Manual Mirage f1

Another Aircraft Manual supplied by:
www.flight-manuals-online.com Ltd
This file is produced and copyrighted by:

www.flight-manuals-online.com Ltd
Wellington
New Zealand
© 2020
Reproduction without written permission is prohibited.

1F-F1K50AD-2-01
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL 01
GENERAL
MIRAGE F1AD
AIRCRAFT
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT - BREGUET AVIATION
RE-ISSUE 1990
RESTRICTED
MAY 1990
MIRAGE F
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MAINTENANCE MANUAL 01
INDEX DES PAGES

L'astérisque indique les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq ue les pages annulées par la présente mise ;3 jour.
The asterisk ndicat es pages changed or added and
letter A indicates pages deleted by the current ctiSnge.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
PAGE C DATE R PAGE C DATE R PAGE C DATE R
A AD 05/90 0-218 AC 02/76 2-102M AA 09/80

B AD 05/90 0-219 AA 08/88 2-103 AC 11/82
C/D AD 05/90 0-220 AC 08/80 2-103M AA 12/79
0-221 AD 08/80 2-104 AE 12/79
0-224 AA 04/77 2-105 AB 09/77
I/II AC 12/74 0-225 AA 04/77 2-201 AA 09/83
III AC 07/75 0-301 AB 09/81 2-202 AA 09/83
IV AC 11/75 0-302 AB 09/81 2-203 AB 02/88
V/VI AD 01/77 0-303 AA 09/76 2-204 AB 02/88
VII/VIII AJ 10/78 0-304 AA 09/76 2-205 AA 03/86
IX AC 06/74 0-305 AB 04/89 2-301 AA 11/72
X AC 06/74 0-306 AB 09/75 2-302 AA 11/72
XI AC 06/74 0-307 AA 09/75 2-303 AH 10/76
XII AC 06/74 0-309 AA 03/85 2-304 AJ 12/87
XIII/XIV AC 06/74 0-310 AA 03/85 2-305 AB 09/79
XV AC 06/74 0-311 AB 03/85 2-306 AF 02/79
XVI AC 06/74 0-401 AC 08/83
XVII AC 06/74 3- 1 AC 01/75
XVIII AC 06/74 1- 1 AC 09/81 3-101 AB 12/74
XIX AC 06/74 1-101 AH 09/81 3-102 AA 11/72
XX AC 02/80 1-102 AE 09/81 3-103 AB 12/74
1-102M AC 10/75 3-104 AB 12/74
0- 1 AC 03/85 1-103 AA 04/89 3-105 AB 12/74
0-101 AA 08/74 1-104 AA 04/89 3-106 AA 11/72
0-102 AA 05/83 1-105 AA 04/89 3-107 AF 03/86
0-103 AB 09/75 1-106 AA 04/89 3-108 AB 03/86
0-104 AA 08/74 1-107 AA 04/89 3-109 AC 04/77
0-105 AB 10/87 1-108 AA 04/89 3-110 AB 07/76
0-106 AA 10/87 1-109 AA 04/89 3-111 AB 08/79
0-201 AB 11/76 1-110 AA 04/89 3-112 AA 08/79
0-202 AA 01/74 1-111 AA 04/89 3-113 AB 03/86
0-203 AA 02/81 1-112 AA 04/89 3-114 AB 03/86
0-204 AC 07/76 1-113 AA 04/89 3-114M AA 03/86
0-205 AC 10/75 1-114 AA 04/89 3-115 AB 10/83
0-206 AA 06/82 1-115 AA 04/89 3-116 AB 10/83
0-207 AA 01/74 1-116 AA 04/89 3-117 AC 10/83
0-208 AA 10/78 1-117 AA 04/89 3-118 AB 08/79
0-209 AA 01/74 1-118 AA 04/89 3-119 AB 01/82
0-210 AA 01/74 1-119 AA 04/89 3-119M AB 01/82
0-211 AC 06/76 1-120 AA 04/89 3-120 AB 10/83
0-211M AE 01/87 1-121 AA 04/89 3-121 AB 10/83
0-212 AB 03/86 1-122 AA 04/89 3-122 AB 03/86
0-213 AC 01/78 3-123 AB 03/81
0-213M AA 10/77 2- 1 AC 12/79 3-123H AB 03/81
0-214 AA 12/75 2-001 AA 01/74 3-123R AB 03/81
0-215 AA 10/86 2-002 AA 08/83 3-124 AC 03/86
0-216 AA 10/86 2-003 AB 10/78 3.-125 AC 03/86
0-216M AD 09/80 2-101 AA 12/79 3-126 AC 03/86
0-217 AB 12/74 2-102 AB 09/80 3-127 AC 03/86
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indique les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
The asterisk indicates pages changed or added and
letter A indicates pages deleted by the current change.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
3-128 AC 03/86 6-011 AD 03/85

3-128M AC 03/86 6-012 AD 11/75
3-129 AC 03/86 6-013 AC 06/75
3-129M AC 03/86 6-014 AA 12/74
3-130 AA 09/81 6-015 AB 06/75
3-131 AB 08/79 6-016 AA 12/74
3-132 AA 04/77 6-017 AB 06/75
3-133 AA 08/79 6-018 AA 12/74
6-101 AD 06/75
4- 1 AE 01/87 6-102 AD 06/75
6-103 AD 06/75
5- 1 AA 10/83 6-104 AC 05/79
5-001 AB 10/83 6-201 AD 06/75
5-002 AB 10/83 6-202 AD 06/75
5-003 AA 11/72 6-203 AC 06/75
5-101 AC 09/81 6-204 AD 06/75
5-102 AA 11/72
5-103 AC 09/81
5-104 AC 06/75
5-105 AC 06/75
5-106 AA 11/72
5-107 AB 07/78
5-108 AA 10/76
5-109 AA 10/76
5-110 AA 10/76
5-111 AA 10/76
5-201 AB 09/81
5-202 AA 09/80
5-203 AA 10/76
5-204 AB 10/76
5-205 AD 10/76
5-206 AA 11/77
5-301 AB 10/83
5-302 AC 10/83
5-303 AC 10/76
6- 1 AC 12/79
6-001 AC 06/75
6-002 AC 06/75
6-003 AC 10/83
6-004 AA 01/83
6-004M AA 12/79
6-005 AA 12/74
6-006 AE 04/77
6-007 AD 05/79
6-007M AD 11/75
6-008 AE 06/77
6-009 AB 04/77
6-010 AF 04/77
F1AD
05/90 Restricted B
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^'iTU
_ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 01
LISTE DES DECISIONS DE MODIFICATION AYANT ENTRAINE

UNE MISE A JOUR DU MANUEL
LIST OF A IRCRA FTMODIFICA TIONS WHICH HA VE RESUL TED
IN MA NUA L UPDA TING
The present manual includes the modifications applicable to the aircraft basic technical
definition
Original issue of January 1978 including following modifications :
426 (FF 10) - 429 (FF 13) - 433 (FF 17) - 421 (FF 27) - FX67 (FF 33) - 457 (FF 42) -
460 (FF 44) - 472 (FF 55) - 498 (FF 83 FF 84) - 500 (FF 85 - FF 86 - FF 87) - 508 (FF 89)
454, 486, 512, 540, 543, 544, 546 (FF 91) 531 (FF 95) - 528 (FF 108).
Change 1 of March 1978
Change 2 of February 1979
Change 3 of July 1980 including following modifications :
514 (FF 97) - 682 (FF 222) - 695 (FF 238) - 701 (FF 242)
Change 4 of May 1981
The re-issue dated May 1990 includes the previous updatings.
NOTE : For modifications prior to the aircraft basic technical definition, systematically apply the
"modification incorporated" text.
F1AD
05-90 Restricted C/D
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION Page
PREAMBLE Hi
GENERAL INDEX OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS v/vi
ELABORATION AND USE OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS ix
REVISION TO MAINTENANCE MANUALS xix
0 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY , 0-1
1 MAINTENANCE CYCLE -TABLE OF PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

OPERATIONS 1-1
2 LUBRICATION POINTS -TIGHTENING TORQUES -INSPECTION DOORS 2-1
3 TOOLS AND GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT 3-1
4 LIST OF VARIOUS PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 4-1
5 STORAGE 5-1
6 TRANSPORTATION 6-1
AC
12-74 Restricted i/ii
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-P-^r-U
MEGUET AVIATION __
MIRAGE F
Restricted
INTRODUCTION
1 The Maintenance Manuals are prepared for the personnel who have the responsibility of
performing technical work on the equipment.
2 The Maintenance Manuals contain :
In the description and operation all the technical information concerning the various component
systems of the aircraft as well as of those equipment items whose documentation is incorporated.
- All information necessary, for the performance of technical work involved in :
- Servicing
- Trouble shooting
Removal-disassembly
-
Inspection-maintenance-adjustment
-
Reconditioning and storage
-
which may be to be carried out by the operators. As such, they establish the limits of the maintenance
authorized at organization level.
3 These Maintenance Manuals form an integral part of a set of publications covering the aircraft
operation. Therefore, it will be necessary to refer to :
- the Illustrated Parts Breakdown for identifying assemblies, sub-assemblies and detail parts.
- the equipments with individual documentation.
4 This set of maintenance publications consists of 17 manuals. Each manual is divided into sections.
Their contents are shown in the «General Index of Maintenance Manuals».
A Some of these manuals cover the aircraft systems and structure according to a breakdown into
homogeneous functions, each section relating to all or part of functional system.
B Other manuals deal with general and specific information such as servicing intervals servicing
instructions, etc.
Thus :
(1 ) Manual 01 «GENERAL» gives some general information on the aircraft.
It summarizes :
The safety measures to be taken during the various tasks, which should normally be known and
-
observed by all the personnel who may work on the equipment.
- The list of the various products and materials that aircraft operation and maintenance require.
- The usual torque values.
It defines :
-The maintenance cycles and the various inspections recommended for the equipment.
- The table of periodic maintenance operations which summarizes all the maintenance operations
detailed in the Manuals and gives the frequency of the operations which are to be performed
systematically during the various inspections.
AC
07-75 Restricted '»
BREGUET AVIATION^__
jL^'^'U
^ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted
It gives :
- The locations of the inspection doors and the principle of their numbering.
- The definition of the standard and specific tool kits as well as their contents.
In Sections 5 and 6 the Manual deals with aircraft storage and transportation.
(2) Manual 02 «SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS» gives information necessary for the performance of
technical work involved in aircraft servicing and preparation for flight :
- parking-mooring,
- ground handling,
- replenishing-draining,
- tyres,
pre-f light and post-flight inspections,
- preparation for mission,
- engine starting,
- run-up.
Section 0 «GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY» contains, general information data and
also Essential Safety precautions to be observed during various maintenance operations. This section
should be familiar to all personnel involved in work on the equipment.
(3) Manual 1 0 «NWS GENERAL» is a collection of the parts common to the NWS Manuals.
(4) Manual 16 «WIRING»
- Gives information necessary to understand the diagrams (symbols used in the diagrams, diagram
effectivity code, location diagrams for the electrical boxes and their components) and information
necessary to maintenance information.
- Lists the electrical and electronic components.
- Gives the connection diagrams in list form.
AC
11-75 Restricted iv
BREGUET AVIATION^-".
,
X MIRAGE F
Restricted
GENERAL INDEX OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
SUB Take-off Pilot
Servicing Structure Hydraulic Electrical
General Flight and landing Power-plant environment
CHAP instructions
and system
controls system
airframe system installations
Genpra! General General General General General General General General

0 information information information information information information information information information
and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Maintenance
cycle
Hydraulic Electrical
Table of Parking Lateral Accessory Cockpit
1 periodic Wings Mam L/G power power
Mooring controls dnve furnishings
maintenance. generation generation
operations
Lubrication Fuselage
points Lighting
Tightening forward Pitch Main L/G Air
Ground Fuel system internal
2 torques section
doors conditioning
nspection handling controls and
I (up to
doors external
frame 22)
Tools Fuselage Air intake Anti-g

and Failure
Replenishing rear section Rudder and and
3 Ground Nose L/G warning
Support Draining (from controls ventilation oxygen
systems
Equipment frame 22) system systems
List of various Engine

Pilot
High-lift Nose L/G installation
4 products Tires Tail unit ejection
controls doors Bleeding and
and materials system
Draining
Pre-flight
Removable Engine
and Airbrake Wheels and
5 Storage structural
post -flight controls tires check and
components
inspections control
Preparation L'G and door

Transporta¬
6 tion
for controls
mission
Engine Brakes and

7 braking
starting
system
Anti-shimmy
Run-up
8 and steering
Check flights
controls
9 Miscellaneous Drag chute
AD
01-77 Restricted v/vi
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
SUB NWS -radio NWS
and NWS NWS
NWS flight control NWS Data
CHAP communi¬ control and operational Wiring
general electronics armament recording
cation navigation systems
and AP
systems
General General General General General Gpnpr.il General General

0 information information information information information information information information
and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Use of Index of
testing and V/UHF Flight electrical
PltOt Armament Gun
1 trouble system
control
panel
and
system system
shoot ing electronics electronic
equipment components
Rocket
26 V 400 Hj UHF Air data Wiring Fatique
2 supply
Autopilot Radar launching
system system diagrams meter
system
Common Telephone Sighting Bombing Connection

3 Gyro system
rack system system system diagrams
Close combat
VOR/ILS Air-to-Air
5 IFF
marker missile
systems
Navigation Radar
6 system detector
Radar
Electronic
7 counter-
altimeter
measures
Reconnais¬
Radio
8 sance
compass
system
Towing
system
9
practice
targets
AJ
10-78 Restricted vii/viii
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT^/ Â^-rXL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^,
Restricted
EXPLANATION AND USE OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1 - MAINTENANCE MANUAL COMPOSITION

Each Manual comprises :
A - A title page identifying the publication.
B A list of effective pages which is the record of all the pages making up the Manual. It determines
the Manual breakdown.
C A list of modifications included in the Manual. This list which is specific to each manual records
only those modifications which affect the Manual concerned.
D - A table of contents which lists the Sections making up the Manual.

E The various Sections making up the Manual.
2- BREAKDOWN OF A MAINTENANCE MANUAL SECTION
Three different kinds of «Sections» can be defined in a Maintenance Manual depending on

whether the Manual deals with an aircraft system or special information.
A Common Sections in a Manual dealing with an aircraft system.
Each of these Sections is subdivided into 9 Sub-Sections which are assigned an unchanging title
and sequence number :
Sectioifi Sub-Section title

No
0 - General
1 Description and operation
2 - Trouble shooting
3 - Removal-Installation
4 - Disassembly-Assembly
5 -Inspection-Check-Adjustment
6 - Cleaning-Corrosionpreventive treatment
Painting
7 -Storage-Preservation-Transportation
8 - Repair
NOTE:
(1 ) Maintenance and lubrication are covered by Sub-Section 6.
(2) In each Manual, Sub-Section 7 deals with the matter of preservation-packaging and transportation
relating to the individual items of the system to which the Manual is applicable and which forms the
subject of an incorporated documentation. As concerns the complete aircraft, this matter is dealt with
in the «GENERAL» Manual.
(3) Sub-Section 8 covers- the reconditioning operations for the items of the system to which the
Manual is devoted. The structural repairs of the aircraft form the subject of a separate Manual :
«STRUCTURAL REPAIRS».
(4) Any Sub-Section which is not applicable is not shown.
AC
06-74 Restricted lx
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ -^-U- "U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^xi ^ ^
Restricted
B - GENERAL INFORMATION Section of a Manual dealing with an aircraft system.

Its breakdown does not follow the sequence of a common Section in a Manual which deals with an
aircraft system.
The structure of this Section is «as required» and this Section deals with all the matters which are
common to the other Manual Sections.
This Section is subdivided into Sub-Sections which are assigned a title and a sequence number
from 0 to X.
C Sections of a Manual dealing with general or specific information.
Their breakdown does not follow the sequence of a common Section in a Manual which deals with
an aircraft system.
The structure of these Sections is «as required» in accordance with general or technical information
forming the subject of the Section.
Each Section is subdivided into Sub-Sections which are assigned a title and a sequence number
from 0 to X.
3- ARRANGEMENT OF A COMMON SECTION IN A MANUAL DEALING WITH A SYSTEM

A - Sub-Section 0 - GENERAL
This is an introductory Sub-Section which gives the general principles of the functional system
covered by the Section. A schematic diagram is usually attached to this Sub-Section.
B - Sub-Section 1 - DESCRIPTION - OPERATION
This Sub-Section is arranged as follows :
(1 ) A table of components, lists all the units, accessories and equipment items of the system concerned,
in the logical descriptive sequence. It gives the essential characteristics of these equipment items, their
function in the system concerned, their location within the aircraft and it indicates whether the
relevant documentation is separate or incorporated.
Layout illustrations are usually attached to this Sub-Section, which also refers to the functional diagram.
The purpose of the table of components is to clarify the system description, by specifying the purpose
and the characteristics of the various components.
In this table, the units, accessories or equipment items are identified by :
- the reference designation for those equipment items which have an electrical function.
- a sequential index number (1 to X) when the item is not assigned any reference designation.
Note that the values shown in the table of components are rated values. When tolerances apply to
these values, they are always given in the Sub-Section which deals with maintenance.
(2) A text portion which describes the system operation in detail. This refers to the functional diagram.
NOTE The detailed description and operation of the individual equipment items are given in their
:
separatedocumentation or, if applicable, in the documentation known as the incorporated
documentation (see below).
(3) The description-operation part of the «incorporated documentation» for some equipment items is
contained in pages or groups of pages which are independent and placed next to the description and
operation of the system to which they belong.
The «incorporated documentation» is given in the same order as it appears in the table of
components; it is illustrated whenever necessary and the internal index numbers are given in the
sequence 1 to X for each component, independently of the index numbers shown in the table of
components.
AC
06-74 Restricted
BREGUET
L -^"Vi
AVIATION^^P"_
MIRAGE F
_ Restricted
C - Sub-Sections 2 to 8 :
These Sub-Sections give all technical information on the maintenance of the functional system
which forms the subject of the Section.
(1 ) Each Maintenance operation is described in the Sub-Section corresponding to its category.
At the head of each group of pages which describe details of an operation, the following
information will be found :
(a) Equipment required which lists the tools and ground support equipment required to perform the
operation. Since the tools are grouped in homogeneous kits, only the tool kit to be used is specified.
However, the tools are indicated in the text by :
- the dimension across flats (in mm) for the spanner to be used when standard tools are concerned,
unless a specific spanner must be used.
- the part number when special tools or special ground support equipment are concerned.
(b) Materials. The standard designation of the materials used, or the commercial designation if the
former is not available, is shown under this heading.
However, the. standard designation suffixes are shown only 'in the «list of various products and
materials» in the «GENERAL» Manual.
If only one material is used during the operation, its designation is not recalled in the text which details
the operation.
(c) Spares. Only the spares which are systematically required are shown by their names supplemented,
ifnecessary, by an indication in order to avoid any confusion in their location. Reference shall be
made to the Illustrated Parts Breakdown to find their part numbers. The only exception to this rule is
the standard hardware, for which the standard part number is shown.
(2) The man-hours required for the performance of the operation are not given in the description of
the operation, but in the table of periodic maintenance operations included in Manual 01 «GENERAL».
4- IDENTIFICATION ON INSPECTION DOORS
The figures showing the location of the inspection doors, are part of Manual 01 «GENERAL», to
which reference should be made.
The door numbering principles are as follows :
A Sub-assembly on which a door is located.
- Fuselage - the number consists of four digits.

- Wings - the number consists of letter V followed by three digits.
- Stabilator - the number consists of letter E followed by three digits.
- Fin - the number consists of letter D followed by three digits.
B Fuselage doors
The first two digits show the number of the frame forward of the door, the next two digits are the
clock position of the door within the fuselage section in which it is located :
- example : fuselage door between F.29 and 30 in the middle part of the R/H side : door 29-03.
AC
06-74 Restricted xi
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT X -^4. >L fVl 1 1\ M W C I
BREGUET AVIATION^^^' ^^>
^^^^^^^K. Restricted
C Wing doors
The first digit locates the door in relation to the rib which precedes the door from the aircraft
centreline to the wing tip.-
The last two digits indicate in which of the following areas is the door :
1 to 29 - leading edge
30 to 59 - centre wing box

60 to 90 - trailing edge.
The door numbering direction is from the wing root to the wing tip and from the leading edge to
the trailing edge.
Even numbers apply to the upper surface doors and odd numbers apply to the lower surface doors.
- example : door located between ribs 1 and 2 on the upper surface within the centre wing box :
V138.
D Fin doors. Same principle as for the wings
The odd numbers apply to the L/H side and the even numbers apply to the R/H side.
E - Stabilator doors. Same principle as for the wings.
5- DIAGRAM DRAWING RULES
There are three kinds of diagrams :

- schematic diagrams
functional diagrams
- wiring diagrams.
A Schematic diagram. The schematic diagram is drawn in block form, showing the main component
interconnections, illustrating the functional principle of the system and the connections to the other
systems or functions.
B Functional diagram. The functional diagram represents all the units, accessories and equipment
items making up the system and their functional connections. The detailed operation of the function
can be followed on that diagram.
The functional diagrams are usually shown in inoperative condition (i.e. no pressure, no power, aircraft
on its wheels). The complex functions may be illustrated by several functional diagrams associated with
the main operating phases.
The equipment inside is represented in the form of a block or symbol. For the actual equipment
illustration it is necessary to refer to the relevant publication.
The functional diagrams show the terminals except for the relays, on/off switches, selector switches and
indicator lights.
The functional diagrams define the type of the information conveyed. Disconnections and grounding
connections are not shown unless an aircraft boundary is concerned.
(1) Test connectors on equipment. The test points are shown by the associated terminal number
which is encircled and hooked to the tested circuit. If there are several test connectors, the reference
designation of the connector to which the point belongs is written next to the test point.
(2) Aircraft test connectors. These are shown with their terminal numbers and reference designations
in the same manner as the other aircraft wiring connectors.
C Wiring diagram. The wiring diagrams form the subject of Manual 16 to which reference should be
made.
D Symbols used in the diagrams. The symbols used in the diagrams are shown in the following
charts :
AC
06-74 Restricted xii
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS : GENERAL SYMBOLS Fuse

" Single-pole
a control switch Single-pole
42R contactor
i-
Fuse-breaker
1-wire lead
\7
Coaxial connector
Sub-assembly
Terminal lug
Connector
Box
terminals
-#-
2- wire lead
Three-pole
circuit-breaker
I * Double-pole
control switch
Double-pole
contactor
112 3 1 Single pole
Test connector control switch
3-wire lead
on equipment I '**'
Spring-loaded,
both directions
42Z Single-pole JL
Â" pushbutton
Double-pole
Independent t> , n-wire lead
connector
control switch
B
T
° Single pole I Spring-Iloaded,
<P Bus bars
Crossing without c fo control switch / din
one direction
Double-pole
connection
pushbutton
(x)~ Light or lamp
Crossing with
Magnetically-held
connection
pushbutton
Relay
Coaxial connector Press-to-test
light
Single-pole
double-throw
Antenna switch
Double-pole
Diode II- DC ground double-throw
switch
Time delay
relay
e
-Z-frm- Pushbutton
light
*-** Zener diode
Double-pole
triple-throw
Flashing
Resistor AC ground
M switch
relay
AC
06-74 Restricted xiii/xiv xtii/xr
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS;

SYMBOLS SPECIFIC TO EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
â Chassis ground l
CX 12
NPN
cj Computing power ground transistor
P4
Terminal 6 of
test connector P4
TDX3 Differential TDR PNP
synchro transistor
o COX
o transmitter
o n-position
o
selector switch
o
o ! RV4 Thyristor
o TR
Resolver
RS
-rt- Triac
I * Relay LV
-Ô- -{oh- j/ Linvar
Magnetron
Hr- Capacitor
Cam-actuator
contact
Thermostat
-c J- Potentiometer mi i Thyratron
Fuse z. Thermistor
Initiator
Comparator
Photo-electric cell
***/ M j Motor
Inductor
Amplifier
-m-4 G ) Generator Transformer
Failure Electronic
detector unit
( MG ) Motor-generator
& Single TR
©_ Tachometer- Double TR
~ generator
AC
06-74 Restricted xv
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT MIRAGE I-
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted
MECHANICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS

Mechanical link
"© or Cam
Mechanical clutch
o
__ Mechanical differential
FLUID SYSTEM GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Filter Float needle valve
Self-sealing coupling
LSI Manually-operated cock
® Non-return valve Level switch

(thermistor)
Electrically-operated cock.
Pressure reducing valve
Electro-cock, electro-valve
® Restrictor valve Solenoid valve
® Outwards or inwards
relief valve
Float switch
r_ Non-return flapper
LEËI Pressure switch
EP - Electro-pump
Fuel stop valve
B P = Pump
Pressure or test connection
T © Stop air valve
Restrictor Transfer valve

(D
m. Filler plug Pressure transmitter
System No. 1 Basic or main

system
System No.2
Ancillary systems Systems other than
.Hydraulic
hydraulic systems
* m m * Emergency system \
Return system Return system
AC
06-74 Restricted XVI
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Logic operator, general symbol

dimension
Note : - The relationship between the sides
of the rectangle is not a requirement.
&
AND
the output state is 1 if, and only if, all
the input states are l 's .
»t OR
the output state is 1 if, and only if,
one or more input states are l 's .
1
NOT
3-
the input state is 0 .
&
NAND (NOT-AND)
D-
all the input states are l 's .
^1
NOR (OR-NOT)
3-
one or more input states are l's .
Time delay operator, general symbol.
LOGIC EQUATIONS
Definition : Sign + : OR operation
ïîign x : AND operation
R : absence of information R
Example : S = (A + B + C) (D + E)
Condition S = (Information A or Bor no information C)
AND (information D or E)
that is : S = A and D or E
or S = B and D or E
or S = no information C and D or E
AC
06-74 Restricted XVII
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/
BREGUET
_-^-^ U
AVIATIONî _ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted
6- IDENTIFICATION OF PAGES
A Each page is identified by :

- the Manual number in the top R/H corner.
- the date of issue of the page in the bottom L/H corner.
- the page number in the bottom R/H corner.
- if applicable, the technical definition of the page just on top of the date of issue. This shows the
number of the modification applied.
The page number consists of two groups of digits separated by a dash :

(1) The Section number
(2) The page number within the Section.
This page number is made up as follows :

- a first digit shows the Sub-Section number (0 to 8).
the next two digits show the page rank within the Sub-Section (01 to 99).
B The figures are assigned numbers within a Section (1 to x).
7- CROSS-REFERENCES
A From text to text :
from Manual to Manual

from Section to Section } Manual/Section
within a same section
B From text to Figure and from Figure to Figure :
from Manual to Manual : Manual/Section/Fig. (if necessary)

from Section to Section : Manual/Section/Fig. (if necessary)
within a same section : Figure.
8- UNITS OF MEASURE USED
The units of measure are written as follows :
«International measuring system (IMS) units (converted values, possible complementary units)».
The converted values are given in the order : British units and US units.
Whenever converted units of measure are suspect, it is mandatory to refer to the international
measuring system (IMS) unit of measure.
In some specific cases, for which the units of measure are taken from standards, the units of
measure remain those of the IMS international system except for US Standards where the units are US
units.
In addition, characteristics specific to some equipment are given in IMS units (example : aircraft
dimensions, etc.).
9- REFERENCE TO OFFICIAL DOCUMENTS
In the publications, references are made to French official documents, such as Technical
Regulations (RT), Technical Circulars (CT), BNAé Standards, etc. All these documents are namely
listed in Manual 01 «GENERAL».
AC
06-74 Restricted xviii
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
REVISION OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1- PUBLICATION DEVELOPMENT PRINCIPLE
This development is performed in two steps :
A Issue of supplements which are temporarily incorporated in the publications.

B - Actual revision which permanently incorporates information in the publications. Such information
may be newly issued or previously published in supplements (replacement of pages or addition of new
pages).
2- REVISION TO PUBLICATIONS
A - Procedure
Revision involves two operations :

- insertion of new pages and replacement of modified pages.
-systematic replacement of the title page and list of effective pages which serves as a guide to the
insertion of revised pages.
B Page numbering
First case - Addition of one or more new pages following the last page of a Sub-Section.
The pages are numbered in the normal order.
Second case Insertion of one or more new pages between two existing pages.
The new page(s) bears the number of the preceding page followed by a capital letter, with the exception
of letters 1, 0 and Z.
The letters are chosen in every case so as to provide for maximum further insertions unless the initial
numbering sequence is changed.
The principle is illustrated in the table below :
3rd insertion
Successive
2nd insertion
insertions
1st insertion
ABCDEFGH KLMNPQRS UVWXY

f *
2 pages
Simultaneous
insertions
3 pages
AC XIX
06-74 Restricted
BREGUET
]LJ^~t H.
AVIATION^^^^Ô.
MIRAGE F
^£-*Sk==>''"^0> Restricted
Example :
Assuming that several pages are to be inserted in succession between pages 6 and 7. The first one
will be numbered 6M, the second one 6F if it is to be placed before 6M, or 6T if it is to be placed after
6M. Similarly, if it is necessary to insert a third page later on, its number will be 6F or 6T, 6C or 6J, 6Q
or 6W as applicable.
Assuming that the following are to be inserted simultaneously :

-2 pages : they will be numbered 6H and 6R.
- 3 pages : they will be numbered 6F, 6M and 6T.
Third case - Insertion of a new page following application of an official modification. The principle
consists in showing up the two states simultaneously in the publication, i.e. post- and pre-modif ication.
(a) The modification can be inserted according to the principle stated above without altering the page
numbering sequence : There will be a new page which supersedes the preceding one.
(b) As a result of the insertion of both states (post- and pre-modification), if the number of pages
increases, the solution will be as follows :
both the pre- and post-modification pages will bear the same number. «MOD...X» will be shown
on top of the date on the modified page (this means modification X applied). Both pages will be shown
in the list of effective pages with.
Remark : These two pages may have different dates.
(c) Where a complete paragraph or a Section is deeply affected by a modification (most of the pages
changed), the complete paragraph which is modified will be found first and followed by the complete
paragraph which is not modified. The table of contents will list both paragraphs (or Sections).
The unmodified pages will be deleted during a further revision only when the modification has
been applied to all aircraft.
C Identification of revised text portions
The modifications to the text, insertion or deletion, are identified by a vertical line in the margin.
Those pages which are entirely changed are identified by a vertical line in the margin on a level
with the date of issue.
TRANSLATION OF REPETITIVE ABBREVIATIONS
To avoid the necessity of creating English versions of certain illustrations the translations of the
legends have been added in italic script and the standard french abbreviations have been unchanged.
Furthermore, to ensure ready reference, the same abbreviations have been used in the parts of the
text which correspond to such illustrations.
A key to the standard french abbreviations is given below :
AR («arrière») - Rear L («lisse») = Stringer

AT («attaque») = Drive Lg («longeron») = Spar
AV («avant») = Front Lgt («longeronnet»)= False spar
C («cadre») = F.rame M («médiane») = Middle
Cst («constant») = Constant N («nervure») = Rib
e («épaisseur») = Thickness R («rail») = Track
AC
02-80 Restricted xx
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION 0
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
0-1 GENERAL INFORMATION
- Fastener identification code and marking 0-101
0-2 SAFETY MEASURES
- Safety measures to be taken for personnel protection 0-201

- Instructions to be followed when working on systems 0-211
- General instructions for starting and operating the variousaircraft systems 0-214
- Instructions for using ground support equipment 0-217
0-3 GENERAL TECHNOLOGICAL INFORMATION
- Locking with cotter pins 0-301

- Installation of the various types of retaining rings 0-303
- Manufacture of a retaining strap (cable) 0-305
- Lockwire safetying 0-309
0-4 BIBLIOGRAPHY
- List of official publications referred to in the manual 0-401
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure No. Page
1 AIRBORNE RADAR DANGER AREAS 0-205

2 CONNECTION OF PRESSURE GENERATOR 0-221
AC
03-85 Restricted 0-1
BREGUET AVIATION
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION CODE AND MARKING
1 - STANDARD FASTENER IDENTIFICATION CODE
A General : The identification code gives the abbreviated and coded part number of each hardware
item whether standard or not.
B Coding principles : The coded designation consists of a succession of references, dimensions,

symbols in accordance with the sequences shown below.
XXXXX XX XXXXXX XX
TL Surface treatment code (see para. E)
NOMINAL DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS

ITEM AND
ITEM SHAPE Length indication in millimetres of :
DESIGNATION a) plain section (1 ) for precision hardware.
Relevant BNAé b) total length (L) for cordinary hardware:
Standard number or AMD
spécification number (where
item is not standard)
Nominal diameter indication in 1/10 mm
(see para.C)
For standard parts intended for repair ;
Material code (see para.D) diameter considered is not nominal diameter by
actual oversize diameter in 1/10 mm.
(1 ) - Typical designation codes
22201 BC 050008 L
Short thread precision screw

Hex head.
Material : 35 NC6 steel SURFACE TREATMENT :

CADMIUM PLATING
Diameter D in 0,1 mm - Dia. = 5 mm -Plain section length (1) = 8 mm
22274 BC 050014 LE
General purpose pan head screw

SURFACE TREATMENT
CADMIUM PLATING
10 microns thick
Material : 35 NC6 steel
Total length (L) = 14 mm
Diameter D in 0,1 mm - Dia. = 5 mm
22431 CC 050 R
L SURFACE TREATMENT :
Ordinary hex nut DULL BLACK PAINT
Material : Z 10CNT18. 10 CRES Diameter D in 0,1 mm - Dia. = 5mm
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C Standard or AMD specification numbers applicable to selected materials
Standard or
Item
specification number
38150 Hex head, short thread, precision screw
38260 - 100° csk head, short thread, precision screw
38261 100° csk reduced head, short thread, precision screw
38340 General purpose round head screw
38380 - 60° csk head sealing screw (cone point)
38390 - 100° csk head sealing screw (cone point)
38391 - 100° csk head sealing screw (without cone point)
38460 Fillister head, short thread precision screw
38470 - 100° csk head, short thread precision screw (titanium)
38471 - 100° csk head, short thread precision screw (steel-titanium)
31591 - Narrow, flat washer
31593 - Wide, flat washer
31596 Thick, flat washer
31597 - Reduced, flat washer

NOTE : nuts and anchor nuts : SUC I «W*
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
D Material code
Identification AFNOR TS min. Identifica¬ AFNOR TS min.

code Symbol hbar (psi) tion code Symbol hbar (psi)
A NONA LLOY STEELS

AA A 33 32 (46410) C CORROSION-RESISTING STEEL
AC A 37 40 (58020) CA Z3CN 18-10 44 (63820)
AD XC18S 41 (59470) CC Z10CNT 18-11 54 (78320)
AG XC38 59 (85570) CF Z15CN 17-03 88(127600)

AK XC65 157(222670) CH Z30C13 88 (127600)
B ALLOY STEELS D ALUMINIUM ALLOYS

DB A-G5
i
7(10150)
BC 35NC6 88 (127600) DE AU4G 39 (56570)
BE 30NCD16 108 (156600) DG AU4G1 44 (63820)
BG 15CDV6 103 (149359)
T TITANIUM ALLOYS
BR 45S8 120(174010) TK T-A6V 188(127600)
E Surface treatment code
When necessary, the surface treatment is indicated by means of one or two letters according to the
code established.
Identification
Treatment description
code
A Anodizing with chromic finish

L Electrolytic cadmium plating, thickness : 7 ± 2 microns [ChChromic
fin ish
LE Electrolytic cadmium plating more than 10 microns thick
M Electrolytic cadmium plating (except on ground surfaces
which are greased), thickness : 7 ± 2 microns Chromic
finish
ME Electrolytic cadmium plating (except on ground surfaces
wich are greased), more than 10 microns thick
R Black paint
T Normal phosphate treatment with greasy finish
X Fretting corrosion treatment.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL-^~ir9l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^$P=^C>
^£^-«C^ Restricted MANUAL 01
2- STANDARD FASTENER MARKING
A General. Marking identifies the material, through its characteristics of use and (possibly) its high
temperature capabilities.
B Marking principles
The material, with some exceptions, is identified by two standard code letters given in chapter 1 ,
para. D.
This identification marking also indicates that the threads are in accordance with ISO
Specification.
Limit temperatures above 425° C for use are indicated by the digit of the hundreds of degrees of
the maximum temperature in degrees Celsius.
(1) Special cases :
a) Screws :
The cross-recessed head screws are not marked when they are made of the most commonly used
steel grade (35NC6) (BC).
For the screws that cannot be easily marked on account of the shape or the little space available,
the two letters may be replaced by a simpler symbol.
(b) Nuts :
For standard nuts, made of the most commonly used materials, the letter marking defined above is
not essential since the nuts are differentiated by their shapes, weights and colours ; the ISO thread is
howeyer always indicated either by letter M or m, or by the symbol « » marked on one flat before
cutting.
Material identification is marked only when corrosion-resisting steel is concerned.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
C - Identification marking
SCREWS
LOW ALLOY CORROSION - TITANIUM HIGH-

STEEL RESISTANT STEEL TEMPE¬
Rmin 88 hbar 108 hbar Rmin 54 hbar 88 hbar R 88 hbar 110 hbar RATURE
(127600 psi) (1 56600 (78300 psi) (127600 (127600 psi) (159500 MATERIALS
psi) psi) psi)
© © © © © © BJ
.^^1
É
3 and 4 diameter capability
NOTE: When reinstalling components secured with titanium screws, the operator may:
- reuse the TK annealed titanium screw if in good condition, or,
- replace it with a TX hardened and tempered titanium screw of the same dimensions.
SCREWS
CED Shape a
83 hbar
R < CM3
STEEL (AG) (120300 psi)
ALUMINIUM ALLOY (DG) CORROSION - RESISTANT
STEEL
(SD R
Shape b
£ 83 hbar
STEEL (BC) (120300 psi)
3 - STANDARD FASTENER OVERSIZE MARKING
Screws and bolts
Oversizing of diameters of parts Nominal 1st 2nd

for repair: diameter Repair R1 Repair R2
5-6 + 0.2 + 0.4
7-10 + 0.3 + 0.6
AB
MIRAGE F
BREQUET AVIATION
Oversize fasteners must be marked as follows:

1st oversize -1 spherical marking on head, or a conical marking on end.
2nd oversize -2 spherical markings on head (for face), or a cylindrical marking on end.
MARKING END MARKING

On head (screws and bolts) (Screws only)
On one side (washers)
Nominal Marking Nominal Marking Nominal 1 st oversize 2nd oversize

diameter d diameter d diameter R1 R2
d1 ± 0,2 d2 ± 0,2
1.4 14- 16 3.5 5-6-7 2.5
6-8
S18 4.5 £8
10- 12 2.5
Spherical markings, depth 0.5
1 st oversize 2nd oversize
NOTE: - "Non-removable" components may be originally fitted with oversize fasteners "R1"
without any special mention in the aircraft logbook.
If an oversize 81 screw, as identified by its marking defined above, is removed, it is
to be replaced with a screw of the same oversize.
- If the screw hole needs to be reworked as a result of damage caused during disas¬
sembly, the second oversjze "R2" is to be used.
AA
BREGUET
L^^^trVe
AVIATION^^^P3--^8^
MIRAGE F
^C^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
SAFETY MEASURES TO BE OBSERVED FOR PERSONNEL

PROTECTION
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet summarizes the main safety measures to be applied or complied with when working on
the aircraft so as to avoid body injuries.
2 - ARMED AND LOADED AIRCRAFT

All necessary arrangements should be made in presence or with agreement of the armament expert
and in any case after complying with safety measures (See 02-0).
Following instructions shall be MANDATORILY complied with :
- On ARMED aircraft, ALL OPERATIONS (trouble shooting or preparation for use) are
FORBIDDEN.
- On LOADED aircraft, all operations (trouble shooting or preparation for use) shall only be
carried out after making sure that no armament circuit is energized.
WARNING:
THE EMERGENCY JETTISON CIRCUITS ARE DIRECTLY SUPPLIED FROM THE BATTERY.
PUSHING ANY OF THE EMERGENCY JETTISON BUTTONS WILL CAUSE THE INITIATORS
TO FIRE EVEN IF THE BATTERY SWITCH IS OFF.
3- PRESSURIZED HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

The ground staff should be informed and conscious of the dangers encountered when working on
the aircraft under such conditions. It is then important to take all relevant safety measures, particularly
in areas swept by moving parts. These areas should be clear and perfectly located.
A - Doors and airbrakes
- Opening and closing of undercarriage doors and airbrake panels are subject to very strict safety
measures (See 02-0).
Each system features a «GROUND» safety switch.
- Operation is electro-hydraulic and is obtained when the three following conditions are met :
- hydraulic system 1 pressurized
- D.C. mains switched on.
- «DOORS-DIVE BK» ground safety switches on «FLIGHT» position.
WARNING ;
IN ALL CASES, OPEN DOOR 17-04 AND SET «DOORS-DIVE BK» GROUND SAFETY
SWITCHES TO «GROUND» POSITION.
B Flight controls
DO NOT WALK - DO NOT STAY UNDER AND ON CONTROL SURFACES (SPOILERS- TAIL
UNIT) - DO NOT LEAVE ANYTHING ON MOVING PARTS.
-All works in compartments through which the flight controls (rods, bellcranks, servo-control...)
run as well as all disconnections shall be prohibited when hydraulic systems are pressurized. If-for
trouble shooting or adjusting purposes - it is necessary to work on the controls, it is then recommended
to avoid any wrong operation and take all relevant safety measures.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^>>^r$L
BREGUET AVIATION^^^-v^f^
MIRAGE F
^5^-^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 01
- Pitch control.
- If doors 36-03-1 and 36-09-1 are not installed, all operations in compartments are prohibited.
Roll control.
-
Spoilers (on wing upper surface) operate together with the ailerons : USING PROTECTORS,
-
DELIMIT THE SPOILER OPERATING AREA so as to avoid any accident.
C Hydraulic system
- Comply with precautions to be taken when working on hydraulic systems (See 07-0).
4- TAKE-OFF AND LANDING SYSTEM
- Only work on brakes when the latter are cold enough (risk of burns)
- In case of brake unit fire :
- Come near the wheels perpendicularly to the spindle (risk of bursting).
- Comply with safety measures relative to brake unit fire (See 02-0).
5- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A Personnel protection against stray currents.
(1 ) Aircraft grounding inside hangars.
In order to prevent accidents due to electrocution, each work station shall be fitted with a ground
connector used to dissipate towards the ground line inside the hangar, the stray currents generated by
defective electrical ground support equipment.
(2) Maintenance equipment.
Ground support equipment and maintenance equipment using 11 5/200 V-400 Hz voltages or
industrial frequency voltages should be connected to the ground and the aircraft. The latter shall be
grounded with utmost care.
B Utilization of hand tools.
When working on the aircraft, it is FORBIDDEN to use electrical hand tools energized under
voltages other than very low voltage.
C Operations on electrical system
Only use insulated tools.
6- POWER PLANT
A - Personnel protection during ENGINE run-ups
During said run-ups, the ground mechanics are subject to the engine noise which causes fatigue
resulting in reflexes slackening and slowness to react.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-i*-ar-\l
BREGUET AVIATION _xZZ£, .
MIRAGE F
It is then advisable to comply with following elementary instructions :

- Personal protection against noises by using special anti-noise helmets.
- Protection against vibrations (engine A/B) by using abdominal belts.
-Compliance with location of danger' areas (suction - ejection and rotating parts) and also
(see 02-0) :
- engine air intakes,
additional air intake,
- jet pipe,
- alternator ventilation.
Only stay under and on the aircraft or in U/C wells for the time required for inspection or
-
adjustment.
- Do not touch air conditioning pipes.
- Do not carry out any disconnection.
B Fuel and pressurization systems
(1 ) Prior to any work, drop the pressure in the systems
(2) Working inside a tank
- Ventilate the tank before and while the specialist is working.
WARNING :
- ONLY USE COLD LIGHT SOURCES.
- ANY REMAINING FUEL MUST BE MOPPED UP WITH NATURAL SPONGES OR COTTON
CLOTHS.
-THE USE OF PAPER TOWELS IS PROHIBITED WHEREVER THERE MIGHT BE FUEL
VAPOURS.
7 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
- Comply with precautions to be taken when working on hydraulic systems (see 07-0).
8- PILOT ENVIRONMENT INSTALLATIONS
A Oxygen system
- The use of oxygen may be dangerous and the existing hazards should not be overlooked. Oxygen
in itself is not a dangerous element but it improves the combustion and risks become greater when
oxygen concentration in the air increases.
- When working on oxygen systems, it is mandatory to comply with the elementary safety measures
(see 02-0 and 09-0).
- People working on oxygen systems should never forget the following :
OXYGEN + FATS = EXPLOSION
- Do not work on liquid oxygen systems unless you are thoroughly familiarized or under the
supervision of qualified specialists.
- Wear a special protective suit when handling liquid oxygen.
- Never touch pipes or couplings through which liquid oxygen flows with bare hands or any part
of the body not efficiently protected.
- If liquid oxygen is spilled on clothes, take them off immediately. If the body comes into contact
with liquid oxygen or if any part of the body is suspected to be frozen or cooled, rapidly thaw the
affected part preferably by immersion or bath in water at a temperature slightly higher than the normal
body temperature (40-45°C). After this fast thawing, loosely wrap the wound in dry and clean linen
and call for a doctor. Do not put anything other than a clean and dry dressing on the wound.
- Do not authorize smokers, open flames, sparks or matches in areas where liquid oxygen is being
handled.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION .«-^^P^^*^
/L-^^TU MIRAGE F
^Z^^^^> Restricted MANUAL 01
- During oxygen filling, do not carry out maintenance or servicing operations which may introduce
inadvertently fire sources or combustibles.
Oxygen jets should always be directed far from persons, various components of the bench,
ground and aircraft.
B - Pilot ejection system

Safety pin rope installed (See 02-0).
Any operation on the ejection seat or canopy embrittlement installation should be
-
MANDATORILY performed by the armament specialist.
9 - PITOT STATIC SYSTEM - PROBE HEATING

Touching pitot probes or incidence probe may cause burns, because said probes can be hot due to
tests or after a flight.
10 EMITTERS
A - Radiation (See Figure 1 )
(1 ) It is not advisable fo stay in front of very powerful SHF emitters (radar), especially when the aerial
is fixed.
Airborne radar danger areas are illustrated in the figure.
Because of eye accident hazards, it is forbidden to stay in front of the aircraft during laser firing.
The safety area to be observed is contained within an angle of 20° in front of the aircraft. It should be
marked out by panels «DANGER - LASER LIGHT».
(2) It is forbidden to introduce and handle explosives (stores and initiators) within the radar radiation
areas (a minimum distance of 16 m (17 yd) shall be observed for airborne radar, in the 20° radiation
area)
B High voltage
Most VHF-UHF-SHF-XHF emitters feature high voltages. It is FORBIDDEN to touch the high
voltage systems of these emitters (systems-antennas...).
11 SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO THE USE OF DANGEROUS PRODUCTS

The paragraphs hereafter indicate .
-the main safety measures to be observed when using or handling products which may be
dangerous.
- emergency measures to be taken in the case of an «accident» caused by said products.
A Definition of dangerous products.
These products include :

- solvents
- cleaning products
- corrosion treatment products
- etching products
- pickling products
etc...
AC
BREGUET AVIATION - -
v -<-
^
\i
>.
MIRAGE F
10 m
(11 yd)
20° horizontal
110° vertical
3m (3 yd)
2 m (2yd)
Antenne
Antenna
Pointe avant radar
Radar nose cone
ZONE INTERDITE
FORBIDDEN AREA
Stationnement limité à 2 minutes

SUS Standing limited to 2 minutes
hwms
1
Stationnement autorisé pour le travail occasionnel
,,'1 11 !'
l,v
Standing authorized for occasional work
FIGURE 1 - ZONESDE SECURITE DU RADAR DE BORD

AIRBORNE RADAR DANGER AREAS
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L-^ZZT^.
BREGUET AVI ATlONôF'^^^
MIRAGE
.........
F
Components of these products can be classified into two categories according to the dangers
encountered when using them :
- Category 1
methyl toluene
methyethylketone carbon tetrachloride
trichloréthylène methyl chloride
crude petroleum chromâtes dichromates
xylene acetates
cyclohexanone epoxy resins
alodine
- Category 2 (the most dangerous)
selenious acid
hydrofluoric acid
nitric acid
phosphoric acid
phenol
all acid and base solutions, in general.
B General safety measures
(1) Always avoid to inhale solvent or acid vapours for a long time. Workshops in which these
products are used should be ventilated. Use a breathing mask when handling very dangerous products.
(2) Drinking water should be available close to work stations.
(3) Never add water into an acid, but acid into water.
(4) Never mix chemical products haphazardly. Always comply with the «directions for use» of said
products.
(5) Avoid prolonged or frequent contact of these products with the skin. All useful protections
should be available : protecting clothes, boots, goggles, masks, gloves.
(6) Do not eat nor keep food in working zones. Thoroughly wash before meals.
C Emergency measures to be taken in case of «accident» caused by said products.
WARNING:
PRODUCTS OF CATEGORY 2 REQUIRE IMMEDIATE INTERVENTION OF A DOCTOR.
(1 ) Projection into the eyes
Do not rub. Rapidly wipe the eyelid with clean cloth (handkerchief-compress). Immediately
wash with running water and keep the eyes open :
- for 1 5 minutes at least for products of category 1 .
- until ambulance arrives for products of category 2.
AA
BREGUET
iL^-^rÇL
AVIATION^£lF=^<C>
MIRAGE F
^£^^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
(2) Important projection onto clothes or body.
(a) Product of category 1
- Immediately take contaminated clothes off.

- Thoroughly wash body with water and soap.
Have the clothes washed before taking them back.
(b) Product of category 2
- Thoroughly water, take clothes off and carry on watering until the ambulance arrives.
(3) Projection onto.
- For products of category 2, thoroughly water until the ambulance arrives.

- For products of category 1 , immediately wash with water and soap.
(4) More or less serious discomfort during work
(a) Headaches and other symptoms.
- Immediately go out and breathe fresh air.
(b) Breathing difficulties
- Start artificial respiration and call for the ambulance.
(5) Ingestion of products (particularly products of category 2).
(a) If the person is conscious
-Allow the victim to vomit and drink much water, wash the mouth several times.
(b) If the person is unconscious.
- Start artificial respiration. If the victim comes to, proceed as stated above.
In both cases, IMMEDIATE medical aid is required.
12 -PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN USING SOME PRODUCTS
A- Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) : TEFLON-FLUON
When used up to 260°C, PTFE is not dangerous. However, cigarettes and tobacco may be
contaminated by PTFE dust or dispersed dried PTFE. Utilization of cigarettes and tobacco is therefore
prohibited when working with PTFE, it is even forbidden to keep cigarettes and tobacco in the pockets.
For these same reasons, all persons shall wash hands before smoking.
B Sealing products : PR sealant
PR sealants can be handled without danger, taking the minimum precautions. As a component part
of the activator is immediately absorbed by the epiderm, avoid any direct contact with the skin and
specially with open wounds. Also avoid to ingest sealing products. Wash hands before smoking or
eating. If the activator has been in contact with the skin, wash with hot water.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ>-^,-^L
BREGUET AVIATION^-^P3^^^^
MIRAGE F
^&£*^^> Restricted MANUAL 01
When applying sealant, correctly ventilate or use breathing masks. Avoid to inhale the vapours for
long or frequent periods. As PR sealants strongly adhere to the various materials, they also adhere to
the skin. Therefore, in order to avoid difficulties for removing the sealant spread on the hands :
- Use polyethylene gloves for coarse worksteps, i.e. which do not require a great skill.
- For delicate work normally wash hands before using the product, then apply a slight coat of
cream DERMOCIF to be spread on the epiderm by lightly massaging so as to allow the cream to
impregnate the epiderm efficiently. Allow the- cream to dry for one or two minutes. Sealant no longer
adheres to the skin and can be removed by normal washing.
13 - REANIMATION METHOD
Any person involved with maintenance operations on an aircraft or next to an aircraft shall be
familiarized with the following regulations, both THEORETICALLY and PRACTICALLY. It is
everyone's DUTY to be ready to give first aid in order to prevent any loss of human lives. YOUR OWN
LIFE IS CONCERNED.
Generally, an electric shock DOES NOT IMMEDIATELY KILL. The victim can be SAVED, even
if HE DOES NOT BREATH ANY LONGER.
A- PRECAUTION TO BE OBSERVED : IMMEDIATELY CLEAR THE VICTIM FROM CONTACT

WITH ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
Use non conductive and dry material (rubber gloves, cloth) to clear either the electric wire or the
victim. Never use metal or damp material. If voltage exceeds 1000 volts, cut off power supply and
provide for the victim's fall if he is hung-up.
If power supply cannot be suppressed, using an isolated stool, take a non conductive and dry pole
to clear the wire from the victim. Avoid any contact between the wire and the face or any other bare
parts of the victim. If the mouth of the victim is open and if it contains foreign matter (such as tobacco,
false teeth, etc..) remove them with the fingers.
Loosen the victim's clothing near his throat and his chest. Immediately start the artificial
respiration.
B Artificial respiration
Follow the indications given by the three sketches hereafter («mouth to mouth» procedure).
Continue the artificial respiration, without stopping, until spontaneous breathing starts again, or, if
transportation to the hospital is found necessary, continue artificial respiration during transportation
until a mechanical means of artificial respiration can be applied.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
(1 ) Place the victim in the sleeping position, belly up, if possible on

a table level with the operator's hips or chest, nevertheless a hard
plane is not mandatory. The operator kneels ahead of the victim or
lies down by his side, if required.
(2) Place the head of the victim backwards so that he be hyper-

extended (position 1 ). Keep it in this position by pressing with one
hand on the victim's forehead and with the other hand on his chin.
Thus, the tongue of the victim will not stop his throat and the air can
pass freely into the respiratory tracts. The same result can be
obtained by putting the second hand under the victim's neck and
rather strongly pushing it upwards.
Position 1
(3) The operator, then, breathes in deeply, then applies his mouth,
widely open, round the victim's mouth (position 2), pressing to avoid
air leaks. Simultaneously, the operator stops the nostrils of the
victim with his cheek, therefore preventing the air from passing
through the nose. If it cannot be done, the operator shall pinch the
nostrils between finger and thumb of the hand which is applied on
the forehead, (a helper can do this).
(4) The operator, then, blows strongly into the mouth of the
victim, watching if possible, the thoracic expansion obtained.
Position 2
(5) When he has finished to blow, he takes his mouth from that of
the victim without moving his hands. The air comes out whilst the
chest depresses. (Breath can be heard by placing the ear close to the
victim's mouth).
(6) When the thorax of the victim is empty, the operator breathes
in again strongly and repeats the operation described in step 3, going
on with the artificial respiration cycle at a rate of 12 to 15 times per
minute. The first 10 insufflations in the victim's mouth shall,
however, be performed more rapidly.
Position 3
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L-**-~; "\L
BREGUET AVIATION^c^ J~c
MIRAGE F
^^^-^<^ Restricted MANUAL 01
REMARKS
A slight pressure against the victim's ribs applied by the operator or by a helper eases the breathing
out time.
For babies, the operator's mouth will cover both the mouth and the nose. Carefully blow and stop
blowing as soon as the thorax starts expanding. It is recommended to slightly press against the stomach
of the child to prevent air from entering.
If the operator finds water or vomit in the mouth of the victim, he shall immediately turn the
victim's head to the side so that the liquids can flow out, then, very quickly he cleans the mouth with
his fingers or a handkerchief. He then places the victim's head in the hyperextension position and
restarts the artificial respiration.
If, during the inspiration time the victim's thorax does not expand, check if the head is correctly
in the hyperextension position and the chin pushed upwards before starting insufflation again. In case
of unsuccess, make sure that no foreign matter obstructs the pharynx.
If it is not possible to lay the victim down, (in a boat, for example, or in small premises) kneel on
the right knee, the left foot being slightly forwards. Lay the back of the victim on the left thigh. Keep
the victim in this position by placing his right armpit over the operator's right elbow, whilst the right
hand lifts the chin and the left hand holds the head in the hyperextension position by pressing against
the victim's forehead. Make the insufflation in this position (position 3).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^ltiX.
BREGUET AVIATION^sa^^sfÔ
MIRAGE F
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE OBSERVED WHEN WORKING

ON SYSTEMS
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet summarizes the general instructions to be observed when working on systems so as to
avoid damage to the material.
2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A - When removing equipment from A/C, refer to instructions given in the manual WEIGHING AND
BALANCING OF AIRCRAFT.
B - Whenever any repair or maintenance operation is performed on the installation with due regard to
the location of. the equipment or component to be removed and their environment, it is essential prior
to removal to blank off or mask all openings likely to give access to foreign matter in the adjacent areas.
C When taking down items of equipment or components, all removable fasteners of the screw type
such as screws, washers, nuts, etc. must be kept together with the associated equipment or else assorted
according to their location (frame ref. No., stringer ref. No.) in order to be able to check all their
numbers ; all missing fasteners must under any circumstances be collected before going on with the
removal.
Special care should therefore be taken on removing units of equipment or components from such
areas as structural boxes giving access to the flight controls, since they are difficult of access for
detecting and eliminating foreign matter.
D - When removing or installing equipment on a system, comply with following instructions :
- OPERATIONS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ONCE ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS ARE TURNED

OFF AND PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS IS DROPPED.
- use appropriate tools.
- protect the tires.
- if needed, drain the system concerned.
- loosen attachment clamps to provide for greater motion clearance as necessary. Do not hesitate
to remove components or items of equipment if this should facilitate the access.
-correctly blank all disconnected pipes and connectors to prevent foreign matter from entering
said components. Use appropriate blanking devices.
- blanking devices shall be selected in such a way that once installed, they prevent any connection
to the A/C systems or another equipment.
AC
06-76 Restricted °-211
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L->*îrvL.
BREGUET AVIATION^^F-V^Ô
MIRAGE F
^C^^^^> Restricted MANUAL 01
This condition is practically met by using :

- outer blanking covers painted in glaring color, on ports used to connect the various items
of equipment,
- various protectors with head or collar of such a shape or size that they cannot be mistaken
for being part of the system,
- blanking devices designed to cover threaded connections and enabling to protect threads,
- streamers, if none of above conditions can be met.
- Equipment, pipes and electrical cables shall be handled with care. Check them for condition.
Before installation make sure that :

-
- there is no blanking device' or foreign matter inside ports before making final connections.
- the equipment or structural bonding surfaces are clean, free of paint, grease or any other
material.
- After installation, carry out the following :
- system drainage,
- check of system sealing,
- check of equipment mechanical clearances with respect to linkage travels,
- adjustments, as necessary,
- check of installation,
- locking.
E Closing of inspection doors
It is forbidden to close a door before the mechanic responsible for the inspection has examined
each compartment (no tools left, defective locking, discrepancies...) and given the order to close said
door.
- It is MANDATORY that multiple wrench M 31025 with female square drive be used to open or
close some doors such as : cockpits - lower and side bays. Advantages of this wrench are as follows :
- it can only be removed from the square drive if the door is correctly closed (two pins are
provided to impede extraction),
- when the door is locked, the wrench cannot remain in the square drive because it features
an internal spring used to eject it as soon as it is no longer held in position.
3- STRUCTURE AND AIRFRAME
-Do not clean titanium and titanium alloys with chlorinated products.
-When removing or reinstalling the pressure sealed inspection doors of the tanks, it is compulsory
to comply with some particular precautions (see 03-5). As regards the other pressure sealed doors, take
care not to damage the seal (PR sealant or seal) and recondition it or replace it as necessary (see 03-5).
- Take all relevant safety measures in order not to score the structure elements or damage the
protective coatings.
- Do not damage structure seal beads.
AC
01-87 Restricted 0-21 1M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ilJ^-~ir5L
BREGUET AVIATION^JS^^S-O
MIRAGE F
^3^^=-^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
4- FLIGHT CONTROLS
- Do not operate the control stick, rudder pedal and trims if the hydraulic systems are NOT
pressurized.
- DO NOT ALTER ADJUSTMENT of flight control rods. The latter are adjusted in factory using
manufacturing tools which enable interchangeability of equipment. For any operation, refer to
manual 04 «Flight controls».
- Servo-controls with fixed or moving barrel are adjusted in factory to the same center-to-center
distance, with very close tolerances.
- THE LENGTH of servo-controls provided with a fixed barrel SHOULD NEVER BE ADJUSTED,
as such servo-controls include a mechanical position repeater device connected between piston and
control bellcrank. Any modification of the center-to-center distance will require the servo-control to be
sent to the manufacturer for complete adjustment.
5- TAKEOFF AND LANDING SYSTEM
- Comply with instructions relative to manual opening and closing of undercarriage doors and
airbrake panels (see 02-0).
6- POWER PLANT
A Fuel and pressurization systems are equipped with special «INTER F LEX» type couplings which
require particular installation and removal conditions (see 06-0).
- On couplings, only use seals matching the system concerned.
B - When working inside a tank, take the following precautions :

- do not keep anything in the pockets,
- take care that the lead lights do not bear directly on the structure sealed with PR sealant,
- immediately, remove any object that falls into the tank,
- put on very clean rubber-soled shoes resistant to hydrocarbons.
C - On the ground, with the aircraft supplied with electrical power, it is imperative to trip the fuse-
breaker of the low-pressure pump concerned (either LH or RH) in case the supply circuit of the pump
control relay should be cut off as this relay permits pump operation when it is not energized.
D - If the aircraft has been grounded, with tanks empty, for more than four months (and no more
than six months in temperate climate) :
- either refuel the aircraft,
| - or fill and drain the tanks, or spray the tanks with an Air 3404 fuel mixture plus 10% of Air 1 504
oil. Renew this treatment every four months.
E After an emergency extension of the inflight refueling boom, do not return the boom emergency
control lever to normal position until the emergency cylinder is completely discharged.
- Before disconnecting or connecting servicing or test connectors, make sure that the aircraft is
not energized.
- When measurements are not carried out with a specific equipment, it is compulsory to use
continuity testers when connecting the test connectors. Work can then be performed without risk
of damage to the connector pins.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £-->>""; "\1 MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^cZsPp^êf^<> ...k..iai *i
- Whatever the measurement may be, it is forbidden to pierce the lead insulation. This results in an
electrolysis process which in course of time causes leakage or insulation breakdown.
- As regards systems supplied with three-phase AC voltage and after repair or modification to
wirings or connectors, check the phase sequence before connection.
NOTE : As regards terminals including berylium bronze components (e.g. transformer-rectifiers,

battery washers), keep the original nuts, locknuts and washers. If replacement of a
component is required, select an identical item made of the same metal.
- Take all relevant precautions for removing and installing an electrical component (See 08-0).
8- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
- Hydraulic systems are equipped with ARSAERO fittings requiring to comply with particular
instructions when installing them (See 07-0).
- Only use seals and flexible pipes made of a material matching with the system concerned.
- Comply with precautions to be taken when working on hydraulic systems (See 07-0).
A Air conditioning
- Comply with assembly instructions for air conditioning pipes (see 09-0).
- As regards connections, only use seals matching with the system concerned.
B- Oxygen
- All works on oxygen system require an absolute cleanliness.

- It is strictly forbidden to use protective or adhesive tape to cover the free ends of pipes and
equipment. Use appropriate blanking devices.
- It is strictly forbidden to use a wrench or any tool to open a valve.
- Only use seals and flexible pipes made of materials matching with oxygen systems.
- Possible leaks on the oxygen system will be detected using a special solution. The latter shall not
flow into the systems and shall be completely eliminated after use.
To prevent any accidental draining of the emergency oxygen cylinder, it is essential to comply
with the cock opening sequence :
1 - A/C oxygen cock
2 - Emergency cylinder cock

and also with the closing sequence :
1 - Emergency cylinder cock
2 - A/C oxygen cock.
C Pilot rescue system
It is mandatory that any action concerning seat or canopy embrittlement system should be
performed by a seat or armament specialist.
In order to keep the reliability of canopy embrittlement pyrotechnic system, see instructions
in 09-0.
10 -NAVIGATION AND WEAPON SYSTEM

A Comply with precautions to be taken when removing and installing an electronic component (See
10-0).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LZ.-J>^L'V<
BREGUET AVIATION ^^-°^^^0
MIRAGE F
Jïê-**^^. Restricted MANUAL 01
B - Pitot static systems
(1) On outer pressure inlets
- Install blanking devices on pressure inlets as soon as the pitot system is not used so as to prevent
foreign, matter from entering the ducts (before installing blanking devices, make sure that heating
probes are sufficiently cooled).
C Incidence probe
-Carefully handle the probe tube to avoid damaging the stops limiting its rotation.
-Install probe tube protecting cover as soon as the incidence system is no longer used and heated.
- The protecting cover should be installed or removed as per axis of probe tube, and without
rotating.
D Armament
- Comply with safety measures for armed or loaded aircraft (See 02-0).
E IFF system
- In order to avoid accidental operation of IFF emitter-receiver emergency mode, do not pull
seat-to-emergency contactor connection (on frame 10, on RH side behind the seat).
F Equipment items including gyroscopes
- Wait until the gyros have stopped completely before removing the equipment.
- Use trucks fitted with shock absorbers for transport.
- Do not drop, kick, throw, ram or knock down carelessly any gyro container.
- Be careful when handling a gyro for fixing it to a support, or laying it on a bench.
G - Sight head
When working in cockpit, be careful not to put anything on the sight head lens. It is recommended
to put the protective cover, supplied with the sight assembly on the lens.
The clear glass and lens should not be subjected to dust or smoke.
H Sight camera
Protect the camera and especially the periscope from shocks.

Make sure that the surface of the lens is perfectly clean.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ^ZZZV*.
BREGUET AVIATION^ '_ _
MIRAGE F
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERVICING THE

Al RCRAFT AND OPERATING THE VARIOUS SYSTEMS
1 - PURPOSE
this sheet summarizes the isntructions to be observed when servicing the aircraft and operating the
various systems so as to avoid wrong operations which could cause damage.
2- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Systems and installations shall be operated only for the time required for adjustments or checks.
As transformer-rectifiers permanently operate as soon as the aircraft is energized with alternating

current through ground power receptacle, it is recommended (except during run-up or when it rains) to
leave the equipment bay door open so as to facilitate cooling of said units. when the aircraft is energized
for a long time.
3- FLIGHT CONTROLS
Before pressurizing the hydraulic systems, MAKE SURE THAT NO CONTROL IS PINNED.
-
-When hydraulic systems are pressurized, ONLY PIN THE CONTROL FOR THE TIME
REQUIRED FOR THE CHECK and after taking all relevant arrangements to avoid wrond operation,
AND PARTICULARLY FOR ANY PIN INSTALLED DOWNSTREAM OF AUXILIARY
SERVO-CONTROL.
- Before pressurizing the A/C hydraulic system fully or partially, it is IMPERATIVE to check that
the two connections between releasable bellcrank and servo-control are simultaneously uncoupled or
coupled (risk of damage to a releasable bellcrank lever). Severe damages will also be caused to both
components in case one of these two connections is uncoupled (even for a short time) while hydraulic
pressure is applied to one system.
- IT IS FORBIDDEN TO CARRY OUT FLIGHT CONTROL INTEGRATED TEST WHEN THE
AIRCRAFT IS JACKED UP. THIS TEST SHALL BE COMPULSORILY PERFORMED WHEN THE
AIRCRAFT IS ON GROUND.
4- TAKE-OFF AND LANDING SYSTEM
- Comply with instructions relative to opening and closing of U/C doors and airbrake panels (See
02-0).
- A brake unit disassembled even partially requires particular attention to avoid any inadvertent
pressurization of the braking system (See 05-7).
5- POWER PLANT
A At run-up
Some units of the navigation and weapon system shall be operated in order to prevent them from
being damaged (See 02-7).
- Comply with safety measures for run-up (See 02-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i
BREGUET AVIATION^ _ _
MIRAGE F
6- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
-Before pressurizing hydraulic circuits, make sure that they are in full operating condition.
-After any operation and before performing adjustments or functional tests, carry out vapour
relief preceded - if necessary - by drainage of systems.
A - Protection of A/C battery
(1) All tests should be performed using an external power supply unit so as to prevent battery
discharging.
(2) On failure warning panel, the battery switch should be set to «Off» position so as to avoid :
- battery discharging when no external power supply unit is available,
- battery saturation when an external power supply unit is available (battery charging through
transformer - rectifiers).
B Protection of fuse-breakers
It is advisable to cut in or cut off said fuse-breakers only when necessary.

C Protection of failure warning panel
To prevent damage to the front face of failure warning panel due to heating when indicator lights
are supplied, place the lighting control unit selector to position «NIGHT» and adjust lights to minimum
brightness. After completion of test, return selector to position «DAY».
D Resetting of inverter
When it is necessary to use an external electrical power source (external power receptacle connect¬
ed), the inverter must be reset by tilting down the reset switch so as to prevent its operation which is
indicated at the failure warning panel by the illumination of the «EMG ***» light. The light should go
out.
A Oxygen
Opening and closing of oxygen cocks on aircraft.

-In order to avoid any damage to the oxygen pressure regulator, do not open A/C oxygen cock (or
emergency oxygen cock) when the flow port is blanked (see 02-9).
_ - When energizing the A/C with alternating current, make sure that the oxygen indicator pointer
does not hunt (continual wavering of the pointer from one side of the dial to the other) (risk of damage
to the gauge system amplifier) (See 09-3).
- Emergency cylinder cock should always be opened after A/C oxygen cock, and conversely as
regards closing.
9- NAVIGATION AND WEAPON SYSTEM

A Protection of NWS unity
During run-up (see 02-7) or ground firing, it is recommended to operate the gyro systems and
servo-mechanism systems to prevent possible damages due to vibrations.
B - Heating of NWS units
Operating time of NWS units is submitted to restrictions according to weather conditions

(see 10-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=>~ir9L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^ô^^-^-^
^£2^^2^ Restricted MANUAL 01
C - Standby horizons (front and rear cockpits)
When power supply is cut off (voluntarily or because of failure), it is very important that the
gyroscope axis be perpendicular to the outer frame so as to avoid - during slowing down - that the
gyroscope comes to rest on its pitch stop and then causes the gyro equipment to rotate about the roll
axis, which may result in damage.
Consequently, after cutting off power supply, it is necessary to pull the resetting knob fully so as
to make sure that the gyroscope is correctly positioned.
D Pitot static systems
Starting and operation of a pressure generator should be performed carefully to prevent aneroids
and servo-mechanisms from being damaged.
As a consequence, the following should be observed :
-IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE SEVERAL PRESSURE GENERATORS

SIMULTANEOUSLY ON AIRCRAFT.
- PRESSURIZATION AND PRESSURE VARIATIONS OF SYSTEMS MUST BE ACCOMPLISH¬

ED ONLY WHEN AIRCRAFT IS ENERGIZED.
- PRESSURE IN STATIC SYSTEMS SHOULD NEVER EXCEED GROUND PRESSURE.
-PRESSURE IN TOTAL SYSTEMS SHOULD NEVER BE LOWER THAN PRESSURE IN STATIC

SYSTEMS.
- OPERATING LIMITATIONS OF ITEMS SHOULD ALWAYS BE OBSERVED.
-PRESSURE VARIATIONS SHOULD NEVER OCCUR ABRUPTLY, ESPECIALLY STATIC

PRESSURE VARIATION WHICH SHOULD NOT EXCEED LIMITATION SET BY THE VERTICAL
SPEED INDICATOR.
During operation, these safety measures entail the following instructions :
(1) For starting
«Sensitive» pitot static systems' (S1, S2, S4, T1, T2) are to be systematically connected to the
generator. In some special cases when some systems are to be shut off, the relevant operations are
described and SHOULD BE DULY OBSERVED.
Before performing leak test prior to the checks, make sure that static systems are connected to Ps
outlet of generator, and that total pressure systems are connected to Pt outlet.
(2) Tests
- Make sure that no inadvertent disconnection may occur during tests.

- Before applying pressure or negative pressure to the systems, make sure that aircraft is energized.
- Should A/C power supply be faulty, keep pressure or negative pressure in pitot static systems
until power supply is restored.
- In order to comply with equipment operating limitations, observe the following :
IAS<750kt i.e.0<AP<1240mb
H< 60,000 ft i.e. 70 mb < Ps < 1050 mb
M<2.2
- In addition, as regards static inlet S3, only perform the leak test (see 12-1), the associated
equipment are limited in pressure.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^^^
iL-^rU MIRAGE F
(3) Reconditioning
After testing, slowly vent the systems (ambient pressure). First vent the total pressure systems,
then the static pressure systems.
Do not remove pitot static system connections until they have reached ambient pressure.
E - Radar
Radar starting is subject to particular instructions so as to avoid damage to the equipment

(see 14-0).
F Intercommunication system
Amplifier channel selector switch on radio selector box shall be set to «1» in order to prevent
channel «2» from being permanently supplied by the battery bus.
G Gyro system
Restarting of the gyro system is to be carried out :

- either after complete stop of the gyro wheels (8 minutes),
- or within two minutes of stopping the system.
H Map display unit
The length of time for which this unit is energized on the ground is subjected to some restrictions
so as to avoid damage to said unit (see 12-0).
I - Laser
Laser range finder starting is subject to particular instructions (see 14-0).
I J Navigation computer
The length of time for which this equipment is energized on the ground is subjected to some
restrictions so as to avoid damage to said equipment (see 12-0).
I K Bombing computer
The length of time for which this equipment is energized on the ground is subjected to some
restrictions so as to avoid damage to said equipment (see 14-0).
AD
09-80 Restricted 0-216M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ ->-. « MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<5î. _,^ - , *,.......,»,
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet summarizes the instructions to be observed when handling and using the ground support
equipment.
2- OXYGEN TRANSPORTATION TROLLEYS
A Transportation trolleys for gaseous oxygen cylinders.
These trolleyswill be more particularly :

located far from any flame,
-
- protected against contamination by fats,
- protected against bad weather and sun when not used,
- stored in cool ventilated premises : proper ventilation shall prevent oxygen accumulation due to
leaking cylinders which could cause explosion or fire.
B Oxygen cylinders
- Slowly open or close the cocks only manually. If manual opening (or closing) is impossible, the
cocks will be considered as defective. It is strictly FORBIDDEN to use a wrench or similar tool to open
or close cylinder cocks. .
WARNING :
QUICK OPENING OF COCKS MAY CAUSE A SUDDEN COMPRESSION RESULTING IN
TEMPERATURE INCREASE SUFFICIENT TO GIVE BIRTH TO FIRE OR EXPLOSION.
- Make sure that the cylinders contain «Aviation» grade oxygen. In case of doubt as regards the
content of a cylinder, NEVER use it to fill an oxygen system.
- A residual pressure of 3,5 bar (50.75 psi) should remain permanently in the cylinders of the
trolley so as to prevent introduction of moisture.
- On exhausted cylinders, mark «empty» and put them aside from other cylinders.
C Liquid oxygen storage and dispenser trolleys
- They shall remain in open, cool and ventilated premises and shall be protected against sun and
heat source.
- They shall be handled with care, as well as their pipes so as to prevent the insulation from being
damaged, and shall be kept very clean.
- During decanting operations, do not leave valves or cocks completely open. Open them fully,
then close them by a quarter turn to avoid risks of freezing in open position.
- Never allow liquid oxygen to remain between two valves. Always open one of the valves to
prevent an excessive pressure from being generated.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]LJ>~'^.
BREGUET AVIATION^2P=^^0
ÎL MIRAGE F
^2^^^^> Restricted MANUAL 01
D Transportation trolleys for liquid oxygen tanks
- They shall be very clean and in perfect condition.

- They shall never be used to carry other material than liquid oxygen tanks.
- The tanks shall always be correctly attached to their support and fitted with their protective
plug.
- Parking of trolleys carrying oxygen tanks is identical to that stated in sub-paragraph C.
- The towing speeds shall be mandatorily observed.
3- MEASURING DEVICES
A Fluid and gas pressure measuring devices
- These instruments shall periodically undergo a systematical inspection followed by possible

recalibration, whether they are used alone (charging gage, pressure reducing valve (HP) for instance) or
they belong to a ground support equipment (pressurization set - hydraulic bench - compressor).
This is also applicable to pressure reducing valves used on compressed gas dispenser trolleys (oxygen,
nitrogen, air).
Mean inspection periodicity is once a year.
- These operations are to be performed more often when :
inspection periodicities stated in support equipment technical handbook are shorter,

- users or repairers deem it necessary according to the accuracy of measurements to be made,
or to conditions for use (intensive use, safety,etc),
pressure gage or pressure reducing valve has undergone a mechanical operation (repair or
replacement of a component).
- measuring instruments (pressure gage, pressure reducing valve...) used for oxygen systems
shall in no case be calibrated with oil. They can be tested with a dry nitrogen supply. It is strictly
FORBIDDEN to use meters which do not offer this warranty. Instruments to be used on oxygen
systems shall bear a permanent marking easily visible.
B Force measuring devices
These ground support items of equipment shall be systematically calibrated twice a year and when¬
ever defective.
4- GROUND POWER UNIT
A Instructions for use
(1 ) Care shall be taken to keep wirings and connectors in satisfactory condition.

(2) Set GPU «anti-flash» selector switch to «without anti-flash» thus enabling to supply the field coils
of ground power receptacle relay and A/C ground power receptacle contactors with + 28V from the
GPU.
If «anti-flash» selector switch is left to «anti-flash», the field coils of ground power receptacle
relay and A/C ground power receptacle contactors are supplied by a battery direct connection, which
makes battery installation on A/C necessary and may cause battery discharging if GPU is used for a long
time.
(3) Check that GPU voltage is 200 ± 4V and GPU frequency 400 ± 4 Hz.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREOUET AVIATION
5 - HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT

A - Instructions for use of bench:
(1 ) Refer to hydraulic bench technical handbook.
(2) Operation of the hydraulic test bench for approx. 10 minutes is recommended before con¬
necting to aircraft system, in order to eliminate all risks of contamination of the A/C systems.
B - Utilization on aircraft:
-The "dual supply" benches permit to ensure maintenance on aircraft only with one
bench, but utilization of these benches requires to take some precautions, according to the
type of bench:
(1) Utilization with only one generation: connect it to the system concerned: the tests are
carried out with "aircraft reservoir full".
After use, refill the reservoir if required.
(2) Simultaneous utilization with both generations:
(a) The bench used is fitted only with one flow supply and a common return: the tests are
carried out with "aircraft reservoirs empty" so as to avoid abnormal filling of an aircraft reser¬
voir.
After use, fill the reservoir of each system separately.
(b) The bench is fitted with two separate systems: the tests are carried out with "aircraft res¬
ervoir full".
6 - HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC TEST ACCESSORY KIT (P/N: 15000 -)
A - Installation of swivel coupling
-Never use an open-end wrench. Tighten nuts 1 and 2 by hand by gripping their knurled
surfaces.
-Before fitting this coupling on the valve, unscrew knurled nut 1 so as to insert plunger 3
until the internal stop is felt.
-Install the swivel coupling on the valve by tightening nut 2 by hand, then tighten nut 1
until the valve internal stop is felt.
SWIVEL COUPLING
INFLATION VALVE
(Tool)
Gas source
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^T
]L=>^rU.
_ _
MIRAGE F
6- PREPARATION AND OPERATION OF PRESSURE GENERATOR
A Purpose
This operation is intended, through pressure generator, to obtain - on the ground - static pressures
(Ps), total pressures (Pt) and consequently display of the following parameters :
- pressure altitude H,
- indicated airspeed IAS,
- mach number M.
NOTE : Preparation of the SDAP pressure generator is described in manual 10-1 .
B Connection to aircraft (figure 2)
(1) Functional tests
Equipment required :
Ground support equipment :
1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply
static pressure probe sleeve BADIN 37681

total pressure probe sleeves (2) BADIN 32560
- skin static port suction fixture 50MS095
- set of pipes BADIN 79.080.847
- pressure generator type 12-3.
CAUTION :
IT IS MANDATORY TO CONNECT SKIN STATIC PORT S4 TO THE PRESSURE GENE¬
RATOR. STATIC PORT S3 IS NOT CONNECTED.
Connect pressure generator receptacles Pt and Ps to the aircraft using appropriate rubber hoses,
couplings, sleeves and adapters.
NOTE :
1 Particular attachment of sleeves

- After loosening the knurled screw, the seal is no longer fully compressed.
- Adjust the sleeves onto the probes by pushing them fully home, then tighten the knurled
screw.
For total pressure probe sleeves, the probe drain hole is blanked by the sleeve.
2 Particular attachment of skin static port adapter
Dry clean the fuselage skin where the suction cup is to adhere.
- Using the knurled screw, draw the suction cup.
- Install the adapter on the aircraft as follows :
- attach part (1 ) to the aircraft anchor nuts by means of its knurled screws,
- couple parts (1 ) and (2) by means of the center knurled screw.
- Make the suction cup adhere.
(2) Leak tests
See 12-1.
C Operation
CAUTION :
REFER TO GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR STARTING AND OPERATING THE VARIOUS

AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS (01-0).
-Make sure that 1013.25 mbar standard altitude is displayed on generator and A/C altitude
indicators.
- Connect the aircraft to an external power supply.
- Perform a leak test (see 12-1). Should a leak be detected, make sure it is not caused by the
generator.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
VUE SUIVANT F
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW F
Générateur
Pressure generator
FIGURE 2 - RACCORDEMENT DU GENERATEUR DE PRESSION

AD CONNECTION OF PRESSURE GENERA TOR
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAIJITL
BREGUET AVIATION ,,<_;
>-'-.\l
_JT\ -
/VMKAVj'L ï"
c^ - -^<N, Restricted MANUAL 01
UTILIZATION OF PRESSURE GENERATOR TYPE 12-3
CAUTION :
THE GENERATOR SHOULD NEVER BE OPERATED WITH Ps AND Pt OUTLETS AIR
VENTED.
TO THAT PURPOSE, MAKE SURE THAT THE AIR VENT VALVE IS CLOSED (CLOSE
THROUGH CLOCKWISE ROTATION).
(1) Envelopes
Make sure that the operating limitations of A/C components (01-0) correspond to the limitations -
Hp max and CAS max - displayed on the generator. Otherwise, select these values.
(2) Connecting the remote control unit
- Using the junction cords, connect the remote control unît to the generator.
- On remote control unit :
- check that Hp and CAS selectors are set to «0».
- check that sealing switches are directed towards L5 and L6 lights.
- Install the remote control unit in cockpit.
(3) Starting the generator into operation
Operate on the front panel of the pressure generator.

- Record the ground altitude (altitude indicator set to 1013.25 mbar.
- Check that the mode selector is OFF.
- Set the INT/EXT switch to INT
- Energize the generator with three phase 200 V - 400 Hz power
- Check that Hp and CAS selectors are set to «0»
- Using fine adjustment potentiometers, select the required variation speeds
dHp . dCAS
It and "dt-
Switch to «Pt - Ps opening» and test the lights. Pump and blowers come into operation.
-
Using Hp and CAS selectors, display the ground pressure (ground altitude and zero speed). To
-
that purpose, pay attention to indicator lights L1 to L4. The light(s) out indicate(s) the direction in
which Hp and CAS selectors are to be actuated. When the lights L1 to L4 come ON, L7 and L8 go out,
L5 and L6 come ON. The generator is ready for use.
REMARK : If ground pressures are already selected, lights L1 to L4 are to come ON very soon, but L5
will only come ON after about 10 sec. time delay after unit starting.
and L6 lights
- Perform a leak test (see 12-1 )
Perform leak test of Ps and Pt channels by directing Ps and Pt switches towards L7 and L8 lights.
- Set I NT/EXT switch to EXT.
AA
04-77 Restricted 0~224
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L
BREGUET AVIATION,., <Ç.
\<?Z
' ZZc*^
MIRAGE F
. ^ Ô, Restricted MANUAL 01
(4) Operation
The generator is controlled from the cockpit ; using the remote control unit, test the lights.
- Vary Hp altitude and CAS speed in operating systems as per required test.
- Read their values on altitude indicator (set to 1013.25 mbar) and mach/airspeed indicator.
Process data delivered by the indicator lights associated with altitude and speed switches.
rr^ and -Tr- speeds, related to required tests, may only be modified on the front panel of
generator.
NOTA : The pressure generator may be fully controlled from the front panel, by setting the INT/EXT
switch to INT and using the front panel controls and indicator lights.
(5) Cutting the generator out
This operation is performed from generator front panel.
- Set the INT/EXT switch to INT.

- Set the mode selector to ground pressure selection.
- Select the ground pressures (ground altitude and zero speed), using selector switches.
To that purpose, pay attention to altitude indicator and mach/airspeed indicator. When both in
initial setting, switch to OFF by retracting the stop.
(6) Incident during operation
- Mains cut-out
Short cut-out
The electro-valves which are not supplied are closed ; in operating systems, pressures are kept as
before cut-out.
When re-energizing the mains, keep the generator to «Pt - Ps opening» ; the generator starts by
itself . The electro-valves are kept closed by the time delay circuit ; they will open themselves when
the operator obtains : upstream Ps = downstream Ps and upstream Pt = downstream Pt.
Long cut-out
The insulation electro-valves automatically close themselves. Thus, it is impossible to return Hp

and CAS to «O» through normal procedure. Switch OFF.
Two mechanically connected cocks are used for progressive return of A/C Ps and Pt systems to air
pressure.
Pay attention to altitude indicator and mach/airspeed indicator ; when both in initial setting, the
generator can be disconnected.
Take care to close the cocks after air venting.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
LOCKING WITH COTTER PINS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet indicates the instructions to be followed for locking castellated nuts with cotter pins.
2- PROCEDURE
A Before pinning
- Tighten the nut according to instructions

in force. When the cotter pin is not fitted
Limit positions of pin immediately after tightening the nut, make
hole with respect to castellatior sure that the tightening torque is correct
before fitting the pin.
Make sure that the castellation is correctly
positioned with respect to the pin setting hole
(see opposite figure).
- Check that the pin diameter is adequate
and that the pin head shape is correct.
B Castellated nut pinning method
(1 ) Two pinning methods :
(a) Generally and when no special indication

is provided, locking of castellated nuts with
cotter pins is to be carried out in compliance
with the opposite figure, the head of the cotter
pin being inserted in a castellation of the nut.
(b) Every time the above pinning method is

not possible due to the prong bent over the
bolt end (RISK OF CATCHING DURING
TRAVEL), cotter pins can be installed as
follows :
- either in compliance with the opposite
figure showing cotter pin installation on a
bench (locking in the form of an anchor),
without bending the prongs into the
castellations ;
Only pins with a diameter less than or
equal to 3 mm (0.118 in) can be twisted to
allow the pin head to be inserted in a cas¬
tellation of the nut.
Cotter pin body
twisted by 90°
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT MIKACit I-
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MANUAL01
or as shown in the variant in the figure of paragraph B (1) (a) ; in that case, it will be necessary
to make sure that the pin head is sufficiently inserted into the castellation to prevent the cotter pin
from rotating.
NOTA : 'n all cases, thin castellated hex nuts with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 7 mm
(0.275 in) shall be pinned according to the method set forth in paragraph B (1) (a), if the
outer taper of the castellated section precludes forming of the cotter pin to a correct
«anchor» shape.
(2) Pinning procedure
- Insert the cotter pin in the hole. Press on the pin head so as to insert it correctly into the
castellation (never use a hammer which could cause the pin head to be distorted and the nut and bolt
to be damaged).
- If need be, cut off the prongs of the pin using nippers, then bend said prongs.
ONCE THE COTTER PIN IS INSTALLED, IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO CUT THE

PRONGS INSIDE A MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY IF RECOVERY OF THE CUT ENDS IS NOT
GUARANTEED.
-Bend the prongs of the pin as shown in the figure.

-After pinning, check that the cotter pin is correctly installed and locked, which does not exclude
a slight play relatively to its housing.
C Plain pin locking method
- Plain pins shall be pinned by bending the

prongs to «anchor» shape, as indicated in the
opposite figure.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
INSTALLATION OF RETAINING RINGS (CIRCLIPS) AND EQUIVALENT RETAINERS
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet indicates the general instructions and precautions relative to installation of various
retaining rings.
2 - EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
A - Standard tool
Circlip pliers
B Spares
- Retaining rings with diameters not exceeding 40 mm are considered as systematical spares and
shall be replaced at each disassembly.
3 - PROCEDURE
A - Groove inspection
Before installing retaining ring, carefully brush the groove. No burr or trace of impact is
permissible. All the edges shall be sharp except those of groove roots for parts made of materials liable
to notch effect.
B - Installation
Before installation, discard retaining rings showing defects which could be prejudicial to their
insertion or to their position inside the groove (distortion, burr, oxidation, etc.).
NOTE : Ensure before assembly (on slat rollers, for example), that the TRUARC rings have satisfied
the hardness unity measurement tests (hardness tested rings).
- Always install (or remove) the retaining rings using appropriate pliers fitted with stop screws used
to limit displacement. These pliers should be matched with the dimension of the ring to be installed.
Ring distortion should be limited to the minimum required for installation. As regards circlips «I»
(inner) particularly, never bring the ring ends in contact with one another. In case of wrong operation,
discard the circlip.
- Some retaining rings are stamped. Cutting may result in curvature of one of the faces next to the
edges. The ring shall be positioned in such a way that the face (free of cutting radii or curved face (B))
is opposite the face bearing against the component to secure against motion.
Detail A
Inner retaining
ring
Outer retaining ring
AA
BREGUET
L^^TU
AVIATION^û^JCç
MIRAGE F
^-S^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
- The retaining ring shall fall freely into its groove, but shall always be tight on the shaft.
C - Check
After installation, make sure that the ring is correctly positioned :

-
- by acting laterally on said ring to determine the groove clearance and by rotating it inside
the groove to check for correct installation and diametral tightening while checking alternately for
proper abutment on each groove face.
- In case of doubt, remove and reinstall the ring, replace it as necessary.
AA
09-76 Restricted 0 -304
BREGUET AVIATION
MANUFACTURE OF A RETAINING STRAP (CABLE)
1 - SCOPE
To describe the manufacture of an attachment used to retain aircraft small removable

parts during their removal.
A - Special tools
-Pliers, SOURIAU 8459A - Crimping die No. 2.
B - Standard tools
-Hand cutters or snips.
C - Materials
-Galvanized steel cable 1.6 mm (0.063 in) dia. (specification BNAé L36115).
-FLEXON sheathing 3 mm (0.118 in) dia., 0.5 mm (0.0197 in) thickness, (LABINAL).
-A-G5 alloy tube 6 mm (0.236 in) dia. x 1 mm (0.039 in), (specification BNAé L15612).
-Attaching parts: (lugs, split rings...).
3 - DESCRIPTION
Cable end extending

.1 by 1 to 2 mm (0.039 to 0. 078 in) -3
The equipped strap includes:
-a cable 1, diameter: 1.6 mm (0.063 in), seven strands of seven wires, in galvanized steel,
-a sheath 2, in "FLEXON" clear plastic, 3 mm (0.118 in) dia. and 0.5 mm (0.0197 in)
thickness,
-two tubes 3, in A-G5 light alloy 6 mm (0.236 in) dia. and 1 mm (0.039 in) thickness,
-attaching or connecting parts 4 (lugs, split rings).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
4- PROCEDURE
- Using hand cutters, cut the cable to a total length including «L» plus the length required to form
a loop at each end. It is recommended to use the following standard lengths : 120 mm, 170 mm,
220 mm, 270 mm (with 10 mm intervals for intermediate lengths).
- Slip a crimping tube onto the cable then add the attachment.
- Form the loop.
- Position the tube so that the loop cable end protrudes from it by 1 to 2 mm (0.04 to 0.08 in).
Crimp the tube over the two cable pieces thus joined together.
- From other end of cable, slip on the clear plastic sheath, then the crimping tube and the
attachment.
- Proceed as previously for loop forming and crimping.
NOTE : In the particular case of movable parts retained by nylon attachment, such as electrical
connector caps, these nylon straps can be replaced, for repair purpose, by galvanized steel
cable.
5- ATTACHMENTS
A Various attachments are described in the following table :
Part description Size in mm Scale 2/1
Fixing lug dia. 3 dia. 3

10

10
Fixing lug. dia. 5 dia. 5

10

12

12
Split ring int. dia. 12

P/N3410-dia. 12-FOIN Split ring
dia. 12
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ; Y- M MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ,<<ZZ.
B Manufacture of a fixing lug (field repair)
(1) Fixing lugs will be manufactured in A-UAG1/A5 light alloy with T3 treatment (quenched - age
hardened), as per the following drawing :
dia.D
dia.2.5
J Developed lenght
R mini 3
CROSS-SECTION AA
Break sharp edges
:zEsn33S 2 shanfers 0.4 at 45°
(2) Table of dimensions (in mm) for the manufacture of various lugs
L
For fixing D
L (developed t
Description dia.
R r
screw dia. mm lenght)
Fixing lug 3.2

dia. 3
for screw dia. 3
Fixing lug 4.2 5 6 11

dia. 4
for screw dia. 4
Fixing lug dia. 5 5.2 3 1.2

for screw dia. 5
Fixing lug dia. 6 6.3

for screw dia. 6
8 8 13
Fixing lug dia. 8 8.3
for screw dia. 8
(All above dimensions in mm)
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^cT
iL>^rU
_ _
MIRAGE F
LOCKWIRE SAFETYING
(figure 1)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet indicates the instructions to be followed for the effective safetying of screws or nuts
whenever the use of lockwire is specified.
These instructions apply to screws and nuts installed on an aircraft equipment item or component,
line couplings or nuts (lines belonging to an equipment item or the aircraft) and the assembly of two or
more equipment items.
- The purpose of lockwire safetying is not to guarantee that the original tightening torque is
maintained, but to minimize any loosening caused by settling and vibration.
- This operation is to be performed with the use of corrosion-resistant steel lockwire with a
diameter of 0.8 mm (0.5 mm dia may be used under exceptional conditions, but only for safetying 3 or
4 mm dia screws).
Unless otherwise indicated, the use of zinc-coated, annealed soft steel lockwire is permitted for
emergency repair purposes and is recommended for equipment when the wire is not permanently in
contact with an unpainted light-alloy surface.
- The use of lockwire is stricly prohibited when the part(s) is/are in ultra-light alloy.
2 - PROCEDURE
- The wire connecting the components to be safetied must be installed so that any natural
loosening tendency is counteracted by an increase in the wire tension.
- After insertion through the hole provided, the wire is to be twisted together with eight to twelve
twists being formed over a length of 25 mm. The wire must be taut during this operation.
- As far as possible, long lengths of twisted wire are to be avoided ; do not exceed 60 mm
(developed length) between two holes.
- The length of untwisted wire near each hole is not to exceed 3 mm.
- After the last hole, the wire must be twisted over a length of 10 to 15 mm, then formed into a
loop to prevent it from becoming a snag.
No loop is required when the lockwire is sealed with heat-shrinkable tubing, but the tubing must
entirely cover both ends of the wire.
- The wire must be installed so that it is not subject to wear caused by friction (bearing against a
sharp angle for instance) or overstress resulting from fouling.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULtJlJ^-^TvL »» I KM \J C I
BREGUET AVIATIONôF=<^0
^£^S=-^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
- As a general rule, no more than three screws or nuts should be safetied together, except when
they have the same function (e.g : cover secured by a series of n screws which must all be removed if
the cover is to be removed).
- On the figure (example 4), note the reverse twisting directions of twisted portions A and C ;
loop B can move only in the direction which increases the twisting of wires A and C.
-Safetying can be performed as indicated in the figure (example 10) for some cases where no
provision has been made for a hole.
- When a direct-mounting union or bulkhead union is lockwired, the wire must be arranged so as
to permit insertion of the wrench intended to counteract the loosening torque of the line nut.
- The hollow bolt of a banjo union must be lockwired. The wire shall be connected to a hole
drilled in the union (see example 1 1 in figure), or to a hole of the adjacent hollow bolt if necessary.
In addition, if the banjo union is connected to a moving hose, it must be mechanically prevented from
rotation (flat machined on the boss supporting the banjo union for instance). If the body of the banjo
union is not prevented from rotation, lockwiring is to be installed only after connection of the line
to the union.
The tightness of a screw or a nut must not be modified so as to move the hole to the best posi¬
tion.
- A lockwire must never be reused.
IMPORTANT :
IN THE SPECIAL CASE OF LOCKWIRE APPLICATION INSIDE FUEL TANKS, BLOB OF
PR 1422 IS TO BE APPLIED TO THE END OF THE TWISTED WIRE.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
?77rrZ?T?7?7T7?7Zt
7 8
Cas des raccords > 16

Fop unions > 16 .2 spires
9 10 2 turns 11
FIGURE 1 - METHODEDE FREINAGE PAR FIL

LOCKWIRE SAFETYING
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
LIST OF OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS REFERRED TO IN THE MANUALS
This is a list of the official regulations and publications mentioned in the manuals and to which
reference should be made.
1- LIST OF PUBLICATIONS
Publication reference Subject
Technical bulletin :
CT. No. 2, NF dated May 14th, 1979 Conditions of applicability for technical speci¬
fications and for technical manual Of Aviation
grade liquid oxygen.
Fascicle EQ 630-56, issue No. 3 of Technical specifications and acceptance require¬

June 23rd, 1977 ments for supply of Aviation grade liquid oxygen.
Technical regulation :
R RE 001-08 General technical instruction relative to storage,

utilization and maintenance of aircraft tires.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]LJ>~try<
BREGUET AVIATIONw^F=<^C>
MIRAGE F
^^^^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
SECTION 1
MAINTENANCE CYCLE
TABLE OF PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1-0 GENERAL
I - Maintenance cycle and inspections. . refer to separate document «MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE»
1-1 PREPARATION FOR INSPECTIONS
- Instructions to be followed for aircraft periodic inspection 1-101

- List of doors to be removed for periodic inspection 1-103
- Pre-inspection run-up See 02-8
1-2 TABLE OF PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
- Table of periodic maintenance operations on aircraft |I Refer to sepan

separate document
- Table of periodic maintenance operations on removed f- «MAINTENAI
V «MAINTENANCE
equipment J SCHEDULE»
Fig. No Page
1 GROUND SAFETIES 1-102M
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL->~rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION snp^^g*^ ....,.. _,
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED FOR

AIRCRAFT PERIODIC INSPECTION-
(figure 1 )
A Special tools
- Tool kit 5002-AH-D

- Tool kit 5004-TR-B
B Ground support equipment
- Cabin access ladder

- Standard step ladders
- Servicing platforms, made up from building sections
- 2 wing protective mats and 1 fuselage dorsal fin protective mat
- Engine compartment floor
- Wingtip and U/C door protective pads
- Dummy cockpit seat
- Dummy cockpit floor <
- Windshield protection PPB4

- Boundary layer bleed protective screens MS 1351
- Air intake blanking covers BOA 15
Angle-of -attack probe protective cover PS 26
- Temperature probe protective cover PS 31
- Static pressure probe protective cover 5002 HAA
- Total pressure probe protective covers 5001 HAA
- Tire protectors
- Laser glass protective cover 50 MS 008
- Hydraulic and electric seal plugs
- Nose U/C leg protective cover C47645
- Canopy seal protectors 50 MS 066
2- MATERIALS
- Kraft paper
- Adhesive tape
- Minnesota 670 adhesive tape, or
- Arclad adhesive aluminum protective foil
3- SAFETY MEASURES
- Comply with the following safety measures :

- opening and closing of U/C doors and airbrakes (see 02-0),
general principles for aircraft preparation (see 02-0),
- safety measures for armed or loaded aircraft (see 02-0).
- Ground the aircraft.
- Install the ground safety pin line in cockpit.
Open door 17.08 and tilt (manually) the vent valve to open position.
Leave the door open.
4- AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION
The aircraft should be supplied complete and conforming to the inventory list. The aircraft tool
kit, slip covers and various blanks are part of the aircraft equipment.
In the event of partial disassembly on the line, the removed parts shall follow the aircraft.
If the fuel system is to be repaired, the aircraft should reach the hangar fully defueled. If required,
defueling will be performed after engine test run-up or after the various tests only.
IF AIRCRAFT GROUNDING IS TO EXCEED 2 MONTHS, IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO

COMPLY WITH AIRCRAFT STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS (SEE 01-5).
AH
AVIONS MARCEL DAIJAUlTJLa^-jrU. MIRAGE F
MtOUfT AVIATIONvÉ&^LJ^^»
5- PROTECTION AND ACCESS EQUIPMENT
A Protection equipment
Place a flat rubber mat :

on each wing,
- on fuselage dorsal fin.
CAUTION :
OBSERVE «NO STEP» MARKINGS.
Install canopy seal protectors on cabin lateral beams.

Install air intake blanking covers and boundary layer bleed protective screens.
Install wingtip and U/C door protective pads.
Install the windshield protection so as to avoid scratches. If no protection is available, protect the
windshield either with thin plexiglas sheets or kraft paper applied to both inner and outer surfaces (this
protection should overlap with the framework and be fixed to it with adhesive tape), or else with
adhesive aluminum foil.
Install the laser glass protective cover.
During inspection, avoid placing lights near to glass panels, as heat may damage lateral and front
panels.
Install antenna and probe protective devices.
-When the pilot's seat is removed, install a dummy seat in the cockpit so as to prevent damage to
wiring and pipes.
Using sealed plugs, blank off all disconnected pipes and couplings.
Blank electrical connectors with appropriate plugs, especially those in bottom of racks from
which components have been removed.
When the engine is removed :
place a protective floor in the engine compartment, and install the protective cover on the
throttle lever.
Place the protective cover on the upper section of the nose U/C leg (retraction system) ; the
streamer should be visible under the aircraft.
Install tire protectors.
- If a tire happens to be soiled by splashes of hydraulic fluid, dry it immediately with clean cloths,
then clean it thoroughly with soapy water and rinse with clear water.
Paraffin-base thinners should not be used for cleaning tires, as they damage rubber.
B Access equipment
-Access to cabin :
cabin access ladder, or standard stepladder, or servicing platform.
- Access to wings :
standard stepladder or servicing platform.
Access to fuselage :
use servicing platforms made up from building sections ; it is not recommended to climb onto the
fuselage upper section via the cabin access ladder and the upper section of the air intakes.
Access to fin :
standard stepladder.
CAUTION :
OO NOT WEAR SHOES LIKELY TO SCRATCH THE SKIN OF THE AIRCRAFT (ESPECIALLY
CORD-SOLED SHOES IN WHICH WOOD OR METAL CHIPS MAY BE EMBEDDED).
OO NOT USE THE DOOR FRAMING AS A FOOTHOLD.
AE
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6_ EXAMINATION OF A/C RECORDS AND LISTING OF COMPONENTS TO BE REMOVED.
A Examination of check documents :
Refer to the various A/C log-books and forms.
B Listing of components to be removed.
Refer to document «Service life of components installed on aircraft» and to table of periodic
maintenance operations on removed components.
7- UPDATING OF DOCUMENTS
- Update the documents according to the regulations in force.
L/H console R/H console
FIGURE 1 -GROUND SAFETIES

AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /ÏJk-VUft #Y\ll\/-\V«7C- I
BREQUET AVIATION ^H^ !^«S^ « . . ....,.. ..
^ ,ô Restricted MANUAL 01
LIST OF DOORS TO BE REMOVED FOR PERIODIC INSPECTION
1 - GENERAL
The doors to be removed or opened for a specific periodic inspection are indicated by a
cross opposite the number of the doors concerned.
They are given in numerical order, in accordance with their location on aircraft and num¬
ber.
For actual removal of doors, refer to operation "Removal - installation" of doors (see
03-5).
2 - LIST OF DOORS TO BE REMOVED OR OPENED
AA
04-89 Restricted 1 - 1 03
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
A- Fuselage
^vÎNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^>w F T F T F T F T F T F T
01-00
02-OOi X X X X
02-04Î
02-06 X X X X X X
02-08i
03-03 X X X X X X
04-04i
04-08i
04-09i X X X X X X
05-04i
05-05i
05-06 X X X X X X
05-06i X X X X X X
05-07i X X X X X X
05-08/1 i
05-08/2i X X X X X X
06-05i
06-08i
07-04Î
07-08i X X X X X X
10-04 X X X X X X
10-04Ï X X X
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^vJNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^V. F T F T F T F T F T F T
10-05
10-07
10-08 X X X X X X
10-08Î
11-03 X X X X X X
11-04i X X X X X X
11-08i X X X X X X
11-09 X X X X X X
12-01
12-04 X X X X X X X X X X
12-08 X X X
12-11
13-00 X X X X X X
13-03
13-04i X X X X X X X X X
13-06Î X X X X X X X X
13-08i X X X
13-09
14-04Ï X X X X X X
14-08i X X X X X X
15-01
15-02
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^\INSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^K F T F T F T F T F T F T
15-03 X X X X X X
15-04-1 X X X X X X
15-04-2 X X X X X X
15-05 X X X X X X
15-06 X X X X X X
15-07 X X X X X X
15-08-1 X X X X X X
15-08-2 X X X X X X
15-09 X X X X X X
15-10
15-11
17-00
17-00/1
17-00i
17-01 X X X
17-02
17-04 X X X X X X
17-05
17-06 X X X X X X
17-06Î
17-06/1
1 7-06/1 i
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
>VsssINSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^"^ F T F T F T F T F T F T
17-07
17-08 X X X X X X
17-10
17-11
18-02 .
18-04Î
18-05 X X X X X X
18-06 X X
18-07 X X X X X X
18-08Î
18-10
19-05 X X X X X X
1 9-05/1 i X X X
19-05/2i
19-06
19-07 X X X X X X
1 9-07/1 i X X X X
19-07/2Î X X X X
19-10
20-02 X X X X X X
20-02/1
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^\JNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^s. F T F T F T F T F T F T
20-03 X X X X X X
20-06 X X X
20-06Ï
20-09 X X X X X X
20-10 X X X X X - X
20-10/1
21-03 X X X X X X
21-04 X X X X X X
21-08 X X X X X X
21-09 X X X X X X
22-00 X X X X X X
22-03i X X X X X X
22-06
22-06i X X X
22-09i X X X X X X
23-04Î
23-05 X X X X X X
23-05Î X X X X X X
23-06 X X X X X X
23-06/1 i
23-06/2i X X X
23-07 X X
x
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^ÎNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^^\^ F T F T F T F T F T F T
23-07Î X X X X X X
23-08Î X X X
24-03Î
24-05i
24-06
24-06I
24-06/1 i
24-09i
25-00 X X X X X X
25-02 X X X X X X
25-02i X X X X X X
25-03 X X X X X X
25-04i X X X X X X
25-05 X X X X X X
25-05i
25-07 X X X X X X
25-07Ï
25-08Î X X X X X X
25-09 X X X X X X
25-10 X X X X X X
25-1 Oi X X X X X X
AA
REGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
""ÎNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^"s. F T F T F T F T F T F T
26-02 X X X X X X
26-03
26-04i X X X X X X
26-05 X X X X X X
26-05i X X X X X X
26-06 X X X X X X
26-07 X X X X X X X X X X X X
26-07/1 X X X X X X
26-07i X X X X X X
26-08i X X X X X X 1.
26-09
26-10 X X X X X X
27-01
27-01-1 X X X X X X
27-01-2
27-01-3
27-03
27-03-1
27-04
27-08
27-08Î X X X X X X
27-09
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^sJNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR N. F T F T F T F T F T F T
27-09-1
27-11
27-11-1 X X X X X X
27-11-2
27-11-3
28-00 X X X X X X X X X
28-05-1 X X X X X X
28-05-2 X X X X X X
28-06 X X X X X X
28-06-1
28-06i
28-06-2 X X X X X X
28-07 X X X X X X
28-08i
29-00 X X X X X X
29-OOi X X X X X X
29-02
29-03-1 X X X X X X
29-03-2
29-04 X X X X X X
29-04i
29-04-1
AA
REGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^sÎNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^v. F T F T F T F T F T F T
29-04-2
29-05 X X X X X X
29-05i X X X X X X
29-06
29-07 X X
29-08 X X X X X X
29-08i
29-08/1
29-08/2
29-09-1 X X X X X X
29-09-2
29-10
30-00
30-00i X X X
30-03
30-04i
30-05 X X X X X X
30-05i X X X X X X
30-06Î -
30-08i
30-09
31-OOi X X X
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
31-01-1
31-01-1/1
31-01-1/2
31-01-2
31-04 X X X X X X
31-05 X X X X X
31-07
31-08 X X X X X X
31-11-1
31-11-1/1 X X X X X X
31-11-1/2
31-11-2
32-01
32-03
32-09
32-11
33-04
33-07
33-08
35-00i X X X
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^VJNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
35-04
35-06 X X X X
35-06i X
35-08
36-00i X X X X X X
36-01-1 X
36-01-1/1
36-01 i X X X X X X
36-01-2 X X X X X X
36-02 X X X X X X
36-02i
36-03-1 X X
36-03-2 X X X
36-04
36-05-1
36-05-2 X X X
36-07-1
36-07-2 X X X
36-08 X X X X X X
36-09-1 X X X X X X
36-09-2 X X X
36-10 X X X X X
x
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^^JNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
36-1 1i
36-11-1 X
36-11-1/1
36-11-2
38-02i
38-03 X X X X X X X X X X X
38-05
38-07
38-09 X X X X X X X X
38-1 Oi
39-00i X X X
39-01
39-11 X X X X X X
40-07 X X X X X X
42-02 X X X X X X
42-04 X X X X X X
42-08 X X X X X X
42-10 X X X X X X
AA
REGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
B- Wings (LH and RH)
DOOR ^s\. F T F T F T F T F T F T
VO-20 X X X X X X
VO-22 X X X X X X
VO-22-1
VO-24 X X X X X X
VO-24-1
VO-26 X X X X X X
VO-26-1
VO-28 X X X X X X
VO-28-1
VO-31 X X X X X X
VO-61 X X X X X X
V1-03 X X X X X X
V1-05 X X X X X X
V1-15 X X X X X X X X X X
V1-19 X X X X X X
V1-28 X X X X X X
V1-38 X X X X X X
V1-39 X X X X X X
V1-47 X X X X X X
V1-51 X X X
V1-53
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAUlTJL>~jjr'
BREGUET AVIATION v "^
MIRAGE F
^vÎNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^v. F T F T F. T F T F T F T
V1-54Î
V1-56 X X X X X X
V1-58 X X X X X X
V1-60 X X X X X X
V1-62 X X X X X X
V1-63 X X X X X X
V1-64 X X X X X X
V2-03 X X X X X X
V2-05 X X X X X X
V2-09 X X X X X X
V2-11 X X X X X X
V2-28 X X X X X X
V2-38 X X X X X X
V2-39 X X X X X X
V2-43
V2-46 X X X X X X
V2-50 X X X
V2-59 X X X
V2-60 X X X X X X
V2-61 X X X X
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^vJNSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
DOOR ^n. F T F T F T F T F T F T
V2-61-1 X X X X X X
V2-62 X X X X X X
V2-64 X X X X X X
V2-65 X X X X X X
V2-66 X X X X X X
V2-67 X X X X X X
V2-69 X X X X X X
V2-71 X X X X X X
V3-11 X X X X X X
V3-13 X X X X X X
V3-15 X X X X X X
V3-28 X X X X X X
V3-47 X X X X X X
V3-51 X X
V3-70 X X X X X X
V3-71 X X X X X X
V3-72 X X X
V3-73 X X X X X X
V3-74 X X X X X X
V3-75 X X X X X X
V4-41
V4-70 X X X X X X
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
V4-71 X X X X X X
V5-30
V5-40
V5-68
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C- Fin
"XsVsINSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
D0-00
D1-33
D1-45
D1-48 X X X X X X
D1-52
D1-53
D2-34
D2-42 X X X X X X
D2-43 X X X X X X
D2-48
D2-51 X X X X X X
D2-52
D2-54
D3-00
D3-34
D3-45
D3-47 X X
D3-48 X X X X
D3-49 X X X X X X
D3-50 X X X X X X
D3-56 X X X X
D4-48
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^vINSPECTION P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
D5-71
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
D- Tail unit
DOOR ^\^^ F T F T F T F T F T F T
E1-35 X X X X X X
E1-36
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L->'"rnJL
MIRAGE F
SECTION 2
LUBRICATION POINTS - TIGHTENING TORQUES -

INSPECTION DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
2-0 GENERAL
- Minimum precautions to be taken during lubrication operations 2-001

- Instructions for installation of «hydraulic» type grease nipples 2-003
2-1 LUBRICATION POINTS
- Lubrication and protection points 2-101
2-2 TIGHTENING TORQUES
- Tightening torque general method of application 2-201

- Tightening torques of standard bolting 2-202
2-3 INSPECTION DOORS
Location and identification of inspection doors 2-301
Fig. No. Page
1 LUBRICATION CHART (flight controls - structure - power plant) 2-102

IM LUBRICATION CHART (undercarriage) 2-102M
2 LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION CHART 2-103
2F LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION CHART (undercarriage and doors) 2-103M
2M LAYOUT OF HINGES AND TEFLON-COVERED PARTS (on flight controls and
in-flight refueling boom) 2-104
2T LAYOUT OF HINGES AND TEFLON-COVERED PARTS (on undercarriage) 2-105
3 EXTERNAL DOORS 2-303
6 INTERNAL DOORS 2-306
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ v/ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^ ^ _.- ^ - ......... tf.
MINIMUM PRECAUTIONS TO BE OBSERVED DURING LUBRICATION
1 - GREASE STORAGE, FILLING OF LUBRICATING DEVICES

The grease shall be stored in the manufacturer's packaging :
either in the box provided by the manufacturer, for use with grease guns,
- or in a tube, for direct use.
THE ONLY OPERATION PERMITTED CONSISTS IN TRANSFERRING THE GREASE FROM THE
MANUFACTURER'S PACKAGING INTO THE LUBRICATING DEVICE.
BOXES SHALL BE HERMETICALLY CLOSED AFTER USE.
LUBRICATING PUMPS SHALL BE FILLED WITH UTMOST CARE SO AS TO AVOID ANY
POSSIBLE CONTAMINATION OF THE GREASE TO BE USED.
NOTE : Before filling the grease guns, make sure that there is no oil at the grease surface, otherwise
mix carefully using a very clean stainless steel (or tool steel) spatula.
2- GREASE GUN LABELLING
All grease guns shall bear a label indicating the AIR reference of the grease.
3- USE AND MAINTENANCE OF GREASE GUMS
It is advisable to group all lubricating operations and to determine approximately the quantity
of grease to be used.
This enables :
- to select the type to be used and to fill one or several grease guns in a single operation,
- to carry out check and maintenance of grease gun assembly (clip-type adaptor, hose...) before
any new filling.
4- LUBRICATION
-The grease to be used can only be contained.

- either in a grease gun, for lubrication of grease nipples,
- or in a tube, for direct lubrication.
- Before lubrication :
- carefully clean the grease nipple and its periphery,
- check that the grease nipple is fitted with its ball and spring, might have been contaminated
during handling.
-squirt a small quantity of grease so as to clean the clip - type adaptor which might have
been, contaminated during handling.
- During lubrication, take any relevant precaution so as to prevent the grease fitting from being
contamined.
- Inject the grease by force into the grease nipples until the old grease is expelled (unless otherwise
specified).
- After lubrication :
- wipe off the excess grease so as to prevent accumulation of dirt.
AA
BREGUET
/LJ^rU
AVIATION^^fiF'-iÔ
MIRAGE F
^C*5^^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
NOTE : During lubrication of hinges fitted with grease nipples, if injection of the new grease is not
easy and the old grease is difficult to expel, proceed as follows :
- manually actuate the hinge several times to make sure that there is no friction point or
locking,
- remove the grease nipple concerned, check that it is not clogged ant that its ball is not
frozen in closed position ; any defective grease nipple shall be mandatorily replaced
(see 01-2),
- inspect the grease duct and check there is no hard deposit inside.
If condition of grease nipple and grease duct is proved to be correct and injection of the new
grease is still difficult, disassemble the hinge for thorough inspection.
5- LUBRICATION OF HINGES
If no grease nipple is provided, lubricate with a brush just before final installation. Otherwise,
proceed similarly then, once installation is completed, inject grease through the grease nipple using
a pump, so as to make sure that the grease can flow freely from the grease nipple ; stop when excess
grease flows out.
This first lubrication is part of the hinge mounting process and must not be postponed.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=>^rT ^L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<^F=_^g<-i> .......... «,
INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF «HYDRAULIC» TYPE GREASE NIPPLE
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench case (0 to 3 m.daN) (0 to 20 ft. lb)

- Accessory case for torque wrench (0 to 3 m.daN) (0 to 20 ft.lb)
2- MATERIALS
- LOCTITE SR290 resin

- LOCQUIC N activator.
3- PROCEDURE
A - Make sure that the threaded bore accommodating the grease nipple is deeper than the nipple
threaded section.
B Locking of grease nipple shall be performed as follows :
- Carefully degrease the grease nipple threading and the threaded bore.
- Apply a coat of LOCQUIC N activator to the grease nipple threading.
- Allow to dry for five minutes.
- Smear one or two drops of LOCTITE to the threading.
C - Screw in the grease nipples. Tighten them to torque 0,5 m.daN (44.2 in.lb). When installing
elbowed grease nipples, increase the tightening torque value so as to provide for correct positioning. If
desired position is not obtained when applying a torque of 0,8 m.daN (70.8 in.lb) max., select another
grease nipple.
NOTE : Front and rear grease nipples of nose U/C rear door shall be installed once the pins are
removed. After correct positioning of the grease nipple, one face of the nipple hexagonal base
shall be parallel to the flat of the pin so that the latter can be reinstalled.
AB
BREGUET
/L-îriJL
AVIATION^-^jF^JSô
MIRAGE F
séC*^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION POINTS
1 - GENERAL
I Figures 1, 1M, 2 and 2F show the various lubrication and protection points.
Detailed procedure of these operations is stated in the corresponding sections of the part
concerned, which it should be referred to.
CAUTION :
LUBRICATION OF SOME HINGES REQUIRES INSTALLATION OF GREASE NIPPLES
WHICH SHALL BE MANDATORILY REMOVED AFTER LUBRICATION COMPLETION.
NOTE : During these operations, comply with minimum instructions to be followed during lubri¬
cation (see 01 -2).
2- TEFLON BALL JOINTS (figures 2M- 2T)
DO NOT APPLY ANY PRODUCT (OIL OR GREASE) TO HINGES FITTED WITH TEFLON
BALL JOINTS.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FLIGHT CONTROLS
STRUCTURE 66 grease nipples
POWER PLANT : 2 grease nipples FUSELAGE : 4 grease nipples (modification 695 not incorporated)
64 grease nipples
Accessory drive : 2 grease nipples Secondary attachments of each wing : 2 grease nipples
1 grease nipple on each power take-off 1 grease nipple on front attachment pia TAIL UNIT : 6 grease nipples
1 grease nipple on rear attachment pin
Rudder : 4 grease nipples
Vertical stabilizer
1 grease nipple on center bearing
1 grease nipple on actuating rod
MODIFICATION 695
NO T INCORPORA TED - Servo-control
1 grease nipple on fixed point
1 grease nipple on bellcrank
Pitch : 2 grease nipples

- Stabilators
1 grease nipple on each bearing
FUSELAGE : 6 grease nipples
Pitch : 4 grease nipples

- Servo-control
Airbrakes : 2 grease nipples

(modification 695 not incorporated)
1 grease nipple on each jack rod
end
WINGS : 54 grease nipples
Roll : 14 grease nipples

- Aileron
1 grease nipple on internal shackle
1 grease nipple on external shackle
1 grease nipple on actuating rod
- Servo-control
- Spoilers
Servo-control
High-lift devices : 40 grease nipples
- Slotted slats
16 grease nipples on rollers
2 grease nipples on screw jack
- Flaps
1 grease nipple on unlocking rod
1 grease nipple on locking fitting
slider
FIGURE 1 - LUBRICATION CHART

(flight controls - structure - power plant)
AB
09-80 Restricted 2-102 FIGURE 1 2-102
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Modification 575
Modification 627 not incorporated
not incorporated
Modification 575 incorporated :

1 grease nipple on front hinge pin on each
^ Points to be
upper door ^ lubricated
2 grease nipples on center and rear hinge Grease AIR 4210
pins on each lower door.
FIGURE IM -LUBRICATION CHART (undercarriage)

AA
09-80 2-102M FIGURE 1M 2-102M
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
UNDERWING EJECTOR FLIGHT CONTROLS

STRUCTURE AND AIRFRAME
LINERS
Oil AIR 3512 Grease M I L-G 4343
Oil AIR 3512 Grease AIR 4205 - Sealing bushes of sealed be/lcranks -A.F.U.
- Canopy mechanism Inside the liner
- - Control surface hinges (shackles and hinges) - Spring boxes
- Hinging device
- Yokes (servo-control attachment) - Uplock mechanism
- Doors and panels Mastinox 6856H
- Feedthrough pistons (airbrakes)
(locks, bolts, hinges) - Outside the liner
- Position pickoffs (pre-servo)
Grease AIR 4222 or AIR 4210 ,
Grease AIR 4222 or AIR 4210 (*}
- Jacking and hoisting - Rails, rollers and pads
fittings
BRAKE CHUTE
Oil AIR 3512
- Hinges
Grease Ml L-G 4343

- Brake chute box
Spring box of telescopic rods
REFUELING PROBE
Oil AIR 3512 ENGINE MOUNTS
Hinge pins GUNS AIRBRAKES
Oil AIR 3512 Grease AIR 4247
- Roller Grease AIR 4222 or AIR 4210 (V Lubrication compound Oil AIR 3512 - Rear mount
- Front door mechnism - Hinges of actuators ARDROX 397/1 - Hooking mechanism
- Screws and universal joints - Guns U-n MOL YKOTE compound
Oil AIR 1504 Grease AIR 4247 Grease 4222 or AIR 4210 (*) - Main mounts
of actuators
- Refueling valve - Gas vents - Unlocking box - Front mounts
- Rollers
- Rails
(*) CAUTION : It is recommended to use the same

type of grease for all successive
lubrication operations.
FIGURE 2- LUBRICATION AND PROTECT/ ON CHART

AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
KEY
f^ Areas to be lubricated and protected
FIGURE 2F - LUBRICATION AND PROTECT/ON CHART

(UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS)
AA
12-79 Restricted 2-1 03M FIGURE 2F 2-103.V
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
i
FIGURE 2M - IMPLANTATION DES ARTICULATIONS ET DES ELEMENTS TEFLONNES
(Sur commandes de vol et perche de ravitaillement en vol)
LA YOUT OF HINGES AND TEFLON-COVERED PARTS
AE (On flight controls and in-flight refueling boom)
12-79 Restricted 2-104 FIGURE 2M 2-104
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Modification 575 non appliquée
LEGENDE
KEY
Articulations ou éléments téf lonnés
Hinges or teflon parts
FIGURE 2T - IMPLANTATION DES ARTICULATIONS ET

DES ELEMENTS TEFLONNES (Sur atterrisseurs)
LA YOUT OF HINGES AND TEFL ON PA R TS
(On undercarriage)
AB
09-77 Restricted 2-105 FIGURE 2T 2-105
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^ZT^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONxr^^-^T^
^^-^ Restricted MANUAL 01
TIGHTENING TORQUE-GENERAL METHOD OF APPLICATION
1 - SCOPE
The scope of this section is to determine the general rules to be observed when applying tightening
torques.
2- GENERAL
Tightening torques are applied to bolts or nuts so as to set assemblies with an amount of stress
known with some precision.
3- APPLICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUES
The stress to which an assembly is set varies according to the state of the surface, the lubrication
and the geometry (perpendicular deviation of supporting faces in relation to the thread axis).
Unless lubrication is specifically defined, tightening torque values are always understood to be
«dry», i.e. : no lubrication of the components.
Correct application of tightening torque requires the use of appropriate methods and tools.
A Tools
(1) Torque wrenches
Only high precision and reliability wrenches with a ratchet type release system must be used.
(2) Dynamometers
The dynamometers must be sturdy, precise and reliable. It is recommended to use the
ACRATORK type dynamometer. Like torque wrenches, the dynamometer must undergo regular
official inspection.
B Tightening torque-procedure of application
It is recommended to apply a tightening torque in a single move, without any interruption. If it is

necessary to accomplish the tightening in several movements for reasons of space and wrench travel, the
last move must be made with sufficient travel to permit a positive indication.
In the case of parts stacking, the tightening must always be performed in the right order, and it is
specially necessary to apply the torque two or three times to allow for a progressive tightening of the
components.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
When, for accessibility reasons, it is necessary to use an extension, strictly comply with the
following instructions :
-the tightening torque application point must be the same during calibration and utilization,
- it is forbidden to alter the position of the extension once the calibration has been performed,
- except in particular cases, the extension must be as short as possible, the maximum length must
not exceed one third of the torque wrench length,
-whether using an extension or not, the calibration must always be performed on the standard
dynamometer,
- the tightening must be carried out by the same person who did the calibration.
- the torque actually applied must not depend on :
- how fast the wrench is actuated,
- the position of the wrench,
- the lateral stress the operator might apply on the wrench (to hold it in place for example).
Calibration Utilization What not to do
Position of the extension ' '
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL2*~a-Js\ /V\ll\/-\\JrU I
^^^
BREGUET AVIATION
^<e. ^^>
â-*o Restricted hhamiiai
MANUAL ni
01
TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR STANDARD BOLTS AND NUTS
1 - SCOPE
To remind the ground crew of the usual torques to be applied to the standard bolts and
nuts, for which no specific torque values are indicated.
2 - GENERAL
The tightening torques given in the following table apply (for dry tightening either on
head or on nut side) to SIM - ISO - BNAé - AMD/BA screws made of cadmium plated steel
or not (35NC6-30NCD16) or of titanium T.A6V annealed or not (code X molykote MOS2
treated or code XA molykote M106 treated).
3 - TIGHTENING TORQUES (see table)

A - Normal torques (column 1)
-For bolts subject to shear loads (except ISO reduced-head recessless screws "FL") with:
-standard hex nuts,
-thick hex nuts with nylon lock whatever the material and thin hex nuts in 30NCD16
only,
-hex nuts with elleptical lock or lateral slots PH or DH, all diameters, nuts RH8035
dia 4 and 5 (red colored or not) and dia > 6 red colored,
-thick and thin castellated hex nuts,
-castellated hex nuts with nylon lock, thick type only,
-all anchor nuts.
B - Reduced torques (column 2)
-For bolts subject to shear or tensile loads (ISO reduced-head bolts wihtout recess,
called "FL") with:
-thick hex nuts with nylon lock whatever the material and thin hex nuts in 30NCD16
only,
-hex nuts with elliptical lock (RH8035) dia 4 and 5, red colored or not and dia > 6
red colored.
C - Reduced torques (column 3)
The torque values in column 1 are reduced by 25 % when using RH8035 nuts (old man¬
ufacture) of dia > 6 and not red colored.
D - Reduced torques (column 4)
The torque values in column 2 are reduced by 25 % (for ISO "FL" bolts) when using
RH8035 nuts (old manufacture) and not red colored.
E - Exceptional torques (column 5)
For bolts subjected to tensile loads only (values which must be specified in the drawings,
i.e., torque values 1 increased by 1 5 %).
F - Exceptional torques (column 6)
Torque values in column 5 are reduced by 25 % when using RH8035 nuts (old manufac¬
ture) of dia 0 £ 6 and not red colored.
NOTE: When assembly is performed with the use of nut retainers (Std 31650), the torque va¬
lues must be reduced by 10 % (M106 treated retainer).
REMARK :
A reduced-head bolt without recess is identified by the mark "S".
AB
MIRAGE F
BRESUET AVIATION
4 - TORQUE VALUES IN m.daN
TORQUE VALUES TO BE APPLIED WHEN NOT TORQUE VALUES THAT MUST BE

SPECIFIED IN DRAWINGS SPECIFIED IN DRAWINGS
NORMAL REDUCED FOR USE WITH NUTS EXCEPTIONAL VALUES FOR

RH8035 TENSILE LOADS
For all bolts For ISO not colored red, dia a 6
DIA PITCH subjected to reduced-head
shear loads *FL" bolts With all With RH8035
except ISO subjected to nuts listed nuts, dia 2 6
reduced-head shear and All bolts except For ISO -FL
ISO-FL bolts in para. 1 not colored red
"FL" bolts tensile loads
© © © © © ©
For old
For old manufacture manufacture
0.70
0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.230 0.230
0.75
reduced head 0.300 0.280
5 | 0.80
standard head 0.350 0.350
0.350 0.365 0.400 0.420
0.90
0.750 0.700 0.545 0.525 0.850 0.630
1.200 1.150 0.900 0.865 1.400
1.25 1.600 1.200 1.200 0.900 1.800 1.380
10 1.50 3.500 2.300 2.500 1.700 3.800 2.850
12 1.50 5.500 4.500 3.250 4.600
14 1.50 12 8.800 5.250 13.500 10
16 1.50 16 12 18.500 13.800
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]
BREGUET AVIATION^ _
MIRAGE F
These torque values are to be obtained after all the precautions given in 01-2, i.e. tightening
torques-general method of application, have been taken. DO NOT CLEAN OR DEGREASE PARTS
MADE OF TITANIUM OR ALLOY WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS.
A noticeable damaging of the protection treatments or lubrication of the screws, washers and nuts
as well as a definite heating of a screw or nut during tightening may lead to an important decrease
in the tension applied to the screws. THEREFORE, ANY ATTACHMENT PART SHOWING ONE OF
THESE DEFECTS MUST BE REPLACED.
The tightening torques specific to certain assemblies which are not shown in this table can be
found in the work cards.
The torque wrenches to be used must be of the ratchet type release system kind and not of the
clock type whereas their calibration must be carried out with a precision of ±5 %.
5- SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
A When using a pin or a notched lockwasher, locking is by fractions of a turn and may not coincide
with the torque value prescribed (tolerance included). It is therefore necessary to fit a washer or adjust
the nut bearing surface as necessary.
B When castellated nuts are fitted to the joints of rotating parts :

-slightly overtorque the nut, then untighten if necessary to fit the pin in the axis hole :
- in this case, it is however necessary to tighten and untighten the nut several times successi¬
vely, thereby achieving a compression of the axis/nut assembly in order to fit the pin only when the nut
is almost locked,
- make sure that the part rotates freely.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL
BREGUET AVIATION ^£T
*vwxr\l
_ _
MIRAGE F
LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF INSPECTION DOORS
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet was elaborated to inform the personnel about the basic rules selected for identification
of inspection doors through numbering. These rules enable to determine using a memotechnic
method the position of inspection doors with respect to the aircraft without referring to the figures.
These rules shall therefore be assimilated correctly so that this numbering be practical and the
identification efficient and unequivocal.
2- LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF INSPECTION DOORS (Figures 3-4-5)
A General
(1) Identification of said doors takes the breakdown of the aircraft into account, with regard to its
main components such as : FUSELAGE - WINGS - FIN - STABILATOR ASSEMBLY.
(2) As regards the fuselage, numbering of doors comprises 4 figures, e.g. 29-03. For other components
of the aircraft structure, numbering comprises 3 figures preceded by the first letter of the component
concerned, e.g. V 2.34 - D 2.32 - E 1.35. In some cases, a suffix may be added to these figures.
(3) Numbering of internal inspection doors is based on the same principle as that used for external
doors, except that suffix letter «i» (stands for internal) is added to the figures. An internal door which
can be reached through an external door will bear the same identification number as said external door,
followed by suffix letter «i».
B Fuselage doors
(1 ) Their location is first defined with respect to each fuselage section included between two frames,
from front to rear, then with respect to all-around clock divisions of the fuselage section
(00-01 -02 to 1 1 ). Direction of rotation : clockwise for a person in the cockpit.
(2) A door is identified by four figures (e.g. door 29-03).

(a) The first two figures show the location of the door with respect to the preceding frame (e.g.
frame 29). The same principle is applicable to a door covering several frames.
(b) The last two figures determine the clock division on which the door is located (e.g. at 3 o'clock).
NOTE : Doors located on the dorsal fin are conventionally identified by both figures 00 (instead of
12).
(c) Two doors located on the same fuselage section and on a same generatrix bear the same four-figure
identification number. To make a difference between said doors, a fifth figure corresponding to their
position in relation to the reference frame, is added after the identification number. This number and
the fifth figure shall be separated by a dot (e.g. doors 29-03.1 - 29-03.2).
(d) One or several small doors cut-out in a large one : each small door bears the identification number
of the large door, suffixed by a fifth figure corresponding to the position of each small door on the
large one. Identification number and fifth figure are separated by a slash (e.g. door 26-07/1 ).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fA V MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^ .:,;<>
^J^^<^. Restricted MANUAL 01
C Wing doors
(1 ) Their location is first defined with respect to each wing spar box included between two ribs, from
the wing root to the wing tip, and then with respect to wing spar box areas.
The wing spar box areas are delimited with respect to front and rear spars. A wing section
comprises three areas : leading edge centre wing spar box - trailing edge (control surfaces included).
(2) In order to locate the doors on a same wing spar box and to distinguish them from one another
according to the area considered, 90 number (1 to 90) are selected. Each area considered is given a
series of numbers, i.e. 1 to 29 for leading edges 30 to 59 for centre wing spar box and 60 to 90 for
trailing edge.
(a) As regards location and identification of doors, numbering starts from wing root to wing tip, and
from leading edge to trailing edge (upper and lower surfaces).
(b) Even numbers are assigned to wing upper surface doors, and odd numbers to wing lower surface
doors.
(3) A door is identified by letter V (stands for wing) suffixed by a three-figure number (e.g.
door V 1.38).
(a) The first figure is used to locate the door with respect to the preceding main rib (e.g. rib 1 ).
(b) The two other figures determine the area where the door is located (e.g. (38) wing upper surface
door in center wing spar box).
(c) If the door considered is only located on one of both wings, the identification number is followed
by «D» (R/H) or «G» (L/H).
D Fin doors
Numbering of fin doors is based on the same principle as numbering of wing doors, except for the
following :
Letter D (stands for fin) is added to the three-figure number.
- Even numbers are assigned to R/H fin doors and odd numbers to L/H fin doors, for a person in
the cockpit.
E Stabilator doors
Numbering of stabilator doors is based on the same principle as numbering of wing doors except
that letter E (stands for stabilator) is to be added to the three-figure number.
AA
1172 Restricted 2-302
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
D3.00 .
P0.09
VUE DE DESSUS
TOP VIEW
17.11
17.10
FIGURE 3 - PORTES EXTERIEURES \ \

EXTERNAL DOORS
AH
10-76 Restricted 2-303 FIGURE 3 2-303 FIGURE 3 9_"?m
BREGUET AVIATION
VUE COTE DROIT

R H SIDE VIEW
29 08/2; 28.06
I L 29 08/li 28.06.2 28.061.26.07
11
I 29 08 L 28.07
FIGURE 4 - PORTES EXTERIEURES ! 29.07
AJ EXTERNAL DOORS
2-304 FIGURE 4 2-304
12-87 Restricted 2-304 FIGURE 4
BREGUET AVIATION
t--v"'i; il
^\±r~^ JZZ>^>
MIRAGE F
V5.68
INTRADOS
LOWER SURFACE
V5.40
V1.38
VI. 58
Lg.AV
EXTRADOS
UPPER SURFACE
V0.61
I I I
Lg.AR Lg.5 Lg.4 Lg.3
FIGURE 5 - PORTES EXTERIEURES

EXTERNAL DOORS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
COUPE COTE DROIT 29.00.1 3O.00i 31.00. 35.00.1 36.02.1 36.01.1 36.00.1 38.02 ,L
CROSS SECTION (R/H SIDE)
COUPE C
LjIii^^^^dM?^
CROSS SECTION C
COUPE A
CROSS SECTION A
23.06. 2. i
20 06.1
2308 2304 j
ii i i i i i i i
Cadres i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 222324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Vue si ivant J Frames Vue suivant H Vue suivant F Vue suivant G
View m direction of arrow J View in direction of arrow H View in direction of arrow F View in direction of arrow G
73.06.1. 19 05 2.1 j ' -36.11. i
05.05.i 22.06.i
Ol.OO.i 05.06-i .
36.00.1
05.07.i 2406.1 31.00.
&a! Ç&
Cadres | | | | 3s.oo.i | 36.02.1 | 36.oi.i
C1 IC2 C5 C6 19.07.1.Î 23 06 2. i
COUPE D Frames 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
CROSS SECT/ON D COlJPE COTE GAUCHE
1907.2.1
CR\DSS SECTION (L/H SIDE)

_^39.00.i ,36.11..
SECTION B
1907.1
Cadres 4 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 242322 21 20 19 18 17 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 16
Frames
29.04.1 2504.i 2305.i _. 23.04.i_ 20.0S.J _, 19.05.1.i_
COUPE E 35 06i 30.04.i I 26.05.1 25 05i \ 24.06J \23.06.2i\ 27.03.if 19.05. 2. i f 18.04.1
CROSS SECTION E VLE DE DESSOUS
BOTTOM VIEW
24.05.i
FIGURE 6 - PORTES INTERIEURES 3O.05.i 30.08.1 2905. i 26.07.1 25 08 i 23.06.1. i 22 09i 19 07 1.Î J 18.08.1 13.06. i
INTERNAL DOORS
AF
02-79 Restricted 2-306 FIGURE 6 2-306 FIGURE 6 2-306
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
SECTION 3
TOOLS AND
GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
3-1 TOOLS
- Standard tool kit 3-101

- Special tool kits 3-107
3-2 GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (Refer to : Ground support equipment list)
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
STANDARD TOOL KIT
1- ARSAERO coupling case

2- INTERFLEX coupling case
3 Set of extra-thin fork spanners
4- Case for torque wrench (0 to 0.500 m.daN) (0 to 45 in.lb)

5 - Case for torque wrench (0 to 3 m.daN) (0 to 20 ft.lb)
6 - Accessory case for torque wrench (0 to 3 m.daN) (0 to 20 ft.lb)
7 - Case for torque wrench (2 to 20 m.daN) (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)
8- Case for torque wrench (5 to 50 m.daN) (40 to 350 ft.lb)

9 - Accessory case for torque wrench (2 to 20 m.daN) (15 to 150 ft.lb) and (5 to 50 m.daN) (40
to 350 ft.lb)
10 -Additional case for torque wrench (5 to 50 m.daN) (40 to 350 ft.lb)

1 1 Thread insert installing and removing tools.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^<<;c^ ..»_.*, n,
^^ V Restricted MANUAL 01
1 - ARSAERO COUPLING CASE
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 set of O/E ring spanners : 10 x 12 - 14 x 16 - 17 x 19 - 21 - 23 - 24 x 26 - 29 x 32.
- 1 set of socket spanners

- 1/4" square drive : 12 - 14 - 19
- 3/8" square drive : 21 - 26 - 32
- 1 hinged handle 1/4" square drive with pin
- 1 hinged handle - 3/8" square drive with pin.
2- INTERFLEX COUPLING CASE
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1set of spanners for ring.

Reference 306-369 for 16 mm dia. pipes
Including :
- 1set of spanners for nut

Reference 300-245 for 1 6 mm dia. pipes
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLsr^tSy^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF0^-^-^ , ..».....».«,
3- SET OF EXTRA-THIN SPANNERS
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 set of straight spanners : 12 - 13 - 14 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28

- 29 - 30 - 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 -36 - 37 - 38 - 40 - 42 - 45 - 46 - 50 - 52 - 53 - 54 - 58 - 64 - 67 - 71 - 82 - 102.
- 1 set of offset spanners : 12 - 13 - 14 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 -

29 - 30 - 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 40 - 42 - 45 - 46 - 50 - 52 - 53 - 54 - 58 - 64 - 67 - 71 - 82 - 102.
- 2 extensions (small type)
2 extensions (large type)
4- CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCH (0 to 0.500 m.daN) (0 to 45 in.lb)
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 torque screwdriver 0 to 0.500 m.daN (0 to 45 in.lb)
- 1 locking spanner (for reference)
- 1 screwdriver socket :
- 1/4" square drive hexagonal 6.35 female/female.
5- CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCH (0 to 3 m.daN) (0 to 20 ft.lb)
including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 self-reset torque wrench 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
- 1 1/4" single male square drive
- 1 3/ 8" single male square drive
- 1 attachment ratchet head
- 1 adapter
- 1/4" square drive female
- 3/8" square drive male
- 1 1/4" square drive socket
- hexagonal 6.35
- female/female.
AB
BREGUET AVI ATlON^^f
/A-_^xc >k-c /WIKMVjE
»,»..,*,«,
I
_^£^-<CN: Restricted MANUAL 01
6- ACCESSORY CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCH 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 setofforkspanners:7-8-9-10-11 -12-13-14-15-16-17-18-19
- 1 set of ring spanners : 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 - 1 1 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19
- 1 straight extension (small type) for fork and ring spanners
1 straight extension (large type) for fork and ring spanners.
7- CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCH 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 torque wrench 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)
1 3/8" single male square drive
- 1 reducer - square drive :
- 3/8" male
- 1/2" female
- 1 attachment ratchet head

- 1/2" square drive
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL.^^trV^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF°^=>«i>
^^-~<<^ Restricted MANUAL 01
8- CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCH 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb)
Including :
- 1 bare case
1 torque wrench 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb)

- 1 adaptor
- 3/4" female square drive
1" male square drive
1 attachment ratchet head

- 3/4 square drive
- 1 reducer
- 3/4" female square drive
- 1/2" male square drive
9- ACCESSORY CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCHES 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) and 5 to 50
m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb)
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 set of fork spanners : 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 -

29-30-31-32-35
- 1 set of ring spanners : 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29
- 30 - 31 - 32 - 35
- 1 straight extension (small type) for fork and ring spanners
1 straight extension (large type) for fork and ring spanners
10 -ADDITIONAL CASE FOR TORQUE WRENCH 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb)
Including :
- 1 bare case
- 1 3/4" square drive torque multiplier.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASiAULT/.
BREGUET AVIATION^C '
v
_-.
0
C
MIRAGE F
. --r-- ^^. ' Restricted MANUAL 01
11 -THREAD INSERT FITTING AND REMOVING TOOLS
- Prethread-forming standard tool (monodimensional manual installation tool)
For nominal dia. of 3 - 4 - 4 - 5 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10.
- Special taps with conical start
Special taps : 3 x 50 - 4 x 70 - 4 x 75 - 5 x 80 - 5 x 90 - 6 x 100 - 7 x 100 - 8 x 100 - 8 x 125 -

9 x 100 - 9 x 125 - 10 x 125 - 10 x 150.
- Special taps without conical start
Special taps : 3 x 50 - 4 x 70 - 4 x 75 - 5 x 80 - 5 x 90 - 6 x 100 - 7 x 100 - 8 x 100 - 8 x 125 -

9 x 100 - 9 x 125 - 10 x 125 - 10 x 150.
Manual impact switch
For nominal dia. of:3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10
- Manual extractor
Extractor for nominal dia. of 3 to 10

Extractor for nominal dia of 3 to 3.5
- Helicoil plug gauge 3501.
For nominal dia. and pitch of 3 x 50 - 4 x 70 - 4 x 75 - 5 x 80 - 5 x 90 - 6 x 100 - 7 x 100 -

8x100-8x125-9x 100-9x125-10x125-10x150.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KITS
1 - GENERAL
For convenient and logical use, the tool kits have been composed according to specialty and main¬
tenance line.
2- DENOMINATION AND CLASSIFICATION OF TOOL KITS
A Denomination
(1) Example :F1-AH-B4

F1 : aircraft type.
AH : specialty («atterrisseur-hydraulique» - U/C-hydraulics).
B : maintenance line for which the kit is intended ; however, it may be used for other maintenance
lines.
4 : contents of kit (for example : 4th inventory change).
(2) Further example : 5002-EQ-B4

50 : aircraft type.
02 : tool kit sequence number.
EQ : specialty (equipment).
B : maintenance line for which the kit is intended ; however, it may be used for other maintenance
lines.
4 : contents of kit (for example : 4th inventory change).
B Classification
SPECIAL TOOL MAINTENANCE MANUF.'S

KITS LINE P/N
Preparation tool kit Preparation 5001-MO-A2
U/C-hydraulics ground tool kit Ground 5001-AH-A2
Fuel system ground tool kit Ground 5002-CA-A1

(aircraft refueled)
Electrical system ground tool kit Ground F1-EL-A1
Flight control tool kit 1st line 5004-CV-B3
U/C-hydraulics tool kit 1st line 5003-AH-B5
Engine installation-removal tool kit 1st line 5010-TR-B2
Electrical system tool kit 1st line 5001-EL-B6
Equipment tool kit 1st line 5009-EQ-B5
Equipment tool kit 2nd line 5002-EQ-C
Airf rame-structure tool kit 1st line 5002-CS-B5
AF
BREGUET AVIATION
B Classification (cont'd)
SPECIAL TOOL MAINTENANCE MANUF.'S

KITS LINE P/N
Flight control tool kit 2nd line 5002-CV-C3
Airframe-structure tool kit 2nd line 5002-CS-C3
Flight control tool kit 2nd line 5001-CV-D8

Specialized workshop
U/C-hydraulics tool kit Specialized workshop 5008-AH-D9
Fuel system tool kit Specialized workshop F1-CA-D6
Fuel system tool kit 2nd line 5005-CA-C
Retractable probe tool kit 1st line 5001 -PR-B
Retractable probe tool kit Specialized workshop 5003-PR-D
3- INVENTORY OF TOOL KITS
The contents of the different tool kits correspond to a basic inventory drawn up in accordance
with the maintenance operations known and studied up to present time. Maintenance developments
may lead to addition, withdrawal or modification of certain tools. In this case, to keep a single type
of tool kit throughout the aircraft life it has been decided to change the kit contents only and not the
reference. The changes in kit contents can be followed by means of an index added to the reference,
and which is to be found only in the above table.
Example : basic inventory F1-MO-A.

1st inventory change : F1-MO-A1
2nd inventory change : F1-MO-A2,
etc.
Further example : basic inventory 5002-EQ-B.

1st inventory change : 5002-EQ-81
2nd inventory change : 5002-EQ-B2,
etc.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<<1 ^-n^
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - PREPARATION
REFERENCE 5001-MO-A
DESCRIPTION PART No. USAGE Qty
Multiple wrench M31-025 Cabin door opening wrench

PPV-APV
Pressure relief valve unseating M31-031 Wing pressure relief valve

tool PPV - APV
Tightening spanner M31-096 Tulip ALKAN 1022 F
Wrench for blanking plug M31-125 Tulip ALKAN
Bleed connection 56497 Oil sampling
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - GROUND-HYDRAULIC UNDERCARRIAGE
REFERENCE 5001.AH.A
Notched wrench C46.610 Main U/C leg axle nut
Adapter C46.860 Nose U/C leg axle nut
Disc centering tool D46.233 Main wheel installation
Shim D47.419 Play check between plates

and brake unit stator
Measuring gage 047.459 Wear check of side stators
Compression tool 146400/78 Play take-up zero resetting
Measuring gage 147700/78 Brake wear check
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - GROUND FUEL
REFERENCE 5002-CA-A
Tank drain plug wrench M 12038 Tank draining 1
Pressure relief valve unseating M 31031 Wing pressure relief valve unseating 1
tool
Air-vent device M 31128 For A/C refueling 3
Draining device MS 553 Gravity draining 2
AB
BREGJET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL-KIT - GROUND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
REFERENCE F1.EL.A
Control grip wrench (SAMM 151.557) M 15.007 Pilot handle installation or removal
Wrench OUT 55 For bub replacement
Armament panel tool OUT 58 Button loosening and panel light

replacement.
Bulb extractor OUT 57A Midjet and micro-midjet of warning panel
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FLIGHT CONTROLS - 1st LINE
REFERENCE 5004-CV-B
DESCRIPTION PART No. USE Qty
Double hexagonal endpiece 41 A/F M 31011 Tail unit fixed point servocontrol pin
Double hexagonal endpiece 36 A/F M 31012 Tail unit rudder servocontrol pin
Pin endpiece M 31013 Tail unit servocontrol outlet

bellcrank pin
Pin wrench M 31023 Rotation pin of micrometric rod and

spoiler servocontrol bellcrank
Adjusting wrench M 31042 Servo spoiler, micrometric rod adjusting

backnut
Wrench for hinge pin of flap M 31043 Servocontrol replacement

servocontrol internal bellcrank
Set of adapters M 31044 Flap servocontrol pin, fixed point side
Wrench 16 A/F M 31045 Flap servocontrol pipes
Pin wrench M 31047 Rudder shackle attachment
Socket 29 A/F M 31048 Spoiler servocontrol attachment pin,

sliding rod side
Pin wrench M 31052 Servo spoiler pin plug, fixed point side
Socket 24 A/F M 31055 Aileron servocontrol pin, fixed point side
Operating handle M 31056 For wrench M 31045
Wrench 21 A/F M 31059 Fitting of pitch servocontrol flexible pipes
Wrench 17 A/F M 31060 Fitting of pitch servocontrol flexible pipes
Lockwasher extractor M 31063 Servo spoiler slide valve control pin
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FLIGHT CONTROLS - 1st LINE (Cont'd)
REFERENCE 5004-CV-B
Pin extractor M 31064 Servo spoiler slide valve control
Pin extractor M 31065 Servo spoiler output bellcrank
Pin wrench M 31066 Lower surface plugs
Neutral resetting strip M 31097 Slotted slats
Wrench M 31 103 Flap jack torque tightening
Crankpin with gimbal joint M 31104 Slotted slat driving
Clearance checking tool M 31150 Spoilers servocontrol rod
Adjusting wrench M 31151 Spoilers spring box
Rod barrel holding tool M 31152 Spoilers servocontrol micrometric rod
Castle adapter M 31160 Flap root bellcrank pin cap
Set of pins for linkage MS1390 Flight control and flap linkage pinning
Pin assembly MS 1390-10-840 Locking of pitch servocontrol releasable

bellcrank
Pin extractor MS1392 Sliding rod side
Pin extractor for control rod, droop MS1393 Removal of slats

slat jack bellcrank side
Extractor MS1394 Spoiler servocontrol pin, fixed point side
Extractor MS1395 Spoiler servocontrol pin, sliding rod side
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FLIGHT CONTROLS - 1st LINE (Cont'd)
REFERENCE 5004-CV-B
Extractor MS 1396 Aileron servocontrol pin, sliding rod side
Socket S 30 Bellcrank-to-micrometric rod linking pin,

servo spoiler side
Centering thimble SMS 231 Spoiler servocontrol attachment pin,

fixed point side
Centering thimble SMS 244 Tail unit servocontrol pin, fixed point
side
Centering thimble SMS 245 Tail unit servo control pin, rudder side
Centering thimble SMS 246 Hinge pin of flap servocontrol internal

bellcrank
Centering thimble SMS 247 Bellcrank swiveling pin
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - UNDERCARRIAGE-HYDRAULICS - 1st LINE
REFERENCE 5003-AH-B
Castle wrench C 46607 Telescopic rod attachment nut 1
Extractor C 46608-1 Nose U/C leg to structure hinge pin 2
Guide C 46609 Nose U/C leg to structure hinge pin
Guide C 46862 Main U/C leg hinge pin
Tension adjuster attachment pin C 46864 Towing yoke
Castle wrench C 46895 Elastic rod adjustment
Castle wrench C 46896 Compass pin sleeve
Hexagonal socket C 46897 Elastic rod removal
Castle wrench C 46910 Adjustable endpiece locknut

(telescopic rod)
Castle wrench C 46958 Endpiece locknut (nose U/C door

actuating cylinder)
Guide cone C 47027 Telescopic rod attachment pin
Adapter C 471 76 Holding threaded bush (nose U/C leg)
Castle wrench C 47179 Retraction jack
Adapter C 47181 Airbrake jack
Pin wrench C 47186 Threaded bushes for level gauges

1 and 2
Wrench C 47480 Nose U/C leg cylinder assembly
AB
10-83 3-115
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - UNDERCARRIAGE-HYDRAULICS - 1st LINE (cont'd)
REFERENCE 5003-AH-B
Protective device C 47645 Nose U/C
Extractor F 46677 Main leg hinge pin
Main U/C spherical bearing alignment M 31007 Main U/C positioning

tool
Extractor F 21972 Shock absorber pin stop pegs
Wrench for HP filter M 31018 HP filter tooling
Wrench for LP filter removal M 31040 LP filter tooling
Force measuring tool M 31 100 Emergency parking brake control
Setting tool M 31101 Normal braking selector valve
Castor action setting tool M 31 127 Nose U/C
Pump storage cradle 50MS149 Messier pump installation and removal
Hexagonal adapter PR1 46471 Nose wheel valve
Special connection PR 47419 Pump priming tool, installation and

removal
Special adapter PR 47572 Pump priming tool, installation and

removal
Driving handle 12971 J Pump priming tool, installation and

removal
5 mm offset wrench 148100/78 Adjustment of progressive braking

* selector valve
8 mm offset wrench 148200/78 Adjustment of progressive braking

selector valve
Holding wrench for main U/C 148300/78 Adjustment of main wheel bearings
wheel liner
Castle wrench for nut of main wheel 148400/78 Adjustment of main wheel bearings
liner
Messier pump support cradle 50 MS 115 Pump support for U/C testing
AB
10-83 3-116
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - ENGINE INSTALLATION - REMOVAL
REFERENCE 5010-TR-B
DESCRIPTION PART No. USE
Castle wrench M 3002 Engine trunnion attaching nut
Conical ring extractor M 3003 Engine trunnion conical ring
Engine trunnion extractor M 31051 Engine trunnion extraction
Throttle control protective cover M 31 112 Engine compartment
Engine front part lifting device 50 MS 046 Engine handling
Messier pump storage cradle 50 MS 149 Hydraulic pump storage during

engine removal
Centering thimble SMS 264 Mounting of engine upper fastener
Socket wrench J3/8L Clamps for fuel-pressurization

pipes
Socket wrench J 7/16 L Clamps for fuel-pressurization

pipes
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 1st LINE
REFERENCE 5001. EL.B
Switch adjusting wrench C46894 U/C switch adjustment
Extracting and positioning tools C 47680 Anti-skid system (SPAD) tacho-

generator removal and installation
Panduit clamp fitting pliers GS2B Grounding braids
Electrical master box positioning pins M 31050 Electrical master box reinstallation
Pin wrench M 31074 For indicator lights
Pin wrench M 31087 For fuse-breakers
Pin wrench M 31091 For switches
Attachment device for bonding MS1349 Checking equipment button hold

check depressed
Elbowed pin 146.900/78 Dowel extraction and positioning
Torque wrench bush 312 For installation and removal of

fire detector (torque tightening)
Extracting tool 809710

Maintenance of
Insertion pliers 809718
electrical connectors
Checking gauge 809721
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - EQUIPMENT - 1st LINE
REFERENCE 5009-EQ-B
Screwdriver bit for Flexinox clamp M 12043 Tightening of Flexinox clamp
Instrument panel positioning pin M 31038 Removal and installation of instrument

panel
Blanking plug for cabin pressure M 31039 Check of cabin pressurization

regulator
Dummy jaws M 31061 Coalescer filter
6.35 offset open-end wrench M 31073 Resetting of standby altimeter
Removal - installation tool M 31077 Trim indicator
Wrench M 31102 Removal of acquisition unit
Pin wrench M 31117 FHS preconditioning receptacle
Pin wrench M 31118 Electrical preconditioning receptacle
Pin wrench M 31119 Air preconditioning receptacle
Wrench 65-3 F x W 707864 Coalescer filter
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - EQUIPMENT - 2nd LINE
REFERENCE 5002-EQ-C
Special wrench 68506017-1 JPT indicator 1
Special wrench 68506018-1 JPT indicator 1
Wrench 1-1038-02-63 Pressure switch 1
Wrench 65-3FxW 707864 Coalescer filter 1
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT -STRUCTURE AIRFRAME - 1st LINE
REFERENCE 5002-CS-B
Pin wrench M 31062 Actuator support blanking plug
Measuring gauge M 31099 Brake chute linkage buttressing
Ventral fin nut tightening wrench M 31138 Ventral fin removal - installation
Removable spherical bearing L 92318-2 Front actuator

F. 5000 daN
Removable spherical bearing L 92318-3 Rear actuator

F. 15,000 daN
Shock cone screw holding tool 51 MS 008 Shock cone screw holding
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FLIGHT CONTROLS - 2nd LINE
REFERENCE 5002.CV.C
Octagonal endpiece 46 mm M 31004 Tail unit pin nut
Double hexagonal endpiece M 31010 Tail unit control

41 mm
Taper pin extractor M 31016 Aileron and rudder control

center shackle
Holding tool M 31019 Tail unit root spherical bearing
Pin wrench for lower retaining M 31030 Flap removal

rod pin
Pin wrench for outer pad pin M 31037 Flap removal
Extractor M 31070 Flag center hinge bracket sleeve
Extractor M 31071 Aileron internal hinge bracket sleeve
Double hexagonal wrench M 31072 For extractors M 31070 and M 31071

17 mm
Extracting tool M 31 105 Internal hinge bracket spherical bearing

for horizontal stabilizer
Pin wrench M31113 Removal/ Installation of pitch

bellcrank
Torque wrench M 31120 Amedee bellcrank rod
Retaining wrench M31121 Amedee bellcrank rod
Torque wrench M 31129 Amedee bellcrank rod
Centering thimble SMS 220 Tail unit control trunnion
Centering thimble SMS 221 Tail unit pivot end
Spherical bearing retaining shim set M 31157 Pitch reduction bellcrank
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT- Al RFRAME-STRUCTURE- 2nd LINE
REFERENCE 5002-CS-C
Squeeze tool M 3077 Phillips screw 1
Dummy pin M 31014 Main attachment 1
Holding tool for rudder control cable M 31017
Pin wrench M 31029 Fuselage-to-wing pin tabwasher 1
Set of pins for canopy linkage M 3 1034A

mechanism
Wrench for station 1 sleeve nut M 31035
Wrench for station 2 sleeve nut M 31036
Holding wrench for fin main pin M 31049
Graduated quadrant M 31106 Check of canopy linkage travel
Fork screwdriver bit M 31110 Attachment of nylatron shims on

air intake fairing
Safetying wrench M 31111 Nylatron shim attaching nut

Pin wrench M 31115 Removal of balljoint nut at stations
land 2
Main pin extractor, including : M 31126 Fuselage-to-fin main pin
- 1 extractor M 31005
1 unlocking tool M 31 126-10
-1 case M 31126-50
- 1 punching tool M 31126-105
54 A/F socket wrench M54 Holding wing pin for calibration
Gun center mount installation/ M 31161

removal wrench
60 A/F socket M 60 Wing pin nut
Hydraulic tool MS1312 Extraction and positioning of fuselage-

towing pin
Holding device M 31164 Ventral fin rear pin holding
Open-end wrench 44-38x42 Ventral fin rear pin holding
Centering thimble SMS 218 Fin rear-front attachment
Centering thimble SMS 219 Wing rear-front attachment
Measuring tool 50MS082 Wing-fuselage bore
120° milling cutter 2014 Replacement of nylatron shim on remov¬

able shock cone fairing
Pin adapter M 31165 Fairing door and main U/C door rod 2
adjustment
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FLIGHT CONTROLS 2nd LINE (specialized workshop)
REFERENCE 5001-CV-D
O/E torque wrench, 1 2 A/F DO 12 Electrical flap rods
O/E torque wrench, 1 7 A/F DO 17 Roll AFU
O/E torque wrench, 20 A/F D20 Slat jack
O/E torque wrench, 21 A/F D21 Roll-pitch AFU
O/E torque wrench, 23 A/F D23 Yaw AFU
O/E torque wrench, 24 A/F D24 Servocontrol
O/E torque wrench, 38 A/F D38 Servocontrol
Brush preliminary seating tool MFA 043-22 Trim jack
Vice support MFG 101-21 Pitch AFU
Vice support MFG 102-21 Flap spring box
Vice support MFG 103-21 Aileron spring box
Vice support MFG 228-21 Spoiler spring box
Vice support MFG 229-21 Roll AFU
Vice wrench MHC 310-41 Electrical flap rods
Fitting and removing tool MGA 055-22 Controlled valve

(or MGA 055-06)
Filter extractor MGB 093-25 Equipment filters

(or G 1-1 6029)

(orG1-16172)

(or G 1-1 6329)
Bearing extractor MGB 105-21 Slat jack

(or MGM 105-21)
Spring removing and fitting tool MGC 101-21 Pitch AFU
Spring removing and fitting tool MGC 103-21 Aileron spring box
Compression tool MGC 310-21 Electrical flap rods
Fitting bush MGF 105-29 Slat jack
Mounting thimble MGM 105-22 Slat jack
AB
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAULT
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT FLIGHT CONTROLS 2nd LINE (specialized workshop) (cont'd)
REFERENCE 5001-CV-D
Ring torque wrench, 51 A/F MHC 100-22 Yaw AFU 2
Ring torque wrench, 52 A/F MHC 101-23 Pitch AFU
O/E torque wrench, 42 A/F MHC 101-24 Pitch AFU 2
O/E torque wrench, 21 A/F, 3 mm th. MHC 101-25 Pitch AFU
Ring torque wrench, 26 A/F MHC 102-21 Flap spring box
Ring torque wrench, 49 A/F MHC 103-21 Aileron spring box
Ring torque wrench, 36 A/F MHC 228-21 Spoiler spring box 2
Ring torque wrench, 44 A/F MHC 228-22 Spoiler spring box
O/E torque wrench, 44 A/F MHC 228-23 Pitch AFU
Ring torque wrench, 40 A/F MHC 229-22 Roll AFU
Ring torque wrench, 34 A/F MHC 229-23 Roll AFU 2
Ring torque wrench, 29 A/F MHC 230-22 Variable bellcrank
Holding wrench MHG 101-21 " Pitch AFU
Holding wrench MHG 229-21 Roll AFU
Pin wrench MHJ 094-21 Spoiler servocontrol
Pin wrench MHJ 096-29 Servocontrol

(or MHJ 096-06)
Pin wrench MHJ 100-21 Yaw AFU
Pin wrench MHJ 101-22 Pitch AFU
Pin torque wrench MHJ 105-21 Slat jack
Pin torque wrench MHJ 112-27 Electrically-operated selector valve

(or MHJ 112-01)
Pin torque wrench MHJ 112-28 Electrically-operated selector valve

(or MHJ 112-03)
Pin wrench MHJ 119-21 Gearmotor

(or MHJ 199-01)
Pin torque wrench MHJ 230-21 Variable bellcrank
AB
03-81 Restricted 3-123H
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FLIGHT CONTROLS 2nd LINE (specialized workshop) (cont'd)
REFERENCE 5001-CV-D
Tightening tools including : MHN 112-29 Electrically-operated selector valve 1
1 vice support (or MHN 112-02)

- 1 adjusting screwdriver
- 4 attachment screws
Wrench MHN 218-22 Gearmotor 1
Adjusting tools including : MJK 014-30 Labavia electromagnet 1
- 1 support flange
- 1 wrench
- 1 washer
Microswitch adjusting tool MJK 106-22 Mechanically controlled 1
flap clutch-release bellcrank
Dummy pin for locking cams ML 041-0005 Gearmotor 1
Spatula MMT 051-04-01 Seals 2

(or G1 -15606)
Spatula MMT 051-04-02 Seals 2

(or G1 -15607-1)
Pin dia. 6.4 -120 mm STB 064-120 1
Pin dia. 8.5 - 200 mm STB 084-200 1
Coupling STH 008-A3 1
O/E wrench, 17 A/F, 5 mm th. 10-14x17 Yaw AFU 1
Roll AFU
AB
03-81 Restricted 3-1 23R
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - UNDERCARRIAGE-HYDRAULICS (specialized workshop)
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Adjustable wrench A 21978 Tightening of jack nut and locknut
Spatula A 46524 ,
Adapter C1 47029 Cylinder bottom, main shock absorber side
Dummy jaws C 46030 Accumulator
Adapter C 46032 Accumulator
Adapter C 46472 Tightening of jack nut and locknut
Adapter C 46473 Tightening of jack nut and locknut
Extractor C 46832 Selector valve
Fitting cone C 46843 Main shock absorber
Shaping ring C 46844 Main shock absorber
Adapter C 46845 Main shock absorber
Pin wrench C 46846 Main shock absorber
Switch adjusting wrench C 46894 Mechanical fitting of jack switches
Castle wrench C 46895 Elastic rod
Castle wrench C 46896 Nose U/C leg sleeve (parallelism)
Castle wrench C 46910 Adjustable endpiece locknut
Dummy jaws C 46924 Nose U/C door jack
Extractor C 46933 Emergency slide valve, valve box,

shuttle valve
Socket C 46934 Emergency slide valve, valve box,

shuttle valve
Castle wrench C 46958 Endpiece locknut
Adapter C 47016 Lower threaded bush of nose U/C leg

shock absorber
Dummy jaws C 47017 Nose U/C leg sliding rod
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - UNDERCARRIAGE-HYDRAULICS (specialized workshop) (cont'd)
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Dummy jaws C 47018 Nose U/C leg center rod
Extractor C 47019 Nose U/C leg separator piston
Adapter C 47020 Nut holding the cam on nose U/C leg

centering rod
Dummy jaws C 47021 Truss jack body
Thrust block C 47022 Truss jack cylinder
Dummy jaws C 47024 Truss jack, main U/C door jack sliding rod
Castle wrench C 47025 Nut holding truss jack center rod
Guide cone C 47026 Guide cone on truss jack sliding rod
Dummy jaws C 47028 Main shock absorber cylinder
Dummy jaws C 47030 Main shock absorber, truss jack
Pin wrench C1 -47032 Main shock absorber center rod bottom
Guide cone C 47033 Main shock absorber center rod bottom
Dummy jaws C 47034 Main shock absorber sliding rod
Extractor C 47036 Main shock absorber piston
Holding wrench C 47037 Main shock absorber restrictor retainer
Dummy jaws C 47039 Main U/C retraction cylinder
Castle wrench C 47040 Threaded bush holding restrictor retainer of

U/C retraction jack
Extractor C 47041 Restrictor retainer of main U/C retraction

jack
Castle wrench C 47043 Threaded bush holding main U/C retraction

jack bottom, on structure side
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
- REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Extractor C 47044 Plug of main U/C retraction jack
Holding wrench C 47046 Brace strut of main U/C retraction jack
Dummy jaws C 47047 Sliding rod of main U/C retraction jack
Dummy jaws C 47048 Restrictor retainer of main U/C retraction

jack
Castle wrench C 47049 Threaded bush holding restrictor retainer of

main U/C retraction jack
Castle wrench C 47050 Threaded bush for connection with swivel

endpieces
Thrust block C 47051 Main U/C door jack cylinder
Compression fixture C 47054 Unlocking jack spring
Extractor C 47055 Unlocking jack liner
Thrust block C 47056 Nose U/C door jack cylinder
Compression fixture C 47057 Telescopic rod spring
Shaping tool C 47062 Teflon ring for swivel coupling
Holding wrench C 47063 Tail rod of system 1 reservoir piston
Shaping cone C 47065 Teflon ring for system 1 and 2 reservoirs
Compression fixture C 47070 Truss jack spring
Threaded bush C 47073 Compression of elastic rod
Adapter C 47074 Elastic rod
Adapter C 47175 Attachment of nose U/C leg threaded bush

anti-shimmy cup
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Adapter C 47176 Threaded bush holding nose U/C leg

anti-shimmy valve
Extractor C 47177 Truss jack liner
Thrust block C 47178 Locking cylinder of nose U/C door jack
Castle wrench C 471 79 Locknuts of retraction jack adjustable

endpiece
Thrust block C 47180 Locking cylinder of main U/C door jack
Dummy jaws C 47182 Airbrake jack cylinder
Dummy jaws C 471 83 Airbrake jack sliding rod
Adapter C 47184 Threaded bush holding dashpot on airbrake

jack sliding rod
Guide cone C 47185 Airbrake jack sliding rod
Pin wrench C 47186 Threaded bushes for system 1 and 2

fuel gauges
Adapter C 47188 Nut for nose U/C elastic rod bottom
Extension C 47189
Socket C 47457 Hydraulic reservoir
Test plug C 47472 Sealing of hydraulic reservoir
Guide cone C 47482 Nose U/C door jack
Guide cone C 47494 Main U/C door jack
Guide cone C 47496 Main U/C retraction jack
Thrust block C 47497 Truss jack
Adapter C 47527 Elastic rod
Dummy jaws C 47528 Elastic rod
Cone C 47735 Removal-installation of hydraulic reservoir
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Positioning ring C 47736 Removal-installation of hydraulic reservoir
Wrench C 47921 Controlled valve
O/E torque wrench, 1 4 mm D14 Canopy compensating jack
Riveting tool D 21845 Pads
Adjustment tool D 21875 Adjustment of progressive selector valve
Supply connection plate D 21902 Braking servo valve test
O/E torque wrench, 24 mm D24 Canopy compensating jack
Extraction lever D 46235 Nose shock absorber (holding pin 2

retaining ring)
Extractor D 46375 Flange of main U/C cylinder

Extractor D 46415 Main U/C retraction jack (restrictor
retainer)
Extractor D 46416 Removal of airbrake jacks
Checking tool D 46559 Adjustment of nose U/C switch
Stowage case D 46564 Mounting and shaping cones and bushes
Fitting cone D 46808 System 1 accumulator
Shrinking bush D 46809 System 1 accumulator
Fitting cone D 46810 System 2 accumulator
Shrinking bush D 46811 System 2 accumulator
Fitting cone D 46812 Anti-shimmy system
Shrinking bush D 46813 Anti-shimmy system
Fitting cone D 46814 Electric pump system
Shrinking bush D 4681 5 Electric pump system
Compression tool D 47465 Automatic return assembly
Wrench D 47475 Adjustment of pump pressure
Wrench D 47476 Adjustment of pump pressure
Fitting cone D 47492 Hydraulic nozzle assembly
Vice support MFG 231-22 Canopy compensating jack
Spring loading tool MGC 231-26 Canopy compensating jack
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Push rod guide MGD 231-23 Canopy compensating jack
Spring fitting tool MGD 231-25 Canopy compensating jack
Set of 3 blanking parts MGJ 111-21 Testing of connection block/filter assy
Wrench MHN 231-22 Canopy compensating jack
Spatula MMT 051-04-01 Connection block seals

(or G1 -15606)
Spatula MMT 051-04-02 Connection block seals

(or G1-1 5607-1)
Valve MS 28889-1 Charging of main shock absorber
Castle torque wrench M 31018 Reconditioning of HP filter
Special coupling SK2-20171 Self-closing
Brake unit support 50 MS 145 Brake unit adjustment
1
3-pin adapter SK 15-20941
Testing of shock absorber and

10-pin adapter SK 18-20941
jack switches
Operation lever SK 20671
Adapter PR 47350 Threaded bush of anti-shimmy accumulator
Special coupling PR 47419 Pump priming tool
Special adapter PR 47572 Pump priming tool
Special coupling SK 20684 Test of U/C door jack
Fitting thimble STM 066.43 Canopy compensating jack

(or MGM 231-22)
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0271 Unlocking jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0391 Nose U/C door jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0541 Main U/C door jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0661 Main U/C retraction jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0692 Nose U/C door jack
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0870 Main U/C door jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0900 Airbrake jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.0931 Truss jack
Shaping cone S 16.0605.1531 Main U/C retraction jack
Fitting cone S 16.0606.0811 Nose U/C door
Shaping ring S 16.0606.1350 Airbrake jack
Shaping ring S 16.0607.0812 Nose U/C door jack
Fitting cone S 16.0607.1261 Main U/C door jack
Fitting cone S 16.0607.1351 Airbrake jack
Shaping ring S 16.0608.1261 Main U/C door jack
Fitting cone S 16.0608.1831 Main U/C retraction jack
Fitting cone S 16.0609.0221 Swivel coupling
Fitting cone S 16.0609.0341 Bracing strut jack C 22282.10
Shaping ring S 16.0609.1261 Main U/C retraction jack
Shaping ring S 16.0609.1831 Main U/C retraction jack
Clamping support S 16.0610.0800 Swivel coupling
Shaping ring S 16.0611.1290 Swivel coupling
Shaping shell S 16.0611.1990 Swivel coupling
Drive handle 12971 J Pump priming tool
Positioning wrench 14138 J Truss jack, nose U/C door, main U/C
door jack telescopic rod
Leak test tool 17977 C Shock absorber and jack switch
Drive unit extractor 147 000/78 Main wheels
Riveting tool 147 100/78 Main wheel drive unit
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
REFERENCE 5008-AH-D
Compression and checking tool 147 200/78 Check of friction and setting of pad
automatic return spring
Leak test tool 147 400/78 Piston retaining torque plate
Welding assembly 161-25016 J

Shock absorber and jack switches
Welding screen 161-25017 J
Compression tool 193-23314 J Removal of airbrake compartments
Wrench 21571 Removal-installation of electric pump

shaft end nut
Compression tool 193-25035 J U/C uplock box A 75-24239-01
Pump mount 58913 Holding removed electric pump
Spatula 89901
Guide 19324828J Hydraulic nozzle assembly
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FUEL SYSTEM (specialized workshop)
REFERENCE F1-CA-D
Special tools M 31057 Measurement of rotation torque 1
Vice mount MFG 098-21 Self-blanking part (air) 1
Vice mount MFG 099-21 Self-blanking part (fuel) 1
Blanking part (air) MGJ 150-21 Test of self -blanking part 3
Blanking part (fuel) MGJ 151-21 Test of self -blanking part 1
Special tenon wrench MHN 150-21 Removal/installation of valve (air) 1
Special tenon wrench MHN 151-21 Removal/installation of valve (fuel) 1
Spatula MMT 051 -04-01 Self -blanking part (kerosene) 1
(or G 1-1 5606)
Spatula MMT 051-04-02 Self-blanking part (fuel) 1
(or G 1-1 5607-1)
Special tools for auxiliary LP pump 01436 Disassembly of auxiliary LP pump 1
(turbine)
Special pin wrench 154 799 Disassembly of pressure relief valve 2

(inverted flight accumulator)
Pliers 157 221 Installation of diaphragm 12

(inverted flight accumulator)
Test fixture 64-7-10-19 Test of self blanking part (air) 1
Fitting thimble MGF 097-22 Self-blanking part 1
Fitting thimble MGF 098-21 Self -blanking part (air) 1
Fitting thimble MGF 099-21 Self-blanking part (kerosene) 1
Centering screw MGL 097-23 Self -blanking part 1
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - FUEL SYSTEM. 2nd LINE (AIRCRAFT A)
REFERENCE 5005-CA-C
Unsticking spanner M 31109 Front feeder tank valve
Device 50 MS 043 Sealing and protection of

upper bay tank (removed)
Door assy 50 MS 070 Feeder tank pressure inlet
Door assy 50 MS 071 Rear tank pressure inlet
Adaptor 50 MS 072 Check of fuselage/wing tank

vacuum relief valve
Adaptor 50 MS 075 Check of feeder tank vacuum

relief valve
Door assy 50 MS 087 Front tank pressure inlet
Device 155A-40-2 Wing tank pressure inlet
Valve removal/installation tool M31131 Front tank negative pressure valve
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^, '
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - RETRACTABLE PROBE (1ST LINE)
REFERENCE 5001.PR.B
Refueling adaptor K01 -63-201 1
Pin wrench M 12 040 Valve torque tightening 1
Screwdriver bush M 31 107 Removal of nitrogen cylinder 1
diaphragm
WIG-O-FLEX wrench 150A

Probe connection
WIG-O-FLEX wrench 163A
AA
04-77
Restricted 3-132
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT) MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^ ^TX^
SPECIAL TOOL KIT - RETRACTABLE PROBE (Specialized workshop)
REFERENCE 5003 PR D
Wrench D33 Jack 2
Vice support MFG105-21 Jack
Seal installation tool 1 Emergency selector valve

STM 074-08
Seal installation tool J Cock and selector valve
Fitting bush MGF 105-26 Jack
Fitting bush MGF 105-27 Jack
Fitting thimble MGF 105-28 Jack
Wrench MHF 105-22 Jack
Wrench MHJ199-21 Electrically operated selector valve
Wrench MHJ261-21 Cock
Wrench MHL256-22 Emergency selector valve
Wrench MHN 105-26 Emergency selector valve
Cock assembly MKC261-21 Cock
Tools included in tool kit 5001-CV-D, foi reference only :
Extractor MGB093-25 Emergency selector valve

(or G 1-1 6029)
Extractor MGB093-27 Electrically operated selector

(or G 1-1 6329) valve
Spatula. MMT051 -04-01 Seals
Spatula MMT051 -04-02 Seals
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,^
LJ>~rv. MIRAGE F
SECTION 4
LIST OF VARIOUS PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-1 LIST OF VARIOUS PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
- List of various products and materials 1 Refer to separate document

- List and addresses of suppliers f 1F-F1K50-2-01-4
AE
01-87 Restricted 41
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^^r^L
BREGUET AVIATION ,^35F=L^<0
MIRAGE
.,..,,,..
F
-.,
PART 5
STORAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
5-0 GENERAL
- General principles of storage 5-001

- Storage rooms - Cleaning of aircraft skin - Corrosion removal 5-003
5-1 STORAGE
- «Stored unprepared» aircraft 5-101

- «Short-term» storage of aircraft 5-103
- Aircraft storage in enclosure with controlled hygrometry 5-107
- Internal storage of engine installed in aircraft Refer to 06-4
5-2 MAINTENANCE OF STORED AIRCRAFT
- Maintenance of «stored unprepared» aircraft 5-201

- Maintenance of aircraft in «short-term» storage 5-202
- Maintenance of aircraft stored in enclosure with controlled hygrometry 5-203
5-3 REMOVAL FROM STORAGE
- Returning «stored unprepared» aircraft to service 5-301

- Returning aircraft in «short-term» storage to service 5-302
- Removing from storage and returning to service of aircraft stored in enclosure with
controlled hygrometry 5-303
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=^Jir5k
BREGUET AVIATIONâF3^^^
MIRAGE
.........
F
ni
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF STORAGE
1 - GENERAL
This section is intended for use by the personnel (mechanics and inspectors) in charge of the
aircraft storage, storage maintenance and removal from storage operations. It defines the general
arrangements to be made and the work to be carried out on aircraft and equipment during storage
operations.
It is advisable to refer :
to the whole maintenance manual for general data concerning the function, location and main¬
-
tenance of the components.
- to the illustrated parts catalog for the nomenclature and full description of the components.
2 - DEFINITIONS
Aircraft (serviceable or unserviceable) which are to remain inactive for a period extending beyond
1 5 days should be placed, for aircraft maintenance, in one of the following categories.
A Aircraft in «Unprepared storage»
Aircraft in this category are aircraft not specifically protected for storage and which can be return¬
ed to service without storage protection removal.
An aircraft in «unprepared storage» is maintained in «available to service» condition.
In principle, an aircraft should not be held in this position for more than six months.
B Aircraft in «Prepared storage»
An aircraft is in «prepared storage» when it has received a storage protective treatment which has
to be removed before its return to service.
Protected storage falls into two categories :
(1 ) «Short-term» storage when maximum anticipated storage period is no longer than six months.
(2) «Long-term» storage when anticipated storage period is longer than six months.
Aircraft scheduled for repair or aircraft scheduled for major maintenance operation should be
systematically placed in the «long-term» storage category if they cannot be flown to their repair
station.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJL^>^TJL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^sP^^^^ Restricted
. M AMI l Al
MANUAL 01
m
3 - RENEWAL OF AIRCRAFT STORAGE PROTECTIVE TREATMENT
The engine «short-term» storage protective treatment is designed for a maximum out-of-service
period of three months.
The airframe «short-term» storage protective treatment is designed for a maximum out-of-service
period of six months.
At the end of the first six months, the aircraft may be held in the «short-term» storage category
up to a total limit of 12 months maximum on condition that certain operations provided for under
«long-term» storage are carried out.
These operations will be defined locally according to :

- the period of time (known or estimated) during which the aircraft will remain stored.
the climatic conditions.
- After twelve months under these conditions, the aircraft shall be placed in the «long-term»
storage category. All corresponding storage operations not accomplished during the first year will then
be carried out.
- The periodicity of renewal of the aircraft «long-term» storage protective treatment is not fixed.
Only faults found on periodic inspections will determine this renewal.
Depending on the gravity of such faults, reconditioning and storage protective treatment renewal
will be either confined to :
- the aircraft affected areas.
- or extended to the whole airframe.
It rests with the responsible authorities to decide whether the whole or part of the long-term
storage protective treatment should be renewed.
In any case, always proceed in the following way :

- Remove from storage the equipment undergoing storage protection renewal.
- Carry out reconditioning wherever necessary.
- Carry out storage operations specified in the worksheet corresponding to the storage method
selected, as regards the airframe.
4 - CONFIGURATION OF STORED AIRCRAFT
The aircraft should be stored in the transfer configuration specified in the relevant Inventory List.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £. * ^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION -CïÎP _^ >.
-^^^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
STORAGE ROOMS- CLEANING OF AIRCRAFT SKIN

CORROSION REMOVAL
1 - STORAGE ROOMS
- Stored aircraft should be kept in covered, very dry and spacious hangars at a medium ambient
temperature (5 to 10°C in winter and less than 35°C in summer).
- Floors should be made of concrete to avoid dust.
- Storage rooms should be kept well ventilated as a warm, damp atmosphere is particularly
harmful.
- Direct sunshine on the aircraft and more particularly on the wings, the canopy, the windshield
and the wheels will be avoided.
- Removed items of equipment will be stored either in a room maintained at a medium
temperature of about 10°C where the air will be kept dry in all seasons, or inside the storage enclosure
in the case where the aircraft is stored in anhydrous enclosure.
2- STORAGE TREATMENT ROOMS
The storage protection treatment will be applied inside the hangar. It is essential that the work be
carried out in a very dry atmosphere.
3- CLEANING OF AIRCRAFT SKIN CORROSION REMOVAL
Before any storage, and especially in the case of long-term storage, it is mandatory to proceed with
a thorough cleaning of the aircraft skin (Refer to 03-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ>>^r\L
BREOUET AVIATION^^^ji ^ _
MIRAGE F
«STORED UNPREPARED» AIRCRAFT
1 - GENERAL
- An aircraft will be placed either in the «stored unprepared» or in the «short-term storage»
position, according to the choice of the responsible authorities, as soon as it is known for certain
that this aircraft is not to be flown for a period longer than fifteen days.
- Aircraft in the «stored unprepared» position are the aircraft kept available for service.
In principle, the duration of storage for an «unprepared» aircraft is fixed to a maximum of
six months.
- It is possible to extend this period only if the aircraft belongs to a flying unit and must remain in
the serviceable condition.
- When aircraft have been in the «stored unprepared» position for six months and if they must
remain grounded for an indeterminate length of time, place them in either «short-term storage» or
«long-term storage» position.
- It is recommended to place a «stored unprepared» aircraft inside a hangar.
2- MATERIALS
- Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520

I
3- PLACING AN AIRCRAFT IN «STORED UNPREPARED» POSITION
An aircraft will be «stored unprepared» in the following configuration :

-
- engine installed,
- aircraft clean,
- gun pack installed,
- oxygen tank removed,
- inspection doors closed,
- U/C doors closed,
- parking brake released,
- battery removed and sent to electrical shop.
- Make sure that the aircraft is otherwise serviceable and that «post-flight inspection» has been
performed.
- Make particularly sure that all tanks and reservoirs are full and that all safety devices are installed
in the cockpit.
No particular treatment is to be applied to an aircraft placed in «stored unprepared» position.
- Inspect the skin panels and structural panels of :

- wings,
- fuselage and air intake ducts,
- fin,
and, if required, recondition them and remove corrosion traces (see 03-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLjîrU
BREGUET AVI ATION^SF*^^^ . .
**» I KM W C T
.,..,., nl
^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
- Carry out the cleaning of :

- the canopy, the windshield panels.
- the gun blast tubes and skin attacked by breech gases.
- the airframe
- the cockpit
- the undercarriage and doors
- Using a cloth soaked in hydraulic fluid, apply a light coat over the sliding surfaces of shock struts,
as a protection against corrosion.
- Make sure that no ammunition has been left in the ammunition boxes. Carefully clean and grease
the guns.
- Purge the pitot circuit lines.
- Purge the fuel system tanks and lines.
Make sure that the earthing cable of the nose undercarriage fork makes good contact with the
ground.
- Install all covers and protection devices used for parking the aircraft (see 02-1 ).
NOTE : Arrange the canopy cover so that air may circulate between the cover and the plexiglass
material (using wedges, for example).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/L^>-%-\l
BREGUET AVIATION^Ïi ^ - .
MIRAGE
...».,...«,
F
«SHORT-TERM» STORAGE OF AIRCRAFT
1 - GENERAL
A An aircraft will be placed either in the «stored unprepared» or in the «short-term storage»
position, according to the choice of the responsible authorities, as soon as it is known for certain that
this aircraft is not to be flown for a period longer than fifteen days and not exceeding six months.
B Aircraft in «short-term» storage are not available for immediate service on account of the protec¬
tive treatment applied to preserve their condition.
C The duration of «short-term» storage is, in principle, fixed to six months.
(1 ) At the end of this period, it is possible to keep the aircraft in «short-term» storage for a further
six month period thus extending the limit to a maximum of twelve months, on condition that certain
operations provided for under «long-term» storage should be carried out.
These operations will be defined by the local responsible authority according to :

- the period of time (known or estimated) during which the aircraft will remain stored,
- the climatic conditions.
(2) After twelve months under these conditions, it is mandatory to :

- place the aircraft in «long-term storage» position,
- systematically carry out all «long-term» storage operations not accomplished during the first
year.
(3) In case of storage prolongation, carry out engine storage renewal.
2- MATERIALS

- Desiccant bags
A Aircraft will be stored in the transfer configuration specified in the relevant Inventory List :
- engine installed,
- aircraft clean,
- gun pack installed,
- inspection and U/C doors closed,
- in-flight refueling probe retracted.
NOTE : Access doors opened for storage purposes will be reinstalled with only one or two screws ; the
other screws will be placed in a bag and attached to their door.
AC
09-81 Rmstrlcted 5-103
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAULTl^^-^rU
AVIATION^SF3^^^
MIRAGE
.........
F
tf,
B The following components will be removed and stored in the store-room (or another very dry
room) in accordance with the instructions contained in their own technical handbooks :
- battery
ejection seat
sight and sight camera
- brake chute
- IFF transceiver
- radio sets (this removal is left to the discretion of the responsible authority)
- radar
- laser range finder
- liquid oxygen cylinder.
C The engine will be placed in storage condition (Refer to 06-4)
D Make sure that the aircraft is otherwise serviceable and that the «post-flight inspection» has been
carried out. Particularly check that all tanks are full.
4- STRUCTURE
A Check the skin and structural panels of :

- the wings
the fuselage and air intake ducts
- the fin
and if required recondition them and remove all corrosion traces (Refer to 03-0).
B - Clean :
- the canopy, the windshield panels
- the airframe
- the gun blast tubes and the skin attacked by breech gases
- the cockpit
C Make sure that the earthing cable of the nose undercarriage fork makes good contact with the
ground.
D Check condition and safety of attachment of all inspection doors and panels.
E Carry out greasing of all the aircraft greasing points.
F When all the storage operations are completed, close the canopy and install all covers and
protective devices normally used for aircraft parking (Refer to 02-1).
G In particular :
(1 ) Install blanking device on :

-ejection seat oxygen supply connector
(2) Place desiccant bags in the following compartments :

- nose cone
- equipment bay
- cockpit
Do not forget to attach to every unit or compartment thus protected a clearly visible label
indicating the number of bags placed in it.
(3) Arrange the canopy cover in such a way that air may circulate between the cover and the plexiglass
material (use wedges for instance).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL^t
BREGUET
^
AVIATION*-5a^\J^<^
MIRAGE
.,..,.,..
F
A.
^*^<Cb Restricted MANUAL 01
5- FLIGHT CONTROLS
Inspect and protect control surface visible hinges.

-
Inspect and protect speedbrakes and their jacks.
-
- Clean the sliding parts of the servo-control jacks with a dry clean cloth and apply a thin coat of
hydraulic fluid to ensure protection against corrosion.
6- UNDERCARRIAGE AND BRAKES
A Clean the undercarriage. Lubricate and protect all joints (Refer to 05-0).
B Clean the sliding parts of jacks and U/C legs with a clean dry cloth. Then apply a thin coat of
hydraulic fluid to ensure protection against corrosion.
C Visually check shock struts and tires for correct inflation.
D Inspect the. wheels for damage (dents, cracks, etc.), (Refer to 05-5).
E - Close the U/C doors (Refer to 02-0).
7- FUEL SYSTEM
A Storage is performed with the operating fuel.
B Twenty-four hours after full refueling, purge the tanks and the fuel lines.
C Check for correct condition of vent pipes.
D Check for leaks and repair if required.
E Check for correct condition of in-flight refueling boom and filler valve.
F Check charging pressure of emergency cylinder (refueling boom extension) (Refer to 06-2).
8- HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
A Check charging pressure of accumulators (Refer to 07-1 )
9- ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A It may be advisable, depending on storage location and conditions, to add desiccant bags in the
various electrical boxes.
B Check wiring, connections, electrical units and connectors of the various circuits.
10 -FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS - ENVIRONMENT AND SAFETY EQUIPMENTS

A Purge the pitot circuit lines
B Check that the stand-by gyro horizon is well caged.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 1^>-U
BREGUET AVIATION ,^£_ ^
.* MIRAGE F
11 -OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT
- Remove the gun packs and carry out servicing and storage operations.
- Reinstall the guns
- Install gun muzzle caps.
NOTE : Guns may be stored separately in the equipment store if external storage conditions are
particularly unfavorable.
AA
BREGUET
Û^-^^TU
AVIATION^<<aF= jZZ*Qï>
MIRAGE F
^^^^^> Restricted MANUAL 01
AIRCRAFT STORAGE IN ENCLOSURE WITH CONTROLLED HYGROMETRY
1 - GENERAL
A Aircraft storage in an enclosure with controlled hygrometry (E.H.C.) is a method recommended
for long-term storage (grounding time over 6 months).
It only requires a minimum removal of equipment and a minimum special protection operations,
thus permitting a rapid reconditioning of aircraft.
This method of storage consists in preserving an aircraft in good condition inside an
air-conditioned enclosure (as near as possible to 40% relative humidity).
B Storage in E.H.C. stops aircraft ageing for a determined grounding time which is currently
indicated in «F1K50 component and equipment service life» document ; however, ageing of some
components and equipment of oxygen, seat and pyrotechnical systems is not stopped during that
storage (see 01-1 and «F1 K50 component and equipment service life»).
C Aircraft condition before storage is not taken into account by the pre-storage conditioning
operations. Aircraft may be new, or may have just been inspected, or are to be repaired. Consequently,
the storage department should determine operations to be actually performed, so that condition of
stored aircraft corresponds to the treatment described in the present worksheet.
2- EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
A Ground handling equipment
BACHMANN polyvinyl chloride enclosure with accessories

- Desiccator and humidifier
- Lifting jacks
- Recording hygrometers
3- SERVICING MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 1504

- Weekly diagrams
- Purple ink for stylus
4- ENCLOSURE DESCRIPTION
The enclosure includes :

- a sealed reinforced cover which may be used in a hangar with given internal dimensions, sheltered
from stresses caused by atmospheric disturbances
- an air conditioning device
- one or several recording hygrometers.
AB
07~78 Restricted 5-107
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT zL-îrVL
BREGUET AVIATION^ÎÎP3^^^
MIRAGE
.. i a .. a
F
m
_ Restricted MANUAL 01
A Sealed reinforced cover
Located at about 2 m from hangar internal wall to allow for installation of conditioning device,
the top section is fitted with a supporting frame, the cover is secured to the hangar internal frames, an
adequate stiffness is obtained through attachment of the lower section to the ground by bolts and nuts,
sealing is provided by a felter gasket.
The enclosure is fitted with one or several electrically operated sealed shutter openings.
A sealed door provides easy access for personnel and ancillary equipment.
The floor of enclosure is coated with moisture-proof, anti-skid and dust-proof paint.
B Air conditioning device
The system includes :

a ventilation system used for replacing the air inside enclosure through air blowing and suction
manifolds : overpressure is prevented by one or several pressure relief valves fitted to the lower section
of enclosure.
- an air dryer which reduces the relative humidity of ventilated air.
- a humidifier which increases it.
- an hygrostat which provides a constant 40 ± 5% regulated humidity inside enclosure.
- filters
a control panel.
C Recording hygrometers
According to enclosure dimensions, one or several recording hygrometers with protections are
installed on mounts inside enclosure ; they should be visible from outside.
D- Safety devices
According to enclosure dimensions, several A/C may be stored simultaneously ; safety is ensured
by:
-a flame, smoke and explosive vapor detector
-a warning system
- an automatically controlled powder extinguisher.
NOTE : The brief description of the present system shown a complete E.H.C. ; a less sophisticated
individual or collective anhydrous enclosure may be used (for instance without humidifier ;
thus, the 40% maximum threshold of relative humidity can be alone ensured).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
/LJîrÇL
^Zs^ ^Z£^>
MIRAGE F
5- STORAGE
IMPORTANT NOTE : Any anomaly found during inspection or run-up should be rectified before the
start of storage operations.
A Preliminary steps
The aircraft should be stored in clean configuration, with engine installed.
(1 ) Run-up check
Should A/C has not been submitted to a run-up or flown for over a week, check tank levels and
carry out a run-up check (see 02-8).
B Internal storage of engine installed on A/C (see 06-4).
C Fuel system storage

-Drain the remaining fuel and oil mixture.
- Fully refuel the aircraft with normal fuel, provided that the cure date of the batch should be at
least one year.
- Bleed all the tanks.
D Accessory gear box and telescopic shaft storage
No special operation required, but :

-lubrication of telescopic shaft and accessory drive (see 06-1 ).
E Airframe storage
IMPORTANT NOTE : It is imperative that the aircraft be perfectly clean when stored.
Structure skin should not show any evidence of oxidation ; it will therefore be necessary to carry
out the following operations :
- removal of corrosion traces, if any (see 03-0).
- check and maintenance of sleeves on underwing store attachment fittings (stations 1 and 2)
(see 03-1).
- cleaning and polishing of A/C skin (see 03-0).
F Flight controls storage

Perform the following operations :
-check and maintenance of hinges on ailerons and spoilers (see 04-1), tail unit (see 04-2), rudder
(see 04-3), flaps and slats (see 04-4).
- check and maintenance of airbrakes (see 04-5).
G Undercarriage and brake storage
Jack up complete aircraft.
(1 ) Wheels and tires : remove the wheels, clean and remove corrosion traces, if any (see 05-5).
- Lubricate bearings, U/C axles.
- Thoroughly clean the brake discs and visually check them.
- Install the wheels.
- Inflate the main U/C and nose U/C wheels to normal operating pressure (see 02-4).
AA
-*-~rU
BREGUET AVIATION -<^^-\^..<<*^
MIRAGE F
^C^^^^t> Restricted MANUAL 01
(2) Undercarriage
- Carry out general cleaning of U/C and U/C doors (see 05-0).
- Lubricate door and U/C hinges (see 05-0).
- Clean sliding rods with dry rag.
Check charging pressure of shock struts ; restore it if required (see 05-0).
(3) Brake chute
- Remove the brake chute for check and maintenance in workshop ; reinstall on A/C.
H Hydraulic system storage
This system is stored with operating fluid..

- Check for leakage.
- Check the accumulators for pressure and charging (see 07-1 )
- Top up hydraulic reservoirs (see 02-3).
- Clean polished surfaces of jack rods with a dry rag.
I Electrical system storage
- Trip all circuit-breakers.

- Remove the battery (to be stored in workshop)
- Inspect the battery compartment :
- clean and degrease
- if necessary, neutralize and renew paint protection
- Make sure that all switches are open (circuits cut off)
- Top up vario-alternators (see 02-3).
J Pitot system storage
- Check probes for condition

- Bleed the pitot static systems (see 02-3)
- Leave bleed ports open
K Electronic equipment storage (NWS)
This equipment is not removed, but the side bay access doors should be removed to ensure
compartment ventilation.
Inspect all circuits and equipment items ; clean if required.
If necessary, clean and restore bonding of equipment bay access door, then leave it open.
L Operational installation storage
- Remove the gun pack, clean and lubricate the guns (see 15-1 )
- Install the gun pack.
Check the sight head silicagel for condition.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT '
BREGUET AVIATION^-uP53^-^-^
MIRAGE F
M Cockpit and equipment storage
(1) Instruments
- Check for condition
- Cage the standby horizon
(2) Ejection seat

- Install seat safeties
- Perform a daily inspection of seat and equipment item (see 02-5)
(3) Oxygen system

- Remove and drain the liquid oxygen tank (see 09-3), then forward to the sepcialized workshop
where it will remain.
- Bleed and dry A/C system up (see 09-3)
- Refill the standby oxygen cylinder.
(4) Cockpit
- Clean and inspect interior of cockpit
- Perform maintenance of ejector units (see 09-4)
- Check and clean the front and side windshield and canopy panels (see 03-2)
- Leave canopy open.
N Cleaning the cockpit air conditioning system
- Drain the evaporator (see 02-3).
6- PREPARATION OF ENCLOSURE
Store the aircraft with nose cones directed toward the exit ; provide a servicing passage.
-
- Using bonding braids, earth the aircraft.
- The A/C shall remain on ground with wheels fitted either with old tires or with original tires : if
so, periodically move the A/C so that wheel rotate by 1/4 turn.
- Install the sets of equipment inside enclosure (no blanking cap or protection on aircraft). Covers
may be hanging on frame for ventilation purpose.
- Position the pans under the various draining ports.
- Clean the inside of enclosure.
- Close the enclosure doors.
- Set the system into operation.
- Set the hygrostat to 40 ± 5% relative humidity.
- Carry out a functional check of the whole installation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 11 ^>^-rM MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^£. ^ - . . ......, ..
MAINTENANCE OF «STORED UNPREPARED» AIRCRAFT
1 - WEEKLY SERVICING
-Slightly move the aircraft so as to rotate the wheels by approximately one fifth of a turn.
-Visually check (especially under the covers) that there is no traces of corrosion on the visible skin
sections ; eventually remove the corrosion traces and take off the covers to inspect the whole aircraft
skin.
- Check for fluid leaks under the aircraft. If any, locate precisely the leaking component and carry
out necessary repair.
2- FORTNIGHTLY SERVICING
- Carry out an engine run-up check. To this end :

- remove all covers and protectors,
- reinstall the battery,
- carry out the maintenance run-up (see 02-8),
- carry out functional check of all electrically-operated valves,
- replenish the fuel tanks,
- remove the battery and return it to electrical shop.
- Since the covers are removed, carry out the inspections provided for under «weekly servicing».
- Reinstall all covers and protection devices normally used when parking the aircraft.
NOTE : Arrange the canopy cover so that air may circulate between the cover and the plexiglas.
3- TWO-MONTHLY SERVICING
- The time interval of two months is a maximum. If local conditions (parking area, prevalent
weather, etc.) make it advisable, the responsible authority may reduce this interval.
- Also refer to the table of periodic maintenance operations on removed equipment, and to the
«equipment and components service life» list. It can be determined from these documents if the
equipment requires :
- removal for minor servicing,
or removal for overhaul and replacing.
Remove all covers and protectors.
- Install the battery.
- Carry out operations provided for under weekly inspection of ejection seat.
- Carry out a «Daily inspection» (see 02-5).
- Perform a check flight of approximately 20 minutes, followed by a «Post-flight» inspection.
- Correct all defects discovered in flight during the post-flight servicing.
- Perform all operations described in «Placing an aircraft in stored unprepared position» so
as to return the aircraft to the same condition as before flight.
AB
0981 Restricted 5201
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ-^tTV^
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^L^-yf^ .....
MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT IN SHORT-TERM STORAGE
1 - SEMI-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE
A Slightly move the aircraft so as to rotate the wheels by approximately one fifth of a turn.
B Visually check (especially under the covers) that there is no signs of corrosion on the visible skin
sections ; eventually remove the corrosion traces and take off the covers to inspect the whole aircraft
skin.
C - Check under the aircraft for fluid leaks. If any traces are found, locate precisely the leaky
component and perform the rectification.
2- BI-MONTHLY MAINTENANCE
The time interval of two months is a maximum. If local conditions (parking area, prevalent
weather, etc.) make it advisable, the responsible authority may reduce this interval.
- Remove all covers and guards.
- Open the access doors.
- Check that anti-corrosion coatings are in good condition on the protected areas and that there is
no traces of corrosion on the aircraft skin ; eliminate such traces if any.
- If necessary, renew the protection.
- Check desiccant bags for moisture absorption and replace them if necessary.
- Carefully inspect the cockpit interior.
- Jack-up the aircraft.
- Remove the protective coating from the sliding parts of undercarriage shock absorbers,
undercarriage door and airbrake actuating jacks (refer to 05-1 ).
Pressurize No. 1 hydraulic system and perform a functional test on the servo-controls
(hydraulic test only). Also test the servo-controls with No. 2 system.
- Apply a coat of hydraulic fluid on the sliding parts of undercarriage shock absorbers,
undercarriage jacks and servo-control jacks.
- Reinstall all doors after circulating dry air in the various compartments, and lower the
aircraft back onto its wheels.
- Purge :
- the pitot system lines,

- the fuel tanks and lines.
- Close the canopy and install all covers and guards normally used when parking the aircraft.
3- QUARTERLY MAINTENANCE
A Partially de-store the aircraft (see 01-5) :

-removed and stored components are not to be reinstalled on aircraft, except for the battery.
B - Renew the internal storage protection of the engine installed in aircraft (see 06-4).
C - Attend to the «short-term» storage of the airframe (see 01-5).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L===îiru
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^P^^Ô
MIRAGE F
Ô^**^^ Restricted MANUAL 01
MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT STORED «IN ENCLOSURE WITH CONTROLLED HYGROMETRY»
(Inspections during storage)
1 -GENERAL
In addition to constant supervision of hygrometer indications and various systems correct
operation, supervision which can take the form of check rounds carried out at least once a day, the
following inspections are provided to check aircraft in storage :
- Weekly inspection
- Half-yearly inspection
- Yearly inspection followed by a test flight
- Inspection of equipment with individual maintenance (refer to Index of periodical maintenance
operations to be performed on removed equipment : see 01-1 ).
NOTE : Any anomaly detected during an inspection must be immediately corrected ; on occasion
other A/C may be inspected to ensure that this anomaly is not generalized.
2- WEEKLY INSPECTION
- Brief general inspection of aircraft (leaks, traces of corrosion, etc.).

- Check the sight head silicagel for condition.
- Replacement of each hygrometer record sheet. The removed sheet will be kept with the enclosure
individual records.
- Rewinding and re-setting the recording hygrometers.
3- HALF-YEARLY INSPECTION
A Foreword :
This inspection includes :

-an «inspection» part leading to the detection of various anomalies through thorough visual
inspection.
' - a «maintenance» part consisting in the performance of functional maneuvers.
- jack-up the aircraft (refer to 02-2).
- carry out operations of aircraft periodical inspection (Refer to 01 -1 ).
NOTE : During inspection, the canopy will be closed and locked throughout the periods of inactivity
in the cockpit.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
L
.<<£."-
V*
_--<*^>
MIRAGE F
^Z^^^^s, Restricted MANUAL 01
B Inspection
(1) Airframe
- Inspection of accessible structure and skin.
(2) Engine
- Check engine external condition (sections visible through access doors and air intakes), sealing
in particular.
- Manually rotate the telescopic shaft by a few turns.
(3) Fuel system

- Check for possible leakage
Check fuel for validity ; if required, replace it
- Bleed the fuel tanks (see 02-3).
(4) Undercarriage
- General inspection of U/C and U/C doors (sliding doors in particular).
- Check for leaks and corrosion
-. - Clean U/C and jack sliding parts with a clean rag.
Check height of shock absorbers (see 02-4).
(5) Hydraulic systems

- Inspection of visible sections of circuits (leaks)
- Check filling-up of reservoirs.
- Check the pressure of accumulators (Refer to 07-1 ).
(6) Electrical and electronic installations

-Check the visible sections of the system for damages.
C Maintenance
(1) Preliminary steps :

- install the battery
- supply aircraft with electrical power
- connect the hydraulic rig (No. 1 and No 2 systems).
- make sure that all circuit-breakers are closed.
(2) Maintenance checks :

- test all warning lights
- check that «IGN-VENT» selector switch is selected to «VENT»
- functional tests of LP, A/B and crossfeed cocks
- test LP pumps for about 20 sec. (LP cock should remain closed)
- test all gages (see 02-5)
- general check of all instruments
- functional test of conditioning electro-valves (see 09-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ>^rlJL
BREGUET AVIATIONôR^ -î>
MIRAGE F
Test the pitot and incidence probes.

-
Brief check of the NWS.
-
- Functional test of emergency regulation.
- Failure and alarm warning signal test (refer to 02-5).
- Carry out functional test of shock cones in manual control.
- Test flight controls and check control surfaces.
- Functional test of undercarriage and speedbrake (refer to 05-1 ). On test completion, dry clean
the jack sliding rods.
CAUTION :
TESTS SHOULD BEGIN VERY SLOWLY TO PREVENT PACKINGS FROM TURNING INSIDE
OUT.
- Check refueling boom.

Drop hydraulic pressure.
- Functional test of emergency hydraulic pump and hydraulic pressure drop.
- Test radio and ground telephone installation.
- Disconnect the ground power units.
- Make sure that all circuit-breakers are disengaged.
- Remoye the battery.
- Remoye the lifting jacks.
Put aircraft back in storage position.
- Check pressure of tires.
- Clean the enclosure.
- Put the enclosure back in operating condition.
- Update all records and documents.
4- YEARLY INSPECTION
A General
Yearly inspections include

- examination of records and documents
- carrying out of a half-year inspection.
- aircraft reconditioning.
- engine tests and run-up.
- test flight.
B Aircraft reconditioning
After half-yearly inspection, leave the battery on A/C. Move the aircraft out of enclosure.
(1) Flight controls
- Airbrake maintenance (see 04-5).
- Lubrication of flight control and servo control hinges (see 04-1 , 04-2, 04-3, 04-4, 04-5).
(2) Undercarriage
- Lubrication and protection of doors and U/C hinges (see 05-0).
(3) Fuel system
- Drain the fuel (see 02-3) (pick-up).

- Refuel the tanks (see 02-3).
- Bleed the tanks (see 02-3).
- Check the refueling boom (see 02-9).
AD
BREGUET
Vxv
AVIATION^<^P--^sr"-'-W>
MIRAGE F
^Z^*^ZZz^ Restricted MANUAL 01
(4) Engine
Visually check for sealing of :

(a) «Engine-airframe» connections (main and A/B fuel supply)
(b) Accessories and jet pipe actuators.
(5) Oxygen system
Fully dry up the liquid oxygen tank (see 09-3)

Install the liquid oxygen full tank (see 09-3)
- Check emergency gaseous oxygen cylinder for oxygen quantity (02-3)
- Check A/C system for possible leakage (see 09-3)
(6) Cockpit air conditioning system
- Refill the cockpit conditioning evaporator with fluid (see 02-3).

- Check the air conditioning system (see 09-2).
IMPORTANT :For the turbine cooler unit, apply the instructions concerning removal from storage as
shown in the technical handbook of this equipment.
(7) Pitot static systems
- Close the bleed ports (02-3).

- Check the pitot static systems for sealing (see 12-1 ).
(8) Airframe
- Inspect the air ducts.

- Close all access and inspection doors ; on occasion remove foreign matter.
(9) Maintenance and test run-up
IMPORTANT NOTE : during run-up, observe instructions and limitations (see 02-8).
C Aircraft maintenance test flight
- Perform weekly inspections (see 02-9).

- Perform daily inspections (see 02-5).
- Perform pre-f light inspection (see 02-5).
- Perform test flight (see 02-8) : during taxiing, carry out brake test.
- Update records and documents.
D Prolonged storage
Long-term storage in EHC may be prolonged for a further one year under the same conditions ;
observe instructions given in chapter «STORAGE» in EHC.
AA
BREGUET
^LJ^Tyi
AVIATION^5F°_-<^<C>
MIRAGE
....,.,
F
_.
RETURNING «STORED UNPREPARED»

AIRCRAFT TO SERVICE
1 - PROCEDURE
A Remove all covers and protections.
B - Install the battery.
C Install the oxygen tank.
D Perform the operations required by the grounding time.
(1 ) If grounding time or unavailability does not exceed three months, perform :

- lubrication and protection of hinges (see 02-9)
- operations scheduled for weekly inspections (see 02-9)
- check of charging of accumulator built in the electrically operated selector valve of pitch re¬
leasable bellcranks (see 07-1 )
- check of braking accumulator capacity (see 05-7)
- check of aircraft oxygen system tightness (see 09-3)
- integrated test of flight control and AP electronics system (see 13-0).
| (2) If grounding time is to exceed three months, perform an «I» inspection.
E Carry out a thorough daily inspection.
F Update the aircraft log books and documents.
IMPORTANT NOTE : Refer to the list of periodic maintenance operations on removed equipment and
to the «Equipment and components service life» list.
From these documents, it can be determined whether any equipment requires :

- removing for minor servicing,
- or removing for overhaul and replacing.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ>iJTV<
BREGUET AVIATION^gr^tff^
MIRAGE
.........
F
nt
^£^*"~<^ Restricted MANUAL 01
RETURNING AIRCRAFT IN
«SHORT-TERM STORAGE» TO SERVICE
1 - PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT NOTE : Refer to the list of periodical maintenance operations on removed equipment
and to the «equipment and component service life» list. From these documents, it can be determined
whether any equipment requires :
removing for minor servicing,
or removing for overhaul and replacing.
A Remove all covers and protection blanks.
- Open all access doors.
B Remove all desiccant bags from compartments and electrical boxes, where their presence is indi¬
cated by clearly displayed labels.
C If necessary, clean the aircraft skin.
D Check for traces of corrosion and remove if any.
E Check for fluid leaks under the aircraft.
F - Ventilate the aircraft. Whenever possible, use a hot air blower to completely remove moisture.
G - Reinstall the components which have been stored separately, after making sure that their storage
protection has been properly removed.
H Jack up the aircraft and remove protective coating from the sliding parts of U/C shock absorbers,
undercarriage jacks, U/C door jacks and airbrake jacks (see 05-1 ).
I I Perform a type «I» inspection.
J Carry out an engine check run-up during which the various ancillary systems are to be checked for
correct operation (see 02-8).
K Check the charging pressure of hydraulic accumulators (see 07-0).
L - Check the charging pressure of the emergency cylinder (emergency extension of the refueling
probe) (see 06-2).
M Carry out a «daily» inspection of aircraft (see 02-5).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/;
BREGUET
>c¥
AVIATION^cF^J-V^
MIRAGE F
^2-2^-^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 01
REMOVING FROM STORAGE AND RETURNING TO SERVICE AIRCRAFT

STORED IN «ENCLOSURE WITH CONTROLLED HYGROMETRY»
Final reconditioning of an aircraft stored in «enclosure with controlled hygrometry» consists in

carrying out reconditioning operations applicable for a yearly inspection (see chapter
«MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT STORED IN E.H.C», para. 4) completed with a radar test flight
(see 02-8).
Update records and documents.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
/L-îrU. MIRAGE F
SECTION 6
TRANSPORTATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
6-0 GENERAL
- Preparation and conditioning of aircraft for transportation 6-001

- Dimensional characteristics of the various components of a transportation assembly .... 6-005
- Installation of aircraft components on transportation cradles 6-008
6-1 ROAD TRANSPORTATION
- Normal road transportation of an aircraft 6-101
6-2 AIR TRANSPORTATION
- Air transportation on C 130 cargo aircraft 6-201
Figure No. Page
1 TRANSPORTABLE COMPONENTS OF AN AIRCRAFT 6-001

2 POSITIONING OF PROTECTION ACCESSORIES AND HOLDING FIXTURES 6-004M
3 CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTATION ASSEMBLY 6-006
4 CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTATION ASSEMBLY EQUIPPED WITH
AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS 6-007
4M CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTATION ASSEMBLY EQUIPPED WITH
AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS. 6-007M
5 FUSELAGE TRANSPORTATION TROLLEY ASSEMBLY 6-009
6 INSTALLATION OF FUSELAGE ON TRANSPORTATION TROLLEY 6-010
7 INSTALLATION OF NOSE CONE ON SUPPORT MOUNT 6-012
8 INSTALLATION OF WINGS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE 6-014
9 INSTALLATION OF FIN ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE 6-016
10 INSTALLATION OF STABILATORS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE 6-018
11 ROAD TRANSPORTATION ON TRAILER : 1st loading 6-102
12 ROAD TRANSPORTATION ON TRAILER : 2nd loading 6-104
13 LOADING ON C130 CARGO AIRCRAFT 6-202
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
PREPARATION AND CONDITIONING OF AIRCRAFT FOR TRANSPORTATION

(Figure 1 - Figure 2)
1- GENERAL
A As its overall dimensions exceed the maximum permissible for road or air transportation, it is
necessary to disassemble the aircraft into easily transportable components :
- clean fuselage 1, with engine installed
- nose cone 2
- refueling boom 3
wings 4
-fin 5
- horizontal stabilators 6
- brake chute fairing 7
- keels 8
B Conditioning of the aircraft or its components will be limited to the protection required for
transportation which, in principle, is of short duration.
NOTE : Damaged aircraft must be placed in the «long-term» storage category awaiting dispatch to
repair facilities. Main items of equipment should be removed from the aircraft and stored in
accordance with the RT.22.1.
FIGURE 1 -TRANSPORTABLE COMPONENTS OF AN AIRCRAFT

AC
AVK3NS MARCEL DASSAULT^J^-^l /YIIinMOC I
breguet av.atôn^^^> Restricted MANUAL 01
A Servicing equipment
- Set of control locking accessories MS 1428-30 (for holding controls and loose cables)
3- SERVICING MATERIALS
- Self-sealing fabric
Adhesive tape
- Kraft paper.
4- PREPARATION
- Jack-up the aircraft (see 02)

- Completely drain the fuel system (see 02)
- Make sure that speed brakes are locked in the position «CLOSED».
- Retract the undercarriage - Place holding devices into position.
- Retract slats and flaps.
- Extend the refueling boom.
Drop the pressure in hydraulic systems
- Drain hydraulic tanks (see 02).
5- DISASSEMBLY OF AIRCRAFT
A Remove external stores (see 15)
B Remove the nose cone (see 03-3)
- The radar and the laser range finder should be previously removed and packed in their respective
container.
- Remove the pitot head and place it on the nose cone support mount.
- Place the nose cone on its transportation cradle.
C Remove the refueling boom and place it on its transportation cradle (Refer to 06-2).
D Remove the engine (see 06 4)
E Remove the fin (see 03-4)
- Disconnected hydraulic lines will be blanked off with metal sealing plugs.
Place fin on its storage cradle.
F Remove the brake chute fairing
- Place it in transportation case.
G Remove the keels
- Place keels on their transportation cradle.
NOTE : For road transportation, removal of the keels is not necessary.
AC
06-75 Restricted e-°02
BREGUET
/L-îrîL
AVIATION^^F^L^f^
MIRAGE
.........
F
_,
H Remove horizontal stabilators (see 034)
- Place .them on their storage cradle.
I Remove the wings (see 03-1 )
Disconnected lines will be blanked off with metal sealing plugs.
Place the wings on storage cradle.
J Remove the following fragile equipment :
- sight head
- rate gyro box
- standby gyromagnetic compass
- gyro platform
Standby gyro-horizon is left in place, but caged.
All these equipments will be packed for shipping in accordance with instructions of the individual
documentation.
K Re-install the engine
6- CONDITIONING
A Equipment required
(1 ) Servicing equipment
- Set of control locking and blanking accessories (MS 1428-30)
B Servicing materials
- Self -seal ing fabric

- Adhesive tape
- Kraft paper
C Fuselage conditioning
- Disconnected hydraulic lines will be blanked off with metal sealing plugs.
- Protect all pipe ends and junction connectors with wrappings of self-sealing fabric.
- Attach and stow loose ends of pipes and cables to prevent them from flapping.
- Lock the controls with the locking equipment.
CAUTION :
WHEN ATTACHING RIGID PIPES FOR STOWING, MAKE SURE THEY ARE NOT SUB¬
JECTED TO ANY STRESS.
Jack ends and disconnected attachment fittings will be greased and wrapped in self-sealing fabric.
-
The sections exposed or bared by disassembly of components will be wholly covered with
-
self -sealing fabric.
- Antenna fairings will be protected with paper held in place by adhesive tape.
- Install :
- the canopy cover

- the jet pipe cover
- the air intake blanks
- the wing root protection plates
the mounting base protectors
- the ventral fin pin protectors
- the vent pipe protectors.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTjLJp-^rvL /VllKMOU I
BREGUET AVIATION^ôF^-^"^
^-*assS^^s^ Restricted MANUAL 01
- flight control holding and locking tools,

- aileron clamping tools,
- stabilator pivot protection devices.
D Conditioning - Wings - Fin - Stabilators
- Proceed in the same manner as with the fuselage to protect during transportation the fittings,
the rigid or flexible controls, the disconnected lines, the cables, the connectors and the exposed areas.
AA
J
BREGUET AVIATION ^S3

MIRAGE F
FIGURE 2 - POSITIONING OF PROTECTION ACCESSORIES AND

HOLDING FIXTURES
AA
12-79 Restricted 6-004M FIGURE 2 6-004iV
BREGUET AVIATION
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VARIOUS TRANSPORTATION

COMPONENTS
(Figures 3 -4)
1 - DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTATION CRADLES

Refer to figure 3.
2- DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS
Refer to 03-0.
3- DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTATION CRADLES EQUIPPED WITH

AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS
Refer to figure 4.
AA
BREGUFT AVIATION^G'
MIRAGE F
Length : 1 ,93 m (2.11 yd)

Overall width
(with mooring
hook) :1 ,02 m (1 .1 1 yd)
Height : 0,90 m (0.98 yd)
STABILATOR TRANSPORTATION CRADLE - BTE

Weight : 200 kg (440 lbs)
Length : 3,30 m (3.60 yd)
Width .-0,82 m (0.90 yd)
Height : 0,55 m (0.60 yd)
WING TRANSPORTANTION CRADLE - BTV
Weight : 400 kg (880 lbs) NOSE CONE SUPPORT MOUNT - BSP
Weight .65 kg (143 lbs)
Length : 3,96 m (4.33 yd)

Width : 1,28 m (1.40 yd)
Height : 0 ,34 m (0.37 yd)
CASE FOR WING AND FIN FILLETS - CTE

Weight :150 kg (330 lbs)
Length 7,56 m (8.26 yd)

Width 2,40 m (2.62 yd)
Height 2.70 m (2.95 yd) Length : 2,00 m (2. 19 yd)
Nose wheel assy track 0,72 m (0.78 yd) Width .0,80 m (0.87 yd)
Rear wheel assy track 2,32 m (2.53 yd) Height .0,45 m (0.49 yd)
FUSELAGE TRANSPORTATION TROLLEY - BTF Ground clearance 0,24 m (0.26 yd)
FIN TRANSPORTATION CRADLE BTD
Weight : 2460 kg (5420 lbs) Towing bar extended 3,50 m (3.82 yd)
Weight ; 115 kg (253 lbs)
FIGURE 3 - CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTATION ASSEMBLY

AE
04-77 Restricted 6-006 FIGURE 3 6-00(
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Overall lenght : 1 2,04 m (13. 16 yd)

Overall width : 2,32 m ( 2.53 yd)
Maximum height : 2,70 m( 2.95 yd)
TRANSPORTAT/ON TROLLEY EQUIPPED WITH FUSELAGE

Weight: without engine : 6800 kg (14990 lbs)
with engine : 8400 kg ( 18520 lbs)
Load on front axle : 806 kg (1776 lbs)
Overall length : 5,70 m (6.23 yd)

Overall width : 3,05 m (3.33 yd)
Height : 0,90 m (0.98 yd)
TRANSPORTATION CRADLE EQUIPPED WITH WINGS

FIGURE 4 - CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTA TION ASSEMBL Y EQUIPPED WITH

AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS
AD
05-79 Restricted 6-007 FIGURE 4 6-O0Î
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F

Overall width :ï,02 m (1.11 yd)
Height : 2.30 m (Z51 yd)
TRANSPORTATION CRADLE EQUIPPED WITH STABILATORS


Overall width : 0,80m (0.87yd)
Height : 2,60 m (2J84 yd)
TRANSPORTA TION CRADLE EQUIPPED WITH FIN

Weight ;312 kg (687 lbs)

Overall width : 0,82 m (0.89 yd)
Height : 0,90 m (0.98 yd)
SUPPORT MOUNT EQUIPPED WITH NOSE CONE

Weight: 215 kg (473 lbs) Length : 3,90 m (426 yd)
Width ;1 ,20 m (1.31 yd)
Height : 0,34 m (0.37 yd)
CASE EQUIPPED WITH WING AND FIN FILLETS

FIGURE 4M - CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSPORTAT/ON ASSEMBL Y Weight : 203 kg (447 lbs)
EQUIPPED WITH AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS
AD
11-75 Restricted 6-007M FIGURE 4M 6-O07M
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
INSTALLATION OF AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLES
1 - INS ALLATION OF FUSELAGE ON TRANSPORTATION TROLLEY (Figure 6)
A Equ pment required
(1) Standard tools

- Torque wrenches, 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb).
(2) Servicing materials

- Hoisting beam EHA 13.
B - Materials
Adhesive tape.
C Preparation
(1 ) Remove from transportation trolley :

blanking plate (4) from frame 1
adjustable front support assembly (1) by detaching adjustable base plate (22) from the trolley.
Put the front support into position A on the base plate.
pit k-up fittings (8) fitted with shaft (11),
- swivel bearings (9) attached to rear supports (12) by pins (10),
co meeting beam (3).
(2) On fuselage (frame 25), at the wing main attachment points, install fittings (8) fitted with
shaft (11):
usij pick-up fitting-to-fuselage connecting pins (19),
install them in accordance with instructions for connecting pins (refer to 03-1); as regards
insert ior dimensions, refer to the individual inspection logbook of each pin,
engage swivel bearings (9), positioning them properly on shafts (11) each fitted with thrust
washer ( 4) and spacers (15) and (16),
- engage spacer (17) and washer (18) on the shaft ; tighten the nut and position the lockpin.
(3) Apply blanking plate (4) and adjustable front support assembly (1 ) onto frame 1 :
(a) Apply blanking plate (4) onto frame 1 and center it, using the 2 centering pins.
(b) Install adjustable front support (1 ). Fasten the blanking plate and support assembly onto frame 1 ,
using the 4 top and bottom attaching parts.
(c) Usi ig adhesive tape, seal all round gap between blanking plate and fuselage.
(4) Attach hoisting beam to fuselage fittings.
AE
BREGUET AVIATION
7 - RETRACTABLE TOWING BAR

2 - FRONT WHEEL ASSEMBL Y
(DIRIGIBLE)
3 - ADJUSTABLE PLA TE
4 -ADJUSTABLE FRONT SUPPORT
5 - FRONT SUPPORT IN STORAGE
POSITION
6 - INSTRUCTION PLA TES
7 - STOWING RINGS
8 - LONGITUDINAL GIRDERS
9 - CENTRAL CROSS BEAM
1 1 - EXTENSION PLA TFORMS
12 - INTERMEDIA TE CROSS BEAM
13 - STABILIZATION KEEL CRADLE
14 - CASE FOR TAIL CONE AND
MISCELLANEOUS
15 -REAR YOKES
16 -REAR SUPPORT ASSEMBL Y (AT
FRAME 25)
17 - CONNECTING BEAM
18 -REAR BOGIE
19 - REAR CROSS BEAM
20 - EXTENSION PLA TFORM SUPPORTS
21 - EXTENSION PLA TFORM A TTACHING
PARTS
22 - TOWING BAR STORAGE SUPPORTS
23 -STOWING CABLE
FIGURE 5 - FUSELAGE TRANSPORTA TION TROLLEY ASSEMBL Y

AB
04-77 6-009 FIGURE 5 6-0(
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
o\^
<a>^xi
(Et- o oo c
33 8
6A CoE c
B
O O O CO 0
i^>^.... (®>^J
\ *
_^ 1 -ADJUSTABLE FRONT SUPPORT
2 - PARTS ATTACHING SUPPORT ONTO F. 1

3 - REAR SUPPORT CONNECTING BEAM
4-F.1 BLANKING PLA TE
6 -STOWING POINTS
7 - FRONT SUPPORT BALL JOINT
8 - PICK-UP FITTING A T F. 25
9 - SWIVEL BEARING, PIN-MOUNTED
10 - BEARING-TO-REAR SUPPORT ATTACHING PIN
1 1 - PICK-UP FITTING CONNECTING PIN
12 - SWIVEL BEARING REAR SUPPORT 19 - PICK-UP FITTING-TO-FUSELAGE
13 - STOWING RING CONNECTING PIN
14 - THRUST WASHER 20 - ADJUSTABLE FRONT SUPPORT
15 - SHOULDERED SPACER POSITIONING SCREW
16 - SPACER 21 HAND-LEVER
17 -SPACER 22 - FRONT SUPPORT ADJUSTABLE PLATE
18 - WASHER 23 -CATCH
FIGURE 6 - INSTALLA TION OF FUSELAGE ON TRANSPORTA TION TROLLEY

AF
BREGUET
/L-îrU.
AVIATION^^F="^VC>
MIRAGE F
.,»»...*. ««
^£^-<^ Restricted MANUAL 01
D - Loading
CAUTION :
IF LOADING IS CONDUCTED IN A HANGAR, MAKE SURE THAT THE OVERHEAD
CLEARANCE OF THE CRANE JIB IS SUFFICIENT FOR HOISTING THE FUSELAGE ABOVE
THE MAIN ATTACHMENT FITTINGS OF THE MOUNT.
TO HOIST AN UNEQUIPPED FUSELAGE, PLACE CG IN POSITION 2 (SEE PLACARD ON
HOISTING BEAM).
(1 ) Hoist fuselage assembly and bring it over the trolley, parallel to its longitudinal axis.
Operate slowly and smoothly, guiding the fuselage with slings attached at the front and at the rear.
Properly position swivel bearings (9) and engage them between the plates of supports (12). Align
the bores and pin with pins (10). Tighten the nuts and install the lock pins.
(2) Position the base plate of adjustable front support (1 ) on the chassis of the fuselage transportation
trolley. Fasten.
(3) Remove the hoisting assembly.
(4) Attach connecting beam (3) to the rear supports.
2- INSTALLATION OF NOSE CONE ON SUPPORT MOUNT (figure 7)
( 1 ) Grou nd su pport equ ipment

- Support mount BSP
- Protecting cover
B Materials
- Adhesive tape
C Preparation
(1) Cradle:
- Lay support mount (8) on the ground by releasing wheel retraction devices (4) and (9).
- Untie and extend front and rear retaining straps (3).
(2) Nose cone :

Position and center blanking plate (1) onto cone rear frame. Attach blanking plate with screws
(12).
- Using adhesive tape, seal all round gap between blanking plate and nose cone.
- Put protecting cover (2).
D Loading
(1 ) Position the nose cone on cradles (7), with the rear face resting on stop (10).
(2) Stow the nose cone on the support mount by tightening the straps with strainers (6).
(3) Set the support mount back on its wheels by locking devices (4) and (9).
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
/ - FRAME 1 BLANKING PLA TE

2 PROTECTING COVER
3 - FRONT AND REAR STRAPS
4 - FRONT WHEEL RETRACTION DEVICE
5 - MOORING HOOKS
6 - PITOT HEAD SUPPORTS
7 CRADLE
8 - SUPPORT MOUNT
9 - REAR WHEEL RETRACTION DEVICE
10 - REAR STOP
12 - A TTACHING SCREW
13 - IAS PROBE PROTECTOR
FIGURE 7 - INSTALLA TION OF NOSE CONE ON SUPPORT MOUNT

AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT yî MIRAGE F
breguet aviation^^p^ Restricted MANUAL 01
3- INSTALLATION OF WINGS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE (Figure 8)
(1) Servicing material

- 1transportation cradle BTV
- 1 hoisting assembly EHV
- 1 aileron locking device (joint plates)
- 2 protecting covers.
B Materials
- Grease AI R 4205.
C Preparation
(1) Cradle:
lay the cradle on the ground ; to that purpose, clear front wheel assembly (7) off its support and
-
retract rear wheels by tilting, after removing pin, control (8) equipped with a prolongator
-fully unscrew the 2 clamping screws (4) and remove the 4 pins (19) ; then remove clamping
block (2)
- disengage the 2 tie rods (1 ) from the holes in lateral posts (21 ) by pulling them upwards
- disengage intermediate block (20) from lateral posts and remove it
- remove the 2 pins (18) ; pull lateral posts (21) upwards in order to disengage them from lower
spacer ; pivot them outwards of the cradle and set them on the ground
- remove hinged arms (3) from adjustable struts (5) ; remove pick-up pins (9) from wing rear fitting
- move arms (3) sidewards in order to clear the cradle
- lubricate slides (12) and bores of wing rear fittings (10)
(2) Wing:
wipe and lightly lubricate (with AIR 4205) the lower bore of the LH wing main attachment
-
wipe and lubricate the 2 bushings (16), then insert them in the bore
-
- insert rearward swivel arm (15) fitted with ball and socket-halves (14)
- screw and tighten nut (17) and install lockpin
- lock the ailerons with the locking device
- put a protecting cover on each wing
- attach the hoisting assembly to the wings ; gently tighten the slings, hoist smoothly and bring the
wing over the cradle.
D Loading
(1 ) Lower the wings and guide socket (14) so as to engage it in slides (12) of the pick-up fitting ; pin it
with lock (13).
(2) Position hinged arm (3) on wing rear fitting (10). Align the bores by manually maintaining the
wing, then insert pin (9).
(3) Check wing centering, then adjust the length of strut (5) and pin it to the hinged arm clevis, using
pin (11).
(4) Rest the wing on the lower clamping block.
(5) Remove the hoisting assembly.
(6) Set intermediate clamping block (20) in place.
(7) Install the RH wing on the cradle, operating in the same way as for the LH wing.
(8) Set up again lateral posts (21) and pin them with pin (18) so that they remain in the vertical
position.

BREGUET AVIATION
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
1 - TIE ROD
2 - UPPER CLAMPING BLOCK
3 -HINGED ARMS
4 - CLAMPING SCREW
5 -ADJUSTABLE STRUT
6 - PICK-UP FITTING
7 - MOBILE FRONT WHEEL ASSEMBL Y
8 -WHEEL CONTROL
9 - PIN WITH TIL TING STOP
10- WING REAR FITTING
11 -PIN WITH TIL TING STOP
12 SLIDES
13- LOCK
14 SOCKET WITH BALL
15 SWIVEL ARM
16 -BUSHINGS
17 -SPECIAL NUT
18 LOWER PINS WITH TILTING STOP
19 - UPPER PINS WITH TILTING STOP
20 - INTERMEDIA TE CLAMPING BLOCK
21 - LATERAL POSTS
MOUNTING OF SWI VEL
ARM ON WING FITTING
(LOWER BORE)
FIGURE 8 - INSTALLATION OF WINGS ON TRANSPORTA TION CRADLE
AA
Restricted 6-014 FIGURE 8 6-014
12-74
BREGUET AVIATION ^Cjèr~ ^~>-ï.^~ kÂAMllAl ai
(9) Reinstall tie rods (1).
(10) Set upper clamping block (2) on RH wing, and attach it to lateral posts with pins (19). Pin the
clamping block to the wings with tie rods (1 ) and screws (4).
(1 1 ) Lift the cradle and install front wheel assembly (7).

(12) Extend the rear wheels by actuating and pinning control (8).
4- INSTALLATION OF FIN ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE (Figure 9)

(1) Standard tools

-spanner 32 A/F,
- torque wrench, 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ftlb),
- case for torque wrenches 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb),
- bushing, 32 mm.

- transportation cradle BTD
- rudder locking device
- hoisting assembly EHD 12.
B Materials
-Grease AIR 4205.
C Preparation
(1) Cradle:
- place transportation cradle assembly (4) plumb with the fin.
- lay the cradle on the ground by retracting the wheels with handweel (3).
- clean the cradle attaching fittings.
(2) Fin:
lock the rudder with locking device (1).
-
remove blanking plugs from fin hoisting fittings.
-
- using a crane, bring the hoisting assembly over the fin.
- pin the front and rear attaching parts of the hoisting beam to the fin hoisting fittings.
- place rags between the cables and the fin to prevent scratches ; the front and rear cables should
be lightly and equally tightened.
- clean the fin attaching fittings.
D Loading
- Bring the fin over the transportation cradle and lower it gently and smoothly.
- Engage fin rear fitting (12) (fin side) on rear support (14) (chassis side).
- Engage main fitting (8) in the fitting of girder (9) by a few centimeters and check their relative
position.
- Slowly engage the fin main spar until the bores are aligned.
- Pin main fitting (8), using fitting-to-girder connecting pins (1 1 ).
- Install them in accordance with instructions for aircraft main attaching pins. As regards insertion
dimensions, refer to the inspection log-book of each pin.
- Clean and lightly lubricate pin (13).
- Pin rear fitting (12) with pin (13), with 1 washer on either side of fitting (12).
- Remove the hoisting assembly.
Reinstall the blanking plates of the hoisting fittings.
- Set cradle back on its wheels by actuating handwheel (3).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT^ ^ M /V\IKAwC I
BREGUET AVIATION .«--^.^ > KAAMMAI HT
^^-<£Q^ Restricted MANUAL 01
5 - INSTALLATION OF STABILATORS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE (Figure 1 0)

(1) Standard tools

-Spanner 40 A/ F.

- 1 transportation cradle BTE.
B - Materials
-Grease AIR 4217.
C Preparation
(1) Cradle:
lay cradle (9) on the ground by retracting wheels (6) with hand-wheel (5).
-
- the RH and LH plates respectively receive the RH and LH stabilators ; carry out the following
operations for each plate :
- loosen the lock screws (4) in order to free the clamps of plate (2), then simultaneously
unlock and lift eccentric pins (7).
pivot plate (2) on hinge pins (8) by manually moving pivot (1) until it is in a horizontal
position.
- remove plate holding strut (3) from its rest position and pin it to the plate so that it remains
in a vertical position.
- using screw (14), loosen clamping yoke (13) provided for the stabilator control trunnion.
- dry-clean the stabilator pivot.
- screw guide end (10) onto the pivot end.
(2) Stabilator :
- dry-clean the inner and outer bearings and the control trunnion
- using grease AI R 421 7, lubricate the control trunnion and the outer bearing bore.
- do not lubricate the inner bearing (teflon-coated bore)
-on control trunnion, install spherical bushing (12), tighten it with nut 40 A/F and lock with
safety pin.
D Loading
- Manually position one stabilator in a horizontal position. Carefully insert the pivot into the outer
bearing. While keeping the stabilator horizontal, push it in order to insert the pivot into the inner
bearing and the control trunnion into clamping yoke (13).
- Through the outer bearing inspection door, remove guide end (10) and screw in place stabilator
lock nut (1 1 ). Torque : 10 m.daN (73.75 ft.lb).
- Reinstall outer bearing inspection door.
- Tighten yoke (13).
- Remove pin from holding strut (3), while manually keeping the stabilator horizontal so as to
relieve the strain on the plate. Pin the strut in rest position.
Tilt the stabilator vertically.
-
Set eccentric pins (7) in lower position, then lock them.
-
- Position again lock screws (4) on the plate clamps and tighten them so that plate (2) becomes
integral with the chassis.
- When one stabilator is installed on the chassis, repeat the above operations for the other one.
- Set the cradle back on its wheels through hand-wheel (5) operation.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
PLATE IN
ASSEMBL Y POSI TION
1 -PIVOT
2 -PLATE
3 -HOLDING STRUT
4 -LOCK SCREW
5 -HAND-WHEEL
6 - WHEELS
7 -ECCENTRIC PINS
8 -PLATE HINGE PIN
9 - CRADLE
10 - GUIDE END
1 1 - STAB/ LA TOR LOCK NUT
12 - SPHERICAL BUSHING
13 -CLAMPING YOKE
14 - YOKE TIGHTENING SCREW
FIGURE 10 -INSTALLATION OF STABILATORS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^csx ' ^-< *-»> AAAKJMAI m
NORMAL ROAD TRANSPORTATION OF AN AIRCRAFT

(Figures 11, 12)
1 - GENERAL
A Road transportation is performed with 2 semi-trailers :
The first one carries :

- the fuselage
- the containers for radar and laser range finder
- the stabilization keels (if required)
- the brake chute fairing
the wing and fin fillets
- the container for refuelling boom.
The second one carries :

- the wings
- the fin
- the two stabilators
the nose cone.
B The aircraft components are prepared and installed on their respective cradles (refer to 01 -6).
A Servicing material
- Aircraft hoisting assembly EH A 13

- Aircraft fuselage cover
- Two semi-trailers ACTM type SMR
- Hoisting assembly of wing transportation cradle.
3- PREPARATION
A Perform the following operations for each semi-trailer :
- Place it near the components to be loaded.

- Clear the rear and front platforms from any object.
- Lower the rear props.
B Fuselage trolley assembly
- Remove from the trolley both extension platforms (5) and cases (6) and (7).
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restrhted MANUAL 01
Ground clearance .
(off f load) 0,20 m (0.21 yd)
7,57 m (8.27 yd) 2,23 m (2.43 yd)
*
$ R!
«S
E
8 §
2,80 m (3.06 yd) 10 m (10.93 yd)
12JBQm(13S9yd)
/ - CONTAINERS FOR RADAR AND LASER RANGE FINDER 5 - EXTENSION PLA TFORMS
2 -FUSELAGE ON AIR TRANSPORTATION TROLLEY 6 - STABILIZA TION KEELS Useful load : 1 5 000 kg (33 000 lbs)
3- TOWING BAR (IN STORAGE POSITION) 7 -TAIL CONE TRANSPORTATION CASE Maximum load :
4 - REFUELING BOOM CONTAINER 8 - FILLET TRANSPORTATION CASE front platform : 3 500 kgf 7 700 lbs)
rear platform : 1.1 500 kg (25 300 lbs)
FIGURE 11 - ROAD TRANSPORTATION ON TRAILER

1st loading
AD
BREGUET AVIATION î.^-^. --> â.amiiai m
4- LOADING
A First semi-trailer (Figure 1 1 )
- Hoist the fuselage-transportation trolley assembly on the platform.

Wedge the trolley and provisionally stow it.
- Install and stow wing and fin fillet transportation case (8).
- Install and stow cases (6) and (7) and extension platforms (5) on the trolley.
- Carry out the final wedgings and stowings.
- Put the cover on the fuselage assembly.
- Hoist and attach radar and laser range finder containers (1 ).
- Hoist and attach refueling boom container (4).
NOTE : If desired, the trolley can be installed and stowed empty on the platform before fuselage
loading.
B Second semi-trailer (Figure 12)
- Hoist both wings and stow cradle (2).

- Hoist and install fin-transportation cradle assembly (3).
- Stow the cradle on the semi-trailer.
- Hoist and install stabilator-transportation cradle assembly (4) and stow the cradle.
- Hoist and install nose cone support mount (1 ) on the front platform and stow the support mount
(cone end facing rearward).
- Carry out the complementary wedgings and stowings with the semi-trailer set of equipment.
5- ROLLING TESTS
After loading, carry out a rolling test for a few hundred yards and check that the aircraft
components are secure on the trailer.
IMPORTANT NOTE : Loaded trailers should not be towed at speeds exceeding 20 to 30 km/h (12 to
19m.p.h.).
6- UNLOADING
Unloading procedure is the reverse of loading procedure.
AD
06-75 Restricted 6 103
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
/ - NOSE CONE SUPPORT MOUNT Useful load : 1 5 000 kg (33 000 lbs)
2 - WINGS ON AIR TRANSPORTATION CRADLE Maximum load :
3 - FIN ON AIR TRANSPORTAT/ON CRADLE front platform : 3 500 kg ( 7 700 lbs)
4 - STABILA TORS ON AIR TRANSPORTA TION CRADLE rear platform : 1 1 500 kg (25 300 lbs)
FIGURE 12 - ROAD TRANSPORTATION ON TRAILER

2nd loading
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /U^/i- m7 MIRAGE F
breguet AviATKg^^g^ Restricted MANUAL 01
AIR TRANSPORTATION ON C130 CARGO AIRCRAFT

(Figure 13)
1 - GENERAL
A One C130 cargo aircraft permits air transportation of an aircraft disassembled into the following
sub-assemblies :
- fuselage
wings
- stabilators
- fin
- nose cone
- radar and laser range finder
- stabilization keels
- refueling boom.
B The various sub-assemblies are installed on, and attached to their respective trolleys, cradles and
support mounts (refer to 01-6).
A Standard tools
- Aircraft kit C130 : hoist, cables, tensators, stowing slings and roller ramps.
B Servicing material
- Crane with hinged boom : Strength : > 7 tons (8 US tons).
3- PREPARATION
- The aircraft should be parked on a parking area, in lowered position, with loading ramp extended
to the ground.
- Remove extension platforms (5) from the transportation trolley. Place them side to side, on
either side of the aircraft centreline, with the catch fittings hooked to the loading-ramp troughs.
4- LOADING
A Nose cone
- Place the extension platforms so that the space between them corresponds to the support mount
gauge.
- Install the nose cone on its support and place it in the forward RH corner of the bay with the
cone end facing the rear of the bay. Retract the wheels.
Attach the support-nose cone assembly to the bay floor, using the front and rear mooring bars (fix
the mooring rings to the bay floor before installation of the support-nose cone assembly).
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT g^
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
/ - TRANSPORTATION TROLLEY-FUSELAGE ASSEMBLY 5 - EXTENSION PLA TFOR MS 10 - CONTAINER FOR RADAR AND LASER RANGE FINDER
2 - NOSE CONE SUPPORT MOUNT 6 - STABILIZATION KEELS ON CRADLE 11 - STABILATORS ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE
3 - FIN ON TRANSPORTATION CRADLE 7 TRANSPORTA TION CASE FOR BRAKE CHUTE FAIRING 12 - CASE FOR WING AND FIN FILLETS
4 TOWING BAR (IN STORAGE POSITION) 9 - WINGS ON TRANSPORTA TION CRADLE 13 -STOWING CABLE
14 - REFUELING BOOM
FIGURE 13 - LOADING ON C130 CARGO AIRCRAFT

AD
BREGUET
,
AVIATION^^^
n ^ Bfriefgttt
MIRAGE
MANUAL
F
01
B- Fin
- platform so that the space between them corresponds to the cradle gauge.
Place the extension
Install the fin on its cradle and place it in the forward LH corner of the bay, with the front part
-
of the fin facing the rear of the bay. Retract the wheels.
Attach the cradle-fin assembly to the bay floor, using front and rear mooring bars.
C Fuselage
(1) Place the extension platforms so that the space between them corresponds to the gauge of the
trolley front wheels.
(2) With the towing bar adapted to the front axle, position the fuselage-trolley assembly in line with
the bay.
(3) Roll the fuselage-trolley assembly, guiding it manually so that the trolley remains in the axis of the
bay ; stop when the front wheels come into contact with the extension platforms.
(4) Moor the aircraft hoist chain to the front rings on the trolley girders. Guide the hoisting operation
by maintaining the towing bar upwards.
(5) Restart pulling until the wheels of the rear bogie come at the level of the extension platforms.
(6) During this first phase of the hoisting operation, maintain wedges behind the wheels on the access
ramps, so that the trolley does not move backwards.
(7) Adapt the space between the extension platforms to the rear bogie gauge. Restart towing the
trolley until the rear wheels of the bogie are beyond the limit between access ramps and bay floor. Put
wedges as described above.
(8) Retract towing bar (4) and place it on its storage support ; resume the towing operation until the
front wheels reach the second row of mooring points on floor. Put wedges before and behind the
wheels. Lower the rear skids.
(9) Remove the extension platforms and store them on the fuselage transportation trolley.
D- Fillets
Embark the case containing the fillets and bring it between the wheels of the rear bogie, in the
aircraft centreline, by merely sliding it on the bay floor.
E Stabilization keels and brake-chute
On the fuselage transportation trolley, secure the cradle-keel assembly (6) and the case-brake chute
fairing and container assembly (7).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION^Cii _.--v -' uahimai m
_ _ Restricted MANUAL 01
F - Wings
(1 ) Place the loading ramp in a horizontal position and fix the holding struts.
(2) Place and attach the roller ramps to the bay floor ; adapt the roller ramps and the loading ramp to
the space between the cradle support pads.
(3) Using the hoisting crane, bring the cradle-wing assembly in the aircraft centreline and over the
loading ramp.
(4) Allow the cradle to rest on the loading ramp and remove the hoisting beam.
(5) Retract the cradle wheels so that the support pads rest on the roller ramp tracks.
(6) Using the aircraft hoist, move the cradle-wing assembly forward until it reaches its place on the
bay floor (last row of mooring points) ; while doing so, manually guide the cradle so that it remains in
the axis of the bay).
(7) Remove the aircraft hoist.
G Stabilators
Embark cradle-stabilator assembly (11).

-
Plate the assembly on the RH side of the ramp, with the leading edge facing rearward. Retract the
-
wheels. Attach the cradle to the ramp with the front and rear mooring bars.
H Radar and laser range finder container (10)
Embark the container, place it on the LH side of the ramp, parallel to the stabilator cradle.
Stow it.
I - Refueling boom container (14)
Embark the container, place it between the radar container and the stabilator cradle.
Stow it.
J - Definitively stow the loads embarked into the bay. Tighten stowing cable (13), one end of which is
attached to the fuselage trolley (front support), and the other to the aircraft structure.
Remove the access ramp struts.
Retract the access ramp and lock it in flight position.
4- UNLOADING
Proceed in the reverse order of loading. However, all precautions taken for hoisting and wedging
operations when loading should be reinforced at the time of unloading, specially when the trolley passes
from the bay floor to the access ramp, and when it rools on the extension platforms.
AD
1F-F1K50AD-2-02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL 02
SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS
MIRAGE F1AD
AIRCRAFT
RE-ISSUE 1990
RESTRICTED
MAY 1990
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^ 2c*^
^^ Restricted MAINTENANCE MANUAL 02
INDEX DES PAGES

L'astérisque" ndique les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiqi je les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
The asterisk i ndicates pages changed or added and
ORIGINAL ISSUE
A AD 05/90 3-111 AC 07/84

B AD 05/90 1- 1 AA 12/73 3-112 AB 01/88
C/D AD 05/90 1-101 AF 01/81 3-113 AB 12/73
E/F AD 05/90 1-102 AB 06/75 3-114 AD 05/88
1-103 AA 05/74 3-115 AC 11/76
I/II AD 11/74 1-104 AC 01/81 3-116 AC 08/87
III AC 07/75 3-117 AC 02/84
IV AC 11/75 2- 1 AA 03/77 3-118 AC 08/87
V/VI AD 01/77 2-001 AC 06/75 i 3-119 AB 06/85
VII/VIII AJ " 10/78 2-101 AB 12/81 3-120 AB 01/84-
IX AC 06/74 2-101M AA 12/81 3-121 AC 01/88
X AC 06/74 2-102 AB 12/81 3-122 AA 01/88
XI AC 06/74 2-103 AB 12/81 3-123 AB 02/85
XII AC 06/74 2-104 AC 11/76 3-201 AB 09/83
XIII/XIV AC 06/74 2-105 AB 12/81 3-202 AB 04/85
XV AC 06/74 2-106 AB 09/74 3-203 AC 12/84
XVI AC 06/74 2-107 AB 02/72 3-204 AC 09/85
XVII AC 06/74 2-201 AC 10/85 3-205 AC 11/76
XVIII AC 06/74 2-202 AB 10/85 3-206 AB 02/72
XIX AC 06/74 2-203 AA 06/89 3-207 AB 12/84
XX AC 02/80 2-204 AB 11/76 3-207M AA 12/84
2-205 AB 12/81 3-208 AA 02/72
0- 1 AD 12/76 2-301 AC 05/88 3-209 AC 06/86
0-101 AC 02/81 2-302 AB 02/72 3-209M AA 06/86
0-102 AC 06/75 2-401 AB 02/72 3-210 AB 06/85
0-201 AC 05/80 2-402 AA 02/72 3-211 AA 06/85
0-202 AC 05/80 2-403 AB 10/74 3-301 AB 06/76
0-202M AA 05/80 3-302 AB 06/76
0-203 AC 10/77 3- 1 AA 07/75 3-303 AB 06/75
0-204 AC 04/87 3- 2 AA 12/84 3-304 AA 12/84
0-204M AB 04/87 3-001 AG 02/77
0-205 ÂB 06/78 3-002 AC 10/87 4- 1 AA 12/73
0-206 AC 12/84 3-003 AC 06/85 4-001 AB 08/87
0-209 AE 10/79 3-003M AA 08/87 4-002 AB 03/85
0-210 AC 09/74 3-101 AG 06/85 4-003 AA 06/89
0-211 AC 01/77 3-102 AD 12/80 4-004 AB 06/89
0-212 AG 03/77 3-103 AD 06/85 4-005 AB 06/89
0-212M AB 09/78 3-104 AC 10/79 4-006 AA 06/89
0-213 AC 03/88 3-104F AD 10/83 4-007 AA 06/89
0-214 AD 12/84 3-104M AB 03/81 4-008 AA 06/89
0-215 AD 12/84 3-104T AF 06/85
0-216 AC 09/74 3-105 AD 01/80 5- 1 AA 06/78
0-217 AJ 05/77 3-106 AJ 04/86 5-101 AC 12/84
0-218 AE 02/77 3-107 AD 10/78 5-102 AC 06/75
0-219 AC 09/74 3-108 AA 03/79 5-103 AC 06/78
0-220 AE 06/86 3-109 AB 03/79 5-104 AE 09/83
0-221 AB 06/87 3-109M AB 10/74 5-105 AB 03/85
0-221M AB 06/87 3-110 AB 07/84 5-106 AC 03/85
0-221T AA 06/86 3-110M AB 07/75 5-107 AC 06/87
F1AD
05/90 Resti 'icted A
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

L'astérisque ndique les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq je les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
Trie asterisk t ndicates pages changed or added and
ORIGINAL ISSUE
5-108 AA 06/87 6-205 AA 06/81 6-301 AG 04/87

5-109 AJ 02/77 6-206 AC 02/79 6-301M AE 07/79
5-110 AJ 07/84 6-207 AB 02/79 6-301R AA 04/82
5-111 AJ 02/77 6-211 AA 04/87 6-301T AA 04/82
5-112 AC 12/77 6-212 AA 05/82 6-303 AB 06/78
5-113 AB 06/89 6-213 AA 04/87 6-304 AB 09/78
5-115 AC 01/88 6-214 AA 04/87 6-311 AA 07/77
5-117 AC 05/79 6-221 AA 05/82 6-312 AA 07/77
5-118 AA iO/85 6-222 AA 06/81 6-401 AA 04/87
5-119 AB 10/85 6-223 AA 06/81 6-401M AA 02/76
5-120 AH 03/79 6-224 AA 06/81 6-401R AA 04/82
5-121 AC 07/86 6-224L AB 03/83 6-401T AA 04/82
5-121M AD 07/86 6-224M AA 03/83 6-403 AB 10/77
5-201 AA 10/87 6-225 AA 06/81 6-405 AB 09/78
5-202 AF 04/87 6-225M AA 03/83 6-501 AA 11/74
5-203 AC 06/75 6-226 AA 06/81 6-502 AA 01/77
5-204 AD 01/81 6-227 AA 03/83 6-503 AA 06/81
5-205 AA 12/84 6-228 AA 06/81 6-504 AB 07/79
5-206 AB 02/76 6-228M AA 06/81 6-511 AA 04/87
5-207 AB 01/81 6-229 AA 06/81 6-512 AA 07/79
5-208 AB 02/85 6-231 AD 05/82 6-513 AC 04/87
5-209 AJ 01/77 6-232 AA 03/83 6-521 AE 10/84
5-210 AG 01/77 6-232C AA 03/83 6-522 AF 03/83
5-301 AD 06/89 6-232F AA 04/82 6-522L AA 03/83
5-302 AK 06/89 6-232M AG 06/81 6-523 AA 06/81
5-302M AF 10/78 6-232T AA 03/83 6-524 AB 06/81
5-303 AE 11/81 6-233 AB 03/83 6-525 AB 07/79
5-303fo AB 02/76 6-233C AA 04/82 6-526 AA 07/79
5-304 AB 01/81 6-233D AA 03/83 6-527 AE 06/81
5-305 AA 06/87 6-233F AA 03/83 6-531 AD 06/81
5-306 AA 01/81 6-233R AA 06/81 6-532 AC 04/82
5-307 AD 04/87 6-233T AA 06/81 6-533 AC 04/82
5-308 AD 04/87 6-234 AB 04/82 6-533H AA 06/81
6-234F AA 04/82 6-533R AA 06/81
6- 1 AG 02/79 6-234T AA 06/81 6-536 AA 06/81
6- 2 AH 03/83 6-235 AD 03/83 6^537 AA 06/81
6-001 AE 06/81 6-237 AA 06/81 6-551 AA 10/84
6-002 AC 06/81 6-238 AA 06/81 6-552 AA 08/82
6-002M AB 06/81 6-238L AB 06/81 6-553 AB 07/79
6-003 AC 06/81 6-238M AB 06/81 6-554 AA 07/79
6-010 AA 01/80 6-239 AB 06/81 6-555 AA 10/84
6-010M AA 06/81 6-251 AB 10/83 6-591 AB 03/85
6-011 AB 06/81 6-252 AB 06/81 6-592 AB 09/78
6-012 AE 04/82 6-253 AA 05/82 6-593 AB 09/78
6-012M AA 01/80 6-254 AG 12/79
6-201 AB 06/81 6-291 AB 03/85 7- 1 AA 02/72
6-202 AA 06/81 6-292 AB 06/81 7-001 AC 06/87
6-203 AA 01/80 6-293 AB 09/78 7-002 AB 09/85
6-204 AA 07/79 6-294 AB 06/81 7-101 AA 02/88
F1AD
05/90 Restricted B
MIRAGE F
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT Jif^ "^&S^
.^^^L
BREGUET AVIATION
^^ Restricted MAINTENANCE MANUAL 02
INDEX DES PAGES

L'asterjsque indique les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
ORIGINAL ISSUE
7-102 AF 02/77 9-108 AA 11/77

7-103 AE 12/87 9-110 AA 06/76
7-103M AD 12/87 9-111 AA 06/75
7-103R AB 06/85 9-112 AA 02/76
7-104 AE 07/86 9-113 AA 10/81
7-104M AB 12/87 9-113H AA 10/81
7-105 AD 01/86 9-113R AA 10/81
7-106 AD 01/86 9-114 AA 02/76
7-107 AD 12/87 9-120 AA 07/84
7-108 AD 06/85 9-121 AA 11/87
9-122 AA 11/87
8- 1 AC 12/77 9-123 AA 01/81
8-001 AA 11/76 9-124 AA 01/81
8-101 AA 12/80 9-201 AC 10/87
8-102 AD 06/85 9-202 AA 10/87
8-103 AD 06/85 9-203 AB 09/80
8-104 AF 09/85 9-204 AB 06/87
8-105 AG 11/87 9-205 AA 06/87
8-106 AB 09/85 9-207 AB 09/77
8-201 AB 06/83 9-209 AA 10/87
8-202 AD 09/87 9-210 AA 01/82
8-203 AF 09/87 9-211 AB 02/87
8-204 AC 07/81 9-212 AA 10/87
8-205 AF 11/85
8-206 AE 09/87
8-207 AC 09/87
8-208 AQ 09/87
8-209 AF 09/87
8-210 AA 07/77
8-211 AC 06/89
8-212 AC 11/85
8-213 AB 09/87
8-214 AD 09/87
8-215 AA 05/84
8-301 AB 06/89
8-302 AB 06/89 ,
8-303 AB 09/87
8-304 AB 12/77
9- 1 AB 07/86
9-001 AA 04/81
9-101 AE 12/88
9-101F AD 07/84
9-101M AC 07/84
9-102 AA 11/87
9-104 AE 02/79
9-105 AB 03/79
9-106 AB 07/76
9-107 AB 03/79
F1AD
05/90 Resti'icted C /D
BREGUET AVIATION ^f^P3^^^
lL^^-^X. MIRAGE
,
F
__

LIST OF AIRCRAFT MODI FICA TIONS WHICH HA VE RESUL TED
IN MANUA L UPDA TING
The present manual includes the modifications applicable to the aircraft basic
technical definition
Original issue of October 1977 including following modifications :
437 (FF 18) - 443 (FF 38) - 454 (FF 91) - 464 (FF 61) - 471 (FF 54) - 472 (FF 55)
493 (FF 78) -541 (FF 115)- 559 (FF 124) - FF 33 (FX 67)
Change 1 of February 1979 including following modifications :

475 (FF 147) -FX 118 (FF 135)
This change includes temporary revision No 007-02
Change 3 of June 1981 including following modification :
695 (FF 238)
Change 4 of April 1982

This change includes temporary revision No. 012-02
The re-issue dated May 1990 includes the previous updatings, and includes the following
modification :
765 (FF324)
F1AD
nc an D.»..*,!»*,»*! F/F
BREGUET AVIATION
SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION Page
PREAMBLE iii
. GENERAL INDEX OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS v/vi
0 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY 0-1
1 PARKING -MOORING 1-1
2 GROUND HANDLING 2-1
3 REPLENISHING - DRAINING 3-1
4 TIRES 4-1
5 PRE-FLIGHT AND POST-FLIGHT INSPECTIONS 5-1
6 PREPARATION FOR MISSION 6-1
7 ENGINE STARTING 7-1
8 RUN-UP- CHECK FLIGHTS 8-1
9 MISCELLANEOUS 9-1
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
ti -J>^ni
__
MIRAGE F
Restricted
INTRODUCTION
1 The Maintenance Manuals are prepared for the personnel who have the responsability of
- Servicing
- Trouble shooting
Removal-disassembly
-
-
- Reconditioning and storage
instructions, etc.
Thus :
(1) Manual 01 «GENERAL» gives some general information on the aircraft.
It summarizes :
-The safety measures to be taken during the various tasks, which should normally be known and
It defines :
- The maintenance cycles and the various inspections recommended for the equipment.
AC
07-75 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJ>>~uZ~\L.
BREGUET AVIATION, __ _ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted
It gives :
- parking-mooring,
- ground handling,
- tyres,
- pre-flight and post-flight inspections,
- engine starting,
- run-up.
Section 0 «GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY» contains general information data and
(3) Manual 10 «NWS GENERAL» is a collection of the parts common to the NWS Manuals.
Gives information necessary to understand the diagrams (symbols used in the diagrams, diagram
-
AC
11-75 Restricted iv
/
MIRAGE
s-
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT^ \.: F

BREGUET AVIATION^-^1'
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
SUB Pilot
Servicing
Structure Take-off Electrical
Flight Hydraulic
CHAP General and and landing Power-plant system
environment
instructions controls system
Genera! General General General General General General General General

and- safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Maintenance
cycle
1 periodic Wings Main L/G power power
Mooring controls dnve furnishings
maintenance generation generation
operations
points Lighting
Tightening forward Pitch Air
Ground Main L/G internal
2 torques section Fuel system
' handling controls doors and conditioning
1 nspection (up to
doors external
frame 22)

and Failure
systems
Engine
List of various Pilot
Draining
Pre-f light
Removable Engine
post-flight controls tires check and
components
inspections control
Preparation L'G and door

Transporta¬
6 for controls
tion
mission
Engine Brakes and

7 braking
starting
system
Anti-Shimmy
Run-up
8 and steering
Check flights
controls
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
NWS radio NWS
SUB NWS NWS
NWS and flight control NWS Oata
CHAP control and operational Wiring
general communi¬ electronics armament recording
and AP
systems
General General General General General Gnnrrnl General General

0 information information information information information information mtormation information
and safety and safety and salety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Use of Index of
testing and Flight electrical
V/UHF Pitot Armament Gun
1 trouble control and
system system panel system
shooting electronics electronic
Rocket
26 V 400 Hi UHF Air data Wiring Fatigue
2 Autopilot Radar launching
meter
supply system system diagrams
system

3 Gyro system
Close combat
VOR/ILS Air-to-Air
S IFF
marker missile
systems
Navigation Radar
6 system detector
Radar
Electronic
7 counter-
altimeter
measures
Reconnais¬
Radio
8 sance
compass
system
Towing
system
9
practice
targets
AJ
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jT^-^-tt /VlIlxMvJ'C l
BREGUET AVIATION ^2?^ .
Restricted
1 - MAINTENANCE MANUAL COMPOSITION

A A title page identifying the publication.
D A table of contents which lists the Sections making up the Manual.
2- B REAKDOWN OF A MAINTENANCE MANUAL SECTION

Sub-Section Sub-Section title

No
0 - General
1 - Description and operation
5 - Inspection-Check-Adjustment
6 - Cleaning-Corrosion preventive treatment-
Painting
7 - Storage-Preservation-Transportation
8 - Repair
NOTE :
(1) Maintenance and lubrication are covered by Sub-Section 6.
(3) Sub- Section 8 covers, the reconditioning operations for the items of the system to which the
(4)Any Sub-Section which is not applicable is not shown.
AC
06-74 Restricted lx
BREGUET
/U^t"U
AVIATION^SS^^^fS"5^
MIRAGE F
Restricted

aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
an aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
:
components; it is illustrated whenever necessary and the internal index numbers are given in the
components.
AC
06-74 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT }L^>>~U--\L
BREGUET AVIATION^<<c£ _
MIRAGE F
_ Restricted
(1) Each Maintenance operation is described in the Sub-Section corresponding to its category.
However, the standard designation suffixes are shown only in the «list of various products and
the operation.
if necessary, by an indication in order to avoid any confusion in their location. Reference shall be

B Fuselage doors
AC
06-74 Restricted xi
BREGUET AVIATION,
r^xf
_ ^
MIRAGE F
Restricted
C Wing doors
centreline to the wing tip.

the trailing edge.
V138.
E Stabilator doors. Same principle as for the wings.
-functional diagrams
- wiring diagrams.
indicator lights.
made.
charts :
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted

" Single-pole
A control switch Single-pole
42R contactor
Fuse-breaker
I
I- Coaxial connector
Terminal lug Box

1-wire lead
A Double-pole
Sub-assembly terminals control switch
1
Three-pole
2-wire lead circuit-breaker
Connector D- -#-
Double-pole
contactor
I ' 2 3 | Single pole
3-wire lead
on equipment
Spring-loaded,
both directions
42Z Single-pole
pushbutton
X
Double-pole
Independent ", n-wire lead
control switch
connector
Si ngle pole | Spring-loaded,

<P Bus bars O I 0
Crossing without conmtrol switch / one direction
Double-pole
connection
pushbutton
& &
(J) Light or lamp
Crossing with
Magnetically-held
connection
pushbutton
Relay
Coaxial connector
-e- Press-to-test
light
Single-pole
double-throw
Antenna switch
Double-pole
-w- Diode ,|L. DC ground

double-throw
switch
Time delay
relay
$
^Z^-Ti
0- Pushbutton
light
Zener diode
^-H-*-
Double-pole
triple-throw
Flashing
AC ground switch
-\ r Resistor ^tr relay
AC
06-74 Restricted xiji/xiv xiii/xiv
BREGUET AVIATION -<S&=
MIRAGE F
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS :
21 Chassis ground
NPN
q Computing power ground transistor
P4
h© 6 1 Terminal 6 of
test connector P4
TDX3
Differential TDR PNP
o synchro transistor
CDX
o transmitter
o n-position
o
selector switch
o
o Thyristor
o
TR
*** Resolver
RS
_ Triac
-+1 Relay LV
H§)~ ^ Linvar
Magnetron
-S
Capacitor
Cam-actuator
1 contact
0 Thermostat
-c Potentiometer Thyratron
Fuse
-c=zf>- Thermistor
Initiator
<c^
Comparator
[ [~ |J Photo-electric cell
**-/ M ) Motor
Inductor
Amplifier
/// é q ) : Generator Transformer
Failure Electronic
detector unit
( M G ) "Motor-generator
# Single TR
©Tachometer- Double TR
generator
AC
06-74 Restricted xv
BREGUET AVIATION ^S^3
Restricted

Mechanical link
0 or Cam
Mechanical clutch
-©
-HEr- Mechanical differential
FLUID SYSTEM GRAPHI C SYMBOLS
Filter (3=a Float needle valve
4 Manually-operated cock

(thermistor)
Pressure reducing valve ~^- Electrically-operated cock.
Outwards or inwards Float switch

relief valve
r Non-return flapper
[33 Pressure switch
EP = Electro-pump
Fuel stop valve
B P = Pump
T Stop air valve

CD
JiL Filler plug

m Pressure transmitter

system
System No. 2
.Hydraulic Ancillary systems Systems other than
hydraulic systems
systems
zee: Emergency system
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

dimension
&
AND
the output state is 1 if, and only if, all
the input states are 1 's .
>1 OR
the output state is if, and only if,
1
one or more input states are 's . 1
1
NOT
y-
&
NAND (NOT-AND)
D-
a IIthe input states are 's . 1
5*1
NOR (OR-NOT)
D-
one or more input states are ' s . 1
LOGIC EQUATIONS
Sjgn x : AND operation
Example : S = (A + B + C) (D + E)
Condition S = (Information A or B or no information C)
or S = B and D or E
AC
BREGUET
LJ^-^sl
AVIATION^cJ23^ ^
MIRAGE F
Restricted
IDENTIFICATION OF PAGES
the Manual number in the top R/H corner.

-


- the next two digits show the page rank within the Sub-Section (01 to 99).
B The figures are assigned numbers within a Section (1 to x) .
7- CROSS-REFERENCES
A From text to text

nual )
from Section to Section
:tion )> Manual/Section
within a same sectior
>n )

8- UNITSOF MEASURE USED
units.
dimensions, etc.).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted
1 - PUBLICATION DEVELOPMENT PRINCIPLE
B Actual revision which permanently incorporates information in the publications. Such information
pages).
A Procedure

insertion of new pages and replacement of modified pages.
-
- systematic replacement of the title page and list of effective pages which serves as a guide to the
B Page numbering
Second case - Insertion of one or more new pages between two existing pages.
of letters I, 0 and Z.
3rd insertion
Successive
2nd insertion
insertions
1st insertion
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRS
' T i U VWXY
L 4- j
2 pages
Simultaneous _J
insertions
3 pages
AC xix
06-74 Restricted
BREGUET
ZU^'irAl
AVIATION^^^^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^C^^^^^î. Restricted
Example :
- 2 pages : they will be numbered 6H and 6R.

consists in showing up the two states simultaneously in the publication, i.e. post- and pre-modification.
- both the pre- and post-modification pages will bear the same number. «MOD...X» will be shown
text which correspond to such illustrations. . .
AR («arrière») = Rear L («lisse») = Stringer

C («cadre») = Frame M («médiane») = Middle
AC
02-80 Restricted xx
BREGUET
/L==^-~'t:'\l
AVIATION^^ÏiP3^^^
MIRAGE F
^S^-^X. Restricted MANUAL 02
SECTION 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
- General characteristics 0-101

Definition of the aircraft weight (See aircraft weighing and balancing manual)
0-2 SAFETY MEASURES
-Safety measures to be observed for personnel protection See 01-0

- Instructions to be observed when working on systems , See 01-0
- General instructions for starting the aircraft and operating the various systems .... Ses 01-0
- Instructions for using the ground support equipment See 01-0
Treatment of surfaces contaminated with fire-extinguishing products 0-201
- Manual opening and closing of U/C doors and speedbrakes 0-203
- General principles for A/C preparation 0-206
- Safety measures for run-up 0-209
-Safety measures for armed or loaded aircraft 0-211
- Safety measures to be taken on a crashed aircraft . 0-213
- Safety measures relative to brake unit fire 0-219
- Instructions relative to engine fire 0-220
- Instructions for use of LP main cock See 06-0
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No. Page
1 INTRODUCING THE AIRCRAFT 0-102

3 OPERATION OF U/C DOORS AND SPEEDBRAKES 0-205
4 DANGER AREAS AROUND AIRCRAFT DURING RUN-UP 0-210
5 SAFETY MEASURES ON CRASHED AIRCRAFT 0-217
6 SEAT SAFETY PIN ROPE 0-218
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
Length , 15.07 m 49.44 ft

Span , 8.42 m 27.61 ft
Height in relation to ground (load 1 ). , 4.53 m 14.85 ft
WING UNIT
Reference area (without slotted slats) 25 sq.m 269 sq.ft

Reference chord (in symmetry plane) , 4.69 m 15.38 ft
Leading edge sweep-back 47°34'
Anhedral , 5°
Setting 0°
FUSELAGE
Length (with engine ring) 14.30 m 46.90 ft
STABILATOR
Reference area 2 x 3.12 sq.m 2 x 33.57 sq.ft

Leading edge sweep-back , 50°
Dihedral , 1°30'
FIN
Reference area 4.59 sq.m 49.4 sq.ft

Leading edge sweep-back , 57°
UNDERCARRIAGE
Wheel base 4.87 m 15.97 ft

Wheel track 2.48 m 8.13ft
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
(8.13ft)
8,42 m (27.6 ft)
4,87 m (15.97 ft)

15,25 m (50.03 ft)
ô
FIGURE 1 - PRESENTATION DE L'AVION

INTRODUCING THE AIRCRAFT
AC
BREGUET AVIATION, _
/LJ^TU. MIRAGE F
TREATMENT OF SURFACES
CONTAMINATED WITH FIRE EXTINGUISHING PRODUCTS
1 - SCOPE
This operation is to inform the users about the measures to be taken so as to avoid the harmful
effects of certain fire extinguishing products on the airframe which may add to damage caused by
fire.
2- GENERAL
A Various types of fire extinguishing products :

-halogen-containing agents such as fréon, tribromofluor (T.B.F.),
-foam type FLEB70,
- dry powder type GRANITO,
- carbon dioxide C02
B Use of above products :

- halogen-containing agents for major fires (no longer to be used),
- foam for major fires,
- powder for minor fires,
- C02 for minor fires.
C Effects of the use of fire extinguishing products :

halogen-containing agents :
-
When in contact with hot sheets, the halogen-containing products decompose into acids causing
intercrystalline corrosion.
THE CORROSION PREVENTIVE TREATMENT IS TO BE APPLIED IMMEDIATELY IN
ORDER TO PRECLUDE THE CONTINUATION OF THE HARMFUL EFFECTS OF FIRE EXTIN¬
GUISHING PRODUCTS.
- Foam :
Mildly corrosive effect
- Dry powder :
Abrasive effect on moving parts
- Carbon dioxide :
No known effect.
A Ground support equipment

- A/C cleaning unit.
4- MATERIALS
- White-spirit.
- NETAL AC or
-ARDROX6025
- Potassium dichromate solution type 1 .
5- OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT AFTER USING FIRE EXTINGUISHING
When using a fire extinguishing product, it is necessary to know its chemical composition in
order to classify it into one of the above mentionned categories, thus enabling to determine the proce¬
dure to be followed (see hereunder).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ ^-"-^1 MIRAGE
I l\#~\ V^ U.
11 F
I
BREGUET AVIATION^*}- ^ . . ,,..,., n,
For treatment of the engine, refer IMMEDIATELY TO INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO

ENGINE FIRE (see 02-0).
A Halogen-containing products
(1) General principle
CAUTION :
AS DERIVATIVES OF HALOGEN-CONTAINING FIRE EXTINGUISHING PRODUCTS ARE
HIGHLY REACTIVE, ACTION MUST BE TAKEN WITHIN 4 HOURS OF EXTINGUISHING
THE FIRE.
First eliminate all the «lightly adhering» residues by rinsing.

-
Neutralize - even in the remotest parts - the hydrochloric, hydrobromic and hydrofluoric
-
products by transforming them into soluble substances which can later be removed by rinsing.
- Passivate the surfaces pending a more complete protective treatment to be applied the first
time the aircraft is grounded.
(2) Treatment of the airframe
- Unbind and free the electrical cables hindering access to contaminated areas.
- Remove the components, pipes and electrical cables from these areas so as to reach the airframe
easily.
-Prepare the following solution :
- emulsify 10 % of Ardrox 6025 or NETAC AC with 10 % of white-spirit, by stirring the
mixture for 2 or 3 minutes,
- add 80 % of water while continuing to stir the mixture.
- Spray the cleaning product for a few seconds under a pressure of 3 to 4 bar (42 to 56 psi),
proceeding from lower sections up to upper sections. Clean the airframe step by step, a small area
at a time.
- Brush, allow to act for approximately 3 minutes.
- Thoroughly rinse with running water under low pressure.
- Dry all the parts wet by rinsing water.
Look for water pockets (structural box lower section, double skin).
- Spray a light coat of type 1 solution diluted in two to five volumes of water over all surfaces.
- Allow to dry.
- IMMEDIATELY remove the dichromate crystals (yellow trace) with brush and water.
- Rinse, then dry.
B Foam
Any foam residues are to be removed from the airframe.

Foam does not cause corrosion, except that due to water contained in the foam.
Carry out the same procedure as for the halogen-containing products, but do not spray the coat
of type 1 solution.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
C Dry powder
Any powder traces are to be removed from the airframe. Clean the moving parts because dry
powder may have abrasive effects.
- Vacuum the powder out of the structural boxes, blow it from the skins.
- Carry out the operations set forth in para. «Foam».
D Carbon dioxide
Since carbon dioxide C02 is an inert non-toxic gas, no cleaning is required. The only damage
is that caused by the fire.
6- RESTORATION
The measures described hereabove make it possible to limit the structure corrosion due to fire
extinguishing products pending the repair of the airframe.
Restoration of the aircraft must always be preceded by a complete inventory of the damage
caused by the fire to the aircraft systems and to the primary and secondary structure.
Principles related to damage evaluation and repair are given in Structural Repair Manual.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^
MIRAGE F
MANUAL OPENING AND CLOSING OF U/C DOORS
AND AIRBRAKES
(See Figure 3)
1 - SCOPE
It consists to informing the ground personnel of operation and safety measures to be taken when
operating the U/C doors and airbrakes.
2- SAFETY DEVICES
A A «GROUND SAFETY» switch is installed on the electrical supply of each circuit. On «GROUND
SAFETY» position : .
- The «DOORS» switch turns off the electrical supply of the «Closing» winding of U/C door
operating electrovalve.
- The «DIVE BK» switch turns off the circuit general supply.
B The switches are mounted on a hydraulic safety switch unit located behind door 17-04. This unit
comprises three 2-position switches «GROUND SAFETY» and «FLIGHT» which can be locked on
«GROUND SAFETY» position. They are fitted with guards hinged downward. If a guard is raised in
order to operate the switch, the door cannot be closed. Both guards for airbrakes and U/C doors are
red, the guard for «HYDR» switch in white.
- Ground position.
Open the door, tilt the guards and set the switches to «GROUND SAFETY» position. THEY ARE
LOCKED IN THIS POSITION.
Flight position.
-
UNLOCK THE SWITCHES AND SET THEM TO «FLIGHT» POSITION.
Lower the guards, close the door. -
DO NOT OPERATE SWITCHES BY MEANS OF THE GUARDS.
NOTE : (For reference) This switch unit also comprises the «HYDR» switch. The latter is installed on
the electrical supply of the ancillary isolation valve. On «GROUND SAFETY» position, it
enables to forbid the ancillary isolation function when the reservoir of system 1 is empty.
THIS SWITCH IS ONLY TO BE SET TO «GROUND SAFETY» POSITION FOR THE
GROUND HYDRAULIC TESTS.
3- OPERATION OF U/C DOORS AND AIRBRAKES
A When the A/C is on the ground operation of U/C doors and airbrakes can only be performed if the
three following conditions are met :
(1 ) Hydraulic system 1 under pressure
(2) D.C. mains switched on
(3) «DOORS» and «DIVE BK» ground safety switches on «FLIGHT» position
4- MANUAL OPENING OF U/C DOORS AND AIRBRAKE PANELS

WARNING :
IN ALL CASES, OPEN DOOR 17-04 AND SET «DOORS» AND «DIVE BK» GROUND SAFETY
SWITCHES TO «GROUND SAFETY» POSITION.
A Manual opening of U/C doors
(1) Manually unlock U/C doors
(a) For nose U/C main door, operate -from top to bottom -the uplock release lever (located ahead of
frame 12 on LH side face of nose wheel well).
(b) For upper and lower doors of each main U/C, operate - by pulling - the uplock release handle
(located behind frame 27 in each main wheel well). Return the handle to neutral position on its stowage
clip.
AC
1°~77 Restricted 0-203
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL>*îrU.
BREGUET AVIATION^jL _ ^
MIRAGE F
(c) In order to obtain complete opening of the doors, apply a progressive effort to the lower edge of
the door, level with the jack, so as to expel the fluid from the door jack. At the end of travel, a slight
effort will cause the door jack to be locked in open position.
B Manual opening of airbrake panels
(1) For each panel, manually unlock the hooking latch by means of the multiple wrench pin which
is to be inserted into the hole provided in the latch. Actuate the pin in a backward motion until un¬
locking is obtained.
(2) To obtain complete opening of the panel, apply a progressive effort to the extreme rear edge so as
to expel the fluid from the jack.
5- ADDITIONAL SAFETY MEASURES FOR A MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
A During a maintenance inspection or an important work on aircraft, which generally requires the
use of hydraulic and electrical power supply systems, the following measures should betaken so as to
avoid any false step and to improve safety :
(1 ) tripping of «U/C control» fuse-breaker (on circuit breaker box) ;
(2) installation of a safety pin on airbrake control switch (on throttle lever).
6- CLOSING OF U/C DOORS AND AIRBRAKE PANELS
Normal locking of U/C doors and airbrakes takes place electro-hydraulically.
WARNING :
IN ORDER TO AVOID ANY FALSE STEP, ONLY ONE FLIGHT LINE TECHNICIAN WILL
PERFORM THE OPERATION. HE WILL TAKE ALL NECESSARY MEASURES TO CLEAR
THE DANGER AREAS «SWEPT» BY DOORS AND AIRBRAKES (PERSONS AND EQUIP¬
MENT). HE WILL START THE OPERATION ONLY IF OPTIMUM SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
ARE MET.
Consequently :
-check that all the hooking latches of doors and U/C are unlocked ; if not, refer to para. 7
hereafter ;
- switch on the DC mains (battery switched on or external power receptacle connected) ;
- set hydraulic system 1 under pressure ;
- if needed, operate «U/C control» fuse-breaker ;
- set «DOORS» and «DIVE BK» ground safety switches to «FLIGHT» position ;
WARNING :
DOORS AND AIRBRAKES ARE GOING TO CLOSE SHARPLY
- close door 17.04 and check that each latch is effectively engaged ;
- disconnect the hydraulic and electrical supply receptacles, switch off the battery.
WARNING :
WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE, WITH DOOR 17.04 CLOSED, THE U/C DOORS AND AIR¬
BRAKE PANELS ARE GOING TO CLOSE. TAKE ALL NECESSARY MEASURES SO AS TO
FREE THE DANGER AREAS.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/L^>^rU /Vlll\MV»7C I
BREGUET AVIATION .^ûP1^^^ , . , . . .. . . . M
7- UNLOCKING OF A DOOR OR U/C HOOKING LATCH IN CASE OF UNWANTED LOCKING
- During an A/C inspection, or when the doors are open, check that the door and U/C latches are
in OPEN position ; if not, unlock them as follows :
(1) Dooruplock
- Operate the door unlocking manual control
(2) U/C uplocks

- Latch, or latches, may be unlocked by applying pressure to system 1 through an hydraulic power
unit or during engine starting.
- Set the door safety switch to «GROUND» position ;
- Downlock the doors of the nose and main U/C ;
- Once the system No 1 is pressurized, ensure that the latches are open ;
- Set the «DOORS» switch to «FLIGHT» position .
WARNING :
-DO.QRS ARE GOING TO CLOSE SHARPLY
- Close door 17.04 and check that each latch is effectively engaged ;
- Disconnect the hydraulic power receptacle.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
C.18
Déverrouillage des vol

d'aérofreins
Unlocking of speedbrake
panels
Boîtier interrupteurs SECURITES

SAFETY switch unit
Soute de train principale :

Soute de train avant : levier de déverrouillage poignée de déverrouillage
des verrous d'accrochage
des verrous d'accrochage
Main wheel well : Uplock
Nose wheel well : up/ock re/ease lever release handle
FIGURE 3 - MANOEUVRE DES TRAPPES DE TRAIN ET DES AEROFREINS
OPERATION OF U/C DOORS AND SPEEDBRAKES
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £JS^-^>L ** f\M Vj C
» I
BREGUET AVI ATION^-^^^^ MAMMA I rn
/C^^^Z^ Restricted MANUAL 02
GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR AIRCRAFT PREPARATION
1 - SCOPE
Summary of general principles and rules for aircraft preparation.
- Refer to :
- safety measures to be taken for personnel protection (see 01-0),
- instructions to be followed when working on systems (see 01-0).
- general instructions for starting and operating the various aircraft systems (see 01-0),
- instructions for using ground support equipment (see 01-0).
2- SAFETY MEASURES
A Aircraft armed
- If the aircraft is armed, take the corresponding safety measures (see 02-0).
B In the cockpit :
- seat safety pin line installed (see figure 6),

-warning horn switch OFF (prevents any operation of the oscillators controlled by certain failure
detector channels),
- pitot and angle-of -attack probe heater switch OFF,
- standby horizon switch OFF (prevents starting of the instrument),
- gyro control unit switch OFF (no rotation of the gyros of gyro center and of emergency gyro-
magnetic compass),
- gunsight selector switch OFF (prevents the gyro from rotating),
-radar selector switch OFF (prevents any accident to personnel if the radar is emitting, and
also any heating of components),
- electric pump switch OFF,
- do not operate the flight controls and trims : no pressure in the servo-control systems,
- armament master switch OFF (guard shut down, cover and safety pin installed),
- undercarriage control lever in down position.
C Outside
- door 17-04 open : «DOORS» and «DIVE BK» ground safety switches on «GROUND SAFETY»
position (see 02-0),
- blanking covers and protective covers installed,
- clear danger areas «swept» by doors and airbrakes.
AC
BREGUET
W^J^-^nl
AVIATION^SF3^,^
MIRAGE
......... «
F
SAFETY MEASURES FOR RUN-UP
1 - SCOPE
This operation is to inform the ground personnel about the safety measures to be taken impera¬
tively when running up the engine. It recalls the main safety measures and should comply with the
safety instructions stated by the general regulations in force.
2- SAFETY MEASURES
A Should the 7500 RPM (89%) power be reached or exceeded, it is mandatory to move the A/C to a
clean prepared run-up area (with special pressure locking chocks).
B Danger areas around the A/C are delimited by safety fences.
C Emergency fire fighting equipment should be located near the A/C.
D Ground personnel protection should be ensured by helmets and vibration preventing belts.
E Connect ground telephone.
F Engine run-up should be performed with :

- main U/C doors open (See 02-0).
- brake chute removed
- canopy closed
- A/C boarding ladder removed
- parking brake applied
- DOORS 24-03i AND 24-09i CLOSED
- doors 26-00 - 26-04i - 26-08i - 27-08i - 30-05 - 26-07/1 open
NOTE : The other doors to be open are determined according to the type of checks to be carried out,
in the sheets describing particular run-up types.
G The flight line technician chosen is responsible for the run-up and application of these measures.
AE
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ZONE DEGAGEE A L'ARRIERE

- 25 mètres (83 ft) avec déflecteur de jet
- 60 mètres (200 ft) sans déflecteur de jet
AFT CLEAR AREA
- 25 metres (83 ft) with jet deflector
- 60 metres (200 ft) without jet deflector
TT/4rd (45°)
FIGURE 4- ZONES DANGEREUSES AUTOUR DE L'AVION AU POINT FIXE

DANGER AREAS AROUND AIRCRAFT DURING RUN-UP
AC
BREGUET
T V.*
AVIATION^-u"-.-. '-^>
MIRAGE F
^ Restricted MANUAL 02
SAFETY MEASURES FOR ARMED OR LOADED AIRCRAFT
1 - PURPOSE
This operation to inform the ground personnel about the safety measures to be taken in case of
is
an armed or loaded A/C. It recalls concisely and incompletely the safety measures and should comply
with the safety instructions stated by the general regulations in force.
2- SUMMARY OF DEFINITIONS
A Armed aircraft
- Aircraft whose guns are ready for firing. On the weapon, the compartment aligned with the tube
contains a cartridge, safety is ensured by cut out of electrical firing circuits.
- Aircraft in rocket or missile connected configuration with ground safeties removed or cancelled
- Bombs ready for use, ground safeties removed.
B Loaded aircraft
Aircraft loaded with ammunition corresponding to the carrying facilities of the A/C, i.e. :
- cartridges positioned in ammunition boxes, with guns loaded but not armed.
- rocket-launchers loaded, ground safeties in position.
- missiles in position and connected, ground safeties in position.
- bombs hooked under carrying devices, jettison safety wires hooked with ground safeties mounted
on weapon devices.
3 - SAFETY MEASURES
WARNING-DANGER :
MANDATORILY FOLLOW THE SEQUENCE OF SAFETY OPERATIONS.

A General safety principles
(1 ) Outside the hangars :
(a) Aircraft ARMED or LOADED

- Head the aircraft towards a clear area.
- Determine the parking areas of armed or loaded aircraft, and the spaces between said aircraft in
relation to the type of load.
- Indicate the armed or loaded aircraft by means of appropriate signal panels.
(b) Aircraft ARMED

- No operation, repair, or preparation is permitted.
(c) Aircraft LOADED

- Certain limited operations which refer to elementary maintenance (adjustment, repair or
preparation for use) and which do not require important immobilizing of the A/C, can be performed. If
needed, they will be carried out in the presence of an armament specialist and, in any case, after
application of the safety measures (distance-orientation).
- No work can be done if it involves :
- use of an equipment producing a flame or uncontrolled heat.
- energization of the gun-firing, bomb, rocket, missile or emergency jettisoning circuits.
WARNING-DANGER :
THE EMERGENCY JETTISON CIRCUITS ARE DIRECTLY SUPPLIED FROM THE
BATTERY : DEPRESSING ONE OF THE EMERGENCY JETTISON BUTTONS CAUSES THE
INITIATORS TO FIRE, EVEN IF BATTERY SWITCH IS SET TO «OFF».
(2) Inside the hangars :
- The jettisoning circuits of the carrying devices should be inoperative (initiator connection doors
open, initiators disconnected).
- Exceptionally, maintenance operations can be carried out on a LOADED aircraft, for short
duration operations and if the A/C has been previously DISARMED and indicated by means of an
appropriate signal panel.
(3) It is forbidden to handle explosives (cartridges or initiators) in front of SHF transmitters (radars)
AC
01-77 Restricted °"211
BREGUET
ti^J^r^.
AVIATIONôP^Ô
MIRAGE F
^^^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
B Arming and disarming the aircraft

Safeties are to be removed or installed in compliance with instructions in OPERATIONS TO BE
CARRIED OUT UPON AIRCRAFT DEPARTURE FOR OR RETURN FROM OPERATIONAL
MISSIONS (02-6).
C In cockpit, make sure that :
-armament master switch is set to OFF position, with guard lowered, protective cover and safe¬
ty pin installed.
- «control stick» trigger is folded down and gun firing safety is engaged.
- on armament control panel :
- no weapon selector button is depressed,
- «550» switch on «OFF»,
- «INST- DE LAY-SAFE» selector switch on «SAFE».
D - In LH wheel well :
check that the ground firing connector has no shunt.
E Safety measures depending on the particular weapon :
(1) Emergency jettisoning

-Safety pin fitted to all load carrying devices.
(2) Guns
- Gun connectors (on control boxes) disconnected.
(3) Rocket-launchers
- Doors of jettison initiators on multi-purpose pylons open.
- Safety lever of each rocket-launcher open and safety pin with streamer in position.
(4) Bombs
Doors of jettisoning initiators on multi-purpose pylons (wing inboard and outboard stations) or
-
four-bomb pylon : open and initiators disconnected (outboard stations and four-bomb pylon)
- Safety pins on arming fuses (nose cone and base).
- Safety pin installed on initiators of multi-purpose pylons or four-bomb pylon.
NOTE : The initiators are connected to the firing circuit. :

- on the multi-purpose pylons, through the connecting door which, in closed position, ensures
electrical connection.
- on wing outboard station pylons and four-bomb pylon, through the connecting plug locked
on each initiator head.
- Aerodynamic flap open with safety pin located on bomb-launcher adaptor type 65A.
(5) AI R-TO-AI R close combat missiles
(a) R550 missiles
On missile-launcher :
- aerodynamic flap open, with safety pin and streamer installed.

- pip-pin installed on unlocking mechanism.
On missile :
- cover installed on proximity fuse.
- cover installed on homing head (irdome).
AG
BREGUET AVIATION
i^^trVL
^(5^ ^g^^
MIRAGE
.. . ... . nn
, .
F
(7) Al R-TO-AI R gun firing practice targets
(a) Target S90-B and container-uncoiler VRAC 500

On towing stub :
- front and rear initiator electrical connectors disconnected.
On target S90-B :
- explosive bolt electrical connection disconnected from connector box (protective cover)
- towing yoke tilted rearwards and secured by a ground safety pin
- lock in contact with stub flange, with ground safety pin installed
On container-uncoiler VRAC 500 :
- locking pin fitted into release unit pyrotechnical unit, with safety pin installed
- pyrotechnical unit electrical connector disconnected.
CAUTION :
A 3 x 1 m (9.84 x 3.28 ft) SAFETY AREA, DELIMITED AFT OF CONTAINER AND ALONG
CONTAINER CENTERLINE, SHOULD BE PROVIDED WITH A STANDARD BOARD
BEARING THE FOLLOWING INSCRIPTION :
«WARNING - RISK OF PANEL EJECTION»
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," TW-X /V\|r\/-\V^7L. I
BREGUET AVIATIONî_~-
^-w. ^^^
^-=^> .
Restricted , »a a mi i a i
MANUAL «««
02
SAFETY MEASURES TO BE TAKEN ON A CRASHED AIRCRAFT

(see figures 5 and 6)
1 - GENERAL
This sheet provides the main instructions which shall be applied immediately in the case of a
crashed aircraft. In most cases, the first operation on a crashed aircraft will be performed by
the fire fighting and rescue team, whose main task is:
-to prevent or put out the fire,
-to rescue the pilot,
-to make the A/C inert.
As regards fighting of aircraft fires, comply with the instructions stated by the general re¬
gulations in force. This chapter dealing with initial safety measures, is based on the assump¬
tion that the fire is already extinguished or has not broken out.
Action on a crashed A/C may be analyzed as follows:

-immediate safety/rescue measures,
-complementary safety measures,
-removal of aircraft to a safe area.
A - Special tools
-Adjustable wrench M.31 025 (door 1 7.04)
B - Ground support equipment
-Rescue vehicle specially equipped with:

-pole (to set the engine to idle position)
-forward crash towing system MS1317.
-Hoisting crane (F > 55 kN - 55 tons approx. - 62 U.S. tons approx.)
3 - IMMEDIATE SAFETY/RESCUE MEASURES
This study is divided into three sections:

-methods of access to the cockpit,
-safety operations,
-pilot rescue.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^Zsxr°
L=J>^rU
^g*^
MIRAGE F
A Methods of access to cockpit
Access to the cockpit can be gained only from above, after manual opening, embrittlement or
breaking of the canopy.
(1 ) Aircraft not inverted and engine stopped
If the pilot did not open the canopy, it should be unlocked from the outside, and then removed. If
manual opening is impossible, proceed to canopy pyrotechnic embrittlement, then to disintegration
(see procedure in para. A (1) (b)).
(a) Opening by manual unlocking

- Place the multiple wrench on the male square at the front LH side of the canopy.
NOTE : A multiple wrench is to be found at door 1 7.04.
Turn the wrench one revolution clockwise.

-
Open the canopy up to its hooking point by moving it upwards.
-
- Disconnect the pyrotechnic fuze retaining cable then disconnect the fuzes.
- Remove the hinge arm pin by pulling the ring.
- Move the canopy upwards and tilt it rearwards until the hooks are disengaged, lift the canopy and
remove it on the side.
(b) Canopy pyrotechnic embrittlement

-Move the one side of the fuselage, break the glass panel, pull the ring to embrittle the canopy.
WARNING :
IN ORDER TO AVOID POSSIBLE PROJECTION OF PLEXIGLAS PIECES INTO THE EYES,
DO NOT TURN THE HEAD TOWARD THE CANOPY AT THE TIME OF EMBRITTLEMENT.
- Once the canopy is embrittled, disintegrate it by pulling the pieces of plexiglas outwards, then tilt
the larger remaining part of the canopy rearwards while having it swivel around its dacron hinge.
(c) Breaking the canopy
If removal cannot be achieved by any of the methods described above, the canopy must be cut out
or broken, starting as close as possible to the frame to avoid injuring the pilot, then tearing away the
pieces of plexiglas.
(2) Aircraft inverted and engine stopped
Access to the cockpit is impossible without any hoisting device.
To hoist the aircraft, proceed as follows :

- on either side of the cabin front section, break the plexiglas panels blanking the «crash hauling»
holes,
- install the crash hauling system,
- hoist the aircraft using the crane, embrittle or break the canopy (see para. A (1) (b) (c)).
(3) Aircraft not inverted and engine still running
Engine at idle : refer to para. A (1 ).

-
Engine still running (engine speed > idle) : in order to avert danger from the air intake suction
-
zone, it is mandatory to proceed as described below.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Lj>~i~\L
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F=^^<0.
MIRAGE F
^£^^^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
- move back to the fuselage dorsal fin behind the cockpit, facing the aircraft front section (pass
on the wings so as to avoid the suction zones),
- break the glass panel of the pyrotechnic embrittlement system ;
WARNING :
IN ORDER TO AVOID POSSIBLE PROJECTION OF PLEXIGLAS PIECES INTO THE EYES,
DO NOT TURN THE HEAD TOWARD THE CANOPY WHEN EMBRITTLEMENT TAKES
PLACE.
- pull the control until canopy embrittlement is obtained,

- move back to the fuselage dorsal fin in order to :
- disintegrate the canopy (see procedure in para A (1) (b)),
- set the engine to idle position by pulling back the throttle lever, using a boat hook.
(4) Aircraft inverted and engine still running

Firefighting and rescue crew action to choke engine.
B Safety operations
(1) Seat safety pins (to be found in a pocket, on LH rear section of pilot's parachute container)
Three safety pins should be mandatorily installed :
- ejection gun safety pin, so as to avoid untimely ejection of the pilot's seat,
- drogue gun safety pin,
- firing unit safety pin, if the canopy embrittlement system has not been used.
WARNING :
THE SHEARS INITIATOR MUST NOT BE FITTED WITH ITS SAFETY PIN.
(2) Aircraft safety devices

- Bring the throttle lever to «stop» position, pulling it backwards and operating the red flap so as
to override the idle stop.
-Set «LP MAIN COCK», «AB MAIN COCK», «LP PUMP RH» and «LP PUMP LH» switches to
«OFF» (these four switches are located on the LH console).
- On failure warning panel, set the battery switch to «off» position.
- Set the armament master switch to «off» position and lower the guard.
- Close both oxygen cocks (on ejection seat oxygen unit).
C Pilot rescue
WARNING :
DO NOT GRIP THE YELLOW AND BLACK HANDLE AT THE LOWER SECTION OF THE
SEAT (SEAT EJECTION CONTROL). DO NOT TOUCH THE QUICK-RELEASE FITTING.
First of all, the pilot should be separated from his seat ; to do this, actuate the yellow handle at
the LH lower section of the seat (separation of seat and pilot). This also triggers the shears initiator
(cutting of the cord connecting the pilot's parachute to the seat stabilizer drogue).
NOTE : The pilot is evacuated with his parachute.
(1 ) Pilot rescue with jib of rescue vehicle
Pass the parachute harness straps in the hooks of the hoisting beam and guide the pilot while
hoisting him clear of the cockpit.
(2) Pilot rescue with strap
If possible, unfasten the pack on which the pilot is sitting (fastener of the lowering line as well as
both quick-release fasteners on either side of the pack). The rescuer should face forward with one
foot on either side of the cockpit. He should then anchor both hooks to the thigh straps, adjust the
shoulder strap length and then lift the pilot who is received outside the cockpit by one of the rescuers.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=i>-Û.
BREGUET AVIATIONô?53^ ^
MIRAGE F
4- A/C REMOVALTO THE LIMIT OF SAFETY ZONE
Generally, this operation is performed by the line rescue team. It disposes of a specific vehicle :
crane-truck or removal vehicle, parking of which should be mandatorily close to the vehicles of the fire
fighting and rescue team and to the ambulance. If it is impossible to tow the aircraft normally (U/C
damaged or retracted), clearing of the runway may be carried out in two different ways :
- A/C hoisting (see 02-2)

- A/C towing (see 02-2)
The means chosen to remove the aircraft will depend upon following requirements : rapidity of
operation, handling means in place, damages to the A/C. However, it should be mentioned that the
towing method will necessarily result in additional structure damage to the aircraft.
(1) A/C upside down
To bring the A/C to normal position, run a sling through the fitting of the wing pylon store ejector
and operate the crane.
5- ADDITIONAL SAFETY MEASURES
Certain additional safety measures designed to prevent any technical incident during removal of a
crashed A/C should be performed by specialized personnel of the unit, if possible directly after previous
safety measures and prior to any further A/C handling, or at least directly after A/C hoisting or lifting.
( 1 ) Battery
- Remove the main A/C battery (door 11-03)
(2) Cockpit safety devices
- Install additional seat safety devices.
(3) Armament
- Remove external loads

- Unload the guns and remove ammunition box
(4) Fuel
- Remove pylon tanks

- In the case of a visible fuel leakage, drain the A/C system.
(5) Ejection seat
- Unload ejection seat, remove it (see 09-4)

- Remove seat ejection gun (see 09-4).
6- A/C REMOVAL (see 01-6)
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^C
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
Seat/pilot separation Rescue with Rescue with
Rescue Shearing device, strap jib
strap initiator
Seat /pi lot

separation lever"
Pilot rescue
Ejection gun
safety pin
Aircraft safety devices
FIGURE 5 - SAFETY MEASURES ON CRASHED AIRCRAFT

AJ
BREGUET AVIATION ^-"Ll
SECURITE POIGNEE SECURITE CANON SECURITE CENTRALE
HAUTE EJECTION SIEGE ' A PERCUSSION
BLIND FIRING HANDLE SEA T EJECTION GUN FRAGILISATION VERRIERE
SAFETY PIN SAFETY PIN PERCUSSION UNIT
SAFETY PIN FOR
CANOPY EMBRITTLEMENT
SECURITE POIGNEE BASSE SECURITE INITIATEUR SECURITE PISTOLET

ALTERNA TIVE FIRING DE GUILLOTINE EXTRACTEUR
HANDLE SAFETY PIN GUILLOTINE INITIATOR DROGUE GUN SAFETY PIN
SAFETY PIN
FIGURE 6 - CHAINE DES SECURITES SIEGE

SEA T SAFETY PIN ROPE
AE
BREGUET
iUJ^^rll
AVIATION^rSiF3^.^^
MIRAGE
aâAMMAI
F
AO
SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO BRAKE UNIT FIRE
1 - SCOPE
This operation is to inform the ground personnel about the safety measures to be taken in the case
of brake unit fire.
2- SAFETY MEASURES
- Clear the lateral areas (persons and equipment)

- Approach the wheels perpendicularly to the spindle
- Only use powder extinguishers
- Put out the fire, remaining as far as possible from the wheels
- Make sure the parking brake is not applied.
IMPORTANT : The various units located at the level of the spindles (velocity generator - speed
detector, etc..) should be removed for particular checks (visual, metallurgical, dimensional inspections,
characteristics check).
Check hydraulic pipes and electrical wiring for condition.
Every unit which might have been damaged should be systematically replaced and sent to repair-shop.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ -" » / V\l l\/-\\^L_ l
breguet aviation Û ^, Restricted MANUAL 02
INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO ENGINE FIRE
1 - SCOPE
Although it is difficult:
-to find rapidly the origin and cause of the fire,
-to foresee possible spreading of a fire which breaks out,
the ground crew must immediately determine the areg where fire has broken out and make
sure that the special instructions are applied in the case of a fire which may be due to the en¬
gine.
2 - SAFETY MEASURES
WARNING -
HALOGEN FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ARE PROHIBITED.

A - IF EXTINGUISHERS WERE USED FOR PUTTING OUT THE FIRE, IMMEDIATELY RE¬
FER TO:
(1) SHEET "TREATMENT OF SURFACES CONTAMINATED WITH FIRE-EXTINGUISHING

PRODUCTS" (SEE 02-0).
(2) PARAGRAPH 4.
3 - PROCEDURE
A - Fire breaking out upon engine starting
(1) ENGINE FIRE warning light on
Set:
-the throttle lever to "stop",
-"LP MAIN COCK" switch to "closed" position,
-"LP PUMP" and "DC LP PUMP" switches to "off" position,
-"BATT" switch to "off" position.
(2) Fumes escaping from air ducts
Immediately stop the engine as per instructions for "false starts" (see 02-7, "ENGINE
STARTING").
(a) The fumes disappear and the anomaly may be due to the starting conditions (tail wind, a
weak battery...):
-attempt a new start, mandatorily applying instructions relative to tail wind start.
(b)* The fumes persist or disappear but the starting conditions fail to explain the anomaly:
-DO NOT ATTEMPT A NEW START and seek the cause of the anomaly.
-IF NECESSARY, PUT OUT THE FIRE THROUGH THE AIR DUCTS, USING A CARBON
DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHER.
DO NOT USE A FOAM OR POWDER EXTINGUISHER.
(3) Fire inside exhaust duct
(a) JPT exceeding 900°C

-Set:
-the throttle lever to "stop",
-"IGN-VENT" selector switch to "VENT".
-Interrupt run-up.
-Then apply the instructions to be followed when JPT is exceeded upon starting (see
02-7, "ENGINE STARTING").
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 ^ -" CK /V\H\MwL I
BREGUET AVIATION ^L
^-v, ,sô
-^^ .
Restricted , »«am,iai
MANUAL s\~>
02
(b) JPT below 900°C
-As soon as engine speed reaches 2500 rpm (29.7%), select 7500 rpm (89%) until the
fire has completely disappeared.
-Check that inflight relight is off.
-Retard the throttle to "idle".
If this operation is ineffective:
-accelerate again up to 7500 rpm (89%),
-set:
-Interrupt run-up.
IF THE ABOVE OPERATIONS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT: EXTINGUISH THE FIRE WITH A
CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHER DIRECTED THROUGH THE EXHAUST NOZZLE (IF
SAFETY DICTATES, USE A POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHER).
B - Fire between aircraft inner wall and engine
Simultaneously set:
-the throttle lever to "stop" position,
-"LP PUMP" and "DC LP PUMP" switches to "off" position.
At least 5 seconds after "LP MAIN COCK" switch has been set to "closed", set "BATT"
switch to "off" position.
PUT OUT THE FIRE USING EXTINGUISHERS.
C - Fire during engine stop (noticed from the rear, inside the engine)
-Check that inflight relight is off.
-Turn the aircraft into the wind or, if this is impossible, use the starting lever.
-Start the engine as soon as N is less than or equal to 1000 rpm (12%).
(1 ) The gas generator accelerates correctly; set the throttle lever to "idle".
(a) The engine accelerates correctly:

-as soon as engine speed reaches 2500 rpm (29.7%), select 7500 rpm (89%) and main¬
tain this speed until the fire has disappeared (visual check),
-about one minute after fire extinction has been observed, reduce engine speed and sta¬
bilize it at "idle".
Set:
-the throttle lever to "stop" position,
IF THE ABOVE OPERATIONS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT OR IF IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO OP¬

ERATE THE ENGINE: EXTINGUISH THE FIRE WITH A CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHER
DIRECTED THROUGH THE EXHAUST NOZZLE (IF SAFETY DICTATES, USE A POWDER
FIRE EXTINGUISHER).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^-^-^X V\|I\/-\V^L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^g^ ^S^CN . «aamiiai ni
^<e. ^=? o Restricted MANUAL 02
(b) RPM hangup suggests a false start: DO NOT ATTEMPT STARTING (throttle lever to
"STOP" position).
IF THE ABOVE OPERATIONS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT OR IF IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO OP¬
FIRE EXTINGUISHER).
(2) The gas generator fails to accelerate correctly: DO NOT ATTEMPT STARTING (throttle
lever to "STOP" position).
IF THE ABOVE OPERATIONS ARE NOT SUFFICIENT OF IF IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO OP¬
FIRE EXTINGUISHER).
D - After fire extinguishing

In all cases, look for the cause of the fire:
-check the fuel supply system on aircraft side and particularly delivery pressure of LP
pumps (so as to make sure this pressure is not too high),
-remove the engine and send it to 2nd line workshop for inspection.
4 - TREATMENT OF ENGINE
(1) General
-DO NOT RESTART THE ENGINE WHICH IS TO BE SENT TO THE 2nd LINE WORK¬
SHOP WITHOUT DELAY.
-ENGINE CLEANING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY EITHER THE 1st LINE OR 2nd LINE.
-AFTER CLEANING, SEND THE ENGINE TO THE 2nd LINE WORKSHOP REGARDLESS
OF THE EXINGUISHANT USED.
-Remove the engine (see 06-4).
-Allow the engine to cool to the ambient temperature prior to performing any operation.
NOTE: No special cleaning is required after the use of carbon dioxide which is an inert extin-
guishant having no corrosive action on the engine.
(2) Engine cleaning after use of foam

-Thoroughly wash the outside of the engine with water.
CAUTION:
TFTHE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS BELOW FREEZING POINT, ADD A FEW LI¬
TERS OF METHANOL TO THE WASHING WATER.
-If foam has been sprayed into the air intake, thoroughly wash the inside of the engine
with water.
CAUTION:
ANT REMAINING FOAM FORMS A CREAM-COLORED RESIDUE OR A SCALE ON
THE HOT SECTIONS OF THE ENGINE AND MUST BE REMOVED.
-Thoroughly dry the inside and outside of the engine by means of a hot air source.
AB
06-87 Restricted 0-221 M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 VN -" ^ /V\ll\/-\\Û I
BREGUET AVIATION_^^-
^-w. ^s^-ô
^? »o Restricted m
a a aa i /m
MANUAL ,
02 1
(3) Engine cleaning after use of dry chemical powder.
Inspect the air intake casing and compressor first-stage vanes for any powder deposit.
CAUTION:
THE POWDER DISCHARGED INTO THE AIR INTAKE MAY COMBINE WITH THE LU¬
BRICATING OIL AND FORM SLUDGE.
-Remove any traces of dry powder with a vacuum cleaner.

-If the outside of the engine is soiled, wash with a solution consisting of one volume of
Ardrox 624 and 19 volumes of water.
CAUTION:
THE PENETRATION OF POWDER IN THE HOT SECTIONS RESULTS IN A VITREOUS
DEPOSIT BEING FORMED.
-Thoroughly dry the engine by means of a hot air source.
(4) Engine cleaning after use of vaporizing liquids (T.B.F.)
CAUTION:
THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMED IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE
USE OF T.B.F. WHICH HAS A PRACTICALLY INSTANTANEOUS CORROSIVE ACTION:
-REMOVE THE ACCESSIBLE T.B.F. FROM THE INTAKE CASING,
-THOROUGHLY RINSE THE EXHAUST DUCT AND COMPRESSOR WITH WATER,
-SEND THE ENGINE TO THE 2nd LINE WORKSHOP WITHOUT DELAY.
AA
06-86 Restricted 0-221T
BREGUET AVIATION
SECTION 1
PARKING MOORING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1-1 PARKING AND MOORING
- Aircraft parking 1-101

- Aircraft mooring 1-103
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No. Page
1 AIRCRAFT PARKING 1-104

2 AIRCRAFT MOORING 1-104
AA
BREGUET AVIATIONî
LJ^^t^X
_-^ -
MIRAGE F
Rastrl(t«d MANUAL 02
AIRCRAFT PARKING
(see figure 1 )
1 - SCOPE
Bad-weather protection of parked aircraft.
A Special tool
- Multiple wrench M31.025 (door 17.04).
- 4 standard wheel chocks type 1

- 1 cockpit slip cover 5001 HCC
- 1 jet pipe slip cover HDT 23

- 2 air intake protective covers BOA 1 5
- 1 temperature probe protective cover PS31
- 2 total pressure probe protective covers 5001 HAA
- 1 angle-of-attack probe protective cover PS26
- 1 static pressure probe protective cover 5002 HAA
- 1 top IFF antenna protective cover PS29
- 1 laser window protective cover 50 MS 008.
3- PARKING
A If required, face the aircraft upwind.
B Ensure that :
- the last be tween-f light inspection actually was performed,
- all access doors are closed,
- all U/C doors are closed and locked.
C Check that nothing could damage the airframe in the event of tire deflation or shock absorber
discharge.
D Move any ground support equipment away from aircraft.
E In the cockpit, check that :
- «BATT» switch is «OFF»,

- the parking brake is released,
- the seat safety pin line is installed (see 02-0 figure 6).
F Close and lock the canopy. Remove the cockpit access ladder.
G - Install :
(1 ) Wheel chocks 1 in front of and behind the main U/C wheels.
(2) Slip covers and protective covers :

- cockpit slip cover 2
- jet pipe slip cover 3
- air intake protective covers (LH - RH) 4.
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL=**>-^ "U.
BREGUET AVI ATlON^xÔ^^^C-i» .
MIRAGE
.........
F
«
(3) Various protecting covers :
- 1 temperature probe protecting cover 5

- 2 total probe protecting covers 6
- 1 incidence probe protective cover 7
- 1 boom cover 8
- 1 top IFF antenna cover 9
- 1 laser window protecting cover 10.
NOTE : Should the probes be wet, first wipe them before installing the covers.
H If necessary, moor the aircraft (see 02-1).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ÎLJ>^ry^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONx^^L-^^^
^2=^<X Restricted. UAklnAi no
MANUAL 02
AIRCRAFT MOORING
(see Figure 2)
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet provides the mooring method of an A/C on its parking area.
2- MOORING CONDITIONS
- It is recommended to moor the A/C when the wind velocity reaches 50 knots.
For winds between 25 and 50 knots, install two chocks at each wheel.
- For very high winds, it is preferable to shelter the A/C.
A - Special fools.
- F1-CS-B kit
B Ground handling equipment
-3 mooring devices (A/C equipment) consisting of :
- 1 eye bolt L92-21 1 B
attachment pin L92-212 type II
1
- ring L92-314B
1
Mooring kit
4- MOORING
A/C mooring is performed by means of the three hoisting fittings located as follows :
Two at frame 17 (one on each side of the A/C) - One at frame 36 (in A/C centerline).
A The aircraft is parked {see 02-1)
B - For each fitting :

- Remove doors 1 5.04-2 and 1 5.08-2 and blanking plug of AFT fitting (wrench M31 062)
- Screw a mooring device to each fitting.
C Using a rope, connect each ring to the mooring points
DO NOT TIGHTEN THE ROPES EXCESSIVELY.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
FIGURE 1 - CAMPEMENT DE L'AVION

PARKING AIRCRAFT
FIGURE 2 - AMARRAGE DE L'AVION

MOORING AIRCRAFT
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^^^TVL
^ ^
MIRAGE F
SECTION 2
GROUND HANDLING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
2-0 GENERAL
- Servicing and handling points 2-001
2-1 TOWING
- A/C mechanical towing on hard ground 2-101

-A/C handling 2-103
- Backward de-bogging or mechanical towing on uneven ground 2-105
2-2 LIFTING
-Complete A/C lifting (jacking) . . 2-201

- Quick method of leveling A/C 2-203
- Nose U/C partial lifting 2-204
- Main U/C partial lifting 2-205
2-3 HOISTING
- Complete A/C hoisting 2-301
2-4 HAULING
- Crashed A/C hauling 2-401
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No. Page
1 SERVICING POINTS: GROUND HANDLING 2-001

2 AIRCRAFT TOWING 2-102
3 AIRCRAFT HANDLING 2-104
4 BACKWARD DE-BOGGING 2-107
5 AIRCRAFT LIFTING 2-202
6 QUICK METHOD OF LEVELING A/C 2-203
7 NOSE U/C PARTIAL LIFTING 2-204
8 MAIN U/C PARTIAL LIFTING 2-205
9 COMPLETE AIRCRAFT HOISTING 2-302
10 AIRCRAFT HAULING 2-403
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Hissage avion complet ou fuselage Halage par l'arrière -,

' Complete aircraft or fuselage hoisting Backward hauling
Déverrouillage extérieur cabine

External unlocking of canopy
Halage par l'avant Hissage voilure Hissage empennage

Forward hauling Wing hoisting Stabilator hoisting
ni Levage ou amarrage avion complet

Complete aircraft lifting or mooring
Levage ou amarrage avion complet

Complete aircraft lifting or mooring
Attache de desembourbage par l'arrière

Levage partiel Backward debugging fitting
atterrisseur avant Levage partiel atterrisseur principal
Nose U/C Main U/C partial lifting
partial lifting
FIGURE 1 - POINTS DE SERVITUDE - MANUTENTION

SERVICING POINTS : GROUND HANDLING
AC
BREGUET AVIATION,,
iL^^^TU MIRAGE F
MECHANICAL TOWING OF AIRCRAFT ON HARD GROUND

(figure 2)
- Standard tow bar type 1
2- PRELIMINARY STEPS
A In the cockpit, the flight line technician checks that :
(1 ) - the parking brake is released,
(2) - the green lights on U/C position indicator panel are lit,
(3) -the emergency brake pressure is sufficient to permit towing, and is in any case higher than
150 bar (2175 psi).
CAUTION :
A 120 bar (1740 psi) PRESSURE IN EMERGENCY ACCUMULATOR PERMITS ONLY ONE
OPERATION OF THE BRAKE.
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT THE AIRCRAFT IS PROPERLY BALANCED AND IS NOT LIABLE TO
TIP ONTO ONE SIDE WHEN BEING TOWED.
3- PROCEDURE
A - Hook tow bar (1 ) to nose U/C towing fitting (2).
B Move the aircraft, taking all necessary precautions. Nose wheel steering is limited to 45° in either
direction by the mechanical stops of the nose wheel steering pistons device.
C Tow the aircraft slowly and smoothly.
D If possible, stop the aircraft with its wheels along the centerliné.
E Install wheel chocks.
F Disconnect the tow bar.
G Check that shear pins are tightly secured by manually acting on the towing fitting after disconnect¬
ing the tow bar.
Also check that retaining pin (6) is fitted and in good condition.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION .<5^=«^C>
LJ>~^)X MIRAGE F
^^ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
NOTES :
(1 ) The towing fitting of the nose U/C leg comprises :
- traction-compression shear pin (3), calibrated to 2040 daN (4585.92 Ib.f),
- torsion shear pin (4), fitted with spacer (7) and calibrated to 1695 daN (3810.36 Ib.f),
-pin (6).
(2) Should a shear pin break, replace it immediately with a spare shear pin from the set
located on support (5) of the fitting steering sector.
LOCAL MANUFACTURE OF SHEAR PINS IS FORBIDDEN.
(3) The traction shear pin may break during backward motion of the aircraft without it
being felt.
H Replacement of shear pins
Traction shear pin (see detail 1 ).

- Install it with its two pins (8), then install pin (6), inserting it at the same time in the heads of
pins (8).
- Fold the legs of pin (6) over lower pin (8) head, then fold the legs of pins (8) around the shear
pin heads.
Torsion shear pin (see detail 2)

- Lockwire the torsion shear pin instead of pins (9).
- Twist the lockwire around the fitting steering sector.
NOTE : This type of locking prevents the shear pin pieces from dropping during aircraft maneuvers,
with possible ingestion by the engine, should shear pin breakage have not been noticed before
flight.
AA
12-81 Restricted 2-1 01 M
BREGUET AVIATION MIRAGE F
R= 11,10m
(36.4 ft)
FIGURE 2 - REMORQUAGE DE L'AVION

TOWING AIRCRAFT
AB
BREGUET AVIATION,
LJ^^Vl. MIRAGE F
MANHANDLING OF AIRCRAFT
(figure 3)
1 - SCOPE
Handling or positioning the aircraft on a parking area.
2- GENERAL
There are two possibilities. Choice between them depends upon the handling operation to be per¬
formed.
A Handling by means of standard tow bar :
-nose wheel steering is limited to ± 45° (mechanical stops of anti-shimmy device).
B Handling by means of steering bar :

- it requires uncoupling of U/C torque links and compliance with certain instructions,
- wheel rotation is not limited (shock absorber compressed).
- standard tow bar type 1
-steering bar FDD 16
- 2 wheel chocks type 1
j A During towing, a flight line technician is required to be in the cockpit so as to check that :
1 (1) -the parking brake is released,
(2) -the green lights on U/C position indicator panel are lit,
(3) - the emergency brake pressure is sufficient to permit handling of aircraft and is in any case higher
than 150 bar (2175 psi).
CAUTION :
ÀTZ0 bar (1740 psi) PRESSURE IN EMERGENCY ACCUMULATOR PERMITS ONLY ONE
CAUTION :
IvTÂKE SURETHAT THE AIRCRAFT IS PROPERLY BALANCED AND IS NOT LIABLE TO

TIP ONTO ONE SIDE WHEN BEING TOWED.
5- PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT : It is not recommended to :
- push the aircraft by bearing on mobile surfaces,
- steer the nose wheels when not rolling,
- pivot the aircraft on main U/C wheels.
A Handling with standard tow bar (see 02-1 ).

B Handling with steering bar.
IMPORTANT : It is strictly forbidden to use the steering bar as a two bar ; it is only designed to steer
the nose wheels.
(1 Uncoupling of nose U/C torque links.
)
(a) Disconnect mobile electrical connector (1 ) from the upper torque link, as well as bonding braid (6)
(modification 300 incorporated).
(b) Remove torque links center pin (2) : bend down the locking pawl and unscrew the knurled nut.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
(c) Reinstall pin 2 on the lower torque link, then position mobile electrical connector 1 onto its rest
support 3.
(2) Couple steering bar 4 to the spindle :
(a) Position the threaded pins of fork 5 opposite the spindle inner bores.
(b) Fully screw in the threaded pins, then tighten the lock-nuts.
C -- Handling
- Remove the wheel chocks

- Move the A/C while taking all necessary precautions
- Stop the A/C with its nose wheel along A/C centerline
- Install wheel chocks.
6- PREPARATION FOR USE
A According to the adopted solution, uncouple :
- the towing bar, or

- the steering bar.
B - Should the U/C torque links be uncoupled, couple it back in the reverse sequence of uncoupling
procedure (see para. 5B).
FIGURE 3 - MANHANDLING OF AIRCRAFT

AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^_^ ^ -
BACKWARD DE-BOGGING OR MECHANICAL

TOWING ON UNEVEN GROUND
(figure 4)
1 - SCOPE
Operation to be performed when the ground configuration does not enable normal mechanical
towing.
- De-bogging equipment EDR 25

-Steering bar FDD 16
A If needed, even up the ground behing the aircraft wheels.
B During towing, a flight line technician is required to be in the cockpit so as to check that :
(1 ) the parking brake is released,

-
(2) the green lights on U/C position indicator panel are lit,
-
(3) - the emergency brake pressure is sufficient to permit handling of aircraft and is in any case higher
than 150 bar (2175 psi).
CAUTION :
(1) A 120 bar (1740 psi) PRESSURE IN EMERGENCY ACCUMULATOR PERMITS ONLY ONE
(2) IF THE BRAKE SYSTEM IS DAMAGED, THE RESPONSIBLE PERSON WILL TAKE ALL
NECESSARY MEASURES (CLEARED AREA, WHEEL CHOCKS...) SO AS TO AVOID ANY
SERIOUS ACCIDENT.
4- PROCEDURE
A Uncouple the nose U/C torque links (see 02-1 ; «Manhandling of aircraft»).
B Attach the steering bar to the nose wheel spindle (see 02-1 ).
C Pin clevises (1 ) of the de-bogging assembly (2) cables to rings (3) of the main U/C legs.
D Hook the towing ring to the tractor.
E Tow the assembly smoothly and along the aircraft centerline.
AB
BREGUET
ti^>^rKL
AVIATION^c. ^^
MIRAGE F
F Should shear pin 4 be broken, replace it with one of shear pins 5 located on the towing bar.
NOTE : Shear pin breaks for a stress of 3000 daN approx. (6744 lb wgt approx.)
G As soon as the A/C is on a hard ground, remove de-bogging equipment 2 and carry out normal
mechanical towing (see 02-1).
After de-bogging :
A Remove the wheels for checks and maintenance (see 05-5)
B Remove the brakes for checks and maintenance (see 05-7).
C Carry out cleaning, lubrication and protection of U/C and door hinges (see 05-0).
D On occasion, check undercarriages (see 05-1 and 05-3).
E Carry out U/C operating tests (see 05-6).
F Carefully clean all A/C sections covered with mud.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^ôP0^**
MIRAGE F
1 7 m (55.7 ft)
___^=n^cL102
o°
T
FIGURE 4 - DESEMBOURBAGE PAR L'ARRItRE

BACKWARD DEBOGGING
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H ^ -" « fV\ll\/AV«7L_
BREGUET AVIATION _Û-~ ^2*=*^> . , ....,,,., ««
^->, ^*-^ Restricted MANUAL 02
COMPLETE LIFTING (JACKING) OF AIRCRAFT

(see figure 5)
A - Special tools
-F1.CS.Bkit.
-2 six ton tripod hydraulic jacks P4736

-1 ten ton tripod hydraulic jack P4737
2 - PRELIMINARY STEPS
CAUTION:
DOORS 15-04-1 AND 15-08-1 SHOULD BE MANDATORILY INSTALLED ON AIR¬
CRAFT.
IF THE AIRCRAFT IS TO BE LIFTED IN THE OPEN AIR, ENSURE THE WIND DOES
NOT MAKE JACKING DANGEROUS.
Aircraft lifting requires the use of- three hydraulic jacks positioned as follows:
-Jacking fittings at F17,6 tons jacks,

-Jacking fitting at F36, 1 0 tons jack
A - Remove doors 15-04-2 and 15-08-2 so as to reach both fittings of frame 17, and the
plug so as to reach fitting of frame 36.
B - Fully screw manually the three ball joints in the jacking fittings (ball joint L 92.313 type
B at F1 7 - ball joint L 92.31 3 type C at F36).
C - Position the three jacks straight below the ball joints.

(1) Both 6 ton jacks (F17) should be positioned in such a way that the inner side of the tri¬
angle delimited by the jack legs is parallel to aircraft centerline, and that the hoisting pump is
placed to the outside.
(2) Should the aircraft centerline be materialized during the next operations, it is then recom-
mmended to position the 10 ton jack (F36) in such a way that one of its legs is not located
on said centerline.
D - Ensure that the jack shafts are approx. vertical. If needed, act upon the screws of the leg
adjustable shoes.
E - Using the coasting screw, bring the jacks close to the ball-joints
| F - Make sure that the wheels are free and the parking brake is not set.
3 - AIRCRAFT LIFTING
A - Jacking shall be performed in a coordinated manner.
B - Raise the jacks up to wanted position while holding the safety nut as close as possible to
its stop during the rising motion, tighten it manually at the end of the operation.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
C - Should U/C operations be performed, keep a minimum clearance about 100 mm (4 in)
between wheels and ground.
4 - LOWERING ON THE GROUNG
CAUTION:
ETSTSXIRE THAT NOTHING WILL DAMAGE THE AIRFRAME WHEN LOWERING THE
AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND. MAKE SURE IN PARTICULAR THAT DOORS 17-04
AND 17-08 ARE CLOSED. CHECK THE UNDERCARRIAGE IS EFFECTIVELY DOWN-
LOCKED.
A - Slightly pump so as to loosen the safety nut of each jack.
B - Slowly lower the jacks and unscrew the safety nut progressively.
C - Withdraw the jacks.
D - Unscrew the pads.
5 - FINAL-STEPS
-Grease the fittings.
-Reinstall the plug and doors 15-04-2 and 15-02-2.
FIGURE 5 - AIRCRAFT LIFTING

AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
QUICK METHOD OF LEVELING AIRCRAFT

(see Figure 6)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet provides the easy and practical method of leveling an aircraft. The precision
obtained is sufficient to carry out the routine servicing operations and harmonization proce¬
dures.
A - Special tool
-Multiple wrench M31025 (door 17-04).

-Standard stepladder (2 m high)
-Weapons adjustment set MRA 9.
3 - PROCEDURE
A - Jack up the aircraft (see 02-2)

B - Open the canopy, then lock it
C - Clean the mating surface of the 3 leveling studs 1 located on the LH and RH cockpit side
formers (two on the left, one on the right) and position leveling ruler 2 (RMN9). Make sure
that the ruler is fitted with "single-seater" pin gauges at the front points.
NOTE: Fit the rear land of ruler RMN9 with:
- shim RMN9-100 for engine removal/installation,
- shim RMN9-200 for gun harmonization.
D - First position the aircraft horizontal (transversely) while acting on front lifting jacks so as
to bring the transversal spirit level air bubble to center position.
NOTE: It is more advisable to position the aircraft in very slight nose up attitude rather than in
nose down attitude because it is easier to control leveling operation while raising a
jack (instead of lowering it).
E - Next bring the longitudinal spirit level air bubble to center position while acting on rear
jack.
F - Check the transversal leveling is still correct.
-Leave the ruler in place during the operation for which the aircraft was leveled so as to
check that adjustments remain correct.
4 - FINAL STEPS
Single-seater
A - Remove the leveling ruler.
pin gauge
B - Close the canopy, then lock it.
C - Lower the aircraft onto the ground. Single-seater
pin gauge
AA FIGURE 6 - QUICK METHOD OF LEVELING AIRCRAFT

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT I
BREGUET AVIATION, Z^5
MIRAGE F
NOSE U/C PARTIAL LIFTING

(see Figure 7)
1 - PURPOSE
Nose wheel replacement
- Jack
- 4 wheel chocks type 1
A Ensure nothing prevents lifting.
B Ensure the parking brake is released.
C Install main U/C wheel chocks
D Before using jack, check that the jacking pad 1 slides freely inside female clevis.
4- LIFTING
A Position the jack perpendicular to the U/C leg, take care of nose U/C truss jack fairing door.
B to the correct height so as to engage it into jacking shackle 2 of nose U/C leg.
Bring jacking pad 1
C - Lift off the jack wheels so as to position it firmly on the ground.
D Check that the measured distance between jack front flange and bearing part shoulder is about
30 mm (1.18 in).
E Check that jack position is correct, then operate, lifting device so as to obtain the required height.
NOTE : During the first operations of the lifting device, it is required to direct jack always towards
wheels if its wheels were not lifted off as indicated in para. C.
5- LOWERING
A Slowly operate the lifting device so as to avoid sudden lowering of the leg.
VIEW IN DIRECTION
OF ARROW F
FIGURE 7 - NOSE U/C PARTIAL LIFTING

AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
PARTIAL LIFTING BY MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

(figure 8) '
1 - SCOPE
Replacement of main U/C wheel and brake unit hot sections.
-Jack
- 4 wheel chocks type 1 .
A Ensure that nothing prevents lifting.
B Ensure that the parking brake is released.
C Check the wheels of the other main U/C and of the nose U/C.
D - Before using the jack, ensure that jacking pad (1 ) slides freely inside the female clevis.
4- LIFTING
A Offer the jack perpendicular to the U/C leg ; center it in relation to the wheels.
B - Bring jacking pad (1 ) to the correct height so as to engage it into jacking shackle (2) of the leg.
C Lift off the jack wheels so as to position the jack firmly on the ground.
D Check that the distance measured between jack front flange and bearing part shoulder is about
30 mm (1.18 in).
E Check that the jack position is correct, then operate the lifting device so as to obtain the required
height.
NOTE : Supposing that the jack wheels have not completely retracted as required in para. C, always
push on the jack in the direction of the aircraft wheels during the first operations of the lift¬
ing device.
5- LOWERING
A Operate the lifting device slowly so as to prevent the leg from lowering sharply.
FIGURE 8 -PARTIAL LIFTING OF A MAIN U/C LEG

AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ J] ^ / V\ I r\/-\VJrl_ I
BREGUET AVIATION îs<-^
^v, j?-^>
^^^^ .
Restricted .. A mi .a i
MANUAL n~
02
COMPLETE HOISTING OF AIRCRAFT

(See Figure 9)
A - Ground handling equipment
-Hoisting unit A5001EHA

-Hoisting crane.
- F > 1 1 T (1 1 .03 tons - 1 2.3 U.S. tons) with 4 m (1 3 ft approx.) useful span
-Min. height under hool: 5 m (16.4 ft).
2 - GENERAL
-TAKE ALL NECESSARY SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 02-0).

-Maximum weight of the aircraft to be hoisted shall not exceed 11 T (11.03 tons - 12.3
U.S tons). If necessary, remove external loads.
3 - PROCEDURE
-Make sure the equipment compartment door is closed.

-Remove the fin bottom antenna (see 12-8).
-Open and remove doors 20.02/1 - 20.10/1 - 31.11 and 31.01 so as to reach the three
hoisting fittings 1 .
-Screw eye bolts 2 (to be found on hoisting unit 3) to each hoisting fitting.
-Position the hoisting unit shackle on the chain according to the configuration of the air¬
craft to be removed.
-Hook the hoisting unit to the crane hook.
-Drive the crane into reverse to the aircraft nose according to a 0.5236 radian (30°) an¬
gle. The driver shall drive the crane so that the hoisting unit is straight above the three hoisting
fittings.
-Hook the hoisting unit to the hoisting fittings. During this operation, necessary precau¬
tions shall be taken so as to avoid hitting the aircraft fuselage with the ground handling equip¬
ment. Therefore, place old tires straight below the beams of the hoisting unit.
-Attach ropes or straps to appropriate points of the aircraft so as to compensate for the
unavoidable aircraft swinging at the time of hoisting and during handling.
-Slightly stretch the hoising unit, then check that:
-the aircraft attitude remains fairly identical to the level flight attitude,
-there is no risk of damage to the airframe.
-Slowly and smoothly hoist the aircraft - Maintain it using ropes or straps.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
FIGURE 9 - HISSAGE DE L'AVlON COMPLET

COMPLETE A IRCRA FT HOISTING
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/: >~'-,~\l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^"-^^*^ i........ «
CRASHED A/C HAULING

(see Figure 10)
1 - GENERAL
- A/C hauling is only accomplished in case of an emergency (clearing of the runway) because such
a solution may worsen the A/C damage due to the crash.
- Hauling shall be restricted to the necessary distance only.
- The necessary towing force to move the «crashed» A/C may reach :
- 7,5 T (7.52 tons - 8.4 U.s.tons) on concrete (to start towing operation).
- 5 to 8,5 T (5.01 to 8.52 tons - 5.62 to 9.55 U.S.tons) on grass (depending on ground
configuration).
- Whatever method may be used, hauling shall be performed slowly and smoothly by means of
appropriate power vehicles. Towing force shall be applied as per A/C centerline.
- Hauling shall be performed only when following conditions are met :
- All safety measures relative to a crashed A/C (see 02-0) shall have been taken.
- Important fire fighting means shall be close to hauling area.
- Personnel shall be cleared from around the towing vehicles so as to avoid any accident (possible
towing cable breaking).
- Two hauling methods may be used according to the A/C position in relation to cleared area.
- Forward hauling
- Backward hauling

- Forward towage system MS 1317
- Rear towage system MS1 242
- Towing vehicles fitted with a winch capable of a 9 T towing force (9.02 tons - 10.1 U.S. tons).
3- PROCEDURE
A Forward hauling
(1) Break both disks 1 blanking the hauling fittings : use point 2 located on beam 3.
(2) Attach a hook 5 of the towage system to each fitting 4. Fully screw in screw 6 attaching the hook
to the fitting.
(3) Tighten towage system and attach it to the hook of the towing vehicle.
(4) Haul the A/C.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fi^î'U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^P^^^Ô k t .,.,,.. . _-
B Backward hauling
(1) Remove brake chute container
(2) Open brake chute hook 7, then place the end fitting of rear towage system 8 between the hook
jaws.
(3) Close the hook and lock the jaws (control lever in REAR position)
NOTE : Opening and closing are controlled from the cockpit by means of control lever 9.
(4) Catch the hauling vehicle hook into the ring of rear towage system.
(5) Haul the aircraft.
AA
WIONS MARCEL DASSAULT MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
MANUAL 02
HALAGE PAR L'ARRIERE

.BACKWARD HAULING
FIGURE 10 - HALAGE D'UN AVION

HAULING AIRCRAFT
AB
BREGUET
it^-^tT^
AVIATION^'-c^V^Ô
MIRAGE F
^-^^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
SECTION 3
REPLENISHING - DRAINING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
3-0 GENERAL
- Instructions to be complied with in the case of a doubt relative to engine oil replenishing 3-003
- Instructions to be observed when replacing engine, accessory gearbox,
vario-alternator oil 3-003M
3-1 REPLENISHING
- Normal refueling 3-101

-Partial refueling 3-104F
- Emergency refueling 3-105
- Oxygen tank replenishing (on A/C) 3-108
- Emergency cylinder oxygen replenishing 3-110
- Air conditioning evaporator replenishing 3-112
- Hydraulic reservoir replenishing 3-114
- Accessory gearbox oil replenishing 3-116
- Engine oil replenishing 3-118
- Vario-alternator oil replenishing 3-121
3-2 DRAINING
- Defueling 3-201
- Air conditioning evaporator draining 3-207
- Hydraulic reservoir draining 3-208
- Accessory gearbox oil draining 3-209
- Engine oil tank draining 3-210
3-3 DRAINING
- Fuel tank draining 3-301

- Pitot static system draining 3-303
- Equipment conditioning system draining 3-304
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No. Page
1 SERVICING POINTS : REPLENISHING 3-001

2 SERVICING POINTS: BLEEDS AND DRAINS 3-002
3 NORMAL REFUELING 3-104
4 EMERGENCY REFUELING 3-107
5 OXYGEN TANK REPLENISHING 3-109M
6 EMERGENCY CYLINDER REPLENISHING 3-110
6M EMERGENCY OXYGEN CYLINDER FILLING PRESSURE VERSUS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 3-1 10M
7 EVAPORATOR REPLENISHING 3-113
AA
07-75 Restricted 3_-,
BREGUET AVIATION^__
iL-îirU.
_ _
MIRAGE F
(Cont'd)
Figure No. Page
7M EVAPORATOR DRAINING 3-207M

8 ACCESSORY GEARBOX OIL REPLENISHING 3-117
9 ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING 3-119
10 VARIO-ALTERNATOR REPLENISHING 3-123
11 DEFUELING 3-206
12 OILTANK DRAINING 3-210
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Prises de parc hydrauliques circuit 2

(Messier 61-43947 et 6143677)
System 2 hydraulic power receptacles
(MESSIER 61-43947 and 61-43677)
Plein en huile vario-alternateurs
Vario-alternator oil replenishing
Lecture niveau des réservoirs hydrauliques
(Circuit 1 a droite, circuit 2 à Gauche)
Hydraulic reservoir level indicator
(system 1 R/H side system 2 L/H side)
Prises de parc hydrauliques circuit 1
(Messier 61-43947 et 61-43677)
System 2 hydraulic power receptacles
(MESSIER 61-43947 and 61-43677)
Ferrures d'accrochage échelle

cabine
Cockpit access ladder attachment
fitting
Plein en huile du réacteur
Prise de ventilation au sol (Le Bozec Remplissage A15166
(Le Bozec/Gauthier 660A50-21) Trop plein A15167)
Ground ventilation receptacle Engine oil replenishing
(LE BOZEC/GAUTHIER 660A50-21 1 (L E BOZEC Filling A 15 166
Plein de l'évaporateur de conditionnement Overflow A 15 167)
(Le Bozec 15208A/AA) Lecture niveau
Air conditioning evaporator replenishing du réservoir d'huile réacteur
(LE BOZEC 15208A /AA) Engine oil
Prise de remplissage carburant tank level indicator
(Norme N F 48512)
Refueling receptacle
(Standard NF 48512)
FIGURE 1 - POINTS DE SERVITUDE : RAVITAILLEMENT
SERVICING POINTS : REPLENISHING
AG
02-77 Restricted 3-001 FIGURE l 3-001
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
± Réservoirs de voilure (G et D) 4. Nourrices (G et D)

4. Vidanges réservoirs AR (G et D)
^ Wing tanks (L/H and R/H) ^ Feeder tanks (L/H and R/H)
Aft tank drains (L/H and R/H)
.A. Vidanges réservoirs de voilure (G et D) _ Surpression nourrices (G et D)
Wing tank drains (L/H and R/H) Feeder tank pressure relief valves
y Moteur réducteur de becs (G et D) (L/H and R/H)
Slat gear reducer actuators (L/H and R/H)
f Clapet commande de train f Mise â l'air libre circuit carburant
' U/C controlled valve Fuel system vent
mm Pompe PC - Air - Carburant
AB pump - Air - Fuel
Réservoirs latéraux AV (G et D)
+ Forward lateral tanks (L/H and R/H)
Vidanges réservoirs latéraux AV (G et O)
+ Forward lateral tank drains (L/H and R/H)
Circuit de dégonflage des réservoirs

T Tank pressure-relief system
Moteur de noyaux coniques (D)
T Shock-cone actuator (R/H)
Oxygène liquide (G)
T Liquid oxygen (L/H)
T Compartiment oxygène
Oxygen compartment
TT Paliers 2 et 3 du réacteur
Engine bearings 2 and 3
1 Intercom, nourrices
Feeder tank cross feed
-f. Réservoirs AR (G et D)
Aft tanks (L/H and R/H)
LEGENDE mf- Clapet de surpression BP (circuit hyd. 1)
LP pressure relief valve (hydraulic system 1)
KEY 4 Circuit BP
Sortie de drainage ou LP system
mise à l 'air libre Clapet de surpression BP
J" (circuit hyd. 2)
Drain or vent outlet
LP pressure relief valve (hydraulic system 2)
Point de purge ou
Relais d'accessoires, pompes hydrauliques circuit 1 et
de vidange T circuit 2
Bleed or drain point Accessory gearbox, system 1 and system 2 hydraulic pumps
FIGURE 2 - POINTS DE SERVITUDE : VIDANGES-PURGES-DRAINAGES

SERVICING POINTS : BLEEDS AND DRAINS
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT:
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^ï<<_~
^w ^s*-*^
^-o Restricted ....,..*.«
MANUAL 02
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED IN CASE OF DOUBT RELATIVE TO

ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING
1 - SCOPE
This sheet determines the instructions to be followed whenever the SAFETY instructions
of sheet "ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING" (see 02-3) were not taken into account or in case of
any doubt relative to replenishing which may cause:
-engine operation without oil,

-regulation troubles due to oil system "overflow".
2 - GENERAL
A - General method
(1 ) It requires application of the complete procedure below.
(2) It is applicable in each case of doubt and covers all contingencies.
B - Particular method
(1 ) It only requires application of steps F-G and H of the procedure below.
(2) It is applicable AFTER an operating period and BEFORE performing topping-up if:
-one or several ventilations have been performed since engine stop,
-SAFETY instructions of sheet "ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING" (see 02-3) were not taken
into account.
3 - PROCEDURE
A - Drain the oil tank (main tank) (see 02-3)
CAUTION:
DO NOT SCREW IN THE DRAIN PLUG.
B - Connect the fluid dispenser pipe fitted with the filling adapter to the filler fitting (see
02-3, ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING).
C - Replenish or top up the "Emergency" tank of the oil tank assembly until OIL FLOWS OUT
of the drain pipe.
Stop replenishing.
D - Screw in and safety (0.8 mm dia lockwire) the drain plug of the main tank. Disconnect
the pipe.
E - Allow 3 liters (5.2 pts - 6.3 US pts) of oil to flow into the tank through the filler fitting.
Disconnect the filling and overflow adapters and lock the fitting blanking plugs.
F - Operate the engine (see 02-7) and run it up for 2 minutes at 7200 RPM (85.5%).
G - Stop the engine (see 02-7).
H - Top up the oil tank (see 02-3).
AC
06-85 Restricted ' 3-003
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L_i>-*!rU
BREGUET AVIATION ^^- ^^
MIRAGE F
INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED WHEN REPLACING THE OIL IN ENGINE,

ACCESSORY GEARBOX AND VARIO-ALTERNATORS
1 - GENERAL
There are two types of authorized oils, with different viscosity, for lubrication of engine, accessory
gearbox and vario-alternators.
- Type 1 oils : Air 3514 (Turbo Nycoil 13B)
- Type 2 oils : Mobil Jet 2, Esso 2380 (non-miscible oils).
2- EFFECT OF OIL TYPE CHANGE ON ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK SYSTEM
- is set for Turbo Nycoil 13B oil :

If the indicator amplifier
no change, this setting now covers use of all types of oil which are authorized for use.
-
- If the indicator amplifier is set for Mobil Jet 2 oil :
- replace the indicator amplifier installed on aircraft by another indicator amplifier set for
Turbo Nycoil 13B.
3- REPLACEMENT OF OIL BY AN EQUIVALENT OIL OR A DIFFERENT OIL TYPE
A Engine and vario-alternators
Remove the unit and send it to second line maintenance facilities (draining, flushing of oil
system and adjustments as indicated in the relevant manual of the unit).
B Accessory gearbox
Two possibilities could occur :
(1) Removal of the unit for shipping to second line maintenance facilities (draining, flushing of oil
system as indicated in the relevant manual of the unit).
(2) On aircraft, in which case :

-drain the accessory gearbox (see 02-3). Allow a maximum quantity of oil to flow out ;
- refill the gearbox (see 02-3) with new oil ;
- carry out a run-up (see 02-7) at 7000 rpm (83 %) for 5 minutes ;
- drain the gearbox once again ;
- refill with new oil.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ___.
/L-^'ir'yL
_ _
MIRAGE F
NORMAL REFUELING
(see figure 3)
1 - GENERAL
Two types of refueling should be considered :
normal refueling corresponding to a usable internal fuel quantity of 4350 liters (3436 kg,
957 imp.gals, 1149 U.S.gals, 7569 lbs) (negative-g flight accumulator included) for a total internal
quantity of 4420 liters (3491 kg, 972 imp.gals, 1168 U.S.gals, 7691 lbs), 70 liters (55 kg, 16 imp.gals,
19 U.S. gals, 122 lbs) being not consumable ;
- total refueling corresponding to a usable internal fuel quantity of 4410 liters (3483 kg,
970 imp.gals, 1165 U.S.gals, 7673 lbs) (negative-g flight accumulator included) for a total internal
quantity of 4480 liters (3538 kg, 987 imp.gals, 1184 U.S.gals, 7795 lbs). This increase of 60 liters
(47 kg, 13.2 imp.gals, 16 U.S.gals, 104 lbs) in the fuselage tanks is obtained by using the «top-up»
buttons ;
- the aircraft may also carry three pylon tanks of 1 137 usable liters (250.1 imp.gals, 300.4 U.S.gals,
1978 lbs, 898 kg).
POWER TO J3E SUPPLIED TO REFUELING SYSTEM IS DIRECTLY OBTAINED FROM THE

AIRCRAFT BATTERY, BY SWITCHING «REFUELING/FLIGHT» SWITCH TO «REFUELING»
POSITION. IN ORDER TO PREVENT ANY USELESS BATTERY DISCHARGE, THE SWITCH
SHALL BE KEPT IN THIS POSITION ONLY FOR THE TIME NECESSARY FOR REFUELING.
CAUTION :
1 - SHOULD OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS MAKE IT NECESSARY TO LEAVE THE
A/C FITTED WITH STORES OR FULL PYLON TANKS :
-EITHER ROTATE THE' WHEELS BY 1/4 OF A TURN ON DAILY INSPECTION (OR
EVERY 48 HOURS AT MOST), WHEN CHECKING THE TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE,
-OR - PRIOR TO TAKE-OFF -PERFORM TAXIING FOR ABOUT 1 km, INCREASING
SPEEDUPTO50km/hr.
2 - THE QUANTITY OF FUEL CARRIED FOR CERATIN MISSIONS IS LIMITED DUE TO

THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT UPON TAKE-OFF.
A Special tools
- Fuel system ground tool kit - aircraft refueled

- Aircraft boarding ladder

- Fuel recovery pans
- Appropriate fire extinguishing equipment
- Fuel distribution vehicles fitted for a delivery rate of 60cu.m/hr (1000 l/min) (3550 cu.ft/min -
269.1 g.p.m), under a pressure of 3.5 bar (50 psi).
3- MATERIALS
-Engine fuel :AIR3405C
WARNING :
TÂR1 ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES SO AS TO AVOID FIRE.

ELECTROSTATIC CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE EFFECTIVE :
-TANKER-TO-GROUND, AIRCRAFT-TO-GROUND, TANKER-TO-AIRCRAFT.
AG
BREGUET
/Uîru
AVIATIONôP3^-^^
MIRAGE
.. ».. «
F
a « .
A Unseat the wing pressure relief valves if the outer temperature is less than 0°C. If not, carry out
this operation once a week only.
Carefully sponge any trace of moisture from the valve and surrounding area.
-
Fully screw the unseating wrench (M31031) into the tapped hole of the valve.
-
- Pull along valve opening axis until said valve cracks open, then stop pulling. Quickly perform this
operation several times.
In the case of a defect, check valve setting (see 06-2).
- Remove the unseating wrench.
B Install device 7 (M31 128) on the main air vent and place a recovery pan under it.
C In cockpit
(1 ) Make sure that «IND» and «LP COCK» circuit breakers are cut in.
(2) Make sure that «LP MAIN COCK» and «CROSSFEED» switches are in «off» position .
(3) Read the fuel gauge indications on «fuselage» scale.
(4) Battery switched off.
D Connect the aircraft to the earth.
E Access to the refueling unit is via door 17.08, opening of which causes automatic opening of
feeder tank air vent valve 1 .
- Open the door ; while doing so, check that the valve actually opens.
- Remove the plug from the pressure refueling port.
- Ensure electrostatic connection between aircraft and ground refueling coupling.
- Connect the ground refueling coupling.
On refueling panel 2 :
- set «refueling - flight» switch 3 to «refueling» ;
- make sure that the «CROSSFEED» indicator light is out ;
- test the warning lights by depressing «LIGHT TEST» button 5 ;
- amber light (end of refueling)
- red light (feeder tank crossfeed) ;
- test the filler valve control circuits :
-set «FORWARD FUS TANK» switch to position «1» : the relevant indicator light comes
on; then depress «FILLING CIRCUIT TEST» button 6 : all the end-of -refuel ing lights come on ;
- repeat the operation with the switch in position «2» ; then return the switch to «off».
CAUTION :
IN STRONG TAIL WINDS, CLOSE THE CANOPY WHEN REFUELING SO AS TO PREVENT
FUEL FROM BEING SPLASHED INTO THE COCKPIT (OPERATION OF WING PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVES).
AD
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_
ti ^>^-r\l
^^.
MIRAGE F
5- NORMAL REFUELING
A Select the tanks to be filled.
In order to test both circuits of the front tank refueling valve, the front tanks should be refueled :
- on odd days, by selecting position «1 »,
- on even days, by selecting position «2».
CAUTION :
SELECTION OF THE AIRCRAFT REAR TANKS MANDATORILY IMPLIES PREVIOUS
SELECTION OF THE FRONT GROUP TANKS.
B - Aircraft refueling shall be performed under pressure (approx. 3.5 bar - 50 psi) ; as tank refueling
proceeds, the end-of -refuel ing lights flash on and off then go out, thus showing that the correspond¬
ing tanks are full.
6- TOTAL REFUELING OF FUSELAGE TANKS

A - Install two devices 4 (M31 128) on the outlet ports of the feeder tank pressure relief pipes.
B Position two fuel recovery pans beneath them.
C Carry out the same operations as stated under para. 5.
D Once all warning lights are out, reduce the pressure and carefully top up the tanks by slightly
pressing each button in turn until fuel starts to flow from the outlet ports of the feeder tank pressure
relief pipes.
7- FINAL STEPS
A Once the required refueling is carried out, set the refueling selector switches to «off».
B Set refueling switch 3 to «flight» position.
C - Check that the fuel quantity delivered largely corresponds to the required quantity.
D - Disconnect the ground refueling coupling then the electrostatic plug. Check the refueling
receptacle for tightness ; lock the refueling port plug.
E - Check for presence of the rubber pad on the control stop of «refueling-flight» switch, if the stop is
not of the one-piece type.
I NOTE : This pad is bonded with EC 1675 A/B adhesive.
F - Close door 17.08 and while doing so, check that feeder tank air vent valve 1 actually closes.
G In the cockpit :
- check that the fuel gauge indicates the required quantity,
- display the corresponding quantity on fuel remaining indicator.
H Remove electrostatic connections in reverse order of installation.
J Remove device 7, and if they were used, devices 4.

K - In the case of change of fuel grade, it may be necessary to adjust the specific gravity correctors of
the engine (see 06-5).
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
PRISE DE REMPLISSAGE DISPOSITIFS DE MISE A L'AIR LIBRE

REFUELING RECEPTACLE VENT DEVICES
FIGURE 3 - REMPLISSAGE NORMAL EN CARBURANT

AC NORMAL REFUELING
10-79 3-104
Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ>^r^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^SF5^-,^-^ . m amiai no
i
Restricted MAN UAL 02
PARTIAL REFUELING
(see figure 3)
1 - GENERAL
This type of refueling may be used for certain special missions.
POWER SUPPLY OF THE REFUELING SYSTEM DIRECTLY COMES FROM THE MAIN
AIRCRAFT BATTERY, BY SWITCHING «REFUELING-FLIGHT» SWITCH TO «REFUELING»
POSITION. IN ORDER TO PREVENT ANY USELESS BATTERY DISCHARGE, THIS SWITCH
SHALL BE KEPT ON THIS POSITION ONLY FOR THE TIME STRICTLY NECESSARY FOR
REFUELING.
A Special tools
- Fuel system ground tool kit
- Aircraft boarding ladders

Appropriate fire fighting equipment
-
Fuel distribution vehicles capable of a delivery rate of 60 cu.m/h (1000 l/min - 3550 cu.ft/min
- -
264.1 g.p.m), with a 3.5 bar (50 psi) pressure
- Recovery pan
3- MATERIALS
- Engine fuel Air 3405C
WARNING :
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES SO AS TO AVOID FIRE.
ELECTROSTATIC CONNECTIONS MUST BE EFFECTIVE :
- TANKER-TO-GROUND, AIRCRAFT-TO-GROUND, TANKER-TO-AIRCRAFT.
A Install device 7 (M31128) on the main air vent and place the recovery pan under the device.
B In cockpit
(1) Check that «IND» and «LP COCK» circuit breakers are cut in.
(2) Ensure that «LP MAIN COCK» and «CROSSFEED» switches are set to «OFF».
(3) Read the fuel gauge indications on «fuselage» scale, then on «feeder tank» scale (remaining fuel).
If the front and rear fuselage tanks are not empty, drain them so as to refuel them in accordance with
quantities given under para. 5.
(4) Battery «OFF»
C Carry out aircraft grounding.
AD
10-83 Restricted 3-1 04F
BREGUET AVIATION
D Access to the refueling unit is via door 17.08, opening of which causes automatic opening of
feeder tank air vent valve 1 .
- Open the door and while doing so, check that the valve actually opens.
- Remove the plug from the pressure refueling port.
- Ensure electrostatic connection between aircraft and ground refueling coupling.
- Connect the ground refueling coupling.
- On refueling panel 2 :
- set «refueling-flight» switch 3 to «refueling» position ;
- check that «CROSSFEED» light is out ;
- test the warning lights by depressing «LIGHT TEST» button 5 :
- amber light (end of refueling),
- red light (feeder tank crossfeed) ;
- test the refueling valve control circuits :
-set «FORWARD FUS TANK» switch to position «1» : the relevant indicator light
comes on ; depress «FILLING CIRCUIT TEST» button 6 : all the end-of-refueling lights come on ;
- repeat the operation with the switch in position «2» ; then return the switch to «off».
5- PARTIAL REFUELING
A Refer to the table below in order to find the fuel quantity to be delivered to the various tank
groups (difference between total required refueling and remaining fuel).
B Feeder tank refueling shall be performed under pressure (approx. 3.5 bar - 50 psi). Check total
feeder tank refueling by reading the fuel gauge indication and according to the fuel quantity delivered
by the tanker.
C On refueling panel (and in the indicated sequence) :
-set «FWD FUS TK» switch to «refueling» (position «1» or «2») and deliver the required fuel
quantity (tanker indication). Set «FWD FUS TK» switch to «off».
NOTE : In order to test both circuits of the front tank refueling valve, the front tanks should be
refueled :
- on odd days, by selecting position «1 »,
- on even days, by selecting position «2».
-set «AFT FUS TK» switch to «refueling» and deliver the corresponding fuel quantity (tanker
indication). Set «AFT FUS TK» switch to «off».
TOTAL FWD AFT

REQUIRED FEEDER FUSELAGE FUSELAGE
REFUELING TANKS TANKS TANKS
1500 1040 280 180
1700 1040 400 260
1900 1040 510 350
2100 1040 640 420
2300 1040 760 500
2500 1040 880 580
2700 1040 1000 660
2900 1040 1110 750
3100 1040 1240 820
3300 1040 1350 910
3500 1040 1480 980
NOTE The fuel quantities mentioned in above table are given in liters. To convert them into UK-US
units of volume, see Weight and Balance manual.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ>-%-U
BREGUET AVIATION .<<oF=
MIRAGE F
6- FINAL STEPS
A Once the required refueling is carried out, set refueling switch 3 to «Flight» position.
B Check that the fuel quantity delivered largely corresponds to the required quantity.
C Disconnect the ground refueling coupling then the electrostatic plug. Check the refueling
receptacle for tightness ; lock the refueling port plug.
D Check for presence of the rubber pad on the control stop of «refueling-flight» switch, if the stop
is not of the one-piece type.
I N0TE : This Pad is bonded with EC 1675 A/B adhesive.
E Close door 17.08, and while doing so, check that feeder tank air vent valve 1 actually closes.
F In cockpit :
- check that the fuel gauge indicates the required quantity,
- display the corresponding quantity on fuel remaining indicator.
G Remove electrostatic connections in reverse order of installation.
H Remove device 7.
J In the case of change of fuel grade, it may be necessary to adjust the specific gravity correctors of
the engine (see 06-5).
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL-îrvL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^^L-^f^
EMERGENCY REFUELING
(See figure 4)
1 - SCOPE
This operation enables to perform gravity refueling of internal fuselage tanks and, if needed, of
additional tanks, should no pressure refueling vehicle be available.
This refueling method should be exceptional and should be performed for operational requi¬
rements only.
CAUTION :
THE QUANTITY OF FUEL CARRIED FOR CERTAIN MISSIONS IS LIMITED DUE TO THE
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEIGHT UPON TAKE-OFF.
- Aircraft boarding ladder

Standard access stepladder (2 m high)
- 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz power supply unit
- Appropriate fire fighting equipment

- Fuel distribution vehicle (gravity refueling).
B Possible spares
- 1 O-ring, for front tank plug

- 1 O-ring, for feeder tank plug.
3- MATERIALS
I Engine fuel : AIR 3405C
A- WARNING :
- TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES SO AS TO AVOID FIRE.
-ELECTROSTATIC CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE EFFECTIVE :
TANKER-TO-GROUND, AIRCRAFT-TO-GROUND, TANKER-TO-AIRCRAFT.
B Open door 17-08 and set pressure relief valve 1 to open.
C - Remove fillet component 31 .1 1 and open vapor relief valve 2 of aft tank group.
D Remove both refueling plugs located respectively :

- on door 17.00/1 for fwd tank group,
- on door 27.01/3 for feeder tanks and aft tank group.
E Ground the aircraft and the tanker.
F Turn on A/C electrical supply.
AD
01 -80 Restricted 3_ 1 05
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL^-'MjL
BREGUET AVIATION ^--£»jS*ii> « ^ - ^ j ami i Al no
HA
^-^£^-<^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
G - In cockpit
(1 ) Ensure that "IND" and "LP COCK" circuit breakers are cut in.
(2) Ensure that the LP main cock is closed.
(3) Open the feeder tank crossfeed valve.
(4) Read the fuel gauge indication on "fuselage" scale.
(5) Switch on the LP pumps.
(6) Select "Emergency transfer" setting.
H - On refueling panel 3, make sure the "CROSSFEED" light is on, by selecting "refueling"
position then immediately returning to "flight" position.
5 - REFUELING
A - CAUTION
- IT IS MANDATORY TO FOLLOW THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS.
- INSTRONG TAIL WINDS, CLOSE THE CANOPY WHEN REFUELING SO AS TO PRE¬
VENT FUEL FROM BEING SPLASHED INTO THE CABIN.
B - Procedure
-Fill the front tank group through the filler port located on front center tank ; the capac¬
ity of this group is about 1 730 liters (380 Imp.gal - 456 US gal - 301 0 lb - 1 367 kg).
-Fill the feeder tanks and the rear tank group through the filler port located on the RH
feeder tank ; the total capacity of these tanks is about 2030 liters (446 Imp.gal - 536 US gal -
3522 lb - 1604 kg).
-Close the filler ports (align the marks) after checking the seal for condition. If necessary,
replace the seal.
6 - FINAL STEPS
A - In cockpit :
-check that the fuel gauges indicate the required fuel level
-switch off LP pumps
-switch off emergency transfer
-shut off feeder tank crossfeed
-on fuel remaining indicator, display the carried fuel quantity.
B - On refueling panel 3, make sure the "CROSSFEED" light is out, by selecting "refueling"
position then immediately returning to "flight" position.
Check for presence of the rubber pad on the control stop of "refueling-flight" switch, if
the stop is not of the one-piece type.
NOTE: This pad is bonded with EC 1675 A/B adhesive.
Close door 17.08 and while doing so, check that feeder tank air vent valve actually
closes.
C - Disconnect the electrical power supply unit.
D - Close vapor relief valve 2 of the rear tank group and reinstall the fillet component.
E - For pylon tanks :
-remove the filler plug (tank depressurization - opening),

-establish the gun-to-tank electrostatic connection,
-fill the tank,
-suppress the electrostatic connection,
-reinstall the filler plug (align the marks) after checking the seal for condition. If neces¬
sary, replace the seal.
F - Remove electrostatic connections in the reverse order of installation.
G - In the case of change of fuel grade, it may be necessary to adjust the specific gravity cor¬
rectors of the engine (see 06-5).
AJ
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
BOUCHONS DE REMPLISSAGE ROBINET DE DEGAZAGE

REFUELING PLUGS VAPOUR RELIEF VAL VE
TABLEAU DE REMPLISSAGE
REFUELING PANEL
FIGURE 4 REMPLISSAGE SECOURS EN CARBURANT

EMERGENCY REFUELING
AD
BREGUET AVIATION^jjF^ ^
lLj!>-^T\L MIRAGE F
OXYGEN TANK REPLENISHING (ON A/C)

(See figure 5)
1 - GENERAL
This operation is exceptional and should be performed when replacement of oxygen tank is
impossible.
2- EQUIPEMENT REQUIRED
- Liquid oxygen dispenser AIR LIQUI DE type 2258.

- Liquid oxygen storage tank AIR LIQUIDE type 80 A1.
- 02 vent pipe MS1359 (access to oxygen tank compartment via door 1 1-09).
- Liquid oxygen recovery pan.
B Special protective equipment
- Gloves
- Apron
- Helmet
- Boots
- White zip fastener type overalls (without pocket).
WARNING :
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO OPERATIONS ON OXYGEN SYSTEM
(See 01-0).
A In addition to general safety precautions, the following measures should be taken :
- operatives to be dressed with perfectly clean special clothes,

- parking area to be clean,
- aircraft and ground equipment to be earthed,
- fire extinguisher to be at hand,
- electrical circuits to be switched off, ground receptacle disconnected,
- refueling not to be performed at the same time,
- other personnel to be kept away from filling equipment, especially the vent.
B Open door 1 1 -09 and lock it with its crutch.
C Using a clean cloth thoroughly clean surroundings of access door and vent.
4- PROCEDURE
A Remove the free vent pipe from the oxygen compartment and connect it to the port. Beneath
said pipe, place a liquid oxygen recovery pan taking care that the vent pipe is inside recovery pan so
as to avoid any possibility of oxygen splashing (gusts for example).
B Remove the cap from the converter filler port.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=i>--<ir\l
BREGUET AVIATION^,r5}F=<^C>
MIRAGE F
^jsa= ^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
C Prépare the oxygen dispenser, then :

- set the pressure to 3 bar (43.5 psi),
- bleed the hose as follows :
(1 ) Make sure that no water remains in the nozzle, as ice might be formed.
(2) Bleed hose by connecting the nozzle to dispenser bleed until fluid flows out for at least 10 seconds.
D Disconnect the dispenser nozzle and connect it to the tank filler receptacle. Locking of filling
nozzle and opening of self-sealing valves occur simultaneously.
WARNING :
BE CAREFUL OF THE GAS DISCHARGE THROUGH VENT HOLE.
E Increase the pressure gradually up to 3.5 bar (50 psi). This pressure should be maintained throughout
the entire refilling operation.
NOTE : This filling pressure is defined, taking into account an average pressure loss of 1 bar through
the filling nozzle.
For reference, nominal pressure at tank inlet should be :
2.5 + q-5 bar ( 36 + 7Q psi).
F The 02 tank is replenished when there is a large continuous flow through vent hole.
NOTE : The tank capacity is 5 liters of liquid oxygen. (Replenishing requires 3 times the tank capa¬
city approx.).
G Close the oxygen dispenser delivery cock.
H Disconnect the filling nozzle from the tank filler and bleed the hose.
I Reinstall the plug onto tank filler port only when this no longer shows any trace of frost.
J Disconnect vent pipe. Place it back inside oxygen compartment, then close the door.
K After oxygen replenishing, allow the tank to stabilize for a minimum of two hours if the sub¬
sequent flight starts with acrobatics. If the flight is normal, allow the tank to stabilize for a minimum
of fifteen minutes.
A Switch off the oxygen dispenser.
B Check tank replenishing (see 02-5.1 15).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
RANGEMENT TUYAUTERIE
MISE A L'AIR LIBRE
VENT PIPE STOWAGE
FIGURE 5 - PLEIN DU RESERVOIR D'OXYGENE

OXYGEN TANK REPLENISHING
AB
BREGUET AVIATION .-^^^ MIRAGE F
EMERGENCY CYLINDER OXYGEN REPLENISHING

(figures 6 and 6M)
A Ground support equipment.
- Gaseous oxygen dispenser.
- Emergency cylinder replenishing adapter IT 406 441 .
- Oxygen pipe holding device MS1342.
- Cockpit access ladder.
2- PROCEDURE
WARNING :
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO OPERATIONS ON OXYGEN SYSTEM
(see01-0).
A Open the canopy.
B Connect emergency cylinder replenishing adapter 1 to the valve of the oxygen dispenser flexible
pipe with holding device 5 fitted between them.
C Place the pipe in the direction opposite to the aircraft, and bleed it, venting a small quantity of
oxygen under reduced pressure. Close the valve.
D Hook filling pipe 2 to the cockpit edge using holding device 5.
E Connect adapter 1 to filling receptacle 3 of the ejection seat oxygen unit. Open the pipe valve.
F Slowly fill the emergency cylinder until it is filled up (indication read on the pressure indicator of
the dispenser), while correcting the pressure in accordance with the ambient temperature in the cockpit ;
to this end, use the diagram (figure 6M).
Rated pressure : 180 ± 5 bar (2610 ± 72.5 psi) at 15° C.
Example :
For a cockpit temperature of 30° C, the filling pressure (stabilized) should be 195 bar (2827.5 psi).
G Make sure that the pointer of pressure indicator 4 of ejection seat oxygen unit is within «FULL»
sector.
NOTE : Emergency cylinder capacity : 0,41 liter (0.7 pts - 0.84 US pts).
FIGURE 6 - EMERGENCY CYLINDER REPLENISHING

AB
BREGUET AVIATION
ti MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
4000J.C
1500..
Pression
10001 à 15°C
Pressure at
& 15°C
1500 2000 2500 3000 PSI
FIGURE 6M - PRESSION DE REMPLISSAGE DE LA BOUTEILLE OXYGENE SECOURS
SUIVANT LA TEMPERATURE AMBIANTE CABINE
EMERGENCY OXYGEN CYLINDER FILLING PRESSURE
VERSUS AMBIENT TEMPERA TU RE
AB
BREGUET
it*J>^XL
AVIATION^^^-^^
MIRAGE F
^^*^^> Restricted MANUAL 02
3- FINAL STEPS
A Once the emergency cylinder is filled up, close the dispenser valve and the filling pipe valve.
B - Disconnect the adapter from the ejection seat oxygen unit, then reinstall the blanking plug on
the filling receptacle. Moderately tighten the blanking plug, using an 11 mm open-end wrench (for
reference, the tightening torque is 1 .2 ± 0.1 m.daN (8.85 ± 0.73 ft. lb).
C Secure the oxygen dispenser.
D Ensure that the pressure indicator does not show any pressure drop.
E Make sure that the «5 mn OX» warning light is out.
| F Close the canopy.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," v\ ^/ J*. # YV I r\/-\V«7f_ I
BREGUET AVIATION^-f^_ j^^, _ »«amiiai ««
Jâ~° Restncted MANUAL 02
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR REPLENISHING

(see figure 7)
1 - GENERAL
IN ALL CASES, REPLENISHING SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH A MIXTURE MADE OF

DISTILLED WATER AND 1 0% ANTIFREEZE.
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE GALVANIZED CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE
AND PREPARATION OF THE WATER/ANTIFREEZE MIXTURE.
ONLY USE LIMPID, DEPOSIT-FREE, RECENTLY MANUFACTURED ANTIFREEZE.
A - Ground support equipment
-Standard 30 fluid dispenser: evaporator fluid.

I
-Adapter MS1123 (Replenishing and drainage of evaporator).

-Overflow pipe.
3 - MATERIALS
-Distilled water.
J -S759-DCSEA 61 5 antifreeze fluid.
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Manually open nose U/C door.
WARNING:
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (See 02-0).
B - Install:
-adapter 1 onto filler port,
-overflow pipe 2, then open overflow port 3.
C - Set supply pressure to 2.5 bar (36 psi).
D - Carry out evaporator replenishing by slight impulses so as to avoid excess filling.

Replenishing is completed when a continuous flow of liquid is coming out through the
overflow port.
-AVOID ANY FLUID SPLASHES ONTO NEARBY EQUIPMENT.
-Stop replenishing.
E - Once the flow is TOTALLY COMPLETED:

-Close overflow port 3 and remove overflow pipe 2.
-Disconnect adapter 1 and reinstall plug onto filler port.
NOTE: Evaporator capacity = 4.5 liters (7.92 pts - 9.51 US pts).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
FIGURE 7 - PLEIN DE L'EVAPORATEUR

EVAPORATOR REPLENISHING
AB 3-113
12-73 Restricted
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-?v_~- j^ô _ . , m a m i ai no
^w ô Restricted MANUAL 02
HYDRAULIC RESERVOIIR REPLENISHING
1 - SCOPE
This operation provides the method to carry out the following:
-Either reservoir topping-up made necessary by normal operating consumption, or reser¬
voir filling-up.
-Hydraulic pressure supply unit.
-11 5/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply unit.
-Low pressure filling device MS1382.
-Connect hydraulic pressure supply unit.
(System 1 = door 30.05 - System 2 = door 26.07/1).
-Connect electrical power supply unit (door 25.07).
CAUTION:
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO U/C DOORS AND AIRBRAKES (SEE
02-0).
-Check that "DOORS" and "DIVE BK" HYD switches are set to "GROUND SAFETY" po¬
sition (door 17.04).
-Check that electric pump switch is off.
4 - HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR REPLENISHING

A - High pressure replenishing (with hydraulic power supply unit).
NOTE: Replenishing values are given for a hydraulic system correctly bled, and for accumula¬
tors normally charged.
Replenishment shall be performed in the following aircraft configuration:
System No. 1 System No. 2
-U/C extended, -power supply and anti-shimmy
-doors open and downlocked accumulators fully charged
-airbrakes retracted,
-slats and flaps retracted,
-accumulators fully charged, except electric pump accumulator.
-Start hydraulic pressure supply unit (pressure: 206 bar - 3000 psi; delivery rate: between
1 0 and 42 liters/min - 9.23 imp.gal/min -11.1 gpm).
-Carry out replenishing operation so as to deliver the required fluid quantity in the reser¬
voir. According to the system concerned, the reservoir volume to be reached is:
-System 1 = 6.1 \ q 2 liters (10.7 + jj pts - 12.8 * g5 U.S. pts)
-System 2 = 3.5 * ° 2 liters (6.1 5 * ® pts - 7.39 * g 5 U.S. pts)
AD
BREGUET AVIATION^CJjP=_^^-0
L^^-^TU MIRAGE F
^<^^^<^ Restricted MANUAL 02
NOTE : Operation of the control stick permits to perform a quicker replenishment.
B Low pressure replenishing (with MS 1382)
This replenishing shall be performed in the following A/C configuration :
System No 1 System No. 2
- U/C extended - power supply accumulator fully discharged

- speedbrakes retracted - anti-shimmy accumulator fully charged
- slats and flaps retracted
- doors open and downlocked
- in-flight refueling boom retracted
- accumulators discharged, except emergency brake system and accumulator.
- connect the filling device to the system hydraulic receptacle (supply).
Supply required hydraulic fluid quantity into the reservoir - According to the system concerned,
the reservoir volume to be reached is :
- System 1 = 7,6 + ° 2 liters (13.37 + ° 4 pts - 16.06 * [J 5 U.S.pts).
- System 2 = 4,2 + ° liters (7.39 + ° 4 pts ' 887 + 0.5 U-S'Pts)-
- Disconnect the filling device.
5- EXCESS FLUID
A High pressure :
- apply pressure to the system through hydraulic power supply unit.
- operate the unit to discharge the excess fluid out of the reservoir :
- cut out the power supply unit.
B Low pressure : this operation shall be performed only by using a hydraulic pressure supply unit.
- Disconnect :
-hydraulic pressure supply unit

- electrical power supply unit
- Close the doors.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^co- _-^^' . M A MUAI m
ACCESSORY GEARBOX OIL REPLENISHING

(see figure 8)
A Special tools
- Preparation tool kit.

- Standard 30 I fluid dispenser
- Recovery pan
- Replenishment adapters :
- replenishment adapter MS 1288-10 (item 6)
- replenishment adapter 15 173 B/AA (item 5)
- With stores :
- swivel coupling adapter 630A-16-4 (item 7)
- replenishment adapter 636A8-1 (item 8)
- Overflow adapters :
- overflow adapter MS 1 288-20 (item 3)
- overflow adapter 15 172 B/AA (item 2)
2- MATERIALS
-Oil
- Air 3514 (Turbo Nycoil 13B), or
- Mobil Jet 2, or
- Esso2380.
CAUTION :
IN THE CASE OF OIL REPLACEMENT, SEE 02-3 «INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED
WHEN REPLACING OIL»).
3- PROCEDURE
A Remove protective plugs of connections located in door 25.05 (wrench M 31025).
B On overflow connection 1 :
- install adapter 2,
- connect adapter 3 (fitted to overflow pipe) to adapter 2.
NOTE : During this operation, a slight quantity of oil corresponding to the overflow pipe volume
may flow out ; this phenomenon is normal.
C On filling connection 4 :
- without belly store, install adapter 5

- with belly store, install adapters 5 and 7
- with four-bomb pylon, install adapters 8 and 7.
For each of these configurations, connect to the indicated adapter(s), adapter 6 fitted to the
fluid dispenser piping.
D Ensure that the fluid dispenser pressure is between 2 and 4 bar (29 and 58 psi).
E Carry out accessory gearbox replenishing by injecting small quantities of oil at intervals until oil
flows out through overflow pipe.
F Disconnect filling device assembly.
G When oil no longer flows out, disconnect overflow device.
H Reinstall protective plugs of the connections (use wrench M 31025) and ensure they are locked
correctly.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION MIRAGE F
C^^P SANS CHARGES

WITHOUTSTORES
FIGURE 8 -PLEINDU RELAIS D'ACCESSOIRES

ACCESSORY GEARBOX OIL REPLENISHING
AC
BREGUET AVIATION^cL
ti ^J>^^1 MIRAGE F
ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING

(see figure 9)
1 - SCOPE
A Perform oil tank topping-up after engine operation ; determine and check the hourly oil consump¬
tion of the engine.
B Perform oil tank replenishing after drainage.
- Standard 30 I oil dispenser (unrestricted, pressure set to 58 psi (4 bar))
- Filling adapter MS1288-10
- Overflow adapter MS 1288-20
- Calibrated oil recovery tube
3- MATERIALS
-Oil
- Air 3514 (Turbo Nycoil 13B), or
- Mobil Jet 2, or
- Esso 2380.
CAUTION :
REPLENISHMENT MUST NEVER BE PERFORMED WITH AN OIL OF A DIFFERENTBRAND
OR GRADE THAN THAT IN THE TANK.
IN THE CASE OF OIL REPLACEMENT, SEE 02-3 «INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FOLLOWED
WHEN REPLACING OIL»).
4- SAFETY MEASURES
A Never top up the oil tank after an engine ventilation.
B Never top up the oil tank if the safety instructions of sheet «ENGINE STOP» (see 02-7) were not
complied with.
C Oil tank topping-up shall be performed within 2 hours after engine stop.
D Oil tank replenishing after drainage is authorized only if drainage was performed within 2 hours
after engine stop.
For each above mentioned case, apply the «Instructions to be followed in case of doubt rela¬
tive to engine oil replenishing» (see 02-3).
A Open doors 30.05 and 30.05i so as to reach oil servo-unit 1 .
6- PROCEDURE
CAUTION :
CHECK THE OIL DISPENSER FILLING AND OVERFLOW ADAPTERS FOR CONDITION
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. DEFECTIVE ADAPTERS MAY CAUSE DAMAGE OF THE
ENGINE SIDE CONNECTIONS RESULTING IN SIGNIFICANT AND DANGEREOUS LEAK¬
AGE.
A Unlock and remove both blanking plugs of filling and overflow connections (items 3 and 2 respec¬
tively).
B Connect one end of overflow adapter to overflow connection (2) and place the other end in a
calibrated oil recovery tube. This tube shall be empty so as to check the oil quantity discharged through
overflow pipe.
AC
08-87 Restricted 3-1 1 8
BREGUET AVIATION
NOTE : When the pipe is installed, a slight quantity of oil corresponding to the inner volume of the
tank junction pipe will normally flow out.
C Connect the oil dispenser adapter to filling connection 3.
(1 ) Ensure that the oil dispenser pressure is set to 4 bar (58 psi).
(2) The approximate oil quantity to be added is determined by multiplying the maximum hourly
consumption (1.5 liter - 2.63 pt - 3.16 US pt) by the operating time since last oil replenishing.
D Depending on the type of dispenser used :
- position ACCURATELY the index at the oil level in the dispenser,

- or return the volume counter pointer to zero.
E Fill the oil tank until oil flows out through the overflow pipe.
F Press the oil level indicator pushbutton and check that the pointer is in the green range of the
scale.
G Disconnect the filling pipe, check the self-sealing coupling for tightness and reinstall the blank
ensuring that it locks properly.
H Wait until oil flow through the overflow pipe is interrupted, then disconnect the pipe.
I Wipe the overflow connection, install the blank and check that it locks properly.
| J Check drain adapters 4 for tightness (main and emergency capacity).

2_ _1 _3 4
FIGURE 9 - ENGINE OIL REPLENISHING

AB
BREGUET AVIATION
£«^>Û
^<<SP^^-Î?^
MIRAGE
..»».,.».
F
7- FINAL STEPS
A Close the access doors
8- CHECK
A Read the oil quantity supplied ; depending on the type of dispenser used, the reading shall be
taken :
- between the index and the oil level after replenishing,
- or on the volume counter.
B Measure the oil quantity discharged in the calibrated oil recovery tube. Subtract this quantity
from the oil quantity supplied.
C In the case of oil tank topping-up following a sampling used for spectrometric analysis (see 06-5),
subtract the oil sampled for this analysis (^ 0.25 I - 0.43 pt -0.52 US pt).
D Record on aircraft form 1 1 the oil quantity used by the engine. Ensure that the real consumption
is between 0.8 and 1.5 l/h (48.8 and 91.5'cu.in/h -0.17 and 0.32 lmp.gal/h -0.21 and 0.39 USgal/h).
Should consumption be abnormal, see 06-5.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ Jl *< V\II\/-\VJ'L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£i_~ ^7**^, _ ,.,.,., rt0
^v, ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 02
VARIO-ALTERNATOR OIL REPLENISHING

(See figure 10)
1 - SCOPE
Top up the vario-alternators with oil (Figure 10).
-Normal consumption for 100 flying hours should be less than 150 cm3 (9.15 cu.in).
-Standard 30-liter oil dispenser.

-Replenishment adapter MS 1288-10.
-Supply adapter 74608.
-Recovery pipe 75002 (fitted with plastic tube).
-Graduated recovery vessel.
or
-Filler syringe 52 738-2.
-Recovery tube 75002 (fitted with plastic tube).
B - Systematic spares
-O-ring NLB-378-10-06 - fig. 3 - item 25
-Flat washer 74609 (in kit 41502)
-O-ring NLB-378-10-06 - fig. 3 - item 17
-Flat washer 74526 (in kit 41502)
3 - MATERIALS
-Oil
-Air 3514 (TURBO NYCOIL 13B)
-Mobil jet 2 or
- Essq 2380
-In the case of oil replacement, see 02-3 (Instructions to be followed when replacing the
oil in engine, accessory gearbox and vario-alternator).
Remove :
-belly pylon (if necessary)

-doors 26.05 and 26.07 (door 26.06 remains integral with door 26.07),
-open vario-alternator cowling,
-place a clean recovery vessel underneath the casing.
5 - PROCEDURE
-Vario-alternator replenishing is normally performed on the aircraft by means of a stan¬

dard 30-liter oil dispenser set to 1,2 bar (17.4 psi) (1,5 bar (21 .5 psi) max.).
-Vario-alternator replenishing can also be performed using a syringe with a special
nozzle ; this method is however more specially designed for replenishment in a workshop,
with vario-alternator removed.
Consumption will be equal to the difference between oil quantity delivered by standard
dispenser or syringe and oil quantity recovered in overflow port vessel.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," n -" ^ I\/-\WL.
BREGUET AVIATION^>_- ^p-^> _ . . . , ,...,,,., m
A - Oil replenishing with standard oil dispenser
CAUTION:
DO NOT START REPLENISHING BEFORE CHECKING THAT THE OVERFLOW ADAP¬
TER IS CORRECTLY CONNECTED.
NEVER CONNECT THE OVERFLOW ADAPTER AFTER COMPLETION OF THE REPLEN¬

ISHMENT AS THE AIR VENT IS THEN IMMERSED, THUS CREATING A VACUUM
PRESSURE IN THE GEARBOX WHICH PREVENTS A CONTINUOUS AND FULL OUT¬
FLOW OF THE EXCESS OIL.
-Remove the blanking plug from the overflow port (located on the side of vario-alternator
mounting flange).
-Screw overflow recovery tube 1 .
-Remove the blanking plug from the filler port.
-Screw supply adapter 2.
-Connect filling device 3 to the supply adapter.
-Perform replenishment by injecting small quantities of oil until oil starts to flow out of
the recovery tube (duration of the injection < 1 second).
-Disconnect filling device 3.
-Unscrew supply adapter 2.
-When oil has stopped flowing, unscrew recovery tube 1 .
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If there is any doubt as concerns overfilling, drain the vario-alternator and replenish again.
-Wipe off the vario-alternator overflow port and filler port plugs.
-Systematically replace the flat washer and the plug preformed packing (see figure 10).
-Screw the overflow port and filler port plugs and moderately tighten them.
-Check for sealing, then safety the plugs.
B - Oil replenishing with syringe fitted with special nozzle.
This method is identical to the previous one. The syringe is directly screwed to the vario-
alternator filler port.
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Close the cowling.

-Reinstall the doors.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 10 - PLEIN D'UN VARIO-ALTERNATEUR

VARIO-ALTERNATOR REPLENISHING
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_
J^-^-Q
^ ^
MIRAGE F
DEFUELING
1 - GENERAL
Two defueling methods should be considered :
A - With connection of external pressure supply unit : defueling of complete A/C through dry engine
pipe.
B Gravity defueling : successive defueling of all tanks.
A Special tools
- Fuel system ground tool kit - aircraft refueled.
- 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply unit

- Pressure supply unit
- Drain pans
- Fuel draining pipe MS 1378 or,
- Aircraft-to-tanker direct defueling device
- Fuel recovery equipment
C Spares
- Seal of «dry engine» fuel filler adapter.
AB
09_83 Restricted 3-201
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
3 - LOCATION OF DEFUELING DEVICES (See figure 2)
QUANTITY
DEFUELING POINTS ACCESS FUEL QUANTITY
LH RH
Internal without topping-up:

GENERAL DEFUELING 1 29-05 4380 liters
NOTE: not drainable: 40 liters
with pylon tanks ~6650 liters
+ belly pylon tank -7800 liters
Negative-g flight 1 29-05 60 liters

accumulator
Forward central tank 1 17-06 691 liters
Forward lateral tanks Airbrake 1076 liters

(RH and LH) 1 1 compartment
Forward and aft feeder 29-04/2

tanks (LH and RH) 1 1 29-08/2 1059 liters
Aft tanks 33-04

(LH and RH) 1 1 33-08 1110 liters
Wing tanks Between

(LH and RH) 1 1 ribs 2 and 2A 384 liters
LH and RH pylon tanks 1 1 1137 liters x 2
Filler port
Belly pylon tank 1 1 1 37 liters
NOTE: The fuel quantities mentioned in above table are given in liters. To convert them into
UK-US units of volume, see Weight and Balance manual.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=J>^>k MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^F5'^^ M A Ml lA I OO
^^^"^^% Restricted MANUAL 02
4 - RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING :
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES AS TO AVOID ANY FIRE :
- ELECTROSTATIC CONNECTIONS SHOULD BE EFFECTIVE :
- TANKER-GROUND, AIRCRAFT-GROUND, AIRCRAFT-TANKER,
- DRAIN PAN-GROUND, TANKER-DRAIN PAN, AIRCRAFT-DRAIN PAN.
A Avoid any fuel splashing onto wheel tires.
B Drain water from the tanks (See 02-3).
5 - TRANSFER DEFUELING
A Principle
(1) Feeder tank defueling, LP pumps operating.

(2) Fuel transfer from other tanks for feeder tanks.
B Preliminary steps
(1) -Doors 28.07 and 26.00

- Defuel the engine supply system.
- Open the bleed ports of LP system (engine and supply pipes), then close them.
(2) -Door 29.05
-Separate the «dry engine» supply flexible pipe from adapter (INTER F LEX adapter -
See 06.0).
(3) - Connect to adapter (with progressive valve closed) :
- defueling device, through pick-up, or
- defueling pipe, routed to a pan.
(4) -Door 17.08
- Make sure it is closed.
(5) - Door 25.00
- Connect the pressure supply unit to the tank charging receptacle.
(6) - Energize the aircraft.
(7) - Start the pressure supply unit, set the delivery pressure to 4 bar (58 psi) and supply the aircraft.
(8) - Open the progressive valve of draining device (or pipe).
(9) - In the cockpit :
- «Fuel transfer sequence» control switch on «CLEAN».
- Set «LP MAIN COCK» switch to OPEN, «LP PUMP» switch to ON.
C Defueling
In the cockpit, a flight line technician will follow the defueling procedure :
- on fuel transfer indicators :

- light on : corresponding tanks drained,
- transfer sequence :
external tanks,
-
wing tanks,
-
forward central tank,
-
AFT tank upper section,
-
forward lateral tanks,
-
- AFT tank lower section,
- feeder tanks,
- on fuel remaining indicators,
- on fuel gages.
SWITCH OFF THE LP PUMPS AS SOON AS THE CORRESPONDING LIGHTS ON FAILURE

WARNING PANELS ARE ON.
KEEP THE PRESSURIZATION - AFTER LP PUMP SWITCHING OFF - UNTIL FUEL FLOW IS
INTERRUPTED (DRAINING OF NEGATIVE-G FLIGHT ACCUMULATORS).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^|L
/LJ>-iJr'U.
__
MIRAGE F
..,»,,... ~~
NOTE : Complete defueling is obtained by draining remaining fuel through drain valves.
D Final steps
(1) -Check that «LP PUMP switches are set to OFF.

- Set «LP MAIN COCK» switch to CLOSED.
(2) - Uncouple the pressure supply unit and fit the blanking plug.
- Cut out the electrical power supply.
(3) Open door 17-08 on refueling panel and set the discharging valve to «OPENING».
(4) Disconnect the draining device (or pipe) and connect the «dry engine» supply pipe (Interflex
adapter -see 06-0).
(5) Once the tanks have been refueled, bleed the «LP» fuel system of dry engine (see 06-4).
WARNING :
AS THE DRY ENGINE SUPPLY SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE, CHECK FOR TIGHTNESS.
(6) Install the doors.
6- GRAVITY DEFUELING OF INTERNAL TANKS (see figure 11)
A Procedure
WARNING :
ITTTHE CASE OF FWD TANK GROUP DEFUELING AND IN ORDER TO PREVENT THE
AIRCRAFT FROM TILTING BACK ON ITS TAIL (AIRCRAFT CENTER OF GRAVITY
SHIFT). INSTALL A JACK UNDER JACK FITTING AT FRAME 36 (see 02-2).
IN THE CASE OF A COMPLETE DEFUELING AND FOR SAME REASONS AS ABOVE,
START DEFUELING THE AFT TANK GROUP.
(1 ) Position drain pans under the tanks.
(2) Install defueling devices MS553 (see para. 3) as follows :
- remove plug 1 (wrench M12 038),

- install defueling device 2 closed (bayonet fit),
- tighten sealing ring.
(3) Open defueling device using lever 3.
B Final steps
(1 ) Remove defueling devices 2.
(2) Reinstall plugs 1.
7- PYLON TANK DEFUELING
A Defueling shall be performed by suction through the filler port, after removal of the filter (opening
of the plug in two steps, pylon tank pressure relief).
B Take following particular safety measures :
- ensure electrostatic connection between tank and defueling nozzle,
- avoid any damage to the filler port and the tank bottom when using the defueling nozzle,
- be careful to use a clean defueling nozzle.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /U^^TAl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^cP-^-Ô
^^^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 02
8 - NEGATIVE-G FLIGHT ACCUMULATOR DRAINING
A Principle
Draining is performed by pressurization.
B Procedure
(1) Door 17-06

Connect the pressure supply unit to the pressure pick-off on negative-g flight accumulator
bleed port.
(2) Perform preliminary operations (1) to (3) for transfer defueling (see para. 5), using the draining
pipe.
(3) Apply electrical power supply to the aircraft.
(4) Start the pressure supply unit, set the delivery pressure to 600 mb (8.7 psi) and power supply the
accumulator.
(5) Open the progressive valve of draining pipe.
(6) Open the LP main cock in cockpit and close it as soon as fluid no longer flows in the draining pipe.
(7) Deenergize the pressure supply unit.
C Final steps
- Perform final operations (2) to (5) of transfer defueling (see para. 5).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT^
BREGUET AVIATION -Ê°
MIRAGE F
BRANCHEMENT DE LA TUYAUTERIE
VIDANGE PAR GRAVITE
GRAVITY DEFUELING DE VIDANGE SUR TUYAUTERIE REACTEUR SEC
CONNECTION OF DEFUELING
PIPE TO DRY ENGINE PIPE
C.29:
MONTAGE AVEC BOUCHON

D'OBTURATION
SEALING PLUG INSTALLATION
FIGURE 1 1 VIDANGE CARBURANT

DEFUELING
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ^^r^l
BREGUET AVIATION _. __
MIRAGE F
AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR DRAINING

(Figure 7M)
1 - SCOPE
- Removal of evaporator.
- Avoid antifreeze concentration.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Evaporator replenishing and draining adaptor MS 1 123.

Recovery pan (capacity : 5 liters - 8.7 pts - 10.5 U.S.pts min.).
3- PROCEDURE
A Manually open nose U/C door (see 02-0)
WARNING :
| TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (See 01-0).
B Place recovery pan under filler port
C Open overflow port 3 and install adaptor 1 onto filler port
D Once air conditioning evaporator draining is performed :

- close overflow port 3,
- remove the adaptor and fit blanking plug to filler port.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Manually close nose U/C door (see 02-0).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Ouvert Fermé
Open Closed
FIGURE 7M- VIDANGEDE L'EVAPORATEUR

AA
EVAPORATOR DRAINING
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £_-*-*--"; "G MIRAGE F
breguet aviation^^-^ Restricted MANUAL 02
HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR DRAINING

- Hydraulic pressure supply unit
- 1 1 5/200V - 400Hz electrical power supply unit.
- Connect hydraulic pressure supply unit

(System 1= door 30.05 - System 2 = door 26.07/1 )
- Connect electrical power supply unit (door 25.07).
CAUTION : TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (See 02-0).
3- HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR DRAINING
- Drain the reservoir by using pressure supply unit, switch the latter off as soon as the reservoir is
empty.
- Disconnect
- hydraulic pressure supply unit,
- electrical power supply unit.
- Close the doors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJS>-&-JrA /V\ll\/AVj'C I
BREGUET AVIATION ^£0ï
^ t5»CS
.^-w. .
Restricted, ...»,,,..« 02
MANUAL
ACCESSORY GEARBOX OIL DRAINING

(see figure 8)
A - Special tools
| -Installation tool kit.
-Drain pan
-Replenishment adaptor MS1 288-10 (Item 6)
-Replenishment adaptor 15173BAA (Item 5)
-Overflow adaptor MS1 288-20 (Item 3)
-Overflow adaptor 15172BAA (Item 2)
With stores :
-Rotating coupling adaptor 630A16-4 (Item 7).
-Replenishment adaptor 636A8-1 (Item 8).
2 - PROCEDURE
NOTE: Complete draining of accessory gearbox cannot be performed on the aircraft. Only par¬
tial draining (sufficient as regards routine servicing) may be carried out.
Draining is more effective when it is performed after a runup or upon return from
flight.
Collect the oil in a clean container for contingent analysis.
A - Remove protective plugs from connections located in door 25-05 (wrench M31.025).
B - On overflow connection 1 :
-install adaptor 2,
-connect adaptor 3 (fitted to overflow pipe the end of which is placed in the drain pan)
to adaptor 2.
C - On filling connection 4 :
-without belly store install adaptor 5,
-with belly store install adaptors 5 and 7,
-with four-bomb pylon install adaptors 8 and 7.
For each of these configurations, connect to the indicated adaptor(s) adaptor 6 whose
end will be placed in the drain pan.
D - When oil no longer flows out, disconnect the overflow and replenishing devices.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^-"^ /Y\ll\/-\v^C. I
^, .cô «aamiiai
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^-o Restricted MANUAL «o
02
E - Reinstall connection protective plugs (wrench M 31025) and make sure they are locked.
3 - OIL INSPECTION
-Inspect recovered oil. In case of very black oil, it usually means that the gearbox operat¬
ing temperature is excessive.
-Check the accessory gearbox magnetic plug and filter (see 06-1 ).
-The presence of hydraulic fluid in the gearbox oil usually means that a hydraulic pump is
deteriorated (leak at pump drive system level). After checking the pump, rinse the gearbox in
the following manner :
-fill up the gearbox (see 02-3),

-have the engine run at 7000 rpm (83%), for 5 min. (see 02-3),
-thoroughly bleed the gearbox,
-refill the gearbox.
AA
06-86 Restricted 3 -209 M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTi
BREGUET AVIATION ^S^
MIRAGE F
ENGINE OILTANK DRAINING
1 - SCOPE
This sheet provides information relative to engine oil tank draining.
- Recovery container (approximate capacity : 15 liters - 26 pt - 31 US pt for complete draining)
- 10 mm ID flexible pipe
B Spares
- 0.8 mm dia stainless steel wire
CAUTION :
THE~ENGINE OIL TANK CONSISTS OF TWO INNER TANKS EACH CONNECTED TO AN
ADAPTER USED FOR DRAINING. COMPLETE DRAINING OF THE OIL TANK THEREFORE
REQUIRES DRAINING OF BOTH INNER TANKS.
A - Open doors 30.05 and 30.05L
4- PROCEDURE
FIGURE 12 - OIL TANK DRAINING

AB
rf^-A-^
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ' " * ' '^'^V-7L-
BREGUET AVIATION .<^&^-S*Qs . » « a mi i a i «i
^^â^sQ^ Restricted MANUAL 02
A - Draining of main tank
(1 ) Unsafety hollow bolt 1 of drain adapter 2.
(2) Fit the flexible pipe to drain adapter 2.
(3) Place the other end of the flexible pipe in the recovery container.
(4) Unscrew the hollow bolt by several turns and allow oil to flow out.
(5) Once the tank is completely drained (no more oil flow), screw in the hollow bolt, then re¬
move the flexible pipe and safety the bolt with lockwire.
B - Draining of emergency tank
(1 ) Repeat the steps described in paragraph 4A, acting on hollow bolt 3 and drain adapter 4.
C - Carry out engine oil replenishing (see 02-3) and check drain adapters for leaks.
WARNING:
IL OIL TANK REPLENISHING IS NOT ACHIEVED IMMEDIATELY AFTER DRAINING; IT
IS MANDATORY TO INDICATE IT CLEARLY SO AS TO PREVENT THE AIRCRAFT FROM
BEING PUT INTO SERVICE WITHOUT OIL
5 - FINAL STEPS
Close the doors.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
DRAINING WATER FROM FUEL TANKS

(See figure 2)
- Clean calibrated transparent receptacle, capacity : 1 liter (1.75 pts - 2.1 U.S.pts) approx.
- Drain tube, diameter : 20 mm approx.
2- LOCATION OF DRAINS
DRAINED COMPONENT LOCATION
Forward central tank Door 17.06
FWD lateral tank, R H

Speedbrake spar box
FWD lateral tank, LH
Aft feeder tank, RH Door 29.04
Aft feeder tank, LH Door 29.08
Aft tank, RH
Between frames 31 and 32
Aft tank, LH
Wing tank, RH
Between ribs 2 and 2A
Wing tank, LH
Pylon tank, RH
Pylon tank, LH Lower section
Belly pylon tank
Negative-g flight
accumulator Door 17.06
3- DRAINING
NOTE : As the presence of water depends on a great number of factors, among which
- Fuel type,
- Weather conditions,
- Fuel storage,
the frequency of draining operations can be modified by the local command.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU^>'"rvk
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F^^s^C"
MIRAGE F
^25^-s^-^ Restricted MANUAL 02
A Tanks
(1 ) Use the transparent calibrated receptacle.
(2) Unscrew the drain screw and allow the fuel to flow out for a few seconds.
(3) Screw in the drain screw.
(4) Repeat the same operation for all other drains so as to recover 3/4 liter approx. (1.3 pts -
1.5 U.S.pts).
(5) Allow to settle for about 10 minutes. Check that there is no water.
B Negative-g flight accumulator (air system bleed)
(1) Unscrew the drain screw.
NOTE : Allow the fluid to flow out until exhaustion. Fuel recovery does not mean necessarily that the
diaphragm is burst. In that case, it is necessary to perform following check : switch on a LP
pump : a continuous fuel flow will show that the diaphragm is burst.
(2) Screw in the drainscrew.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^c-
ti^j>^r\L
__
MIRAGE F
PITOT STATIC SYSTEM DRAINING
1 - PURPOSE
Evacuation of water from pitot static systems.
- Open nose gear door manually.
WARNING :
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES (See 02-0)
- Open doors 01-06.1 - drain S1

01-06.2- drain T2
05-06.1 - drains S2-T2
Access to drains T2 - S4 is gained through nose gear door 1 1-04i.
3- DRAINING
- Ensure the blanking plugs are removed.

- For each draining operation :
- unscrew drain plug
- allow water to drain away
- screw up drain plug.
- Close the doors

- Perform pitot static system leakage test (See 12-1 ).
AB
06-75 m ». i a.
Restricted j 3-303
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ftî^ O MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôP2" ^
BLEEDING OF EQUIPMENT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1 - SCOPE
Evacuation of condensate from equipment air conditioning system.
Open nose gear door manually (see 02-0).
WARNING :
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES (See 01-0).
3- PROCEDURE
- Unlock ventilation receptacle plug (bayonet system).

- Allow water to drain away.
- Reinstall ventilation receptacle plug, making sure that seal ring is positioned correctly.
- Apply vertical pulling force to plug to make sure that pins are correctly aligned with locking
slots.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Close nose gear door manually (see 02-0).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION 4
TIRES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
4-0 GENERAL
- Tire inflation pressure and shock absorber height 4.001

- Standards of use for tires 4.003
- Tire replacement (See 05-5)
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//« xx^n
-l^^-O MIRAGE
I VU l\/V
V^ L. F
I
BREGUET AVIATION ^£. _^ - . »,am,.a. «o
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

AND SHOCK-ABSORBER HEIGHT
1 - GENERAL
A Tire inflation pressure
These inflation pressures are given for an A/C resting on its wheels, with tires at ambient
temperature. After braking, allow the tires to cool before checking the inflation pressure.
NOTE : When checking the pressure, take into account variations in ambient temperature. For an
ambient temperature variation of ± 10°, apply a pressure variation as follows :
- ± 0.34 bar (4.9 psi) for the main wheels,
- ± 0.24 bar (3.4 psi) for the nose wheels.
If a pressure loss in excess of 5 % of initial pressure is noted over a 24 - hour period, the
wheel must be removed to check for airtightness.
B Shock-absorber height
Shock-absorber height (H) measurement is not an accurate measurement, but is considered as a

simple and fast means to check that the shock-absorber does not show any considerable charging
discrepancy which may be prejudicial to safety.
Nose U/C shock-absorber : H = distance between wheel axle box upper face and rotating tube
lower bearing face.
Main U/C shock-absorber : H = distance between lower bearing face and shock-absorber bottom
upper edge.
NOTE : Such a shock-absorber bottom upper edge may be covered with rubber cement applied at that
location. It will be therefore necessary to slightly remove rubber cement at the measuring
point.
In addition to values specified in following table, it is imperative that the shock-absorber

concerned should be checked as follows, so as to identify leakage (gas or hydraulic fluid) :
The method consists in measuring the following (preferably 2 or 3 hours after flight) :
-
- pressure with shock-absorber fully released and A/C jacked up,
- temperature.
- Any pressure/temperature point located outside the theoretical range will indicate that the
charging pressure is to be checked (see 5-0).
- Any pressure/temperature point located inside the theoretical range will indicate that the shock-
absorber is to be removed for hydraulic fluid level check (see 05-1 and 05-3).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
2 - TABLE OF TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES
Other than
TIRES MICHELIN
MICHELIN
UNDERCARRIAGE Nose U/C Main U/C Nose U/C Main U/C
< 13,500 kg 10.5 bar

(29,762 lb) (150 psi)
8 bar 9.3 bar 13.1 bar
(115 psi) (135 psi) (190 psi)
> 13,500 kg 12.5 bar
(29,762 lb) (181 psi)
TABLE OF SHOCK ABSORBER HEIGHT
Travel to be measured is shown in the table below.

It is valid irrespective of aircraft weight distribution or temperature.
A/C WEIGHT
SHOCK ABSORBERS
< 13.5 tonnes > 13.5 tonnes
(29,762 lb) (29,762 lb)
MAIN U/C >10mm (0.39 in)
NOSE U/C >60mm (2.34 in) >40mm (1.46 in)
In the event of a major discrepancy between the two main U/C shock absorbers, release the shock
absorbers by transmitting oscillatory movements to the wingtips.
The examples below indicate stores carrying capability with full fuel load.
(a) At aircraft weight less than 13.5 tonnes (29,762 lb), stores carrying capability is approximately
2 tonnes, as follows :
- one RP35 under fuselage plus LR155 at station 1, or any equivalent load,
- operational stores at station 1 or station 2.
(b) At aircraft weight greater than 13.5 tonnes (29.762 lb), stores carrying capability is higher
than 2 tonnes, as follows :
- one RP35 under fuselage plus operational stores other than LR155,
- operational stores at wing stations 1 and 2.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ;
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ê^ ^^^> ,.AM,|A, M
^-«. ^~=w Restricted MANUAL 02
STANDARDS OF USE FOR TIRES
1 - SCOPE
This worksheet is intended to inform the personnel about the technical instructions to be
followed so that the tires are used properly.
It is a synopsis of RRM 108 that it completes.
2 - GENERAL
Considering the importance of tire behavior for FLIGHT SAFETY, it is essential that the
personnel checking and watching the tires strictly follows the instructions in force. The very
serious risks which may be run only allow for limited initiative and interpretation.
IN CASE OF DOUBT AS TO THE INTERPRETATION OF A TOLERANCE OR OF A RE¬

JECTION CRITERION, SYSTEMATICALLY CHOOSE THE SOLUTION OFFERING MAXIMUM
SAFETY.
3 - DEFINITION OF TIRE AREAS
A - Tread
Tire portion liable to wear out through contact with the ground.
Visible limits are the circular concentric serrations as the upper section of the sidewalls.
B - Sidewalls
Areas between tread and tire beads.
C - Tire beads
Part of the tire bearing against the wheel rim flanges.
D - Metal protector (N.P.S.)
The MICHELIN AIR X tire is provided with a metal protector under the thread.
4 - USABLE TIRE TYPES
-Tubeless type:
-DUNLOP bias-ply,
-MICHELIN radial-ply,
-KLEBER bias-ply.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
5 - STANDARDS OF USE
TIRE INSPECTION TOLERANCES REMEDY
A- Tread
(1 ) Normal wear MICHELIN tire
1 - The groove depth is equal to The tire remains in
or greater than 1 mm over service.
the entire tread.
2 - The groove depth is between Discard the tire.
0.5 and 1 mm (0.019 and
0.039 in) at any point
of the tread.
3 - Appearance of metal protector Discard the tire
at any point of the tread.
(2) Cracking at bottom 1 - The metal protector is not The tire remains in
of groove visible. service.
2 - The metal protector is
visible.
. The length of the cracking is The tire remains in
less than 30 mm (1 .18 in) service.
. The length of the cracking is Discard the tire.
more than 30 mm (1 .1 8 in)
(3) Normal wear Other tires
- Normally, tires may be used until
one of the tread designs is no
longer visible. However, for the
benefit of doubt concerning
the degree of wear, replace the
tire when the thickness of
one of the designs is locally
less than 1 mm (0.039 in). Discard the tire.
(4) Cuts MICHELIN tire
Firstly consider the depth:
1 - The cut does not reach the metal Maintain the tire in
protector or the metal protector service after extraction of
is reached but not any foreign objects.
damaged (no wires cut).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
2 - The metal protector is

damaged:
. Estimate the depth of the
cut in relation to the bottom
of the closest groove.
If the depth of the cut is
greater than limit depth LC
(limit cut: 3 mm) (0.118 in) Discard the tire.
If the depth of the cut is
less than or equal to limit
depth LC, measure the greatest
length of the cut and compare
the value with LL (LL = limit
length: 30 mm) (1.18 in)
. if length > LL Discard the tire.
. if length < LL Maintain the tire in
service after extraction
of any foreign objects.
(5) Cuts
(Slits facing any direc KLEBER COLOMBES tire
tion, the lips of which are With the tire inflated to its opera
clearly separated. ting pressure, for any cut showing
Not to be confused ONE of the following three
with more or less characteristics:
lengthwise scratches Discard the tire.
due to horn-stone sliding
between tire and ground (a) the greatest dimension of the
nor with gap or opening). cut exceeds 25 mm (0.984 in)
and the edges are at least 3 mm
(0.118 in) apart.
(b) 40 % or more of the textile

plies are slashed.
(c) the carcass cords are
visible.
DUNLOPtire
With the tire inflated to its
operating pressure, for any cut
SIMULTANEOUSLY showing the
following three characteristics: Discard the tire.
(a) the cut has resulted in a
tear exceeding the limits
of a 25 mm (0.984 in) dia circle.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(b) The textile cords are cut and

at least then thread sections
are visible.
(c) The depth of the cut is such
that its edges are protruding and
the profile is locally distorted.
NOTE: For any very thin
cut (thin at the surface, but
very deep) which does not show
characteristics (a) but shows
characteristic(c). Discard the tire.
(6) Bulge (All tires) - No bulge is permissible Discard the tire.
(7) Puncture (All tires) - Not permissible Discard the tire.
B- Sidewalls
(1 )Cuts (as per - The slit depth is greater than
definitio.n) 2 mm and specially if the textile
is visible at the bottom of the
cut Discard the tire.
If the cuts are smaller The tire remains in service
but should be inspected
daily.
(2)Bulge - No bulge is permissible. Discard the tire.
(3) Crazing - Check that the damage does
(appears after a long not affect the textile casing
exposure to ozone otherwise. Discard the tire.
action)
MICHELIN tire
Tire covered with After cleaning with soapy
noxious materials water:
(oil, grease, etc.) - if the noxious agents have
causing deterioration produced crazing or visible
of the surface condition deterioration of the rubber
or blisters. (hardening, drying, etc.)
on the tire Discard the tire.
- If the blisters are not
absorbed within 24 hours Discard the tire.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Cuts or crazing, slit 1 - Less than 2 mm (0.078 in) The tire remains in
(± 30° in relation deep and not reaching the service.
to the radial lay) carcass.
2 - More than 2 mm (0.078 in) Discard the tire.
deep or reaching the carcass.
Cuts or crazing 1 - Not reaching the carcass. The tire remains in
(inclined by more service.
than 30° in relation
to the radial lay) 2- Reaching the carcass. Discard the tire.
Separation in sidewalls No tolerances. Discard the tire.
Blisters or bulges No tolerances. Discard the tire.
Local tire distortion 1 - Distortion less than 1 mm The tire remains in
without separation (1 ) (0.039 in) with tire inflated. service.
over an extent of less
than 30 mm measured 2 - Distortion greater than Discard the tire.
circumferentially 1 mm (0.039 in) with tire
inflated.
C- Tire beads - Checking can only be performed
when removing the tire
(see 05-5).
E - Tire inflation - See 02-4.
pressure.
(1 ) Insufficient pressure - If operation reports reveal
that an insufficiently
pressurized tire has been
used (inflation pressure at
least 1 5% below normal operation
pressure value). Discard the tire.
- On a same bogie, if the
inflation pressure drop of a
tire exceeds 33%. Discard both tires.
(2) Inflation pressure (a) Relative pressure drop of - Reinflate the tire to its
drop during 5%. normal inflation
24 hours pressure.
(b) Relative pressure drop - Reinflate the tire to its
between 5 and 1 0%. normal inflation
pressure and check it
before next taxiing.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(c) Relative pressure drop - Remove the wheel and

higher than 1 0%. perform leak check
(see 05-5).
NOTE: When a tire is initially

placed in service, an inflation
pressure drop of about 10% may
be detected during the first ten
landings.
6 - PARTICULAR INSTRUCTIONS
A - On a same bogie:
-it is advisable to fit tires with approximately the same amount of wear,
-it is forbidden to fit two tires of different brands, or of same brand but capable of differ¬
ent takeoff weights,
-if one tire bursts, then the other is to be discarded.
B - On main LH and RH U/C, it is forbidden to mount tires of different brands or of same
brand but capable of different takeoff weights.
C - If a main wheel fusible plug has melted, discard the tire.
D - After a hard landing calling for a check of one or both main U/C leg(s) at the next higher
repair line, the affected tires are to be discarded.
E - The nose and main undercarriage may be fitted with different brands of tires (e.g.: Nose
U/C: DUNLOP - Main U/C: MICHELIN).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]LJ>~^X.
BREGUET AVIATION ^ZsF^ ^g^>
MIRAGE
,,.....
F
SECTION 5
PRE-FLIGHT AND POST-FLIGHT INSPECTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
5-1 DAILY INSPECTIONS
- Daily inspection of airframe, hydraulic system and engine 5-101
- Daily inspection of equipment 5-115
- Daily inspection of electrical system 5-1 18'
- Daily inspection of ejection seat 5-119
5-2 PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
- Pre-flight inspection 5-201

- Pre-night flight inspection 5-208
5-3 POST-FLIGHT INSPECTION
- Post-flight inspection 5-301

- Inspection after last gun firing 5-307
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. No Page
1 AIRCRAFT EXTERNAL INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS 5-102

2 CHECK OF NOSE U/C SHOCK ABSORBER HEIGHT 5-104
3 CHECK OF MAIN U/C SHOCK ABSORBER HEIGHT 5-105
4 COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS -LH CONSOLE 5-109
5 COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS- INSTRUMENT PANEL 5-110
6 COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS - RH CONSOLE 5-111
7 EJECTION SEAT INSPECTION 5-120
8 AIRCRAFT EXTERNAL INSPECTION 5-203
9 COCKPIT LIGHTING LAYOUT . 5-209
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //
BREGUET AVI ATION^sj.
-J>^ril
^ - .
MIRAGE
, .,,A__
F
, A ,
DAILY INSPECTION OF AIRFRAME, HYDRAULIC

SYSTEM AND ENGINE
A Special tools
j - Preparation tool kit
- Protective mat of ejection seat dinghy pack.

- Portable lighting device
- A/C boarding ladder
- Mechanic's headset
- Brake chute and equipment bay access ladder
- Wing access stepladder
- 1 15/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply unit
- «MARPA MA 31 » tire pressure check and adjustment set.
2- MATERIALS
- Medical cotton wool
- Denatured ethyl alcohol
- Paper handkerchiefs (Kleenex type)
- Anti-static cleaner (Altunet)
3- GENERAL
A- DURING THE INSPECTION, COMPLY WITH THE GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND RULES
RELATIVE TO A/C PREPARATION FOR USE (see 02-0).
B During the inspection, should accidental closing of a U/C door latching box hook (or of a U/C
uplock box hook) be noticed, open said hook as follows :
(1 ) Door latching boxes
- Operate door manual unlocking control.
(2) U/C uplock boxes
- Opening of the hook(s) may be obtained when the A/C is ready for flight or after connection of
a hydraulic pressure supply unit
- Set «DOORS» safety switch to «GROUND SAFETY».
- Down-lock nose U/C and main U/C doors
- After engine starting or system 1 pressurization, check that the hooks are open.
- Set «DOORS» safety switch to «FLIGHT»
C Check that reservoir level of hydraulic circuits 1 and 2 are correct and within tolerances
- Any excess or drop of level in hydraulic reservoirs necessitates trouble-shooting to determine its
origin.
WARNING :
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (see 02-0).
- Lower the guard and close door 17-04.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 1 - INSPECTIONS ET VERIFICATIONS EXTERIEUR AVION

AIRCRAFT EXTERNAL INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
t -î \L
^^"^-^
MIRAGE , A _ , , A .
F
_
4- INSPECTION STEPS
A - Daily inspection is performed as follows :
(1 ) A/C preparation and summary inspection of the cockpit by the mechanic.

(2) A/C external inspections and checks : to be performed in a well-defined sequence all around the
aircraft as shown in Figure 1 .
(3) During A/C external inspections, further inspections are to be carried out by other flight line
technicians, specially inside the cockpit.
The last specialist inspecting the cockpit is the one checking the ejection seat.
(4) Final rapid inspection performed by the mechanic.
5- CHECK OF DOCUMENTS
- Refer to the A/C form so as to ensure the post-flight inspection and eventual repair have been
performed.
6- A/C PREPARATION
A - Remove the covers, the air intake protective plugs and, if required, the mooring device.
B - Install A/C boarding ladder. Open the canopy after drying it off if it is wet.
C Ensure that :
- the ejection seat safety pin rope is installed (see 02-0 - Figure 6)
- the cover and safety pin of armament master switch are installed.
D Ensure that the protective mat of the dinghy pack is installed.
E Check the hydraulic pressures.
(1) Drop the pressure of normal brake system by repeatedly actuating the pedals until «BRAKES»
light goes out.
(2) Set the switch to «SERVO» : the pointers read zero.
(3) Set the switch to «ANC» and «Em.B» - On «ANC» dial, the pointer reads zero - On «Em.B»
dial, the pointer reads the emergency braking reserve Record this value.
F- Open door 17-04 : set «DOORS» - «DIVE BK» ground safety switches to «GROUND»
(see 02-0).
G Connect external power receptacle.
7- A/C EXTERNAL INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS
A General checks
Following general checks shall be performed as the mechanic's inspection proceeds :
- Check the various skins and the riveting for condition.

- Check attachment of panels, doors, various fairings and antennas .
- Check landing/search lights, navigation and formation lights for condition.
- Check-by shaking - correct attachment of the pylon stores fitted to the A/C.
- Check there is no oil, fuel or hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Drain water from fuel system (depending upon draining periodicity) (see 02-3).
- Ensure the various systems and equipment do not show any leak.
- Check flexible pipes, electrical cable and bonding braids for condition.
- Ensure the electrical connectors are correctly tightened.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
B Inspection of forward fuselage
(1) Inspection of airbrake spar box :
-open airbrake panel,
-ensure that the uplock box roller rotates freely,
-examine the rubber stop for condition,
-after inspection, close airbrake panel.
(2) Inspection of LH air intake duct.
CAUTION : DO NOT LEAVE ANYTHING INSIDE AIR INTAKE DUCTS.
(a) Boundary layer bleeds, air intake, shock cones :

Check :
- cleanness - riveting for condition - all screw and rivet heads should be visible,
- that there is no metal pick-up on bearing surfaces of shock cone elastic ribs,
- removable fairings for condition,
- air intake posts and straps for condition and attachment.
(b) Additional air intake doors :

- check these doors for operation.
(3) Inspection of nose U/C

(a) Tightness check of inflight refueling pipe dual connectors (if inflight has been performed)
- Remove connector plugs
- Check for absence of leakage
- Reinstall connector plugs.
(b) Check nose U/C cylinder for general condition

- Check :
- U/C cylinder for general condition,
- electrical master box protective plexiglas covers (condition, attachment, no condensation),
electrical connectors and cables,
- U/C uplocked safety microswitch (condition and attachment).
(c) Inspection of U/C and doors

- Ensure that the sliding rods of actuating cylinders and shock absorbers are clean.
-Check the condition of paint on U/C cylinder (scratches, scaling or blistering which could hide
a corrosion point).
- In case of deterioration, touch up the paintwork (see 05-0).
- Check :
- that the hooks of U/C uplock box and of door latching boxes are open. If needed, open
them (see para. 3),
- that the hooking rollers are correctly secured (condition and attachment of junction com¬
ponent) and that they rotate freely about their pin,
- check door stops for condition,
- check U/C doors for condition : surface and linkage,
- ensure the hoisting ring is held in position by its spring,
- ensure that the torque link is correctly connected,
- check condition and attachment of speed detector box and of switch on torque link,
- check condition of cables and connections (attachment along the U/C leg),
- check condition of hydraulic pipes and their attachment to steering distribution unit (impact
marks, distortions, friction and leakage of hydraulic fluid),
- check that the static ground wire is in contact with the ground,
- check shock absorber height «H1 » (see figure 2). This dimension varies according to aircraft
configuration (see 024).
FIGURE 2 - CHECK OF NOSE U/C SHOCK

ABSORBER HEIGHT
AE
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(d) Inspection of wheels and tires

- Check :
- the wheels for condition : impacts, corrosion protection, cracks
- the tires for condition, including the tread area in contact with the ground (see 02-4)
- tire inflation (see 02-4).
(4) Inspection of nose cone :
- condition of skin and doors
- condition of radome and static pressure probe
- condition of laser window and cleanness of its external face (for window cleaning, see para. 8)
(5) Inspection of battery
- Check that there is no trace of electrolyte at the battery ventilation port.
- Open door 1 1 .03, check battery attachment and make sure there is no trace of electrolyte.
(6) Inspection of RH air duct
Refer to para (2).
(7) Ensure there is no leakage from the drain plug of the shock cone gearmotor.
(8) Inspection of RH airbrake compartment
Refer to para (1).
C Inspection of RH center fuselage

(1 ) Inspection of RH main U/C
(a) Inspection of U/C and doors
- Ensure that the sliding rods of the jacks and shock absorber are clean.
- Check the condition of paint on U/C cylinder (scratches, scaling or blistering which could hide
a corrosion point).
- In case of deterioration, touch up the paintwork (see 05-0).
- Check :
- that the hooks of the U/C uplock boxes and door latches are open ; if required, open
them (see para. 3),
- that the hooking rollers are correctly secured (condition and attachment of junction compo¬
nent) and that they rotate freely about their pin,
- door stops,
- U/C doors : surface and linkage,
- that the hoisting rings are held in position by their spring,
- condition of junction box, pressure switch and brake units (signs of hydraulic fluid leakage
or any visible anomaly in brake functional assembly),
- condition and attachment of hydraulic pipes (impact marks, distorsions, friction) and of
swivel couplings (leakage of hydraulic fluid),
- electrical cables and their attachment along the U/C leg, connections, contactor on shock
absorber,
- shock absorber height «H2» (see figure 3) ; this dimension varies according to aircraft confi¬
guration (see 02-4).
FIGURE 3 - CHECK OF MAIN U/C SHOCK

ABSORBER HEIGHT
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(b) Inspection of wheels and tires

Check :
- the wheels for condition : impacts, protections, cracks,
- the tires for condition, including the tread area in contact with the ground (See 02-4),
i - tire inflation (See 02-4),
I - positioning of generator drive cap.
(2) Inspection of RH main U/C well.
(a) Check main U/C well for general condition.
(b) Check connectors and cables.
(c) Open door 24-03Î (24-09i).

- Inside air intake duct, check :
- cleanliness,
riveting for condition : all screw and rivet heads should be visible,
-
there is no distortion of the plate located perpendicularly to the turbo-starter exhaust gas
-
outlet (Frame 25).
- One the engine, check :
- the flexible deflectors for condition (no crack, impact or distortion),
- the RM1 for condition (no crack, impact or distortion),
- the fairing and gas generator air intake screens for condition.
(d) Close door 24-03i (24-090 and ensure that control lever is locked.
| (3) Check of hydraulic reservoir level (system 1 ) (not pressurized)
(a) The A/C is in following configuration :

- U/C extended,
I - U/C doors downlocked,
- slats and flaps retracted,
- airbrakes retracted,
- inflight refueling probe retracted,
- normal brake system pressure = 0.
Considering the emergency brake system pressure, this level should be :
Emergency brake
pressure
bar
psi
liters
210
3045
7.6
2538
175
7.7
150
2175
7.8
o
(b) Through door 29-04/1 , read the level on reservoir level indicator - Close the door.
+
in
125
1812
7.9
0
8
Tolerance
+ 0
+ 0.2
Reservoir
+ 0
pts 13.3 13.5 13.7 13.9 14
+ 0.4
level
US. pts 16 16.2 16.4 16.6 16.9
(4) Inspection under fuselage

Check that there is no trace of oil at vario-alternator cooling ports.
D - Inspection of RH wing
Inspection of control surfaces :
- Slats.
- Ailerons.
- Flaps.
Ensure the plastic plugs blanking the access holes are installed and check them for condition.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' t\ -" x /V\ 1 1\ /"\V^ L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^l_-
^-v, ^~^,
^~^> _
Restricted »/iamiiai
MANUAL «o
02
E - Inspection or AFT fuselage
(1) On the A/C
(a) Ensure that there is no oil and fuel accumulation in the fuselage lower section (partic¬
ularly check through door 30-05).
(b) Ensure that there is no trace of oil in the lower section of the tail cone.
(c) Check the ventral fins for correct attachment.
(d) Ensure that the brake chute is installed, with cap safety pin removed.
(e) Inspect the tail unit.
(2) On the engine
(a) Ensure that the nozzle does not show any distortion which could result in discarding.
(b) Carry out a visual inspection in order to detect any possible cracks :
-on hot and cold flaps,

-on seal between nozzle support and hot flaps,
-on the rear flange of the nozzle support.
(c) Enter the AB duct and examine the interior of the duct using an electric torch ; in partic¬
ularly :
-check liner 1 for presence of the 30 attaching rivets,

-inspect thermal protection liners (ovalization of air inlet holes, typical traces of local
burning or corrosion ; correct concentricity of liner 1 leading edge).
CAUTION:
NO CRACK IS ACCEPTABLE ON LINER 1 .
-check condition of the JPT probes,

-check condition of the AB detection probe,
-check condition of the turbine (all components should be fitted, no distortion, etc..)
-check the aspect of the burner rings and injection manifolds, specially opposite the fuel
inlets,
-specially make sure that the manifolds do not show any swelling, even slight (tactile in¬
spection).
NOTE: As regards the defects found during inspection, refer to Manual 06 so as to know if
said defects are permissible or not.
F - Inspection of LH center fuselage
(1 ) Check of hydraulic reservoir level (system 2).

-Generator accumulator empty, anti-shimmy accumulator full.
(a) Through door 29-08/1, read the level on reservoir level indicator : it should be 4.2 liters
(7.39 pts - 8,87 U.S.pts). Close the door.
(2) Inspection of LH main U/C
(a) Refer to para. 7-C-(1).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -^ / V\ll\/-\vJ'L. \
.>&-
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^c?-*»^
J=?-»^ _ .
Restricted , ha ami i ai
MANUAL no
02
(3)Inspection of LH main U/C well

Refer to para. 7-C-(2).
Carry out the following additional operations :
-check microswitch 9A for attachment and condition (ground firing prevention namely),
-check the Giffard valve for operation.
CAUTION:
TATE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES FOR ARMED OR LOADED AIRCRAFT
(SEE 02-0).
-depress microswitch 9A and aurally check that the valve is working properly (nose
U/C well, rear section). Operating time : 3 seconds in each direction (closing - opening).
-Remove doors 26.08i and 27.08L Check for correct connection between :
-throttle control and fuel control unit,
-potentiometer rod and power lever (presence of all parts),
-main fuel control unit and AB fuel control unit.
-check that there are no traces of fuel or grease on the single-lever control box at
the selector shaft (no leakage is tolerated).
Modification 696 not incorporated :
-On Teleforce control, make sure that the marking on sleeve nut is aligned with that on
endpiece.
-If an oil leak is detected at the engine power takeoff, check that the leakage does not
exceed one drop within 5 minutes after the next engine shutdown.
G - Inspection of LH wing
-Identical to inspection of RH wing described in para. 7-D.
H - Inspection of aircraft upper section.
(1) Inspection of fuselage
(2) Inspection of wings
-Identical to inspection described under para. 7-D.
-Carry out the following additional operations:
-inspection of spoilers
-unseating of wing pressure relief valves.
Unseat the pressure relief valves when the outer temperature is below 0 °C. If the temper¬
ature exceeds 0 °C, this is to be performed once a week only.
-Carefully sponge any trace of moisture from the valve and surrounding area.
-Fully screw the unseating wrench (M31031) into the tapped hole of the valve.
-Pull along valve opening axis until said valve cracks open, then stop pulling.
Quickly perform this operation several times.
In the case of a defect, check valve setting (see 06-2).
-Remove the unseating wrench.
(3) Inspection of fin.
8 - COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS (see figures 4-5-6)
A - General checking
(1 ) For each instrument :
-check condition of glasses (undamaged, clean) and of optical surfaces (sight head...),
-check attachment of instruments to the instrument panel ; also check the panel shock-
mount,
-check that the various indications correspond with those in the figures.
(2) Cleaning of optical surfaces
NOTE: Never finger the lens or the transparent glass of the sight head.
-Clean dirty surfaces with a paper handkerchief impregnated with denatured ethyl alco¬
hol.
-Immediately wipe the wet surfaces with a dry paper handkerchief.
-Do not rub, wipe as quickly as possible and pressing very slightly.
B - Inspection of instrument panel, control pedestal and consoles.
-The various switches should be set as indicated in the figures.
-Test all the separate warning and indicator lights, as well as those on the warning and
indicator panels.
-Make sure that the dinghy puncturer is in its proper place.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
J
-<£ED
MIRAGE F
0° - 180° SELECTOR SWITCH LANDING LIGHT CONTROL CANOPY EMBRITTLEMENT CONTROL
- «OFF» - Lever tilted aft and lockwired
A/B MAIN COCK SWITCH
«ON» (guard down) INCIDENCE TEST SWITCH
Neutral position
JPT EMERGENCY REGULATION SWITCH
- «AUTO» EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKE HANDLE
- Handle fully pushed in
EMERGENCY FUEL TRANSFER SWITCH
- Off (guard down) U/C CONTROL SWITCH
- Lever down (safety guard down)
LEAD LIGHT -Anti-retraction button lockwired

In its housing
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SELECTOR SWITCH
CANOPY SHEA R KNIFE
- In its housing ARTHUR SELECTOR SWITCH
- «AUTO» (guard down)
YA W DAMPER/ANTI-SL IP S YSTEM
«ANTI-SLIP»
SERVO RESET BUTTON
STICK UNCOUPLE SWITCH

- Off (guard down)
PITCH SYSTEM SWITCH

«PITCH»
V/UHF CONTROL UNIT

«OFF»
LP MAIN COCK SWITCH

Closed (guard Up)
ARMAMENT MASTER SWITCH

-Off
- Guard down, cover and safety pin in position
EMERGENCY REGULATION LIGHT

-Off
RH LP PUMP SWITCH
Off
LH LP PUMP SWITCH
Off
STARTING PUMP SWITCH

-Off
IGNITION - VENTILATION SELECTOR SWITCH

- On (P or S plug)
TEST DISPLAY UNIT. START BUTTON
- «OFF» (guard down)
- Guard down
LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT.

HIGH-LIFT DEVICE SELECTOR SWITCH
- As required
- «OFF»
UHF CONTROL UNIT
MANUAL DISTANCE SETTING UNIT
- «OFF»
ANTISKID SWITCH
HEADING TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT.
On (guard down)
SLAT-FLAP HANDLE
RADIO SELECTOR UNIT
- All down
- Transmitter/Receiver channels off
INFLIGHT RELIGHT CONTROL - Aft position - Amplifier selector on « 1»
FIGURE 4 - COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS - LH CONSOLE

AJ
02-77 Restricted 5-109 FIGURE4 5-109
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CLOCK STANDBY COMPASS Aircraft heading correct

- Set
RH REAR - VIEW MIRROR
- Seconds hand zeroed
AIR /AIR GUN INDICATOR LIGHT- Tested
LH REAR - VIEW MIRROR
SIGHT HEAD Silicagel not pink .
ACCELEROMETER - Three pointers on + /
ANGLE-OF-A TTACK INDICATOR - Flag out of view CAMERA

RADIO-ALTIMETER INDICATOR
MASTER FAILURE WARNING LIGHT-
- Red and amber on (out if cancelled) STANDBY HORIZON
"COMBAT FLAPS ARMED" INDICATOR LIGHT - Out Knob = caged
- Horizon = neutral
CONFIGURA TION INDICA TOR . - Flag = visible
- Slat/Flap lights = out
- Brake light = out RADAR DETECTOR INDICATOR
- U/C light = on NA VI GA TION INDICA TOR «OFF»
- RH and LH flags visible
AUTOPILOT CONTROL AND INDICATOR -
- Flag on distance counter
PANEL TEST BUTTON
«U/C-NOT-DOWN» WARNING LIGHT - Out . DOPPLER CONTROL PANEL
MACH/AIRSPEED INDICA TOR - Reads zero .
NOSE WHEEL STEERING HIGH SENSITIVITY BUTTON
AUTOPILOT CONTROL AND INDICATOR PANEL FEEDER TANK OVERFLOW INDICATOR LIGHT
- Buttons released
NOSE WHEEL STEERING EMERGENCY SWITCH
All lights out -On
AIRBRAKE WARNING LIGHT- Out - Guard down
«LIMIT» WARNING LIGHT- Out «ADF/VOR» SELECTOR SWITCH

SHOCK-CONE POSITION INDICA TOR . REFUELING PROBE CONTROL SWITCH
- Shock cones retracted
REFUELING PROBE UNLOCKED WARNING LIGHT -Out
- Pointjr below 1.2
SHOCK-CONE MANUAL CONTROL SWITCH (neutral position)
FIRE WARNING LIGHT- Out
SHOCK-CONE PUSHBUTTON (released)
«SW/JETT» BUTTON Guard down
STANDB Y AL TIM ETE R - Reads zero
RPM INDICA TOR - Pointer between 0 and 150 rpm
NOSE WHEEL STEERING LIGHT- On
«AB INJECTION» LIGHT- Out
TRANSFER/REFUELING SELECTOR SWITCH
«AB ON» LIGHT- Out
CROSSFEED SELECTOR SWITCH «OFF»
«SRL» FAILURE WARNING LIGHT -Out
ARMAMENT CONTROL PANEL
JPT INDICA TOR - Automatic firing switch on «A UTO» (under guard)
- Pointer below scale
- Armament controls off, buttons released
EMERGENCY JETTISON BUTTON - Arming fuze selector switch on «SAFE»
- Safety guard down - «SINGLE-SALVO» selector switch on «SINGLE»
- «550» switch on off
JETTISON SELECTOR SWITCH - Center (neutral) position
- «F.DIP» switch on off
SELECTIVE JETTISON BUTTON -
FUEL TRANSFER SEQUENCE SELECTOR SWITCH - In accordance
- Safety guard down with configuration
SLA VED A L Tl METER - Reads zero DUAL FUEL GAUGE
- Pointers aligned
VER TICA L SPEED INDICA TOR - Reads zero . - Reads feeder tank contents
SPHERICA L INDICA TOR FUEL REMAINING INDICATOR - Reads contents corresponding

- N/P selector on N to A/C configuration
- Crossed pointers not visible FUEL TRANSFER INDICATOR
- Lights on (except 3)
MAP D ISP LA Y UNI T-«OFF»-
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GAUGE - Zero pointer reading
TRIM INDICA TOR - Symbols in neutral position . CABIN ALTIMETER
OXYGEN INDICA TOR . OXYGEN CAPACITY GROUND TEST BUTTON
FIGURE 5 - COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS

INSTRUMENT PANEL
AJ
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CANOPY SEAL VALVE CONTROL LEVER
-«INFLATE»
CANOPY CONTROL
DEMISTING SWITCH- Off
DINGHY PUNCTURE R - In position
VOR /ILS CONTROL UNIT- «OFF»
FORMATION LIGHT SWITCH
- As required OXYGEN CAPACITY TEST BUTTON
EMERGENCY U/C HANDL E HEADING CONTROL UNIT
- Fully pushed in «OFF»
- Handle folded
PROBE EMERGENCY CONTROL
FAILURE WARNING PANEL

- Switches on, except battery switch
- All lights on, except :
«TR1- TR2TRIM-AP-ADC-MODUL»
NA VI GA TION SWITCH
- As required
RADAR DETECTOR SWITCH

«OFF»
PROBE HEA TER SWITCH

- «OFF»
WARNING HORN SWITCH.

«OFF»
ELECTRO-PUMP SWITCH
«OFF»
STANDBY HORIZON SWITCH.

«OFF»
STATION STORAGE UNIT.

- As required
RADIO-COMPASS CONTROL UNIT.

- «OFF»
BOMBING PANEL
BOMBING RESETTING UNIT.
MAP HOLDER
SPHERICAL INDICATOR COVER - In position
OMNIBEARING SELECTOR «OFF»
RADAR/SIGHT CONTROL UNIT

- «OFF»
CABIN AND EQUIPMENT AIR CONDITIONING

CONTROL UNIT
- «EMG.COLD» selector switch : on normal
Master valve selector switch : «OFF»
Temperature adjusting rheostat : «A UTO»
- Cabin conditioning solenoid valve position indicator.
Bay ambient temperature indicator

«AUTO-MANUAL» selector switch : «AOTO» CIRCUIT-BREAKER BOX,
«HOT-COLD» control switch in rest position - All circuit-breakers pushed in
FIGURE 6 - COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS - RH CONSOLE

AJ
BREGUET AVIATION ^^P^V^Ô
fl^>~rVc MIRAGE F
^^^"^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
C Operational checks
(1 ) Operate throttle lever, no friction point shall be noticed. Return it to «STOP»
(2) Check standby magnetic compass for proper attachment and ensure that the cup is filled with
fluid.
(3) Fuel inspection
(a) Inspection of fuel gages

Set «Feeder tank/fuselage» selector switch to «Feeder tank»
-
- Test the fuel gages (button on indicator)
- Depress the button : the pointers rotate smoothly.
- Release the button : both pointers shall return to initial position
-Set «Feeder tank/fuselage» selector switch to «Fuselage» and carry out fuel gage test (same
operation as above)
- Set «Feeder tank/fuselage» selector switch to «Feeder tank».
- Ensure that the fuel remaining indicator reads carried fuel quantity
(4) Checking the «failures and alarms» indicating system
- Connect the mechanic's headset

- Set warning horn switch to ON.
(a) General failure check
- Depress test button «T» on failure warning panel :

-all lights of failure warning panel come on, as well as master failure warning light (red and
amber),
- an audio signal «red failures and fire» delivered by the warning horn, is heard in the headset.
- depress the master failure warning light : the light goes out and the audio signal is
interrupted
- Release test button : the lights of failure warning panel go out.
(b) Oxygen failure check
On the failure warning panel :

- the «Ox. REG» warning light comes on.
- the audio signal «Oxygen» is delivered from the warning horn.
(c) Limit check.
- Depress «limit» warning light

- the light comes on
- an audio signal «limit», delivered by the warning horn, is heard in the headset.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl ^ l\/~\V^ t_
BREGUET AVIATION ^À-*- ^=*^> . , ,,......, «,,
^T^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(d) Fire detection check

-Press the fire warning light:
-the light comes on (engine and AB),
-an audio signal "red failures and fire" is delivered by the warning horn.
-Set the warning horn switch to "off" position.
-Disconnect the mechanic's headset.
(5) Operational tests of electric pump
CAUTION:
MAKE SURE THAT THE CONTROL SURFACES CAN OPERATE WITHOUT ANY DAN¬
GER TO GROUND PERSONNEL OR EQUIPMENT.
-Set the electric pump control switch to "on", and check that:
-the pressure increases,
-the "EMG HYD" light goes out,
-the electric pump stops.
-Operate the ailerons to check that the servo-controls are properly fed by system 1
through the dual supply valve.
-Return the electric pump control switch to "off".
(6) Inspection of canopy and windshield
(a) Check the canopy seal for condition. Replace the seal should one of the following defects
be found:
-perforation,
-tearing of the center part,
-premature spline wear.
(b) Ensure that the canopy shear knife is in place and that the retaining pin is safetied.
-Check the "CAB P" light to ensure correct operation of canopy microswitch:
on: canopy open; off: canopy closed and locked.
During this check, ensure that:
-the mechanism operates correctly, with no binding points.
-the canopy opens smoothly and stabilizes in the balanced position before reaching the
uplock which should only be obtained by applying an accompanying force. Otherwise, check
the jack pressure (see 03-2).
(c) Rear-view mirror
It is advisable not to touch the reflecting surface, even with clean fingers (brittleness of
chromed surface).
Clean the rear-view mirrors with cotton wool or gauze soaked in ethyl alcohol, or with
lens paper.
(d) Windshield and canopy
-Check condition.
-Clean transparent materials with medical cotton wool and anti-static cleaner (Altunet).
Remove the sight head if it is necessary to clean the inside surface of the windshield.
(e) Check condition and correct seating of the control stick base dust guard.
9 - FINAL STEPS
-Ensure that all inspections have been carried out.
-Rapidly inspect the cockpit interior to make sure that everything is in order and that no
foreign matter remains after the last specialist has performed his inspection.
-Close the canopy, locking it from the outside.
-Disconnect the external power receptacle.
-The aircraft should be in the following configuration: all doors closed except door 17.04,
and U/C doors open and not locked.
10 -UPDATING OF AIRCRAFT DOCUMENTS
AB
MIRAGE F
û-
BREGUET AVIATION
^<v ^#-=-0
^f-o n ^ ^
Restricted . ,...,.,
MANUAL ~o
02
DAILY INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT
-A/C boarding ladder.
- 1 1 5/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply unit.
2 - GENERAL
During this inspection, comply with the general principles and rules relative to A/C prep¬
aration for use (refer to 02-0).
3 - CHECK OF OXYGEN TANK CONTENTS
A - Check the liquid oxygen tank contents by proceeding as follows:
GROUND POWER SUPPLY UNIT CONNECTED
-Check that the "OX" circuit breaker is pushed. in.
-Depress the "T" button of the oxygen indicator: the pointer continuously hunts between
the "EMPTY" and "FULL" extreme positions.
Release the "T" button: the pointer stabilizes opposite the oxygen remaining quantity.
GROUND POWER SUPPLY UNIT NOT CONNECTED

-Set the battery switch to "on".
-Check that the "OX" circuit breaker is pushed in.
-Depress the "OXY-GND TEST" button and the "T" button of the oxygen indicator: the
pointer continuously hunts between the "EMPTY" and "FULL" extreme positions.
Release the "T" button while holding the "OXY-GND TEST" button depressed: the pointer sta¬
bilizes opposite the oxygen remaining quantity.
-Should the oxygen indicator pointer stabilize outside the green range, replace the tank
(see 09-3) or, if applicable, replenish on aircraft (see 02-3).
CAUTION:
IF THE AIRCRAFT IS TO PERFORM ACROBATICS DURING FLIGHT, FIT A TANK
WHICH WAS REFILLED AT LEAST TWO HOURS PREVIOUSLY.
FOR A NORMAL FLIGHT, A STABILIZATION PERIOD OF 15 MINUTES BETWEEN
FILLING AND THE BEGINNING OF THE FLIGHT IS SUFFICIENT.
FOR A MISSION EXCEEDING A DURATION OF TWO HOURS: REPLACE THE TANK IF ITS
CONTENTS IS LESS THAN HALF.
B - Gaseous oxygen tank

-Ensure the pressure gauge pointer is located in the black range.
CAUTION:
BEFORE OPENING THE COCKS, MAKE SURE THAT DELIVERY PORT IS NOT OB¬
STRUCTED (SEE 02-9).
-Open A/C normal oxygen cock, then emergency oxygen cock and ensure the
"5 mn OX" light is out.
-Close emergency oxygen cock, then A/C normal oxygen cock.
IT IS MANDATORY TO CLOSE THE COCKS IN THE ABOVE SEQUENCE.
-If required, perform oxygen topping-up (see 02-3).
AC
01-88 ' Restricted 5-115
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT |L==^br"U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^SF^^-sS*^ . .........
«o
4- INSPECTION AND CHECK OF INSTRUMENTS
A Standby altimeter
Using the ground pressure adjustment knob, set the pointers of the altimeter to zero.
Note the corresponding altimeter pressure indication and compare it with the actual local ground
pressure :
- if the difference is less mb, the standby altimeter is serviceable,
than 1
- if the difference is between and 5 mb, reset the altimeter (see 12-1 ).
1
During the next few days, keep the altimeter under observation.
- if the difference is greater than 5 mb, remove the standby altimeter.
B Vertical speed indicator
Check that it reads zero. Reset if the difference is less than 50 ft/mn. During the next few days,
keep the vertical speed indicator under observation.
C Pitot and incidence probes
Remove the probe protecting covers.

-
Check all probes for condition and make sure the probe openings are clean.
-
- Check that the incidence probe tube turns freely.
- Set «PITOT» switch to ON.
- On failure warning panel, ensure that «PITOT» light is out.
-Check that probe reheating is discernible 30 seconds after applying voltage (burning possible
beyond this limit).
- Set «PITOT» switch to «OFF», «PITOT» light should come on.
- Reinstall protecting covers after cooling.
5- UPDATING OF A/C DOCUMENTS
AC
BREGUET
fl^^^r^l
AVIATION^jÎF3., _
MIRAGE F
DAILY INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Digital multimeter Metrix MX563

or
Equivalent digital multimeter with 0.1% accuracy
2- CHECKING THE BATTERY VOLTAGE
- Ensure the battery was separated from the bus bar at least 6 hours before checking.
- Open door 25.07.
- Select a suitable range on the multimeter.
NOTE : The following operations should be carried out so that the battery voltage is measured within
30 seconds after the battery switch has been turned on.
- Set the battery switch to «ON».

- Measure voltage across terminals N and F of external power receptacle.
- Check that the battery voltage is > 24.7 V.
- Note the voltage and return the battery switch to «OFF».
- If the battery voltage is lower than 24.7 V, remove the battery (see manual 08-1 ).
- Close door 25.07.
NOTE : During this operation, the A/C residual consumption should be between 14 and 16 amperes.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^fL
ti Ji>^-r\l
_^
MIRAGE
,
F
DAILY INSPECTION OF EJECTION SEAT

(figure 7)
WARNING :
PRIOR TO ANY EJECTION SEAT INSPECTION, ENSURE THAT THE SEAT SAFETY PIN
ROPE IS INSTALLED.
1 - TOP OF SEAT
Check following points :
(a) Check that stabilizer drogue retaining shackle is engaged in retaining scissors, that the shackle
retaining nut is in place (outside).
(b) Seat locking (absence of handwheel, locking plungers flush with unit).
(c) Correct routing and positioning of the two firing cables :
- large (blind firing handle) cable ABOVE interconnect cord,
- blind firing handle cable ABOVE alternative firing handle cable in the scissors (thin cable under
large cable).
(d) Presence of key pull-out stirrup (main mechanism).
(e) Correct positioning (over interconnect cord) of the cord connecting the stabilizer drogues to the
drogue gun piston.
WARNING :
THIS CORD SHALL NOT RUN THROUGH OR UNDER ANY STRAP.
(f) Lockwire and lead seal of seat main firing mechanism.
(g) Lead seal installed on stabilizer drogue closing flap.
(h) Presence of attaching thread on stabilizer drogue retaining shackle.
(i) Passage of the pilot parachute black extraction strap fitted with yellow flexible sleeve through the
shearing device.
WARNING :
THE RED CORD PREVENTING THE OPERATION OF THE MANUAL OPENING «D» RING
SHOULD NOT BE PASSED THROUGH THE SHEARING DEVICE.
(j) The connector coupling connecting the pilot parachute extraction strap to the stabilizer drogue
should be fully screwed on.
(k) Make sure that the interconnect cord safety pins fit firmly into the supports on the headrest sides
(correct attachment of face blind straps and parachute pack retaining straps).
(I) The face blind straps should not be twisted.
2- SEAT CENTRAL SECTION
(a) Slightly untighten parachute pack retaining straps avoiding disengagement of the two ejector
springs located at rear of pack, open upper panel and check for :
- presence of safety wire on cone pin. Should it be broken send pack back to workshop:
- position of «D» ring retaining pin.
If LH upper part of pack is deformed, remove pack then reposition extractor spring in workshop.
(b) Close pack flap again and tighten retaining straps by compressing ejector springs.
Check :
(c) Correct positioning of pilot parachute pack :

correct passage of securing straps through short retaining straps (from the inside to the outside),
-
with strap ends pressed against the velcro tapes,
- attachment of parachute pack opening bungee cords.
|(d) Locking of the harness (three attachment points),
(e) Correct operation of ventral buckle. Then return it to locked position and check that control knob
does not rotate when face plates are not actuated.
(f) Attachment of dinghy pack to harness (quick-disconnect fasteners).
(g) Seat quick-disconnect straps ; they should be passed outside the pack quick-disconnect flaps and
fastened in the spring clips.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ
BREGUET AVIATION J^Êo
MIRAGE F
Screw safetying Pin
spread
Short
strap
Connector
coupling
Pilot parachute
extraction strap
Cable stretched
taut except for
slight slack
Oxygen
connection
Link-rod Seat oxygen

connection unit attachment
(pin ring safetied)
FIGURE 7 - INSPECTION OF EJECTION SEA T

AH
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ Jl ^ /V\II\/-\V-7L.
BREGUET AVIATION^c_^
^v, ê-so
^?-^> .
Restricted aaamiiai
MANUAL rvo
02
3 - LH SIDE OF SEAT
Check following points:
(a) Drogue gun :
-drogue gun body attachment,

-lockwiring of barrel to drogue gun body and attachment of lead seal to lockwire;
-pin correctly located on barrel (spread);
-lockwiring of the screw connecting drogue gun piston to stabilizer drogue extraction
cord.
(b) Connection of link-rod (pin ring safetied) and drogue gun cocking (if the safety pin can
be inserted, the gun is cocked).
(c) Connection of seat-to-A/C breakaway connector (yellow line not visible). Make sure that
the release cable of the breakaway connector positioned in its retaining clip, is practically taut.
(d) Shearing device initiator :

-connection of sear extraction control
-lockwiring of breech hex nut to initiator body, and attachment of lead seal to lockwire.
(e) Positioning and locking of pilot parachute "D" - ring flap.
(f) Attachment of seat oxygen unit and its connections. In particular, check the attachment
of the electrical cords, and their passage between the seat oxygen unit and the seat-to-pilot
connector.
(g) Correct connection of seat-to-pilot junction assembly (connector).
CAUTION:
IN THE CASE OF A REPLACED JUNCTION ASSEMBLY, MAKE SURE THAT THE SEP¬
ARATION MECHANISM HAS BEEN CHECKED (SEE 09-4).
(h) Proper anchoring of flow detector (locating pin flush).
(i) Manual unlocking lever in down position.
4 - RH SIDE OF SEAT
(a) Connection of delayed release mechanism link-rod (pin ring safetied).
(b) Cocking of delayed release mechanism (stabilizer drogue scissors release pin installed).
(c) Lockwirings and lead seals on barostat and g control unit of delayed release mechanism.
(d) Connection of IFF emergency switch (linen thread).
(e) Efficient working of the shoulder strap tensioning lever (check the three positions).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT" ^ J! -* /V\II\/AVÎ_
BREGUET AVIATION _^?U JtS~a^ . «aamiiai oo
^ ^-^ Restrjcted MANUAL 02
5 - BOTTOM OF SEAT FRONT SECTION
Check following points:
(a) Correct position of negative-g strap (tension cord in front of the quick-disconnect strap
of the survival pack). Make sure that the negative-g strap does not pass through the alterna¬
tive firing handle.
(b) Correct positioning of alternative firing handle (in seat pan prolongation).
(c) Positioning of the survival pack quick-disconnect strap : the strap guide is to be placed
on the Velcro tape.
(d) Proper working of the leg strap release lever (cones released). With cones in position,
check that the leg straps are well locked.
(e) Check proper appearance of the rod connecting the leg strap release lever with the con¬
nector.
(f) Correct attachment of leg restraining straps (pins fitted in floor forks from inside to out¬
side).
(g) Strap position : crossed over, but not intertwined ; position of leg straps : red part on
the left-green part on the right (buckles inside, tensioning cords outside).
NOTE: Arrange leg straps so as to avoid binding of the buckle when operating the seat pan.
(h) Operation of the snubbing units by actuating the corresponding control.
(i) Operation of seat pan electric actuator (switch).
CAUTION:
THE MOTOR SHOULD NOT BE RUN FOR MORE THAN ONE MINUTE WITHOUT
STOPPING FOR FIVE MINUTES.
6 - COCKPIT REAR PART
(a) Correct connection and locking of flexible detonating fuses to the transfer unit and
correspondence with color markings.
(b) Proper external condition of flexible detonating fuses. If in doubt, refer to "Check of
flexible detonating fuses" (see 09-4).
(c) Correct connection of detonating fuse guide cable (snap hook).
(d) Correct connection of seat-to-percussion unit link rod (safety pins), and return bun-
gee with the bungee passed behind the breakaway connector cable.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^^'^ /V\ll\/"\V^£_ i
BREGUET AVIATION ^-A_~ ^?-ô aaamiiai oo
^ ^?-~o Restricted MANUAL 02
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
-A/C boarding ladder

-Fire-extinguisher.
2 - GENERAL
-DURING THE INSPECTION, COMPLY WITH THE GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND

RULES RELATIVE TO A/C PREPARATION FOR USE (see 02-0).
CAUTION:
IMPERATIVELY MAKE SURE THAT THE TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE AND SHOCK
ABSORBER HEIGHT HAVE BEEN CHECKED AND ADJUSTED TO SUIT THE AIR¬
CRAFT ARMAMENT CONFIGURATION.
A - Refer to the A/C inspection log so as to ensure the post-flight inspection and eventual
repair have been performed.
B - If needed, remove slip covers and mooring device.

C - Ensure that:
-the areas at front and rear of the A/C are clean,
-the main wheel chocks are installed,
-the extinguisher is available.
D - If needed, install A/C boarding ladder.
E - Open the canopy.
F - Inside the cockpit:

-Remove pack protective mat.
-Remove seat lower safety pin and let it hang down outside the cockpit.
-Ensure the cockpit is in "post-flight inspection" configuration.
G - Ensure the cockpit and the windscreen are clean.

| H - Ask the pilot to sign the A/C inspection log.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT" ^ J> -** IAA I R AC"* F
V \l l\/-\\^l_
F
breguet av,at,on ^^ ^> Restricted MANUAL 02
4 - A/C EXTERNAL INSPECTION (See figure 8)
A - General
This A/C external inspection shall be performed by the pilot together with the mechanic,
in a well-defined sequence as shown on the figure.
CAUTION:
THE PROTECTING COVERS AND BLANKS SHALL BE REMOVED BY THE MECHANIC
AS THE A/C EXTERNAL INSPECTION PROCEEDS.
B - Forward fuselage inspection
(1 ) Inspection of LH air intake duct:

-protecting blank removed
-absence of foreign matter
-shock cones retracted
-operation of additional air intake doors.
Disconnect aircraft/ground lead.
Check that each latch of door 17.08 is effectively engaged.
(2) Inspection of nose U/C:

-torque links and connectors connected
-tire condition
-shock absorber height
-inspection of U/C down catch
-close and lock the U/C door.
(3) Inspection of:

-radar compartment radome
-static pressure probe
-angle-of-attack probe
-temperature probe |- Protecting covers removed
-pitot probes
-static pressure inlets
-laser window.
(4) Inspection of RH air intake duct:

Refer to sub-sub-para. (1 ).
(5) Set "DOORS" - "DIVE BK" ground safety switches to "FLIGHT" and lower the guards
(see 02-0).
-Close door 17-04 and check that each latch is effectively engaged.
AF
BREGUET AVIATIONû'
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 8 - CONTROLE EXTERIEUR DE L'AVION

AIRCRAFT EXTERNAL INSPECTION
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
iL-^^TlX
^jâ^L-^^
MIRAGE
..
F
oo
A am i a .
(1 ) Inspection of RH main U/C

- Tire condition.
- Shock absorber height (compare the value with that of LH main U/C shock absorber).
- Locking of engine access door 24.03i (24.09i).
- Uplock box hook open.
- Close and lock the U/C door.
D Inspection of RH wing
- General condition of the structure.

- Attachment of external stores.
- Condition of navigation lights.
- Control surfaces :
- slats : retracted
- aileron
- flaps : retracted
- spoilers : retracted.
E Inspection of rear fuselage
- Ensure there is no oil or fuel accumulation in the fuselage lower section.

- Ensure there is no trace of oil in the lower section of the tail cone.
- Check the stabilizers (tail unit).
- Ensure that the brake chute safety pin is removed and the locking pin is installed.
F Inspection of LH center fuselage
Refer to para. 4-C.
G Inspection of LH wing
Refer to para. 4-D.
H Check under the aircraft that all doors are closed (including U/C doors).
5- STRAPPING-IN
A The pilot sits down and

- adjusts the seat height,
-adjusts the pedals.
B - Check that :
-the quick-release coupling is properly locked to the aircraft (yellow line out of view) ; pull
the releasable portion of the coupling sharply upwards, taking care not to touch the lanyard ;
- the lanyard of the quick-release coupling is correctly placed in its stowage clip, with the correct
amount of slack (i.e. not quite taut).
AD
01 -81 Restricted 5-204
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^r^jL
BREGUET AVIATION^JiF3^^^»
MIRAGE F
C Strapping-in
Ensure that the pilot :
-
- connects the survival pack to the Sater belt using the quick-release strap,
- fastens the calf straps : red on the left, green on the right (the restraining straps are in
normal half-crossed position) ; secure the tensioning ends (Velcro strips),
- is not impeded when operating the pedals ; otherwise adjust restraining strap length (using
the pull-rings under the seat).
-Position the back cushion.
-Remove the connector assembly from the wide ventral belt and pass the belt to the pilot,
ensuring that the oxygen connector assembly passes underneath the belt.
Then, the pilot :

- fastens the negative-g strap,
- fastens the thigh straps to the lower corners of the quick-release fitting and tightens them (LH
thigh strap on pack strap),
- slips the groin straps through the thigh strap rings (LH strap above pack strap).
Free both shoulder straps and bring them over the pilot's shoulders.
The pilot then brings his shoulder straps through the groin straps and fastens them to the upper
corners of the quick-release fitting.
- EACH ATTACHMENT LUG MUST BE FULLY ENGAGED - ENSURE THAT THE FLAPS ARE
FULLY HELD IN. A CLICK SHOULD BE HEARD WHEN THE HOOK LOCKS.
-ONCE THE LAST LUG IS FASTENED, CHECK CORRECT ATTACHMENT BY GIVING AN
EXTRA PUSH ON EACH FLAP.
The pilot :
- tightens the negative-g strap, then the shoulder straps,
- shakes the straps to check their attachment to the quick-release fitting,
- unlocks the shoulder straps and leans forward.
Pull the main straps of the parachute upwards to tighten them, pressing the metal rings on the
pilot's shoulders.
The pilot fastens the oxygen connector assembly to the RH shoulder strap.
OPEN THE NORMAL OXYGEN COCK, THEN THE EMERGENCY OXYGEN COCK.
Hand the pilot his headset.

-
Ensure that the pilot connects the oxygen mask hose to the chest connector over the harness LH
-
shoulder strap (and that he checks carefully the locking of the endpiece).
NOTE : Instructions to be followed when connecting and disconnecting the mask are described in
«Check of oxygen system» (see 02-9).
-Connect the anti-g connector, pull the connector to check for coupling, open the cock.
-Test the anti-g valve by depressing the test button : the suit is inflated ; release the test button.
- Ensure the pilot checks the oxygen system for correct operation.
- Remove :
- the seat safety pin rope (hand it to the pilot who then counts the safety pins),
- the cover and safety pin of the armament master switch, and place them in the appropriate
pouch (see 02-0 - figure 6).
- Ensure that the quick-release coupling is locked (yellow line not visible).
- Help the pilot to close the canopy ; during canopy closing, make sure that the flexible detonating
fuses correctly slide in the guide clamp.
- Remove the cockpit access ladder.
6- STARTING
A Give the pilot the signal for starting.
B Check that the control surfaces are in neutral position.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
7- CHECKS TO BE PERFORMED AFTER STARTING
- Carry out functional checks below. These checks should be performed in synchronization and
according to conventional signals between pilot and mechanic.
Conventional signals
from pilot to Functional checks
mechanic
Flat hand movement SLATS- FLAPS

All extended
The mechanic moves to rear of A/C.
Checks :
-flaps
- yaw damper Perform a few horizontal pushes
on the fuselage Tear section and
check that the rudder reacts
(short oscillations)
- control surface displacement.
The mechanic comes back to front of A/C.
Steering test with rudder pedals.
Actuate the inflight refueling probe

if inflight refueling is expected.
AB
02 76 Restricted 5 206
BREGUET AVIATION^,
/L^-^TU MIRAGE F
8- BEFORE AIRCRAFT DEPARTURE
- Remove wheel chocks.

-If required, perform the initial navigation heading setting through the transfer gyro (see 02-6).
- Rapidly ensure that everything is normal and give the pilot the signal for taxiing.
- After initial roll, the pilot applies the brakes : check for a pull-up motion of the tail unit control
surfaces in response to aircraft nose dipping.
- Signal to pilot that the test is satisfactory.
CAUTION :
IN THE CASE OF AN OPERATIONAL MISSION, CERTAIN SAFETY MEASURES ARE TO BE
TAKEN AT THE END OF THE RUNWAY.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i^J>^^sX
BREGUET AVIATION^fL
t
_^
MIRAGE
........
F
PRE-NIGHT FLIGHT INSPECTION
A Special tools
- F1-EL-A tool kit (for removal/installation of indicator lights, if required).
- A/C boarding ladder

- 1 1 5/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply unit
- Supply the aircraft with electrical power.
3 - COCKPIT LIGHTING INSPECTION (See Figure 9)
- It is necessary to enter the cockpit to check the lighting area of each light.
A General procedure for checks
(1) Using the various lighting control box rheostats, switch on the lights and vary their brightness.
(2) As regards external lights, check for lighting area of each light.
(3) As regards internal lights, check equipment edge lighting and IFF electroluminescent display.
(4) Switch off the lights.
(5) If necessary, remove the dimmer cap in order to replace the bulb, or remove integral lighted
equipment.
B - Checks
(1 ) Lighting of instrument panel and consoles

-Using rheostats 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 of lighting control unit 29L, switch on the corresponding lights.
NOTE : If the UV lights have not been operated for a month, operate them for 4 minutes at
maximum brightness.
(2) Lighting of instrument panel upper section :

Set miscellaneous instrument lighting switch 30L10 to ON and check for action of rheostat 30L8
-
on corresponding lights.
- Using map light rheostat 30L3, switch on the corresponding light and check for action of map
light 30L4.
(3) Lead light lighting
-Pul lead light 26L : it should go on ; then manually push it fully home : it should go out.
- If required, replace the bulb, without removing dimmer cap.
(4) Lighting of indicating panels and warning lights
Using lever S1, carry out «DAY - NIGHT» test ; in «NIGHT» position, operate rheostat 7 and
-
check for lighting of corresponding panels and lights ; in «DAY» position, check that their brightness is
maximum.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^48L1
FIGURE 9 - IMPLANTATION DES ECLAI RAGES AU POSTE PILOTE

COCKPIT LIGHTING LA YOUT
AJ
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=>^rvL
BREGUET AVIATION^<^s=.-:iÔ
MIRAGE F
^£2^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
4 - INSPECTION OF A/C EXTERNAL LIGHTING
A - Landing light
- Inspect landing light glass for cleanliness, and clean if necessary.
- Set landing light control switch 15L to position «LDG» ; check for first sequence of landing light
extension in landing position, and for landing light lighting (replace optical unit if required).
- Set control switch to position «TAXI» ; check for second sequence of landing light extension in
taxiing position ; the landing light is on.
- Return to position «LDG» ; check for first sequence of landing light retraction ; the landing light
remains on.
- Set control switch to «OFF» and check for extinction and complete retraction of landing light.
B Formation light
- Inspect formation light for cleanliness, and clean if necessary with a clean, dry cloth (chlorine
solvents are proscribed).
- Set formation light switch 3L to «DIM» ; check that the light on equipment bay door comes on.
- Set formation light switch to «BRT» and check that brightness increases.
- If everything is normal, set the switch to «OFF» ; otherwise replace the defective bulb and test
again.
C Navigation lights
Inspect navigation lights for cleanliness, and clean if necessary as indicated in B.

-
Set navigation light switch 4L to «STBY», check for lighting of red and green wing lights and of
-
yellow fin and fuselage lower lights.
-Set navigation light switch to «FLH», check alternate lighting of white fin light together with
yellow fin and fuselage lower lights, and of red and green wing lights (also check these lights for
increasing brightness).
- If everything is normal, set the switch to «OFF» ; otherwise replace the defective bulb and test
again.
5 - FINAL STEPS
- Cut off aircraft power supply.
AG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT l"^ -" ^ IIIXAAV^L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^<V~-
^ J=f-*=»^>
^~=^> Restricted , .a ami iai
MANUAL oo
02
POST-FLIGHT INSPECTION
-Kit MAR PA MA31 for A/C tire pressure check and adjustment
-4 standard wheel chocks type 1
-Protective mat for ejection seat dinghy pack
-Cockpit access ladder
-Brake chute and equipment bay access ladder
-Fire extinguisher
-Portable light source
2 - GENERAL
-During the inspection, follow the general principles and rules relative to aircraft prepara¬
tion (see 02-0).
3- SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AT END OF RUNWAY
WARNING:
WHEN THE AtRCRAFT IS RETURNING FROM AN OPERATIONAL MISSION, CERTAIN
SAFETY MEASURES SHALL BE TAKEN AS SOON AS THE AIRCRAFT IS AT THE END
OF THE RUNWAY OR, AS A GENERAL RULE, AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. THESE SAF¬
ETY MEASURES DEPEND UPON THE TYPE OF MISSION (SEE 02-6).
4 - ARRIVAL OF.AIRCRAFT AT PARKING AREA
A - Ensure that:
-the aircraft parking area is clear,
-a fire extinguisher is available.
B - Guide the aircraft to its parking area (conventional signals).

C - Install:
-the main U/C wheel chocks,
-the grounding lead between aircraft and ground.
NOTE: Have the pilot maintain an engine speed of 7200 rpm for 2 minutes so as to ensure
correct scavenging of the engine lubricating oil.
D - With the engine still running, carry out the following operations:
CAUTION:
WATT UNTIL THE ENGINE SPEED IS STABILIZED AT IDLE.
-Check that:
-the airbrakes are retracted (if they are not, signal the pilot to retract them),
-with control stick and roll trim set to neutral, the ailerons are at neutral (within the
adjustment tolerance),
-the in-flight refueling boom is retracted,
-there is no leakage under the aircraft.
-Ensure there is no airflow at the main air vent nor in the RH feeder tank overpressure
pipe (fuel system).
-Check fluid level in hydraulic reservoirs:
- doors 29.04/1 : system 1 = 5.6* qJ liters (9.8 * jj'J pts - 1 1 .8 * J g US. pts)
- doors 29.08/1 : system 2 = 3.5* jj'| liters (6.15 +_ [j-J pts - 7.39 +_ J 5 US. pts).
Any fluid excess or level drop in hydraulic reservoirs necessitates trouble shooting to de¬
termine its origin.
-Open door 17.04 and set "DOORS" and "DIVE BK" ground safety switches to
"GROUND" position. Check the dash-pot level light is out; test it.
-Manually open the U/C doors without locking them. This operation shows that the
"GROUND SAFETY" system is effective.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lZ2>-A-Jr\ / Y\ll\/-\V»7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^ï3& ^S«SO> . .a a au, ai oo
^<^ ^r*^ Restricted MANUAL 02
Modification 692 incorporated: hard-landing detector

-Check that the red indicator does not show in the hard-landing detector window. Other¬
wise, check the main. U/C after a hard-landing (see 05-0).
E - Signal the pilot to shut down the engine.
-Check the draining systems for correct operation.

-Smoke emission in duct is acceptable.
-Together with the pilot, time the engine run-down time (see 02-7).
NOTE: This check shall be performed upon each engine shutdown (allow for the wind effect
(tailwind or headwind) which may appreciably modify the run-down time).
F - After engine shut down :
-Install the cockpit access ladder, wipe the canopy if wet.

-Install the seat safety pin rope (see 02-0 - figure 6).
CAUTION:
THFBAFETY PIN OF THE PERCUSSION UNIT SHALL BE INSERTED FROM THE REAR
TO THE FRONT TO PREVENT BUMPING AGAINST THE QUICK-RELEASE COUPLING
LANYARD.
-Close the emergency oxygen cock, then the normal oxygen cock.
-Close the anti-g cock.
-Disconnect the anti-g coupling.
-If required, help the pilot out of the cockpit.
G - Ask the pilot about correct aircraft operation.
NOTE: If the pilot felt unwell during the flight, check the liquid and gaseous oxygen systems
and the cabin air conditioning and pressurization systems (see manual 09-0).
5 - INSPECTIONS OF COCKPIT AFTER PILOT HAS VACATED
THESE INSPECTIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED FROM THE ACCESS LADDER WITH¬
OUT ENTERING THE COCKPIT.
A - Check following points:
-circuit breakers: all pushed in,
-electric pump, standby horizon, pitot probe heater, warning horn switches: "OFF",
-battery switch: "OFF",
-crossfeed switch: "closed",
-canopy embrittlement:
-control lever tilted aft and safetied with snapwire (0.3 mm dia. black enameled ann¬
ealed copper wire),
-pins correctly locked to percussion unit firing link-rod,
-brake chute control: "DROP" position (fully forward, knob raised),
-parking brake: lever fully pushed in,
-U/C control switch: «
-lever down, safety guard down,

-anti-retraction button safetied with snapwire (1 mm dia. annealed aluminum wire),
-armament master switch: "OFF" (guard down, cover and safety pin in position) ;
-emergency regulation switch: "OFF", guard down,
-LP main cock switch: "closed", guard not down,
-LH and RH low pressure pump, starting pump switches: "OFF",
-ignition/ventilation selector switch: "ignition" (P plug or S plug),
-throttle lever:
- lever on "stop",
-combat flap lever: in,
-airbrake control switch: "IN",
-inflight relight control: aft position,
-slat/flap handle: position depending on control surface position,
-AB main cock switch: "open", guard down,
-JPT emergency regulation switch: "AUTO",
-autopilot emergency switch: "OFF", guard down.
AK
BREGUET AVIATION,_
MIRAGE F
B - Install :
- the oxygen chest connector on its stowage support,

- the quick-release box on its stowage support,
- the shoulder straps over the seat upper section,
- the dinghy pack protective mat.
- Arrange calf straps in such a way that the buckle is not jammed when the seat pan is moved.
CAUTION :
DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS WHEN HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ARE NOT
PRESSURIZED.
C Checking
- Check liquid oxygen quantity contained in the tank. If another flight is to be performed and the
oxygen quantity is not sufficient (less than half the normal quantity) or if in-flight refueling is to take
place, replace the tank (see 09-3) or top it up (see 02-3).
WARNING :
IF THE AIRCRAFT IS TO PERFORM AEROBATICS DURING FLIGHT, FIT A TANK WHICH
HAS BEEN FILLED AT LEAST TWO HOURS BEFORE.
FOR NORMAL FLIGHT A STABILIZATION TIME OF 15 MINS BETWEEN FILLING AND
FLIGHT IS SUFFICIENT.
- Check emergency cylinder gaseous oxygen pressure (black range).
6- SAFETY MEASURES
If the A/C is armed, allow the armament specialist priority for taking all relevant safety measures.
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R^^Z^Vs.
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
7- A/C PREPARATION FOR USE
A Replenishment (see 02-3)
(1 ) Systematically carry out the following :

- refueling
- evaporator fluid replenishing : normally scheduled in weekly inspection (however, replenishing
is required after a flight at M > 1 .7),
- engine oil replenishing.
(TO BE PERFORMED WITHIN 2 HOURS OF ENGINE SHUTDOWN).
NOTE : For operational purposes, a competent authority may allow successive flights without oil
replenishing, as is actually required after each flight. In this case, observe the following
instructions :
-THE OVERALL DURATION OF FLIGHTS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 hours and
30 minutes ;
- successive flights without oil replenishing shall be exceptional ;
- check engine oil level.
(2) Check of engine oil level
(a) Purpose
- If required, to enable the pilot to check the approximate amount of oil remaining in the main
tank.
- To enable the A/C to be flown back from an alternate airfield.
CAUTION :
THIS CHECK SHALL BE PERFORMED WITHIN 15 MINUTES OF ENGINE SHUTDOWN (OIL
TEMPERATURE).
(b) Procedure
- Open door 30.05.
- Press the amplifier pushbutton and read the oil remaining quantity on the indicating dial :
- indicator in green range : flight authorized

- indicator in red range : flight not authorized ; IMPERATIVELY replenish oil.
- Close door 30.05.
(3) If required, carry out the following :
(a) depending on periodicity (see 01 -1 ) :

- vario-alternator oil replenishing
- accessory gearbox oil replenishing ;
(b) depending upon previous checks :

- liquid oxygen tank replacement (see 09-3) or replenishing (see 02-3) ;
- gaseous oxygen replenishing ;
- hydraulic reservoir replenishing.
B Recording fatigue meter readings
Record all fatigue meter readings, including the «TEST» meter reading, on the appropriate form.
C Brake chute
- If the brake chute has been used for landing, proceed to replacement (see 05-9).
AE
BREGUET
iL-^'t'U.
AVIATION^fiF^-^Ô
MIRAGE F
^C*=-^**^ Restricted MANUAL 02
8- A/C EXTERNAL INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS
A General checks
NOTE : Following general checks shall be performed as the mechanic's inspection proceeds :
- Check the various skins and rivets for condition.

- Check attachment of panels, doors, various fairings and antennas.
- Check landing/search, navigation and formation lights for condition.
- Check - by shaking - correct attachment of pylon stores fitted to the A/C.
- Check that there is no oil, fuel or hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Check hoses, electrical cables and bonding braids for condition.
B Inspection of forward fuselage.
(1 ) Inspection of LH air intake duct.
WARNING :
DO NOT LEAVE ANYTHING INSIDE AIR INTAKE DUCTS.
Examine :
- Air intake ducts, air intakes, boundary layer bleeds.
- Shock cones and spring ribs.
(2) Check of TAS and laser glass indicator lights
- Open door P2-09.

- Check TAS failure indicator light 129F for condition. If it indicates a failure (red and white flap),
perform trouble shooting of the air data system (see 12-2).
- Check laser glass indicator light 40H for condition. If it indicates a failure (red and white flap),
perform trouble shooting of the laser glass demist system (see 14-3).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL-P-^Til MIRAGE F
«.«Kl mAnCsd^^*^ .rM.6 MANUAL 02
(3) Inspection of nose U/C
(a) Check the nose U/C cylinder for general condition
(b) Inspection of U/C and doors :

- check the shock absorber and jacks for condition and cleanness ;
- check the static ground wire for condition (contact with the ground) ;
- visually check the shock absorber height.
(c) Inspection of wheels and tires :

- condition of wheels and tires (see 02-4) ;
- flattening of tires.
(4) Inspection of RH air duct :
refer to para. (1).
(5) Inspection of airframe after gun firing

Check the outer skin close to the gun muzzles and on the nose U/C door (tearing of rivets or solder
tacks, incipient cracks, incipient corrosion).
(1) Inspection of RH main U/C
(a) Inspection of U/C and doors :

-check the shock absorber and jacks for condition and cleanness ;
- check the brake units for visible condition ;
- check the wear take-up device for correct operation ;
-check the shock absorber height. This dimension varies according to aircraft configuration
(see 02-4).
(b) Inspection of wheels and tires :

- condition of wheels and tires (see 02-4) ;
-flattening of tires (tire inflation pressure varies according to aircraft configuration (see 02-4)).
(2) Inspection of RH main U/C cylinder
(a) Check the cylinder for general condition
(b) Open door 24.03i (24.09i).

- Inside the air duct, check for :
- cleanness,
- condition of riveting : all screw and rivet heads should be visible.
- On engine, check for condition of :
- flexible deflectors,
- engine 1st rotor stage,
- cowling and air intake screens of gas generator.
(c) Close door 24.03i (24.090 and ensure the control lever is locked.
D Inspection of RH wing
- Inspection of control surfaces :

- slats
-ailerons
-flaps.
- Check for presence and condition of plastic plugs on access holes.
AB
01-81 Restricted 5304
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H^-à-^S /Y\ir\/"\V-7L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^g^&
^<e. ^^>
-*^> .
Restricted , mi a muai
MANUAL no
02
E - Inspection of rear fuselage

(1 ) On aircraft
(a) Ensure that there is no oil and fuel accumulation in the fuselage lower section (partic¬
ularly check through door 30.05).
(b) Ensure that there is no leakage from the starting pump drain plug (2 drops/min maxi¬
mum).
(c) Ensure that there is no trace of oil at the lower section of the tail cone.
(d) Ensure that the brake chute is installed, with cap safety pin removed.
(e) Check the tail unit for condition.
(2) On engine
Move back to the jet pipe and visually check the following for condition :
-the turbine (all components fitted),

-the AB duct (no distortion, no trace of burning or corrosion, correct concentricity of
leading edge of thermal protection liner 1 .
-using a light source, check liner 1 for presence of the 30 attaching rivets.
Whenever possible, perform the check by entering the AB duct,
-the jet pipe, the hot and cold flaps, the seal between jet pipe supports and hot flaps, and
the rear flange of the jet pipe support,
-the jet pipe actuators (for tightness - abnormal oil accumulation),
-the JPT probes and AB detection probe,
-the burner rings and injection manifolds.
F - Inspection of LH center fuselage
-Same inspection as that described under para. 8-C.
G - Inspection of LH wing
-Refer to para. 8-D.
-Remove door 27.08i and check the speed selector pin (on main FCU) for leaks.
NOTE: A leakage of one drop per minute is permissible on a hot engine.
-Install door 27.08L
H - Inspection of aircraft upper section
(1) Inspection of fuselage

(2) Inspection of wings
-refer to para. 8-D.
-In addition, check the spoilers for condition.
(3) Inspection of fin.
9 - COCKPIT INSPECTIONS AND CHECKS
A - The various switches and control units should be set as indicated in figures 4-5-6.
B - Display the carried fuel quantity on the fuel remaining indicator. Test the fuel gauges
(button on indicator), then check replenishment was carried out properly.
C - Check the windshield and canopy for condition and cleanness.
10 -FINAL STEPS
Whenever changing the aircraft armament configuration, make sure that the tire inflation
pressure and the shock-absorber height are correct (see 02-4).
A - Ensure that all the operations required by the aircraft form were carried out.
B - Rapidly inspect the cabin to make sure everything is in order and there is no foreign mat¬
ter.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^>-~rU
BREGUET AVIATION .^F^^-^Ô
MIRAGE F
C Close the canopy, locking it from the outside.
D Remove the cockpit access ladder, if it was used.
E The aircraft should be in the following configuration :

all doors closed except door 17.04, and U/C doors open, not locked.
F If required, carry out aircraft parking and mooring operations (see 02-1 ).
1 1 -UPDATING OF AIRCRAFT DOCUMENTS
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^Mi /V\ 1 1\ AAV-^L»
BREGUET AVIATION^^
ô !5*Cï>
^=^> Restricted miamiiai
MANUAL rto
02
INSPECTION AFTER LAST GUN FIRING OF THE DAY
1 - SCOPE
This sheet provides the maintenance operations to be carried out after last gun firing of
the day.
-Gun preparation tool case 30-550- F4 (3CGF 187)
-Gun servicing tool case 30-550- F6 (3CGF 189)
-Gun circuit controller 30-550-F2 (3CGF 136)
-Wrench M31025 (in door 17.04)
3 - MATERIALS
-Lubrication agent ARDROX 397-1
-White spirit S752
4 - GENERAL
During the inspection, comply with the general principles and rules relative to A/C prepa¬
ration for use (see 02-0).
j 5 - PRELIMINARY STEPS
-Open ground crew door 17.04 (if necessary) and recover wrench M 31025
-Open doors 21 .04 and 21 .08 giving access to the link recovery boxes
-Open the following doors (IMPERATIVELY WITH WRENCH M 31025):
-23.05 and 23.07 giving access to the case recovery boxes
-21 .03 and 21 .09 giving access to the ammunition box compartments and lock these
doors in up position, then remove the ammunition boxes
-19.05 and 19.07 giving access to the guns.
6 - GUN MAINTENANCE
A - Carry out post-firing maintenance operations (see 02-6 - Operations after mission with
guns).
NOTE: When removing the gun barrel, clean the blast tubes if no other gun firing mission is
anticipated. To this end, remove the film of grease applied on the sections of the air¬
frame in contact with burnt gases.
B - Cleaning
(1) Remove the connecting strip, summarily clean contacts and check insulators for condi¬
tion.
(2) Unscrew and remove firing control unit; clean it thoroughly.
(3) Remove case ejection chute.
(4) Install manual recocking device
(5) Clean simultaneously the gun barrel and the five chambers of the breech cylinder with a
metal cleaning-brush (brass brush), then lubricate slightly the chambers with a silk brush
soaked in ARDROX cleaning agent.
Carry out four successive recockings so as to align the five chambers in the barrel axis
and repeat previous operations.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT,
MIRAGE F
breguet aviation ^_ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
C - Reinstallation
(1 ) Install and secure firing control unit and connecting strip.
(2) Back off and remove manual recocking device.
(3) Install and lock case ejection chute.
7 - CHECKS OF GUN PACK COMPONENTS
A - Checking shell supply chutes for condition and attachment.
Ensure there are no cracks, no metal pick-up, no abnormal wear of the guides, etc.
On feed side, check the feed chute for condition (no distortion, no crack).
Check:
-attachment pins of the various chutes and rest supports for condition
-the springs returning the upper chute in up position for condition
-the lower chute door for attachment and condition.
B - Checking the recovery devices.
Check the following for condition:

-link chutes (general condition of the chutes and their attachment systems, condition and
attachment of guides and fairing).
-case chutes (condition of soldering, rods, internal condition of the chutes - indents, me¬
tal pick-up, incipient cracks, etc. condition of chute attachment - flange, locking device),
-recovery boxes:
-link compartment:
check that there is no trace of impact, metal pick-up, etc.
-case compartment:
check the various protective plates for condition and attachment, depth of impact
traces, of metal pick-up traces, etc.
C - Checking the ammunition box compartments
Check the various pads (on the structure) for satisfactory condition and make sure they
are cemented correctly.
On structure, at frames 21 and 22, check guiding rails for conditions (cracks at the inlet).
| 8 - FINAL STEPS
-Close doors 21.04 and 21.08 giving access to the link recovery boxes and check that
each latch is effectively engaged.
-Close the following doors (IMPERATIVELY WITH WRENCH M 31025):
-21 .03 and 21 .09 giving access to the ammunition box compartments
- 1 9.05 and 1 9.07 giving access to the guns
-Replace wrench M 31025 in door 17.04, then (if necessary) close the door and check
that each latch is effectively engaged.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION 6
PREPARATION FOR MISSION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
6-0 GENERAL
- General information about mission changes 6-001

- Installation and removal of initiators 6-002
- Selection of weapon loading code 6-010
- General measures to be taken when carrying stores. 6-011
6-2 PREPARATION FOR MISSIONS
Pre-flight inspection of sight camera

- 6-201
Preparation for mission with pylon tanks
- 6-202
- Operations to be performed after installation of pylon tanks 6-206
- Preparation for mission with guns 6-21 1
- Preparation for mission with rockets 6-221
- Preparation for mission with bombs , 6-231
- Preparation for training mission with adaptor type 65A 6-237
- Preparation for mission with missiles 550 6-251
- Preparation for mission with practice target 6-291
6-3 AIRCRAFT DEPARTURE FOR OPERATIONAL MISSIONS
- Operations to be performed before departure of aircraft 6-301

- Initial setting of navigation heading 6-31 1
6-4 AIRCRAFT RETURN FROM OPERATIONAL MISSIONS
- Operations to be performed when aircraft returns from mission ,

6-401
6-5 OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED AFTER OPERATIONAL MISSIONS
- Post-flight inspection of sight camera 6-501

- Operations after mission with pylon tanks 6-502
- Operations after mission with guns 6-51 1
- Operations after mission with rockets 6-521
- Operations after mission with bombs 6-531
- Operations after training mission with adaptor type 65A 0-536
- Operations after mission with missiles 550 6-551
- Operations after mission with practice target 6-591
AG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT r VA7 MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^rV "^-sf^
^Z^^^^b> Restricted MANUAL 02
Figure No. Page
1 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS 6-003

3 GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING BOMBS 6-012
3M GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING VARIOUS
STORES 6-012M
20 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF PYLON TANK. 6-204
21 GUN LOADING AND COCKING 6-212
22 PREPARATION OF WING INBOARD PYLON 6-223
22D PREPARATION OF WING OUTBOARD PYLON 6-224M
22H TYPE F1 ROCKET LAUNCHER UNDER PYLON 6-225M
22R PREPARATION OF TYPE F2 ROCKET LAUNCHER 6-227
22V PREPARATION OF TYPE 155 ROCKET LAUNCHER UNDER PYLON 6-228M
23 EXTERNAL ROUTING FOR RETARDED BOMBS 6-232C
23A INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF BOMBS ON/FROM MULTIPURPOSE
PYLONS 6-233
23B INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF BOMBS ON/FROM FOUR-BOMB PYLON . . . 6-233F
23F INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF BOMBS ON/FROM OUTBOARD PYLONS . . . 6-233T
23M PREPARATION OF DURANDAL BOMB 6-234
23N PREPARATION OF BELUGA BOMB 6-234F
23Q PREPARATION OF SPECIAL TANK N300 6-234T
23R PREPARATION FOR BOMB TRAINING MISSION (TYPE 65A) 6-238L
25 INSTALLATION OF MISSILE 550 6-252
29 PREPARATION FOR PRACTICE TARGET TOWING MISSION WITH
TARGET S90B AND CONTAINER VRAC 500 6-293
29R TESTING OF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS OF CONTAINER VRAC 500 6-296
31 HEADING TRANSFER 6-312
52 ZERO RESETTING OF TYPE 155 ND ROCKET LAUNCHER (TYPE F8 TEST
SET) 6-526
53 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF EJECTORS ON FOUR-BOMB PYLON CLB4 6-533R
55 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF NITROGEN CYLINDER (MISSILE 550) 6-554
AH
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT MISSION CHANGES
Any change of mission requires :
- replacement (if required) of the carrying device,
- check of aircraft firing/release circuits and of carrying device circuits,

- check of jettisoning circuits.
These operations are followed by the preparation for scheduled mission.
The following table gives, for each type of mission, the various operations to be carried out before
another mission.
DOGFIGHT PRACTICE
TYPE OF MISSION PYLON TANKS GUNS ROCKETS BOMBS AIR-TO-AIR TARGETS
MISSILES
Check of clean Check of tank carrying Check of jettisoning

aircraft circuits circuits on clean aircraft circuits on clean
(see 15-0) aircraft
(see 15-0)
Installation of Installation of fuselage Installation of wing Installation of fuselage and Installation of missile Installation of
carrying devices and wing multipurpose multipurpose pylons wing multipurpose pylons launchers hooking stub
pylons (see 15-3) (see 15-3) (see 15-5) (see 15-9)
(see 15-3)
Check of firing/ Check of aircraft Aircraft + pylon circuits Aircraft + pylon Aircraft + missile Aircraft + hooking
release circuits circuits, except gun (see 15-2) + four bomb pylon launcher circuits stub circuits
circuits circuits (see 15-5) Aircraft + practice
(see 15-1) (see 15-3) target circuits
(see 15-9)
(2) (2)
Check of jettisoning Aircraft + pylon Aircraft + p r-lon circuits Aircraft + pylon Aircraft + hooking
circuits circuits (see 15-0) + four bomb pylon stub circuits
(see 15-0) circuits (see 15-9)
(see 15-3)
(1)
(D (2) (2)
Operation to be carried Operation to be Applicable to Operation to be followed by a test of fuel dipper
REMARKS out prior to tank followed by a test of special tanks N300 circuits
installation fuel dipper circuits (see 06-5)
(see 06-5)
AE
06-81 Restricted 6-001 6-001
BREGUET AVIATION ^<^.
/LJ^^rU
_^^ _
MIRAGE F
..ami ai no
i
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS

(figure 1)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed to install initiators when preparing the aircraft
for a mission, and to remove said initiators when the aircraft returns from mission.
A Special tools
- Alkan tool kit Y 801 P001 A for pylon preparation
3- SERVICING MATERIAL
- Grease Air 4247
4- PROCEDURE
Before installing the initiators, make sure they have been tested (see 15-0, «CHECK OF
REMOVED INITIATORS AND DETONATOR HOLDERS»),
A- Initiator F17A
(1) Installation
- Open initiator access door (1 ) (on pylon).

- Position the initiators as follows :
- lightly grease the threads of adapter (3) and plug (4),
- engage initiator (2) into the adapter,
- screw and lock the plug,
- lightly grease the threads of the housing and adapter,
- position and screw adapter assembly (5) into the bore of housing (6).
WARNING :
DOOR (1) MUST BE LEFT OPEN AFTER FITTING THE INITIATORS.
NOTE : Adapter (5) is normally equipped (sub-assemblies (2), (3) and (4)) when received from the
armament shop.
(2) Removal
- If required, open initiator access door (1 ).

- Unscrew and remove adapter assembly (5) ; clear it away.
- Unscrew the plug (4) and disengage the initiator.
B Initiators 1. 50 and F71 A on hooking stub

(1) Installation
- Open door (7) giving access to LEMO connectors (8) (on RH side of the hooking stub and
level with each ejector).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ>-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^cT __
MIRAGE F
Install 1.50 initiators in front cockpit, proceeding as follows :

-
- engage initiator (9) in vent plug (10),
- lightly grease the threads of the vent plug and of main body (1 1 ),
- screw up and lock the equipped vent plug in the main body,
- lightly grease the threads of the main body,
- install main body assembly (12) in initiator support (13) and screw up,
- place the power supply wire of the initiator on threaded portion (14) of the main body and
immobilize with two nuts (15).
- Install F71 A initiator in rear cockpit (rear housing), proceeding as follows :
- lightly grease the threads of main body (16),
- engage initiator (17) in the main body,
- install the main body assembly in initiator support (13) and screw up,
-place the power supply wire on threaded portion (18) of main body (16) and immobilize
with two nuts (19).
- Install one 1. 50 initiator in the rear cockpit (front housing) (see above-described procedure for
installation of I.50 initiators in front cockpit).
On threaded portions (14) and (18) of the main bodies :
-fit the protective caps,

take the power supply wires out of the windows cut in the side panel of the hooking stub,
-
-check the protrusion of the markers (20) confirming the presence of the main bodies (12) and
(16) under each ejector/release unit (markers painted red).
CAUTION :
THE CONNECTORS OF THE POWER SUPPLY WIRES SHOULD NOT BE MATED WITH
THEIR RESPECTIVE LEMO CONNECTORS (8) MARKED «N» AND «S» ; ACCESS DOORS (7)
SHOULD BE LEFT HANGING FROM THE SIDE OF THE HOOKING STUB.
NOTE : Main body (11) is normally equipped (sub-assemblies (9) and (10)) when received from the
armament shop.
(2) Removal
- Open the access door to initiators (9) and (17).

- Disconnect the power supply wires (RH side of the hooking stub).
- Disengage the protective caps.
- Unscrew and remove nuts (15) and (19) retaining the power supply wires.
- Remove initiators (9) and (17).
- Case of 1. 50 initiators :
- unscrew and remove main body assemblies (12),

- unscrew vent plugs (10) from the main bodies and extract initiators (9).
- Case of F71 A initiators :
- unscrew and remove main body (16),
- extract initiator (17).
AB
£00-9 t aunou E00-9
l 3UnDld 800-9 pej3i.jjsey
18-90
DV
SiJOlVIlINI J0 1VAOIAI3U ONV NOI1V11V1SNI
sanasindiAii saa asod3a ±3 3SOd - i gynoid
P341UIS3H
noiiviav i3no3aa
d 39VÏIIW nnvssva tbdïvw snoiav
BREGUET AVIATION, _
R^^TXL MIRAGE F
WEAPON LOADING CODE SELECTION
1 - PURPOSE
The worksheet describes operations specific to the weapon loading code selection, on the bombing
intervalometer once bombs are installed under the various carrying stations.
2- PROCEDURE
A Preliminary steps
Canopy opening.
B Selections to be made on intervalometer
(1 ) Select, according to the carrying stations
Using switches associated to each carrying station, select as follows :

-under fuselage, carrying :
- FUSELAGE, display from 1 to 4
- under wing carrying :
- A. STATIONS 1 , carrying under wing inboard station, select from 2 to 8,
- A. STATIONS 2, carrying under wing outbord station, select 2.
Examples of operational carrying Selection code
Carrying 2 bombs under inboard wing pylons 020

Carrying AIR-to-AIR gunfire training target 100
Carrying 3 bombs under fuselage-F inboard wing pylons 120
Carrying 4 bombs under inboard and outboard wing pylons 022
Carrying 4 bombs under four-bomb fuselage beam 400
Carrying 6 bombs under four-bomb fuselage beam and inboard
wing pylons 420
Carrying 6 bombs under four-bomb fuselage beam and outboard
wing pylons 402
Carrying 8 bombs under four-bomb fuselage beam and inboard +
outboard wings 422
NOTE : If no store is installed under a carrying station, make sure that the switch is set to «0».
(2) Store type selection
Select the store type on the rotary switch :

- clean bombs CB
- retarded bombs RB
- clean practice bombs C.P.B.
- retarded practice bombs R.P.B.
(3) Initialization
After selecting the various stores, initialize the intervalometer. For that purpose, actuate the
«INITIALIZATION» button.
Two cases may occur :
- A/C with external power supply source : the light associated to the button comes on, and remains
steadily illuminated (if the initialization is taken into account),
- A/C without power supply : the light comes on (if initialization is correct) and goes out as soon
as the button is no longer actuated.
NOTE : Check that the «STBY-SUP» light does not come on after initialization (case of an external
power supply source), or when actuating the initialization button.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
(4) Setting required for special pylon tanks N300
- Carrying of six pylon tanks (four under wings - two under fuselage)
- Setting of code 422,
- Setting of configuration : «C» (clean) or «B» (bombs)
- Carrying of four pylon tanks (four under wings)

- Setting of code 022,
- Carrying of four pylon tanks (two at wing outboard stations - two under fuselage)
- Setting of code 402
AA
06-81 Restricted 6-01 OM
BREGUET AVIATION
ZU^^r5L
^cF^ ^Z^^*
MIRAGE
,, ... . rt
A .
F
.
GENERAL MEASURES TO BE TAKEN WHEN CARRYING STORES

(figures 3 and 3M)
1 - SCOPE
To give the information required for conditioning the various pylons and stores in relation to the
scheduled missions and loading configurations.
2- GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED
Refer to the instructions in the tables below for :

- preparing the stores before installation (bomb fin setting)
- positioning the bomb pads,
- selecting the openings on the gate valves, and if required, replacing the gate valves.
3 - REPLACING A GATE VALVE (PYLONS - FUSELAGE AND INBOARD STATIONS)
A Reminder
The ejector is fitted with two gate valves :

- a normal «0-7» gate valve,
- a «0-7» gate valve with a 5 mm dia. vent hole.
These gate valves can be installed at the front or at the rear of the ejector, so that the various
stores are properly released.
B Procedure
(1) Removal
- Rotate the gate valve to unlock it. Unlocking is obtained at the intermediate position between
«0» and «7» settings.
- At the end opposite to the setting device, press on the gate valve with a screwdriver to disengage
it from its housing. Remove the gate valve.
(2) Installation
- Engage the new gate valve fully home in its housing and rotate it up to the stop for locking it.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
STATION
RING
CAR
^v STORES 1000 lb DURANDAL CLUSTER SPECIAL
400 kg 250 kg 125 kg BOMBS
BOMBS PENETRATION TANKS
BOMBS BOMBS BOMBS TYPEBLG66
CAR RING \. (MK 10) N 300
DEVICE ^v BOMBS BELUGA
Position of gate valves Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Gate valve setting O(-) 5(+) O(-) 5M+) 5(+) 5(+) O(-) 5(+) 5(+) 5(+) 5(+) 2(+)
- The igniters are

OUTBOARD PYLON - The bomb fin pad is in Same as for 400 kg - The bomb fin pad is in located on either
(CLB 30) rear position rear position side of the upper
W EJECTOR TYPE 165 B bombs shell attachment
plates, level with
The bomb fin is set The bomb fin
the hooking rings
1
- - is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb is set
X - wise X - wise X - wise X wise
N
Gate valve setting O(-) 7*(+) O(-) 7M+) 7M+) 7(+) !
O(-) 7*(+) 7*(+) 7(+) 7(+) 7(+) 7(+) 7(+)
G * Gate valve with 5 mm *Gate valve with 5 mm * Gate valve with 5 mm 'Gate valve with 5 mm
dia vent hole at the rear dia vent hole at the front dia vent hole at the front dia vent hole at the front - The igniters are
S
located on either
MUL TIPURPOSE PYLON - The bomb fin pad is in Same as for 400 kg The bomb fin pad is in
side of the upper
(915B-916B) rear position rear position
shell attachment
EJECTOR TYPE 115 A bombs
plates, level with
the hooking rings
The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set
X wise X - wise X - wise X - wise X - wise
Gate valve setting O(-) 7M+) O(-) 7*(+) O(-) 7*(+)

*Gate valve with 5 mm * Gate valve with 5 mm
dia vent hole at the rear dia vent hole at the rear
F
MUL TIPURPOSE PYLON Same as for 400 kg
U (91 OB) Pending Pending Pending
EJECTOR TYPE 115 A bombs
S
- The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set
E X - wise X - wise
Gate valve setting O(-) 5(+) O(-) 5M+) 5(+) 5(+) O(-) 5(+) 5(+) 5(+) 5 (+) 5 (+) 5 (+) 5 (+)
L
A
- The igniters are
FOUR-BOMB PYLON located on either
G Same as for 400 kg
(CLB 4) side of the upper
EJECTOR TYPE 165 B bombs shell attachment
E
(qty : 4) plates, level with
the hooking rings
- The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set - The bomb fin is set
+ - wise + - wise + - wise X - wise X - wise
FIGURE 3 - GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING BOMBS

AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT \
BREGUET AVIATION --Ê0
MIRAGE F
CARRYING STATION WINGS FUSELAGE

CARRYING
DEVICE OUTBOARD PYLON MUL Tl -PURPOSE PYLON MUL Tl -PURPOSE P YL ON
(CLB 30) (915B-9WB) (91 OB)
Ejector type 165B Ejector type 1 15A Ejector type 1 15A
Front Front Rear Front Rear

7 (+) O(-) 7j(+) O(-)
PYLON
TANKS 77?e pylon is fitted with a The pylon is fitted with a

rear retaining device rear retaining device
RP35
5 (+) | O(-) 7(+) O(-)

ROCKET Rear retaining device in place Rear retaining device in place
on pylon on pylon
LAUNCHERS Front and rear rings off center Front and rear rings off center
for 1° deviation setting of rocket for 1° deviation setting of
launcher
TYPE FID Modification of electrical connector rocket launcher
Modification of electrical
connector
5 (+) O(-)
ROCKET
LAUNCHERS Front ring off center for

0 setting of rocket launcher
TYPE F2
(//to A/C axis)
5 (+) Ot-)
ROCKET
LAUNCHERS Front ring off center for Front ring off center for
0 setting of rocket launcher 0 setting of rocket launcher
TYPE 155ND (//to A/C axis) (//to A/C axis)
FIGURE 3M - GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING VARIOUS STORES

AA
01-80 Restricted 6-012M FIGURE 3M 6-0 12M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^~iryL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^^^^^b» _
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION OF SIGHT RECORDER
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be carried out prior to aircraft mission.
2- PROCEDURE
A Delay setting
According to the mission to be performed, set on the camera the time delay required for taking
the photographs. This delay setting may be performed according to the indications given in the table
below (values given for reference only).
SETTING Mission
5 seconds Gun and rocket firing
30 seconds Active or passive missile firing
60 seconds Bombing
B Rate setting
CAUTION :
DO NOT HANDLE «IM/S-PPS» KNOB WHEN THE CAMERA IS OPERATING.
DO NOT LEAVE «IM/S-PPS» KNOB ON AN INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
For rate setting, depress «IM/S-PPS» knurled knob and turn the eccentric until it clicks into place
at position «5» or «16».
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ___
^L^-^rU
__
MIRAGE F
PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH PYLON TANKS

(figure 20)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed to install pylon tanks and to connect the
circuits after tank installation.
A Special tools
- Elevator trolley with accessories

- 1200 liter trolley 5001 CRL for installation of belly tank
- Ammunition transport and distribution trailer
- Alkan hoists (2) type 500 (MO 15B)
- Alkan hoisting pin Y0 15-001
- Safety pins
- Alkan hoisting strap 77069
C Materials
-Grease Air 4222 or 4210

-Oil Air 3512
3- TESTING OF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Before the first mission with pylon tanks, carry out electrical tests as described in sheet «GENE¬
RAL INFORMATION ABOUT MISSION CHANGES».
4- INSTALLATION OF PYLON TANK
A Preparation of pylon
- Open connecting door (5) of initiators (29).

- Remove safety pin (1 ).
- Release the mechanism by operating «DECLENCHEMENT - RELEASE» hex head control (2) in
direction of the arrow.
- After unlocking jam nuts (4), bring the screws of mounting lugs (3) to upper abutment.
- Unscrew lock screw (22) and remove lockplate (21) securing castellated nut (15).
If required, carry out the «GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING

STORES».
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ^^TXL
BREGUET AVIATIONôT _ _
MIRAGE F
B Preparation of pylon tank
Make sure that the rings are in satisfactory condition.

-
Bring both ball joints into down position, after removing protective caps.
-
- On rear adjusting assembly, loosen locking nut (6).
- Operate pad hexagonal nut (7) and lower rear adjusting assembly.
- Remove the protective plugs from crossfeed devices.
- Check crossfeed union seals for condition, replace them as necessary ; lubricate the seals (petro-
I latum) ; slightly lubricate the swivelling devices of seal supports (grease).
- Lubricate ball joint heads.
C Installation of pylon tank
(1) By elevator trolley
Lifting shall be performed with elevator trolley for tank carried under wings, and with installation
trolley for tank carried under fuselage.
(a) Preliminary steps
- Prepare lifting devices for use (elevator trolley or installation trolley).

- Position the tank on the elevator trolley platform and hold it in position with retaining straps.
NOTE : Place a protecting pad between elevator trolley platform and tank so as to protect tank
structure during lifting.
(b) Lifting of pylon tank
Lift the tank, making sure - at the time of hooking - that the rings are positioned correctly and
simultaneously straight below the hooks.
On tank rear adjusting assembly :

position fork (8) onto pin (9) and move hooking device (10) forward so as to bring opening (1 1 )
-
into nose (12) ;
-fit ball joint (13) into its housing (14) on the pylon, and screw castellated nut (15) by a few
threads.
(c) Hooking of pylon tank
Engage the ejector hooks into the tank rings and lock by operating «ENCLENCHEMENT-
COCKING» hex head control (16) in direction of arrow.
(2) By hoisting device
(a) Installation of hoisting device
- Insert the hoisting pin in pylon housing (28).

- Hook a hoist onto either side of this pin.
- Move the tank next to the preselected shifting point.
- Adjust the hoisting strap under the tank and pin it at each end to the hoist end-fittings.
(b) Hoisting and positioning of pylon tank.
Hoist the tank by simultaneously operating the two hoists.

-
Go on hoisting while making sure that the rings are positioned correctly and simultaneously
-
under the hooks.
- Install fork (8) by performing the operations described above (para. b).
AA
01-80 Restricted , 6-203
BREGUET AVIATION ^^p23
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
FIGURE 20 - POSE ET DEPOSE DU RESERVOIR PENDULAIRE

INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF PYLON TANK
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=*>-^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^^^^ .........
(c) Hooking of pylon tank
Engage the tank rings into the ejector hooks and lock by operating «ENCLENCHEMENT-
COCKING» hex head control (16) in the direction of the arrow.
D Check and preparation of pylon fitted with tank
- Through opening (17) marked by an arrow, check that locking is correct.

- Insert safety pin (1) into the bore marked «SECURITE-SAFETY».
- If the installation is by hoisting, remove the handling equipment (hoists and pin).
- For easier removal of the trolley, unscrew, fold back and release the strap retaining side locks.
CAUTION :
THE TROLLEY SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM THE REAR OF THE AIRCRAFT, TAKING
CARE NOT TO DAMAGE TANK STABILIZERS.
- Bring external mounting lugs (3) of the ejector in contact with the tank skin, then complete lug
tightening, strictly observing the following order : RH front lug, LH rear lug, RH rear lug, LH front lug ;
tighten each lug by 1/4 turns up to 1 1/4 to 1 1/2 turns.
- Lock jam nuts (4).
NOTE : The internal mounting lugs are not used when carrying a pylon tank. Bring these lugs to the
up position, but not in abutment ; lower and lock the jam nuts.
- Operate hex head control (7) to bring the rear assembly in abutment against pylon bearing
plate (18), then complete tightening (+ two turns). Tighten locking nut (6).
- Actuate operating flats (19) by hand, so as to bring the flange of window (1 1 ) into contact with
nose (12), then tighten by a quarter turn after contact. Lock jam nut (20).
- Fully screw castellated nut (15) into its housing (14).
NOTE : After tightening, spacer pin (9) should retain some lateral mobility.
-On the pylon rear fitting, engage lockplate (21) into a castellation of nut (15), then tighten
lock screw (22).
- Screw the tank ball joints until contact is obtained in the ball joint housing (without forcing),
then lower them by half a turn.
-Set adjusting valves (23) and (24) in the appropriate position (see «GENERAL OPERATIONS
TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING STORES», figure 3).
- Open the electrical connector access door (on pylon).
- Disconnect connector (25) from its stowage support and connect it to the tank receptacle.
- Make sure that the connector extracting cable is normally hooked to its snap hook.
- Close the access door.
- On the pylon, set rotary switch (26) to «TANK-ROCKET».
-On the fuselage pylon, operate hex head control (27) in the clockwise direction «OUVERT-
OPEN») to bring the feeler of the antileak squeeze device in the up position.
- Install the initiators (see worksheet «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»).
5- PREPARATION FOR MISSION
- Perform the operations required after installing pylon tanks (see 02-6).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL->^rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^-^"^ . ....m...
«o
OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED AFTER INSTALLATION OF PYLON TANKS
1 - SCOPE
Check for proper operation of the pylon and pylon tank fuel system.
- Cockpit access ladder

- 1 1 5-200 V/ 400 Hz electrical power supply
-Pressurizationunit.
- Test plugs MTP 10 (for troubleshooting if necessary).
3- RECOMMENDATIONS
WARNING :
APPLY ALL GENERAL AND PARTICULAR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS :
AVOID FIRE
ELECTROSTATIC CONNECTION SHOULD BE PERFECT BETWEEN AIRCRAFT AND
GROUND, TANKER AND GROUND, AIRCRAFT AND TANKER.
CAUTION :
THROUGHOUT THE TEST MAKE SURE THERE ARE NO LEAKS ESPECIALLY AT AIR¬
CRAFT/PYLONS AND PYLON/TANK JUNCTIONS.
A - Replenish the pylon tanks with fuel (see 02-3), about 250 liters (55 Imp. gals - 66 US. gals - 440
lbs - 200 kg) for each tank. During this operation ascertain that air is escaping from the vent of the dif¬
ferent pylons (LH side for the LH wing, RH side for the belly and RH wing pylons).
B Drain the feeder tanks (see 02-3).
C- Door 25-00
- Connect the pressurization unit to the charging connector.
D - Door 7-08 1
- Make sure it is closed.
E Supply the aircraft with electrical power
F In cockpit :
- the following switches :

- «LP MAIN COCK, AB MAIN COCK, CROSSFEED» are set to «OFF»
- «LP PUMP, DC LP PUMP, EMERG. TRANSF» are set to «OFF»
- transfer control to «WG. PYL. TK»
- on the transfer control panel : the lights of the installed pylon tanks are off.
AC
02-79 Restricted 6_206
BREGUET
/Us^r^X.
AVIATION^-^P53^^^^
MIRAGE F
^£S^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
5- CHECK
A Start the pressurization unit, adjust the delivery pressure to 4 bar (58 psi) and connect up the
aircraft.
B Follow the transfer sequence from the pylon tanks to the feeder tanks :
-on gage on feeder tanks : the level progressively rises by approximately the same amount in each
feeder tank
- on transfer control panel : the corresponding light comes on at the end of the transfer sequence
of each tank.
C Switch off the pressurization unit and electrical power supply.
D Open door 17-08 and set the blow-down valve to «OPEN».
6- FINAL STEPS
- Replenish the system (see 02-3)

- Disconnect the pressurization unit and reinstall the blanking cap.
- Close the access doors.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //Ji-û-^1 /V\ll\/-\V-7L.
^-î3&
BREGUET AVIATION
^ "^«C^
^-»^> -,
Restricted haamiiai
MANUAL rt02
o
PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH GUNS

(Figure 21)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed to load and cock the guns and also
mentions the various checks to be performed when preparing the aircraft for gunnery mission.
A - Special tools
-Gun preparation tool case DEFA 30-550-F4 (3 CGF 187)
B - Ground handling equipment
-Elevator trolley with accessories

-Gun circuit controller DEFA 30-550-F2 (3 CGF 136)
-Firing circuit controller DEFA 30-550-F3 (3 CGF 203)
-Armament master switch protective cover (M.S. 1430)
-Ground firing shunt MRA9-13 (included in weapons setting tool case MRA9)
-Wrench M31025 (in door 17.04).
3 - MATERIALS
-Grease 4215
I -Water-repellent oil 391 -1 .
4 - SAFETY MEASURES
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO ARMED OR LOADED AIR¬

CRAFT (SEE 02-0).
I 5 - PRELIMINARY STEPS (Phase 1 )
-Open ground crew access door 17.04 (if necessary) and recover wrench M 31025
-Open doors 21 .04 and 21 .08 giving access to the link recovery boxes
-Open the following doors (IMPERATIVELY WITH WRENCH M 31025):
-21 .03 and 21 .09 giving access to the ammunition box compartments and lock these
doors in up position, then remove the ammunition boxes
-1 9.05 and 1 9.07 giving access to the guns, then remove these doors.
NOTE: Doors 19.05 and 19.07 can be only partially opened when some vertical loads are car¬
ried. However, the safety device may be overridden through the resulting gap, allowing
the doors to be removed by slightly reclosing them so that they do not contact the
belly store.
-On each gun:

-remove case ejection chute (4)
-open shell feed chute (5)
-remove link ejection chute (6).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^
MIRAGE F
__--'
AMMUNITION BOX
i C = -.vjU 2 r^-r^T~^7Z
/".-": V-jA.-ji... ---rJ !;! \
&H%
Sf $ Psk'sJSfr'i ; J
ipf^ ^N
/o% ~
ft -->^
?V:.=JSfty _ ^. >.
H?T
Mase 2 ; Installation of recocking device Phase 4 : Insertion of belt into gun
*> *
! !
FWD\ kn Â
1 *<
V. ° *> <r r. o a *j 'j o
FWD
' "p" O
^_\^J>
O
*/
q g o
i:
O" O O P- """ O &
70 o ::}
o o
/Y/sse / : Preliminary steps
Bottom view LH gun

èà /%aw 3 : Gun loading
FIGURE 21 - GUN LOADING AND COCKING
AA
05-82
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ>^ryi MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^P3^^-^ .» a ...... ,-..>
-Before the first mission with guns, lubricate the gun blast tubes, proceeding as follows :
- open gun barrel locking system access doors 18-05 and 18-07
- unlock and remove the barrel of the first gun
- repeat that operation on the second gun
- apply grease onto gun blast tubes and onto airframe sections in contact with burnt gases
(1 0 to 1 5 cm (4 to 6 in) approx. on the periphery of gun blast tubes and on nose U/C doors).
WARNING:
DO NOT SMEAR GREASE ON OXYGEN OVERFLOW PORT.
WHEN PERFORMING - IF NECESSARY - OXYGEN TANK ASSY REPLENISHING OPERA¬
TIONS, IT IS MANDATORY TO COMPLY WITH SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO SAID
OPERATIONS (See 09.0 and 02.3).
-Install and lock the gun barrels. Check for correct locking (locking indicator protruding at the
front of the electrical connecting strip of each gun) .
- Close doors 1 8.05 and 1 8.07 and check that each latch is effectively engaged.
6- FIRING CIRCUIT TEST

Before the first mission with guns, carry out electrical tests as described in sheet «GENERAL
INFORMATION ABOUT MISSION CHANGES» followed by a test of the fuel dipper control circuits
(see 06-5-558).
7- GUN LOADING
- Using the elevator trolley, place the ammunition box level with the ammunition compartment
(phase 3).
- Check the operation of the belt retainer (at the front of the ammunition box) and fasten strap
type feeder (7) to the first link.
- Position the ammunition box opposite the ammunition compartment.
- Insert the strap type feeder in the feed chute.
- Slide the ammunition box up to the bottom of the compartment, while keeping the strap type
feeder taut on gun side.
- Pull on the feeder to bring the first shell level with the feed box.
- Leave the ammunition compartment door open so that the belt retainer is operative.
- Unfasten the feeder.
- Through the link recovery compartment and the gun feed box, engage belt inserter (8) and fasten
the latter to the first link (phase 4).
- Bring the first shell into contact with the sprockets by pulling on the belt inserter.
- Close feed chute (5).
- Close the door of ammunition compartment (1 ) then bring the first shell into contact with the
sprockets, using the belt inserter to do so.
- Check that the belt inserter is still in abutment.
- Install the manual gun recocking device (phase 2).
8 - GUN COCKING (phase 5)
- Bring the gun parts rearwards, using the recocking device.

-Clear the dead point of the breech cylinder by pulling the belt inserter (rotate the sprocket
shaft to help the movement).
- Release the recocking device by means of knurled ring (9) so that the gun parts can again move
forward.
- Perform these operations four times.
NOTE : Positioning of the shell under the feeler is then signalled by contactor pin protrusion (at
the rear of the electrical connecting strip).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," VW/ JS /V\ir\/-\V_7L_ l
BREGUET AVIATION ^.
^ ^ ^ _
Restncted .,*..,,««« 02
MANUAL
-Unfasten the belt inserter.

-Install the link chute and cotter it.
-Remove the manual gun recocking device.
-Install the case ejection chute.
-Install the pyrotechnic recocking cartridge.
-Perform the same operations for the second gun.
9 - GUN TEST
A - Test
Perform the following operations successively on each gun:

-connect the gun connector to the 19-pin connector of the controller,
"taoditUtSLthneiIn0ntr0"erl
-test the gun J 'efer to controller instruction card,
B - Failure
Perform trouble shooting (see 15-1).
10 -PREPARATION FOR MISSION
-On control boxes, check that mode selector position is correct.
NOTE: Do not connect gun connectors. Leave them hanging.
-Ensure there is no link in link recovery boxes. Close link recovery box doors (3) and
check that each latch is effectively engaged.
Perform the same operation for case recovery boxes. Install gun bay access doors (2) (do
not close these doors).
Replace wrench M 31025 in door 17.04, then (if necessary) close the door and check
that each latch is effectively engaged.
AA
BREGUET
//^-"rAl
AVIATION,,^ ^^ ~
MIRAGE
....,....«
F
PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH ROCKETS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed to install, load and prepare rocket launchers
for a rocket mission with pylons installed at inboard and outboard wing stations.
A Special tools

- Tool kit OML R01-521 1-00G for 68 mm rocket launcher
- Elevator trolley and accessories

- Alkan hoists type 500 (M015 B) (qty : 2)
-Alkan hoisting pin Y01 5-001
- Safety pin(s)
- «DANGER» warning board
- Electrical power supply, 1 15-200 V/400 Hz
- Protective casing MS 1430 for armament master switch
3- SAFETY MEASURES
CAUTION :
ONLY THE STORE-CARRYING CONFIGURATIONS DESCRIBED IN THE AIRCRAFT PER¬
FORMANCE MANUAL ARE AUTHORIZED.
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO ARMED OR LOADED AIRCRAFT

the personnel are required to observe certain safety
(see 02-0). As rockets are dangerous weapons,
rules so as to avoid possibly fatal accidents.
The armament team chief will be responsible for all loading and unloading operations.
Aircraft circuits and rocket launcher circuits shall be tested with appropriate ground support
equipment only.
Never stand directly in front of or behind rocket launchers during loading operations.
Electrical tests shall never be performed when rockets are installed on rocket launchers.
4- CHECK OF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Before the first mission with guns, carry out the electrical tests described in sheet «GENERAL
INFORMATION ABOUT MISSION CHANGES».
When the checks are completed, install the protective casing on the armament master switch.
AA
BREGUET
/L^-jirU.
AVIATION^ôF53^-^^
MIRAGE
....,.,««
F
5- INSTALLATION OF ROCKET LAUNCHER
- AT INBOARD WING STATION (figure 22)
Open connecting door (5) of initiators (6).

-
Remove safety pin (1 ) from the bore marked «SECURITE - SAFETY».
-
- Release the mechanism by operating «DECLENCHEMENT-RELEASE» hex head control (2) in
the direction of the arrow so as to provide for hook opening.
- After unlocking jam nuts (4), bring mounting lugs (3) to upper abutment.
- If the aircraft is to be fitted with type F1 D rocket launcher, install the retaining clevis. Proceed as
follows for this installation :
- insert shaft (7) into the clevis body, using a screwdriver to retract locking balls (8) ;
- engage clevis (15) in pylon socket (9) and let shaft (7) come back ;
- disengage retainer pin (10).
B Installation of rocket launcher
WARNING :
1- PLACE THE AIRCRAFT ON A CLEAR AREA.
2 - ALL THE PRE-FLIGHT OPERATIONS SHOULD BE COMPLETED (REFUELING, TESTS,
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTIONS, ETC.).
3- ENSURE THAT ALL ARMAMENT CONTROLS ARE IN «OFF» OR «SAFETY»
POSITION (guard installed).
4- THESE OPERATIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH ALL ELECTRICAL POWER
SUPPLIES TURNED OFF.
NOTE : If the aircraft carries a rocket launcher type 155ND, check the hooking stations (center-
to-center distance : 14 in) and the position of the junction connector (at rear of hooking
stations).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^s^^
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 22 - PREPARATION DU PYLONE INTERNE DE VOILURE

PREPARATION OF WING INBOARD PYLON
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^îrU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF0^^^ ...muai no
(1) With lifting trolley

(a) Preparation
- Prepare the lifting trolley by equipping it with the required handling platform and adapter.
- Position the rocket launcher on the lifting trolley platform and hold it fast by means of retaining
straps.
(b) Lifting of rocket launcher
Lift the rocket launcher, making sure, when hooking, that both rings get positioned correctly and
simultaneously right below the hooks.
(c) Hooking of rocket launcher
Complete the lifting. When the rings are correctly positioned in the hooks, adjust «ENCLEN-
CHEMENT-COCKING» hex head control (11) (if required).
(2) With hoisting device

(a) Preparation of hoisting device
- Fully insert the hoisting pin into its bore (17) and rotate it clockwise by a quarter turn to lock it.
- Place a hoist on either side of this pin and unwind the required cable length while holding the
cables taut.
- Adjust the hoisting strap under the rocket launcher and pin it at each end to the hoist end
fittings.
(b) Hoisting and positioning of rocket launcher
- Hoist the rocket launcher, maintaining it horizontally by operating both hoists simultaneously.
- Check that the rocket launcher is correctly positioned (rings straight below pylon hooks).
(c) Hooking of rocket launcher
- Continue to hoist the rocket launcher until the rings are correctly positioned with regard to the
pylon hooks. If needed, operate «ENCLENCHEMENT-COCKING» hex head control (11) to obtain
proper engagement of the ejector.
(3) Check and preparation of pylon

- Through opening (12) marked by an arrow, check that engagement is correct. The locking parts
shall be in contact over 3 mm (0.12 in) approx.
- Insert safety pin (1 ) into the bore marked «SECURITE-SAFETY».
- If installation is by hoisting, remove the handling equipment (hoists and pin).
- On the pylpn, bring inner mounting lugs (3) of the ejector against rocket launcher skin, then
complete lug tightening, strictly observing the following order : RH front lug, LH rear lug, RH rear lug,
LH front lug ; proceed by quarter turns, until reaching the number of turns indicated below :
Rocket launcher type Nber of turns
F1D 1 turn
F2 1/2 to 3/4 turn
155ND 1 turn
CAUTION :
TrTTUNUSED MOUNTING LUG SCREWS SHOULD BE SET TO UPPER POSITION, BUT
NEVER BRING THEM UP TO STOP.
-Lock jam nuts (4) of inner mounting lugs.

-Set adjusting valves (13) and (14) to the appropriate position (see «GENERAL OPERATIONS
- For type F1 D rocket launcher, install and lock pin (10) in retaining clevis (15).
- Set pylon rotary switch (16) to «TANK-ROCKET» position.
6- PREPARATION OF ROCKET LAUNCHER
CAUTION :
AFTER LOADING THE ROCKET LAUNCHER (see following paragraph), AND ONLY AFTER
SO DOING, POSITION THE INITIATORS (SEE «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INI¬
TIATORS»).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
/LJ>-^ru MIRAGE F
AT OUTBOARD WING STATION (figure 22D)

-Remove safety pin (1) from the bore marked «SECU RITE-SAFETY».
-If required, release the mechanism by actuating hex head control (2) in «RELEASE» direction to
open the hooks.
- Unlock jam nuts (4) then return mounting lugs (3) to upper stop position.
- Open initiator access door (5).
- If the aircraft carries rocket launcher type F1 D, install the retaining clevis as follows :
- pull rod (20) to release hook retaining pin (10), and bring the control rod into low vertical
position to secure it ;
- screw moving assembly (22) home into the body of clevis (15) ;
- engage clevis in socket (9) of the pylon ;
using a screwdriver inserted in opening (7), work upward to prevent balls (17) from pro
truding ;
push the clevis home in the socket ; stop using the screwdriver ;
pull moving assembly (22) downward to ascertain that the clevis is properly locked.
NOTE : If a type F2 rocket launcher is mounted, install locknut (4) of sway-brace bolts (3), under
the ejector sway-braces (23).
B Installation of loaded rocket launcher using elevator trolley
WARNING :
1 - PLACE THE AIRCRAFT ON A CLEAR AREA.
2 - ALL THE PRE-FLIGHT OPERATIONS SHOULD BE COMPLETED (REFUELING, TESTS,
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTIONS, ETC.).
3 - ENSURE THAT ALL THE ARMAMENT CONTROLS ARE IN «OFF» OR ON «SAFETY»
POSITION (with guard installed).
4 - THESE OPERATIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH ALL ELECTRICAL POWER
SUPPLIES TURNED OFF.
NOTE : If the aircraft carries a rocket launcher type 155ND, check the hooking stations (14-inch
center-to-center distance) and the position of the junction connector (to the rear of hooking
stations).
(1 ) Lifting of rocket launcher

Make sure, when hooking the rocket launcher, that both rings are simultaneously and correctly
underneath the hooks.
NOTE : If carrying a rocket launcher type F 1 D, check :

- the clevis of the retaining device for correct position,
- that the rear hook, when held in position, fits properly into the clevis.
(2)Snapping-in of ejector
Complete the lifting. As soon as the rings are correctly positioned in the hooks, actuate
«LOCKING» hex head control (12) in direction of the arrow (if required).

- Insert safety pin (1) into the bore marked «SAFETY PIN».
- On the pylon, bring inner mounting lugs (3) of the ejector against rocket launcher skin, then
complete lug tightening, strictly observing the following order : RH front lug, LH rear lug, RH rear lug,
LH front lug ; proceed by quarter turns, until reaching the number of turns indicated below.
Rocket launcher type Nber of turns
F1D 1 turn
F2 1/2 to 3/4 turn
155ND 1turn
- Lock jam nuts (4) of the mounting lugs.
AB
03-83 Restricted 6-224 L
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
Vue de dessous
Bottom view
FIGURE 22D - PREPARATION DU PYLONE EXTERNE DE VOILURE

PREPARATION OF WING OUTBOARD PYLON
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^înl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^^"^ . M A Mil Al OO
- Set adjusting valves (13) and (14) to the appropriate position (see «GENERAL OPERATIONS
-Return control rod (20) to horizontal position and engage retaining pin (10) in clevis (15)
housing.
-If required, perform a height adjustment by means of castellated nut (21) until the rocket
launcher retaining nose fits correctly in the clevis opening and rests on the pin.
- Set pylon rotary switch (16) to «TANK-ROCKET» position.
After loading the rocket launcher (see next paragraph), and only after doing so, install the ini¬
tiators (see «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»).
6- PREPARATION OF ROCKET LAUNCHER
TYPE F1D ROCKET LAUNCHER (figure 22H)
NOTE : This rocket launcher is fitted under the aircraft following testing and loading in ammunition
stack site.
- On the rocket launcher, use the checking rule to ensure that the rocket launcher has been
correctly assembled. For this purpose, proceed as follows :
- engage the rule first in the rear ring, then in the front ring ;
- bring the rule in abutment by engaging its rear section in the rocket launcher retaining
hook ;
-check that ring assembly (18), electrical connector (19) and hook (20) are correctly
aligned ; in particular, make sure that the electrical connector engages correctly in the rule inden¬
tation ;
- disengage the rule.
- Bring the rocket launcher under the LH or RH wing, as appropriate.
- Repeat the above operations for the other rocket launchers and distribute these correctly to RH
or LH wing, as the case may be.
NOTE : Preparation of the rocket launcher (installation of rings and of rear hook, orientation of
connector) is performed before loading, in ammunition stack site or ammunition storage
site. The operations described in this paragraph are only pre-assembly checks.
- Make sure that the safety pin is in place on the safety lever. If it is not installed, do so after
having lifted the safety lever.
ON INBOARD WING PYLON (figure 22)
- Open door (25) giving access to the rocket launcher connector.

- Remove connector (23) from its stowage support.
- Insert the connector through the opening at the pylon base, at the level with the door.
- Branch the connector to the rocket launcher receptacle.
- Ensure that :
- connector (26) is correctly fitted to its receptacle,
- extractor cable (28) of connector (23) is hooked on its attachment fitting.
-Close door (25).
ON OUTBOARD WING PYLON (figure 22D)
- Disconnect connector (6) from its stowage support by releasing it from its grip clip.
- Insert this connector through opening (7) at the pylon base, level with the receptacle.
- Branch the connector to the rocket launcher receptacle.
- Make sure that extractor cable (9) of connector (6) catches in the snap hook.
REMARK : The salvo mode is selected through selector switch (8) before takeoff (see «OPERATIONS
TO BE PERFORMED ON AIRCRAFT DEPARTURE») (figure 22H).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Cas de lance-roquettes
typeF1Det155ND
FWand 155 ND type
rocket launcher
FIGURE 22H - LANCE-ROQUETTES F1D SOUS PYLONE

F1D ROCKET LAUNCHER UNDER PYLON
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT zL^>-±r\l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^cP3^^^ . ,, . _0... . A .
TYPE F2 ROCKET LAUNCHER (figure 22R)
Check that :
- a special offset ring is mounted on the front of the rocket launcher,
- the rings are fully tightened.
(1 ) Preparation rocket launcher

- Open safety lever (1 ) and install the safety pin equipped with its streamer.
- Unlock rear cone snap fasteners (2) (step 1 ).
- Remove the cone and place it upright on the ground or on a field trolley (step 2).
CAUTION :
THE REAR CONE SHOULD STAND ON ITS REAR SECTION.
(2) Connection of rocket launcher

Open the door (on pylon) giving access to the aircraft-to-rocket launcher connector.
-
- Disconnect the connector from its stowage support and connect it to the rocket launcher
receptacle, through the opening at the pylon base, level with the door.
- Make sure that the junction connectors to pylon circuit are connected to their respective
receptacles.
- Check that the connector extraction cable is hooked to the snap hook.
- Close the connector access door.
NOTE : On outboard wing pylons, the rocket connector is directly accessible on the lower pylon
flange. For connection, release the connector from its grip clip.
(3) Tests before loading

Before loading, no electrical test is to be carried out for :
- either the rocket launcher has just been installed under aircraft and comes from workshop or
stack site where testing has been performed,
- or the rocket launcher has just carried out a firing and it is to be reconditioned after aircraft
mission.
(4) Installation of protection cone and muzzle (step 3)
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT THE NOSE CONE IS FITTED WITH A THERMAL PROTECTION
CONE FOR SPEEDS OVER 500 kt.
Insert pin (4) into the pin setting hole and unscrew the assembly by the normal procedure.
-
Fully engage protection cone (5) onto the nose cone and position muzzle (6) over the cone,
-
making sure that the centering hole coincides with the boss on the upper section of the nose cone.
- Secure the muzzle by screwing locking stud (7), with pin installed.
- Once the locking stud rs screwed, remove pin (4).
- Check for correct locking by inserting the non-conical section of the pin into the pin setting
hole until it abuts the piston, then try to unscrew. If unscrewing is impossible, locking is correct ;
otherwise, complete locking, rotating by a fraction of a turn.
(5) Loading of rocket launcher
WARNING :
BEFORE LOADING, MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY LEVER IS IN OPEN POSITION,
WITH SAFETY PIN IN PLACE.
- Install each rocket, making sure that the firing connectors are correctly positioned (see relevant
instructions in rocket launcher and rocket handbooks).
- Install the rear cone as follows :
- insert the locking tabs into their respective housings in the rear frame,
- close the snap fasteners (a rather strong resistance should be felt).
AA
BREGLIET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
vrvyvwww^
MISE EN PLACE
DU CONE AVANT DEPOSE DU CONE ARRIERE
INSTALLATION OF FRONT CONE REMOVAL OF REAR CONE
FIGURE 22R - MISE EN OEUVRE DU LANCE-ROQUETTES TYPE F2

SERVICING F2 ROCKET LAUNCHER
AA
03r-83 Restricted 6-227
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^-^ryL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^©F^^^-o . h/iamiiai no
TYPE 155ND ROCKET LAUNCHER (figure 22V)
The rocket launcher can be prepared :
- either directly under the aircraft,

- or in ammunition stack site.
NOTE : When being mounted under aircraft, the rocket launcher :

- has either been loaded and tested in ammunition stack site ; the selection by means of
distributor (6) (selection 1-3-6) is then performed prior to assembly of the nose cone ;
-or is empty, in which case refer to the operations described in the following paragraphs.
- Check that an offset ring is mounted on the front of the rocket launcher and that the center-
to-center distance between the two rings is 1 4 in.
A Preparation under aircraft
(1) Preparation of rocket launcher
Once the rocket launcher is mounted under the pylon :

- open safety circuit breaker lever (1 ) and install the safety pin fitted with its streamer,
- remove rear cone (2) and nose cone (3) by operating snap fasteners (4) and (5) respectively (three
snap fasteners are provided for attachment of each component).
CAUTION :
THE REAR CONE SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED ON ITS FRONT SECTION.
(2) Connection of rocket launcher (figure 22)
- Open door (25) (on pylon) giving access to the aircraft-to-rocket launcher connector.
- Disconnect connector (23) from its stowage support and connect it to the rocket launcher recep¬
tacle, through the opening at pylon base, level with the door.
- Make sure that pylon circuit junction connector (26) is connected to its receptacle (27).
- Check that connector extraction cable (28) is hooked to its attachment fitting.
- Close connector access door (25).
NOTE : On outboard wing pylons, the rocket connector is directly accessible on the lower pylon
flange. For connection, release the connector from its grip clip.
(3) Tests before loading
- Test the rocket launchers mounted under pylon (see 15-2-505).
NOTE : The rocket launcher may come :

- either directly from the workshop, where the tests have been performed,
- or from another aircraft.
In either case, following a rocket launcher firing mission, reconditioning shall be performed
upon return of the aircraft (see OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH ROCKETS).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 22V - PREPARATION DU LANCE-ROQUETTES TYPE 155ND SOUS PYLONE

PREPARATION OF TYPE 155ND PYLON ROCKET LAUNCHER PHASE 4
AA STEP 4
06-81 Restricted 6-228M FIGURE 22V 6-228M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ>^br&.
BREGUET AVIATION .^F=L^cS^>
MIRAGE
....,..,. _
F
(4) Installation of thermal protection devices
- Install diaphragm (7) and neoprene seal (8) on the rear section of the nose cone, using the
centering pin on the barrel as a reference.
- Position the diaphragm in such a way that the bosses are located forwards.
- Reinstall nose cone (3) onto the rocket launcher center body.
WARNING :
THE ROCKET LAUNCHER SHOULD ALWAYS BE FITTED WITH THERMAL PROTECTION
DIAPHRAGM (7).
-Lock the nose cone with snap fasteners (step 1). Adjust the snap fasteners as follows (step 2) :
- once the diaphragm and seal are installed and after locking the snap fastener, index position
«1 » will be obtained on the snap fastener ;
- if the diaphragm is removed, change the index position with a screwdriver (thickness of
protection devices = 1 .6 mm, 0.062 in ; each index = 0.01 5 in).
WARNING :
MAKE SURE THAT THE NOSE CONE IS FITTED WITH THERMAL PROTECTION CONE (1 1 )
FOR SPEEDS OVER 500 kt.
- Insert pin (9) into the pin setting hole and normally unscrew locking stud (10).
- Fully engage protection cone (1 1 ) onto nose cone (3).
- Position muzzle (12) overthe cone, making sure that the centering hole coincides with that in
the nose cone.
- Secure the muzzle by screwing locking stud (10), with pin installed.
- Once the locking stud is screwed, remove pin (9).
- Check for correct locking by inserting the non-conical section of the pin into the pin setting hole
until it abuts the piston, then try to unscrew. If unscrewing is impossible, locking is correct ; otherwise,
complete locking rotating by a fraction of a turn.
(5) Loading of rocket launcher (step 3)
WARNING :
BEFORE LOADING. MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY LEVER IS IN OPEN POSITION.
WITH SAFETY PIN IN PLACE.
-Install each rocket, making sure that the firing connectors are correctly positioned.
As regards use and installation of rockets, refer to the relevant individual documentation.
- Connect the rockets.
- Reinstall the rear cone (step 4) and lock it using the three snap fasteners. Index position «3» is
obtained on the snap fastener.
B Preparation in ammunition stack site or in ammunition storage site
- The rocket launcher is tested and loaded in ammunition stack site or ammunition storage site.
Install the rocket launcher under the pylon.
- Check that the lever of circuit breaker (1 ) is open.
- Set distributor (6) to the selected firing mode (selector switch to 1-3-6).
These operations are identical to those carried out for rocket launcher preparation under aircraft.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU^>~ryL
BREGUET AVIATION _ "_ "
MIRAGE F
PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH BOMBS

AND SPECIAL TANKS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed to install the bombs and special tanks, and to
prepare the pylons and the four-bomb pylon.
A Special tools
Alkan tool kit Y 801 P001 A for pylon preparation

-
Matra tool kit 0B0D01-618772Y for Durandal bomb
-
-Matra special wrench OPAA99-618768S for removing and installing Durandal bomb sequencer
safety device
- Elevator trolley with accessories and protective receptacle

- Ammunition.transport and distribution trailer
- Alkan hoists' type 500 (MO 15B) (qty : 2)
- Safety pins
- Special ground support equipment for transporting and handling Durandal bombs :
- Matra fork 055W025371 26T for elevator trolley
- Matra adapter 055W02537125S for eievator trolley
- Matra adapter 055W02537124R for transport trailer
- Matra truck 55W02 -537681 A for handling and transporting Durandal bombs
3- SAFETY MEASURES
CAUTION

(see 02-0).
4- TESTING OF ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Before the first mission with bombs, perform electrical tests as described in sheet «GENERAL
INFORMATION ABOUT MISSION CHANGES».
When all the tests are completed, install the protective casing on the armament master switch.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// ^>-iL-\1 MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION XZZ$- ^-^ .
5- PREPARATION OF CARRYING DEVICES
A Preparation of fuselage and inboard wing multipurpose pylons (figure 23A)
- Open initiator connecting door (5).

- Remove safety pin (1 ) from the bore marked «SECU RITE-SAFETY».
- Release the mechanism by actuating «DECLENCHEMENT-RELEASE» hex head control (2) in
the direction of the arrow, so as to open the hooks.
- Unlock jam nuts (4), then bring mounting lugs (3) to upper abutment.
-Prepare the pylon. Refer to «GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN
CARRYING STORES» (figure 3) for :
- possible replacement of gate valves,
- installation of bomb firi pad in front or rear position (on wing pylons only).
For the latter operation, proceed as follows :
- position pad (14) and attach it,
- loosen nut ( 1 5) securing the fork,
- actuate operating nut (16) to bring fork (17) into up position.
B Preparation of four-bomb pylon (figure 23B)
At each of the carrying stations :

- remove safety pin (1) from the bore marked «SAFETY-SECURITE»,
- release the mechanism by actuating «DEVERROUILLAGE-RELEASE» hex head control (2) in
the direction of the arrow, so as to open the hooks,
- unlock jam nuts (4), then bring mounting lugs (3) to upper abutment.
C Preparation of outboard wing pylons (figure 23F)
- Open initiator access door (5).

- Remove safety pin (1) from the bore marked «SAFETY PIN».
- Release the mechanism by actuating «RELEASE» hex head control (2) in the direction of the
arrow, so as to open the hooks.
- Unlock jam nuts (4), then bring mounting lugs (3) to upper abutment.
-Prepare the pylon. Refer to «GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN
CARRYING STORES» (figure 3) for installation of the bomb fin pad in front or rear position.
For the latter operation, proceed as follows :
- position pad (14) and attach it,
- loosen nut (15) securing the fork,
- actuate operating nut (16) to bring fork (17) into up position.
6- PREPARATION OF STORES
A Preparation of conventional stores
The bomb to be loaded on aircraft should be in its final configuration, that is : fitted with its
fusing unit wires, fuzes fitted with their ground safeties and bomb fin set as per «GENERAL OPER¬
ATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING BOMBS» (figure 3).
CAUTION :
WHEN ARMING WIRE RINGS ARE FASTENED (BOMBS WITH WIRES ROUTED
EXTERNALLY) (figure 23) :
- CHECK THAT THE ARMING WIRES ARE ROUTED THROUGH THE WIRE GUIDE
- MAKE SURE THAT THE GENERAL ARMING WIRE IS ROUTED OVER THE INSTANTA¬
NEOUS ARMING WIRE
- ASSURE THAT THE NOSE SWIVEL ON THE GENERAL ARMING WIRE
DOES NOT PASS UNDER THE INSTANTANEOUS ARMING WIRE
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Anneau (SL) ogive

Nose ring
Anneau (SL) culot

Tail ring
Fil d'armement général

General arming wire
de sécurité largable _
Arming wire \
(vers point fixe empennage) \
(at tail attaching point) \
Fil d'armement instantané

Instantaneous arming wire
Clips ALKAN Point fixe empennage

ALKAN Clip Tail attaching point
Fil d'armement instantané de la fusée d'ogive.

Nose fuze instantaneous arming wire
FIGURE 23 - CHEMINEMENT EXTERNE POUR BOMBES FREINEES

EXTERNAL ROUTING FOR RETARDED BOMBS
AA
03-83 Restricted 6-232C
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^-^rU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^£g_ __
MIRAGE F
B Preparation of special stores
Durandal bombs (figure 23M)
When readying Durandal bombs, refer to the assembly and preparation operations for hooking
described in the individual documentation No. 165/DAVU/DOC.
The following operations are mentioned «for information» :

- Checking the correct positioning of :
-suspension lugs (1),
- ejection piston pads (2),
- mounting screw pads (3),
-arming wire (4),
-X-shaped fins (5), as per «GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CAR¬
RYING STORES» (figure 3).
- Checking the presence of GROUND safeties :
- safety pin (6) of first chute and retaining clip (18) in place,
- safety pin (7) of second chute and retaining clip (16) in place,
- safety pin (8) of striker and retaining clip (17) in place,
- sequencer safety (1 1 ) withdrawn and blanking plug (12) (red) in place,
- initiator safety (9) removed and blanking plug (10) in place.
- Check of safety pin (19) position :
- using a flashlight, check correct positioning of safety pin (19) through port (15) blanked by
a white plug.
It should be within range 1 .
- Remove safety pins (13) and (14) retaining fuzing unit ring (19).
Beluga BLG type 66 bombs (figure 23N)
When readying Beluga bombs refer to the assembly and preparation operations for hooking descri¬
bed in the individual documentation.
The following operations are mentioned «for information» :

- Checking the correct positioning of :
-suspension lugs (1)
-X-shaped fins (2) as per «GENERAL OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN
CARRYING STORES» (figure 3).
- Checking the presence of GROUND safeties :
- protective cover (3) with streamer on the airscrew,
- safety pin (4) with streamer on the presence indicator passed through the front lug,
- safety pin (5) with streamer passed through the nose-tail fuzing units for short carpet/long
carpet selection and chute-opening control.
- Check the correct positioning and attachment of the protective cover under the bomb casing.
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-232F
BREGUET AVIATION
Special tanks N300 (figure 23Q)
Refer to the mounting and preparation operations described in the individual documentation
No. 74 UMAT/AR when preparing special tanks N300.
The two igniters shall however be mounted on either side of the attachment plates of upper
shell (1 ), level with the hooking rings, as per following diagram :
Front ring Rear ring
FORWARD
A
The following operations are provided «for information» :

check the correct position of :
-
- mounting rods (2) of the half-shells,
- hooking rings (3),
- check that pins (4), fitted with their storage and grounding streamers, are positioned in the pins
of the igniter airscrews (5),
- check that arming wires (6) are fitted :
- to the pins of the airscrews igniters,
- to fusing unit wires (7).
AG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^P-^GL
BREGUET AV1ATION^<-2}F=^«<0
MIRAGE F
^Cs»==-^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
7- INSTALLATION OF STORES
A Installation of stores under multipurpose pylons (figure 23A)
Conventional stores
(1 ) Hooking-on using an elevator trolley
- Prepare the elevator trolley by fitting it with the platform and adapter required to transport and
to handle the bomb.
the bomb on the elevator trolley platform.
- Install
Position the bomb under the hooking station of the appropriate pylon.
-
- Hoist the bomb and hook it, making sure that its rings are correctly and simultaneously posi¬
tioned in the ejector hooks.
- Complete the hoisting until the bomb is snapped in place, assisting this maneuver with the
«ENCLENCHEMENT-COCKING» hex head control, if necessary.
(2) Hooking-on using a hoisting device
- Prepare the hoists as follows :

- insert the hoisting pin into pylon opening 13 and rotate it by one quarter turn rearwards
to lock it,
position a hoist on each side of this pin,
-
unreel an adequate length of cable while holding each cable taut,
-
- adjust the hoisting strap under the bomb and pin it at both ends onto the hoist end fittings.
- Hoist the bomb and hook it, making sure that its rings are correctly and simultaneously posi¬
tioned on the ejector hooks.
- Complete the hoisting until the bomb is snapped in place, assisting this maneuver with the
«ENCLENCHEMENT-COCKING» hex head control, if necessary.
- Through opening 7 marked by an arrow, check that the snapping is correct. The locking parts
should make contact over approx. 3 mm (0.12 in).
- Install safety pin 1.
For the operations specific to certain types of bombs, refer to «GENERAL OPERATIONS TO
BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING STORES».
- Remove the hoists and the hoisting pin (the cables should be reeled in on the drums while being
held taut).
- Bring ejector swaybraces 3 into contact with the store, then keep on tightening them by quarter
turns while observing mandatorily the tightening sequence : RH front swaybrace, LH rear swaybrace,
RH rear swaybrace, LH front swaybrace, and the number of turns hereunder :
- inner swaybraces : 1/2 to 3/4 turn
- outer swaybraces : 1 to 1 1/4 turns.
NOTE : The type of the mounting screws to be used depends on the bomb size :
- inner screws for small size bombs,
- outer screws for large size bombs.
CAUTION :
THE UNUSED SWAYBRACE SCREWS SHOULD BE RETURNED TO UP POSITION AND
SAFETIED BY THEIR LOCKNUTS. DO NOT BRING THEM TO ABUTMENT OR LOCK THEM
IN THAT POSITION.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
DETAIL A
MISE EN PLACE DES ANNEAUX DE S.L. PAR HISSAGE CAS DE LA BOMBE DE 400 kg FREINEE
INSTALLATION OF JETTISONABLE SAFETY WIRE RINGS BY HOISTING CASE OF 400 kg RETARDED BOMB
FIGURE 23A- POSE ET DEPOSE DES BOMBES SOUS PYLONES UNIVERSELS

INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF BOMBS ON/FROM MULTI-PURPOSE PYLONS
AB
03-83 Restricted 6-233 FIGURE 23A 6-23
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ>-"z^.
BREGUET AVIATION ^SP3^^?^
MIRAGE F
- Lock swaybrace jam nuts (4).

- For the wing pylons :
- loosen rear fin pad jam nut (15),
- bring fork (17) to bear on the bomb fin body by turning rod base nut (16),
- bring jam nut (15) to high stop position and tighten it.
-Set adjustment valves (8) and (9) to appropriate position. Refer to «GENERAL OPERATIONS
TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING STORES» (figure 3).
- Hook rings (22) of the fuzing unit wires onto corresponding solenoids (10) and (11). To do so,
position the fuzing unit ring at a slight angle and exert an upward force so that the ring fits itself into
its hooking part (see detail).
- Set «BOMB - TANK ROCKET» rotary switch (12) to «BOMB».
- Install the initiators (see «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»).
Special stores
(4) The procedure for installing special stores by means of an elevator trolley or a hoisting device is
identical to that described in para A (1) and (2), except for Beluga type 66 bombs (figure 23N) where,
after hooking, it is necessary to :
- unstrap the bomb,
- remove protective cover (20) and its two retainer straps (21 ).
(5) Checks and preparation of pylon
The checks and preparation are identical to those described for conventional stores, except for the
adjustment of the swaybraces :
- DURANDAL BOMB :
- rTter swaybraces } after contact and by quarter turns' up t0 3/4 turn
- BELUGA BLG BOMB TYPE 66 :
-inn r sway s i after contact and by quarter turns, up to 3/4 turn

- outer swaybraces J r M ' K
-SPECIAL TANK N300 :
Y. V after contact and by quarter turns, up to 1 turn and 3/4 turn.

- outer swaybraces J ' M ' ^
NOTE : When using an elevator trolley, a protective receptacle shall be positioned between the plat¬
form and the special stores, to protect their surfaces during hoisting operations.
CAUTION
BEFORE INSTALLING SPECIAL TANKS N300, CHECK FOR PRESENCE OF THE
FRONT AND REAR GATE VALVES (7 mm DIA WITHOUT 5 mm VENT HOLE). REPLA-
CE THEM IF NECESSARY.
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-233C
BREGUET
fl^^-^-Q
AVIATIONôF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^C^**-^=^ Restricted MANUAL 02
B Installation of stores under four-bomb pylons (figure 23B)
Conventional stores
(1) Conventional stores are installed by means of an elevator trolley, as described in para A (1).
In case of four-bomb loading, the installation should proceed starting with the two rear carrying
stations since the trolley approach is hindered by the main undercarriage.
(2) Check and preparation
- Install safety pin 1 in the housing marked «SAFETY - SECURITE» and make sure it fits in
freely.
- Bring ejector swaybraces 3 into contact with the store, then keep on tightening them by quarter
turns while observing mandatorily the tightening sequence : RH front, LH rear, RH rear, LH front and
this up to one turn maximum.
- Lock swaybrace locknuts 4.
-Set adjustment valves 7 and 8 to the appropriate position. Refer to «GENERAL OPERA¬
TIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING STORES» (figure 3).
- Hook rings 13 of the fuzing unit wires onto corresponding solenoids 9 and 10. To do so, position
the fuzing unit ring at a slight angle and exert an upward force so that the ring fits itself into its hooking
part (see detail).
Repeat these operations for the various carrying stations.
- Open initiator access door 5.

- Open selector box access door 1 2.
- Set selector switch 1 1 to «BOMB 4» position for quadruple store.
- Close door 12.
Special stores
(3) Special stores are installed by means of an elevator trolley, as described in para A (1), except for
Beluga type 66 bombs (figure 23N) where, after hooking, it is necessary to :
- unstrap the bomb,
- remove protective cover 20 and its two retainer straps 21 .
(4) Checks and preparation are identical to those described for conventional stores in para B (2).
AA
03-83 Restricted 6-233D
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
^=^=^
MISE EN PLACE SUR SUPPORT DE MANUTENTION

INSTALLA TION ON CARRYING SUPPORT ACCROCHAGE DE LA BOMBE
LOCKING THE BOMB
LEVAGE DE LA BOMBE
LIFTING THE BOMB
Position déverrouillée Position verrouillée

Unlocked position L ocked position
W
^^Repère de couleur Repère de couleur.
PRESENTATION SOUS LA POUTRE Rouge Vert
POSITIONING UNDER PYLON Red index Green index
MISE EN PLACE
DE L'ANNEAU DE S.L.
FIGURE 23B - POSE ET DEPOSE DES BOMBES SOUS POUTRE QUADRIBOMBE INSTALLA TION OF JETTISONABLE
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF BOMBS ON/FROM FOUR-BOMB PYLON SAFETY WIRE RING
f\f\
03-83 Restricted 6-233F FIGURE.23B 6-2331
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /U^-^rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION.^jî^L-^^ nn
C Installation of conventional stores under outboard wing pylon (figure 23F)
Conventional stores
(1) Hooking of a store under outboard pylon is performed by means of the elevator trolley (see
para. A (D).
- Install safety pin (1 ) in the bore marked «SAFETY PIN».
- Bring ejector mounting lugs (3) into contact with the store, then keep on tightening them by
quarter turns while observing mandatorily the tightening sequence : RH front lug, LH rear lug, RH rear
lug, LH front lug and this up to one turn maximum.
- Lock mounting lug jam nuts (4).
-On rear fin pad (12) :
- loosen jam nut (14),
- bring the fork to bear on the bomb fin body by turning rod base nut (13),
- bring jam nut (14) to high stop position and tighten it.
-Set adjustment valves (7) and (8) to the appropriate position. Refer to «GENERAL OPER¬
ATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN CARRYING STORES» (figure 3).
- Hook rings (16) of fusing unit wires onto corresponding solenoids (9) and (10). To do so, offer
up the fusing unit ring slightly at a slant and exert an upward force so that the ring drops by itself into
its hooking part (see detail).
- Set «BOMB-TANK ROCKET» rotary switch (1 1) to «BOMB».
Special stores
(3) Installation of special stores is performed by means of an elevator trolley as described in

para. A (1).
(4) The checks and preparation are identical to those described in para. C (2) for conventional stores.
AA
06-81 Restricted 6-233R
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Position verrouillée Position déverrouillée
Locked position Unlocked position
\ /
Su &&S
Repère de couleur. Repère de couleur

Vert Rouge
Green index Red index
MISE EN PLACE DES ANNEAUX

DE SECURITE LARGABLE
INSTALLA TION OF JETTISONABLE
SAFETY WIRE RINGS
AFFICHAGE SUR
COMMUTATEUR ROTATIF
DISPLA Y ON ROTARY SWI TCH
FIGURE 23F - POSE ET DEPOSE SOUS PYLONES EXTERNES DE VOILURE

INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL ON/FROM WING OUTBOARD PYLONS
AA
06-81 Restricted 6-233T FIGURE 23F 6-233'
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
PLAGE (T) ^-~"

RANGE
^*i r-
0. B0N
CORRECT
FIGURE 23M - PREPARATION DE LA BOMBE DURANDAL

PREPARATION OF DURANDAL BOMB
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
FIGURE 23N - PREPARATION DE LA BOMBE BELUGA BLG TYPE 66

PREPARATION OF BELUGA TYPE 66 BOMB
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-234 F
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 23Q - PREPA RA TION OF SPECIAL TANK N300

AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/.
BREGUET AVIATION^S^^^^Cs
-^t^V. MIRAGE F
^ZZ^^^^, Restricted MANUAL 02
8- CONDITIONING AFTER LOADING UNDER AIRCRAFT
Conventional stores (figure 23A)
(1 ) Case of 250 kg and 400 kg retarded bombs
Operations after hooking of the bomb

Using measuring rod 18 fitted to winder 19 streamer, check that the distance between the upper
-
face of the winder and the lower face of the pylon is at least 5 mm (0.20 in) and at most 18 mm
(0.71 in); Should this distance be more than 18 mm, remove the safety pin, release the mechanism by
actuating «DECLENCHEMENT-RELEASE» hex head control 2 in the direction of the arrow, then
remove the bomb.
- Loosen the front ring by no more than the amount strictly required (1 turn = 2 mm (0.078 in))
for raising the tail of the bomb to the level of the winder. Do not exceed two turns.
- Reinstall the bomb. Should the winder be fitted with its wedge (when using a combined rack
for a 400 kg bomb), actuate the winder head to bring it to bear on the lower flange of the pylon.
Should the winder not be fitted with wedge 20 (when using a combined rack for a 250 kg bomb),
loosen hex head screw 21 located on the upper part of the winder (16 mm A/F wrench) so that this
screw may come to bear on the pylon. Hold the winder body during this operation, then release it
slowly once the screw head bears on the lower flange of the pylon.
Special stores
(2) DURANDAL BOMB (figure 23M)

r
- Remove ground safety pin 13 etaining fuzing unit ring 12.
- Engage ring 1 2 of fuzing unit wire 4 in the tripping device of the ejector tail fuzing unit.
(3) BELUGA (figure )

- Remove safety pin 4 from the presence indicator.
- Remove safety pin 5 from the short carpet/long carpet selector.
NOTE : Protective cover 3 shall be removed only when leaving the parking area.
(4) SPECIAL TANK N300 (figure 23Q)

- Remove both storage pins 4 from airscrews 5.
9- PREPARATION OF SYSTEM
A Setting of loading code
(1)Set, on the intervallometer, the loading code corresponding to stores carried (see «SETTING OF
LOADING CODE»).
B Setting of ballistics factor
(1) Set, on the bombing computer, the factor for the type of bombs carried, taking into account the
following data :
- «1 » = 400 kg/250 kg clean bomb
- «2» = 125 kg FRAG clean bomb
- «3» = LHA7 clean bomb
- «4» = UBB73 practice bomb
- special tank N300*.
*NOTE : No «particular setting» is displayed for this store.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION ^<3>- _-^ ., A mi i a i no
PREPARATION FOR TRAINING MISSION WITH

BOMB RACK ADAPTER TYPE 65A
(figure 23 R)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed when installing, loading and preparing the
adapter.
A Special tools

- Alkan handling wires 79400-02 (qty : 2)
- Alkan handling wire 79400-01
- Alkan special wrench 80900-620
- Alkan multiple wrench 80900-180

- Fusing unit rings (qty : 3)
C Accessories
- Alkan safety stops 79751-1 (qty : 3)

- Ejector P65 (qty : 3)
- Ejector T65 (qty : 3)
- Accessories depending on the stores carried :
- mounting pads 79265-607A (qty : 3 or 6)
or
-rear pads 79413 (qty : 3)
3- SAFETY MEASURES
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO LOADED OR ARMED AIRCRAFT

(see 02-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^*~rÇL.
BREGUET AVIATION^5iF:3_ê^>
MIRAGE
. .... , A ,
F
__
4- HOOKING OF ADAPTER UNDER PYLON
-Remove safety pin (1) from the bore marked «SECURITE-SAFETY».

- Releasethe mechanism by actuating «DECLENCHEMENT-RELEASE» hex head control (2)
in direction of the arrow to open the hooks.
- Bring mounting lugs (3) to upper abutment after loosening jam nuts (4).
B Preparation of adapter
Check that the hooking rings are properly oriented.

-
Ensure that the adapter is fitted with the small front stem and the rear stem assembly.
-
- Check that safety flap (5) is opened and secured by handling wire (6) ; if it is not, open it and fit
the handling wire.
- Make sure it is fitted with its three ejectors and with the accessories required for the mission.
Equipment required on each carrying station
EJECTOR P65
- Front and rear mounting pads (7) installed.
- Fin pad (8) installed (when not in use, this pad should be raised).
EJECTOR T65
Front and/or rear mounting pad(s) installed.
-
Safety stop (9) installed.
-
Rear pad (10) installed (pad modified or not).
- Check that the three initiators are not installed.
C Hooking
It is a manual operation performed by two operators while a third one performs the various
maneuvers.
Suitably position the adapter with hooking rings in front of ejector hooks, then lift it.
-
Stop lifting the adapter when it is quite close to the pylon, then perform the electrical
-
connection :
- open the door giving access to the adapter plug (rear door on LH side),
- disconnect adapter plug (S5) from its operating receptacle (P5),
- connect adapter plug (S5) to the adapter receptacle,
- close the door.
- Continue lifting until the rings touch the hooks.
Locking may be made easier by actuating hex head control (11) marked «ENCLENCHEMENT-
COCKING».
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^û^3
MIRAGE F
VERSION LISSE
CLEAN VERSION
FIGURE 23R - PREPARATION A LA MISSION D'ENTRAINEMENT BOMBES (type 65A)

PREPARA TION FOR 65A TYPE BOMB TRAINING MISSION
AB 6-238L FIGURE 23R 6-238L
06-81 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^T^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF0^-^"^ ..,,,., no
D Check and preparation of pylon
- Through opening (12) marked with an arrow, check that cocking is correct.
- The locking parts should be in contact over 3 mm (0.12 in) approx.
- Install safety pin (1) in «SECURITE-SAFETY» bore.
- Bring inner mounting lugs (3) of the ejector against the adapter, then complete lug tightening,
strictly observing the following order : RH front lug, LH rear lug, RH rear lug, LH front lug ; tighten
the lugs by quarter turns alternately, up to a maximum of 3/4 turn.
CAUTION :
THE UNUSED MOUNTING LUG SCREWS SHOULD BE RETURNED TO UP POSITION. DO
NOT BRING THEM TO ABUTMENT OR LOCK THEM IN THAT POSITION.
- Lock jam nuts (4) of mounting screws.

- Set rotary switch (25) of the pylon to «BOMB».
CAUTION :
DO NOT INSTALL INITIATORS ON THE PYLON EJECTOR.
Refer to the operations described in «CHECK OF BOMB RELEASE CIRCUITS (WITH BOMB
RACK 65A INSTALLED)», manual 15-3.
6- HOOKING OF STORES
A- Under ejector P65
- Remove the door giving access to the center ejector controls.

- Make sure that the hooks of each ejector are open or ensure their opening by actuating hex
head controls (13) marked «DECLEN» (release).
- Check that front and rear pads (7) are in up position ; if they are not, bring them to this position
by actuating hex head controls (14) and (15) for the front pads and the rear pads respectively.
- Raise fin pads (8).
- Installation of initiator in each ejector
- Make sure that safety contact (16) is in «disengage» position, with handling wire (17) in
place.
- Loosen and remove lead-in plug (18).
- Engage and screw the initiator in its housing.
- Engage and screw lead-in plug (18) in its support.
- Installation of stores
- Bring the practice bomb level with the underside of the center ejector, with the rings oppo¬
site the hooks.
- Simultaneously engage the rings in the hooks.
-Snapping-in is automatic. It may however be assisted by actuating hex head controls (19)
marked «ENCLEN» (cocking).
- Ensure the correct snapping-in by pressing manual test button (20) (stud test device).
- Bring front and rear pads (7) into contact with the bomb and, using the special wrench,
tighten each hex head control (14) and (15) by half a turn.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^^TU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^jZT
MIRAGE F
NOTE : For the 50 kg type F1 bomb, bring fin pads (8) into contact, then lock the jam nuts in
this position.
- Reinstall the center access door.

- Repeat the previous operations for the RH and LH ejectors.
- If required, hook the store fusing unit ring onto fusing unit tripping device (21) of each ejector.
- Disengage handling wire (17) from each ejector.
CAUTION :
WHEN HOOKING THE STORES, MAKE SURE THAT THE STREAMERS ARE VISIBLE.
B Under ejector T65
- Depending on the type of bomb to be loaded, make sure that front and/or rear pad(s) (7) are in
up position ; if they are not, bring them to this position by actuating the appropriate hex head controls.
CAUTION :
WHEN HOOKING ON «VARIABLE BALLISTICS» BOMBS WITH RINGS (23) RETRACTED

AFTER REMOVAL OF RETAINING PINS (24), STOPS (9) AND REAR PADS (10) MUST BE
REMOVED AND REAR PADS (7) INSTALLED.
- Installation of initiator in each ejector

Operations similar to those described previously for ejector P65.
- Installation of stores
- Offer up the practice bomb (clamps open) under the ejector.
- Check that the longitudinal axis of the thrust flange lies parallel to the ejector axis.
- Engage the thrust flange centering stud in the positioning hole of the store.
- Raise the thrust flange horizontally until it snaps into place.
- Check its correct locking (manual stud test device (20)).
NOTE : When «variable ballistics» bombs are involved, bring front and rear pads (7) into contact
with the practice bomb, then tighten by 1/4 to 3/4 turn. In all other cases, bring front
pad (7) into contact with the practice bomb and tighten by 1/4 to 3/4 turn.
CAUTION :
WHEN HOOKING THE STORES, MAKE SURE THAT THE STREAMERS ARE VISIBLE.
- Repeat the above operations for the other initiators.

- Disengage the handling wire from each ejector.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^Âl
BREGUET AVIATION,
MIRAGE F
PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH 550 MISSILES

(figure 25)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed when hooking missiles and preparing missiles
and missile launchers.
A Standard tools
- Armament standard tool kit
B Special tools
- Aircraft squadron tool kit Matra 055L00.544802T (Matra standard tool kit + Omnibus wrench
Matra 050 A57. 520985 F)
C Ground support equipment
- Ammunition transport and distribution trailer with accessories

- Hoisting device Matra 055W025371 27W
- Connector protective plug (missile-missile launcher cord) Souriau 8522-37
- Protective plug Souriau 8522.28 for missile launcher receptacle
- Infrared generator type 810, Matra 055U95-534355Y
- Protective cover MS 1430 for armament master switch
- 1 15-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply
- Ground crew headset
D Safety accessories
- Irdome covers Matra 055V02.542049W (qty : 2)

- PF window protectors Matra 055B00.519682R (qty : 2)
- Lock safety pins Matra 050A57.520752A (qty : 2)
- Flap safety pins Matra 1337.25D (qty : 2)
3- SAFETY MEASURES
CAUTION :
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO LOADED OR ARMED AIRCRAFT (see 02-0).
Before the first firing mission, perform the following checks :

-«CHECK OF SIDEWINDER MISSILE NORMAL FIRING AND JETTISONING CIRCUITS
WITH MISSILE LAUNCHERS INSTALLED» (see 15-5), then «STATIC CHECK OF DOGFIGHT
AIR-TO-AIR MISSILE FUEL DIPPER CONTROL CIRCUITS» (see 06-5).
On completion of the checks, install the protective cover on the armament master switch.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Y O
ï
PHASE 1 -PREPARATION DU LANCE-MISSILES PHASE 2 - HISSAGE DU MISSILE PHASE 3 - ACCROCHAGE DU MISSI LE

PREPARING THE MISSILE-LAUNCHER HO/STING THE MISSILE LOCKING THE MISSILE
PRESENTATION ACCROCHAGE
POSITIONING LOCKING
FIGURE 25 - MISE EN PLACE DU MISSILE 550

INSTALLA TION OF 550 MISSILE
DETAIL A DETAIL B
AB
06-81 Restricted 6-252 FIGURE 25 FIGURE 25 5-252
6-252
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
5- INSTALLATION OF MISSILES
A Preliminary steps (phase 1 )
(1) On missile launcher, check that :

- front fairing (1 ) of the missile launcher is open ; if required open it,
- safeties (2) and (3) are installed..
Ground safety pin (3) should not be removable.
Otherwise, perform the following operation :

-lift
snubbers (6) by actuating their control (7) in «DEBLOCAGE APPUIS LATERAUX -
UNLOCK SNUBBERS». direction ; the firing pins of the missile launcher should retract ; ground safety
pin (3) should be no longer removable.
(2) Fit the elevator trolley with hoist arm and straps.
- Prepare the elevator trolley and the hoisting device (phase 2).
- Disengage the missile from the transportation trailer ; begin hoisting.
(3) On missile
- Release missile/missile launcher junction cable (8).
- Make sure that the guard of the proximity fuse doesnot impede hooking (the thinner section of
the rubber strap should be passed behind the front fitting).
- Check that the safety pins are present on the screws of the missile junction belt.
- Remove the shunt from rocket motor firing pins.
- Check for presence of the irdome cover.
B Operation (phase 3)
- Keep on hoisting missile until it comes in line with missile launcher.

- If required, improve missile position so as to install hooking fittings level with missile launcher
rails.
Two operators are required to hook the missile ;a third one operates the elevator trolley.
- Install the missile so that front hooking fitting is located behind the missile launcher retention
mechanism, opposite the black marks made on missile launcher body.
- Engage the missile hooking fittings fully home in the missile launcher rail and push the missile
fully forward against stop.
- After this operation, an operator should install and lock extracting lever (9) of the breakaway
connector on base ( 1 0) of the missile.
- Using special wrench, actuate «APPUIS LATERAUX - SNUBBERS» control as follows :
-insert the wrench into control (7) while aligning its lever arm with the «DEBLOCAGE
APPUIS LATERAUX - UNLOCK SNUBBERS» reference mark,
- turn the wrench in the «BLOCAGE-LOCK» direction until its lever arm is aligned with the
«BLOCAGE-LOCK» reference mark, then remove the wrench.
- Check for missile locking by verifying the position of the rear edge of the retention mechanism.
CAUTION :
DO NOT REMOVE THE SPECIAL WRENCH FROM «APPUIS LATERAUX - SNUBBERS»
CONTROL BEFORE ITS LEVER ARM IS PERFECTLY ALIGNED WITH THE «BLOCAGE-
LOCK» REFERENCE MARK.
THE FACT THAT THE SAFETY PIN CAN BE WITHDRAWN IS NO GUARANTEE THAT THE
SNUBBERS ARE IN THE «BLOCAGE-LOCK» POSITION.
- Move away the elevator trolley.
Repeat the same operations to hook the missile at the other wing tip.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^J>A^'\l
BREGUET AVIATION ôF0^-^5^
MIRAGE F
6- PREPARATION AND CHECK OF MISSILE
- Remove protective plugs from connector (11) of missile/missile-launcher cord and from missile-
launcher receptacle (12), then couple the connector to this receptacle.
- Close front fairing (1).
- Apply electrical power to A/C.
- Prepare the operational A/C intercom system with the radio selector unit channel selector set
to «1» (see 11-3).
- On armament panel :
- set «550» switch to «ON»
- depress «550» button.
- check the position of «.550 - NORMAL EMG» switch which should stand at «NORMAL».
- Remove irdome cover from homing head of each missile.
- Remove the cover from infrared generating unit projector.
The operator with infrared generating unit stands about ten meters in front of missile being
checked, and on its centerline, then :
- actuates the automatic return operating switch of the generating unit (on generating unit)
- keeps operating the switch
- checks that the luminescent diode comes on
-directs the light beam toward missile and asks the operator in cockpit to make sure that the
audio signal can be heard in the headset
- from the missile centerline, moves the infrared generating unit in bearing (LH, then RH) then in
elevation (up and down) until the homing head is unlocked and asks the operator in cockpit to make
sure that the audio signal cannot be heard any more.
NOTE : Another ground operator, near homing head, can perform a visual check by checking the
bearing and elevation deviations of mirror.
- Repeat these operations with the second missile, without modifying selection.
- Release the switch of the infrared generating unit and fit the cover on the generating unit
projector.
If no audio signal can be heard, perform trouble shooting (see 15-5).
- On the armament panel :

- cancel the current selection by actuating «550» button
- switch OFF «550» switch again.
- Deenergize A/C.
- Install irdome cover on the homing head of each missile.
AG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=i>îrvL.
BREGUET AVIATION ôP3^^^
MIRAGE
.. ...a
F
«n . a .
PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH PRACTICE TARGET
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed for preparing the towing stub and installing
the air-to-air gun firing practice targets.
A Special tools
- Alkan multiple wrench 80900-180

3- SAFETY MEASURES

(see 02-0).
4- CHECK OF AIRCRAFT AND HOOKING STUB ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Before the first practice target towing mission, carry out the electrical tests described in sheet
«GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT MISSION CHANGES».
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=^^r\L
BREGUET AVIATIONôP3^0^
MIRAGE
........«
F
^<^5^<^ Restricted MANUAL 02
5- LOADING
A Preparation of hooking stub (figure 29)
With front and rear ejectors fitted under the hooking stub :
- open initiator access door (3) ;
-if needed, release the mechanism by operating «DECLENCHEMENT» (release) hex head
control (1 ) in the direction of the arrow, so as to open the hooks ;
- unlock the jam nuts and bring mounting lugs (2) to up position ;
- install the initiators (see sheet «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS») ;
- F R ONT ejector : two .50 initiators with adapters,
1
- REAR ejector : one 1. 50 initiator with adapter at the front of the ejector,
one F71 A initiator with adapter at the rear of the ejector ;
- position front and rear gate valves (4) and (5) of the ejectors as follows :
- front ejector : front gate valve «F», rear gate valve «GO»,
- rear ejector : front gate valve «0», rear gate valve «GO».
B Installation of ground support equipment
Preparation of elevator trolley

-Prepare the elevator trolley by fitting it with the platform and adapters required for the handling.
C - Installation of pay-out container VRAC 500 (figure 29)

(1 ) Lifting of pay-out container V RAC 500
This operation is performed with the elevator trolley

- Position pay-out container VRAC 500 under the hooking stub rear station.
- Start lifting ; interrupt lifting to perform the electrical connection, proceeding as follows :
- bring the protective guide to down position (inner face of hooking stub),
- engage the connector into the protective guide,
- connect the connector to the electrical receptacle on hooking stub.
- Fit the rings into the rear ejector hooks.
-Continue the lifting operation until cocking takes place. If needed, operate «ENCLENCHE¬
MENT» (cocking) hex head control (6) for easier cocking.
-Through opening (7) marked «VERIFICATION DE L'ENCLIQUETAGE» (cocking check),

check that cocking is correct. The locking parts should be in contact over 3 mm (0.12 in) approx.
- Put a finger on «TEST PICOT» (stud type test) button (8) to confirm correct cocking.
- Bring mounting lugs (2) against the container ; then complete lug tightening, observing the
following order : RH front lug, LH rear lug, RH rear lug and LH front lug ; proceed by quarter turns
until reaching 3/4 to 1 turn.
- Lock mounting lug jam nuts.
- Insert towing cable loader (9) fully home, then turn it to the right so as to engage pin (10) of
the loader behind retaining fitting (1 1 ) of the container.
- Secure the loader by installing locking pin (12).
- Engage towing cable loop (13) in the hook of release unit (14), then lock by means of hex head
control (15).
- Check the loader for correct locking.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
BLOC PYROTECHNIQUE
PYROTECHNICAL UNIT
FIGURE 29 - PREPARATION A LA MISSION CIBLE D'ENTRAINEMENT

AVEC CIBLE S90B ET CONTENEUR VRAC 500
PREPARATION FOR PRACTICE TARGET TOWING MISSION
WITH TARGET S9Q3 AND CONTAINER "VRAC 500"
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^^ÏrÇL
BREGUET AVIATION ^P^ ^^^>
MIRAGE
,,..,,..,
F
no
D - Installation of target S90B (figure 29)

(1 ) Preparation of target
Make sure that the following components are installed :

-
- safety pin (16) of mechanical lock (pressed position),
- safety pin (1 7) of towing yoke,
- retaining pin (18) of parachute door and first TETRAPLAN safety device,
- metal loop (19) of second TETRAPLAN safety device, held in safety lock (20) ; this safety
lock is secured by rigid control (21 ) which is mechanically connected to the yoke,
- microphone plug fitted with its retaining cable.
- Check hooking rings for alignment and correct positioning in both front wells. The rear well
should be blanked off by a plug.
(2) Lifting of target S90B
This operation is performed with an elevator trolley 1 .

- Position target S90B under the towing stub front station.
- Fit the rings into the front ejector hooks.
-Continue the lifting operation until cocking takes place. If needed, operate «ENCLENCHE¬
MENT» (cocking) hex head control (6) for easier cocking.
-Through opening (7) marked «VERIFICATION DE L'ENCLIQUETAGE» (cocking check),

check that cocking is correct. The locking parts should be in contact over 3 mm (0.12 in) approx.
- Put a finger on «TEST PICOT» (stud type test) button (8) to confirm correct cocking.
- Lower front fork (22) until contact is obtained.
- Bring LH and RH lateral lugs (23) into contact .
- At the end of the operation, check that the safety pin is released and not pressed.
- Continue mounting lug tightening until reaching 3/4 to 1 turn.
- Make sure that the target remains in alignment with the fuselage centerline throughout the above
operation.
- Lock mounting lug jam nuts.
- Adjust the height of the pin of control lock (24) until contact is obtained with hooking stub
lower part.
- Fit parachute door safety pin (18) to the hooking stub clevis by means of pin (25).
- Connect VRAC container cable (26) to towing yoke (27).
- Secure the cable in the container trough by means of rubber bands.
- Screw the antenna whip into its base plate.
- Secure the microphone plug cable to the hooking stub angle.
Refer to «CHECK OF AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS (WITH PRACTICE TARGET

INSTALLED)» (see manual 15-9).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED UPON DEPARTURE OF AIRCRAFT
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed before the aircraft takes off for an
operational mission.
2 - SAFETY MEASURES
COMPLY WITH ARMAMENT SAFETY MEASURES AS STATED IN 02-0.
FOR ALL OPERATIONS CARRIED OUT WITH ENGINE STILL RUNNING, STRICTLY
OBSERVE INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO DANGER AREAS DURING ENGINE OPERATION.
3 - PROCEDURE
ON PARKING AREA
AT THE END OF RUNWAY
TYPE OF AFTER ENGINE STARTING REMARKS
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
MISSION WITH AGREEMENT OF GROUND MECHANIC AND PILOT
PYLON On pylon(s), check that selector switch On pylon(s)

TANKS is set to «TANK- ROCK ET». - close initiator connecting door
- remove safety pins.
- Check that gun connectors are - Ask the pilot to put hands on his helmet. WARNING :
disconnected. - Open doors giving access to guns (wrench
GUNS
- Check for display on control boxes. M31025). BEWARE OF HAVING AIRBRAKES
AIRFRAME
Close doors giving access to guns with - Connect gun connectors to control boxes. INADVERTENTLY EXTENDED.
wrench M31025. - Close doors giving access to guns with
wrench M31025, then replace the wrench in
door 17.04. Close this door and check that
each latch is effectively engaged.
-INSTRUCT THE PILOT.
- On F1D type rocket-launcher, display - On multi-purpose pylons, close initiator - Close the safety levers of rocket-launchers REMINDER :
the type of salvo on the black range connecting door. type 155ND by hand.
(selector switch to 6, 12 or 18). - On wing outboard pylons, connect initiator THE OPENING AND CLOSING OF DOORS
ROCKETS connecting plugs ; the green mark must be GIVING ACCESS TO THE GUNS MUST BE
- On pylon(s), check that selector visible if locking is correct ; close access IMPERATIVELY PERFORMED WITH
switch is set to «TANK-ROCKET». doors. WRENCH M 31025 LOCATED ON
- Remove pins from safety levers of rocket- DOOR 17.04.
launcher.
- Remove safety pins from pylons.
- On pylons, check that selector - On multi-purpose pylons, close initiator 0

switches are set to «BOMB» connecting door. - Check that :
CONVEN¬
- On four-bomb pylon, check that - On wing outboard pylons and four-bomb -the selection made on the intervalometer
TIONAL
selector switch is set to 2 or 4 pylon, connect initiator connecting plugs ; corresponds to the stores actually carried
BOMBS
- Check that rings of jettisonable the green mark must be visible if locking is by the A/C ;
safety wires are correctly hooked. correct ; close access doors. - the initialization has been performed (see
- Remove fuse ground safeties «SELECTION OF LOADING CODE») ;
© - Close the LH door on the tail of each bomb - the ballistics coefficient (case of clean bomb
(applicable to retarded bombs). has been selected on the bombing computer.
- Remove safety pins from pylons or four-
bomb pylon.
AG
04-87 Restricted 6-301 6-3
BREGUET AVIATION. ^-S&=
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE OF AFTER ENGINE STARTING
PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION REMARKS
MISSION
WITH AGREEMENT OF GROUND MECHANIC AND PILOT
TRAINING On multi-purpose pylon On adaptor

with bomb - Remove the handling wire from the safety
beam WARNING flap.
adaptor CHECK THAT NO INITIATOR IS The flap should be closed automatically.
65A FITTED TO THE EJECTOR.
- On multi-purpose pylon
- Check for closing of initiator - Remove the safety pin.
connecting door.
WARN THE PILOT
On adaptor
- Ensure that the scheduled dropping
models displayed :
- selector switch to «SHUNT».
On the intervalometer, check that :
- the loading code is selected,

- the initialization is performed.
AE
07-79 Restricted 6-301 M 6-301
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
AFTER ENGINE STARTING
TYPE OF PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION REMARKS
MISSION
BELUGA - On pylons, check that the switches are On multipurpose pylons, close the initial or
TYPE 66 set to «BOMB». connection doors.
BOMBS - On four-bomb pylon, check that the On four-bomb pylon, connect the initiator
switch ison «2». connecting plugs and check for correct
- Check that the fuzing unit wire rings locking (green mark appears) ; close the
are attached to the tripping devices of access doors.
the NOSE-TAIL fuzing units. On bombs, remove the protective cover yvith
streamer of the airscrew.
On pylons and four-bomb pylon, remove the
safety pins from the ejectors.
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-301 R 6-3011
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
AFTER ENGINE STARTING AT THE END OF RUNWAY
TYPE OF
MISSION
DURANDAL - On pylons, check that the switches are On multipurpose pylons, close the initiator
BOMBS set to «BOMB». connection doors. j
- On four-bomb pylon, check that the On outboard wing pylons and four-bomb j
switch ison «4». pylon, connect the initiator connecting

- Check that the fuzing unit wire rings plugs and check for correct locking (green
are attached to the tripping devices of mark appears) ; close the access doors.
the TAI L fuzing units. On bombs, remove the three safety pins : i
- first chute, j
- second chute, !
- striker. j
On pylons and four-bomb pylon remove the

safety pins from the ejectors.
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-30 1T 6-3011
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE OF AFTER ENGINE STARTING
MISSION
MISSILES - Open the rear fairing of missile- - On each missile, remove : - Ask the pilot to put his hands on his helmet. Once pilot is installed, remove the
R550 launcher. protective cover of armament
- irdome cover - On each missile-launcher, disengage : master switch.
- Check pressure in nitrogen cylinder - proximity fuse cover.
(read on pressure gage) -safety pin from flap «SECURITE M.A.F.-
- green range = correct pressure - On each missile-launcher, disengage SAFETY LEVER».
- yellow range (tangent to green range)
= available pressure. - the ground safety pin of retention
- red range = incorrect pressure mechanism. WARN THE PILOT
NOTE : As this is a post-flight WARN THE PILOT

check, incorrect pressure
means that a leak has
occured in cooling system.
- Close the rear fairing.
- Repeat the same operations on the

other side.
AB
06-78 Restricted 6-303 6-3
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE OF
MISSION
AIR-TO-AIR - On towing stub :
GUN FIRING - connect front and rear initiator electrical

PRACTICE connectors
TARGETS - close and lock access doors.
- On container VRAC 500 :

-connect rear release unit electrical connec¬
tor.
- close and lock access door.
- On target S90-B :
- connect explosive bolt to its connector box

and close protective cover.
- install safety pins fitted with streamers on :
- yoke
- control lock.
AB
09-78 Restricted 6-304 6-304
BREGUET AVIATION
lLJ>-±r^
_
MIRAGE F
INITIAL SETTING OF NAVIGATION HEADING
1 - PURPOSE
To perform the heading initial setting of navigation computer. This operation is performed during
pre-flight inspection, with engine running before starting.
Ground handling equipment
- Miniaturized transfer gyroscope SFIM - P/N 427-00137-002.
3- PREPARATION OF TRANSFER GYROSCOPE
CAUTION :
THE GYRO UNIT MUST BE CARRIED- BY THE HANDLE SO AS TO MAINTAIN THE GYRO
AZIMUTH AXIS VERTICAL (PERMISSIBLE DEFLECTION IS ±15°).
A pedestal is used to correct for the transfer gyro drift and to reset the heading synchro-detector
-
of the transfer gyro unit for the true heading.
- After these operations, take the gyro unit next to the A/C, behind LH main U/C (with the
receptacle connected to the stowage connector on the support plate).
4 - A/C PREPARATION
- Remove the plug from A/C heading transfer connector 127F.
The pilot :
- starts up the gyro unit,
- starts up the navigation computer,
- selects «HDG1 » on the heading control unit.
5 - HEADING TRANSFER PROCEDURE
- Position the transfer gyro unit on panel 29.09.2.

- Set it horizontal with a level.
- Connect the transfer cord to A/C heading transfer connector.
- In flight compartment, the light of heading transfer unit comes on.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- The pilot maintains the transfer control pushbutton depressed on heading transfer unit :
- the heading transfer unit light goes out,
- the gyro unit transfer light comes on.
- the card of polar indicator rotates.
- On completion of initial setting :
- the heading transfer unit light comes on
- the polar indicator card stabilizes on the heading supplied by the transfer gyro.
- The pilot releases the heading transfer unit pushbutton :
- the heading transfer unit light remains illuminated
- the gyro unit transfer light goes out.
- Disconnect the transfer unit cord from A/C connector.
- the heading transfer unit light goes out.
- Remove the gyro unit.
- Reinstall plug on connector, taking care to fit it well in line to prevent short-circuits
- The pilot makes sure that transfer took place by :
- noting the indication displayed on heading card of polar indicator.
- setting the heading switch of heading control unit to «NAV 1 ». The difference of the two
indications is the local magnetic deviation.
FIGURE 31 - HEADING TRANSFER

AA
| 07-77 Restricted 6-312
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT] MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<TfSP
OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED WHEN AIRCRAFT RETURNS FROM MISSION
1 - SCOPE
This sheet mentions the operations to be performed on ground maneuver area when the
aircraft returns from operational mission or when returning to parking area.
2 - SAFETY MEASURES
FOR ALL OPERATIONS CARRIED OUT WITH ENGINE STILL RUNNING, STRICTLY .
COMPLY WITH PRECAUTIONS RELATIVE TO DANGER AREAS DURING ENGINE OPERA¬

TION.
3 - PROCEDURE
TYPE AT THE END OF RUNWAY ON PARKING AREA

WITH AGREEMENTOF SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS REMARKS
OF MISSION WITH AGREEMENTOF PILOT GROUND MECHANIC
Prepare the aircraft for flight as per

- Install safety pin on each pylon instructions of sheet «OPERATIONS
PYLON TANKS AFTER MISSION WITH PYLON
- Open initiator connecting door TANKS».
- ASK THE PILOT TO «PUT HANDS WARNING In case of firing incident, refer to
ON HIS HELMET» sheet «OPERATIONS AFTER MIS¬
- Take wrench M31025 from door 17.04. BEWARE OF AIRBRAKE UNWANTED SION WITH GUNS».
- Open doors giving access to guns (wrench EXTENSION. REMINDER
M31025). THE OPENING AND CLOSING OF DOORS
- Disconnect gun connectors from control - Install armament master switch protective GIVING ACCESS TO THE GUNS MUST BE
GUNS
AIRFRAME boxes. cover. IMPERATIVELY PERFORMED WITH
- Close access doors (wrench M31025). WRENCH M 31025 LOCATED ON DOOR
- Replace wrench in door 17.04, then close 17.04.
the door and check that each latch is
effectively engaged.
WARN THE PILOT
- Open safety lever of rocket launcher (s) - Install safety pin WARNING In case of firing incident, refer to
- Install safety pin on each pylon sheet «OPERATIONS AFTER MIS¬
- Open initiator connecting door (on inboprd NEVER STAND DIRECTLY IN FRONT SION WITH ROCKETS».
ROCKETS
pylons), or open initiator access door anjd OF OR BEHIND A LOADED ROCKET
remove connecting plugs, (on outboard LAUNCHER.
pylons). -Install armament master switch protective
cover.
WARN THE PILOT
If bomb launching did not occur (mission - Install armament master switch protective Prepare the aircraft for flight as per
interrupted or jettison circuit failure) : cover instructions of sheet «OPERATIONS
NOTE : In the case where retarded bombs are AFTER MISSION WITH BOMBS».
CONVEN¬ - install ground safeties on bomb fuses carried :
TIONAL - install safety pin on each pylon - remove LH door on each bomb
BOMBS - open initiator connecting door (on inboard tail,
pylons) or open initiator access door and - install ground safeties on com¬
remove connecting plugs (on outboard bined bomb beam.
pylons). - leave door hanging and secure it
with one screw.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE AT THE END OF RUNWAY
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS REMARKS
OF MISSION WITH PILOT'S AGREEMENT UPON GROUND
MECHANIC'S APPROVAL
TRAINING In case of jettison failure (defective On A/C return without bombs,

WITH jettisoning circuits or interrupted mission recondition the A/C as per
BOMB BEAM - Install the safety pin on pylon(s) «OPERATIONS TO BE
ADAPTOR - Open the safety flap on adaptor and keea PERFORMED AFTER BOMB
type 65 A it open through a handling wire. MISSION».
In case of defective jettisoning,
refer to «OPERATIONS
AFTER BOMB MISSION».
AA
02-76 Restricted 6- 401 M 6-40'
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
AFTER ENGINE STARTING
TYPEOF PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION
MISSION
REMARKS
WITH AGREEMENT OF 0 ROUND MECHANIC AND PILOT
BELUGA If bombs have not been released (mission Fit the protective cover on the armament Restore the aircraft to initial configu¬
BOMBS interrupted or release circuit failure) : master switch. ration as per recommendations in
- on bombs, install the protective cover wit > «OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED
streamer on airscrew ; j AFTER MISSION WITH BOMBS».
- fit ground safety pins in pylons ejectors ; !
- on wing multipurpose pylons ; open connec¬

tion doors ;
- on outboard wing pylons and four-bomb
pylon, open access doors to initiators and
disconnect the connecting plugs.
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-401 R 6-40
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE OF PRE-FLIGHT INSPECTION REMARKS
» MISSION
DURANDAL If bombs have not been released (mission Fit the protective cover on the armament Restore the aircraft to initial configura¬
BOMBS interrupted or release circuit failure) : master switch. tion as per recommendations in
- on bombs, fit the following safeties : «OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED
- first chute safety pin, AFTER MISSION WITH BOMBS».
- second chute safety pin,
- striker safety pin ;
- fit ground safety pins in the pylons ejectoijs
- on wing multipurpose pylons, open conneu
tion doors ;
- on outboard wing pylons or four-bomb pylon
open access doors to initiators and disconrect
the connecting plugs.
»
AA
04-82 Restricted 6-401 T 6-401 T
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE OF AT THE END OF RUNWAY
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS REMARKS
MISSION WITH AGREEMENT OF PILOT WITH AGREEMENTOF
GROUND MECHANIC
MISSILES NORMAL FIRING Perform the operations after mission with Once the pilot has left the aircraft, install the
R550 Signal the pilot to bring A/C to the missile R550. cover on the armament master switch.
parking area.
INTENTIONALLY NON
LAUNCHED MISS! LE(S)
ASK THE PILOT TO PUT HANDS Install the safety pin on each missile- WARNING-DANGER
ON HIS HEADSET. launcher. NEVER STAND BEFORE OR BEHIND
- Lift the safety flap. Install irdome cover on each missile homirjg A MISSILE.
- Install the safety pin with streamer.. head.
- WARN THE PILOT FOR COMPLE¬ Install the proximity fuse cover. Once the pilot has left the aircraft, install the
TION OF OPERATION. cover on the armament master switch.
- Signal the pilot to bring A/C to the Perform the operations after mission with
parking area. missile R550.
MISSILES(S) NOT LAUNCHED

SUBSEQUENT TO FAULTY
FIRING
ASK THE PI LOT TO PUT HANDS ON Install the safety pin on the missile- WARNING-DANGER
HIS HEADSET. rauncher. NEVER STAND BEFORE OR BEHIND
- The exhaust pipe sealing ring is in Install irdome cover on missile homing A MISSILE
place. head.
- Install the safety flap. Install proximity fuse cover. Once the pilot has left the aircraft, install the
- Install safety pin with streamer Perform the operations after mission with cover on the armament master switch.
missile R550.
-WARN THE PILOT FOR COMPLE¬
TION OF OPERATION.
- Signal the pilot to bring A/C to the
parking area.
- The exhaust pipe sealing ring is

missing
- Have the engine stopped.
- Ask the pilot to leave the A/C.
- Wait for 30 minutes in a safe area.
- Perform the operations after mission
with?rriissile R550.
AB
10-77 Restricted 6-403 6-41
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ON PARKING AREA
TYPE OF
AT THE END OF RUNWAY SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS REMARKS
MISSION WITH AGREEMENT OF PILOT WITH AGREEMENTOF
GROUND MECHANIC
AIR-TO-AIR In the case where target hanging and jet¬ Prepare the aircraft for flight as per instructions
GUN FIRING tisoning did not occur (mission interrupted of sheet «OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION
PRACTICE or jettison circuit failure) : WITH PRACTICE TARGET».
TARGET
OPERATIONS APPLICABLE TO CONTAI¬
NER «VRAC 500» AND TARGET S90- B :
On towing stub :
- disconnect front and rear initiators.
On container VRAC 500 :

-disconnect rear release unit pyrotechnical
unit.
On target S90-B :
- install safety pins in yoke and timer control

lock.
- disconnect explosive bolt from its connector
box.
AB
09-78 Restricted 6-405 6-405
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION.
POST-FLIGHT INSPECTION OF SIGHT CAMERA
1 - PURPOSE
Checking the usable film length remaining in the camera.
2- OPERATION
Through the check sight (lower section of the camera), check camera loading. When a 22,5 m
(73.8 ft) magazine is installed on unwinding shaft, a white index appears in the sight. This index moves
gradually to the right as the film is unspooled, and then disappears.
mini iiiiiiiiiii iiiiiiiii [iiiiiiiiiii iiiijriii

i
LOADED CAMERA FILM PARTIALLY FILM COMPLETELY

(22J5m-73.8ft) UNWOUND UNWOUND
Should camera loading be insufficient, remove the camera (see 14-3).
AA
BREGUET
ÏL^'a^\L
AVIATION^joP3^ '
MIRAGE F
OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH PYLON TANKS
(Figure 20)
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed when the aircraft returns from a mission with
pylon tanks, as well as operations relative to pylon tank removal.
A Special tools
- ALKAN pylon preparation tool kit Y 801 POOL
- Elevator trolley with accessories.

- 1200-liter belly tank installation trolley 5001 CRL.
- Armament transportation trailer.
- ALKAN hoists (2), type 500 (M015B).
- ALKAN hoisting pin Y01 5-00.1.
- ALKAN hoisting strap 77069.
C Accessories
- Ball-joint protective caps : P/N : S-O-009

- Fuel crossfeed protective cover : S-O-010
- Air crossfeed protective cover : S-O-01 1
3- SAFETY MEASURES
WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS ARMED, TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES

(SEE 02-0).
4- PREPARATION FOR FLIGHT
A If the following mission is a mission with pylon tanks, check the following on each pylon :
- locking of ejector hooks.

- tightening of the 9 bolts attaching the ejector (on pylon R/H side)
- tightening of mounting lugs and their jam nuts
- behaviour and tightening of rear hooking device.
On each tank, check the following :

tank external condition (no impact, rivet behaviour, etc.)
-
- condition and attachment of access doors, gravity refueling plug, rear hooking device, stabilizers
-check that there is no seepage or leakage on the tank structure, particularly at junction lines
between front and center sections, and between center and rear sections.
AA
BREGUET
/L^>~r\l
AVIATIONôF0^^-^
MIRAGE
....,.,..
F
.,
B If the next mission does not require carrying of pylon tank(s) :
- remove the pylon tank(s).
C If tanks have been jettisoned
(1 ) If the next mission requires carrying of pylon tanks on each pylon, proceed as follows :
- remove the adapters equipped with the used initiators ;
- unscrew and remove the seven attachment screws, remove the ejector ;
- remove retaining assembly (10) as follows :
- fully unscrew lock screw (22) and remove the screw and lockplate (21 ),
- unscrew castellated nut (15), free and remove the assembly ;
- inspect the pylon, checking with particular care :
- electrical connector (25) linking the tank to the pylon and its retaining cord (30),
- the rear retaining device, i.e. ball joint socket (14) and bearing plate (18) ;
- reinstall the ejector and secure it ;
-install the tank (see worksheet «PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH PYLON TANKS») ;
-install the initiators (see worksheet « INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»).
(2) If the next mission does not require carrying of pylon tanks :
-remove the pylons (see worksheet «REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF PYLONS», manual 15-3).
5- REMOVAL OF TANK
(1 ) Preparation of lifting or hoisting device
(2) Preliminary steps
Using the lifting device :
bring the elevator trolley platform into contact with the tank.
-
Using the hoisting device :
- engage the hoisting pin in pylon housing (28),
- lock the pin rotating it by one quarter turn,
- hook a hoist on either side of this pin,
- hook the hoisting strap on each cable end fitting,
- tauten the cables and adjust the hoisting strap under the tank.
- Loosen nut (6) and, using hex head control (7), bring the device to lower abutment.
-Lower rear hooking assembly (10) by operating rear ball joint rod (19) after loosening jam
nut (20).
- Unscrew lock screw (22), back off lockplate (21 ) and unscrew castellated nut (15).
- After loosening nuts (4), unlock and loosen mounting screws (3).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=>~±ry.
BREGUET AVIATION ^©P^^^
MIRAGE F
^£$52^^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(3) Procedure
On the fuselage pylon, set anti-leak squeeze device to down position by turning the hex head (27)
in the «FERME-CLOSED» direction.
-Open the door giving access to the electrical connector (25).

-Disconnect the plug from the tank and engage it with its stowage socket (on the pylon).
- Remove the safety pin (1 ) from the pylon.
- Turn the hex head marked «DECLENCHEMENT-RELEASE» (2) in the direction of the arrow
to open the hooks.
- Pivot the retaining device (10) rearward so as to clear the claw (12) from the hole (11) and to
free the fork (8) from the pin (9).
- Back-off rear hooking device.
- Remove the tank.
- Remove the hoisting device (if applicable).
If needed, repeat these operations at the various store carrying stations.
- Fit protective covers on tank crossfeed devices.

- Fit latex protective covers on ball-joints.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //JWLJfi I Y \ 1\ /AVJ' L_
1
BREGUET AVIATION ^g^* ^5«Cb, _ . , ..,.,.. .

^ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH GUNS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed when the aircraft returns from a mis¬
sion with guns.
A - Special tools
-Gun preparation tool case DEFA 30-550-F4 (3CGF 187)
-Gun circuit controller DEFA 30-550-F2 (3CGF 136)
-Protective casing MS 1430 for armament master switch
-Wrench M 31025 (door 17.04).
3 - MATERIALS
-White spirit S752
- Loctite 241
-Water repellant oil 397-1
4 - SAFETY MEASURES
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO ARMED OR LOADED AIRCRAFT (see
02-2).
5 - PROCEDURE
-If necessary, open ground crew access door 17.04 and recover wrench M 31025.
A - Aircraft returning from normal gun firing mission
-Ensure that the operations after gun firing mission have been performed and that gun fir¬
ing took place normally.
-Carry out the following operations (IMPERATIVELY WITH WRENCH M 31025):
-open and remove gun bay access doors 19.05 and 19.07,
-open ammunition box access doors 21 .03 and 21 .09 and bring them to up position.
(1) Perform the gun test. This test indicates whether:
(a) the gun is in normal position (gun parts forward)
(b) cartridges or empty cases are present in the chamber (visual and electrical check)
(c) the pyrotechnic recocking cartridge has been used
(d) there has been a firing failure (gun jamming)
(e) the rounds are all fired or not.
,(2) Rounds all fired
(a) Remove the pyrotechnic recocking cartridge.
(b) Remove the ammunition boxes.
(c) Open link recovery box access doors 21 .04 and 21 .08.
Empty link recovery boxes and ejection link chutes.
Check link recovery boxes and link ejection chutes for internal condition.
(d) Open case recovery box access doors 23.05 and 23.07 (wrench M 31025).
Empty case recovery boxes.
Check laminated panels and case ejection chutes for condition.
AA
04 - 87 Restricted 6 - 511
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=J>-"ir'\I
BREGUET AVIATION ^cT
MIRAGE F
(e) Check that the guns and supports do not show any visible defect : parts cracked, broken, indented
or distorted.
(f ) For each gun, especially check the following :

- the anti-whip bushing,
- locking of central support,
- rear support,
- attachment and condition of connecting strip,
- locking of pyrotechnic recocking cartridge connector.
(g) Weapon maintenance

- Open gun barrel locking system access doors 18-05 and 18-07.
- Unlock the barrel and remove it.
- Remove the gas vent ; clean, brush and decarbonize it if required.
- Lightly grease the vent threads. Screw up the vent fully home, then loosen by half a turn to avoid
sticking.
IMPORTANT NOTE : In no case should the vent top protrude beyond the tube axis.
- Check the rear flange of the barrel for condition (non corrosion due to burnt gases).
- Install and lock the barrel. Check that barrel locking indicator protrudes.
- Perform same operations for the second gun.
- Close gun barrel locking system access doors 18-05 and 18-07.
(h) Check gun blast tube for attachment and condition. Replace the defective screws (use loctite).
- Open link recovery box doors 21-04 and 21-08.
- Empty link recovery boxes and link ejection chutes.
- Check link recovery boxes and link ejection chutes for internal condition.
- Open case recovery box doors 23-05 and 23-07.
- Empty case recovery boxes.
- Check laminated panels and case ejection chutes for condition.
(j) If needed, perform gun loading and cocking if another mission with guns is anticipated (refer to
«PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH GUNS»).
(k) If no mission with guns is anticipated during the next flight :

do not connect gun connectors to control boxes, stow them in the ejection tube of the feed
-
box of each gun,
- close gun bay access doors 19-05 and 19-07.
(3) Rounds not all fired
(a) Remove the pyrotechnic recocking cartridge,

(b)* Remove the case ejection chute.
(c) Unpin and remove the feed chute
(d) Unlock and remove the sprocket shaft so as to uncouple the latter from the breech cylinder shaft.
(e) Open and remove the gun feed box.
(f ) If a cartridge is half-engaged, push it fully home in the chamber with a non-metallic tool.
(g) Unfasten and separate the link belt.
(h) Close the cover of the gun feed box.
(j) Using the correct wrench, turn the breech cylinder anti-clockwise to free the end of the link belt
remaining in the gun feed box.
(k) Push back the sprocket shaft and secure the lock.
(I) Remove the ammunition box.
(m) Close and pin the feed chute.
(n) Fit the manual recocking device to the gun.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ^^tTS^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^jSF3^-"^"-^
(p) Recock four times so as to eject the cartridges remaining in the gun.
WARNING :
BEFORE EJECTING A CARTRIDGE, TAKE CARE TO PLACE A CLOTH AT THE FEED BOX
OUTLET SO AS TO PREVENT THE CARTRIDGE FROM HITTING THE HAND OF THE
TECHNICIAN WHO BRINGS THE GUN PARTS FORWARD.
(q) Remove the manual recocking device and reinstall the case ejection chute.
(r) Carry out the same operations for the second gun.
(s) Repeat the operations of para. «Rounds all fired» (steps (c) to (k)).
NOTE : In the case where guns have intentionally not been fired (mission interrupted or cancelled,
or guns not used) :
- prepare the aircraft for a mission with guns if another gunnery mission is anticipated,
- perform unloading operations (if required) if no other gunnery mission is anticipated (see
para. «Rounds not all fired».
B Aircraft returning from mission after firing failure
-Remove the pyrotechnic recocking cartridge.

-Perform gun test.
- If the test is satisfactory, perform unloading operations (see «Final steps» of para. «Rounds not
all fired») then carry out trouble shooting of the gun system (see 15-1).
If the test is not satisfactory, refer to the trouble shooting operations related to the system
(see 15-1).
6- FINAL STEPS
Close and lock the following doors (IMPERATIVELY WITH WRENCH M 31025):
-
- 21 .03 and 21 .09 giving access to the ammunition boxes,
- 23.05 and 23.07 giving access to the case recovery boxes.
- Close doors 21.04 and 21.08 giving access to the link recovery boxes and check that each latch
is effectively engaged.
- Replace wrench M 31025 in door 17.04, then (if necessary) close the door and check that each
latch is effectively engaged.
7- CHECKING AND PROTECTING THE AIRFRAME
A- Check the aircraft skin for condition (see 02-5, worksheet «POST-FLIGHT INSPECTION»).
B Should another mission with guns be anticipated, check that the grease film applied to the airfra¬
me sections reached by burnt gases is sufficient. If it is not, apply a new film of protective grease.
C Should no other mission with guns be anticipated, clean the airframe (see 02-5, worksheet «INS¬
PECTION AFTER LAST GUN FIRING OF THE DAY»).
8- LAST MISSION OF THE DAY
When the aircraft returns from its last mission, perform the recommended maintenance operations
(see 02-5, worksheet «INSPECTION AFTER LAST GUN FIRING OF THE DAY»).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^J>~^s± MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _^- ^^ .........
OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH ROCKETS
1 - PURPOSE
rockets, as well as operations relative to rocket-launcher unloading and removal.
A Special tools
I - ALKAN pylon preparation tool kit Y801 P001 A.

- 68 mm rocket-launcher tool case OML R01-521 1-00G.
- Elevator trolley and accessories

- Armament transportation and distribution trailer
- ALKAN hoists (2) type 500
- Hoisting pin
- Hoisting strap
- «DANGER» board
- Electrical power 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz and 28 V DC
- Armament master switch cover (M.S. 1430)
- Ground firing shunt (in weapon setting case MRA9).
3- SAFETY MEASURES
-TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO ARMED OR LOADED

AIRCRAFT (See 02-0).
4- PROCEDURE
WARNING-DANGER :
SHOULD ROCKETS REMAIN IN ROCKET-LAUNCHER, REFER TO PARA.B
A The aircraft returns from mission after normal firing (empty rocket-launchers).
- Ensure that rocket firing mission operations have been carried out and that rocket firing has
proceeded in the normal way.
- Carry out the following operations :
(1) Case of rocket-launchers type F1D
(a) If the rocket-launchers have been ejected at the end of the firing mission, check the pylons and the
ejecting devices for condition.
- Put the pylons back to working order :

- remove the initiators (see operations «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»,
- check that both initiators have normally operated on each pylon,
- ascertain that the hook retainer is properly locked and check it for perfect condition.
(b) If the rocket-launchers have not been ejected :
- Remove the rocket-launchers.
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^y^
BREGUET AVIATION^^°^^^>
^C^^^=^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(2) Case of rocket launchers type F2 (fig. 22R)
(a) If another rocket firing mission is scheduled
Check :
-
- external condition of rocket launcher (condition of front cone, suspension rings, quick-
release fastening device, rear cone, possible traces of impacts, etc.) ;
- condition of tubes (cracks, signs of corrosion, metal pick-up, foreign matter).
If firing was carried out with a protective cone, remove the muzzle and release the remains
of the cone.
- Reset the rocket launcher distributor to zero. To this end, perform the following operations :
- on the rocket launcher to be tested, make sure that ground safety lever 1 is in open position,
with safety pin installed ; remove the rear cone.
CAUTION :
PUT THE REAR CONE VERTICALLY ON THE GROUND, RESTING ON ITS REAR SECTION.
- Install the ground firing shunt.

- Energize the aircraft.
- In cockpit
On the armament control panel :
- depress «RP» selector button
On the bombing control panel
-set «RP 1-2-1+2» selector to the position related to the carrying stations being checked
- set «RP - SINGLE - SALVO» selector to «SALVO».
On the LH console :
- remove the safety pin and the protective cover from the armament master switch,
- lift the safety guard and set the armament master switch to «TEST».
- On the rocket launcher, remove the safety pin and fold down lever 1 .
- Depress the firing button on control stick handgrip.
- Open safety lever 1 of rocket launcher, position the safety pin.
- Set the armament master switch to «OFF», with guard down. Place the protective cover and
safety pin.
the button once again to suppress rocket selection.
- Depress
Deenergize the aircraft.
-
- Remove the ground firing shunt.
- Load the rocket launcher (see «PREPARATION FOR ROCKET MISSION»).
(b) If no other rocket mission is scheduled, remove the rocket launchers, after fitting the rear cone.
NOTE : For rocket launchers type F2 locknuts 4 of swaybrace screws 3 are put back to rest on
bearing points 11 (figure 22R).
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^VL
BREGUET AVIATION^siF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^Z^**^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(3) 1 55 ND type rocket launcher
- Open the connection doors of the universal pylon initiators, or open the access doors and discon¬
nect the initiators (outboard pylons).
(a) If another rocket mission is planned
Check :
-
- the appearance of the rocket launcher (condition of front cone, mounting rings, quick-
disconnect fastenings, rear cone, signs of blows or impacts, etc.),
- the condition of the tubes (cracks, traces of corrosion, metal pick-up, deposits of waste
matter).
Restore the nose cone to operating condition (see figure 22V).
-
- Remove the retaining cone 12 (in case of heat protection).
- Remove the remains of the protecting cone 1 1 , if one was fitted to the launcher.
- Remove the nose cone 3.
- Remove the heat protection diaphragm 7.
- Reset the rocket launcher pulse distributor to zero. To do so, carry out the operations described
under «ZERO RESETTING OF TYPE 155ND ROCKET LAUNCHER PULSE DISTRIBUTOR».
AA
03-83 Restricted 6-522L
BREGUET AVIATION^c.
fiJ^^T*!
.
MIRAGE F
B The aircraft returns from mission with loaded rocket launchers
(1 ) of a rocket launcher type F1 D

Case
(a) If another mission with rockets is scheduled, check rocket launchers for loading and make sure the
number of rockets is sufficient for the next mission.
Also check general condition of pylons, ejectors, mounting lugs, etc.
If the load of the rocket launcher is not adequate, remove the rocket launcher (see next
paragraph).
Once removed, forward the rocket launcher to the emergency yard.
Install another rocket launcher (see «PREPARATION FOR MISSION»).
(b) If no other mission with rockets is scheduled, remove the rocket launcher and forward it to the
emergency yard.
(2) Case of a rocket. launcher type F2 or 155ND

Remove the remaining rockets as per rocket launcher individual documentation.
(a) If another mission with rockets is scheduled, restore the condition of rocket launchers (see pre¬
ceding paragraphs).
(b) If no other mission with rockets is scheduled, remove the rocket launcher.
C The aircraft returns from mission with loaded rocket launchers subsequent to faulty firing
(1 ) Case of a rocket launcher type F1 D

- Remove the rocket launcher(s).
- Perform trouble shooting on the system (see 15-2).
(2) Case of a rocket launcher type F2 or*1 55ND

- Unload the rocket launcher(s) (see para. B).
- Perform trouble shooting on the system (see 15-2).
5- REMOVAL OF ROCKET LAUNCHERS
A Preparation of pylon (figure 22)
Loosen jam nuts (4) then unlock and loosen mounting lugs (3) by means of their screws.
-
With rocket launchers type F1 D
-
- On inboard wing pylons, remove pin (10) from the retaining clevis.
- On outboard wing pylons (figure 22D), pull control rod (20) to release hook retaining
pin (10) and bring the rod into low vertical position to secure it.
B Preparation of rocket launcher
- Check that the safety lever is open and that the pin (with streamer) is installed.
- On the rocket connector access door (on pylon).
- Disconnect the plug from the rocket launcher receptacle and connect it to its stowage mount.
- Close the access door (on pylon).
- Remove the pin then fold down the safety lever.
C Removal with elevator trolley
Lodge the elevator trolley platform underneath the rocket launcher.

-
Remove the safety pin.
-
- Operate hex head control «DECLENCHEMENT-RELEASE» (for inboard pylons) or «RELEASE»
(for outboard pylons) in direction of the arrow for opening the hooks.
- Once released, remove the rocket launcher.
- Close the initiator access door.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ>~try^
BREGUET AVIATION^SF3^^^
MIRAGE
...... nn
F
D Removal with hoists (inboard wing pylons)
(1 ) Preparation of hoisting device
- Insert the hoisting pin into pylon housing (17) and rotate it a quarter turn rearward to lock it.
- Fit a hoist on either side of the pin.
Unreel the required length of cable while holding both cables taut.
- Adjust the hoisting strap under the rocket launcher and attach it.
- Stretch the hoist cables so as to maintain the rocket launcher.
(2) Removal of rocket launcher
Bring the load transportation trailer straight below the carrying station.
-
Remove the safety pin from the pylon.
-
- Operate «DECLENCHEMENT - RELEASE» hex head control in direction of the arrow so as
to open the hooks.
- Remove the rocket launcher, using the hoisting device.
NOTE : Operate the hoists simultaneously so that the rocket launcher remains horizontal during
removal.
(3) Final steps
- Back off and remove the hoists and the hoisting pin (the cables must be once again reeled onto
the drums while held taut).
AB
BREGUET
/LJ^T\l
AVIATIONôP3^-^^
MIRAGE F
ZERO RESETTING OF TYPE 155ND ROCKET LAUNCHER PULSE DISTRIBUTOR

BY MEANS OF TYPE F8 TEST SET
(Figure 52)
1 - SCOPE
This section details the procedure for resetting the type 155ND rocket launcher pulse distributor
to zero.
-Electrical power supply : 1 15-200 V/400 Hz AC and 28 V DC.

-Master armament switch protective casing (M.S. 1430).
- Ground firing shunt (in weapon setting case MRA 9).
- Test set type F8, MATRA 0JLU06-501293W comprising :
- test unit 0JLU06-521365F,
- power supply lead A488-1 50-5 (W2) ,
- rocket launcher connection lead 0JLU05-501087A (W1 ).
3- SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS RELEVANT TO ARMED AND LOADED AIRCRAFT

(see 02-0).
- On the rocket launcher, check that the ground safety lever (7) is in the open position and that
the safety pin (6) is in place. Remove the rear cone (quick-release fasteners).
- Make the following connections to the test set :
lead W2
- connector S2 to connector P2 of the test set
- power connectors to a 28 V DC power source
lead W1
- double coaxial connectors S1 to the rocket launcher firing frame connectors in accordance
with their engraved markings
the ground connector of the rocket launcher structure
-
connector S2 to connector P1 of the test set.
-
- Establish a telephone link between the operator in the cockpit and the operator on the ground.
- Fit the ground firing interlock shunt to the firing authorization connector (LH U/C bay).
- Supply the aircraft with electrical power.
5- PROCEDURE
CAUTION :
THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS ARE TO BE OBSERVED THROUGHOUT THE
OPERATION.
1 - NEVER HOLD THE FIRING BUTTON PRESSED FOR MORE THAN TWO SECONDS.
2 - PULSES CAN BE SENT AT 15-SECOND INTERVALS DURING TWO TO THREE MI
NUTES.
3 - AFTER COMPLETING EACH TEST SEQUENCE, ALLOW 20 MINUTES TO ELAPSE
BEFORE STARTING THE NEXT TEST SEQUENCE.
4 - AFTER EACH TEST SEQUENCE, SWITCH OFF THE DISTRIBUTOR.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^ZS^ J^^-

MIRAGE F
± 28V power supply H ..
FIGURE 52 - ZERO RESETTING OF TYPE 155ND ROCKET LAUNCHER

BY MEANS OF TYPE F8 TEST SET
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^-"r-Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c. ^~ ^
- On test set
Check that switch (1 ) is «off» and that «SELECTION» indicator light (2) is out.
-
-Set selector (3) to «CIRCUIT» and power switch (4) to «MARCHE» (on). Corresponding
indicator light (5) will come on.
- In cockpit
On armament control panel
- Engage «RP» selector button.
On bombing control panel
- Set «RP 1.2.1 + 2» selector to the position corresponding to the stations to be checked.
- Set «RP-SINGLE-SALVO» selector to «SALVO».
On LH console
-Release and remove the safety pin and the protective casing from armament master switch.
- Raise the guard and throw the armament master switch to «TEST».
- Operate the bomb-rocket -missile button on control stick handgrip and check that the indi¬
cator lights remain off.
- On the rocket launcher, release and remove safety pin (6) and lower lever (7).
- Operate the BRM button on control stick handgrip and check that the eighteen indicator lights
on the test set come on successively in the correct sequence.
As soon as the eighteenth indicator light comes on, release the BRM button.
- Turn off test set power switch (4).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Raise the safety lever of the rocket launcher, fit the streamer-equipped safety pin.
- Set the master armament switch to «off» position, with guard down. Fit the protective casing
and the safety pin.
- Cancel the rocket selection by pressing the button a second time.
- Switch off the power supply to the aircraft and to the rocket launcher.
- Disconnect all leads from the test set and from the rocket launcher.
- Remove the ground firing shunt.
- Load the rocket launcher (see «PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH ROCKETS»).
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [L^>^r\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ ^^ _ .........
OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH BOMBS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the operations to be performed when the aircraft returns from a mission
with bombs, as well as the operations relative to bomb removal.
A Special tools

- Matra tool kit 0B0D01-618772Y for Durandal bombs
- Elevator trolley with accessories and protective receptacle

- Alkan hoists type 500 (M015B) (qty : 2)
- Safety pins
- Special ground support equipment for transporting and handling Durandal bombs :
- Matra fork 055W02537126T for elevator trolley
- Matra adapter 055W02537125S for elevator trolley
- Matra adapter 055W02537124R for transport trailer
- Matra truck 055W02-537681 A for handling and transporting Durandal bombs.
3- SAFETY MEASURES

(see 02-0).
A Bombs released
- Ensure that the operations required upon return from mission with bombs have been carried
out and that release took place normally.
On inboard wing or fuselage multipurpose pylons :
- open the initiator connecting door,
-remove the initiators (refer to «INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»),
- for each pylon, check that both initiators have operated normally,
- check that the mounting lugs, screws, etc., are in good condition,
- manually actuate each ejector several times.
On outboard wing pylons or on four-bomb pylon :
- open the initiator access doors,
- disconnect the connecting plugs and remove the initiators (refer to «INSTALLATION AND
REMOVAL OF INITIATORS»),
- for each pylon, check that both initiators have operated normally,
- check that the mounting lugs, screws, etc., are in good condition,
- manually actuate each ejector several times.
On the four-bomb pylon, repeat these operations for each store carrying station.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION^!
//^^-"rAi
^
MIRAGE
.........
F
B The aircraft has returned from a mission with unreleased bombs
(1) If bombs have been intentionally not released (mission canceled or interrupted) and another
mission is planned :
- check the correct tightening of swaybraces, the proper condition of the pylon or four-bomb
pylon, fuzing unit tripping devices, etc,
- check the condition of arming fuzes, correct routing of fuzing unit wires, etc.
If no further bomb mission is planned :

- remove the initiators (see «Installation - removal of initiators»),
- remove the bombs (see following paragraph).
(2) If bombs have not been released due to a failure of the release circuits :
- remove the initiators,

- remove the bombs,
- proceed with trouble shooting (see 15-3).
5- REMOVAL OF STORE (S)
A Bombs under wing or fuselage multipurpose pylons
(1) Removal with elevator trolley
(a) Preparation of store
Beluga type 66 bomb (figure 23 N)

- Install protective cover (20) under the bombs casing and attach using the two retainer straps (21 ),
- Fit ground safety pin (4) on the presence indicator after having compressed the latter.
- Remove the rings of the fuzing unit wires from their corresponding tripping devices on the pylon.
Durandal bomb (figure 23M)

-Refit safety pins (13) and (14).
(b) Preparation of pylon
- Loosen the bomb fin pad jam nut and raise the pad by turning the base nut.
- Unlock and loosen the swaybraces.
(c) Removal of bomb
Bring the platform of the elevator trolley to bear under the store.
-
Remove the safety pin.
-
- Turn the «DECLENCHEMENT - RELEASE» hex head control in the direction of the arrow to
open the hooks.
- Release and remove the bomb.
- Close the initiator connection door.
(2) Removal with hoisting device
(a) Preparation of bomb
Beluga bomb : as described above, using the lifting device.
- Remove the rings (16) of the fuzing unit wires from their corresponding tripping devices on the
pylon.
(b) Preparation of pylon
- Place the hoisting pin on the pylon and lock by 1/4 turns.
- Unlock and loosen the swaybraces.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^<5_ __
(c) Preparation of hoisting device
- Hook the two hoists on the hoisting pin.

- Pay out the required amount of cable while maintaining taut.
- Place the hoisting strap under the store and attach.
- Reel in the hoist cables so as to support the bomb.
(d) Removal of bomb
-Remove the safety pin from the pylon.

-Turn the «DECLENCHEMENT - RELEASE» hex head control in the direction of the arrow
to open the hooks.
- Remove the bomb using the hoisting device.
CAUTION :
For 250 kg and 400 kg retarded bombs, proceed as follows to secure the combined rack winder
(figure 23).
- 250 kg bomb :
. fit a handling tool between the lower part of the pylon and the top of winder (19), compress
the winder head and hold it,
. tighten lock screw (21 ) on the winder head (16 mm A/F wrench),
. remove the handling tool.
- 400 kg bomb :
. fit a handling tool between the lower part of the pylon and the top of shim (20) of winder
(19), compress the shim and the winder and hold them,
. hand tighten the assembly,
. remove the handling tool.
NOTE : The hoists are simultaneously maneuvered so as to keep the store vertical during handling.
(e) Preparation
- Release and remove the hoists and the hoisting pin ; cables are to be rewound on the drums
while maintaining then taut.
- Close the initiator connection door.
B Bombs under outboard wing pylon
The bomb is removed by elevator trolley. Procedure is the same as that described in the preced¬
ing paragraph ; however the hooks are opened by turning the hex head control marked «RELEASE».
C Bombs under four-bomb pylon
The removal of each bomb is performed in a manner identical to that for stores under other
pylons ; the hooks are opened by turning the hex head control marked «DEVERROUILLAGE -
RELEASE».
Stores are removed in the following order :
- front store carrying stations,

- rear store carrying stations.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iU^^T'U. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION x^^^ miamiiai no
6- LAST MISSION OF THE DAY
When the aircraft returns from the last mission of the day, replace the pylon ejectors (or the
four-bomb pylon ejectors) used for one or several launchings.
A Removal of ejector from four-bomb pylon CLB4 (figure 53)
(1 ) Release the six locks (1 ) of fairing (2) corresponding to the ejector to be removed and place the
fairing in the raised position.
(2) Make the following electrical disconnections :

unscrew and recover attachment screw (3) of the grounding lug,
-
-unlock and disconnect electrical connectors (4) as soon as «ROUGE» (red) markers appear,
- disconnect the power supply plugs from electrical connectors (5) of fusing unit tripping
devices (6) and (7).
(3) From inside the ejector holder, unscrew and remove both lower attachment screws (8) (10 mm
A/F hex socket), and recover nuts (9).
(4) Unscrew both upper attachment screws (10) (14 mm A/F hex head), hold the ejector, remove
screws (10), recover washers (1 1 ) then remove the ejector.
(5) Separate the ejector from support plate (12) after unscrewing and removing the three attach¬
ment screws.
B Installation of ejector
CAUTION :
DURING INSTALLATION OF THE EJECTOR, THE HOOKS OF THE EJECTOR LINKAGE
MUST MANDATORILY BE OPEN ; THE CONTROL BUTTON OF THE TRANSFER UNIT IS
THUS IN THE DOWN POSITION.
(1) Fit the ejector with its two fusing unit tripping devices (6) and (7) (if necessary, refer to the
individual documentation for the pylon).
(2) Fit the ejector with fairing support plate (12).
To do so, proceed as follows.
(3) Position the fairing support plate on the outer face of the ejector with the smaller arm of the
«V» against that face.
(4) Engage and screw up the three attachment screws (1 3) of the support.
(5) Position the ejector under the pylon, orientating it correctly.
(6) Connect up the power supplies of fusing unit tripping devices (6) and (7).
(7) Place the ejector in position.
(8) Hold the ejector in position and insert upper attachment screws (10) fitted with washers (11).
(9) Engage each screw in threaded bush (14) and screw up by a few turns (14 mm A/F hex head).
(10) From inside the structure of the ejector holder, fit each lower screw (8) into plain bush (15) and
through the ejector.
Fit a nut (9) onto each screw.
(1 1 ) Torque the four attachment screws to 5 m.daN (37.16 Ib.ft).
(12) Swing the fairing down and secure it.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 53 - REMO VAL-INSTALLA TION OF EJECTORS ON CLB4

FOUR-BOMB PYLON
AA
06-81 Restricted 6-533 R
L>irU
__
MIRAGE F
OPERATIONS AFTER TRAINING MISSION WITH

ADAPTER TWESÀ"
(figure 23 R)
1 - SCOPE
To describe the operations to be performed on return from bomb training mission, as well as the
adapter unloading procedure.
A - Special tools
- Alkan handling wires 79400-02 (qty : 2)
- Alkan handling wire 79400-01
- Alkan special wrench 80900-620
- Alkan multipurpose wrench 80900-180
- Fusing unit rings (qty : 3)
C Accessories
- Ejectors P65 (qty : 3)

- Ejectors T65 (qty : 3)
- Alkan safety stops 79751-1 (qty : 3)
- Accessories according to type of bombs carried :
- mounting pads 79265-607 A (qty : 3 or 6), or
- accessory sets 7941 3 (qty : 3)
3- SAFETY MEASURES
TAKE ALL MEASURES RELATIVE TO LOADED OR ARMED AIRCRAFT (see 02-0).
4- FINAL STEPS
A Bombs released
Ensure that the operations related to return from mission have been performed and that bomb
release occurred normally.
(1 ) Another mission is scheduled
(a) On pylon
- Check for condition of skin and tightening of mounting lugs (inner screws) on adapter.
(b) On adapter
- Check adapter, ejector, pads, etc., for condition.
- Manually uncock and cock each ejector several times in succession.
- Remove the initiator mount from each ejector.
NOTE : If the next mission requires a new type of bomb, thereby a new type of ejector, proceed as
follows.
- Remove the ejector from each carrying station.
- If needed, remove the accessories related to this type of ejector.
- Install the new type of ejector with its accessories.
P65 ejector
-Front and rear pads (7) installed.
-Fin pad (8) installed (when not in use, this pad shall be set in raised position).
T65 ejector
- Front pad (7) and/or rear pad fitted.
- Safety stop (9) installed.
- Rear pad (10) (modified or not) installed.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^>îl
,, BREGUET AVIATION^F53^^^
MIRAGE F
M ^2^^<^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(c) Recondition the adapter (see «PREPARATION FOR TRAINING MISSION WITH BOMB RACK
ADAPTER 65A», para. «HOOKING OF BOMBS»).
(2) No other mission is scheduled
Remove the bomb rack adapter (see para. «REMOVAL OF ADAPTER»).
B The aircraft returns from mission with its bombs
(1) If the bombs have intentionally not been released (mission cancelled or interrupted) and if no
other mission is scheduled :
- make sure that the ejector is tightened on the store (front and rear mounting pads (7) for P65
ejector, clamps and rear pad (10) and/or safety stop (9) for T65 ejector) for each store carrying station,
- check for perfect condition of adapter and multipurpose pylon.
(2) release was prevented by faulty operation of the bomb release circuits :
If bomb
remove the bombs (see next paragraph),
-
- on each adapter ejector, unlock and unscrew the initiator holder complete with initiator,
-perform trouble shooting on the whole system (see «TROUBLE SHOOTING OF SYSTEM»
in 15-3).
If no other mission is scheduled, remove bombs and adapter (see next paragraphs).
5- REMOVAL OF STORES
- Make sure (on RH side) that the safety flap is open and secure it with handling wire.
- Make sure on each ejector that the safety contact is secured in rear positon by a handling wire.
- Unlock the mechanism on LH ejector, proceeding as follows :
P65 ejector
- if required, separate the ring of the fusing unit wires from the fusing unit tripping
device (21 ) of the ejector,
- raise front and rear pads (7) by actuating hex head controls (14) and (15),
-actuate hex head control (13) marked «DECLEN» (release) while a second operator retains
the bomb,
- release and remove the bomb ;
T65 ejector
- insert the screwdriver blade between the top of the lock and the base plate of the thrust
unit,
- actuate the screwdriver by a quarter turn to unlock the mechanism.
- Repeat these operations with the RH ejector.
- If a store is to be loaded under P65 ejector, remove the lower access plate from the center
carrying station then uncock the center ejector.
NOTE : Reinstall holding pins (24) of pull-away rings (23) before removing the «variable ballistics»
bombs fitted to P65 ejectors.
6- REMOVAL OF ADAPTER
- If needed, remove the stores as indicated in the preceding paragraph.

Remove safety pin (1) from the hole marked «SECURITE-SAFETY».
-
Two operators hold the adapter, while the third one performs the other operations.
-
-Open the hooks by actuating the hex head control (2) marked «DECLENCHEMENT-
RELEASE» in direction of the arrow.
- Release and remove the adapter.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^c~
ti^à>^rVL
^
MIRAGE F
OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH 550 MISSI LES
1 - PURPOSE
To describe the operations to be carried out after return from a mission with missiles 550, and also
the operations for missile removal.
A Standard tooling
- Armament standard tool kit

B Special tooling
- Special 12 sided spanner MATRA 050A57. 520985 F (for non modified missile-launchers).
C Ground servicing equipment

- Ammunition transportation and distribution trailer and accessories.
- Lifting trolley with accessories.
- Lifting harness MATRA 055W02537127W
- Connector protector plug (missile/launcher coupling) SOURIAU 8522-37
- Launcher socket protector plug SOURIAU 8522-28
- «DANGER» board.
- Armament master switch cover MS 1 430.
D Safety accessories
- Rocket motor firing pin shunt MATRA 055B70-501 649P
- \ rdome protector MATRA 055V02-542049W.
- PF window protector : MATRA 055B00-51 9682R
- Locking device safety pin : MATRA 050A57-520752A (number : 2).
- Flap safety pin : MATRA 133725D (number : 2).
3- MATERIALS
-Ethyl alcohol AIR 3655
, -Kleenex type paper handkerchiefs
| -Grease AIR 4210 or 4222
4- SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO ARMED OR LOADED AIR¬
CRAFT.
5- PROCEDURE
A Aircraft returns from mission after normal firing.
- Ensure that firing took place normally
- Carry out the following operations :
- unlock and open the launcher front fairing
- unlock the jettisonable connector extractor lever
- disconnect the missile/launcher jettisonable cable connector plug.
- fit a protector plug to the socket.
- close the front fairing and lock in closed position.
(1 ) If another mission is planned, before loading up the missile :

- make sure that the protective disk is fitted in front of the missile launching ramp and check
its condition.
-reset the lock by operating the «ARMEMENT VERROU» control ; the front stop should
then bottom in the down position.
AA
BREGUET
/t^>îl
AVIATION^S53 -«<0
MIRAGE F
^S^^-^^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(1) Check:
- missile-launcher condition (traces of dents, corrosion, burnt gases, condition of front and rear
fairing skin, guide rail and launching ramp) ;
- condition of the firing pins, jettisonable connector extractor lever and ground safety flap ;
- nitrogen pressure. For that purpose :
- open the rear fairing,
- read the value of the nitrogen pressure on the multi-range pressure gage,
- pointer in green range -» correct pressure, suitable for next flight,
-pointer in yellow range (in half range section tangent to green range) -+ admissible
pressure, suitable for next flight,
- pointer in yellow range (in half range section tangent to red range) or in red range
-*- insufficient pressure, mandatorily change the nitrogen cylinder. See paragraph 6 - REMOVAL -
INSTALLATION OF NITROGEN CYLINDER.
- Carry out :
- cleaning
of outer assembly
-
of firing pins,
-
- greasing of the rail.
(2) If no further mission is scheduled, remove the missile-launcher (see REMOVAL-INSTALLATION
OF A MISSILE-LAUNCHER operations).
IMPORTANT NOTE :
IF AIRCRAFT HAS TO FLY WITH MISSILE LAUNCHERS ONLY, THEY MUST BE FITTED
WITH NITROGEN CYLINDERS.
B Aircraft returns from mission with missiles intentionally not fired.
(1 ) If a further mission is scheduled :
remove the irdome cover ;
-
clean the irdome with denatured ethyl alcohol and Kleenex type paper ;
-
- refit the irdome cover ;
- remove the proximity fuse guard ;
- clean the proximity fuse windows with repeated jets of ethyl alcohol ;
- refit the proximity fuse guard ;
- check that the missile-launcher and missile are in perfect condition (absence of dents, corro¬
sion, condition of missile-launcher and missile skin, condition of missile control surfaces and stabilizer
fins) ;
check the nitrogen pressure (see paragraph above) ;
-
check that the missile is connected to the missile-launcher connector ;
-
check that the extractor lever is correctly locked onto missile receptacle.
-
(2) If no further mission is scheduled, remove the missile (see paragraph 7) and missile-launcher
(see REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MISSILE-LAUNCHER operations in 15-5).
IMPORTANT NOTE :
IF AIRCRAFT HAS TO FLY WITH MISSILE-LAUNCHERS ONLY, THEY MUST BE FITTED
WITH NITROGEN CYLINDERS.
C Aircraft returns from mission with one (or two) missile(s) after a firing anomaly
Two cases may be considered for missile launching system failure :
rocket motor not ignited,
-
rocket motor ignited, but insufficient thrust.
-
NOTE : The rocket motor ignition can be checked visually by the absence or presence of the sealing
disc ring located at the nozzle outlet.
- If the sealing disc is present
- Remove the missile.
- Send the missile to the specialized workshop (comply with the instructions given in the missile
technical handbook).
- Trouble shoot the system (see 15-5).
If the sealing disc is absent
In this instance, the launcher switch has been actuated and the missile/missile-launcher connec¬
tion has been broken.
- Install as soon as possible the proximity fuse window cover and the irdome cover.
- On the missile-launcher :
- raise the «SECURITE M.A.F. - SAFETY LEVER» lever
- fit the safety pin
- fit the ground safety pin.
- Remove the missile.
CAUTION :
WTTËNJ REMOVING MISSILE, ALL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID BUMPING
OR DROPPING IT (RISK OF RELEASING THE ARMAMENT SYSTEM DUE TO AN ACCE¬
LERATION IN EXCESS OF 13g).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION. _ _ _
MIRAGE F
Disassemble the missile in accordance with the missile technical handbook.

-
Send both missile sections to the workshop.
-
- Open the missile-launcher front cover, disconnect the missile/missile-launcher connecting cable,
and fit a protector plug to the receptacle.
- Trouble shoot the system (see in 15-5).
6- REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF THE NITROGEN CYLINDER (Figure 55)
(a) Removal of cylinder :

unlock rear fairing (1 ) and tilt outwards.
-
-turn hexagonal nut (2) marked «BLOCAGE BOUTEILLE - GAS BOTTLE LOCK» to unlock
cylinder (3) front fixing device (opposite direction to arrow).
CAUTION :
- BEFORE UNLOCKING CHECK WHICH WAY THE NUT TURNS (IT MAY BE CLOCKWISE
OR ANTICLOCKWISE ACCORDING TO WHETHER THE OPERATOR WORKS FROM THE
RIGHT OR LEFT HAND SIDE OF THE MISSILE-LAUNCHER WHEN LOOKED AT IN THE
DIRECTION OF FLIGHT).
-THE OPERATOR SHOULD TURN NO FURTHER IF THE SLIGHTEST RESISTANCE IS
FELT. UNLOCKING IS INDICATED BY TELL-TALE STUDS (8) COMING OUT.
- THE ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE STRICTLY ADHERED TO.
- bend back the rear locking device hook by means of hexagonal head pin (4). This is done by
| pressing the wrench and turning it half a turn anticlockwise.
- remove the cylinder from the rear, in order to disengage the head of the cylinder from the
front fixing device.
- raise cylinder head pressurisation lever (5) (closed position «F»).
-disconnect quick -disconnect coupling (6) from the cylinder head, by means of control (7).
- carefully release and remove the cylinder.
If the missile-launcher is to be removed, do not re-install the cylinder, close rear fairing (1) and
lock it.
(b)Installation of cylinder :
unlock rear fairing (1 ) and open it outwards
-
- carefully remove quick-disconnect coupling (6)
- insert the cylinder into its housing
- connect coupling (6) to the nitrogen cylinder
- lower pressurization lever (6), the lever flap should be in contact with the coupling.
- push the cylinder home in order to engage it with the front fixing device.
- lock the front fixing device by turning screw (2), in the direction of the arrow «BLOCAGE
BOUTEILLE - GAS BOTTLE LOCK». Finally studs (8) should retract.
CAUTION :
SEE INSTRUCTIONS IN REMOVAL PARAGRAPH.
- drop down the rear locking hook by turning pin (4). This is done by pressing the wrench and
turning it half a turn clockwise.
- close rear fairing (1 ) and lock it.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Manomètre
Pressure Sauge
Point blanc Rouge

White point Red
Vert J A_ Jaune
Green Yellow
PHASE 1 - INTRODUCTION DE LA BOUTEILLE PHASE 3 - FIN DE MISE EN PLACE DE LA BOUTEILLE

INSER TING THE BOTTLE COMPLETING THE BOTTLE INSTALLA TION
OCAGE BOUTEILLE
GAS BOTTLE LOCK
PHASE 4 - VERROUILLAGE ET BLOCAGE DE LA BOUTEILLE

LOCKING THE BOTTLE
PHASE 2 - RACCORDEMENT ET ABAISSEMENT DE LA PALETTE

CONNECTING AND LOWERING THE PLA TE
FIGURE 55 - DEPOSE-POSE DE LA BOUTEILLE D'AZOTE (MISSILE 550)

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF THE NITROGEN BOTTLE (550 MISSILE!
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L-^~!r~U. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^^^^<> ..am,, ai no
6- REMOVAL OF MISSILE
Unlock and open the front fairing of the missile-launcher.
-
Disconnect the missile/missile-launcher connecting cable.
-
- Fit a protector plug :
- to the cable connector
- to the missile-launcher fixed receptacle.
- Unlock the extractor lever of the jettisonable connector.
- Prepare the transportation trailer and the elevator trolley.
- Position the elevator trolley under the missile to be removed.
- Attach the hoisting harnesses to the missile (the first harness being routed behind the connecting
belt) and tighten.
Two operators are necessary for this operation, and a third one for preparing the elevator trolley.
-Turn the «APPUIS LATERAUX - SNUBBERS» control in the «DEBLOCAGE - UNLOCK»
direction.
- Slide the missile backwards until the missile hooking fittings are free from the missile-launcher
rail.
- Remove the missile and place it on the transportation trailer (see missile utilisation manual).
- Check that safety pins are fitted to the screws of the missile connecting belt.
- Fit a protector shunt to the missile firing studs.
- Secure the missile connecting cable (rubber piece in both studs).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,,
JL^^T^. MIRAGE F
OPERATIONS AFTER MISSION WITH PRACTICE TARGET

(figure 29)
1 - SCOPE
air-to-air gun firing practice target, as well as the operations relative to target and container removal.
A Special tools
- Alkan multipurpose wrench 80900-180

- Alkan wrench 80900-190 for initiator
- Alkan pin 80900-590 for wrench

3- SAFETY MEASURES

(see 02-0).
A Aircraft returning from mission after normal towing
Ensure that the operations relative to a return from mission with practice target have been carried
out and that release took place normally.
- Disconnect the initiators from the hooking stub rear ejector.

- Remove the front ejector initiators that have been used.
(1 ) If a further mission is anticipated
On container VRAC 500 :

- remove cable loader locking pin (12),
- remove cable loader (9) to provide for new loading,
- insert new towing cable loader (9) fully home, then turn it to the right so as to engage the loader
lug behind the retaining fitting of the container,
- secure the loader by installing locking pin (12),
- engage towing cable loop (13) in the hook of tripping device (14) and lock,
- check the loader for correct locking.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=i>~rVL
BREGUET AVIATION^^F^^^Ô
MIRAGE F
replace the detonator-holder of pyrotechnical unit, proceeding as follows :

-
- disconnect power supply connector (30) from pyrotechnical unit (31 )
- remove retaining pin (32) from assembly pin (33)
- remove pin (33) and remove pyrotechnical unit (31 )
- unscrew threaded assembly bush (34)
- remove contact-holder (36)
- remove old detonator-holder (36)
- insert a new detonator-holder assembly (36) into the chamber of body (37)
- engage contact-holder (35), making sure that the detonator-holder locating pin is positioned
correctly on the contact-holder
- fully screw threaded assembly bush (34) onto main body (37)
- install pyrotechnical unit (31 ) and secure it with pin (33)
- install retaining pin (32).
REMARK : The release unit pyrotechnical unit should be removed and cleaned after six jettisonings
and, in any case, every day it is used.
- install new initiators in towing stub front ejector and install a new target S90-B. Refer
to the operations described in sheet «PREPARATION FOR MISSION WITH PRACTICE TARGET».
{2) If no further mission is anticipated :
- remove container VRAC 500 (see para. 5).
AB
BREGUET
iL^^rU.
AVIATION^S^3^-^^
MIRAGE __
A ,
F
B Aircraft returning from mission with target and container
(1 ) If the mission has been cancelled or interrupted and if a further mission is anticipated
- Check mounting lugs for tightening, towing stub and release unit for perfect condition, etc.
If no further mission is anticipated, remove the target and the container (see para. 5).
(2) If jettisoning did not take place due to a failure of towing or hanging control circuits.
- Install all safeties to be installed after return from mission.

- Disconnect towing stub and container initiators.
- Perform trouble shooting (see 15-9).
5- REMOVAL OF TARGET AND CONTAINER
A - Removal of target S90-B
Remove pin (25) from parachute door safety pin (18).

-
the microphone plug retaining cable from towing stub angle.
- Disengage
- Install safety pin (16), fitted with a streamer, on timer control lock (24).
- Disconnect towing cable (26) from yoke (27).
- Unlock jam nuts of mounting lug screws.
- Position the elevator trolley under target S90-B.
- Unlock the hooks of towing stub front ejector by operating «DECLENCHEMENT» manual
hex head control (6).
- Lower and move away the assembly consisting of elevator trolley and target S90-B.
- Remove towing stub front ejector initiators.
B - Removal of container VRAC 500
Disconnect pyrotechnical unit (31) from rear release unit (14).

-
Unlock jam nuts of mounting lug screws.
-
- Position the elevator trolley under container VRAC 500.
- Unlock the hooks of towing stub ejector by operating «DECLENCHEMENT» manual hex head
control (6).
- Slightly lower the assembly consisting of elevator trolley and container VRAC 500.
- Disconnect the electrical connection between container VRAC 500 and towing stub.
- Proceed with removal and move away the assembly.
- Remove towing stub rear ejector initiators.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJ>~!Z^y^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^j^^Ô Ail A Ml ia i no
SECTION 7
ENGINE STARTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
7-0 GENERAL
- Instructions for use of turbo-starter 7-001
7-1 ENGINE STARTING

- Preparation for engine starting or ventilation 7-101
- Engine starting 7-102
- Engine stop 7-105
- Dry ventilation 7-107
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 ^-" -* /Y\ll\/-\V-7I_ I
BREGUET AVIATIONû_^
^ _a~^>
^~-^> .
Restricted hhamiiai
MANUAL 02no
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF TURBOSTARTER
1 - SCOPE
A - This sheet provides the particular instructions for use of the turbostarter in order to per¬
form the following operations:
-engine ventilation,
-engine starting.
2 - SAFETY MEASURES
WARNING:
BEFORE DEPRESSING THE START BUTTON, MAKE SURE THAT ENGINE ROTATION
SPEED IS NIL (N -«*- 0).
HOWEVER, IF SAFETY DICTATES (FIRE INSIDE ENGINE FOR INSTANCE OR OPERA¬
TIONAL REASONS), IMMEDIATELY PERFORM STARTING ONCE N < 1000 rpm
(12%) REGARDLESS OF THE NUMBER OF PREVIOUS STARTS AND THE TIMES IN¬
VOLVED.
A - The start button is to be positively actuated for approximately 1 second, NEVER DE¬
PRESS IT FOR MORE THAN 2 SECONDS.
B - If the turbostarter operates for more than 25 seconds (audio check) or in the case of any
failure requiring turbostarter stopping, switch off the power supply using the start circuit
breaker or battery switch.
C - If the turbostarter is not switched off by the phonic wheel sensor upon engine starting, it
is to be manually shut down before the engine rotation speed reaches 2450 rpm (29%) by
moving the throttle lever to the "stop" position and by tripping the start circuit breaker.
D - When, due to any discrepancy, the turbostarter operates for at least 30 seconds, remove
the engine and send it to the 2nd line workshop.
3 - GENERAL
A - The approved adjustment for the altitude starting bypass valve is:
-H < 6500 ft (2000 m): arrow on "N" position,
-H > 6500 ft (2000 m): arrow on "A" position.
B - Any actuation of the start button must be considered as a start.
C - Audio check of the turbostarter ignition is performed by listening to the gas generator
typical whistling. If the turbostarter fails to start, the ground crew must immediately inform the
pilot who has to make a new attempt. The pilot can be informed of turbostarter complete stop
when no longer hearing the interference in his headset.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
4 - OPERATING CONDITIONS
A - A start is considered as successful when the engine N > 1300 rpm (15.5%).
B - Three consecutive start attempts, whether successful or not, are permissible.
CAUTION:
HOWEVER, FOUR ATTEMPTS ARE ALLOWED FOR THE FIRST START OF THE DAY.
C - After a second false start (restart attempted without success), wait for at least 20 seconds
prior to attempting the third start so that the gas generator chamber is cleared.
CAUTION:
EXCEPT THE FIRST START OF THE DAY, ANY RESTART NOT JUSTIFIED BY ABNOR¬
MAL USE OF THE EQUIPMENT (TAILWIND START, LOW BATTERY CHARGE, ETC.)
MUST BE RECORDED IN THE AIRCRAFT DOCUMENTATION FOR TROUBLESHOOT¬
ING PURPOSES.
D - If the first of second attempt is unsuccessful, comply with following instructions:
Turbostarter
RPM obtained New attempt
operation
N > 0 Ignition obtained Immediate as soon as N = 0
Ignition obtained Immediate

(audio check)
N = 0
No ignition Wait 90 seconds
(audio check)
E - After three consecutive start attempts, whether successful or not, the starting electric mo¬
tor must be cooled down.
To this end, and prior to further attempts:

-either run the turbojet engine at N greater than 6300 rpm (75%) for at least seven min¬
utes if the turbostarter is to be used again, or,
-wait 30 minutes.
F - After three consecutive unsuccessful start attempts:
-REPLACE THE AIRCRAFT BATTERY,
-perform troubleshooting (see 06-5).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -« /Y\ll\/-\\J7r_ T
BREGUET AVIATION ^?t_~ J5^^, _ . . . .... .. nn
^ ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 02
PREPARATION FOR ENGINE STARTING OR VENTILATION
1 - SCOPE
This sheet provides the various operations to be performed prior to engine starting or ven¬
tilation.

-Fire-extinguishers.
-115-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply unit.
-Starting paddle (in certain cases).
3 - SAFETY MEASURES
WARNING:
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES RELATIVE TO RUN-UP (SEE 02-0).
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Remove blanking and protective covers (see 02-1).
B - Head the aircraft into the wind. If impossible, use the starting paddle.
C - Carry out general rapid inspection of the aircraft ; especially make sure that:
-air intakes are unobstructed,
-DOORS 24-03i AND 24-09i ARE CLOSED,
-door and airbrake safety switches are in ground position,
-parking brake is applied,
-wheel chocks are installed.
D - Make sure that fire fighting equipment is close at hand and ready to function.
E - Connect ground power receptacle and switch on A/C supply.
The engine is then ready for starting or ventilation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jU^-iiTVL
BREGUET AVIATION,
MIRAGE F
ENGINE STARTING
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet provides the operations to be performed and instructions to be complied with when
starting the engine.
2- INSTRUCTIONS
A Comply with :
- INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF TURBO-STARTER (SEE 02-7).
- If needed, INSTRUCTIONS TO BE COMPLIED WITH IN THE CASE OF ENGINE FIRE (SEE
02-0).
B- ANY RUN-UP FOLLOWING ANOTHER RUN-UP WITHIN LESS THAN 30 MINUTES SHALL
MANDATORILY BEGIN AT 7000 RPM (83%) FOR ONE MINUTE SO AS TO VENTILATE AND
COOL THE ENGINE CHAMBER.
C Protection of equipment during engine starting.
Certain vibration sensitive equipment (gyro systems) should be put into operation so as to avoid
indents on bearing balls and mechanical stop hammering.
Equipment to be operated :
(1 ) Gyro system (gyro center and emergency gyromagnetic compass) :
On heading control unit :

- set «ON-OFF» switch to «ON»
- set mode selector to «NAV 1 »
- set «ON-OFF-ERECT» switch to «ON».
(2) Sight head (sight head gyro) :

- set sight head control switch to «ON» (on sight head L/H side).
(3) Standby horizon (gyro) :

- set standby horizon control switch to «ON».
(4) Navigation indicator (servo-mechanism).

-Tl position.
AF
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-?v_*-
^>, ^.s^»^
^-^ .
Restricted , . . ami i ai
MANUAL no
02
3 - ENGINE STARTING
The operations below follow the operations described in sheet "PREPARATION FOR EN¬
GINE STARTING OR VENTILATION" (see 02-7).
A - Preliminary steps
(1 ) Ensure that the throttle lever is on "stop" position.
(2) Set "BATT" switch to "ON".
(3) Ensure that "IGN-VENT" switch is on "IGN" (plug P or plug S).
(4) Invert the plug (plug selection).
(5) Set "LP MAIN COCK" switch to "on" (guard down), then set "LP PUMP" switches to
"on" within 1 5 seconds.
(6) Check the following lights :
(a) "LP" - "L/H LP" - "R/H LP" ... out

(b) "OIL" ... on
(c) "EMERG. REGUL" ... out
(d) "BOV" ... on (engine modification No. 303 or 338 or 357 incorporated).
"BOV" ... on or out (engine modification No. 303 not incorporated).
B - Starting
(1) Simultaneously :
-press the start button for 1 second approx. - NEVER EXCEED 2 SECONDS - and start
the stopwatch.
(2) Observe the RPM indicator. Between 300 rpm (3.5%) and 600 rpm (7%), bring the throt¬
tle lever to :
-"idle" in the case of a hot engine start,
-between "idle" and "full power" in the case of a cold engine start ; then MANDATO¬
RILY place the throttle lever back to "idle" as soon as engine speed reaches 2500 rpm
(29.5%).
(3) While watching the RPM and JPT indicators, make sure the engine speed increases nor¬
mally. If starting is normal (600 °C < JPT < 650 °C), engine acceleration should be smooth
and N should be at least 2000 rpm (24 %) after about 1 5 seconds.
The "OIL" light should remain on when N < 2000 rpm (24 %) ; otherwise, replace the oil
pressure switch (see 06-5), and
The "BOV" light should remain out when : N > 2200 rpm (26.2 %).
(Engine modification No. 303 or 338 or
357 incorporated)
N = 2900 ± 1 00 rpm (34.5 % ± 1 .2 %)
(Engine modification No. 303 not
incorporated) ;
otherwise, shut down the engine.
(4) IMMEDIATELY shut down the engine if :
(a) the engine speed does not exceed 1300 rpm (15.5 %),
(b) there is no JPT indication,
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ -" ^ /Y\II\/-\V«7C- I
BREGUET AVIATION ^<4
^ - j^ô
^~**^> Restricted » « a au i a
MANUAL no
02
(c) the jet pipe temperature reaches 900°C or if it exceeds 850°C for more than 3 seconds.
If the jet pipe temperature peak systematically exceeds 850°C and is less than 900°C for
less than 3 seconds, perform trouble shooting.
If the jet pipe temperature peak exceeds 900°C and is less than 950°C for less than 3 sec¬
onds:
-perform trouble shooting,
-check the turbine visually, through the inside of the exhaust duct,
-report the trouble in the engine logbook so as to have the turbine blades checked during
the next periodic inspection.
If the jet pipe temperature peak exceeds 850°C for more than 3 seconds or if it exceeds
950°C, remove the engine and send it to second line maintenance;
(d) the engine "chatters" without accelerating
C - False starts
(1 ) Should engine shutdown be necessary during the starting sequence:
(a) bring the trottle lever to "stop",
(b) release "START" circuit breaker.
As soon as the engine stops:
(c) set "LP PUMP" switch to "off" position,
(d) set "LP MAIN COCK" switch to "off" position.
CAUTION:
IN CASE OF DANGER ONLY, CLOSE THE LP MAIN COCK AS SOON AS THE THROT¬
TLE LEVER IS RETURNED TO "STOP".
(2) If a start performed after a false start resulting in fuel accumulation in the exhaust duct,
move the trottle lever so as to obtain 7500 rpm (89.5%) as soon as engine operation is self-
sustained (N £ 2500 rpm (30%)). This procedure enables the trapped fuel to be evacuated
from the exhaust duct and nozzle flaps.
D - Idle RPM
(1) The idle RPM is 2900 ± 100 rpm (34.5 ± 1.2%). In some cases (e.g. on a cold engine),
the rotation speed may be less than the normal speed or oscillate between 2600 and 3200 rpm
(31 and 38%), even through the trottle lever is at idle. This phenomenon should disappear
when the engine temperature is stabilized.
(2) Check the following lights: "OIL", "BOV", "HYD.1", "HYD.2" ... out.
CAUTION:
-DURING STARTING, ENGINE RPM MAY BE INCREASED SO AS TO OBTAIN AL¬

TERNATOR CUTTING-IN (CUTTING-IN THRESHOLD AT 2930 rpm (35%) FOR A
LOAD OF12kVA).
-DURING RUN-UP, AS THE ALTERNATOR VENTILATION IS RESERVED, NEVER
BRING FOREIGN MATTER CLOSE TO THE VENTILATION PORT (RISK OF SUC¬
TION).
-ENGINE MODIFICATION No. 338 NOT INCORPORATED (ENGINE MODIFICATION
No. 303 INCORPORATED OR NOT):
STABILIZED ENGINE RPM'S BETWEEN 4000 AND 5000 rpm (47.6 AND 59.5%) ARE
TEMPORARILY FORBIDDEN (REACTION OF FIRST ENGINE ROTOR STAGE
BLADES).
-DO NOT REMAIN WITHIN THE 5500 TO 6000 rpm (65.5 TO 71.4%) RANGE CORRE¬
SPONDING TO ALTERNATOR CUTTING-IN (SPEED CHANGE BETWEEN 5630 AND
5730 rpm (67 AND 68.2%)).
AD
1 2 - 87 Restricted 7- 1 03 M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZLJ>-jiry.
BREGUET AVIATION ôF0^^^
MIRAGE F
^Zê^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
WARNING :
In case of accidental flameout of the engine during run-up, immediately :

- move the throttle lever to «STOP»,
- set the «LP PUMP» switch to «OFF».
ANY OMISSION OR DELAY CAUSES ACCUMULATION OF FUEL WHICH MAY IGNITE AND
A FIRE IS LIKELY TO BREAK OUT.
After complete engine stop :

- close the «LP MAIN COCK»,
- set the battery switch to «OFF».
BEFORE RESTARTING THE ENGINE, DETERMINE THE CAUSE OF FLAMEOUT.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
4- SUMMARY TABLE
Preparation Operations Parameters SAFETY MEASURES

or
sequences checks N (rpm) JPT (°C) remarks
Throttle lever
to «STOP»
«BATT» switch
to «ON»
«IGN-VENT»
switch to «IGN»
(plug P orS)
Invert the plug
(selection)
«LP MAIN COCK»
switch to «on» then;
within 1 5 seconds :
«LP PUMP»
switch to «on» «LP»-«L/HLP»
«R/H LP» -
«EMERG.
REGUL» lights
out
«OIL» light on
«BOV» light on Engine modification
No. 303 or 338 or
357 incorporated
«BOV» light on Engine modification
or out No. 303 not incorpo¬
rated
Stopwatch at 0
Start Button ~0 Button pushed

Stopwatch in for 1 second
Throttle lever to 300

(3.5%)
to
600
(7%)
1 - «idle» or 1 - Warm engine
2 - between 2 - Cold engine

«idle» and
«full power»
Stopwatch >2000 X t ^ 15 seconds Engine shut down if

(24%) between JPT reaches 900 °C
600 and or exceeds 850 °C for
650 more than 3 seconds
<850
Throttle lever to 2500

«idle» (in case of (29.5%)
cold engine
starting)
AE
BREGUET AVIATION

or or and
sequences checks N (rpm) JPT (°C) remarks
Idle Throttle lever to 2900 To be «OIL», RPM to be selected in

«idle» ±100 recorded «BOV», relation to stabilized
(34.5±1%) «HYD. 1», engine temperature
«HYD. 2»
lights out
BEWARE OF :
-SUCTION OF
ALTERNATORS
FOR THE ENTIRE
DURATION OF
OPERATION.
Throttle lever X 4000 ENGINE MODIFI¬

(47.6%) CATION No. 338
to NOT INCORPO¬
5000 RATED (ENGINE
(59.5%) MODIFICATION
No. 303 INCORPO¬
RATED OR NOT) :
DO NOT STABILIZE
WITHIN THIS
RANGE (REAC¬
TION OF FIRST
ENGINE ROTOR
STAGE BLADES)
Throttle lever s" 5500 -DO NOT STABI¬

(65.5%) LIZE WITHIN THIS
to RANGE (ALTER¬
6000 NATOR
(71.4%) CUTTING-IN).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^^Tsl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^jL _^^ - . .«a muai no
ENGINE SHUT-DOWN
1 - SCOPE
This sheet provides the operations required for engine shut-down and specially for checking the
run-down time.
2- INSTRUCTIONS
A- If required follow INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVE TO ENGINE FIRE (see 02-0).
B In the case where oil topping-up is anticipated after engine shut-down :

after a long duration run-up at idle RPM,
-
-after a test of EMERGENCY REGULATION without complying with the oil recovery instruc¬
tions, run the engine at 7200 RPM (86 %) approx. for about 2 minutes.
C- AFTER ENGINE OPERATION AT A SPEED GREATER THAN 7000 RPM (83.5 %), IT IS
MANDATORY NOT TO STOP THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY, BUT TO RUN IT AT7000 RPM (83.5%)
FOR AT LEAST ONE MINUTE SO AS TO VENTILATE AND COOL THE ENGINE CHAMBER.
3- ENGINE SHUT-DOWN
A- Stabilize the engine still running, at «Idle» (2900 ± 100 RPM, (34.5 % ± 1), engine temperature
stabilized).
B Override the idle stop and bring throttle lever to «stop» (in abutment), simultaneously start
the stopwatch.
Check that the «OIL» light comes on when N < 2000 rpm (24 %).
C Watch the drain outlet and ensure that the fuel flows normally.
D At the «signal» given by the mechanic placed near the jet pipe, stop the stopwatch (the «signal»
indicates the time when the turbine wheel stops). Wait 15 seconds approx. after bringing throttle lever
to «stop», then move to the jet pipe.
E After complete rotor stop, set «LP PUMP» switches to «off».
F - Set «LP MAIN COCK» switch to «closed». Allow at least 5 seconds to elapse (cock closing time).
G - Set «BATT» switch to «OFF».
4- CHECK OF RUN-DOWN TIME
A Check the engine run-down time and enter it in the corresponding aircraft form. It should be
greater than 25 seconds, with the hydraulic systems under pressure.
B - As each aircraft (airframe equipment + engine) is characterized by a proper and practically cons¬
tant (to a few seconds) run-down time, this check will be a comparison in relation to previous engine
stops.
NOTE : The influence of the wind (head or tail wind) shall be taken into account because it can
appreciably modify the run-down time.
C Should there be abnormal change of run-down time between two consecutive engine shut-downs,
refer to manual 06-5.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
5- SUMMARY TABLE

or or and
sequences checks N (rpm) JPT (°C) Remarks remarks
Idle 2900 + To be All engine Fire safety

100 recorded warning
(34.5±1%) lights out
If necessary, apply
oil recovery ins¬
tructions
Stopwatch at 0
Throttle lever )
to «stop» N. [
Stopwatch )
\ \ «OIL» light Turbine stop signal

Stop Stopwatch .. 0 on when N given by the ground
< 2000 rpm crew
(24%)
«BOV» light Engine modification
on No. 303 incorporated
«BOV» light Engine modification
on or out No. 303 not incorpo¬
rated
«LP PUMP» switch
to «off»
«LP MAIN COCK» Allow 5 seconds

switch to «off» to elapse
«BATT» switch Run-down time :
to «OFF»
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^>-^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^y ^-^ - »,am..a. nn
DRY VENTILATION
1 - SCOPE
This sheet specifies the operations to be carried out for a dry ventilation :
- if there is accidental accumulation of fuel inside the engine nozzle,
- after an aircraft grounding period which requires internal «ventilation» of air intake ducts and
engine,
- for each check relative to turbo-starter operation,
- after each engine installation in the aircraft,
- after a wet ventilation and before starting.
2- SAFETY MEASURES
Comply with the «INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE OF TURBO-STARTER» (see 02-7).
The operations below follow the operations stated in sheet «PREPARATION FOR ENGINE
STARTING OR VENTILATION» (see 02-7).
4- PROCEDURE
A Ensure that the throttle lever is in «stop» position and the inflight relight control in the «off»
position.
B - Set «BATT» switch to «ON».
C Set «IGN-VENT» switch to «VENT» after unlocking it from «S plug» position.
D Set «LP MAIN COCK» switch to «on» (guard down) then set «LP PUMP» switches to «on» within
1 5 seconds.
E - Check that «LP», «L/H LP», «R/H LP» and «EMERG. REGUL» lights are out.
F - Depress the start button for 1 second approx. - NEVER EXCEED 2 SECONDS - and start the
chronometer.
G Watch the RPM indicator and ensure that the engine runs normally. DO NOT MOVE THE
THROTTLE LEVER FROM STOP POSITION.
H Record the max. rotation speed and stop the chronometer upon turbo-starter cut-out. The «peak»
speed should be between 1300 and 1800 rpm (15.5 and 21.4 %).
Check the turbo-starter operating time (between 15 and 25 seconds).
I Wait until the rotor stops completely.
J - Set «LP PUMP» switches to «off».
K Set «LP MAIN COCK» switch to «off». Allow at least 5 seconds to elapse (cock closing time).
L - Set «IGN-VENT» switch to «IGN» (P or S plug).
M - Set «BATT» switch to «OFF».
AD
BREGUET AVIATION ^SSO
5- SUMMARY TABLE

or or and
sequences checks N (rpm) JPT (°C) Remarks remarks
Throttle lever to
. «STOP»
Inflight relight
control to «off»
«BATT» switch
to «ON»
«IGN-VENT»
switch to «VENT»
«LP MAIN COCK»
switch to «on»
then, within
15 seconds,
«LP PUMP» «LP» -«L/H
switch to «on» LP»
«R/H LP»
«EMERG.
REGUL»
lights out
Stopwatch at 0
Button 0 Button pushed in for

Stopwatch 1 second
Stopwatch Between t= 15 to 25 Turbostarter cutout

1300 seconds
(15.5%)
and 1800
(21.4%)
>
«LP PUMP»
switch to «off »
«LP MAIN COCK» Allow 5 seconds to

switch to «off» elapse
«IGN-VENT»
switch to «IGN»
(plug P or S)
«BATT» switch to
«OFF»
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
SECTION 8
RUN-UP- CHECK FLIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
8-0 OPERATION CHECK FLIGHTS
- Operation check flights 8-001
8-1 POST-INSPECTION RUN-UP
- Post-inspection run-up 8-101
8-2 CHECK FLIGHTS
-Aircraft check flight 8-201

- Engine check flight ' 8-211
8-3 TAXIING TEST
-Taxiing test 8-301
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ÎC^^^-ô
MIRAGE
....,,..,
F
no
OPERATION CHECK FLIGHTS
1 - GENERAL
Among other maintenance and repair operations,' the aircraft are submitted to operation check
flights, in order to check :
- the qualities of the equipment
- the quality of the maintenance operations previously performed on the equipments.
2- CIRCUMSTANCES
A Systematical flights
- After all maintenance operations.

-.During overall repair after a «long term» storage.
- After :
- replacement of the engine

- replacement or reassembly of main parts of the airframe (wings, tail unit).
- a major repair.
B - Optional flights
- Upon requirement of the responsible technician, in some circumstances he is able to estimate.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
POST-INSPECTION RUN-UP
1 - PRESENTATION
MIRAGE F1 No.
ENGINE No.
AIRFRAME HOURS
ENGINE HOURS
NUMBER OF LANDINGS
DATE
QFE Gmd temp.
Operating time Number of Run-down

Engine starts
Total A/B A/B ignitions time
2- GENERAL
For the entire duration of the run-up, check the various systems for leaks and especially aircraft-
to-engine connections :
- «dry engine» supply pipe,
- «A/B» supply pipe, including sleeve couplings,
- pressurization of fuel tanks,
- pressurization of air conditioning system.
A In addition to preparation for engine starting or ventilation (see 02-7), prepare the aircraft in order
to check :
- fuel pressurization system during run-up (see 06-2),
- A/C power supply system during run-up (see 08-1 ),
| - peak stress on first engine rotor stage blades (depending on frequency of inspection) (see 06-5).
B Disconnect the plug of a main U/C telescopic strut switch and short the terminals E.F.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION. ^r3
4- BEFORE STARTING
- Record the indications shown on fuel gauges and fuel remaining indicator.
- During runup, record these parameters when each warning light on fuel transfer indicator comes
on.
Fuel gauges
Fuel remaining
Sequence Feeder tanks Fuselage tanks Remarks
indicator
LH RH LH RH
Start
lu lh
LH RH
m
LU LH
[3] RH
0 LH
[4] RH
LU LH
LU RH
FUEL
Stop
5- PROCEDURE
A Dry ventilation (see 02-7)
- N max. :
- Turbostarter operating time :
B Engine starting (see 02-7)
- JPT max. :
- Acceleration time from 0 to 2000 rpm (0 to 24%)
- N at which «OIL» light goes out :
- N at which «BOV» light goes out :
- N for alternator cutting-in : alt. 1 : alt. 2
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DfeSSMll
BREGUET
ti^J>^tru.
AVIATION^^F3^-^^
MIRAGE F
^£5=^-^0^ Restricted MANUAL 02
At idle
- Idle rating :
- Inverter resetting - «EMG-0^» light out :
- Checking hydraulic pressures :
- Extinction of lights : «HYDR. 1» : «HYDR. 2» :
«servo 1» : «servo 2» :
«ANC» : «Em.B» :
- Stabilator switch on «PITCH» - Light out :

- Rudder switch on «ANTI SLIP» - Light out :
- Electric pump «on» - «EMG.HYD» light out :
«EP» light stays out.
- Make sure there is no air blowing out of one of the feeder tank pressure relief pipes.
C Checking the peak stress on first engine rotor stage blades (See 06-5)
- Max. stress :
- Corresponding N :
D Checking the engine in dry operation (See 06-5)

-Full power dry
N: JPT:
- «JPT EMG REG» : «OFF» : N : JPT :
«AUTO» : N : JPT :
-Deceleration time :
- Acceleration time :
- Full power dry :
N : JPT :
- Checking the accelerations
N =4000 rpm (47.5%)
N = 5000 rpm (59.5%)
N = 6000 rpm (71%)
N =7000 rpm (83%)
-Idle
N : JPT :
E Checking the engine in AB operation (See 06-5)
(1) Normal AB ignition

-Full power dry
N : JPT :
AB indicating
Injection («INJ» light) : Operation («ON» light) :
Time delay for «INJ» light out :

N variation :
- Min. AB
N : JPT
- Max. AB
N: JPT
- AB cutout
«AB-ON» light out
(2) Checking the SRL system

- Time delay for «INJ» light on when N > 8100 rpm (96%)
- Time delay for «AB-ON» light on at max. thrust :
- N variation :
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
F Brief test of engine operation in emergency regulation (see 06-5-51 5H)

- Light ON :
- Operation by means of control switch in direction «flow increase» :
- Operation by means of switch :
- Light OUT :
G - Hydraulic pressure check : RPM = 8400 (100%)

- Servo 1 : Servo 2 :
-ANC: Em.B:
H - Checking flight controls for operation : RPM = 7000 (83%)
(1) Pitch control :

- Stick in nose-up attitude :
- Stick in nose-down attitude :
- Trim in nose-up attitude : Indicator

- Trim in nose-down attitude : Indicator
(2) Roll control :

- Stick on the left :
- Stick on the right :
- Trim on the left : Indicator:
- Trim on the right : Indicator
(3) Rudder control :

- Rudder pedals on the left :
- Rudder pedals on the right
- Trim on the left : Indicator
- Trim on the right : Indicator
(4) Arthur :
- «AUTO» :
-«HIGH» :
-«LOW» :
(5) Slats-flaps :
-Half-flaps Indicator
- All down : Indicator
(6) Auto slats (incidence test)
(7) Combat flaps :

-Control lever readied
- flaps : Indicator
- slats : Indicator
- Control lever retracted

- flaps : Indicator
- slats : Indicator
AF
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(8) Autopilot test

-Engagement - disengagement with control stick:
-Connection - disconnection:
-Altitude monitoring:
-Pitch beep trim:
-Roll beep trim:
-Disengagement upon force application:
-Emergency disengagement:
(9) Flying aids integrated test (do not perform other checks during this test):
J - Checking air-conditioning system for operation
(1 ) IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT N < 3500 rpm (41 .5 %)
-Set master switch to "on".

-SLOWLY set N : 8000 RPM (95%)
Cockpit:
-Selector switch on "AUTO" (twelve o'clock position). Set the selector switch to
"COLD", then to "HOT" and check that the valve position indicator moves accordingly.
-Set the selector switch to "MANUAL" : give impulses toward "COLD" then toward
"HOT" and check that the valve position indicator moves accordingly.
-Set back the selector switch to "AUTO" (position "HOT").
-Trip the "EMG COLD" switch (in the arrow direction) and check that the valve position
indicator moves toward "COLD". Set back the switch to the normal position.
Equipment :
-Switch on "AUTO" ; the temperature gauge should be stabilized on 27°C approximately.
-Set the switch to "MANUAL". Using the control switch, give impulses toward "COLD",
then toward "HOT" and check that the temperature gauge moves accordingly.
-Set back the switch to "AUTO".
Emergency demisting (to be performed very quickly):
-Demist switch on "DEMIST" ; check that warm air flows, then set back the switch in the
closed position.
-N < 3500 rpm (41 .5 %) ; set the master switch to "off" position.
(2) Check that warm air does not come from pre-cooling air intake scoop.
K - Checking pressurization of fuel tanks (See 06-2).
RPM = 6500 (77.5%)
INVERTED-FLIGHT
ACCUMULATOR WING/FUSELAGE TANKS FEEDER TANKS
PYLON TANKS
L - Checking "U/C-NOT DOWN" indicating system
-Move the throttle lever to "full power dry".

-Check that the light goes out.
-Slowly return the throttle lever towards "idle" until the light flashes.
-Check for: 8000 < N < 8100 rpm.
(95.2% < N < 96.4%).
AG
BREGUET
fl^>-%-\l
AVIATION^c^^^-^Ô
MIRAGE F
^Z2=£*^^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
M Checking of AC generation system during runup (see 08-1)
N - Engine stop (see 02-7)

- RPM for «OIL» light illumination :
- Engine rundown time :
6- FINAL STEPS
A This shall be performed after checking :

- fuel pressurization during runup (see 06-2),
- AC generation during runup (see 08-1),
- peak stress on first engine rotor stage blades (see 06-5).
B Connect the mobile connector of the telescopic strut switch and ensure, on U/C configuration
indicator, that the corresponding warning light is on.
CAUTION :
ENTER INFORMATION IN THE AIRCRAFT FORM FOR THE PILOT WHO HAS TO PER¬
FORM THE FIRST FLIGHT FOLLOWING RUN-UP SO THAT HE PERFORMS THE WEEKLY
TEST OF THE EMERGENCY REGULATION SYSTEM.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
AIRCRAFT CHECK FLIGHT
1 -GENERAL
DATE
MIRAGE F1 aircraft No.
Engine No.
Airframe hours
Engine hours (dry, afterburner)
Number of landings
WEATHER REPORT
Ground temperature
Tropopause (temp., H)
Takeoff time
Landing time
Dry operating hours
AB operating hours
Number of AB ignitions
Engine shutdown time
2 -BEFORE STARTING
- Exterior inspection
Entering cockpit and strapping-in
I
- As per Flight Manual
- Cabin checks
NOTE : Record on the list all particular checks to be made.
3 -STARTING
- As per Flight Manual
- Record the following in the order :
(1 ) «B.O.V.» indicator light on (engine modif. No. 303 incorporated)

(2) Start timing while pressing start button (max. = 2 s) =* 1 8 s
(3) «Ol L» indicator flight must remain on until N = 2000 rpm (24%)
is reached
(4) «B.O.V.» light out at 2200 rpm (26%) (engine modif.

No. 303 incorporated)
(5) Time mark at stabilized idle

(6) Idle
(7) JPT
(8) Number of pulses
(9) «ALT 1 » and «ALT 2» lights out (engine at power)
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
4 - AFTER STARTING
-Normal checks as per Flight Manual.
-Record:
A - Hydraulic pressures
-"SERVO" system 1
-"SERVO" system 2
-Ancillaries ("ANC")
-Emergency brakes
B - Testing of combat high-lift devices
-Slat/flap switch to "NORMAL"
-Combat flap control lever out
-Check : half flaps out - full slats out
-"cbt.F" light steadily illuminated
-Extend all the flaps in manual mode: "cbt.F" light flashes
-Retract the combat flap control lever : "cbt.F" light goes out
-Set the slat/flap switch to "EMG.RETR" and check for:
-slats and flaps in
-"SI?" failure warning light illumination
-Reset the slat/flap switch to "NORMAL".
-"SI?" failure warning light goes out ; flaps extend
C - Testing of auxiliary servo-control barrel 2
-Connect the autopilot (green "AP" light on)
-Tilt "STICK UNCOUPLE" switch
-Check for:
-illumination of red "AP" light on failure warning panel
-sounding of warning horn
-flashing of amber "AP" light
-Actuate the control stick, which should move freely
-Reset "STICK UNCOUPLE" switch to "normal" position
-Press the autopilot disengagement lever
-Make sure that the lights go out
-Reset the trim actuators to neutral
D - Checking of shock cones
-In manual mode, extend and partially retract the shock cones
-In "AUTO" mode, check for complete retraction
E - Carry out built-in tests
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ \^-"-" /Vil IXMVJC. I
BREGUET AVIATIONô. _^^ - ...,... M
^>_^ -"~-*_ Restricted MANUAL 02
5- TAXIING
Normal checks as per «Flight Manual»
Record :
(1) Aircraft brake check L
- Check emergency braking system at very low speed (effectiveness, symmetry)

(2) Pitch damper check
(3) Steering control check :
- Low sensitivity
- High sensitivity
(4) With steering control OFF :
- Aircraft behaviour during taxiing

(5) IFF test
6- BEFORE LINE-UP
Normal checks as per «Flight Manual»
Test of emergency regulation system
(As per «Flight Manual» , weekly test of emergency regulation system)
Record altimeter errors
- Normal
- Standby
7- AFTER LINE-UP
(1) Heading check :
- Standby compass
- Spherical indicator
- Navigation indicator
- Map display unit
(2) Fuel check (with throttle open) : fuel transfer indicator OUT
(3) Engine checks
- Idle 2900 ± 100 rpm (34.5 ± 1 %)
- Acceleration from idle to full power dry (time required to reach

8300 rpm (99 %)< 8 sec.)
- Parameters at full power dry :
Engine speed = 8400 ± 60 rpm (100 ± 0.7%)
JPT = 750 + f0°C
AF 0 ono
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
8- MIN. AB IGNITION
From stabilized full power dry to min. AB
Record :
- max. hunting of engine speed
- injection time (time delay : 8 s)
engine speed (stabilized)
-JPT (stabilized)
- AB indications
- injection («INJ» light)
-operation («ON» light)
9- AB CUTOUT
Record :
- engine parameters at full power dry
- deceleration (time from full power dry to 3250 rpm (39 %)< 15 s)
10 -SLAM RELIGHT LIGHTING TEST (FROM IDLE TO MIN. AB)

- Record injection light coming on at engine speed > 8100 rpm (96 %)
(time delay : 3 s)
Engine speed (stabilized)
-JPT (stabilized)
11 -TAKEOFF
- At time signal, release the brakes ; record :
- fuel remaining indicator reading
- Select max. AB ; record :
- max. hunting of engine speed
-JPT (stabilized)
- U/C retraction :
- retraction time (^ 7 s)
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
| 12 -MAX. AB CLIMB TO FLIGHT LEVEL 300

IAS = 500kt M =0.95
- Every 10,000 ft, record in the following order :
Fuel remaining
Flight level Time indicator RPM JPT Remarks
100 0
200
300
- During the outbound climb :
- autopilot response
- air-conditioning check
- cabin air-conditioning
- equipment bay air-conditioning
- check :
- oxygen
-IFF
- standby horizon
- spherical indicator
- sight
- radio-altimeter (dropout)
13- AB CUT-OUT AT FLIGHT LEVEL 300

- Check that «AB-ON» light goes out
14- LEVEL FLIGHT AT FLIGHT LEVEL 300

- Check :
- DOPPLER radar
- RADIO-COMPASS
-VOR
- Navigation indicator
-Map display unit

- Spherical indicator (vertical pointer)
AF
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
1 5 -ACCELERATION FROM M = 0.9 to M = 1 .5
CAUTION.
CHECK BEFORE ANY ACCELERATION:
-SHOCK CONE PUSHBUTTON: PUSHED IN

-HIGH-LIFT DEVICE SWITCH: "OFF".
NOTE: Acceleration at flight level 300 : start acceleration at 1850 liters minimum.
(1480 kg, 3261 lbs, 388 Imp.gals, 481 US.gals).
-Fuel remaining indicator reading
-AB ignition-start stopwatch
-Engine speed maximum oscillation value
-Check AB indicator lights
-Check autopilot operation
-Record the following in the order :
Fuel remaining Engine Shock cone

M Time JPT Remarks
indicator speed Mach No.
0.9 0
.
1.1
1.2
1.3 Shock cone

extension
M.,.28 1^
1.4 Overspeed
Engine speed =
8900 RPM (106%)
JPT = 730 +_ 2Q°C
1.5
AE
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
| 16 -MAX. AB CLIMB AT M = 1 .5
to flight level 500
J (This check is optional and will be performed only if there is enough fuel remaining).
-Announce start of climb.
Fuel remaining Engine Shock-cone
Flight level Time JPT Remarks
300 0
360
400
450
500
-Check response of altitude monitoring at 50,000 ft
-Disconnect the autopilot
-Check cabin altitude ...
-Cut out the AB ; record:

-engine speed maximum oscillation value
-correct operation of indicating system
17 -MANEUVERS - DECELERATION - DESCENT TO FLIGHT LEVEL 200
-Full power dry deceleration (airbrakes and turns)
-Check shock cone retraction (down to M = 1 .27)
-Record Mach number at overspeed cut-out (M = 1 .41 ±0.08)
-Obtain subsonic IAS at 40,000 ft
-Record fuel transfer indications
-Check A/C attitude hold
Fuselage fuel gages Feeder tank fuel gages Fuel remaining indicator
LH RH LH RH
-Connect the autopilot and retract the airbrakes

-Fast descent to flight level 200
-Check A/C attitude hold
18 -HIGH-LIFT DEVICE CHECK AT FLIGHT LEVEL 200
A - High-lift device switch to "NORMAL"

-Mach No. = 0.9
-High load factor turns, record angle-of-attack indications:
Slat extension at i=8° approx. Slat retraction at i=7° approx. Remarks
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
B - High-lift device switch to "NORMAL" ; select combat slats and flaps

-Reduce engine speed to 7000 RPM (83%) - Maintain flight level 200
-Reduce IAS - Check for high-lift device extension at IAS = 300 kt
-Set combat high-lift device switch to "OFF" ; check for high-lift device retraction.
19 -NWS AND RADAR FUNCTIONAL TEST

(If fuel reserve is sufficient).
20 -LOW SPEED - FLIGHT LEVEL 200

-Ensure that autopilot is connected
-"U/C-NOT-DOWN" check:
-Reduce engine speed until it ranges between 8000 (95%) and 8100 RPM (96%)
-Record IAS at "U/C" light illumination (215 ± 5 kt)
-Extend U/C and flaps
-Check the lights for correct operation:
-U/C
-Flaps
-Drop IAS to angle-of-attack limit
-Record:
Angle-of- 6° 9°5 12°5 14° 15°5 17°

attack
Blue Blue Green Warning horn Yellow Angle-of-
Green Yellow Carry on while Red attack
disconnecting limit
autopilot
-Accelerate, retract U/C and flaps and perform normal letdown.

-Check for radio-altimeter cut-in.
21 -SLAM RELIGHT LIGHTING TEST AT LOW ALTITUDE (2000 ft)

-Initial engine speed : 7000 RPM (83%), IAS =300 kt, AB MAX. ignition:
-Check "INJ" light coming on (time delay: 3 sec.)
-Engine speed > 8100 RPM (96%)
-Engine speed maximum oscillation
-Acceleration to 450 kt (580 kt for new engine)
-Estimate aircraft behavior
-Cut out AB and record in this order:
-engine speed maximum oscillation
-JPT variation
-indicating system operation
AQ
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
22 -APPROACH - LANDING
Check:
-radio-altimeter readings (below 2500 ft)

and radio-altimeter indicator lights
-navigation indicator
-map display unit
-Perform ILS (autopilot) or GCA approach (according to airfield possibilities)
-check sight head approach mode
-Landing:
-use the brake chute
-use maximum braking C

-anti-skid system response
-At the end of runway, record error reading on:

-navigation indicator
(NAV1 - HDG1 - NAV2 - HDG2 - MH - EMG)
-spherical indicator
-map display unit
23 -RETURN TO PARKING AREA
-Carry out normal checks as per "Flight Manual", and record:
-the indications shown on:
-fuel gages
-fuel remaining indicator
-engine speed at IDLE RPM (Stabilized)
-engine rundown time
24 -PILOT'S REMARKS
25 -PILOT'S NAME: Signature
MECHANIC'S NAME: Signature.
AF
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ENGINE CHECK FLIGHT
1 - PRESENTATION
Date
Mirage F1 A/C No
Airframe hours
Engine No
Engine operating hours
Type of the last periodic inspection
Number of starts
Number of A/B ignitions
A/B operating hours
WEATHER REPORT
Ground temperature
Tropopause (Altitude temperature)
Take-off time
Landing time
Dry operating hours
A/B operating hours
Number of A/B ignitions

Run down time
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
2 - BEFORE STARTING
-Exterior inspection
-Entering cockpit and strapping-in As per Flight Manual
-Cockpit check
-Start on "IGN" (P plug or S plug).
}
NOTE: Note on the list all particular checks to be made. [_
3 - STARTING
-As per Flight Manual
- Record the following in the order:
(1) "B.O.V." light on (engine mod. No. 303 incorporated)

(2) Start timing while pressing start button (max. = 2 s) L
(3) "B.O.V." light out at 2200 rpm (26 %) (engine mod. No. 303 incorporated)
(4) Stop timing at stabilized idle =l 18 s {_
(5) Idle E
(6) JPT [
(7) Number of pulses |_
(8) "ALT 1 " and "ALT 2" lights out [

4 - ON RUNUP AREA
- Check emergency regulation (weekly check of
emergency regulation as per Flight Manual)
5 - AIRCRAFT LINED-UP
- Record the following in the order:
(1 ) Idle (2900 ± 100 rpm) (34.5 % ± 1 %)
(2) Acceleration check (idle to full power dry)
(time required to reach 8300 rpm (99 %) < 8 s)
(3) Parameters at full power dry:
Engine speed: 8400 ± 60 rpm (100 % ± 0.7 %)
+ 5 o^
JPT: 750
10
AB IGNITION
From stabilized full power dry to min. AB, record:
- max. RPM hunting
- injection time (time delay: 8 s)

- RPM (stabilized)
- JPT (stabilized)
- AB indicator- lights:
- injection
- operation
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION -V^==
AB CUT-OUT
Record :
- engine speed maximum oscillation
- full power dry engine speed
- JPT (evolution)
- deceleration (time from full power dry to 3250 RPM

(38.5%) < 15 sec.)
8- SLAM RELIGHT LIGHTING (FROM IDLE TO AB MIN.)
- Check for «INJ» light coming ON at engine speed > 8100 RPM (96%)
(time delay : 3 sec.)
- Engine speed (stabilized)
-JPT (stabilized)
9- TAKE-OFF
Start stopwatch, release the brakes, and record
- fuel remaining indicator
Select max. AB and record :
-JPT (stabilized)
10 -MAX. AB CLIMB TO FLIGHT LEVEL 300
IAS = 500kt M = 0.95
- Every 1 0,000 ft, record in the following order :
Flight level' Time Fuel remaining Engine JPT Remarks

indicator speed
100 0
200
300
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
11 -AB CUT-OUT AT FLIGHT LEVEL 300
Record :
-engine speed maximum oscillation
-correct operation of indicating system
| 1 2 -ACCELERATION FROM M = 0.9 TO M = 1 .5
CAUTION
CHECK BEFORE ANY ACCELERATION :
-SHOCK CONE PUSHBUTTON PUSHED IN :
-HIGH-LIFT DEVICE SWITCH : "OFF"
NOTE: Acceleration at flight level 300 : start acceleration at 1850 liters minimum (1480 kg,
3261 lbs, 388 imp.gals, 481 US gals).
-Fuel remaining indicator reading
AB ignition - start stopwatch
Engine speed maximum oscillation
Check AB indicator lights
Check autopilot
Record the following in the order :
Fuel remaining Engine Shock cone

M Time JPT Remarks
0.9 0
1
1.1
1.2
1.3 Shock cone
extension n no
,
M = 1-28-ooi
1.4 Overspeed
Engine speed =
8900 RPM (106%)
JPT = 730 +_ 2^C
1.5
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^2=
MIRAGE F
I 13 -MAX. AB CLIMB at M = 1.5 TO FLIGHT LEVEL 500
- Announce start of climb
Flight Time Fuel remaining Engine JPT Shock cone Remarks

level indicator Speed Mach No.
300 0
360
400
450
500
- Carry out acceleration up to the aircraft limit (never exceed M = 2.1)
- Cut out the AB; record :
- engine speed max. oscillation
- correct operation of indicating system
14 -MANEUVERS -DECELERATION -DESCENT

- Full power dry deceleration (airbrakes and turns)
- Check shock cone retraction (down to M = 1 .27)
- Record Mach number at overspeed cut-out (M =1.41 ± 0.08)
- Subsonic descent to 1500 ft (when initiating the descent,

the combat flap lever should be retracted)
15 -SLAM RELIGHT LIGHTING TEST AT 2000 ft

Max. AB ignition (initial RPM = 7000 (83 %) - IAS 300 kt)
- Check «INJ» light coming on (time delay : 3 sec.)
- Engine speed > 8100 RPM (96 %)
- Engine speed max. oscillation
Carry out acceleration up to 450 kt (580 kt for new engine)
Cut out AB and record in this order :
-JPT evolution
- correct operation of indicating system.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
16 -APPROACH - LANDING - RETURN TO PARKING AREA
- Carry out normal checks as per Flight Manual and record :
- Fuel gauge indications
- Fuel remaining indicator reading
- Engine speed at stabilized idle
- Engine run-down
17 -PILOT'S REMARKS
18 -PILOT'S NAME Signature
MECHANIC'S NAME Signature
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^-" -*< / V\ |l\/-\V-7[_ |
BREGUET AVIATION ^l_- ^~*^> ,..,.,... ,.
^ ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 02
ROLLING TEST
1 - CHARACTERISTICS
MIRAGE F1 AIRCRAFT No
ENGINE No
AIRFRAME OPERATING HOURS
ENGINE OPERATING HOURS
NUMBER OF LANDINGS
DATE
QFE | | GROUND TEMP. |
2 - GENERAL
This test can be carried out either:

-as a specific check (e.g. braking or AB ignition tests), or
-for trouble shooting after unconclusive investigations during static ground runs (e.g. fai¬
lures that may be due to vibrations).
This sheet describes the preparatives for the rolling test and the test itself. The specific
checks concerning the test will be covered in this sheet. Only those of the tests that are found
to be necessary should be performed.
This test is to be carried out upon approval of the local command who will estimate the
need for it and also take all necessary safety measures with due allowance for requested in¬
spection and the failure investigated.
The required amount of fuel is 2000 I approx. (528 US.gal., 3526 lb, 1600 kg).
The fuel tanks should only be partially filled except where a fully loaded A/C is needed
for the test.
The aircraft is to be prepared as for an ordinary flight.
CAUTION:
MAKE SURE THAT THE SEAT SAFETY DEVICES HAVE BEEN REMOVED.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" -** /V\|I\/-\V^L l
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£, ê=^> -, m i a . nr^
» « a
^ ^~^> Restricted MANUAL .
02
4 - BEFORE STARTING
-Exterior inspection
-Entering cockpit and strapping-in
-Cockpit check }J" As per maintenance and flight manuals
5 - STARTING
-As per flight manual
-Record the following in the order given below:
(1 ) "B.O.V." light on (engine modif. No. 303 incorporated)
(2) Start timing while pressing-starter button (max. = 2 s)
(3) "B.O.V." light out at 2200 rpm (26 %) (engine modif. No. 303 incorporated)
(4) Time mark at stabilized idle si18s [
(5) Idle
(6) JPT I I
(7) Number of pulses

(8) "ALT 1 " and "ALT 2" lights out (engine at power)
6 - AFTER STARTING
Normal checks as per flight manual.
Record the hydraulic pressures:
- System 1 (servo)
- System 2 (servo)
- Ancillaries
- Emergency brake
7 - TAXIING
Record:
(1) Braking check
- emergency braking check at very low speed
(symmetrical effect)
(2) Pitch damper check
(3) Steering check
- Low sensitivity
- High sensitivity
(4) Steering cut-out (aircraft behavior during taxiing)
- Without any pilot action on the pedals,
the aircraft should maintain its
trajectory without any significant
deviation.
- Make sure that there are no abnormal
vibrations after the steering system
is cut out.
AB
06 - 89 Restricted 8 - 302
BREGUET AVIATION
8- BEFORE LINE-UP
Test of emergency regulation system
(as per flight manual : weekly test of emergency regulation system)
9- AFTER LINE-UP
(1) Heading check :
- standby compass
- spherical indicator
- navigation indicator
(2) Fuel check :
- transfer panel lights OUT (with throttle open)

(3) Engine checks :
- idle (2900 ± 100 RPM) (34.5 % ± 1 %)
- acceleration from idle to full power dry with time required to reach
8300 RPM (99 %)< 8 sec.
- parameters at full power dry (8400 ± 60 RPM)
(100% ±0.7%)
JPT (750° C + f0)
10 -AB IGNITION AT MINIMUM SETTING

From stabilized full power dry to minimum AB, record :
- RPM maximum oscillation

- injection time (8 sec. time delay)
- engine speed (stabilized)
-JPT (stabilized)
- AB indicator lights :
- injection (INJ)
-operation (ON)
- braking power with min. AB
(the A/C if lightly loaded may tend to swerve on a wet rupway).
11 -AB CUT-OUT
Record :
- deceleration (time from full power dry to

3250 RPM (39%)<15sec.)
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
12 -S. R.L. TEST (from idle to min. A/B)

Record injection light coming on for engine speed
> 8100 RPM (96 %) (3 sec. time delay)
- Engine speed (stabilized)
-JPT (stabilized)
13 -ACCELERATION - SHUT - DOWN
At «Pip», release the brakes and record :
- remaining fuel indicator reading
Set maximum A/B and record :
- RPM maximum oscillation
-JPT (stabilized)
At 100 kt :
- A/B cut-out and throttle fully retarded

- brake chute opening (unless otherwise specified for test)
- braking (use normal power)
Brake chute jettisoning.
14 -RETURN TO PARKING AREA

Carry out normal checks as per flight manual and record :
- fuel gauge reading
- remaining fuel indicator reading
- engine speed (RPM) at stabilized idle
- engine shut-down time.
AB
AVK>NS MARCH DASSAULT
MEOUET AVIATION
jL>~4r&.
^cJ^JS*^
MIRAGE F
^^-^<^ Restricted MANUAL 02
SECTION 9
MISCELLANEOUS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
9-0 GENERAL
- Classification criteria of fuel leaks at integral tanks 9-001
9-1 WEEKLY INSPECTION
- Check of oxygen system 9-101

-Check of indicating panel lights ., 9-102
- Check of slat asymmetry comparator 9-104
- Weekly inspection of ejection seat 9-105
Check of clogging indicator on hydraulic system connection blocks 9-108
- Check of inflight refueling probe 9-110
- Brief check of laser window and true airspeed indicator lights 9-112
- Brief check of fatiguemeter and counter readings 9-113
- Check of NWS equipment air dryers 9-114
- Visual inspection of protective grid of cabin pressurization equipment and
cabin reference pressure tapping 9-120
- Corrosion inspection 9-121
- Inspection of ventral fin riveting 9-123
9-2 VARIOUS OPERATIONS
- Lubrication and protection of hinges 9-201

- Logging of swivel tubes of main undercarriage 9-207
- Oiling of hinges 9-209
Figure No. Page
1 INSPECTION OF EJECTION SEAT 9-106

1 R INSPECTION OF VENTRAL FIN RIVETING 9-124
2 MAINTENANCE OF FLIGHT CONTROLS 9-203
3 MAINTENANCE OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS 9-205
4 OILING OF FLIGHT CONTROLS 9-210
5 OILING OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS 9-212
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA OF FUEL LEAKS AT

INTEGRAL TANKS
1 - SCOPE
Classification of leakages and working-out of the required remedies.
2- GENERAL
The external leaks are usually tolerable if they remain at a low level after the pressure drop inside
tanks.
The leaks entailing fuel flowing in the air ducts, the engine chamber, or related to these leakages,
MAY NOT BE TOLERATED. Only stains and seepage are permitted.
Fuel accumulation in a compartment is NOT PERMITTED.
CLASSIFICATION AND REPAIR CRITERIA
CLASSIFICATION OF LEAKAGES REQUIRED REMEDIES
Stain - Colored trace of fuel

- Wiped, does not reappear within one
hour
Seepage - Large stain

- When wiped, reappears within one hour.
A drop may even appear during that
time.
Drop by drop - Several drops within one hour

leakage without pressurization.
- To know its importance, apply pressure
to the tanks for three hours.
Under such circumstances, the drop - May be allowed to continue
by drop leakage is lower than or providing, it is monitored
about 60 drops per minute. daily.
- To be repaired during the
next long term storage of
the aircraft unless it grows and
is included in a higher class.
Drip - More than 60 drops per minute - To be repaired as soon as

possible. An impending
periodical inspection may
however be waited for, while
watching the drip regularly.
Trickle - Drops cannot be numbered. - Immediate repair.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT" ^ J< ^ /Y\ll\/-\VJrL. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-~ js^ . , ..,.,,,.. rto
^ ^^-^ Restrjcted MANUAL 02
CHECK OF NORMAL OXYGEN SYSTEM

1 - GENERAL
The following operations are complementary to the operations carried out during daily in¬
spection of equipment (see 02-5). These operations shall be systematically performed when
replacing a component of the oxygen system or when reconnecting the quick-release coupl¬
ing. In that case, check the radio equipment (microphone and earphones) for correct opera¬
tion.
-Oxygen mask
-Helmet (headset)
-11 5-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply.
CAUTION:
~ WHEN CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING THE OXYGEN LINE OF THE MASK,
NEVER PRESS FOR ANY REASON THE FLEXIBLE PARTS (HOSE AND MOLDED
END-PIECE) OF THE OXYGEN LINES OF THE MASK AND JUNCTION ASSEMBLY.
ONLY METAL PARTS OF THE CHEST CONNECTOR ARE TO BE HANDLED AS FOL¬
LOWS:
-COMPRESS THE CONNECTOR BY BEARING ON THE STOP LOCATED ON THE
REAR SECTION OF EACH END-PIECE.
-ROTATE THE LOCKING BUSH IN THE APPROPRIATE DIRECTION.
(1 ) Apply power to the aircraft systems.
(2) Check oxygen tank contents (see 02-5).
(3) Open the normal oxygen cock, then the emergency oxygen cock, and check that the
5 mn OX" warning light goes out.
IT IS MANDATORY THAT THE COCKS BE OPENED IN THE ABOVE SEQUENCE.

(4) Put on the headset.
(5) Switch on the warning horn.
4 - CHECKING OPERATION OF NORMAL SYSTEM
CAUTION:
HTURDER TO AVOID DAMAGING THE REGULATOR:
-NEVER APPLY PRESSURE SUPPLY TO THE REGULATOR WHEN THE CHEST CON¬
NECTOR PORT IS BLANKED OFF OR AFTER THE BLANKING COVER HAS BEEN FIT¬
TED UPON REMOVAL OF THE JUNCTION ASSEMBLY.
-NEVER BLANK OFF, EVEN PARTIALLY, THE DELIVERY PORT OF A REGULATOR
TO WHICH PRESSURE IS APPLIED (e.g., CHEST CONNECTOR PORT) WHEN THE SE¬
LECTOR IS SET TO "S" (EMERGENCY).
NOTE: Disregarding these directions would result in an overpressure with subsequent damage
to the "demand" delivery diaphragm.
This danger is not present wnen the mask is connected or when the junction assembly
is connected to the seat stowage connector.
A - Manual selector set to "N" (normal).

(1 ) On the oxygen indicator, ensure that the position repeater shows a black "N" on a white
background.
mask to the chest connector. On the oxygen indicator, the blinker indicates
$ack"Connect a
(no flow), as the threshold of the flow detector should not be exceeded.
(3) Check that the audio warning signal is heard.

NOTE: A very slight flow perceived when the mask is not placed on the face corresponds to
normal operation.
AE
BREGUET
/L^^tsi.
AVIATION^,r3=i=s3^<0>
MIRAGE F
^C*****^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
(4) Place the mask on the face, breathe in and out two or three times ; no difficulty in breathing
should be experienced.
The failure warning panel «OX.REG»light should go out and the audio signal should be cut off.
Check that the blinker is :

- white when breathing in,
- black when breathing out.
(5) Depress the overpressure button. A slight overpressure should be felt in the mask.
(6) Start a stopwatch when removing the mask (continuous flow). The «OX. REG» Ugh;: should
come on and the warning horn should sound after 22 ± 3 seconds.
(7) Cancel overpressure by depressing the button again.
NOTE : As overpressure is intended to improve mask sealing when in polluted environment, it is

obviously used only with the manual selector set to «100 %» ; the position of this selector
is however of no importance during the test.
(8) Cancel the failure by inhaling in the mask.
(9) Start a stopwatch when disconnecting the mask (flow stop). The «OX. REG» light should come
on and the warning horn should sound after 22 ± 3 seconds.
(10) Connect the mask and cancel the failure by inhaling.
B Manual selector set to «100 %»
(1 ) Check that the position repeater shows a white square.
(2) Place the mask on the face and breathe in and out several times : no difficulty in breathing should
be experienced.
C Manual selector set to «S» (emergency)
(1 ) Check that the position repeater shows a red square.
(2) Place the mask on the face and ensure that oxygen flow is continuous.
(3) Check that the blinker shows a white fixed square.
(4) Reset the manual selector to «N» (normal).
D Checking the anti-g system
(1) Open the anti-g valve cock and open the anti-g suit connector by lifting the blanking cap and
keeping it in that position.
(2) Depress the test button and ensure that the valve has a high flow rate.
(3) Release the test button : the high flow rate is stopped, but it may give way to a low flow rate.
Let the blanking cap return back onto the connector.
(4) Close the anti-g valve cock.
CAUTION :
CHECK THAT THE POINTER OF THE EMERGENCY CYLINDER PRESSURE GAUGE DID
NOT MOVE FOR THE WHOLE TEST DURATION.
AD
07-84 Restricted 9-101 F
BREGUET AVIATION,
/L-J^'Û.
__
MIRAGE F
5- CHECKING OXYGEN REGULATION SYSTEM WITH EMERGENCY SUPPLY
(1 ) Breathe in and out in the mask.

(2) Close the aircraft normal oxygen cock.
(3) Breathe in and out in the mask for a while (corresponding to aircraft system draining time).
(4) Whatever the manual selector position may be :
Check that :
- oxygen is delivered continuously, with a slight overpressure,
- the blinker shows a white fixed square,
-the «5 mn Ox» light comes on without any audio signal being heard (pressure drop in
emergency cylinder).
DURING THIS TEST, AVOID EMPTYING THE EMERGENCY CYLINDER COMPLETELY.
(5) Close the emergency oxygen cock and disconnect the mask.
(6) Set the manual selector to «N» (normal).
(7) Install the chest connector on its stowage support.
NOTE : In case the emergency cylinder is accidentally emptied, it should be rinsed and replenished
within 2 hours after emptying.
6- FINAL STEPS
(1 ) Remove the headset, then switch off the warning horn.

(2) Cut off and disconnect the electrical power supply.
(3) Top up the emergency cylinder (see 02-3).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl -** / V\ I r\/-\V_7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^^_-
^ j5^0
^^) Restricted »*aaiiiai 02
MANUAL «o
CHECK OF INDICATING PANEL LIGHTS
1 - SCOPE
Checking the operation of the lights which are doubled on certain indicating panels. This
check is complementary to daily inspection of airframe, hydraulic system and engine (see
02-5).
A - Special tools
-Flight line special electrical tool kit F1ELA1.
B - Ground handling equipment

-11 5/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply unit.
3 - CHECK
A - Failure warning panel

-Remove the front face of the panel.
- Depress test button "T" ensure that all warning lights come on.
If one Ifght remains out :

-Unscrew the socket with pin wrench OUT 55.
-Extract and remove the light with wrench OUT 57A.
-Replace the light, then repeat the test.
-Reinstall front face of failure warning panel.
B - Configuration indicator (U/C, slats, flaps).

-Same operation as for failure warning panel.
C - Armament control panel

-Extract the pushbuttons using special tool (OUT 58).
-Depress light test button and ensure that all lights come on.
-If one light remains out, replace it using the same appropriate tool.
-Reinstall the pushbuttons.
AA
1 1 - 87 Restricted 9- 1 02
BREGUET AVIATION
iUît'U MIRAGE F
CHECKING THE SLAT ASYMMETRY COMPARATOR
1 - SCOPE
Checking correct operation of slotted slat asymmetry comparator (slat servo unit).
- 1 15-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply unit.
- Equipment bay access ladder.
PRELIMINARY STEPS
- Open equipment compartment door 13-00

- Turn on A/C supply.
CHECK
- Set «SLAT/FLAP» selector switch to «NORMAL».

- Throw the integrated test unit switch to «ON».
- Throw the slat servo unit «test» selector switch to upper position.
- Check that «S/F» indicator light comes on on failure warning panel.
- Set «test» switch back to rest position.
- Throw «SLAT/FLAT» selector switch to «EMG RETR» and bring it back to initial position.
- Check that «S/F» light goes out.
- Repeat the operation by setting the «test» selector switch of slat servo unit to lower position.
- Throw the integrated test unit switch to «OFF».
-Close door 13-00

- Disconnect electrical power supply unit.
AE MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tiJ>^Ts^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c^33^-^ - ......,«««
^^ ~^ Restricted MANUAL 02
WEEKLY INSPECTION OF EJECTION SEAT

(Figure 1)
1 - GENERAL
This inspection should be followed by the daily inspection of the ejection seat (see 02-5) which is
less detailed.
WARNING :
PRIOR TO ANY EJECTION SEAT INSPECTION, ENSURE THE SEAT SAFETY PIN ROPE IS
INSTALLED.
NOTE : Check the rope and safety pin attachments for condition.
2- SEAT CENTRAL SECTION
A Combined harness, shoulder strap tightener
- Check the strap of shoulder strap tightener for attachment (upper lock).
- Check the harness straps for condition and cleanliness.
- Operate the unlocking control of shoulder strap tightener :
- fully pull the stirrup to check the strap for condition (fraying - contamination : oil,
water...).
- Release the unlocking control of shoulder strap tightener :
- allow the strap to wind while ensuring - at intervals - that locking is correct.
B Pilot's parachute
- Remove the parachute extraction strap from the shearing device and unscrew the interconnection
coupling (separation of interconnection cord from parachute extraction strap).
- Loosen and disconnect the two parachute pack retaining straps ; the parachute is pushed forward
by the two springs.
- Check the pack for condition (specially moisture).
- Make sure that the parachute extraction strap and the «D» ring disable cord are both passed
through the alignment ring.
- Open the upper flap and make sure that :
- the «D» ring disable pin is fitted in the cone above the small ring connected to the closing
pin extraction strap.
CAUTION :
THE RH PART OF THE DISABLE PIN SHOULD BE PASSED THROUGH THE CONE.
- the safety wire on the RH cone pin is not broken.

- the parachute opening cable is hooked on the LH cone pin.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MANUAL 02
.Small ring "D"ring Alignment

disable pin ring
RH flap
RH coney / L Forward flap L LH cone
Aft flap y Manual opening cable _

RING DETAIL
LOCKWIRING OF PARACHUTE PACK CLOSING PIN
FIGURE 1 - EJECTION SEAT INSPECTION

AB 9-101
Restricted 9-106 FIGURE 1
07-76
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]Lep*~?Q. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^cF0^^-^ ....... A , «o
- Close the pack upper panel.

- Install the parachute pack on the seat.
- Engage LH and RH retaining straps of parachute pack through the buckles of relevant small
retaining straps (inside, outside) ; adjust the strap length in such a way that, on both sides, a space
remains between rigid pack and back-rest plate which is equal to the thickness of ejector spring fitting
pliers.
- Fit the ejector springs separately in their housing between back-rest plate and rigid pack as
follows :
- compress the spring in the pliers

-position pliers fitted with the spring between back-rest plate and rigid pack being careful
to place it opposite the back-rest plate on the side with the opening, move the compressed spring out
of pliers until it comes into its housing.
Once the springs are positioned, tighten the retaining straps to maximum, then secure the
ends with velcro tapes.
- Screw the interconnection coupling (connection of interconnection cord to parachute extraction
strap).
- Engage the black extraction strap with its yellow flexible sleeve in the shearing device.
CAUTION :
NEVER ENGAGE THE «D» RING DISABLE CORD (RED SHEATH) IN THE SHEARING
DEVICE.
3- GENERAL CONDITION OF EJECTION SEAT
Check the leg restraining straps for condition (fraying, moisture, soiling).
-
Lift the dinghy pack from the seat pan.
-
- Check for cleanliness under the pack.
- Check the negative-g strap for condition (incorrect routing, fraying, moisture, wear...).
- Check the dinghy pack quick-releasing strap for condition :
- elasticity : the length of the strap in rest position should not exceed 55 cm (21.65 in) as
measured between D-ring and the quick disconnect end.
- check for fraying, moisture, soiling.
- Reinstall the dinghy pack in the seat pan.
4- REAR FRAME
- Check for correct locking of the end pieces of pyrotechnical transmission flexible cords on
transfer unit.
- Perform a visual inspection of flexible cords (no fold should be seen).
- Make sure that the cords freely slide in the guide clamp when canopy is actuated.
5- FINAL STEPS
Carry out a daily inspection of the seat (see 02-5).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
/L=^±rU
^îïZP2
MIRAGE F
CHECKING THE CLOGGING INDICATOR

ON HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CONNECTING BLOCKS
1 - SCOPE
Ensure that the hydraulic supply systems are not contaminated.
2- PRELIMINARY STEP
Remove access doors 26-07-1 and 28-05-2
3- CHECK
On each connecting block (systems 1 and 2), ensure that the indicator (red end) is flush with the
plug in which it is located.
If the indicator
is OUT :
perform operations indicated in the measures to be taken in case of trouble with the hydraulic
-
system or when in doubt about the fluid state (see 07-1 )
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECKING THE INFLIGHT REFUELING PROBE
1 - PURPOSE
Visual checking of inflight refueling probe.
2- GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

Hydraulic power supply unit
- Electrical power supply 1 15/200 V - 400 Hz.
3- MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 1504 A.
Place inflight refueling probe in extended configuration (see 06-2).
5- PROCEDURE
Check following components :
(1) Refueling valve :

Check for :
- absence of stem distortion resulting in off-centered dome.
- absence of sleeve rim distortion, pitting or scoring (area A).
Check for chromium-plating damage. If required, remove any blistered chromium-plated surface
likely to peel off. Trim remaining chromium-plating surface borders and polish scores so as to smooth
out rough spots. Protect the surfaces from which chromium-plating has been removed through oiling.
NOTE : Flaked sections do not require valve remplacement, except in the case where such sections are
located at the dome rear part, close to the seal (area B).
Replace valve if check is not satisfactory (see 06-2).
Zone A 4 mm (0.1574 in)
Fourreau
3 à 4 mm (0.1181 à 0.1574 in)
Dôme
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(2) Connector base
Check for :
- correct attachment
- condition of safetying lockwires.
(3) Probe tube and swivel fitting
Check for condition and attachment.
(4) Probe housing and fairing type door
Check for :
condition and attachment of probe fairing type door.

-
- condition of probe front door and associated mechanism (absence of play in hinges, presence and
condition of stops, etc..)
Slightly oil door control roller.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Place inflight refueling probe in retracted configuration (see 06-2)
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^
LJ^trVe. MIRAGE F
BRIEF CHECK OF TAS FAILURE

AND LASER GLASS INDICATOR LIGHTS
1 - PURPOSE
To test true airspeed (TAS) and laser glass indicator lights.
1 15/200 V 400 Hz power supply unit.
- Energize the aircraft
- Open door P2-08
CHECK
Test the indicator lights through switch 41 H.

The red and white-striped flap should appear for each light.
Reset the lights by means of switch 41 H. The black flap should appear for each light.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Disconnect the power supply unit.

- Close door P2-08.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^g- ^^
BRIEF CHECK OF FATIGUEMETER

AND COUNTER READINGS
1 - SCOPE
To check the accelerometer and data recorder for operation, and to record the counter readings so
as to follow the variations in aircraft structure fatigue condition.
- Electrical power supply, 1 1 5-220 V/400 Hz.
3- PROCEDURE
gained through the LH U/C well.

- Access is
Cut in power supply to the aircraft.
-
- Record the reading taken from each counter (including «TEST» counter).
- Depress data recorder «TEST» pushbutton for at least one second.
- Check that all the data recorder counters have increased by one unit.
- Cut off power supply.
- If the data recorder is defective and need be removed, read the counter values before removal
then after removal, and enter them in a new logcard.
4- COUNTER READINGS
- The readings from all the data recorder counters («TEST» counter included) should be entered in
the logcard.
NOTE : The codes used in the logcard are defined by the following tables.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
EXTERNAL STORES - TYPE OF MISSION - QUANTITY OF FUEL CARRIED
TYPE OF MISSION
Only the most significant mission shall be mentioned.

Example : A-2.
ALTITUDE MISSION
ALTITUDE TYPE OF MISSION
CODE CODE
Low altitude A Navigation - Rodeo GCA/ILS - Landing patterns 1
H < 10,000 ft Interception (without fighting)
Aerobatics - Maneuvers and fight - Tracking 2
Air-to-ground delivery 3
Medium altitude B Navigation Blind flying - Interception (without 1
10,000 ft < H < 25,000 ft fighting)

In-flight refueling
Air-to-air firing - Aerobatics - Maneuvers and fight - 2

Tracking
High altitude C Navigation Blind flying - Interception (without 1
H > 25,000 ft fighting)

In-flight refueling
Air-to-air firing - Maneuvers and fight - Tracking 2
Transonic flight Supersonic flight 3
QUANTITY OF FUEL CARRIED
QUANTITY OF FUEL CARRIED CODE
Fuselage tanks only 0
Internal tank (fuselage and wings) 1
Internal and external tanks (with pylon tanks) 2
EXTERNAL STORES
Clearly write the code or type of stores carried.

Examples : 1 x 400 kg for a 400 kg bomb
4 x 250 kg for four 250 kg bombs
3 x LHA7 for three practice bombs
L R 1 55 for a rocket launcher
CC420 for a gun pod
TYPES or
STORES CARRIED CODES
No stores 0
Wingtip stores type
Outboard wing stores (stations 2) type
Inboard wing stores (stations 1) type
Fuselage stores type
AA
10-81 Restricted 9-1 13H
FATIGUEMETER SYSTEM LOGCARD
o
I
s 5
00
MIRAGE Fl No. AIRFRAME HOURS: COUNTER No. CARD No.

AIR BASE No. RH WING No. FATIGUEMETER No. Date of the last flight in the previous
SQUADRON LH WING No. card :
FATIGUEMETERS READINGS EXTERNAL STORES

Number Type QuantKy
Test Flight
DATES -1.5 -0.5 0.5 2 3.25 4.5 6 7.5 of Inboard Outboard of of fuel
counter duration
landings Fuselage wings wings Wingtips mission carried
reading reading reading reading reading reading reading reading stations 1 stations 2
« JO
M 9
«
Q. t a.
TO
(O
IO
> m
w r~
3) to ' *
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL3>-^r5L
BREGUET AVIATION _ "_
MIRAGE F
CHECKING THE NWS EQUIPMENT AIR DRYERS
1- PURPOSE
To check that the air dryer silicagel of certain NWS equipment items is effective.
2- PROCEDURE
A Sight head
Check the silicagel color through the window at the upper part of the air dryer (rear LH side of
sight head) :
- if blue, the silicagel is effective,
- if pink, the silicagel is to be replaced (see 14-3).
B Laser electronic unit
Open door P4-09
Check the silicagel color through the window :

- if blue, the silicagel is effective,
- if pink, the silicagel is to be replaced (see 14-3).
C Map display unit
The silicagel condition will be checked when removing the unit.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^^^VL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONy^Z^SZr^Zz^>
^C^^^=^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
VISUAL INSPECTION OF PROTECTIVE GRID OF CABIN

PRESSURIZATION EQUIPMENT AND CABIN REFERENCE PRESSURE TAPPING
1 - SCOPE
To check the cleanness of the protective grid of the cabin pressurization equipment and of the
cabin reference pressure tapping.
(a) - Open the canopy.

(b) - Make sure that the seat safety devices are in place.
3- INSPECTION
A Protective grid of cabin pressurization equipment.
(a) Visually check the cabin pressurization equipment protective grid for cleanness (use a light if
necessary).
(b) If the fouled surface is > 30 %, or in case of doubt, cleaning is imperative (see 09-2).
B Cabin reference pressure tapping
Visually check the cabin reference pressure tapping (frame 12) ; make sure that it is not obstructed.
If obstruction is noticed, or in case of doubt, blow out the cabin reference pressure line of the regulator
(see 09-2).
AA
07-84 Restricted 9_12o
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ J< ^ /V\|I\/-\V-7C. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^-
^v. ^?-=^,
^?-^. .
Restricted h/iamiiai
MANUAL «o
02
CORROSION INSPECTION
1 - SCOPE
Inspection of aircraft enabling monitoring of possible deterioration (corrosion in partic¬

ular).
2 - GENERAL
The aircraft structure shall be inspected visually for:

-general cleanness,
-deterioration of anticorrosion protection,
-incipient corrosion.
The inspection shall cover the points particularly prone to the development of corrosion.
(a) General cleanness
Localized or generalized build-up of dirt, leading to a decision to rinse, remove any de¬
posits, or wash the aircraft (either partially or totally).
(b) Deterioration of anticorrosion protection
Blistering, flaking or removal of paintwork, necessitating touch-up operations; these may

be scheduled for the next periodic inspection (the aircraft will continue to be periodically
checked) or else carried out at the earliest opportunity in the case of incipient corrosion.
(c) Incipient corrosion
Any degree of incipient corrosion:

-pitting,
-intergranular ("intercrystalline") corrosion (blistered surfaces detected by means of a
light source directed at a very close angle towards countersinks, fittings or edges of sheets),
-filiform corrosion (a threadlike network developing underneath the paint surface around
countersinks, sheet edges or scratches),
-oxydation,
which may be observed at any of the corrosion-prone areas listed below, shall entail:
-a more detailed inspection,
-treatment of the incipiently corroded areas with the minimum of delay (see Structural
Repair Manual).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ J] ^ / V\ I l\/-\V_7L_
BREGUET AVIATION _^._~-
^-v,
^s^*^
-? > _
/?e5fr/cfed aaamiiai
MANUAL ni
02
3 - CORROSION-PRONE AREAS TO BE INSPECTED
(a) Air intake zones and air duct inlet area (inspection for pitting).
(b) Additional air intake doorlets (magnesium parts).
(c) Undercarriage and doors:

-undercarriage wells. Visual inspection of hydraulic connections, small components and
steel hardware,
-nose undercarriage leg (magnesium), particularly:
-around the support of the nose wheel steering control units,
-around the bushings mounted on the truss jack attachment fitting,
-on the towing fitting,
-around the pipe support clamps,
-nose undercarriage shield door, particularly around the connection to the nose undercar¬
riage.
(d) Oxygen compartment (floor pick-up angles on frames 1 1 and 12).
(e) Cockpit: sight support.
Modification 579 not incorporated:

-canopy hinge fitting.
(f) Airbrakes.
(g) Wing upper and lower surfaces, around the screws picking up the main attachment fit¬
ting.
(h) Fuselage upper surface (within fin base zone).
(j) Fuselage lower surface in cockpit area between stringers 8 and 10 (inspect for pitting and
distortion).
(k) Antenna mounts.
(I) Stabilator leading edges.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^-^rAl
BREGUET AVIATION ^y __^
MIRAGE
...........
F
INSPECTION OF UNDERFIN RIVETING

(figure 1R)
1 - SCOPE
To inspect the skin of the underfins, specially the front fairings and to determine action to be
taken.
Inspection of riveting is to be carried out without removing the underfin, in accordance with
general inspection of riveting (see 03-0).
3- INSPECTION
Check for possible signs of skin loosening around rivets. When the panel is able to «pant» around
one or several rivets, this means that some rivets of the rivet row become progressively loose.
When noticing this type of defect, in particular at rib 1 , rib at frame 36, rib 2 or at one of the rivet
rows near the rear attachment fitting, repair this defect as soon as possible by external reinforcement
(see structural repair manual).
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
FIGURE 1 R - INSPECTION DU RIVETAGE DES QUILLES

INSPECTION OF UNDERPIN RIVETING
AA 9-124
01-81 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTf ^ Jl ** ^
BREGUET AVIATION ^£ç^>
^<^ K?=^
^-^^ ^ - ^
Restricted _, .,..,,,.,
MANUAL M
02
LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION OF HINGES
1 - SCOPE
Maintenance of hinges on flight controls, U/C and doors.
-Pressure greasing unit with:

-flexible extension,
-"Hydraulic" (straight and elbow) grease nipples.
-Tecalemit lubricator 9 20 04 01 .
-Hydraulic pressure unit.
-Cockpit boarding ladder.
-Wing access stepladder.
B - Spares
-1 protecting plug (access to the rudder servo-control anchor point).

-1 pin 23 310 AA 020030LE.
3 - MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4222 or AIR 4210.
-Oil AIR 3512.
-Remove the following access panels :

-on fuselage 36.1 1 .2, 36.01 .2,
:
-on fin : D2.42,

-on wings : V1 .56, V2.61 .1 , V3.75.
-Connect the hydraulic pressure unit to the system No. 1 .
-Set the flaps and slats in "all out" position.

-Drop the hydraulic pressure in system No. 1 .
WARNING:
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0 AND 02-0).
-Set the "DOORS" and "DIVE BK" ground safety switches to "GROUND" position.
-Open manually :
-airbrakes (see 02-0),

-doors (see 02-0) without locking them in down position.
AC
1 0 - 87 Restricted 9 - 201
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ " ~ AAV^L.
BREGUET AVIATIONê^
^*^ _^-=*o
^-^? n ^ ^
Restricted j l\/l A M M A
MANUAL I m
02
5 - CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE

A - Cleaning
(1 ) Using a dry lint-free cloth or a dry brush, dry clean :
-the grease nipples,

-the pads.
-NEVER USE SOLVENTS SUCH AS TRICHLOROETHYLENE FOR CLEANING.
B - Flight control maintenance (figure 2)
-NO OIL OR GREASE SHOULD BE APPLIED TO HINGES FITTED ON TEFLON-LINED
SELF-ALIGNING BEARINGS.
(1 ) Lubricate the anchor point of spoilers, stabilizers, ailerons and rudder servocontrols.
(2) On the flight control hinges
(a) Lubricate :
-the internal and external shackles of LH and RH ailerons,
-the aileron/actuating rod hinge,
-the LH and RH stabilizer external bearing,
-the rudder center shackle,
-the rudder/actuating rod hinge,
-the flap lock fitting,
-the lock fitting slider/inboard control surface retaining rod hinge ; this lubrication re¬
quires installation of an elbow grease nipple on the pin head.
NOTE: During greasing operation, actuate the rudder and the roll control surfaces manually,
so that the grease is evenly spread.
-MODIFICATION 695 INCORPORATED : jack airbrake flap linkpin.
CAUTION:
BEFORE ANY HIGH-LIFT DEVICE ACTUATION, MANDATORILY REMOVE THE EL¬
BOW GREASE NIPPLE PLACED ON THE HEAD OF THE INBOARD CONTROL SUR¬
FACE RETAINING ROD PIN FOR LUBRICATION PURPOSES. FILL THE LUBRICATING
PORT WITH GREASE.
(b) Protect with a light coat of oil :
-the internal and external shackles of ailerons,
-the aileron/actuating rod hinge,
-the rudder external shackles, taking care not to impregnate the bore of the Airflon-lined
bearing ball,
-the rudder/actuating rod hinge.
(c) Lubricate with a light coat of oil :
-the spoiler hinges,
-the droop leading edge slat hinges,
-the hinge of self-aligning bearings fitted in flap leading edge pads (center, inboard, out¬
board),
-the flap rollers,
-the airbrake retaining rollers (make sure that they rotate freely),
-the airbrake retaining mechanism (hinge, spring, hook).
(d) Using a brush, apply a film of grease on :
-the slotted slat guide rails,

-the flap guide rails,
-the slotted slat actuating jack screws.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 02
.Ac cess panel
V2.67
iL
Access panelî. Ag\
V. 2.61/1
DETAIL E
JÏMGI
SPOILERS SERVO ROLLSERVO Access panel V3. 75 STAB IL IZERS

CONTROLS CONTROLS RUDDER SERVO
CONTROL
FIGURE 2 - FLIGHT CONTROLS MAINTENANCE
AB 9-203
09-80 Restricted 9-203 FIGURE2
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ Jl ** /Y\ll\/-\VJ't_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ï^_~
^«_ ^p-*»o
^~=^> , .
Restricted haamiiai
MANUAL nn
02
(3) Remove the excess grease and oil
C - Lubrication of the canopy system
-Lightly grease:
-the rollers on the locking fittings,
-the canopy hinge system.
D - U/C and door maintenance (fig. 3)
(1 ) Lubricate all points indexed on the illustration, observing the indicated grease quantities.
Lubrication of shock-absorber spherical bearings

-Jack up the aircraft (see manual 02-0)
-Lubricate both hinges.
-Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels.
-Lubricate again.
NOTE: There are two ways for lubricating the center hinge of the nose U/C main door:
- the door is in downlocked position: disconnect the door actuating jack (two 17
spanners) to gain access to the grease nipple. After lubrication, connect the jack ; in¬
stall pin ;
- the door is unlocked and in mid-position: bring it by hand to a position allowing ins¬
tallation of the elbowed end piece.
(2) Oil for protection or lubrication of indexed points of the illustration.
Ensure that the rollers (U/C and doors) rotate freely about their axis.

-sparingly oil the hinge of the safety flap of the main U/C control unit lever in the cock¬
pit.
(3) Remove the excess grease and oil.
NOTE: When a grease nipple is clogged, grease flows out of it ; replace it ; if there is no im¬
provement, look for probable cause.
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Return slats and flaps in "all in" position.

-Close the airbrakes.
-Reinstall the access panels.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION /^°
MANUAL 02
ES
Wheel fairing
removed Modification
575
i
incorporated
1 -xl PUMP
BB BRUSH
LU GREASE
LU OIL
NOSE U/C
FIGURE 3 - MAINTENANCE OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS MAIN U/C

AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^=°
MIRAGE F
LOGGING OF SWIVEL TUBES OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the procedure for logging the swivel tubes of main undercarriage.
2- GENERAL
Logging of the swivel tubes is by a cumulative point system, a number of points depending on' the
take-off weight being added at each flight.
The following table indicates the number of points to be attributed per flight as a function of the
type of mission.
The points are to be added to the existing total.
NOTE : Touch-and-go take-offs are not counted.
Modification 483 (3 rd or 4 th stage) incorporated :
-no discount is to be made.
TAKE OFF WEIGHT NUMBER OF POINTS
M < 11500 kg (27630 1b) 4

1 1500 kg (27630 lb)< M < 12000 kg (28830 lb) 5
12000 kg (28830 lb) < M < 13000 kg (31230 lb) 7
13000 kg (31230 lb) < M < 14000 kg (33635 lb) 10
14000 kg (33635 lb) < M < 14700 kg (35320 lb) 13
* 14700 kg (35320 lb) < M < 15500 kg (37240 lb) 18
* 15500 kg (37240 lb)< M < 16200 kg (38920 lb) 25
* SEE ALSO THE MAXIMUM AUTHORIZED TAKE OFF WEIGHT, IN FLIGHT MANUAL
BOOK 1.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT" ^ " « / Y \ 1\ /-\ V-7
1
breguet av.at,on ê~ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 02
OILING OF HINGES
1 - SCOPE
Maintenance of hinges on flight controls, undercarriage and doors.
-Hydraulic power supply

-Electrical power supply, 115-220 V/400 Hz
-Cabin access ladder
3 - MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3512.
-Connect the hydraulic power supply to system 1 .

-Set the flaps and slats to "all out" position.
-Drop hydraulic pressure in system 1.
WARNING:
TAKE ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0 AND 02-0).
-Set "DOORS" and "DIVE BK" ground safety switches to "GROUND" position.
-Manually open :
-airbrakes (see 02-0),
-doors (see 02-0), avoiding their locking in lower position.
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Oiling of flight controls (figure 4)
(a) Protect with a light coat of oil :

-internal and external shackles of the ailerons,
-the actuating rod/aileron hinge,
-the external shackles of the rudder, taking care not to impregnate the base of the Air-
flon-lined bearing ball.
-the rudder/actuating rod hinge.
(b) Lubricate with a light coat of oil :

-the spoiler hinges,
-the droop slat hinges,
-the spherical bearing hinges in flap leading edge pads (center, inboard and outboard),
-the flap rollers,
-the airbrake retaining rollers (make sure that they rotate freely),
-the airbrake retaining mechanism (hinge, spring, hooking latch).
Wipe off any extra oil.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
|QjW/ J
iH|if-rc-\/< .^
.Jpe^Sa
AEROFREINS [hTIFI AILERONS
AIRBRAKES
FIGURE 4 - HUILAGE DES COMMANDES DE VOL

OILING OF FLIGHT CONTROLS
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
B - Oiling of undercarriage and doors (figure 5)

(a) For protection or lubrication purposes, oil the zones marked in the figure.
-Make sure that the rollers or olives (U/C and doors) rotate freely about their pins.
Modification 466 not incorporated:

-lightly oil the hinge of the safety flap of the normal U/C control unit lever in cockpit.
(b) Wipe off any extra oil.
C - Oiling of canopy mechanism

(a) Lightly lubricate:
-the rollers of the canopy locking fittings,
-the guide rollers on the cockpit side members,
-the canopy hinge device
(see figure below)
(b) Wipe off any extra oil.
Ifrl BRUSH \
0 OIL j
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Reset the slats and flaps to "all in" position.

-Retract the airbrakes.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION wô?33

MIRAGE F
LEGENDE KEY
QB PINCEAU BRUSH
E] HUILE OIL
ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL
MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE
FIGURE 5 - HUILAGE DES ATTERRISSEURS ET DES TRAPPES

OILING OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS
AA
10-87 Restricted 9-212. FIGURE 5 9-21
1F-F1K50AD-2-03
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL 03
MIRAGE F1AD
AIRCRAFT
RE-ISSUE 1 990
RESTRICTED
MAY 1990
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq je les pages annulées par la présente mise £i jour.
letter A indicates pages deleted by the current chanqe.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
A AD 05/90 0-120 AB 12/76 0-525M AA 09/84

B AD 05/90 0-120M AA 05/75 0-526 AA 09/77
C AD 05/90 0-121 AG 03/87 0-527 AA 09/77
D AD 05/90 0-122 AB 12/76 0-528 AA 09/77
E/F AD 05/90 0-122M AK 01/87 0-529 AA 09/77
0-123 AB 05/75 0-530 AB 12/82
I/II AC 07/74 0-124 AC 05/75 0-530M AA 09/77
III AC 07/75 0-125 AA 05/74 0-531 AA 09/77
IV AC 11/75 0-125M AB 05/74 0-532 AB 09/73
V/VI AD 01/77 0-126 AG 11/80 0-533 AC 01/77
VII/VIII AJ 10/78 0-126M AB 04/77 0-534 AA 09/77
IX AC 06/74 0-127 AJ 06/85 0-535 AB 09/73
X AC 06/74 0-127F AB 10/75 0-535M AA 09/84
XI AC 06/74 0-127T AB 12/76 0-535R AC 11/79
XII AC 06/74 0-128 AA 10/76 0-535S AA 09/77
XIII/XIV AC 06/74 0-129 AG 05/80 0-536 AA 09/75
XV AC 06/74 0-130 AB 12/76 0-537 AA 03/87
XVI AC 06/74 0-130M AD 09/81 0-538 AA 05/80
XVII AC 06/74 0-131 AH 09/81 0-539 AA 05/80
XVIII AC 06/74 0-501 AB 03/87 0-540 AB 03/79
XIX AC 06/74 0-502 AC 08/88 0-541 AC 11/86
XX AC 02/80 0-503 AA 06/82 0-542 AB 11/86
0-503M AA 05/85 0-543 AB 01/88
0- 1 AG 11/87 0-504 AC 12/87 0-544 AB 11/86
0- 2 AB 11/79 0-504F AB 12/87 0-550 AC 03/79
0-101 AC 12/76 0-504M AA 12/87 0-552 AA 12/82
0-102 AE 09/77 0-505 AC 03/87 0-601 AB 11/87
0-103 AF 01/77 0-506 AB 09/75 0-601D AA 11/87
0-104 AB 05/75 0-507 AB 09/84 0-601H AA 11/87
0-104M AA 05/75 0-508 AB 02/79 0-601M AA 11/87
0-105 AB 06/85 0-509 AB 09/77 0-601R AA 11/87
0-106 AC 11/79 0-510 AB 08/83 0-601V AA 11/87
0-106M AA 05/75 0-510M- AB 09/84 0-601X AA 11/87
0-107 AA 07/72 0-511 AA 09/80 0-602 AC 11/87
0-108 AB 05/75 0-511M AA 09/77 0-602F AA 11/87
0-109 AA 07/72 0-512 AB 09/75 0-602M AA 11/87
0-110 AB ' 12/76 0-513 AA 09/77 0-602T AA 11/87
0-111 AC 02/81 0-514 AA 09/77 0-602X AA 11/87
0-112 AA 05/78 0-515 AB 09/80 0-603 AA 11/87
0-113 AA 05/78 0-515M AA 09/84 0-604 AA 11/87
0-114 AA 05/78 0-516 AB 09/77 0-604M AA 11/87
0-114F AA 05/78 0-517 AA 09/77 0-604T AA 11/87
0-114M AA 05/78 0-518 AA 09/77 0-605 AA 06/86
0-114T AA 05/78 0-519 AA 09/77 0-606 AA 06/86
0-115 AA 01/77 0-521 AA 08/79 0-606H AA 06/86
0-116 AB 09/77 0-522 AB 09/75 0-606R AA 06/86
0-117 AB 07/72 0-523 AA 05/78 0-607 AA 01/88
0-118 AA 12/76 0-524 AA 09/77 0-608 AA 01/88
0-119 AB 12/86 0-525 AB 09/73 0-608M AA 01/88
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^
*^^zs.
ift:5a^> Restricted MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03
INDEX DES PAGES

ORIGINAL ISSUE
0-609 AA 08/88 1-121 AB 05/78 1-509 AA 05/85

0-609M AA 08/88 1-122 AC 07/74 1-510 AA 05/85
0-615 AA 11/87 1-123 AA 02/85 1-511 AA 08/86
0-615F AA 11/87 1-124 AB 02/85 1-512 AA 08/86
0-615M AA 11/87 1-125 AA 07/72 1-512M AA 08/86
0-615T AA 11/87 1-126 AB 07/72 1-513 AA 07/82
0-617 AA 11/87 1-301 AC 11/88 1-514 AA 09/81
0-618 AA 11/87 1-302 AA 08/79 1-514H AA 09/81
0-619 AA 11/87 1-303 AA 01/88 1-514R AA 09/81
0-621 AA 11/87 1-303M AB 03/76 1-517 AA 09/81
0-622 AA 11/87 1-304 AB 11/88 1-518 AA 10/86
0-623 AA 11/87 1-305 AB 12/74 1-521 AA 03/82
0-801 AB 05/80 1-306 AB 12/74 1-571 AA 09/86
0-802 AB 05/78 1-307 AB 01/88 1-575 AA 10/87
0-802M AA 05/78 1-308 AC 09/87 1-576 AA 10/87
0-805 AC 11/87 1-309 AA 01/88 1-577 AA 10/87
0-806 AA 10/78 1-309M AA 01/88 1-578 AA 10/87
0-807 AB 11/88 1-310 AB 01/88 1-579 AA 10/87
0-808 AA 07/75 1-310M AB 01/83 1-580 AA 10/87
0-809 AA 01/77 1-311 AB 01/88 1-601 AB 07/87
0-810 AB 06/88 1-312 AB 01/88 1-602 AA 03/87
0-811 AA 01/81 1-312M AA 01/88 1-603 AB 07/87
0-812 AB 10/85 1-313 AB 01/87 1-605 AA 12/87
0-812M AB 11/80 1-314 AC 01/87 1-606 AA 09/85
0-813 AB 07/86 1-314M AA 01/87 1-607 AA 09/85
1-315 AA 09/85 1-608 AA 01/82
1- 1 AA 11/88 1-316 AB 08/83 1-801 AB 10/79
1- 2 AA 10/87 1-316M AB 10/75 1-803 AA 09/88
1-001 AA 05/74 1-317 AA 01/87 1-820 AA 06/88
1-101 AC 05/78 1-318 AB 12/82 1-821 AA 06/88
1-102 AB 07/75 1-318H AA 01/87 1-822 AA 06/88
1-103 AA 12/74 1-318R AA 01/81
1-104 AB 05/78 1-319 AB 01/88 2- 1 AB 11/88
1-105 AB 05/74 1-320 AA 12/82 2- 2 AB 09/83
1-106 AA 09/73 1-321 AB 01/85 2-001 AB 07/72
1-107 AB 05/78 1-322 AB 10/75 2-101 AC 11/80
1-108 AB 01/85 1-322T AB 01/85 2-102 AB 05/75
1-109 AD 03/87 1-323 AB 10/83 2-103 AC 05/75
1-110 AB 01/85 1-324 AA 08/88 2-104 AB 05/75
1-111 AA 07/75 1-501 AB 01/87 2-105 AA 07/72
1-112 AB 07/75 1-502 AB 09/85 2-106 AC 05/75
1-113 AC 04/83 1-503 AA 09/85 2-107 AC 05/75
1-114 AB 12/80 1-504 AA 09/85 2-108 AB 05/75
1-115 AC 02/81 1-504M AA 09/85 2-109 AB 05/75
1-116 AB 02/81 1-505 ÀA 09/86 2-110 AC 10/78
1-117 AC 12/74 1-506 AB 09/86 2-111 AC 10/76
1-118 AB 12/76 1-506M AA 09/86 2-112 AB 05/75
1-119 AB 02/76 1-507 AA 05/85 2-113 AB 05/75
1-120 AA 02/76 1-508 AA 05/85 2-114 AC 05/75
F1AD
05/90 Restr icted B
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

L'astérisque ndiquei les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
The asterisk i ndicatt îs pages changed or added and
/errer A indicates pages deleted by the current change.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
2-115 AA 01/77 2-314 AA 06/75

2-116 AB 01/77 2-315 AA 06/75 3- 1 AA 11/88
2-117 AE 09/77 2-316 AB 07/75 3-101 AA 07/72
2-118 AD 09/77 2-317 AB 01/80 3-102 AB 07/72
2-119 AD 09/77 2-318 AA 01/77 3-103 AA 07/72
2-120 AF 09/77 2-319 AA 01/77 3-104 AA 07/72
2-121 AA 04/86 2-320 AA 09/87 3-105 AB 07/72
2-122 AC 04/86 2-321 AA 09/87 3-106 AA 07/72
2-123 AC 04/86 2-501 AC 06/88 3-107 AA 01/77
2-124 AC 04/86 2-501M AB 06/88 3-108 AA 07/72
2-125 AC 04/86 2-502 AD 02/75 3-109 AB 09/73
2-128 AD 05/76 2-503 AD 06/75 3-110 AC 07/74
2-129 AC 05/76 2-503M AC 05/80 3-111 AA 06/82
2-130 AD 01/77 2-504 AB 05/84 3-112 AB 06/82
2-131 AB 07/79 2-505 AB 01/87 3-113 AA 09/73
2-132 AC 05/80 2-506 AA 07/72 3-114 AB 09/73
2-133 AA 01/77 2-511 AB 02/84 3-114H 'aa 09/73
2-134 AB 07/75 2-512 AC 02/84 3-114R AB 09/73
2-134M AA 07/75 2-513 AC 12/85 3-115 AA 10/76
2-135 AA 05/75 2-514 AD 02/84 3-116 AB 05/80
2-136 AA 05/75 2-515 AB 03/88 3-117 AB 05/75
2-137 AA 05/75 2-516 AB 02/84 3-118 AA 09/77
2-138 AA 05/75 2-516M AB 02/84 3-119 AB 09/77
2-139 AA 05/75 2-516R AB 02/84 3-301 AA 08/79
2-140 AA 05/75 2-517 AA 09/77 3-302 AA 08/79
2-141 AA 05/75 2-519 AA 05/85 3-501 AA 05/80
2-142 AA 05/75 2-521 AA 05/80 3-501M AA 12/80
2-143 AA 05/75 2-523 AA 11/88 3-502 AC 09/84
2-144 AA 05/75 2-524 AA 01/87 3-503 AC 09/84
2-145 AA 05/75 2-525 AA 09/86 3-503F AA 09/84
2-146 AA 05/75 2-526 AA 09/86 3-503J AA 09/84
2-147 AA 05/75 2-585 AA 09/86 3-503M AA 09/84
2-148 AA 05/75 2-601 AA 05/80 3-504 AC 02/87
2-149 AA 05/75 2-602 AC 01/87 3-505 AC 02/87
2-301 AB 03/82 2-603 AC 01/88 3-505M AA 02/87
2-302 AA. 01/87 2-604 AC 01/87 3-506 AB 06/85
2-303 AC 10/83 2-605 AC 01/87 3-507 AA 05/84
2-303M AC 04/88 2-606 AC 05/80 3-507M AA 12/87
2-303Q AC 12/80 2-607 AB 01/82 3-508 AA 01/81
2-304 AC 12/83 2-701 AA 01/88 3-509 AB 05/85
2-305 AB 02/79 2-702 AA 05/80 3-510 AA 05/80
2-306 AA 05/75 2-801 AC 06/87 3-511 AA 05/85
2-307 AA 07/75 2-802 AC 09/83 3-512 AB 05/85
2-308 AA 05/75 2-802F AA 09/83 3-513 AB 05/80
2-309 AA 05/75 : 2-802J AA 09/83 3-514 AB 01/87
2-310 AA 05/75 2-802M AA 06/87 3-515 AA 12/82
2-311 AA 05/75 2-802T AA 09/83 3-516 AA 02/84
2-312 AA 05/75 2-803 AD 02/79 3-517 AA 12/82
2-313 AA 07/75 2-804 AD 08/79 3-521 AA 01/88
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

ORIGINAL ISSUE
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
3-522 AA 09/86 4-507 AA 10/83 5-804 AA 05/80

3-523 AA 09/86 4-508 AA 10/83
3-524 AA 09/86 4-509 AA 10/83
3-525 AA 09/86 4-510 AA 10/83
3-555 AA 08/88 4-511 AA 10/83
3-601 AA 12/82 4-512 AA 10/83
3-602 AA 12/82 4-513 AA 10/83
3-603 AA 12/82 4-514 AA 10/83
3-604 AA 12/82 4-801 AB 05/80
3-605 AA 12/82 4-803 AA 03/87
3-606 AA 12/82
3-607 AA 04/86 5- 1 AF 04/87
3-608 AA 12/82 5- 101 AF 01/77
3-801 AA 06/87 5- 102 AA 10/76
5- 103 AG 01/77
4- 1 AA 10/83 5- 104 AA 07/72
4-001 AA 07/72 5- 105 AA 07/72
4-101 AA 07/72 5- 106 AB 07/72
4-102 AA 07/72 5- 107 AA 04/83
4-103 AB 05/74 5- 108 AC 04/81
4-104 AC 01/77 5- 108M AB 04/81
4-105 AD 01/77 5- 109 AA 05/80
4-106 AC 12/84 5- 110 AB 07/72
4-107 AD 09/83 5- 111 AD 01/77
4-108 AA 07/72 5- 112 AD 01/77
4-109 AA 09/80 5- 113 AB 05/75
4-110 AB 05/74 5- 114 AC 05/75
4-301 AC 12/84 5- 115 AA 07/72
4-302 AA 05/78 5- 116 AA 07/72
4-303 AB 12/84 5- 117 AA 05/75
4-304 AB 12/74 5- 118 AA 05/75
4-304M AB 12/74 5- 119 AA 05/80
4-305 AD 01/87 5- 120 AB 10/78
4-306 AD 01/87 5- 121 AB 10/78
4-306M AB 09/77 5- 301 AC 09/77
4-307 AE 01/87 5- 302 AC 01/88
4-308 AD 01/88 5- 303 AC 05/80
4-309 AA 08/86 5- 304 AB 07/72
4-309M AA 10/87 5- 305 AC 05/84
4-310 AB 08/86 5- 306 AB 03/87
4-3 10M AD 05/85 5- 307 AB 03/87
4-311 AB 07/84 5- 501 AA 07/72
4-312 AB 07/84 5- 502 AA 07/72
4-313 AA 07/84 5- 517 AA 10/86
4-501 AA 05/85 5- 518 AA 10/86
4-502 AB 05/85 5- 519 AA 10/86
4-503 AC 09/81 5- 801 AB 03/87
4-505 AA 09/86 5- 802 AA 03/87
4-506 AA 09/86 5- 803 AB 05/80
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ^-^TU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^^fiF°___
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANlilAL 03

LIST OF A IRCRAFTMOD/FICA T/ONS WHICH HAVE RESUL TED
IN MANUAL UPDATING
definition
415 (FF3) - 416 (FF4) 417 (FF36) - 418 (FF5) - 419 (FF6) - 433 (FF17) - 457 (FF42)
460 (FF44) 480 (FF60) 509 (FF76) - 514 (FF97) - 527 (FF107) - 550 (FF1 19) -
559 (FF124) - 571 (FF146) - 575 (FF147).
Change 1 of October 1979 including following modification :
551 (FF )
Change 2 of February 1981 including following modifications
695 (FF238) - 71 1 (FF254)
The re-issue dated May 1990 includes the previous updatings.
F1AD
05-90 Restricted E/F
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION Page
PREAMBLE iii
1 WING GROUP 1-1
2 FUSELAGE (from frame 1 to frame 22) 2-1
3 FUSELAGE (from frame 22 to frame 41) 3-1
4 TAIL UNIT 4-1
5 REMOVABLE STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS 5-1
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^_
f^J>-^r^l
__
MIRAGE F
Restricted
INTRODUCTION
- Servicing
- Trouble shooting
Removal-disassembly
-
- Inspection-maintenance-adjustment
instructions, etc.
Thus :
It summarizes :
observed by ail the personnel who may work on the equipment.
It defines :
AC
07-75 Restricted "
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^>-f£rU.
BREGUET AVIATION^^==^<>i>
MIRAGE F
û*a=*>^=55^ Restricted
It gives :
- parking-mooring,
- ground handling,
- tyres,
- engine starting,
- run-up.
AC
11-75 Restricted iv
BREGUET AVIATION ^-r"->
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
SUB Take-off Pilot
Servicing Structure Hydraulic Electrical
General
Flight Power-plant environment
CHAP and and landing system

and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Maintenance
cycle
Mooring controls drive furnishings
operations
points Lighting
2 torques section conditioning
' handling controls doors and
Inspection (up to
doors external
frame 22)

and Replenishing rear section Rudder
Failure
and and
systems

Nose L/G
Pilot
Tires Tail unit High-lift installation
4 products ejection
Draining
Pre-flight
Removable Engine
components
inspections control
Preparation L/G and door

Transporta¬
6 tion
for controls
mission
Engine Brakes and

7 braking
starting
system
Anti-shimmy
Run-up
8 and steering
Check Mights
controls
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
NWS - radio NWS
SUB NWS NWS
NWS and flight control NWS Data
CHAP communi¬ control and operational Wiring
general electronics armament recording
cation
navigation systems
and AP
systems
General General General General General Genor.nl General General

0 information information information information inlormation information information information
and salety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Use of Index of
testing and V/UHF
Flight electrical
Pitot Armament Gun
1 trouble control and
system system panel system
Rocket
26 V 400 Hz UHF Air data Wiring Fatigue
supply system system diagrams meter
system

3 Gyro system
Close combat
VOR/ILS Air-to-Air
5 IFF
marker missile
systems
Navigation Radar
6 system detector
Radar Electronic
7 counter-
altimeter
measures
Reconnais¬
Radio
8 sance
compass
system
Towing
system
9
practice
targets
AJ
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//
BREGUET AVIATION^__
^-"-tVl
^^
MIRAGE F
Restricted
1- MAINTENANCE MANUAL COMPOSITION
A A title page identifying the publication.


No
0 - General
3 - Removal- Installation
5 - Inspection-Check-Adjustment
Painting
8 - Repair
NOTE:
(1) Maintenance and lubrication are covered by Sub-Section 6.
(3) Sub-Section 8 covers the reconditioning operations for the items of the system to which the
Manual is devoted. The structural repairs of the aircraft form the subject of a separate Manual
AC
06-74 Restricted ix
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -i>-u^l /VMlxMOC I
BREGUET AVIATION ^<<£. _^
Restricted

aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
an aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
:
components ; it is illustrated whenever necessary and the internal index numbers are given in the
components.
AC
06-74 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT W^^-Û MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^P3^^^"^
==^> Restricted
the operation.

B Fuselage doors
AC
06-74 Restricted xi
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// AV-"-~V) / V\ 1\ r\
1 VJ7 L. T
BREGUET AVIATION^sL ^ ^
__ _ Restricted
C Wing doors

60 to 90 -trailing edge.
the trailing edge.
V 138.
- functional diagrams
- wiring diagrams.
systems or functions:
indicator lights.
made.
charts :
AC
06-74 Restricted *"
JS MARCEL DASSAULT MIRAGE F
:EGUET AVIATION
Restricted

v Single-pole
42R contactor
Fuse-breaker
i- Coaxial connector
Terminal lug Box

1 -wire lead
A Double-pole
Sub-assembly . terminals control switch
I
Three-pole
2-wire lead
i i
Connector
~ IH- circuit-breaker
Double-pole
contactor
i i 2 3 r Single pole
3-wire lead
on equipment
Spring-loaded,
both directions
42Z Single- pole X

Â" pushbutton
Double-pole
Independent n-wire lead
control switch
6 connector
~~*
f Bus bars
Crossing without
Double-pole
Single pole
control switch
! Spring- loaded,
one dinrection
connection
pushbutton
(T\ Light or lamp
Crossing with
Magnetically-held
connection
pushbutton
Relay
«Xgh Coaxial connector

-e- Press-to-test
light
Single-pole
double-throw
>® Antenna switch
Double-pole
-K- Diode -ih DC ground

double-throw Time delay
relay
e
switch
E- Pushbutton
light
*-** Zener diode
Double-pole
triple-throw Flashing
\ r Resistor ^\y AC ground
M switch
relay
AC
06-74 Restricted xiii/xiv xiii/xiv
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS;

â Chassis ground I rx 12
TX
NPN
c\ Computing power ground /s~\ \ Synchro-
TR
CT
transistor
receiver $
P4
CTR
Terminal 6 of
test connector P4
Differential JDR PNP
synchro transistor
o CDX
o transmitter
o n-position
o selector switch
o
o Thyristor
o TR
*** Resolver
RS
Triac
Relay
-^çy)" unvar
Magnetron
-4 Cam-actuator
contact
Thermostat
-r
_j|
D-
Capacitor
Potentiometer Thyratron
/l
Fuse
-czzz>- Thermistor
Initiator
^ Photo-electric cell ®- Comparator
yfïÀ M ) Motor
Inductor
Amplifier
/// à q j Generator Transformer
Electronic
unit
( MG ) Motor-generator
& Single TR
Tachometer- Double TR
GT generator
AC
06-74 Restricted xv
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted

___ .__ Mechanical link
"© or Cam
__ Mechanical clutch
<D
Mechanical differential
Self-sealing coupling Manually-operated cock

(thermistor)
Electrically-operated cock,
Pressure reducing valve
relief valve
Float switch
r Non-return flapper Pressure switch
EP = Electro-pump
Fuel stop valve
B P = Pump
T Stop air valve

CD
m Filler plug
S Pressure transmitter

system
System No. 2
Systems other than
Hydraulic Ancillary systems
hydraulic systems
» c l systems
m- m m m Emergency system I
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

dimension
&
AND
the output state is if, and only if, all
1
>\ OR
one or more input states are 's . 1
1
NOT
D-
&
NAND (NOT-AND)
D-
all the input states are 1 's .
^1 NOR (OR-NOT)
D-
one or more input states are Vs.
i i
LOGIC EQUATIONS
S_ign x : AND operation
Example : S = (A + B + C) (D + E)
or S = B and D or E
AC
AVIONS MARCEL ,^n
DASSAULTj^J^-"-^!
« MIRAGE
I V IX/V V^ 1-
11 F
I
BREGUET AVIATION^xiF^ ^
Restricted

-the Manual number in the top R/H corner.
the page number in the bottom R/H corner.
-
if applicable, the technical definition of the page just on top of the date of issue. This shows the
-


7- CROSS-REFERENCES

from Section to Section ) Manual/Section
within a same section I
from Manual to Manual ': Manual/Section/Fig. (if necessary)

units.
dimensions, etc.).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted
pages).
A Procedure

B Page numbering
Second case : Jnsertion of one or more new pages between two existing pages.
3rd insertion
Successive
2nd insertion
insertions
1st insertion
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRSTUVWXY
f *
2 pages
Simultaneous
insertions
3 pages
AC XIX
06-74 Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
Example :

-both the pre- and post-modification pages will bear the same number. «MOD...X» will be shown
To avoid the necessity of creating English versions of certain illustrations the.translations of the

AC
02-80 Restricted XX
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ -" -1* / V\l r\/AVJ7L_
BREGUET AVIATION^à-^-
^<s jf^j
^-^ _ . ^
Restricted , . , A km i a i
MANUAL nr>
03
SECTION 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
0-1 DESCRIPTION - OPERATION
-Aircraft breakdown 0-1 01

-Dimensional characteristics of the various assemblies 0-102
-Partitioning 0-104
-Manufacturing principle 0-107
-Anti-corrosion protection 0-1 1 1
-Fuel tank sealing 0-1 1 5
-Water tightness of doors and skin junctions - Water draining 0-120
-Air pressure sealing 0-1 23
-Various tightnesses 0-1 25
-Thermal protection 0-126
-Inscriptions and symbols on aircraft 0-128
0-5 INSPECTION - CHECK - ADJUSTMENT .
-General inspection of riveting 0-501

-Inspection of aircraft skin and fittings 0-503
-Airframe measurements 0-505
-Check of aircraft sealing 0-538
-Inspections to be performed on an aircraft which has exceeded the
permissible load factor 0-539
-Inspectiorïé to be performed on an aircraft after arrester barrier
engagement 0-550
-Inspection of lockbolts 0-552
0-6 CLEANING - CORROSION PREVENTIVE TREATMENT - PAINTING
-Washing of aircraft skin panels 0-601

-Rinsing of aircraft 0-602
-Corrosion preventive maintenance 0-603
-Renewal of aircraft paint (See STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual)
-Renewal of self-lubricant paint (See STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual)
-Repair of antenna fairings 0-605
-Application of transfers, signs, markings and decals 0-607
-Inspection of water drains 0-609
-Corrosion preventive treatment 0-615
-Special corrosion preventive maintenance before and after exposure to
harsh environment 0-61 7
-Special corrosion preventive maintenance during exposure to harsh
environment 0-619
-Removal of deposits from structure for prevention of corrosion 0-621
0-8 REPAIR
-Sealing of integral tanks (See STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual)

-Attenuation of scratches 0-801
-Repair of heat insulation 0-805
-Teflon bonding process 0-806
-Replacement of a teflon-lined ball joint assembled by circular groove
swaging :...; 0-807
AG
BREGUET AVIATION^ _
IL^^^XL
__
MIRAGE F
SECTION 0

(cont'd)
Figure No Page
1 AIRCRAFT BREAKDOWN 0-101

2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VARIOUS ASSEMBLIES . 0-103
2M NOSE CONE PARTITIONING 0-104M
3 FUSELAGE PARTITIONING 0-106
4 WING 0-107
5 FUSELAGE 0-108
6 STABILATOR 0-109
7 VERTICAL STABILIZER 0-110
8 SEALING OF STRUCTURE COMPONENTS 0-116
9 SEALING OF ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS 0-117
10 SEALING OF FUEL TANK STRUCTURE 0-119
10M WATER TIGHTNESS 0-120M
11 WATER TIGHTNESS 0-121
11M WATER DRAINING 0-122M
12 AIR PRESSURE SEALING 0-124
13 VARIOUS TIGHTNESSES 0-124
14 THERMAL PROTECTION 0-127
14F «PROTECAL» COMPOUND PROTECTION 0-127F
14J INSTALLATION OF PANELS 0-127T
14M INSCRIPTIONS AND SYMBOLS ON AIRCRAFT.. 0-131
15 MEASURING POINTS ON AIRCRAFT 0-506
16 RECORD OF HEIGHTS OF CORRECTED WING POINTS WITH REGARD
TO SIGHT TUBE PLANE 0-512
17 WING GROUP : DETERMINATION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS -
TOLERANCES ON INCIDENCE AND ASYMMETRY 0-513
18 WING GROUP : CONVERSION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS 0-515
19 WING GROUP : CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND SYMMETRY 0-517
20 WING GROUP REPLACEMENT : DETERMINATION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATION
AND DIHEDRAL DEVIATION TO BE RECORDED ON A/C LOGBOOK 0-519
21 WING GROUP REPLACEMENT : CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND SYMMETRY. .. 0-520
22 RECORD OF HEIGHTS OF CORRECTED STABILATOR POINTS WITH REGARD
TO SIGHT TUBE PLANE 0-522
23 STABILATORS : DETERMINATION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS -
TOLERANCES ON INCIDENCE AND ASYMMETRY 0-523
24 STABILATORS : CONVERSION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS. . 0-525
25 STABILATORS : CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND SYMMETRY 0-527
26 STABILATOR REPLACEMENT : DETERMINATION OF INCIDENCE
DEVIATION AND DIHEDRAL DEVIATION TO BE RECORDED ON A/C
I OGBOOK 0-529
27 STABILATOR REPLACEMENT : CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND SYMMETRY . . . 0-530
28 RECORD OF DISTANCES OF FIN CORRECTED POINTS IN RELATION
TO BASIC PLANE 0-532
29 FIN : DETERMINATION OF YAW AND ROLL DEVIATIONS - TOLERANCES 0-533
30 FIN : CONVERSION OF LINEAR DEVIATIONS INTO ANGULAR DEVIATIONS. . . 0-535
30M FIN REPLACEMENT : DETERMINATION OF YAW AND ROLL DEVIATIONS -
TOLERANCES 0-535R
31 FUSELAGE - WING GROUP - TAIL UNIT TRIANGULATION 0-537
32 MEASURING THE MAIN WING-TO-FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS. 0-543
AB
11-79 Restricted 0-Z
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £m; MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION,
AIRCRAFT BREAKDOWN
(Figure 1)
The Mirage F1 aircraft consists of the following main removable assemblies :

- wing group 1 comprising two wings
- fuselage 2, all in one assembly from frame 1 to frame 41
- nose cone 3
- tail cone 4
- stabilator assembly 5 comprising two stabilators
- vertical stabilizer 6.
Each of these assemblies consists of removable sub-assemblies which are described in the
appropriate sections.
FIGURE 1 - AIRCRAFT BREAKDOWN

AC
BREGUET
/L=J>^rU
AVIATION^^=^^C>
MIRAGE F
^C^^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VARIOUS ASSEMBLIES
(Figure 2)
1 - WING
- Span 3,48 m (11.44 ft) + fitting 3,71 m (12.20 ft)

- Root chord 3,85 m (13.16 ft)
- Tip chord 1 ,34 m (4.40 ft)
- Maximum thickness 21,3 cm (8.38 in)

- Weight empty equipped 650 kg (1432.6 lbs)
2- FUSELAGE FROM FRAME 1 TO FRAME 41
-Length 11,18 m (36.70 ft)

-Maximum width 1,95 m (6.41 ft) -(-undercarriage 2,92 m (9.60 ft)
- Maximum height 1 ,44 m (4.73 ft)
- Weight empty equipped (+ engine) 5525 kg (12177.6 lbs)
3- NOSE CONE
- Length 2,38 m (8.10 ft)

- Maximum width 75 cm (2.46 ft)
- Maximum height 77 cm (2.53 ft)
- Weight equipped (Radar + radome) 220 kg (484.9 lbs)
4- TAIL CONE
- Length 73 cm (2.40 ft)

- Height with brake chute fairing 1 ,40 m (4.60 ft)
- Diameter 1 ,09 m (3.58 ft)
-Weight 22 kg (48.4 lbs)
5- STABILATOR
- Span 1 ,93 m (6.34 ft)

-Tip chord 95çm (3.12 ft)
- Maximum thickness 14 cm (5.51 in)
- Weight 92 kg (202.7 lbs)
6- VERTICAL STABILIZER
-Maximum height 2,16 m (7.10 ft) +0,18 m (0.59 ft) 2,34 m (7.69 ft)
- Tip chord 1 ,22 m (4.01 ft)
- Maximum thickness 15,3 cm (6.02 in)

- Weight equipped 180 kg (396.7 lbs)
AE
°9"77 Restricted °-102
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
1,87 m (6. 15 ft)
^=^ Cdg CC
34 cm (1. 11 ft)
73 cm (2.40 ft)
POINTE ARRIERE
TAIL CONE
POINTE AVANT
NOSE CONE
DEMI-VOILURE
WING
FUSELAGE
EMPENNAGE VERTICAL
DEMI-EMPENNAGE HORIZONTAL VERTICAL STABILIZER
STABILATOR
1.22 m 14.01 ft)
95 cm 13.12 ft)
r
(1.48 ft)
Epaisseur maxi-14 cm Epaisseur maxi - 15,3 cm

Max. thickness 5.51 in Max. thickness - 6.02 in
FIGURE 2 - CARACTERISTIQUES DIMENSIONNELLES DES DIFFERENTS ENSEMBLES

DIMENTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE VARIOUS ASSEMBLIES
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^>-^r5L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONî^^f^ . ......... M
PARTITIONING
(Figure 3)
The aircraft structural components such as spars, ribs, frames, floors, skins delimit some
compartments.
Besides the cockpit, these compartments contain the engine, the landing gears, the fuel and all the
equipments required for flying and performing the various aircraft missions. The compartments shall be
identified by their door numbers, whenever it is possible, (see 01-2)
1 - WING GROUP PARTITIONING
From the root to the tip, each wing includes :

V0.31 - slat actuator located at root between front spar, false spar Lg 1 , front rib OC, and rib N1 .
-
- V0.61 - flap actuator, at root, between rear spar, flap deflector false spar, rear rib OC, rib N1 .
- V1.56 - spoiler servo-control located between false spar Lg 5, rear spar, rib N1 and rib N2.
- V2.46 - aileron servo-control located in central structure box between false spars Lg 3 and Lg 5
and between ribs N2A and N3.
The structure box constituting tight tank 12 is delimited :

- Transversa I ly by :
- rib OC and rib N2A
- Longitudinally by :
- rear spar and false spar Lg1 to rib N1
- false spars Lg5 and Lg1 between ribs N1 and N2A.
2- FUSELAGE PARTITIONING
From front to rear, there are :

- nose cone partitioning
- fuselage partitioning
A Nose cone partitioning (Fig. 2M)
The nose cone includes :

- radar nose cone 1 , at the front part, fastened to nose cone frame I,
-a zone 2 between frames I and II, containing radar equipment and in which a ventilation duct
opens.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
P5.07
Cadres I Vc VI VII
(Frames)
P4.06
SECTION C
P4.09
. P2.08
P3.06 L P4.06
SECTION E
SECTION D P5.11
P4.09
P5.07
P4.06 P4.06
FIGURE 2M - COMPARTIMENTAGE POINTE AVANT

AA NOSE CONE PARTITIONING
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" * /V\ 1 1\ /-\V_7 C. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^£±-*-
^<e. ^?-=*o
^^^> .
Restricted n . » m i i a i
MANUAL no
03
At the lower part, the compartments

-P1.06 - of pitot-head between frames I and III,
-P2.08 - of auxiliary unit - of filter transformer between frames II and IV,
-P3.06 - of radio altimeter antenna between frames III and IV,
-P4.06 - of junction box and laser telemeter structure box between frames IV and VII,
-P5.07 - of sight unit between frames V and VII.
At the upper part

-compartment 3 accommodating refuelling boom filler valve between frames II and IV,
-housing 4 of in-flight refuelling boom between frames IV and VII,
-P5.11 for the radio-altimeter box between frames V and VII.
At the center part

-P4.09 for laser supply unit, V/UHF, VHF unit, between frames IV and V,
-P5.03 for firing computer, air data system, navigation computer between frames V and
VII.
B - Fuselage partitioning from frame 1
From front to rear, there are:

1 and 2, consisting of 2 structure boxes,
-a non -pressurized zone between frames
-structure box 1 for refuelling boom attachment, at the top,
-structure box 01 -06 for the boom actuator and some equipments, at the bottom,
-"DOPPLER" compartment 2, between frames 2 and 5 bis,
-the tight single-seat cockpit 3, from frame 2 to slanted frame and to frame 12 at the up¬
per section,
-an equipment compartment 4 between frames 5b and 6b,
-landing light 5 between frames 6b and 8b.
- Nose U/C well 6 from frame 1 0 to frame 1 7.
-Two side structure boxes on either side of the U/C well,

-14.04i for the auxiliary servo-control and pitch control linkage,
-14.08i for the auxiliary servo-control and roll control linkage.
-Transverse bay between frames 10 and 12

-1 1 .03 on right hand side,
-1 1 .09 on left hand side,
-13.00 equipment bay from frame 12 to frame 17 containing a metal fuel tank (see 03-2).
-L/H and R/H airbrake bays 7 from frames 18 to 21 .
-Air intakes 8 between frames 1 7 and 25

-17.06 lower equipment bay, between frames 17 and 19,
-19.05 - 19.07 Gun bays from frame 19a to frame 23,
I -20.06 Equipment bay from frame 20a to frame 22,
-20.03 - 20.09 Ammunition magazines 1 u«t,.,Mr. *,,«. oi *a oo
-20.04 - 20.08 Link magazines j
between frameS 21 and 22
-22.06 Equipment bay from frame 22 to frame 25a.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION D SECTION E SECTION F SECTION G SECTION H SECTION J
13. 00 36.10_ JUU .36.02
14.08 i
01. 06
FIGURE 3 - COMPARTIMENTAGE DU FUSELAGE

FUSELAGE PARTITIONING
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti -i*-^-\l «Y» IKMwL T
BREGUET AV.AT.ON^P^^ Restricfed MANUAL 03
Engine compartment 10 from frame 25b to frame 30.
Engine duct 1 1 from frame 30.
Main L/G bays 9 between frames 22 and 29

- 36.02 - 36.10 Pitch servo-controls between frames 36 and 39
- 39.01 Drag chute from frame 39.
The tight structure boxes constituting the fuel tanks include :

- Front central tank 13 between air intakes V branches, between frames 17 and 20a
- Front lateral tanks between frames 17 and 22
- Feeder tank (front) 1 5 between frames 22 and 25a
- Feeder tank (rear) 16 between frames 26 and 31.
- Rear tanks 17 between frames 31 and 36.
4- STABILATOR PARTITIONING
These compartments are delimited by the structure and are not accessible except for :
- E1.35 attachment nut of stabilators.
5- VERTICAL STABILIZER PARTITIONING
From root to fairing, there are the following :

- D1.48 The rudder sector and AFU between main spar, false spar Lg3, ribs NO and N3
- D2.51 Trim actuator between false spar Lg3, rear spar AR, ribs N2 and N3.
- D2.43 Rudder servo-control between main spar, false spar Lg3, ribs N2 and N3.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUFACTURING PRINCIPLE
1 - WING MANUFACTURING PRINCIPLE (Fig. 4)
Each wing, mainly made of light alloy comprises some high tensile strength components.
It essentially consists of a multi-spar main structure box 1 of integral construction on which are
hinged droop 2 and slotted 3 leading edge slats, inboard 7 and outboard 6 wing flaps and spoilers 5. On
the structure box, all the seams are performed by titanium SL rivets and « HUCK » bolts.
to the fuselage by three fittings.

Each wing is attached
One main fitting embedded between frames 25a and 25b transmitting the components due to
-
bending moment, lift and drag loads. Besides, the rear and front faces transmit a component of the
twisting moment.
- One front fitting at location of frame 22 and
- One rear fitting at location of frame 28.
These two fittings transmit the components of the twisting moment.
_/?gr" Yù'YM "»»»»
FIGURE 4 - WING
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
2- FUSELAGE MANUFACTURING PRINCIPLE (Figure 5)
The light alloy fuselage is a semi-integral monocoque construction with frames, stringers and skins.
The fuselage bending strength is ensured by the skin stiffened by the stringers, four of which are
preponderant, two at the upper section (stringers L1) and two at the lower section (stringers L20).
The twisting strength is ensured by the skin which is maintained in shape by the stringers and the
frames. These various components are assembled by titanium screws, titanium SL rivets, HUCK rivets
and standard rivets as well as by welding spots at pressurized compartments.
Skins
The external skins are made of panel assembly, chemically milled or formed sheet, of various
thicknesses.
These skins are cut out to accommodate the various doors (See STRUCTURAL REPAIR
MANUAL)
3- NOSE CONE
Itis a conventional structure box with frames, webs, stringers and skin. The distribution of webs
and floors is such that it allows for maximum equipments. The access doors to the various
compartments are distributed on either side of the nose cone, so as to ensure correct stiffness. The front
section is extended by a radar nose cone.
4- TAIL CONE
It consists of an assembly made of machined sheet metals strengthened by frames.
36 39 41
SECTION A
L.20
FIGURE 5 -FUSELAGE
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
5- STABILATOR MANUFACTURING PRINCIPLE (Fig. 6)
Each light alloy stabilator consists essentially of a multi-spar main structure box 1 of integral
construction.
Forward, the main structure box is extended by leading edge 2 of conventional structure, and,
aftward, by trailing edge 4 of honeycomb structure. A removable tip fairing 3 is located at the outboard
end of the structure box.
Each stabilator includes one actuating cylinder and two bearings fitted with one hinge pin integral
with fuselage.
The two bearings transmit, to the structure, the components due to :
- bending moment
-lift
-drag
- twisting moment.
The actuating cylinder transmits the component due to twisting moment.
Since loads are high, root rib section, at location of internal bearing and actuating cylinder, is
made of steel.
FIGURE 6 - STABILA TOR

AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- VERTICAL STABILIZER MANUFACTURING PRINCIPLE (Fig.7)
The vertical stabilizer consists of fin and rudder.
The light alloy fin consists of a main multi-spar structure box 1 of integral construction.
Forward, the main structure box is extended by leading edge 2 of conventional structure, and,
rearward, by rudder 3.
Fin is attached to fuselage by three fittings :

- one central fitting embedded in frame 36 transmitting, to the structure, the components due to :
- bending moment
- side-slip
- drag
- one front fitting at frame 33 and,
- one rear fitting at frame 39b.
These two fittings transmit the components due to twisting moment.
SECTION A
x: c r
FIGURE 7 - VERTICAL STABILIZER

AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ACCESSIBLE AREA INACESSIBLEAREA FUEL AREA
Protective treatment - no water stagnation

before assembling : - no corrosive product
LIGHT 1 +P drippings or fumes
PROTECTION - no temperature or
humidity variation
- no mechanical parts
Protective treatment - low part of accessible Protective treatment - no water stagnation - fuel tank
before assembling : areas before assembling : - no corrosive product
I +P + F 1 I +P + F1 drippings or fumes
NORMAL - no temperature or Protection on assembly :
PROTECTION humidity variation sealant

- inside the horizontal
stabilizer
- inside the ailerons, flaps, Finish : PR 1005 L paint
rudder
Protective treatment - battery emplacement Protective treament - insufficiently drained

before assembling : -area in contact with before assembling : low areas
I +P + F1 hydraulic fluid (servo¬ I 4-P + F1
HEAVY control)
PROTECTION Protection on assembly : - hydraulic reservoir Protection on assembly :
sealant - main and nose U/C wells sealant (if required)
- gun blast tubes
Finish : F2 Finish : F2
AA
05-78 Restricted 0-112 0-112
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJ>~ZV<
BREGUET AVIATION _ _ _
MIRAGE F
ANTI-CORROSION PROTECTION
1 - PRINCIPLE
Anti-corrosion protection of aircraft structural parts is accomplished in two steps :
- basic protection
- secondary protection by painting.
This anti-corrosion protection concerns the whole of the aircraft with the exception of external
paint application.
ABBREVIATIONS USED:
I Phosphate etch primer, metal primer

P Zinc chromate primer
F1 First top coat
F2 Second top coat
A Basic protection is systematic
It is applied only on a detail part, i.e., a monolithic, unassembled part or a part made up of welded
components. This protective treatment is applied only after all machining operations, such as forming,
cutting out, drilling or countersinking on basic parts, have been completed.
It consists in :
- for light alloys :
- plating
- anodizing
- for steels :
- cadmium plating
- metal spraying
- phosphating
- for titanium :
- anodizing
- for magnesium
- chromate treatment.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L>>--^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^cT __ ^
MIRAGE F
B Protection by painting is mandatory but may be reinforced or lightened according to the area
involved.
There are three area types :
- accessible area :
Inspection of this area must be easy enough to enable detection of corrosion as from initial signs
of evidence. It must be possible to efficiently treat during routine maintenance operations.
- inaccessible area :
Any area where access is impossible.
- fuel area
Any sealed compartment forming a fuel tank.

Any item in permanent contact with fuel.
The different catégories of protective treatment shall be applied according to the area involved :
- normal protection
- light protection
- heavy protection
The table indicates the protective treatment applied during manufacture and according to the
aircraft area.
C Protective treatment operative scheme of application
In the following order :

- protection on a detail part before assembling
- protection on assembly of detail parts by injection, bead, caulking
- protection of fasteners (screw heads, rivets...)
- finishing
2- APPLICATION OF THE OPERATIVE SCHEME TO PROTECTION CATEGORIES FOR

HOMOGENEOUS ASSEMBLIES
In all cases, countersinks shall be protected by adhesive or non-adhesive sealant when these
countersinks are on skins in air, water or fuel tight areas.
A Light protection : (accessible area)
- Protective treatment on a detail part before assembly :

l + P
- Protective treatment on assembly of :

- interfaces : none
- under head and on shank of screws and rivets, see para. 3
- protective treatment of fasteners (screw heads, rivet heads...) :
l+P
- finishing : none
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^l
tL^-^z^l MIRAGE F
B Normal protection : (lower portions of accessible areas, inaccessible areas as per table).
- Protective treatment of a detail part before assembly :

I + P + F1
- Protective treatment on assembly :

- of interfaces : none
- under head and on shank of screws and rivets, see para. 3
- Protective treatment of fasteners (screw heads, rivets heads) :

I + P+ F1
- Finishing : none
C Normal protection : (Fuel area)
- Protective treatment on assembly
- Before mounting on interfaces :

- application of PR sealant
- After mounting :
- injection of sealant or application of bead under head and on shank of screws and rivets-
see para. 3.
- Protective treatment of fasteners (screw heads, rivet heads) with PR sealant.
- Finishing protective treatment :

- a coat of PR 1005L by filling and emptying
- Finishing : only for beads located outside tank : F1 .
D Heavy protection : (accessible area subject to corrosion and inaccessible area as outlined in the
table).
- Protective treatment of a detail part before assembly :

I + P + F1
- Protective treatment on assembly :

- caulking with PR sealant is mandatory :
- on interfaces of homogeneous joints located in areas exposed to tricklings.
- by application under screw or rivet heads for all dimpled joints (see para. 3).
- protective treatment of fasteners (screw heads, rivet heads...) :
- with sealant or paint F2
- finishing : F2
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJL-îr
BREGUET AVIATION ^^
MIRAGE F
3- PROTECTION OF HETEROGENEOUS JOINTS ON ASSEMBLY
A Protective treatment of heterogeneous detail part interfaces on assembly
Aluminium
Anodized light
alloys.
Steels, cadmium plated, me¬

tal sprayed (Zn or AI), phos-
phated and painted. Cad¬
mium plated copper alloys.
Stainless steels
Titanium and
titanium alloys
(anodized or not) .
Magnesium alloys
Key:
- 0 : caulking not required
- C : caulking required (supplemented with sealing in some cases).
NOTE : The cauiking is carried out between detail parts having received their complete protection
(as a rule, basic protection and paint).
For reference :
Titanium/cadmium plated steel contact is forbidden above 150°C.
-
-Titanium should be isolated from cadmium-plated steel by sulphuric anodizing or sealant, above
80°C.
AA
05-78 Restricted 0-1 14F
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
To sum up :
(1 ) No caulking in the following particular cases :
- stainless steel to stainless steel

- titanium to stainless steel
- titanium to titanium.
(2) Caulking is carried out for assembling all parts made of :

- stainless steel
titanium or titanium alloy
-
magnesium alloy
-
whatever the material in contact with these parts (except for case 1 ).
B Protection of fasteners heterogeneous to the assembled materials.
(1) Assembly only between protected light alloy and cadmium plated part. (e.g. cadmium plated bolt
connecting light alloy parts).
The caulking is carried out under head and on shank in external areas and only when holes and
countersin kings are performed after protection.
- On countersinks in inaccessible areas.

It is carried out together with sealing in fuel areas.
- No caulking in accessible areas.
The final protection (Paint or PR application) is performed after assembly in inaccessible areas
and fuel areas.
(2) Assembly between - titanium or its alloys, magnesium alloys - stainless steels (e.g. assembly by
titanium screws, whatever the materials of assembled parts, except magnesium).
- Structure assembly - fixed installation on main structure.

- Caulking (even if protection is performed after drilling operation).
Standard installations
-
- Located, in inaccessible areas, installation is carried out without caulking (titanium attaching
screws).
(3) Removable assemblies (e.g. screwed inspection doors).
- No caulking under screw heads or on shanks whatever the materials in contact and the utilization
area.
- Countersinks and holes are mandatorily protected on detail parts (drilling prior to protection).
(4) Assembly protection of magnesium alloy parts
(a) Special precautions are required for ensuring assembly protection of magnesium parts mandatorily
chrome pickled without omission.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL-J>~irÇL
BREGUET AVIATIONôF3^^"^
MIRAGE F
^£-**^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) After application of priming coat and primer coat, the part faying surfaces and hardware resting
surfaces are exempt from finishing coat (to avoid overthickness préjudiciable to assembly). Caulking
and application of sealant on edge are performed on these areas during assembly.
(c) Insertion bores for assemblies and bushings are entirely exempt from finishing coat. Caulking is
performed on insertion (bushings and assembly components).
(d) After insertion and application of sealant on edge, any paint protection touch-up is carried out by
application of the complete paint scheme (Paint forbidden in fuel area).
C Protection of bushes and bearings on assembly
Bushes : steel or cupreous alloy in titanium or light alloy : caulking

Stainless steel bearing in light alloy : caulking
4- SPECIAL PROTECTION
A Electrical bonding
Electrical bonding areas are protected by chrome pickling, titanium anodizing, cadmium plating
or metal spraying which are anodic protections.
In other cases, the protection is locally removed.
B Areas where Filleralu is used
These areas are painted as per scheme PPR + PAC
If required, they may be covered with scheme I + P -I- F1 .
AA
05-78 Restricted 0-1 14T
BREGUET AVIATION ô_ _ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted ÂANUAL 03
FUEL TANK SEALING
The integral tank sealing on wing group and fuselage is obtained according to the same principle.
Sealing of the various component connections and attachments is ensured by the use of miscellaneous
seals.
The products used are applied :
- with brush, or
- as bead or by injection, or
- by interlaying, or
- with brush or by filling and draining.
The product used with a brush or by filling process is applied as finishing inside the integral tanks.
All the surfaces are coated with a protective film.
1 - SEALING PRINCIPLE OF STRUCTURE COMPONENTS (Fig. 8)
A Visible sealing :
- Corner bead. Located inside or outside the structure box
- Inter sheet bead. Located on the edge of integral panels.
B Non visible sealing (not repairable)

Injected bead : through injection holes between 2 screws or 2 rivets. It is safetied either with
- a
corner bead or with a second injected bead.
- Interlaying coat (faying surface seal). It is flattened on installation by sheet stacking.
2- ATTACHMENTS
The sealing principle of assembly components is identical with that described above (Fig. 9).
3- WING GROUP SEALING (Fig. 10)
Structure sealing is obtained on installation by interlaying PR sealant between lower surface skin
and structural components (false spar 1 - rear spar) between ribs 1 and 2A - by injection in grooves
provided on skin (in area comprised between ribs OC and 1 and various fittings).
Then, access to the inside of structural boxes is easy and visible corner beads are readily applied
inside structure box.
Since upper surface skin is structure box closing side, sealing is made by two injected beads.
Corner beads can be applied inside or outside the structure box.

Any attachment passing between two seals is mandatorily reinforced with a safety pin.
Wing doors (Fig. 10).
Doors V1-54i and V2-50 are fitted with «0» rings.
AA
01 ~77 Restricted 0"115
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
A -INTERPOSITION B- CORDON D'ANGLE

FA YING SURFACE SEAL CORNER BEAD
Cordon de
PR. 1422 B2
Bead of
PR.1422B2
PR.1431 S1
Débordement si e < 12 2 couches d'enrobage 2 couches dej Jcouche d'assise

Overlap if th < 0.47 in PR. 1422 A2 PR. 1422 A2 PR. 1422 A2
2 coatings of 2 coat of / pre-coat of
PR. 1422 A 2 PR.1422A2 PR.1422A2.
2<e< 12
0.078 in < th
1 couche d'assise
1422 A2
pre-coat of
1422 A2.
Cordon de PR. 1 422 B2

Bead of PR. 1422 B2
-CORDON INTER TOLE -CORDON INJECTE

INTER-SHEET BEAD INJECTED BEAD
Sécurité injection PR. 1422 B2

Injection safety of PR. 1422 B2
PR. 1422 B2
.Injection de PR. 1422 B2

Injection of PR. 1422 B2
FIGURE 8 - ETANCHEITE DES ELEMENTS D'OSSATURE

SEALING OF STRUCTURE COMPONENTS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^-S^53
MIRAGE F
1- RIVETS
2 couches PR
2 coats of PR
PR. 2 couches PR PR
2 coats of PR
Rivet standard
Standard rivet Rivet Huck étanche Rivet Huck-Rivet Huck
Tight Huck rivet
2 couches PR
2 coats of PR
3 couches PR 3 couches PR
3 coats of PR 3 coats of PR
2 - VIS
SCREWS
3 couches PR 2 couches PR.
3cpatsofPR \ 2 coats of PR
Serrage par l'écrou

Tightening by nut
Vis étanche
Tight screw
3 - ECROUS
NUTS
.2 couches- PR Injection PR 3 couches PR 2 couches PR
' coats of PR dans coupe I le 3 coats of PR 2 coats of PR
Injection of
PR into cup
Ecrous hexagonaux Ecrou à river borgne

Hexagonal nuts Blind anchor nut
FIGURE 9 - ETANCHEITE DES ELEMENTS D'ASSEMBLAGE

AB SEALING OF ASSEMBL Y COMPONENTS
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT l
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted AAANUAL 03
4- FUSELAGE STRUCTURE SEALING (Fig. 10)
Structural components constituted by :

-inner skins
-webs
- floors
- outer skins
comprise grooves for injection, with additional corner beads.
A Fixed skins are assembled on structure by riveting ; these various panels include welded and riveted
stringers. Sealing between skins is obtained with inter-sheet beads.
B- Screwed removable skins (Fig. 10) (17-00 - 27-01(11) - 27-03(09) - 30-03(09) - 31-01(11.1) -
32-03(09)) are sealed by injected beads and attached by sealed screws (see Fig. 9) to anchor nuts.
C- Doors (Fig. 10)
(1 ) External doors
Fitted with an «O» ring, they are attached by screws to anchor nuts integral with door edgings,
except door 17-02(10) which is sealed by injected bead ; attachment with F screw.
(2) Internal doors
Door 1 7-06i is sealed by an injected bead ; attachment with F screw.

Doors 18-04i(08i), 22-03i(09i), 30-04i(08i) are fitted with two «O» rings. The other doors are
fitted with a seal.
AA
12~76 Restricted °-118
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
.31 .01 .1/1(11 .1/1)
27.01/3(1 l/3)_ ,_31 .01 .1(11 .1)
18.04 i (08ÏX-, 22.03i(09ij 27.01(111 1/2)
_19.l0
FIGURE 10 - ETANCHEITE AU COMBUSTIBLE
SEALING OF FUEL TANK STRUCTURE
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^. __^ -
MIRAGE F
WATER TIGHTNESS OF DOORS AND SKIN
JUNCTIONS - WATER DRAINING
1 - WATER TIGHTNESS OF DOORS AND SKIN JUNCTIONS (Figures 10M - 11)
It is obtained using sealant and seals in certain compartments of the nose cone, at fuselage upper
section and on sides, up to fuselage mid-frame, on removable structure components, moving
components, fixed skin connections and structural parts exposed to water.
A Sealing by sealant application
(1) Intersheet connections

They are performed :
- at all skin junctions
- on wing group fillets at upper section between fuselage and fillet
- on fin fillets, fin side
- on pitot head front fairing between nose cone and fairing. The fairing attachment screws are
fitted with sealant.
(2) Door sealing
From frame 10, doors of fuselage, wing group upper surface and fin are sealed between doors and
resting surfaces by a sealant bead. This bead adheres only to the door.
B Sealing of upper door 13-00 (Cross-section A-E)
This door is made tight by a foam seal on door lateral edgings, in LH side bent section, in RH side
stiffeper corner. Rear surface of frame 12 and front surface of frame 17 are fitted with gutters at
junction with the door. Each of these gutters includes a special conductor seal held in place by bonding.
All the ports or slots > 1 ,5 mm (0.058 in) shall be blanked with sealant.
C Sealing of laser telemeter doors and fairing (Figure 10M)
-On nose cone

- Doors P2-08, P4-09, P5-1 1 , P5-03, fairing P4-06.
Sealing is obtained with silicone seals bonded on the periphery of doors and fairing bearing
against bent sections integral with the structure (Section D).
-On fuselage - door 1 1-03 (09) (Section F-G)

Sealing is obtained with two silicone seals bonded in a bent section on the two door vertical
resting surfaces.
D Canopy sealing (Cross section A.B.C.D.)
Sealing is obtained with a silicone foam seal bonded on the periphery of canopy bearing surface, in
the axis of canopy seal « U » section (See 09-2).
The canopy section is sealed with PR sealant bead at lateral bent section connections above hinge
support.
E Nose cone sealing (Figure 10M)
Sealing between nose cone and fuselage.

-
It is ensured by a rubber seal, made of 4 bonded sections, covered by bonding strips 1 held by
edgings 2 riveted to frame 1 (Section E).
- Sealing of structure box

it is obtained with a PR sealant bead :
filler valve between front floor and front boom webs
- in the compartment of refueling boom
and at all connections,
- in the housing of refueling boom between upper floor and rear boom webs and at all
connections.
AB
12"76 Restricted °-120
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
SECTION A SECTION B SECTION C

Cl
SECTION D SECTION E
_*/-
FIGURE 10M - ETANCHEITE A L'EAU

WATER TIGHTNESS
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE E CROSS SECTION E SECTION G SECTION F COUPE N

CROSS SECTION N
Cadres
iâoreb 123
' '
4 5 6 7 8
>
9' 11
' '
12 '
13 '
14 '
15
'
17 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
Frames
CI 2 C.17
r
COUPE A COUPE B
SECTION J
CROSS SECT/ON A CROSS SECTION B
V2 . 66
VI .62^ V2.46^/"
COUPE C
CROSS SECTION C
COUPE D
CROSS SECT/ON D SECTION L
FIGURE 11 - ETANCHEITE A L'EAU

AG WATER TIGHTNESS
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L*à>~?V^
BREGUET AVIATIONôF='^«"s*0
MIRAGE F
^£&£*^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
F Stabilator sealing (Section K.L)
Itobtained with :
is
circular seal at internal hinge bearing on stabilator rib 0 surface
- a
-a PR sealant bead at all connections of skins and trailing edge structure components in
honeycomb area.
H Hinge point of stabilator (Section L)
Sealing is obtained with :

- PR sealant bead and injection between bush and pivot pin.
J Fin sealing (Section M - Cross section N)
Sealing between fin and brake chute fairing is obtained using :
- two rubber seals clamped in bent sections, and

a silicone seal bonded on a bucket integral with fin.
K Pin sealing on wing group upper surface (Section P)
All flight control pins crossing wings are sealed with PR sealant under head on upper surface side.
2- WATER DRAINING (Figure 11M)
Draining is made through skin holes. These holes enable trickling or condensation water trapped in
some compartments to be drained.
Various holes are used for draining :
On nose cone :
- the compartment of refueling boom filler valve (Section L)
- the housing of refueling boom (Section M)
On fuselage :
the buckets of nose cone upper attachment fittings (Section A)
-
- incidence probe support between frames 1 and 2 (Section B)
-upper gutters of battery bay doors (11-03) and oxygen compartment doors (11-09) between
frames 1 1 and 12 (Section D)
-canopy and windshield sections between frames 1 and 2, 6 and 8, 11 and 12 (Section C -
Section J)
- structure box of canopy hinge housing between frames 12 and 13 (Section E)
- structure boxes of ground rescue handle housing between frames 12 and 13 (Section E)
- recess of radio bay air vent scoops (Section K)
- structure box of electro-static connection at frame 17a (Section F)
- structure box of pre-cooler access door 29-07
- structure box of electro-static connection at frame 30 (Section G)
- access compartments to engine trunnions ahead of frame 30, on LH and RH sides (Section G)
On wing group :
- inboard and outboard flaps

- flap structure box at location of trailing edge (Section H)
- on lower surface
- wing structure box at location of ribs 1-3-4
- navigation light guard, at each wing tip, between ribs 5 and 16F.
On fin :
- compartment of direction finding unit, aft of radar detector.
AB
12-76 Restricted °"122
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 11M -DRAINAGE DE L'EAU

WATER DRAINING
AK
01-87 Restricted 0-122M FIGURE IIM 0-122M FIGURE 11M 0-122M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J^^-^rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^âF^^Ô M AMI I Al (Yi
^Z2£^^± Restricted MANUAL 03
AIR PRESSURE SEALING

(Figure 12)
It is performed in pressurized area (Cabin and lateral structure boxes)
1 - SEALING WITH PR SEALANT (Section A)
Door 10-04(08) is sealed by interlaying PR sealant on door periphery and by fitting screws with
PR sealant
2- SEALED DOOR 03-03 (Section B)
It is fitted with an O-ring, attachment is made by screws on anchor nuts
3- INTERNAL DOOR at frame 2 (Section C)
It is fitted with a rubber seal. Attachment is made by screws on anchor nuts.
4- CANOPY SEALING (Section D)
It is made by an inflatable seal (See 09.2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT \~li.\ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<-£i.-~
SECTION B
mmr
03.03^ 10.04(08)
Cadres 12 3 4 10 11 12 13
Frames
<2° ^r1
i <\ w y<^
SECTION C
P SECTION A SECTION D
t
5s
L.7
/?i i n
ï
FIGURE 12 ETANCHEITE PRESSURISATION
AIR PRESSURE SEALING
AC
BREGUET AVIATION^,
MIRAGE F
VARIOUS TIGHTNESSES
(Figure 13)
1 - TIGHTNESS TO GUN FIRE SMOKE
A Gun blast tubes (Sections A - B - C)
The gun blast tube tightness is performed :

- at connection of rear blast tube and anti-whip fitting by PR sealant bead between flange 1 and
rear gun blast tube 4. The bead does not adhere to flange (Section C)
- by PR sealant injection between front gun blast tube 2, center blast tube 3 and joint plate
(Section B)
- by PR sealant interlaying between blast tube edges and structure ; seal does not adhere on aircraft
structure (Section A)
- by hardware sealing
B Doors and panels in gun bay
Tightness of doors and panels, located under gun bay ceiling between frames 19a and 22, is made
by seals bonded on their periphery.
.2 - AIR TIGHTNESS (Section D)
Sealing is performed on the periphery of lower 5 and upper 6 air intake doors by a PR sealant
bead. This bead adheres only to door.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 19a 20b
yjy////////////////^^^^
COUPE E
rz% ETANCHEITEAL'AIR
CROSS SECT/ON E AIR TIGHTNESS
SECTION D
19.07.1i 19.05.1
COUPE F
CROSS SECTION F
19.07.2i 20.06.Î 19. 05.21
W///////////////////^^^^
SECTION A SECTION C
ssssigaE
ETANCHEITE AUX GAZ DES ARMES

TIGHTNESS TO GUN FIRE SMOKE
FIGURE 13 - ETANCHEITES DIVERSES

VARIOUS TIGHTNESSES
AB
BREGUET AVIATION,
iL^>-^r\l.
^^
MIRAGE
, .,
F
^n
THERMAL PROTECTION
(figures 14, 14F and 14J)
1 - GENERAL
Thermal protection is performed :
in zone A :
-
- nose cone : between frames I and VII, inside the various structure boxes - on doors, pitot
probe rear fairing, laser telemeter fairing (filler valve compartment, door, refueling boom housing and
door between frames II and III are not heat-insulated),
-fuselage : between frames 1 and 2, in the lower equipment structure box (section F) -
between frames 2 and 3 on structure lower section (section G) - in cockpit (section H) and on equip¬
ment bay door (section J),
- in zone B : engine compartment and duct,
- in stabilator servo-control structure box.
2- DESCRIPTION
A Protected zones
(1) Zone A
Heat insulation is obtained by bonding «polyurethane» foam 2 protected by «Nylar», to the

internal faces ot the skin panels in the various structure boxes and of the removable components.
(2) ZoneB
(a) Between frames 26 and 36, protection on each side of the fuselage is by :
- three «Protecal» panels 3-4-5,
- one titanium thermal shield 6 covering the upper section of panel 3,
- two laminated plastic panels 7 - 8.
On LH side : one titanium thermal shield 6 covers the lower section of panel 3.
On RH side (modification 711 incorporated) : a titanium plate also covers the lower section of
panel 3.
Between frames 27 and 28, in engine compartment (detail R) :

-two titanium baffle plates 19-20, each of them secured with screws at front and rear sections.
These components are screwed on anchor nuts integral with tank internal structural skins by
special screws 9 (LH pitch) and on edge by screws 10 (sections N and P). The upper portion of the
ring at frame 31 also comprises a laminated plastic panel 11, bonded and riveted (section L).
(b) The portion of the engine compartment located between frames 38, 39A, 39B and 41 is protected
by «Vicotex» 648 laminated plastic plates covered with stainless steel watered sheets ; the latter are
held in place by edge jumpers 21. This protective device is secured to the structure by wide washers 17
and screws 18 attached with anchor nuts 23 (see detail, section M).
Such protection consists of :

- one upper component 12, between points C-C,
- two upper lateral components 13, RH and LH, between points C-F,
- one lower component 15, between points J-J,
- two lower lateral components 14, RH and LH, between points G-J,
-two stainless steel slide panels 16, LH and RH, between points F-G ; each panel is covered by
a bonded and riveted laminated plastic plate, consisting of two parts joined end to end.
At frame 41, the components are covered with seven stainless steel folded plates with laminated
plastic plates fitted between mating surfaces ; upper folded plate 24, LH and RH upper folded plates
25, LH and RH center folded plates 26, LH and RH lower folded plates 27 (frame 41, viewed from the
rear).
AG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL=P~r1>l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^r^F^^xÔ» *.*.....*.««»
(c) At junctions in zone B between skins, internal sheets and frames, the protection is obtained by
fitting laminated plastic strips between the mating surfaces.
(3) Tail unit servo control structure box (cross section S)
Heat insulation is obtained by bonding cork plates 28 to the structure box face, on the engine
compartment side, (cement EC1 675).
B Definition of the compound protections used
(1) Panels3-4-5, made of «PROTECAL» (see figure 14F).
(2) Panels between frames 38, 39A, 39B and 41 (see figure 1 4J).
AB MOD 417
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION MANUAL 03
Restricted
C.28
COUPE D
CROSS SECTION D
Forme.
FUSELAGE chambre
CHAMBRE REACTEUR réacteur
FUSELAGE Fiujino
FIGURE 14 - PROTECTION THERMIQUE SECTION T
ENGINE COMPARTMENT compartment
THERMAL PROTECTION
AJ profile
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Soyage Soyage
Joggling Joggling
SECTION D SECTION E
COUPE M
CROSS-SECTION M
Renfort Alfol
Reinforcement
Soudure électrique Tôle gaufrée relief Fraisages dans le stratifié

à la molette intérieur protecal Countersink in laminate
V Electric seam Corrugated sheet
welding protecal outer skin
***.
Laine de quartz Raidisseurs

Quartz wool Stiffeners Trou embrevé dans la tôle
pour rivets TF/100
Tôle gaufrée relief Trous d'aération répartis Hole dimpled in sheet
extérieur protecal tous les 4 raidisseurs Soyage for TF/100 rivets
Corrugated sheet Ventilation holes Joggling
protecal inner skin every 4 stiffeners
SECTION A SECTION B SECTIONS C - F SECTION G SECTION J
FIGURE 14F PROTECTIONS COMPOSITES "PROTECAL"

PROTECAL COMPOUND INSULATION
AB
10-75 Restricted 0-1 27 F FIGURE 14F 0-1 27 F
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
A
COUPE A
CROSS-SECTION A
*1
J <5 o" ô"~ o" ô~ "5 "*<5t
+ + + + + + -L- + + + + J
+ + -+ + + + + + + + -*- + o\
+
+ + + + + + B^ + + + 1
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ «1
+
+ + + + + -f*' + + -+- + j
y
J
Rivets POP référence T.L P.D.B.H.424 V Trous
Pop rivets ref. : T.L.P.D.B.H. 424 Holes
Tôle gaufrée Z10CNT 18 Rondelles AU4G1.

relief de ce côté Washers AU4G1
Corrugated sheet
Z10 CNT 18, skin this sidel
Vicotex Trou dans la tôle gaufrée .
et dans le vicotex
Hole in corrugated
sheet and in vicotex
Bordures et tôle gaufrée soudées

par 2 rangées de points au pas de 14
Corrugated sheet edges spot
welded, 14 mm intervals, 2 rows
Bordures Z10 CNT 18

Edging
SECTION B
FIGURE 14J - MONTAGE DES PANNEAUX

PANEL ASSEMBL Y
AB MOD 417
12-76 Restricted 0-1 27T
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]Lj>~ttrV<
BREGUET AVIATION ^
MIRAGE F
INSCRIPTIONS AND SYMBOLS ON Al RCRAFT

(Figure 14M)
1 - PURPOSE
To locate intervention points for maintenance, servicing and identification of the aircraft.
2- GENERAL
Marking enables location of ground intervention points related to servicing, handling, maintenance
and safety of aircraft, and also location of frames 11, 1 7, 21 , 22, 25, 29, 31 , 36, 39 and 41 , level with
the FRL, on L/H and R/H sides.
Dimensional characteristics and colors of various symbols and inscriptions are defined in the
following tables.
Some decal-type and standardized symbols and inscriptions have no indication about dimensions
or letter type.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
Oxygen
26 Oxygen system Black
Inscriptions on aircraft
Green
27 <Cockade
c\
28 Inscription on doors Black
o
I IT IS MA\DATO»v THAT TnIS DOO« BE
29 Inscription on door in position before jacking up aircraft
Aircraft number
fuselage 1
I
L J
I
I
ot Black
fin I\I2[]0T O.I
Ye/low
o! strip with
! red
Marking off the areas L hatching
by strips
Red
strip
avions: ~^T
Black
M.DASSAULl
MIR FIljLT "sHf Black
°l
KEEPOFE =4 Black
All dimensions are given in millimeters

AD
09 81 Restricted 0-130M
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
INDEX DESCRIPTION SYMBOL INDEX DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
+
Fuel Pitot-static system
Refueling port Black

8 Static port - VSI, regulator
Orange
Draining port Red arrow
and circle
Static port - Pitch dash-pot Black letters
Orange et noir
Tank bleed
% 30 Static port - Cabin pressure

safety
Electrical - electronic systems
Grounding for
refueling Black
10 Ground power receptacle
F Black
11 Battery system Orange
Lubricant 12 Electronic equipment
Vario-alternator
system
^ Orange
oil filling
Accessory gear¬ Black
box oil filling Air conditioning
Engine oil filling
Hydraulic system
13 Cabin pressure inlet :: Orange
Black dots
Hydraulic fluid filling Black
14 Ground standby receptacle Black
Hydraulic system 1 and 2

ground connection
:] Orange and black
15 Cooling system Black
AG
05-80 Restricted 0-129 0-129
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
INDEX DESCRIPTION SYMBOL INDEX DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
Armament system Safety devices
275
16 Ammunition box 23 Ejection seat
124
170 (LH and R H sides)
Black
Print type 14
White letters
o Print type 12
J CO
17 Gun bay 75 |
200
Green
o
CO
18 Case magazine 25p

42
"124
44 r50-
1
19 L ink reco very box o
24 Canopy embrittlement
CM
(LH and RH sides)
1
70
Handing
30 ^jefi^.
. Black and orange - yellow
20 Jacking points 25 Rescue on ground
13 equally spaced divisions at 45°
(LH and RH sides)
Orange
50 I
21 Hoisting points Orange-yellow arrow

Shiny black
PHOT
Print type 18
, 60 ,r J 8 1. BREAK GLASS
2.PUU. HANDLE
*\ Shiny black
335 ( Orange - yellow
C.I 2 \ Print type 15
'*M/,fo.
22 Towing point Orange

Print type 10
All the dimensions are given in millimeters

AB
12-76 Restricted 0-130 0-130
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f VX^fl CK / V\l l\/-\VÎ_ \
BREGUET AVIATION ^&~~
^ ^c?-^^,
^-^ Restricted ,.a«.i.iai
MANUAL 03 «*>
GENERAL INSPECTION OF RIVETING
1 - SCOPE
To define the general criteria for detecting the defective rivets and determining the rivets
to be replaced.
2 - DETECTION OF SUSPECTED RIVETS

Thoroughly clean the airframe prior to rivet inspection (see 03-0).
B - Defective rivets
A simple visual inspection allows defective rivets to be detected in the three following
cases:
-Rivet head broken or cracked,
-Rivet head showing one or several incipient wrinkles on its periphery,
-Rivet head separated from countersinking (or for example, mushroom-head rivet not
gripping the sheet) with the possibility of clearly inserting a 0.04 to 0.05 mm (0.0016 to
0.0020 in) minimum feeler gauge between the head and the sheet without any sheet motion
(these rivets are classed as loose rivets).
REMARK :
A blackish trail on the skin panels in the direction of the airstream ("comet tail") starting
from the head of a rivet or the cracked paint on its periphery is not sufficient evidence to de¬
cide that a rivet is loose and therefore defective.
Confirmation of a loose rivet can only be obtained by subjecting the rivet to a more thor¬
ough inspection so as to ensure that it no longer clamps the assembled components together.
C - Doubtful rivets
A slightly more thorough visual inspection allows detection of a doubtful rivet in the fol¬
lowing three cases:
-Rivet head deeply sunk in countersinking (sinking of 0.1 mm (0.0039 in) min in rela¬
tion to the skin).
-Rivet head deeply marked by riveting tool.
-Rivet head flared (head edges raised).
IMPORTANT NOTE :
In these three cases it is necessary to check that rivets effectively clamp the sheets. For
this purpose, put finger half on rivet head and half on skin while an aid using a tool handle al¬
ternately applies and releases pressure against the skin around the "doubtful" rivet. A relative
displacement of rivet in relation to skin clearly felt by the finger indicates that the rivet
"breathes". In this case, the "doubtful" rivet shall be considered as defective. As an alternative,
on thin gauge sheets, it is possible to knock rather strongly around the rivet (second finger
folded as when knocking on a door). When the rivet no longer clamps the sheets, a slight me¬
tal clicking of the skin sheet hitting the underlaying sheet can clearly be heard.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//JS^-'Ml \II\/-\V_7I_ I
^-î*&^ ^sQs
BREGUET AVIATION
^^^ Restricted ,. A
MANUAL 03mi i a i /-*->
D - Additional inspections
When a rivet is missing, clearly abnormal (head broken or wrinkled) or loose, the attach¬
ing rivets on either side must be checked.
If the cause of the abnormality is presumed as a consequence of aircraft use, the other areas
which may have been subjected to the same stress must be subjected to a careful inspection.
In the case of a rib, frame or in a riveting pattern, check the symmetrical area and inspect all
the other rivets of the rib, frame or riveting pattern concerned as indicated in paragraph 2 C.
When two rivets or more are ascertained as "defective" by simple visual inspection as de¬
fined in paragraph 2 B, on a rib or on a frame, check all the other rivets of such rib or frame,
using procedure described in paragraph 2 C.
When one rivet or more is ascertained as "defective" by simple visual inspection as de¬
fined in paragraph 2 B, on a riveting pattern, check all the other rivets of the row using proce¬
dure described in paragraph 2 C.
Any isolated rivet considered as good a priori in a row of defective rivets is to be checked
after unriveting of the defective rivets on the one hand and installation of spare rivets on the
other hand, using procedure described in paragraph 2 C, but it is not to be systematically re¬
placed, for it will depend on the limitations specified in paragraph 3.
If the paint film is broken around a rivet head, make sure that no corrosion has developed
under the paint, then protect the rivet periphery after treating any corrosion detected
| (see Structural Repair Manual, 1 -361).
3 - DETERMINATION OF RIVETS TO BE REPLACED

A - Rivets to be replaced mandatorily
On ribs, frames or stringers. Any rivet with a broken, cracked or wrinkled head must be
replaced, even when it is isolated in a row.
On sheet edges, door framings, clusters of ribs or any vital attachment, any rivet consid¬
ered defective (loose rivet or rivet head not seated against the sheet to be clamped) shall be
replaced.
No loose rivet is tolerated in the engine air intakes.
B - Tolerated rivets
As a general rule, the following rivet defects may be accepted without the need of re¬
placement:
-On rib, frame or spar:
Two loose rivets per linear meter on a rnajor component rib, spar or frame, provided that they
are separated by at least twenty good rivets and not located in clusters.
NOTE: A rib is always considered as complete (upper surface + lower surface).
-On the other rows (stringers, stiffeners or components without load transfer):
Four loose rivets per linear meter provided that two loose rivets are separated by at least ten
tight rivets.
-On scattered -rivet areas:
One loose rivet on a surface area equivalent to that of a 150 mm (5.91 in) radius circle com¬
prising no other loose rivet and centered on the loose rivet.
NOTE: The above tolerances are only applicable when access to the rivets is difficult. Other¬
wise, rivet replacement is mandatory.
4 - REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Refer to "STRUCTURAL REPAIR" manual.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT U^^^TSL
BREGUET AVIATION . __
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF AIRCRAFT SKIN AND FITTINGS
1 - SCOPE
To prevent or to limit further development of damages and to remedy their effects.

This worksheet describes the overall inspection of the aircraft skin and fittings.
Since this operation is frequently scheduled, the ground crew shall limit itself to the checks
possible through the access doors removed at the time of the inspection under consideration.
2- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 1504

- Grease Air 4210
3- INSPECTION
A General procedure
- Check the structure for general condition (cracks, distortion, impact marks).
- Inspect the rivet rows (see 03-0).
- Check for any trace of fuel leakage.
- Check doors and access panels for correct attachment.
- Check general paint condition.
- Check for any trace of corrosion and scratches (for removal, see 03-0).
(1 ) Detection of corrosion traces
of corrosion traces is to be carried out after skin cleaning. Good lighting

In principle, detection
particular, should be inspected with grazing light allowing blisters
is essential and questionable areas, in
to be evidenced. In any case, the presence of blisters will require local removal of all paint in order to
determine the extent of the corroded area.
The defects to .look out for are :

either blistering, separation or disappearance of the protection requiring touch-up of the protec¬
-
tion coat ;
or incipient corrosion :
-
- pitting,
- intergranular corrosion : blisters that show up under grazing light near screw or rivet
countersunk holes or along sheet edges ;
-threadlike corrosion : a thin network extending under the painted surface, from sheet
edge countersinks or from scratch marks ;
- extensive surface corrosion (pitting centered on an extensive and same surface).
Special attention should be given to the inspection of the following equipment or zones which
are most likely to be affected by corrosion :
- air intakes and start of the air intake ducts,
- additional air intake doors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^^-^TVL.
BREGUET
f
AVIATION^^F^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^£*=***^*^ Restricted MANUAL 03
Oxygen compartment.
-
U/C wells :
-
- steel hardware, small parts and hydraulic connections to be subjected to a rapid visual
inspection.
- Nose U/C leg, in particular :
- at the support of the nose wheel steering control unit,
- around the plain bushings fitted to the truss jack drive clevis,
- on the towing bracket,
- in the vicinity of the pipe support clamps,
- on the nose U/C shield door, specially where it is attached to the U/C.
- Cockpit :
sight support.
-
- canopy hinge fitting.
- Airbrakes.
- Fuselage underside.
- Wing, flap and aileron lower and upper surfaces.
- Flap nose attachment fittings.
- Wing upper surface, around the main attachment fitting pickup screws (in case of corrosion,
see relevant worksheet - 03-1-609).
- Stabilator lower surface.
- Areas close to the gun blast tubes.
- Gun bay.
- Leading edges (wings - fin - stabilator - air intakes).
- Antenna mounts.
The internal structure boxes of the aircraft shall also be inspected with the utmost care, and
specially :
- areas where foreign matter may accumulate (lower sections in particular),
- floors and zones underneath,
- areas where dissimilar metals are in contact and may generate electrolytic couples,
- components in contact with rubber, neoprene or klegecel seals which absorb humidity and may
create corrosion areas.
(2) Detection of scratches
- Carefully inspect components susceptible to notching (AU4SG). All scratches and points of
impact shall be systematically blended out.
- As a rule, a scratch exists if a burr or dent is felt by passing the fingernail over the skin panel.
Anodized skin panels shall be specially checked. As scratches are the origin for corrosion attack, they
should be treated either immediately or in a more or less short delay according to their extent (see
03-0). Previous scratches which have been already treated shall also be investigated carefully.
B Specially check and inspect :
(1) On fuselage :
-boundary layer bleeds,
- air intakes, air intake ducts (see Structural Repair manual), shock cone fairings and shock cones,
air intake attachment straps; check that shock cone spring ribs have not caused any metal tear on
internal surfaces of air intake ducts,
- additional air intake doors (see 06-3),
- areas close to additional air intakes (specially in the corners),
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" JK / V\l l\ A"\NÎ_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^._~ ^^^, . ,...,,... .
^LJ^ Restricted MANUAL 03
-gun blast tubes,

-gun bay, link recovery box, case magazine: check the laminated skin panels for condi¬
tion,
-ammunition box structure boxes,
-tail unit servo-control structure boxes; check the thermal protection cork plates for con¬
dition and bonding,
-fuselage underside,
-U/C doors, as well as formed sections on the lower periphery; specially check that the
nose and main U/C door spherical bearings are properly swaged and have no play,
-front rib and main beam of U/C fairing door (check for cracks),
-lower cover sheets 25.04.2i/08.2i of the U/C door unlocking unit structure boxes at
F.25.
-If a crack is detected on the fold of the flange attached to the well wall on engine side,
measure its length and :
-if it is greater than 60 mm (2.36 in), replace the cover sheet (see below),
-if it is equal to or less than 60 mm (2.36 in), stop the crack by drilling a 4 mm
(0.15 in) dia. hole.
Upon the first engine removal or during a minor maintenance inspection, replace any
cracked cover sheet or increase the diameter of the holes to 5.5 mm (0.21 in) if there is no
crack.
Replacement of cover sheet:
-remove the engine,
-remove the adjacent cover sheet (25.04.1 i/25.08.1 i) (the cover sheets are attached to
the structure box with screws and anchor nuts),
-remove the U/C door unlocking unit,
-remove the cracked cover sheet by removing the four attaching screws (the nuts are ac¬
cessible through the box and engine tunnel).
Upon installation of spare cover sheets, make sure that the attaching holes have a diam¬
eter of 5.5 mm (0.21 in).
-airbrakes,
-ventral fins: condition and attachment; specially check the condition of the screws at¬
taching the front and rear fitting flanges, and inspect the ventral fin structure rivets for proper
attachment (see 03-0).
(2) On stabilators:
-stabilator lower and upper surfaces,
-specially check the stabilator honeycomb trailing edges:
-detect the defects by the audio method: LIGHTLY tap the surface of the bonded
components using a steel drift the size of a pencil with a round polished end (or possibly a
coin); the obvious difference in sound when tapping a bonded area and an unbonded area can
be easily heard, and is distinguished by:
-a clear single sound if the assembly is satisfactory,
-a dull and muffled sound if there is a defect.
THIS OPERATION SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH CARE (LIGHT GAUGE
SKIN PANELS) TO AVOID DAMAGING THE COMPONENTS INVOLVED.
-if in doubt, see worksheet dealing with checking of trailing edge structural box
(03-4).
(3) On wings:
-lower and upper surface skin panels:
-inspection of fasteners and fittings,
-inspection of rib 5 riveting, specially at the lower surface; should three or more ad¬
jacent rivets be found to be loose, apply the repair procedure (3-61 1 ) described in the
STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual as soon as the aircraft is grounded, or after 150 flying hours at
the latest,
-lower and upper surface panels of tank structure boxes,
-condition and attachment of nylatron sections on trailing edge, flap top,
-leading edges, specially the fixed slat upper surface skin at slotted slat drive points 1 and
2.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
-Should cracks start from the bottom of the slots, perform a dye penetrant inspection to
determine their exact length with accuracy:
-cracks < 15 mm: stop them as illustrated by the examples below, leaving the edges
well rounded off,
Hole enlargement
to stop the
incipient crack
i
I
I
-crack ^ 15 mm, apply the repair procedure (3-604) described in the STRUC¬
TURAL REPAIR manual,
-ailerons
NOTE: The damage criteria, operating limits, and checks or repairs required for the compound
ailerons (MOD 568) are given in section 2 of the STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual.
-high-lift devices:
-condition of inboard and outboard flap riveting (see 03-0),
Check that there is no friction and that there is sufficient clearance between the screw
jack sliding door and the wing upper surface skin.
-condition of self-lubricant paint strips:

-on inner upper surface of the fixed slat (wing leading edge) at location of the slid¬
ing doors of drive points AT1 -AT2,
-on the ledge of the slotted slat trailing edge,
-on upper surface of fixed slat and of flaps along their whole length,
-along the whole length of the inboard trailing edge and of the droop slat dript strip,
-condition and attachment of brush at flap-to-fuselage junction and in wing-to-aileron
gap.
NOTE: A Teflon strip, instead of a self-lubricant paint strip, may be bonded on the inboard
trailing edge of some droop slats: check this strip for condition and bonding.
Should this strip be damaged (unsticking, tearing, etc.), remove it and apply a strip of
self-lubricant paint (inboard trailing edge and slat drip strip) (see Repair manual).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT: MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<^__
^^ â~=»^
^r^^ Restricted .«akiiiai
MANUAL «o
03
(4) On fin:
-leading edge,
-rudder,
-the hinge of the center shackle actuating rod (check for corrosion),
-panels.
C - Check of various components carried on skin panels
-Windshield (condition of seal around side and front glass panels).

-Condition of inflatable canopy seal.
-Condition and attachment of position and formation lights. Clean if necessary. Do not
use solvents.
-Condition and attachment of the various probes (pitot, temperature and angle-of-attack
probes).
D - Various checks
-Check that the water draining holes in fuselage and wings are not stopped (see 03-0).
-Check for correct condition of inscriptions.
-Check that the sealing beads are not cut or damaged, specially at the junctions of the
tail unit trailing edge.
4 - CHECK OF FITTINGS
Check each fitting for:

-corrosion,
-cracks,
-distortion,
-incorrect attachment.
5 - MAINTENANCE
-Hoisting and jacking fittings:
-clean and grease (AIR 4210).
NOTE: After removing the hoisting fitting plugs, remove any traces of oxidation from them.
Grease them and install without applying Loctite.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ,
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION Û_~ ^^^> ^ . ^ . ....,., rt03
~
^-^ ^-^ Restnctecj MANUAL
AIRFRAME MEASUREMENTS
1 - SCOPE
The measurements are intended to determine the accidental structural distortions on air¬
craft.
The distortions are determined:
-by comparing the dimensions taken on the wings and tail unit with those admitted for
the incidence, dihedral, and incidence and dihedral asymmetry,
-by checking the relative displacements of the main components with respect to one
another (triangulation).
The measurements permit to know:

-the differences between the present dimensional characteristics of the aircraft and those
recorded upon release from factory,
-the sinking dimensions subsequent to normal use,
-the residual structural distortions subsequent to abnormal operations.
-11 5-200 V/400 Hz power supply

-Hydraulic generation
-Flight control adjustment tool
-Tail unit deflection template
-Quick leveling rule
- 1 sight tube assy
-Airframe distortion check rule
-Tees
- Decameter
-Vertical stabijizer measuring rule RRC7
3 - GENERAL
A - Measurement purpose
Measurements shall be taken:

-on crashed aircraft,
I -on an aircraft the poor flying qualities of which are probably caused by a structural dis¬
tortion,
-on an aircraft on which a major component has been repaired or replaced recently
(wings, tail unit...).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
L9-AV Lg.AR
Lg.AV Lg-AR
Référence horizontale fuselage

Fuselage horizontal datum line
Lg.AV Lg-AR
Lg-AV Lg.AR
J vHl
vGI^^<\ N.4
Q Points de peau Skin points
0 Repères de nivellement Levelling points
A Repères de triangulation Triangulation points
Points de peau et de triangulation

Skin and triangulation points
FIGURE 15 - POINTS DE MENSURATION REPERES SUR AVION

MEASURING POINTS ON AIRCRAFT
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl ** /V\II\/-\VÎ_ I
BREGUET AVIATION Â_~ ^*=^, . ..,..., n.
w«. .cî ^ Restricted MANUAL 03
CAUTION:
AFTER REPLACEMENT OF A MAJOR COMPONENT, WING FOR INSTANCE, THE DI¬
MENSIONS SHALL BE RECORDED IN THE AIRCRAFT LOGBOOK AND SHALL REP¬
RESENT THE NEW MANUFACTURING DIMENSIONS FOR THE REPLACED
COMPONENT. SUCH DIMENSIONS SHALL BE REFERRED TO ON FURTHER MEAS¬
UREMENTS.
Out-of-tolerance dimensions involve aircraft inspection by manufacturer specialists who

will determine the value and the category of the distortions and the repairs to be performed
provided the aircraft can be repaired.
B - Definition and identification of measurement points
(1 ) The various measurement points are of three kinds:

-skin datum points,
-triangulation points,
-leveling points.
They are identified as follows:
(_) Skin point
It is represented by a 5 mm (0.197 in) dia circle punched lightly but visibly on the «kin.
A value in tenths of millimeter is marked close to the circle ; this value is the direct read¬
ing correction.
The skin correction permits to take into account the local defects at a given datum point.
The imperfect actual profile differs from a theoretical profile by a few tenths of millimeter.
For easier calcuations, it is assumed that a corrected profile is at 5 mm (0.197 in) from the
theoretical profile. Thus the skin correction shall be e = x + 5 mm (0.197 in), hence the
suppression of the negative signs.
A Triangulation point
Identified by a 1,5 mm (0.059 in) dia and 0,8 mm (0.031 in) deep blind hole, filled
with red paint and'surrounded by a triangle.
Skin and triangulation point
Coinciding skin point and triangulation point.
(^) Leveling point
Identified by a 1,5 mm (0.059 in) dia and 0,8 mm (0.031 in) deep blind hole, filled
with red paint and surrounded by a 5 mm (0.197 in) dia circle.
(2) The Figure 1 5 and the aircraft logbook give the list of the measurement points which are
all identified by a letter.
-Points (A.B.C..) beneath the fuselage bear no index. Points are given index 1 (A1 -
B1...) on A/C LH side (fuselage - wing - tail) and index 2 on A/C RH side.
-Wing points are located on the upper surface and the lower surface; however only the
lower surface points are used for measurements.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^c
L>^r\l MIRAGE F
B Aircraft configuration
The A/C configuration for measuring purposes is of the utmost importance and must be complied
with so that the values obtained can be compared with one another :
- aircraft jacked up and leveled.
Position the front lifting jacks so that they do not hinder positioning of the rules at points B1
and B2, and of the plumb line at point f D.
clean configuration (without external stores),
- guns in place, ammunitions boxes empty,
- fuel tanks empty,
- ejection seat removed,
- engine and nose cone mounted,
- U/C retracted,
- flight control adjustment tool fitted in the cockpit,
- fix the control stick in the fully aft position with the above tool (hydraulic system under pressu¬
re, electrical power off).
MEASUREMENTS SHOULD BE TAKEN UNDER SHELTER, IN A QUIET AREA, AND AT A
MOMENT OF THE DAY WHEN THE TEMPERATURE IS AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO 20°C.
A Instructions for leveling the aircraft
-Jack up the aircraft (see 02-2 ), positioning the rear jack properly : one of the sides of the
triangle formed by the three legs should be perpendicular to the aircraft centerline, and located aft of
the ball joint.
- Provide for a minimum clearance of 100 mm (3.94 in) between wheels and ground.
For a coarse leveling performed with the quick leveling rule, a slight nose-up attitude is preferred
to a nose-down attitude, as extending a jack is easier than retracting it.
B Setting up the sight tube
(1) Use a sight tube with a true precision at least equal to 0.1 mm at a distance of 10 meters. This
sight tube should be perfectly transparent, precise, accurate and easy to set up.
(2) Location
Locate the sight tube so that :

- focusing is possible on the rule placed at the nearest point to the sight tube,
- there is no obstacle between the sight tube and the rule.
It is preferable to place the sight tube aft of the aircraft in line with the stabilator leading edge and
at 5 or 6 mm (between 0.197 and 0.236 in) from the aircraft centerline.
(3) Height
Make sure that the sight tube height enables reading :

-
- of the aircraft lowest point (measurements taken on the side opposite to the fuselage, with
respect to the sight tube),
- of the aircraft highest point (rule extension pieces).
NOTE 1 : The operator is firmly advised to adjust the sight tube height so that he is seated when taking
the readings. His position for applying his eye against the sight tube eye-piece should not be
wearisome (an uncomfortable position will greatly affect the reading precision).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^
MIRAGE F
NOTE 2 : Once the sight is correctly positioned, perform the following operations in the order, without
altering the sight tube setting :
- leveling the aircraft,
- recording the height of the fuselage datum plane,
- recording the height of the wing points.
- recording the height of the tail unit points.
C Sight horizontality
Leveling the sight tube is a delicate operation of great importance for the measurement accuracy.
It must be carried out in strict compliance with the instructions in the technical handbook of the sight
tube used.
Should the level be of the reversible type, take a double reading.
Do not forget to focus the reticle.
D Selecting and using the measuring rule
(1) Selecting the rule
The RRC5 rule includes :

- an RRC5.10 rule - length : 1,50 m (4.93 ft) - to be used for the fuselage points (pitot tube point
excepted) and the wing points ;
- an RRC5.20 rule, composed of two 0,50 m (1 .64 ft) elements - length : 2 x 0,50 m (2 x 1 .64 ft) -
to be used for the pitot tube point, with the two elements assembled.
- for the fin, use the scale rule.
(2) Using the rule
(a) The rule must be vertical in both planes. To this end, the rule incorporates a spirit level permitting
to place the measuring rod vertically at each point.
The operator performing the readings with the sight tube :

- will have the rule positioned in such a way that the graduations are parallel with the reticle,
- will swing the rule slowly from front to rear and record the smallest dimension (corresponding to
the vertical position of the rule).
(b) For the leveling points, insert the lateral tip of the rule into the center hole.
(c) For the skin points : if a punch mark, a recess or a scratch is found inside the circle, put the
vertical tip of the rule inside the circle representing the point, but not in the hole resulting from the
punch mark, recess or scratch. The height read on the rule should be that of the skin outer surface at
the considered location.
5- FINDING THE HEIGHT OF THE AIRCRAFT POSITIONING PLANE
A Principles
Leveling shall be performed with the sight tube.

The scope of the operation is to materialize an aircraft plane by means of the leveling points.
The horizontal datum plane is that defined by the sight tube.
The aircraft leveling operation consists in setting the aircraft plane parallel with the sight tube
plane by acting on the jacks to move the aircraft about its two axes of freedom ; these two axes are :
- lateral horizontality,
- longitudinal horizontality.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
B Start by setting the aircraft approximately level, using the quick leveling rule. The operator must
sit on a stepladder and not in the cockpit.
C Use the sight tube to set the aircraft in horizontal position, proceeding as follows :
(1) «Swing» the aircraft (from side to side and from back to front) so as to determine a basic hori¬
zontal plane to include fuselage horizontal datum points Bl - B2 and D1 - D2 to within 0.7 mm
(0.028 in).
Also, measure height of points A1 - A2 - C1 - C2 and E1 - E2 to provide an additional check of

the true lateral horizontality.
(2) This «swinging» is a working procedure using the trial and error method. It consists in balancing
the deviations between the leveling points above and below the horizontal plane determined by the
sight tube.
(3) Proceed in the following way, with a single setting-up of the sight tube :
-first adjust the lateral horizontality by acting on the front jacks,

- then, adjust the longitudinal horizontality by acting on the rear jack.
D Recording the height of the leveling points
Record the following :
Points A1 B1 C1 D1 E1
Nose cone LH
tip height side
Height h
Points A2 B2 C2 D2 E2
RH
(see para. G)
side
Height h
E Computing the average height of the fuselage points.
- Record height h at the points tabulated below.

- Add up the dimensions recorded on LH side and enter the result in column «Sum of LH side
dimensions».
- Repeat the operation for the RH side.
Points B1 C1 D1 E1 Sum of LH
LH side dimensions T1
side
Height h H -Ir F Hr- =
Points B2 C2 D2 E2 Sum of RH
RH side dimensions T2
side
Height h H\- Hh - -
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- Mean LH side height :
- Mean RH side height :
h
n2 =Il4
- The fictitious distance between the aircraft basic plane and the sight tube plane will be :
L i u
D = L 2. (round off the value found to the nearest tenth of millimeter).

- Subtract from dimension D, a given value called «rule constant» which represents the distance
between the horizontal and vertical points of the rule. Height H is then obtained.
- Height H shall be the one and only calculation value retained for the following operations. It
represents the «corrected» distance between sight tube plane and basic plane.
H =D rule constant
Enter this value in figure 16.

Rule constant
The rule constant shall be determined before taking
the wing and stabilator measurements.
It
The theoretical principle governing these calculations
is given in para. «Wing measurements».
F Checking the aircraft horizontality
(1) Lateral horizontality

h! should be equal to h2 to within 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
(2) Longitudinal horizontality
For each leveling point, make sure that height h found previously is equal to D, to within 0.7 mm
(0.028 in).
If these two requirements are not met, repeat all the operations described above.
G Recording the nose cone tip height
This measurement is to be taken in some special cases only (accidental deterioration of the nose
cone - exceptional load factor > 1 0 g).
- Using the rule, measure the height of the nose cone tip with respect to the sight tube plane.
- Calculate, the height deviation between this point and the basic plane, i.e. recorded height H
(basic plane height).
- Compare the measured height deviation with the original height deviation (see aircraft individual
logbook) (tolerance ± 1 mm (0.039 in).
Notch Static pressure Nose cone tip

probe attachment RH side view
Measurement
point
Bottom
AB
09-84 Restricted 0-51 OM
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- WING MEASUREMENTS
A Identifying the wing points
(1 ) Wings mounted on thé fuselage, aircraft horizontal and in the indicated configuration.
(2) On each wing lower surface, eight skin points are located as follows :
- on section 1 , two points VA and VB
- on section 2, two points VC and VD
- on section 3, two points VE and VF
- on section 4, two points VG and VH
Index 1 is reserved for the LH wing points.
Index 2 is reserved for the RH wing points.
NOTE : Points VA - VC - VE - VG are located on the front spar.
Points VB - VD - VF - VH are located on the rear spar.
Points VA - VG and VB - VH are used for dihedral check.
B Principle
(1 ) Recording the height of the wing skin points
The scope of the operation is to determine the height of the considered point with respect to the
aircraft basic plane (dimension A).
The point of the graduated rule is placed on the skin point concerned.
The operator directs the sight tube toward the rule and records dimension (a) of the considered
point.
This dimension «a» is to be increased by the distance between the point and the 0 graduation of
the rule (y).
Moreover, the reading taken with the sight tube gives the height of the point with respect to the
sight tube plane (dimension a + y).
Therefore, the height P between the basic plane and the sight tube plane must be subtracted from
the point height determined with the sight tube (i.e. dimension a + y - P).
I (P = D + x, with D = fictitious distance as found previously)
; > Basic plane
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
/L~->iiU.
^^SF^^-çÔ
MIRAGE F
^££=^~*^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
The height of each skin point must receive the «skin correction», to be subtracted from the
previous result :
A = a+y-P-e = a-e- (P-y) = b- (D + x-y) = b- (D- rule constant) = b- H

with b = a e, rule constant = y x and H = D rule constant.
The above calculation shows that subtracting the rule constants x and y on each point
measurement is avoided by merely subtracting their difference (y x) from the fictitious distance D
once for all.
(2) Principle of wing measurement
(a) Incidence deviation
The wings of an aircraft in service are assumed to be distorted. Their incidence is then different
from the theoretical incidence. Such distortion has an effect on each rib.
Incidence deviation
The theoretical incidence of a rib is determined as follows :

- let A! th be the theoretical height of a rib forward point
- let A2 th be the theoretical height of a rib aft point.
The difference Aj th A2 th represents the theoretical height deviation Eth (in mm) of the rib
considered. This value Eth is to be converted into an incidence expressed in minutes (Eth mn).
- let Aj be the height of the rib forward point.
- let A2 be the height of the rib aft point.
The difference Ai A2 represents the height deviation E (in mm) of the rib considered. This
value E is to be converted into an incidence expressed in minutes (E mn).
For a given rib, the incidence deviation between its actual position and theoretical position is :
A = E mn Eth mn
A is function of E Eth = A! A2 [A{ th A2 th).
Upon aircraft release from factory, the incidence deviation has been measured as indicated above,
and the result has been entered in the aircraft logbook.
The manufacturing and the present incidence deviations should be found equal, to within the
tolerance.
(b) Incidence asymmetry
Compare the incidence deviation of a RH wing rib with that of a LH wing rib. The two deviations
should be found equal, to within the tolerance.
(c) Dihedral
The wings are assumed to be distorted as the aircraft is being used. This distortion is to be
determined, using the basic plane as a reference.
Select two points on each rib (one on the leading edge, about the wing tip, the other on the
trailing edge, near the wing root).
The theoretical dihedral of a wing group is calculated as follows :
- AEth is the theoretical height of the wing root point.
- Ath is the theoretical height of the wing tip point.
Hence Dth = AEth - Ath
Dth is expressed in mm and represents the theoretical height deviation. Once expressed in minutes,
Dth would represent the theoretical dihedral.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Constante règle Toutes les cotes doivent être

Rule constant exprimées en millimètres
All the dimensions must be
given in millimeters Distance ' corrigée" du plan
de la lunette au plan
horizontal des points de fuselage
a Corrected distance from sight-tube
plane to horizontal plane of
fuse/age points
b=a - e H = mm
o- =
DCaÔ A2 ()«() B~
QQ »Q B2 r~TD2r~r *n
FIGURE 16 - RELEVE DES ALTITUDES DES POINTS CORRIGES DE VOILURE

PAR RAPPORT AU PLAN DE LA LUNETTE
RECORD OF HEIGHTS OF CORRECTED WING POINTS
WITH REGARD TO SIGHT TUBE PLANE
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
_ . |
HEIGHT
HEIGHT OF INCIDENCE INCIDENCE ASYMMETRY
OF COR¬
CORRECTED
RECTED HEIGHT DEVIATIONS DEVIATIONS FROM DIFFERENCE DIFFERENCE
HEIGHT POINTS WITH
POINTS DIMENSION «E» = HEIGHT DEVIATIONS = THEORETICAL BETWEEN MEASURED AND
OF RESPECT TO BETWEEN
WITH «A» (MEASURED INCIDENCE MEASURED THEORETICAL
BASIC BASIC PLANE «E» (FRONT POINT INCIDENCE
RESPECT
4?
PLANE POINT HEIGHT) HEIGHT) - «E» INCIDENCE INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS
TO SIGHT Au
TUBE
PLANE
A = (b-H>
- «A THEO»
(THEORETICAL
(REAR POINT HEIGHT)
1 A
MEASURED MANUFAC¬
AND
MANUFAC¬
TURING 4P
DEVIATIONS 1 (LH
SECTION)
H POINT HEIGHT) INCIDENCE TURING LH
IN HEIGHT IN INCIDENCE INCIDENCE RH -MRH
E=A-ATHEO (mm) INCIDENCE
DIMENSION (minutes) DEVIATIONS SECTION SECTION SECTION)
«b» THEORE¬ AS PER AS PER COL. S I SEE SEE A/C AS PER
MEASURED COL. 3 - COL. 4 COL.8-COL.9 AS PER COL. 8
TICAL COL. 5 AND CHARTS COL. 7 LOGBOOK COL. 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ! 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
i
VA1 279 +
1G ± ± + ± ± 1'30
VB1 292.2 +
VC1 207.8 ±
2G + ± ±i ± + ±2'
i
VD1 220.2 + i
VE1 136.4 ±
Section
±i + 3' AB
3G ± ± + ±
-5' (1G/1D)
VF1 147.7 ±
VG1 70.4 +
Section
± ± ±
+ 4'
4G ± + CD
-8' (2G/2D)
VH1 81.8 +
<8'
VA2 279 ±
Section
1D ± ± ± ± ± ± 1'30 EF
(3G/3D)
VB2 292.2 ±
VC2 207.8 ±
Section
2D ± + ± ± ± ±2' GH
(4G/4D)
VD2 220.2 ±
VE2 136.4 ±
+ 3'
3D ± ± ± ± ±
-5'
VF2 147.7 ±
VG2 70.4 ±
+ 4'
4D ± ± ± ± ±
-8'
VH2 81.8 ±
FIGURE 17 - WING GROUP : DETERMINATION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS

TOLERANCES ON INCIDENCE AND ASYMMETRY
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJi>-^r\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c^^^Ô ..*.,,,»««
^2^-<C^ Restricted MANUAL 03
The actual wing dihedral is calculated as follows :
- AEr is the actual height of the wing root point.
- Ar is the actual height of the wing tip point.
Hence Dr = AEr - Ar Dr is expressed in mm and represents the actual height deviation.
Once expressed in minutes, Dr would represent the actual dihedral.
Furthermore, it can be admitted that the difference Dr - Dth (in mm) represents the actual
dihedral deviation, i.e. Ar = Dth Dr.
The dihedral deviation Au has been measured on each aircraft upon release from factory.
Comparing the actual dihedral deviation with the manufacturing dihedral deviation permits to check
that the tolerances have not been exceeded :
e = Ar Au
(d) Dihedral asymmetry

The dihedral asymmetry is determined by comparing the distortion of the RH wing with that of the
LH wing.
Once the actual dihedral deviations of the RH and LH wings are obtained, the results are compared
with each other : the difference found should be within the permissible tolerances.
C Procedure
(1) Incidence
(a) Measure the rule constant.
(b) Calculate the distance H (H = D - rule constant) and record it in the table. Figure 1 6.
(2) Computation of height «b» of corrected wing points relative to sight-tube plane (see tables,
Figures 16 and 17).
(a) On each of these sections, using a reversible level and a rule provided with its tip and its spirit level,
the origin of which is roughly located at the center of each datum circle, measure the front point
height, and the aft point height.
NOTE : The height considered for each point is the height directly read on the rule. The «rule
constant» value has been taken into account when determining dimension H.
(b) Enter these values in each upper space of the table of Figure 1 6.
(c) For each point, note in the table intermediate circle the value marked near the reference circle
(skin correction) (this dimension, indicated in tenths of mm, is to be converted into mm). This
dimension is indicated in the aircraft logbook. Check for similarity.
(d) In the table lower space, enter the difference between the higher dimension and the skin
correction dimension.
Enter the values obtained in table of Figure 17, column 1.
(3) Computation of height «A» of corrected wing points relative to basic plane.
(Table in Figure 17).
A = (b-H)
The resulting positive value shall be entered in column 3 of table opposite each point.
(4) Calculation of height deviation «E» between measured point and theoretical point (see table.
Figure 17).
E = «A», measured point height (col. 3) minus «A theo», theoretical point height (col. 4).
Enter the value obtained in column 5.
NOTE : «E» is given the sign «+» if the wing height exceeds the theoretical value («A» > «A theo»),
and the sign « » in the opposite case.
(5) Calculation of the height deviation between front point and rear point
(see table. Figure 17)
AA
09-77 Restricted °~514
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Ecart en mm Height deviation (mm)
FIGURE 18 - VOILURE : CONVERSIONDES ECARTS EN INCIDENCE

WING GROUP : CONVERSION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
DEVIATION DIHEDRAL DEVIATION SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION

in VA - VG or in I II III IV
mm VB - VH mm VA- VB VC - VD VE -VF VG - VH
4.6 5'.36" 0'.07" 0.1 0'.1 0" 0M4" 0'.20" 0'.36"

4.7 5'.43" 0M4" 0.2 0'.20" 0'.28" 0'.40" 1M2"
4.8 5'.50" 0'.22" 0.3 0'.31 " 0'.41 " 1 '.00" 1 '.49"
4.9 5'.57" 0'.29" 0.4 0'.41 " 0'.54" 1'.21 " 2'.25"
5.0 6'.05" 0'.36" 0.5 0'.52" 1 '.08" 1'.41 " 3'.02"
5.1 6M2" 0'.44" 0.6 1 '.02" 1 '.22" 2'.01 " 3'.39"
5.2 6'.19" 0'.51 " 0.7 1 '.1 2" 1 '.35" 2'.21" 4M 5"
5.3 6'.26" 0'.58" 0.8 1 '.23" 1 '.49" 2'.42" 4'.51"
5.4 6'.34" T.05" 0.9 1 '.33" 2'.02" 3'.02" 5'.28"
5.5 6'.41 " V.13" 1.0 1 '.43" 2M6" 3'.22" 6'.04"
5.6 6'.48" 1 '.20" 1.1 1 '.54" 2'.30" 3' .42" 6'.40"
5.7 6'.56" T.27" 1.2 2'.04" 2'.44" 4'.02" 7M7"
5.8 7'.03" 1 '.34" 1.3 2M4" 2'.57" 4'.22" 7'.54"
5.9 7'.10" 1 '.42" 1.4 2'.25" 3M0" 4'.42" 8'.30"
6.0 7'.18" 1 '.49" 1.5 2'.35" 3'.24" 5'.03" 9'.06"
6.1 7'.25" 1 '.56" 1.6 2'.45" 3'.38" 5'.23" 9'.43"
6.2 7'.32" 2'.04" 1.7 2'.56" 3'.52" 5'.43" 10'.20"
6.3 7'.40" 2'.1 1 " 1.8 3'.06" 4'.06" 6'.03" 10'.56"
6.4 7'.47" 2'.1 8" 1.9 3M6" 4M 9" 6'.23" 1 1 '.32"
6.5 7'.54" 2'.26" 2.0 3'.27" 4'.33" 6'.44" 12'.09"

6.6 8'.01 " 2'33" 2.1 3'.37" 4'.46" 7'.04" 12'.45"
6.7 8'.09" 2'.40" 2.2 3'.48" 5'.00" 7'.24" 1 3'.22"
6.8 8M 6" 2'.48" 2.3 3'.58" 5M4" 7'.44"

6.9 8'.23" 2'.55" 2.4 4'.08" 5'.28" 8'.04"
7.0 8'.30" 3'.02" 2.5 4M 8" 5'.41 " 8'.24"
7.1 8'.38" 3M0" 2.6 4'.29" 5'.55" 8'.44"
7.2 8' .45" 3M7" 2.7 4'.40" 6'.08" 8'.05"
7.3 8'.53" 3'.24" 2.8 4'.50" 6'.22"
7.4 9':00" 3'.32" 2.9 5'.00" 6'.36"
7.5 9'.08" 3'.39" 3.0 5M 1 " 6'.49"
3'.46" 3.1 5'. 21" 7'.03"
3'.54" 3.2 5'.31 " 7M7"
4'.01 " 3.3 5'.42" 7'.30"
4'.08" 3.4 5'.52" 7'.41 "
4M 5" 3.5 6'.02" 7'.58" '
4'.23" 3.6 6M3" 8M2"
4'.30" 3.7 6'.23" 8'.25"
4'.37" 3.8 6'.34" 8'.39"
4' 45» 3.9 6'.44" 8'.52"
4'.52" 4.0 6'.54" 9'.07"
4'.59" 4.1
5'.06" 4.2
5'.1 4" 4.3
5'.21 " 4.4
5'.28" 4.5
WING GROUP
TABLE OF CONVERSION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATIONS
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L=i>-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Dimension «E», front point height (col. 5) minus dimension «E», rear point height (col. 5)
NOTE : The height deviation «AV - AR» (front point rear point) is given the sign «+» if the wing
group is in a «pull-up» attitude with respect to the theoretical value, and the sign « » in the
opposite case.
(6) Calculation of the angular deviations in terms of the height deviations (see table. Figure 17).
(a) Refer to the chart in Figure 18, and enter these values in column 7 opposite the space with the
corresponding sign in column 6.
NOTE : The conversion curves are linear. If a dimension is too high for the chart, split it up into lower
values comprised between 0 and 2,5 mm (0 and 0.09 in) or 0' and 5', then add up the partial
results.
Enter the values of column 7 in the similar spaces (points and signs) of column 8.
In the aircraft logbook (Measurement report) read the deviations between the manufacturing
incidence dimensions and the theoretical incidence dimensions ; enter these values in the similar spaces
(points and signs) of column 9.
(b) Calculate the deviation difference :
Measured deviation (column 8) minus manufacturing deviation (column 9)
Taking the signs into consideration, enter the resulting values in column 10 (positive ones in space
«+», negative ones in space « ») (refer to paragraph C (5)).
(c) Compare these values with the tolerances given in column 1 1.
(7) Checking the wing incidence asymmetry (see table. Figure 17).
(a) Carry over the values in column 8 to the corresponding spaces (points and signs) of column 13.
(b) For a same section on the LH wing and RH wing, calculate the difference between the measured
deviations (column 13), taking the signs into consideration.
LH section incidence deviation (column 13) minus RH section incidence deviation (column 13)
Enter these values, as absolute value, in column 14.
(c) Compare these values with the tolerances shown in column 1 5.
(8) Checking the dihedral (see table, Figure 19)
(a) This consists in checking the present height of points VA - VG and VB - VH relative to their
manufacturing height.
Dimension «E», VA (VB) point height deviation (col. 5)

minus dimension «E», VG (VH) point height deviation (col. 5)
(b) Calculation of the angular deviations in terms of height deviations.
(c) Refer to the chart in Figure 18 ; the values found should be entered in column 16, opposite the
corresponding space.
(d) In the aircraft logbook (Measurement report), read the manufacturing height deviations, and carry
over these dimensions to the corresponding spaces in column 1 7.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND ASYMMETRY
DIHEDRAL ASYMMETRY
DEVIATIONS OF «E» DIMENSION HEIGHT VALUES DIFFERENCE

BETWEEN
DIFFERENCEC
MEASURED (A r) MANUFACTURING (A u) BETWEEN |(«A1-vG1)
MEASURED
HEIGHT A rAND -<vA2-vG2)l
POINTS IN HEIGHT
in mm in minutes
IN HEIGHT
in mm in minutes
MANUFAC¬
TURING
HEIGHT Au
i and
|WB1-vH1)
-<vB2-vH2)|
DEVIATIONS DEVIATIONS
AS PER
AS PER COLUMN 5 SEE AIRCRAFT LOGBOOK COL.16-COL.17 COLUMN 16
16 17 18 19 20
vA1-vG1
vA2-vG2
<9' <9'
or or
7,5 mm 7,5 mm
vBI-vHI
vB2-vH2
..Ml
FIGURE 19 - WING GROUP : CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND SYMMETRY

AA
BREGUET AVIATION
jLJîril MIRAGE F
(e) Calculation of the deviation difference
Measured deviation (col. 16) minus manufacturing deviation (col. 17)
NOTE : Assuming that «+ A» is the value found in column 16, and «+ B» that found in column 17,
we have
+ A - (+B) = + A - B
Enter the values obtained in column 18.
Compare such values with the tolerances given in column 19.
(9) Checking the dihedral asymmetry (see table, Figure 19)
Using the height value variations of dimension «E» (column 16) of points VA-VG and VB-VH,
check that the dihedral height difference remains within tolerances given in column 20.
7- MEASURING THE WINGS AFTER A REPLACEMENT
The replacement consists in :

- either installing a new wing
- or installing a wing which has already been used on another aircraft.
A- General
IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE REPLACEMENT OF A WING, AN INCIDENCE ASYMMETRY

SLIGHTLY OUT OF TOLERANCE MAY BE NOTED, AS NO SETTLEMENT HAS OCCURRED ON
THE NEW WING.
(1 ) In this case, proceed as follows :
(a) Attach the measurement record to the aircraft logbook : this will be the new «manufacturing»
measurement for the replaced wing.
(b) Take a new measurement, after approximately 75 flying hours. For this new measurement, the
incidence asymmetry must mandatorily be within the tolerances.
B Measuring the new wings (see Figure 20)
The operation consists in determining the incidence deviations and the dihedral which will be the
new incidence and «manufacturing» dihedral values to be entered in the aircraft logbook.
To this end, fill in the columns 1 to 8 as done previously, and compare the new results with the
tolerances given in columns 9 and 11. If the incidence deviations and the dihedral are within the
tolerances of columns 9 and 1 1 , enter them in the aircraft logbook.
Any further measurement shall be taken in compliance with the above prescriptions (see
chapter 6).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
HEIGHT HEIGHT OF INCIDENCE DIHEDRAL

OF COR¬ CORRECTED
RECTED POINTS WITH HEIGHT DE VIA TIONS DEVIATIONS FROM DEVIATIONS BETWEEN HEIGHT
POINTS RESPECT TO DIMENSION «E» = HEIGHT DE VIA TIONS = THEORETICAL VALUES OF DIMENSION "E"
WITH HEIGHT BASIC PLANE «A» (MEASURED *E» (FRONT POINT INCIDENCE
OF MEASURED
*/
RESPECT POINT HEIGHT) HEIGHTI - jr£»
TO SIGHT
TUBE
PLANE
BASIC
PLANE
A = (b-H)
- *A THEO»
(THEORETICAL
POINT HEIGHT)
(REAR POINT-HEIGHT)
IN HEIGHT
(mm)
tN INCIDENCE
, (minutes)
EASURED
MCIDENCE
/ /
<P
in mm
IN HEIGHT
in minutes
DIMENSION AS PER SEE
THEORE¬ AS PER COL.5
«b» H MEASURED COL.3 - COL.4 AS PER COL.5
TICAL COL.5 AND CHARTS COL. 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
VA1 +
or 279
VA2 <8'
1G VA1 -VG1
or + 4 + ±3' or or
1D VA2 - VG2 7 mm
VB1
292.2 +
or I
VB2
VC1
+
or 207.8
VC2 <8'
2G. VB1 - VH1
or + + + - r or or
4.'
+ 7' VB2 - VH2 7 mm
2D I
VD1 +
or 220
VD2
VE1
136.4 +
or
3G
VE2
or + + + + 0'
3D + 10'
VF1
or 147.7 +
VF2
VG1 +
or 70.4
VG2
4G + 0'
+ 4- +
or
+ 13'
4D
VH1
+
or 81.8
VH2
FIGURE 20 - WING GROUP REPLACEMENT : DETERMINA TION OF INCIDENCE DEVIA TION

AND DIHEDRAL DEVIATION TO BE ENTERED IN THE AIRCRAFT LOGBOOK
AA
09-77
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAULTjL->^lrvL
AVIATION^fiT __
MIRAGE F
8- STABILATOR MEASUREMENTS
For these measurements, the aircraft position and configuration, as well as the sight tube position,
are identical with those required for measuring the wings.
A Identifying the stabilator points
On the lower surface of each stabilator, six skin points are located as follows :
- on section 1 , 2 points eG and eH
- on section 2, 2 points eJ and eK
- on section 3, 2 points eM and eN.
NOTE : Points eG and eM are used for checking the dihedral.

Points eG - eJ - eM are located on the front spar.
Points eH - eK - eN are located on the rear spar.
B Setting the stabilator to zero position
With hydraulic pressure applied to aircraft and stabilator deflection template positioned, set the
LH stabilator to theoretical zero, then :
- act on the trim until the zero on template faces the mark on fuselage,
- record the height of points eG and eH of section 1 ,
- act on the trim so that the difference between these two heights is equal to the requested value
((- 1 10.1 ) - (1 17.5)) = .+ 7.4 mm (allow for the correction of each of these points) ;
- maintain the setting obtained using the flight control adjustment tool.
C Principle
(1 ) Recording the height of the stabilator skin points

Proceed asfor the wings. Make sure that the rule constant is the same. If required, repeat the
calculation : dimension H = D constant.
(2) Principle of stabilator measurement
(a) Incidence deviation

(b) Incidence asymmetry
(c) Dihedral
(d) Dihedral asymmetry (see «Wing measurements»)
D Procedure
(1) Incidence
(a) Measure the rule constant.

(b) Calculate the distance H (H = D constant) and enter the value obtained in the table, figure 22.
(2) Calculate the height «b» of the stabilator corrected points with respect to the sight tube plane
(tables of figures 22 and 23).
Proceed as for the wings (see para. 6C).
(3) Calculate the height «A» of the stabilator corrected points with respect to the basic plane (table
of figure 23).
A = -(H-b)
The resulting negative value shall be entered in column 2 of the table, opposite each point.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Constante règle
Rule constant Toutes les cotes doivent être
exprimées en millimètres
All the dimensions must be Djstance »corrigée» du p,an
i
h Constante given m millimeters de |a |unette au p|an

Eâ Constant
=i ,n= 1
1 horizontal des points de fuselage
Corrected distance from sight-tube
plane to horizontal plane of
b = a - e
n H =
fuselage points
mm
o-
G2TZI ej2IHÏ
eMl XJ1 1h
^Ml^Kl
eN ,T^T eK.J^J .n|n>2Q eK2J^JeN2Q
FIGURE 22 - RELEVE DES ALTITUDES DES POINTS CORRIGES DES

EMPENNAGES PAR RAPPORT AU PLAN DE LA LUNETTE
RECORD OF HEIGHTS OF CORRECTED STABILATOR
POINTS WITH REGARD TO SIGHT TUBE PLANE
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(
HEIGHT
HEIGHT OF INCIDENCE INCIDENCE ASYMMETRY
OF COR¬
CORRECTED
RECTED HEIGHT DEVIATIONS DEVIATIONS FROM dIfTERENcE
HEIGHT POINTS WITH DIFFERENCE
POINTS DIMENSION «E» = THEORETICAL MEASURED AND
OF RESPECT TO HEIGHT DEVIATIONS = BETWEEN BETWEEN
WITH «A» (MEASURED INCIDENCE MEASURED THEORETICAL
BASIC BASIC PLANE «E» (FRONT POINT !
INCIDENCE
RESPECT POINT HEIGHT) INCIDENCE INCIDENCE
PLANE HEIGHT) -«E» I
MANUFAC¬ DEVIATIONS
TO SIGHT
S*
- «A THEO» (REAR POINT HEIGHT) MEASURED AND DEVIATIONS
TUBE TURING MANUFAC¬ <** KLH
*** PLANE
H
A = -(H-b) (THEORETICAL
POINT HEIGHT) IN HEIGHT IN INCIDENCE
INCIDENCE
INCIDENCE TURING
LH R H
SECTION)
E=A-ATHEO INCIDENCE -L(RH
DIMENSION (mm) (minutes) I A Au DEVIATIONS SECTION SECTION SECTION)
«b» THEORE¬ AS PER AS PER COL. 5 SEE SEE A/C AS PER
MEASURED
TICAL
COL. 3 - COL. 4
COL.5 AND CHARTS COL. 7 LOGBOOK
COL.8-COL.9 AS PER COL. 8
COL. 13
(*)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8
!
eG1 -110.1 ± i
1G ± ± ± i ± t ± 1'30
\
eH1 -117.5 +
i
eJ1 -71.6 ± i
2G ± ± ± ± ± ±3'
eK1 -75.7 ±
1 '! Section
GH <8'
eM1 -38.9 ± (1G/1D)
3G ± ± ± ± ± ±5'
eN1 -41.1 ±
Section
JK <15'
(2G/2D)
eG2 -110.1 ±
1D ± ± ± ± ± ± 1'30
eH2 -117.5 ± Section

MN <20'
(3G/3D)
eJ2 -71.6 ±
2D ± ± ± ± ± ±3'
eK2 -75.7 ±
eM2 -38.9 ±
3D ± ± ± ± ±
±5'
eN2 -41.1 ±
FIGURE 23 - STAB/ LA TORS : DETERMINA TION OF INCIDENCE DEVIA TIONS (*) Such tolerances do not take into account the tail unit offset subsequent to
TOLERANCES ON INCIDENCE AND ASYMMETRY flight control adjustment.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L-~
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted A4ANUAL 03
(4) Calculation of height deviation «E» between measured point and theoretical point (see table,
Figure 23)
«E» = «A», measured point height (col. 3) minus «A theo», theoretical point height (col. 4).
NOTE : «E» is given the sign «+» if the stabilator height exceeds the theoretical value and the sign
« » in the opposite case.
(5) Calculation of the height deviation between front point and rear point (see table. Figure 23).
dimension «E», front point height (col. 5) minus dimension «E», rear point height (col. 5)

NOTE : The height deviation «AV AR» (front point rear point) is given the sign «+» if the
stabilators are in a «pull-up» attitude (aircraft nose-down) , and the sign « » in the opposite
case.
(6) Calculation of the angular deviations in terms of the height deviations (see table, Figure 23).
(a) Refer to the chart in Figure 24, and enter these values in column 7, opposite the space with the
corresponding sign in column 6.
NOTE : If the deviation value in millimeters oversteps the charted values, split up this value into
fractions (e.g. : 3 mm = 2 mm + 1 mm), then add up the corresponding angular deviations.
Enter the values of column 7 in the similar spaces (points and signs) of column 8.
In the aircraft logbook (Measurement report), read the deviations between the manufacturing
incidence dimensions and the theoretical incidence dimensions ; enter these values in the similar spaces
(points and signs) of column 9.
(b) Calculate the deviation difference :
Measured deviation (column 8) minus manufacturing deviation (column 9).
Taking the signs into consideration, enter the resulting values in column 10 (positive ones in space
«+», negative ones in space «-») (refer to paragraph 8 D (5)).
(c) Compare these values with the tolerances given in column 1 1 .
(7) Checking the stabilator incidence asymmetry (see table, Figure 23).
(a) Enter the values of column 8 in the corresponding spaces (points and signs) of column 1 3.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
{Ecart en mm Height deviation (mm)
FIGURE 24 - EMPENNAGES : CONVERSION DES ECARTS EN INCIDENCE

STAB I LA TORS : CONVERSION OF INCIDENCE DEVIA TIONS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
DEVIATION SECTION SECTION SECTION DIHEDRAL

in I II III eH - eN
mm eG - eH eJ - eK eM - eN
0.1 0'.24" 0'.34" 0'.51 " 0M4"

0.2 0'.48" 1 '.08" '.42"
1 0'.28"
0.3 1M2" 1 '.43" 2'.32" 0'.42"
0.4 T.36" 2M7" 3'.23" 0'.56"
0.5 T.59" 2'.51" 4M 4" 1M0"
0.6 2'.23" 3'.25" 5'.06" 1 '.24"
0.7 2'.47" 3'.59" 5'.56" 1 '.39"
0.8 3'.1 0" 4'. 35" 6'. 46" 1 '.53"

0.9 3'.34" 5'.06" 7'.37" 2'.07"
1.0 3'.58" 5'.41 " 8'.28" 2'.21"
1.1 4'.21" 6'.1 5" 9'.1 9" 2'.36"
1.2 _ 4'.45" 6'.49"" 10'.09" 2'.50"
1.3 5'.09" 7'.24" 1 1 '.00" 3'.03"
1.4 5'.33" 7'.58" '.51 "
1 1 3'.1 8"
1.5 5'.57" 8'.32" 12'. 42" 3'. 32"
1.6 6'.20" 9'.06" 1 3'.33" 3'.46"
1.7 6'.44" 9'.40" 4'.00"
1.8 7'.08" 10M4" 4'.14"
1.9 7'.32" 10'.48" 4'.29"
2.0 7'.56" 1 1 '.22" 4'.42"
2.1 8M 9" 1 1 '.56" 4'.56"
2.2 8'. 43" 12'. 30" 5'.1 1 "
2.3 9'.06" 1 3'.04" 5'.25"
2.4 9'.30" 5'.39"
2.5 9'.54" 5'.54"
2.6 1 0'.1 8" 6'.08"
2.7 6'.22"
2.8 6'.36"
2.9 6'.50"
3.0 7'.04"
3.1 7M8"
3.2 7'.32"
3.3 7'.44"
3.4 8'.00"
3.5 8M4"
3.6 8'.28"
3.7 8'.42"
3.8 8'.56"
3.9 9M0"
4.0 9'.24"
STABILATORS
AA
BREGUET
jLJ-^T^
AVIATIONêF^Ô
MIRAGE F
^£2=^-"^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) For a same section on the LH and the RH stabilators, calculate the difference between the
measured deviations (column 13), taking the signs into account.
LH section incidence deviation (column 13) minus RH section incidence deviation (column 13)
Enter these values, as absolute value, in column 14.
(c) Compare these values with the tolerances given in column 15.
(8) Checking the dihedral (see table. Figure 25)
(a) This consists in checking the difference in height of points eH and eN relative to their
manufacturing height.
Dimension «E», eH point height deviation (col. 5)

minus dimension «E», eN point height deviation (col. 5)
(b) Calculation of the angular deviations in terms of height deviations
Refer to the chart in Figure 24 ; the values found should be entered in column 16, opposite the
corresponding space.
In the aircraft logbook (Measurement report), read the manufacturing height deviations, and enter
these dimensions in the corresponding spaces in column 17.
(c) Calculation of the deviation differences
Measured deviation (col. 16) minus manufacturing deviation (col. 17)
NOTE : Assuming that «+ A» is the value found in column 16, and «+ B» that found in column 17,
we have :
+ A-(+B) = + A-B
Enter the values obtained in column 18.
Compare such values with the tolerances given in column 19.
(9) Checking the dihedral asymmetry (see table. Figure 25)
Using the height value variations of dimension «E» (column 16) of points eH and eN, check that
the dihedral height difference remains within tolerances given in column 20.
AA
O9"77 Restricted 0-526
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND ASYMMETRY
DIHEDRAL ASYMMETRY
DEVIATIONS OF «E» DIMENSION HEIGHT VALUES DEVIATION

DIFFERENCE <9
/
DIFFERENCE 6
MEASURED (A r) MANUFACTURING (A u) BETWEEN KeHI-eND
MEASURED -(eH2-eN2>l
POINTS IN HEIGHT IN HEIGHT HEIGHT A rAND
MANUFAC¬
TURING
In mm in minutes in mm in minutes HEIGHT Au
DEVIATIONS
AS PER
AS PER COLUMN 5 SEE AIRCRAFT LOGBOOK COL.16-COL.17 COLUMN 16
16 17 18 19 20
eH1-eN1
<6' <8'
or or
2,5mm 3,5 mm
eH2-eN2
FIGURE 25 - STABILATORS : CHECKING OF DIHEDRAL AND SYMMETRY
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ>~^rX
BREGUET AVIATION^c^"^"^
MIRAGE F
^£25S=-<^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
9- MEASURING A STABILATOR AFTER REPLACEMENT

- either installing a new stabilator
or installing a stabilator which has already been used on another aircraft.
A General
INCIDENCE ASYMMETRY MUST MANDATORILY BE WITHIN THE REQUIRED TOLERANCES.
Attach the measurement record to the aircraft logbook : this will be the new «manufacturing»
measurement for the replaced stabilator.
B Measuring a new stabilator (Figure 26)
The operation consists in determining the incidence deviations and the dihedral which will be the
new incidence and «manufacturing» dihedral values to be entered in the aircraft logbook.
To this end, fill in the columns 1 to 8 and column 10 as done previously, and compare the new
results with the tolerances given in columns 9 and 11. If the incidence deviations and the dihedral are
within the tolerances of column 9, enter them in the aircraft logbook.
chapter 8).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
HEIGHT INCIDENCE DIHEDRAL

HEIGHT OF
OF COR¬
CORRECTED
RECTED HEIGHT DE VIA TIONS DEVIATIONS FROM DEVIATIONS BETWEEN HEIGHT
POINTS WITH HEIGHT DEVIATIONS = THEORETICAL
POINTS DIMENSION «E» = INCIDENCE VAL UES OF DIMENSION "E"
HEIGHT RESPECT TO «E» (FRONT POINT
WITH *A» (MEASURED
OF BASIC PLANE POINT HEIGHT) HEIGHT! -*E» MEASURED
RESPECT
4*
/
TO SIGHT BASIC - HA THEO» (REAR POINT HEIGHT)
MEASURED
TUBE PLANE (THEORETICAL IN HEIGHT
A = -IH-b) POINT HEIGHT) INCIDENCE
IN HEIGHT IN INCIDENCE
PLANE
DIMENSION
E=A-A THEO (mm) (mm)
#/ in mm in minutes
THEORE¬ AS PER ÀSPERCOI-S SEE
«b» H MEASURED COL.3 - COL.4 COL.7 AS PER COL.5
TICAL COL.5 AND CHARTS
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
eG1 <6'
+ i
or -110.1 i
i
eH1 -eN1 or
eG2 2'5mm
1G
+ + ±4' or
or
1D
eH1
-117.5 +
or eH2-eN2
eH2
eJ1
or -71.6 +
eJ2
2G
or + + + ±4'
2D
eK1
or -75.7 +
eK2
eM1
+
or -38.9
eM2
3G
or
+ + + ± 10'
3D
eN1
or -41.1 +
eN2
FIGURE 26 -STABILATOR REPLACEMENT: DETERMINATION OF INCIDENCE DEVIATION

AND DIHEDRAL DEVIATION TO BE ENTERED IN THE AIRCRAFT LOGBOOK
AA 0-529
09-77
BREGUET AVIATION, _
MIRAGE F
8- MEASURING THE VERTICAL STABILIZER
The aircraft position and configuration are the same as for the wing measurements.
A Setting the theodolite
(1 ) Materializing the aircraft centerline on the ground (see figure 1 5)
- For each of the points A and D, maintain the upper end of a plumb line in the punch mark so
that the end coincides with the aircraft point.
- Using the other end of the plumb line, mark the projection of points A and D on the ground.
- Materialize the aircraft centerline with a chalked thread joining points A and D and prolonging
the centerline up to a distance of 7 m (22.96 ft) aft of the fuselage.
- Check that the projection of the other points (B and C) coincides with the projected centerline.
(2) Setting the theodolite
- Place the tee (50 cm - 19.68 in) on the ground, at right angles with the projection of the aircraft
centerline, and to the left ; the tee zero should coincide with the projected centerline and the projection
of point A. Place a second tee (50 cm - 19.68 in) on the ground, with its zero coinciding with the
projected centerline and the projection of point D.
- Using the three knurled screws and the spirit level, adjust the horizontality of each tee.
- Place the theodolite aft of the aircraft, at about 5 m (15.404 ft) from the end of the tail cone,
and to the left of the aircraft centerline projection, at a distance of 25 to 45 cm (9.84 to 17.71 in)
from this projection.
- Level the theodolite.
- Adjust the theodolite so that the two rules on the ground indicate the same value ; immobilize
the theodolite in that position.
NOTE : - For the above adjustment, move the theodolite about its vertical axis.
- The value read should exceed 25 cm (9.84 in).
- Record this dimension H between the theodolite plane and the aircraft centerline.
^ _ | oiyiiiiuy C7/WO / I \
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT j/_=i>-ilrJQ
BREGUET AVIATION ê_ __
MIRAGE F
(3) Identifying the points on the vertical stabilizer. '
On the LH side of the fin, six skin points are located as follows :
- on section 1 , 2 points eA and eB

- on section 2, 2 points eC and eD
- on section 3, 2 points eE and eF.
NOTE : Points eA - eE and eB - eF are used for checking the roll setting of the fin.
Points eA - eC - eE are located on the front spar.
Points eB - eD - eF are located on the rear spar.
C Principle
(1 ) Recording the distances of the vertical stabilizer skin points.
The purpose of the operation is to bring the rule at right angles with the optical axis of the
theodolite for each point to be measured, so as to determine the distance from the vertical plane of the
theodolite to the point considered.
Theodolite Theodolite
sighting axis "1 sighting axis
Horizontal plane
Once the tip of the rule is located in the point datum circle, the rule has two axes of freedom : one
vertical, the other horizontal.
The rule is fitted with a spirit level : the vertical displacement can be suppressed once the bubble is
at the center of the rule reference mark.
The only axis of freedom remaining is the horizontal one. As the rule is being displaced along the
horizontal plane, the distance between the parallel lines of the scale in the theodolite sight tube goes
through a maximum value. At that moment, perform the measurement of the considered point. The
operator can also check that the lines of the rule scale are quite parallel with the vertical axis of the
sighting plate.
H is the distance between the vertical plane of the theodolite and the vertical plane of the vertical
stabilizer.
AA
09-77 0-530M
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(2) Principle of vertical stabilizer measurement
(a) Yaw setting deviation of vertical stabilizer.

(b) Roll setting deviation of vertical stabilizer.
Proceed as for the wings :

- for the yaw setting of the vertical stabilizer, see the wing incidence ;
- for the roll setting of the vertical stabilizer, see the wing dihedral.
D Procedure
(1) Incidence
On each of the ribs listed above, record the distance of the front and rear points, proceeding as
follows :
- place the rule tip in the center of the datum circle ;
- position the rule so that the scale is tilted by about 45°, with its lower section directed to the
theodolite ;
- bring the level bubble to the center of the rule reference mark ;
- an operator pivots the rule slowly about its tip and along the horizontal plane, without altering
the above three settings ; during this time, a second operator watches the theodolite scale ; when he sees
the lines from «full face», he has the rule immobilized in the corresponding position and reads the
distance «a» ;
- enter this dimension in the table of Figure 10.
distance read on the theodolite

corrected distance
: distance of corrected points
with respect to aircraft
centerline
Theodolite plane
Aircraft viewed from the front
AA
09-77 0-531
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Toutes les cotes doivent être

exprimées en millimètres
All the dimensions must be
Distance du plan du théodolite
given in millimeters
au plan de base
Distance from theodolite a
plane to basic plane
H = mm
( )
b = a - e
FIGURE 28 - RELEVE DES DISTANCES DES POINTS CORRIGES DE LA DERIVE

PAR RAPPORT AU PLAN DE BASE
RECORD OF DISTANCES OF FIN CORRECTED POINTS IN
RELA TION TO BASIC PLANE
AB
AVION» MARCEL DASSAULT
RIOUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
YAW
DISTANCE OF DISTANCE OF CORRECTED
CORRECTED DISTANCE POINTS WITH RESPECT DISTANCE DEVIATIONS DEVIATIONS FROM DIFFERENCE
BETWEEN TO BASIC PLANE DIMENSION «E» =: «A». DISTANCE DEVIATIONS
POINTS WITH «E», FRONT POINT DISTANCE
THEORETICAL YAW BETWEEN
RESPECT TO THEODOLITE MEASURED POINT DISTANCE MEASURED
PLANE A = (H - b) - «A THEO». THEORETICAL
- «E». REAR POINT DISTANCE
THEODOLITE YAW AND
PLANE AND BASIC POINT DISTANCE MEASURED MANUFAC¬
SECTIONS MANUFAC¬ TOLERANCES
POINTS PLANE IN DISTANCE IN YAW YAW TURING YAW
TURING YAW
DIMENSION E=A-ATHEb (mm) (minutes) DEVIATIONS
«b» H i '
MEASURED THEORETICAL AS PER AS PER COL. 5 SEE SEE A/C
COL. 3 - COL.4 AND CHARTS COLA - COL.9
COL.5 COL. 7 LOGBOOK
1 2 3 4 5 j 6 7 8 9 10 11
eA 57.7 ±
1 ± ± ± + ± ± 1'30
eB 37 ±
eC 47 +
t
2 i
1 ± ± ± ± ± ±3'
1
eD 32.2
eE 37.8 ±
3 ± t ± ± ± ±4'
eF 28.2 ± ;
CHECK OF FIN ROLL SETTING
DIFFERENCE
DEVIATION OF «E» DIMENSION HEIGHT VALUES BETWEEN
MEASURED
MEASURED MANUFACTURING VALUE AND
MANUFACTU¬
IN DISTANCE RING VALUE TOLERANCES
IN DISTANCE
POINTS DEVIATIONS
mm minutes mm minutes
AS PER COL. 5 SEE A/C LOGBOOK COL.12-COL.13
12 13 14 15
eA eE
< 3' or 1 mm
eB-eF
FIGURE 29 - FIN : DETERMINATION OF YAW AND ROLL DEVIATIONS

TOLERANCES
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [
BREGUET AVIATION,
MIRAGE F
(2) Calculation of distance «b» of fin corrected points with respect to theodolite plane (tables of
Figures 28 and 29).
Proceed as for the wings (see para. 6B).
b= a e
Enter the resulting values in column 1 of the table, Figure 29.

(3) Calculation of distance «A» of fin corrected points with respect to basic plane, (table of
Figure 29).
A = H-b
The resulting positive value shall be entered in column 3 of the table.
(4) Calculation of distance deviation «E» between measured point and theoretical point (see table,
Figure 29)
«E» = «A», measured point distance (col. 3) minus «A theo», theoretical point distance (col. 4)
Enter the resulting value in column 5.
NOTE : «E» is given the sign «+» if the fin is offset to the LH side, and the sign « » if the fin is
offset to the RH side.
(5) Calculation of the distance deviation between front point and rear point (see table, Figure 29)
Dimension «E», front point distance (col. 5) minus dimension «E», rear point distance (col. 5)
Enter the resulting value in the relevant space («+» or « ») in column 6.
NOTE : The distance deviation «AV-AR» (front point - rear point) is given the sign «+» if the fin
setting tends to deviate the aircraft to the right, and the sign « » in the opposite case.
(6) Calculation of the angular deviations in terms of the distance deviations (see table. Figure 29)
(a) Refer to the chart in Figure 30 ; the values found there should be entered in column 7, opposite
the corresponding space (same sign) in column 6.
Enter the valu.es of column 7 in the corresponding spaces (points and signs) of column 8.
In the aircraft logbook (Measurement report), read the deviations between manufacturing yaw and
theoretical yaw, and enter these values in the corresponding spaces (points and signs) of column 9.
(b) Calculation of the deviation difference representing the fin yaw setting deviation.
Enter the resulting values in column 10, taking the signs into account : positive values in «+»
spaces, negative values in « » spaces.
(c) Compare these values with the tolerances given in column 1 1 .
AA
09-77 Restricted °-534
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
-1 ....
t "
r\
.... .... .
t- - -
.... .. . .
_.
" " "
'
ii i
'
' ii i
"
i i# r J i i
i L- ' Ecart i
en minutes:
i
i
i i
-
i
- -j" " t; -j--
i
i .. .- .. . j. ... - - -"»«
!
l ii
/-i r
~w& 'j5>\
; 1
i
i; i i
. i
T-'
.._4
i
y *
t
t
-
!
j ï
--f
1
- -H
1
---
; -
......
î r j
: J
! "
f
i
i
t'i Lv.-L/Tc i i
i
i
"i
1
1
i -
i
i !
>
:- --
\\
' o^ JA^ f
-
i
i
i
1
l.*v 1
*y/\ U^
;
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
-
, i
1
>>-
ï
!
i
1
î
j
1
!
:
- i
|
i-
?ç
0- -if
|
irf j | 1
i
,&y
c\ a^z.
j i
1
^ -i
1
i
4' \
<£$ i
. j . ... S« i
c- " !
;\ %v
-- i i i /* 4--
'
y/\
i
i 4- - ;
r - ~
j'
i
i
.
.
i j
\S
1
Iïï°<?i2 r
! i
i
-;-- S\\ - i~ - -i .^w_

A\ 1 .
1 > l
i 1;
i '
....
- /- »
_-_
i
y ïjT
i
Il - ......
i __
[
3*; '; J
i Tl"
t i
|j
1-
| r î '
_.-
-- i"
"~r-
i
1
' i 1
i
i 2^t
.....
i i
V j
rjr
i j
i J i/ i
i
t
i
-4-- -X- /\\f i
i --f-- 1
!
._,.
\-~ . i_-
i
>
....
" "'
j :
\/_
ILi*1.'
i ......
i
i
i
i
- ._.
i
i
i
i ._...
-.-
..._
j y Jr't i
i i
|
2r i
1 i
I
i
i i
'>S i j
*__ l'- .
t
._. +-__ ^ * 1
1
t.
i !
' j
'
i
$ i
i
I i
!
!
; i
i
i 4 ..... j_. .. i \
Z- j
- -f -
;
.....j.. .-
:
i
!
i
\w'À
,. 10" ,
i
r
l
i
i
i. .. . .'.. ; .... .. .!
--
i
_ .! ,-4- - .. .;. ....
Ecart en mm[L inear deviation
.
L" "T ." i t i (
i '}-' \
.i
:
IM»
i
4 \- j..... ! L .
- .
mm Z mm
...
-
T 1 i 1
t < i
1
i î
i i i l
.
: i
i
cl .i
t l 1
' i r 1
f
j j .1 :'..) j
1
.... J i. ... j \. ! ...
FIGURE 30 - DERIVE : CONVERSION DES ECARTS LINEAIRES
EN ECARTS ANGULAIRES
FIN : CONVERSION OF LINEAR DEVIATIONS
INTO ANGULAR DEVIATIONS
AB
09-73 Restricted 0 535 FIGURE 30 0-, 535
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
FIN FIN
Versions as per drawing F94001 3 Versions as per drawing FB1 C94001 3
SECTION
ROLL SECTION SECTION SECTION DEVIATION SECTION 2 SECTION
eA - eE .3 2 1 in 1 eC - eD 3
eB - eF eE-eF eC - eD eA - eB mm eA - eB and eE-eF
ROLL
0M7" 0'.25" 0'.16" OM 1 " 0.1 0'.1 2" 0M7" 0'.28"

0'.35" 0'.50" 0'.32" 0'.22" 0.2 0'.24" 0'.34" 0'.55"
0'.52" 1 '.1 4" 0'.48" 0'.34" 0.3 0'.36" 0'.52" 1 '.23"
1M0" 1 '.39" 1 '.04" 0'.45" 0.4 0'.48" 1 '.09" 1 '.50"

1'.27" 2'.04" 1'.20" 0'.57" 0.5 0'.59" 1 '.26" 2M 8"
1 '.45" 2\29" 1'.36" T.08" 0.6 1 M 1 " 1 '.44" 2'.45"
1 '.02" 2'.54" 1 '.52" 1 '.1 9" 0.7 T.23" 2'.01 " 3'.1 3"
2M9" 3M9" 2'.09" 1 '.30" 0.8 1 '.35" 2'.1 8" 3'.41 "
2'.36" 3'.44" 2'.25" T.42" 0.9 1 '.47" 2'.36" 4'.08"
2'.54" 4'.09" 2'.41 " 1 '.53" 1.0 1 '.59" 2'.53" 4'.36"
3'.1 1 " 4'.34" 2'.57" 2'.05" 1.1 2'.11" 3M0" 5'.04"
3'.29" 4'.59" 3M3" 2'.16" 1.2 2'.23" 3'.28" 5'.32"
3'.46" 5'.24" 3'.30" 2'.28" 1.3 2'.35" 3'.45" 5'.59"
- 4'.04" 5'.49" 3'.46" 2'.39" 1.4 2'.46" 4'.02" 6'.27"
4'.21 " 6M4" 4'.02" 2'.50" 1.5 2'.58" 4'.20" 6'.54"
4'.38" 6'.39" 4M 8" 3'.02" 1.6 3'.1 0" 4'.37" 7'.22"
4'.56" 7'.04" 4'.34" 3M3" 1.7 3'.22" 4'.55" 7'.50"
5'.14" 7'.29" 4'.50" 3'.25" 1.8 3'.34" 5'.1 2" 8M8"
5'.31 " 7'.54" 5'.06" 3'.36" 1.9 3'.46" 5'.29" 8'.45"
5'.48" 8'.1 9" 5'.22" 3'.48" 2.0 3'.58" 5'.46"
6'.06" 8'.44" 5'.38" 3'.59" 2.1 4M0" 6'.04"
5M3" 5'.54" 4M0" 2.2 4'.22" 6'.21 "
6'.41 " 6'.11" 4'.22" 2.3 4'.34" 6'.38"
. 6'.58" 6'.27" 4'.33" 2.4 4'.46" 6'.56"
7M6" 6'.43" 4'.44" 2.5 4'.58" 7M3"
7'.33" 6'.59" 4'.56" 2.6 5'.1 0" 7'.31"
7'.50" 7M6" 5'.08" 2.7 5'.22" 7'.48"
8'.08" 7'.32" 5M9" 2.8 5'.34" 8'.05"
8'.26" 7'.48" 5'.30" 2.9 5'.46" 8'.23"
8'.43" 8'.04" 5'.42" 3.0 5'.58" 8'.40"
9'.00" 8'.20" 5'.54" 3.1 6'.10" 8'.57"
8'.36" 6'.05" 3.2 6'.22"
8'.53" 6M6" 3.3 6'.34"
6'.28" 3.4 6'.46"
6'.39" 3.5 6'.58"
6'.50" 3.6 7'.1 0"
7'.02" 3.7 7'.22"
7'.1 4" 3.8 7'.34"
7'.25" 3.9 7'.46"
7'.36" 4.0 7'.58"
FIN
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF FIN YAW SETTING
DISTANCE OF YAW
CORRECTED DISTANCE OF CORRECTED
DISTANCE
POINTS WITH POINTS WITH RESPECT DEVIATIONS FROM
BETWEEN DISTANCE DEVIATIONS DISTANCE DEVIA TIONS
TO BASIC PLANE THEORETICAL YAW
RESPECT TO THEODOLITE DIMENSION «E» = «A», »E», FRONT POINT DISTANCE
THEODOLITE PLANE MEASURED POINT DISTANCE - tE». REAR POINT DISTANCE
PLANE AND BASIC As(H-b) -«A THEO», THEORETICAL
MEASURED
SECTIONS POINTS PLANE POINT DISTANCE IN DISTANCE IN YAW
YAW
E= A-ATHÉO (mm) (minutes) TOLERANCES
DIMENSION H MEASURED THEORETICAL !
AS PER AS PER COL.5 SEEs
«b» COL.3-COLJ.4
COL.5 AND CHARTS COL.7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
eA 57 7 1
+ + +
1
±3>
eB 4
37
+
eC 47
2 i + + + + 6'
i
eD 32.2 +
eE 37,8 +
3 + + + ±8'
+
eF 28., 2
CHECK OF FIN ROLL SETTING
DE VIA TION OF «E» DIMENSION HEIGHT VAL UES
MEASURED
IN DISTANCE
POINTS TOLERANCES
mm minutes
AS PER COL.5
10 11
eA-eE
< 6' or 2mm

eB-eF
FIGURE 30M - FIN REPLACEMENT : DETERMINATION OF YAW AND

ROLL DEVIATIONS - TOLERANCES
AC
11-79 Restricted 0-535R FIGURE 30M 0-535R
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]LJ>~zQ.
BREGUET AVIATION^-îF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
(7) Checking the fin roll setting (see table, Figure 29).
(a) Check the difference of distance deviation of points eA-eE and eB-eF, with respect to the
manufacturing distances.
Dimension «E», eA (eB) point distance deviation (col. 5)

minus dimension «E», eE (eF) point distance deviation (col. 5)
Enter the resulting value in column 12.
(b) Calculation of angular deviations in terms of distance deviations.
(1 ) Refer to the chart in Figure 30 ; the values found there should be entered in column 12, opposite
the corresponding space.
(2) In the aircraft logbook (Measurement report), read the manufacturing distance deviations, and
enter these values in the corresponding spaces in column 13.
(3) Calculation of deviation difference
Enter the resulting values in column 14.
Compare these values with the tolerances given in column 15.
11 -MEASURING A VERTICAL STABILIZER AFTER REPLACEMENT

-either installing a new vertical stabilizer,
-or installing a vertical stabilizer which has already been used on another aircraft.
A General
Attach the measurement record to the aircraft logbook : this will be the new «manufacturing»
dimension for the replaced vertical stabilizer.
B Measuring a new vertical stabilizer (Figure 30)
The operation consists in determining the yaw and roll setting deviations which will be the new
«manufacturing» yaw and roll values to be entered in the aircraft logbook.
To this end, fill in the columns 1 to 8 and column 10, as done previously, and compare the new
results with the tolerances given in columns 9 and 1 1 . If these yaw and roll setting deviations are within
the tolerances of columns 9 and 1 1 , enter them in the aircraft logbook.
chapter 10).
AA
09-77 Restricted 0-535S
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -^-^c-U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATION^£. __^ ..*.....». ..
11 -TRIANGULATION
A General
(1) THIS CHECK IS NOT TO BE MADE SYSTEMATICALLY FOR ALL THE MEASUREMENTS,
BUT ONLY AFTER REPLACEMENT OF LARGE COMPONENTS : WINGS, TAIL UNIT.
(2) Triangulation points are shown in figure 15
- Fuselage : points f A and f D

- Wings : points vH 1 and vH2
- Stabilators : points eM1 and eM2.
(3) It is necessary to plumb the fuselage points fA and fD located on aircraft centerline.
- Then, plumb wing points vH1 and vH2 and stabilator points eM1 and eM2
- Accurately plot dimensions specified in the figure
- For each one, calculate the deviation values between the actual plotted value and the theoretical
value.
B Fuselage/wing triangulation, to be performed only after replacement of a wing (See table,

figure 31)
(1) Accurately plumb points f A, fD, vH and eM

-
In the related column, enter the value of dimension recorded upon aircraft manufacturing (See
-
aircraft logbook)
- In the related column, enter the dimension value recorded after wing replacement.
(2) Compare the dimension measured after wing replacement with the manufacturing dimension and
check that the absolute value of this deviation is lower than the tolerance given.
NOTE : This tolerance takes the reading error into consideration.
C Fuselage/stabilator triangulation to be performed after replacement of one stabilator (See table in

figure 31)
The procedure will be the same as for fuselage/wing triangulation except that only the points fD -
vH and eM shall be plumbed.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
vH2
vH1
TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS
DIMENSIONS AFTER DEVIATION

THEORETICAL MANUFACTURING IN ABSOLUTE
TO BE COMPONENT TOLERANCES
DIMENSIONS DIMENSIONS VALUE
PLOTTED REPLACEMENT
f A - vH1
9197.5
f A - vH2
fD-vH1
4072
fD-vH2
fD-eM1
3277.8 < 5 mm
f D - eM2
vH1 -eM1
3476.8
vH2-eM2
eEl -eM1 ^zzxzz^

3307
eE2 - eM2 x
FIGURE 31 - FUSELAGE - WING GROUP TAIL UNIT TRIANGULATION
AA
BREGUET
/LJ>~rU
AVIATION^S^L^^ .
MIRAGE
...*,..«
F
CHECK OF AIRCRAFT SEALING

(See figure 11)
1 - SCOPE
Check for correct sealing of doors, intersheet connections of skin panels and compartments.
2- CHECKING SEALING AT JUNCTIONS (sealant)
Check sealant at junctions for absence of cut, separation or damage. Renew sealing as required
(see 03-0).
3 - CHECKING SEALING OF DOORS (sealant)
(1) After removal
If any trace of dampness or any deposit due to water seepage in the related compartments is
detected, renew door sealing.
(2) Check of sealing bead
Check for correct bearing surface of the sealant bead all around : absence of cut, separation,
missing section... Renew door sealing as required.
(3) Procedure for checking door water tightness
- With the door normally fastened, pour water on the door framing, wipe then remove the door.
- Check for absence of water seepage between door and structure. If required, renew door sealing.
4- CHECKING SEALING OF SEALED DOORS
Check that the rubber or foam seal is not cut, unstuck or incomplete ; if it is, replace the seal.
5- CHECKING SEALING OF GUTTER SEALS ON EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR
On the rear side of the «U» section and on the front side of frame 17, check that the special
gutter seal is not unstuck, cut or incomplete. If it is, replace it as follows :
- remove the damaged seal ; the bonding compound forms a film (orange peel type), a part of
which is removed together with the seal ;
- carefully dry-clean by rubbing with a cloth to remove any deposit of compound left in the
gutter ;
- using a spatula, spread a film of Chomerics compound ;
- position the seal and press it down firmly ;
- close the door
- allow to set for 24 hours.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^_
ti^J^^^l
_^^
MIRAGE F
INSPECTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON AN AIRCRAFT

WHICH HAS EXCEEDED THE PERMISSIBLE LOAD FACTOR
(figure 32)
1- SCOPE
To check, after exceeding the load factor, the various parameters enabling to determine whether
the incident has caused damage necessitating aircraft reconditioning.
2- GENERAL
Before these checks, fill in a data sheet concerning the incident. The data to be entered in the
sheet can be : recorded acceleration - A/C weight - possible external stores - airspeed - altitude : general
remarks, special remarks on the circumstances of the incident - particular damage found.
3- LIMIT LOAD FACTOR
This is the value beyond which certain checks of the aircraft must be carried out.
Such load factor limit value should be taken into consideration only after :
- bench testing the aircraft accelerometer,
- processing the crash recorder tape and checking the recorder and its accelerometer in workshop.
NOTE : To avoid misinterpretation as regards the various load factor values given in the Flight Manual
and the Maintenance Manual, it is reminded that the Flight Manual gives the authorized safe
load factor, whereas the Maintenance Manual gives the load factor constituting the limit
beyond which it is necessary to carry out certain checks which are detailed in this section.
AA
BREGUET
ff^>-%-U
AVIATION^^cF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^£^^^^> Restricted MANUAL 03
A Limit load factor for clean aircraft
nz < 10 g when M <0.85

or 0.85<M<0.95andh>15,000ft.
- 4.55 < nz < 8.6 when 0.85 < M < 0.95 and h < 1 5,000 ft
-3.7 < nz < 7.2 when M > 0.95
Such load factors are given :

- for symmetrical maneuver envelope
- for aircraft weight = 10,200 kg (22,440 lb) ; if the aircraft weight is above or below this value,
make allowance for the product of aircraft weight and nz :
- A/C weight x nz < 10 x 10,200 when M < 0.85 or 0.85 < M < 0.95 and h > 15,000 ft
- A/C weight xnz< 8.6 x 10,200 when 0.85 < M < 0.95 and h < 15,000 ft
- A/C weight x nz < 7.2 x 10,200 when M > 0.95.
(For aircraft weights in pounds, multiply the g number by 22.400)
B Limit load factor for loaded aircraft
Refer to the Flight Manual, which gives the limitations versus the carried loads and the conside¬
red mission. If an aircraft has exceeded the authorized (safe) load factor by over 20 %, in addition to
the procedure specified for clean aircraft according to the load factor reached, it will be necessary to
carry out the inspections and checks specifically applicable to aircraft with external stores (section 4).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 ^ " " IVIIIXAAV^L-
breguet aviation Û ^> Restricted MANUAL 03
4 - INSPECTION
A - Particular structure inspections
(1 ) Especially look for skin crinkling. In suspect areas, inspect the rivets and ensure that the
locking doors can be easily removed.
This inspection especially concerns the following:
(a) Fuselage
-Inspection of rivets.
-Condition of skin between frames 10 and 36.
-Condition of air intake ducts.
-Condition and attachment of ventral fins.
-Tank sealing.
-Check of canopy operation
-Operate the canopy several times to check its positioning with respect to the cen¬
tering parts on the side formers (see 03-2).
-Check of nose cone attaching parts (see 03-2).
(b) Wings
-Check of rivets.
-Condition of skin.
-Condition of mobile components (slats, flaps, ailerons, spoilers).
-Tank sealing.
(2) Inspection of U/C and doors
(a) Operate the U/C doors slowly, and check:

-travel and locking of doors (see 05-2 and 05-4),
-locking pressures (see 05-6).
(b) Operate the U/C slowly:

-check travel and U/C uplocking (see 05-1 and 05-3),
-check for impact traces on roller, hook and door lower skin,
-if the U/C uplocks are dented, remove them for workshop inspection; inspect the fitting
bores and the attaching bolts.
(3) On aircraft fitted with external stores

-In addition to the previous checks, perform the following operations:
-removal of external stores,
-removal, inspection and maintenance of suspension fittings or ejectors.
-Inspection and check of suspension fittings and secondary attachment points.
-Inspection and check of skins, panels and rivets around the various attachment points.
-Inspections, check and maintenance of pylons and stores (see individual documenta¬
tion).
B - Measurement of main wing-to-fuselage attachment fittings

(1 ) Measure the LH and RH lower surface attachment fittings as per the procedure described
hereafter.
(a) Ovalization tolerances for wing bores
A maximum recorded diameter of 80.102 mm (3.1536 in) is acceptable; this value corre¬
sponds to the theoretical dimension allowing for the possible transfer od Dalic deposits from
the fitting to the sleeve (Dalic thickness: 0.010 to 0.012 mm (0.00039 to 0.00047 in).
AC
11 - 86 Restricted 0 - 541
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT:
MIRAGE F
breguet aviation ^_ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) Ovalization tolerances for fuselage bores
If detected, the greatest distortion should be located at the sections closest to the wing
fitting.
-Maximum diameter recorded, s 80.2 mm (3.1576 in)

-install the connecting pins in compliance with the normal assembly instructions,
-return the aircraft to service if no abnormality is detected during inspection of the
fuselage (para. A) and the check of harmonization, systems and equipment.
Maximum diameter recorded > 80.2 mm (3.1 576 in)

-
-install the lower surface connecting pins in compliance with the special assembly
instructions:
-increase the pin insertion (2.3 _ o5mm (00905 _ Q0197 in^ theoretical) UP to
a maximum value of 3.8 7mm (0.1496 Q 0275 'n)
Q
-measure the LH and RH upper surface attachment fittings,

-perform the wing dihedral geometrical measurements in compliance with the proce¬
dure described under airframe measurements (see 03-0),
-inform the manufacturer of all the results.
(2) Measurement procedure for main wing-to-fuselage attachment fittings
(a) Special tools

-Bore dial gauge positioning tool, ref. 50 MS 082 (wing removed).
-Tool set for measuring wing-to-fuselage bores, ref. 50 MS 118.
(b) Measuring the attachment fittings
Using the dial gauge, take the measurements at distances from the bore edges corre¬
sponding to those indicated in the figure, so that the dimensions can be compared with one
another. The measurement points are given on the dial gauge positioning tool.
This operation must take place in a sheltered area with a temperature of 1 5 to 25 °C.
(c) Position the aircraft in the same configuration as when removing a wing (see 03-1 ).
(d) Position the wing handling jig (see 03-1).
(e) Before removing the pins:

-using a depth gauge, measure the protrusion dimension of each tapered pin and com¬
pare it with that obtained upon installation and entered in the individual aircraft logbook.
(f) Remove the lower pin (see 03-1 : Removal/installation of wing):

-offer up the dial gauge positioning tool through the engine compartment without the
ring.
-install the ring so that:
-the RH mark (D) is visible when measuring the RH wing and the LH mark (G) is
visible when measuring the LH wing,
-the upper mark 2 is visible when measuring the upper bore in direction of pin 2
(lower mark 2 when measuring the lower bore in direction of pin 2), and that mark 8 is visi¬
ble when measuring the lower or upper bore in direction of pin 8.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
.?
FERRURE VOILURE
WING FITTING
PKD Comparateur équipé

(rallonge -t- pied de mesure)
ôi,ure:80'06H6/80'06 ^0,022 31519in- ++0.0008 Dial gauge assembly
Cotes théoriques Wing n nnmi (extension + measuring probe)
Theoretical dimensions 0 Cadre: 80 J6 / 80
_
, 'r":
+0,013
3.1496 in. ~ ^'zjfïzz,
+ U.UU051
Frame
ALESAGES SUPERIEURS - UPPER DIA. BORE ALESAGES INFERIEURS - LOWER DIA. BORE
COTE GAUCHE - LH COTE DROIT - RH COTE GAUCHE - LH COTE DROIT -RH
a8 a8 k8 k8 .
a2 a2 k2 - k2 MESURE DE L'OVALISATION
OUT-OF-ROUND MEASUREMENT
b8 b8 m8 m8
b2 b2 m2 m2 ,_ Couronne
c8 c8 n8 n8 Ring
Outillage de positionnement
c2 c2 n2 n2 Positioning tool
d8 d8 P8 p8
d2 d2 p2 p2
e8 e8 q8 q8
a(k) b(m) ^ e(q) h(t) j(u)
==XXz
e2 e2 q2 q2
c(n)
f8
f2
f8-
f2
r8
r2
r8
r2 V
98 98 s8 . s8.
.Cheminement du pied de mesure
92 92 s2 s2 Routing of measuring probe
h8 h8 t8 t8
h2 h2 t2 t2
J8 J8 u8 u8
J2 J2 u2 u2
OUTILLAGE DE POSITIONNEMENT DU COMPARATEUR D'ALESAGE
POSITIONING TOOL OF BORE DIAL GAUGE
FIGURE 32 - MENSURATION DES ATTACHES PRINCIPALES VOILURE/FUSELAGE
MEASUREMENT OF MAIN WING/FUSELAGE A TTACHMENT POINTS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fljV-'Mi /V\II\/-\V-7L.
^£&^
BREGUET AVIATION
^-<^ ;^*Qï>
-<f-o .
Restricted R/i a mi i a i
MANUAL no
03
-insert the dial gauge support locating pin into the hole selected for the previous
reading,
-position the ring in the notches in frame 25 by turning it until it abuts on the stop,
-using the bush, calibrate the dial gauge (set the clock to zero),
-using the dial gauge, take the dimensions in direction of pins 2 and 8 and at each point
of the dial gauge support (frame 25a: 3 points, wing fitting: 3 points, frame 25b: 3 points).
Use extensions of different lengths according to the points to be measured. Enter the dimen¬
sion values in the table of the figure,
-remove the measuring tools,
-install the pin as per instructions (see 03-1: Removal/installation of wing).
NOTE: The measurements may be performed with the wings removed, using tool 50 MS 082.
D - Harmonization check
Check harmonization of the NWS (see 10-0).
E - Check of systems and equipment
This operation is to be performed only if the load factor has exceeded 1 0 g.
(1) Equipment
-Send the engine for second line maintenance.

-For the purpose of inspection and check in workshop, remove the following items of
equipment:
-Standby horizon - Mach-airspeed indicator - Vertical speed indicator - Standby al¬
timeter
-Air data computer - Altitude indicator
-Gyro center - Spherical indicator - Emergency gyromagnetic compass - Doppler ra¬
dar - Map display unit
- Rate gyro box (flying aids) - Autopilot computer
- Radar nose cone
-Sight system - LASER range finder
-Ejection seat oxygen unit - Anti-g valve - Oxygen regulator.
(2) Systems
-Carry out the following checks:

-overall check of NWS, using SDAP (see 10-1),
-brief check of IFF system (see 14-5),
-brief check of fatigue meter (see 02-9).
-Carry out:
-integrated test of flight control electronics and AP (see 13-0),
-cheqk of indicator panel lights and individual indicator lights.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £3^T^L
BREGUET AVIATION J^P=~jg*Q>
MIRAGE
imiiviwi.
F
^C*^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
INSPECTION OF AIRCRAFT AFTER ARRESTER

BARRIER ENGAGEMENT
1 - GENERAL
Engagement with an arrester barrier generally results in stripping or distortion of the probes,
antennas and protruding elements. Damage to larger structural parts may also occur, depending on
the speed of the aircraft.
2- PROCEDURE
Make a visual inspection and note any damage to the following parts :
- pitot head boom
- pitot probes, incidence probe, impact temperature probe (see Structural Repair Manual, section 4).
In the absence of visible damage, test the system to which the part belongs.
A Fuselage structure
- Nose cone :
inspect the connections between the nose cone and the fuselage
- Cockpit area :
inspect the windshield transparency, the lateral transparencies and the canopy as well as
-
the frames, cover strips and lateral fairings,
- check that the canopy operates correctly.
- Air intake area :

inspect the boundary layer bleeds and the connections between the air duct and the fuselage
-
(dented, loose or torn parts) (see Structural Repair Manual, section 4),
- inspect the shock cones (distortion, mechanism apparently out of true) but do not test their
functioning unless both LH and RH installations are totally free of damage,
- inspect the skin panels (paint, legends, transfers).
B Wing structure
Leading edges :
-
- inspect the fillets (surface condition, attachment),
- inspect the inboard slats (scratched, dented, distorted parts),
- inspect the outboard slats and, with special care, the step in the leading edge where the two
types of slat meet,
. detained inspection, checking and testing of the slats (see 04-4).
C Undercarriage
- Inspection and checking of the nosegear (see 05-0).

- Inspection of the fairing door.
- Inspection of the sides of the nosegear bay (deformation, condition of connections, mountings).
- Inspection and checking of the main landing gear (see 05-0).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
INSPECTION OF LOCK BOLTS
1 - SCOPE
To detect then replace lock bolts whose collars are cracked or missing.
2- LOOKING FOR DEFECTIVE BOLTS
Examine the lock bolts in all the areas mentioned below, after removing as many inspection doors
as convenient for the operations.
- In nose U/C well :

- near the U/C hinge fitting,
- near the front hinge fitting of the U/C doors.
- In airbrake housings :
- on stringer 20.
- In lateral bays, between frames 21 and 22 :

-doors 21 .03 -21.09:
- on air duct ;
-doors 21.04 -21.08:
- on stringer 20/f rame 21 .
- In main U/C wells :

Collar on frame 25, around the U/C uplock box,
-
- around the engine compartment inspection door
(doors 21. 03i/24.09i).
-Through all underfuselage doors allowing check of stringer 20

(RHandLH).
- In pitch servoactuator compartment (doors 36.02/36.10) (on
frame 36).
Any lock bolt whose collar is cracked or missing must be immediately replaced by a plain counter¬
sunk screw, or by a Huck bolt if access is possible from one side only.
NOTE : If isolated bolts are found defective out of inspection, protect them with Ardrox 31.40 and
mark them with a view to their replacement during a further inspection.
3- REPLACEMENT OF BOLTS
Refer to Structural Repair manual.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^-^rVL
BREGUET AVIATION, _
MIRAGE F
ATTENUATION OF SCRATCHES
- Vacu-Blast Midjet station
- Outside and inside calipers for checking trim profile.
- Portable pneumatic tool for different cutters.
- Small cutters of various shapes for scoring the bottom scratches.
- Various large-radius cutters for final rounding-off of surface blending.
- Final polishing tools and products for repaired surfaces.
- Surface compressing device, Vacu-Blast type.
2- MATERIAL
- Abrasives of different grits for surface conditioning.

- Pure corundum abrasive, 90 MESH.
- Reactive thinner 6940 B.
- Final polishing product for repaired surfaces.
3- GENERAL
Most of the structure (skin panels- spars and frames) is made of AU4G, AU4G1, AU4SG and
A7U4SG. Basic protection of these materials is obtained by chromic anodizing (thin coat of aluminum,
approx. 0.01 mm (0.00039 in) thick, very hard, thus brittle) (BF4 process), or alodine 1200.
-Generally, ail light metals are sensitive to notching, especially AU4SG and A7U4SG alloys.
Scratches are a source for the spread of corrosion. Therefore it is important to eliminate these two
ill effects when cleaning the skin panels. These precautions must be taken either on the flight line,
or during periodic inspections according to the importance of the scratches.
4- PROCEDURE
A Various methods
- The burnisher tool is useful on surface scratches, but it is difficult to reach the bottom of deep
scratches using this procedure.
-The purpose of the Vacu-Blast process is not to remove the scratch (which should not be
removed), but to round off the edges and therefore suppress the ill effects already mentioned.
B Various types of scratches
- Remove paint from the concerned area. Use a magnifying glass if necessary.
- Triangular shape scratches are the most harmful and must be treated mandatorily using the
Vacu-Blast process, with maximum care and urgency (for AU4SG and A7U4SG alloys on the flight
line).
- Trapezoidal scratches are also harmful in as far as they have acute, «turned-in» corners and
in that case, they should be treated as mentioned above.
- Rounded-off scratches are not harmful to strength. They should be treated either on first
inspection (for AU4SG and A7U4SG alloys), or during airframe cleaning (for the other alloys).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
C Procedure
(1 ) Using burnisher tool

Deburr scratch, round off external edges and smooth the internal edge so as to suppress sharp
-
dent and obtain a rounded section.
(2) By.Vacu-Blast process

This process must not be used on clad alloys.
- Using the appropriate small cutters, scour to even off the bottom of the scratch.
- Measure the maximum depth of the scratch and the scour ; blend with the surface using large-
radius tools, as per the profile in the figure below.
Mini. R.25 20X
Original thickness
of component
With the skin profile newly reworked, proceed to perfect the surface condition, using abrasive
and final polishing products.
CAUTION
-THE FINAL SURFACE CONDITION MUST SHOW NO SCRATCHES OR PROFILE IRRE¬
GULARITES.
-MECHANICAL REPAIR OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMED SO AS TO AVOID AB¬
NORMAL OVERHEATING WHICH COULD MODIFY THE STRUCTURAL CHARAC¬
TERISTICS OF THE REPAIRED COMPONENTS.
- It is recommended that a Vacu-Blast type compressing treatment be applied to the repaired

areas.
The Vacu-Blast shall bè fitted with a special gun allowing a localized treatment to be performed
and the immediate recovery of abrasive.
Load the Vacu-Blast with corundum of 90 mesh.
The Vacu-Blast shall be preferably used on removed parts or in areas at a distance from
transparent parts and cylinders.
Hermetically protect all areas near the area to be repaired.
- Widely degrease area around the scratch. On integral tanks (wings and fuselage), do not use
trichloroethylene which may damage sealants used for sealing purpose.
- Slowly pass Vacu-Blast gun nozzle over scratch to be treated at constant speed of 1 to 2 cm/sec.
After each pass, using magnifying glass, inspect the scratch visually and stop the operation as soon
as any sharp edge or dull background has disappeared (as soon as the desired appearance is obtained on
a scratch section, avoid passing over again).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^JL
/L-^^rU MIRAGE F
(3) Final check of trim : '
When the trim has been finished, measure its final maximum depth and compare it with the table
of minor damages in the Structural Repair Manual. If the remaining thickness is insufficient, local
reinforcement of the component may be necessary.
(4) Finishing
Immediately after the operation :

-
- using dry brush, eliminate any trace of corundum.
- degrease around the area treated by Vacu-Blast, then pickle this surface using reactive
thinner (or FOSCRAL), degrease again, to allow adherence of protective product.
- apply original protective product (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F V\ Jl« / V\||\/-\V~7C_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^rv ^=?-=»^ . «/.amiiai no
^-^ ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 03
REPAIR OF HEAT INSULATION
1 - SCOPE
To allow local repair of heat insulation:

-in cockpit,
-in nose cone,
-in structure box between fuselage frames 1 and 3,
-in equipment bay,
-in tail unit servo-control structure boxes.
A - Spares
-Polyurethane foam 113/2, 10 mm and 5 mm thick, Nylar-protected (Jehier 113 compo¬
site).
-Cork agglomerate board FL 65 EP4.
3 - MATERIALS
-Abrasion prevention black rubber adhesive tape 101/250
-Adhesive Bostik 1410 SC
-Approved chlorinated solvent
- Methylethylketone
-Primer P50
-Adhesive EC 1675 B
4 - HEAT INSULATION IN COCKPIT, NOSE CONE, FUSELAGE STRUCTURE BOXES,
EQUIPMENT BAY
A - Repair of polyurethane
-Cleanly remove the old adhesive tape and the polyurethane to be repaired.
-Make clean cuts.
-Clean and carefully degrease the bared areas with methylethylketone. Allow to dry.
-Apply a coat of P50 primer on the sheet metal.
B - Installation of polyurethane
-Cut out and adjust the polyurethane sheet to be installed. If necessary, drill the holes for
pipes or attaching parts.
-Smear the faying surface and the sheet metal with Bostik 1410 SC adhesive.
-When the adhesive has become tacky, bond the polyurethane without crushing it.
C - Finishing
-On all polyurethane cuts and junctions, apply a strip of black adhesive tape 101/250.
-While applying the adhesive tape, take care that the polyurethane is not compressed or
flattened. On the one hand, this would reduce heat insulation efficiency due to reduced thick¬
ness ; on the other, it would impair proper bonding of the adhesive tape by including strains.
5 - HEAT INSULATION IN TAIL UNIT SERVO-CONTROL STRUCTURE BOX

-Carefully remove the cork board to be renewed.
-Carefully clean and degrease the surface of the bared sheet metal and corresponding
cork board ; use methylethylketone to dissolve the old adhesive.
-Before the solvent is evaporated, wipe with a clean cloth.
B - Installation of cork board
-Using a spatula, coat the cork board and the sheet metal with adhesive.
-Allow the adhesive to dry until it is no longer tacky.
-Position the cork board and press it against the sheet metal.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti -J^-^r-TJ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^,^. ^^ . . » v a i no
BONDING THE TEFLON
1 - SCOPE
To describe the bonding method to be applied when replacing teflon components.
2- MATERIALS
- Methylethylketone (M.E.K.)
- Reagent thinner P50 (6940B CELOMER)
- Acetone
-Cleaner ARDROX 2526
- Sealant EC 1675 B/A, class B
- Abrasive paper No. 120.
3- SURFACE PREPARATION
A Preparing the structure area to be covered with teflon
Using plastic or wooden spatulas, scrape away the residual teflon and EC 1675 B/A sealant.
-
Remove any trace of EC 1675 B/A' sealant by cleaning with ARDROX 2526 ; complete cleaning
-
with white cotton rags soaked with MEK.
- Polish the surface with abrasive paper No. 120.
- Carefully degrease with white cotton cloths dipped in MEK ; change the cloths until the last one
emerges completely white.
- Reactivate the surface with reagent thinner P50 (see Structural Repair manual, section 1-3).
B Preparing the teflon
- Degrease the face to be. bonded (the brown one) with acetone, using a very clean and white fine
cotton cloth. Repeat the operation until the cloth emerges completely white.
-Check the wettability of the treated face by spilling distilled water over it ; the water should
spread evenly over the whole surface.
- Wipe dry, then degrease again as instructed above.
4- BONDING
- Over the two faces to be bonded, spread a thin and even coat of sealant EC 1675 B/A, class B.
- Fit the spare teflon component exactly in place of the initial one, applying it manually, without
stress or crease.
- Clamp the bonded parts with a screw clamp, the bearing surfaces of which have been covered
with metal plates ; the latter should be isolated from the teflon through a paper or cellophane sheet.
- Curing time : 72 hours at 25°C and 70 % humidity.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION Û-~ ^?^^ aa a mii ai no
^-v-, ^-> Restricted MANUAL 03
REPLACEMENT OF A TEFLON-LINED BALL JOINT

ASSEMBLED BY CIRCULAR GROOVb SWAGING
1 - SCOPE
To give the method for replacing a teflon-lined ball joint.
2 - GENERAL
As the operation is not carried out in normal conditions, the following remarks and re¬
strictions should be taken into consideration:
-the replacement is TOLERATED only if a fork end or any other device prevents the ball
joint from being lost during operation;
-as de-swaging may damage the bore, the swaged ball joint replacement SHOULD RE¬
MAIN EXCEPTIONAL and strictly supervised;
-the ball joint replacement affects the AIRCRAFT components only; it does not apply to
the items of equipment which can be fitted with similar components;
-the diameter limitation of a ball joint which can be changed (specially for replacement
on aircraft) is determined by the swaging tool capacity (overall dimension);
-any ball joint replacement should be recorded in the aircraft documentation.
NOTE: When replacing a ball joint, make sure that no relevant derogation exists in the aircraft
documentation.
The ball joint is replaced:
-on aircraft if the support part cannot be removed and if access is possible,
-in workshop if the support part is interchangeable or can be removed, and if additional
means available in factory are required.
CAUTION:
B~EFORE PERFORMING THE OPERATIONS BELOW, SEE PARA. 8 "SPECIAL CASES".
A - Tools
-Tool set 50MS061 for ball joint replacement and swaging, including :
-6 mm capacity pneumatic angle drill,

-swaging spotfacing tool,
-extracting tool,
-fitting tool,
-swaging tool,
-protective thimble.
-Graduated magnifying glass
-Hydraulic pump BEH4A.
4 - MATERIALS
-Machine cutting oil Mobil - Vactra No. 2
-Mastinox 6856H,
-Blindexite,
-Tallow,
-White spirit.
AB
11 - 88 Restricted 0 - 807
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £_ ->-> "M MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION .<<^"-
5- REMOVAL OF BEARING
A De-swaging
WHERE A BEARING IS FITTED WITH A SELF-LUBRICATING COATING WITHIN THE

BORE. IT IS NECESSARY TO REMOVE IT COMPLETELY DURING THE FIRST OPERATION IN
ORDER TO OBTAIN A CORRECT SURFACE CONTACT ON THE BORE OF THE BEARING.
Use the tools suitable for the particular diameter of the bearing bore.
-
Set up the spot facing equipment.
-
- Insert chuck 1 into the bearing bore, from the side of the lip to be worked.
- Fit the chuck with the support ring 2, which ensures that the bore axis is perpendicular to
the bearing cage faces, and lock assembly with nut 3.
- Fit pneumatic drill with spot facer 4.
- Spot face swaging.
- Center the spot facing bit on the trunnion of chuck 1 .
- Carry out operation in small stages, check progress frequently and lubricate tooling (cutting
oil).
THE SPOT FACING SHOULD COMPLETELY REMOVE THE BEARING GROOVE.
When spot facing is finished, remove tooling.
Drill chuck
Safety
margin
De-swaging
AA
BREGUET AVIATION îi
MIRAGE F
B Extraction
- Use the tool suitable for the particular diameter of the ball joint bore.
- Position centering chuck 1 in the ball joint bore so that the ring section of its head bears against
the spotfacing machined previously.
- Install thrust bushing 2 (guide screw 3), washer 4, and nut 5, on chuck 1 .
- Extract the ball joint using nut 5 and holding pin 1 in position.
- Remove the ball joint from the tool and discard it.
Safety margin
Extraction
6- CHECKING SUPPORT BORE
A - Visual check of bore
- Clean the bore carefully.

- Check that the two chamfers are intact, especially at the bore corners, which should show no sign
of yielding or dents.
- Check the surface, which should be completely uniform and with no distortion making the bore
out of tolerance : cracks, scratches, corrosion and tool marks. Scratches may be smoothed out or
removed within the tolerances.
AA
01-77 0-809
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAULT " ^ -" -* #V\||\/AVJ7L. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-î^ ^s-^> . ..,..., A«
^»v ^?-^> Restricted MANUAL 03
B - Dimensional check
-Using a bore checking tool, check that the bore diameter does not exceed the nominal
diameter by more than 0.005 mm. Ovalization is acceptable on condition that it does not ex¬
ceed 0.025 mm.
If one of the checks reveals an unacceptable fault, the support shall be completely re¬
placed.
7 - INSTALLATION OF BALL JOINT
-Record the width of the circular swaging grooves (dimensions Lo, see page 813).
-To facilitate fitting of the ball joint, slightly break the external edge of the outer ring on
the side to be inserted into the support.
-Lightly coat the bore with Mastinox.
B - Force fitting
-SYSTEMATICALLY FIT GUIDE CHUCK 1 WITH A PROTECTIVE THIMBLE FOR EACH

INSERTION OR EXTRACTION OF THE CHUCK IN THE BALL JOINT BORE (SPECIALLY IF
THE BALL JOINT IS COATED WITH AIRFLON).
-Assembly is always carried out with a "slightly tight fit".
- Fit chuck 1 with centering ring 2, then insert the assembly into the bore of the support,
on the side opposite to the reference face, until the centering is in place.
-CAREFULLY fit the ball joint on the chuck and position it correctly opposite the support
bore (place the outer ring with the broken edge on the support side and set all parts perfectly
in line).
-Remove the protective thimble and install thrust ring 3, washer 4 and nut 5.
-Force fit the ball joint by tightening nut 5 until the ball joint comes into contact with
centering ring 2.
-Remove the tooling - Remove centering ring 2 then fit the tooling again as before but
without the centering ring. Ensure that the protective thimble is fitted for the removal- installa¬
tion operations.
-Complete force fitting - Thrust ring 3 should be in contact with the support reference
face.
-Remove the tooling.
-Eliminate any Mastinox in excess.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Beginning of 1st phase Beginning of 2P^ phase
Force fitting
C Force fit check
- Check that there is no play between the support bore and the ball joint. The ball joint should
hold in its housing and it should not be possible to expel it by pressing with both thumbs.
- Check that the ball joint swivels without any tight spot or overdue stress. If required, shift the
ball joint until an adequate swiveling torque is obtained.
D Swaging
- During this operation, the Airflon coating shall be protected to prevent contact with the grease
used to facilitate swa"ging.
- Thoroughly clean the support chamfer and apply a bead of Blindexite before swaging.
- Insert pilot pin 1 mounted on punch 2 in the ball joint bore, taking care to avoid damaging the
bore.
- Lightly grease the working surfaces of swaging punches 2 and 5.
- Engage squeeze tool 3 on pilot pin 1 .
- Fit the swaging C spacer to the pilot pin (corresponding diameters).
- Squeeze the ball joint :
- swage the ball joint with the swaging device, applying the forces or pressures indicated in the
following table.
Remove C spacer 4, and squeeze tool 3.
-
Engage punch 5 on pilot pin 1 .
-
- Fit C spacer 4 to the swaging device.
- Perform the swaging operation three times, pivoting the punches by about 120° between each
tightening, so as to obtain a uniform swaging groove.
AA
01-81 0-811
BREGUET AVIATION
RE6R RL8R RL10R RE-RL12R

Ball joint RL17R
RE6AR RL8AR RL10AR RE12AR
Swaging force in daN 4500 5000 6500 9500 12,000
Tons 4.513 5.015 6.519 9.528 12.036
US tons 5.058 5.620 7.306 10.678 13.488
Pressure to be selec¬ 105 115 150 220 275

ted in bar ( , c)
T o
in psi (+ ?2) 1522 1667 2175 3190 . 3988
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
8- SPECIAL CASES
| (1) Bail joints of repair size, nominal diameter + 0.2 mm ( 0.008 in) exclusively (see aircraft
logbook).
- De-swaging : normal procedure

- Swaging : swaging pressure increased by 5 bar (73 psi).
(2) Ball joint support thicker than the ball joint itself
In some aircraft, the hinge fittings of the main U/C upper doors have a thickness of 9 mm
(0.354 in) instead of 8 mm (0.31 5 in) (figure 8 - 03-2).
On such fittings, ball joints RL8R are installed as follows :
(a) To locate the ball joint in the fitting on the second step of installation, use thrust bushing 3 (for
dia. 8 and 9 mm ball joints) ; this bushing includes a shoulder (th. : 0.5 mm - 0.020 in).
(b) Swaging should be mandatorily performed with the shouldered positioning tool (3a).
n \nnm
iw w^
^3 bis
^
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- When swaging is finished, remove the tools.
E Checking after swaging
- Make sure :
that the ball joint is held firmly and swivels correctly,
-
- that the lips are swaged evenly all round and that they are not cracked.
- Record dimensions L (width of ball-joint grooves after swaging).
For each groove, perform the measurement at a minimum three points using a graduated magni¬
fying glass.
- Check the lip flares as per the following table.
- Finish off protection, if required.
Ball joint Flare in mm
From RE RtoRL 10R L - Lo = 0.30 ± 0.1
From RE 12RtoRL17R L-Lo = 0.45 ±0.1
Groove before swaging
Lip flare after swaging
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" ^ / Y\II\/-\VJ',L. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^,
^v, ,5^)
^^^-^ Restricted haamiiai
MANUAL no
03
SECTION 1
WINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1-0 GENERAL
-Wing group breakdown 1 -001

-Main structure box 1 -101
-Fittings 1-106
- Droop slat 1-113
-Slotted slat. 1-115
-Inboard and outboard wing flaps 1-117
-Aileron . 1-122
-Inboard and outboard spoilers 1-125
1-3 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION
-Removal of wings... 1 -301
-Installation of wings 1 -308
- Removal-installation of an aileron 1 -31 3
- Removal-installation of a droop slat 1 -31 5
-Removal-installation of a slotted slat 1 -317
-Removal-installation of inboard and outboard wing flaps 1-319
-Removal-installation of spoilers 1 -323
1-5 INSPECTION - CHECK - ADJUSTMENT

-Method for presetting and installing taper pins of control surfaces
(ailerons and rudder) 1 -501
-Check of hinges on a removed aileron 1 -505
-Check of hinges on a removed droop slat 1 -507
-Check of hinges on a removed slotted slat 1 -509
-Inspection of hinges and lower and upper surface skins on a removed
spoiler 1 -511
-Check of hinges on a removed flap 1 -51 3
-Check of compound aileron hinge bracket fittings 1 -51 5
-Inspection of inboard and outboard wing flaps' 1-517
-Inspection of wing main attachment fitting 1-521
-Inspection of roll servo-control access door attaching screws 1-571
-Inspection (NDI) of point 1 (pressurization self-sealing valve) and
point 5 (electrical connector of outboard station) on wing lower
surface panel 1 -575
-Inspection and maintenance of sleeves on underwing store attachment
fittings (stations 1 and 2) 1 -601
-Inspection and protection of wing main attachment fitting 1 -605
1-8 REPAIR
-Refilling the upper surface recess of the flap outboard track with Klegecel ... 1 -801
-Replacement of screws attaching slotted slats to tracks 1, 2, 3 and 4
(lower surface) 1 -803
-Replacement of brush holders between inboard flaps and rear fillets 1 -820
AA
1 1 - 88 Restricted 1-1
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," V\ Jl CK / Y\l l\/-\V_7L F
BREGUET AVIATIONîL
^ ^p~^^
^^> Restricted haamiiai
MANUAL no03
Figure No. Page
1 MAIN STRUCTURE BOX 1-104

2 MAIN STRUCTURE BOX (details) 1-105
3 WING ATTACHMENT FITTINGS 1 -107
4 EXTERNAL STORE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS 1-109

5 HOISTING FITTINGS AND TEMPLATE INSTALLATION 1-110
6 WING-TO-FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT 1-112
7 DROOP LEADING EDGE SLAT - ATTACHMENTS 1-114
8 SLOTTED LEADING EDGE SLAT - ATTACHMENTS 1-116
9 INBOARD AND OUTBOARD WING FLAPS 1-118
10 WING FLAPS -ATTACHMENTS 1-121
11 AILERONS - ATTACHMENTS 1-124
12 INBOARD AND OUTBOARD SPOILERS -ATTACHMENTS 1-126
1 2M REMOVAL OF WINGS - MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS 1 -303M
1 3 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF WINGS - HANDLING 1 -306
14 REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF WINGS - FUNCTIONAL CONNECTIONS 1-307

15 INSTALLATION OF WINGS - MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS 1-310M
16 REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF A SLOTTED SLAT 1-318M
17 CHECK OF COMPOUND AILERON BEARING FITTINGS 1-516
18 INSPECTION OF INBOARD AND OUTBOARD WING FLAPS 1 -518
19 INSPECTION OF WING MAIN ATTACHMENT FITTING 1-608

20 LOCATION OF POINTS TO BE INSPECTED ON THE WING LOWER
SURFACE SKIN 1 -579
21 CHECK PRINCIPLE FOR EACH POINT 1 -580
AA
10 - 87 Restricted 1-2
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^-^TU.
BREGUET AVIATION _
MIRAGE F
WING GROUP BREAKDOWN

(Figure 1)
Wing group is constituted by two wings (L/H and R/H) attached to the upper fuselage section by
three fittings.
- main fitting 1 embedded between frames 25a and 25b
- front attachment fitting 2 at frame 22
- rear attachment fitting 3 at frame 28.
Each wing is constituted by a structure box 4 mainly forming integral tank.
Each wing is provided with three external store attachment points

- inner point (P1)
- intermediate point (P2)
- tip section (rib N5).
Breakdown of one wing
Each wing is constituted by :

- one main structure box and moving components
- one inboard (droop) leading edge slat 5
- one outboard (slotted) leading edge slat 6
- one inboard wing flap 7
- one outboard wing flap 8
- one aileron 9
- one inboard spoiler 10
- one outboard spoiler 1 1 .
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^
ZL-îrU MIRAGE F
MAIN STRUCTURE BOX

(Figures 1-2-3)
THE MAIN STRUCTURE BOX IS CONSTITUTED BY :
- one central multi-spar box 12 located between front spar LgAV and rear spar LgAR, rib NOC and
rib N4,
-one flap top box 13, constituting the internal 2/3 of trailing edge span between rear spar LgAR
and flap deflecting false spar 14,
-one aileron deflecting box 15 constituting the external 1/3 of trailing edge between rear spar
LgAR and aileron deflecting false spar 16,
- one assembly 17 of two braced ribs N4 - N5 located at the end of the box. Rib N5 has no tip
fairing. It is fitted with the external store attachment points.
- one fixed slat 18 constituting the external 3/4 of leading edge span, attached to the front spar
Lg AV.
- one droop slat drip-flap 19, attached to front spar LgAV towards wing root.
1 - CENTRAL MULTI-SPAR BOX 12
It is constituted
by :
- one front spar LgAV and one rear spar LgAR, of light alloy machined in the solid, between wing
root rib NOC and rib N4. Rear spar LgAR is provided with a boss fitted with ball-joint of point P2,
- one wing root rib NOC in two parts (fig. 3) :
- one front section, of light alloy and machined with the wing front attachment yoke 2
bolted to it and fitted with its ball joint 20,
- one rear section, of steel and machined with the wing rear attachment yoke 3 integral
with it and fitted with ball joint 27 and provided with flap actuator attachment fitting 4,

one wing root rib NOC. of high tensile steel (MAR-AGING) and in two parts (Fig. 3),
-one front section, machined with the wing front attachment yoke fitted with ball
joint 20,
- one rear section, machined with the wing rear attachment yoke fitted with its ball joint 27
and provided with flap actuator fixed point attachment fitting.
- one main wing attachment fitting 1, of high tensile steel (MAR-AGING),
- four main ribs N1 to N4 "I , . . . .. .. ,,
j- * -u moa r
- one intermediate rib N2A J
of machined hght3
alloy
limiting the sealed integral fuel tank,
-one lower surface skin 22, of machined light alloy, split with 10mm (0.39 in) thick (max.)
sections at root (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL).
-one upper surface skin 23, of same type, 13 mm thick max. (0.408 in) at wing root (see
STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL). This skin is cut out for housing spoilers 10-11 and is extended
into the droop slat area by a drip-flap.
- two crossed ribs
- rib N4 integral with aileron external attachment fitting and
- rib N5, of light alloy.
-two fittings 24-25, of titanium alloy, for hooking under-wing external stores (housed in the box
between false spars Lg1 and Lg2).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /U^^T^L lYlIlxMwL V
BREGUET AV.AT.ON^^^^> Restricted MAN UAL 03
2- FLAP TOP STRUCTURE BOX 13
Located between rear spar LgAR and flap deflecting false spar 14, it is constituted by :
- one internal rail 26, continuation of rib NOC 1 macninec| gtee\
- one external rail 27, level with rib N3 _f
- one central rail 28, level with rib N2 of machined high tensile steel (MAR-AGING)
-six ribs NOT to N5T 1 of machined ,ight a,,oy
- one false rib 29 j » »
- one deflecting false spar 1 4, of folded sheet

- one rear structure box coupled to deflecting spar, constituted by :
- one machined part 30, from rib NOC to external rail 27
- one internal sheet 31 and one nylatron ledge 32, in two sections, stopped on either side of the
central rail 28
- Flap top structure box is closed by central box skins 22 and 23 and, locally, in the spoiler area,
by flap top upper skin 33.
3- AILERON DEFLECTING STRUCTURE BOX 15
Located between external rail 27 and rib N4, it is constituted by :

- one aileron internal bearing 34 of machined light alloy
- three ribs N3B, N3C, N3D, of folded sheet
- one aileron deflecting false spar 16.
It is closed at the upper and lower surfaces by central box skins 22 and 23 (section A).
4- WING TIP 17
It is constituted by central box rib N4, and rib N5. It is limited by fixed slat rib N15E, wing
leading edge and rear attachment fitting 35.
This wing section includes :

- one rear attachment fitting 35, of machined steel
- one front attachment fitting 36, of machined steel
These two fittings are attached to rib N4
- two stiffeners R1 - R2; of light alloy
-one false rib N16F.
These components are attached to the central box lower and upper surface skins 22 and 23.
Wing tip N5 is complete with guard 43, fixed with 8 screws and having a lighfalloy shim at front,
neoprene washers, and two adhesive rilsan plugs attached next to the rear connector and fitting.
5- FIXED SLAT 18 (WING LEADING EDGE)
Attached to front spar Lg in the slotted slat area, it is constituted by :

- Eight ribs (4 internal and 4 external) "1
at location of slat rails R1 - R2 - R3 - R4 L machined light alloy
-Three ribs N8E-N13E-N15E J
- Twelve ribs, of light alloy folded sheet, N1 E to N7E - N9E to N12E and N14E
- One light alloy rolled sheet skin 37, cut out at location of passage of the four rails and the two
drive points.
Fixed slat upper surface section in contact with the slotted slat includes a strip of self-lubricant
paint on the whole length of the slat.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^c_
//^^"r-U
_
MIRAGE F
The fixed slat includes a blanking system at location of drive points AT1 - AT2. This system is
constituted as follows :
- one unit 38 screwed on the screw jack body
- one sliding door 39 hinged on a knuckle holder 40 clamped on drive rod.
Drive point AT1 is provided with an additional blanking device 41 screwed in the lower surface of
the knuckle holder.
Fixed slat upper surface internal face, at location of drive points AT1 - AT2, is covered by
self-lubricant paint on the sliding surface of sliding doors.
6- DROOP SLAT DRIP-FLAP 19
It is located in the droop slat area 5 from the wing root rib.
The drip-flap is constituted by six machined light alloy elements : 5 of these elements are
removable. It is attached, on the one hand, to the upper surface skin 23 and, on the other hand, to
brackets 42 attached on the front spar Lg web by screws and rivets (section A).
It is coated with self-lubricant paint on the whole length of drip-flap.
- Removable elements :
VO-20 - VO-22 - VO-24 - VO-26 - VO-28
- Element VO-22 is provided with a door VO-22-1 aligned with adjustment template
installation fitting.
- Element VO-26 is provided with a door VO-26-1 aligned with the hoisting fitting.
- Elements VO-24 and VO-28 are provided respectively with doors VO-24-1 and VO-28-1
aligned with droop slat drive points 1 and 2.
AA
12-74 Restricted 1"103
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION A
N.5 N.4
MODIFICATION N° 551 NON APPLIQUEE
MODIFICATION N" 551 NOT INCORPORATED
FIGURE 1 - CAISSON PRINCIPAL
MAIN STRUCTURE BOX
AB
05-78 Restricted 1-104 FIGURE I 1-1
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
N.7E
SECTION B
Lg.AV
Lg.AR
SECTION C
N.3B
R3E R.3 R.3I
SECTION D
COUPE F
CROSS SECTION F
Lg.AV
Rear spar FIGURE 2 - CAISSON PRINCIPAL - Détails
MAIN STRUCTURE BOX - Details
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
FITTINGS
The main fittings include :

- main wing attachment fitting
- external store attachment fittings
- control surface connection fittings
- main structural stout elements constituting supports or attachment points.
1 - MAIN WING ATTACHMENT FITTING (Fig. 3)

The fitting is embedded in the dual frame 25a - 25b. It is constituted by several welded
components. It is bolted through lower surface skin 22 and upper surface skin 23, through front and
rear NOC rib flanges and false spars Lg2 and Lg3.
It is fitted with two crankpins equipped with force fit steel bushes 45.
It is integral with the structure by titanium and steel bolts.
2- FLAP HINGE FITTINGS (Fig. 1)
They include three rails : internal 26, external 27, central 28.
- Internal rail 26 extends rib NOC and closes flap top structure box. Its external surface is used as
inboard flap track.
- Central rail 28 extends rib N2 and, on either side of its central web, forms inboard and outboard
flap tracks.
- External rail 27 extends rib N3 and its internal surface is used as outboard flap track.
3- AILERON HINGE FITTINGS (Fig. 1)
They include :
-one fork fitting 34 extending rib N3A (aileron internal attachment fitting) fitted with two steel
bushes.
- one external attachment fitting 46 integral with rib N4.
4- FIXED SLAT RIB (Fig. 1)

- There are eight ribs, R1 - R2 - R3 - R4, internal and external, fitted with front rollers 47 and rear
rollers 48. They are used as slotted slat rail track.
5- POINT 1 ATTACHMENT FITTINGS (Fig. 4)

They include :
-external store attachment points fitted with :
- at front point : fitting sleeve 49 attached to fitting 24 by nut 50 and washer 51 ; nut is locked
by tab-washer 52 attached by three screws 53. One seal 92 for the door, and its thrust washer 91 are
inserted between nut and tab washer.
- at rear point : ball-joint 54 installed through shouldered bush 55 on structure attached by
nut 56 safetied by lockwire 57. Shim 58 is inserted on assembly.
Blanking device of point 1 attachment fitting is constituted by lower and upper surface doors
assembled by special Philips head captive screw integral with upper surface door.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION .^-^So

MIRAGE r
Restricted MANUAL03
COUPE A
CROSS SECTION A
COUPE B CROSS SECTION B
MODIFICATION N° 551
NON APPLIQUEE
FIGURE 3 - FERRURES D'ATTACHE VOILURE MODI FICA TION N°551
WING ATTACHMENT FITTINGS NO T INCORPORA TED
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ " « IVIIIXAA L»
BREGUET AVIATION ô-> ^s*^ .,..,., n«
.^ ^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
6 - POINT 2 ATTACHMENT FITTINGS (Fig. 4)

They include:
-external store attachment point fitted with:
-at front point: fitting sleeve 59 attached by nut 60 and washer 61 on fitting 25. Nut
is locked by tab-washer 62 attached by four screws 53. Door seal 94 and its thrust washer 93
are inserted between nut and tab-washer,
-at rear point: ball-joint 63 installed on the structure through shouldered bush 64,
attached by nut 65 and lockwire 66. Shim 67 is inserted on assembly. If there is no store car¬
rying at rear point 2, a blanking device 44 is fitted in location of ball-joint 63.
Point 2 attachment fitting blanking device is constituted by lower and upper surface
doors, assembled by special Philips head captive screw integral with upper surface door.
7 - WING TIP ATTACHMENT FITTINGS (Fig. 4)

They include:
-one front fitting 36 attached to false spar Lg1 extension, fitted with self- locking anchor
nuts 68 (section C),
-one threaded bush 69 held by:
-one base plate 70 attached on front fitting by screws (section C),
-one rear fitting 35 in prolongation of aileron deflecting spar fitted with:
-one shouldered bush 71 held by a rod 72 peened on assembly "1 /sectJon D\
-one base plate 73 attached to rear fitting by helicoil 74. J *
8 - HOISTING FITTINGS (Fig. 5)
The three hoisting points are located:

-two on front face of spar LgAV. They are also used:
-the first one 75, to hold the droop leading edge slat adjustment template,
-the second one 76, to hold the slotted leading edge slat adjustment template.
They are constituted by one fitting 77 attached to front spar LgAV by
screws fitted with steel bush 78, washer 79 located by spigot 80 (cross-section A),
-the third one 81, on front face of spar LgAR. It is constituted by one steel bush 82,
washer 83 and nut 84 (cross-section D).
9 - TEMPLATE INSTALLATION FITTINGS (Fig. 5)
Four fittings, enable installation of adjustment templates

-86 for droop leading edge slat (cross-section A),
-87 - 88 for slotted leading edge slat (cross-section A),
-90 for aileron (cross-section B).
They are fitted with one steel bush 78, blanked with one washer 79 positioned by spigot
80.
An attachment point 89 on anchoring pin 95 of the spoiler servo-control (cross-section

C) enables installation of the spoiler adjustment template.
Points 75, 76, 86, 87 and 88 (cross-section A) are each covered by a door 91 secured
with four screws.
-Point 81 (cross-section D) is blanked off by a screwed plug 85 safetied with Wedglok.
-Point 89 (cross-section C) is blanked off by a screwed plug 94 safetied with Wedglok.
-Point 90 (cross-section B) is blanked off by a Rilsan plug 92 fitted and bonded with
Loctite 672.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ê*3 SECTION A
MANUAL 03
EXTREMITE D'AILE
FIGURE 4 - FERRURES D'ATTACHE CHARGES EXTERNES WING TIP
EXTERNA L STORE A TTA CHMENT Fl TTINGS
AD FIGURE 4 1-K
Restricted 1-109
03-87
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE A
SECTION A
LONGERON AV.
FRONT SPAR
ÉffraSr
COUPE B
SECTION B COUPE C COUPE D
SECT/ON C SECTION D
Hl
m^mi0.m?=^mmmm.
LONGERON AR.
REAR SPAR
FIGURE 5 - FERRURES DE HISSAGE ET MISE EN PLACE DES GABARITS

HOIST FITTINGS AND INSTALLATION OF TEMPLATES
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^rTU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^F^L^^^ . . A kii i a i no
10 -WING-TO-FUSELAGE JUNCTION (Fig. 6)
Wing assembly is made at three points on frames : 22 - 25 and 28.
A Attachment to frame 25
It is the main assembly.

Two taper pins 99 and split sleeves 92, lockwashers 93, castellated nut 94 and safety pins 95 assemble
crankpins 1 in the recess between frames 25a - 25b on the wing side. Pin and sleeve assembly is engaged
from rear to front section and penetrates into R/H and L/H feeder tank front section.
Plug 96 ensures sealing to fuel.
B - Attachment to frames 22 and 28
Yokes 2 and 3 held by wings engage into bushed fork-fitting attached to frames 22 and 28.
Assembly is made by pins 97 and 98 locked with safety pins.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION A
SECTION B
SECTION D
J^!
94 95
C25a. I C.25b
FIGURE 6 - LIAISON VOILURE - FUSELAGE
AB WING TO FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L==^-"rU.
BREGUET AVIATION _ _
MIRAGE F
DROOP SLAT
(Rgure 7)
1 - DESCRIPTION
It is located at the wing leading edge between root rib NOC and fixed slat rib N1 E.
This structure box assembly includes :

-two light alloy machined drive fittings 1 (made of titanium prior to modification 634),
constituting ribs N4 I - N9 I, fitted with fork fittings 2 of drive points AT1 and AT2 (and with slat
hinge knuckles prior to modification 634),
- one spar, constituted by sheet 3 and angle 4,
- ribs N1 I to N3 I for internal component,
N5 I to N8 I for center component,
N10 I to N14 I for external component,
- six half-hinges 5, of machined light alloy (4 half-hinges prior to modification 634),
- one internal skin 6 1 { STRUCTURAL REPAI R MANUAL)
- one external skin 7 J
A self-lubricating paint strip 8 is fitted to the slat trailing edge lower surface mating the fixed edge
strip on front wing spar, over the whole length of the slat (detail D).
Various components of structure box are assembled by rivets and screws.
2- ATTACHMENT
Droop slat attachment to wing is made at :

- hinges,
- slat control drives AT1 and AT2.
A Hinge
Attachment is made by a two-part stainless steel hinge pin. On wing side, the two half-hinges are
riveted to the wing lower surface skin. One screwed retainer 9 prevents pins from coming out (section C).
B Drive points (section A)
At each drive point AT1 - AT2, ball-jointed yoke 10 of the link rod engages in drive fork fitting 2
integral with droop slat.
Assembly by pin 1 1, teflon washer 12 and self-locking nut.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT)
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION .^t^0
COUPE B
SECTION B
COUPE A
SECTION A
Extrados Intrados
Upper surface Lower surface
Bec
Siat
Avion
Aircraft
COUPE C
SECTION C
VUE SUIVANTE
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW E
1_ 3_ 4, 1
DETAIL D
.5 Modification 634 appliquée 5J

Modification 634 incorporated
DETAIL F
N.13I N.12I N.10I N.9I N.8I N.7I N.6I N.5I N.4I N.3I IM.2I
Arrêt d'axes
lij
Hl
il'
____li___4!l|-JJi_-LJL_tJ_.__i[_.-!l_-.y $
zizzz^zzz^zzi±zzzzhzz^zzzzzzrzt^z~~
y
AT 2 ^J AT 1
FIGURE 7 - BEC D'ATTAQUE BASCULANT - Liaisons

INBOARD (DROOP) LEADING EDGE SLAT - Attachments
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
L>tTU
_
MIRAGE F
SLOTTED SLAT
(figure 8)
1 - DESCRIPTION
It is located between the droop slat and the wing tip.
A This structure box includes :

- one machined light alloy hat section 1 , over the whole length of the slat
-one machined rolled skin in two sections (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL)
- one light alloy internal section 2
- one titanium external section 3
- one light alloy curved sheet in two parts : internal 4 - external 5
- two doublers : 6 at the junction of both skin panels, and 7 at that of both curved sheets
- one internal rib 8
- one light alloy end wedge 9 and one Klegecel wedge 10 closing the structure box
- five trailing edge wedges 1 1 inserted between the skin and curved sheet, from internal rib to track R3.
Drive point AT2 is reinforced by two cups 12 and two~T_shaped angle sections 13.
Drive points AT1 and tracks R1 - R2 are each reinforced by two~l_ shaped angle sections 13.
B The slat lower surface is fitted with :

- two attachments 14, riveted at drive points AT1 and AT2
- four screwed tracks, R1 to R4, are fitted on either side with fixed slat rear and front rollers 15
- one blanking plate 16, held by screws at drive point AT2.
Track R2 is laterally guided by two rollers 21.

The trailing edge is covered by a light alloy bead made up of five elements 17, coated with low-
friction paint.
2- ATTACHMENTS
The slotted slat is attached to the wings :
- at drive points AT1 and AT2

-at tracks R1 to R4.
A - Drive points AT1 and AT2
At each drive point, ball-jointed yoke 18 of the rod engages in bushed fork fitting 14. Assembly
is made with pin 19, teflon washer 20 and self-locking nut.
B - Tracks R1 to R4
Rollers 15 integral with fixed section of slotted slat are engaged in either side of the tracks which
are integral with the droop slat.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
3 , SECTION A SECTION B
(Nervure porte galets).

FIGURE 8 - BEC D'ATTAQUE A FENTE - Liaisons (Roller holder rib)
OUTBOA RD (Slotted) SLA T - Attachments
AB
02-81
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT P^>^T^1
BREGUET AVIATION ^__^ . _
MIRAGE
.,..,.. A .
F
INBOARD AND OUTBOARD WING FLAPS
1- DESCRIPTION (Fig. 9)
Wing flaps are constituted by one inboard flap 1 and one outboard flap 2. They form the wing
trailing edge from root to aileron.
Each flap is fitted with two skid holder fittings 3 - 4 which slide in the flap top rails. One brush 5
on inboard flap internal rib ensures sealing to air flow (section B).
Their structure manufacture is identical. Each flap is constituted by a main structure box 6, one
leading edge section 7 offset from main box and forming slot and by one trailing edge structure box 8
(Section A).
A Main structure box
Each box is constituted by :

three light alloy false spars Lg1 - Lg2 - Lg3
-
one central rib NC in three components. The
- front component is machined and provided with a
web for leading edge section 7 attachment
- one internal skid holder fitting 3
- one external skid holder fitting 4.
On inboard flap, external skid holder fitting is provided with a web fitted with fork fitting in
which the flap locking rod is engaged (cross-section G).
-two machined light alloy skins: lower surface 10, upper surface 11 (see STRUCTURAL
REPAIR MANUAL).
Rolled lower surface skin constitutes main structure box leading edge. The whole length of the
flaps is coated with a strip of self-lubricant paint, on the area mating flap top trailing edge.
B Flap leading edge section
It is constituted by two components and forms leading edge of each flap. Each component is taken
from an extrusion, riveted to three machined supports : one internal support 12, one central
support 13, one external support 14, screwed to skid holder fittings 3 and 4 and to central rib NC.
C Flap trailing edge
Each flap trailing edge forms a structure box riveted to false spar Lg3.
It is constituted by :
folded sheet false ribs extended by a corrugated section 15
-
- for inboard flap : nine false ribs N1 VI to N9VI
- for outboard flap : six false ribs N1 VE-to N6VE
-one internal rib 16
- external false rib 17
-one light alloy skin on lower surface 18 and upper surface 19 (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR
MANUAL).
Sealing of trailing edges is dealt with in section 0.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
FIGURE 9 - VOLETS DE COURBURE INTERNE ET EXTERNE

AB INBOA RD AND OUTBOA RD WING FLAPS
BREGUET AVI ATlON^co. ^^^ -> .iAMMAt Ol
^^ ^^_ Restricted MANUAL 03
D Attachments
The various flap structural components are attached by screws and rivets.
E Skid holder fittings 3 and 4
This titanium fitting is provided with :

- one inserted and bolted ball-joint 20, fitted with front skid 21-22
- a roller support 43 (on fitting 4 on inboard flap and 3 and 4 on outboard)
- a secondary skid holder 23 (on fitting 3 on inboard flap)
Front brass skids slide in flap top rails.
F Front skids
(1) Front skid 21

On internal Rl and external RE rails of flap top, they are constituted by two half -skids.
These two half -skids, upper 37 and lower 38 (section D), screwed together form :
- housing of ball-joint 20, integral with the fitting,
- one fork fitting for control linkage attachment.
(2) Front skid 22

On central rail RC of flap top, each is constituted by two-half skids, upper 39 and lower 40
(section E) screwed together. Each lower half-skid is provided with one assembling web.
These two webs retained by a shim 36, attached by bolt 29, make both flaps integral. Flaps slide
on either side of rail RC.
Fork fitting of inboard flap skid is fitted with control linkage.
G Secondary attachments
(1) Roller 44
The rollers are retained in the roller holders 43 by special wide headed screws 41 locked with
PR 1422 B2 and a grooved pin 42 (section F and J).
(2) Secondary skid 24

The secondary skid is retained in roller holder 23 by a special wide headed screw 41 .
It is prevented from turning by key 45 and the screw is locked with PR 1422 B2 and with a
grooved pin 42 (section C and K).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT a^j^-'^Û
BREGUET AVIATION^^°_J^<<C>
MIRAGE F
2- ATTACHMENTS (Fig. 10)
Attachment between inboard 1 and outboard 2 flaps is made as follows :

- At the locking rod attachment on inboard flap
- At interconnection of inboard and outboard flaps
- At control drive points.
A Locking rod attachment (Cross-section B)
Rod yoke 25, fitted with its bearing, is engaged into fork fitting 26, fitted with external skid
holder sleeve bushes of inboard flap. Assembly is made by shouldered pin 27 held by plug 28 locked by
one tab-washer.
B Inboard and outboard flap interconnection (section E) (Fig. 9)
It is made at location of front skid 22 by assembling webs of lower half-skids 40 on central rail RC
by bolt 29. A shim 36 is inserted between skid webs.
C - Control drive points (Sections C - D - E) (Fig. 10)
(1 ) Attachment is made at three points :

- Ball-jointed yokes of drive rods 30 - 31 are engaged in fork-fittings constituted by the two half
skids 37 - 38.
- Ball-jointed yoke of rod 32 is engaged in fork-fitting constituted by the two half skids 39 and 40.
(2) Assembly
(a) on internal skid of inboard flap (section E) by bolt 33 and locked nut
(b) on external skid of inboard flap (section D) by pin 34, notched nut and hook safety lock
(c) on external skid of outboard flap (section C) by pin 35 and nut locked with safety pin.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 10 - LIAISONS VOLETS DE COURBURE

WING FLAP ATTACHMENTS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=>>-^rvL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£L _^ -, ..»....»««,
AILERON
(Figure 11)
1 - DESCRIPTION
It constitutes the trailing edge between external rail and wing tip.
It is a light metal assembly including a structure box extended, forward, by a leading edge.
A Structure box includes :

- one front spar LgAV, of machined ZZ3 shape section
- one false spar Lg3, also of machined I shape section
- one rib 10, machined, closing the aileron end
- four ribs NI - N4 - N6, of folded sheet, and N8, machined
- five false ribs, N2 to N6
-two machined skins, lower surface 1, and upper surface 2 (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR
MANUAL).
Front spar LgAV is machined with hinge external bearing fork-fitting 3. Ribs and false ribs, in two
parts, are attached to false spar by splices. Three false ribs N7 - N8 - N9 are solid, taken from corrugated
section. Chemically milled skin panels are riveted together on trailing edge.
Internal bearing fitting 4 (cross-section A)

It constitutes the internal hinge yoke and the control drive fork-fitting. It extends front spar Lg to
rib N1 . One special screw with nut ensures attachment to false spar Lg3.
B Leading edge
It
is constituted by :
six false ribs N1 A - N2A
- - N4A - N5A - N7A - N8A, of folded sheet riveted to spar LgAV and skin
flanges.
It is closed by :
- two fixed drip-flaps 6 and 7 covering aileron central and end sections
- eight removable drip flaps, held by lugs and screwed on either side of both bearings.
2- ATTACHMENTS
Aileron to wing attachment is made :

- at internal bearing
- at external bearing
- at control drive point.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/L^""-"1^ *** IK"^L I
BREGUET AVIATION ^âF55^^ - . ......... .,
A Internal bearing (detail F)
Aileron fitting yoke 4 is fitted with a shouldered bushing bearing a flange 26 on its plain section
and a sleeve 8 which is engaged in bushed fork fitting, on wing side. Assembly by taper pin 9, sleeve 10,
recessed washer 11, nut and locking pin.
MOD 568 NOT INCORPORATED :
Aileron fitting yoke 4 is fitted with two riveted bushes and one sleeve 8 which is engaged in
bushed fork fitting, on wing side. Assembly by taper pin 9, sleeve 10, recessed washer 11, nut and
locking pin.
B External bearing (detail E)
The yoke, whose ball joint is fitted with spacer bush 5, is engaged in bushed fork fitting 3 of the
aileron spar. Assembly by shouldered pin 12 fitted with a lubricator, recessed washer 13, nut and
locking pin.
C Drive point (section G)
Ball-jointed yoke 14 of the control link rod is engaged in fork fitting 4 fitted with aileron drive
fitting bushes. Assembly by shouldered pin 15 fitted with a lubricator ; the pin is held by plug 16,
which is locked by special retainer 17 attached to fork fitting by stud 18, tabwasher and nut.
One of the bushes is equipped with a Teflon washer 19.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
G
SECTION C
r1
COUPE G
CROSS SECTION G
L9-AV
COUPE A
SECTION B CROSS-SECTION A
N.10 N.9 N.8 N.7 tf.6 N.5 N.4 N.3 N.2 N.1
DETAIL E
DETAIL F
COUPE D
CROSS^SECTION D
FIGURE 11 -AILERON -Liaisons

AILERON -Attachments
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L>>^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^fiF0^-^0^ . . . . ,. . . . -.-,
INBOARD AND OUTBOARD SPOILERS

(Figure 12)
1- DESCRIPTION
It is an assembly constituted by one inboard spoiler 1 and one outer spoiler 2 located on the flap
top structure box upper surface.
Each spoiler is constituted by :

one machined external skin 3 and
-
- one light alloy closing panel 4. Klegecel pads are inserted between them. Holes are drilled through
these riveted elements on assembly.
Each spoiler includes one half hinge, internal 6 and external 7, riveted between skin 3 and closing
panel 4.
Both spoilers are fitted with machined titanium fittings 8 constituting drive fork-fittings and hinge
knuckle.
- inboard spoiler at drive points AT1 and AT2
- outboard spoiler at drive points AT3 - AT4 - AT5.
Each fitting. is attached through spoilers to closing panel 4 by screw 9 and special screw 10 and
bushes.
2- ATTACHMENTS
Inboard 1 and outboard 2 spoiler attachment to wings is made :

at hinges
-
- at drive points : AT1 and AT2 of control for inboard spoiler, AT3, AT4 and AT5 for outboard
spoiler.
A Hinge
On each spoiler, attachment is made at three points by half hinges 1 1, on flap top side, secured by
screws in captive nuts. Stainless steel hinge pin is held by flap top drip flaps.
B Drive point
-At each drive point, rod ball-jointed yoke 12 is engaged in fork-fitting constituted by spoiler
drive fitting 8
- Assembly by pin 13, teflon washer 14, nut and safety pin.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
COUPE F COUPE E
CROSS SECTION F CROSS SECTION E
5^ i ^5
OOO
o oo o o o o o ^\ E oo
OOO'OOOOO'Ô | / oooo1 ooooo ooo
Br-*-
COUPE A COUPE B COUPE D DETAIL C

CROSS SECT/ON A CROSS SECT/ON B CROSS SECT/ON D
FIGURE 12 - SPOILERS - INTERNE - EXTERNE - Liaisons

INBOARD AND OUTBOARD SPOILERS - Attachments
AB FIGURE 12 1-12
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]" ^ " « /V\ 1 1\ /-\V_7 L. F
BREGUET AVIATION î^~- _«5-=^^, . raamiiai no
^n. ^-^2> Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL OF WINGS
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CSC.
-Hydraulic extraction tool MS1313B (if necessary).
-Extractor backup ring 50MS221 (special installation at frame 25).
B - Standard tools
-Arsaero coupling kit.
-Set of extra-thin fork wrenches.
-Interflex coupling kit.
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 Ib.ft).
C - Ground support equipment
-1 wing positioning screw jack MS 1326.
-1 engine installation trolley.
-1 wing positioning jig BMV 6.
-1 wing hoisting assembly EHV 24 (if necessary).
-Set of blanking plugs for pipes.
-Wing storage cradle 5001 SRV or MS 1387 LH or RH.
2 - MATERIALS
- Petrolatum Air 3565.
3 - AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION
With pylon stores removed, proceed as follows:
A - Drain fuel from aircraft and depressurize the tanks (see 02-3).
B - Jack up the aircraft, in straight and level flight configuration (see 02-2).
C - Remove the engine (see 06-4).
D - Remove the following structural components
On upper surface:
-inspection rJoor 25.02 (25.10), fillets 20.02 (20.10), 26.02 (26.10), 18.02 (18.10),
After extending droop slats:
-access door to hoist fitting V.0.28.1 (if wings need to be hoisted)
On lower surface:
-fillets 20.03 (20.09) and 26.03 (26.09),
-after extending slats and flaps, fillets 29.02 (29.10), (after 'removal of fillets, and door
V.O.28.1 if necessary, retract slats and flaps),
-at location of droop slats, the first baffle on fuselage side,
-all the ribs attaching wing fillet 1 8.02 (1 8.1 0),
-internal door 25.02 (25.10),
-the stiffener of the ribs attaching wing fillet 26.02 (26.10), for access to the secondary
pin,
. -the wing fillet attaching rib located ahead of the secondary pin on frame 28,
-the stiffener linking the ribs located on either side of the main fitting,
-the stations S1 and S2 blanking covers.
CAUTION:
IN THE JACKED-UP AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION, WITH A SINGLE WING IN-.
STALLED, THE AIRCRAFT MAY ROLL ONTO ONE SIDE. THEREFORE, IT IS NECES¬
SARY TO PLACE A POSITIONING SCREW JACK UNDER THE INSTALLED WING FOR
THE TIME OF THE OPERATION.
AC
11-88 Restricted .1-301
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [LJ>^~\L
BREGUET AVIATION^,
MIRAGE F
4- INSTALLATION OF WING HANDLING ASSEMBLY (figure 13)

A Preliminary steps
Equip the engine installation trolley with the wing positioning rig including :
- the lower positioning rig hooked on the tracks of the trolley mobile assembly,
- the intermediate positioning rig,
' - the upper positioning rig.
Adapt this positioning rig according to the wing installed (RH or LH wing), so that the engine
trolley pump assembly is located on wing tip side.
Retract the sperical pads.
B Offering up the handling assembly
- Offer up the trolley assembly under the wing group as follows :

- trolley parallel with the A/C centerline,
- the two centering spherical pads directly beneath the two hooking fittings of internal and
external stations S1 and S2.
- Bring the two spherical pads a few centimeters under the fittings and stop hoisting.
Install the trolley safeties (brakes blocks mechanical safety devices).
- Lift up the engine installation trolley until the centering spherical pads of the upper positioning
rig are engaged into the hooking fittings (adjust the engine trolley or displace the intermediate posi¬
tioning rig).
-Bring the three spherical pads 1-2-3 in contact with the wing group. Never tighten them
excessively to avoid stressing the attachment fittings.
5- UNCOUPLING OF CONNECTIONS
A Functional connections (figure 14)
(1 ) Electrical connectors
(a) LHside
Between frames 21 and 23 :
-connectors 1 27 A - 1 37A - 81 Q.
- connectors 123A - 125A - 133A - 189A - 193A - 201 A - 83Q.
- Through the engine compartment, remove the ground connector base plate secured to the
stiffener (for positioning the lower main pin removal/installation tool).
(b) RH side
- connectors 128A - 138A - 80Q.
- connectors 124A - 126A - 134A - 188A - 192A - 200A - 82Q.
- In order to clear the wirings off the passing area in the main fitting, remove the electrical
connector base plates on the rib.
- Cut the binding cords in order to clear each cable off the ribs and separate the cable remaining
on the fuselage.
Remove the clamps holding the cable bundle.
Clear off the cables and connectors between fuselage and wing group so that they do not catch
on wing removal.
(2) Hydraulic pipes
Disconnect and unclamp the following pipes :
(a) Wing group side

Between frames 21 and 22, the two supply pipes of the slotted slat gearmotor.
Between frames 22 and 23, on ribs OC, the two droop slat actuator supply pipes.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
-on lower connection block, the two aileron, spoiler and flap jack pressure and return
pipes,
-on upper connection block, the two aileron and spoiler jack supply pipes; also discon¬
nect them from the fuselage T-coupling (to gain access to the upper pin),
(b) Fuselage side (figure 14)
Uncouple the flap jack supply pipe from clamp 10 attaching it to frame 27 and remove
the clamp.
Between frames 27 and 28, uncouple the flap jack supply pipe at straight union 4.
(3) Control linkages

Between frames 25 and 26:
-uncouple the roll servo-control mechanical linkage,
-on roll control, remove the rod linking the two angle drives (detail K), and located at
right angles to the main pins.
Between frames 28 and 29, the flap jack mechanical control (detail H).
(4) Pressurization and fuel pipes

Between frames 24 and 25, on wing group pressurization pipe (fuselage and wing group
sides), remove connecting pipe 2.
Between frames 26 and 27, on pylon and wing tank filling and transfer pipe 5: uncouple
elbow spacer 7 (wing and straight union sides). Insert straight union 6 into the feedthrough.
Remove spacer 7.
-RHside:
-between frames 24 and 25, wing tank pressurization pipe 8.
-LHside:
-between frames 24 and 25 and on the connection block between frames 25 and
26, fuselage and wing tank pressurization pipe 8; remove this pipe (in two sections) and di¬
sengage it from its base plates.
-between frames 25 and 26, on the spacer (connection block/wing base); discon¬
nect the tank pressurization pipe connection. Clear spacer 9 from the wing base by pushing it
back in the connection block.
B - Mechanical connections (figure 12M)

-Make sure that the wing group rests correctly on its positioning rig to prevent it from
falling upon removal of the connecting pins.
-Remove the mechanical connections in the following sequence:
(1 ) Secondary attachment fittings
-Front attachment fitting at frame 22 (30-mm open-end wrench-30-mm ring wrench).
-Rear attachment fitting at frame 28 (30-mm open-end wrench-30mm ring wrench).
(2) Main attachment fittings at frame 25

- For each of the two pins:
(a) Remove the castellated nut (socket M60 + adapter K232 + ratchet + extension). If, ex¬
ceptionally, too high a force is required for unlocking the nut, use the hydraulic tool in "pin in¬
stallation" configuration to avoid longitudinal counter effect. The nut is then easily unscrewed.
(b) Remove the screw interconnecting the lockwasher and the sleeve.
(c) Remove the lockwasher (wrench M31. 029).
(d) Remove the taper pin and the sleeve.
-two methods may be used: the method called "pin removal from the rear (aircraft direc¬
tion)" which is the current and normal removing method, and the method called "pin removal
from the front (aircraft direction)" which is the exceptional method used when the other
procedure is inefficient.
(1 ) Pin removal from the rear (aircraft direction)

-Fit hydraulic extraction tool MS 1312:
-provide for judicious stacking of washers 7 to obtain a 6 mm clearance between the
rubber stop of dummy nut 3 and the sleeve,
-position washers 7 resting on the pin shoulder.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03!
EXTRACTION AXES PRINCIPAUX
EXTRACTION OF MAIN SHAFTS
Méthode de dépose classique (par l'arrière)

Conventional removal procedure (from the rear)
C.25a C.25b
ORIENTATION
OUTILLAGE D'EXTRACTION
Attaches principales POSITIONING OF
Main attachments EXTRACTION TOOL
C.22 C.28
HI
m II
mAmMAwmam
Attache secondaire Attache secondaire

Méthode de dépose (par l'avant)
Auxiliary attachment Auxiliary attachment
pour un axe de liaison bloqué
Removal procedure (from the front)
FIGURE 12M - DEPOSE DE LA VOILURE - Liaisons mécaniques of a seized connecting shaft
REMOVAL OF WINGS - Mechanical links
AB
03-76 1-303M FIGURE 12M 1-302
Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H ^ " ** /Y\H\/-\V^L-
BREGUET AVIATION ^&^-
^<^ ^z^^
^^^> Restricted kaamiiai
MANUAL no
03
-screw dummy nut 3 until it is in contact with washers. Then, clearance shall be about
6 mm (0.24 in). Otherwise, modify washer stacking.
-offer up sleeve 4 on pin; then, jaw holder 5, taking care to engage jaws correctly behind
the sleeve flange. Hold jaws by moving clamp 6 until it comes in abutment against the end of
its housing.
CAUTION:
ON TWO OF THE JAWS, THE SLEEVE GROOVE IS SHAPED TO MATCH SLEEVE
FLANGE. THEN, TAKE CARE TO POSITION THESE JAWS CORRECTLY ON SLEEVE
(INDEXES A-B-C).
-fully screw hydraulic jack 1 onto jaw-holder.

-unlock taper pin: screw jack control screw (17 A/F wrench). Stop the operation before
dummy nut 3 is in contact with the sleeve.
CAUTION:
LIMIT TAPER PIN BACKING SO AS TO PREVENT THE SEALING PLUG 8 FROM BE¬
ING DRIVEN IN.
-remove hydraulic extraction tool.

-remove taper pin sleeve assembly, taking care not to damage the components.
-Pin removal from the front (aircraft direction):

-remove door 22-03i or 22-09i of corresponding feeder tank,
-remove:
-surrounding equipment, if required, to ease installation of tooling,
-on frame 25, pin end sealing plug 8 (3 attachment screws)
-on taper pin:
-with nut and washer previously removed, refit nut and screw it, leaving a 1 cm
(0.39 in) clearance approx. between its flange and the sleeve,
-fit hydraulic extraction tool (MS 1313):
NOTE: For special installation of the pin/sleeve assembly (see Structural Repair Manual,
4-725), use backup ring 50MS221 with hydraulic extraction tool MS1313B.
-install spacer (2) on frame boss.
-fully screw hydraulic jack 1 onto pin so that spacer be in contact with the
frame and centered in relation to the jack.
-unlock taper pin: screw hydraulic jack control screw.
CAUTION:
AS SOON AS THE TAPER PIN IS UNLOCKED, REMOVE THE NUT SO THAT IT DOES
NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE SLEEVE.
-remove taper pin hydraulic extraction tool.

-withdraw taper pin from the front (aircraft direction) and the sleeve from the rear
(aircraft direction). Take care not to damage the components.
-clean the location of sealing plug on frame 25.
-re-install the plug fitted with a new seal on the frame. Take the usual precautions
not to damage the seal on fitting (to ease installation, slightly lubricate seal and bore with pe¬
trolatum AIR 3565).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJ>^rs± MIRAGF
BREGUET AVIATIONî. ^-^
Restricted
i ..
» a ..
MANUAL
. a . ,
Oo
.1
5- REMOVING WINGS
A Handling
- Disengage wings from their attachment fittings. Make sure that displacement of the assembly is
parallel with main fitting plane.
CAUTION : WHEN WING GROUP IS CLEARED BY 2 TO 3 CM (0.78 TO 1.18 IN), MAKE SURE
THAT NO CONNECTION IS LEFT AND NOTHING IMPAIRS DISENGAGEMENT.
NOTE : When wing group is to be transferred from engine installation trolley to a wing storage
trolley, upper positioning rig shall be made integral with intermediate positioning rig by
pinning (four pins).
B Protecting the various elements
- Blank :
Hydraulic pipes
-
- Pressurization and fuel pipes
- Coil cables and protect connectors
- Protect and preserve various mechanical connections.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
Lg.AR
COUPE A
COUPE D CROSS-SECTION A
CROSS-SECTION D
PRESENTATION DE L'ENSEMBLE
DE MANUTENTION
GENERAL VIEW OF
HANDLING ASSEMBL Y 1-2
BROCHAGE L^k^ ^ * " ^ ^ * ^ *T*
CHARIOT REACTEUR
CHASSIS INFERIEUR ACCOUPLEMENT
PINNING CHASSIS INTERMEDIAIRE
ENGINE INSTALLA TION CHASSIS SUPERIEUR
TROLLEY COOPLING
LOWER POSITIONING RIG INTERMEDIA TE POSITIONING
RIG OPPER POSITIONING
CHASSIS SUPERIEUR
OPPER POSITIONING RIG
COUPE C
CHASSIS INTERMEDIAIRE CROSS-SECTION C VUE SUIVANT E COUPE B
CHASSIS INFERIEUR INTERMEDIA TE POSITIONING VIEW IN DIRECTION CROSS-SECTION B
LOWER POSITIONING RIG RIG OF ARROW E MUJ>
CHARIOT REACTEUR
ENGINE INSTALLATION III!!!! W
TROLLEY
IFJIJIIIJlJJlJlJJJllJlJJfllll
ENSEMBLE DE MANUTENTION IMMOBILISATION

CHASSIS INTERMEDIAIRE ACCOUPLEMENT
HANDLING ASSEMBL Y CHASSIS INFERIEUR
CHASSIS SUPERIEUR
LOCKING CHASSIS INTERMEDIAIRE
FIGURE 13 - DEPOSE-POSE DE LA VOILURE - MANUTENTION INTERMEDIATE POSITIONING RIG COUPLING
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF WING GROUP - HANDLING OPPER POSITIONING RIG LOWER POSITIONING RIG
AB INTERMEDIATE POSITIONING RIG
12-74 Restricted 1-306 FIGURE 13 1-30<
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
DETAIL J
DETAIL A DETAIL B
C.25 DETAIL C DETAIL D
M "~N
-T-r^n
DETAIL K
na r n K
n
SP" m am O
T i^r
m
L&L
TXTT
\ \ Version avion avec Version avion sans
AXE AVION
-AIRCRAFT
ravitaillement en vol ravitaillement en vol TT
Aircraft version with Aircraft version without
CENTERLINE inflight refueling system inflight refueling system
FIGURE 14 - DEPOSE-POSE DE LA VOILURE - LIAISONS FONCTIONNELLES

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF WINGS- FUNCTIONAL CONNECTIONS
AB
Restricted 1-307 FIGURE 14 1-3C
01-88
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl ** 1V1II\/AV*7I_
^ït-~
BREGUET AVIATION
^« ^?*^
^~=^ Restricted aaamii ai no
MANUAL 03
INSTALLATION OF WINGS
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CSC
B - Standard tools
-Tool kit for Arsaero couplings.
-Set of extra-thin wrenches.
-Tool kit for Interflex couplings.
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 and 40 to 350 ft.lb)
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to
350 ft.lb).
-Complementary kit (multiplier for torque > 50 m.daN (350 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-1 wing positioning screw jack MS 1326.
-1 wing positioning jig BMV 5.
-1 engine installation trolley.
-1 wing hoisting assembly EHV 24 (replacement of wings).
-Hydraulic power supply.
D Spares
-2 pins 2331 0AA 01 5020 LE.
-2 pins 2331 0AA 01 501 5 LE.
-2 pins 2331 0AA 040045 LE.
-O-rings for fuel pipe.
-R02352 x 178 AD016 - R3560 x 360AD016 - R04064 x 533 AD016
- R02300 x 360 AD01 6 - R03465 x 1 78 AD01 6 - R02830 x 1 78 AD01 6
-O-ring for pressurization pipe.
-R02780 x 360 A21 B6 - R02780 x 360 AD016.
2 - MATERIALS
-Grease Air 4210 and 4222.
-Codex pharmaceutical-grade petrolatum.
-Neutral petrolatum Air 3565.
-Mastinox C 627 B.
-Mastinox 6856 H.
-Thinner 3924.
-Aliphatic naphtha, grade F.
NOTE: Installation of the main pins requires preliminary steps necessitating a product applica¬
tion and curing time of about 5 hours before installation.
For the wing installation procedure, take these preliminary steps into account so that
the overall installation time is not affected.
A - Aircraft configuration
(1 ) Aircraft jacked up, in approximately straight and level flight configuration (see 02-2)
(2) Engine removed (see 06-4)
(3) Aircraft defueled (see 02-3)
(4) Inspection doors and fillets removed (see REMOVAL OF WINGS, para. 3D)
CAUTION:
WHEN JACKED-UP WITH ONLY ONE WING INSTALLED, THE AIRCRAFT MAY ROLL
OVER ONTO ONE SIDE. THEREFORE, IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE A POSITIONING
SCREW JACK UNDER THIS WING DURING THE OPERATION.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ J' » /V\ll\/-\VÛ T
BREGUET AVIATION _^._~.
^>, .s^,
^-^ Restricted muai
n* a
MANUAL no
03
B - Installation of wing on handling assembly (figure 13)

(1 ) Preparation of handling frame
Equip the engine installation trolley with the wing positioning rig including:
-the lower positioning rig hooked on the track of the trolley mobile assembly,
-the intermediate positioning rig,
-the upper positioning rig.
Adapt this positioning rig according to the wing installed (LH or RH wing).
(2) Offering-up and installation
Using the wing hoisting assembly, offer up and position the wing on the trolley assembly.
Positioning shall be made such that:
-the two hooking fittings (inboard and outboard stations) coincide with and engage into
the two trolley centering spherical pads.
-adjust the three spherical pads to make them bear against the wing lower surface.
Remove the hoisting assembly.
C - Preparation of fuselage (figure 14)

(1 )Removal blanking plugs from pipes.
(2) Remove plugs from electrical cables and check for correct positioning of electrical cables.
(3) Systematically replace pressurization and fuel pipe seals (on removed connections).
(4) Slightly lubricate (petrolatum AIR 3565) the pipe seals and bases for easier installation.
(5) On LH wing only, between frames 25 and 26, make sure that spacer 9 is installed on the
connection block and pushed inside its base.
(6) Between frames 26 and 27, make sure that straight union 6 is installed and pushed inside
its base.
(7) Carefully clean (aliphatic naphtha, grade F and white lint-free cloths) and check the at¬
tachment fittings (surface condition of bores and faces of frames 25). See "Check of main
wing-to-fuselage attachment fittings".
D - Preparation of wing
(1 )Remove blankjng plugs from pipes and plugs from cables.

(2) Replace the fuel pipe seals.
(3) Slightly lubricate (petrolatum AIR 3565) the pipe seals and bases for easier installation.
(4) Push the unions of the wing tank pressurization and transfer pipes inside their bases.
(5) Check electrical cables and connectors for positioning.
(6) Carefully clean (aliphatic naphtha, grade F and white lint-free cloths) and check the at¬
tachment fittings (surface condition of main fitting bores and faces).
(7) Check that the pressurization pipes passing through the wing main fitting are fitted.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ZZs£ï^>
^-^ ^=-^>
^r-*^, . ^
Restricted . uamiiai
MANUAL no
03
4 - REPLACEMENT OF A WING (see figure 1 4)
A - Components to be recovered from removed wing:

-slotted slat gearmotor (see 04-4),
-droop slat jack (see 04-4),
-flap jack (see 04-4),
-aileron servo-control (see 04-1 ),
-spoiler servo-control (see 04-1),
-roll trim jack (see 04-1 ),
-valve MESSIER 4 (flap system).
B - Delivery condition of spare wing

On delivery, the spare wing without components listed in para. A above, is fitted with:
(1 ) Thermistor mounting base 1 including the two thermistor setting indexes (aircraft with or
without in-flight refueling system),
(2) Three eyebolts type A SMS 240 with their protective plugs SMS 190-12 (used on the
wing hoisting assembly).
C - Preparation of spare wing

(1 ) Fit the eyebolts type A SMS 240 to the three hoisting points and place the wing on the
wing positioning jig (see para. 3).
(2) Fit the wing with the components taken from the removed wing.
-Provide for bonding of the slotted slat gearmotor and of the droop slat jack by carefully
stripping the bearing surfaces under the heads of the two diagonally-opposed attaching
screws.
(3) Position thermistor 1 on its mounting base fitted with positioning indexes (aircraft with or
without in-flight refuelling system) (see 06-2).
(4) Depreserve the various wing-to-fuselage connections.
NOTE: Make sure that all the hydraulic connecting hoses are provided with a ring marked
with the service life limit date determined from document "SERVICE LIFE OF COMPO¬
NENTS AND EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON AIRCRAFT".
5 - INSTALLATION OF WING (figure 13)
A - Preparation of connecting pins
(1 ) Carefully clean the component parts of each pin with aliphatic naphtha, grade F.
CAUTION:
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE MAIN PINS, MADE OF TITANIUM, BE
CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS.
(2) Wipe them with a clean lint-free cloth.

(3) Carefully check the condition of parts: surface condition of sleeve and main pin.
(4) Should a component of the main pin need replacement, or should spare wings be in¬
stalled, or should the Dalic coating be removed from the fitting bore, see the method for deter¬
mining the insertion of attachment pins (03-3).
(5) Apply a thin film of Codex petrolatum on the taper pin.
(6) Apply grease AIR 421 0 to the contact surfaces of the washer and nut.
(7) Assemble the taper pin, making sure to match up components according to markings.
NOTE: It is recommended that only grease or petrolatum in unpainted tube be used.
AA
01-88 Restricted 1 -309M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' " M ** /YlllX/AV^t. F
breguet aviation Û -~ fleshed MANUAL 03
(8) Apply protective treatment to the taper pin:

-slightly tighten the nut so as to open the slot of the sleeve,
-blank its ends with adhesive paper,
-pack the ends of the slot with Mastinox C627B as follows:
-on flange side, over 10 mm (0.39 in),
-on opposite side 5 mm (0.19 in),
-after curing for four or five hours, Mastinox C627B will form two plugs with some flexi¬
bility; using a spatula, refill the rest of the slot with Mastinox 6856H,
-loosen the nut of the taper pin without removing it,
-slide the sleeve on the taper pin so that the clearance of the slote is taken up and so that
the sleeve can be inserted easily into the bores.
(Take the necessary measures so as not to damage the Mastinox plugs).
While awaiting their installation take the necessary measures so as to avoid contaminating
the pins thus prepared.
B - Installation of wing
(1 ) Bring the trolley near the fuselage so that the wing fitting is level with the main frame
(F.25) and as close to it as possible.
(2) Secure the trolley by lowering the support pads.
(3) Bring the wing fittings level with the fuselage fittings:
-adjust the trolley as required to set the wing incidence and dihedral according to the fu¬
selage,
-position the trolley mechanical safeties.
Using a brush, apply some diluted Mastinox (1 part by volume of Mastinox 6856H and 3
parts by volume of thinner 3924) to each face of the main fitting (wing and fuselage).
(4) Insert the wing fitting into the fuselage fitting by a few centimeters and check for correct
relative position.
On the wing, arrange the ball joints of the secondary fittings so that they do not become
stuck during assembly.
(5) Slowly engage the wing main fitting until its bores are in line with the fuselage fitting
bores.
This operation shall be carried out by adjusting the various settings of the trolley so that
the fitting does not bear on the internal faces of fitting at frame 25.
Make sure that nothing catches during this operation.
(6) At the end of fitting engagement, feel the "step" between fuselage and wing upper and
lower bores with the finger. Guide the manoeuver in order to overcome this step, which will
mean the bores are properly aligned.
(7) Check that the sleeve can be easily inserted without its taper pin.
6 - COUPLING OF CONNECTIONS
A - Mechanical connections (figure 15)
Assembly is made in the following sequence:

-install main pins,
-tighten main pins,
-install front and rear secondary fittings,
-tighten secondary fittings.
AB
Cadre 25
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F Cadre 25 Frame 25
Restricted MANUAL 03 -Frame 25
Fourrure Rondelle
Bushing Washer
Axeab
Mise en place de la fourrure Axis ab
C.25a C.25b sur le cadre 25
Installation of bushing on frame 25 Mise en place de la rondelle
Installation of washer
Axeab
Axis ab
C.28
Fente des
fourrures
Bushings slot
Mise en place des

Attache secondaire Attaches principales Attache secondaire deux fourrures
Auxiliary attachment Main attachments Auxiliary attachment Installation of two bushings
MONTAGE AXES PRINCIPAUX COUPE B PREPARATION
INSTALLA TION OF MAIN SHAFTS SECTION B
!
DES FERRURES D'ATTACHE
C.25a C.25b PREPARATION
OF A TTACHMENT FITTINGS
DETAIL A i .Papier adhésif .

Adhésif tape
CoteC Confection des bouchons de mastinc
m (Après enfoncement) Application of mastinox caulkings
Jeu final tel que : - Dimension C
(After engagement) Mastinox
Final clearance such that : Y
*A - C > 1 ,5 mm (0,057 in)1
Cote D
J
i
1 '
ujwi/mrrmn/)rinm/nm
^MtrHfetirtttihttffrttiiiUiUialL
1
(Avant enfoncement)
Dimension D
(Before engagement)
>m/MM/m>MMJM/M
\M
\\ /'in>i/ir77l
SERRAGE DE L'AXE CONIQUE Valeur d'enfoncement : C D Bouchon de

.
TIGHTENING OF TAPERED PIN î I Engagement value : CD mastinox

Mastinox caulking
FIGURE 15 - POSE DE LA VOILURE - Liaisons mécaniques *A = Cote d'enfoncement hors ferrure PREPARATION DES AXES CONIQUES
INS TA L LA TION OF WINGS - Mechanical connections M = Protrusion beyond fitting PREPARATION OF TAPERED PINS
AB
01-83 Restricted 1-310M FIGURE 15 1-311
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" « / Y 1 1\ AAV-7 L.
1
BREGUET AVIATION ^£c_~ ^c?-=^> a/iamiiai no

^w ^?-ô Restricted MANUAL 03
(1 ) Main attachment on frame 25
i (a) Installation of pins

-Using a brush, apply some diluted Mastinox (1 part by volume of Mastinox 6856H and
3 parts by volume of thinner 3924) to the bores.
-Through the engine compartment, bring the connecting pins to position in related bores,
proceeding as follows:
-install the assembly (taper pin, sleeve, washer, nut) in the fuselage bore, taking care
to direct the pins properly,
-clean out Mastinox burrs,
-the sleeve slot shall be directed as per line ab (upper sleeve slot downward, lower
sleeve slot upward). Such direction is defined by the two sleeve spigots which shall be posi¬
tioned on eitherside of one of the three notches on frame 25. Only one position is possible.
CAUTION:
FULLY ENGAGE THE SLEEVE SO THAT THE FLANGE RESTS AGAINST THE FRAME.
-Install the lockwasher (wrench M 31029) and secure it to the sleeve with the 5 dia.
screw.
When installing back components (wing, pins) that have been removed, proceed as indi¬
cated below.
When installing new components, see the method for determining insertion of main
wing-to-fuselage attachment pins (see 03-3).
For each sleeve/pin assembly, the insertion value must be similar to that recorded in the
aircraft individual logbook.
The value for measurement after tightenirig with the hydraulic tool is dimension C (pro¬
trusion of pin threaded part in relation to nut), resulting from the insertion value. Dimension C
must correspond with that entered in the aircraft individual logbook.
A tolerance of _ 0P- mm ( _ n'n-tq in) is required to install the safety pin.
-Screw the nut by hand until it abuts onto the washer.

-Proceed in the same manner for the other main attachment pin, after correcting any pos¬
sible misalignment.
-Measure protrusion dimension D for each pin to determine the insertion value C - D to
be obtained with the hydraulic tool.
(b) Installation of tightening tool

-Install hydraulic tool MS 1312 (first on the upper pin then, after tightening, on the
lower pin).
-Check that the hydraulic tool rod is in "extended" position.
-Cap the taper pin nut with positioning spacer 2.
-Fully screw hydraulic actuator 1 onto the taper pin while checking for correct centering
of the spacer on the actuator.
-Through the spacer aperture, locate the position of the spacer nut holes with the incor¬
porated spindle.
CAUTION:
THE TORQUE APPLIED FOR TIGHTENING THE ACTUATOR CONTROL SCREW SHALL
NOT EXCEED 11 m.daN (81 ft.lb).
(c) Tightening of pins

-Act on the tool to obtain the required insertion value minus 1 mm (0.039 in), then re¬
move the hydraulic tool and install it on the lower pin.
-Act on the tool to obtain the required insertion value minus 0.5 mm (0.019 in) for the
lower pin.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT j
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-^-
^« ^^=î
^s~^ ^ . ^
Restricted . IV/IAMIIA1
MANUAL no
03
-Remove the tool.

- Estimate the nut rotation required to align one of the nut safety holes with the pin safety
hole:
-the safety holes will be aligned either using the hydraulic tool or directly using a
torque wrench,
-safety holes will be aligned only by tightening the nut (never by untightening it).
NOTE: If the hydraulic tool is not used, the tightening torque applied to the nut shall range
between 20 and 60 m.daN (148 and 442 ft.lb).
-Complete insertion of the upper pin, proceeding as indicated above (estimation of nut
tightening, alignment of safety holes).
-After tightening the two pins, record the insertion value actually obtained by measuring
dimension C. Check that they are within tolerances.
-Lock the nuts.
-Enter the dimension C obtained in the aircraft individual logbook.
If the required value cannot be obtained for the given torque limits (determined to pre¬
vent important errors), proceed as follows:
-remove the pins again,
-specially check the components in contact for surface sondition,
-check the correct positioning of the wing, making sure that the sleeve is easily fitted by
hand,
-determine again the insertion value,
-grease and assemble again.
NOTE: These operations may be carried out several times until the required value is obtained.
(2) Front and rear auxiliary attachments
-Grease the pins, bores and spherical bearings of the front and rear fasteners (grease AIR
4222 or 4210).
-Use a thimble for pin installation (SMS 219).
- Pin fitting: pin to frame 22, from front to rear; pin to frame 28, from rear to front. Direct
the grease nipples: upward at frame 22, downward at frame 28.
-Fit the washers and nuts.
-Brings the nuts into contact and tighten up to the first pinning hole (1/12 turn max) (30
A/F ring wrench-30 A/F wrench).
-Then fit cotter pins.
B - Functional connections (figure 14)
(1 ) Fuel and pressurization pipes
-LHside
Between frames 24 and 25 and on the connection block (F.25 and 26), connect the
pressurization pipe of the wing and fuselage tanks (in two sections).
Between frames 25 and 26 on the spacer (block/wing base):
-insert the spacer in the wing base; connect the tank pressurization pipe.
-RH side
Between frames 24 and 25, connect the pressurization pipe of the wing tank.
-LH and RH sides
Between frames 26 and 27, fuel transfer and refueling pipe of wing and pylon tanks:
-reinstall the spacer; take the straight union out of the feedthrough, couple the el¬
bowed spacer (wing and straight union side).
Between frames 24 and 25, wing tank pressurization pipe (fuselage and wing side):
-reinstall the connecting pipe.
AB
01 - 88 Restricted 1 - 31 2
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^-Q. /VXIIXAA 1_
^3&
BREGUET AVIATION r^*^N aaammai no
S""^ST^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Control linkage

Between frames 28 and 29, couple the flap jack mechanical control.
-on the roll control, reinstall the rod connecting the two bellcranks and located at the
main pins,
-couple the roll servo mechanical control.
(3) Hydraulic pipes
Connect and clamp the following hydraulic pipes.

-On fuselage side
Between frames 27 and 28, couple the flap jack supply pipe (straight union) and clamp
it to frame 27.
-On wing side
-on the upper block, the two aileron and spoiler jack supply pipes; also connect
them to the T-coupling in the fuselage (access to upper pin),
-on the lower connection block, the two supply and return pipes of aileron, spoiler
and flap jacks.
Between frames 22 and 23, on ribs OC, the two slat jack supply pipes.
Between frames 22 and 23, the two gearmotor supply pipes.
(4) Electrical connections

-LHside
-reinstall the ground connector base plate attached to the stiffener,

-electrical connectors 1 23A, 1 25A, 1 33A, 1 89A, 1 93A, 201 A, 83Q.
-electrical connectors 127 A, 137 A, 81 Q.
-RHside
-electrical connectors 1 24A, 126A, 134A, 188A, 192A, 200A, 82Q.
-electrical connectors 128A, 138A, 80Q.
-Re-position and secure the connector base plates on the wing.
-Blind the cables and clamp the cable bundle.
8 - FINAL STEPS
-Grease the pins of the front and rear secondary attachment fittings.
-Check the components for correct installation and make sure that all safetyings and
bindings have been carried out.
-Check all the hydraulic pipes and their identification rings.
-Degas the hydraulic systems and check the couplings for sealing (see 07-1 ).
-Check the adjustment of the roll and high-lift device control systems (see 04-1 and
04-4).
-Check the signal and navigation lights. .
-Check the electrical circuits of the wing external stores.

-Check the wing tank pressurization and fuel systems for proper sealing.
-Reinstall the engine (see 06-4).
-Reinstall the access doors and wing fillets.
-Reinstall the blanking plugs on the external store carrying stations.
-Reinstall the plug on the hoisting point of the rear spar.
-Remove the positioning screw jack.
-In case of replacement:
-measure the wing (see manual 03-0),
-grease the control surface hinges (see manual 04-4).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^=>^r5L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^cL-^^> ..... _0
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AN AILERON

(Figure 11)
A Special tools
- Flight control 2nd line tool kit
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350 ft.lb).
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 and 40 to 350 ft.lb)
C Spares
- 2 lockwashers 23351 AC 060 L
-1 pin 23310 AA 020025 L
-1 pin 23310 AA 030030 L
-1 pin 23310 CA 030035
D Ground support equipment
- Aileron cradle MS 1 175
- Hydraulic power unit
- 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz power unit
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Grease AIR 4222 or AIR 4210
Remove :
- Upper surface doors : V4.70 - V3.74 - V3.72 - V3.70,
- Lower surface doors : V4.71 - V3.75 - V3.73 - V3.71 ,
- Fairing V3.47,
- On inner hinge side, separatefrom fitting and skins (five attaching screws) the leading edge false
rib used for bonding pickup. Fully push it outwards.
- Disconnect the bonding braids.
WARNING :
COMPLY WITH SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE WHEN. WORKING ON FLIGHT
CONTROLS (see manual 01-0).
4- REMOVAL
A The aileron is removed at the hinge pins and the control rod at the wing bellcrank.
B On bellcrank side, disconnect the aileron control rod (cross-section G).

-Remove the nut (24-mm A/F wrench).
-Recover the washer.
-Free the rod from the bellcrank trunnion.
- Protect the rod during the operation.
C Remove the hinge pins
(1) Outer hinge (detail E)

Remove the connecting pin (17-mm ring wrench).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" « /V Y 1 1\ /"\ V^7 L_ i
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ftç _«=-*w^
-*-^ Restricted aaamiiai no
MANUAL 03
(2) Inner hinge (detail F)

-Remove the nut and washer (22 mm ring wrench) from the taper pin.
-Extract the taper pin (extractor M.31016) and bushing (extractors M.31071 and
M.31072).
(3) Remove the control surface
the leading edge false rib and let it hang by its braid.
- Disengage
-Recover spacer bush 5 of the outer hinge bracket and sleeve 8 of the inner hinge
bracket.
5 - REPLACEMENT OF AN AILERON
The outer hinge pin and control rod connecting pin are part of the control surface. The
taper pin belongs to the wings. Consequently, when an aileron is replaced, pre-adjust the ta¬
per pin (wing and aileron) (see 03-1).
-Remove the control rod from the removed aileron and install it on the replacement ail¬
eron (see 04-1).
NOTES: 1 If the replacement aileron consists of carbon fiber laminate, prepare for painting as
-
per instructions in Structural Repair Manual.
2 - A metal aileron and a carbon fiber aileron can be mounted simultaneously on a
same aircraft without any problem.
6 - INSTALLATION
-Carefully clean and wipe the various fasteners.
-Check for perfect surface condition of components.
-Lubricate hinge points (ball joints - bores - pins).
DO NOT LUBRICATE TEFLON-LINED BALL JOINTS.
B - Installation of aileron
(1 ) Install spacer bush 5 in the ball joint of the outer hinge bracket, and sleeve 8 in the bush-
fitted bore of the inner hinge bracket.
(2) Offer up the aileron at right angles to its hinges, position the leading edge false rib and
engage the aileron in its brackets.
(3) Install the hinge pins
-Fit the pins.
(a) Outer hinge (detail E)
CORRECTLY POSITION THE PIN HEAD (FLATS CORRESPONDING TO ROTATION
STOPPING BOSS).
-Install the washer and nut, tighten (17 mm ring wrench).
-Pin.
(b) Inner hinge (detail F)
- Pre-adjustment and installation procedure applicable to control surface taper pins (see
03-1).
-Secure the leading edge false rib with the five attachment screws - correctly position the
bonding braid.
(c) Attach the bonding braids.
NOTE: If the reinstalled aileron consists of composite material, make sure that there is no foul¬
ing between:
1 - the aileron drip strips and the rear attachment fitting of the wing tip missile
launcher. In case of insufficient clearance of friction, increase the clearance
between the fitting and the aileron to 3.5 mm (0.014 in) by locally reworking the
fitting lower and upper surfaces between points A and C. Then apply the
protection to the reworked area (see Structural Repair manual).
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
2 - the aileron drive fitting and the wing trailing edge. Contingent rework: file the trailing
edge in line with the fitting so as to obtain a minimum clearance of 1 mm (0.04 in), then ap¬
ply the protection to the reworked area (see Structural Repair Manual).
Datum plane .
Top skin.
°£S _D
Bottom skin .
SECTION KK
POINTA (lower and upper
Top skin
surfaces)
Datum plane
Rework area
Bottom skin
Section to be removed
Rib. 5 reference p POINT C (lower and upper

R : Aileron leading edge radius. .
line surfaces)
R1 : Basic machining (R + 1.5 mm (0.06 in))
R2 : Rework (R + 3.5 mm (0. 14 in )).
7 - FINAL STEPS
-Check aileron deflection and structural stops (see 04-1 ).

-Connect the aileron control rod (section G) to the bellcrank trunnion.
+ 1
- Fit the washer and the nut, tighten (24 A/F wrench). Torque to 6 _ ~ m-daN.
(44.25 *i437gft.lb).
-Pin.
-Lubricate the aileron hinge points (see 04-1).
-Reinstall the access doors and fairing.
-Check for correct deflection and operation of roll channel (see 04-1).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^^^l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^JÎP3^^ ......... «
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF A DROOP SLAT

(figure 7)

- Hydraulic power supply
- Electrical power supply 1 1 5/200 V - 400 Hz
- Access ladders
- Protective cover for slat trailing edge
- Slat travel templates GVB3
- Hinge pin extraction tool 50MS130
2- MATERIALS
- Mineral petrolatum Air 3565

-Oil Air 3512
- White Spirit
- «Transyl» penetrating product
- Remove drip flaps VO.20 - V0.22 - V0.24 - V0.26 - V0.28

- Connect hydraulic and electrical power supplies and extend slats.
4- REMOVAL
Remove the hinge pin stop.

-
Remove the two drive fitting pins (22 mm socket). To avoid any deterioration of the slat upper
-
surface skin during this operation, protect the slat trailing edge with an appropriate cover.
- Recover the teflon washers.
- Extract the two hinge pins, beginning with the shorter pin.
Using a metal wife looped through the hole in the end of the pin, pull the pin out while at the
same time moving the slat to-and-fro by hand to facilitate extraction.
If this fails, apply «Transyl» penetrating product on the hinge knuckle area ; wait for the product
to penetrate between the pin and the hinge knuckles before extracting the pins. When the longer of the
two pins is partially withdrawn, support the flap in order to take up the longitudinal play, to protect
the pin from shearing stresses while extracting it from the last hinge knuckle.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl^J>^r5L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^F^^^-O ». a nomi i a i
5- INSTALLATION OF AN ORIGINAL SLAT
A Prelimianry steps
(1) On aircraft :
Cleaning and inspection of the following parts (and protection if required) :
- hinge knuckles, pins, pin ends and hardware
- hinging of leading edge link rods, including teflon lined spherical bearings.
THE TEFLON LINED SPHERICAL BEARINGS SHOULD NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH
OIL OR GREASE.
(2) On the droop slat :

Cleaning and inspection of the following parts :
- hinge knuckles
- drive clevises 1 and 2
- lubricate (Air 4205) the hinge pins before installing the slat.
B Installation of slat
- Position the droop slats on the aircraft, fitting the hinge knuckles in position and lining them up
flush. Then insert the two pre-greased hinge pins.
- Position the drive link rods .1 and 2 in their respective fittings.
- Fit the pre-lubricated pins and the teflon washers (at head end of pin), taking care to fit the pin
head in the «head end» recess of the leading edge fitting.
- Torque the nut to : 2.8 m.daN , Q (20.65 ft.lb , 2 065). During this operation, to prevent
damage to the slat upper skin, cover its trailing edge with a protector.
- Fit the hinge stop.
- Remove the trailing edge protector.
6- INSTALLATION OF A REPLACEMENT SLAT
A Preliminary steps
(1) On aircraft
As for installation of an original slat, para. 5.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- Prepare the stop(s) to be replaced by adjusting the thickness in relation to the distance measured
(mill down the support face on the spar side and leave a few tenths of a mm (a few thousandths of an
inch) on the stop side to complete setting after attachment).
Front spar Stop Edge strip Overthickckness 3 mm (0. 1 18 in)

for adjustment or fitting.
^^
Position the stop in its location and adjust the rear edge to fit into the spar upper side.
- Hold the stop in place, then counterdrill the attachment holes and countersink the holes for the
screw heads.
- Paint the reworked parts (see 03-0).
- Install the stop.
- Bring the slat in abutment against the stops and check the zero indication on the tooling
templates. File down the stop abutment face as required to obtain a stop contact of at least 70 %.
- Protect the contact face with paint (see 03-0).
- Connect up the drive link rods then adjust the control linkage (see 04-4).
7- FINAL STEPS
- Grease the slat hinges (see 04-4).

- Check the slat travel and operation (see 04-4).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A SLOTTED SLAT

(figure 16)
A - Standard tools
-Circlip pliers.

- Hydraulic power supply.
-Electrical power supply, 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz.
1 -Cockpit access ladder EAC 25.
-Access step ladders.
I -Flight control 1st line tool kit.
C - Spares (if required)
-8 circlips ADR RC 41 001 .
-8 circlips ADR RC 41002.
2 - MATERIALS
| -Grease Air 4210.

-Oil Air 1504.
-White spirit.
-AralditeAV138M.
-Hardener HV998.
-Connect hydraulic and electrical power supplies and fully extend the slats.
4 - REMOVAL
NOTE 1 : In some aircraft, the RH slat includes a microswitch control pin which is no longer
used. In this case, the lower blanking part of the track housing is to be removed
before the slat.
-Remove shafts 3 at drive points AT1 and AT2 (10 mm socket).

- Recover teflon washers 2.
-Slide the slat along its tracks and remove it.
NOTE 2: When removing or installing the LH slat, pay special attention to the slotted slat
microswitch. It may be necessary to remove it to avoid damaging it when handling
the slats. Adjust it when reinstalling it.
5 - INSTALLATION
A - Installation of removed slat
-Preparation for installation.

-Checking and maintenance of parts before assembly:
-on the slat:
-visually inspect it for impact and corrosion traces,
-clean tracks and drive fittings with white spirit, then dry them,
-grease the tracks,
-check that the tracks are securely held on the slats;
-on the aircraft:
-clean teflon-lined ball joints of drive actuators AT1 and AT2 with a dry rag.
AA
- Checking and maintenance of connections

- Make sure that the roller retainer rings are in place.
- Thoroughly clean and dry the various fasteners.
- Check that the surfaces of parts are in perfect condition.
- Sparingly lubricate hinges.
IMPORTANT :
Do not apply oil or grease to teflon-lined spherical bearings.
-Installation of slat
- Offer up the slat on the leading edge.
- Slide the slat along its tracks and make sure there is no abnormal friction point.
- Align the bores of drive fittings AT1 and AT2 with those of the actuator spherical bearings.
- Install pins and teflon washers 2 (on pin head side), taking care to correctly engage the
pin head in the flat of drive fitting 4.
- Tighten and lock the nut.
- Check the slat adjustment (see 04-4).
FINAL STEPS (see para. 6)
B Installation of a replacement slat
Slats are delivered ready for installation. The blanking plates 1 of the outer actuator, which are
supplied with the slats, are to be adjusted and attached.
- Preparation for installation

Checking and maintenance of parts before assembly (see para. 5-A).
- Installation of slat
Offer up the slotted slat on the leading edge, engaging the tracks on the rollers.
- Align the bores of drive fittings 4 (AT1 and AT2) with those of the actuator spherical
bearings ; temporarily pin them.
NOTE : A certain amount-of force may have to be applied to the slat to align the bores, due to signifi¬
cant warping of the slat.
- Uncouple the control shaft at the output of the gearmotor after disabling the hydraulic
operation of the control (see 04-4).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «JX-iMS. #Y\ll\/-\VjrC. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^&^ ^5<^> ..ami i ai no
^ .^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
-Retract the slat by manually rotating the drive shaft by means of the crank handle. Dur¬
ing this operation, check for absence of abnormal resistance. Otherwise, determine the cause.
-Bring the slat to the 0° position (value of 104 ± 0.5 mm (4.094 ± 0.02 in) at track
R1).
-Check for 104 ± 0.5 mm (4.094 ± 0.02 in) at track R4 and adjust if necessary.
-Check the clearance at jack AT1 (see manual 04-4: installation of slotted slat jacks).
-Fully retract the slat, then check that the slat is in abutment at drive jack AT1 (jack
stop); the dimension between zeroing marks on track R1 should be 102 mm (4.016 in).
- Perform the same check at track R4 and ensure (by rotating the drive shaft a few times)
that no resistance is felt as the AT1 jack stop is approached.
Attach the blanking plates of the outer jack:

-position blanking plate 1 so as to give even clearance at the surrounds,
-make a hole in the blanking plate and the slat,
-adjust the blanking plate so as to give a minimum clearance of 4 mm (0.157 in) at the
rear edge when the slat is at the zero position (104 mm dimension (4.094 in) at the zeroing
marks of tracks 1 and 4),
-cement (with araldite) and screw the blanking plate onto the slat.
NOTE: If there is doubt about the position of the slat during the operations described above,
pin it (in the zero position):
- separate the slat from the jacks by moving the slat to the position which permits this
and remove it.
The slat is pinned through a hole in the rear roller holder fitting on tracks R1 and R4
(see figure). This requires, for each of these tracks, the removal of a roller and its
holder.
- track 1 : removal of roller, grease nipple and inner roller holder on wing tip side
- track 4: removal of roller, grease nipple plus its adapter, and inner roller holder on fu¬
selage side.
-Put the slat back into place on the leading edge.

-Move the slat to pin it.
-Then ensure that any difference in the alignment of the bores of the slat fitting and jack
clevises does not exceed 0.5 mm (0.019 in).
-Remove the slat.
- Remove the, pinning tools and reinstall the roller holders.
-Reinstall the slat and finish fitting the slat-to-jack connecting pins (see para. 5-A).
-Reconnect the drive shaft and check slat adjustment (see 04-4).
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Lubricate the slat hinges.

-Check deflection and operation and, if necessary, adjust the slat microswitch (see 04-4).
AA
01 - 87 Restricted 1 - 31 8H
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Bec mobile
Movable slat
Bec fixe
Fixed slat
Brochage
Pinning
COUPE AU NIVEAU D'UNE ATTAQUE DE COMMANDE(AT2)

SECTION AT LEVEL OF A DRIVE (AT2)
4 mm
(Position 0° )
_, 4 mm
COUPE AU NIVEAU D'UN RAIL(R1) COUPE A
SECTION AT LEVEL OF A TRACK (RI) SECTION A
Repère de mise à zéro. AT1 - AT2
Zero resetting marks
Trou de brochage
Pinning hole
BROCHAGE BEC Faux porte galet , Broche 0 4
(Coupe au repère B) Dummy roller holder / Pin 4
ct>
PINNING OF SLAT
(Section at B)
Forme intrados Porte d'accès à déposer (V3.1 1 )
Lower surface profile (V1.15aurail 1)

Access door to be removed (V3. 1 1)
(VI. 15 to track 1)
FIGURE 16 - DEPOSE-POSE D'UN BEC A FENTE

AA REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF A SLOTTED SLAT
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 ^ Jl ** lYlIlN/AVJ'L.
BREGUET AVIATION û-
^-» êï»»»^.
^=o .
Restricted kaamiiai
MANUAL 03no
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF INBOARD AND OUTBOARD WING FLAPS

(figure 10)
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CVC
B - Standard tools
-Extra-thin open-end wrench kit

-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 and 40 to 350 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350
ft.lb).
-7.3 mm dia. reamer
-1 15-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply

D - Spares
-Two pins 2331 0 AA 01 501 2 L

-Two pins 23310 AA 020020 L
-Two pins 2331 0 AA 01 501 5 L
-Tabwasher for retaining rod pin
-Nut 6 RH8035
-Blanking plug for access to outer rod pin of outboard flap
2 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Grease AIR 4210 or 4222
-Oil Air 3512
- Loctite 675
Extend the wing flaps completely.

-
-Extend the spoilers on the side of the flap to be removed.
-Remove access doors VO.bl, V2.62, V2.66 and the protective fairing of the retaining rod
on the flap.
AB
01 - 88 Restricted 1 - 31 9
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /.
BREGUET AVIATION ____
. . -v-"
__
-, "Vi MIRAGE F
4- REMOVAL
A Inboard wing flap
- Separate locking rod 25 from the flap (wrench M31030). Maintain the flap, drive out the axle
pin, disconnect the grounding wire.
- Uncouple the center skid.
- Remove the nuts from the skid screws.
- Drive out the screws with a drift, while holding the skid to take the force of the blow.
This is necessary because the screws are tight-fitted.
- If applicable, recover the shim inserted between the center skids.
- Immobilize the outboard flap onto the center track.
- Uncouple center rod 32 (skid side).
- Lower the flap as far as possible.
- Remove the retaining ring from rod 32 axle pin.
- Remove the slotted nut (wrench M31037).
- Withdraw the axle pin.
- Pull the flap slightly to the rear, level with the center track, so as to offset the flap and disengage
the skid from the inboard track ; access can thus be gained to skid-to-rod connecting pin 30.
- Remove the pin (7 mm open-end wrench). Recover the teflon washer.
- Realign the flap so that it can be slid and disengaged from the tracks.
B Outboard wing flap
- Disengage the center skid (see removal of inboard flap).

- Disconnect outer rod 31 (bellcrank end), using a 10 mm open-end wrench.
- Withdraw the pin, recover the teflon washer.
- Lower the flap to the maximum.
- Remove the flap from the tracks, guiding the rod during the operation.
5- REPLACING AN INBOARD OR OUTBOARD WING FLAP
A Parts to be taken from the removed flap
The flap control rods are part of the control linkage. Therefore, fora replacement, it is necessary
to recover the rods from the- removed flap and to fit them to the new one.
( 1 ) Removal of rods (see fig. 10)
- Inboard flap inner rod (detail J, section E)

- Remove the nut (7 mm open-end wrench).
- Withdraw the pin.
- Disengage the rod.
- Outboard flap outer rod (detail G, section C)
- Remove the nut (10 mm open-end wrench).
- Remove the washer.
- Remove the pin.
- Disengage the rod.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" « IV\II\/-\V^7L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^t^
^>, c*?-=^
^ff-»^ Restricted kaamiiai
MANUAL no
03
B - Supply of a replacement flap
Replacement flaps are supplied with:
(1 ) Retaining rod covers (attachment holes not drilled) and the supports on the flap lower
side.
(2) The slide skids mounted on their ball joints. (The half-skid assembly screws are neither
tightened or locked). On the spare skids, the assembly centering pins are fitted temporarily and
are to be removed after tightening the screws.
(3) A set of assembly shims fitted to the central rail.
NOTE: There are two different kinds of flap skid-ball joint assemblies each having a different
ball diameter.
Consequently, to avoid confusion, a reference letter R or R1 is stamped on each part
(skid and ball-joint). A red spot is added to this reference for the R1 category.
C - Preliminary steps for a replacement flap
(1 ) Inspection and conditioning of parts prior to assembly

-Carefully wipe the various parts.
-Check that sufaces are in perfect condition (no dents or corrosion).
-Oil the skid ball-joints.
CAUTION:
THE TEFLON BALL-JOINTS SHOULD NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH OIL OR
GREASE.
(2) Skid attachment

-On skids equipped with pins, check that the pins for holding the hald-skids in place dur¬
ing assembly are In position.
-Tighten the half-skid assembly screws to a torque of:
-0.35 m.daN (2.581 ft.lb) for the inboard flap inboard skid,
-0.7 m.daN (5.162 ft.lb) for the inboard flap outboard skid,
-0.7 m.daN (5.162 ft.lb) for the outboard flap inboard skid,
-0.35 m.daN (2.581 ft.lb) for the outboard flap outboard skid.
- Remove assembly pins.
-Safety the skid assembly screw nuts:
-fuselage or wing side (according to the flap installed) - safety by means of three
punch indentations (see repair manual),
-central rail side - fold down the locking tab best lined up with the hexagonal head
sides.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ>~irÇL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF3^^"^ . .........
(3) Installation of link rods
On the outboard flap :

- Outer link rod 31 (detail G, section C)
- Position link rod in its skid (the flat side of the yoke, bellcrank end, should be on the lower
surface side).
- Grease the pin lightly then push home (countersunk head).
- Fit the washer.
- Tighten the nut (spanner 10 mm A/F).
- Install safety pin.
On the inboard flap :

Inner link rod 30 (detail J, section E)
- Position link rod in its skid (the flat side of the yoke, bellcrank end, should be on the upper
surface side).
Grease the pin lightly then push home (flat correctly positioned).
- Tighten the nut (spanner 7 mm A/F).
(4) Adjustment of flap on wing (see 04-4)
(5) Adaptation of the fairing of the retaining link rod

Screw the fairing supports onto the lower surface skin of the flap (Do not tighten the main
support attachment screws in order to allow for any transverse adjustment of the fairing).
- Pin the fairing on the supports.
- Temporarily install the flap. (Follow the installation instructions given in para. 6, but without
installing permanently).
- With the flaps in, check the alignment of the new flap (see 04-4).
- Position the fairing in such a way that the play between the fairing and the retaining link rod
fairing is a minimum 4 mm (0.157").
- Adjust the front edge of the flap fairing to match up with the rear face of the link rod fairing
(play :2 mm -0.079").
- Complete, as required, the adaptation of the fairing to the lower skin profile.
Mark the correct position of the fairing.
- Remove the fairing and tighten the support attachment screws.
- Mark the attachment screw holes so that the fairing is not in contact with the lower skin surface
(clearance 1 ,5 mm - 0.059") .
- Tighten fairing.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 ^ " vl /Y\ll\/~\V_7l_
BREGUET AVIATION ^W=** ^=*^> a/iamiiai
^«. -^^> .
Restricted MANUAL no
03
6 - INSTALLATION
NOTE: If both the inboard and outboard flaps are to be installed, start with the inboard flap
and connect it to the drive link rods, then install the outboard flap by connecting it to
the outer drive link rod and assembling its central skid on the inboard flap skid.
A - Inboard flap
-Position the flap in down and slightly biased position with inner link rod 30 folded back
90°. Engage the outer skid on the central rail first and connect link rod 32 to the skid (see A
(1 )), then engage the inner skid in its rail and connect link rod 30 (see A (2)).
(1 ) Installation of inboard flap outer link rod 32

-Position the link rod in the central skid (adjustable yoke, skid end).
-Lightly coat the pin, then drive home.
-Tighten the slotted nut (spanner M31037).
(If the pin is new, drill the locking ring hole after marking with the nut tightened. After
assembly, check that the end of the pin is at least 0.4 mm (0.016") from the skid installa¬
tion plane.
-Fit the lock ring.
(2) Installation of the inner link rod 30 on the inner bellcrank

-Lightly grease the pin, then partly push in (pin head on upper surface side).
-Install the teflon washer between the link rod and the yoke, nut side.
-Drive the pin fully home (position flat correctly).
-Tighten the nut (spanner 7 mm A/F).
(3) Retaining link rod 25 coupling

-Match up the link rod with its attachment point on the inboard flap.
-Lightly grease the pin then drive home (fait on yoke).
-Install lock washer.
-Tighten the castellated plug (spanner M31030).
-Safety plug.
B - Outboard flap
(1 ) Position the outboard flap with its link rod 31 pointing towards its passage in the struc¬
ture. Engage the inner and outer skids on their respective rails with the flap in a lowered and
slightly biased position. Slide the flap into position manually until it matches up with the link
rod-bellcrank pin.
(2) Installation of link rod 31 on outer bellcrank

Lightly grease the pin, then partly push in (pin head on lower surface side - flat on yoke).
Install the teflon washer between the yoke and the link rod (pin head end). Drive home the
pin (position flat correctly). Tighten the nut (spanner 10 mm A/F). Install safety pin.
(3) Assembly of inboard flap outer skid and outboard flap inner skid
-Match up the attachment holes with the assembly screws.
-Depending on the assembly, install shims between the skids with the chamfer to the
rear.
-Install assembly screws. (When fitting tight fitting screws, couter-blow is necessary).
7 - FINAL STEPS
-Check the safetying.
-Proceed to wing flap hinge maintenance (see 04-4).
-Check for correct deflection and operation (see 04-4).
-Reinstall removed doors and fairings, bond the blanking plug for the access hole to the
pin of the central drive link rod with loctite.
AB .
01-85 Restricted | 1 -322T
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ^>^-rVL ti MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^cZc. __
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF SPOILERS

(figure 12)
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350 ft.lb)
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 and 40 to 350 ft.lb).

- Electrical power supply, 1 1 5/200 V - 400 Hz
C Spares
- Blanking plugs for access to pins of spoiler control link rods
- 10 locking pins 23310 AA 015020 L
- 1 0 locking pins 2331 0 AA 020020 L
2- MATERIALS
-Mastinox 6856 H
-Neutral petrolatum Air 3565
-Oil Air 351 2
PRELIMINARY STEPS
- Open the spoiler to be removed until the link rod pin matches the clearance hole.
- Remove the plugs for access to control link rod pins of inboard and outboard spoilers.
4- REMOVAL
(Outboard and inboard spoilers)
- Disconnect both bonding braids.

- Disconnect the drive fitting pins, on bellcrank side.
- Remove the locking pin.
- Remove the nut (17 mm socket).
- Extract the pin through the lower surface access hole.
- Recover the teflon washer.
- Close the spoiler.
- Remove the hinge attaching screws on wing side, and mark the location of screws.
- Remove the spoiler.
NOTE : When removing an outboard spoiler? mark drive fitting pin 5 which is slightly shorter than
the others.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT j> ^-"-« MIRAGE
iTiii\nvi. iF
BREGUET AVIATION ^^_- ^s~=.^ _ . mi i ai
«a a no
^-«v. ^* ^. Restricted MANUAL 03
5 - REPLACING AN INBOARD OR OUTBOARD SPOILER

A - Spoiler control link rods are part of the bellcranks. Consequently, when replacing a
spoiler, it is necessary to remove link rods from the removed spoiler and reinstall them on the
new spoiler.
The hinge components on the wing side are part of the spoiler (interchangeability is en¬
sured at wing/hinge attachment point).
B - Remove link rods (22 mm ring wrench - 13 mm open-end wrench).
C - Reinstall link rods onto spare spoilers.
-Carefully wipe the various assembly parts.
-Check for perfect surface condition of components.
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE ON LINK ROD BALL JOINTS (TEFLON-COATED BALL
JOINTS).
(2) Installing link rods
-Offer up each link rod in its drive fitting on spoiler (flat for pin positioning, lower surface
side).
-Slightly lubricate the pin; then, fit it partially (pin head, inboard side).
-Install the teflon washer.
-Drive the pin fully home.
-Install the washer. Screw and tighten the nut (13 mm wrench). Then, pin.
6 - INSTALLING SPOILERS
A - Preliminary steps - Checking - Maintenance
-Before reinstalling spoilers, check the hinge attaching screws.
-Lubricate hinge pins.
B - Installing inboard and outboard spoilers
-Prior to spoiler installation, apply a light coat of Mastinox under each hinge (wing side).
-Install the spoiler and simultaneously, offer up each link rod on its bellcrank.
-For each hinge point.
-Slightly grease each link rod-to-bellcrank attaching pin; then, engage it partially.
CAUTION:
DTCTVE FITTING PIN 5 IS SHORTER THAN THE OTHERS.
-Install the teflon washer
-Drive the pin fully home, taking care to correctly engage the pin head onto the link
rod flat.
-Screw and tighten the nut (22 mm wrench). Then, pin.
-Close the spoiler.
-Coat the shank and head of each attaching screw with Mastinox.
- Proceed to hinge attachment.
-Secure both bonding braids.
7 - FINAL STEPS
-Check for correct safetying.
-Proceed to spoiler hinge checking and maintenance (see 04-1).
-Check for correct deflection and operation (see 04-1 ).
-Check for satisfactory adjustment of spoilers (flushing) (see 04-1-528 - figure 21 - de¬
tail E).
-Install blanking plugs.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" ^ /Y\II\/-\VJT_. F
BREGUET AVIATION ZZsÂ~~
^«. ^=?-ô
>s^ Restricted haamiiai no
MANUAL 03
METHOD FOR PRESETTING AND INSTALLING TAPER PINS

OF CONTROL SURFACES (AILERONS AND RUDDER)
A - Special tools
-Flight control 1st line tool kit.
-Ring and plug gauge kit 50MS1304.
-Additional ring and plug gauge kit 50MS212.
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-INDIA stone.
2 - MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4222 or 4210.
-White Spirit.
-Crocus cloth.
3 - SPARES
-Aileron repair-size sulfinuzed bush F11814823N1.

-Rudder repair-size sulfinuzed bush F31102813N1.
4 - GENERAL
The method for pre-setting and installing taper pins applies for the main hinge of aileron
and rudder. Method described below covers only rudder hinge and should be adapted for the
aileron.
Main difference existing between attachments of these hinges is that:

-aileron hinging is directly made on a fixed bearing (integral with wing),
-rudder hinging is made through a removable shackle.
Therefore, all operations described with shackle should be carried-out for the aileron by
positioning it on wing unit.
5 - INSPECTING THE VARIOUS HINGE PARTS

A - Pin equipped
(1 ) Sulfinuzed bush
-Check part for perfect surface condition and, if necessary, remove any trace of dent or
burr, by a slight polishing with India stone.
-Check for presence of chamfers on internal diameter and for absence of sharp edges on
outer diameter (and if applicable, polish with India stone, then, with crocus cloth).
(2) Sleeve
-Check sleeve for condition as above.
-Check for presence of chamfers and absence of sharp edge (specially in slot).
(3) Taper pin, washer and nut

-Similar checks as in paragraph (1 ).
AB
01 -87 Restricted 1 -501
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl ** / Y \ 1\ /"\ W L. l
1
breguet aviation Û -~ /ta*,**/ MANUAL 03
B - On control surface drive fitting
(1 ) Fitting bore
-Check bore for surface condition: slight scratches can be smoothened with crocus cloth.
-Check that chamfers have been made on bronze bushing (s).
-Check surface condition of side faces of above bushing(s) and smooth off any dent or
scratch as necessary by light polishing with stone.
C - On structure
(1 ) Aileron bearing
-Check bushings for condition: slight scratches can be smoothened with crocus cloth.
(2) Rudder shackle

-Check bores and internal and external faces for surface condition, and for presence of
chamfers.
D - Cleaning
-Carefully clean the various hinge parts using White Spirit and dry them.
6 - POSITIONING THE PARTS ON AIRCRAFT HINGED BRACKET
A - Slightly grease:
-sleeve,
-shackle bore.
B - Fit sleeve in its bore ; then using a 4/1 00th mm (0.0015 in) thick shim gauge, check
that flange perfectly bears on shackle side face. If this bearing is defective, deburr:
-either bore chamfer,
-or recess intended to lock sleeve against rotation.
C - Position recessed washer on sleeve and check it does not bear on shackle side face.
D - Slightly grease sulfinuzed bush:

-check it fits easily on sleeve,
-then, install it in control surface drive fitting.
E - Proceed with positioning of drive fitting still equipped with its sulfinuzed bush and install
sleeve, pin, recessed washer and tighten nut to a torque comprised between 0.5 and 1 m.daN
(3.7 and 7.3 ft.lb). Check, then, that shackle can move freely and has a lateral clearance felt
by hand. Min. 0.04 mm (0.0015 in).
7 - PRE-SETTING
A Check of bronze bush bore

-Use the set of plus gauge numbered 1 to 9 contained in the case. The bush bore must
be perfectly clean and grease-free. The plug gauges must be wiped with a clean cloth.
-Insert plug gauge No. 1 into the bore ; it should enter the bronze bush over its whole
length.
-Then insert plug gauge No. 2 and so on until a gauge not entering the whole length of
the bush is found.
AB
i
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H TV_/L_* /V\ll\/-\v^r_ I
^.
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^=-^3
^=-^3 .
Restricted , ....,,.»«
MANUAL 03
-For presetting, then use the ring gauge bearing the same number as the last fully en¬
gaged plug gauge.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
IF PLUG GAUGE No. 6 ENTERS OVER THE WHOLE LENGTH OF THE BRONZE BUSH,
SUCCESSIVELY INSERT THE PLUG GAUGES BEARING HIGHER NUMBERS AS DE¬
SCRIBED BELOW.
-Insertion of plug gauge No. 7; four cases may occur:

-the cylindrical side does not enter over the whole length of the bronze bush and
the flat side does not enter by more than 5 mm (0.19 in). Then reinstall the original sulfi¬
nuzed bush and use ring gauge No. 6 for presetting,
-the cylindrical side does not enter over thé whole length and the flat side enters
over more than 5 mm (0.19 in).
The elongation is then greater than 0.020 mm (0.0008 in): reinstallation of the
control surface is prohibited, send it to the next higher repair line,
-the cylindrical side enters over the whole length of the bronze bush and the flat
side does not enter over more than 5 mm (0.19 in). Insert plug gauge No. 8 (see hereafter),
-the cylindrical side enters over the whole length and the flat side enters over more
than 5 mm (0.19 in).
Accurately measure the actual elongation of the bore using a SUBITO type tow-
point hole gauge.
-If the elongation is greater than 0.020 mm (0.0008 in), reinstallation of the
control surface is prohibited, send it to the next higher repair line.
-If the elongation is less than 0.020 mm (0.0008 in), insert plug gauge No. 8.
-Insertion of plug gauges No. 8 and on:

-plug gauge No. 8 does not enter over the whole length of the bronze bush: then
install the repair-size sulfinuzed bush and use ring gauge No. 7 for presetting,
-plug gauge No. 8 enters over the whole length of the bronze bush: insert plug
gauge No. 9,
-plug gauge No. 9 does not enter over the whole length of the bronze bush: then
install the repair-size sulfinuzed bush and use ring gauge No. 8 for presetting,
-plug gauge No. 9 enters over the whole length of the bronze bush: reinstallation of
the control surface is prohibited, send it to the next higher repair line.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]" ^ -" « '" "t^r^KJfL.
BREGUET AVIATION ^<£i_~- .^-ô _ . ^ , kaamiiai no
*^5T^ Restncted MANUAL 03
B - In the shackle, fit:

-the previously determined ring gauge,
-the original or repair-size sulfinuzed bush, as required,
-the sleeve,
-the taper pin,
-the recessed washer,
-the nut.
All these parts shall be slightly lubricated. Remove the excess grease with a white lint-
free cloth. Take care to prevent grease from entering between the sulfinuzed bush and ring
gauge.
C - Determination of presetting
IMPORTANT NOTE:
riGHTENING IS CRITICAL. THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE OBSERVED.
(1 ) Tighten the nut until the ring gauge can no longer be moved (without marking this posi¬
tion).
(2) Unscrew the nut and, using the extractor, pull the taper pin out.
(3) Repeat the two operations above (1 and 2).
(4) Slowly tighten the nut until the sulfinuzed bush reaches the ring gauge diameter (when
the ring gauge, which at start was freely rotating, begins to tighten).
(5) Then note the protrusion of the taper pin with respect to the sleeve. If the hinge compo¬
nents are new, mark the position of the nut in relation to the pin by two light bu visible punch
marks.
NOTE: The punch marks may be found offset if the reinstalled hinge components are the same
as those removed (due to wear) or if one of the components is changed (due to mat¬
ing part tolerance change). In this case, remove one of the existing punch marks and
apply a new mark matching the retained mark. II a new taper pin with no split pin hole
is fitted, drill this pin hole.
8 - FINAL SETTING WITHOUT TOOL

(1 ) Disassemble the assembly and then fit back the following in the shackle:
-the sulfinuzed bush,
-the sleeve,
-the taper pin,
-the recessed washer,
-the nut.
(2) Progressively tighten the nut and note its position when^the sleeve can no longer be
moved sideways by hand and when the sulfinuzed bush is secured on the sleeve (it can no
longer be rotated by hand).
(3) Both positions shall correspond to a nut tightening lower by at least 1/2 turn than that
corresponding to the markings made in paragraph C (5).
-Should this condition not be met, repeat the operations described in paragraph C.
9 - FINAL INSTALLATION
A - Disassemble the assembly and lubricate:
-the external section of the sulfinuzed bush,
-the internal section of the drive fitting bronze bush.
B - Reinstall the assembly on the rudder and tighten the nut until the position marked in par¬
agraph C (5) is reached, then fit a split pin.
REMARKS: When reassembling with a previously drilled taper pin, slightly tighten beyond the
mark to reach the split pin hole if the holes fail to match.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
yz/A
Mesure de l'alésage avec tampon cylindrique

Bore measurement with cylindrical gauge
Contrôle de l'ovalisation
avec tampon plat n 7 à présenter des deux côtés
dans plusieurs positions
Check of elongation
with flat gauge No. 7 (to be applied on either side
and in several positions)
Pré-réglage avec bague outillage

Presetting with ring gauge
Bague outillage Repérage par coup de pointeau des

Ring gauge positions de l'axe et de l'écrou
Punch-marking of pin and nut
positions
FIGURE - PRE-REGLAGE DES AXES CONIQUES

PRESETTING OF TAPER PINS
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L«-*>-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HINGES ON A REMOVED AILERON

(figure 1 1 )
1 - SCOPE
To check the condition of the various hinge components.
- India stone
- Crocus cloth
3- MATERIALS
- Approved chlorinated solvent.

-Grease Air 4210.
Separate the various hinge point components. Bushes and spherical bearings tight-fitted onto
fittings shall not be removed.
Normally, the spherical bearing inner ring of the outboard hinge bracket shall not be removed.
Should its removal be deemed necessary for inspection (binding point, visible scratches), note the
assembly direction.
Cleaning
Thoroughly clean all the hinge components, then dry them.
5- PROCEDURE
(1) Inboard hinge bracket
(a) Bushes of fittings (wings-ailerons)
Check for :
- insertion and proper seating of the flange on the fitting,
-surface condition of side faces : smooth off any impact marks or scratches by polishing lightly
with India stone,
- corrosion : remove if any,
- sharp edges,
- surface condition of bush bores : a maximum loss of 20% of the theoretical bearing surface due
to contact corrosion and scratches is permissible, provided that the remainging 80% is evenly distributed.
Check proper condition of the rivet securing the metal aileron fitting bushes.
On the single bush fitted to carbon fiber ailerons :

-check that flange 26 - at the end of the bush - is correctly positioned against the fitting (overlap :
0.2 to 0.3 mm (0.008 to 0.012 in) in relation to the bush).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^lirU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^rjaF'L--^^ . miamiiai no
Perform a dimensional check of the aileron fitting bush bores using the plug gauges of kit MS1304
(Method and criteria, see 03-1-501).
(b) Taper pin 9, slotted sleeve 10
the taper bearing surfaces of the pin and sleeve.

- Inspect
- Smooth out all scratches perceptible to the fingernail.
- Remove all traces of corrosion.
- Remove all traces of corrosion from the pin and nut threads.
- Check for sharp edges on the outer face of the sleeve, specially on the sleeve slot lips : trim, if
necessary, by lightly polishing with India stone, then with crocus cloth.
(c) Sufinuzed sleeve 8
Inspect the bore which must be free from any traces of fretting.
-
Inspect the outer section : only scratches not perceptible to the fingernail and disappearance
-
of the sulfinuzation over 50% max of the surface are permissible, but no traces of metal tearing are
tolerated.
(2) Outboard hinge bracket (DETAI L E)
(a) Aileron fitting bushes
Check for :
- insertion and correct seating of the flange on the fitting,
- surface condition of side faces : smooth out any dents or scratches by lightly polishing with
India stone, and remove any traces of corrosion,
- any sharp edges ; smooth out if necessary,
- surface condition of the bores : a maximum loss of 20% of the theoretical bearing surface due
to contact corrosion and scratches is permissible, provided that the remaining 80% is evenly distributed.
Smooth out the scratches by stoning and remove all traces of corrosion with crocus cloth.
(b) Spherical bearing
Check for :
- insertion (tight) in fitting,
-surface condition of inner ring bore (scratches, traces of impact), no sharp edges ; trim, if
necessary, by lightly polishing with India stone, then with crocus cloth,
- corrosion : remove if necessary,
- traces of seizing between bronze bush and ball joint,
- surface condition of side faces,
- free nutation : no binding point (nutation torque between 0.1 and 1.2 m.daN).
(c) Pin 12 and nut
Check for :
- condition of threads on pin and nut,
- traces of friction between pin and spacer. bush 5,
- play between pin and fitting bushes (tight insertion).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-à^^rÇL
BREGUET AVIATION^^SF0^-^4^
MIRAGE F
(d) Spacer bush 5
Inspect the bore and outer face of the bush.

- No traces of fretting are permissible.
- Smooth out the scratches by stoning.
(3) Aileron drive fitting 4
Check for :
-surface condition of side faces : smooth out any dents or scratches by lightly polishing with India
stone,
- sharp edges,
- surface condition of bores,
- condition of Teflon washer cemented to one of the bushes.
6 - FINAL STEPS
- Grease all hinge components.

- Reinstall the control surface (see 03-1).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
/L-i^TU.
_
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HINGES ON A REMOVED DROOP SLAT
1 - SCOPE
- To check the condition of the various hinge components.
-India stone
- Smooth file
- Crocus cloth
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV "I
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C1 50LV J" ° '
- Scraper Sicametal (Widia) P/N 564 with carbide inserts TH10 Widia
- Rotary carbide cutters HF103Z3 Lukas
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Oil Air 3512
Clean all the hinge components, paying particular attention to the bores of the half-hinges ; then
dry them. Teflon-lined hinges shall be wiped with a dry lintless cloth. For cleaning of titanium parts,
comply with the special instructions.
CAUTION :
IN NO CASE SHOULD TITANIUM PARTS BE CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS
(drive fitting). USE WHITE SPIRIT.
5- PROCEDURE
(1) Drive fittings
Check for :
- condition and attachment,
- condition of pins,
- surface condition of bores and side faces : no impact marks, scratches or sharp edges ; smooth off
if necessary,
- condition of teflon washers ; replace them if required.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION î.
n^J^^rU
__
MIRAGE F
Titanium is very sensitive to notching, it is therefore essential to cancel this prejudicial effect.
Small dents or scratches shall be reduced by carefully polishing the surface with a smooth file or silicon
carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV (used dry). For finishing, use silicon carbide stone, grade
Crystolon 39C150LV (used dry). A rotary carbide cutter and carbide scraper can also be used instead of
the above-mentioned tools.
CAUTION :
WHEN TOUCHING UP TITANIUM PARTS, IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE ALUMINA-
BASED INDIA STONE, POLISHING OR GRINDING.
(2) Half-hinges
Check for :
- condition of pin : wear, scratches etc.
Position the pin in each half-hinge (wing and slat), then gauge the play existing between the
two parts by appraisal and manual feel.
(3) Drive rods
Check for :
- spherical bearing :
-swaging,
- condition of airf Ion coating on the spherical section of the outer ring (absence of separation
and fraying),
-surface condition of bore and spherical section of inner ring (scratches, dents...), no sharp
edges,
corrosion,
-
- manually check that the inner ring rotates without friction and that there is no play or
binding point.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Oil the pin and bores of half-hinges.

DO NOT LUBRICATE TEFLON PARTS (GREASE OR OIL).
- Reinstall droop slats (see 03-1 ).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^-^ru MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HINGES ON A REMOVED SLOTTED SLAT
1 - SCOPE
- India stone
- Smooth file
- Crocus cloth
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV "I .
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C1 50LV J

- Scraper Sicametal (Widia) P/N 564 with carbide inserts TH 10 Widia
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Grease Air 4210
Thoroughly clean all the hinge components and structure boxes, then dry them. For cleaning
of titanium parts, comply with the special instructions.
CAUTION :
(e.g. : tracks). USE WH ITE SPI R IT.
5- PROCEDURE
(1) On slotted slat
(a) Drive fittings
Check for :
-condition and attachment,
- correct insertion of bushes, surface condition of bores and side faces ; if necessary, smooth
off any impact marks or scratches by lightly polishing with India stone,
- corrosion : to be removed if any,
- condition of teflon washers,
- play between pin and bushes.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^J^^rSJL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^cF^^Ô ,
^£5^~<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) Tracks
Check for :
- attachment,
- surface condition of races : no marking, no dent, scratch or sharp edge ; smooth off if required.
Titanium is very sensitive to notching. It is therefore essential to cancel this prejudicial effect.
carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV (used dry). For finishing, use silicon carbide stone, grade
Crystolon 39C150LV (used dry).
A rotary carbide cutter and carbide scraper can also be used instead of the above-mentioned tools.
CAUTION :
WHEN TOUCHING UP TITANIUM PARTS, IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE ALUMINA-
BASED INDIA STONE, POLISHING OR GRINDING.
(2) On fixed slat
(a) Track bearings
Check for :
- condition and attachment of ribs,
- condition and attachment of rollers : free rotation, no binding point, no corrosion,
- condition and attachment of teflon blanking parts.
6- FINAL STEPS
Grease :
all components including slat tracks (see 04-4).
-
DO NOT LUBRICATE TEFLON PARTS (OIL OR GREASE).
- Reinstall slotted slats (see 03-1).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Li*-^! MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF°^-^ »,mu ai no
a
INSPECTION OF HINGES AND LOWER AND

UPPER SURFACE SKINS ON A REMOVED SPOILER
1 - SCOPE
- To check the condition of the various hinge components and the Klegecell for proper bonding on
the outer skin and the inner cover plate at the cutouts.
- India stone
- Smooth file
- Crocus cloth
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C150LV } or
- Scraper Sicametal (Widia) P/N 564 with carbide inserts TH 10 Widia

3 - MATERIALS
- White spirit or Diestone S
-Oil Air 3512
Clean all the hinge components, paying particular attention to the bores of the half-hinges ;
then dry them. Teflon-lined hinges shall be wiped with a dry lintless cloth. For cleaning of titanium
parts, comply with the special instructions.
CAUTION :
(drive fittings).. USE WHITE SPI RIT.
5 - PROCEDURE
A Drive fittings
Check for :
-condition and attachment,

- correct insertion of bushes, surface condition of bores and side faces : no impact marks, scratches
or sharp edges ; smooth off if necessary,
- condition of Teflon washers ; replace them if required.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^^»3
MIRAGE F
Titanium is very sensitive to notch effect ; it is, therefore, essential to cancel this harmful effect.
carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV (used dry). For finishing, polish with silicon carbide stone,
grade Crystolon 39C150LV (used dry). A rotary carbide cutter and carbide scraper can also be used
instead of the above-mentioned tools.
CAUTION :
FOR TOUCHUP OF TITANIUM PARTS, IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE ALUMINA-

BASE «INDIA» STONE, SANDING OR GRINDING.
B Half-hinges
Check of clearances :
On each hinge :
- Hold the spoiler properly secured on a bench.

- Push the free half-hinge toward the spoiler.
- Using a set of feeler gauges, measure clearanceA between the end of the free half-hinge and the
spoiler structure.
- Pull the free half-hinge away from the spoiler and measure clearance A'.
The difference between both clearances. A' A, should not exceed 0.8 mm (0.031 in).
oom op
ooo ^ o o o o
oooo 000' 00
|b
é\ 4\l^ ( ^> Clee
A-A
SECTION BB
Separation area
/ D O O O
Separation area
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti -à>-"-U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^}. ^ . .,..,,,., n,
- Remove the pins.
Check :
- condition of the half-hinges and fasteners,

- condition of the pins (wear, scratches, etc.).
C Drive link rods
- Check for :
- condition and attachment of the link rods,

- condition of the self-aligning bearing :
- fitment,
- surface condition of bore and inner ring (scratches, dents, no sharp edges, etc.),
- corrosion,
- swiveling and free rotation : no binding points.
D Outer skin and inner cover plate
At each cutout, check for any separation between the skin and Klegecell as well as between the
inner cover plate and Klegecell. If separation is detected, refer to the Repair Manual.
6 - FINAL STEPS
- Oil the half-hinge pin and bores.

DO NOT LUBRICATE TEFLON PARTS (OIL OR GREASE).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL-J>^-t1
BREGUET AVIATION^
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HINGES ON A REMOVED FLAP
1 - SCOPE
To check the condition of the various hinge components.
- Crocus cloth
- India stone
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit
- Grease Air 4210
-Oil Air 3512
- Thoroughly clean all the hinge components, then dry them.
WARNING:
TITANIUM PARTS (skid support ribs and rollers) SHOULD IN NO CASE BE CLEANED WITH
CHLORINATED SOLVENTS. USE WHITE SPIRIT.
5 -CHECK
(1) Self-aligning skid
Check for :
: play-free swiveling of skids,
- condition of friction surfaces : if necessary, smooth off scratches with a stone ; check for signs of
irregular wear,
- correct safetying condition,
- condition of bores of control rod connecting clevises.
(2) Secondary skid (on inner skid support rib - inboard flap)
Check for :
- proper crimping of the skid retaining plug,
- condition of friction surfaces : if necessary, smooth off scratches with India stone.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULtJ^-^jI /VIIKMV^C I
BREGUET AVIATION^<^F°<^»ï> M A MM Al m
^2^*"^^. Restricted MANUAL 03
(3) Rollers
Check for :
- rotation without binding point and noticeable play (axial and radial)
- condition and attachment of roller retaining circlip (old method) or retaining plug
- oxidation.
(4) Drive rods and connecting pins
Check for :
- dents, friction or corrosion
- correct safetying of locknuts and condition of retainers
- spherical bearing :
- swaging, condition of airflon coating on the outer ring (no separation or fraying),
- manually check that the inner ring swivels without friction, and there is no play or binding
point.
Check condition of pins :

- no corrosion, scratches or peening,
- condition of teflon washers,
- no play between pins and clevises of skids.
(5) Retaining rod and its attachments to flap and locking fitting
- Remove fairing (see 03-1).

- Check rod barrel :
- no dents, friction or corrosion,
correct condition of fairing fittings,
-
correct condition of bonding braids (cleanness, no fraying, correct attachment to fairing
-
fittings ; protective varnish),
- correct appearance and efficiency of locknut retainers.
AA
BREGUET
//^-"r-Q
AVIATION^r^ _ _
MIRAGE F
- Check the endpieces

- on spherical bearing equipped endpiece (flap), check :
- swaging
- condition of airflon coating on the outer ring (no separation or fraying)
- surface condition of bore
- manually check that the inner ring swivels without friction, and that there is no play or
binding point,
- on the clevis end, check :
attachment of nut retainer

-
- endpiece (no oxidation).
- Check the rod attachment to the locking fitting
-check that the retaining rod and the locking finger are coupled without play. (In case of
play, remove retaining rod and check the pin, the bores of the clevis and the bush. Replace the compo¬
nents involved).
- Check the rod attachment to the flap.
- Check :
- tightness of bushes on flap clevis and condition of the bore,
- condition of the connecting pin (no scratches or peening),
- appearance of the retaining rod : safetying, fairing attachment.
(6) Locking fitting
- Remove the underwing fitting fairings.

- Remove the plug blanking the front of the fitting cylinder (two screws).
- Clean inside the fitting (remove old grease).
Clean the grease nipple.
- Check :
that the slider travels without binding or excessive play : test the slider travel (play of
-
0.05 mm approx. (0.0019 in)) by moving it radially by means of the retaining rod along different points
of its travel ;
- that the general condition of the fitting is satisfactory.
(7) Rails
Clean the guide rails with white spirit, then dry them.
-
Check :
-
- appearance of rails : no cracks or abnormal wear, no corrosion, especially on the rail web :
to be removed with a Scotch-Brite pad if necessary.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^tTVs.
BREGUET AVIATION^S^ jSfQ>
MIRAGE F
^Z^^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
6- FINAL STEPS
(1) Maintenance of hinges
(a) Ball joint skids

- Oil the ball joint hinges in the skids
- Lightly grease the outside of the skids (friction surfaces)
(b) Secondary skids

- Lightly grease the friction surfaces
(c) Rollers
- Insert grease into the inside of the races ; rotate the rollers to obtain proper penetration.
Remove excess grease.
(d) Attachment of retaining rod to flap

- (Lubricate the pin upon installation)
(4) Locking fitting

Apply a thin film of grease to the inside of the fitting. Move the slider to obtain proper distri¬
-
bution. Check for free travel of the slider.
(f) Rails
- Lubricate the skid races as well as the rail web.
(2) Installation of ffap (see 03-1 ).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-^-^TV.
BREGUET AVIATION __ _.^
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF INBOARD AND OUTBOARD WING FLAPS

(figure 18)
1 - SCOPE
To check condition of riveting of top and bottom skins, especially on trailing edge structural
boxes.
2- GENERAL
Definition of rivet defects
(1) Damaged rivets
Rivets showing the following symptoms should be replaced as soon as acceptance limits are
exceeded :
- broken or cracked rivet head
- rivet head separated from the countersink allowing a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) shim to be inserted
between rivet head and countersink without any stress onto sheet ;
- insufficient tightening tested as follows :
- put a finger half on rivet head, half on skin
- have another operator push hard and release the surrounding skin several times, using
a non-metallic tool handle,
-tightening is considered as insufficient if a relative movement of the skin with respect
to the rivet is clearly felt by finger.
(2) Suspect rivets
Rivets showing the following symptoms should be submitted to a careful check concerning tigh¬
tening :
- head inserted into the countersink,

- raised head edges («concaved» head)
- black mark around the rim of the countersink in the direction of the aerodynamic flow (comet
tail).
3- MATERIALS
- White spirit.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/lî>-%Al
BREGUET AVIATION .<<£. __
MIRAGE F
- Carefully clean the skin using cloths soaked in white spirit.
5 - INSPECTION
(1) Inspection of skins
- Check for traces of impact and depression.

- Visually check for cracks.
(2) Inspection of riveting
-Locate the defective rivets and check their tightness :

- During a weekly inspection (H), if more than 50% of the rivets are found to be loose,
repair the riveting upon the first grounding of the aircraft without waiting for the next intermediate
inspection (I) (see Structural Repair manual).
- During an intermediate inspection (I), systematically repair all loose rivets (see Structural
Repair manual).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,
/L^^TU. MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF WING MAIN ATTACHMENT FITTING

(figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
To check the anti-corrosion protection of the fitting for condition.
- Remove wing fillets 20.09 and 20.03.
3- PROCEDURE
On all visible areas of the fitting, check condition of the paintwork and if applicable, check the
integrity of the Ardrox protective coat which covers it.
If the fitting is not covered with Ardrox, make sure that the paint is sound by making a careful
inspection under direct and side lighting in order to detect any possible swells in the paintwork.
Especially inspect the rear lower part and the edge between the lower surface and the rear surface of
the base plate.
If there doubt about the protection or if there is any corrosion :

is any
- if applicable,remove the Ardrox coat and carefully look for any trace of corrosion (see 03-0),
- renew the protection (see 03-0).
Remove light surface scratches in the critical area. Finish surface with polishing cloth, then renew
protection (see 03-0).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
INSPECTION OF ROLL SERVO-CONTROL

ACCESS DOOR (V2.46 LH/RH) ATTACHING SCREWS
1 - SCOPE
To check the screws attaching the roll servo-control access doors (V2.46 LH and RH) for any
abnormality.
2 - MATERIALS
- Remove the doors.
- Clean the attaching screws.
4 - PROCEDURE
- Visually check condition of the attaching screws.

- Particularly check condition of the heads : broken or cracked head, mushroomed head (distor¬
tion), damaged cross recess.
Mushroomed head
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJà-^-TA lYlllX/AVJC. I
BREGUET AVIATION^££& ^^^
^-«. ^<^> .
Restricted k a ami i ai
MANUAL no
03
INSPECTION (NDI) OF POINT 1 (PRESSURIZATION SELF-SEALING VALVE)
AND POINT 5 (ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR OF OUTBOARD STATION)
ON WING LOWER SURFACE PANEL
1 - SCOPE
To check for cracks on the lower surface panel of each wing at the following points:
-inboard station pressurization self -sealing valve,
-outboard station electrical connector.
-Eddy current crack detection unit Locator UHB1 .
- Detection meter Forster H2835.
-Set of standard probes 50AM042.
-Set of specific probes 50AM043.
-Set of guide bushes 50MS21 6A.
-bush 50AM033A (Point 1 ),
- bush 50AM037A ( Point 5) .
or
- Detection meter Forster H2835.
-Standard probe NFE21 54611.
-Standard probe NFE2154613.
3 - MATERIALS
-White-spirit.
-Trichloroethane (approved chlorinated solvent).
-Clean, dry, lintfree cloths.
4 - SPARES
-2 seals MS 25913-127 (preformed packing) (pressurization self-sealing valve).
-Make sure that the wing tanks and pylon tanks (if mounted) are completely defueled;
defuel the tanks if necessary (see 02-3-201 ).
-Remove equipment from each wing; the aircraft may be in one of the following two co¬
nfigurations:
-pylons and pylon tanks mounted under the wings,
-pylons and pylon tanks not mounted under the wings.
If the pylons and pylon tanks are mounted:
-remove the pylon tank(s) (see 02-6-502),
-remove the underwing (inboard station) multipurpose pylon (see 15-3-303),
-remove the underwing (outboard station) multipurpose pylon (see 15-3-308).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTLSy-à-^ #Ylll\/AVÛ l
BREGUET AVIATION -î&^-g«CS _ . , ...,,,,tro
^£Z£^<^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
-Remove equipment from points 1 and 5 (see figure 20) as follows:
POINT 1 (PRESSURIZATION SELF-SEALING VALVE)

-remove the four self -sealing valve attaching screws, then withdraw and remove the
valve (discard the seal).
POINT 5 (ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 1 64A or 1 65A)

-remove the two screws securing the electrical connector to the structure,
-slightly withdraw the connector assembly and allow to hand down.
If the pylons and pylon tanks are not mounted:
-remove the flap fairings (V1 .51 ) (V2.61 ),

-remove equipment from points 1 and 5 (see figure 20) as follows:

-remove the four self -sealing valve attaching screws, then withdraw and re¬
move the valve (discard the seal).
POINT 5 (ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 1 64A or 1 65A)

-remove the two screws securing the blank (V2.43), then remove the blank,
-remove the two screws securing the electrical connector to the structure,
-slightly withdraw the connector assembly and allow to hang down,
-thoroughly clean the wing lower surface -panel at each point (see figures 20
and 21 ), specially the bore and spotfacing. Make sure that these areas are clean and free from
flaking paint, blisters, corrosion, grease, etc.
6 - PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT NOTE: The personnel performing these inspections must hold qualifications cor¬
responding to the method used at least equal to level II of the CO-
FREND (aerospace committee) certification or AS NT (American
certification).
(1 ) Visual crack inspection
Perform a visual inspection for apparent cracks on the wing lower surface panel at points
1 and 5 (see figure 20), specially at the bores and spotfacings (see detail in figure 28).
(2) Eddy current crack inspection (see figure 21 ).
(a) Prepare and calibrate the instrument as described in the associated technical handbook:
-connect the special probe and select the 2 MHz frequency,
-select the "METAL" position according to the metal to be inspected (aluminum alloy
wing lower surface panel),
-make sure that the battery is sufficiently charged.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION .^_~
^-«_ jtf>ao
.tfô .
Restricted aaamiiai
MANUAL no
03
-calibrate the instrument with the "test" block (reference standard).

Correctly apply the probe to the sound area of the standard after performing the balanc¬
ing procedure as described in the technical handbook; the galvanometer should indicate
"zero". Then place the probe on the known defect, with the sensitivity adjusted to provide a
valid reading (80% for instance).
(b) Check each point as described hereafter (see figure 21 for check principle).
NOTE: Use the guide bush corresponding to the point to be checked (1 and 5, figure 20).
CHECK A
-Engage the special probe in the bore of the guide support intended for CHECK A, ensur¬
ing that it is correctly directed.
Adjust distance (d) between support shoulder and probe at a bore position. Secure the
probe in the support with the appropriate screw.
- Place the probe/support assembly in the skin panel bore.
-Check that the galvanometer reads zero; adjust if necessary.
-Check the bore through 360°, maintaining perfect contact between the support and skin
panel spotfacing throughout the operation.
NOTE: - The detection of the crack causes a sudden and distinct deflection of the galvanome¬
ter needle.
- The galvanometer needle deflection is at the maximum value when the probe is di¬
rectly above the center of the crack. The severity of the crack is indicated by the ampli¬
tude of the deflection.
- If a doubt arises during the operation, repeat the check of the doubtful area several
times.
- High amplitude deflections of too long duration cause the zero to be slowly changed
(2% after a total deflection having lasted approximately 15 seconds).
- Withdraw the support/probe assembly from the skin panel bore.
- Disconnect the special probe.
CHECK B
-Connect the standard pencil probe.

-Calibrate the. instrument as described in paragraph (a).
-Engage the probe in the bore of the guide support intended for CHECK B, making sure
that the probe ferrite is slightly out-of-flush with the support shoulder.
Secure the probe in the support with the appropriate screw.
AA
1 0 - 87 Restricted 1 - 577
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _^,_~
^« ^j^^>
^-«^ _ ^ . ^
Restricted . uamiiai
MANUAL ao
03
- Place the probe/support assembly in the skin panel bore, then maintain it in abutment so
that the probe contacts the spotfacing.
-Check the bore edge through 360°, maintaining perfect contact between the probe and
skin panel spotfacing throughout the operation (pay particular attention when the probe
passes the location of the equipment attaching holes).
NOTE: Refer to NOTE pertaining to CHECK A.
-Withdraw the support/probe assembly from the skin panel bore.

- Remove the probe from the support.
CHECK C
-Engage the probe in the bore of the guide support intended for CHECK C, making sure
that the tip of the probe is slightly out-of-flush with the support shoulder. Secure the probe in
the support with the appropriate screw.
- Place the probe/support assembly in the skin panel bore, then maintain it in abutment so
that the probe contacts the spotfacing .
-Perform the check in the same manner as CHECK B.
IMPORTANT NOTE : For point 1 (pressurization selfseaiing valve), as the four self-sealing
valve support attaching screws are still in place, perform this check on
either side of each screw head.

CHECK D (Only applicable to point 1 (pressurization self -sealing valve))
-Engage the probe in the bore of the guide support intended for CHECK D, marking sure
that the probe ferrite is slightly out-of-flush with the support shoulder. Secure the probe in the
support with the appropriate screw.
-Place the probe/support assembly in the skin panel bore, then maintain it in abutment so
that the probe contacts the spotfacing.
-Perform the check jn the same manner as CHECK C.
IMPORTANT NOTE : For point 1 (pressurization self-sealing valve), as the four self-sealing
valve support attaching screws are still in place, perform this check on
either side of each screw head.

(c) In case of doubt or if it appears that a crack has been detected, confirm the presence of a
defect by performing a penetrant inspection (see Structural Repair manual 1 -358).
7 - FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall equipment at points 1 and 5 (see figure 20) as follows :
POINT 5 (ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR 164Aor 165A)

-Insert the electrical connector in the bore, then reinstall the two attaching screws.
- Place the blank in position, then reinstall the two attaching screws.

-Offer up the self-sealing valve complete with new seal and engage it in the bore, then
reinstall the four attaching screws.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION. ^SS3
MIRAGE F
X . X
X X
.- m
FIGURE 20 - EMPLACEMENT DES POINTS A CONTROLER SUR LE REVETEMENT
INTRADOS VOILURE
LOCATION OF POINTS TO BE INSPECTED ON THE WING LOWER
SURFACE SKIN
AA
BREGUET AVIATION -'-£Eo
MIRAGE F
Vérif . C .
. Vérif. D Vérif. B. . Vérif. C
Check C Check D Check B Check C
Vérif. Vérif. A
Check Check A
Valable point 1 : self pressurisation Valable point 5 : prise elect (4 trous)

Applicable to point 1 : pressurization self-sealing valve Applicable to point 5 : electrical connector (4 holes)
Partie à supprimer/usinage
pour les bagues prévues pour
la vérification du point 5
(passage du câblage électrique)
Section to be removed/machining
for bushes provided for checking
point 5 (routing of electrical
wiring)
NOTA : Vérif. D uniquement

valable pour le point 1
(self press)
NOTE : Check D only
applicable to point 1
(self-sealing valve)
Bague de guidage
Guide bush
FIGURE 21 - PRINCIPE DE VERIFICATION DE CHAQUE POINT

CHECK PRINCIPLE FOR EACH POINT
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT!" ^ -" « #Y||I\/AV^C. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^_~
^ ^^^.
^-^ Restncted «aamiiai
MANUAL no03
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF SLEEVES

ON UNDERWING STORE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS (Stations 1 and 2)
(Figure 4)
1 - SCOPE
Check for condition of various components.
A - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)

-Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 and 40 to 350 ft.lb)
-"India" stone
-Smooth file
-Crocus cloth
-Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV 1
-Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C150LVJ
-Scraper Sicametal (Widia) P/N 564 with carbide inserts TH10 Widia
-Rotary carbide cutters HF103Z3 Lukas
B - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CSC
3 - MATERIALS
- Loctite 675
-White spirit
-Grease AIR 4120
-Mastinox 6856 H
-Thinner 3924
-Ardrox 3140
- Methylethylketone
4 - REMOVING SLEEVES
-Remove access doors V1.38 (LH - RH) - V1.37 (LH - RH) - V2.38 (LH - RH) - V2.37
(LH - RH).
-Remove nut lock. Recover attaching screws.
-Remove seal (item 94 - figure 4)
-Remove washer (item 93 - figure 4) under seal.
-Unscrew sleeve nut. Station 1 (M31035), Station 2 (M31036).
- Remove sleeve.
TAKE CARE NOT TO LET SLEEVE FALL ON THE GROUND
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 " " « /Y\II\/-\V-7L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^*^- ^0=*^, uamiiai no
^-^ ^5~^> Restricted MANUAL 03
5 - CLEANING - CHECKING
A - Cleaning
Clean sleeves and aircraft fittings with methylethylketone or thinner - Dry them - For cle¬
aning - Titanium parts, comply with special instructions.
CAUTION:
TITANIUM PARTS SHALL, IN NO CASE, BE CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOL¬
VENTS (FITTINGS).
B - Checking
(1 ) On fitting and sleeve
-Check:
-for condition of fitting and sleeve: no corrosion - crack, peening etc. If required, reduce
corrosion traces,
-on sleeve lower edge (taper bore large diameter), marking sure that it shows- no dent
with metal upsetting in taper bore. Otherwise, carefully polish damaged area with India stone.
Titanium is very sensitive to notch effect, it is therefore essential to cancel this prejudicial
effect. Small dents and scratches shall be reduced by carefully polishing the surface with a
smooth file or with a silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 36C60LV (used dry). For finishing,
polish with silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C150LV (used dry). A rotary carbide cut¬
ter and carbide scraper can also be used instead of the above-mentioned tools.
CAUTION:
TO TOUCH-UP TITANIUM PARTS, IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO USE ALUMINA-
BASE "INDIA" STONE, POLISHING OR GRINDING.
-Condition of washer tab, nut and hardware: no corrosion, crack, seizing traces.
-Condition of seal: cut, flattening, cracks etc ... Replace it if found defective.
C - Maintenance
(A) Apply protection on each sleeve:
(1) Outside:
-Use MASTINOX product diluted to 300% with thinner.

-Apply it with a brush, in thin and even coat, on sleeve cylindrical and tapered areas and
on its lower face.
-Apply undiluted MASTINOX to the center area corresponding to the fitting recess if the
surface is not painted.
(2) Inside:
-Coat sleeve with grease carefully distributed over the whole internal surface.
-Protect nut and washer similary.
(B) Protect the bores:
-apply a brush coat of ARDROX 3140 in the housing of nut 50 and on the upper part
masked by the door,
-apply undiluted MASTINOX to the center cylindrical recess,
-apply thin and even coats and diluted MASTINOX on the cylindrical and tapered areas
that will come into contact with the sleeve after installation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 *"v -" » / Y 1 1\ /"\ V.7 L_ I
1
BREGUET AVIATION^^-
^-, ^«=»^,
^*^ .
Restricted aaamiiai
MANUAL no03
INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES
-Install the sleeve through the lower surface, taking care to bring the mark engraved on
the sleeve lower section opposite the triangle apex (three punch marks on the fitting, on lower
surface side).
-Install the thrust washer of the nut, inserting a Mastinox bead in the sleeve groove for
sealing purposes.
-Screw the sleeve attaching nut. Torque to 7.8 m.daN (57.5 ft.lb).
-Reinstall and position:
-the washer under seal,
-the seal,
-the lockwasher; if necessary, adjust nut tightening to bring the washer tab inside the first
notch. Fasten the washer. Lock the attaching screws with Loctite.
-Install the access doors. Align the paint mark on the door with the mark on the upper
surface skin panel.
NOTE: When modification 607 is incorporated, wings are provided with paired sleeves and
ball joints. The former sleeves and ball joints are not to be installed (mechanical loca¬
tion for ball joints and paint marking on sleeves).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" « /Vlllx/AVÊ. I
BREGUET AVIATION J-A_-
^« j?^,
-*^> .
Restricted »a a ami ai
no
MANUAL 03
INSPECTION AND PROTECTION OF WING MAIN ATTACHMENT FITTING

(figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
-To check that the paintwork is in good condition and that there is no corrosion on the
wing main fitting (LH and RH sides), in the accessible areas; specially check the critical zone
located on the rear edge (fuselage exterior), over 4 to 5 cm (1 .50 to 2 in) starting from frame
26.
-To correct any possible defect.
-Magnifying glass (x 4 to 6).
3 - MATERIALS
-Methylethylketone (MEK) or Diestone S

-White spirit
-Abrasive cloth/paper, grits 240, 280 thru 600
-Flexible sanding wheel, grit 240
-Ardrox for fluorescent penetrants:
Ardrox 985P3
Ardrox 9PR4
Ardrox 9D3
-Distilled water
-Ardrox 31 .40
-Celomer paint system:
-Reagent thinner 6940B
-Wash primer P99
-Anti-corrosion primer PAC33
-Zinc chromate primer 6840B
- Primer 4888
- Finishing 4080
-Remove wing fillets 20.09 and 20.03.
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Looking for protection defects.
If the fitting is already protected with Ardrox, remove this protection with white spirit.
Inspect the visible lower part of the fitting and the rear and front surfaces of the lower
base plate, and specially the rear lower section and the edge located between the lower sur¬
face and the rear surface of the base plate (see figure).
-The inspection deals with the quality of the anti-corrosion protection
This protection consists of:

-a coat of Epoxy paint (the color may vary from light green to yellow),
-a coat of finishing paint (aluminium color).
AA
1 2 - 87 Restricted 1 - 605
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT l_à>-ar"Q
BREGUET AVIATION^fi.
f
_ _
MIRAGE F
- Make sure that the paint is sound by carefully inspecting under direct and side lighting in order to
detect any possible swells in the paintwork.
- Scrape the suspect areas using a plastic scraper (for example a beveled piece of plexiglas.
- If the paint flakes off, use the plastic scraper to remove as many flakes as possible ; stop when the
remaining paint is sure to adhere to the metal.
B Looking for corrosion
- Check the stripped metal for any trace of corrosion.
The most serious form of corrosion consists of pits located :

- on the rear lower surface of the fitting,
- on the rear vertical surface of the base plate,
- and especially on the rounded edge between these two surfaces.
In case of corrosion (rust, pitting), proceed as indicated hereafter (paragraph D).
C Looking for scratches
In the event of paint removal, make sure that there are no scratches, especially within the area
located around the rear edge of the fitting and within 4 to 5 cm (1 .50 to 2 in) of the frame.
D Elimination of corrosion or scratches
- Clean carefully using a lintless cloth soaked in MEK or Diestone S.
- Abrade the damaged area (cloth grit 280 or 240).

If this is not sufficient, use a flexible sanding wheel (grit 240) mounted on an air drill.
- As soon as corrosion or scratches seem to be suppressed, polish the treated area using fine
abrasive papers (up to grit 600).
- Perfectly clean the polished surface with a lintless cloth soaked in MEK or Diestone S.
- Using a magnifying glass (x 4 to 6) and under good lighting, carefully inspect the surface : no
defect should be left.
-This shall be confirmed by a dye penetrant inspection using Ardrox 985 P3 (see Structural
Repair manual).
If the corrosion is likely to have reached the area where the fitting and the frame are assembled,
remove the wing.
E Anti-corrosion protection
(1) If no corrosion has been found, and even if the paint seems to adhere perfectly to the metal,
protect the fitting with Ardrox 31.40.
NOTE : Ardrox 31.40 should never be applied at a temperature lower than 4- 5°C. Drying time :
- tack-free time : 2 to 3 hours,
- complete drying : 24 hours.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]LJ>~izr*.
BREGUET AVIATION ^Zs^^fg^
MIRAGE F
(2) Operations after corrosion treatment
If the treated surfaces have a small area :

- protect these surfaces, as well as the whole visible surface of the fittting, using Ardrox 31 .40.
If the treated surface has a large area and if the wing has been removed, repaint the fitting as
follows :
- degrease the treated area with MEK or Diestone S,

- etch with reagent thinner 6940B,
- clean again with MEK or Diestone S,
- apply the Celomer paint system :
- 1 wash primer coat : P99
- 1 anti-corrosion primer coat : PAC33
- 1 primer coat : 6840B
- 1 zinc chromate primer coat : 4888
- 1 finishing coat : 4080
After complete curing of the paint (10 days at 20°C) :

- apply a coat of Ardrox 31 .40 to the whole treated area.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall wing fillets 20.09 and 30.03.
NOTE : In any case, the manufacturer should be informed of the presence of corrosion pits or of
scratches difficult to polish due to their depth (detected by penetrant inspection if necessary) ;
as far as possible, a photograph is desirable.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
VOILURE G
LH WING
ZONE DE FORTE CONTRAINTE

(Environ 50 mm)
HEA VY STRESS AREA
(About 50 mm)
FUSELAGE
C.25a
FIGURE 19- INSPECTION DE LA FERRURE D'ATTACHE PRINCIPALE DE LA VOILURE

INSPECTION OF WING MAIN A TTACHMENT FITTING
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ>~r11.
BREGUET AVIATION ^fiF3.^"5^
MIRAGE F
k/i a mi i a i no
REFILLING THE UPPER SURFACE RECESS OF THE FLAP

OUTBOARD TRACK WITH KLEGECEL
1 - GENERAL
This operation is to be carried out when the Klegecel filling is found to have come away from
the recess, in order to prevent oxidation due to subsequent water infiltration.
A - Spares
- Klegecel shim, 130 x 24 x 8 mm (0.52 x 0.096 x 0.032 in).
B - Materials
-Etching agent Ardrox 2526

-Compound MINNESOTA EC 1675
-Glue Araldite AV138M.
3- PROCEDURE
- Tear away the unstuck shim and clean its housing by scraping the cementing surfaces.
- Complete cleaning with Ardrox 2526, applying the product several times, but without excess.
- Wash with water to remove any remaining etching agent, wipe and dry.
- Cut out and adjust the new Klegecel shim.
- Cement the shim with EC 1675 compound (drying time : 6 hours).
- Coat the visible surface of the shim with Araldite which is to be smoothed out in order to obtain
a regular layer covering the shim and blending with the edges of the recess.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Sand the Araldite coat to prepare for painting and paint (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
REPLACEMENT OF SCREWS ATTACHING SLOTTED SLATS TO TRACKS 1 , 2, 3 AND 4

(LOWER SURFACE)
1 - SCOPE
To replace the two screws attaching the slat to the track end before they reach their fa¬
tigue limit.
Spares:
-Special screws F 101993 (Tracks 1 and 2),
-Special screws F 101870 (Track 3),
-Special screws F 101700 (Track 4).
3 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Mastinox 6856H
-Aircraft paint system
4 - PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
IF THE INVOLVED AREA IS TO BE CLEANED, DO NOT USE CHLORINATED SOLVENT,
BUT WHITE SPIRIT EXCLUSIVELY (TRACKS MADE OF TITANIUM).
For each track:

-Unscrew one of the two screws and replace it with a new screw to be installed with
Mastinox 6856H spread under head.
-Torque to standard value:
-track 1 -2 screws: 0.900 m.daN (79.62 Ib.in),
-track 3-4 screws: 0.750 m.daN (61.93 Ib.in).
-Unscrew and replace the other screw in the same way.
-Apply a coat of "F1 " finishing paint to the screw heads.
2 adjoining screws to be replaced
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^-"J* /V\II\/-\V7L_ l
BREGUET AVIATION ^>_~ J*~=^> . aaamiiai no
.--«. -«> Restricted MANUAL 03
REPLACEMENT OF BRUSH HOLDERS BETWEEN INBOARD FLAPS

AND REAR FILLETS
1 - POWER SUPPLIES
HYDRAULIC POWER SUPPLY: NEC yes FORB
A - Tools
Pair of scissors, or
Cutter, or
Shears, or
Clippers.
B - Spares
Brush holder assembly 1 604

F1 61
Countersunk rivets (Std 35072) L21218DE2407
3 - PROCEDURE
-Apply pressure to hydraulic system No. 1 .
- Retract the flaps.

-Stop applying pressure.
WARNING:
COMPLY WITH THE SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM INVOLVED
(SEE MANUAL 01 -0-2).
B - Determination of brush bristle length (see figure 1 )
-Mark the brush bristle anchoring face on the flap lower surface fitting with a line (see
figure 1).
-Measure dimension "X" between the bristle anchoring face on the brush holder angle
section and the bristle contact end on the fillet rib (see figure 1 ).
-Extend the flap (see paragraph 3 (A) Preliminary steps).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* ^ -" -** /Y\H\/-\V^t F
BREGUET AVIATION_^l_- ^>^^
JS"*^> Restricted ai no
aa a au
MANUAL 03
C - Removal of brush holder

-Remove the brush holder to be replaced.
-Recover the hardware for reinstallation (9 screws).
-Remove the brush holder mounting plates and stops (see figure 1 ).
D - Preparation before reinstallation of spare brush holder
-Reinstall the removed mounting plates and stops on the spare brush holder (attach the
stops with 2.4 dia rivets).
E - Brush holder bristle length adjustment and cutting
-Transfer dimension "X" (as determined in paragraph B) plus 1 mm onto the spare brush
holder (see figure 1).
-Draw this dimension "X" + 1 mm on the brush length.
-Grip the brush bristles between two formed sheets so as to make the bristles more rigid
for the cutting operation (see figure 1 ).
-Using a cutting tool, adjust the brush bristle length according to the applied mark.
F - Installation of spare brush holder on flap
-Reinstall the brush holder on the flap and fit the screws without tightening.
-Position the brush holder on the flap, with the bristle anchoring face at the mark applied
on the flap lower surface fitting (see figure 1 ).
-Then finally secure the brush holder by tightening the nine screws.
- Retract the flap (see paragraph 3 (A) Preliminary steps) and check the bristles for proper
seating against the fillet rib.
D - Final steps
-Drop the pressure and disconnect the power supply from hydraulic system No. 1 .
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
TOLES PROFILEES
FORMED SHEETS
PORTE BROSSE
BRUSH HOLDER POILS
BRISTLES
COUPE DES POILS

BRISTLES CUT HERE
COTE X + 1mm
X + 1mm DIMENSION X + 1mm
- MISE A LONGEUR ET COUPE DES POILS

- BRISTLE LENGTH ADJUSTMENT AND CUTTING
FORME EXT» FACE D'ANCRAGE DES POILS

, UPPER SURFACE BRISTLE ANCHORING FACE
PROFILE
FORME EXT»
UPPER SURFACE (COTE A RELEVER)
PROFILE (DIMENSION TO BE
MEASURED)
KARMANS
VOLET
FILLETS
FLAP
(COTE A RELEVER)
(DIMENSION TO BE
f
Zfoj
.FORME INT»
MEASURED)
/
LOWER SURFACE
PROFILE
FORME INT»
Z.FOF REPERE
LOWER SURFACE
PROFILE
MARK
V- REF: NERVURE DES KARMANS
FILLET RIB REFERENCE LINE
REF: NERVURE DES KARMANS

FILLET.RtB REFERENCE UNE
mi mi v ihi
T
VOLET
BRISTLES
FLAP
PLATINE PLATINE BUTEE
MOUNTING PLATE MOUNTING PLA TE STOP
FIGURE 1 - PORTE BROSSE EQUIPE (DETERMINATION DE LA LONGUEUR DES POILS)

BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBL Y (DETERMINA TION OF BRISTLE LENGTH)
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [UJ^^rXi.
BREGUET AVIATION ___ __
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AN AIRBRAKE PANEL

(figure 12)
A Standard tools
- Accessory kit for torque wrenches, 2 to 20 m.daN and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb and 40 to
350 ft.lb)
B Spares (as required)

-Special nut F2 14999
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Grease Air 3565
- Loctite 675 (as required)
Manually open the airbrake panels (see 02-0).
4- REMOVAL
A Uncouple the airbrake jack from the panel (see 04-5).
B Remove the airbrake panel hinge pins.

- On each hinge :
- remove the lockplate (6 mm socket),
- unscrew and withdraw the pin (21 mm socket).
C Remove the airbrake panel.
5- REPLACEMENT
Bushes 21, spacer 23 and hinge pins 20 and 22 are part of the aircraft fittings. Consequently, in
case of replacement, these components shall be withdrawn from the removed airbrake and reinstalled
on the new one.
A Check and maintenance of parts prior to reassembly
- Clean the various assembling parts.

- Wipe them carefully.
- Check for perfect surface condition.
B Installation of bushes 21 and spacer 23
- Sparingly grease bushes 21 and fit them in the outer spherical bearing (the longer one on the
inner side of the airbrake).
- Sparingly grease spacer 23 and fit it in the inner spherical bearing.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- INSTALLATION OF AIRBRAKE PANELS

A Preliminary steps
(1 ) Check for perfect cleanness of :
- connecting pins 20,
- the bore of each spherical bearing,
- the hinge fittings.
(2) Sparingly grease the pins.

IMPORTANT NOTE : Never spread anything (oil or grease) on teflon-lined spherical bearings.
B Installation
- Install the hinge pins.
- Position the airbrake panel.
- Insert the pins.
- Screw them in (21 mm socket).
- Torque them to 3.300 m.daN (24.75 ft.lb).
After torquing, the clearance between pin head and rib should be 0.3 mm (0.012 in).
- Fit the lockplates (6 mm socket).
- Attach the bonding braids.
7- FINAL STEPS
(1 ) Check of airbrake adaptation to fuselage
- Deflection check
Bring the airbrake up to structural stop ; check that the dimension measured in the airbrake
symmetry plane between the airbrake skin trailing edge and the cutout section on fuselage skin, as near
as possible to the unlocking unit, exceeds 1000 mm (40 in).
- Check of routing clearance
The routing clearance between airbrake and structure should be :
3 ± 1.5 mm (0.1 18 ± 0.059 in) on stringer 14 side,
2 _ 1 ' mm (0.079 _ q'qoq in) everywhere else.
On airbrake panels which do not incorporate the new type of assembly, check that there is no
contact between screw 1 attaching the locking hook support to the airbrake, and the hooking unit
(see figure below).
If there is contact, replace the nut of the rear screw by a special nut.
- Remove screw 1 .
-Mill the screw hole to dimensions of special nut 3.
- Fit the nut coated with Loctite 675.
- Shorten the screw to obtain 0.5 mm protrusion from the nut.
Also shorten front screw 2 to obtain 0.5 mm protrusion from the nut. Safety the nut with Loctite
675.
CD CD CD L
O O çd r~ TOP VIEW SECTION A SECTION B
IP CD O
O. CD. \__ r*-A r*-B
O O o o \
Protrusion
=0.5 mm
(2) Couple the airbrake jack to the panel (see 04-5).

(3) Carry out airbrake maintenance operations (see 04-5).
(4) Adjust the airbrakes (see 04-5).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT p
BREGUET AVIATION ^^
-~à>-"r\l
_^ .
MIRAGE
.......«
F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF CANOPY

(figure 7)

- Stowage cradle GSV-1 7
- Storage and transport case LH 77287-100
- Canopy seal guard 50 MS 066
B Spares
- Laminated shims for lateral stops, FA1B261-043
2- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 351 2
- Open the canopy.
- Make sure that the seat safety pins are fitted.
- Disconnect the pyrotechnical fuses (see hereunder).
NOTE: WHEN REPLACING THE CANOPY, CHECK THAT THE PYROTECHNICAL CIRCUIT
HASNOT REACHED ITSSERVICE LIFE LIMIT.
- Comply with instructions relating to canopy embrittlement pyrotechnical system
(see 09-0).
- Disconnect the pyrotechnical fuses from the transfer unit ; to this end :
- unscrew both plugs from the stowage support attached to frame 1 2.
- Undo the grip of the cable retaining the fuses, from the ring attached to the canopy
arch.
- Disconnect the two fuses and withdraw them TOGETHER from the transfer unit.
CAREFULLY place the two fuses TOGETHER on the stowage support (unscrew
the clamp screw if necessary).
- Lock the fuses into place (color marks).
CAUTION :
1 - HANDLING THE FUSES SEPARATELY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE.
2- THE POSITION OF EACH PYROTECHNICAL FUSE IS MARKED WITH A LINE OF
DIFFERENT COLOR, BUT IDENTICAL ON THE TRANSFER UNIT AND THE
STOWAGE SUPPORT. MAKE THESE MARKS COINCIDE WHEN CONNECTING THE
COMPONENTS.
- Blank off the ports of the transfer unit with the two plugs taken from the stowage
support.
4- REMOVAL
- Maintain the canopy and remove the canopy-to-actuator pip pin.
- Swing the canopy up until it separates from its attachment fittings.
- Remove the canopy and place it :
- either on its stowage cradle if it is not removed for more than one day,
- or in its storage and transport case if it is removed for more than one day.
- Cover the canopy with its protective slip cover.
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO BOND ANYTHING ON PLEXIGLAS WITH ADHESIVE

TAPE OTHER THAN SCOTCH 670 MINNESOTA TAPE.
If maintenance operations are to be performed in aircraft cockpit with canopy removed for a
certain time, install canopy seal guards on cockpit lateral beams.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _Â_~ ^>=^, aaamiiai r»o
^ ^=^ Restricted MANUAL 03
5 - INSTALLATION
-Clean and oil slightly.
(1 ) On fuselage:
-Rollers and hooking fitting finger. Make sure they rotate freely.
(2) On canopy:
-Actuator hooking fitting. Check actuator ball-joint for condition.
- Release canopy from its stowage cradle.
-Position the canopy on aircraft and engage hooks in rollers.
-Couple canopy actuator, using pip-pin inserted from left to right.
CAUTION:
BEFORE MOVING THE CANOPY, CHECK THAT THE HOOKS ARE FULLY ENGAGED
IN THE FUSELAGE FITTING ROLLERS. STOP THE OPERATION IF A TIGHT SPOT IS
DISCOVERED; TO CONTINUE WOULD MEANS ABNORMAL TENSION LOAD ON THE
CLEVIS TABS, WITH A RISK OF BREAKAGE.
6 -REPLACEMENT OF CANOPY (see "Adjustment of canopy locking linkage").
A - Install the canopy seal (see manual 2-803)
- Perform the following checks as detailed in manual 2-51 1 :
-Check of balancing jack.

-Check of internal clearance of jack rod.
B - To check canopy centering:

-cover canopy rollers in blue, close canopy and lock,
-open canopy and check that the marks left by the rollers are centered on the hooks.
Maximum off-center: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
C - Check the clearance between the canopy rollers and hooks (see para. 5C (2)).
D - Check canopy locking in closed position.
During this test, ensure that the canopy roller fitting does not catch pin 41 (Fig. 15). If
required, chamfer the fitting so that it can pass freely.
E - Check the adjustment of rubber stops (see para. 5G).

F - Check the control lever loads (see para.6B).
G - Check canopy locking in up position (see para. F).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^£. _^ _
MIRAGE
..*....«.««
F
7- FINAL STEPS
A Connection of pyrotechnical fuses
Comply with instructions relating to canopy embrittlement pyrotechnical system (see manual
09-0-2).
-Unscrew the plugs blanking the ports of the transfer unit.

-CAREFULLY disconnect the pyrotechnical fuses from the stowage support at frame 12,
removing them TOGETHER.
- Check for correct positioning of the following components : sleeve, clamp, cable attaching
tab and screw.
- Check tightness of the screw.
- CAREFULLY engage the two fuses TOGETHER into the transfer unit and press them home,
ensuring that color marks are aligned.
CAUTION :
HANDLING THE FUSES SEPARATELY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE.
-Lock the fuses.

-Hook the grip of the cable retaining the fuses, into the canopy ring.
- Make sure that the collar is properly set over the red sleeves, with the sleeve ends projecting
on either side.
- Screw the plugs onto the stowage support.
B - Checks
Check the following :

- cleanness of the canopy seal,
- correct locking of the terminals of the flexible pyrotechnical fuses to the transfer unit,
- correct external appearance of the flexible fuses (no wrinkles),
- correct operation of the canopy : move it several times, checking that the fuses slide correctly
in the guide collar,
- if required, arrange the fuses by hand to give them the best shape for sliding, with no bend having
a radius smaller than 6 cm (2.36 in). In case of wrinkling, reposition the collar as the collar attaching
tab should lie along the pulling axis of the cable.
AC
12-80 Restricted 2-303Q
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTL=J>^rPv
BREGUET AVI ATlON^gF3^^5-^
fVllKMVJU
....,,,.,
I
n1
""-** -"^ Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF NOSE CONE

(figure 13K)
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ftlb)
B Special tools
- Pitot-static system protection caps

- Nose cone stowage cradle
- Hoisting assembly 5001 PHP
- Lifting device
2 -MATERIALS
- Eastman 910 or Cyril EF adhesive

- Bostik adhesive
- Grease Air 4205
- Loctite 672
3 -PRELIMINARY STEPS
Ensure that the laser fairing window protection is positioned.

-
Remove access doors 01.06, P5.10, P5.02, 01.05 and 01.07.
-
- Install the cone hoisting assembly.
- Place the boom in extended position (see 06-2).
- Remove the caps of frames II and VII hoist fittings.
- Before installing the hoisting assembly, make sure that the hoisting beam is correctly centered
according to the equipment items located in the nose cone.
- Screw the nose cone hoisting beam shackles in the fittings of frames II and VII.
- With the crane, apply a very light tension on the hoisting beam.
4 - REMOVAL
A Disconnection of functional junctions
(1 ) Electrical wiring
(access through door P5.03)
- Disconnect the following connectors from the two electronics units :
17 Fa, 17 Fb
23T P01 , 23T P02, 23T P03.
- Disconnect connector 240C from the equipment.
- Remove the three strips attaching the cables to the structure.
- Disconnect the following electrical connectors secured to the base plate of frame 1 :
207A, 209A, 206A, 204A, 229A, 228A, 208A,
8R, 18R, 15T.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors secured to the base plate of frame VII :
341A,342A,343A,344A
(access through door 01 .06).
- Disconnect connector 104R
(access through door 01.10).
- Disconnect connectors 21 0A, 21 1 A, 295A and 345A.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj^^Pl «V» I KM W C T
BREGUET AVIATION^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Pitot static system pipes :

- Through the door P5-03, disconnect S1 and S2 circuits at frame 1 (19 A/F wrench).
- Through the door 01-06, disconnect T2 circuit (19 A/F wrench).
- Screw the protection plugs onto the pipes to avoid pitot static system contamination.
B Nose cone removal
For each attachment :

Remove the lock safetying the attachment pin head (recover the lock, screw and nut).
- Unlock the attachment pin but do not unscrew it completely (13 socket).
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT THE CRANE APPLIES A LIGHT TENSION TO THE HOISTING BEAM, SO
AS TO HOLD THE NOSE CONE DURING REMOVAL, AND TO FREELY UNSCREW THE NOSE
CONE TO FUSELAGE.
- Fully unscrew the captive attachment pin.

- Release the nose cone from the locating pins.
CAUTION :
WHEN THE NOSE CONE IS DISENGAGED BY SOME CENTIMETERS, ENSURE THAT
THERE IS NOT ANY ATTACHMENT LEFT AND THAT NOTHING IMPAIRS REMOVAL -
EASE ELECTRICAL CABLE DISENGAGEMENT.
- Remove the nose cone with a straight forward uniform motion while avoiding any knock.
- Install the nose cone on its stowage cradle.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
-Check the seal and the air conditioning duct seal on frame 1 for condition (absence of cuts,
separation, missing sections). Replace them if required, and bond the seal with Eastman or Cycril
adhesive and the air conditioning duct seal with Bostik adhesive.
- Check the condition of the connecting elements of the nose cone to fuselage attachments (screw -
lock), of connecting pins, locating pins, corresponding bores, conical sections (absence of scratches).
- Apply a light coat of grease AIR 4205 on conical sections, connecting pin thread, locating pins,
corresponding bores.
B Installation
With the hoisting assembly, offer up the nose cone at 10 centimeters from the fuselage.
-
-Install the electrical cables in the nose cone - Facilitate their routing to the electrical components.
- Install the electrical connectors previously removed.
- Gradually move the nose cone forward with a straight uniform motion up to the locating pins.
Center the nose cone properly.
- Move the nose cone forward, up to its final position.
-Tighten the pins (13 socket) with a torque wrench to a torque of 2.8 m.daN (20.6 ft.lb) (by
gradual steps) two by two in staggered sequence. Fit the locks.
- Remove the hoisting assembly (hoisting beam, shackle)
- Install the caps on the hoist fittings and safety them with loctite.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/Z^V-Ur-Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^!. ^ - « . . .,....,
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the protection plugs from the pitot system pipes.

- Connect the pitot systems. Carry out a leak test on the pitot systems (See 12-1 ).
- Test the nose cone electrical and electronic components (See 14).
- Install the doors previously removed.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Lj>~^r9k
BREGUET AVIATIONôF0^-.^^ .
/VllKMvJC T
àâakiiiai
no
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF THE EQUIPMENT BAY FUEL TANK
(Figure 13T)
A Standard tools
- 50 dia. wrench for WIG-O-FLEX coupling
-Rule
- Pressurization unit
C Spares
- O-rings for the air vent
- Seal for WIG-O-FLEX coupling
2- MATERIALS
-Petrolatum AIR 3565
-Grease AIR 4205
- Sealant PR 1422 A2
- Sealant PR 1005 L
- Methylethylketone
- Pierlon BC 60
- Tecsil T/2036
- Klegecel
- Polyurethane
- Drain out the fuel from : (see 02-3)
- the front tank group
- the inverted flight accumulator
- Remove the door 1 7-00 (see 03-2)
WARNING :
TAKE ALL THE USUAL PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING IN A TANK (SEE 06-0).
Remove the inverted flight accumulator (see 06-2)

-
Open the equipment bay door 13-00 and remove :
-
- the peripheral electrical and electronic components to permit the access to the fuel tank
(TACAN, flying aid amplifier, etc..) and its removal
- the common rack
- the air intake connecting spacer rod (see 03-2)
- the MMU rack and its R/H support (seven 5 mm screws and bonding strip)
- the R/H filter secured to the tank
- the protection sheet located between the console and the tank (4 screws).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// J^-^hî MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^}. ^-^ - . ...........
4- TANK REMOVAL
A Disconnection of the functional junctions :
(1) Air vent :
Remove the PR sealant so as to disengage the attachment screws 1 and the junction of the
-
flange 3.
- Remove the six screws attaching flange 3 to support 4 ; recover the washers (8 A/F spanner).
- Withdraw the base plate 2 and the connector pipe
- Unscrew the flange 3 from the end of liner 5.
(2) Frame 17 interconnection

Remove the PR sealant so as to disengage the attachment screws 1, the junction of flexible
-
coupling 2 to base 3 and the junction of base plate 3 to support 4.
- Unlock the flexible coupling 2, and unscrew it ; recover the split washer and the seal.
- Unscrew the base plate 3 from the end of liner 5.
B Mechanical junctions :
- Front attachment :
- tilt the spring
- remove the pin
C Tank removal :
- Slide the tank by pulling it forward so as to disengage :

- side attachment secured to the R/H console
- both attachments of frame 17
- interconnection and air vent
- Fit the protection caps to the ends of the connecting liners.
PULL THE TANK HORIZONTALLY UNTIL THE AIR VENT AND THE INTERCONNECTION
OF FRAME 17 BE COMPLETELY DISENGAGED, SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE LINERS.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL^>-^rÇL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^-»^-^ , ÂÀAMIIAI fYl
5- PREPARATION PRIOR TO TANK INSTALLATION
A Tank leak tests :
- Fit :
the air vent with a connector allowing for pressurization.

-
the interconnection with a refueling union equipped with a blanking cap.
-
- Fill-up through the interconnection
- Connect the pressurization unit to the air vent union, adjust the delivery pressure to 500 millibar
(7.25 psi) and close the shut-off valve.
- Leave the pressure and check for leaks.
- Depressurize and remove the unions. Fit the protection caps.
B - Checks :
(1) On frame 17:

- Check the klegecel and polyurethane shims for condition (absence of cuts, separation, missing
sections). If not repair them.
- separate the klegecel
- clean the mating surfaces
-bond the shims on frame 17: klegecel with Pierlon, polyurethane on klegecel with Tecsil
adhesive.
- touch-up the protection (paint).
(2) On the protection sheet (between tank and console)

- Check the neoprene seal for condition and bearing (absence of cuts, separation, missing sections).
Replace it if required and bond it with Pierlon.
(3) Equipment bay :

Carry out an overall check of the component hidden by the tank (electrical cables, in-flight
-
refuelling pipes, etc..)
- Check the dual interflex unions of in-flight refuelling piping for leaks (See 02-5).
6- INSTALLATION
Position the tank in the equipment bay.
A Preliminary steps
(1) Mechanical junctions

Remove the lateral pin and the hub (8 A/F spanner) from the R/H console support.
-
- Clean the pin and ball-joint on tank ; apply a light coat of grease AIR 4205.
- Slide the pin in the ball-joint
-Clean the two pins of frame 17 and the ball-joints on tank; apply a light coat of grease
AIR 4205.
- Make sure that the two rear ball-joints are correctly positioned.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MANUAL 03 Montage du raccord de
pressurisation sur la
mise à l'air libre
Installation of
pressurization connector
on air vent
Robinet de coupure
Manomètre Shut-off valve
Pressure gauge Groupe de
j__, pressurisation
4 couches de P.R CZJOï Pressurization unit
4 PR sealant coats
(0.236in)
zm
MONTAGE DE LA MISE
A L'AIR LIBRE
le bouchon
'
Wig-O-Flex
\l
Monter sur l'intercommunicarîon ^
|H
%p
AIR VENT INSTALLATION

Fit the Wing-O-Flex
plug to interconnection
MONTAGE DE
L'INTERCOMMUNICATION
DU CADRE 17 Montage du raccord carburant
FRAME 17 INTERCONNECTION sur l 'intercommunication
INSTALLATION Installation of fuel union
on interconnection
SCHEMA DE PRINCIPE DE L'ESSAI MONTAGE DES BOUCHONS

4 couches de P.R D'ETANCHEITE DU RESERVOIR DE PROTECTION
4 PR sealant coats DE SOUTE A EQUIPEMENTS
INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION
EQUIPMENT BA Y TANK LEAK CAPS
(0.236în) TEST FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
FIGURE 13T - DEPOSE - POSE DU RESERVOIR DE SOUTE A EQUIPEMENTS

REMO VAL- INSTA L LA TION OF EQUIPMENT BA Y TANK
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J/J^r^X *** IKMwL I
BREGUET AVIATION^5P=-<^0> àâamMAI m
^£s-<<<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Functional junctions

-Remove the two protection caps screwed onto the pipe ends.
THE PROTECTION CAPS STIFFEN THE AIR VENT AND INTERCONNECTION LINERS.
TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS SO AS NOT TO DENT OR DISTORT THE LATTER
DURING INSTALLATION.
(a) frame 17
Bases on
Completely remove the damaged PR sealant, taking care to make a bevelled cut, on sound bead
-
side, so as to ensure correct junction with the sealing product. For this, use tools which cannot score or
damage the structures (hard wood, plexiglass).
- Proceed to cleaning and degreasing.
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO DROP METHYLETHYLKETONE ON PARTS OTHER THAN THE
SUPPORTS.
(b) Tank connections :

- Clean flanges, bases, screws, washers and WIG-O-FLEX coupling.
(c) - Systematically replace the air vent O-rings.

-Lightly lubricate the O-rings and the base with petrolatum AIR 3565 in order to facilitate
installation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL=«s>""inX
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^c^P3^^^ . , ââamiiAI AO
/^ _ Restricted MANUAL 03
B Installation

-Offer up then slide the tank onto the pins of frame 17 until the hub bears against the console
attachment of frame 14.
- Correctly position the straight-toothed hub in order to align the front tank attachment bore with
the equipment bay eccentric bore, when the tank is brought to its final position, and to fit the pin in
these bores.
- Safety the pin with the safety spring.
(2) Functional junctions (access through door 17-00)
(a) Interconnection :
- Screw the base plate 3 on the liner assembly 5 up to a 6 mm (0.236 in) distance from support 4
bearing surface.
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO TWIST THE LINER WHEN SCREWING THE BASE PLATE.
- Compress the base plate 3 till it bears against support 4

Assembly base plate 3 and support 4 with screws 1 tightened two by two in staggered sequence.
- Fit the WIG-O-FLEX coupling.
- Apply a light coat of petrolatum AIR 3565 on the seal and the split washer and fit them to
the end of liner 5.
WHEN POSITIONING THE SPLIT WASHER, TAKE CARE NOT TO SCORE THE LINER END
TUBE
Tighten the WIG-O-FLEX coupling as follows :

-
- ensure that the nut can be screwed freely ; screw.it fully home so as to position the seal
and the washer correctly.
unscrew to free the parts compressed during position tightening. Make sure that no
spring effect remains. If not, repeat the operation.
- slowly screw the mobile nut, holding it between the thumb and the forefinger tips.
- when the nut bears against the sealing elements, proceed with screwing, slowly and
without stress, until the resistance due to seal compression makes the fingers slide on the nut.
- repeat this operation two or three times.
- mark the nut position in relation to the coupling body.
- from this mark, tighten the nut by 4 notches (4 m.daN) (29.48 ft.lb) with the
50 spanner. Safety.
- Using a slightly soaked rag, degrease the WIG-O-FLEX to liner end junction.
- Seal the junctions as indicated on the figure (apply three coats of PR 1422 A2 sealant, plus
one coat of PR 1005 L sealant).
- Observe the curing times of the products.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJLs^-jjrU MIRAGE
I Y II l\/~
>» fc- v
F
l
BREGUET AVIATION^SîF3,^'^ . ........ n,
~^ Restricted MANUAL 03
From the reference mark, tighten the nut 4 notches (4 mdaN - 29.48 ft.lb) using the 50 wrench.
-
Safety.
- Use a lightly soaked rag to degrease the WIG-O-FLEX coupling at the liner end.
- Seal the couplings as shown in the figure (three coats of PR 1422 A2 plus a coat of PR 1005 L).
- Observe the curing times for the products.
(b) Air vent :
Screw the flange 3 onto the liner assembly 5 up to

- a 6 mm (0.236 in) distance from support 4
bearing surface (measurement with a rule).
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO TWIST THE LINER 5 WHEN SCREWING THE FLANGE 3.
- Fit the base plate 2 till it bears against flange 3.

- Proceed with installation as for crossfeed.
7- FINAL STEPS
A - Install :
- protection sheet between the console and the tank.
- inverted flight accumulator (see 06-2).
- air vent
CAUTION :
TAKE ALL THE USUAL PRECAUTIONS WHEN CARRYING OUT THE FINAL STEPS ON
THE FUEL SYSTEM (SEE 06-0).
B Fill up the front tank group and the equipment bay tank ; check them for leaks.
C Install the electrical and electronic equipment items previously removed and carry out the tests.
D Install the air intake connecting spacer rod (see 03-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L=^"rU
BREGUET AVIATION ^ô^^-Ô
MIRAGE
.,. . . . , . ,
F
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF IN-FLIGHT
REFUELLING BOOMS
(Fig. 13H)
Hydraulic power supply

1 15/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply
2- MATERIALS
- Blue Loctite
-Sealant EC 1675
- Connect the hydraulic power supply to system No. 1 and to the electrical power supply.
- Extend the boom (See 06-2).
4- REMOVAL
A Removal of main door.
- Remove sealant from the six door attaching screws.

- Withdraw the six attaching screws (13 mm bush) and recover washers.
- DO NOT SEPARATE MOUNTS AND ADJUSTING WASHERS.
- Remove door.
B Removal of nose door :
- Remove the fork arm-to-rod connecting pin (10 mm A/F wrench).

- Recover the three washers and the nut.
- Separate both nose door hinges (10 mm A/F wrench). Recover the front junction washer.
- Remove the door.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps :
(1) Of boom door

- Clean and check the door-to-mount junctions for condition
- Check the hardware for condition
- If required, replace the spring washers.
(2) Of nose door

- Clean and check the door ball joints, the two bearing holders of rod-to-fork arm for condition.
- Check the hinges for possible play, the stops for presence and condition.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^L __^ - hawm.a. #»«
- Slightly oil the roller.

- Using petrolatum, slightly lubricate the bearing holders
- Clean the connecting pins and slightly lubricate them with petrolatum.
(3) Check the boom for correct adjustment (see 06-2) then extend it.
B Installation
WARNING :
DOORS BEING INSTALLED BUT NOT ADJUSTED, LEAVE BOOM IN EXTENDED

POSITION.
(1) Main door :

- Use the adjusting washers previously matched with mounts.
- On front and rear mounts, and in the following sequence, install :
- adjusting washer 17
- washer 1 6
- spring washer 15
- serrated washer 1 4
- door
- thrust washer
- threaded pin 13 (13 mm bush)
- On central mount, and in the following sequence, install :

- adjustment washer 20
door -
thrust washer
-
-screw 18 the length of which will be set according to the adjustment washer thickness
(13 mm bush).
- Perform door adjustment (See 03-2).

- Lock the six threaded pins with blue Loctite.
- Blank the pin holes in door with sealant.
(2) Nose door :
- Install door into its housing and insert bearings into mounts.
- Tighten pins (10 mm wrench)
- Ensure rod-to-fork arm junction by installing pin, nut and washers. Tighten nut (10 mm wrench).
- Adjust nose door (See 03-2).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Check theboom adjustment (see 06-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fjLsT^jPk
breguet aviation^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE

ATTACHMENT SPACER ROD
(Figure 13)
A Standard tooling
- Torque wrench kit 2 to 20 mdaN (15 to 150 ft.lb)

- Torque wrench accessory kit 2 to 20 mdaN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
2- MATERIALS
- Grease AI R 4205
- Set the aircraft on jacks.

- DO NOT MOVE AIRCRAFT ONCE THE SPACER ROD IS REMOVED.
- Open the equipment bay door 1 3-00.
- Remove peripheral electrical and electronic equipment to gain access to the rod.
4- REMOVAL OF ROD
A Preliminary steps
- Make a reference mark on both sidewalls at the rod attachment point.

- Measure the distance between the two marks.
B Disconnecting
- Unlock the rod end fitting locknuts.

- Remove the sidewall attachment pin nuts.
- Release any tension in the rod (19 A/F spanner) so that the attachment pins can be easily
removed.
- Remove pins and rod.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Clean and check the condition of :

- the rod end fittings
- the sidewall clevises
- the pins.
- Cover the rod end fitting ball joints and the pins with a light film of grease.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTt^^TXX.
BREGUET AVIATION ^Cj^
MIRAGE F
B Attachment
- Adjust the length of the rod so that the pins may be easily fitted.
- Attach the rod to the structure.
- Adjust the length of the rod as required (19-mm A/F wrench) to obtain the pre-removal dimen¬
sion (marks drawn upon removal).
- Tighten the end fitting locknuts to 3.5 m.daN (25.795 ft.lb) and safety.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Install the electrical and electronic equipment which was previously removed and carry out
testing.
- Close equipment bay door 13-00.
- Set the aircraft down onto its wheels.
AB
MIRAGE F
Restricted AVÀNUAL 03
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF LASER RANGE FINDER FAIRING
(Figure 7)
- Glass protective cover 50MS008.
B- Spares
- 1 split pin 83310 CA 015012
2- MATERIALS
- GreaseAI R 4205
- Methylethylketone
- Acetone
-Primer RHODORSIL 4094
- White sealant RHODORSI L CAF 7306.
- Make sure that the laser range finder assembly is stopped.
- Make sure that the glass protective cover is in place.
4- REMOVAL
CAUTION :
THE INTERNAL FACE OF THE WINDOW IS VERY FRAGILE AND SHOULD NEVER BE
TOUCHED ; EVEN THE FINGER CONTACT IS PROSCRIBED.
A Actuate the lock to cause the laser range finder fairing to pivot about its gooseneck fittings. The
cable keeps the fairing ajar.
B Disconnect laser glass heating connector 39H, level with frame V of the aircraft structure.
C Unlock the spindle, level with the fitting at frame Vc, while holding the fairing to avoid any
untimely action. Recover the pin, washer and split pin.
D Rotate the fairing downward, while pulling lightly to the rear, parallel with the aircraft centerline,
in order to extract the gosenecks at frame IV.
E Place the fairing under shelter to avoid any impact liable to damage the laser glass pane.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
(1) Sealing
- Make sure that the seal is fitted correctly (continuity, no tear, proper bonding).
If the seal is damaged, replace it as follows :
- put a compress inside the fairing, in front of the laser glass pane to protect it, and cover the
thermal insulations with clean and lintless white rags ;
- remove the old seal completely by scraping with a wooden or plexiglas tool so as not to
scratch the seal support sheet ;
- recover all the seal pieces and glue debris ;
- clean the surface using a clean and lintless white rag lightly soaked with methylethylketone ;
-spread a coat of primer on the surface thus prepared, then allow to dry for about
30 minutes ;
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L.^-^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION w^c?=°^<0
^£2£**^^ Restricted AAANUAL 03
- coat the faces to be bonded with a thin film of sealing and bonding compound ;
- allow to dry for a few minutes, checking the adherence with a finger ;
- remove the protective covers, compresses and rags.
- Check that the thermal insulations are intact and properly bonded (see 03-0).

- Clean the gooseneck fittings and the lock, and check their surface condition.
Spread a light coat of grease on the lockbolt.
Check the cable and the tin solder tacks for condition.
(3) Laser glass pane

If contaminated, clean the glass faces using a compress lightly soaked with a very pure solvent
-
(acetone). The solvent should leave not trace when drying. While cleaning, be careful not to damage the
plastic components of the window (seals, electrical wires).
(4) Compartments
- Make sure that the dull black paint of the compartments is not scratched.
B Installation
- Position then engage the goosenecks fully home in the fasteners at frame IV. Hold the fairing.
- Using the spindle, attach the cable to the fitting at frame Vc, then fit the washer and the split
pin.
Connect connector 39H.
-
Pivot the fairing to close it. Check that the fairing is properly aligned with respect to the aircraft
-
centerline, thanks to the centering spigots.
- Bring the fairing stop in contact with the nose cone structure stop, then engage the lock.
- Check that :
- the clearance between the fairing skin and the nose cone skin is the same in any point ;
- the profile of the fairing and nose cone assembly is conform.
7- FINAL STEPS
Check the window heating circuits with the test set (see 14-3).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" --** #V\II\/"\\Î_ l
BREGUET AVIATION ^^-
^ ^-^^
^*~^> _ .
Restricted , haamiiai
MANUAL rs^
03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF GUN BLAST TUBES
1 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Sealant PR 1422 A2
- Paraffin
2 - SPARES
- Screws22258 TK 060 01 0 XA
-Screws F291 -01 -05
-Screws F291-01-06
-Washers 2311 2 BC 050 LE
- Remove the gun barrel (see 1 5-1 -3)
4 - REMOVAL
NOTE: (LH side only)

- Disconnect door unlocking control rod (F296-42) on rear side to gain access to the
countersunk-head screws.
- Remove the attachment screws, marking out their location according to their shape and
diameter.
- Removal order of blast tubes: rear -» front -» center or front - rear -* center.
-Clean the bearing surfaces of the blast tube assembly on structure side; remove any PR
sealant excess (in particular, carefully clean the attachment screw countersinks).
CAUTION:
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE CENTER BLAST TUBE, MADE OF TITA¬
NIUM, BE CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS (TRICHLOROETHYLENE, PER-
CHLORINE ...). .USE WHITE SPIRIT.
5 - INSTALLATION
NOTE: Normally, the blast tube attachment screws will be reused after inspection, but if de¬
fective, they will be rejected, especially in case of:
- damaged cross recesses
- damaged threads
- cracks beginning on screw heads.
-Apply a coat of paraffin:

-on blast tube bearing surfaces, on structure side,
-on the internal cone of the fitting receiving the end part of the rear blast tube;
-on the rear and center blast tubes, at the installation plane of the joint plate con¬
necting them.
-Apply PR sealant on the bearing surfaces of each blast tube and on the joint plate con¬
necting the rear and center blast tubes.
-Position the blast tubes starting with the rear blast tube and pinning by means of a few
screws.
-Position the screws, making sure the special screws are properly located and screwing
them down by a few turns only.
-Gradually tighten the screws so that the blast tubes are positioned.
-Remove any excess PR sealant after tightening.
-Wait for a minimum period of 12 h at 20°C for the PR sealant to start drying.
-Remove the blast tubes with care so as not to strip off the PR sealant.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
-If necessary, finish off the joint by filling the voids.

-Remove the excess sealant from the structure.
-Clean the paraffin-coated portions.
-Reinstall the blast tubes as described above.
-Insert some PR sealant under the screw heads before tightening.
-Shape a PR sealant bead on the edge of the fitting into which the rear blast tube end is
engaged.
-Check that the screw heads protrude within the permissible limits (see figure 14M).
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Connect door, unlocking control rod (F296-42) on rear side.
- Reinstall the gun barrel (see 1 5-1 -3).
-In case of gun blast tube replacement, make sure that the shock wave breakers and the
harmonization checking template do not make contact.
-Should contact occur, file the shock wave breaker edges in order to obtain the required
clearance 2 mm - 0.08 in) and apply paint range PU66 to the areas that have been bared.
o Screws 22 258 TK 060 010 X

Special screws, 5 mm dia., 16 mm long
X Special screws Hz, 5 mm dia., 20 mm long
CROSS-SECTION
ATF.12 " For screws F ,6 mm dia., tolerated head
LH protrusion of 0.25 to 0.40 mm maximum
AND RH v (0.009 to 0.015 in).
For screws F ,5 mm dia., tolerated head
protrusion of 0.05 to 0.25 mm maximum
(0.0019 to 0.009 in).
FIGURE 14 - IDENTIFICATION OF SCREWS ATTACHING
GUN BLAST TUBES
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ Jl « #Y\II\A\VJ'L. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^._~
^rv ^.s-^.o
^?-^> .
Restricted aaamiiai
MANUAL no
03
SECTION 2
FRONT SECTION OF FUSELAGE

(from frame 1 to frame 22)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
2-0 GENERAL
-Fuselage breakdown 2-001
-Table of components 2-101

-Frames 2-102
-Floors- Webs 2-108
-Beams - Stringers - Skins 2-110
-Fittings 2-112
-Cockpit 2-115
-Canopy 2-118
-Canopy mechanism.... 2-121
-Nose undercarriage doors 2-128
-Airbrakes 2-131
-Removable air intakes 2-1 33
-Nose cone 2-135
-Nose cone-to-fuselage attachments 2-145
-Equipment bay tank 2-147
-Removal-installation of an airbrake panel 2-301

-Removal-installation of canopy 2-303
-Removal-installation of nose cone 2-304
-Removal-installation of equipment bay tank 2-307
-Removal -installation of in-flight refueling probe doors 2-314
-Removal-installation of air duct attachment spacer rod 2-316
-Removal-installation of laser range finder fairing 2-318
-Removal-installation of gun blast tubes 2-320
-Inspection and maintenance of canopy 2-501
-Pressure check and charging of canopy jack 2-502
-Inspection and maintenance of canopy linkage 2-504
-Inspection and adjustment of leveling straight-edge positioning plane 2-506
-Adjustment of canopy locking linkage 2-51 1
-Adjustment of in-flight refueling probe doors 2-517
-Inspection of front gun blast tubes 2-51 9
-Inspection of structure under rear gun blast tubes and in gun compartments 2-521
-Inspection and measurement of seat lower attachment fitting 2-523
-Check of hinges on a removed airbrake panel 2-525
-Visual inspection of LH and RH front tank doors 2-585
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^
/L^-JirU MIRAGE F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(cont'd)
Page
- Cleaning of cockpit 2-601

- Inspection and cleaning of windshield front and side panels and of canopy 2-602
- Paint touch-up in cockpit (refer to STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL)
2-7 STORAGE - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION
- Packaging of a canopy for transportation and storage 2-701
2-8 REPAIRS
- Replacement of a windshield panel (front or side) 2-801

- Replacement of canopy seal 2-803
Figure No. Page
1 SECONDARY FRAMES 2-103

2 INTERMEDIATE FRAMES 2-106
4 FLOORS -WEBS -BEAMS "... 2-111
5 FITTINGS 2-1 14
6 COCKPIT - WINDSHIELD 2-117
7 CANOPY - ATTACHMENTS 2-120
8 CANOPY MECHANISM - ASSEMBLY 2-124
9 CANOPY MECHANISM - OPERATION 2-125
1 1 NOSE U/C DOORS - ATTACHMENTS 2-130
12 AIRBRAKES- ATTACHMENTS 2-132
13 REMOVABLE AIR INTAKE - ATTACHMENTS 2-134
13A NOSE CONE FRAMES AND STIFFENERS 2-136
13B NOSE CONE FRAMES AND STIFFENERS (DETAILS) 2-137
13C NOSE CONE FLOORS - WEBS - CROSS BEAMS 2-139
13F PROBE FRONT DOOR OPERATING MECHANISM 2-142
13H PROBE DOOR . . : 2-144
13K NOSE CONE-TO-FUSELAGE ATTACHMENTS 2-146
13L EQUIPMENT BAY TANK STRUCTURE 2-148
13T REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT BAY TANK 2-310
14 DIAGRAM OF CANOPY JACK CHARGING DEVICE 2-503M
14M IDENTIFICATION OF ATTACHING SCREWS ON GUN BLAST TUBES 2-510
15 ADJUSTMENT OF CANOPY LOCKING LINKAGE 2-513
15M UTILIZATION OF GLASS PANEL INSPECTION SIGHT 2-609
16 REPLACEMENT OF WINDSHIELD PANELS 2-802T
AB
BREGUET AVIATION. _
MIRAGE F
FUSELAGE BREAKDOWN
The fuselage is made essentially of light alloy with some local reinforcements of titanium. It is a
semi-monocoque structure with frames, stringers and skin panels assembled by bolts and rivets.
To facilitate its description, the fuselage is split into two parts :

- from frame 1 to frame 22
- from frame 22 to frame 41 .
The fuselage comprises :

-41 frames, most of them milled, which can be grouped into three categories :
- Main frames - They ensure strength where important loads are applied i.e.
- aerodynamic loads transmitted by the wings and tail unit
- landing loads
- jet engine loads.
- Secondary frames - They delimit the fuselage section changes and ensure strength where inertial
loads are transmitted by removable assemblies such as air intakes, nose cone and tail cone.
- Intermediate frames - They support the stringers and skin panels and provide fuselage twisting
strength.
- milled light-alloy skin panels incorporating integral reinforcements and stiffeners.

- milled skin panels incorporating integral reinforcements at location of frames and stringers.
- four primary stringers running over the whole length of fuselage which contribute to provide
fuselage bending strength.
- two in the top section
- two in the bottom section.
-secondary stringers, made of light-alloy formed sections, spaced at intervals of 100 (3.937 in) to
110 mm (4.33 in)t approx.
- webs and floors made
- either of chemically milled sheet metal (floor and integral fuel tank)
- or of stiffened sheet metal.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
DESCRIPTION - OPERATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
For layout, see figures 8 and 9
Location Doc
Item Name - Characteristics and Functions
Access Door No
CANOPY PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR Cockpit
This actuator is used for balancing the canopy during the

operations.
It includes :
a balancing chamber charged with nitrogen,
- a ball-type mechanical locking device locking the
canopy in the open position,
- a charging port.
28H MICROSWITCH Cockpit
It controls coming-on of «CAB.P» indicator light when

the canopy is not locked.
1W FAILURE WARNING PANEL Cockpit
- See 08-3 for description and operation.

- «Canopy locked» indication is by red «CAB.P» indicator
light.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
FRAMES
Frames The fuselage structure from Frame 1 to Frame 22 does not comprise main frames.
1 - SECONDARY FRAMES (Fig. 1)
The following frames are regarded as secondary frames : 1 -2-10-17.
FRAME
PURPOSE SHAPE MANUFACTURE REMARKS
No.
1 Nose cone annular machined light equipped with nose

attachment alloy cone attachment
fittings
2 Cockpit front annular machined light central section

limit alloy blanked by machined
light alloy door.
Lower RH section
includes boom actuator
locking
10 Cockpit rear closed in upper section upper section ending

limit two sections machined-lower sec¬ level with canopy
tion folded sheet supporting beams
17 bounded between the closed in central machined light-alloy equipped at the upper
nosewheel U/C well section, opened at section with a sealed
and structural tanks air intake and gun access door to the
blast tube locations central fuel tank
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^>-VL-
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
18 19 20
Cadres secondaires
Secondary frames
Cl C.2
f
+
DL
LEGENDE KEY
Hi tôle sheet metal
usiné machined
CIO
yry
Q
r"
I ::::::
*.<".' 0
1 I
*x*r W:|S:
1**?:
Xvlv
:::*
>
\
FIGURE 1 -CADRES SECONDAIRES

AC SECONDA R Y FRAMES
BREGUET AVIATION
2- INTERMEDIATE FRAMES (Fig. 2 - 3)
The following frames are regarded as intermediate frames : 3 to 9 - 1 1 to 15 - 17a to 21 - As well as

frames located between central fuel tank and air intake ducts.
FRAME
CHARACTERISTIC MANUFACTURE REMARKS
No.
3-4 partial frames in machined upper section upper section limited

2 sections lower section of folded between canopy supporting
sheet beam and stringer 8
5 frame in 5 machined upper section upper section limited

sections lower section of folded between canopy suppor
sheet ting beam and stringer 8
6 to 8 partial frames in machined upper section upper section limited

2 sections lower section of folded between canopy suppor
sheet ting beam and stringer 8
9 partial frame folded sheet
11 partial half-frame folded sheet upper section from frame

10 to stringer 9
machined lower limit of U/C well
web
12 partial frame in upper section of folded upper section up to ceiling

3 sections sheet panel of U/C well
machined lower section lower section lateral to
U/C well
13-14 ha If -frame in folded sheet from radio bay door support

4 sections to stringer 5
folded sheet from stringer 5 to str. 7
machined from stringer 7 to str. 9
machined under stringer 9
15 2 half-frames in machined from radio bay door support

3 sections to stringer 7
from stringer 7 to str. 9
under stringer 9
17a 2 partial half-frames folded sheet limited in height between

stringer 10 and central
floor, in width between cen¬
tral fuel tank and air intake
ducts
18 2 half-frames in folded sheet limited in height between

3 sections stringer 1 and central floor,
in width between central fuel
tank and air intake duct
folded sheet between stringer 1 and
stringer 14 lateral to air
intake
machined below stringer 14
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^°
MIRAGE F
FRAME
No.
18a partial frame with folded sheet upper central section

opening to stringer 1
folded sheet central section with
opening in two fish-plated
sections
19 2 half-frames in machined central section limited by

3 sections stringer 1 in 3 elements
side sections limited by
str. 1 and U/C well ceiling
panel, stringer 14
19a partial frame with upper section of folded sheet

opening in 4 sections
centre section of in 2 elements joined by
folded sheet splices
machined lower section forms gun attachment
20 partial frame with folded sheet central section in

opening in 3 sections 2 elements joined by splices
and machined cross-beam
machined 2 side sections
20a partial frame machined
20b partial frame in folded sheet central section

2 sections
machined lower section forms gun aft attachment
21 2 half-frames machined located on either side of

air intake duct
AA
MIRAGE F
Cadres 12 3 4 5 6 7 8109 11 12 13 14 15 17^18 > 19 20 20bl

Frames 17a 18a 19a 20a 21
C.3 C.4
L.8. L.8 y
nD 1 70
C.5 C. 6-7-8
L.8_ LJ
D
0'
C.9 cn A
LEGENDE KEY
EJ**%3 tôle sheet metal
Ï-ZZ-ZZ-A usiné machined
FIGURE 2 - CADRES COURANTS

INTERMEDIATE FRAMES
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
C.12 C.13 C.Ï4 C.15 C.17a
lilu
L.9
C.18 C18o C.19 C.19o

L.1
L.i I MIIMIIII1BWW!
*-J IP
C.20 C.20a C.20b C.21
L.1
D
LEGENDE. KEY
ISSifo:} tôle sheet metal
^y'-'-j
i i i i r
1 1
usiné machined
INTERMEDIATE FRAMES
AC 2-TC
05-75 2-107 FIGURE 3
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
FLOORS- WEBS
(Figure 4)
1- FLOORS
Made of machined light alloy or folded sheet, they ensure junction between frames and webs and
form partitions between the various compartments.
They comprise :
- Various fittings
- Access doors
- Lightening holes
- Stiffeners and ribs.
Index
Location Composition
No.
1 Between frames Made of sheet, in three sections. Central section is

C1 and C2 removable, secured by screws on anchor nuts, tight-fitted,
includes flanged edges.
2 Central, between frames Made of joggled sheet, reinforced by angles and formed
C 2 and C 5 bis sections ; cockpit floor is tight-fitted.
3 Central, between frames Made of machined sheet, reinforced by angles, it is cut¬

C 5 bis and C 10 out in its central section. Equipped between frames
5 and 6 bis with two welded and riveted sheet boxes
through which flight controls pass. Cockpit floor is
tight-fitted.
4 Central, between frames Made of machined sheet, reinforced by two machined

C 12 and C 17 cross-beams. Fitted with supports provided to receive
equipments of the equipment bay and of nosewheel well.
It forms the bay floor.
5 Between frames Made of flanged-edge machined sheet, it comprises three

C 17 and C 19 wide cutouts and sealing grooves.
6 Central, between frames Made of flanged-edge machined sheet, it comprises

C 19 and C 20 sealing grooves.
7 L/H and R/H sides Made of flanged-edge machined sheet, it forms the
between frames speedbrake well ceiling.
C 17 and C 18
8 L/H and R/H sides Made of machined and corrugated sheet, it forms the
between frames ceiling of the gun bay.
C 19a and C 20b
9 L/H and R/H sides Made of machined sheet, equipped with a wide screwed
between C 18 and C 21 door. It comprises sealing grooves.
10 L/H and R/H lateral Made of machined sheet, it is equipped with a support
sections, between and comprises sealing grooves.
C 21 and C 22
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
2- WEBS (Fig. 4)
Made of machined light alloy or folded sheet, they ensure junction between frames, floors, thus
forming the sidewalls of various compartments.
They comprise :
- Various fittings
- Access doors
- Lightening holes
Index
No.
11 L/H and R/H sides Made of Z section folded sheet from C 2 to C 5 and [
between C 2 and C 10 section from C 5 to C 10.
12 Central between Made of machined sheet, reinforced with angle, connects

C10andC12 the rear consoles.
13 L/H and R/H sides Made of machined sheet, reinforced by L bent sections
between C 10 and C 17 from C 1 1 to C 12, Z section from C 12 to C 13 ; also
equipped with a bracket.
14 L/H and R/H sides Web 9, it comprises two parts riveted together with a
between C 10 and C 17 filler wedge :
- horizontal part with servo attachment
- vertical part limited from C 1 1 to C 1 5.
15 L/H and R/H sides Nosewheel well wall, it consists of a machined lower
between C 10 and C 17 section riveted to the upper section made of angle
reinforced sheet.
It bears nosewheel leg hinge fitting.
16 L/H and R/H sides In gun bay box. It comprises a floor and a machined web ;
between C 17 and C 19a reinforced by stiffeners, bent sections and angles.
17 L/H and R/H sides These are made of machined folded sheet, reinforced with
between C 17 and C 21 angles, their profile presents a slight break. They
C 21 and C 23 comprise sealing grooves.
18 L/H and R/H sides Made of machined folded sheet, it comprises sealing
between C 1 7 and C 22 grooves.
19 L/H and R/H sides Dorsal fin web, it is made of machined folded sheet. It
between C 17 and C 20a comprises a riveted Tee and sealing grooves.
NOTE : These tables cover only main floors and webs although the structure comprises secondary
webs made of folded sheet and angles some of which form stringers.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
BEAMS - STRINGERS - SKINS

(Figure 4)
Stringers are made of light alloy of various shapes and sizes according to fuselage zones. They are
assembled to the skin by rivets except in the integral structure zone where assembling is ensured by
spot-welding.
The beams transmit important local loads due to some equipments (e.g. servo-controls) or loads
due to important cut-out in fuselage shape, at location of canopy, and radio compartment.
Index
No.
20 Between C 19a and C 20b Beam of machined tight alloy, it comprises an

housing for ball-joint aft of C 20.
It is used for external load centring and attachment.
21 Between C 12 and C 17 Beam of machined light alloy secured to C 1 7 by

screws and nuts.
NOTE : For the whole of stringers and skin panels (see STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE F COUPE G
CROSS SECTION F CROSS SECTION G
'TE 'Y
: ; ' I i i i
Cadres 1 2
I
17
|l' 18 II
19 20
|
|
il21
1
i
22
I i i
COUPE D 19sl 20al l20b COUPE E

CROSS SECTION D CROSS SECT/ON E
COUPE A COUPE B COUPE C

CROSS SECTION A CROSS SECTION B CROSS SECTION C
FIGURE 4 - PLANCHERS - VOILES - POUTRES

FLOORS WEBS - BEAMS
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FITTINGS
(Figure 5)
1- MAIN FITTINGS
The front part of the fuselage from Frame 1 to Frame 22 does not comprise any main fittings.
2- SECONDARY FITTINGS
Secondary fittings carry the loads, more specially those transmitted by the nosewheel gear, inertial
loads transmitted by the nose cone as well as inertial loads transmitted by equipments such as :
-Seat
- Canopy
- Air intake - shock cones.
Index Frames Designation Location
Nose U/C
1 10-11 Hinge fitting L/H - R/H
2 10. Jack attachment, including the seat Aircraft

lower attachment yoke centreline
3 13-14 Up-lock nose U/C fitting U/C L/H - R/H

and unlocking jack web
Refuelling boom hinge
4 1-2 Hinge bearing R/H
5 1-2 Hinge bearing L/H
Seat
7 10-12 Upper attachment fitting A/C centreline
Lower attachment on jack attach, fitting A/C centreline
Canopy
8 10 Canopy attachment fitting A/C centreline
9 12 Jack attachment fitting A/C centreline
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
Index Frames Designation Location
Air intake-shock cone
10 13-14 Front roller-holder fitment counter- L/H - R/H

fitting and front roller-holder fitting L/H - R/H
12 15 Rear roller-holder fitting L/H - R/H
Jacking
13 17 Jack fitting L/H - R/H
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 5 - FERRURES
FITTINGS
AC
05-75 Restricted 2-114 FIGURE 5 2-1 1
BREGUET AVIATION _
/LJ>i!rU. MIRAGE F
COCKPIT
(Figure 6)
1 - GENERAL
The cockpit structure is made sealed by application of sealant at junction of the various elements.
The structure is subjected to cabin pressure.
It comprises a thermal insulation (refer to 03-0).
Its strength is increased by light alloy beams bordering the cut-outs formed by the windshield and
the canopy between frame 2 and frame 10.
To the front, the beams receive the windshield, and to the center and the rear, the canopy U
section. These components include a groove accommodating the inflatable canopy seal (see 09-2).
At right angles with the canopy, the beams house the opening and closing mechanism.
They also support a certain number of equipment items.
2- DESCRIPTION
A - Cockpit
The cockpit is limited :

-
- at the front, by frame 2
- at the rear, by frame 10 up to the consoles and by frame 12 in the top section ; this box
structure forms the canopy U section fitted at frame 12 with the canopy hinge fitting
- at the lower section, by the multi-element floors attached by screws to the bent sections and
webs which stiffen the flight station.
- The cockpit comprises :
- front instrument panel 1
- RH side console 2 and LH side console 3 (both horizontal)

- RH side panel 4 and LH side panel 5 (both vertical)
- pedestal 6
- pedal mount 7, aft of frame 2
- sight mount 8 attached between the two consoles
- control stick mount 9 at frame 6
- The cockpit receives windshield 10 in its upper section.
B- Windshield
The windshield assembly is composed of :

- a structural assembly integral with the fuselage structure
- a group of glass panels.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZUJ^-^TU
BREGUET AVIATION ^g^V^gÔ
MIRAGE F
^£^-<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(1 ) Structural assembly
The structural assembly consists of :

- transverse arch 1 1 riveted to the side beams at frame 7 ; ball joint 23 attaching the canopy hinged
handle is screwed to it ;
- two titanium posts 12, riveted :
- on the one hand, to the arch
- on the other hand, to frame 2 ;
On side glass panel side, these posts are fitted with neoprene extrusion 13 bonded with PR ;
- titanium machined skin 14 for front glass panel
- rear panel edge skin 1 5
- edge fairing 16, on LH and RH sides.
(2) Glass panel assembly
The windshield comprises a front glass panel and two side glass panels.
(a) Front glass panel

It is made up of three 8-mm thick (0.314 in) glass layers sandwiching two butyrol plastic layers,
1 mm thick (0.039 in) each. Molded seal 17 is fitted round the assembly for pressurization sealing.
(b) Side glass panels

Each panel is made of curved OROGLASS material, 19 mm thick (0.748 in), girded all around
with silicone elastomeric seal 18 bonded to the glass.
(c) Attachment
The front panel is clamped between the post and frame 2 supports by front panel edge skin 14,
fastened with screws.
The side glass panels are gripped on neoprene extrusions 13 of the structures :
- by front panel edge skin 14
- by rear panel edge skin 1 5 screwed to captive nuts at frame 7
- by an angle piece 19 screwed to the consoles
Screwed edge fairing 16 ensures the side junction between the fuselage shape and the windshield ;
it is edged with neoprene extrusion 20.
Tightness to pressurization is obtained by rubber seal bead 21 bonded to the metal sections of the
side glass panel periphery.
Watertightness is obtained by sealant bead 22 at glass panel-to-structure junctions.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C.2
; COUPE A COUPE B
CRÇSS SECTION A 14
14^ CROSS SECTION B
12 3 4 5 6 7 10 13
V£^Vj£E%
FVW<#
FIGURE 6 - POSTE PILOTE - Pare-brise

AE COCKPIT- Windshield
BREGUET AVIATION
/L=J>^rU MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 0?
CANOPY
(Figure 7)
1 - GENERAL
The hinged canopy forms the superstructure of the cockpit, which prolongs the windshield. It is
made of dome 1 embedded in metal framework 2. For tightness, refer to 03-0.
A glass-embrittlement system is provided. For that purpose, it is fitted on its periphery with
20 blocks 29 for supporting pyrotechnic charges and a support 30 for transfer unit. In the axis of dome
and rear arch overlap, the canopy is fitted with dacron «hinge» element 31, held by counterplate 32
throughout the structure. This hinge acts as a link point for the dome section separated from the
canopy.
A Dome
The dome is made of «oroglass» material, 7,9 mm thick (0.311 in), girded by pad 3 and
external and internal edge 4 made of tergal polyester and composed of several elements bonded
together and to the dome.
The dome is fastened to the rigid metal framing structure by screws and nuts safetied through the
edging. On assembly, tightness between dome and frame is obtained by application of PR sealant.
B Metal framework
It is made of welded and riveted extrusions comprising an internal framework, front arch 5 and
rear arch 6 tied by side beams 7.
(1 ) The side beams are fitted with screwed components.
(a) To the front, two roller-holder fittings 8 fitted with roller 9 and adjustable stop screw 10.
(b) To the center and aft sections, two roller-stop fittings 1 1 .
(c) The LH side beam comprises support 12 made of folded sheet and receiving canopy shear knife 13,
fastened with a ring and lockwired.
(2) Front arch

The front arch is fitted with the following components :
(a) Fixed handle 14, screwed.

After unlocking and once the canopy balance is reached, a slight impulse upward is enough to
open it and lock it' in open position.
(b) Hinged handle 15.
It is used to partly open the canopy, on the ground
- At rest : the handle ends are secured to two ball joint type supports screwed to the front arch, on
either side of the centerline.
The handle is hinged on LH support 16 and is fastened, by engagement of the end ball joint cage
into RH support 17. The ball joint is immobilized by lock 18 of the yellow and black stripped end.
- On the ground : after unlocking the end, the handle is pulled-down in the vertical position. The
end then latches on the support ball joint, on windshield arch.
(c) Two rear-view mirror mounts 33.
(3) Rear arch

The framework is reinforced, along the centerline, by fitting 19 onto which the following items are
bolted :
- to the inside, actuator attachment fitting 20

- to the rear, canopy hinge fitting 22, with two open hooks for canopy jettison.
AD
°9"77 Restricted 2~118
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^ _
MIRAGE F
2- CONNECTIONS
A Mechanical connections
(1) At the hinge of the canopy actuator rod end, the connection is made with pin 23 tied to the
canopy structure by a small chain.
(2) At the two attachment points of the hinge fitting, the two open hooks of the canopy slide
between top roller 24 and bottom roller 25. These rollers are fastened to the bushed yokes of the fitting
through bolt 26 and locked nut.
B Functional connections.
These are made on transfer unit 36, at the junction of the two pyrotechnic flexible cords 35.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION^^^S^
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
PR
COUPE F CROSS SECTION F
FIGURE 7 - VERRIERE - Liaisons

CANOPY - Attachments
AF
BREGUET AVIATION __ ^_ _
MIRAGE F
CANOPY MECHANISM
(Figure 8)
1- GENERAL
The canopy opening control is fully mechanical.
Unlocking is controlled :
- From inside by the cockpit RH control lever
- From outside by means of a wrench engaging into a square on the cockpit LH side.
The canopy opens under the action of balancing jack 1. The latter is constructed in such a way
that the canopy opens partially by itself when it is unlocked. An upward impulse enables the pilot to
lock it in up position.
Closing is obtained after pulling control lever 2 on the RH. side. This produces unlocking of the
canopy which falls down by itself to the balance position.
A light pull with the hand on the canopy movable handle returns the canopy onto its seat.
A forward pushing action on the RH. control lever ensures downlocking.
Interconnection of LH and RH mechanisms is ensured by torque shaft 3 and bellcranks 4 located

in the cockpit forward section.
Linkage adjustment is obtained by stops 5.
2- DESCRIPTION
The canopy control mechanism is composed of :

- two normal actuation side mechanisms
- a balancing and open-position locking mechanism.
A Each side mechanism comprises :

- alocking hook 6
The RH hook controls the canopy seal inflating and deflating cock trough a rod 7 and control
finger 29.
- a bellcrank 8
- an adjustable control rod 9 between hook and bellcrank
- a telescopic rod 10
- a link rod 1 1 between bellcrank and control lever
- an adjustable stop 12
- a control lever :
- on RH side (2), it provides internal control of the canopy ; its deflection is limited at the end
of downward travel by stop 1 2 ; the handle folds back,
- on LH side (13), it permits external unlocking control.
The RH side control lever also comprises :

- on its pivot shaft, a free lever 14, returned by spring 15 against a stop 16 and fitted with attach¬
ment of cable 17 for up position unlocking control.
AA
BREGUET
fi^>^ru
AVIATION^F0^^^
MIRAGE F
B Balancing mechanism
It consists of a canopy jack 1 comprising a balancing chamber into which the following items
slide :
- a piston 18 equipped with the rod-end actuating the canopy
- a locking bush 19 incorporated in the piston
- a latch rod 20.
The jack body is hinged on a mount fastened against frame 12 at the level of the lateral cabin
beams ; this mount is equipped with control lever 21 of the latch rod.
- a bellcrank lever 22, linked through a rod to the control lever, and which bears unlocking cable
attachment.
3- OPERATION (Fig. 9)
A Canopy closed and locked

The canopy is held in closed position by locking hooks 6.
Telescopic rod 10 ensures this position by buttressing.
B Unlocking (from inside)
Control lever 2, brought to opening position (by pulling), controls the rotation of bellcrank 8
through the action of rod 11 and after releasing the buttressing of telescopic rod 10 against the
bellcrank, controls, through the action of rod 9, the hook opening.
Once unlocked, the canopy jack operation causes the canopy to rise from its seat until its balance
position (half-open position).
The hook opening pulls control finger 29 :

- by cock opening, this finger ensures the canopy
seal air vent to prevent any damage to the seal
during canopy actuations ;
- in turn, this actuates microswitch 28H, which causes «CAB.P» warning light grounding and
lighting-up.
NOTE : The canopy can only take a « LOCKED » or « UNLOCKED » position. Each of these
positions is obtained by telescopic rod 10 buttressing on bellcrank 8.
C Locking in open position
This locking is obtained through a ball device inside the canopy jack.
-The canopy is raised by an impulse and drives piston 18 and locking bush 19 ; the balls enter
groove 23 in the jack cylinder and are pushed and blocked by locking bush 19.
D Unlocking the canopy from up position (lowering)
Control lever 2, brought to down position by pulling, actuates free lever 14 which causes a traction
on cable 17 and lever 21, through shaft 24.
By its deflection, lever 21 drives latch rod 20 and locking bush 19, thus releasing the balls from
the jack cylinder groove ; the canopy is unlocked and returns to its balance position.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^^TU
^S^^ff^
MIRAGE
..aw..,*,
F
no
E Canopy down lock ing
Pushing the canopy fixed handle brings the canopy to closed position. While maintaining the
canopy in this position, push-in lever 2 to locked position : hooks 6 reengage and lock the canopy.
Telescopic rod 10 and bellcrank 8 assembly are buttressing.
F Unlocking from outside
The hooks can be controlled from outside. The shaft of LH control lever 13 is fitted with a
square. A wrench, engaged on this square, on aircraft LH side, at the root of windshield arch, allows
canopy locking and unlocking mankuvres to be made from outside.
G Canopy unlocked warning
The pilot is warned by illumination of the «CAB.P» light that the canopy is not locked. In locked
position, the RH mechanism hook pushes rod 7 which actuates microswitch 28H which cuts off light.
4- FUSELAGE TO CANOPY JACK CONNECTIONS (Fig. 8)
Connection is made :
- on support at frame 12 :
- at the jack lower attachment fitting to the ball-joint 25 crimped to support by bolt 26,
recessed washer and safetied nut,
- by a clamp 27 providing attachment for rod 28 by a spacer bolt and safetied nut,
- the rod integral with F.10 comprises a port allowing jack body deflection.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION D
COUPE A
COUPE B C.12 SECTION A _16
SECTION B
COUPE C
SECT/ON C
FIGURE 8 - MECANISME VERRIERE - Ensemble

CANOPY MECHANISM - Assembly
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 9 - MECANISME VERRIERE - Fonctionnement

CANOPY MECHANISM - Operation
AC
04-86 Restricted 2-125 FIGURE 9 2-
BREGUET AVIATION ô^1^-^^»
/L^>-"r\l MIRAGE F
NOSE U/C DOORS
(Figure 11)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The nose U/C doors include :

- a fairing door 1
- two lateral doors 2 and 3 (L/H and R/H)

- a rear door 4.
A Fairing door 1
Fairing door is attached to the nose undercarriage.

Its frame consists of a machined panel comprising a yoke 5, and two fixed stops 6 ; two bores are
provided for strut jack attachment.
B Lateral doors 2 and 3
Located between frames 9 and 12, they are positioned on either side of fairing door. Each lateral
door consists ofa box comprising : an outer skin sheet 7, an inner sheet 8 and two stiffeners 9.
Components are assembled by screws and rivets.
The door is fitted with :

- two front and rear gooseneck fittings 10 fitted with ball-joints for hinging
- an interconnection assembly comprising :
-a hinge fitting 11
-a gimbal joint 12
- a rod 13
- a door control adjustable rod 14.
C Rear door 4
The rear door is located on aircraft centerline between frames 12 and 16.
The door consists of a box comprising : an outer skin 15, an inner skin 16, and two stiffeners 17.
Components are assembled by screws and rivets.
The door is fitted with :

- two front (24) and rear (25) fixed stops.
-three hinge fittings : - front one (18) - center one (19) - rear one (20). Center fitting with a
lubricator comprises a female yoke fitted with door jack rod-end.
- three door-locking fittings : front one (21 ) - center one (22) - rear one (20), each fitted with door
«uplock» position locking rollers 41.
- fittings 21 and 23 are reinforced and attached to the outer skin, the edge Z-plate and the front
rib.
Roller installation
On each of the three fittings are installed, in the following order, a recessed washer 42, a
washer 43, roller 41, two washers 43 and a safetied nut.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-^-^rvL
BREGUET AVIATION^^R^vÔ'
MIRAGE F
NOTE : Provision is made for an IFF antenna on rear door (cross-section L).
2- CONNECTIONS
A Shield door 1
Connection is made on strut jack.

The door is attached :
- at yoke 5, by a plain pin 26 safetied and fitted with a washer, for attachment of strut jack yoke
(cross-section A)
- through two bores and strut jack support by two bolts 27, washers and nuts (cross-section B).
B - Lateral doors 2 and 3 (L/H - R/H)

to structure by means of :
Each lateral door is tied
-front bearing fitted with bolt 28, washer and nut, through structure bearing bushes and bushed
ball-joint 29 of the door front gooseneck bearing 10 ; this bearing limits axial play (cross-section C).
- rear bearing fitted with bolt 30, washer and nut, through structure bearing bushes and
ball-joint 31 of the door rear gooseneck bearing 10 (cross-section D).
- the interconnection assembly (detail E)
- at location of gimbal joint 12 by a bolt 32, washer and nut, through gimbal-joint bushes and
hinge fitting.
- at location of rod 13 :
- on gimbal-joint side (detail E) by bolt 33, washer and nut
- on structure side (cross-section F) by bolt 34, washer and nut
- at location of adjustable rod 14
- on gimbal-joint side by bolt 35 washer and nut (detail E)
- on U/C leg side by bolt 36 (cross-section G).
C Rear door 4
Attachment to structure is made :

- at location of side hinge fittings by a bolt 37 fitted with a lubricator, washer and nut for fuselage
fittings attachment (cross-section H)
- at location of center fitting 29 by a bolt 38, washer and nut, through center fitting and fuselage
fitting bushes (cross-section J)
- through bearing yoke bushes and door jack rod-end ball-joint by bolt 39, washer and safetied nut
(cross-section K).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
C12 18
H|
M
(f *p
21 J
DETAIL E L38
COUPE H COUPE J
CROSS-SECTION H CROSS SECT/ON J
21-22-23
COUPE K
CROSS-SECTION K 15.
"COUPE A
CROSS SECTION A COUPE L
CROSS SECTION L DETAIL M SECTION N
FIGURE 1 1 - TRAPPES D' ATTERRISSEUR AVANT - Liaisons
NOSE L/G DOORS - Connections
AD
01-77 Restricted 2-130 FIGURE 11 2-1 :
BREGUET AVIATION^
]LJ>^^1 MIRAGE F
AIRBRAKES
(Figure 12)
1 - DESCRIPTION
Two airbrakes (RH and LH) are located on fuselage sides between frames 18 and 21. They are
actuated by actuator 1 hinged, on structure side, about attachment fitting 2 integral with frame 21
(cross-section D).
Each magnesium airbrake is machined from solid stock, complete with internal ribs and hinge
arms. It is mounted on bearing ribs fitted with bushes integral with frame 18 (cross-section E).
- Outer arm 3, toward stringer 14, fitted with steel liner 4, receives the ball joint cage attached by
nut 5 and lockwasher 6.
- Inner arm 7, toward stringer 20, is fitted with a ball joint whose cage is spot-stamped against
steel washer 8.
-Perforated skin 18, machined in light alloy, is fastened to the airbrake by rivets and screws.
- At frame 19, two webs 9 fitted with bushes 10 constitute the female hinge yoke of the actuator.
- At the rear section, support 1 1 is fitted with steel hook 12 hinged on pin 13 retained by circlips.
The hook comprises an adjustable stop screw 14, and is held by two return springs 15 attached :
- on the one hand, to locking pin 1 6 integral with the hook
- on the other hand, to attachment fitting 17 integral with the support.
At the rear of the hook and along the centerline, the airbrake is fitted with rubber stop 19 bonded
in a bore.
2- CONNECTIONS
Connections are made as follows :

- Through hinge arm ball joints (cross-section E) :
- on the outer arm, by pin 20, bushes 21 and nut
- on the inner arm, by pin 22, spacer 23 and nut.
Pin heads 20-22 are retained by lockplates 24 fastened by screws ; the nuts are retained by cages
25 screwed on safetied nuts.
- At hinge point on airbrake (cross-section B) :

- by pin 26 safetied with stop 27 fixed by screws 39, shouldered bushes 28, teflon washer 29,
washer and nut 30, all lockwired.
- At hinge point, on fixed point side (cross-section D) :
on fuselage, by pin 31 fitted on head side, with nut 32 receiving the swivel coupling, and
-
with fixed bush and teflon washer 33, sliding bush 34, lockwasher 35 and nut.
On airbrake retraction, hook 12 swings open. It is brought back to closed position by its two
springs 1 5.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION B
SECTION E
C.18 C79 C.20

»
C.21
i
COUPE C
r CROSS SECT/ON C
Soô
-L.14 v
D O
l CD O oo
I
O t) CD o
1
CD CD {do
i CDCD !cz> CD
V L.20
Détail au rep. 24
Detail at item 24
Vue suivant F
View in direction
MODIFICATION N° 695
NON APPLIQUEE
A of arrow F MODI F ICA TION AT 695
18 NOT INCORPORA TED
COUPE A
CROSS-SECTION A
SECTION D
après serrage : ;;
0,3 mm (0.022 in)
minimum entre tête
d'axe et nervure
Clearance after tightening
0.3 mm (0.022 in)
FIGURE 12- AEROFREINS- LIAISONS minimum betwenn head
AIRBRAKES - A TTACHMENTS of bolt and rib
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^>~rÇL
BREGUET AVIATION ^Sr0,
MIRAGE F
REMOVABLE AIR INTAKES
(Figure 13)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The air intakes, located on either side of fuselage, aft of the cockpit, are of the thin-edge,
semi-circular section type.
Junction with fuselage fixed air intakes is made at frame 15.
Each air intake constitutes a light-alloy box assembly comprising :

- aninner skin and an outer skin made of two sheets
- inner skin sheets 1-2 are welded together and to ledge 3
- outer skin sheets 4-5 are riveted to the ledge and to joint plates 6.
The lattice structure is made of :

- three semi-circular stiffeners = front (7) - center (8) - rear (9)
- two stiffeners - one upper (10) and one lower (11) extended forward by three wedges :
- laminated wedge 12, at lower and upper sections
- wedge 13, under upper and lower straps
- wedge 14, at lower and upper sections, up to ledge
- duct side wedge 15, made of high-temperature laminates, and riveted between skin sections 1 and
4, level with structure boxes
-pyrofoam filling block 16, packed between duct side sheet 15 and upper (10) and lower (11)
stiffeners.
The air intake duct includes two straps 17 and two posts 18 for attachment to fuselage, and is
fitted with protective cover hooking point 19.
Air duct intermediate rod 28 in the equipment bay takes up the tension or compression loads
caused by air intake duct straps 17, and which tendto distort beams 29.
This intermediate rod comprises :

- rod body 28
-two end fittings 30 screwed into the body (one of the end fittings has a left hand thread) ;
notched locknut 31 is-used to lock the end fittings.
2- AIR INTAKE-TO-FUSELAGE ATTACHMENTS
Each air intake is fastened :
by screw 20 (through duct side wedge and ledge) on anchor nuts and safetied nuts integral with
-
A/C structure
- by screw 21 (through the ledge and both posts 28) on anchor nuts integral with A/C structure
(cross-section D)
- by screw 22 and nuts, on periphery of the fixed air duct junction (cross-section E)
-by screw 23, washer 24, nut 25, through strap end-piece and support on fuselage
(cross-section J).
The supports, on A/C structure side, are fixed by spherical washers 26, adjustable washer 27, and
safetied nuts (cross-section H).
AA
01-77 Restricted 2~U3
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
COUPE E SECTION G
CROSS SECTION E
COUPE B COUPE D
CROSS SECTION B CROSS SECTION D
FIGURE 13 - ENTREE D'AIR DEMONTABLE
- LIAISONS
REMOVABLE AIR INTAKES -ATTACHMENTS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-i>~rU
BREGUET AVIATION ^Z^JZ^*^
MIRAGE F
NOTE : All screws located inside the air intake duct are installed with PR sealant.
3- AIR-INTAKE-TO-FUSELAGE CONNECTIONS
Each rod end fitting is held to the side wall by a bushed clevis.
The clevis/rod attachment is by means of pin 32 and self-locking nut 34.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //
BREGUET AVIATION ^L
^>^-\\
_^ ^
MIRAGE
......... M
F
NOSE CONE
1 - DESCRIPTION
Secured to fuselage frame 1, it forms the aircraft nose. It is extended by a radar nose cone secured
to nose cone frame I.
It includes nine doors :
- five hinge access doors to equipment compartments,
- two access doors to nose cone attachment to fuselage, at the upper section,
- The boom front door blanking the compartment accommodating in-flight refuelling boom filler
valve.
The lower section accommodates :

- a front fairing to frame I and a rear fairing from frame I to frame III for the pitot-head.
- a door secured by screws, bearing radio-altimeter antenna.
- a Laser telemeter fairing between frames IV and VII (See 03-5).
NOTE : In-flight refuelling boom housing is blanked off by a door integral with the refuelling boom.
A Structure
It is a light alloy structure box-type construction which comprises seven frames, five stiffeners
linked by four beams, stringers, webs and floor covered by a machined light alloy skin.
(1 ) Frames and stiffeners (Figures 13A - 13B)

(a) Frames
Frame I
-
Machined annular frame, forms radar compartment front limit. Bears the four radar nose
cone attachments. The lower section is provided with front attachment fitting 1 of pitot head,
comprising a clamping cone 2 and a wirelocked castellated nut 3.
-Frame II
Closed frame made of folded sheet, covered by a riveted cap 4. The central section receives an
air conditioning duct. The upper section is provided with the front hoist fitting 5 consisting of a bush 6
blanked off by a plug 7 and secured to the fitting by the screw 8, on self-locking nut, crossing both
parts.
-Frame III
Lower half-frame made of folded sheet, provided with the rear attachment fitting 9 of the
pitot-head, comprising a clamping cone 2, a castellated nut 3, a dog point screw 10 and a lock-washer.
- Frame IV
Closed frame in two sections, made of folded sheet
- Upper section : provided with boom guide fitting 1 1
- Lower section : provided with 2 laser telemeter fairing hinge fittings 12.
- Frame V
Cut-out partial frame. The lower section is constituted by a bracket in two components
forming collar:a
- The upper component 13 is screwed onto self-locking nuts integral with the frame. It is
provided with an attaching rod 14 which receives a thrust washer 15, «Schnorr» washers 16, a guide 17,
a nut 18 the stroke of which is limited by a pin 19.
Frame VI
-
In one section, made of folded sheet, opened in central section. Front face of structure box
formed with frame VII.
- Frame VII
In one section, opened in central section, wall made of folded sheet almost completely
covered by a reinforcement plate. Linked to frame VI by angles and bent sections, and by the two
spacers of guide pins. Is provided with four nose cone to fuselage attachment fittings at location of
beams. The upper section is fitted with rear hoist fitting 20 equipped as front fitting 5.
Flanged-edge holes are provided on the frames for the delivery of conditioning air which is
evacuated through scoops on a door located at the lower section between frames 5 and 6.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MANUAL 03 RAIDISSEUR IVa - IVb RAIDISSEUR Va
Vb STIFFENER IVa - IVb STIFFENER Va
<§m V
RAIDISSEUR Vc
STIFFENER Vc
RAIDISSEUR Vb
STIFFENER Vb
CADRE IV
Cadres I VI VH FRAME IV
Frames
CADRE I CADRE II 11
FRAME I r** FRAME II
Dfl CADRE III

FRAME III
L*. CADRE VI
p
CADRE V FRAME VI
FRAME V
"P
+
Nota (Note) - Les cadres et raidisseurs de I à VI
Frames and stiffeners from I to VI
sont vus de l'arrière
are seen from the rear
- Les cadres et raidisseurs VII - Va - Vc
CADRES ET RAIDISSEURS DE POINTE AVANT Frames and stiffeners VII - Va -Vc
sont vus de l'avant
NOSE CONE FRAMES AND STIFFENERS are seen from the front
AA
05-75 Restricted 2-136 FIGURE 13A 2-136
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
COUPE C
CROSS - SECT/ON C
COUPE A
CROSS - SECTION A C.Vc
III, TT: r//"///"'/// tf^Sl
SECTION D
CROSS - SECTION D
Cadre 5
Frame 5
COUPE E
CROSS - SECT/ON E
COUPE B COUPE F
CROSS - SECTION B CROSS -SECTION F
FIGURE 13B - CADRES ET RAIDISSEURS DE POINTE AVANT (DETAILS)

NOSE CONE FRAMES AND STIFFENERS (DETAILS)
AA
05-75 Restricted 2-137 FIGURE 13B 2-13
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL*^tr^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION xr^L-^^> . . . . . ,, . . , ^,
^2=^<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) Stiffeners
- Stiffeners IVa - IVb

Partial made of folded sheet : side components between central floor and lower webs.
- Stiffener Va
Partial made of folded sheet : in two joined components forming a structure box fitted with
the centering dowels of laser telemeter fairing.
- Stiffener Vb Partial, in two section, made of folded sheet.
- L/H side section, between upper beam and lower floor,
- R/H side section, between boom rear outer web and upper floor.
- Stiffener Vc
Machined light alloy partial stiffener, provided with attachment and setting system 21 of laser
telemeter constituted by a base plate 22, a ball-joint holder 23 including openings, two eccentrics 24,
one pin 25 and two screws 26 fitted with washers and self-locking nuts, and the attachment base 27 of
laser fairing retaining cable.
(2) Floors - Webs - crossbeam (Figure 13C)
They constitute the sidewalls of the various compartments and ensure the junction between frames
and webs.
(a) Floors
Made of light alloy sheet, they include :
- various fittings
- doors
- lightening holes
- angles, reinforcement plates, stiffeners.
They comprise :
-one upper floor 28 between frames IV and VI. At location of frame IV, it is provided with a
neoprene stop 29 positioned on two blocks, screwed on self-locking nuts receiving the refuelling boom.
It comprises a water draining hole 30 ahead of frame VI and a riveted tube 31 on L/H side for electrical
cable running. It is interrupted on R/H side between frames IV and V up to boom R/H front web.
- a central floor in two sections :
- a front floor 32 between frames IV and V comprising on the R/H side a machined door
P4-03i screwed on self-locking gang nuts integral with the structure. Aft of frame IV, it receives the air
conditioning duct 33 and four attachment points of the dampers of laser and V/UHF - VHF supply
units.
- a rear floor 34 between frames V and VII comprising on the R/H side a screwed sheet door
P5-03i and four attachment points of the dampers of firing computer, air data computer and navigation
computer.
- a lower floor 35 attached laterally on lower beams, equipped with a riveted slot 36 and two
skids 37 (front and rear) for sight unit positioning.
- a front floor 38 comprising a riveted funnel 39 equipped with a water draining evacuating tube
and a riveted tube 40 on L/H side for electrical cable running.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
35 34 47 34
SECTION C SECTION D
I Cadres
Frames
FIGURE 13C - PLANCHERS - VOILES - TRAVERSES DE POINTE AVANT

NOSE CONE FLOORS - WEBS - CROSS BEAMS
AA
05-75 Restricted 2-139 FIGURE 13C 2-13!
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ^^trV^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION w^F^îÔ ..*«.,.. ai nn
^C^^^b, Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) Webs
of folded sheet, they ensure the junction between frames and floors.
Made
They comprise :
-boom rear inner web 41 - corrugated sheet between frames IV and VII. Aft of frame IV, it is
equipped with the fork support fitting of boom front door.
- boom rear outer web 42 - corrugated sheet between frames IV and VII
- boom L/H front web 43 - corrugated sheet between frames II and IV
- boom R/H front web 44 - corrugated sheet between frames II and IV. It is provided with boom
door front bearing support.
- lower L/H (45) and R/H (46) webs - sheet with flanged edge holes, between lower frame IV and
frame V.
(c) Machined light alloy crossbeam 47 between frames V and VII which forms the bottom of the
compartment and includes the holes for the sight unit connectors.
(3) Stringers
They are made by pick-up angles

Stringer 1 - Boom rear inner web 41 attached from frame IV to frame VII
Stringer 2 - Boom L/H front web 43 attached from frame II to frame V
Stringer 4 - 5 - Between lower frame V and frame VI
Stringer 6 - Central floor attached between frames IV - V and V - VII
Stringer 9 - Between frames V and VI
Stringer 10 - Central floor 32-34 attached between frames III - V and V - VII
Stringer 1 1 - Front floor attached between frames and IV
1 1
Stringer 12 - Between frames IV and V

Stringer 13 - Upper floor 28 attached between frames V and VI
Stringer 15 - Boom rear outer web 42 attached from frame IV to frame VI I
(4) Beams
Stringer 3 - L/H upper beam constituted by an angle from frame II, and protruding beyond
frame V. Riveted from frame V on two elements made of folded sheet from frame V to frame VII.
Stringer 7 - 8 - L/H and R/H lower beams constituted by two folded sheets from frame to 1 1
frame V and riveted together from frame IV to frame VII.

Stringer 14 - R/H upper beam constituted by an angle between frames II and VII and a bent
section picked up on the angle between frames V and VII.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ>~?V^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^p^^g^ , ......... m
B Boom doors (Figure 13F)
(1) Front boom door
(a) Description
It is a mechanically controlled swivelling door, which can be locked in open position, actuated by
the in-flight refuelling boom. It is a structure box type light alloy construction, riveted, constituted by
an external sheet and an internal sheet joined by three stiffeners. It is hinged on brackets integral with
the structure through a front bearing 1 and a rear bearing 2 fitted with teflon ball-joints. The rear
bearing comprises a riveted steel shoe.
The door is controlled and locked by the following system :

- a fork 3
- a rod 4 _
- an adjustable stop, door closed 5 L secured with nut locked by nut retainer and
- an adjustable stop, door open 6 J equipped with a neoprene pad.
- a locking hook 7 equipped with a teflon pad.
- two return springs 8.
(b) Operation
Door opening
When the boom is extended, the fork 3 is driven upward by a roller 9 integral with the boom. It
-
swivels and pushes the rod 4. The rod acts on the rear support 2 of the door which swivels on its
support till the contact against the «door open» stop 6. Simultaneously, the rear support 2 lower shoe
engages on locking hook 7 retained by the springs 8. The door is locked open.
Door closing
When the boom retracts, it drives the locking hook end 7 which pivots and releases the rear
-
support 2 shoe. The door is unlocked. During its travel, the roller 9 of the boom engages in the fork 3
which pivots, thus driving the door rear support 2 through the rod 4, till the contact against the «door
closed» stop 5.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
*»«"
COUPE A
CROSS - SECTION A
C.IV
OUVERTURE DE LA PORTE FERMETURE DE LA PORTE

DOOR OPENING DOOR CLOSING
FIGURE 13F - CINEMATIQUE DE LA PORTE AVANT DE PERCHE
BOOM FRONT DOOR OPERA TING MECHANISM
AA
05-75 Restricted 2-142 FIGURE 13F 2-142
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Ls^TSk MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^^^^^» ...Mll., m
(2) Boom door (Figure 13H)
It blanks the upper groove which serves as a housing for the in-flight refuelling boom between the
nose cone frames IV and VII. Made of machined light alloy, with serrated washers 1 crimped at location
of attachments, it is made integral with the boom through 3 supports.
The front support is equipped with a roller which actuates the boom front door.
(a) Supports
Front support 2 (cross-section B)

-
It is constituted by two stirrups (upper 3 and lower 4) joined laterally :
- on R/H side by screw 5, washer, nut and pin
- on L/H side by a roller-holder 6 secured by pin 7, washer, nut and pin on both stirrups and
provided with a roller 8 secured by a special screw 9.
- Intermediate and rear supports (cross-sections C and D)
Each support is constituted by two half-supports 10 joined at the upper and lower sections
by pin 1 1 or screw 12, washer, nut, pin.
(b) Supports attachment to the door
It is made :
- for the front and rear supports by
a pin 13 and washer below the head, by serrated washer 14,
spring washer 15, thrust washer 16 and adjusting washer 17, interposed between the door and the
supports (cross-sections B and D).
- for the intermediate support, by a screw 18 and washer below the head, by serrated washer 19
and adjusting washer 20 interposed between the door and the support.
The recesses of screw heads in the door are blanked with sealant 21 .
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE D
CROSS - SECTION D
FIGURE 13H - PORTE DE PERCHE
AA BOOM DOOR
05-75 Restricted 2-144 FIGURE 13H 2-144
AVIONS MARCEL bASSAULTjL^^ryi *** ' f\M V7 L. T
BREGUET AVIATIONôF0^-^^ , .âakiiiai m
NOSE CONE TO FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT
(Figure 13K)
1 - ATTACHMENT
The nose cone is attached to the fuselage at the level of frame 1 .
Attachment is made in four points by pins crossing conical parts

The two upper attachments are screwed from the nose cone into fuselage fittings.
The two lower attachments are screwed from the fuselage into nose cone fittings.
The nose cone is positioned by two locating pins 1 secured by self-locking nuts, through a spacer 2
located between nose cone frames VI and VII.
A Upper attachment points (Cross-section A)
Each attachment point is constituted :

On fuselage side, by a fitting 3 provided with :
-a pin attachment ring 4, safetied by lock 5, secured by screw and washer on self-locking nut
riveted to the rear face of fuselage frame 1 .
- a conical support 6 positioned by an adjusting washer 7.
On nose cone side, by a fitting 8 provided with :

bush 9 with conical bearing positioned by an adjusting washer 10.
- a
- a pin retaining ring 1 1
- a captive pin 12 and washer below the head safetied by a lock 13, secured by screw and washer
on self-locking nut, integral with a bent section on nose cone structure.
B Lower attachment points (Cross-section B)
Each attachment point is constituted :

On fuselage side, by a fitting 3 provided with :
- a conical support 6 positioned by an adjusting washer 7.
- a pin1 1 retaining ring.
- a captive pin 12 safetied by a lock 13 secured by screw and washer on a self-locking nut integral
with a bent section on nose cone structure.
On nose cone side, by a fitting 8 provided with :

- a pin attachment ring 4, safetied by a lock 5, secured by screw and washer on self-locking nut,
.riveted in nose cone frames VI and VII structure box.
- a bush with conical bearing 9 positioned by an adjusting washer 10.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
13_ 11 8_ 9_ 7
210 a rs;
211 A
r
CVII
I
COUPE H
CROSS - SECTION H
COUPE A
CROSS -SECTION A
CADRE VII (POINTE AVANT) CADRE (FUSELAGE)

1
COUPE F COUPE G
FRAME VII (NOSE CONE) FRAME 1 (FUSELAGE)
CROSS SECTION F CROSS SECTION G
COUPE B
CROSS - SECT/ON B
CVI C.VIIC.1
COUPE C
CROSS - SECTION C 2.
COUPE E COUPE D
CROSS - SECTION E CROSS - SECTION D
ryî
FIGURE 13K - LIAISONS POINTE AVANT-FUSELAGE
NOSE CONE TO FUSELAGE ATTACHMENT
AA
05-75 Restricted 2-146 FIGURE 13K 2-141
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ&~Zr\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^S^^^ ..*...., ««
EQUIPMENT BAY FUEL TANK
(Figure 13L)
1- GENERAL
This integral metal tank is located in the equipment bay (L/H side) between frames 14 and 17.
2- DESCRIPTION
A Structure
The tank includes :

a framework consisting of :
- a front machined frame 8
- two sheet frames 9
- one intermediate machined frame 10
- one rear machined frame 1 1 .
- skins picked-up on the framework, consisting of :
-a R/H front skin 12
-a R/H rear skin 13
-a L/H skin 14
These skins are machined and stiffened by stringers 15 (angles) and pick-up tees 16.
Sealing of the three skins is ensured by a PR 17 sealant bead.
The three skins are riveted onto the front frame, the intermediate frame, the rear frame, the two
pick-up angles 18, the angle 19. The machined bottom of the tank, provided with two beads of PR
sealant, is screwed on the frames, the R/H skins and the angle 19. A tank bottom inspection door 20,
fitted with a seal, screwed on the bottom of the tank, allows for internal sealing of the tank.
B Mechanical junctions
(1) Rear attachments (frame 17)

two ball-joint supports 7 riveted onto the rear frame 14 are attached to the two pins 22 secured
-
to frame 17.
(2) Side attachment

on tank side
- a ball-joint 21 is secured in the bore of the lateral tab of the front machined frame 8.
on aircraft side
-
- an eccentric pin 23 adjusted in a straight-toothed hub is secured to a support riveted to the
R/H console.
- the.eccentric hub permits lateral and vertical adjustments so as to obtain front attachment
centering.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
ATTACHE AVANT
FRONT ATTACHMENT
FIGURE 13L - STRUCTURE DU RESERVOIR DE SOUTE A EQUIPEMENTS MONTAGE DE L'INTERCOMMUNICATIOh

EQUIPMENT BA Y TANK STRUCTURE DU CADRE 17
AA INTERCONNECTION INSTALLATION
05-75 Restricted 2-148 FIGURE 13L 2-V
AT FRAME 17
BREGUET AVIATION
(3) Front attachment
- On tank side
- a bail-joint 24 is secured in the bore of the tank bottom attachment tab.
- On aircraft side :
- an eccentric 26 fitted in the bore of the equipment bay floor allows for lateral and
longitudinal deflection adjustment.
- the pin 27 crossing through the ball-joint of the tank bottom tab and in the eccentric bore
immobilizes the tank, in the longitudinal direction, the only possible direction.
- this pin is locked by a tilting safety spring 25 secured on a pin retained by two angles.
C Functional junctions
(1) Interconnection union including :

- a support 28 attached to the tank, to the end of which the liner 5 is welded.
- a base plate 3 screwed to the liner end and secured to frame 17 support.
- an union 2 is screwed onto the base plate 3 and ensures sealing by compressing the seal 6.
- the junction assembly is sealed by PR sealant coats.
(2) Air vent union including :

- a support 29 attached to the tank, to the end of which the liner 5 is welded.
-a flange 3 screwed to the liner end
- a base plate secured with the flange to frame 17 support (liner to base plate sealing is ensured by
O-rings).
- an air vent tube is secured to the base plate through a bayonet joint, (tube to base plate sealing
ensured by O-ring).
- the junction assembly is sealed by PR sealant coats.
3- OPERATION
- The equipment bay fuel tank is permanently interconnected to the front central tank.
- Filling, transfer, air venting are made with that of the front central tank.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [UJ^^rXi.
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AN AIRBRAKE PANEL

(figure 12)
A Standard tools
- Accessory kit for torque wrenches, 2 to 20 m.daN and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb and 40 to
350 ft.lb)
B Spares (as required)

-Special nut F2 14999
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Grease Air 3565
- Loctite 675 (as required)
Manually open the airbrake panels (see 02-0).
4- REMOVAL
A Uncouple the airbrake jack from the panel (see 04-5).
B Remove the airbrake panel hinge pins.

- On each hinge :
- remove the lockplate (6 mm socket),
- unscrew and withdraw the pin (21 mm socket).
C Remove the airbrake panel.
5- REPLACEMENT
Bushes 21, spacer 23 and hinge pins 20 and 22 are part of the aircraft fittings. Consequently, in
case of replacement, these components shall be withdrawn from the removed airbrake and reinstalled
on the new one.
A Check and maintenance of parts prior to reassembly
- Clean the various assembling parts.

- Wipe them carefully.
- Check for perfect surface condition.
B Installation of bushes 21 and spacer 23
- Sparingly grease bushes 21 and fit them in the outer spherical bearing (the longer one on the
inner side of the airbrake).
- Sparingly grease spacer 23 and fit it in the inner spherical bearing.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- INSTALLATION OF AIRBRAKE PANELS

A Preliminary steps
(1 ) Check for perfect cleanness of :
- connecting pins 20,
- the bore of each spherical bearing,
- the hinge fittings.
(2) Sparingly grease the pins.

IMPORTANT NOTE : Never spread anything (oil or grease) on teflon-lined spherical bearings.
B Installation
- Install the hinge pins.
- Position the airbrake panel.
- Insert the pins.
- Screw them in (21 mm socket).
- Torque them to 3.300 m.daN (24.75 ft.lb).
After torquing, the clearance between pin head and rib should be 0.3 mm (0.012 in).
- Fit the lockplates (6 mm socket).
- Attach the bonding braids.
7- FINAL STEPS
(1 ) Check of airbrake adaptation to fuselage
- Deflection check
Bring the airbrake up to structural stop ; check that the dimension measured in the airbrake
symmetry plane between the airbrake skin trailing edge and the cutout section on fuselage skin, as near
as possible to the unlocking unit, exceeds 1000 mm (40 in).
- Check of routing clearance
The routing clearance between airbrake and structure should be :
3 ± 1.5 mm (0.1 18 ± 0.059 in) on stringer 14 side,
2 _ 1 ' mm (0.079 _ q'qoq in) everywhere else.
On airbrake panels which do not incorporate the new type of assembly, check that there is no
contact between screw 1 attaching the locking hook support to the airbrake, and the hooking unit
(see figure below).
If there is contact, replace the nut of the rear screw by a special nut.
- Remove screw 1 .
-Mill the screw hole to dimensions of special nut 3.
- Fit the nut coated with Loctite 675.
- Shorten the screw to obtain 0.5 mm protrusion from the nut.
Also shorten front screw 2 to obtain 0.5 mm protrusion from the nut. Safety the nut with Loctite
675.
CD CD CD L
O O çd r~ TOP VIEW SECTION A SECTION B
IP CD O
O. CD. \__ r*-A r*-B
O O o o \
Protrusion
=0.5 mm
(2) Couple the airbrake jack to the panel (see 04-5).

(3) Carry out airbrake maintenance operations (see 04-5).
(4) Adjust the airbrakes (see 04-5).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^
-~à>-"r\l
_^ .
MIRAGE
.......«
F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF CANOPY

(figure 7)

- Stowage cradle GSV-1 7
- Storage and transport case LH 77287-100
- Canopy seal guard 50 MS 066
B Spares
- Laminated shims for lateral stops, FA1B261-043
2- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 351 2
- Open the canopy.
- Make sure that the seat safety pins are fitted.
- Disconnect the pyrotechnical fuses (see hereunder).
NOTE: WHEN REPLACING THE CANOPY, CHECK THAT THE PYROTECHNICAL CIRCUIT
HASNOT REACHED ITSSERVICE LIFE LIMIT.
- Comply with instructions relating to canopy embrittlement pyrotechnical system
(see 09-0).
- Disconnect the pyrotechnical fuses from the transfer unit ; to this end :
- unscrew both plugs from the stowage support attached to frame 1 2.
- Undo the grip of the cable retaining the fuses, from the ring attached to the canopy
arch.
- Disconnect the two fuses and withdraw them TOGETHER from the transfer unit.
CAREFULLY place the two fuses TOGETHER on the stowage support (unscrew
the clamp screw if necessary).
- Lock the fuses into place (color marks).
CAUTION :
1 - HANDLING THE FUSES SEPARATELY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE.
2- THE POSITION OF EACH PYROTECHNICAL FUSE IS MARKED WITH A LINE OF
DIFFERENT COLOR, BUT IDENTICAL ON THE TRANSFER UNIT AND THE
STOWAGE SUPPORT. MAKE THESE MARKS COINCIDE WHEN CONNECTING THE
COMPONENTS.
- Blank off the ports of the transfer unit with the two plugs taken from the stowage
support.
4- REMOVAL
- Maintain the canopy and remove the canopy-to-actuator pip pin.
- Swing the canopy up until it separates from its attachment fittings.
- Remove the canopy and place it :
- either on its stowage cradle if it is not removed for more than one day,
- or in its storage and transport case if it is removed for more than one day.
- Cover the canopy with its protective slip cover.
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO BOND ANYTHING ON PLEXIGLAS WITH ADHESIVE

TAPE OTHER THAN SCOTCH 670 MINNESOTA TAPE.
If maintenance operations are to be performed in aircraft cockpit with canopy removed for a
certain time, install canopy seal guards on cockpit lateral beams.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _Â_~ ^>=^, aaamiiai r»o
^ ^=^ Restricted MANUAL 03
5 - INSTALLATION
-Clean and oil slightly.
(1 ) On fuselage:
-Rollers and hooking fitting finger. Make sure they rotate freely.
(2) On canopy:
-Actuator hooking fitting. Check actuator ball-joint for condition.
- Release canopy from its stowage cradle.
-Position the canopy on aircraft and engage hooks in rollers.
-Couple canopy actuator, using pip-pin inserted from left to right.
CAUTION:
BEFORE MOVING THE CANOPY, CHECK THAT THE HOOKS ARE FULLY ENGAGED
IN THE FUSELAGE FITTING ROLLERS. STOP THE OPERATION IF A TIGHT SPOT IS
DISCOVERED; TO CONTINUE WOULD MEANS ABNORMAL TENSION LOAD ON THE
CLEVIS TABS, WITH A RISK OF BREAKAGE.
6 -REPLACEMENT OF CANOPY (see "Adjustment of canopy locking linkage").
A - Install the canopy seal (see manual 2-803)
- Perform the following checks as detailed in manual 2-51 1 :
-Check of balancing jack.

-Check of internal clearance of jack rod.
B - To check canopy centering:

-cover canopy rollers in blue, close canopy and lock,
-open canopy and check that the marks left by the rollers are centered on the hooks.
Maximum off-center: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
C - Check the clearance between the canopy rollers and hooks (see para. 5C (2)).
D - Check canopy locking in closed position.
During this test, ensure that the canopy roller fitting does not catch pin 41 (Fig. 15). If
required, chamfer the fitting so that it can pass freely.
E - Check the adjustment of rubber stops (see para. 5G).

F - Check the control lever loads (see para.6B).
G - Check canopy locking in up position (see para. F).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^£. _^ _
MIRAGE
..*....«.««
F
7- FINAL STEPS
A Connection of pyrotechnical fuses
Comply with instructions relating to canopy embrittlement pyrotechnical system (see manual
09-0-2).
-Unscrew the plugs blanking the ports of the transfer unit.

-CAREFULLY disconnect the pyrotechnical fuses from the stowage support at frame 12,
removing them TOGETHER.
- Check for correct positioning of the following components : sleeve, clamp, cable attaching
tab and screw.
- Check tightness of the screw.
- CAREFULLY engage the two fuses TOGETHER into the transfer unit and press them home,
ensuring that color marks are aligned.
CAUTION :
HANDLING THE FUSES SEPARATELY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE.
-Lock the fuses.

-Hook the grip of the cable retaining the fuses, into the canopy ring.
- Make sure that the collar is properly set over the red sleeves, with the sleeve ends projecting
on either side.
- Screw the plugs onto the stowage support.
B - Checks
Check the following :

- cleanness of the canopy seal,
- correct locking of the terminals of the flexible pyrotechnical fuses to the transfer unit,
- correct external appearance of the flexible fuses (no wrinkles),
- correct operation of the canopy : move it several times, checking that the fuses slide correctly
in the guide collar,
- if required, arrange the fuses by hand to give them the best shape for sliding, with no bend having
a radius smaller than 6 cm (2.36 in). In case of wrinkling, reposition the collar as the collar attaching
tab should lie along the pulling axis of the cable.
AC
12-80 Restricted 2-303Q
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTL=J>^rPv
BREGUET AVI ATlON^gF3^^5-^
fVllKMVJU
....,,,.,
I
n1
""-** -"^ Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF NOSE CONE

(figure 13K)
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ftlb)
B Special tools
- Pitot-static system protection caps

- Nose cone stowage cradle
- Hoisting assembly 5001 PHP
- Lifting device
2 -MATERIALS
- Eastman 910 or Cyril EF adhesive

- Bostik adhesive
- Grease Air 4205
- Loctite 672
Ensure that the laser fairing window protection is positioned.

-
Remove access doors 01.06, P5.10, P5.02, 01.05 and 01.07.
-
- Install the cone hoisting assembly.
- Place the boom in extended position (see 06-2).
- Remove the caps of frames II and VII hoist fittings.
- Before installing the hoisting assembly, make sure that the hoisting beam is correctly centered
according to the equipment items located in the nose cone.
- Screw the nose cone hoisting beam shackles in the fittings of frames II and VII.
- With the crane, apply a very light tension on the hoisting beam.
4 - REMOVAL
A Disconnection of functional junctions
(1 ) Electrical wiring
(access through door P5.03)
- Disconnect the following connectors from the two electronics units :
17 Fa, 17 Fb
23T P01 , 23T P02, 23T P03.
- Disconnect connector 240C from the equipment.
- Remove the three strips attaching the cables to the structure.
- Disconnect the following electrical connectors secured to the base plate of frame 1 :
207A, 209A, 206A, 204A, 229A, 228A, 208A,
8R, 18R, 15T.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors secured to the base plate of frame VII :
341A,342A,343A,344A
(access through door 01 .06).
- Disconnect connector 104R
(access through door 01.10).
- Disconnect connectors 21 0A, 21 1 A, 295A and 345A.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj^^Pl «V» I KM W C T
BREGUET AVIATION^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Pitot static system pipes :

- Through the door P5-03, disconnect S1 and S2 circuits at frame 1 (19 A/F wrench).
- Through the door 01-06, disconnect T2 circuit (19 A/F wrench).
- Screw the protection plugs onto the pipes to avoid pitot static system contamination.
B Nose cone removal
For each attachment :

Remove the lock safetying the attachment pin head (recover the lock, screw and nut).
- Unlock the attachment pin but do not unscrew it completely (13 socket).
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT THE CRANE APPLIES A LIGHT TENSION TO THE HOISTING BEAM, SO
AS TO HOLD THE NOSE CONE DURING REMOVAL, AND TO FREELY UNSCREW THE NOSE
CONE TO FUSELAGE.
- Fully unscrew the captive attachment pin.

- Release the nose cone from the locating pins.
CAUTION :
WHEN THE NOSE CONE IS DISENGAGED BY SOME CENTIMETERS, ENSURE THAT
THERE IS NOT ANY ATTACHMENT LEFT AND THAT NOTHING IMPAIRS REMOVAL -
EASE ELECTRICAL CABLE DISENGAGEMENT.
- Remove the nose cone with a straight forward uniform motion while avoiding any knock.
- Install the nose cone on its stowage cradle.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
-Check the seal and the air conditioning duct seal on frame 1 for condition (absence of cuts,
separation, missing sections). Replace them if required, and bond the seal with Eastman or Cycril
adhesive and the air conditioning duct seal with Bostik adhesive.
- Check the condition of the connecting elements of the nose cone to fuselage attachments (screw -
lock), of connecting pins, locating pins, corresponding bores, conical sections (absence of scratches).
- Apply a light coat of grease AIR 4205 on conical sections, connecting pin thread, locating pins,
corresponding bores.
B Installation
With the hoisting assembly, offer up the nose cone at 10 centimeters from the fuselage.
-
-Install the electrical cables in the nose cone - Facilitate their routing to the electrical components.
- Install the electrical connectors previously removed.
- Gradually move the nose cone forward with a straight uniform motion up to the locating pins.
Center the nose cone properly.
- Move the nose cone forward, up to its final position.
-Tighten the pins (13 socket) with a torque wrench to a torque of 2.8 m.daN (20.6 ft.lb) (by
gradual steps) two by two in staggered sequence. Fit the locks.
- Remove the hoisting assembly (hoisting beam, shackle)
- Install the caps on the hoist fittings and safety them with loctite.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/Z^V-Ur-Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^!. ^ - « . . .,....,
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the protection plugs from the pitot system pipes.

- Connect the pitot systems. Carry out a leak test on the pitot systems (See 12-1 ).
- Test the nose cone electrical and electronic components (See 14).
- Install the doors previously removed.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Lj>~^r9k
BREGUET AVIATIONôF0^-.^^ .
/VllKMvJC T
àâakiiiai
no
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF THE EQUIPMENT BAY FUEL TANK
(Figure 13T)
A Standard tools
- 50 dia. wrench for WIG-O-FLEX coupling
-Rule
- Pressurization unit
C Spares
- O-rings for the air vent
- Seal for WIG-O-FLEX coupling
2- MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4205
- Sealant PR 1005 L
- Methylethylketone
- Pierlon BC 60
- Tecsil T/2036
- Klegecel
- Polyurethane
- Drain out the fuel from : (see 02-3)
- the front tank group
- the inverted flight accumulator
- Remove the door 1 7-00 (see 03-2)
WARNING :
TAKE ALL THE USUAL PRECAUTIONS WHEN OPERATING IN A TANK (SEE 06-0).
Remove the inverted flight accumulator (see 06-2)

-
Open the equipment bay door 13-00 and remove :
-
- the peripheral electrical and electronic components to permit the access to the fuel tank
(TACAN, flying aid amplifier, etc..) and its removal
- the common rack
- the air intake connecting spacer rod (see 03-2)
- the MMU rack and its R/H support (seven 5 mm screws and bonding strip)
- the R/H filter secured to the tank
- the protection sheet located between the console and the tank (4 screws).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// J^-^hî MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^}. ^-^ - . ...........
4- TANK REMOVAL
A Disconnection of the functional junctions :
(1) Air vent :
Remove the PR sealant so as to disengage the attachment screws 1 and the junction of the
-
flange 3.
- Remove the six screws attaching flange 3 to support 4 ; recover the washers (8 A/F spanner).
- Withdraw the base plate 2 and the connector pipe
- Unscrew the flange 3 from the end of liner 5.
(2) Frame 17 interconnection

Remove the PR sealant so as to disengage the attachment screws 1, the junction of flexible
-
coupling 2 to base 3 and the junction of base plate 3 to support 4.
- Unlock the flexible coupling 2, and unscrew it ; recover the split washer and the seal.
- Unscrew the base plate 3 from the end of liner 5.
B Mechanical junctions :
- Front attachment :
- tilt the spring
- remove the pin
C Tank removal :
- Slide the tank by pulling it forward so as to disengage :

- side attachment secured to the R/H console
- both attachments of frame 17
- interconnection and air vent
- Fit the protection caps to the ends of the connecting liners.
PULL THE TANK HORIZONTALLY UNTIL THE AIR VENT AND THE INTERCONNECTION
OF FRAME 17 BE COMPLETELY DISENGAGED, SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE LINERS.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL^>-^rÇL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^-»^-^ , ÂÀAMIIAI fYl
5- PREPARATION PRIOR TO TANK INSTALLATION
A Tank leak tests :
- Fit :
the air vent with a connector allowing for pressurization.

-
the interconnection with a refueling union equipped with a blanking cap.
-
- Fill-up through the interconnection
- Connect the pressurization unit to the air vent union, adjust the delivery pressure to 500 millibar
(7.25 psi) and close the shut-off valve.
- Leave the pressure and check for leaks.
- Depressurize and remove the unions. Fit the protection caps.
B - Checks :
(1) On frame 17:

- Check the klegecel and polyurethane shims for condition (absence of cuts, separation, missing
sections). If not repair them.
- separate the klegecel
- clean the mating surfaces
-bond the shims on frame 17: klegecel with Pierlon, polyurethane on klegecel with Tecsil
adhesive.
- touch-up the protection (paint).
(2) On the protection sheet (between tank and console)

- Check the neoprene seal for condition and bearing (absence of cuts, separation, missing sections).
Replace it if required and bond it with Pierlon.
(3) Equipment bay :

Carry out an overall check of the component hidden by the tank (electrical cables, in-flight
-
refuelling pipes, etc..)
- Check the dual interflex unions of in-flight refuelling piping for leaks (See 02-5).
6- INSTALLATION
Position the tank in the equipment bay.
A Preliminary steps

Remove the lateral pin and the hub (8 A/F spanner) from the R/H console support.
-
- Clean the pin and ball-joint on tank ; apply a light coat of grease AIR 4205.
- Slide the pin in the ball-joint
-Clean the two pins of frame 17 and the ball-joints on tank; apply a light coat of grease
AIR 4205.
- Make sure that the two rear ball-joints are correctly positioned.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MANUAL 03 Montage du raccord de
pressurisation sur la
mise à l'air libre
Installation of
pressurization connector
on air vent
Robinet de coupure
Manomètre Shut-off valve
Pressure gauge Groupe de
j__, pressurisation
4 couches de P.R CZJOï Pressurization unit
4 PR sealant coats
(0.236in)
zm
MONTAGE DE LA MISE
A L'AIR LIBRE
le bouchon
'
Wig-O-Flex
\l
Monter sur l'intercommunicarîon ^
|H
%p
AIR VENT INSTALLATION

Fit the Wing-O-Flex
plug to interconnection
MONTAGE DE
L'INTERCOMMUNICATION
DU CADRE 17 Montage du raccord carburant
FRAME 17 INTERCONNECTION sur l 'intercommunication
INSTALLATION Installation of fuel union
on interconnection
SCHEMA DE PRINCIPE DE L'ESSAI MONTAGE DES BOUCHONS

4 couches de P.R D'ETANCHEITE DU RESERVOIR DE PROTECTION
4 PR sealant coats DE SOUTE A EQUIPEMENTS
INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION
EQUIPMENT BA Y TANK LEAK CAPS
(0.236în) TEST FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
FIGURE 13T - DEPOSE - POSE DU RESERVOIR DE SOUTE A EQUIPEMENTS

REMO VAL- INSTA L LA TION OF EQUIPMENT BA Y TANK
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J/J^r^X *** IKMwL I
BREGUET AVIATION^5P=-<^0> àâamMAI m
^£s-<<<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Functional junctions

-Remove the two protection caps screwed onto the pipe ends.
THE PROTECTION CAPS STIFFEN THE AIR VENT AND INTERCONNECTION LINERS.
TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS SO AS NOT TO DENT OR DISTORT THE LATTER
DURING INSTALLATION.
(a) frame 17
Bases on
Completely remove the damaged PR sealant, taking care to make a bevelled cut, on sound bead
-
side, so as to ensure correct junction with the sealing product. For this, use tools which cannot score or
damage the structures (hard wood, plexiglass).
- Proceed to cleaning and degreasing.
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO DROP METHYLETHYLKETONE ON PARTS OTHER THAN THE
SUPPORTS.
(b) Tank connections :

- Clean flanges, bases, screws, washers and WIG-O-FLEX coupling.
(c) - Systematically replace the air vent O-rings.

-Lightly lubricate the O-rings and the base with petrolatum AIR 3565 in order to facilitate
installation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL=«s>""inX
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^c^P3^^^ . , ââamiiAI AO
B Installation

-Offer up then slide the tank onto the pins of frame 17 until the hub bears against the console
attachment of frame 14.
- Correctly position the straight-toothed hub in order to align the front tank attachment bore with
the equipment bay eccentric bore, when the tank is brought to its final position, and to fit the pin in
these bores.
- Safety the pin with the safety spring.
(2) Functional junctions (access through door 17-00)
(a) Interconnection :
- Screw the base plate 3 on the liner assembly 5 up to a 6 mm (0.236 in) distance from support 4
bearing surface.
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO TWIST THE LINER WHEN SCREWING THE BASE PLATE.
- Compress the base plate 3 till it bears against support 4

Assembly base plate 3 and support 4 with screws 1 tightened two by two in staggered sequence.
- Fit the WIG-O-FLEX coupling.
- Apply a light coat of petrolatum AIR 3565 on the seal and the split washer and fit them to
the end of liner 5.
WHEN POSITIONING THE SPLIT WASHER, TAKE CARE NOT TO SCORE THE LINER END
TUBE
Tighten the WIG-O-FLEX coupling as follows :

-
- ensure that the nut can be screwed freely ; screw.it fully home so as to position the seal
and the washer correctly.
unscrew to free the parts compressed during position tightening. Make sure that no
spring effect remains. If not, repeat the operation.
- slowly screw the mobile nut, holding it between the thumb and the forefinger tips.
- when the nut bears against the sealing elements, proceed with screwing, slowly and
without stress, until the resistance due to seal compression makes the fingers slide on the nut.
- repeat this operation two or three times.
- mark the nut position in relation to the coupling body.
- from this mark, tighten the nut by 4 notches (4 m.daN) (29.48 ft.lb) with the
50 spanner. Safety.
- Using a slightly soaked rag, degrease the WIG-O-FLEX to liner end junction.
- Seal the junctions as indicated on the figure (apply three coats of PR 1422 A2 sealant, plus
one coat of PR 1005 L sealant).
- Observe the curing times of the products.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJLs^-jjrU MIRAGE
I Y II l\/~
>» fc- v
F
l
BREGUET AVIATION^SîF3,^'^ . ........ n,
~^ Restricted MANUAL 03
From the reference mark, tighten the nut 4 notches (4 mdaN - 29.48 ft.lb) using the 50 wrench.
-
Safety.
- Use a lightly soaked rag to degrease the WIG-O-FLEX coupling at the liner end.
- Seal the couplings as shown in the figure (three coats of PR 1422 A2 plus a coat of PR 1005 L).
- Observe the curing times for the products.
(b) Air vent :
Screw the flange 3 onto the liner assembly 5 up to

- a 6 mm (0.236 in) distance from support 4
bearing surface (measurement with a rule).
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO TWIST THE LINER 5 WHEN SCREWING THE FLANGE 3.
- Fit the base plate 2 till it bears against flange 3.

- Proceed with installation as for crossfeed.
7- FINAL STEPS
A - Install :
- protection sheet between the console and the tank.
- inverted flight accumulator (see 06-2).
- air vent
CAUTION :
TAKE ALL THE USUAL PRECAUTIONS WHEN CARRYING OUT THE FINAL STEPS ON
THE FUEL SYSTEM (SEE 06-0).
B Fill up the front tank group and the equipment bay tank ; check them for leaks.
C Install the electrical and electronic equipment items previously removed and carry out the tests.
D Install the air intake connecting spacer rod (see 03-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L=^"rU
BREGUET AVIATION ^ô^^-Ô
MIRAGE
.,. . . . , . ,
F
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF IN-FLIGHT
REFUELLING BOOMS
(Fig. 13H)
Hydraulic power supply

1 15/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply
2- MATERIALS
- Blue Loctite
-Sealant EC 1675
- Connect the hydraulic power supply to system No. 1 and to the electrical power supply.
- Extend the boom (See 06-2).
4- REMOVAL
A Removal of main door.
- Remove sealant from the six door attaching screws.

- Withdraw the six attaching screws (13 mm bush) and recover washers.
- DO NOT SEPARATE MOUNTS AND ADJUSTING WASHERS.
- Remove door.
B Removal of nose door :
- Remove the fork arm-to-rod connecting pin (10 mm A/F wrench).

- Recover the three washers and the nut.
- Separate both nose door hinges (10 mm A/F wrench). Recover the front junction washer.
- Remove the door.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps :
(1) Of boom door

- Clean and check the door-to-mount junctions for condition
- Check the hardware for condition
- If required, replace the spring washers.
(2) Of nose door

- Clean and check the door ball joints, the two bearing holders of rod-to-fork arm for condition.
- Check the hinges for possible play, the stops for presence and condition.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^L __^ - hawm.a. #»«
- Slightly oil the roller.

- Using petrolatum, slightly lubricate the bearing holders
- Clean the connecting pins and slightly lubricate them with petrolatum.
(3) Check the boom for correct adjustment (see 06-2) then extend it.
B Installation
WARNING :
DOORS BEING INSTALLED BUT NOT ADJUSTED, LEAVE BOOM IN EXTENDED

POSITION.
(1) Main door :

- Use the adjusting washers previously matched with mounts.
- On front and rear mounts, and in the following sequence, install :
- adjusting washer 17
- washer 1 6
- spring washer 15
- door
- thrust washer
- threaded pin 13 (13 mm bush)
- On central mount, and in the following sequence, install :

- adjustment washer 20
door -
thrust washer
-
-screw 18 the length of which will be set according to the adjustment washer thickness
(13 mm bush).
- Perform door adjustment (See 03-2).

- Lock the six threaded pins with blue Loctite.
- Blank the pin holes in door with sealant.
(2) Nose door :
- Install door into its housing and insert bearings into mounts.
- Tighten pins (10 mm wrench)
- Ensure rod-to-fork arm junction by installing pin, nut and washers. Tighten nut (10 mm wrench).
- Adjust nose door (See 03-2).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Check theboom adjustment (see 06-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fjLsT^jPk
breguet aviation^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AIR INTAKE

ATTACHMENT SPACER ROD
(Figure 13)
A Standard tooling
- Torque wrench kit 2 to 20 mdaN (15 to 150 ft.lb)

- Torque wrench accessory kit 2 to 20 mdaN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
2- MATERIALS
- Grease AI R 4205
- Set the aircraft on jacks.

- DO NOT MOVE AIRCRAFT ONCE THE SPACER ROD IS REMOVED.
- Open the equipment bay door 1 3-00.
- Remove peripheral electrical and electronic equipment to gain access to the rod.
4- REMOVAL OF ROD
A Preliminary steps
- Make a reference mark on both sidewalls at the rod attachment point.

- Measure the distance between the two marks.
B Disconnecting
- Unlock the rod end fitting locknuts.

- Remove the sidewall attachment pin nuts.
- Release any tension in the rod (19 A/F spanner) so that the attachment pins can be easily
removed.
- Remove pins and rod.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Clean and check the condition of :

- the rod end fittings
- the sidewall clevises
- the pins.
- Cover the rod end fitting ball joints and the pins with a light film of grease.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTt^^TXX.
BREGUET AVIATION ^Cj^
MIRAGE F
B Attachment
- Adjust the length of the rod so that the pins may be easily fitted.
- Attach the rod to the structure.
- Adjust the length of the rod as required (19-mm A/F wrench) to obtain the pre-removal dimen¬
sion (marks drawn upon removal).
- Tighten the end fitting locknuts to 3.5 m.daN (25.795 ft.lb) and safety.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Install the electrical and electronic equipment which was previously removed and carry out
testing.
- Close equipment bay door 13-00.
- Set the aircraft down onto its wheels.
AB
MIRAGE F
Restricted AVÀNUAL 03
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF LASER RANGE FINDER FAIRING
(Figure 7)
- Glass protective cover 50MS008.
B- Spares
- 1 split pin 83310 CA 015012
2- MATERIALS
- GreaseAI R 4205
- Methylethylketone
- Acetone
-Primer RHODORSIL 4094
- White sealant RHODORSI L CAF 7306.
- Make sure that the laser range finder assembly is stopped.
- Make sure that the glass protective cover is in place.
4- REMOVAL
CAUTION :
THE INTERNAL FACE OF THE WINDOW IS VERY FRAGILE AND SHOULD NEVER BE
TOUCHED ; EVEN THE FINGER CONTACT IS PROSCRIBED.
A Actuate the lock to cause the laser range finder fairing to pivot about its gooseneck fittings. The
cable keeps the fairing ajar.
B Disconnect laser glass heating connector 39H, level with frame V of the aircraft structure.
C Unlock the spindle, level with the fitting at frame Vc, while holding the fairing to avoid any
untimely action. Recover the pin, washer and split pin.
D Rotate the fairing downward, while pulling lightly to the rear, parallel with the aircraft centerline,
in order to extract the gosenecks at frame IV.
E Place the fairing under shelter to avoid any impact liable to damage the laser glass pane.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
(1) Sealing
- Make sure that the seal is fitted correctly (continuity, no tear, proper bonding).
If the seal is damaged, replace it as follows :
- put a compress inside the fairing, in front of the laser glass pane to protect it, and cover the
thermal insulations with clean and lintless white rags ;
- remove the old seal completely by scraping with a wooden or plexiglas tool so as not to
scratch the seal support sheet ;
- recover all the seal pieces and glue debris ;
- clean the surface using a clean and lintless white rag lightly soaked with methylethylketone ;
-spread a coat of primer on the surface thus prepared, then allow to dry for about
30 minutes ;
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L.^-^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION w^c?=°^<0
^£2£**^^ Restricted AAANUAL 03
- coat the faces to be bonded with a thin film of sealing and bonding compound ;
- allow to dry for a few minutes, checking the adherence with a finger ;
- remove the protective covers, compresses and rags.
- Check that the thermal insulations are intact and properly bonded (see 03-0).

- Clean the gooseneck fittings and the lock, and check their surface condition.
Spread a light coat of grease on the lockbolt.
Check the cable and the tin solder tacks for condition.
(3) Laser glass pane

If contaminated, clean the glass faces using a compress lightly soaked with a very pure solvent
-
(acetone). The solvent should leave not trace when drying. While cleaning, be careful not to damage the
plastic components of the window (seals, electrical wires).
(4) Compartments
- Make sure that the dull black paint of the compartments is not scratched.
B Installation
- Position then engage the goosenecks fully home in the fasteners at frame IV. Hold the fairing.
- Using the spindle, attach the cable to the fitting at frame Vc, then fit the washer and the split
pin.
Connect connector 39H.
-
Pivot the fairing to close it. Check that the fairing is properly aligned with respect to the aircraft
-
centerline, thanks to the centering spigots.
- Bring the fairing stop in contact with the nose cone structure stop, then engage the lock.
- Check that :
- the clearance between the fairing skin and the nose cone skin is the same in any point ;
- the profile of the fairing and nose cone assembly is conform.
7- FINAL STEPS
Check the window heating circuits with the test set (see 14-3).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" --** #V\II\/"\\Î_ l
BREGUET AVIATION ^^-
^ ^-^^
^*~^> _ .
MANUAL rs^
03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF GUN BLAST TUBES
1 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Sealant PR 1422 A2
- Paraffin
2 - SPARES
- Screws22258 TK 060 01 0 XA
-Screws F291 -01 -05
-Screws F291-01-06
-Washers 2311 2 BC 050 LE
- Remove the gun barrel (see 1 5-1 -3)
4 - REMOVAL

- Disconnect door unlocking control rod (F296-42) on rear side to gain access to the
countersunk-head screws.
- Remove the attachment screws, marking out their location according to their shape and
diameter.
- Removal order of blast tubes: rear -» front -» center or front - rear -* center.
-Clean the bearing surfaces of the blast tube assembly on structure side; remove any PR
sealant excess (in particular, carefully clean the attachment screw countersinks).
CAUTION:
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE CENTER BLAST TUBE, MADE OF TITA¬
NIUM, BE CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS (TRICHLOROETHYLENE, PER-
CHLORINE ...). .USE WHITE SPIRIT.
5 - INSTALLATION
NOTE: Normally, the blast tube attachment screws will be reused after inspection, but if de¬
fective, they will be rejected, especially in case of:
- damaged cross recesses
- damaged threads
- cracks beginning on screw heads.
-Apply a coat of paraffin:

-on blast tube bearing surfaces, on structure side,
-on the internal cone of the fitting receiving the end part of the rear blast tube;
-on the rear and center blast tubes, at the installation plane of the joint plate con¬
necting them.
-Apply PR sealant on the bearing surfaces of each blast tube and on the joint plate con¬
necting the rear and center blast tubes.
-Position the blast tubes starting with the rear blast tube and pinning by means of a few
screws.
-Position the screws, making sure the special screws are properly located and screwing
them down by a few turns only.
-Gradually tighten the screws so that the blast tubes are positioned.
-Remove any excess PR sealant after tightening.
-Wait for a minimum period of 12 h at 20°C for the PR sealant to start drying.
-Remove the blast tubes with care so as not to strip off the PR sealant.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
-If necessary, finish off the joint by filling the voids.

-Remove the excess sealant from the structure.
-Clean the paraffin-coated portions.
-Reinstall the blast tubes as described above.
-Insert some PR sealant under the screw heads before tightening.
-Shape a PR sealant bead on the edge of the fitting into which the rear blast tube end is
engaged.
-Check that the screw heads protrude within the permissible limits (see figure 14M).
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Connect door, unlocking control rod (F296-42) on rear side.
- Reinstall the gun barrel (see 1 5-1 -3).
-In case of gun blast tube replacement, make sure that the shock wave breakers and the
harmonization checking template do not make contact.
-Should contact occur, file the shock wave breaker edges in order to obtain the required
clearance 2 mm - 0.08 in) and apply paint range PU66 to the areas that have been bared.
o Screws 22 258 TK 060 010 X

Special screws, 5 mm dia., 16 mm long
X Special screws Hz, 5 mm dia., 20 mm long
CROSS-SECTION
ATF.12 " For screws F ,6 mm dia., tolerated head
LH protrusion of 0.25 to 0.40 mm maximum
AND RH v (0.009 to 0.015 in).
For screws F ,5 mm dia., tolerated head
protrusion of 0.05 to 0.25 mm maximum
(0.0019 to 0.009 in).
FIGURE 14 - IDENTIFICATION OF SCREWS ATTACHING
GUN BLAST TUBES
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF CANOPY
1 - MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 3512
-Special paint (Translucent inky black 535/893)
-Thinner 957.
2 - INSPECTION
A - Plexiglas
-Inspect plexiglas for condition: cleanness, cracks, scratches, crazing, transparence.

-Check for correct condition of screws attaching the plexiglas to the structure.
-Check for correct condition of the Dacron hinge plate and its correct cementing to the
plexiglas.
-Check attachment of Tergal reinforcement strips around inside and outside contours of
the canopy.
-Defects can be detected visually by examination of the cemented joint between
edging strip and plexiglas. Faults in the cementing are shown up by the non-uniform appear¬
ance of the cement seal and by the marks left by ingress of cleaning products or paint.
A feeler gauge 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) thick may be inserted between the plexiglas
and the Tergal in order to measure the depth of separation.
Defects should be categorized according to their greatest depth and width of open¬
ing.
-Negligible defects: separation less than 3 mm (0.118 in) deep.
-Acceptable defects:
-separation between 3 and 7 mm (0.118 - 0.276 in) deep and opening less
than 100 mm (3.94 in) wide,
-separation more than 7 mm (0.276 in) deep and opening less than 20 mm
(0.79 in) wide, provided that there are no more than two such defects over a length of
150 mm (5.91 in).
-Above these limits, the canopy should be removed and sent for repair.
-IT SHOULD BE REMEMBERED THAT TRICHLOROETHYLENE MAY CAUSE CRAZING
ON PLEXIGLAS AND THAT IT IS FORBIDDEN TO BOND ANYTHING ONTO PLEXIGLAS
WITH TAPE OTHER THAN 670 MINNESOTA SCOTCH TAPE.
B - Paintwork (canopy structure)
-Check condition of the paintwork.
-When refinishing the outside (scheme 4080).
DO NOT APPLY PAINT BEYOND THE METAL SEAL CAPPING (see figure).
-When refinishing the inside:
-only use special paint for the Tergal edging strip (see figure).
-For painting the metal structure, use scheme 4080.
-Preparation of special paint:
-Special paint 1 part ,. .
. .
Tr: n qj--,
-Thinner 957
o *
2 parts
by weight
a
Limit Not to be painted
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
B - Paintwork (canopy structure)

-Check condition of the paintwork.
-When refinishing the outside (scheme 4080).
DO NOT APPLY PAINT BEYOND THE METAL SEAL CAPPING (see figure).
-When refinishing the inside:
-only use special paint for the Tergal edging strip (see figure).
-For painting the metal structure, use scheme 4080.
- Prepa/atio.n of special paint:
^*
-Thinner pa'"X
957 ^s } by weight
Limit Not to be painted

'* Outer cover of
' Tergal edging strip
Inner side
Touch up with
special paint
C - Structure
Check:
-canopy sealing beads for condition,
-structure for condition and cleanness,
-rollers of locking fittings: make sure that they rotate freely and that their pins are cor¬
rectly crimped,
-rubber stops,
-stops of rear and center rollers (on cabin lateral beams),
-attachment of fittings and fasteners,
-condition of handle (canopy ajar setting) and its locking efficiency,
-on LH lateral structure:
-attachment of support and canopy shear knife case,
-safetying of knife holding pin,
-rain seal for. condition: cementing, cleanness, no tearing,
-condition of hinge fittings on fuselage side: no oxidation, distortion or cracks.
D - Embrittlement system
-Comply with instructions relating to canopy embrittlement pyrotechnical system
(see 09-0).
Check for:
-condition and attachment of fuses and load supports surrounding the canopy,
-connection of fuses to transfer unit,
-attachment of fuse supporting cable,
-correct sliding of fuses when operating the canopy.
CAUTION:
CHECK THAT THE COLOR LINE ON EACH PYROTECHNICAL FUSE MATCHES THOSE
ON TRANSFER UNIT AND STOWAGE SUPPORT.
3 - MAINTENANCE
-Clean and very lightly lubricate:
-the locking fitting rollers,
-the canopy hinging device.
-Wipe off any excess oil.
-Clean the roller stops with a dry cloth.
-Clean the canopy (see 03-2).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^
ï>3l
~./7
_
MIRAGE F
PRESSURE CHECK AND CHARGING OF CANOPY JACK

(Figure 14)
A Special tools
- Hydraulic accessory case
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench case, 0 to 3 mdaN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
- Torque wrench accessory case, 0 to 3 mdaN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
2- MATERIALS
- Adjustable pressure nitrogen supply

- Under pressure gas leak detecting solution
- Open canopy (for actuator complete extension)-.

- Comply with instructions concerning canopy embrittlement pyrotechnical installation (see 09-0).
4- PROCEDURE
A Check charging pressure
(1 ) Remove protecting plug(s) of inflating valve(s).
(2) On valve body, connect â swivel union fitted with a pressure gauge compatible with the pressure to
be recorded (0 to 50 bar (0 to 725.19 psi).
(3) Unscrew by 1 and a half turn max. inflating valve plunger control nut (16 mm A/F).
OVERUNTIGHTENING WOULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE VALVE.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L->^rSl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^s^^-^~ï> xaA k 1 1 i a i no
(4) Read on pressure gauge the indicated pressure which should be :

- Balancing jack chamber : between 26 and 30 bar (377 and 435 psi)
(5) If required, adjust pressure as per para. B. If not, torque inflating valve plunger control nut from
0,500 to 0,870 mdaN (44.1 to 76.9 in.lb) (16 mm A/F wrench).
(6) Disconnect swivel union.
(7) Check sealing of inflating valve and particularly of internal plunger by depressing valve core.
NOTE : In case of leakage, untighten, re-pressurize, re-tighten control nut to the torque required.
Should leakage persist, replace inflating valve.
(8) Screw inflating valve protecting plug by hand.
B Inflation
(1 ) Remove inflating valve protecting plug.
(2) Install an inflating device.
(3) Close check cock valves R1 - R2.
(4) Connect a pressure gauge compatible with inflation pressure to check cock.
(5) Connect inflating device to nitrogen supply.
(6) Set nitrogen supply to low pressure and open check cock valve R1 in order to blow fluid out of
the circuit, if required.
(7) Connect the inflating device to the valve.
(8) Unscrew by 1 and half turn max. valve plunger control nut (16 mm A/F).
(9) Open valve Rl of inflating device check cock very slowly, and watch pressure on pressure gauge.
Wait for 1 or 2 minutes until pressure stabilizes at the value required (thermal balance).
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
- Balancing chamber charging : from 26 to 30 bar (377 to 435 psi) so as to obtain a compensated
canopy opening (accompany by hand) and a balancing position before jack mechanical locking.
- If pressure is too high, close valve R1 and open valve R2 until pressure is correct.
- If pressure is too low, actuate the nitrogen supply adjusting unit to obtain a correct value.
(10) With correct pressure, torque the valve poppet control nut to 0.500 to 0.870 m.daN (44.1 to
76.9 in.lb) (16-mm fork wrench).
(11) Drop the pressure remaining in the charging device by closing valve R1 and the nitrogen supply
valve (if required), and opening valve R2.
(1 2) Disconnect the charging device.
(13) Check sealing of the charging valve and particularly of the internal poppet by depressing the
valve core.
NOTE : In case of leakage, loosen the control nut, restore pressure then re-tighten the nut to the
required torque. Should leakage persist, replace the charging valve.
(14) Screw the charging valve protective plug by hand.
Jack ^B80o<
(&
R1 J-
-J R2
Variable pressure
nitrogen supply
FIGURE 14 - DIAGRAM OF CANOPY JACK

CHARGING DEVICE
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ -**--u--U MIRAGE
»» *^r~i W L. F
I
BREGUET AVIATION _/^. ^^ -
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF CANOPY LINKAGE

(figure 15)
1 - SCOPE
To check the canopy mechanism for correct adjustment and carry out maintenance operations.
A Special tools
I - Graduated sector M 31 106
B Standard tools
- Spring scale, 0 to 20 m.daN (0 to 150 ft.lb).
3- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3512.
4- PROCEDURE
A Preliminary steps
Install the graduated sector : screw it to the pins of bellcranks 14 and 8.

Mark the center of the handle on the edge of the sector.
B Functional check
- Operate the control handle and make sure that the linkage moves without binding points or play
(simultaneous action of both hooks).
- Check for free rotation of all rollers.
C Check of control handle positions
They should match those on the sector.
In the canopy «lock», «open» and «close» positions, the handle should be in the corresponding
red ranges of the sector :
-within a few millimeters for the «lock» position,
- within 3° for the «open» position (unlocking should occur before opening),
-within 1°, with handle in limit position, for the «close» position.
D Check of canopy-up unlocking
-After canopy-up unlocking, the control handle should return to the canopy «open» position
(under the action of its spring).
- Check that :
- the control handle is not in contact with its stop when the canopy unlocks,
-a clearance not less than 3 mm (0.118 in) exists between the conduit stop hollow bolt
and the cable pickup stirrup.
E Check of canopy-open locking
Locking should be clearly evident.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL
AvjDrf
DASSAULT^J>^ryv IMIRAGE
Vil l\/~V>-/l- F
I
BREGUET AVIATION^r^P^^Ô
F Check during canopy lowering
Check for :
-absence of binding points,
-normal contacts between side rollers and canopy guides.
NOTE : For manufacturing reasons and in order to obtain correct centering and proper positioning of
the canopy on its side former rest, some roller holders are fitted with rollers having an «over¬
size dimension» R1, R2...R5 diameter. To allow identification of such assembly type, the
roller holder has been marked with the diameter «oversize dimension» code (R1, R2...R5). In
case of roller replacement, take this specification into account.
G Check of canopy locking in closed position
When the canopy is closed and locked :

- a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) thick foil inserted between the adjustable stop and its rest should be
extracted with difficulty when held between thumb and forefinger,
- push the canopy upward at the location of each hook ; check that there is no play between hook
and roller,
- check that the hooks cover the rollers by (B + 9) - A > 5 mm (0.020 in).
H Check of hook buttressing on locking
At the end of locking, the back motion of the hooks should be > 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
This buttressing should be felt by hand when the control handle reaches its forward travel limit
position.
I Check of clearance on opening
Close and lock the canopy.

-
Slowly operate the control handle in the unlocking direction while slightly pushing the canopy
-
upward.
- Stop the handle motion when the rollers pass the hook tips tangentially.
- Mark this hook position, then bring the handle to the canopy opening position (see para. 4C).
- With respect to the previously marked position, the hook back motion should be > 4 mm
(0.15 in).
J Check of forces applied to control handle
The forces will be measured at the handle, perpendicularly to the lever, using the spring scale.
- Canopy-up unlocking force : 15 daN (33.7 Ib.f) maximum.

- Canopy locking force : 15 daN (33.7 Ib.f) maximum.
- Canopy unlocking force : 10 daN (22.4 Ib.f) maximum.
K Operational check of «CAB.P» indicator light
-With canopy open exert a light pressure on the handle and check that the handle goes to the
«lock» position upon extinction of the «CAB.P» light.
- With canopy closed, check that operation is identical.
NOTE : In no case should the «CAB.P» light come on when the handle is in the «lock» position.
5- MAINTENANCE
- Dry-clean all visible hinges.
- Generously lubricate them as well as the side rollers. Remove excess oil.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAVIT [LJ>~^r\L
BREGUET AVIATION^S- ^
MIRAGE
.........
F
^
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF LEVELLING STRAIGHT-EDGE

POSITIONING PLANE
1- PURPOSE
Check and, if needed, readjustment of locating pins for levelling straight-edge positioning plane.

- Weapons adjustment set MRA9
- Two step-ladders, 2 meter high.
B Spare parts
- 3 tab washers 23351 BC 080 L.
3- PROCEDURE
- Accurately place the aircraft in « straight and level flight » configuration, using a sight (see
airframe measurement).
- Carefully clean bearing face of the three adjusting pins located on the cabin positioning planes
(two on L/H side and one on R/H side).
- Position levelling straight-edge on the three adjusting pins.
- Check levels on the straight-edge : if needed, readjust positioning plane by moving adjusting
pin(s) up or down :
- tighten locknuts
- fold down tab washers (to be replaced systematically)
- lock pins with locknuts.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//h w^,
-^-^-fl MIRAGE
* Vil
l\/"l V^ L. F
I
BREGUET AVIATION^*!- ^^ ....
ADJUSTMENT OF CANOPY LOCKING LINKAGE

(figure 15)
1 - SCOPE
- To define adjustment of canopy linkage.
A Special tools
- Graduated sector M 31 106

- Tool kit 5001 CSC (pins)
B Standard tools
- Spring scale, 0 to 20 daN (0 to 1 50 ft.lb)

- Set of feeler gauges
- Caliper gauge
- Dial gauge with support
C Materials
-Grease Air 4210

-Oil Air 351 2
- Loctite 241 (if required)
3- SPARES
For the whole mechanism :

-1 pin23310AA010012LE
- 4 pins 23310AA01 501 2 LE
- 2 pins 2331 0AA01 501 5 LE
- 17 pins 23310AA020015LE
- 1 retainer 23350AC040LE
-1 retainer 23350AC060LE
- 1 retainer 23350AC080LE
- 2 retainers 31 650AC080LE
A Remove the ejection seat.
B Remove the skin panels of cockpit sidewalls.
C Charge the balancing jack.
5- PROCEDURE
NOTE : Never alter the existing adjustment until the cause of misadjustment has been determined
with certainty. In all cases, it is mandatory to completely readjust the linkage as described
below.
During adjustment, very lightly lubricate (oil Air 3512) all hinges. Wipe off excess oil with a dry
lint-free cloth.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^>-%>L
BREGUET AVIATION ^r^^-i^ô
MIRAGE F
^sfasx^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
Preadjustment of hook control linkage
(1) Hook setting
- Pin hooks 6 (pins M31-034).

- Pin bellcranks (8).
- Bring stops 5 into contact with bellcranks 8 ; tighten their locknuts.
- Adjust rods 9 ; do not safety.
- Check for :
- correct travel of the mechanism without binding points (pins removed)
efficient operation of spring rod 10.
-
- During above step, make sure that the setscrew locking the hook onto its pin is not loosened.
In case of loosening, remove the setscrew, clean it and reinstall it with Loctite 241 .
(2) Adjustment of control handle 2 travel
Install the graduated sector : screw it to the pins of bellcranks 14 and 8.

-
Mark the center of the handle on the edge of the sector.
-
Pin the handle (locking position).
-
The handle should be within the red range of the sector to within a few millimeters.
- Unpin the handle.
- Adjust stop 12 so that the travel of control handle 2 is limited to the «canopy lowering» position
shown on the sector and to within 3° of the theoretical position.
(3) Adjustment of LH - RH interconnecting linkage
With LH and RH rods 29 and LH rod 30 disconnected :

- Pin (pins M31-034) :
-both bellcranks 4,
- control handle 2,
- external control lever 33.
Adjust and connect rods 29 ; tighten their locknuts.
- Install non-adjustable rod 30 :
- adjust rod 35 ; tighten its locknut,
-unpin bellcranks 4.
(4) Adjustment of rods 1 1
-Pin :
control handle 2,
-
-hooks 6,
- external control lever 33 (already pinned).
- Adjust and connect rods 1 1 .
- unpin hooks 6, lever 33 and handle 2.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Pied à coulisse
Caliper
gauge
MESURE DES GARDES DE FERMETURE MESURE DE LA COTE C

MEASUREMENT OF CLOSING CLEARANCES MEASUREMENT OF DIMENSION C
OJL&X Jeu de cales

V.5 to 2 Set of feeler gauges
Mastic
Sea/ant
VERRIERE MESURE DU JEU A FOND DE GALET MESURE DU JEU ENTRE

CANOPY CROCHET FERME
! PORTE-GALET 31 ET GALET DE VERRIERE
MEASURING THE CLEARANCE AT THE MEASURING THF CLEARANCE
REAR OF ROLLER - HOOK CLOSED BETWEEN ROLLER HOLDER 31
AND CANOPY ROLLER
41 10 31 6
Brochage
, Pinning
VUE SUIVANT F - VERRIERE FERMEE VERROUILLEE
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW F - CANOPY CLOSED AND LOCKED
C.2 C.4
VUE SUIVANT G - VERRIERE FERMEE VERROUILLEE Brochage Brochage
i VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW G -CANOPY CLOSED AND LOCKED Pinning Pinning \
_30 Brochage
Pinning
DETAIL A
FIGURE 15 - REGLAGE DE LA CINEMATIQUE DE VERROUILLAGE VERRIERE 3 mm min Travel

ADJUSTMENT OF CANOPY LOCKING LINKAGE 11mm
AC
BREGUET AVIATION^jL
/LJ^-^rU MIRAGE F
C Adjustment of hooks
The linkage assembly being preadjusted, pay no more attention to the rigging pins for final adjust¬
ment.
(1) Setting of buttressing (forward motion of hook at beginning of unlocking action)
- Remove the pin connecting rod 29 to the lower lever of handle 2 on one side only (on LH side
for RH side adjustment and vice versa).
- Set the dial gauge to zero, in contact with the nose or the rear rounded section of hook 6.
Bring control handle 2 very slowly backwards (opening) and watch the dial gauge.
-
-When buttressing is released, take a reading on the dial gauge (required value : 0.3 to 0.5 mm
(0.012 to 0.020 in)).
- If this is within the tolerances, check the other side in the same way.
- Reconnect rod 29.
- If not, adjust stop 5 (screw to reduce, unscrew to increase).
- Adjust the other side so that there is not more than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) in difference
between both sides and that buttressing tolerances are met.
-Join the LH and RH linkages, checking that the pins connecting rod 11 to bellcrank 8 are free
to move.
(2) Checking of clearances between canopy rollers and hooks
Use a caliper gauge with one of its inside legs in good contact with the pin head of roller 31.
- Measure the distance between pin head and nose of hook when closed (dimension A - «closed
clearance» : 9 to 1 1 mm (0.35 to 0.43 in)),
- Check that the clearance between the roller and the hook (closed) is between 0.5 and 2 mm
(0.020 and 0.079 in).
- Use modeling clay as shown in the figure.
- Close the canopy, then open it and measure the thickness of the clay stuck to the inside
of the hook.
To obtain the correct value, adjust rod 9.
NOTE : If rod 9 has to be adjusted, repeat the buttressing check (para. 5-C (1 )).
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT#Xi-^Ml I V \ 1\ AAVJ' l_
1
BREGUET AVIATION ^<£& ^5<0> . .. , ....,., ô

^<v .«-o Restricted MANUAL 03
-Measure the distance with hook open (dimension C - "open clearance").

Using a set of feeler gauges:
-Measure the distance between the pin head of roller 31 and the canopy roller (dimen¬
sion B):
-Place the gauges against the pin head of roller 31 and hold firmly in place.
-Lower the canopy until its roller is touching the gauges.
-Use appropriate gauges so that the roller comes into contact without play and
without jamming as the canopy closes.
-Check that: C - (B + 18 mm) = 2 mm minimum (0.080 in minimum).
(3) Hook adjustment on canopy rollers
-Check that the hook correctly engages the roller by making sure that (B + 9 mm) - A
= 5 mm minimum (0.20 in minimum).
D - Adjustment of canopy seal inflation cock

The deflection plane of control finger 3 should be centered in relation to the rollers of
three-way lever 37. Place a shim under the cock if necessary.
-Bring:
-handle 2 to "canopy locked" position,
-the cock control pin to "canopy seal inflation" position.
' -Install the three-way lever as shown in figure 15; there should be a slight play between
the control finger and roller 38.
-Tighten the attachment bolt.
-Adjust and connect rod 7.
-Lubricate the sliding portion of spring rod 39.
-Make sure that:
-compression occurs smoothly,
-it does not abut against lever 37 when the latter deflects; the minimum clearance is
0.5 mm (0.020 in).
-Check that a clear deflection of the three-way lever is obtained.
- Remove the protective cap from the cock air vent.
E - Adjustment of microswitch 28H

After measuring dimension A (9 to 11 mm) (0.35 to 0.43 in) (see step C (2)):
-Bring handle 2 to "canopy open" position.
-Adjust the caliper gauge to A + 0.8 mm (0.031 in).
-Set the gauge leg against the head of roller 31 pin.
-Actuate handle 2 so as to bring the nose of the hook into contact with the caliper
gauge, and hold it there.
-Loosen the adjustment nuts that hold the microswitch onto its support and adjust the
switch position so that the "CAB.P" indicator light comes on.
-Lock the switch in this position by retightening the attachment nuts.
-Repeat the measurements to ensure that the distance traveled by the hook between the
point when the light goes off and the point of locking is 0.8 mm (0.031 in).
-With canopy open, exert a light pressure on handle 2 and check that the handle goes to
the "lock" position upon extinction of the "CAB.P" light.
-With canopy closed, check that operation is identical.
NOTE: In no case should the "CAB.P." light come on when handle 2 is in the "lock" position.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ? -i>-^-^ /V\ IKnVJL I
BREGUET AVIATION^£_ _ _
F Adjustment of canopy unlocking in «up» position
In case of replacement of cable 17, adjust its length so as to obtain the following adjustment.
Moderately tighten the cable onto bellcrank 14 to avoid damaging cable strands.
Bring cable nuts into contact and tighten by 1/2 to 3/4 turn maximum.
With cable 17 connected at both ends, place control handle 2 in «lock» position.
Make sure that :

- cable 1 7 end connected to bellcrank 22 is not in contact with hollow bolt 36,
- canopy unlocking occurs before handle 2 comes into contact with stop 12.
When handle 2 bears against the stop :

- jack unlocking rod 20 should not be at end of travel, which can be checked by pushing on lever
21 ; then check conduit position in hollow bolts 36 and cable position in bellcrank 22 stirrup ; a
minimum clearance of 3 mm (0.12 in) should be maintained between hollow bolt 36 and cable 17
pickup stirrup,
- if necessary, readjust stop 1 2 and hollow bolt 36,
- if necessary, cut the cable on handle side, leaving an overlength of 2 mm (0.08 in).
G Adjustment of rubber stops 42
- Contact should be simultaneously obtained on both stops (LH and RH).

- During adjustment, unscrew the stop until, with canopy locked, a 0.05-mm (0.0020-in) thick
foil shim held between thumb and forefinger can be extracted with difficulty.
' - Tighten the locknut.
- Check that the roller is in contact with the hook.
6- CHECKS
A Check of handle 2 positions
- Install the graduated sector.

- Mark the center of the handle on the edge of the sector.
Check of «lock» position.

The «lock» position is checked by pinning the handle (see para. B(2)).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ) MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION Ê*3
- Check of «canopy opening» position
- Move the handle in the canopy opening direction. When the handle is in the «canopy
opening» position, bellcrank 14 should be simultaneously in contact with its stop screw 16 and pin
24 integral with the handle (see figure below).
- Check that the handle matches the «canopy opening» position shown on the sector to
within 3°.
This position corresponds to canopy unlocking ; actual opening is obtained to within
1° upon contact with stop 12.
- Check of «canopy lowering» position
Canopy-up unlocking should occur before the handle reaches its stop 12 («canopy lowering»
position of sector to within 1°). When released, the handle should return to the «canopy opening»
position under the sole action of the return spring.
- Lift the canopy to the locked-open position (sharp click).
- Remove the graduated sector.
B Check of forces applied to handle
- Unlocking force in canopy-up position : 1 5 daN (33.7 Ibf) maximum.

- Locking force in canopy-closed position : 15 daN (33.7 Ibf) maximum.
- Unlocking force in canopy-closed position : 10 daN (22.4 Ibf) maximum.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti -J^-^Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^l ^ _
C Operational check of canopy seal inflation cock
With several slow lock and unlock movements, make sure that :
-
- the canopy seal inflates and deflates while the control finger is still in contact with rollers
40 and 38,
- the three-way lever moves correctly under the sole action of the spring rod.
D Operational check of microswitch 28H
This check is to be performed only if the adjustments described in para. 5-E have not been made.
- Repeat the measurements to ensure that the distance traveled by the hook between the point
when the light goes off and the point of locking is 0.8 mm (0.031 in).
-With canopy open, exert a light pressure on handle 2 and check that the handle goes to the
«lock» position upon extinction of the «CAB.P» light.
- With canopy closed, check that operation is identical.
NOTE : In no case should the «CAB.P» light come on when handle 2 is in the «lock» position.
E Check of balancing jack
-Check of internal clearance of rod 18 :

- with jack discharged, measure D1 : protrusion of rod 18 against lower internal stop,
- measure D2 : rod protrusion when canopy is locked closed,
- make sure that internal clearance D2 - D1 is over 1 mm (0.039 in).
- Check of internal clearance of unlocking rod 20 :
- compare the following two positions of the unlocking rod :
- control handle 2 against rear stop,
- unlocking rod 20 brought against the internal stop by pushing on the end of lever 21 ;
the lowering of lever 21 should be clearly felt when control handle 2 is simultaneously held in the
previous position,
- the difference between these two positions should be over 1 mm (0.039 in),
- Recharge the jack.
- Check that the ends of the unlocking cable conduit are correctly positioned in hollow bolts
36 and that the attachment to bellcrank 22 is correct.
7 -FINAL STEPS
A Safety the locknuts.
B Reinstall the skin panels on cockpit sidewalls.
C Reinstall the ejection seat.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «=^>-^\l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F^xf^ ......... M
ADJUSTMENT ON IN-FLIGHT REFUELING

BOOM DOORS
(Fig. 13F)

- 1 15-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply.
- Connect hydraulic power supply to system No. 1 .
- Connect the electrical power supply.
3- OPERATIONS
A Boom door :
Retract boom VERY SLOWLY.

-
Stop the operation when the door is within a few centimeters of the tip.
- Untighten the six attaching screws on mounts.
- Center the door properly in its housing.
- Retract the boom completely.
- In order to get the door flush with the tip, use the spring washer resiliency by tightening the
front and rear attaching screws.
- If a correct adjustment cannot be obtained, remove the door and modify the adjusting washer
thickness, then resume the hereabove described operations.
B Nose door :
- Adjust the stops with door closed and opened (11 mm A/F wrench) in order to ensure correct
boom operation and door flushing.
- When actuating the boom, make sure that the roller properly engages into the front door fork.
4- FINAL STEPS
Operate the boom several times as an operational test.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ^-^^à.
BREGUET AVIATION,.
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF FRONT GUN BLAST TUBES
1 - MATERIALS
White spirit
- Remove the gun blast tubes (front and center) (see 03-2-3).
3- PROCEDURE
-Clean the blast tubes with white spirit. In particular, carefully clean the attachment screw
countersinks.
- Carefully check the blast tubes for :
- absence of cracks, distortions, corrosion ;
- condition of assemblies (rivets, welding spots, shock wave breaker attachment) ;
- presence and proper adhesion of the sealant bead (EC 1675 A/B) around the shock wave
breakers (no separation, no missing section).
- Carefully check the condition of the structure covered by the blast tubes for :
- absence of cracks, distortions, corrosion,
- proper attachment of captive nuts.
- Install the blast tubes (attachment and sealing) (see 03-2-3).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tiî>-^r\l
BREGUET AVIATION ^<ZÎ!~ . ^
MIRAGE
......,..««
F
INSPECTION OF STRUCTURE UNDER REAR GUN BLAST

TUBE AND IN GUN COMPARTMENTS
1 - MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Methylethylketone
- Pierlon BC60
- Remove the gun blast tubes (see 03-2-2).

- Open access doors to gun bays (19.05 and 19.07).
- Open access doors to gun barrels (18.05 and 18.07).
3- PROCEDURE
(1) Inspection
-Look for gun gas infiltration traces (pay particular attention to the sealing of the infiltration
points when carrying out the final steps).
- Remove combustion residue deposits.
- Check for absence of cracks and corrosion.
-Check for good condition of riveting and attachment (screws, captive nuts, locks) on door
hinges.
(2) Renewal of sealing on gun bay doors and panels (doors 20.06i, panels 19.05.1. i - 19.07.1 .i.
19.05.2.Î - 19.07.2j) (fig. 13).
- Remove the damaged seal strip.

-Carefully prepare the seal bearing surface, then clean it with methylethylketone and dry it.
- Cut a seal strip similar to the damaged section and cut it out as required.
- Coat the door bearing surface with Pierlon.
- Position the seal and press it.
(3) Final steps
- Close access doors to gun bays and barrels.

- Install the gun blast tubes.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 ^ -" ** #VlH\/~\V^L I
BREGUET AVIATION _Û~
^->,
.^-^
^~=^ Restricted »«*»... a.
MANUAL rs^
03
INSPECTION AND MEASUREMENT OF SEAT LOWER ATTACHMENT FITTING
1 - SCOPE
To estimate the rate of wear of the pin and bores of the seat lower attachment fitting.
-Micrometer gauge, 0-25

-Slide caliper
3 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Penetrant inspection material
-Abrasive cloth (600 grit)
-Remove the canopy (see 03-2).

-Remove the seat (see 09-4).
-Clean the fitting.
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Inspection of lower fitting
-Visually inspect the rivets for proper seating to check the fitting for security of attach¬
ment.
-Check condition of the sealant around the fitting.
-Check for cracks on the fitting (penetrant inspection) (see Structural Repair Manual).
-Measure the bores, 10 mm diameter on RH and LH sides (Record the temperature value
upon measurement). Maximum permissible diameter: 10.060 mm (0.395 in) for a temperature
of 20°C (68 °F).
-Check the bores for scratches, traces of seizing, corrosion, fretting.
-If necessary, remove the detected abnormalities by sanding (600 grit).
B - Inspection of attachment pin

-Check for corrosion, fretting, cracks, dents, distortion, abnormal wear. If such defects are
detected, install a new pin.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Only a few longitudinal scratches are permissible after sanding when all sharp edges have
been removed.
-Check condition of the threads (cracks) and flats.
-Perform a dimensional check of the 10 mm (0.393 in) diameter pin (see figure). Mini¬
mum permissible diameter: 9.960 mm (0.3921 in) (at 20°C (68°F)).
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Clean the cockpit (see 03-2).
-Install the seat (see 09-4).
-Install the canopy (see 03-2).
*<o*.
9 rt1 0,000 (0.393 in)
P 10,060 10.395 in)

(3 A
OB
.. ,* 9,975 (0.3927 in)

** v 9,960 (0.3921 in)
0C
Il JL J
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//« xx^n
^>-^-^S MIRAGE
I Y l\ri V-/ L.
11 F
I
BREGUET AVIATION^£- _^^ _ ...,.,. __
CHECK OF HINGES ON A REMOVED AI RBRAKE PANEL
1 - SCOPE
-Emery cloth, 600 grit

-Dial indicator, 1/100
3 - MATERIALS
Trichloroethane or Diestone S.
Grease Air 4210.
- Not applicable
5 - CHECK
A Cleaning
Thoroughly clean all hinge components (bushes, spacers, and pins) then dry them.
B - Check
(1) On fuselage bearings
- Check the bushes fitted to the bearings.

- Check the bushes and spherical bearing spacers.
- Check the pins.
Check for :
surface condition of side faces of bushes fitted to bearings,
-
- corrosion : to be removed if necessary (emery cloth, 600 grit),
-condition of pins (traces of corrosion ; condition of threads on nuts and pins, condition of
safetying, no play with bushes).
(2) On airbrake bearing arms
Check condition of spherical bearing (swaging, no corrosion).

-
Pivot the spherical bearing in its outer ring (see figure 1) to check the self-lubricating lining for
-
proper seating, specially on the edges where separation or tearing may arise.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Check rotation and nutation.

- On a spherical bearing which has been operated, the rotation and nutation torques become very
weak (or almost nil), which does not necessarily mean that the spherical bearing is damaged.
- Axial ly actuate the inner ring tilted 90° in its outer ring so as to locate the maximum play point.
- Measure the play in the direction of the arrows (outer ring axis) using a dial indicator.
The maximum permissible play is 0.15 mm (0.0006 in).
Alternate axial load Axial play.

Axial play _^. spherical bearing tilted 90°

- on the upper arm, check condition of the threaded bushing accommodating the spherical bearing
(no corrosion, correct safetying of nut),
- on the lower arm, check swaging of the spherical bearing outer ring, and check for corrosion.
Make sure that the self-lubricating lining is present and in proper condition by moving the spacer
bushing aft as far as possible on one side then on the other side without removing it.
' TEFLON
RL20
Risk of separation
. Spacer bushing
RL. 20 AR
LOWER ARM
FIGURE 1
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU^TU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^jâ^L-^-^ . haamiia. oo
VISUAL INSPECTION OF LH AND RH FRONT TANK DOORS 18.041 AND 18.081
1 - SCOPE
To visually check the LH and RH front tank sealed doors (18.08i and 18.04i, respectively) in the
airbrake compartments for cracks or incipient cracks at each attachment point.
2 - MATERIALS
Manually extend the airbrakes (see 02-0-203).
WARNING :
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 02-0-203).
- Record any traces of fuel which may appear at each attaching screw (risk of defective seal or
cracks on the door).
- Clean the doors and attaching parts with white spirit or Diestone S.
4 - INSPECTION OF DOORS
Without removing any screws, visually check for cracks on the door edging at each screw, paying
particular attention to the locations where traces of fuel have been detected.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT!
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^~
^«
^-=^>
^=~^^
_ ^ . ^
Rgstncted
. yAMIIA,
MANUAL
no
03
PACKAGING OF A CANOPY FOR TRANSPORTATION

AND STORAGE
1 - SCOPE
To determine the measures to be taken in order to protect and install a canopy in its con¬
tainer for transportation (whatever the mode) or storage purposes.
-Transport and storage container LH 7106.
3 - MATERIALS
-Desiccant AIR 8060.

-Polyethylene coated paper AIR 8140 class 12.
- Heat-sealing cloth AI R 81 40 class 1 1 21 .
-Adhesive tape MINNESOTA EC670.
4 - PRESERVATION FOR TRANSPORTATION
-Blank the two transfer units ports with two caps connected to the canopy arch by me¬
ans of a small chain.
-Cover the inside and outside plexiglas surfaces with the plasticized paper (polyethylene
coat in contact with the plexiglas). Secure the paper with adhesive tape on the canopy peri¬
phery.
NOTE: The adhesive tape must be applied to the canopy framing without touching the plexig¬
las which shall be fully covered with plasticized paper.
Do not stick anything on this paper (envelope, parts contained in a bag, etc.).
-Position the canopy in the container, steady it laterally and screw the wing nuts, then
steady it longitudinally (on its upper part) by carefully setting the retaining pads; screw the
wing nuts.
-Safety the wing nuts.

-Close the container.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,
/L-^frU
_ _
MIRAGE F
5- PRESERVATION FOR STORAGE
- Blank the two transfer unit ports with two caps connected to the canopy arch by means of a
small chain.
- Cover the inside and outside plexiglas surfaces as for transportation.
- On the upper part, install the device holding the canopy lengthwise.
- Wrap the canopy in a heat-sealing cloth.
- Introduce desiccant bags in the wrapping and secure them.
- Hermetically seal this wrapping after pumping the air out.
- Steady the canopy laterally and longitudinally.
- Tighten and safety the wing nuts securing the steadying devices.
- Enclose the labels and identifying cards.
- Close the container.
6- DESTORING
A canopy shall be distored only when putting it back into service.
Choose the canopy with the oldest storing date.
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE NOT TO BUMP OR SCRATCH THE PLEXIGLAS WHEN OPENING THE HEAT-
SEALING CLOTH.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/*ï\-« -X IViIIX/AVJ'U i
BREGUET AVIATIONZ^-^-
^-« ^p-^>
^*^> .
Restricted aaaah.ai
MANUAL «o03
REPLACEMENT OF A WINDSHIELD PANEL

(front or side)
A - Spares
-Front panel F21 4-10

-LH side panel F21 4-11
-RH side panel F214-12
-Klegecel shims, F21 4-061 (LH)
F21 4-062 (RH)
F21 4-065 (LH)
F21 4-066 (RH)
F21 4-063 (LH)
F21 4-064 (RH)
-Self-inflatableseai F214-15 (optional)
-Canopy sealing extrusion F214-112
F21 4-1 13 (optional)
2 - MATERIALS
-White sealant Rhodorsyl - CAF 7306

- PrimerA4094
-Black sealant PR 1222
-Sealant EC 1675
-Adhesive EC 1236
- Methylethylketone
-Adhesive tape Minnesota EC 670
3 - GENERAL
The front and side panels forming the windshield may be individually removed. Their dis¬
assembly is performed from the outside. As a preliminay step, place a protective sheet (cloth or
kraft paper) inside* the cabin, under the windshield, in order to recover rapidly any object liable
to fall inside the cockpit. Protect the sound transparent sections using, for instance, kraft paper
held in place with adhesive tape EC 670 exclusively.
4 - PROCEDURE
-Remove the sight head (and the camera if installed) (see 14-3) and protect uncoupled
electrical connectors.
-Withdraw from the windshield rear arch the various equipment items and their supports,
as well as any electrical wiring likely to impair access to the nuts attaching the glass panel re¬
taining fairings.
Those supports whose fasteners impede front panel cover plate removal (canopy half-
open hold device bearing support, lamp support) are secured with screws whose heads are lo¬
cated at the bottom of the inflatable seal U-section. To reach such screws :
-unstick the inflatable seal within the support attachment 'area (see 09-2).
B - Removal
-Remove the screws attaching front panel cover plate 1 .
-Separate the cover plate (see NOTE) and remove it.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=i>^rU.
BREGUET AVIATION^s5F=^<^C>
MIRAGE F
^-ssa==*"^s^> Restricted MANUAL 03
NOTE : In order to avoid damaging the cover plates, do not attempt to pull them off abruptly.
Instead, allow them to unstick slowly by applying a continuous pulling force ; for instance,
insert wooden or plastic wedges progressively.
- Remove front cover plate 10 of the side glass panel.

Unscrew and remove side fairing 1 6.
-
- Unscrew rear cover plate 4.
Separate the cover plate with a wedge.
- Remove the screws attaching angle 5 to the cabin spar (8 and 10 A/F wrenches). Mark the loca¬
tion of these screws.
- Separate the angle with a wedge and remove it.
- Press on the internal part of the glass panel to separate it.
- Remove the panel to the outside.
NOTE : Replacing a side panel makes it necessary to remove the front panel cover plate, which may
result in damage to some sections of the front panel molded seal. Upon reassembly, such
damage can be repaired with sealant CAF 7306.
C Preparation before installation of a front panel
-Check condition and bonding (sealant CAF 7306) of the molded seal round the front panel.
- Remove sealant «plugs» that may have formed at the bottom of blind holes and will possibly pre¬
vent the screws from being tightened fully home.
- Complete cleaning with a cotton wool pad lightly soaked in MEK (avoid runnings).
- Check that the attaching screws are clean (groove under head).
- Using a wooden or plexiglas spatula, remove any trace of sealant from the front panel cover plate.
- Degrease the windshield arch periphery.
- Cut the adhesive tape intended to protect the panel inside and outside so that it is exactly flush
with the useful limits of the panel. If necessary, carefully cut off excess lengths with round-end scissors.
Use of a razor blade is prohibited.
- On panel inside face, unstick the adhesive tape over a sufficient length so that it can be comple¬
tely removed later on.
D Installation of a front' panel
- Position the panel of the windshield posts and make sure that it freely fits into its framing.
- Make sure that the internal layer of the front panel is not abutting on windshield post flanges
19.
Remove the panel, then perform the operations below.

Lay a coat of primer A4094 and a bead of sealant CAF 7306 on the molded seal surrounding the
-
panel, on the arch and on the windshield posts, near the attachment holes.
- Install the panel.
-Secure front cover plate 1 within the following 2 hours, providing for profile blending with
respect to the side cover plates.
- Install each screw previously coated with primer A4094 - insert sealant CAF 7306 under head.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^-^TU.
BREGUET AVIATION^jjF^-eÔ
MIRAGE F
^C****^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
CAUTION :
FITTING THE FRONT PANEL COVER PLATE FASTENERS BACK ONTO THE TITANIUM
WINDSHIELD POST MAY RESULT IN SEIZING OF THE THREADS. ANY INCIPIENT BIND¬
ING SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REPLACEMENT OF THE FASTENER INVOLVED.
-Smooth a bead of sealant inside the groove between cover plate and panel useful limits so as to
obtain a continuous joint.
- Unstick the strips of protective tape while the sealant is still fresh.
- Clean the cover plate with a clean rag. If sealant runnings have propagated over the panel surface,
eliminate them after complete drying only.
E Preparation before installation of a side panel
On panel
-Check condition of black rubber seal 17 round the panel. Rebond it if required (glue EC 1675).
- Cut the adhesive tape intended to protect the panel inside and outside so that it is exactly flush
with the useful limits of the panel (see para. C). If required, border this protection with adhesive tape
EC 670.
- Provide for clear areas at demisting diff users, on internal side.
On structure
- Check joggle recess filling (sealant).
- Unstick the remainder of Klegecel shims 2, 9 and 12 and clean the areas thus freed.
- On framework and fairing contact faces, remove any trace of sealant using a wooden or plexiglas
spatula.
- Clean front cover plate 10, rear cover plate 4 and angle 5. Complete cleaning with MEK.
-Check condition and bonding (glue EC 1675) of Neoprene extrusions 3 bordering panel-to-
framing retaining flanges 19.
- Check condition and bonding of self-inflatable seal 1 1 ; if required, unstick it for cleaning or
replacement.
- Position each panel so that it bears onto the extrusions. Check for proper seating everywhere :
the maximum tolerated play (with panel unstressed) is 2 mm (0.08 in) ; exceptionally, such play can be
reduced by cutting the extrusion at the bottom of the windshield posts or at the top of the arch, over a
length not exceeding 100 mm (3.94 in) - in that case, after temporary assembly of the cover plates,
make sure that the panel does not come into contact with flanges 19.
- Center the panel as properly as possible between frame 2 and the arch so as to obtain a clearance
of 2 mm (0.08 in) - with a local minimum of 1 mm (0.04 in) - between the structure and the external
limit of the seal bonded to the panel ; in the longitudinal direction, the panel must not come into con¬
tact with the structure.
- Trace marks on the panel protective paper and on the structure so that any possible displacement
can be corrected during reassembly.
- Adjust the thickness of Neoprene stops 6 and 8 located along the cabin spar for proper position¬
ing of the panel along the windshield post ; between panel retaining flange and windshield post, with all
cover plates installed, there must be the minimum clearance compatible with an unstressed assembly.
- Make and adjust Klegecel shims 2, 9 and 12 so that they precisely fit into their places.
- Remove the cover plates and the panel.
- Using a clean and lintless rag lightly soaked in MEK (or petroleum ether), carefully clean the
bondable surfaces of Neoprene shims 6 and 8 and of self-inflatable seal 1 1 (if this was removed).
- Using fine grit (320) abrasive paper, sand the framing surfaces to be coated with sealant
CAF 7306 with a view to bonding of Neoprene/Klegecel shims and of the self-inflatablé seals ; wipe
with a clean and lintless rag.
- Using a paintbrush, apply a coat of primer A4094 on the above surfaces.
- Allow to dry for 30 minutes minimum.
AA
BREGUET AVIATIONâF^^^
«^-Û MIRAGE F
^-^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
- If required, readjust the thickness of Neoprene shims 6 and 8 then bond them (CAF 7306) onto
the side formers (at the locations marked during temporary assembly).
- Bond Klegecel shims 2, 9 and 1 2 :
- spread sealant CAF 7306 into a thin layer (approx. 0.5 mm - 0.02 in) on the surface inten¬
ded to accomodate the shim (use a plexiglas toothed spatula),
- hold shim 2 located at the top of the windshield post so that it does not slide down.
- Blow talcum powder inside self-inflatable seal 1 1 , through one of its holes.
- Bond the self-inflatable seal :
- spread sealant CAF 7306 as already done for Klegecel shims,
- position the seal, taking care that its holes are facing the center of the panel ; there must be
at least one hole at the location where there is no retaining flange (arch/post/frame 2 junction) ; splice 7
connecting the two seal ends must be along the side former,
- firmly crush the seal onto its location, though not stretching it, specially at corners.
- Using a hollow punch, make notches in retaining flange extrusion 13, in line with the holes in
self-inflatable seals (on windshield post side and angle side).
- Stick adhesive tape to the internal and external peripheries of the outer face of the center panel 1
cover plate.
- In the same way, stick adhesive tape to the cover plates of the side panel and to the angle.
F Installation of a side panel
- Position the panel and make sure that the serrations in the self-inflatable seal are hidden by the
panel.
- Apply a coat of primer A4094 with a paintbrush, then lay (without spreading) a thick bead of
sealant CAF 7306 on the splines of seal 17 fitted to the side panel - exclusively on the bearing surface
of cover plates 4 and 10 and of angle 5 ; take care not to run the bead to close to the panel edge. Also
fill Klegecel shim 9. Using a spatula, spread sealant on the arch and frame surfaces where cover plates 4
and 1 0 are to be pressed, as well as on the bearing surface of side angle 5.
(The cover plates and its fasteners, as well as the angle, are to be installed within the following
2 hours).
- Install side angle 5 :
-the attaching screws, whose locations have been marked upon removal, are to be coated
with primer A4094 then installed with sealant CAF 7306 inserted under head,
- for installation of screws, make use of appropriate pins,
-tighten the screws then using a spatula and a rag, remove any excess sealant all round the
panel.
- Position front cover plate 10 and rear cover plate 4.
- Install the attaching screws as described above.
CAUTION :
FITTING THE FRONT PANEL COVER PLATE FASTENERS BACK ONTO THE TITANIUM
WINDSHIELD POST MAY RESULT IN SEIZING OF THE THREADS. ANY INCIPIENT BIND¬
ING SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REPLACEMENT OF THE FASTENER INVOLVED.
- Beforehand, specially at bent or formed sections, take care to fit only a few fasteners (one screw
out of two or three) without locking them, so as to provide for proper centering of the countersinks
with respect to the holes.
AA
09-83 Restricted 2-802J
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £Ii-û-*S IYIIIVAAv^L
^3^
BREGUET AVIATION
^v, ~£*£^
.^^ .
Restricted , miamiiai
MANUAL nn
03
-Spread a coat of primer A4094 then lay a bead of sealant on the seal fitted to the front
panel, on the arch, on the windshield posts (round the attachment holes) and on the remain¬
ing surface of the seals fitted to the side panels - be sure to coat Klegecel shims 2 and 1 2.
Secure the front cover plate within the following 2 hours, providing for profile blending
with respect to the side cover plates.
-Remove any excess sealant after tightening the screws.
-Smooth a bead of sealant in the groove between the cover plates and the useful limits of
each panel so as to obtain a continuous joint.
-Remove the strips of adhesive tape bordering the cover plates, as well as all other pro¬
tections, while the sealant is still fresh.
-Wait for complete drying of the sealant, then remove all traces of sealant and adhesive
from the cover plates.
-Clean the panels.
CAUTION:
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO APPLY ALCOHOL, TRICHLOROETHYLENE OR ANY
TYPE OF THINNER ON PLEXIGLAS MATERIAL.
-Check condition and bonding (black sealant PR 1222) of Neoprene edging extrusion
1 4-1 5 in contact with the panel, then reinstall side fairing 1 6.
I -If need be cement back or replace extrusions 18 and 20 (adhesive EC 1236).
After final installation of a front or side panel, allow to dry for 24 hours minimum before
pressurization testing.
CAUTION:
IF PAINT IS TO BE TOUCHED UP, IT IS ESSENTIAL TO PROTECT THE TRANSPAREN¬
CIES ADEQUATELY AND THOROUGHLY.
4 -TESTING
-Carry out cabin pressurization testing (see 09-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE A COUPE E COUPE B

SECTION A 1 mm (0.04 in) SECTION E SECTION B
COUPE C
SECTION C
FIGURE 16- ECHANGE DES GLACES DE PARE-BRISE

REPLACEMENT OF WINDSHIELD PANELS
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
REPLACEMENT OF CANOPY SEAL
A Spares
- Canopy seal
2- MATERIALS
- Methylethylketone (MEK).
- White sealant RHODORSIL - CAF 7306
- Primer RHODORSIL 4094
- Abrasive paper No. 320
- Talcum powder.
- Adhesive tape Groove
billon
3- PROCEDURE
- Canopy removed.

-mark the limits of the canopy front arch
area which is not covered by the 70 mm (2.76 in)
seal above the groove marking the junction with
fuselage form.
- Carefully clean the section of canopy frame which accommodates the seal. Remove all traces of
former seal adhesive, the cleaning down to surface with a wooden or plexiglas spatula.
- Remaining adhesive can be removed using a clean lint-free rag lightly soaked with MEK. Finish
off with No. 320 abrasive paper.
CAUTION
DO NOT ALLOW MEK DROPS TO FALL ON PLEXIGLAS.
- Coat canopy seal with talcum powder.

- Reinstall canopy on aircraft.
- Close canopy and inflate seal. Deflate seal. Open canopy and mark the trace left by the talcum
powder.
- Remove canopy and place it on a support mount, with the hooks directed upwards.
- Bond an adhesive tape at 7 mm (0.274 in) on either side of the axis of the trace. Clean the
surface between the adhesive tapes with a clean rag lightly soaked with MEK.
- Clean up surface with abrasive paper and wipe off the dust with a clean lint-free rag.
- Apply a primer coat with a brush. Allow to dry for 30 minutes.
- Apply a bead of sealant and spread it to a thin layer, 0,5 mm (0.019 in) thick approx., using a
plexiglas spatula with one side cut into saw-blade teeth of 1 mm (0.039 in) approx.
- Proceed in lengths of 60 cm (23.6 in) approx.
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
- Install the seal on this cement, between the two strips of adhesive tape, and press it onto the
bonding plane without stretching it, in particular at the four bends.
- Proceed with new bonding lengths.
- Stop bonding when reaching the groove, and
cut the seal 70 mm (2.76 in) above the latter.
-Bevel the seal over 50 mm (1.97 in). The h^hr)^ ^\ Groove
bevel shall be made inside the seal, so that sealing
of the outer skin is not destroyed.
- Complete bonding.
Secure the seal with adhesive tape jumpers.
- When the seal is cured, remove the adhesive
tape jumpers.
CAUTION :
-THE USE OF ALCOHOL, TRICHLOROETHYLENE OR ANY THINNER IS STRICTLY

FORBIDDEN.
-NOTHING SHALL BE BONDED ON PLEXIGLAS WITH ADHESIVE TAPE OTHER THAN
MINNESOTA 670 TAPE.
If a side panel is to be protected with a paper or plexiglas cover, these protections should be
sufficiently oversized to be bonded on the frames with masking tape.
SOONER OR LATER, THESE PRODUCTS MAY CAUSE CRAZING ON PLEXIGLAS ;THIS

DAMAGE CANNOT BE REPAIRED AND ITS SUDDEN EXTENSION MAY BECOME DANGEROUS.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall the canopy on aircraft.

- Carry out a cabin pressurization test (see 09-2).
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-J>îrVL
BREGUET AVIATION ^côP3^^^^
MIRAGE F
., . ... . nr,
. .
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF TAIL CONE

(Figure 7)

-Tail cone cradle MS. 1 176.
- Removal can be carried out :
- with aircraft on its wheels or- jacked up
- with brake chute in place.
- Set the stabilators to «nose-down» position :
WARNING :
MAKE SURE THAT THE CONTROL SURFACES CAN BE DEFLECTED WITHOUT DANGER
FOR PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.
- with the electric pump on, fully push the control stick forward, then turn the electric pump
off.
- drop the hydraulic pressure in the roll system by holding the control stick in forward
position,
- release the electric pump circuit breaker and cut off electrical power supply.
- Remove doors 42-02, 42-10, 42-04, 42-08 and 40-07.
3- REMOVAL
A Remove the drain fitting from the jet pipe rear cowling and recover its attachment plate and
the drain.
B- Through door 40-07, disconnect tail cone-to-fuselage electrical connector 105A (fire detectors).
C- Through iower doors 42-04 and 42-08, unscrew the captive self-locking screws (13-mm socket)
attaching the lower part of the cone (captive nuts).
Hold the tail, cone by hand ; through doors 42-02 and 42-10, unscrew the captive self-locking
screws (13-mm socket) attaching the upper part of the cone.
D - Free the tail cone from its locating pins (1 at the top on brake chute container - 2 on upper sides) ;
then slide it out along the jet pipe, making sure the electrical connector is not caught ; guide it at
frame 41 passage.
NOTE : Should tail cone removal present difficulties, separate the jet pipe rear cowling and remove
the tail cone and fairing together.
E Install the tail cone on the cradle.
4- INSTALLATION
A Ensure that the tail cone has been properly checked and cleaned.
B - For installation, proceed in reverse order of removal. Place the tail cone properly concentric to the
jet pipe then as soon as it is positioned on aircraft, correctly engage :
- the electrical wiring (hole in frame 41 ) of connector 105A
- the locating pins (one at top, two on sides).
C Fasten the tail cone with the four captive self-locking screws.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]L^>^y<
BREGUET AVIATION^J^P^^-o
MIRAGE F
D Through door 40-07, couple the electrical connector.
E Reinstall the drain fitting and its attachment plate.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Check for correct connection of the electrical connector and safetying of the tail cone attaching
screws (safety spring engaged in one of the screw base notches).
- Test the fire warning lights.
- Reinstall the access doors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* V\_fl^tt MIRAGE
lll\/
# V V^Û. F
I
BREGUET AVIATION ^&.
^ J=^-»^>
.^^ Restricted .».,,,.,
MANUAL n
03
SECTION 3
REAR SECTION OF FUSELAGE
(from frame 22 to frame 41 )

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
-Frames...... 3-101
-Floors -Webs 3-106
-Beams - Stringers - Skins 3-110
-Fittings 3-111
-Tail cone 3-115
-Main U/C doors 3-117
3-3 REMOVAL INSTALLATION

-
-Removal - installation of tail cone 3-301

-Inspection and maintenance of removed tail cone 3-501
-Brief inspection of removed tail cone 3-501 M
-Inspection of fuselage-to-wing main attachment fittings 3-502
-Inspection of fuselage-to-vertical stabilizer main
attachment fittings '. 3-504
-Inspection of engine compartment 3-506
-Inspection of engine air duct inspection doors 3-507M
-Inspection and maintenance of fuselage-to-wing secondary
attachment fittings 3-508
-Determination of insertion of wing-to-fuselage and fin-to-fuselage main
attachment pins 3-509
-Inspection of engine compartment walls 3-51 5
-Check of frame 36 at ventral fin front fasteners 3-521
-Check of wing-to-fuselage main attachment pin sleeve locking bosses
(at frame 25) 3-523
-visual inspection of frame 36 at ventral fin front fasteners 3-555
3-6 CLEANING CORROSION PREVENTIVE TREATMENT - PAINTING

-
-Assessment and elimination of corrosion on engine compartment walls 3-601
3-8 REPAIR
-Repair/Replacement of Teflon band on jet pipe cowling 3-801
Figure No. Page

1 MAIN FRAMES 3-102
2 SECONDARY FRAMES 3-102
4 FLOORS - WEBS - BEAMS 3-109
5 MAIN FITTINGS 3-1 1 2
6 SECONDARY FITTINGS 3-114
6M EXTERNAL STORE FITTINGS 3-1 14R
7 TAIL CONE - ATTACHMENTS 3-1 1 6
8 MAIN U/C DOORS - ATTACHMENTS 3-1 1 9
9 REMOVAL OF HEAT SHIELDS FOR INSPECTION OF ENGINE
COMPARTMENT WALLS 3-51 7
10 CHECK OF LOCKING BOSS 3-525
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FRAMES
1 - MAIN FRAMES (Fig. 1)
The following frames are regarded as main frames : 22 - 25 - 28 - 29 - 36 - 39.
FRAME
No.
22 forward attach solid in side machined light equipped with

ment of wings and sections, opened alloy wing front
front fuselage at location of attachment back
hoisting central air duct fittings and
and U/C well fuselage hoisting
lower section. front fittings
25 main attachment constituted by 2 machined light gap between the

of wings frames 25a and 25b alloy two frames is
opened at location fitted with wing
of air duct and attachment main
U/C wells, joined fitting
by internal and
external coupling
rings
28 aft attachment opened at location machined light equipped with

of wings of engine compart¬ alloy wing aft attach,
ment, laterally back fittings
at U/C wells and main U/C
lower attachment
29 limits aft sec opened at centre. machined light rear face is

tion of main U/C at location of alloy fitted with
wells engine compartment engine attach,
fitting
36 main attachment opened at location machined light equipped with fin

of fin of engine duct alloy attachment cou¬
pling frame
39 hinge pin of constituted by 2 machined light fin hinge pins

stabilator frames 39 and 39b alloy are limited
and fin aft opened at location between stringers
attachment pin of engine duct 8 and 15
joined by stabila¬
tor and cup hinge
fittings
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C.28 C.29
Primary 26 27 30 32 33 34 35
frames
Cadres
principaux 22 25a 25b 28 29
Cadres
secondaires 31
Secondary
frames
LEGENDE
Tôle Sheet C.22
usiné machined
C.36 C.39
ft
©
C.25
C.31 C.41
11
Util
FIGURE 2 - CADRES SECONDAIRES

FIGURE 1 - CADRES PRINCIPAUX SECONDARY FRAMES
PRIMARY FRAMES
AB
07-72 Restricted 3-102 3-10;
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
2- SECONDARY FRAMES (Fig. 2)
The following frames are regarded as secondary frames : 31 and 41 .
FRAME
No.
31 hoisting of frame opened machined light equipped with rear

fuselage rear at location of alloy fuselage hoisting
section engine duct fitting
41 tail cone opened at location upper section in joined by splice
support of engine duct 3 elements of and equipped with
made-up of 2 half- folded sheet, lower tail cone attach,
frames section chemically fittings
milled
3- INTERMEDIATE FRAMES (Fig. 3)
The following frames are regarded as intermediate frames : 23 - 24a - 24b - 26 - 27 - 30 - 32 - 33

34 - 35 - 37 - 38 - 40.
FRAME
No.
23 partial frame in 2 folded sheet reinforced upper central section

sections by angles between stringers 1
lower section between
stringers 20
24a partial frame in 3 folded sheet central section

sections .
24b chemical milling side sections between

stringers 1 and 9
26 partial frame in 3 folded sheet central section

sections between stringer 1
machined side section between

stringer 1 and main
U/C well upper floor
27 2 partial half-frames chemical milling between stringer 1

and main U/C well
30 frame in 8 sections folded sheet upper section, lower

section
chemical milling side sections between

stringer 1 and engine
attach, upper web, between
engine attach, lower
web and stringer 20
machined side sections between

engine attach, lower
and upper webs.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^ûP0
FRAME
No.
32 frame in 6 sections folded sheet upper central section

between stringer 1 lower
central section between
stringer 20.
Lower section under
stringer 17.

stringers 1 and 20.
33 frame in 6 sections folded sheet side sections between

stringers 1 and 20.
Side section under
stringer 17.
machined upper section between

stringers 1
stringers 20
34 frame in 6 sections folded sheet upper section between

stringers 1
lower section under
stringer 17
chemical milling side sections
machined lower section between

stringer 20.
35 frame in 6 sections folded sheet upper section between

stringer 1
stringer 20
lower section under
stringer 17

stringers 1 and 20.
37-38 partial frame in folded sheet 1 upper section between
4 sections stringer 3
2 side sections matching
servo support attachment
1 lower section between
stringer 8
40 frame machined solid annular frame.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
L.1
4L
L.9
\ 28 29 \ 31 \ \ 36 \ \ 39a 39b
Cadres 23 24a 24b 2627 30 3233 34 35 37 38
courants
Intermediate frames
C.26 C.27
3 C.30 C.32
C.33
\
L.20
C.35 C.40
É-L.17 .
L.20
C.34
L.17JS
L.20
L.17
L.20
1
AB INTERMEDIA TE FRAMES
07-72 Restricted 3-105 FIGURE 3 3-10Ï
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FLOORS -WEBS
(Figure 4)
1- FLOORS
Made of machined light alloy, they ensure junction between frames and webs, and form partitions
between the various compartments.
They comprise :
- Various fittings
- Access doors
Lightening holes
Index
No.
1 Between C 22 and C25a Machined, reinforced with angle, it comprises

L/H and R/H sides bonded Orion blocks and sealing grooves. Equipped
with a sealed door between frames 22 and 24.
2 Between C 22 and C 25a In three sections of sheet reinforced with angles.

central Sections between frames 23 and 25a are not fitted
with protective laminated panels.
3 Between C 26 and C 29 In two sections of machined sheet reinforced by

L/H and R/H angles and stiffeners, they form the U/C well floor.
sides It bears the U/C door bearings, front bearing between
frames C 26 and C 28 and rear bearing between
frames C 28 and C 29.
4 Between C 28 and C 29 Machined part forming lower floor.

L/H and R/H
sides
5 Between C 29 and C 30 Machined part (stringer 17) comprising sealing

L/H and R/H grooves, equipped with a sealed door.
sides
6 Between C 30 and C 31 Machined part (stringer 17) comprising sealing

L/H and R/H grooves, equipped with a sealed reservoir support.
sides
7 Between C 36 and C 39a Machined part, servo control support floor fitted
L/H and R/H with bushes.
sides
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
2- WEBS
Index
No.
8 Between* 25 and C 28 Main U/C web, of machined and folded sheet.

L/H and R/H Comprises stiffeners, angles and riveted and
sides bolted bent sections.
9 Between C 25 and C 28 Main U/C web, of machined and folded sheet.

L/H and R/H Comprises stiffeners, angles and riveted and
sides bolted bent sections.
10 Between C 26 and C 31 Made of machined and folded sheets and

L/H and R/H angles. Web from C 26 to C 28, C 28 to
sides C 29, and from C 29 to C 31 . Comprises
sealing grooves.
11 Between C 28 and C 29 Machined part. L/H web is equipped with a

L/H and R/H door and internal plates.
sides
12 Between C 29 and C 31 Made of machined sheet, bent at stringer 20.

L/H and R/H Comprises reinforcing angles and sealing grooves.
sides
13 Between C 31 and C 36 Made of machined sheet reinforced by angles

14 L/H and R/H and bent sections. Comprises sealing grooves.
15 sides -- without sealing groove.
16 Between C 33 and C 34 Made of folded sheet reinforced by angles.

L/H and R/H
sides
17 Between C 36 and C 37 Folded sheet.

L/H and R/H
sides
18 Between C 36 and C 39b Made of folded sheet reinforced with a pickup

L/H and R/H angle.
sides
19 Between C 36 and C 39a In three sections of folded sheet reinforced

L/H and R/H by angles and doubler.
sides
20 Between C 36 and C 37
21 Between C 39b and C 40 Made of folded sheet reinforced by bent

L/H and R/H sections.
sides
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Index
No.
22 Between C 39b and C 40 Machined part

L/H and R/H
23 sides
24 Between C 39b and C 40
25 Between C 40 and C 41
Folded sheet part reinforced by angle and
26 Between C 40 and C 41 bent sections
L/H and R/H
sides
NOTE : This table covers only the main floors and webs although the structure comprises secondary
webs of folded sheet and angle, some of which form stringers.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE D COUPE E' COUPE F

CROSS SECTION D CROSS SECTION E CROSS SECTION F
C.22
A B C D E F G H J K
r rrrr r r r rr
COUPE G COUPE H
CROSS SECTION G CROSS SECTION H
M/7 \ Hl28
22 25a 25b \26
I
27
I Ml
29 30
i
31 36 39 41
27
COUPE A COUPE B COUPE C

CROSS SECTION A CROSS SECTION B CROSS SECTION C
COUPE J COUPE K
CROSS SECTION J CROSS SECT/ON K
FIGURE 4 - PLANCHERS - VOILES - POUTRES

FLOORS - WEBS - BEAMS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
BEAMS - STRINGERS - SKINS
Stringers, spaced by 100 to 1 10 mm (3.937 to 4.33 in) as an average, are of light alloy of shape
and dimensions varying according to fuselage zones. They are joined to the skin by rivets except in the
integral structure zone where they are joined by electrical welding spots.
Beams transmit high local loads, loads due to some equipments, servo unit for instance.
Index
Situation Composition
No.
27 Between C 25b and C 26 Beam of machined light alloy equipped

with ball-joint housing, centring beam
and external store attachment.
NOTE : For the whole of stringers and skin panels (refer to STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
FITTINGS
1 - MAIN FITTINGS (Figure 5)
They take the high loads transmitted by :
- the wings
the tail unit
- the main U/C
- the engine.
Index Frames Description Location
Wings
21 22 Front attachment back-fitting LH-RH
22 28 Rear attachment back-fitting LH-RH
Fin
23 36 Main attachment back-frame Aircraft centerline

24 33 Front attachment fitting Aircraft centerline
25 39b Rear attachment fitting Aircraft centerline
Stabilator
26 39a-39b Hinge fitting LH-RH
Main U/C
27 28-29 Point A attachment back-fitting LH-RH
28 29 U/C back-fitting LH-RH
29 25a-26 Strut attachment fitting LH-RH
33 29 Point B attachment fitting LH-RH
Engine
.30 29-30 Side fittings LH-RH
31 29-30 Upper fitting RH
32 41 Rear fitting LH
The U/C fastener fitted to fitting 27 is :

- constituted by pin 36 fitted to fitting through rings 35 and 37
- secured by nut 34 (tightening torque : 100 ~ on m-daN) with shim 38 between them and
safetying through a cotter pin.
The U/C fastener fitted to fitting 33 is constituted by a ball-joint 43 secured by four screws and
nuts 44. A grease nipple 45 is mounted next to it by means of a collet and a peelable washer.
The jack fastener fitted to fitting 28 is :
- constituted by pin 39 fitted to fitting through collet 40 and washer 41
- secured by slotted nut 42 (tightening torque : 24.3 m.daN) retained by a locknut.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
9 9 9 <b\ » o
0
.0 0
cS
$1
23
22
/
30
i i
25
© i i
! i
i
0.
Cadres ! i i. i i llll
Frames 22 23 25a 25b 26 27. 29 30> 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39a 39b 41
21
39_v 40. r-41
44.
-h 32
L42 33
27
34 35 36 37 x-38
\ î^^ss
^^^^^^>
/ !
29
28 26
FIGURE 5- FERRURES PRINCIPALES
AB MAIN FITTINGS
06-82 3-112 FIGURE 5 3-112
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
2- SECONDARY FITTINGS (Figure 6)
They take the inertial loads transmitted by the tail cone as well as those transmitted by some
equipments :
- Accessory gearbox
- Hoisting fitting
- Servo-control fitting.
Index Frames Description Location
Tail cone
40 41 Upper attachment fitting L/H - R/H
41 41 Lower attachment fitting L/H - R/H
U/C doors
42 22-23 Door jack attachment fitting L/H
Accessory gearbox
47 26 Gearbox support Aircraft centreline
Servo-control
48 36-37 Support fitting L/H - R/H
Brake chute
49 39b Hook support attachment fitting Aircraft centreline
Hoisting
50 22 Front fitting L/H - R/H
51 31 Rear fitting Aircraft centreline
Jacking
52 36 Jacking fitting Aircraft centreline
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
51
25a 25b 26
47
FIGURE 6 - FERRURES SECONDAIRES

SECONDARY FITTINGS
AB
Restricted 3-114 FIGURE 6 3-Î14
09-73
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT )
BREGUET AVIATION. -<£&>
MIRAGE F
3- EXTERNAL STORE ATTACHMENT FITTINGS (Figure 6M)
Index Frames Description Attachment
60 20-20a Threaded bush (point 3) Inserted in beam
61 Plug Screwed
62 20-20a Pads (L/H and R/H) Riveted
63 20-20a Ball-joint housing 2 bolts
64 25a-25b Pylon attachment fitting (point 1) Bolts and nuts
61 Plug Screwed
65 25a Ball-joint housing 2 bolts
66 25b-26 Ball-joint housing Inserted and

bolted
67 Washer
68 23 Ball-joint stop 2 bolts on door

22.06
69 28 Pylon attachment fitting (point 2)
61 Plug Screwed
70 26 Pads (L/H and R/H) 2 bolts each
71 31 Beam rear attachment fitting 6 bolts
72 Plug Screwed
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
19 20 21 22232424a25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 VIEW ON DIRECTION OF ARROW F
VUE SUIVANT F
! i i i t i
I L- I HI Ll L I I I I \ I
///\ Y
C.23
6U COUPE B 22.06S DETAIL D 1

CROSS SECTION B
f-
C.31
uwww\w\
Il Ullii,,,in m
POINT 3 61 61J COUPE C DETAIL E

CROSS SECTION C
FIGURE 6M - FERRURES DES CHARGES EXTERIEURES

EXTERNAL STORE FITTINGS
AB
09-73 Restricted 3-114 R FIGURE 6 M 3-114 R
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2U=i>~<irU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^52S^<g<C> *«.,.. a. ~
à.
TAIL CONE
(Figure 7)
1 - DESCRIPTION
Attached to frame 41 , the tail cone is the terminal part of the fuselage.
It is a structure box comprising :

- three frames, 42 - 43 - 44, each constituted by an upper half-frame 1 and a lower half-frame 2, of
light alloy. Frame 42 is fitted with the four attaching fittings 3 and the two pins 4 centering the tail cone
on the fuselage.
- two outer skins 5 and 6 :
- light alloy outer skins R/H 5 and L/H 6, fitted with doors giving access to attachment
fittings 42-02 (10) and 42-04 (08) and with protective cover hooking points 7,
- the R/H skin is fitted, on either side of the upper pin, with two riveted air scoops 23,
ensuring engine tail pipe flap actuator cooling.
- one inner skin including :
- two sheets 10 and 1 1 between F. 42 and 43, cut at the three detector mounts 12 level. The
upper sheet 10 is made of titanium, and lower one 1 1 of light alloy.
- two sheets 24 made of stainless steel - upper and lower, between F. 43 and F. 44.
- two sheets 10 and 1 1 between F. 42 and F. 44 cut at the level of the three
detector mounts 12. Upper sheet 10 is made of titanium and lower sheet 11
of light alloy.
two stainless steel sheets, upper 13 and lower 14, between F. 44 and flexible fairing.
-
one annular teflon strip 15 for adapting the flexible fairing integral tail pipe rear cowling.
-
- one flexible fairing extending the fuselage structure.
It consists of two titanium superimposed sheets fitted with flexibility slots. Each sheet is made of
three external sections 8 and three internal sections 9.
The tail cone is fitted at its top section with fitting 16, connecting brake chute cowling, equipped
with safetied pin 1.7. Cowling 18 provides junction between the tail cone and the brake chute cowling.
2- ATTACHMENT
The attachment of the tail cone is achieved :

- at the four attachment fittings 3 ; assembly by captive bolts 19 in nuts 20 of fittings integral with
fuselage frame 41. Each bolt head is locked by two spiral springs 21 secured by bolt 22, washer and nut
to the sides of the fitting integral with the tail cone.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION .^>^s3
MIRAGE F
COUPE F
SECTION C CROSS-SECTION F
Capotage AR.de tuyère

Rear jet pipe cowling
Virole téflon
Teflon band
FIGURE 7 - POINTE ARRIERE - LIAISONS

TAIL CONE - A TTACHMENTS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT j MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^ZP^
MAIN U/C DOORS

(Figure 8)
1 - GENERAL
For each main U/C leg there are three bay doors
- an upper door 1
- a lower door 2
Actuation of these doors is interconnected
- fairing door 3.
2- DESCRIPTION
A Upper door 1
Located between frames 22 and 25 at stringers L10 and L14, it is made of a structure box
comprising :
- an outer panel 4
- an inner panel 5 stamped to allow wheel passage
- a front beam 6, machined, comprising a hinge bearing and a yoke receiving the door control
mechanism
- a rear beam 7, machined, comprising a hinge bearing and a yoke equipped with a roller ensuring
contact with the lower door 2 in closed position
- a fitting 8 equipped with a roller ensuring the same function as the preceding one
- five stiffeners 9.
B Lower door 2
Located between frames 22 and 26 at stringers L 14 and L 18, it is made of a structure box
comprising :
- an outer panel, machined, 10
- two inner panels 11-12 stamped for wheel passage
- seven stiffeners 1 3
- a front bearing 14 comprising a yoke receiving the door control jack and the linkage hinge yoke ;
this. bearing is equipped with hooking roller 16 for the door in closed position
Roller fitting
-
- The bearing is fitted with a head pin 45 positioned by a ring 47. It receives the roller and
two adjusting washers 46 on either side. The pin fitted with recessed washer 44 is secured by
self-locking nut.
- central bearing 17 equipped with a hooking roller 18 for the door in closed position
a
- a rear bearing 19
- two tracks 20 onto which the upper door rollers run
- a Teflon block 21 riveted to the edges in contact with the upper door and the fairing door.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^>^rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlONêF0 _<^>i> ......... ~
^££^~ <^> Restricted MANUAL 03
C Fairing door 3
Located aft of lower door between frames 26 and 29, it is a box structure comprising :
- an outer skin 22, an inner skin 23, machined
- a front rib 24, a center rib 25, a rear rib 26
- a top beam 27, machined
- a bottom beam 28
- a center beam 29
- a hooking beam 30, machined, receiving interconnecting rod 31
- a front gooseneck fitting 32
- a rear gooseneck fitting 33.
3- ATTACHMENTS
A Upper door 1
Attachment of upper door to fuselage structure is made at the two bearings by bolt 38, washer and
nut, through the bearing yoke bushes. Steel bolt 38 is fitted with a grease nipple (MOD. 575).
The front bearing limits the end play ; it comprises a yoke to which door control mechanism is
secured by bolt 34, washer and nut.
B Lower door 2
Attachment of lower door to fuselage structure fittings is made :

-At the hinge bearings (front 14 - center 17 - and rear 19) by bolts 35, washer and nut. Steel
bolt 35 is fitted with a grease nipple (MOD. 575).
The center bearing limits the end play.

- At front bearing 14 :
- at door jack hinge, by bolt 36, washer and nut
- at linkage hinge, by bolt 39, washer and nut.
C Fairing door 3
Attachment of the fairing door is made through :

- ball-joints of gooseneck fittings 32 and 33 (rear), and yokes on structure, by bolt 37, washers and
nuts. Bolt 37 is fitted with a grease nipple (MOD 457).
- yoke of the hooking beam 30 and ball-joint of the interconnecting rod 31, by bolt 38, washer
and nut.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C.22 C.2!
COUPE H
CROSS-SECTION H
Après modification 575
After modification 575 COUPE N COUPE C COUPE B
CROSS SECT/ON N CROSS SECT/ON C CROSS SECT/ON B
FIGURE 8 - TRAPPES D'ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL Liaisons - Fuselage
MAIN U/C DOORS Fuselage attachments
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-J>îrVL
BREGUET AVIATION ^côP3^^^^
MIRAGE F
., . ... . nr,
. .
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF TAIL CONE

(Figure 7)

-Tail cone cradle MS. 1 176.
- Removal can be carried out :
- with aircraft on its wheels or- jacked up
- with brake chute in place.
- Set the stabilators to «nose-down» position :
WARNING :
MAKE SURE THAT THE CONTROL SURFACES CAN BE DEFLECTED WITHOUT DANGER
FOR PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.
- with the electric pump on, fully push the control stick forward, then turn the electric pump
off.
- drop the hydraulic pressure in the roll system by holding the control stick in forward
position,
- release the electric pump circuit breaker and cut off electrical power supply.
- Remove doors 42-02, 42-10, 42-04, 42-08 and 40-07.
3- REMOVAL
A Remove the drain fitting from the jet pipe rear cowling and recover its attachment plate and
the drain.
B- Through door 40-07, disconnect tail cone-to-fuselage electrical connector 105A (fire detectors).
C- Through iower doors 42-04 and 42-08, unscrew the captive self-locking screws (13-mm socket)
attaching the lower part of the cone (captive nuts).
Hold the tail, cone by hand ; through doors 42-02 and 42-10, unscrew the captive self-locking
screws (13-mm socket) attaching the upper part of the cone.
D - Free the tail cone from its locating pins (1 at the top on brake chute container - 2 on upper sides) ;
then slide it out along the jet pipe, making sure the electrical connector is not caught ; guide it at
frame 41 passage.
NOTE : Should tail cone removal present difficulties, separate the jet pipe rear cowling and remove
the tail cone and fairing together.
E Install the tail cone on the cradle.
4- INSTALLATION
A Ensure that the tail cone has been properly checked and cleaned.
B - For installation, proceed in reverse order of removal. Place the tail cone properly concentric to the
jet pipe then as soon as it is positioned on aircraft, correctly engage :
- the electrical wiring (hole in frame 41 ) of connector 105A
- the locating pins (one at top, two on sides).
C Fasten the tail cone with the four captive self-locking screws.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]L^>^y<
BREGUET AVIATION^J^P^^-o
MIRAGE F
D Through door 40-07, couple the electrical connector.
E Reinstall the drain fitting and its attachment plate.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Check for correct connection of the electrical connector and safetying of the tail cone attaching
screws (safety spring engaged in one of the screw base notches).
- Test the fire warning lights.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R^>~^Vs. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^fiP3^^"^ .. . ... . . .
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF REMOVED TAIL CONE
1 - MATERIALS
- White spirit.
2- CHECK
A Tail cone assembly
Check for general condition of structure (no distortion or impact, condition of rivet rows).
Check the condition of :
- locating pins,
- attachment fittings (efficiency of safety spring on bolts),
- doors,
- flexible components (no cracks),
- teflon band,
- electrical connector,
- detectors and their supports,
- air scoops.
Especially examine the inner skin at the air scoops of tail pipe actuators (possible tears).
B Rear cowling on jet pipe.
- Check the general condition of the structure (no distortion) as well as of riveting.
- Check for correct condition of :
- flexible partition (no cracks),
- teflon band (if replacement is necessary, see 03-3).
- drain.
3- MAINTENANCE
Clean the tail cone following the procedures and using the products recommended (see 03-0).
-
After cleaning, make sure that there is no remaining water or cleaning product trapped in the
-
gaps of the flexible partition. Make sure that the drain is not obstructed.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
BRIEF INSPECTION OF REMOVED TAIL CONE
1 - MATERIALS
White spirit
2- INSPECTION
A Tail cone assembly
Check for general condition of structure (no distortion or indentation) as well as of rivet rows.
Check for condition of :

- locating pins
- attachment fittings (efficiency of safety spring on screws)
- doors
- flexible components (no cracks)
- teflon band
- electrical connector
- detectors and their supports
- air scoops.
Especially examine the inner skin at the air scoops of the jet pipe actuator (possible tears).
B Rear cowling of jet pipe
- Check for general condition of structure (no distortion) as well as of riveting.

- Check for correct condition of :
- flexible partition (no cracks)
- teflon band
- drain.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -^-"O |V\IKM\-7C l
BREGUET AVIATION^fi- _ _
INSPECTION OF FUSELAGE-TO-WING MAIN ATTACHMENT FITTINGS
1 - SCOPE
To remove the attaching pins (taper pin - sleeve) for inspection of the main attachment fittings.
A Special tools
- Tool kit 5001 CSC.
B - Standard tools
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb).
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV.
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C150LV.

- 1 wing positioning screw jack MS1326.
- 1 engine positioning trolley.
- 1 wing positioning rig BMV6.
3- MATERIALS
- Aliphatic naphtha, grade F or MEK.

- Lubricating varnish Molykote 3402.
A Place the aircraft in the same configuration as for wing removal (see 03-1).
B Position the wing handling rig (see 03-1).
C Prior to removing the attaching pins:

using a depth gauge, measure the protrusion of each taper pin ; compare it to that measured
-
on assembly, and recorded on the individual inspection logbook.
D Remove the main attaching pins (see 03-1).
Proceed as follows : remove one pin at a time ; after checking the pin and the bore, reinstall
the pin. and then remove the second pin.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION^.
/L^^rU MIRAGE F
5- INSPECTION
A Wing and fuselage bores

Using grade F aliphatic naphtha or MEK applied with a soft brush, thoroughly clean the bores
of frame 25 (F.25A and F.25B) and the wing fitting bore. Wipe dry with a clean lint-free cloth without
applying undue pressure.
(2) Inspection of bores

For information :
The fuselage side fitting (frame 25) is in A7U4SG.
The wing fitting is in maraging steel and the bores are notably provided with a Dalic protection
against contact corrosion (0.010 to 0.012 mm thick).
NOTE : The Dalic process consists of an electrolytic deposit of a nickel/tin/lead alloy applied with
a pad. This protection is applied during the manufacturing stage of the bare fitting in com¬
pliance with a specific process sheet (application, degassing) and can under no circumstances
be reworked.
(a) Inspection of fuselage bores

At the bore of each frame (25A and 25B), check for :
-contact corrosion (fretting) and, if detected, perform the necessary trimming operations as
described hereunder :
Trimming limits :
-
The trimming must not exceed the following values :
- Depth : 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
-Total area : 2 cm2 (0.310 sq.in) (over only one area or several accumulated areas
and not including the zone covered by the sleeve slot).
At the zone covered by the sleeve slot, the trimming must not exceed the following values :
- Depth : 0.4 mm (0.016 in).
- Width : 2.5 mm (0.100 in) on either side of the slot centerline.
NOTE : These limit values may be accumulated for one bore.
- Trimming and surface treatment procedure :
- Trimming
Trimming must be performed with the utmost care.
- In case of surface corrosion, it is to be removed with carborundum abrasive paper.

- In case of deep corrosion, it is to be removed with a spherical carbide cutter.
- No scratches or sharp edges are tolerated.
-Trimming shall be completed by surface polishing (degree of roughness similar to
that of the bore surface) and no tool mark is to remain.
- Surface treatment
- Treat the trimmed surface with Foscral solution diluted with 50 % water or reagent
thinner and applied with a pad, then thoroughly rinse with clean water applied with a sponge.
AC
09-84 Restricted I 3503
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl^^Tvl.
BREGUET AVIATION^c^F3^^^^
MIRAGE F
^£2^=--<Q^ Restricted MANUAL 03
CAUTION :
ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN DURING THIS LAST OPERATION
SO AS TO PREVENT ANY RUNS FROM OUTSIDE THE BORE.
- Scratches and, if detected, perform the necessary trimming operations as described hereunder :
The scratches not exceeding 0.2 mm (0.008 in) in depth shall be individually trimmed as
indicated below.
- The scratches not exceeding 0.1 mm (0.004 in) in depth shall be :
- carefully deburred,
- compressed with a piano wire.
These scratches are not accounted for in the trimmed areas if their total accumulated
length does not exceed 100 mm (39.37 in). Beyond this value, the excess areas are to be accounted
for and must be added for determining the areas trimmed for fretting corrosion removal purposes.
- The scratches with a depth of between 0.1 and 0.2 mm (0.004 and 0.008 in) shall be trimmed
by blending out their sides. The resulting trimmed areas shall be accounted for regardless of their
length as indicated above.
NOTE : No special surface treatment is to be applied after trimming of the scratches.
(b) Inspection of wing bores

At each bore, check :
-The Dalic protection for condition (this protection appears as a bright film). Depending on the
bore zone, it may be detected that this protection is degraded or transferred to the sleeve outside
diameter. Blackish traces or zones may also be detected in the bores and are caused by oxidation
of the Dalic coating ; do not attempt to remove these traces.
NOTE : The degradation or transfer of the Dalic protection generally corresponds to the bore zones
subjected, to the greatest loads.
They cover approximately one quarter of the bore surface in total and are distributed over
two zones each comprised within an angle of approximately 45° constructed on the load
axis (see sketch below).
Principal fretting surfaces
Perform the following operations depending on the condition of the Dalic protection remaining
in the bore :
- Remove the loose deposit (separated particles, blisters) by wiping with a slightly rough cloth
without applying undue pressure, then clean with MEK or grade F aliphatic naphtha.
CAUTION :
THIS VERY SOFT DEPOSIT IS EASILY REMOVED.
AA
09-84 Restricted | 3-503F
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- If 50 % of the bore area is still protected by a continuous coating of Dalic, with very slight
disappearance of the protection (less than 5 %) being tolerated within this same area, no corrective
action is to be performed.
- If the above requirement is not complied with or if the remaining coating of Dalic is spread
in the form or small patches, the protection is to be completely removed from the bore (plastic scraper).
In this case, determine the new insertion dimension of the pin (see 03-3) on completion of the checks.
- For contact corrosion (fretting). Perform a thorough inspection, particularly at the bore edge.
Any evidence of corrosion must be removed as described hereafter :
- Thoroughly clean with a lint-free cloth dampened with MEK.
- Sand the degraded zone with abrasive paper (grade 280 or 240).
- Once the corrosion or scratches appear to have been removed, polish the treated zone with
abrasive paper in successively finer grades (finish with grade 600).
- Thoroughly clean the polished surface with a lint-free cloth dampened with MEK.
- Using a magnifying glass (x 4 to 6), perform a thorough inspection under a grazing light to
make sure that any defect has been rectified.
Confirm the rectification of defects by performing a penetrant inspection with the use
of Ardrox 985 P3 as described below :
Thoroughly homogenize the 985 P3 penetrant, then apply with a brush.

-
Allow to penetrate for at least 20 minutes ; keep the zone moist during this period by
-
adding penetrant as required.
- Wipe off the excess penetrant with absorbent paper.
- Using a brush, apply 9PR4 emulsifier to all the zone coated with the penetrant and allow
to act for 1 minute.
- Clean the zone with paper dampened with distilled water ; check that no fluorescent back¬
ground remains under a UV light, then dry.
- Spray on 996-901 developer and allow to act for at least 20 minutes.
- Check that no corrosion pitting id detected under the UV light, with the lamp held at
approximately 30 to 40 cm (12 to 15 in) from the fitting.
NOTE : The lamp must warm up for at least 20 minutes.
- After inspection, remove the penetrant material with MEK.
B Inspection of main pins
- For information, each main pin consists of :

- one titanium (TA6V) taper pin with Microf Ion-coated tapered portion,
-one steel sleeve (30NCD16) with Microflon-coated outside diameter and cadmium-plated
flange.
- one steel washer (15CDV6),
- one castellated nut,
- one safety pin.
(1) Using grade F aliphatic naphtha or MEK applied with a soft brush, thoroughly clean the various
components of the main pins. Wipe dry with a clean lint-free cloth.
CAUTION :
TITANIUM PARTS SHALL, IN NO CASE, BE CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS.
AA
09-84 Restricted I 3-503J
BREGUET AVIATION ^£-
ti^>-^r\i.
_^_
MIRAGE F
(2) Inspection of taper pin
Check :
the Microf Ion-coating on the tapered portion for condition which can be considered as satis¬
-
factory if the coating has not disappeared or shows no signs of peeling ; blisters are permissible. If
otherwise, discard the pin,
- for defects such as scratches, marking or evidence of fretting (particularly at the slot and ends).
If defects are detected, they are to be trimmed (with stone for titanium - Crystolon grade 39C60LV
stone and Crystolon grade 39C150LV finishing stone, used dry) up to a maximum defect depth (mark¬
ing, scratch or corrosion) of 0.1 mm (0.004 in). In addition, the trimmed area must be no greater
than 10 % of the tapered bearing surface.
If these limits are exceeded, discard the pin.
- for distortion (this inspection is to be performed on a surface plate),
- the threads for condition ; spray the threads with Molykote 3402.
NOTE : When reinstalling the pin in the sleeve, make sure that a non-trimmed portion is aligned
with the sleeve slot.
(3) Inspection of sleeve
A transfer of the wing fitting Dalic protection (which appears as a bright film) is generally detected
on the sleeve outside diameter.
This Dalic deposit is to be removed with, for instance, a plexiglas scraper. Do not damage the
sleeve Microflon coating during this operation.
Blackish traces may also be detected ; these are not to be removed (Teflon).
Clean the sleeve with grade F aliphatic naphtha or MEK.
Using a magnifying glass, check :
- The outside diameter of the sleeve for fretting corrosion or marking, notably in the zone located
opposite the wing fitting, extending the zone approximately 1 cm (0.39 in) on either side, and particu¬
larly at the wing-to-fuselage boundary zones. Any sleeve showing signs of fretting corrosion shall be
systematically discarded.
Fretting : This is distinguished by bare metal with the appearance of microcraters or high metal
spots.
- It is normal to detect marking (slight upset which corresponds to peening in this zone) at the
wing-to-fuselage boundary with the sleeve having a bright appearance at this location. The sleeve is
deemed as acceptable in this case.
The slight scratches caused by assembly or disassembly operations or any accidental handling
are acceptable and shall be trimmed with an India stone.
- The inside diameter for scratches, evidence of fretting and burrs. Any defects detected are to
be trimmed with a wet crocus cloth.
AA
09-84 Restricted | 3-503M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," n J « / V M l\/-\\^l_
BREGUET AVIATION ^£s-~ ^jô _ .. A ... . . __
.
^ .^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
INSPECTION OF FUSELAGE-TO-VERTICAL STABILIZER MAIN ATTACHMENT FITTINGS
1 - SCOPE
To remove the attaching pins (taper pin - sleeve) for inspection of the fuselage-to-vertical
stabilizer main attachment fittings.
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CSC.
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
350 ft.lb).
-32-mm socket.
3 - MATERIALS
-Aliphatic naphtha, grade F

-Molykote 3402 (SPRAY)
-Corundum abrasive clotti (280 grit)
-INDIA stone.
A - Place the aircraft in the same configuration as for vertical stabilizer removal (see 03-4).
B - Prior to removing the attaching pins :
Using a depth gauge, measure the protrusion of each taper pin ; compare it with that
measured on assembly and recorded in the individual inspection logbook.
C - Remove the mains pins (see 03-4)
-Proceed as follows : remove one pin at a time ; after checking the pin and the bore, rein¬
stall the pin and then remove the second pin.
5 - INSPECTION
-Using aliphatic naphtha, grade F, carefully clean the various component parts of attach¬
ment fittings (bores and pins) and wipe them with a clean lintless rag.
CAUTION:
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD TITANIUM PARTS BE CLEANED WITH
CHLORINATED SOLVENTS (TAPER PIN).
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^v_~ ^c?-»^. ...,...,. .,
^. ^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
B - Check bores for absence of :
-Fretting corrosion.
-Scratches.
If defects are detected, perform the necessary trimming operations as described

hereunder :
Trimming :
Trimming must be performed with the utmost care :
-in case of surface corrosion, it is to be removed with corundum abrasive paper,
-in case of deep corrosion, it is to be removed with a spherical carbide cutter,
-no scratches or sharp edges are tolerated,
-trimming shall be completed by surface polishing (degree of roughness similar to that of
the bore surface) and no tool mark is to remain.
Surface treatment :
Treat the trimmed surface with Foscral solution diluted with 50% water or reagent thinner
and applied with a pad, then thorougly rinse with clean water applied with a sponge.
CAUTION:
ALL NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN DURING THIS LAST OPERATION
SO AS TO PREVENT ANY RUNS FROM OUTSIDE THE BORE.
C - Pin inspection :
-Taper pin.
-Check:
-the Microflon coating on the tapered portion for condition which can be consid¬
ered as satisfactory if the coating has not disappeared or shows no signs of peeling ; blisters
are permissible. Otherwise, discard the pin,
-for defects such as scratches, marking or evidence of fretting (particularly at the
slot and ends). If defects are detected, they are to be trimmed with silicon carbide stones,
Crystolon gradé 36C60LV stone and Crystolon grade 39C150LV finishing stone, used dry,
-for distorsion (this inspection is to be performed on a surface plate),
-the threads for condition ; remove any traces of corrosion and spray the threads
with Molykote 3402.
CAUTION:
WHEN REINSTALLING THE PIN IN THE SLEEVE, MAKE SURE THAT A
NON-TRIMMED PORTION IS ALIGNED WITH THE SLEEVE SLOT.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^À^
^<s_ _*?-=^
-«-ô -,
Restricted miamiiai
MANUAL no
03
D - Sleeve inspection
-The slight scratches caused by assembly or disassembly operations are acceptable and
shall be trimmed with an INDIA stone.
-Check the inside diameter for evidence of fretting and burrs. Any defects detected are to
be trimmed with wet crocus cloth.
E - Washers and nuts
-Check :
-surface condition (no burrs or impact marks). Trim as required, witt an INDIA
stone, then clean,
-no distorsion : check flatness on a surface plate,
-condition of threads.
REINSTALLATION
-Check the various components for thorough cleanliness.

-When replacing an attaching pin, calibrate and mark it (see 03-3).
-Reinstall attaching pin (see 03-4).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ " ~ /"W^L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^£p^- 1*7=*^ _ naamiiai rto
^-« ^-^> Restricted MANUAL 03
INSPECTION OF ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1 - SCOPE
To perform a general engine compartment inspection.
2 -CHECKS
During the checks, clean the engine compartment (painted or unpainted) with white spirit
using cloths and brushes.
A - Structure
Refer to "Aircraft skin and fitting check - General riveting inspection method" (see 03-0).
CAUTION:
THE TITANIUM PROTECTIVE PANELS ARE NEVER TO BE CLEANED WITH CHLORI¬
NATED SOLVENTS.
-Check engine compartment, inclusive of air intake ducts, for general condition in areas
which are not protected between frames 26, 36; 36, 38; 38, 41 .
-Condition of inner skin panels. Ensure that skin panels do not show evidence of
overheat (blisters, distortion, etc.) or cuts.
-Inspect rivet rows.
-Check doors and access panels for correct attachment.
- Check for traces of corrosion or scratches.
-Check for evidence of fuel of hydraulic fluid leaks.
-Check paint for correct general condition.
-Check fittings for condition and attachment (including engine handling removable
rail fittings).
-Check for efficiency of engine horizontal rod stowage spring clip.
-Check for safetying of keel rear fasteners.
B - Special checks
(1 ) Engine air intake duct seal
-Check for condition (cracks, cuts, etc.) and attachment.
(2) Ventilation ducts
-Check for:
-condition (no distortion - crack etc.) and attachment,
-condition of non-return-valves (tappet) of ventilation ducts: correct operation (no
binding points) - no play at hinge points - condition of seals (bonding - no cuts...); replace,
as required.
(3) Thermal protection
CAUTION:
COMPONENTS LOCATED BETWEEN FRAMES 26 AND 36 ARE FASTENED BY BOLTS
SOME OF WHICH TO NUTS INTEGRAL WITH INNER SKIN SECTIONS OF INTEGRAL
FUEL TANKS. USE SPECIAL BOLTS (14 mm (0.547 in) HEAD DIAMETER -
LEFT-HAND THREAD).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=à>--^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^^c
MIRAGE F
Check for general condition and attachment of the various heat protection items :
- frames 26 to 36 : the three Protecal panels and laminated strips (possible distortions, tears,
burns), titanium heatshield plates (for cracks).
- frames 38 to 41 : set of panels made of Vicotex material (possible distortions, blisters, burns or
cracks on stainless steel wafered plates covering Vicotex laminated material).
(4) Installation of systems
- Check :
the condition, connections, routing, attachments, and cleanness of the various systems
-
(pipes and equipment),
- the hydraulic system,
- the electrical system,
- the fuel and pressurization system
(especially check sealing of the pressurization pipes between the engine and tanks),
- the air conditioning system
(especially check the pipes connected to the engine),
- the fire detection system : make sure that protectors are in good condition.
- Check the flight control linkages for safetying and electrical bonding.
C - In case of irregularity, proceed to reconditioning.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
INSPECTION OF ENGINE AIR DUCT INSPECTION DOORS
(doors 24.09i and 24.03i)
1 - SCOPE
To make sure that the door hinges are not cracked.
2 - MATERIALS
-White spirit.
- Methylethylketone.
3 - SPARES
-2 pins 2331 0 AA 02001 5 LE
-Remove the door.

-Carefully eliminate any traces of paint, grease, oil and corrosion.
- Degrease with methylethylketone.
5 - PROCEDURE
-Proceed to a dye penetrant crack detection inspection in the areas indicated on the fig¬
ure (see Structural Repair Manual, 1-358).
NOTE: If a crack is detected, replace the door by a modified spare door or repair the door: re¬
placement of steel spare hinge (see Structural Repair Manual, 4-631 ).
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Wipe off any trace of developer.
-Clean with methylethylketone.
-Proceed to the renewal of
the anti-corrosion protection.
-Lightly lubricate the pins of
the hinge.
-Reinstall the door.
-Lock the pins.
AA
BREGUET
LJ>^-r\l
AVIATION^jiF3^ _
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF FUSELAGE-TO-WING SECONDARY

ATTACHMENT FITTINGS
- Pressure lubricating gun.
2- MATERIALS
- Grease Air 4217 or Air 4210.
- Remove wing fillets 20.02 - 20.10 - 26.02 - 26.10.
4- CHECK
- On each attachment fitting, check for :

- condition : no corrosion, scratching, etc ;
- positioning of pins and efficiency of nut safetying ;
- correct insertion of bushes and ball joint.
5- CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
A Cleaning
- Dry clean :
- structural boxes by vacuum-cleaning any foreign matter ;
- each attachment fitting, using a clean cloth or brush ;
- grease nipples.
B Maintenance
- Grease each attachment until injected grease appears.

- Apply a light film of grease over attachment component parts (ball joint, pin...). Remove excess
grease.
6- FINAL STEPS
Reinstall the wing fillets.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^,
//^>^rVl MIRAGE F
DETERMINATION OF INSERTION OF WING-TO-FUSELAGE

AND FIN-TO-FUSELAGE MAIN ATTACHMENT PINS
1- SCOPE
This method should be applied whenever installing :

- a spare pin
- an unmatched pin
- a new element (wing or fin)
- when the Dalic coating has disappeared.
The wing and fin main attachments consist of a taper pin/expandable sleeve assembly for
connection between fuselage frame and element main fitting.
Pin insertion and consequently sleeve expansion should cause a stress in the bore of each
attachment part. This stress is the best compromise between a lower limit permitting to avoid «fretting/
corrosion» under load, and an upper limit selected to eliminate any risk of corrosion under stress and
any effective possibility of pin insertion (stress to be applied). For this, a taper pin insertion dimension
is determined. This dimension is measured from the point of contact between the various components
of the pin, taking the pin taper into account to obtain the tightening required.
A Special tools
-Depth gauge (with a 0 to 20 mm (0.784 in) dimension capacity).
B Standard tools
- Sockets M24, M54, M60.
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft. lb).
- Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ftlb).
- Adapter 3/4 «1» (Facom K232 or equivalent).
3- MATERIALS
- Aliphatic naphtha, gradé F.

-Petrolatum Codex.
-Grease AIR 4205.
- Methylethylketone.
A Taper pins
(1) Cleaning
CAUTION :
TITANIUM PARTS SHALL IN NO CASE BE CLEANED WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS
(TAPER PIN).
- Separate the components of each pin. Remove the safety pin, nut, washer and expandable sleeve.
- Remove any molykote burrs from the taper pin threads (on new pin) by lightly filing with a card.
- Carefully clean all the parts with aliphatic naphtha, grade F, and wipe them with a clean and
lint-free rag.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAiaT/L-^-2ir^JL. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^LpV^Q* ...khi a. no
^££^-<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Check
Check the pin, sleeve, washer and nut for surface condition (absence of dents or burrs). Particu¬
larly check the superficial skins (pin and sleeve).
(3) Pin numbering
(a) Sleeves, cones, washers and nuts are matched at random, then each assembly is numbered (light
stamping followed by softening) in relation to the relevant bore, as follows :
fuselage-to-wing attachment pin :

No. 1 assembly fitted to LH lower surface bore
No. 2 assembly fitted to LH upper surface bore
No. 3 assembly fitted to RH lower surface bore
No. 4 assembly fitted to RH upper surface bore
mark the A/C No. on the nut;
fuselage-to-fin attachment pins :

No. 1 or LH assembly fitted to LH bore
No. 2 or RH assembly fitted to RH bore
mark the A/C No. on the nut
(b) If necessary, the components can be matched again, provided the former numbers are struck or
rubbed out and a new one is written, taking the above marking into account.
(c) If a spare attachment pin is to be installed, it shall be numbered in accordance with the bore
receiving it.
IF INITIAL ATTACHMENT PINS ARE TO BE REINSTALLED, EACH PIN SHALL BE FITTED

IN THE RELEVANT BORE.
B Bores (fuselage - wings - fin)
Carefully clean the bores with white and lint-free rags soaked in methylethylketone (or other
solvent) but without excess to avoid streaming.
Check the bores for surface condition (absence of scratches or damage to metal).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
5- DETERMINATION OF INSERTION OF FUSELAGE-TO-WING MAIN ATTACHMENT PINS.
A Preparation of taper pins.
- Apply a light film

- of petrolatum on the taper pin (spread evenly)
- of grease on the nut bearing surfaces.
B Measurement of reference dimension «A», with pin out of fitting
- Position the washer and nut on each unfitted pin.

- Bring the washer in contact with the pin by tightening the nut by hand.
- Record protrusion dimension A of .the threaded section in relation to the nut.
- Remove the nut and washer.
WING
C Measurement of reference dimension «B», with pin installed on wing fitting.
Position each assembly (pin, sleeve, washer, nut) in its related wing fitting bore.
-
On the nut, fit a socket wrench and on the pin head, place a socket (M54) fitted on
- a torque
wrench set to a 5 m.daN (40 ft.lb) torque.
nwssw&u
5m.daN(40ft.lb)
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- Gradually tighten the nut until the taper pin can no longer be rotated when actuating the head
to the torque set.
- Remove the wrenches.
- Record the protrusion dimension B of the threaded section in relation to the nut.
- Remove the taper pin.
D Determination of final insertion dimension «C» of taper pin
C = dimension B + 2.3 mm (0.0874 in).

- Protrusion dimension to be obtained on installation in aircraft :
r -+ 0.5
C
°-2 mm i+ °-°°76 in*
mm(- 0.019 m)
This tolerance enables safety pin installation.
- Enter dimensions A, B and C obtained in the aircraft logbook.
6- DETERMINATION OF INSERTION OF FUSELAGE-TO-FIN MAIN ATTACHMENT PINS
A Preparation of taper pins
- Apply a light film :

- of petrolatum on the taper pin (spread evenly)
- of grease on the nut and washer bearing surfaces.
B Measurement of reference dimension «A», with pin out of fitting
- Assemble each taper pin, taking care to position the washer properly in relation to the sleeve.
- Position the nut on the pin, screwing down until the washer is in contact
with the pin.
- Record protrusion dimension A of the pin head in relation to the sleeve.
xtf
FIN
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C Measurement of reference dimension «B1 », with pin installed on fin fitting
Position each assembly in its related bore in the fin.

-
Position the washer and nut.
-
- On the nut, fit a socket wrench and on the pin head, fit a torque wrench set to a 5 m.daN
(40 ft.lb) torque.
to the set torque.
- Remove the wrenches.
- Record protrusion dimension Bl of the pin head in relation to the sleeve.
Bl
5 m.daN (40 ft. lb)
D Measurement of reference dimension «B2», with pin installed on fuselage fitting
- Position each assembly in its related bore in the fuselage.

- Position the washer and nut.
to a torque of 5 m.daN (40 ft.lb).
- Record protrusion dimension B2 of the pin head in relation to the sleeve.
ffiffi
Jffi^^wfcw^wvxw^CKxy
FUSELAGE
5 m.daN (40 ft. lb)
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=^*~fir'vL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^P3^-^^^ ......... ^
- Compare the results and record the lower protrusion dimension. This is dimension B.
E Determination of final insertion (dimension C) of taper pin upon installation of vertical stabilizer
(see 03-4).
C = dimensidn B - 3 mm (0.01 18 in).

- Protrusion dimension to be obtained on installation in aircraft :
C^q4 mm (0.0157 in)

This tolerance enables safety pin installation.
- Enter dimensions A, B and C obtained in the aircraft individual logbook.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ôP3
iL^^rXL MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF ENGINE COMPARTMENT WALLS
1 - SCOPE
To check for possible traces of corrosion on the fuel tank panels forming the engine compartment
walls between frames 26 and 36.
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Diestone S solvent or methylethylketone (MEK)
(1 ) Remove the engine (see 06-4).
(2) Remove the «Protecal» heat shields attached by screws between frames 26 and 36, proceeding in
the sequence given below.
Group the screws per categories and mark their location on the shields.
CAUTION :
(1) NEVER WALK ON PROTECAL SHIELDS.
(2) SCREWS WITH A SMALL DIAMETER HEAD (8 mm) HAVE A RIGHT-HAND THREAD.
SCREWS WITH A LARGE DIAMETER HEAD (14 mm) HAVE A LEFT-HAND THREAD.
Check for corrosion as removal proceeds. Traces of corrosion consist of patches of powdery oxyde
on the compartment shields or on the Protecal heat shields.
(a) At the rear (section B), remove :

- the edging screws of the floor,
- the attaching screws and the lower lateral shields.
Look for corrosion (see paragraph 2).
Should there by any, even superficial, continue heat shield removal as instructed below.
(b) At the rear (section B) .remove :

- the upper center shield,
- the upper lateral shields.
(c) At the front (section A), remove :

- the protectors of the fire detector,
- the wiring protectors,
- the lower and upper lateral shields.
AA
BREGUET
ti^^-^sX
AVIATION^jL _ _
MIRAGE F
4- PROCEDURE
(1) Cleaning of surfaces
CAUTION
DUE TO ELEMENTS MADE OF TITANIUM ALLOY (PROTECAL SHIELDS), THE USE OF
CHLORINATED SOLVENTS IS PROHIBITED.
NOTE : Protect all recesses or interfaces close to the tank panels so as to avoid any infiltration of
the products used.
- Clean the tank panels first with cloths soaked in white spirit and then more carefully with clean
cloths soaked in Diestone S solvent or MEK and wrung out.
- Clean the heat shields with cloths soaked in Diestone S solvent or MEK.
(2) Corrosion detection
- Carefully inspect the panels so as to detect any possible corrosion pitting in the skin around the
corrugations of the heat shields.
- Particularly inspect the periphery of the rivets attaching the panels to the structure.
Should there be any corrosion, remove it and treat the affected surface (see 03-3-6).
If there is no corrosion :
-protect the engine compartment walls with paint (see Structural Repair Manual),
- if the paint cannot be applied immediately, apply temporarily Ardrox 3140 (see application con¬
ditions in 03-3-6).
This treatment may be repeated pending an aircraft grounding period allowing protective paint
application.
(3) Final steps
If Ardrox has been used, reinstall the shields as soon as the product is no longer tacky.
When reinstalling the shields, take care of the screw location (see para. 3 (2)).
- Install the fire detector deflectors, making sure that there is a 2 mm (0.08 in) clearance between
deflectors and heat shield.
- Install the engine.
AA
.AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
1 ~[
I J I > I I I
| C.27 |c.29|c.3l|
C.26 C.28C.30C.32 C.36
Tôle centrale supérieure

Upper center plate COUPE B
COUPE A SECTION B
SECTION A Tôles latérales supérieures
Upper lateral plates
Tôles latérales inférieures Plancher Tôle latérale inférieure

Lower lateral plates Floor Lower lateral plate
FIGURE 9 - DEPOSE DES PROTECTIONS THERMIQUES POUR

INSPECTION DU TUNNEL REACTEUR
REMOVAL OF HEAT SHIELDS FOR INSPECTION
OF ENGINE COMPARTMENT WALLS
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" « /V\I^M\7l. t
BREGUET AVIATION ^k-~ ^s-î khamiiai rt03
o
^^_ ^-o Restricted MANUAL
CHECK OF FRAME 36 AT VENTRAL FIN FRONT FASTENERS
1 - SCOPE
To check for cracks on frame 36 web, at the ventral fin front fasteners.
-Eddy current tester Multitest EM 3300.

-Pencil probe 44B 022-2-Z-100-125.
-Standard 2-164-55.
3 - MATERIALS
-White spirit.
-Remove doors 36.05.2 and 36.07.2.

-Carefully clean the web of frame 36 with white spirit.
-Inspect the zone, for traces of distortion, impact marks, incipient cracks or corrosion
spots.
- Record the presence of any traces of fuel leakage at the rear tanks.
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Preparation
the tester as instructed in its technical handbook.

- Plug in and set up
-Calibrate the tester:
-apply the probe to the 0.5 reference crack of standard 2-164-55, slide it slowly and
transversely over the crack and adjust the tester so as to obtain a characteristic signal on the
screen.
B - Crack detection
- Press the probe flat against the frame web and slide it on ail the questionable area, pro¬
ceeding in the same way as on the standard.
-On the screen, any detected defect produces a signal comparable to that obtained previ¬
ously with the reference crack.
-Carefully mark the position of the defect with a soft pencil.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
NOTE : If the probe reveals a defect, it is advisable to check the probe calibration several times in
succession.
Repeat the test in the area where the defect has been detected, paying particular attention
to the correct seating of the probe (a defect in surface protection may have escaped visual
inspection).
- If a defect is confirmed, locate the crack by dye penetrant inspection (see Structural Repair
Manual).
CAUTION :
PASSING THE PROBE VERY CLOSE TO A RIVET RESULTS IN AN «EDGE EFFECT» ;
THE SCREEN THEN SHOWS A SIGNAL RESEMBLING THAT CAUSED BY A CRACK.
C Measures to be taken when a crack is evidenced
(a) If the crack ends at more than 20 mm (0.79 in) from the lower rivet row (zone 1), and ONLY
in that case, stop the crack by drilling a 5 mm (0.2 in) dia hole ; otherwise, leave it as it is.
IMPORTANT : Trim the crack stop hole with a reamer.
(b) if the crack ends at less than 20 mm (0.79 in) from the flange or the rib (zone 2), stop it as des¬
cribed above ; then apply the recommended repair procedure which is a fourth line repair that may be
performed on the spot.
(c) To enable the development of the cracks to be followed, record their lengths and locations.
Record the presence or absence of a spotface at the rivet holes where a crack exists.
6 - FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall the doors.
LOWER RIVET ROW AXIS
VENTRAL FIN ATTACHMENT AXIS
FRAME 36 viewed from behind, LH side (RH side symmetrical)
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^ _
ÏL^^zrX.
_
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF WING-TO-FUSELAGE MAIN ATTACHMENT PIN

SLEEVE LOCKING BOSSES (AT FRAME 25)
1 - SCOPE
- To make sure that the sleeve flange notch does not bear on its locking boss and, in such case, that
the boss is free from any incipient crack,
- Set of feeler gauges
- Lighting source
3 - MATERIALS
- Penetrant inspection material Ardrox
- Aircraft configuration : Engine removed.
5 - PROCEDURE
- For each wing-to-fuselage main attachment pin (2+2), visually check proper positioning of the
sleeve in relation to the boss by making sure that the sleeve flange notch does not bear on its locking
boss (Use a set of feeler gauges if necessary).
Should bearing or insertion of the sleeve flange notch on/in the locking boss be detected, perform
the check(s) listed in the following tables according to the sleeve installation performed.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(1) Initial sleeve installation
CHECKS TO BE PERFORMED FINDINGS/REPAIR PROCEDURE
- Bearing of sleeve notch on its locking boss

- Perform a crack detection penetrant inspection Should any crack be detected, the max permissible
of the locking boss (outer face without removal length is 10 mm (0.39 in). Beyond this value,
of pin). reorientate the sleeve by applying the repair
procedure (see Repair Manual).
- Insertion of sleeve notch in its locking boss
of pin). reorientate the sleeve by applying the repair
procedure (see Repair Manual).
- Also check that thé clearance between the
face of frame 25 and the sleeve flange is
less than or equal to 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
(a greater clearance is a sign of a backward
motion of the sleeve/pin assembly).
Should the clearance be greater than 0.4 mm -Should both of these bosses show no crack,
(0.016 in), perform a crack detection penetrant reorientate the sleeve by applying the repair
inspection of the two other bosses. procedure (see Repair Manual).
- Should a crack be detected on either one of
these two bosses, apply, on the main attachment
concerned, the special installation of a sleeve/pin
assembly (see Repair Manual).
(2) Post-repair sleeve installation (Reorientation of sleeve)
CHECKS TO BE PERFORMED FINDINGS/REPAIR PROCEDURE
- Bearing of sleeve notch on its locking boss

Perform a crack detection penetrant inspection Should any crack be detected, the max permissible
-
of pin). apply, on the main attachment concerned, the
special installation of a sleeve/pin assembly (see
Repair Manual).
- Insertion of sleeve notch in its locking boss
of pin). apply, on the attachment concerned, the special
installation of a sleeve/pin assembly (see Repair
Manual).
- Also check that the clearance between the
face of frame 25 and the sleeve flange is less
than or equal to 0.4 mm (0.016 in) (a greater
clearance is a sign of a backward motion of
the sleeve/pin assembly). Should the clearance be greater than 0.4 mm
(0.016 in), apply, on the main attachment
concerned, the special installation of a sleeve/pin
assembly (see Repair Manual).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Côté gauche Côté droit

LHside R H side
Axe supérieur Axe supérieur

Upper pin Upper pin
Fente fourrure
Bossagesd'immobilisation. Sleeve slot / Bossages
Locking bosses / d'immobilisation
Locking bosses
Axe inférieur Axe inférieur

Lower pin Lower pin
Bossagesd'immobilisation
Locking bosses
MONTAGE D'ORIGINE DE LA FOURRURE MONTAGE DE LA FOURRURE APRES APPL ICATION

INITIAL SLEEVE INSTALLATION DE LA SOLUTION DE REPARATION
(Réorientation de la fourrure)
POST-REPAIR SLEEVE INSTALLATION
(Reorientation of sleeve)
Zone à contrôler par ressuage

Area to be checked by dye-penetrant
inspection
Zone d'appui ou de pénétration.

encoche/fourrure bossage
Bearing or insertion area
(notch/sleeve/boss)
Jeu face cadre 25

et collerette/fourrure
Clearance between frame 25
surface and flange/sleeve
FIGURE 10- CONTROLE DU BOSSAGE D'IMMOBILISATION

CHECK OF LOCKING BOSS
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
VISUAL INSPECTION OF FRAME 36 AT VENTRAL FIN

FRONT FASTENERS
1 - SCOPE
To visually check for cracks on frame 36 web, at the ventral fin front fasteners.
2 - MATERIALS
-White spirit.
-White clean, lint-free cloths.
-Remove doors 36.05.2 and 36.07.2.

-Carefully clean the web of frame 36 with white spirit.
4 - PROCEDURE
-Visually inspect the zones (see figure 1 ) for traces of distortion, impact marks, missing
surface protection, cracks or corrosion spots.
-If a defect is detected, confirm its presence and dimensions by performing a crack detec¬
tion inspection using the Eddy current method (see 3-521 ).
5 - FINAL STEPS
LOWER RIVET ROW AXIS
FRAME 36 viewed from behind, LH side (RH side symmetrical)
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f " " w /V\II\/"\V^£. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-~ jtfô .,..,.,.,
REPAIR/REPLACEMENT OF TEFLON BAND ON JET PIPE COWLING
- Pneumatic drill
-Pneumatic riveting gun
-Flat-head rivet set.
2 - MATERIALS
-MEK
-Adhesive EC1675
3 - SPARES
-Teflon PTFEC01 x 100 x 0.20 mm (39.97 in x 0.079 in)

- Rivets 21 21 8 D B 2408A or
21218 DB3208A
4 - SCOPE
To replace or repair the Teflon strip according to the damage detected.
-Repairable damage (corrugation, separation).

-Non-repairable damage leading to replacement (cracks, cuts, tearing).
(a) Repairable damage

-Secure the separated portion of the Teflon strip with a 2.4 mm dia. countersunk rivet.
(b) Non-repairable damage

-Replacement.
-Unrivet and strip off the Teflon strip to be replaced.

-Clean and prepare the area which is to receive the new Teflon strip
(see Manual 03-0-806).
6 - PROCEDURE
-Cut a piece of Teflon strip to a width of 60 mm (2.36 in) and to the same length as the
section to be replaced.
-Chamfer one side of the strip over 10 mm (0.39 in) wide, reducing thickness to approx.
1 mm at the edge.
- Drill 2.4 mm diameter holes for the rivets (3.2 mm if the holes in the sheet are no longer
to their original diameter).
-Cut 100° countersinks in the Teflon strip.
-Apply a bonding coat on the Teflon strip and the surface to be covered (see Manual
03-0-806) and set it in place.
-Install the rivets, taking care not to distort the Teflon.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^ _
L>^TU MIRAGE F
SECTION 4
TAIL UNIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
4-0 GENERAL
- Tail unit breakdown 4-001
4-1 DESCRIPTION -OPERATION
- Stabilators. 4-101
- Fin 4-104
- Rudder 4-108
4-3 REMOVAL- INSTALLATION
- Removal - installation of stabilators 4-301

- Removal of vertical stabilizer 4-305
- Installation of vertical stabilizer 4-308
- Removal - installation of rudder 4-31 1
- Method for presetting and installing taper pins of control surfaces

(ailerons and rudder) see 03-1
- Check of hinges on removed rudder 4-501
- Check of hinges on removed stabilators 4-501
- Determination of insertion of fin-to-fuselage main attachment pins see 03-3
- Check of trailing edge structural box of each stabilator 4-507
4-8 REPAIR
- Replacement of stabilator ball joint 4-801

- Replacement of stabilator bearing 4-803
Figure No. Page
1 STABILATOR ASSEMBLY - ATTACHMENTS 4-103

2 FIN - ATTACHMENTS 4-107
3 RUDDER - ATTACHMENTS 4-110
4 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF STABILATOR. .- 4-304
5 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL STABILIZER 4-307
6 CHECK OF TRAILING EDGE STRUCTURAL BOX OF STABILATOR 4-513
7 CHECK OF TRAILING EDGE STRUCTURAL BOX OF STABILATOR 4-514
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
TAIL UNIT BREAKDOWN
GENERAL
The tail unit consists of :
- two monobloc horizontal stabilators (L/H and R/H), fully independent
- one vertical stabilizer constituted by a fin onto which the rudder is hinged.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
iL=i>^rU
^ ^
MIRAGE F
STABILATOR
(Figure 1)
1- DESCRIPTION
Each L/H and R/H stabilator, comprises :

-one main box 1 forming an integral structure extended by :
- one fixed leading edge 2 of conventional structure construction
- one fixed trailing edge 3 of honeycomb construction
- one removable fairing 4
It forms an assembly comprising :

-one rib NO machined in high tensile steel comprising drive arm and hinge ball-joint. The drive
arm is fitted with drive fitting 5 onto which Teflon skin 6 is bonded.
- one front spar Lg of machined light alloy 1 All in one block between rib
- one rear spar Lg machined in the solid / NO and fairing

-one machined rib N1, supporting hinge bearing
- two ribs N2 and N3 of 3 folded sheet sections
- one end rib N4 of folded sheet
- two false spars Lg1 - Lg2 in two machined sections between rib N1 and rib N4
- two machined webs VO and V2
-two machined webs V1A and V1B, each including a shoulder through which the internal hinge
bearing is fixed.
- two skin panels of machined light alloy : lower surface (7), upper surface (8)
- one ball-joint hinge 9 locked by circlip 10 on rib NO
- one seal 11, secured by reinforcement plate 12 screwed on rib NO surface.
The external bearing ball-bearing cage (13) is attached, through webs V1A - V1B and through rib
N1 by two bolts 14, washers and nuts and between cage and rib N1, by four bolts washers and nuts 15.
B Leading edge
It consists of :
- one folded sheet front rib NO, extending box structure rib NO
- one skin panel, chemically milled and roll-formed 16,
- 14 ribs NOB to N3B in two sections. A front folded sheet section, an angle or an attaching bent
section fitted with gang nuts or anchor nuts.
Leading edge is fastened on front spar Lg web by screws. It is riveted to spar flanges on front rib
NO and rib N4.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
ùat
^S?»^^
MIRAGE
.........
F
«~
^£è^<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
C Trailing edge
It is an assembly forming a structure box comprising :

- one root box formed by :
- one rib NOF,
-one closing rib 17
- attaching bent sections
- one end rib N4F of machined light alloy including a bent section for attachment to rear spar Lg.
- one honeycomb structure 18 bonded to the skins and vertical partitions
- two chemically milled skin panels 19-20 joined at the trailing edge on a ledge 21.
Component parts are attached by rivetting and bonding

Sealing (See 03-0).
D Fairing
It consists of :
- three folded sheet stiffeners
- one skin in two chemically-milled and welded sections 22
Fairing is screwed to end ribs N4 and N4F.
E Fittings (cross-sections C - D)
They comprise :
- two template fittings 23 for deflection template pick-up. They are riveted to rib NO and each
comprises : a bush 24, a washer 25, a pin 26 and a plug 27
- three hoist fittings 28, riveted, stopped by plug 29
- on front spar between ribs NOC-NOD - between ribs N2C-N2D
- on rib N1 between web V2 and rear spar Lg
2- ATTACHMENTS
Each stabilator is assembled :

- at hinge point on pivot integral with fuselage
- at hinge point of control linkage drive rod
A Hinge on pivot (detail E - section F)
Pivot 30 engages into inner bearing hinge ball-joint 9, and in ball-bearing 31 of outer bearing ;
attachment is achieved by spacer 32 and nut 33 screwed and immobilized on pivot by bolt 34.
B Hinge on drive rod (cross section G)
Rod ball-jointed yoke 35 engages in drive arm 36 of rib NO.

Fitment by recessed washer 37, safetied nut 38.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
COUPE G
CROSS SECTION G
FIGURE 1 - EMPENNAGE HORIZONTAL-LIAISONS

STABILA TOR ASSEMBL Y - A TTACHMENTS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
FIN
(Figure 2)
1 - DESCRIPTION
Fin consists of :
- one main box 1 of light alloy integral structure extended by :
- one leading edge 2 of conventional structure type
- one fin top fairing 3
- one front fairing 41
- one rear fairing 42
This light metal assembly comprises the following components :

- one main spar Lg P in two sections. It is machined up to rib N3B, and forms the double crankpin
of fin center attachment.
It is extended up to upper rib N6 by a false spar Lg 2
- one root rib in two machined components :
- front rib NO
- rear rib NO
Each component forms the front and rear fin attachment fork-fittings
- one front spar Lg, a rear spar Lg, machined between root rib NO and rib N6. The rear spar is
extended by a laminated fairing spar 5.
- one rib N6 in two machined components
- one front component from rear spar Lg to leading edge
- one rear component up to trailing edge
- one false spar Lg 1 in two folded sheet components
- one false spar Lg 3 machined in two components of section L
Ribs : machined and folded sheet ribs form the box lattice structure :
- machined rib N1 , braces the break of main spar Lg P base

- rib N1 A between main spar Lg P and false spar Lg 3
- the two rear components of rib N2
rib ES'
'- '-K N4C, £îWeen
between maîn SP3r. L\PQand
rear spar ff
Lg AR and trailing LJLAR 1
r.f?ar edge J °f machined light
a
alloy7
The other rib sections are of folded sheet.
Machined skin panels R/H 6 and L/H 7, are riveted.

Bellcrank support 8 downstream of machined light alloy servo
-
It ensures junction between the two components of false spar Lg 3 and is part of rib N3. It
receives the hinge point of deflection template 9 the equipment of which is identical with that of
template fitting 10.
The structure box components are joined by screws and Huck rivets
The box is equipped with :

- one rudder control fairing 03-56, of laminates, screwed on a support fitted with a rib integral
with R/H skin panel
- one duct 1 1 for cables
Two circular cut-outs 43 machined in the skin on R/H and L/H sides, receive the side aerials of the
radar detector (or dummy antennas, if the latter system is not fitted).
Sealing (see 03-0)
AC
0177
Ul "
...
Restricted 4104
BREGUET AVIATION
JL-^ril
-<5^\^<j^<>
MIRAGE F
s^C^-^^à Restricted MANUAL 03
B Leading edge
Fixed on front spar Lg, it consists of :

- one lower leading edge 12, not removable
- one upper leading edge 13, not removable
- one leading edge cowling 14, removable
- one front fairing 41 , removable.
(1) Lower leading edge 12
Located between. the fin root and front fairing 41, it consists of .twelve light alloy ribs NOC to
N2C comprising pick-up angles equipped with gang nuts and anchor nuts. Level with ribs NOC and N2C
it bears a joint plate fitted with gang nuts attaching cowlings 15-41.
- Two light alloy tubes 16, in two sections joined by a laminated sleeve, pass through rib flanged
holes.
- One roll-formed and machined skin panel forms the leading edge, screwed through the front
spar Lg AV web and riveted on flanges.
(2) Upper leading edge 1 3
Located between leading edge cowling 14 and fin rib N6, it is a riveted assembly consisting of :
- two ribs N4A and N4B

- one joint plate fitted with gang nuts attaching leading edge cowling 14
- one roll-formed and machined skin panel made of light alloy.
The assembly is screwed through spar web and riveted through front spar Lg flanges.
(3) Leading edge cowling 1 4
Located between front cowling 41 and upper leading edge 13, it consists of three ribs N3D to N3F
comprising pick-up angles on front spar Lg and a machined and roll-formed light alloy skin panel.
Cowling is positioned on three locating pins 17 screwed in front spar Lg.
It is screwed to gang nuts integral with spar webs and through joint plates of ribs N3C and N4A.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «Q^L-rS ' «H^^V^C- I
BREQUET AVIATION .^<g& J^"S»0> _ ^ . ^ . .. A mi i a i r»o
^""^S^ Restricted MANUAL 03
C - Fin top fairing

It consists of two laminated sections:
-one front section 20 and one rear section 21 on either side of fairing spar 5.
Each is screwed onto gang nuts integral with rib N6 and fairing spar.
D - Front fairing 41
Located between fixed leading edge 12 and cowling 14, it houses the detection antenna
a dummy antenna if the latter system is not fitted).
of the nose radar (or
It comprises:
-two flanges (RH and LH) onto which antenna guide is welded.
It is screwed and riveted on the joint plates of ribs N2C-N3C
E - Rear fairing 42
Located on trailing edge between ribs N4C and N6, it houses the detection antenna of
the tail radar (or a dummy antenna if the latter system is not fitted).
It comprises:
-two flanges (RH and LH) onto which antenna guide is welded,
-a door D5-71 screwed on LH flange.
It is screwed and riveted on fin structure.
F - Fittings
They comprise:
-attachment fitting 22 bolted to rear rib NO and rear spar Lg,
-rudder deflection template attachment fittings 9 and 10:
-fitting 9 is integral with bellcrank mount 8,
-fitting 10 is bolted to the rear spar.
These fittings are fitted with a bush 23, a pin 24, a washer 25 and a plug 26 (section B).
-fin-to-brake chute fairing locating pin 27, screwed on rear spar Lg,
-bearings PI - PH - Pill (cross section C),
-shackles fastened, at as single point, on bearings PI and Pill, and at two points, on
bearing Pil, through skin panels and rear spar Lg flanges forming fork-fittings.
Attachment of shackles is identical: pin 28, castellated nut and tabwasher. A shim 29 is
inserted, on assembling, on either side of attachment; pins are fitted from fin L/H side,
-hoist fittings:
-upper hoist fitting 30 between false spar Lg 3 and rear spar Lg AR, under rib N6,
-lower hoist fitting 31 , between front spar Lg AV and false spar Lg 1 , toward root.
Each comprises a bush 32 and a plug 33, and is attached between skin panels by
Huck rivets (section D).
2 - ATTACHMENTS
Fin is assembled to the fuselage at three points on frames 33-36-39b.

A - Attachment to frame 36 (detail G)
This is the essential assembly.
On fin side, crankpins 34 are assembled in frame 36 recess by two taper pins 35 and split
bushes 36, recessed washer 37, nuts and safety pins 38.
The pin/bush assembly is engaged from rear to front.
B - Attachment to frames 33 and 39b (detail H)
Fork-fitting 39 (on fin side) engages into ball-jointed yoke on fuselage side.
Assembly is made by pin, and safetied nut 40.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
i MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
FIGURE 2 -DERIVE -Liaisons

AD
09-83 Restricted 4-107 FIGURE2
4-107 FIGURE 2
4-107
BREGUET AVIATION ^^S.
tLJ>^T^l
^ _
MIRAGE
....
F
RUDDER
(Figure 3)
1- DESCRIPTION
Rudder is a light metal assembly comprising :

-a structure box extended forward by
- a leading edge
A Box comprises :
- 1 front spar
Lg of 2D section in two parts
- false spar Lg 1 also of 3 section
1
-14 ribs N1 to N14
- 2 machined skin panels
Front spar in two parts
iKJESSft! } **" * a *~* **» p"

Each component comprises already machined hinge fork-fittings of bearings PI and Pill.
The ribs, each in two sections, are joined by a false spar attachment part.
Chemically milled skin panels 4 and 5 are riveted together at trailing edge.
-bearing fitting Pil

It forms central bearing 6 and control linkage drive yoke 7. It joins front spar Lg upper member 2
and lower member 3 to which it is fastened by Huck rivets. Special bolt 8 and nut attach it to false spar
LgL
B Leading edge
It consists of three sections made-up of :

- three roll-formed closing sheets
- one lower sheet 9
-one middle sheet 10
- one upper sheet 1 1
in which 11 false ribs of folded sheet are riveted. Leading edge is riveted to the edges of the two
skin panels.
- three removable cowlings 12 screwed on gang nuts integral with R/H and L/H box skin panels.
2- ATTACHMENTS
Control linkage to fin attachment is made :

- on bearings PI - Pil - Pill shackles
- at the linkage control drive rod hinge point.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lL~&r\L
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^=3_^CQ>
MIRAGE F
A Attachment of bearing PII (section E)
The yoke of center bearing 6, equipped with force-fitted bush 13 and sulfinuzed sleeve 14, engages
into the shackle fork fitting.
Assembled by taper pin 15 and split bushing 16, washer, and nut safetied with locking pin.
B Attachment of bearings PI and PHI (section B)
On each bearing, the shackle ball-jointed yoke engages into the bushed fork fitting integral with
the rudder front spar.
Assembled by pin 17 and nut safetied with locking pin.
C Drive rod hinge (section D)
The ball-jointed yoke of the drive rod engages into bushed fork fitting 7 of the rudder drive fitting.
Assembled by shouldered pin 18 equipped with a lubricator.
Pin 18 is held by a plug 19 which is locked by special retainer 20 fastened to the yoke by screw 21
and safetied nut.
One of the bushes is fitted with a teflon washer 22.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJL-**~*!r
BREGUET AVIATION. -r^> ^-
MIRAGE F
COUPE B
CROSS SECTION B
FIGURE 3 - GOUVERNE DE DIRECTION-LIAISONS

RUDDER - A TTACHMENTS
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION Û-~ ^^>^> ,,..... no
^rv â ^ Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF STABILATORS

(Figure 4)
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CVC.
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench case, 2 to 20* m.daN and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb and 40 to
350 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory case, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to
350 ft.lb).

-Stabilator stowage trolley CME9.
-LH and RH stabilator positioning adaptor MS 1371.
-Elevator trolley.
D - Spares
-1 lockpin 23310 AA 050060 L
-1 lockwasher 23351 AC 050 L.
-1 stabilator inner bearing seal.
2 - MATERIALS
-AIR 4222 or AI R 421 0 grease.

-AIR 3565 neutral petrolatum.
-BRISAL petrolatum.
- Loctite 675.
Remove:
-doors 38.03 or 38.09 - E1 .35 LH or RH,
-closing curtain front track.
4 - REMOVAL
Separate stabilator control rod from control trunnion junction.

-Control trunnion junction: unlock and remove nut (wrench M 31010) then recessed
washer.
-Remove stabilator pivot end nut:
-unlock it (8 mm A/F wrench),
-on nut, loosen bonding braid clamp,
-unscrew and remove nut (wrench M 31004) then remove bonding braid clamp.
Withdraw spacer.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL>-jir5L
BREGUET AVI ATION^^F°^^C>
* 'K"^L
.........
I
m
- Clear closing curtain from rear track.

- Screw centering thimble (SMS 221 ) onto stabilator pivot to protect threads upon removal.
-Bring and position stowage trolley fitted with its adaptor, under stabilator. Place it in contact
with stabilator.
- Clear stabilator ; during this operation, also clear control rod from trunnion.
- Move the assembly along pivot axis, taking care to keep in line with pivot so as not to damage the
teflon part of stabilator internal ball-joint.
5- INSTALLING THE STABILATOR
A Preliminary steps
- The stabilator is on its trolley.

- On the fuselage :
- check for condition of threads at the end of stabilator pivot.
WARNING :
NEVER USE A CHASER TO TAKE UP THE THREADS. .
- screw centering thimble (SMS 221) on the stabilator pivot.

- On the stabilator :
- check for condition of threads on control trunnion
- screw centering thimble (SMS 220) on control trunnion
-At level of inner bearing, position tooling (M 31019) to ensure hinge ball-joint correct
positioning, taking care not to damage the seal.
In order to facilitate positioning, smear seal inner lip and tool bearing with a thin coat of petro¬
latum Al R 3565. However, previously check the seal for condition, replace it if required : seal flange
attaching screws shall be safetied with loctite.
- Place closing curtain on control trunnion.
B Inspection and maintenance
(1) Check:
- on closing assembly (tracks-door-closing curtain)
for condition of various components and Teflon strips
- on stabilator
- Teflon on control trunnion for condition
- Inner (teflon coated ball-joint) and outer bearings for condition
(2) Maintenance
(a) Dry clean :

- inner and outer bearings (outside and inside structure box)
-control trunnion
- stabilator pivot
- control rod bores .
AA
/L^-^nî
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT IVllIXAA'wL.
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^jg-Cs ,,,,.., 0
^£^^~<^/ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) Grease
-Using AIR 4222 or AIR 4210 grease
-control trunnion and control rod bores,
-outer bearing bore as well as matching part of pivot.
-To ease fitment (sliding), apply a thin coat of petrolatum AIR 3565 (excluding any other
material) (teflon coated bore) on inner bearing ball-joint bore and on matching part of pivot
and of seal.
C - Positioning the stabilator
-Offer up stabilitor on aircraft.

Carefully and simultaneously fit stabilator onto pivot and control rod onto its trunnion.
Smoothly guide it by adjusting the attitude so as not to cause shocks. As soon as inner bear¬
ing is engaged on its bearing (this position is reached when ball-joint holding tool nearly
abuts against fuselage).
-Place closing curtain in rear track slot.
-Remove inner bearing ball-joint positioning tool.
-Fully engage stabilator onto pivot. The seal should be positioned on its bearing.
B - Connecting the attachments
(1 ) Stabilator pivot
-Remove pivot centering thimble.
-Fit spacer (narrow base on bearing side) by engaging its notches correctly in pivot cor¬
responding slots.
-Screw stabilator attaching nut (wrench M31004) once fitted with bonding clamp. Prior
to this operation, clean and smear nut bearing with Brisai petrolatum.
-Tighten and untighten several times in order to position stabilator correctly. Finally
torque the nut from 10 to 15 m.daN (73 to 110 ft.lb).
-Install locking screw (8 mm A/F wrench) of nut fitted witlr its lockwasher. Fold down
the tab.
-Position bonding clamp, and tighten it (8 mm A/F wrench).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION A
C.39I
PIVOT
D'ARTICULATION
HINGE PIVOT
PRESENTATION DE L'EMPENNAGE AVEC

L'OUTILLAGE DE MAINTIEN DE LA ROTULE
POSITIONING OF TAIL UNIT USING THE
BALL JOINT HOLDING FIXTURE
FIGURE 4 - DEPOSE-POSE DE L'EMPENNAGE HORIZONTAL

REM O VA L -INSTA L LA TION OF STA BILA TOR
AB
12-74 4-304 4-3(
Restricted FIGURE 4
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-J>~ir9l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^L^gfQ* .........
(2) Control rod
(a)Control trunnion attachment

- Remove trunnion centering thimble, then install recessed chamber and nut (wrench M 31010).
Torque tighten from 12 to 15 mdaN (88 to 1 10 ft.lb). Install lockpin.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Check safeties.
- Install front track, carefully engaging closing curtain in its slot.
- Grease stabilator outer bearing (see 04-2).
- Check for deflection and operation (see 04-2).
In case of stabilator replacement, take measurements (see 03-0).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f v\ j/ jk IYWIX/A'wC i
BREGUET AVIATION ^v_~ ^^=^^ . .«ami.ai n^
^ ^-^> Restricted MANUAL 03
REMOVAL OF VERTICAL STABILIZER

(Figure 5)
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CSC

B - Standard tools
-Arsaero coupling kit

-Extra-thin wrenches
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 and 40 to 350 ft.lb).
350 ft.lb).
-32-mm socket (1/2" sq.drive).
-Fin hoisting assy EHD 12.

- Hoisting device of 200 daN (449.6 Ib.f) capacity.
- Main pin extractor 50 AM 026.
-Aircraft jacked up in "straight and level flight" configuration (see 02-2-2).

-Engine removed (see 06-4-3).
- Remove :
-fillets 32.01.1 -32.11.1 -32.01 -32.11 -36.01.1 -36.11.1

-cowling D0.00
-doors D1.48 - 20.00 - 31.00i - 35.00i - 36.00i (after removing the heat shield
which covers it)
-the blanking plugs of the fin hoist fittings.
B - Using a crane, position the fin hoisting assy.
(1 ) The fin can be hoisted with or without the rudder.
(2) The hoisting device used shall allow slow and smooth horizontal and vertical displace¬
ments. If the device cannot provide sufficiently precise vertical traction on the fin during re¬
moval of the connecting pins, interpose a hand tackle.
(3) Pin the front and rear fasteners to the fin hoist fittings.
(4) Insert rag pads between hoist cables and fin to prevent any scratches, and set the front
and rear cables under equal and very light tension.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //IWMl /V\H\/-\V_7t P
BREGUET AVIATION ^g^ ^&0> ........ ..
^-^ ^^> Restricted MANUAL 03
3 - UNCOUPLING OF CONNECTIONS
A - Functional connections
-From fin front face disconnect:
-electrical connectors 180A, 181 A, 182A, 184A,
-coaxial connectors 19R, 65R, 66R.
-On fuselage, between frames 32 and 33, disconnect:
-electrical connector 183A,
-coaxial connector 9R.
- On fuselage, between frames 36 and 39, disconnect:
-electrical connectors 337A, 338A, 339A, 340A, 185A, 186A
-Through door 31 -OOi, disconnect the four hydraulic pipes at location of "L" unions
(two 12 mm A/F wrenches).
-Through door 20.00, unsafety the turnbuckles on both rudder control cables and loosen
them. Rig up rudder cable holding devices M31017 in engine compatment, at location of
frame 35 (7 and 10 mm open-end wrenches).
-Through door D1 .48:
-unsafety and remove the pins attaching the cables to the rudder control bellcrank;
-extract these cables from the fin to prevent them from interfering on fin hoisting.
B - Mechanical connections
-Make sure that the hoisting assembly is properly positioned and that the front and rear
hoisting cables are slightly tensioned.
-Remove the three mechanical connections in the following order:
(1 ) Main fastener (frame 36)
Inside engine compartment
-For each attaching pin:
- remove the safety pin,
-loosen the pin attaching nut (32 mm socket + ratchet + extension instead of tor¬
que wrench),
-do not remove the taper pin and its sleeve if the front and rear fasteners are still in
place.
(2) Front fastener (frame 33)
-Unsafety and remove the attaching nut (17 mm ring wrench, 19 mm socket + ratchet);
-Fit the centering thimble on the pin threaded section so that it is protected during pin
removal.
-Remove the attaching pin (if required, drive it out with a drift).
-Remove the centering thimble.
(3) Rear fastener (frame 39)
-Unsafety and remove the attaching nut (17 mm ring wrench, 19 mm socket + ratchet).
-Fit the centering thimble on the pin threaded section so that it is protected during pin
removal.
- Remove the attaching pin and the centering thimble.
(4) Removing both taper pins from F.36 main fastener

-Remove the castellated nut with its washer.
-Using extractor M31 .126-10 (small cup-type), separate the taper pin and its sleeve.
-As soon as the pin is separated, remove the extractor.
-Install extractor M31005 (large cup-type) on the pin, and fit the knurled screw to the
threaded section of the taper pin.
-Fully extract the pin with its sleeve (10 and 27 mm A/F wrenches).
-Take care not to damage the components.
-Mark out the various components of the pin-sleeve-washer-nut assembly so that they
are returned to their original position upon installation.
NOTE: Normally, the extraction does not require an excessive force. Adjust the lift on the fin
so as to reduce loading to a minimum.
(5) Should the taper pin be difficult to extract, use tool 50 AM 026 so as to simultaneously
apply a thrust and tractive force to the pin (see figure). For optimum effect, it is essential that
items 1 and 2 be simultaneously rotated by two operators.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti .AW--n /V\IKMv7C I
BREGUET AVIATION ^55- __
4- REMOVAL OF FIN
A Handling
- Hoist fin by pushing on end sections, taking care that the assembly moves in a parallel direction
to main fitting plane.
CAUTION :
WHEN FIN IS DISENGAGED BY 2 TO 3 cm (0.786 TO 1.179 in), CHECK THAT NO
CONNECTION IS LEFT AND THAT NOTHING IMPAIRS REMOVAL.
- Install fin on stowage cradle.

B Protection of various components
- Blank off hydraulic pipes

- Coil cables and protect connectors
- Protect and preserve the various mechanical connections.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION.--^» MIRAGE F
Mastinox.,
HISSAGE EMPENNAGE VERTICAL VUE SUIVANT C

HOISTING OF VERTICAL STABILIZER VIEW IN DIRECTION Papier adhésif
OF ARROW C Adhesive tape
Confection des
bouchons de mastinox
Execution of Mastinox
PREPARATION DES AXES CONIQUES Bouchon de mastinox
stoppers
PREPARATION OF TAPER PINS Mastinox stopper
COUPE A
SECT/ON A
Dilution de mastinox
Mastinox dilution
=3 z: rs o
o£°a>
COUPE B
SECTION B DECOLLAGE DE L'AXE
ç LIAISONS FONCTIONNELLES
CONIQUE
FUNCTIONAL CONNECTIONS LOOSENING OF
TAPER PIN
C.33 PREPARATION
DEPOSE DE L'AXE ET DES FERRURES D'ATTACHE
DE LA FOURRURE PREPARATION
C.32 REMOVAL OF PIN OF A TTACHMENT FITTINGS
AND SLEEVE
C.36a C.36b
C.36
Cote D (Avant enfoncement)

Jeu final tel que : Dimension D (Before insertion)
Final clearance such that : Cote C (Après enfoncement)
C-A* > 1,5 mm (0.057 in) Dimension C (After insertion)
DEBLOCAGE DE L'AXE CONIQUE A

* A = Cote d'enfoncement hors ferrure L'AIDE DE L'OUTILLAGE 50 AM 026
*A -Protrusion beyond fitting UNJAMMING OF TAPER PIN
USING TOOL 50 AM 026
SERRAGE DE L'AXE CONIQUE
TIGHTENING OF TAPER PIN .
Valeur d 'enfoncement = D C
Insertion value = DC
FIGURE 5 - DEPOSE-POSE EMPENNAGE VERTICAL
REMO VA L -INSTA L LA TION OF VER TICA L STAB IL IZER
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* ^ -" -** /Y\II\/AV_7L. F
BREGUET AVIATION ZZs£±-~
^ï-l. j^^,
^-^ ....
Restricted ,,..,,.,
MANUAL .03
INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL STABILIZER

(Figure 5)
A - Special tools
-Tool kit 5001 CSC.
B - Standard tools
-Tool kit for Arsaero couplings.
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350
ft.lb).
-32-mm socket (1/2" square drive)
-Fin hoisting assy EH D 12.
-Hoisting device of 200 daN (449.6 Ib.wgt) capacity.
D - Spares
-2 pins 23310 AA 020025 L
-2 pins 23310 AA 010012 L
2 - MATERIALS
-Grease Air 4222 or Air 4210.
-Grease Air 4205.
-Codex pharmaceutical-grade petrolatum.
-Mastinox C 627 B.
-Mastinox 6856H.
-Thinner 3924.
-Aliphatic naphtha, grade F.
NOTE: Installation of the main pins requires preliminary steps necessitating a product applica¬
tion and curing time of about 5 hours before installation. For the fin installation proce¬
dure, take these preliminary steps into account so that the overall installation time is
not affected.
-Aircraft jacked up in approximately straight and level flight configuration - Engine re¬
moved.
-Access doors removed: 20.00, 31 .00 i, 35.00 i, 36.00 i, D1 .48,
- Fillets removed: 32.01 .1 , 32.1 1 .1 , 32.01 , 32.1 1 , 36.01 .2, 36.1 1 .1 .
-Cowling D0.00 removed.
B - Preparation of fuselage
-Check position of electrical cables.
-Depreserve frame 36 main fastener.
-Clean the bores and bearing surfaces of frame 36 (aliphatic naphtha, grade F) and check
them for surface condition.
- Depreserve the secondary fasteners.
-Clean (aliphatic naphtha, grade F) and check the fittings on secondary fasteners.
-Grease the secondary fasteners (Air 4210 ou 4222),
- Prepare the following dilution:
-1 volume of Mastinox 6856H,
-3 volumes of thinner 3924.
-Using a brush, apply this dilution to internal faces of frame 36.
C - Preparation of fin
-Check position of electrical cables and connectors.
-Depreserve the main and secondary fittings.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-P-TTU
BREGUET AVIATION^c^F3^^-.^
MIRAGE
,..,..... _
F
- Cleanthe bores and bearing surfaces on main fitting (aliphatic naphtha, grade F) then wipe them
with a cleanlint-free cloth.
- Check fitting bores and bearing surfaces for condition.
-Clean the secondary attachment fittings (aliphatic naphtha, grade F) then wipe them with a
clean lint-free cloth.
- Check them for condition, then apply grease (Air 4210 or 4222).
- Clean the rear centering pin integral with the fin and wipe it with a clean lint-free cloth.
- Apply a coat of Mastinox 6856H on it.
- Apply a coat of Mastinox dilution on the main fitting surfaces.
Preparation of pins
- For each taper pin :

- remove (if required) the old plug of Mastinox which blanked the slot in the sleeve,
- carefully clean the various components with aliphatic naphtha, grade F,
- wipe them with a clean lint-free cloth,
CAUTION :
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE TITANIUM PIN BE CLEANED WITH CHLO¬
RINATED SOLVENTS.
- carefully check each component ; particularly check for condition of surfaces and of teflon
micro-coating on sleeve inner surface and pin outer surface.
- in case of replacement, determine the insertion dimension (see 03-3-5),
- apply a light film of :
- petrolatum on the taper pin
- grease on the contact surfaces of washer and nut,
NOTE : It is recommended to use an unpainted tube of grease or petrolatum.
- assemble each taper pin (sleeve, pin and washer) making sure the components are positioned
according to their marking ;
- protect the taper pin :
- slightly tighten the nut to open the slot in the sleeve,
- blank off its ends with adhesive paper,
- apply Mastinox C 627B to the ends of the slot as follows :
- flange side along 10 mm (0.39 in)
- opposite side along 5 mm (0.196 in).
After four or five hours of curing, the Mastinox C 627B will form two plugs with
a certain elasticity ;
- remove the taper pin nut with washer ;
- slide the sleeve on the taper pin to suppress the gap of the slot and permit the sleeve
to enter the bores easily.
(take care not to destroy the plugs of Mastinox).
4- REPLACEMENT OF FIN
Fit the new fin with the following components, recovered from the removed fin :
- rudder electrically-operated selector valve (door D2.43)
- rudder releasable bellcrank (see 04-3-3) (door D2.43)
- rudder servo-control (see 04-3^3)
- flux valves (see manual 1 2-3-1 )
- AF antenna (see manual 14-6-1 ).
NOTE : Replacement fins are fitted with dummy AF antennas which should be left in place when
the aircraft does not incorporate modification No. 412.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj^p-^TU **» I KM W C I
BREGUET AVIATION ^ÊL-^S^> _. . . ......... »,
5 - INSTALLATION OF FIN
Using the same hoisting devices as those used for removal, and using a similar procedure :
- offer the fin up above the fuselage,
- remove blanks from hydraulic pipes and check pipes for cleanness, on fuselage and fin,
- carefully bring the fin fittings in front of the fuselage ones,
- on fuselage, bring the front and rear ball joints in correct position so as not to catch on assembly,
- lower the fin (make sure nothing catches) in order to engage the fin main fitting by a few
centimeters into the fuselage fitting,
- check their relative position is correct and then slowly introduce the fin main spar until bores
are aligned,
- make sure that the centering pin integral with the fin is correctly positioned in its fitting,
- make sure that the ball joints are properly centered in relation to the fin secondary fittings.
6 - COUPLING OF. CONNECTIONS

A Positioning of pins
-Offering the dummy pin (M31014) through the engine compartment from front to rear, pin
one of the main fastener bores.
- Align the second bore and, using a brush, coat it with the Mastinox dilution (fin frame 36).
- Using a spatula, fill the sleeve slots with non-diluted Mastinox 6856H.
- Position the pin-sleeve assembly corresponding to the second bore, with threaded end of the pin
towards the front, with flange bearing on the fitting and with sleeve slot at right angle to the fin plane,
outwards.
- Remove the dummy pin from the first bore. Using a brush, coat this bore with the Mastinox
dilution (fin frame 36).
- Position the other marked pin-sleeve assembly, proceeding as with the first pin.
- Clean away the excess Mastinox.
- Position and hand-tighten the nut on each taper pin until the washer abuts on the fitting.
CAUTION :
PUSH THE SLEEVE FULLY HOME SO THAT THE FLANGE CORRECTLY BEARS ON THE
FRAME ; IT SHOULD BE IMPOSSIBLE TO INSERT A 4/100 SHIM BETWEEN THE SLEEVE
FLANGE AND FRAME 36.
-Slightly grease the rear secondary fastener pin and fit it with a centering thimble (SMS 218)
(from front to rear), then install it.
- Using a drift, position the pin.
- Remove the centering thimble and put the washer and nut in place.
- Tighten the nut to a torque of 3 to 4 m.daN (22 to 29 ft.lb) (17-mm ring wrench, 19-mm socket).
- Pin.
- Install the front secondary fastener pin, proceeding as for the rear one.
NOTE : For aircraft not having undergone modifications (pins out of alignment, secondary fasteners -
seeaircraft logbook) proceed as follows :
AA
1087 Restricted 4-309M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 .^-"rVl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^5_ . . ....,.,..,>
Install the main fastener pins as described above :

-
- using the hoisting assy pinned on the fin rear hoisting fitting only, align the ball joint
and front clevis bores,
- using a centering thimble (SMS 218), position the front pin (from front to rear), tighten
and safety the nut.
B Tightening of main fastener pins

(see the method for determining insertion of fin-to-fuselage main attachment pins, i.e. insertion
dimension C (03-3-5)).
- Set the torque wrench to a torque of 28 m.daN (206 ft.lb) maximum (tightening value not to
be exceeded).
Tighten the nut of one of the pins until protruding dimension C + 1 mm (0.039 in) is obtained.
-
By successive approaches, tighten the nut on the other pin until protruding dimension C is
-
obtained.
Continue tightening so that the safety hole is aligned with the following notch in the nut, taking
care to remain within tolerance limits of dimension C "_ Q . mm (_ fl 0157 in).
- Position the safety pin.
- Complete tightening of the first pin in the same way as for the other pin, taking care to remain
within tolerance limits of dimension C _ n . mm (_ 0 nie7 in).
Position the safety pin.
-
- Record the insertion dimensions actually obtained and the tightening torques for each pin in
the aircraft individual logbook.
If the required insertion dimension cannot be obtained within the given torque :
- remove the nut and washer and clean them,
- grease again the contact surfaces, then tighten again to the maximum admissible torque until
obtaining the required insertion dimension,
- if the resulting insertion is not satisfactory, remove the pin-sleeve assembly and check it.
When replacing a component in the connection, repeat the operations for predetermining the
insertion dimension.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ïL^^trSL
BREGUET AVIATION .<^£p='^«<«b
MIRAGE F
^S^^*5^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
- Remove the hoisting assy.

- Put the blanking plugs back on the hoisting fittings.
Re-coupling of functional connections.
- Through door D 1.48 :

- push the fin cables back in,
- install and safety the cable attaching pins on the rudder bellcrank.
- Through door 20.00 :

- remove the devices retaining the rudder cables in engine compartment, at location of frame
35 (7- and 10-mm open-end wrenches) ;
- using the tumbuckles, stretch the two rudder cables and lock them (see 04-3-5).
-Through door 31. OOi :

- connect the four hydraulic pipes (two 12-mm A/F wrenches) at location of L-unions
- On fin front face :

- connect coaxial connectors 19R, 65R, 66R,
- connect electrical connectors 180A, 181 A, 182A, 184A,337A, 338A, 339A, 340A
- check them for proper attachment.
- On fuselage, connect :
- electrical connectors 183A, 185A and 186A,
- coaxial connector 9 R.
FINAL STEPS
NOTE : Before installing cowling D0.00, make sure that the two sockets are present on front rib 0.
Should these sockets be lost, bond new ones on with Araldite AV 138 (flange upwards).
-Install the removed doors and fillets (Sealing : see 03-0-1 ).

-Check the components for correct assembly and make sure all is properly safetied.
- Check the rudder control (see 04-3-5).
- Bleed the hydraulic systems free of air (see 07-1-5) and check the connections for sealing.
- Perform a functional check of the systems which were involved in the course of the operations
(uncoupling of wiring-to-feeder connections...).
- When replacing the fin, perform compensation of magnetic detectors (see 1 2-0-1 ).
- Take measurements on fin after installation (see 03-0-5).
AD
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF RUDDER

(Figure 3)
A - Special tools
-flight controls tool kit 5001 CVB
-flight controls tool kit 5001 CVC
B - Standard tools
-set of extra-thin wrenches
-torque wrench case, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
-torque wrench case, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.iu;
lb)
-torque wrench accessory case, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20l ft.lb)
-torque wrench accessory case, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to
350 ft.lb).

-rudder deflection checking template
-rudder stowage cradle BRG2.
D - Spares
-1 lockwasher "23351 AC 060 L
-8 nut locks for shackle attaching pins
-2 lockpins 2331 0 AA 020025 L.
2 - MATERIALS
| Grease AIR 4210

I Mastinox 6856H.
-Remove fairing D.3.56 of rudder control rod.
4 - REMOVAL
A Rudder is removed at attaching pins of shackles on fin.
B - Disconnect rudder control rod:

-remove special lock (10/flats),
-remove pin plug (35/flats),
I -remove pin,
-disconnect bonding braid.
C - Remove attaching pins from fin rear spar shackles (wrench M31047)
NOTE: Mark location of each attaching pin (different lengths).
D - Remove rudder with its shackles.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -A>-"--tt /Vil KAvL F
BREGUET AVIATION^jî. __^
5- REPLACEMENT OF RUDDER
A - The shackles are part of the fin : when replacing a rudder, the shackles from the removed rudder
areto be reinstalled on the spare rudder.
B Removal of shackles
(1 ) Upper and lower shackles

Remove :
- fairings giving access to hinge ;
- attachment pin (19 mm ring wrench) ; the pin is part of the rudder ;
-shackle.
(2) Center shackle
Remove :
- fairings giving access to hinge ; -
- nut and washer (19 mm ring wrench) ;

- taper pin 15 (extractor M3T016) and sleeve 16 (extractors M31070and M31072) ;
-shackle and sulfinuzed bush 14 of drive fitting ; pin 15, sleeve 16 and bush 14 are part of the
shackle.
C Installation of shackles
(1 ) Inspection and maintenance of parts prior to assembly
- Carefully wipe the various assembly parts.
- Check surface condition of parts.
DO NOT LUBRICATE (OIL OR GREASE) THE TEFLON-COATED BALL JOINTS OF THE

UPPER AND LOWER SHACKLES.
(2) Installation of upper and lower shackles

- Position the shackle in its fitting.
-Insert the pin with its head up.
CAUTION :
CT5ÏÏFÎECTLY POSITION THE PIN HEAD (FLAT OF HEXAGONAL HEAD BEARING ON
ROTATION STOPPING BOSS).
- Install the washer, screw and tighten the nut (19 mm ring wrench). Torque to 3.5 m.daN
(25.81 ft.lb). Fit the safety pin.
(3) Installation of center shackle (see 03-1)
(4) Installation of hinge access fairings
6- INSTALLATION OF RUDDER
- Attach the rudder to the fin.
I - Interpose Mastinox 6856H on the side faces of the shackles and on their attachment pins.
CAUTION :
Rn5"ARE OF DIFFERENT LENGTHS. REINSTALL THEM IN THEIR ORIGINAL LOCATION
(SEE PARAGRAPH C).
- Insert the shackle attachment pins taking care to correctly position a special retainer under head
and nut.
NOTE : The pin insertion direction is of no importance ; however, nut tightening will be facilitated
if the center bearing pin head is on the RH side.
- Tighten the nuts of the attachment pins while holding the pin head (wrenches M31047) (tighten¬
ing torque : 3.5 m.daN - 25.81 ft.lb).
- Safety the pin heads and nuts.
AB
07-r84 Restricted 4-312
BREGUET
fLJ>^Vi
AVIATIONx^^^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^-****^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
7- FINAL STEPS
- Manually check free deflection of the rudder between its structural stops.
- Connect the rudder control rod :
- slightly grease the hinge components,
- fit the pin with its head upward and correctly directed (hexagonal section flats mating with
rotation-stopping boss),
tighten the pin plug (35 mm AF) to a torque of 3 to 6 m.daN (22.125 to 44.250 ft.lb) ;
- install the special retainer and safety the attaching nut (10 mm A/F)
- Connect the bonding braid.
- Grease the rudder hinge points fitted with a lubricator (see 04-3).
- Install fairing D 3.56 of the rudder control rod.
- Check for correct rudder deflection and operation (see 04-3).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^"~irU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^F0^^^ .........
,
CHECK OF HINGES ON REMOVED RUDDER

(figure 3)
1 - SCOPE
To check the conditions of the various hinge components.
-India stone
- Smooth file
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C60LV 1 .
- Silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C1 50LVJ
- Scraper Sicametal (Widia) P/N 564 with carbide inserts TH10 Widia
- Rotary carbide cutters HF103Z3 Lu kas
3- MATERIALS
- Approved chlorinated solvent

-White spirit
- GreaseAir 4222 or Air 4210
Disassembly of hinges
Separate the various components of the hinge joints. Bushes and spherical bearings tight-fitted
onto fittings or shackles shall not be removed.
Under normal conditions, the bearing inner rings of the outboard hinge brackets shall not be
removed. Should removal be necessary for inspection purposes (binding point, apparent scratches), duly
note the assembly direction.
Cleaning
Thoroughly clean all the hinge components, then dry them. For cleaning of titanium parts, comply
with the special instructions.
CAUTION :
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD TITANIUM PARTS BE CLEANED WITH
CHLORINATED SOLVENTS (PER- AND TRICHLOROETHANE...). USE WHITE SPIRIT.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iUs^TlX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^jaF3^-^6^
5- PROCEDURE
(1 ) Outboard hinge brackets
(a) Bushes of fittings (on rudder) - spherical bearing (on shackle) pin
Check for :
-tight insertion and correct contact of flange on fitting ;
-surface condition of side faces : if necessary, smooth off any impact marks or scratches by
lightly polishing with India stone ;
- corrosion : remove if any ;
sharp edges ;
-
surface condition of bores and bearing inner ring (scratches, impact marks . . .), no sharp edges :
-
if necessary, blend by lightly polishing with a stone, then with crocus cloth ;
- rotation and nutation of the spherical bearing : no binding point ; the rotation torque shall not
be less than 0.100 m.daN (0.73 ft.lb) ;
- condition of pin threads (traces of corrosion : remove if any) ;
- no play between pin and bushes.
(2) Center hinge bracket (section E)
(a) On rudder fitting
Carry out the check defined in paragraph CO ){a).

for replacement of bush 13 : deep scratches on bush rotating surface entail replacement
- Criteria
of the rudder. Only a few slight and superficial scratches are permissible.
(b) Shackle (titanium)
Check for :
- surface condition of bores (scratches, impact marks . . .), no sharp edges.
Titanium is very sensitive to notch effect. It is therefore essential to eliminate this prejudicial
effect. Small impact marks or scratches shall be reduced by carefully polishing the surface with a
smooth file or silicon carbide stone, gradé Crystolon 39C60LV (used dry) ; complete this operation by
finishing with silicon carbide stone, grade Crystolon 39C150LV (used dry). A rotary carbide cutter and
carbide scraper can also be used instead of the above-mentioned tools.
CAUTION :
IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO TOUCH UP TITANIUM PARTS BY USING ALUMINA-
BASED «INDIA» STONE, OR BY SANDING OR GRINDING.
Criteria for shackle replacement
The shackle is to be replaced :

- when the scratch depth exceeds 0.10 mm (0.0039 in),
-when the loss of bearing surface due to fretting corrosion and scratches exceeds 20 % of the
theoretical bearing surface (total developed surface) ; this corresponds to an 80 % well distributed
bearing surface.
(c) Taper pin 15, sleeve 16 and sulfinuzed bush 14
Check for :
- surface condition of bores (scratches, impact marks . . .), no sharp edges, especially on sleeve
slot lips ; if necessary, blend by lightly polishing with India stone, then with crocus cloth ;
- corrosion : remove if any ;
? condition of threads on pin and nut.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^ST
jL^-^-Q. MIRAGE F
(3) Rudder drive fitting (section D)
Carry out the check defined in paragraph C (1) (a). In addition, check the condition of teflon
washer 22 cemented onto one of the bushes.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Lubricate the components except those with teflon-coated parts.

- Reinstall the rudder (see 03-4).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-*>~JrSl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONô^L^<0> MAMIIAI rV3
CHECK OF HINGES ON REMOVED STABILATORS AND

MEASUREMENT OF TEFLON-LINED BALL-JOINT HOUSING
A Special tools
- Tool kit 5001 CVC
B - Standard tools
- Two-point hole gauge. Subito or Diatest type

- Emery cloth, 450 to 600 grit
2 - MATERIALS
-Trichloroethane or Diestone S
-Ardrox 396.1
-Ardrox 31.40
3 - PROCEDURE
A Teflon-lined ball joint
Removal of ball joint (see 03-4)
Examine the ball joint to detect any possible separation of the Airflon coating and any possible
oxidation on the periphery of the ball-joint outer ring. In case of separation of the Airflon coating,
replace the ball joint (see 034).
In case of oxidation on the periphery of the ball-joint outer ring, remove it using 600-grit emery
cloth while perfectly protecting the ball joint so as to prevent ingress of dust in the Airflon.
Examine the ball-joint housing to detect any possible oxidation and scratches.
In case of oxidation, remove it using 450- to 600-grit emery Cloth.
In case of scratches, smooth out the edges with emery cloth without attempting to remove the
scratch recesses.
Perfectly clean with trichloroethane or Diestone S.
Measure the ball-joint housing : the diameter not to be exceeded is 130.06 mm (5.142 in). Beyond
this value, the stabilators will be sent for repair.
NOTE : The possible rotation of the ball-joint outer ring in its housing does not require any special
action.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=à>-!irU
BREGUET AVIATION ôF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
s-*^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
B Stabilator bearing
- Check the bearing (proper condition, no oxidation, proper lubrication).

- Check for correct swiveling.
- Check the grease nipple for proper condition.
C Fuselage hinge pivot
- Touch up the paintwork on external areas where paint is scratched.

- Using a borescope, examine the pivot internal section, paying special attention to the thickness
reduction step area.
- If the walls are evenly covered with a brown oily-looking coating, no action needs to be taken.
- If the walls are unevenly covered, spray Ardrox 31-40 as described below.
- If no oxidation is found and if the walls are dry, apply the anticorrosion treatment described
below.
- If oxidation is found on an untreated area, apply the anticorrosion treatment :
- fit a cleaning gun with a long adapter fitted with a very large spray cone nozzle,
- spray corrosion passivation product Ardrox type 396-1 ,
- they spray on protection product Ardrox type 31-40.
When applying the products, fully insert the spraying adapter inside the pivot, then pull it out
while spraying.
Only one pass is required for each product.
- Thoroughly clean the bush under the hinge pivot ball joint, then check it for condition.
If the ball joint has turned, there will be noticeable circumferential scratches. The scratch depth
must not exceed 0.07 mm (0.0028 in).
Smooth out the scratch sharp edges without attempting to completely remove the scratches.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ôT
'L^^TXL
^
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF TRAILING EDGE STRUCTURAL BOX OF EACH STABILATOR
- Special tools
- Generator Fokker Bondtester, model 70
- Generator Sonic MK1 or Krautkramer USL32 or 42
- Feelers :
Fokker Bondtester
NOTE : As a general rule, feeler 3814 is used for metal/metal checking.
Sonic MK1 "1 Panametrixf : 1/0.5 MHz,

Krautkramer USL32 or 42 \ dia 14 mm.
- Standards :
Set No. 2 of kit 95 MS 061 including the sets of standards for ultrasonic checking.
- Set No. 2 includes : BZ9/185A

BZ9/185B
BZ9/185U
2- MATERIALS
- Coupling fluid : neutral petrolatum Air 3565

- White spirit S752 (DCE A 202B)
- Trichloroethane (approved chlorinated solvent) XS77 (DCEA 608)
- Clean, dry, lintless rags.
WARNING :
COMPLY WITH THE SAFETY MEASURES REQUIRED WHEN WORKING ON FLIGHT
CONTROLS (SEE 01-0).
- Carefully clean the upper and lower surface skin panels of the stabilator trailing edge.
IMPORTANT NOTE : Qualification of the personnel in charge of the works :
FOR THE NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING/PREPARATION PROCEDURE, THE PERSONNEL

IN CHARGE OF THE WORKS MUST HAVE A QUALIFICATION AT LEAST EQUAL TO LEVEL II
OF THE COFREND («AEROSPATIALE» COMMITTEE) OR ASNT (AMERICAN) CERTIFICATION.

BREGUET AVIATION
4- PROCEDURE
A Thorough inspection of lower and upper surface skin panels on trailing edge.
Check for :
- general condition of paint (no cracking, scaling, swelling, etc.),

- general condition of the riveting (missing rivets, loose rivets, etc.) (see 03-0),
- visible unsticking,
- any other visible defect (corrosion, impact marks, dents, etc.).
B Ultrasonic checking of trailing edge
IMPORTANT NOTE : The procedures for checking upper surface and lower surface skin panels
are strictly identical ; for that reason, the procedure described applies to
both.
- Using soft pencil for example, mark the following on the upper and lower surface skin panels
a
of the trailing edge : limits of the various metal/metal areas (edgings...) to be checked, location of all
rivets, as well as the three honeycomb internal cutouts (see figures 1 and 2).
(1 ) Checking of metal/metal bonding by means of Bondtester, model 70
(a) Carefully spread coupling fluid over the metal/metal areas (edgings) to be checked, all round
the trailing edge structural box.
NOTE : The limits of these areas have been marked as requested above.
(b) Start up the instrument. Adjust as required to obtain a clear image precisely centered within
the scope.
(c) Select a feeler (usually 3814), connect it to the instrument then refine the setting.
(d) Calibrate the instrument.
Take standard BZ 9/1 85U.

-
- Select onthis standard the sheet thickness corresponding to the area to be checked (0.8 or
1.3 mm). Apply on the sheet a thin coat of coupling fluid (petrolatum Air 3565). Bring the feeler into
contact with the sheet.
- Adjust the instrument as instructed in the manufacturer's technical handbook, so that :
- on scale «A», the signal (peak) coincides with the screen 0 graduation,
- on scale «B», the pointer coincides with the 1 00 graduation.
M *° ' ¤0 an
g.A..»ti.l».li./,..rf,^«'
lO ,.VS Zf-. 1QO
tUfln
Li iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii mini iiii
16 42 2 4
I"
6 J
-
Scale "A" Scale "B'
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
(e) Refine calibration on a trailing edge area to be checked (select an area where bonding is perfect) :
the indications read on scales «A» and «B» must be close to those illustrated below.
W llll lllllllll llll
Scale "A" Scale "B'
-Case where the resonant frequency decreases.

-Case where the resonant frequency increases.
NOTE : There may be slight differences between the setting values of the instrument (due to the
coat of paint, for instance). This may be remedied by refining the settings as instructed
in the manufacturer's handbook.
(f) Check the previously marked metal/metal areas, all round the trailing edge structural box (see
figures 1 and 2). This check is to be done section by section, between each rivet (whose location has
been previously marked too). If possible, between two readings, the feeler is to be displaced by a
distance lower than its diameter.
NOTE : The metal/metal bonding check cannot be performed on a band equal to half the feeler
diameter all along the structural box edging.
- On the screens (scales «A» and «B»), any bonding defect shows up as follows :
- on scale «A», the signal (peak) is within the 6 to + 6 range,

- on scale «B», the pointer is between graduations 80 and 100.
Scale "B" '
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
NOTE : - Slight variations between the scope and the pointer are not necessarily the sign of a defect.
If in doubt, repeat the check several times at the questionable area.
- When a defect is found or seems to be found, locate it precisely by marking its limits on the
trailing edge, then repeat the check several times so as to confirm the presence of the
defect (unsticking).
(g) Once the check is completed, wipe the surface dry of coupling fluid using a dry, clean and lintless
rag. If required, do not suppress the defect marking(s) .
(2) Checking of metal/honeycomb bonding with Sonic MK1 or Krautkramer USL32 or 42.
(a) Mark on the skin the whole metal/honeycomb area so as to perform a thorough check (parallel
lines separated by a distance slightly lower than the feeler diameter).
(b) Carefully coat the skin with coupling fluid.
(c) Start up the instrument.
(d) Make the following preselections on the instrument :
- operating frequency : MHz (suitable for skin thicknesses lower than 3 mm),
1
- sweep rate (distance calibration scale as a function of the skin and honeycomb thickness) :
potentiometer between 1 0 and 20 mm,
- amplification set to 90% power,
- threshold or reject set to 0,
- as far as Sonic MK1 is involved, «damping» set to 0.
(e) Calibrate the instrument
Take the standard corresponding to the area to be checked.

-
Spread a thin coat of coupling fluid (petrolatum Air 3565) on the standard, then carry out the
-
operations described below.
Apply the feeler onto the defective area of the standard.

-
Using «DELAY» or «RETARD» button of the feeler, sweep all the corresponding range
-
of the instrument. The scope display runs. Two separate zones of multiple echoes appear.
(A) High amplitude multiple echo zone.

(B) Low amplitude multiple echo zone.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
- Have the scope display shift to the left, so that zone A disappears completely (on the
screen, only the beginning of zone B is visible).
llwVAiyUAMk^MUUuAiAÉAill
IIMIMnUMnM/MUVmlmVIJUl
- Adjust the threshold value («REJECT» button) so that all echoes disappear (do not exceed
the required threshold).
- Apply the feeler onto the standard area where bonding is correct. A great number of echoes
appear on the screen.
- Adjust the amplitude so that the height of the echoes is at least equal to that of the screen.
- Adjust the display by compressing the echoes so that the screen shows a maximum number
of echoes. There must be no blank.
- Apply the feeler again onto the defective area of the standard.
- Adjust the threshold value («REJECT» button) so as to eliminate any echo possibly gene¬
rated subsequent to selection of an excessive amplification (echo amplitude setting) during the previous
operation.
- Place the feeler «in the air».
There must be absolutely no echo on the screen. The instrument setting must not be modified.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^>^rvl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION .^'^Ô .»«>..«.««
NOTE : If some echoes appear on the screen, sweep them by actuating «DELAY» or «RETARD»
button so that the echo display shifts to the left.
(f) Check all the skin metal/honeycomb surface by displacing the feeler carefully as per the marks
(parallel lines) made previously.
The appearance of a flat oscillogram may be due, either to a thorough unsticking, or to a thick
but non-reducible film of glue. This may be differentiated by using :
-a standard with a double film of glue,

-a higher ultrasonic frequency (5 MHz).
NOTE : - Since the thickness of the upper and lower surface skin sheet goes increasing from trailing
edge to rear spar (see figure 1 for detail of upper and lower surface skin thicknesses), it mly
be necessary to readjust the echo amplitude.
- During the check, use the metal/metal area markings (edgings) as limits.
- When a defect is found or seems to be found, locate it precisely by marking its limits on the
skin, then repeat the check several times so as to confirm the defect.
- The check may turn to be very delicate at the trailing edge, within the area where honey¬
comb thickness becomes minimum. Presence of unsticking then may be confirmed by lightly
tapping on the questionable area with a special durai tool the size of a pencil with round
and polished tips. The sound produced when tapping a stuck area and an unstuck area is
quite different and can be interpreted as follows :
- clear single sound : the assembly is satisfactory,

- dull and muffled sound : a defect exists.
(g) Once the check is completed, wipe the surface dry of coupling fluid with a dry, clean and lintless
rag. If required, do not suppress the defect marking(s).
(3) X-ray checking for traces of fluid in honeycomb material or defects in vertical glue joints (junction
of four honeycomb sections, for instance).
C Final steps
- If required, restore to initial condition as described in Repair Manual ; for any defect not dealt
with in this Manual, seek the manufacturer's advice.
-Carefully clean the upper and lower surface skin panels of the trailing edge structural box
(suppression of the various markings in particular).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
FIGURE 6 - CHECK OF TRAILING EDGE STRUCTURAL BOX OF STABILATOR

AA
BREGUET AVIATION
FIGURE 7 -CHECK OF TRAILING EDGE STRUCTURAL BOX OF STABILATOR
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^cL
fî^-^rll
^_ -
MIRAGE F
REPLACEMENT OF STABI LATOR BALL JOINT
A Special tools
- Kit 5001 CVC.

B Spares
-1 ball joint GL1 15 SA 1
2- MATERIALS
- Mastinox 6856 H
- Thinner Celomer 3924
- Loctite 675.
- Remove the stabilator (see 03-4 : REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL
STABILATOR).
4- INNER BEARING BALL JOINT
A Removal
Remove the six attachment screws from the backplate holding the sealing ring.
-
Remove the backplate and the sealing ring.
-
- Remove the ball joint circlip.
- Remove the ball joint :
- position the extractor (M31 105) against the edge of the ball joint cage, level with the three
notches in NO rib ;
- extract the ball joint.
B Installation
- Clean the bearing housing (trim any surface defect).

- Check that the edges of the ball joint housing are smooth in order not to damage the housing
bore.
- Wipe out the ball joint cage then lightly coat with Mastinox (take care not to damage the teflon-
coated section). -
- Insert the ball joint right into its housing.
- Clean off the excess Mastinox.
- Fit the circlip.
- Clean the sealing ring attachment screws.
- Coat the screws with Loctite 675.
- Fit the sealing ring with its backplate and attachment screws.
CAUTION :
DO NOT OIL QR GREASE THE BALL JOINT.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Install the stabilator (see 03-4-3).
- Install door E 1-35.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION,,
iLJ>^r^L MIRAGE F
REPLACEMENT OF STABILATOR BEARING
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (14.750 to 147.500 ft.lb)

- Torque wrench accessory kit
B Spares
1 bearing KN 45 F E SP5
2 shouldered screws F331-002
2- MATERIALS
- Grease AIR 4222 or AI R 4210
-Remove the stabilator (see 03-4 : REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF STABILATOR).

- Remove door E1-35 from the lower surface.
4- OUTER BEARING
A Removal
Remove
- the four 10-mm dia. attachment screws ; recover the washers from under the nuts and
the stops from under the heads.
- Remove the two 15-mm dia. screws ; recover the washers.
- Remove the bearing through the pivot hole.
B Installation
- Before installation, check bearing swiveling, for comparison purposes following installation.
- Check the grease nipple for condition.
- Offer the bearing up in its housing.
- Position the four 10-mm dia. screws, with their stops under their heads.
- Position the washers and screw the nuts.
- Position the two 1 5-mm dia. screws, their washers and their nuts.
- Gradually tighten the nuts for a correct approach and contact of the bearing clamp with its
support.
- Tighten the 10-mm dia. screw nuts to a torque of 1.7 m.daN (12.537 ft.lb).
- Tighten the 1 5-mm dia. screw nuts to a torque of 6.3 m.daN(46.462 ft.lb).
- Check the bearing for proper swiveling.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Grease the bearing (see 02-9-8).

- Install the stabilator (see 03-4-3).
- Install door E1-35.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iLJ>-^r5L
BREGUET AVIATION .«îFL^S?^
MIRAGE F
^^Ss-^5^ Restricted MANUAL 03
SECTION 5
REMOVABLE STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
- Equipment bay door 5-101

- Air intake shock cone 5-104
- Ventral fins 5-107
- Wing fillet 5-109
- Fin fillet 5-111
- Brake chute fairing 5-113
- Attachments of doors and panels 5-115
- Radio compass sense antenna crest 5-1 20
5-3 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION
- Removal-installation of panels and doors 5-301

- Removal-installation of a fuel-tight door 5-303
- Removal-installation of a ventral fin 5-306
- Inspection and maintenance of doors and panels 5-501

- Check of ventral fin attachments 5-51 7
5-8 REPAIRS
- Replacement of ventral fin front and rear attachment pins 5-801

- Renewal of inspection door sealing 5-803
Figure No. Page
1 EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR - ATTACHMENTS 5-103

2 AIR INTAKE SHOCK CONE - ATTACHMENTS 5-106
3 VENTRAf. FINS - ATTACHMENTS 5-108
4 WING FILLET - ATTACHMENTS 5-110
5 FIN FILLET - ATTACHMENTS 5-112
6 BRAKE CHUTE FAIRING - ATTACHMENTS 5-114
7 RADIO COMPASS SENSE ANTENNA CREST 5-121
8 VENTRAL FIN SKIN (FRONT FAIRING) 5-504
AE
0487 Restricted 51
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
EQUIPMENT BAY DOOR
(Figure 1)
1 - DESCRIPTION
It is a structure box assembly of riveted and spot welded light alloy.
For heat insulation and sealing (see 03-0).
Externally, the box includes an opening between frames 13 and 15 for fitting the radio compass
antenna, and a hole between frames 15 and 17 at the location of the formation light. Laterally, it
receives two air vent scoops 1 and snap fastener 2.
Laminated plastic cowling 28 covers the opening used for installing the radio compass antenna ; it
is attached with fou rty -three screws 5 fitted on anchor nuts.
The box is constituted by arches 3, stiffeners 4, one front and rear cross beams 5 along edging of
cowling 28, one external skin machined as a single panel, and one internal skin, in four panels.
Laterally, it forms two housings fitted with :

-on the RH side, three goosenecks 6 attached by screws and fitted with bushes
-on the LH side, the locking mechanism accessible through two screwed doors 7 - 8.
The top of the front arch is fitted with locking ball joint 1 1 of strut 12 holding the door open. At
rest, this strut bears on ball joint 26 and clip 13.
The door is fitted with adjustable stop 14.

The door lateral edges are fitted with foam seal 27 bonded on a bent section (see 03-0).
2- LOCKING
A Locking mechanism
This assembly includes one lock and one linkage actuating three lockbolts 15. Lockbolt end fitting
is adjustable and locked with pin after locking adjustment.
Snap fastener 2 is released by pushing plate 16. Linkage drives the three lockbolts which disengage
from ramps 17, on LH console, and from front lockbolt catch 10.
B Pre-engagement mechanism
(a) Description
It includes one box 18 in which one piston 19 is installed. Piston is fitted with one adjustable stop
returned by spring 20.
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^T'U.
BREGUET AVIATION^^c^V^îfÔ
MIRAGE F
^£^*-<^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(b) Operation
(1) On door opening, due to action of spring 21, linkage returns forward until bellcrank 22 comes
into contact with pre-engagement mechanism piston 19. Then, lateral lockbolts protrude by 8 mm
(approx.) from guides 23 integral with door.
(2) On door closing, both lateral lockbolts retract, when coming into contact with ramps 17, and
compress piston spring 20.
Piston pushes linkage back and ensures pre-engagement of both lateral lockbolts.
(3) Closing of lock toggle fastener 2 pushes the three lockbolts back and ensures their engagement.
3- ATTACHMENTS
A Door is installed on fuselage by engaging the three goose neck fittings 6 on shouldered pins 24
attached by washer and safetied nuts on bearings integral with R/H console. Central bearing is installed
without clearance. After opening, a rearward motion disengages goose necks from hinge pins.
B In the open position, door is held by strut 12, the ball-jointed end-fittings of which are engaged :
- on ball-joint 1 1 , integral with door at frame 13
- on ball-joint 25, located in the bay, at frame 13 upper section along the aircraft centerline.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03 -A COUPE B
CROSS-SECTION B
C.15 c.14
FIGURE 1 - PORTE DE SOUTE A EQUIPEMENTS LIAISONS

EQUIPMENT BA Y DOOR A TTACHMENTS
AG
5-103
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAUlTjL.->'ji;'5v /YllIxMvJ'L. T
BREGUET AVIATION ^^=:^-<<^> . UAklMAI n«3
AIR INTAKE SHOCK CONE
(Figure 2)
1 - GENERAL
Each air intake is equipped with a shock cone called «MICE» the longitudinal position of which
controls air inlet at various flight envelopes.
L/H and R/H shock cones are identical.
2- DESCRIPTION
A Each shock cone consists of a box type body comprising the following :
frames numbered 0 to 6.
- Seven
Frames 1 - 2 - 4 are fitted with spacer bolts 1 tightened by nuts 2, and with rollers 3 completed
with «Falroid» packing held by safetied nuts fitted with slides 4 (section J).
Frames 2 to 6 consist of three elements (center : 5, lateral : 6).
- One front stiffener R AV.
- Two longitudinal webs 7 from frame 1 to 6.
- A light alloy machined skin panel 8.
- A front bottom plate 9.
- A front blanking plate 10.
- Two front spring loaded covers 1 1 .
- Two rear spring loaded covers 12.
On front side, skin panel 8 and front bottom plate 9 are joining onto ledge 13.
The latter constitutes the shock cone tip.
Two rails 14 riveted and screwed to longitudinal webs

-
Ariveted spacer 15 screwed to frame 1 and to rail ends. It constitutes the fork fitting equipped
-
with bushes and with anchor nut provided for attachment of actuating screw gimbal joint (view as per
K).
B Contact between shock cone and vertical well of air intake is ensured :
(1) By front blanking plate 10 comprising the following (section A and D) :

front plate (machined) on which two lateral plates 16 are hinged. The front plate is stiffened by
-a
a center reinforcement and a hat section fitted with two hinge fittings 17 accommodating link rods 18
provided for connection to front spring loaded cover.
(2) By front and rear spring loaded covers 1 1 and 12 comprising the following (section D)
-an external plate 19 perforated at the location of frame attaching pins 20, and an internal
plate 21 pressing against teflon section 22.
Internal plates feature welded flanges accommodating preload springs, slides and bink rod.
(3) Access to actuating screw gimbal joint is made possible through a door.
AA
07-72 Restricted 5~ 1°4
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^^^TU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^jaP^^Ô
C Hinge point of shock cone moving parts
(1) Front spring loaded covers 1 1

They are hinged
- on bolts 1 integral with frame 1 through openings of slides 4 (section J).
They are held :
- by preload spring 23 retained into coil 25 integral with front blanking plate 10 (section B)
- by preload spring 24 retained by two coils 25 integral with frame 0 (section C).
Displacement of spring loaded covers causes the front section of blanking plate 10 to be driven
through link rods 18.
(2) Rear spring loaded covers 12

They are hinged
- on bolts 1 integral with frame 2 and 4 through openings of slides 4.
Each of both rear covers is held :
- by front spring rod 26 and rear spring rod 27 (section E - section G) bearing inside cups on shock
cone structure.
-Displacement of spring loaded covers causes lateral plate 16 of front blanking plate 10 to be
driven through spring 28 attached to the slide at frame 2 (section F).
(3) Front blanking plate 10

It is hinged by pin 29 running through an opening of the support on blanking plate ; this pin is
locked onto front stiffener (section A).
(4) Riveted teflon blocks 30 cemented at the location of contact surfaces facilitate sliding between the
various components.
3- ATTACHMENT
Ensured by the following :

by pin 31 of actuating screw gimbal joint, safetied by lock 32, screwed in anchor nut integral
-
with lower web of spacer 1 5.
- Sliding is ensured by rollers integral with front roller holder fittings between frames 13 and 14
and rear roller holder fittings at frame 15. Front fitting also consitutes fork fitting for attachment of
actuator :
- lateral guiding is performed through four rollers 33
-vertical guiding through four roller 34 on which are engaged shock cone rails (cross
section L).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
DEMI-SECTION B DEMI-SECTION C
HALF-SECTION B HALF-SECTION C SECTION
13^feiU1 F
5-106 FIGURE 2 5-10¤

BREGUET AVIATION^ _
/L^-ibAl MIRAGE F
VENTRAL FINS
(Figure 3)
1 - GENERAL
The rear lower section of the fuselage is fitted with two ventral fins, symmetrically located in
relation to aircraft centerline between frames 35 and 40 and stringers 17 and 19, slanted by 20° ± 1'30".
The ventral fin-to-fuselage attachments are made through two taper pins at frames 36 and 39a.
The ventral fins are used to improve heading stability when aircraft angle of attack is high.
2- DESCRIPTION
Each ventral fin is constituted by a structure box including :

-nine ribs from N1 to N9. Blocks 10 are fitted to their lower ends so as to ensure profile
continuity
- two attachment fittings 1 and 2 comprising a taper bore
- four locating pins :
- two at the ends of ventral fins 3 and 4
- one on rib N3 5
- one on rib N5 6
- three channel sections, which close the structure box upper part, are distributed as follows :
- section 7 to which are secured :
- locating pin 3 at the front
- rib N1 in the center
- attachment fitting 1 at the rear
- attachment fitting 1 at the front
- attachment fitting 2 at the rear
- ribs N2 and N7, equally distributed between these two ends
- a locating pin on N3 and N5
- attachment fitting 2 at the front
- locating pin 4 at the rear
- ribs N8 and N9 between these two ends
- a front skin forming a fairing attached to rib N1, fitting 1 and channel section 7
- a rear skin forming a fairing attached to rib N9 and channel section 9
-a central skin forming a structure box attached to front fitting 1, ribs N2 and N9, rear fitting
and channel sections 8 and 9
- two doors
- a front door between the front fitting and rib N2
- a rear door between rib N7 and the rear fitting.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE A
SECTION A
Cadres
Frames 35
ENSEMBLE ATTACHE AVANT

FRONT A TTACHMENT
ASSEMBLY
N.2
Cadres
Frames 35
SECTION A
N
L
ENSEMBLE DES REVETEMENTS
SKIN PANEL ASSEMBL Y
COUPE B
SECTION B
FIGURE 3 - QUILLES - LIAISONS ENSEMBLE ATTACHE ARRIERE

VENTRAL FINS - ATTACHMENT REAR A TTACHMENT
AC MOD 514 ASSEMBLY
BREGUET AVIATION
3- ATTACHMENTS
A Fuselage side
(1) The front attachment is formed by mounting stub 11 that is embedded into frame 36, and by
doubler 18 bolted to the flange of frame 36 and to the aircraft skin.
The upper part of the stub is fitted into a blind hole drilled through the flange of frame 36. A
vent hole is provided in the bottom of this hole to facilitate insertion of the stub. The lower part of
the stub is tapered for attachment to the ventral fin.
Flange 13 bolted to frame 36 was made redundant following modification of the attachment
fitting (modif. 514).
(2) The rear attachment is formed by a pin 26 inserted through ball joints mounted on frame 39a.
The upper ball joint is held by plate 25 and the lower bearing by flange 27 secured to the skin
by eight screws.
Pin 26 is held to the fuselage by safetied bolt 24 ; the lower end of the pin is tapered for attach¬
ment to the ventral fin.
B Ventral fin side
(1 ) Front attachment
The ventral fin is provided with a fitting 14 that receives mounting stub 11 in its tapered bore.
The mounting stub is held to the ventral fin by nut 15 which screws onto the threaded end of the
stub. The nut is locked by angle 16 that is secured to the fitting by screw 17.
(2) Rear attachment

As for the front attachment, the ventral fin has a fitting 28 with a tapered bore that accommo¬
dates pin 26.
C Fuselage-to-ventral fin attachment
(1) Front attachment

This is achieved by means of special bolt 21, hemispherical washer 32 and nut 22. The clearance
between fuselage and ventral fin is set by means of spacer 20.
The ventral fin is reinforced at this point by strengthening plate 23.
(2) Rear attachment

This is achieved by nut 29 which screws onto the threaded end of pin 26. The nut is locked by
angle 30 that is secured to the fitting by screw 31 .
AB MOD 514
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZLJ^-ftTV.
BREGUET AVIATION __ __
MIRAGE F
WING FILLET
(Figure 4)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The wing-to-fuselage connecting fillet includes seven components of chemically-milled sheet

metal.
These components are the following :

-front fillet 18-10 (02), made up of two sheets welded to the leading edge and including the
joint plates for attachment of front lower and upper surface fillets ;
-front upper surface fillet 20-10 (02), fitted with a door 20-10/1 (02/1) for access to fuselage
hoisting fitting and including a joint plate for center fillet attachment ;
- center upper surface fillet 25-10 (02) ;
- rear upper surface fillet 26-10 (02), including a joint plate for center fillet attachment ;
- front lower surface fillet 20-09 (03) ;
- rear lower surface fillet 26-09 (03), including the joint plate for attachment of front lower
surface fillet ;
- rear fillet 29-10, composed of two sheets welded to the trailing edge and blanked on wing side by
rib 1 and ledge 2, both riveted.
Zone 3 of the center fillet edging, in contact with the wing, is coated with Celogliss paint.
2- ATTACHMENTS
The fillet components are attached to the fuselage by screws 4 in anchor nuts. The corresponding
edge is directly screwed onto the fuselage skins.
- In the droop slat zone, a conical rib 5 stops the fixed structure box of the front fillet. The latter
is attached through ribs 6, integral with the fuselage, and on wing side, through the conical rib flanges.
- For the zone in contact with the wing, the fillet components are attached to the upper surface
through ribs 6 and stiffener 7, integral with the fuselage.
- In the wing flap zone, the rear fillet is attached through ribs 6, integral with the fuselage.
3- SEALING
See 03-0.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
COUPE B
CROSS SECTION B
FIGURE 4 - KARMAN VOILURE - Liaisons

AB WING FILLETS -JUNCTIONS
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=J>""rAl
BREGUET AVIATION^,
MIRAGE F
Restricted AM N UAL 03
FIN FILLET
(Figure 5)
1 - DESCRIPTION
It is a symmetrical assembly composed of removable curved machined sheets, permitting

fuselage-to-fin connection.
The fillet assembly consists of :

- two LH front fillets 31 .1 1 and 32.1 1 .1
- two RH front fillets 31 .01 and 32.01 .1
- two center fillets 32.1 1 and 32.01
- one LH rear fillet 36.1 1 .1 fitted with a door 36.1 1 .1/1
- one RH rear fillet 36.01 .1 fitted with a door 36.01 .1/1 .
Each fillet component is fitted, at its front section, with a welded cover strip 1.
2- ATTACHMENTS
Fillet is attached to fuselage and fin by screws and anchor nuts 2.
- Fillet-to-fuselage
- by the corresponding edge on fuselage skin.
- Fillet-to-fin
- by corresponding edge on fin skin.
- Center fillet-to-rear fillet

- through cover strip integral with rear fillet
- Rear fillet-to-brake chute cowling

- on slanted frame of brake chute cowling.
3- SEALING (See 03-0)
AD
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
MANUAL 03
SECTION B DETAIL E
36.01.1/1
4m
6.11.1
33.11
SECTION DE PRINCIPE SECTION A

SCHEMA TIC SECTION
C.31 C.32 C.33 C.36 C.37 C.39
C!
>SWSSSN\N^SXNvkxV|V>.
DETAIL C
t......>auuu>UUUv
DETAIL D
ii i
iWKNKKM\\V\VV\Vv\\^.
FIGURE 5 - KARMAN DERIVE - Liaisons

FIN FILLET -Junctions
AD 5-112 FIGURE 5 5-1
Restricted
01-77
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ^^zr^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATlON^fiP3^^*^ ,......,.
DRAG CHUTE FAIRING

(Figure 6)
1- DESCRIPTION
Between rudder and fuselage rear section comprised between frame 39b and frame 44 of tail unit,
the rear fuselage section is fitted with the drag chute fairing 1 in which the drag chute container is
housed.
An antenna 16 is secured by screws onto the drag chute fairing.
A Drag chute fairing 1
It is a structure box assembly whose rear section forms a housing for the drag chute container. It
includes :
- One slanted rib 3, fitted with fin centering fitting 4 and with a screwed reinforcement folded
section 5
- One rib NC40 of light alloy folded sheet, fitted with a guide 6 for drag chute container
attachment
- One titanium machined circular flange 7, whose base forms the tail cone connecting fitting 8
- Two skins : one L/H skin 9 fitted with an hinge door, and, one R/H skin 10 fitted with a screwed
door.
Box upper section is blanked by a closing U section 1 1 .
- One upper rib 12, forward of rib NC 40 and one junction sheet 13 in the drag chute housing area
join R/H and L/H skins.
- Housing lower section is blanked by a closing sheet 14.
-Two teflon strips 15 are bonded onto junction sheet 13 and to L/H skin 9 in the drag chute
housing area.
2- ATTACHMENTS
Attachment is made :
- at fin centering fitting 4, by finger integral with fin
- at connecting fitting 8, by finger integral with tail unit
- by a folded section 17 attached to aircraft structure by screws
- by skin edgings 9 - 10 in contact with fuselage, between frames 39b and 41 .
- The rear component of fin fillet is attached to slanted rib edging.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
COUPE A
CROSS SECTION A
VUE SUIVANT F
Z
SECTION B COUPE E COUPE C COUPE D
CROSS SECTION E CROSS SECTION C CROSS SECTION D
FIGURE 6 - CARENAGE PARACHUTE FREIN - Liaisons

BRA KE CHUTE FAI RING - A ttachments
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
ATTACHMENTS OF DOORS AND PANELS
Doors and panels are attached by means of the various following types of attachments :
1 - ATTACHMENT WITH LATCH LOCKING
The operation is carried out from outside, by engaging a wrench on bellcrank square drive which
actuates the latches. The link rods are buttressing and are maintained by a return spring.
2- ATTACHMENT WITH LOCKS
Their closing is ensured by «HARTWELL» lock controlled by a plunger.
Lgdg OO
3C o
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
3- ATTACHMENT BY CLIPS
According to the following doors :
A Non - stressed doors
B Plane stressed doors
C Formed stressed doors (non captive clips)
4- ATTACHMENT BY SCREWS
- Doors and panels stressed on fixed or floating captive nuts.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAUlT/L^^rU fV\ I K M VJ7 L. F
breguet aviation^^^^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
LASER TELEMETER FAIRING
(Figure 7)
1 - DESCRIPTION
It is a structure box assembly, made of riveted light alloy, located at the rear lower section of the
nose cone between frames IV and VII.
It covers the laser telemeter integral with the nose cone.
At the front of the fairing a cant receives a heating window provided for laser beam passage.
As concerns heat insulation (see 03-0)
A Door structure box
- Structure box is constituted by seven stiffeners, from 1 to 7, a skin 9 and an internal sheet 10
laterally joined by an edging 11, bent sections 12 and connecting elements 13 up to stiffener 3.
It is extended rearward by a longeron 14.
- The front face of the stiffener 1 bears two goose necks 15 on either side of the centerline.
-The internal sheet 10 is equipped (on the R/H side only) with two attaching clamps 16 for the
strand of the heating window.
- Each beam (L/H and R/H) receives straight above the stiffener 5 a centering fitting 17 which fits
onto the pins integral with the structure.
- Between stiffeners 6 and 7, the L/H beam is equipped with a cable 18 secured to an angle 19 by
a pinned bolt.
- Stiffener 7 is provided with a stop 20.
- Two supports 21 form a housing which receives the lock 22.
- The frame of fairing skin in contact with the nose cone is surrounded by a seal 23 and bears at
the front a scotch call strip 24
In addition, the two compartments 25 between stiffeners 2-3 and 4 are painted dull black as well
as the flanged edges of the internal sheet 10 and stiffener 3.
B Heating window
The too section of the window is embedded between the stiffener 2 and a cup 26 positioned by an
adjusting shim 27 (detail J - Section B). The gap between the skin, the stiffener and the glass panel seal
is clogged. The window is applied on the edge of the skin 9 by a panel frame 28 screwed on self-locking
nuts and made of a sheet stiffened by welded ribs. At the lower section of the glass panel, a small
klegecel wedge is interposed between the frame and the panel.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
vi v»
Colmatage
Sealing
FIGURE 7 - CARENAGE TELEMETRE LASER

AA LASER TELEMETER FAIRING
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^rU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^LJ^r^
MIRAGE F
2- INSTALLATION OF FAIRING
A Fairing closing
The fairing is mounted below the nose cone by engaging the two goose necks 1 5 in the two corres¬
ponding fittings of structure lower frame IV.
When the fairing is tilted upward, the centering fittings 17 engage on the pins integral with frame 5
till fairing stop 20 abuts against nose cone structure stop 30.
The door is locked once the lockbolt is engaged in the keeper at the bottom of frame VII
(detail G).
B Fairing opening
Actuating the lock causes the lockbolt to withdraw from the keeper. The fairing swivels on its
two goose necks. It is maintained half -open by cable 18 secured by pin 31 in a fitting of frame Vc.
When the pin is unlocked and the electrical supply connector is disconnected, the nose cone
fairing can be separated.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL>*~^r\JL
BREGUET AVIATION^
MIRAGE F
RADIO COMPASS SENSE ANTENNA CREST

(Figure 7M)
1- DESCRIPTION
Forward of the fin, between frames 28 and 33, the fuselage rear section receives a triangular
crest 1 housing radio compass sense antenna 3.
Front cone 2 connects the crest to the fuselage.

Rear cowling 4 connects the crest to the fin.
A Antenna 3
- It is located between frames 28 and 32.

- It consists of a machined light alloy support flange 5 for attachment to the fuselage, and to
which laminated plastic antenna fairing 6 is attached.
The antenna is attached to the fuselage at five points :
- one forward, at F.28, through an 8 dia screw and a sealed captive nut attached under the
frame flange ;
- two at F.30, on RH and LH sides, through 6 dia screws and sealed captive nuts ;
- two at F.31 , on RH and LH sides, through 6 dia screws and sealed captive nuts.
- The rear section of the antenna is attached through fourteen 5 dia screws to pick-up rib 7 bolted
and riveted to the fuselage at F.32.
- Antenna bonding is obtained through metallized seals 8 attached through counterplates 9 screwed
under the antenna flange.
B Front cone 2
This machined light alloy component is an extension of the crest attaching the latter to the
fuselage upper section, forward of F.28..
The cone is attached to the fuselage and to the antenna flange through a 5-dia captive screw
screwed in sealed floating captive nuts.
G- Rear cowling 4 (D0.00)
This cowling, located between frames 32 and 33, consists of a machined and roll-formed light alloy
sheet fairing the crest to the fin form.
It is attached as follows :
- at the front, to F.32 pick-up rib 7, through twelve 5-dia screws ;
- at the rear, to fin rib OC, through eighteen 5-dia screws ;
-at the lower section, to fillets 32.11.1 and 32.01.1 through six 5-dia screws ; the nuts
corresponding to these screws are riveted along the cowling edging.
NOTE : The antenna crest sits astride three access doors : 26.00, 28.00 and 29.00. Therefore opening
of the 1st door requires removal of front cone 2, while complete opening of the 2nd and 3rd
doors requires removal of antenna 3. However, the 2nd door can be opened in two parts,
hinging on either side of the antenna.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 03
FIGURE 7M - RADIO COMPASS SENSE ANTENNA CREST

AB
10-78 Restricted 5-121 FIGURE 7M 5-121
BREGUET AVIATION. __ __
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL Q3
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF PANELS AND DOORS
A- Standard tools
- Pneumatic unscrewing machine 30 082
- Pneumatic screwing machine 30 125.
B Special tools
- Screw unlocking tool MS 1388.
2- GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
A- Tools
(1 ) Screwdriver
Mandatorily use a screwdriver the bit of which strictly matches the screw head shape and which is
in perfect condition.
(2) Pneumatic screwing machine
(a) It shall be of the adjustable torque type ; otherwise, the cruciform shape corners are very rapidly
rounded off, and therefore, it becomes very difficult to remove screw, even with hand screwdriver.
Torque to be applied will be determined in relation to screw diameter (see 01-2).
Besides, it is mandatory to use screwdriver adapter appropriate to the machine and corresponding
to screw shape.
CAUTION :
NEVER USE PNEUMATIC SCREWING MACHINE FOR ANTENNA FAIRING ATTACHING
SCREWS.
(b) For untightening : unlock screw with hand screwdriver or with screw unlocking tool, then
complete operation with unscrewing machine.
(c) For tightening : engage the first two threads by hand, then complete with screwing machine. Take
care that screwdriver adapter remains in the shape during the whole operation.
B Carefully check removed screws. Replace damaged screws by same reference spares (ISO type
hardware).
C Never apply grease or tallow on screw threads.
CAUTION :
TITANIUM PARTS SHALL IN -NO CASE BE CLEANED WITH CHLORIC SOLVENTS. DRY-
CLEAN THEM.
3- REMOVAL
A Doors and panels attached by screws,
(1 ) As a rule, screw diameter and length are uniform for same door or panel. But, this was not possible
for very large panels or for highly stressed panels. In this case, a template, reproducing drilling of the
panel to be removed, is to be manufactured. On this template, each screw shall be placed into the
corresponding hole, as removal proceeds. Uniform screws of other doors or panels shall be put into a
fabric bag which is to be attached to the corresponding door or panel.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //5WM*> MIRAGE
iii\r-wi_ F
breguet aviation ^0?^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
(2) Special cases

(a) The following internal doors: 1 9.05.1 i, 1 9.07.1 i, 19.05.2i, 19.07.2i, 20.06i (gun bay ceil¬
ing), 22.06i, 23.06.1 i, 24.06i, cowlings (case magazines), 23.05i, 23.07i, 25.05i, 25.07i,
26.05i, 26.07i (main U/C well), 28.06i, 30.06i (engine compartment) are attached by screws
of two different lengths for each door. To prevent an error on installation, which may nave se¬
rious consequences, the two lengths of screws have been identified (see below) so as to be
differentiated easily.
For a same door:
-first length of screw (the most used on this door) = titanium scrévviiTKX - bluish color),
-second length of screw:
(a) one red paint circle is drawn round the screw hole.
(b) the screw is made of steel (BCL) and is differentiated from the others by cadmium
plating (typical color). . . .
NOTE: Some doors include a third length of screws; these screws are of the countersunk head
type to avoid any error.
(b) Internal doors 29.04i, 29.08i include one screw which has to be installed in a special
way, at location of frame 31 and stringer 17. This screw is installed in a direction opposite to
that of the other ones. On assembly, take care to keep the attachment stacking and to seal on
nut side.
B Doors or panels attached by clips.
-Mandatorily use flat end screwdrivers corresponding to the lock head slot.
-In case of formed doors (case of doors located on fuselage dorsal fin), these clips are of
the non-captive type and it is mandatory to recover them as they are unlocked.
C - Sealed doors ._
(1) Sealed doors fitted with seal i. I
Their removal is made in two steps. Disengage the door from its framing by pushing it in¬
wards, then extract it. To make this operation easier, each door is fitted with a sealed captive
riutinto which a screw (door attaching screw) or a threaded rod is to be screwed and used as
a "grip" on the door.
(2) Sealed doors installed with PR sealant (see 03-5)

4 - INSTALLATION
CAUTION: '" -'"-'*:''- ^ *'" "">"' '^' ' -' -A" - ;
ITT5" FORBIDDEN TO ¤ËdSF A DOOR' BEFORE THE SUPERVISOR OF THE INSPEC¬

TION HAS PERSONALLY CHECKED EACH STRUCTURAL BOX (FORGOTTEN TOOLS,
IMPROPER LOCKING, ABNORMAL CONDITION OF PIPES, ETC.) AND ORDERED IT
TO BE CLOSED. .....:,*, ;i iW9i, ...*.:<= mob
A - Follow the instructions given in paragraph 2.
B - For sealed doors provided with a seal, slightly coat the seal with petrolatum (Air 3565)
C - For doors whose attaching screws are fitted with "Jet 51 0" gasket washer, the latter may
be reused provided they are in good condition.
The visual inspection shall involve:
-checking the condition and presence of the metal rings,
-checking the condition of the seal (no fraying, cracks or cuts),
-checking the rings for corrosion.
With the doors reinstalled, cover all the seal rings with Ardrox 3140.
D - For fuel-tight doors installed with PR sealant, see 03-5.
E - For water-tight doors (renewal of sealing), see 03-5.
F - For some doors, the attaching screws shall be assembled with an interlaying compound
(see STRUCTURAL REPAIR Manual, section 2-7).
AC ' vt,:'"s";
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL-^^TVi
BREGUET AVIATION^-^^jg*Q>
MIRAGE F
^5^**-^^ Restricted MANUAL 03
Z.. '.'-:v1 t,-- . ,-:
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A FUEL-TIGHT DOOR
-.1- SCOPE ..;;,rj;-:6 3;E ;r :iîc ,

ov;j
To specify the procedure for removing and installing a door made fuel-tight with sealant. ^yr
2 - EQUIPMENT REQUIRED r - , ;
A Standard tools ri
- Percussion unscrewing tool yi6
- 1 plexiglas sharp wedge ) , manufacture
- 3 plexiglas bevel wedges / -,. SS;

-Standard stepladder, 1 .25 or 2 meters long (according to door location).
.. v »
-' +
3- MATERIALS
- Methylethylketone
4- PRELIMINARY STEPS 8 -
A Drain the concerned tank (see 02-3)
IMPORTANT NOTE . : Never use metal tools to separate the door and to clean the mating surfais,
5- REMOVAL .. ^ - v re - .,,, oe'bsc "-

^CiJAJ.jATO-.. _ i,
NOTE : Since screws locked with PR require a very high torque for untightening them, it is regonjT
mended to use a percussion unscrewing tp^t'to.perfQrro,3hi§QperatipTi].C . c i;"7î
Wc;rVÔR ;- "
~M':-:~'"^ "~3.H3r:'-^r. ""- ''"' r
" - ''S'r'"'"
.. ' "; :,rgwgi:'<àis ';c ^'~ " \ . '^."0 ' - " -, ^..;;
A- Remove the door attaching screws and let them soak in a pan containing" methylethylketone.
.i' '1 Lj 8 i (CC "O rt> c:'i
'yr:fr'
. ,. ' 'if,ip.-':\ ilt;
I
B fi>: 'MfifT't-:-3^1 -He c , ; " .: . . .. - " f;
. C "I . - S
AC
>". .'-. W, v.-:
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted /MANUAL 03
tOJAUc-
B Proper removal
>-:fV'~ v ; ' ' ""' ,-
Istjstep :
fo + «C Using plexiglass çsharp^. wedge, remove

/» r^»% external PR bead, ,-v^
i i>
i.r 'i.!
,jOîC
/
! i» *i!
] .noi,v:c
*
ô«*. i'
-in
2nd step : -- -;--.--

HTo ease removal, eaqh door is provided, at
one of its ends, with a chamfered section
(50 mm long (1.96 in) approx. on door internal
resting surface and related framing side).
- Look for the chamfered edging section.
-At this place, engage a bevel wedge (See
opposite drawing) and, using a hammer, drive it
in by a few millimeters.
-This wedge shall remain in situ until the
operation is completed ; it shall be driven in
progressively and as door separation proceeds.
3rd step :
- Position a second wedge as close as
possible to the first one and slightly drive it in.
- Position a third one, close to the second
one, and drive it in sufficiently to withdraw the
second wedge which shall be driven in beside the
third one and so on.
o o o 4th step :
As soon as door is sufficiently separated to

catch it by hands : complete the separation by
hand slowly and regularly.
AB
ÏIVA

BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGET
I 6- INSTALLATION
* « * »
» « *
Refer to STRUCTURAL REPAIR manual which covers
- preparation and cleaning of components, ->
- utilization and properties of sealing products, !
-sealing principles,
-sealing repairs,
- renewal of anti-corrosion protection.
Procedure tf n. *
- Check the condition of the door framing anchor nuts.

- If necessary, replace those that have shaken loose.
- Clean the door framing with methylethylketone ':te~e4im4nate all traces of sealant. - r.~ ....
- Clean the door ; carefully clean out all the injection holes.
- Clean and inspect the open tank in order not to leave any foreign matter inside. \
- If necessary, touch up the anti -corrosion protection on the door and framing. Let dry protection
touch-up, if any.
- Offer up the door on its frame.
- Fit the attaching screws and tighten them progressively in staggered sequence.
- Inject sealant. ' - - ~
- Apply a bead of sealant around the periphery of the door. i'i
- After curing, check the sealing of the door. V
- Apply protection to the screw heads.
' 'CHCr' >;.. ?l.: .
! '-.a 'Z ' ':crr' " " ' ;k;.("d'C

!c il
rn .o
vcnc^C' "- P-
i1U2 2- ICO', a
.'-' : ïon'.rt yd ti dcccc
i-«cj ' -' . . . <
3A
W
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT.
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^y_~ ^-*^> . , .-.,-_ .. A ... . . . no
-*~^ Restricted ,;* -cv i ^MANUAL 03a
o--^^' '- ''C;;T.--.IW r -.
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A VENTRAL FIN

(figure 3) ûQnA
1 - EQUIPMENT REQUIRED d^ -.;.--, -;.-qnioj cuore ;
A - Standard tools -n;.; r,\rr vc ^r^: i

-Torque wrench kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 Ib.ft).
-Accessory fit for torque wrenches, 0 to 3 m.daNîbaO itr.fi^:.H : so J
IB - Special tools \ t
-Wrench M31138 (in airframe structure 1st line tool kit), tuna
iiZZ'^ZZ''
' ' ' ' ' ." . . " :* }) i'\ jji nu .»""!
2-3S MATERIALS ' " ^-? ::.-.-;;
-White spirit ^ H' ' r

[ * -Grease 4205 :-<''-" ccsqc
"'sevRemove : ^f-* its"'.

-doors 38.05 (38.07) and (36.07.1) on ventral fins.
Modification 514 incorporated : iils^sn- yd s .- v.:

-in addition, remove doors 36.05.2 (36.07.2) on fuselage.
:*:-* -~
*'v; +-,'....
Ol ^"'^ ;V !':;..
4 ^"REMOVAL
' on:.'" .^rir-bi.?; ' , *
A- Front attachment ^ ïjs^kc .s-: - ";<ti- ,; ~\ or;î *;C c' j i:

^;OB'i.c>n >. . nii a;.- ,-.: : :;n ' .; 301,.. Cc ."."*' ~ :; ,". ' ''' ;1i3rit >;Cr:rv?
Modification 630 not incorporated : :.-.ir. .-"- .y,.:c.
-unscrew nut 22 (âftèr unsà'fëtyînèi If) <$t tfie'bd'lf attaching connecting flange 18 (13 mm
socket), .:..'- -,^ - ,. c-.., :>-a ju... t,-v----.oo;--. "
-recover the washer under the nut, j-r^ -jrt

-remove screyv^l and -recover Washer 32. h- '- îo4cvv -^c.., "
Modification 51 4 not incorporated : o^^w îc^qc ^c* :u . .

-remove lock angle 16, after unscrewing its attachment screw 17 (7 mm socket),
-unscrew attachment nut 15 (13 mm socket) while supporting the ventral fin,
-recover the washer under the nut. 'os'n> -o<~i - ... .
''"' "^ :;f ^r'f-'/v ;;v--

. .> . v;vJ 2 vv.'TOo coptmi-^ . 1
B - Rear attachment -- . . îî-

-Remove lock angle:30,c after unscrewing its afctJaGhrnehtscfew'Sî {7 torn socket).
-Unscrew attachment nut 29 (13 mm -socket). During this operation, take care to support
the components. ; y.-^
C - Remove the ventral fin vertically so as not to scratch theTafSeVboresv ^» rr. ',r.i
nr-'/j-j; c ^ni^-j ;,;;;.?. T'JOr. ,:y, >.,- C; . -: ~sij .-'-
..'TRib ;uji b~.:.V"l:! f.

. / .-.n; yd jun en. y
.-- ^^)o'u !\\.>.ïZ:c!j.&£ -jor> --^ï. ",,m-

AB
AVIONS MARCEL- DASSAULT
MIRAGE P
BREGUET AVIATION
4 - INSTALLATION
-Clean the various components of the attachment fittings (on fuselage and ventraLfirisX,. t
-Check the condition of tapered bearing surfaces and of attachment fitting components.
-Coat these components with a thin film of grease AIR 4205. :*c A
Jl.oi r,i'o+ 0'» ' : . ..% - . .:: - 7
B- Installation of front at^hmeût frtting ou n; G -'ooa-
Modifications 514 and 630 incorporated : : - c; f
-offer up the ventral fin, fitted with the mounting stub, under the fuselage, e j
In case of replacement : *'
-uncouple the mounting stub from the removed ventral fin (see 03-5),
-insert the mounting stub into the bore of frame 36, then offer up the ventral fir\( under
the fuselage,
-correctly position the ventral fin by means of the centering studs,
-make sure that spacer 20 correctly bears against the fuselage (if it can be made to bear [
against the fuselage without tightening the connecting bolt) ;
-install attachment screw 21 fitted with special washer 32 ;
-screw on self-locking nut 22 and torque to standard value ; _ :
if correct bearing against the fuselage is obtained at this assembly stage only, check that
spacer 20 bears against the fuselage and that there is a minimum clearance of 1 mm between
ventral fin and fuselage (particularly at both. screws attaching flange 13) ;
-tighten nut 1 5 attaching the stub to the ventral fin ;
-safety the nut by installing lock angle 16 (7 mm socket). Q:
.-.. ji-.-'-J'J.: ; iO i :c . :.-.;!:' ~ f:-
-fit the mounting stub to the ventral fin without attaching it ;
-offer up the ventral fin under the fuselage and position it correctly by means of the cen-t
tering studs and front attachment fitting ;
-make sure that the mounting stub shoulder correctly bears against the fuselage and,. at
the same time, check there is a minimum clearance of 1 mm between ventral fin and fuselage,
particularly at both screws attaching flange 13 ; -cîo^^cni ;<- Cl'ô r-oh.-o<\.
-remove the mountin&stubifrom thejiyenjrjaj fin /and install it .[nitfjie bore of fraÈne,;36 ; I
-attach the mounting stub with flange 1 3 and screws 1 2 ; ;-3:ir0,?

- locate the ventral fin and support it ; ;. ?n ^, . -m^, Sr
-fit the recessed washer and nut 1 5 attaching the mounting stub to the ventral fin ;
-tighten the nut with special wrench M31138 and safety it by installing lock angle 16
(7 mm socket)-?-- ; "; r > »-.-,.-- -,-:i-,; ;> - c: ._,.
'i'' -f' ~ ;: -.< ,'...:-. .;.:<: .". :°"o* mm ?,*) cr .'jn rrr clo^ws
: " -fsu ' '. .
Modification 630 not incorporated : - .n ad* ' n

-install attachment screw 21 fitted with special washer 32, placing it in such a way that
the pinning hole is parallel to ventral fin centerline ; s 'flc,ci,o
-torque the «ut as ctoseâs Rp,ss.iblejctorthe standard valuetocproyide for insertion of the
safety pin ; ,y,-: ,-. -; r:;i;; ,jC .^c>,. ^n .cc :-
-fit the safety pin.
C -Installation of rearâttecfement fitting-^ - n -,. -.-,,- om,.; - 3
-Fit the recessed washer and nut 29. Screw on the nut (torque to 1.6 m.daN (1 1 .8 Ib.ft), f
using a 13 mm socket). Although access to rear attachment fitting is not easy to gain, torque j
the nut with the torque wrench, without exceeding the recommended value so as to avoid [
damage to the thread root drafts. î
-Safety the nut by installing lock angle 30 (7 mm socket). j
5 - FINAL STEPS j
4
i-
-Reinstall doors 38.05 (38.07) and (36.07.1), 36.05.2 (36.07.2).
AB . v.;..Vj;.\^;;.y '=-.. *b ~C-j

BREGUET AVIATION
f^à^rrU MIRAGE F
INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE OF DOORS AND PANELS
1 - MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 3512

- White spirit
2- INSPECTION
A General
This sheet concerns, removed doors as well as doors only opened on which locks, olives, small
chains, hinges shall also be inspected and maintained according to the following instructions.
B Inspecting doors
- Check :
- structure for condition .(rivet attachment - eventual cracks)

- attachments for condition (screws - nuts- captive hardware - springs)
- paint for condition
- If necessary, check ;
- door locking device in open position (link rod etc..)
- stowage clips.
attachment of support of door in open position
-
- small chains and their attachment to doors. Since the extreme attachments of small chains are
the most exposed parts; make sure that they do not begin to open. Replace them systematically, if
defective
- bonding braids : replace the defective braids*
C Doors fitted with screws
- Check all the screws and replace those whose cruciform starnp or thread is damaged.
D Doors with snap fasteners
Doors with locks - Doors with clips

- Check for general condition, for absence pf binding points
- Check attachments very carefully (locks - clips)
- Check for correct crimping on door.
NOTE : Replacement of snap fastener (or part of it) requires an identical spare and the use of special
pliers.
AA
' BREGUET AVIATION
MRAGEJ Y,'-
Restricted -jMANUAL03
E Door with hinges i';H .ÂHTl/ili/ =iû >;OEi-.0
Check hinge for correct condition (Attachment, wear, absence of hard points when opening or
closing). / A: ..Z.I "
F Pressure sealed doors :I H')6j - I k .Ciiîiorç;
(1) After removal :

:J^J _! fp,\ r/!=?v: - s
If any trace of dampness or some deposits due to water seepages in related compartment are
detected, carry out door sealing again (See 03-0). A '
(2) Visual inspection of sealant coat îi>! oc: ;
If sealing compound coat does not provide a good bearing surface all arbEfridpoY if the coat shows
any cut, separation, missing sections : carry out door sealing again (See 03-0).
(3) Visual inspection of seal

fiPUf^ . . :cn
Check seal for cut, separation or missing section, otherwise carry out door sealing again (See 03-0).
3- MAINTENANCE
A Maintenance of doors
According to the type of door, slightly oil

- lock control linkages
- locking latches :pZ0 so;) a nit it^+nsc -
- locking olives 'I? -,'..."
- hinges. ->î<- : - *: ic--L' . c
- -.;. .-,. ., T'- ruby.-: ~ .
c or y rit orrc obi.: ogsif:,iJ> no £?:

By ids : .c"os f:-iofi ""--.c * :l :-
. (0- ':- ^ ?£ \"r "L Mf:.bV v, -'; r i!iC>a>. ont "OJriiOi ' "r>-A-
ic:-
jVQir- QH3 ':> - .-;;^ct f... ';S. 'vc* -ji'j '" - ~" Z[:r.<..:, ...
i; . (_,.,. : "_ ...c,./ uns i..MË,n .ci- -'o.,: -.'-:;!.,.
'-.M- -"* ; ,;-:..': nsnî ç...''iaî-;5jiJ."ior.
. i-
:-:oi: v \..- '- ?nn- rty- '':' r-.r-âMvy.t, suo rrroc:
AA
07-t72 Restricted.. 5V502
AVIONS MARcà^ls^èLTO^^
JREGUET^VIATipN^^sP3^-^*^ -
>
~"
- MIRAGE
MAinm'ni
F
£0 jAUHa,*^^^ Restricted '
'
*. MANUAL 03
CHECK OF VENTRAL FIN ATTACHMENTS , c 3
;<; ;0O 03fiv-' "nlo.C blf' C c ccd ,1S0'.'.' 7r:t,;c.-i:c '.'-.; - CC ..-!:-.. iJSr*
1 -GENERAL
To check condition of the ventral fin attachments and skin at the ventral fin attachments;--^"^ - ^
: ,'--. C, c-tA US
9'is. c-cycnoo rrlî^ -.< aftn^-'cc ';". -oî s;>.:. c ;' ' .:-.-." :;o: io y^-' çne
A Standard tools ^ js3; ? c
- Mechanic's tool kit

- Silicon carbide stone (Crystolon grade) 39C60LV
,., - Emery cloth,sgOQ gr/ij. .- -.-.:-.; <>;.. ..--.roe t- ...
- -. : c '
B Special tools
'v '.ei
- Two-point hole gauge
i- . «fi!'---- --,;;:; - c , r _,0 9?iv¥"S8ri.tC-- .Ci..:"" c ?"
3 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
4 - PRELIMINARY STEPS .locbî

'.- > c: : ' ! "" :
- Remove the ventral fins (see 03-5). .
- Clean the following with white spirit :

- the visible portion of the front pin, -.!--.
- the visible portion of the rear pin,
- the plates on fuselage side and the locating pins on ventral fin side,
- the ventral fin taper bore accommodating the rear pin,
- the lower and upper bores at frame 36.
CAUTION :
DO NOT USE CHLORINATED PRODUCTS FOR CLEANING TITANIIUM OR TITANIUM-
ALLOY PARTS (plates and locating pins at frames 35, 37, 38 and 40).
5 - PROCEDURE
A Front attachment
Ventral fin side :

inspect condition of the cylindrical portions of the front pin,
-
- particularly check for cracks and traces of fretting ; if any doubt subsists as concerns cracks,
perform a nondestructive inspection of the pin,
- smooth out any traces of fretting with 600-grit emery cloth.
aa _ A::
10 86^ Restricted 5 517 J
BREGUET AVIATION "
MMGEJF
Restricted ô!ÏAMAlNUAL03
Fuselage side
-Check the lower bore of frame 36 'fc^ÇôTrôsloârtà^tetMhg^
600-grit emery cloth.
-Measure the lower bore as indicated in thÉinFigûreV Cheek.tnàt the'maxim'urrï-rêccVdëddimension
is Jess than or equal to 24.90 mm (0.982 in).
IfcQiSI ''' -:."" v'rr.'r .b..c"ic:;...Av tifi :.on£"^,;t; aa-j.'i b!uo
' -:
: .^ ': ;..;; i:^-.: ;'S: :c-r .tf ti Ljilac.% -sii c*-!t; "iv
J '...scoiq ":
ice ;; '-'k.Zr-vm-nq 8woHs ni.-*» c^c b,ic cs£
jcifjrniCOijj.. ! - a
3 .uoc.-Ti? ; nio tko"! c<:>- ,o nobioo lûrçr srh ; ^ ' -
:'.'0 V19".:^ ^~"'-00B Pf!'..V c cîj":";*

sH^rr
.rite:- y-- -.- -^
Measurement level
Pi- l^tJiisjnaxirrûr^ dirnerjsion is
exceeded, apply TxWspècif ièd
oiq nMijc'O! en" bp- :-.,.:.! ". '.. »ni -,

r '' c n; /".mcoo. v;t l:^6 j:ici% sbic .
c -'.r-'.: ;.^;j^cj* .' to no':;,c >

.C'-:-c: f. C'RO >:'-i'-~: C "-,;.. ; 'C-
t=M
;. Mujie1f-'1..c 3 ni i
- Check the upper bore of frame 36 for corrosion and' burrs at the edging. If necessary, remove
the burrs using a scraper or a smooth file and smooth out with 600-grit emery cloth.
- Check the outer flange and its attaching screws for scratches and corrosion ; smooth out if
necessary with 600-grit crocus cloth.
- On tne skin '
- forward of frame 36 : some depression in the skin may be detected and left as found,
- aft of frame 36 : check for cracks ; if necessary, perform a dye penetrant inspection (see
Structural Repair manual - section 1),
- longitudinal cracks extending between the inner doubler front and rear attachment
holes shall be permissible as well as cracks extending on either side of these holes provided their length
does not exceed 10 mm (0.4 in).
NOTE : Only the cracks extending toward the rear will be stopped by drilling a 4 mm dia hole ;
the others will be left as found.
AA
*&fmi9*t %518
MA^à^'UMuLT^^C
IRIONS ..£ ,,' MIR AQf?f
roBREGUETÂnoN^^^ ^^ .^ -^ ^ MANUAL03
p, ,Within^he>spoGiliê(aring area, tjiftpicrpcracksandâ^sof fretting will also be permitted. -
no The abpyestpleranossare permissible only. if t^ innej doubjier is, npt itself cracked. jT .
"Z rc: ZZZ ,c;i ::- UsZz>

Should these tolerances be exceeded, apply the skin repair procedure (4th line). The skin repair
procedure will also be applied if it has been decided to apply the repair procedure at the bore of frame
36 and the skin shows permissible cracks.
B Rear attachment ~7?^c
- Inspect the taper portion of the rear pin ; smooth out any scratchêiand remove any traces of
fretting with 600-grit emery cloth. ç7. l; V x.d
- Inspect the taper bore in the ventral fin ; smooth out any traoes^f fretting and any scratches
with 600-grit emery cloth.
- .-,-. ...... -T \] .- . ..- .-. --:
C Plates and locating pins' between frames 35, 37, 38 and 40
- On the four plàtèïarïa specially that of frame 35, check for any play in their attachments.
- Check the plate bases and the locating pin holes for burrs which shall be removed, if any, using
a silicon carbide stone, and for peening in the bores. xrzcLti ;
- Check condition of the locating pins : peening or impattTmaJks on the flat portions ; smooth
out if necessary using a silicon carbide stone* '""' '
6 - FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall the ventral fins (see 03-5), making sure that the. spool properly bears on the skin.
-ctoan '! .:'!;;. .' ;u Tens ; A>;;;Cn - ot oc .i£: . ;. . .
.ncoi" i~.9fnyir.- 003ii?iv ' '.-. c' sli- ritoci-"- Cî.î "i^VCG '-'"7
' 1: viC._
-..{)ùk ;?:.- ::::w^:ifli;:
.j -.- r\ -t,jï \ SC.' C;, ;./y, ; . - j;---'. . :c~
'--{-. ,v' ' C" . CoCi iCy'l. C ... .:'..\ \ .otic. ; ' '"~ . C ui f.3Si'^ : '-' i-r- ': ê ;'is - .
s 1 -,;^c CS - h,:: : Vf eft S61|jjPLi"'fc;

*ï ;^3fi»P ' =Ci:t'?rt'f>:;u: -
.^,.. ,,.<on sî; ;:? ^d;ê ïfï:.. r---< pîbr:3T> C:;C;v : ; UJ-'j ?S' - ' ;- > ' , oî
Z''\ iï =";', : . .-'? ;nc ^tiCiC1
?n,';N- ,-d bsqqoîJ f»<,J
AA .'-
10-î RèsWfeirèi SÉ^tS1
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
REPLACEMENT OF VENTRAL FIN FRONT AND REAR ATTACHMENT PINS
A - Standard tools
-C-clamp (200 mm minimum opening).
-Two open-end wrenches 44 - 38 x 42 (for actuating tool M31 -164).
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb) P/N 1 7880.
B - Special tools
-Attaching nut tightening wrençh M31 1 38.
- Rear pin securing device M31 -1 64.
2 - MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4210
-Grease AIR 4205
-White spirit
3 - SPARES
-Front pin F240-023

-Rear pin F240-71
-Lockwasher F240-052
4 - REMOVAL OF PINS (see figure 3)
Remove the ventral fin (see 03-5).
B - Removal of front pin (on ventral fin)

Remove :
-screw 17 attaching locking angle 16,
-nut 15 attaching pin 11,
- pin 1 1 ; recover recessed washer,
-extract the pin from the ventral fin fitting.
NOTE : Should the pin be difficult to
extract, proceed as follows :
- fabricate an extraction sleeve from a
length of tube suited to the diameter of
the top of the fitting and closed off
with a plate (which may be welded),
allowing a clearance of approximately
1 cm (0.39 in) between the plate and
the top of the pin,
- use a C-clamp of an appropriate
shape so that one end can be inserted
through the fitting access door to
bear against the pin threaded end,
with the other end clamping the top
of the extraction sleeve (see sketch).
If necessary, grind the edges of the
C-clamp lower clamping face to improve
its positioning under the threaded
portion.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iLjk-^Vl "'-':~^ --^.^ VlOVI,»>^r>>< ^rd "
fOWWr.'^^^ ***«*& > 0*-~^ MANUAL 03
Insert a protective shim (AGoybë^w^ lower clamping face.
C - Replacement of front pin
- Before installing the new pin :

i\ -check the ventral fin fitting taper>b(»e?toro^^
:.-; [==-...' ''
-Install the new pin lightly greased <MR;4i2û5).rs es-uLs. oiq gni!s3.E "l-c:-:- s:' : c_^
itî^^èmovahof rear pin (onsfuselage) c '.); -.: : e.- c: vewâi sr* w ?i noab e?s^ï u> - ilB^P
-Unsafety and remove special upper screw 24 (access in engine compartment at frame
39).
- Discard the lockwasher. 5 "-CO s^. . ooo y&o v. .srr.-VwUt :u rniitsi - 'f''\A
-Extract the pin. .Z-Z-ZZ- ->t : <*<:' \£ ctic;; : "-.. --.
E - Replacement of rear pin

installing the new pin :
- Before
-check the upper and lower self-aligning bearings for corrosion or §éràfches percep¬
tible with a fingernail (if necessary, sand the bearings with 600-grit crocus cfotb:),
-using the new pin, check the upper self-aligning bearing for normal nutation and
ensure that the lower self-aligning bearing does not rotate, .' -A £\£ ; ~~
-lightly grease the self-aligning bearings (AIR 4210). Q o
-Install the new pin, then fit the special screw complete with a new'tackwasker;. ;-r '
- Prevent the pin from rotating with tool M31 -1 64.
-Torque the screw to 6 m.daN (44.25 ft.lb).
- Safety the screw. SrrT^'
v.H'O- ' '" "' ''" "V "",/>'. 'A3? -"O
.nncyt»A!y-^n,'/-!-J9m.njr?:i'-'.,':r,:"iW-.' v'^'Tf"'
ro 8r" Z.O '.i^v,'.... .'-."-..", . v :-.j;o;."i-;,i:- .cub .rteuid ^rr\ j-^ ^y. , .
,; TS .'M ûv:A 4!/siJYH'.*30cOJri:jlF'r StflATÔO- &^\0 ' "_

rZi'fj,,.Xy
.xcvjoa ;>."". : ft 5 :cù yio c : wc

UnifC' 'i'CiC: 3 -Ç* V^ >.,:' ,' ;i6 Luli ?SO,: ...... ,3^3 "
.." STbno-uv:; : " : .S'-'O ^f-:i - .-; ..-cOO-o .:'+» r'o 'v,.-
,.3ÎC-i?'V ?,:; c. "-""- '" '
.,: >,=? i j , : '., ."-.- ::c;;. : HrZ\Trl,:>ni 1:^,. ... .: -"ijj; iHï-ç< -- ^r ; . >
:.i ;.'.' ;-:":>;.t; c:w. '.-. 7 9Z*.' Viôl'On&f'- ?-;0:is <T*y.:~ .'
:':. 'i?iiC"1 .Xo'.Y -'"":' "- -f1!!!? rjf:iiF.pd nio,v-' - ; VPme .CiTOiJ :'lt:..!? -, ;T'
Z. ;;!c'.3V"* :*;; *: -."c ''mie nsbocv. 6 ...

.;.,;." c c c:-> --,*.".. :-.: '_: c. lS.r-. -^?ii vr*7SiY":',~-.: Z" r;-: :
c -' -'v ;>t io ^^ Ç^* i ^ 'o '-.?;> ;;.y-:qqA

ic ::; i>i9fnnj;.,- . - tv riri-v M't^^ pC ooj trf1: ' ^-..
C".:. C;;iTnf53li. c ...'..: ., : ' c .;:.) Z\ ~"~ x'i'.V^Z ~-."

-, '.--" c;v*W' ' --. çr'-c!'- ; i; ?Pv/ ii io! ,'f'' . ^ .:,:.;;:
AA
03 87: Restricie'd 5-802
TC
MIRAGE F
GO JA-jMAM'**"^ ^b* «WWn
-
^ nMwmï03
RENEWAL OF INSPECTION DOOR SEALING

c-niqmr,;-, .- .-, >i -:a--Z':r Z 'i; ':-:. ïmo -::c'.ï nt>9Wlo<l fr* .;.-'-.; re ;, ,-. .^.c ,, f u-jtrii
niq ' ....i ':. ',;;-:. 3 .*.:; ^9 B -- 3

1 - SCOPE
- ' r\ln - ' " --.' -3 i;..-"V 't- -
To determine the piocèdare for renewing inspection door sealing in general, exclave of fuel tank
door sealing. The various sealing procedures are described-Hi» thistsection. ed) !: ;> .
Sealing of these doors is to be renewed as required except awicockpit doors Where it4s%>- be
performed before each reinstallation.
;. CiLC-.,:-C;;"n."- : efHP>"'c :" -C'CC'Cc; '
,;3£
NOTE : - sealing of equipment bay door : see 03-0-5
- sealing of gun blast tubes : see 03-2-3.
2- MATERIALS
- Primer f>207 <o y^zcr-.oc, "'. "..-",:.: r-uiyils-^c '?.'<--' bn- i3c
- Tecsil T/2036a ? c- cÔ:- .-::i-.v , :^r - ? -.: -- v .' . "7c -idr
-Cirisolwa* .^- . ^qc.
' :.,-. ..-- ,.. * -
- Sealant PR 1422 A2 - 1422 B2 - 1422 B1/2t; ! cr^r m cïit, u«fié
- Abrasive paper No. 320 0 \) ?! î :^ f ^«.'^
- Methytethylketorae- c a : c >je!cmoc c;.!i:cy 'Ssfe ::: :::
; -,
- Paraffin ^-7:' :/:* c.^.-: ^"-v icnacjcr -oil nk- e-rij :hp- c.i'"
- Fairprene seal , j. -7- T~ ?
-ProchalQZ11B
3- RENEWAL OF SEALING ON DOORS AND FAIRINGS (figure 11)
A On aircraft structure (door framing)

- Carefully clean using methylethylketone.
- Using a fine and soft bristle brush, apply demolding product Prochal QZ11B ort the door rest.
CAUTION :
PRODUCT QZ11B CONTAINS TRlCHLOROÉTHYLlNE AND MUST NOT BE USED ON
TITANIUM ALLOYS.
Allow to dry for 5 minutes approx.

-
Apply a second coat and allow to dry for 5 more minutes.
-
- Make sure that the product has been applied over all the appropriate surfaces. After drying, a
thin whitish film remains visible.
- Softly rub the coated surfaces without insisting, using a soft and lintless cloth.
On titanium alloys, mandatorily use Cirisol wax as demolding agent.
- Using a clean cloth, smear the whole bearing surface with wax. Polish until a bright surface is
obtained.
B On door
- Using a wooden spatula, remove the former PR sealant coat.
- Using methylethylketone, carefully clean the area to be coated with sealant. Dry.
- a coat of PR 1 422 B2 or 1 422 B1/2.
Apply
Install the door on aircraft with its normal attachment (to obtain the same pressure as on the
-
operating seal).
- When the sealant is dry (12 hours approx.), clean the door framing and remove the excess sealant.
The products used (QZ1 1 B and wax) are easily eliminated with methylethylketone.
AA #%.
05-80
J... -c
...
Restricted.
a-s. .3 >.-.*<..-.. .
5rr803.
^-
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL-^biJl MIRAGE F
BREGUET ÀVIATION^^P=_^<C> ^ .».»,«.««
^^ ^^ Restrîctmé MANUAL 03
4- RENEWAL OF COCKPIT POOR SËALWG (door tO-04 (08» (figure 12)
-Clean the coating surface (door and structure framing) and attaching screws with
methyfethylketone.
- Coat the door bearing surface with PR 1422 A2 sealant. Also apply a PR bead under screw heads.
- Install the door and attach it.
- Remove the excess sealant.
- Allow to dry (48 hours minimum at 20 °C).
6- RENEWAL OF SEALING ON DOORS FITTED WITH SEALS (11.03-11.09) (figure 11)
Using methylethylketone carefully Clean the structure section to be fitted with the seal. Remove
any trace Of sealant from the former seal. Complete the operation by rubbing with fine abrasive paper
No. 320.
- Coat the area so prepared with primer P 207. Allow to dry for 1 hour.
- Quickly lay a bead of Tecsil T/2036 and spread it into a thin coat (approx. 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
thick). For greater bonding lengths,proceed by sections of 50 to 60 cm (1 .64 to 2 ft).
- Place the seal. Allow to dry for 2 hours.
AÂ
1F-F1K50AD-2-04
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL 04
FLIGHT CONTROLS
MIRAGE F1AD
AIRCRAFT
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT- BREGUET AVIATION
RE-ISSUE 1990
RESTRICTED
MAY 1990
MIRAGE F
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAUL1
BREGUET AVIATION^
-î^&Ss.
***=*£> Restricted MAINTENANCE MANUAL 04
INDEX DES PAGES

»
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiqije les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
PAGE C DATE R PAGE C . DATE R PAGE C DATE R
A AD 05/90 1-105 AA 10/73 1-402 AB 06/87

B AD 05/90 1-106 AA 07/78 1-403 AB 06/87
C AD 05/90 1-107 AA 07/78 1-404 AB 06/87
D AD 05/90 1-108 AD 04/75 1-404H AA 09/86
E/F AD 05/90 1-109 AA 10/73 1-404R AA 09/86
1-110 AB 07/72 1-405 AB 06/87
VII AC 07/74 1-111 AB 05/76 1-406 AB 06/87
III AC 07/75 1-112 AD 04/77 1-501 AB 08/84
IV AC 11/75 1-113 AC 04/77 1-502 AA 05/74
V/VI AD 01/77 1-114 AA 07/72 1-503 AB 05/74
VII/VIII AJ 10/78 1-115 AC 05/76 1-504 AB 04/75
IX AC 06/74 1-116 AC 05/76 1-506 AB 09/85
X AC 06/74 1-117 AC 07/74 - 1-507 AB 09/85
XI AC 06/74 1-118 AA 07/72 1-508 AB 09/85
XII AC 06/74 1-119 AA 10/73 1-509 AA 09/85
XIII/XIV AC 06/74 1-120 AB 04/77 1-509M AA 06/87
XV AC 06/74 1-120M AB 04/77 1-510 AB 01/86
XVI AC 06/74 1-121 AC 05/76 1-511 AB 09/86
XVII AC 06/74 1-122 AB 04/75 1-512 AB 06/87
XVIII AC 06/74 1-123 AB 04/75 1-513 AB 06/87
XIX AC 06/74 1-124 AC 04/75 1-514 AA 06/87
XX AC 02/80 1-125 AA 10/73 1-515 AA 03/78
1-126 AA 07/72 1-516 AB 01/78
0- 1 AC 02/82 1-127 AB 09/85 1-517 AC 01/84
0-101 AB 07/72 1-128 AA 10/73 1-518 AC 01/86
0-102 AB 07/72 1-129 AA 10/73 1-519 AC 11/81
0-301 AA 10/73 1-130 AB 06/87 1-520 AA 04/77
0-302 AA 10/80 1-131 AA 10/80 1-521 AC 02/85
0-303 AA 07/72 1-132 AA 07/72 1-522 AD 01/86
0-307 AA 06/87 1-133 AB 09/86 1-523 AC 01/86
0-308 AA 06/87 1-301 AA 09/88 1-523M AB 01/86
0-309 AB 05/74 1-302 AC 09/86 1-524 AB 03/81
0-310 AA 09/88 1-303 AB 09/86 1-525 AD 06/87
Q-311 AA 09/88 1-304 AA 09/86 1-526 AF 06/87
0-312 AB 01/84 1-305 AC 01/86 1-527 AD 09/86
0-313 AB 11/75 1-306 AB 05/85 1-527M AA 09/86
0-314 AB 02/85 1-306M AC 01/86 1-528 AF 10/81
0-315 AC 10/80 1-306T AA 05/85 1-529 AE 09/86
0-316 AA 04/83 1-306W AA 05/85 1-530 AC 06/87
0-317 AF 02/82 1-307 AC 03/81 1-530M AA 01/86
1-308 AA 03/83 1-531 AA 01/84
1- 1 AB 01/86 1-309 AA 03/83 1-532 AA 01/84
1- 2 AA 03/83 1-309M AA 12/84 1-532H AA 01/84
1-001 AA 05/78 1-309T AA 03/83 1-532R AA 06/87
1-002 AB 10/73 1-310 AB 12/80 1-533 AA 12/74
1-101 AB 04/75 1-311 AC 09/86 1-534 AC 04/75
1-102 AB 07/72 1-312 AB 11/85 1-535 AB 12/87
1-103 AB 05/78 1-313 AA 04/83 1-536 AC 04/75
1-104 AC 11/74 1-401 AB 06/87 1-537 AA 06/87
F1AD
05/90 Rest/icted A
ITxJ
l\ f\irc/ AOI. r
AVIONS MARCEL 0ASSAUL1r JL^
BREGUET AVIATION . ^""^Sw
INDEX DES PAGES

L'astérisque ndlque les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
L/S7 OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq ue les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
The asterisk i ndicat »s pages changed or added and
ORIGINAL ISSUE
1-538 AA 12/74 2-301 AA 09/86 2-521 AA 02/77

1-539 AC 04/75 2-302 AA 09/86 2-522 AA 05/74
1-540 AA 07/76 2-303 AA 03/83 2-523 AB 04/77
1-541 AB 04/77 2-304 AA 03/83 '2-524 AC 04/75
1-542 AA 05/85 2-304M AA 09/86 2-525 AD 09/85
1-544 AA 09/86 2-304T AA 03/83 2-526 AD 03/83
1-546 AA 09/81 2-305 AB 08/83 2-527 AC 02/75
1-547 AA 09/81 2-306 AA 08/84 2-528 AA 12/87
1-548 AA 04/83 2-307 AB 04/80 2-529 AB 04/77
2-307M AA 09/76 2-530 AB 12/87
2- 1 AA 06/87 2-308 AB 04/83 2-531 AB 04/77
2- 2 AA 06/87 2-309 AA 02/82 2-532 AA 12/74
2-001 AA 10/73 2-310 AB 09/86 2-533 AA 09/86
2-002 AB 03/78 2-311 AB 09/86 2-534 AB 06/87
2-003 AA 10/73 2-312 AA 09/86 2-535 AB 09/86
2-101 AA 10/75 2-313 AA 09/86 2-536 AA 12/80
2-102 AA 10/76 2-314 AB 04/85 2-537 AB 09/85
2-103 AG 09/88 2-315 AB 04/85 2-538 AA 09/85
2-104 AA 10/78 2-316 AB 09/86 2-539 AA 09/85
2-105 AA 10/73 2-318 AB 12/84 2-540 AA 09/86
2-106 AB 10/73 2-319 AB 12/84 2-541 AA 09/86
2-107 AA 07/78 2-319M AA 12/84 2-542 AA 09/86
2-108 AC 10/78 2-320 AA 09/85 2-551 AA 06/87
2-109 AF 04/77 2-321 AA 09/85 2-552 AA 06/87
2-110 AA 07/72 2-322 AA 09/85 2-553 AA 06/87
2-111 AB 10/77 2-401 AB 06/87 2-801 AA 10/73
2-112 AA 07/72 2-402 AB 06/87 2-802 AB 10/73
2-113 AD 04/77 2-403 AA 06/87 2-803 AA 06/87
2-114 AA 10/73 2-501 AA 07/72 2-804 AA 06/87
2-115 AA 10/73 2-503 AB 04/77 2-805 AA 04/83
2-116 AB 10/73 2-504 AB 10/73
2-117 AA 10/73 2-505 AB 10/73 3- 1 AA 09/81
2-117M AB 11/7!: 2-506 AB 10/73 3- 2 AA 12/74
2-118 AB 10/73 2-507 AB 06/87 3-001 AA 10/73
2-119 AA 10/7!: 2-508 AC 06/87 3-002 AB 07/72
2-120 AC 05/7(: 2-508M AB 02/82 3-101 AA 10/73
2-121 AB 10/73 2-509 AC 01/84 3-102 AC 02/85
2-122 AA 10/75 2-510 AB 12/80 3-103 AA 10/73
2-123 AC 07/74 t 2-511 AD 02/82 3-104 AA 04/83
2-124 AC 07/7' p
2-512 AB 05/74 3-105 AC 07/74

2-125 AC 07/7' r 2-513 AA 10/78 3-106 AD 04/75
2-125M AC 07/7' 2-514 AB 11/74 3-107 AA 10/73
2-126 AB 10/7: 2-515 AC 05/81 3-108 AB 07/72
2-127 AA 07/7i 2-516 AC 04/80 3-109 AA 07/72
2-128 AB 07/7; 2-517 AA 04/77 3-110 AB 07/72
2-129 AA 09/8* 2-518 AC 01/86 3-111 AA 07/72
2-130 AA 09/8É 2-519 AD 11/81 3-il2 AB 10/73
2-131 AA 09/8e 2-519M AB 11/81 3-113 AA 10/73
2-132 AB. 09/8e 2-520 AC 10/78 3-114 AB 10/73
F1AD
05/90 Restr icted B
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ., ^C"^
ÎS5!5*0 Restricted MAINTENANCE MANUAL 04
INDEX DES PAGES

L'astérisque indique' les pages révisées ou nouvelles et la
The asterisk indicatt ?s pages changed or added and
ORIGINAL ISSUE
3-115 AC 04/80 3-527 AA 04/83 4-139 BB 03/80

3-116 AA 10/73 3-801 AA 06/87 4-140 BA 01/77
3-117 AC 07/74 3-802 AB 06/87 4-141 BB 05/77
3-118 AC 06/78 4-142 BA 01/77
3-119 AA 07/72 4- 1 BB 06/87 4-143 BA 01/77
3-120 AA 07/72 4- 2 BB 06/87 4-144 BB 05/77
3-121 AA 09/75 4-001 BB 05/77 4-145 BA 03/85
3-122 AB 10/73 4-002 BA 01/77 4-301 BB 05/77
3-123 AA 07/72 4-003 BB 10/77 4-302 BB 05/77
3-124 AA 07/72 4-004 BB 05/77 4-303 BB 06/85
3-125 AB 06/87 4-005 BB 03/80 4-304 BA 12/80
3-301 AA 09/88 4-101 BB 05/77 4-305 BA 12/80
3-302 AA 06/85 4-102 BB 05/77 4-306 BA 12/80
3-303 AB 05/74 4-103 BA 01/77 4-307 BA 12/80
3-3Ô4 AB 02/85 4-104 BD 10/78 4-308 BB 12/80
3-305 AC 09/88 4-105 BB 05/77 4-309 BB 12/80
3-306 AA 09/88 4-106 BB 05/77 4-310 BB 10/78
3-307 AB 09/88 4-107 BA 04/80 4-311 BA 04/82
3-308 AC 09/88 4-108 BA 06/78 4-312 BB 04/82
3-308M AC 09/88 4-109 BC 05/77 4-313 BB 02/85
3-401 AB 06/87 4-110 BB 03/78 4-314 BA 03/85
3-402 AB 06/87 4-111 BB 04/82 4-315 BB 09/86
3-501 AA 06/87 4-112 BB 10/80 4-316 . BB 09/86
3-502 AA 04/79 4-113 BA 01/77 4-317 BB 09/86
3-504 AB 04/77 4-114 BA 01/77 4-318 BB 05/77
3-505 AB 10/79 4-115 BA 01/77 4-319 BA 09/85
3-506 AB 06/87 4-116 BA 01/77 4-401 BB 06/87
3-507 AB 06/87 4-117 BB 05/77 4-402 BB 06/87
3-508 AA 04/75 4-118 BA 01/77 4-403 BA 06/87
3-509 AB 05/74 4-119 BB 06/85 4-501 BA 09/86
3-510 AC 05/81 4-120 BB 05/77 4-502 BA 09/86
3-511 AC 04/79 4-121 BB 03/80 4-503 BA 04/82
3-512 AA 02/75 4-122 BA 01/77 4-504 BA 01/77
3-512M AB 12/87 4-123 BB 05/77 4-505 BA 04/82
3-513 AC 02/85 4-124 BA 01/77 4-506 BA 04/83
3-513M AB 09/86 4-125 BB 03/80 4-507 BB 05/77
3-514 AB 02/85 4-126 BB 04/82 4-508 BB 12/80
3-515 AB 02/85 4-127 BA 01/77 4-508M BA 12/80
3-516 AC 02/85 4-128 BB 09/88 4-509 BA 09/86
3-517 AA 12/80 4-129 BB 02/82 4-510 BA 06/87
3-518 AB 09/86 4-130 BA 02/81 4-511 BB 12/80
3-519 AA 09/86 4-131 BA 02/81 4-511M BA 12/80
3-519M AA 12/80 4-132 BA 01/77 4-512 BB 05/77
3-520 AA 06/87 4-133 BB 09/77 4-513 BB 06/87
3-521 AA 06/87 4-134 BB 05/77 4-514 BB 06/87
3-522 AA 06/87 4-135 BB 05/77 4-515 BB 09/88
3-524 AA 12/80 4-136 BA 01/77 4-516 BB 09/88
3-525 AA 04/83 4-137 BB 10/80 4-517 BA 09/88
3-526 AA 09/81 4-138 BB 04/83 4-518 BA 09/88
F1AD
05/90 Resti'icted C
fT\j MIRAGE F
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]if£ ^^Ss.
BREGUET AVIATION ><S~^C«^"^tC^^"*^
INDEX DES PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq ue les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
4-519 BA 01/77 4-567 BB 03/80 5-403 AA 03/85

4-520 BB OS/11 4-568 BC 12/81 5-404 AB 03/85
4-521 BB 07/79 4-569 BA 09/77 5-405 AB 09/88
4-522 BB 04/83 4-573 BA 06/85 5-406 AB 03/85
4-523 BB 09/86 4-574 BA 08/83 5-407 AB 03/85
4-524 BB 10/78 4-574M BA 12/80 5-501 AA 09/80
4-525 BB 09/86 4-575 BA 09/88 5-502 AA 09/80
4-525M BA 12/80 4-580 BA 06/87 5-503 AB 03/85
4-526 BB 05/79 4-581 BA 06/87 5-504 AB 03/85
4-527 BC 09/86 4-582 BA 06/87 5-505 AA 09/88
4-528 BA 02/85 4-583 BA 06/87 5-506 AB 09/85
4-529 BB 09/86 4-584 BA 06/87 5-507 AB 06/87
4-530 BB 09/86 4-585 BA 06/87 5-508 AB 09/86
4-531 BB 06/87 4-586 BA 06/87 5-509 AB 06/87
4-532 BB 09/86 4-587 BA 06/87 5-510 AA 03/85
4-533 BB 02/85 4-588 BA 06/87 5-701 AB 10/73
4-534 BB 02/85 4-589 BA 06/87 5-702 AA 06/83
4-535 BB 02/85 4-590 BA 06/87
4-536 BB 02/85 4-591 BA 06/87
4-537 BB 09/81 4-801 BA 01/77
4-538 BB 09/88 4-802 BB 05/77
4-539 BB 09/86 4-803 BA 01/77
4-540 BB 09/86
4-541 BB 09/86 5- 1 AA 12/80
4-542 BB 09/86 5- 2 AA 04/75
4-543 BB 09/86 5-001 AA 07/72
4-544 BB 01/86 5-101 AB 10/76
4-545 BB 09/81 5-102 AB 06/78
4-546 BA 09/77 5-103 AC 10/76
4-547 BA 09/77 5-104 AG 06/78
4-548 BA 03/80 5-105 AA 07/72
4-549 BB 03/80 5-106 AD 03/77
4-550 BB . 03/80 5-107 AA 10/76
4-551 BB 03/80 5-108 AM 06/80
4-552 BB 03/80 5-109 AA 10/73
4-553 BB 03/80 5-110 AB 10/76
4-554 BB 03/80 5-111 AA 10/73
4-555 BB 03/80 5-112 AB 10/76
4-556 BB 03/80 5-113 AA 01/79
4-557 BB 03/80 5-201 AA 06/80
4-558 BB 03/80 5-301 AB 06/87
4-559 BC 02/85 5-302 AB 03/85
4-560 BB 03/80 5-304 AA 09/79
4-561 BB 03/80 5-305 AA 03/85
4-562 BC 03/80 5-306 AA 09/79
4-563 BC 03/80 5-307 AB 10/76
4-564 BB 03/80 5-308 AB 03/85
4-565 BB 12/81 5-401 AB 03/85
4-566 BB 02/85 5-402 AB 03/85
F1AD
05/90 Restr icted D
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL^ZT^X.
MIRAGE F

LIST OF AIRCRAFT MODIFICATIONS WHICH HAVE RESULTED
IN MANUAL UPDATING
The present manual includes the modifications applicable to the aircraft basic
technical definition
454 (FF91) 459 (FF43) - 464 (FF61) - 488 (FF74) 508 (FF89) - 54 1 (FF1 15)
Change 1 of May 1979 including following modifications :
513 (FF98) - 518 (FF144) - 604 (FF169) - 605 (FF170)
Change 2 of July 1980 including following modification :
547 (FF237) - 682. (FF222)
Change 3 of June 1981 including following modification :
695 (FF 238)
Change 4 of June including following modification :
757 (FF268)
modifications :
778 (FF286) - 823 (FF310)
F1AD
05-90 Restricted E/F
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FLIGHT CONTROLS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION Page
INTRODUCTION iii
COMPOSITION AND USE OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS ix
1 ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM 1-1
2 PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM 2-1
3 RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM 3-1
4 HIGH-LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM 4-1
5 AIRBRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 5-1
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [I^J^^T^l
MIRAGE F
Restricted
INTRODUCTION
- Servicing
- Trouble shooting
Removal-disassembly
-
- Inspection-maintenance-adjustment
instructions, etc.
Thus :
It summarizes :
It defines :
-The table of periodic maintenance operations which summarizes all the maintenance operations
AC
07-75 Restricted »«
BREGUET AVIATION___
]L>^rll
_ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted
It gives :
- parking-mooring,
- ground handling,
- tyres,
- engine starting,
- run-up.
AC
11-75 Restricted iv
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /
BREGUET AVIATION^^ . "
'"V MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
SUB Pilot
Servicing Flight Hydraulic
environment

andiafety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Maintenance
cycle
operations
points Lighting
Tightening forward Pitch Air
Ground Main L/G internal
2 torques section Fuel system
'handling controls doors and conditioning
I nspection (up to
doors external
frame 22)

and Failure
systems

Nose L/G
Pilot
Tail unit High-lift installation
4 products Tires ejection
Draining
Pre-f light
Removable Engine
components
inspections control

Transporta¬
6 tion
for controls
mission
Engine Brakes and

7 braking
starting
system
Anti-shimmy
Run-up
8 and steering
Check flights
controls
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
NWS - radio NWS
SUB NWS NWS
CHAP general communi¬ control and operational Wiring
electronics armament recording
and AP
systems
General General General General General General General General

0 information information information information information information information information
and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Use of Index of
testing and V/UHF Flight electrical
Pitot Armament Gun
1 trouble system system
control
panel
and
system
Rocket
26 V - 400 Hz UHF Air data Wiring Fatigue
system

3 Gyro system
Close combat
VOR/ILS Air-to-Air
5 IFF
marker missile
systems
Navigation Radar
6 system detector
Radar
Electronic
7 counter-
altimeter
measures
Reconnais¬
Radio
8 sance
compass
system
Towing
system
9
practice
targets
AJ
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H^^-Â MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^^ ^
Restricted
A - A title page identifying the publication.

Section Sub-Section title

No
0 - General
5 - Inspection-Check- Adjustment
Painting
8 - Repair
NOTE:
AC
06-74 Restricted *
t -JP-^^Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^- ^ ^ .
Restricted

aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
an aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
:
separatedocumentation or, if applicable, in the documentation i'.nown as the incorporated
components.
AC
06-74 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti-^-^-r^.
BREGUET AVIATION îiF3, _
MIRAGE F
_ Restricted
information will be. found :
the operation.

B Fuselage doors
AC
06-74 Restricted xi
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ ^-"-^ /VIIIxMOL T
BREGUET AVIATION^5L __A
_ Restricted
C Wing doors

the trailing edge.
V138.
E - Stabilator doors. Same principle as for the wings.

- wiring diagrams.
indicator lights.
made.
charts :
AC
BREGUET AVIATION. -^S0
Restricted

Single-pole
control switch Single-pole
42R contactor
Fuse-breaker
V Coaxial connector
Terminal, lug Box

1-wire lead
Double-pole
Three-pole
2-wire lead
Connector
~ 3-* circuit-breaker
Double-pole
contactor
I 1 2 3 |" Single pole
3-wire lead
on equipment
Spring-loaded,
both directions
42Z Single-pole
pushbutton
Double-pole
Independent n, n-wire lead
control switch
8 connector
o
Single pole I Spring-loaded,
<f Bus bars
Crossing without control switch ? one direction
Double-pole
connection
pushbutton
& ^
Light or lamp
^XH
Crossing with
Magnetically-held
connection
pushbutton
Relay
Coaxial connector -Z~\ Press-to-test
^y light
Single-pole
double-throw Z
Antenna switch
Double-pole
-M- Diode nh DC ground

double-throw
switch
Time delay
relay
e
<H3- Pushbutton
light
Zener diode
Double-pole
triple-throw
Flashing
-4 Resistor ^=r AC ground switch
- relay
H-
AC
06-74 Restricted xiii/xiv xiii/xiv
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS :
â Chassis ground
NPN
cj Computing power ground transistor
P4
Terminal 6 of
test connector P4
TDX3
Differential tor PNP
o
synchro transistor
CDX
o transmitter
o n-position
o
o
selector switch
o Thyristor
o
TR
Resolver
RS
Triac
I A Relay LV
-Ô- H§}~- & Linvar
Magnetron
-8 Cam-actuator
contact
Thermostat
|
Hi-
"|
Capacitor
Potentiometer mi) Thyratron
Fuse | / ~[ Thermistor
Initiator
Comparator
Photo-electric cell
*?à M ) Mot6r
Inductor
Amplifier
Transformer
Failure Electronic
detector unit
( MG } "Motor-generator K/t- Single TR
Tachometer- Double TR
GT
generator
AC
06-74 Restricted xv
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted

..«. _- --- Mechanical link
-0 or Cam
-ïN
/)
Mechanical clutch
-©
Mechanical differential
® Non-return valve r7*i Level switch

(thermistor)
Pressure reducing valve Electrically-operated cock.
relief valve
Float switch
r_ Non-return flapper Pressure switch
EP = Electro-pump
B Fuel stop valve
P = Pump
or test connection
T Pressure
© Stop air valve
© Restrictor Transfer valve
T~i. Filler plug


system
System No.2
WDêOêlJÊ e mergency system

systems
DEM :i hydraulic systems
AC
06-74 Restricted xvi
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

dimension
of the rectangle is nota requirement.
&
AND
1
>\ OR
one or more input states are l 's .
1
NOT
3-
&
NAND (NOT-AND)
D-
a II the input states are l 's .
>\ NOR (OR-NOT)

D-
one or more input states are l's .
LOGIC EQUATIONS
Example : S = (A + B + C) (D + E)
or S = B and D or E
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJÎ -^-"-^l /VllKMvjC I
BREGUET AVIATION^£. _ ^
Restricted

the Manual number in the top R/H corner.
-


7- CROSS-REFERENCES

within a same section I

The units of measure are written'as follows :
units.
dimensions, etc.).
AC
BREGUET AVIATION, ^ZE^
Restricted
pages).
A Procedure

-insertion of new pages and replacement of modified pages.
B Page numbering
3rd insertion
Successive
2nd insertion
insertions
1 st insertion
\ t
ABCDEFGH KLMNPQRS UVWXY
I »
2 pages
Simultaneous I
insertions
3 pages
AC XIX
06-74 Restricted
BREGUET
lLJ>^S±
AVIATION^-jiF^^k*^
MIRAGE F
^Cssfce*-"^^, Restricted
Example :

2 pages : they will be numbered 6H and 6R.

AV («avant») = Front Lgt(«longeronnet») = False spar
C («cadre») = F.rame M («médiane») = Middle
AC
0280 Restricted xx
BREGUET
tL^^r^L
AVIATION^^jl _ _
MIRAGE F
SECTION 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
- General 0-101
0-2 SAFETY MEASURES
- Safety measures to be taken for personnel protection see 01-0

- Instructions to be followed when working on systems see 01-0
- General instructions for starting and operating the various aircraft systems see 01-0
- Instructions for using ground support equipment see 01-0
0-3 INSPECTION -CHECK -ADJUSTMENT
- Precautions to be taken when working on flight control system hydraulic

equipment 0-301
- Leak check on flight control system hydraulic equipment 0-302
- Inspection and servicing of servo-controls 0-307
- Torque to be applied to locknuts on flight control connecting rods -
Procedure for adjusting rods 0-310
- Special operations to be carried out on flight control equipment 0-316
- Inspection of control stick boots 0-31 7
Figure No. Page
1 FLIGHT CONTROLS 0-102

2 SERVICING OF SERVO-CONTROLS 0-309
3 ROLL CONTROL - TIGHTENING TORQUES 0-312
4 PITCH CONTROL - TIGHTENING TORQUES 0-313
5 RUDDER CONTROL - TIGHTENING TORQUES 0-314
6 HIGH-LIFT DEVICE CONTROL - TIGHTENING TORQUES 0-315
AC
BREGUET AVIATION,.
ÏLJ^^T^ZX. MIRAGE F
GENERAL
(Figure 1)
Flight controls are provided with conventional control surfaces on the three axes :
- Ailerons and spoilers (roll axis)

- Stabilators (pitch axis)
- Rudder (yaw axis).
Each control surface is actuated by a dual-barrel (tandem arrangement) servo-control driven by a

mechanical linkage.
Stabilator and rudder servo-controls can also be fed with electrical commands.
Conventional controls are completed by the following :
- High-lift devices, consisting of :

Inboard leading edge slats (which are just drooping slats) and outboard leading edge slats
-
sliding on tracks and providing a slot in extended position.
- Slotted wing flaps (fixed slot) sliding on tracks.
- Speedbrakes, driven by single-barrel hydraulic jacks.
No balancing device is provided on control surfaces.
Hydraulic system :
Controls are supplied from two separate systems :

- Hydraulic system 1
- Hydraulic system 2
Geometrical characteristics of control surfaces :

Area
- Aileron 2 x 0,47 m2 (2 x 5.05 sq.ft)

- Spoiler 2 x 0,52 m2 (2 x 5.59 sq.ft)
-Stabilator 2 x 3,12 m2 (2 x 33.56 sq.ft)
- Rudder 0,66 m2 (7.09 sq.ft)
- Slotted slat
- Droop slat
- Inboard wing flap 2 x 0,99 m2 (2 x 1 0.64 sq.ft)
- Outboard wing flap . . 2 x 0,53 m2 (2 x 5.70 sq.ft)
-Speedbrake 2 x 0,38 m2 (2 x 4.08 sq.ft)
Moreover, flight controls are provided with flying aids and with an autopilot (See manual 10).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^-Ê°
Direction
Rudder
Gauchissement
Roll
Volet interne
Inboard wing flap
Volet extern
Outboard wing flap Hypersustentateurs
High-lift devices
Bec externe
Outboard leading edge slat
Bee interne
Inboard leading edge slat
FIGURE 1 - COMMANDES DE VOL

FLIGHT CONTROLS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^-Ji^X. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^SF^^^ ..,....., .,
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN WORKING ON

FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
1- SCOPE
This sheet summarizes the necessary precautions to be taken when working on flight control
system hydraulic equipment.
Take all the necessary precautions required for working on hydraulic system (See 07-0).
3- SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
A Servo-control
Servo-controls with fixed or moving barrel are adjusted in factory to the same center-to-center
distance, with very close tolerances. The length of servo-controls provided with a fixed barrel should
never be adjusted, as such servo-controls include a mechanical follow-up device connected between the
piston and the control bellcrank. Any modification of the center-to-center distance will require the
servo-control to be sent to 4 th line repair facilites for complete adjustment.
B Releasable bellcrank
Before pressurizing the hydraulic system fully or partially, it is imperative that the operator should
check that both connections between releasable bellcrank and servo-control are either both coupled or
both uncoupled (risk of damage to a releasable bellcrank lever). Severe damages will also be caused to
both components in the case where one of these two connections is uncoupled (even for a short time)
while hydraulic pressure is applied in one system. When reinstalling a releasable bellcrank, make sure to
use the bellcrank attaching pin mounting thimble so as not to damage the internal seals.
C Bleeding of stabilator releasable bellcranks
In order to use the whole capacity of the accumulator built into the electrically-operated selector
valve controlling the releasable bellcranks, it is necessary that the hydraulic lines located between two
components should be bled after complete filling of hydraulic system 1. Three bleed screws are
provided for that purpose on each releasable bellcrank.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^-^r^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^jâF0^^
LEAK CHECK ON FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM HYDRAULIC

EQUIPMENT
1 - SCOPE
To check that hydraulic leaks are within permissible tolerances.
2- LEAK CHECK
A Leak description
A leak on a moving component can be defined as follows : wetting over a large surface where the
amount of leaking fluid can be measured. A leak can be expressed in drops.
NOTE : It is normal for a moving component to show a surface wet from leaking fluid, the amount
of which cannot be measured (drop).
B - External leak static check with or without pressure applied

(1 ) On jacks and servo-controls provided with dynamic seals :
- A slight wetting should be considered as normal. In the case where a leak is noticed, do not wipe
the jack at leaking point but proceed as follows :
(a) Place a white paper sheet under suspected point and watch the jack for 15 minutes. Five drops
only are allowed during that lapse of time, otherwise change the component.
(b) In the case where less than 5 drops are noticed, and in the case doubts persist, it is recommended
to perform the leak dynamic check.
(2) On other components not provided with dynamic seals :
Seepage is generally tolerated provided that no drop forms in less than 30 minutes (hydraulic
system pressurized or not).
(3) On couplings :
- No seepage is permitted.
C External leak dynamic check
This operation is to be performed if the results of the static check are not satisfactory.
(1 ) Preparation
Wipe the jack (never use compressed air for this purpose).
-
white paper sheet under the jack.
- Place a
- Do not wipe the jack again during following operations.
- Apply pressure to the system.
- Operate the servo-control at least 10 times (complete cycle : retraction + extension) so as to
steady the leak.
NOTE : The leak flow may vary during the first cycles, depending on the time during which the
servo-control has remained inoperative.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^cL
tL^^r\L
^^
MIRAGE F
- Once the last drop caused by stabilization cycles has fallen, watch the doubtful jack with care.
- Slowly operate the servo-control for a series of 25 cycles.
- A maximum of 10 drops is allowed for each servo-control during above cycles ; otherwise, change
the component.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^Z^y^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F33^-^^ ..,.,,. ..
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF SERVO-CONTROLS

(Figure 2)
A Special tools
- Flight control 1st line tool kit.
- Pressure lubrication device

- Vacuum cleaner.
C Spares
- 1 blanking plug (access hole to rudder servo-control fixed point pin).
2- MATERIALS
Oil AIR 3512

Grease AIR 4222 or 4210.
- Remove doors 36-02, 36-10, 14-04i, 14-08Î, V2-46, V1-56 (wrench M31052), V1-58, V3-47,
D2-42 and D2-43.
- Remove blanking plug from- hole providing access to the fixed point of rudder servo-control.
4- INSPECTION
A On flexible pipes, check :
- absence of rubbing against structure, twisting and application of stresses

- cure date
- correct locking of couplings
- absence of leakage.
B On servo-controls, check :
- condition and security of attachment of bonding braids

- condition and security of attachment of electrical connectors and cables
- correct locking of various connections
- absence of friction traces on servo-control body
- absence of foreign matter around hinges.
C On bellcranks and auxiliary servo-control pickoffs, check :

condition and security of attachment of pickoff interconnecting rods. Attempt to budge inter¬
-
connecting rod by hand so as to make sure that end-fitting is correctly locked on pickoff lever and
bellcrank.
D Servo-control external leak check (see 04-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* *W' jk /V\ll\/-\wt I
BREGUET AVIATION ^4_-
^^ ^r-^>
^r-^ ^ - ^ .
Restricted i* a m a i n04*
MANUAL
5 - CLEANING - SERVICING
A - Cleaning
- Perform dry cleaning of following:

-Structural boxes, using a vacuum cleaner to remove all impurities.
-All hinge knuckles, using a lintless dry rag or a clean brush.
-Equipment items an grease-nipples.
CAUTION:
NEVER USE SOLVENTS SUCH AS TRICHLORETHYLENE FOR THAT OPERATION.
B - Servicing
(1 ) On roll (aileron, spoiler), pitch and rudder servo-controls.
(a) Grease the points provided with a grease-nipple:

-Fixed point.
-Slide valve bellcrank hinge pin.
NOTE: On stabilator servo-controls, relieve pressure in greased chamber of slide valve control
bellcrank by depressing grease-nipple ball; do not relieve pressure on servo-controls
with amendment index B.
(b) Remove excess grease
(c) Slightly oil:

-Clevises (attachment points) of roll (aileron, spoiler), pitch and rudder servo-controls
and roll and pitch auxiliary servo-controls,
-Pickoff interconnecting rod end-fitting mechanisms.
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Reinstall:
-Blanking plug.
-Access doors.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
PROFONDEUR STABILATORS Côté droit R/H SIDE
FIGURE 2 - ENTRETIEN DES SERVO-COMMANDES

SE R VICING OF SER VO-CONTROLS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//J^-Û-Tj /V\ir\A\V^C i
^^^
BREGUET AVIATION
^^ ^S-Cb
^^^> Restricted »aami,a.
MANUAL 04«a
TORQUE TO BE APPLIED TO LOCKNUTS ON FLIGHT CONTROL CONNECTING

RODS - PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING RODS
(See figures 3-4-5-6)
1 - SCOPE
To indicate tightening torques and to sum up the rod adjustment procedure.
2 - TIGHTENING TORQUE TO BE APPLIED TO ROD LOCKNUTS
Enclosed illustrations indicate the torque(s) to be applied to the locknut of end fittings on
each rod.
3 - ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
A - Procedure
(1 ) Preliminary steps
-The screwing of an end fitting into the rod body should be accomplished freely "by
hand" as for screwing of the locknut onto the end fitting.
-Upon replacement of a rod component, the threads of all dissimilar metal assemblies are
to be coated with faying surface compound (Mastinox 6856H).
(2) Non-micrometric adjustable rod
-Length adjustment should provide for unstressed fitting of junction pins to rods or adja¬
cent bellcranks. When screwing or unscrewing end fittings, observe:
-the relative positioning of end fittings
-the minimal length of threads to be engaged in the rod body. When observed in a
plane perpendicular to the axis, the maximum unscrewing mark (circular recess or colored sec¬
tion on the end fitting threads) should not be visible when the retainer and locknut are fitted.
-When adjusting length, fully take up the play of end fitting threads by applying an ap¬
propriate torque to the locknut. After removing the rod, use appropriate tools permitting to ex¬
actly reproduce the center-to-center dimensions and direction of the end fittings, so as to be
sure that these two characteristics are not altered by application of the recommended torque.
(3) Micrometric adjustable rod

-The procedure described above is applicable as a whole. A micrometric rod is fitted with
a RH thread end fitting and a LH thread end fitting. The components provided with a LH
thread are identified as follows:
-end of rod body (LH thread): very shallow circular recess; on the hexagons or
squares this recess is located on the edges only,
-end fitting or clevis (LH thread): circular recess coated with red paint at the start of
the threads or a groove on the four edges after the end fitting shank.
(4) Non-adjustable rod with fixed end fittings
NO OPERATION SHALL BE PERFORMED ON THESE RODS.
B - Tightening of locknut on end fitting or clevis
-This operation is to be performed with ROD REMOVED and placed on a bench, observ¬
ing the following:
-adjustment as previously described
-direction of end fittings
-correct positioning of locking device.
-Tightening the locknuts without removing the rod is permitted in order to prevent major
preliminary disassemblies; it is however required to have a clear access to the nut and be able
to keep the end fitting properly directed with a fork during torque tightening.
WHEN TIGHTENING A LOCKNUT, NEVER SECURE THE ROD BODY BY ITS OTHER
END.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAULT MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(1 ) Lockwasher with bosses

\ Keep bosses of lockwasher in the rod body slots,
tighten the locknut to the specified torque while
maintaining the rod end fittings aligned, then
>
bend the lockwasher tabs over one or two flats of
/ the locknut.
(2) Tab washer
Without inner tab engaging in the thread slot;
tighten the locknut moderately (seating), then
bend two lockwasher tabs over one or two flats
of the rod body.
Tighten the locknut to the specified torque
while maintaining the rod end fittings aligned,
then bend the other two lockwasher tabs over
one or two flats of the locknut.
With inner tab; the lug engages in the clevis
thread slot and must be directed toward the rod
body. Tighten the locknut moderately (seating),
Maximum unscrewing mark then bend two lockwasher tabs over one or two
flats of the rod body. This procedure prevents
misadjustment of the rod and misalignment of
the end fittings, the end fitting having a
tendency to be driven by the locknut.
In addition, shearing of the inner tab may
result from the lockwasher being driven in
rotation.
Tighten the locknut to the specified
torque while maintaining the end fittings
aligned, then bend the other two lockwasher
(3) Radially serrated lockwasher tabs over one or two flats of the locknut.
The nut side section of this lockwasher has

an inner tab which engages in the slot of the
rod end fitting.
The rod body side section is engaged in the
rod slots and has a drilled tab for safetying
the locknut with lockwire.
Before tightening the locknut, make sure that
the serrations are CORRECTLY engaged.
NOTE: This titanium alloy lockwasher
must not be cleaned with chlorinated products.
(4) Application of indicated tightening torque (see para. 2)

-Check for possible modification of initial adjustment,
-safety the locknuts (bend the lockwasher or wirelock).
Upon completion of all these safetying operations, use a 0.04 mm feeler gage so as to
make sure that there is no clearance at the lockwasher tab bearing surfaces (end fitting against
lockwasher and lockwasher against locknut). Apply a line of white paint to the lockwasher in
order to make safetying visible for later visual inspections.
NOTE: During installation on A/C, the last operation should be the connection of hinges in¬
cluding sealed ball-joint bearings so as to prevent swivelling from exceeding ± 6° dur¬
ing positioning.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION Xi»
J
MIRAGE F
4 à 4,5 mdaN^
(29.5 to
33.187 ft.lb)
.12 mdaN
J88.44 ft. lb)
.17 mdaN
(132.3 ft. lb)
FIGURE COMMANDE DE GAUCHISSEMENT - Couples de serrage NOTA : Les bielles ombrées sont non réglables
ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM - Tightening torques NOTE : Shaded rods are not adjustable
AB
01-84 Restricted 0-312 FIGURE 3 0-3T
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
0,5 à 0,6 mdaN.
4 à4,5mdar>
O^ (29.5 to
i 4 à 4,5 mdaN
(29.5 to 33.187 ft.lb)
33. 187 ft.lb
ms&m
SI
28 mdaN
(206.5 ft.lb)
4 à 4,5 mdaN
(29.5 to 33.187 ft.lb)
m
FIGURE 4 - COMMANDE DE PROFONDEUR - Couples de serrage NOTA : Les bielles ombrées sont non réglables
PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM - Tightening torques NOTE : Shaded rods are not adjustable
AB
11-75 Restricted 0-313 FIGURE 4 0-31 :
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAULT MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
4 à 4,5 mdaN
(29.5 to 33.187 ft.lb) 0,5 à 0,6 mdaN
(44.25 to 53. 10 in.lb)
4 à 4,5 mdaN
(29.5 to 33.187 ft.lb)
4 à 4,5 mdaN
(29.5 to 33. 187 ft.lb)
5 à 5,5 mdaN
(36.875 to
40.562 ft./b)
FIGURE 5 - COMMANDE DE DIRECTION - Couples de serrage

RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - Tightening torques
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
0,5 à 1mdaN
(44.253 to 88.507 in.lb)
0,5 à 1 mdaN 3,6 mdaN 3,6 mdaN 12 mdaN 2,5 mdaN 8,2 mdaN 2,5 mdaN
(44.253 to 88.507 in.lb) (26.55 ft.lb) .(26.55 ft.lb) (88.5 ft.lb) (18.437 ft.lb) (60.475 ft.lb) (18.437 ft.lb).
0,4 à 0,5 mdaN 2,5 mdaN

(35.40 to 44.25 in.lb) (18.437 ft.lb)
FIGURE 6 - COMMANDE DES HYPERSUSTENTATEURS - Couples de serrage

HIGH-LIFT DEVICE CONTROL SYSTEM - Tightening torques
AC
10-80 Restricted 0-315 FIGURE 6 0-3'
BREGUET AVIATION
SPECIAL OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT ON

FLIGHT CONTROL EQUIPMENT
1 - SCOPE
To describe the special operations to be carried out after installation or replacement of an
equipment : concerned items of equipment are those, the removal/installation of which was not dealt
with in the present manual. General operations are described in «Instructions to be followed when
working on systems» (see 01-0).
2- EQUIPMENT CONCERNED
A Control stick
- When installing or removing the control stick, use wrench M 15007.
- After installation, perform the tests related to each system.
B Flight control rods
Installation of teflon nutation limiting washers on rod pins
(1) Install a teflon washer between the components to be connected : the washer is to be placed
at the fixed end of each rod, ON THE NUT SIDE of the connecting pin.
Teflon washer
(2) In the following instances, in order to check more easily and visually the presence of a teflon
washer at the rod fixed end, the washer is to be installed ON PIN HEAD SIDE and not on nut side.
Pitch :
- rod 272-52 at junction with bellcrank 272-1 1 ,
- rod 272-54M1 at junction with bellcrank 272-1 1 ,
- rod 272-64 at junction with bellcrank 272-19.
Roll :
- rod 271-51 at junction with bellcrank 271-10,
- rod 271-60 at junction with bellcrank 271-18.
Rudder :
- rods 275-22 LH and RH at junction with quadrants 275-1 1 and 275-12,
- rod 275-21 at junction with quadrant 275-1 1 .
Teflon washer
NOTE : For the roll AFU, install a teflon washer ON EACH CONNECTING CLEVIS, ON THE NUT
SIDE OF THE PIN.
For the rudder AFU, install a teflon washer ON EACH CONNECTING CLEVIS, ON THE
HEAD SIDE OF THE PIN.
AA
t
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i^J>~^r\L
BREGUET AVIATION^gR^îo
MIRAGE F
^2^=-^<2^ Restricted MANUAL 04
INSPECTION OF CONTROL STICK BOOTS
1 - SCOPE
To check condition of the LH bearing guard boot.
A Special tools
- Electrical system ground tool kit
- Remove the canopy (see 03-2).

- Remove the seat (see 09-4).
- Remove the stick handgrip.
- Remove the dust guard from the stick base.
- Remove doors 05.06i and 05.07L
4- CHECK
Visually check the condition of the stick boot

- absence of tears or deformation,
- correct positioning of attachment clips.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall the doors.

- Reinstall the dust guard.
- Reinstall the stick handgrip (see 04-0).
- Reinstall the seat (see 09-4).
- Reinstall the canopy (see 03-2).
AF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^>~rU
BREGUET AVIATION^rTû^^-i^^
MIRAGE F
SECTION 1
ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1-0 GENERAL
- Roll control system - Principle 1-001
- Table of components 1-101

- Roll linkage. 1-109
- Hydraulic system. ". 1-111
- Operation of roll channel 1-113
- Manual control 1-113
- Electrical control with autopilot 1-113
- Roll trim system 1-114
- Cases of failure 1-120
Incorporated documentation
- Control stick AMD OCV 018-19 1-122

- Roll artificial feel unit AMD 105069 1-125
- Spoiler spring box AMD 105068 1-128
- Aileron spring box AMD 105071-04 1-131
AMD 105071-05
- Removal - installation of roll AFU 1-301

- Removal - installation of an aileron spring box 1-302
- Removal - installation of a spoiler spring box 1-304
- Removal - installation of a spoiler servo-control 1-305
- Removal - installation of roll auxiliary servo-control 1-308
- Removal - installation of an aileron servo-control 1-310
- Removal - installation of aileron servo-control dual supply valve 1-313
1-4 DISASSEMBLY- ASSEMBLY
- Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of roll AFU 1-401

- Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of an aileron spring box 1-403
- Replacement of an aileron spring box plug on aircraft
(Modification 682 incorporated) 1-404H
- Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of a spoiler spring box 1-405
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^J^^TU.
BREGUET AVIATION^clF^^^-O
MIRAGE F
^0=*=*"^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)
- Inspection and servicing of aileron and spoiler hinges 1-501

- Inspection of control stick 1-504
- Calibration check and adjustment of roll AFU 1-506
- Calibration check of aileron spring box 1-510
- Calibration check of spoiler spring box 1-512
- Adjustment and inspection of auxiliary servo-control position pickoff see 13-1
- Functional and adjustment check of roll channel 1-515
- Detailed adjustment check of roll channel 1-520
- Adjustment of roll control system 1-524
- Partial inspection of roll (and pitch) control system linkage - Servicing 1-531
- Total inspection of roll (and pitch) control system linkage - Servicing 1-532H
- Installation of flight control rigging device 1-533
- Plotting of control stick forces (roll) 1-540
- Check of aileron servo-control barrel 2 supply 1-544
- Inspection of aileron drive rod 1-546
Figure No. Page
1 ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM - SCHEMATIC 1-002

2 LAYOUT OF EQUIPMENT 1-108
3 LAYOUT OF LINKAGE 1-110
4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - DIAGRAM 1-112
5 AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL -OPERATION IN MANUAL CONTROL MODE ... 1-115
6 AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL - OPERATION IN ELECTRICAL CONTROL
MODE WITH AUTOPILOT 1-115
7 AILERON SERVO-CONTROL -MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC CONTROL 1-116
8 SPOILER SERVO-CONTROL - MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC CONTROL 1-116
9 ROLL TRIM SYSTEM - DIAGRAM 1-117
10 AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL -FAILURE OF SYSTEM 1 AND EMERGENCY
SYSTEM : 1-121
11 AILERON SERVO-CONTROL -FAILURE OF SYSTEM 1 AND EMERGENCY
SYSTEM 1-121
12 CONTROL STICK 1-124
13 ROLL ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT 1-127
14 SPOILER SPRING BOX 1-130
15 AILERON SPRING BOX 1-133
16 REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF SPOILER SERVO-CONTROL 1-307
16M REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF ROLL AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL 1-309T
17 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AILERON SERVO-CONTROL 1-31 1
18 SERVICING OF CONTROL SURFACE HINGES 1-503

19 CHECKOF CONTROL SURFACE DEFLECTION 1-516
20 ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM 1-526
21 ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM 1-528
22 INSTALLATION OF FLIGHT CONTROL RIGGING DEVICE 1-534
25 PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (ROLL) 1-541
AA
BREGUET
ZU^-jr^L
AVIATIONôF0^-^*^
MIRAGE F
^£2^-^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM - PRINCIPLE
(Figure 1)
The roll control system can be operated :

- either manually, by means of control stick
- or automatically, by means of autopilot through flying aids (See 13-1 and 13-2).
NOTE : Roll damping function is effected by both stabilators.
The manual or automatic command is transmitted by an auxiliary servo-control inserted in the

linkage, close to control stick. This auxiliary servo-control is intended to :
- provide the force required to overcome linkage frictions and inertia.
- act as an actuating jack to the autopilot.
Power servo-controls are provided at the other end of system to actuate both ailerons and both
spoilers.
Roll trim function is effected through deflection of both ailerons, the spoilers being not used.
A trim actuator is inserted upstream of each aileron servo-control.
The installation also includes :

- An artificial feel unit (A.F.U.) connected in parallel with the linkage between the control stick
and the auxiliary servo-control.
-Spoiler spring boxes (one for each spoiler), intended to take up the linkage slack in the case
where the corresponding aileron is being deflected downwards.
- Aileron spring boxes (one upstream of each aileron servo-control) intended to :
- allow spoiler deflection, in the case where operating threshold is reached on these
servo-controls.
- prevent excessive load from being applied to the linkage, in the case of aileron «suction».
Failures and safety systems
Should roll channel electrical control circuits happen to fail, the various safety systems will
automatically change over to direct mechanical control (control stick).
Should the hydraulic power generation system happen to fail :
1 In hydraulic system 1 :
Autopilot no longer available
-
- Half of spoiler servo-control nominal force available only. Aileron servo-controls supplied
through system 2.
Autopilot available but half of spoiler servo-control nominal force available only. Aileron
-
servo-controls supplied through system 1.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Poignée pi lofe 2 1 Manche

Control stick handgrip Control stick
Système de restitution 3 6 Renvoi étanche

artificielle d'effort Pressure seal lever
(S.R.A)
Artificial feel unit
(A.F.U.)
Servo commande 79 C 80 C Capteur triple de position

auxi Maire (Servo-Commande auxiliaire)
Auxiliary servo-control Triple position pickoff
(auxiliary servo-control)
Bielle coulissante 9 9 Bielle coulissante

Sliding rod Sliding rod
.10 Boite à ressort Boite à ressort 10.

(ai leron) (aileron)
Spring box Spring box
(aileron) (aileron)
Boites à ressort
(spoilers)
Spring boxes
(spoilers)
_11 8
Servo Servo commandes'
commande spoi lers
ai leron Spoiler
Aileron servo-controls
servo-control
FIGURE 1 - COMMANDE DE GAUCHISSEMENT, Principe

ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM Principle
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Layout - See Figures 1-2.
Location Doc.
Item Name - Characteristics and Functions Access Door No. S 1
1 CONTROL STICK Cockpit X
It performs following functions :

- Roll control, through lateral movements of control stick
head (to the left or to the right).
- Pitch control, through longitudinal movements
(forward or aft).
It includes :
- A roll and pitch stop system. These stops (which can be
adjusted on the ground) are intended to limit control
stick movements.
2 CONTROL STICK HANDGRIP X
Screwed onto control stick, it is provided with various

electrical controls :
- Autopilot disconnect control
- Autopilot uncouple switch
- Roll and pitch trim control switch
- Range reset button
- Push-to-talk button
- Bomb, rocket and missile firing button
- Gun firing control
- Sight camera control
3 ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT (A.F.U.) 11-08i X
- Consisting of a spring box, it transmits an artificial

feel to pilot's linkage, which artificial feel varies in
accordance with spring box rod displacement. i
i
- It is connected in parallel with pilot's linkage,

between control stick and auxiliary servo-control, its i
body being hinged to a fixed point on aircraft structure.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION -<?=»
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Item Name - Characteristics and Functions Access Door No. S I
4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE 17-05 X
It reduces the supply pressure in system 1 (210 bar -

3045 psi) down to 100 bar (1450 psi), which pressure
is directed to roll and pitch auxiliary servo-
controls 79C and 77C.
5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE 17-07 X
It reduces the supply pressure in system 2 (210 bar -

3045 psi) down to 100 bar (1450 psi), which pressure
is directed to roll and pitch auxiliary servo-
controls 79 C and 77C.
6 PRESSURE SEAL LEVER Cockpit
It ensures sealing of roll control where the latter

leaves the cockpit.
7 SPRING BOX (SPOILER) V2-59 X
It allows the spoiler to be extended upwards.

It takes up linkage slack in the case where the corres¬
ponding aileron is deflected downwards.
8 SERVO-CONTROL (SPOILER) V1-58 X
Dual-barrel type (tandem arrangement). Both barrels

operate simultaneously.
Provided with two synchronized selector valves operated
mechnically by the linkage.
Oscillating fixed body, connected to structure.
Mechanical follow-up device connected between piston and
control bellcrank.
Barrel 1 supplied from hydraulic system 1 .
Barrel 2 supplied from hydraulic system 2.
Nominal force : 2 x 3440 daN (2 x 7.733 Ib.wgt -
2 x 3.4503 tons - 2 x 3.866 US. tons) at a pressure
of 210 bar (3045 psi).
Travel between mechanical stops : 82 mm (3.228 in).
SPOILER (See 03-1) Wing upper

surface
Located on wing upper surface, it causes lift to be
reduced and corresponding wing to be lowered when
deflected.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc.
Access Door No. S I
9 SLIDING ROD
Provided with ball slides, it is run through the integral

fuel tank in a sealed tube.
10 SPRING BOX (AILERON) V246 X
Located upstream of each aileron servo-control, it allows

complete spoiler deflection to be obtained in the case
where the servo-control abuts against its mechanical
stop or is.
Its prevents excessive load to be applied to the linkage
in the case of aileron «suction».
11 SERVO-CONTROL (AILERON) V2-46 X

do not operate simultaneously.
- Provided with two synchronized selector valves
operated mechanically by the linkage. Oscillating
fixed body connected to structure.
- Mechanical follow-up device connected between
piston and control bellcrank.
- Barrel 2 supplied from hydraulic system 2.
- Barrel 1 supplied from hydraulic system 1 in case of
failure of hydraulic system 2.
- Nominal force : 1875 daN (4215 Ib.wgt) at a pressure
of 210 bar (3045 psi).
- Travel between mechanical stops : 60 mm (2.362 in).
AILERON (See 03-1) Wing end
It causes the corresponding wing to be lowered or raised

by increasing or decreasing the lift depending in which
direction it is deflected.
12 DUAL SUPPLY VALVE Engine compart¬ X
ment (Between
- Hydraulically-operated hydraulic selector valve frames 25
inserted in supply system of aileron servo-control and 26)
barrels 1. '
It isolates aileron servo-controls from system 1

when system 2 is pressurized.
- It allows barrel 1 to be supplied from system 1 or
emergency system in case of pressure drop in system 2.
39C AUTOPILOT (See 13-2)
48C FLYING AID AMPLIFIER (See 13-1)
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
'' MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No.
52C STICK UNCOUPLE SWITCH Cockpit
It controls closing of electrically-operated selector

valve 53C.
53C AUTOPILOT EMERGENCY

SELECTOR VALVE (ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED)
In normal operation :
- When open, it supplies system 1 pressure to servo-
controls 77C and 79C through pressure reducing valve 4.
- It actuates dual supply valve 96C which shuts off
system 2.
- When closed (autopilot emergency uncouple command),
it shuts off system 1 pressure to auxiliary servo-
controls and causes automatic actuation of dual supply
valve 96C which then supplies servo-controls 77C and
79C with system 2 pressure through pressure reducing
valve 5.
79C SERVO-CONTROL (AUXILIARY) 14-08Î

do not operate simultaneously.
Piston connected to structure. Moving body connected
to linkage.
Barrel 1 is provided with a mechanically-or electri¬
cally-operated selector valve and is supplied from
hydraulic system 1.
Barrel 2 is provided with a mechanically-operated
selector valve and is supplied from hydraulic system 2.
Nominal force on each barrel : 183 daN (41 1 Ib.wgt-
0.1835 tons - 0.2056 US. tons) at a pressure of 100 bar
(1450 psi).
Auxiliary servo-control is intended to :
- absorb linkage frictions
- act as an autopilot actuator in electrical
control mode (barrel 1).
80C TRIPLE POSITION PICKOFF 14-08i

(AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL)
Operated by a bellcrank at the output of auxiliary

servo-control 79C.
Used to slave auxiliary servo-control 79C to auto¬
pilot commands.
Also used to control operation of roll automatic
trim system.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
81C TRIM INDICATOR FUSE-BREAKER Electrical X

heart
Intended to protect the trim indicator power supply line.
82C TRIM INDICATOR Control X

pedestal
Triple Indicator.
It provides trim position indications for roll, pitch
and rudder control systems, from the information signals
fed by each trim actuator.
91C ROLL TRIM FUSE-BREAKER Electrical X

heart
Intended to protect the trim actuator manual control
circuit power supply line.
92C ROLL TRIM CONTROL SWITCH Control X

stick handgrip
Intended for manual control of trim actuators.
93C «MANUAL-AUTO» TRIM RELAY Trim box X

15-03
It switches the trim control circuits from manual mode
to automatic mode, when fed with a signal supplied by
the flying aids.
In automatic mode, it allows the autopilot to be trimmed
in roll by means of manual control 92C.
94C TRIM ACTUATORS V2-46 X

95C
Inserted in series in each aileron linkage, downstream
of spoiler control connection.
They operate simultaneously, but one extends its rod
while the other retracts it, and inversely.
Their rods are synchronized to reach their mid-travel
position at the same time.
They allow the aircraft to be trimmed in roll using
the ailerons alone (manual or automatic mode).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No.
96C DUAL SUPPLY VALVE 18-06
Inserted in barrel 2 supply system of pitch and roll

auxiliary servo-controls 77C and 79C.
It shuts off supply to above auxiliary servo-controls
when system 1 is pressurized.
It allows barrel 2 to be supplied from system 2 in
the case where hydraulic pressure drops in system 1 and
emergency stick uncouple switch is being actuated.
It uncouples the autopilot when hydraulic supply is
being changed from system 1 to system 2, in the case
of a hydraulic pressure drop in system 1.
116C TRIM SYNCHRONIZING RELAYS Junction X

117C box
Intended for synchronizing trim actuator rod mid-travel 15-02
settings.
They are controlled by mid-travel micrcswitches installed
in both trim actuators 94C and 95C.
118C DIODES Junction

119C box
120C Used to prevent current from being returned from trim 15-02
121C actuators to electrical cables.
141C ROLL AUTO TRIM FUSE BREAKER Electro-center
Intended to protect the trim actuator automatic control

circuit power supply.
148C RESISTOR BOX- ROLL TRIM Trim box
Used to attenuate the signal fed to autopilot (1 kilhom

for each resistor).
It prevents fuse breaker 91 C to trip in the case where
any trouble occurs along the line.
151C L H AUTO TRIM RELAY Trim box
When energized, it allows L H side trimming through

relay 1 52C which should be de-energized.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No.
152C R/H AUTO TRIM RELAY Trim box
When energized, it allows R/H side trimming through

relay 1 51 C which should be de-energized.
207C TRIM CHOPPER UNIT
(See 13-1)
211C RESISTORS Trim box

212C
Used to attenuate BIP trim signal fed to autopilot.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
82 C
Stringer 3 Stringer 1 Stringer 1 ^Stringer 3
Frame 26 Front view Section between frames 17 and 19

Rear View
Frames
19a 19 18a 18 17a 17a 18a 19 19a
-f-
I
"T
I I i i
r96C ' 5 i i ' 53 C |
f :
i i
\
c. . JL J J L_J
I Tl
View in direction of arrow A View in direction of arrow B
FIGURE 2 - EQUIPMENT LA YOUT

AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^blJL
BREGUET AVIATION ^-jS^^gÔ
MIRAGE,, ^,
F
ROLL LINKAGE
(Figure 3)
The roll linkage is of the rigid type (pushing and pulling movements).
It is actuated by control stick 1. Control stick travel is limited on either side of aircraft centerline
by means of two stops. A pressure seal lever is used to provide sealing at cockpit outlet in a lateral
structural box.
The following is fitted to the roll linkage :
- In parallel : Artificial feel unit 3, coupled to a bellcrank.

- In series : Auxiliary servocontrol 79C.
- On auxiliary servo-control output bellcrank : Triple position pickoff 80C.
Then, the linkage is routed vertically up to the junction Vee of both air intake ducts.
A rocker and bellcrank system is used at fuselage upper part to separate the roll linkage in two
linkages (L/H and R/H) which are then directed to the wings.
Each linkage is run through the integral fuel tank located aft of false spar 4 through a slide rod 9
placed inside a sealed tube. A bellcrank with two outputs then connects the linkage to the following :
1 Spoiler control linkage, consisting of :
- Spring box 7
- Bellcrank 20, fitted with stop 21 intended to limit the stress applied to the servo-control slide
valve and prevent the latter from being damaged.
- Spoiler servo-control 8.
- Inboard and outboard spoiler driving system, consisting of rods and five control bellcranks
intended to actuate the spoiler assembly.
2 Aileron control linkage, consisting of :
- Trim actuator 94C or 95C

- Spring box 10
- Aileron servo-control 1 1
- Aileron control rod and bellcrank.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 3 - IMPLANTATION DE LA TIMONERIE

LINKAGE LAYOUT
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^^JTSl
BREGUET AVIATION ' ' _
MIRAGE F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(Figure 4)
The roll control system is hydraulically supplied from system 1 or emergency system (sub-system
B) and system 2 (sub-system D) (See 07-1 : Hydraulic power generation).
1 Auxiliary servo-control 79C is supplied as follows :
In normal operating conditions, from system 1 supplying barrel 1 through electrically-operated

selector valve 53C and pressure reducing valve 4.
In the case of system 1 failure, from system 2 automatically supplying barrel 2 through dual
supply valve 96C and pressure reducing valve 5.
2 Aileron servo-controls 11 are normally supplied from system 2 supplying barrel 2. In the case of
system 2 pressure drop, servo-control barrel 1 is supplied from system 1 through dual supply valve 12.
- Spoiler servo-controls 8 are hydraulically supplied from system 1 or emergency system and
system 2 supplying both barrels.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
LEGENDE KEY
_ Circuit 1 System 1
-=- Circuit 2 System 2

Vers servo
===r Retour Return cde auxiliaire
A.P Aides Flying aids profondeur
FA au pilotage To pitch auxiliary
P . A servo-control
Pilote auto Autopilot
AP
Vers P.A
To A.P
AILERON G SPOILER G SPOILER D AILERON D

L/H Aileron L/H Spoiler R/H Spoiler R/H A Heron
FIGURE 4 - CIRCUIT HYDRAULIQUE (SCHEMA)
AD HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
BREGUET AVIATION, __
OPERATION OF ROLL CHANNEL
Two control modes are available :

- manual control
- electrical control, selected when autopilot is being engaged.
NOTE : Roll damping is ensured by the pitch channel.
1 - MANUAL CONTROL
Manual control is effected by actuating control stick 1 laterally. The command is transmitted
mechanically to the distributing slide valves of auxiliary servo-control 79C. Electrically-operated
selector valve 53C is open and allows system 1 pressure to be supplied to barrel 1 of auxiliary
servo-control 79C. Dual supply valve 96C prevents system 2 pressure from being supplied to barrel 2 of
auxiliary servo-control 79C.
A - Auxiliary servo-control 79C (Figure 5)
Barrel 1 . Solenoid valve 22 is closed and causes the following :
- pilot's control 23 becomes free

- control arm of slide valve 24 becomes locked onto pilot's control 23 through locks 25.
The servo-control is directly controlled by the linkage which drives control slide valve 24. By-pass
valve 26 allows the pressure to be directed to chamber A or B. Slide valve 24 directs the pressure to
power stage chamber A or B and causes the servo-control body to move.
Barrel 2 : As already said above, this barrel is not pressurized. By-pass valve 27 interconnects
power stage chambers.
The moving servo-control drives the roll linkage which acts simultaneously on the distributing slide
valves of aileron and spoiler servo-controls 1 1 and 8.
B Aileron servo-control (Figure 7)
- It is supplied from system 2, dual supply valve 96C causing system 1 to be shut off. As no
pressure is applied to barrel 1, by-pass valve 28 causes power stage chambers A and B to become
interconnected.
- The pilot's command conveyed by the linkage causes control slide valve 30 to move, therefore
entailing servo-control movement.
C Spoiler servo-control (Figure 8)

- Its operation is similar to that of the aileron servo-control but it is supplied simultaneously from
systems 1 (or emergency) and 2.
2 - ELECTRICAL CONTROL WITH AUTOPI LOT

This mode of operation is only used when the autopilot is being engaged. Only barrel 1 of
auxiliary servo-control 79C is supplied while barrel 2 of aileron servo-controls 11 and both barrels of
spoiler servo-controls are supplied.
- Electrically-operated selector valve 53C is open and allows system 1 pressure to be supplied to
servo-control barrel 1.
- Dual supply valve 96C, which is slaved to system 1 pressure, causes system 2 to be shut off.
AC
04~77 Restricted 1~113
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iU=^-'~rU.
BREGUET AVIATION^q^3 ^s£^>
MIRAGE F
A Auxiliary servo-control (Figure 6)
Barrel 1 : Autopilot engagement causes solenoid valve 22 to open and cause the following :
-Control arm of main slide valve 24 becomes free.

-Pilot's control 23 becomes locked onto servo-control body through both locks 25.
- Servo slide valve 24 is supplied with hydraulic pressure.
- The commands generated by the autopilot and passing through the flying aid rack (See 13-2) are
transmitted to servo-control torque motor 31 which causes servo slide valve 32 and control slide
valve 24 to move. Control slide valve 24 complies with servo commands and allows pressure to be
directed to power stage chamber A or B, therefore causing the servo-control body to move.
The downs tream linkage and control stick then follows the servo-control movement.
Barrel 2 : This barrel is not pressurized. By-pass valve 27 interconnects power stage chambers.
B Aileron and spoiler servo-controls 1 1 and 8
They operate in the same manner as in manual control mode (See 1-B).
C Change-over from automatic mode to manual mode
Change-over from automatic mode to manual mode can be due :
- either to momentary disconnection or voluntary switching off of autopilot performed by the

pilot.
- or to the operation of one or several safety systems in the case of failure of hydraulic systems or
electronic circuits.
As soon as the autopilot is disengaged, solenoid valve 22 closes, causing the bellcrank of
servo-control 79C to become locked and the hydraulic supply to the servo slide valve to be shut off.
Main distributing slide valve 24 is controlled mechanically by the control stick.
(1) It is also possible to cause autopilot disengagement by actuating the control stick so as to operate
one of the safety microswitches controlled by the bellcrank of servo-control 79C.
3- ROLL TRIM SYSTEM (Figure 9)
The aerodynamical balance of an aircraft varies in accordance with airspeed and flight
configuration (underwing stores, etc.).
The pilot is relieved of constant actuation of controls to maintain the aircraft in balanced flight
thanks to the trim actuators which provide 2 means of changing the length of a linkage. The pilot can
then change the position of the control surfaces to obtain neutral setting of the corresponding artificial
feel unit.
The roll trim system acts on the ailerons only. Each trim actuator 94C or 95C is inserted in series
in each aileron linkage, downstream of spoiler control connection. These actuators are
electro-mechanical devices converting the rotary movement of an electric motor into the longitudinal
movement of a rod. They operate simultaneously and one actuator extends its rod while the other
retracts it, and inversely.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
System 1 System 2
Sub-system B Sub-system D
53 C
FIGURE 5
V\\\V .v
tSrî
- SERVO-COMMANDE AUXILIAIRE
22
FONCTIONNEMENT EN COMMANDE MANUELLE

AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL
OPERATION IN MANUAL CONTROL MODE
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
System 1 System 2
t ' .. i
B!=} >à *
79 C
AJ LB« 221
FIGURE 6 - SERVO-COMMANDE AUXILIAIRE
FONCTIONNEMENT EN COMMANDE ELECTRIQUE AVEC P.A
A UXILIA R Y SER VO-CONTROL
AC OPERATION ELECTRICAL CONTROL MODE WITH AUTOPILOT
BREGUET AVIATION ^=°
MIRAGE F
Circuit 2 Circuit 1
Branche D Branche B
System 2 System 1
Sub-system D Sub-system B
FIGURE 7 -SERVO-COMMANDE D'AILERON

COMMANDE MANUELLE OU AUTOMATIQUE
AILERON SERVO-CONTROL
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC CONTROL
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
System 1 System 2
Sub- system B Sub -system D
FIGURE 8 - SERVO-COMMANDE DE SPOILERS

COMMANDE MANUELLE OU AUTOMATIQUE
SPOILER SERVO-CONTROL
MANUAL OR AUTOMATIC CONTROL
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^S*3
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 9 - ROLL TRIM SYSTEM DIAGRAM

AC
BREGUET
ZU^JirU
AVIATION^sS^^--^*^
MIRAGE F
^C^*-*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
A Roll trim control
The trim system is controlled either manually or automatically. It should be said that both
actuators are independent of each other although they operate simultaneously. A device is provided to
synchronize their mid-travel settings, in order to prevent progressive offsettings due to small speed
differences to take place.
(1) Operation in manual control mode
Trim actuators 94C and 95C are controlled from a control switch located on control stick
handgrip, which control switch actuates «R/H-L/H» plunger 92C.
«Manual-auto» relay 93C, which is not energized, directs the power supply voltage to the actuators
through trim synchronizing relays 1 1 6C and 1 1 7C.
(2) Operation in automatic control mode
Trimming is effected by the flying aids when the autopilot is engaged (See 13-1-13-2).
(a) Principle
With autopilot engaged, roll commands are fed to auxiliary servo-control 79C, causing the latter to
move and to drive both aileron and spoiler linkages.
However, aircraft flight characteristics are affected by permanently deflected spoilers (additional
drag). It can be also said that any auxiliary servo-control movement causes a load to be applied by the
A.F.U. to pilot's linkage, which load varies in accordance with control stick displacement. The load
applied by the A.F.U. the moment the auxiliary servo-control bellcrank becomes unlocked with respect
to servo-control body in the case of autopilot uncoupling (see operation of roll channel) would cause
I the distributing slide valve to open fully and suddenly, causing the aircraft to roll suddenly.
Pickoff 80C, located downstream of servo-control 79C, is used by the flying aids to detect the
position of the roll linkage (and therefore of the spoilers) in order to retract the spoilers and return the
A.F.U. to its zero load setting. The flying aids then generate the commands intended for trim actuators,
so as to obtain lateral balance through the ailerons alone.
The following takes place during operation of trim actuators (operating at a very low speed
corresponding to an aileron deflection of about 5° per minute) :
- Additional deflection of ailerons in the same direction as that obtained through the initial
movement of auxiliary servo-control 79C.
- Progressive modification of autopilot command, resulting from above deflection and intented to
maintain aircraft balance about roll axis.
This causes auxiliary servo-control 79C to :
- slowly resume its initial position (mid-travel position approximately)

- cause spoiler retraction
- move the control stick to the position corresponding to A.F.U. zero load setting.
The trim actuators stop operating when the output voltage of position pickoff 80C is lower than
selected threshold value.
(b) Operation
Autopilot engagement causes a signal to be fed by the flying aid rack to relay 93C through
amplifier 48C, which relay 93C causes control circuits to be switched from manual mode to automatic
mode.
The control signals generated by the flying aid rack operate relay 151C or 152C, depending on
whether L/H or R/H trimming is required for spoiler retraction.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION __
MIRAGE F
(3) Synchronizing device
(a) Principle
This device is controlled by mid-travel position microswitch 33 provided on each actuator. Each
microswitch 33 controls the energization of relay 1 16C or 1 17C thi purpose of which is to cut off the
power supply to the first actuator reaching its mid-travel position, such a power supply being restored
through the other relay only when the second actuator also reaches its mid-travel position. These two
microswitches are provided with two positions allowing mid-travel position synchronizing to be
obtained in both extending and retracting directions.
(b) Operation
Let us assume that L/H actuator 95C is in «rod retracted» position while R/H actuator 94C is in
«rod extended» position. The relays controlled by micro-switches 33 are energized.
The trim system is energized for L/H trimming. The rod of L/H actuator 95C extends and is
supplied through relay 1 17C. R/H actuator 94C is supplied through relay 1 16C and its rod retracts.
If, for instance, actuator 95C moves faster than actuator 94C, relay 117C is de-energized the
moment actuator 95C reaches its mid-travel position, therefore causing the latter to stop moving.
Actuator 94C is then supplied in parallel through both relays.
When actuator 94C reaches its mid-travel position, relay 1 16G is de-energized and the following
configuration is obtained :
- Actuator 94C is supplied through relay 117C alone

- Actuator 95C is supplied through relay 1 16C alone.
Actuator 95C starts moving again since both actuators are synchronized. Actuators will then
operate simultaneously until control signal disappears or until power supply to electric motors is cut off
through the action of each actuator limit switch.
B Automatic trim safety device

Position pickoff 80C includes two potentiometers : one for the control circuit and the other for
safety circuits. Should the output voltage of this second potentiometer be higher than a pre-determined
threshold value, a safety device contained in flying aid amplifier box 48C causes the «TRIM» failure
warning light to come on in the cockpit.
C Roll trim indicating
Roll trim indications are provided on trim indicator 82C. This indicator, which is common to the
three trim control systems (yaw, roll and pitch) provides actuator position indications.
The information is fed by the potentiometers built into actuators 94C and 95C.
Trim indication is provided as fo'lows :
- Indicator bar tilted to the left : L/H trimming

- Indicator bar in horizontal position : Trim in neutral position
- Indicator bar tilted to the right : R/H trimming.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL-*v"^rQl
BREGUET AVIATIONô^_^<C>
MIRAGE F
^£^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
4- CASES OF FAILURE
A - Manual operation
(1 ) Failure of system 1 and emergency system
Barrel 2 of auxiliary servo-control 79C is supplied by dual supply valve 96C subjected to system 2
pressure.
(a) Auxiliary servo-control 79C (Figure 10)
Barrel 1 : By-pass valve 26 interconnects both power stage chambers under the action of its spring.
Barrel 2 : By-pass valve 27 allows pressure to be directed to chamber A or B. As before, the

servo-control is controlled by the linkage which drives control slide valve 24. The latter directs the
pressure to power stage chamber A or B, causing the servo-control body to move. The servo-control
body drives the roll linkage which then acts simultaneously on the distributing slide valves of aileron
and spoiler servo-controls 1 1 and 8.
(b) Aileron servo-control (Figure 1 1 )
Barrel 1 being not supplied (dual supply valve), operation remains unchanged.
(c) Spoiler servo-control (Figure 8)
As no pressure is applied to barrel 1 , by-pass valve 29 interconnects power stage chambers. Barrel 2
is driven by the linkage and operates normally.
NOTE : Only 50 % of spoiler servo-control nominal force is available.
(2) Failure of system 2
(a) Such a failure does not affect auxiliary servo-control 79C which operates normally on system 1 .
(b) Under the action exerted by system 1 pressure, dual supply valve 12 allows aileron servo-control
barrel 1 to be supplied. By-pass valve 29 interconnects barrel 2 power stage chambers.
Pushed back by the pressure, by-pass valve 28 causes barrel 1 chamber interconnection to be
suppressed.
(c) Only 50 % of spoiler servo-control nominal force is available.
AB
Lî^^L
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /VllKMVj7C 1
BREGUET AVIATION^<<^^^-ô . ,,......, ni

^è^<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
B Automatic operation (autopilot engaged)
(1 ) Failure of system 1 and emergency system
In the case where system 1 and emergency system fail when autopilot is engaged, auxiliary
servo-control 79C is automatically supplied with system 2 pressure through dual supply valve 96C
which causes the autopilot to be simultaneously uncoupled. The system then operates in manual mode
with 50 % of spoiler servo-control nominal force available. Full aileron servo-control nominal force is
available.
(2) Failure of system 2
Such a failure does not affect auxiliary servo-control 79C which continues to operate in electrical
mode on system 1 . As in the above case, only 50 % of spoiler servo-control nominal force is available.
Full aileron servo-control nominal force is available.
(3) Failure of electrical power generation
The system operates in manual mode.
(4) Autopilot emergency uncoupling
Electrically-operated selector valve 53C is closed by pilot's action on switch 52C1. This causes
hydraulic supply to barrel 1 of auxiliary servo-control 79C to be shut off, therefore causing the
auxiliary servo-control to operate on system 2 (supplying barrel 2 which is then directly controlled
from the control stick). Autopilot uncoupling takes place the moment hydraulic supply is changed from
system 1 to system 2 as controlled by dual supply valve 96C.
AB
04-77 1-1 20M
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Circuit 1
Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D .
System 1 System 2
53 C 96 C
SERVO-COMMANDE AUXILIAIRE
FIGURE 10 - PANNE CIRCUIT ET SECOURS 1
AUXILIARY SER VO-CONTROL

FAILLURE OF SYSTEM 1 AND EMERGENCY SYSTEM
Circuit 2 Circuit 1
Branche D Branche B
System 2 System 1
Sub-system D Sub-system B
i. * i i ' .i
SERVO-COMMANDE D'AILERON
FIGURE 11 - PANNE CIRCUIT ET SECOURS1
AILERON SER VO-CONTROL

FAILLURE OF SYSTEM 1 AND EMERGENCY SYSTEM
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ -i>-"-\l IVlIlxMwC I
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^^x^ô . , .,..,.. nÀ
^<^^<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
INCORPORATED DOCUMENTATION
CONTROL STICK
(Figure 12)
1 - GENERAL
Control stick 1 performs roll and pitch control functions.
2- DESCRIPTION
The control stick includes the following main items :

- Head 1 .equipped with handgrip 2.
- Body 3
- Base 4
-'Arm 5
- Roll control fork 6.
A - Head 1
This is a cast machined part hinged to body 3.

The upper part accommodates handgrip 2 (screwed).
The lower part accommodates the electrical cable clamp.
B - Handgrip 2
It is provided with various electrical controls.
C- Body 3
This is a box-type assembly screwed onto base 4.
The upper part accommodates the following :

- Two bearings
- Control stick head hinge pin
- Roll bellcrank
- Pin attaching screw.
The lower part accommodates the following :

- Roll bellcrank hinge pin
- Roll control deflection stop screws.
D- Base 4
This is a cast part accommodating the following :

- Arm 5 attaching flange
- Body 3 attaching flange
- Bearing 7.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAUlTfl^-^T^L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONw^P=^^> . . . . , 4 , t
^3^^-*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
E Arm 5
Screwed onto base 4, it includes the following :

Bellcrank accommodating the stop screw
Bearing cage 9 (pitch control swivelling)
- Pitch bellcrank 8.
F - Roll control fork 6
Roll control linkage output is obtained through a bearing cage 12 transmitting control movements
and absorbing control stick rotation.
3- OPERATION
A Pitch control
The control stick assembly swivels about the axis of arm 5 driving bellcrank 8 which actuates the
pitch linkage. Travel is limited by the adjustable stop screw fitted to the stop bellcrank. The adjustable
screw comes into contact with the fixed stop (forward travel) and with the adjustable stop screw (aft
travel). These two stops are mounted on a support integral with aircraft structure.
B - Roll control
The movement of handgrip 2 drives rod 11 through bellcrank 10. Rod 11 actuates bellcrank 13
which transmits its movement to roll output fork 6. Travel is limited by the adjustable stop screws
placed laterally at control stick body lower, part. Forward and aft control stick movements (pitch
control) have no action on fork 6, relative rotation between link-rod and fork 6 being ensured by the
bearings of cage 12.
4- INSTALLATION IN AIRCRAFT
The control stick is located in the cockpit, between frames 5 and 7. It is attached through ball
bearing cages 7 and 9 screwed onto cockpit floor vertical webs.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^^^.-^
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 12 - MANCHE PILOTE

CONTROL STICK
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/;
BREGUET
'TvçC
AVIATION^<<c: -^
MIRAGE F
ROLL ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT
(Figure 13)
1 - GENERAL
The A.F.U. is a spring system the rod displacement of which provides a force varying in
accordance with such a displacement.
Inserted in a channel including servo-controls, it allows a progressive artificial feel varying in

accordance with control stick displacement to be applied to pilot's -linkage.
2- DESCRIPTION
The roll A.F.U. consists of :
- Cylinder 1
- Rod 2
- Two stops 3 and 4
- Two end springs 5 and center springs 6
- Sleeve 7
- Adjusting guide 8
- Two attachment clevises 9 and 10
A- Cylinder 1
One end of cylinder 1 is blanked off by one of the attachment clevises while the other end is
blankedoff by adjusting guide. Cylinder 1 contains the A.F.U. constituent items.
B- Rod 2
It slides in the cylinder and its displacement in either direction drives stops 3 and 4, therefore
causing the springs to be compressed.
C- Stops 3 and 4
Each stop acts as a seat to two of the three springs.

Each stop bore houses two teflon rings 18 intended to reduce frictions between stops and rod.
D Springs 5 and 6
Spring bearing points are as follows :
- Center spring : between both stops 3 and 4

- End spring on cylinder side : between cylinder bottom and stop 4
- End spring on rod side : between adjusting guide 8 and stop 3.
E - Sleeve 7
Screwed onto the rod, it provides for the adjustment of center spring initial setting during
assembly.
AA
BREGUET
/LJ^TV.
AVIATION*^^' ^^>
MIRAGE F
^^^<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
F Adjusting guide 8
Screwed into the cylinder, it provides for the adjustment of both end spring initial setting.
Its bore houses teflon ring 19.
It is secured against motion in cylinder 1 by means of nut 12.
G Attachment clevises 9 and 10
Clevis 10, which is screwed onto the cylinder, is made integral with the latter through nut 11. It is
| used to adjust the A.F.U. to length in the aircraft.
Clevis 9 is screwed to the external ena ot rod 3 and is secured against motion by means of
lockplate 13.
Each clevis is provided with pin 14, washer 15, nut 16 and locking pin 17.
3- OPERATION
A Rod retraction (A.F.U. shortening) causes the representative point on the force versus travel chart
to move along broken line OABC.
(1) Point 0
The center spring is compressed between both stops respectively bearing agains rod shoulder and
sleeve. The rod is in balanced configuration under the antagonistic action of both end springs.
(2) Segment OA
The spring located on cylinder bottom side becomes compressed. The center spring, due to its
higher initial load, remains set to the same length. The spring located on rod side extends.
Within that range, only the end springs are operating.

(3) Point A
The spring located on cylinder bottom side is partially compressed. The center spring remains still
set to its initial length. The spring located on rod side extends exactly up to its free length dimension.
(4) Segment AB
The spring located on cylinder bottom side becomes compressed. The center spring remains still
set to its initial length. The spring located on rod side which has reached its free length dimension
remains inoperative.
Within that range, only the spring located on cylinder bottom side is operating.
(5) Point B
The load applied by the spring located on cylinder bottom side exactly reaches the center spring
initial setting value.
(6) Segment BC
The load applied by the spring located on cylinder bottom side is higher than center spring initial
setting value. The center spring becomes compressed and stop 4, which acts as a common seat to both
springs, leaves its bearing point and moves along the rod.
Within that range, only the center spring and the spring located on cylinder bottom side are
operating.
B Rod extension (A.F.U. lengthening) causes the representative point on the force versus travel chart
to move along broken line OA'B'C. The springs operate in a symmetrical way with respect to rod
retraction sequence described above.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANÙAL04
.14-15-16-17 14-15-16-17
m*MMM%£M
1 I
wmmmwsswt
I ' jîÛ^Jd^d^m
Measurement of dimensions A,B or C D

H W
.Face d'appui de jauge sur le poste d'essai L

Test stand gauge bearing face
< Efforts en daN"(lb.wgt) 29,32 (65.90)

Loads in daN (Ib.wqt)
21 A (61.60) 3 trous d'évacuation

11.77 (26.46) dans cette position a ±10°
3 evacuation hnles
25,48 (57.28) in this position aligned within ±10°
1 1 (24.72)
6,74(15.151
6,3 (14, 16)
5,86 (13. 17)

Déplacement en mm
Course utile 21,5 Displacement in (in)
Useful travel (0.85 in) Extension (ST)
^C
1,6 .4 Course utile 21,5
(0.06) (0. 15) Useful travel (0.85 in) Longueur théorique 383,6 mm ± 3
Theoretical length (15. 10 in ± 0. 12)
6,3(14.16)
(15.1 o;
1 1 (24.72)
25,48 (57.28)
(26.46) j
21 A (61.60)
29,32 (65.90)
Diagramme théorique de la loi force/déplacement

Graph showing theoretical load/travel relationship
FIGURE 13 - SYSTEME DE RESTITUTION ARTIFICIELLE DE GAUCHISSEMENT

ROLL ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^ _
/L^^trU MIRAGE F
SPOILER SPRING BOX
(Figure 14)
1- GENERAL
Inserted in the flight control channel, the spring box allows one of the spoilers to be deflected
upwards and takes up the linkage slack in the case where the aileron is being deflected downwards.
2- DESCRIPTION
The spring box consists of :
- Body 1
- Rod 2
- Two stops 3 and 4
- Spacer 5
- Two springs 6
- End-fitting 7
- Two attachment clevises 8 and 9.
A - Body 1
. One body end is blanked off by end-fitting 7 into which is screwed one of the component
attachment devices.
The other end is drilled with a hole provided for rod passage.
The body contains the spring box constituent items.
B- Rod 2
It slides in the cylinder and its displacement in either direction drives stop 3 or 4, therefore causing
the springs to be compressed.
C- Stop 3 and 4
Each stop acts as a seat to one of the springs.
Their bore and outer surface are provided with four machined grooves, each of these grooves being
fitted with a teflon washer 21 . These teflon rings are intended to reduce frictions between stops and rod
and between stops and body.
D Spacer 5
Placed between the two stops, it slides on the rod and acts as a seat to the springs.
Its bore is provided with two machined grooves accomodating a teflon washer 20.
E Springs 6

-Spring located on body bottom side : Between stop 3 in contact with body bottom and spacer 5.
-Spring located on end-fitting side : Between spacer 5 and stop 4 in contact with end-fitting.
AA
BREGUET
L^^yL.
AVIATION^gF=^<0
MIRAGE F
s^C*^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
F- End-fitting 7
It allows the end play of moving assembly to be cancelled.
G Attachment clevises 8 and 9
Clevis 9, which is screwed into end-fitting 7 , is made integral with the latter through nut 1,1. It is
fitted with pin 14, washer 15, nut 16 and safety pin 17. It is used to adjust the spring box to length in
the aircraft.
Clevis 8 is screwed to the external end of rod 2 and is secured to the latter by means of
lockplate 12. It is fitted with pin 18 and nut 19. Washer 13 is inserted between clevis 8 and stop 3.
3- OPERATION
In rest configuration, the spring box rod is held in neutral position due to the equivalent initial
setting of both springs.
Initial setting value is equal to the spring box threshold force. Any force higher than this threshold
force causes the rod to be moved (extension or retraction).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 14- BOITE A RESSORT SPOILER

SPOILER SPRING BOX
AB
06-87 Restricted 1-130 FIGURE 14 1-1:
BREGUET AVIATION
AILERON SPRING BOX
(Figure 15)
1 - GENERAL
This spring box, which is placed in front of the aileron servo-control and which is coupled to the
trim actuator, is intended to :
- obtain full spoiler deflection in the case where the aileron servo-control abuts against its
mechanical stop or is incapable of absorbing further effort ;
- limit linkage stresses to an acceptable value for system components.
DESCRIPTION
- Body 1
-Rod 2
- Two stops 3 and 4
- Spring 5
- Plug 6
- End-fitting assembly 7.
A - Body 1
One body end is blanked off by plug 6 and theother is drilled with a hole provided for rod passage.
The body contains the spring box constituent items.
B- Rod 2
Shouldered at one end, it slides in the cylinder and its displacement in either direction drives
stop 3 or 4, therefore causing the spring to be compressed.
C- Stops 3 and 4
They act as a seat to the spring.
Their bore and outer surface are provided with three machined grooves, each of these grooves
being fitted with a teflon ring 13-14. These teflon rings are intended to reduce frictions between stops
and rod and between stops and body.
D Spring 5
Bearing against both stops 3 and 4, it is more or less compressed depending on spring box
lengthening or shortening.
E - Plug 6
Screwed into the body, it takes up the end play of the moving assembly.
It is provided with a threaded end which allows the spring box to be attached to the trim actuator
through nut 1 1 and lock washer 12.
AA
BREGUET
/LJ^TÎL
AVIATION^c^^g"^
MIRAGE F
F End-fitting assembly 7
Screwed onto the rod external end and secured against motion by means of lockplate 9, it is fitted
with teflon-coated ball 15. Washer 8 is inserted between stop 3 and end-fitting 7.
3- OPERATION
In rest configuration, the spring box rod is held in neutral position due to spring initial setting.
Initial setting value is equal to the spring box treshold force.
Any force higher than this treshold force causes the rod to be moved (extension or retraction).
AA
BREGUET AVI ATION. ^SS»
MIRAGE F
-.-.i f JV.V.'.V
MJ&JLJ& f\ ft m
*Mh*******d*fc*hU>»i**MiMifc*>
W4 V V
H^J^L±UmXJ^Jm*^*Êm*J I I I |rt^J^^MJjrt*i*M^kwilWi
Eventuellement une rondelle

suivant nécessité du réglage
Washer if required
by adjustment
(3 trous 0 1,5 à 120°) pour,

freinage par fil du contre-écrou (10)
Amendment "A "
Course (three 1.5 mm dia. holes at 120°)
Travel for safety wiring locknut (10)
Butée mécanique
Mechanical stop
i *
Butée mécanique
Mechanical stop
Travel
Modification 682
non appliquée
Modification 682
not incorporated
FIGURE 15- BOITE A RESSORT AILERON

AILERON SPRING BOX
AB
09-86 Restricted 1-133 FIGURE 15 i-i:
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H VW/-X /V\ll\/-\V7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION^^
^«v. ^5?-=^
^~^> .
Resected , ««amiiaio/.04
MANUAL
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF ROLL AFU
A - Special tools
-Flight control 1st line tool kit

B - Spares
-2 locking pins 2331 0 AA 01 501 5 LE
2 - MATERIALS
3 - REMOVAL
- Remove doors 1 1 -08i and 1 2-08.
B - Removal
-Disconnect the AFU bonding braids (7 mm wrench).

-Remove both AFU attaching pins.
- Remove the AFU through door 1 1 -08i.
4 - INSTALLATION
-Adjust AFU length to the corresponding center-to-center distance without stress (see
04-1).
-Lubricate the pins slightly before installation.
B - Installation of AFU
-Through door 1 1 -08i, offer the AFU end fitting located on sliding rod side and engage
its towards the rear of the aircraft. The drain holes are to be aligned to within ± 10° and di¬
rected downwards.
-Couple the AFU to the linkage:
-install the pin on fixed point side, taking care to insert the teflon nutation-limiting
washer between clevis and fitting on nut side. Place the pin head towards the outside of the
aircraft. Install the washer and the nut (10-mm wrench) and then the locking pin,
-install the pin on bellcrank side, taking care to insert the teflon nutation-limiting
washer on nut side. Place the pin head on aircraft centerline side. Install the washer and the
nut (10-mm wrench) and then the locking pin.
-Connect the bonding braids (7-mm wrench).
NOTE: Make sure that the screw attaching the bonding braid to the AFU does not abut
against the front support.
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Check roll artificial feel forces (see 04-1). Check that the AFU does not come into con¬
tact with other components during its travel.
-Check that the attaching pins are properly locked and close the access doors.
AA
BREGUET
1L^-Ii^js\
AVIATIONôF0^
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AN AILERON SPRING BOX
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).

- Accessory kit for torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft. lb).
B Spares
- 1blanking plug for access to spring box pin, F1 17-10-47.

- 1cotter pin 23310 AA 015O20LE.
- Lockwire 23320AC080Z
2- MATERIALS
Remove door V2-46.

-
Set the roll linkage to neutral (see 04-1).
-
- Remove the blanking plug from the hole providing access to the spring box pin (on servo-control
side).
4- REMOVAL OF SPRING BOX (see figure 17)
A Remove the spring box and trim actuator assembly.
Disconnect the electrical connector from the trim actuator and free the clamps.
-
- Remove the pin attaching the spring box to the servo-control, remove the cotter pin and unscrew
the nut (10 mm wrench).
- Remove the pin head retainer (7 mm wrench), then the pin attaching the trim actuator to the
bellcrank (10 mm wrench). Recover the flange and the washer.
- Remove the spring box and trim actuator assembly from the structural box.
B Measure the center-to-center distance between the attachments of the assembly.

C Uncouple the spring box from the trim actuator.
- Unlock and loosen the nut attaching the spring box to the trim actuator (19 mm wrench or
17 mm wrench if modification 682 not incorporated) while holding the lockwasher of the trim actuator
sleeve (19 mm wrench) ; remove the lockwasher from the trim actuator sleeve, unscrew the spring box.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^SF3,
ti^>*tr\L MIRAGE F
5- INSTALLATION (see figure 17)
A Preliminary steps
- Lightly lubricate the pins and end fitting of the spring box before installation.
CAUTION :
CHECK THE BEARING FACES OF THE LOCKWASHER, SKIRT-TYPE NUT AND END OF
THE TRIM ACTUATOR SLEEVE WHICH SHOULD BE FREE OF DISTORTION, METAL
BURRS AND DENTS.
B Coupling of spring box to actuator
- Fully screw skirt-type nut 1 1 matched with the plug without tightening, then place lockwasher 12
against the nut.
- Screw xne spring box onto the trim actuator, observing the center-to-center distance as mesured
on removal.
- Engage lockwasher 12 in the trim actuator sleeve notches (adjust to ± 1/4 turn), then unscrew the
skirt-type nut so as to seat the assembly.
- Tighten skirt-type nut 1 1 as follows :
-apply a settling torque of 3 m.daN (22.125 ft.lb) to the skirt-type nut while holding the
lockwasher with a 19 mm open-end wrench. Loosen the nut and perform this settling operation three
times,
- apply a final torque of 2.5 m.daN (18.44 ft.lb).
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT ONE OF THE WRENCHES DOES NOT ENGAGE BOTH THE SKIRT-TYPE
NUT AND THE LOCKWASHER.
DURING THIS OPERATION, DO NOT PREVENT THE ROTATION OF THE TRIM ACTUA¬
TOR OR ANOTHER COMPONENT OF THE SPRING BOX.
NOTE : Upon connection of the spring box to the trim actuator (modification 682 incorporated),
make sure that the nut skirt sufficiently covers the center portion of the spring box plug
shank. To this end, check dimension X which should be less than or equal to 14 mm
(0.551 in) between the skirt-type nut bearing face and the spring box plug (see 04-1 :
Adjustment of roll control system).
- Lockwire nut 1 1 with lockwasher 12.
C Installation of spring box/trim actuator assembly
- Install the pin on servo-control side, head up : install the washer and Nylstop castellated nut
(10 A/F wrench), then fit the cotter pin.
- On bellcrank side : position the recessed washer (upper portion), install the pin with head up,
insert the washer (on pin head side), install and tighten the nut (10 A/F wrench), and then position
the pin head retainer (7 A/F wrench).
The spring box adjustment is correct if the ailerons are in the same position as before removal.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Check the following on system 1 , then system 2, then systems 1 and 2 (see 04-1 ) :
- that aileron neutral positions are within tolerance,
- that spoiler offset (aileron/spoiler interconnection) is adjusted within tolerance,
- that aileron and spoiler control operates properly with correct travel.
- During operation, make sure that there is not contact with components of the compartment.
- After checking correct safetying of the spring box on the trim actuator and installation of the
attachment pins, close the door and fit the blanking plug.
AB
BREGUET
fl^^^Q
AVIATION^rjoP3^^*^
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A SPOILER SPRING BOX
A Spares
- 1 locking pin 2331 0 AA 01 501 5 LE
- 3 blanking plugs (access holes to spring box pins).
2- MATERIALS
- Grease Air 4222 or 4210.
- Remove door V2.59 and the gang channel with its nuts.
- Remove fairing V1.51.
- Set the roll linkage to neutral (see 04-1 ).
- Remove the blanking plugs from the holes providing access to the spring box pins.
4- REMOVAL
- Remove both spring box attaching pins (10-mm socket).

- Remove the spring box by first taking out the end opposite the rod.
- Measure the center-to-center distance on the removed spring box.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
NOTE : In the event of spring box replacement, its length is to be adjusted as per the center-to-center
distance as measured on removal (see 04-1 : Calibration check of spoiler spring box - Final
steps).
Slightly lubricate the attaching pins before installation.

-
Check that the 4 mm dia hole in the adjustable clevis is aligned with one of the four holes of the
-
spring box body at ± 10° and directed downwards.
B Installation
Installation is performed in reverse order to removal.

Couple the spring box to the linkage.
-
Install the pin on rod side (pin head directed upwards). Install the self-locking nut (10-mm
socket),
- Install the pin on body side (pin head directed upwards), taking care to insert the teflon
nutation-limiting washer, the recessed washer and the nut (10-mm wrench), and then the locking pin.
- Correct adjustment of spring box length is to be checked by measuring the spoiler deflection
with respect to the aileron deflection (see 04-1 ).
6- FINAL STEPS
Perform a functional test of the roll control system (see 04-1 ).
-
Check that the spring box does not come into contact with other components during its travel.
- Check that the attaching pins are properly locked, remount the gang channel with its nuts, refit
the doors and the fairing and install the three blanking plugs.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^_^_
fl^^rà.
^ ^
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF A SPOILER SERVO-CONTROL

(figure 16)
A Special tools
- Flight control 1st line tool kit
B Standard tools
- Set of extra-thin open-end wrenches
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 Ib.ft) and 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 Ib.ft)
- Accessory kits for torque wrenches

-Electrical power supply 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz
-Set of plugs for hydraulic systems
D Spares
- 1 retainer F 110-32-03
- 1 retainer 23351 AC 050 LE
- 2 retainers 23351 AC 060 LE
- Blanking plugs for :
- access hole to pin of drive rod of servo-control slide valve (plug F1 16-10-48)
- access hole to bellcrank/micrometric rod pin (plug F1 16-10-45)
2- MATERIALS
-Sealant PR 1422B
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL THE SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM CONCERNED

(see 01-0).
Servo-controls are interchangeable. They are adjusted in factory with very close tolerances (same
center-to-center distance for same piston position). No operation is permitted on servo-controls. Any
operation causing the center-to-center distance to be altered requires the component to be sent to the
manufacturer for complete adjustment.
- Remove doors V1.56 (wrench M31052), V1.58, V1.60, V1.51, V1.63 and the relevant blanking
plugs so as to allow access to the various pins (wrenches M31066 and M31069).
- Remove gang channel 6 fitted to door V1.58.
5- REMOVAL
I A - Disconnect the four servo-control supply pipes on servo-control side (14 and 16 mm A/F open-end
wrenches, or 17 mm A/F open-end wrench for Teflon pipes (Mod. 384 incorporated)). Blank off the
ports by means of appropriate plugs.
B Uncouple servo-control drive rod 1 on slide valve side.
- Remove the pin head retainer (5 mm socket). Recover the spring. Remove the retainer using
extractor M3 1063.
- Remove the pin (10 mm socket) using extractor M31064.
AC MOD 757
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAULTJLJ^^L /VIIKMVJ'C T
BREGUET AVIATION^c^^-^r^
^2^^=--^^ «...
Restricted ...MIIAI
MANUAL 04
n.
C Uncouple the servo-control from bellcrank 2 (on sliding rod side).
- Remove the bonding braid.

- Remove the retainer (10 mm socket) and pin M31048 (extractor MS1395).
D Uncouple micrometric rod 3.
- Act on the spoiler to bring micrometric rod/bellcrank 4.hinge pin opposite door V1 .63.
- Remove the nut retainer (10 mm socket) and the pin (30 mm socket). Recover travel limit
washer 7.
Uncouple micrometric rod 3 from servo-control actuating bellcrank 2 (connecting pin opposite
-
access hole).
- Remove the pin head retainer (10 mm socket). Recover the spring. Remove the retainer using
extractor M31 063.
- Remove pin S 30 using extractor M31065.
- Recover the travel limit washer.
E Remove bellcrank 2 pin (wrench M31023).
F Disengage and position micrometric rod 3 and bellcrank 2, proceeding as described hereafter and
as shown in the figure.
(1 ) Disengage and position micrometric rod 3 (phase 1 ).
- Disengage bellcrank 2 towards the wing root, while rotating the arm located on servo-control
side in order to bring it approximately parallel to the spar, with a view to removing it from its hinge
clevises.
- Rotate the micrometric rod by 180° (half-turn with retainer upwards) and disengage it through
the rear spar passage hole. If it is desired- to remove it from the wing, first remove the retainer (passage
through spar hole).
(2) Position bellcrank 2 (position allowing servo-control removal) (phase 2).
- Pivot bellcrank 2 and push it against rib 1, with the arm located on micrometric rod side firmly
applied against the rib and parallel to the latter. Support the bellcrank by means of a wooden block 5
(see drawing).
G Uncouple the servo-control on its fixed point side (24-mm socket).
- Remove the plug4pin wrench M' 3 1052).

- Remove the pin using extractor MS1394.
H Remove the servo-control (see removal phases in figures)
- Fully retract the servo-control sliding rod.

Push it as far as possible towards the wing root (phase 1 ).
-
- Disengage the slide valve control lever from the door frame by slightly rotating the servo-control
about its longitudinal axis. Disengage the fixed point side attachment (phases 2 and 3).
- Remove the servo-control by pulling it outwards.
6- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Prior to installation in aircraft, clean and lightly lubricate the pins and ball joints. On the
lubricated ball joint (fixed point side), check that the lubricating groove is opposite the end fitting
notches used for disassembly.
AB MOD 757
05-85 Restricted .1-306
BREGUET AVIATION ^ji
IL>^ru
^ ^
MIRAGE F
B Installation
- Fully retract the servo-control sliding rod.
(1 )Engage the servo-control in the compartment. To this end :

push it as far as possible towards the wing root (phase 3)
-
- disengage the slide valve control lever from the door frame by slightly rotating the servo-control
about its longitudinal axis (phase 2).
(2) Install the servo-control

- Install the servo-control pin on fixed point side, tighten centering thimble SMS231 onto the pin.
- Position the pin, install and tighten the nut (24 mm socket) and torque to 7 to 8 m.daN
(51.6to59lb.ft).
Remove the wooden block.
-
Pivot bellcrank 2, engage it on the servo-control.
-
- Reinstall rod 3 in its location and rotate through 180° (half turn, retainer downwards).
- Install bellcrank 2 center pin, tighten centering thimble SMS247.
- slightly raise the rotation pin of bellcrank 2 on the wing upper surface and apply a PR
sealant bead to seal the pin head, then wipe off the excess sealant,
- position the pin, install the retainer, the screw (wrench M31023), tighten and torque to
1.5 to 2 m.daN (1 1.06 to 14.75 Ib.ft). Safety the screw.
(3) Position micrometric rod 3.

- Couple rod 3 to spoiler actuating bellcrank 4.
- Install the travel limit washer.
- Position the pin, tighten nut (30 mm socket) and torque to 9.3 m.daN (68.5 Ib.ft).
- Fit the nut retainer and its attachment screw.
- Couple rod 3 to servo-control actuating bellcrank 2.
- Install the travel limit washer.
- Position pin S30 and torque tighten to 9.3 m.daN (68.5 Ib.ft).
- Fit the retainer and its spring nut (10 mm socket).
(4) Couple the servo-control to bellcrank 2. To position the pin, the sliding rod may be disengaged
by pulling on the servo-control barrel while actuating the control slide valve so that the clevis comes
in front of the swivel end.
- Position the pin and torque tighten (M31048) to 9 to 10 m.daN (66.3 to 73.7 Ib.ft).
- Fit the pin retainer and its attachment screw.
- Install the bonding braid.
AC MOD 757
BREGUET AVIATION
(5) Couple drive rod 1 of the servo-control slide valve.

-Position the pin and fit the retainer with its nut spring.
(6) Connect the four hydraulic pipes, taking care not to cross them (as per the figure, view on G).
(7) Lubricate the servo-control.

j -Install the servo-control fixed point pin plug (pin wrench M 31052).
7- REPLACEMENT
The procedure is identical to that for removal/installation of a servo-control, but an additional

adjustment check is required.
(1 ) Adjustment check
Uncouple drive rod 1 from the servo-control on slide valve side, and micrometric rod 3 on bell¬
-
crank 4 side.
- Pressurize barrel 1 (low delivery rate, maximum pressure 50 bar - 724 psi).
- Bring the servo-control to retracted mechanical stop position.
- Install tool M31 150 (see figure below) and adjust its screw in order to come into contact with the
servo-control bushing.
- Drop the hydraulic pressure.
- Couple micrometric rod 3 to bellcrank 4.
- Press the spoilers by hand onto their closing stops.
- Using a set of feeler gages, check that the clearance between tool and servo-control bushing is
2.5 _ 0 1 mm (0.1 ~ Q 0Q4 in). If required, readjust the center-to-center distance of rod 3 as per para¬
graph «Readjustment».
SPOILER
SERVO-CONTROL
-SPOILER SERVO¬
CONTROL BUSHING
INSTALLATION OF TOOL
AA MOD 757
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^ZZTy^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^=L--^^>
(2) Readjustment
Remove micrometric rod 3 and record its center-to-center distance.
-
Uncouple the clevis from the rod body, unsafety and loosen nut 8 (see figure , section F).
-
Unscrew the clevis, remove the retainer and fit a new one.
- Reinstall the clevis, approximately to the center-to-center distance previously recorded.
- Unsafety and loosen nut 9 (wrench M31042 and holding device M31152). Unscrew the clevis,
remove the retainer and fit a new one.
- Reinstall the clevis, approximately to the center-to-center distance previously recorded.
-Torque tighten nut 9 to 17 m.daN (132.3 Ib.ft) and nut 8 to 12 m.daN (88.44 Ib.ft) (wrench
M31042 and holding device M31 152) while holding the two clevises in alignment.
- Reinstall rod 3 and, using a set of feeler gages, check that the clearance between tool and servo¬
control bushing is 2.5 _ 0 1 mm (0.1 ~n nna. m>- If required, readjust the rod length.
- Remove rod 3, bend over the retainer tabs without attempting to lodge them in the castella-
tions of nut 9.
- Reinstall rod 3.
- Check the adjustment (see paragraph «Adjustment check»).
- Apply pressure to the system. Operate the control stick and check that the spoilers deflect by
+ 1°
52 o
-2°
8- FINAL STEPS
- Check that all the components are correctly installed and that safetying is performed wherever
required.
- Bleed the hydraulic systems (see 07-1).
- Check the operation and adjustment of the roll channel (see 04-1).
- Reinstall the removable nut gang channel, access doors and fairings ; install new blanking plugs
on the pin access holes.
AA MOD 757
05-85 Restricted 1-306W
BREGUET AVIATION,
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 04
SECTIOIN
SECTION F
Bielle micrométrique de conjugaison spoilt
Micrometric spoiler interconnection roa
Phasi
y////////////////////////)>(////////////////f
Phase
DESACCOUPLEMENT
DES LIAISONS MECANIQUES
UNCOUPLING OF
MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS
Phase
PHASES DE POSITIONNEMENT DE LA BIELLE MICROMETRIQUE
ET DU GUIGNOL
BELLCRANK AND MICROMETRIC ROD POSITIONING PHASES
VUE SUIVANT G
VIEW ON G
FIGURE 16 -DEPOSE-POSE D'UNE SERVO COMMANDE DE SPOILERS
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF SPOILER CONTROL PHASES DE DEPOSE DE LA SERVO COMMANDE
AC MOD 757 SERVO-CONTROL REMOVAL PHASES
03-81 Restricted 1-307 FIGURE 16 1-3i
BREGUET
jLs^-^Q
AVIATIONxjC?^-<^^ï>
MIRAGE F
^C*^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF ROLL AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL

(see figure 16M)
A Special tools

B Standard tools
- Set of extra-thin wrenches
- Set of plugs for hydraulic system
C Spares
- 2 locking pins 23310 AA 015015 LE

- 1 locking pin 23310 AA 015020 LE
2- MATERIALS
- Grease Air 4222 or 4210
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM CONCERNED (see 01-0).
Servo-controls are interchangeable. No operation is permitted on these parts. Any operation
causing the center-to-center distance to be altered requires return of the component to the manu¬
facturer for complete adjustment.
- Remove door 14.08i in nose U/C well.
NOTE : For easier access to this door, it is recommended to remove some of the air conditioning
pipes.
- Remove the spacer.

- Remove doors V2.46.
5- REMOVAL
- Remove the position pickoff link rod.
- Disconnect the electrical plug from the aircraft receptacle.
- Disconnect both bonding braids (7 mm wrench).
- Disconnect the pipes on the support. Proceed in the following order, starting from door side : P2,
R2, P1 and R1 (14 mm thin fork wrench and 16 mm open-end wrench) (see figure). Note the position
of the pipes to prevent misconnections upon reinstallation (in particular put identification marks on the
two outboard side pipes).
- Blank off the pipes on the support and on the servo-control by means of appropriate plugs.
- Bind the pipes together at the upper part of the servo-control (pipes directed forwards).
- Remove the attaching pin of the slide valve control rod (10 mm wrench).
- Remove both servo-control attaching pins (10 mm wrench). Recover the flange located on
bellcrank side.
- Remove the servo-control.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
Before installing the servo-control in aircraft, equip it with its flexible pipes and lock these pipes.
- Servo-control LH side : P1 at top (small pipe), R1 at bottom.

- Servo-control RH side : R2 at top (small pipe), P2 at bottom.
Lightly grease the connecting pins and spherical bearings before installation.
B Installation
- Engage the auxiliary servo-control in its compartment. The flexible pipes are to be stowed at the
top and directed forward.
- Install :
- the connecting pin on fixed point side,
- the connecting pin on flange-equipped bellcrank side.
The pins are to be fitted with their heads directed outward, so that the nuts are located on access
door side for easier locking pin installation.
- Install the recessed washer and the nut (10 mm wrench), then fit a locking pin.
- Reconnect the system 1 pipes to the support (see figure).
- Servo-control return (R1) to the orifice on outboard side (long pipe at bottom).
- Servo-control delivery (P1) to the immediately adjacent orifice (short pipe at top).
For each pipe, position the coupling nut and engage a few threads by hand, then continue to
screw until contact is obtained (use a 16 mm extra-thin fork wrench with short stem) ; tighten.
CAUTION :
BE CAREFUL NOT TO TWIST THE FLEXIBLE PIPES.
- Lock the two couplings together.

- Then reconnect the system 2 pipes to the support (see figure).
-Servo-control return (R2) to the orifice next to delivery system (P1) (short pipe at top).
- Servo-control delivery (P2) to the last orifice in the support (long pipe at bottom).
screw until contact is obtained (use a 16 mm extra-thin wrench with short stem) ; tighten.
CAUTION :
BTTJAREFUL NOT TO TWIST THE FLEXIBLE PIPES.
- Connect the electrical connector and the bonding braids.
DO NOT CONNECT THE PICKOFF LINK ROD.
7- CHECKING OF CLEARANCES
- Bleed the hydraulic systems (see 07-1). Never bring the ailerons into stop position during this
operation.
- Relieve the hydraulic pressure.
- Disconnect the spring boxes from the servo-control slide valve (8 mm wrench).
- Apply pressure to hydraulic system 1 .
- Proceeding very slowly, manually actuate the slide valve to successively bring the auxiliary servo¬
control against its «rod retracted» then «rod extended» stops ; simultaneously move the servo-control
to stop position and check that the spring boxes can be installed for each of these positions. This opera¬
tion is intended to make sure that the auxiliary servo-control internal stops are within the power servo¬
control stop-to-stop range.
- Measure the power servo-control stop-to-stop range.
- Connect the spring boxes to the servo-control slide valve.
- Measure the auxiliary servo-control stop-to-stop range and check that there is a clearance between
servo-control and auxiliary servo-control.
- Connect the control rod of the auxiliary servo-control slide valve.
- Install the connecting pin with its head on outboard side and fit a locking pin.
- Connect the bonding braid.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iU=i>~ir\l
BREGUET AVIATION^^F^L^Ô .
MIRAGE
,,...,,.,
F
n.
-^ Restricted MANUAL 04
8- FINAL STEPS
- Bleed the hydraulic systems (see 07-1).

- Check pinning :
CAUTION :
TAKE ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES INVOLVED WHEN CHECKING PINNING
DOWNSTREAM OF THE AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL (SEE 01-0).
- pin the bellcrank upstream of the auxiliary servo-control (pin MS 1390-20-8 10),
- check that the LH wing root bellcrank can be pinned (pin MS1390-10-810).
- Remove the pins.

- Check that safetying is correct and that the electrical connector is properly connected.
- Check that the operation and ajustment of the roll control system are OK (see 04-1).
- Fit back the preservo-control pickoff rod.
CAUTION :
- OVER THE WHOLE TRAVEL, CHECK THAT :
-THE PIPES DO NOT RUB AGAINST ANY COMPONENT, SPECIALLY AGAINST THE
POSITION PICKOFF SUPPORT,
- THE PIPES ARE NOT TWISTED.
- Carry out the electrical tests of the roll auxiliary servo-control system (see 13-1).
- Install the spacer and the access doors.
- Perform the integrated test of the flight control electronic system (see 13-0).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION C SECTION B
FIGURE 16M -DEPOSE-POSE DE LA SERVOCOMMANDE AUXILIAIRE DE GAUCHISSEMENT

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF ROLL AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL
AA
03-83 Restricted 1-309T FIGURE 16M 1-309
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ A>-u-n /VMKMVj'C T
BREGUET AVIATION ^c. ^ _
REMOVAL INSTALLATION OF AN AILERON SERVO-CONTROL

(figure 17)
A Special tools

B Standard tools
- Set of extra-thin fork wrenches

- Accessory kit for torque wrenches, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350 ft.lb)
C Spares

- 1 locking pin 23310 CA 03003S
- 1 blanking plug for access hole to servo-control pin (sliding rod side)
- 1 blanking plug for access hole to link pin between servo-control and spring box
D Ground support equipment

- Electrical power supply, 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz
2- MATERIALS
- G rease Air 4222 or 42 1 0
3- GENERAL
Servo-controls are interchangeable. No operation is permitted on these parts. Any operation

- Remove doors V2.46 and V3.51, as well as the plug blanking the access hole to the servo-control
pin (on sliding rod side) and the servo-control/spring box link pin.
- Remove gang channel 1 .
- Remove aileron drive rod fairing V3.47.
- Remove the pin of the slide valve control rod (10-mm wrench).
5- REMOVAL
A Disconnect hydraulic pipes from structure (14- and 16-mm open-end wrenches). Blank off
uncovered ports by means of appropriate plugs.
B Disconnect the aileron drive rod (see 03-1 ).
C Disconnect the spring box from the servo-control slide valve (10-mm A/F wrench).
D Remove both servo-control attaching pins.
Attaching pin on fixed point side : socket M 31055.

AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION A
Entre axes
MODIFICATION 682 NON APPLIQUEE

MODIFICA TION 682 NOT INCORPORA TED wmmMt
Rondelle cham
Recessed wash
Rondelle'
Washer

MODIFICA TION 4f>S NOT INCORPORA TED
FIGURE 17 - DEPOSE-POSE D'UNE SERVO-COMMANDE D'AILERON
REMOVAL-INSTALLA TION OF AN AILERON SERVO-CnNTROL
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT \Lj>^rsl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^fi^3^^
- Attaching pin on sliding rod side : 19-mm socket. Recover the nutation-limiting flange and
recessed washer.
- Bring the clevis opposite door V3.47 to unscrew the nut.
- To remove the pin (extractor MS 1396), bring it level with the hole in the wing upper surface.
E Remove the servo-control.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
Clean and lightly lubricate attaching pins and ball joints. Check that the lubricating groove on the
lubricated ball joint (fixed point side) is opposite the end fitting notches used for disassembly.
B Installation
NOTE : Engage the servo-control in its compartment with rod retracted. It will be necessary to
extend the sliding rod for pinning the attaching pins.
Proceed in reverse order to removal.
Torque the servo-control attaching pins as follows :

- attaching pin on sliding rod side : 3.5 to 4 m.daN (25.81 to 29.5 ft.lb) (fit a locking pin),
- attaching pin on fixed point side : 7 to 8 m.daN (51.62 to 59 ft.lb).
Check that the components are properly installed and that all the parts concerned are properly
locked.
Lubricate the servo-control.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Apply pressure to system 1.

- Bleed the hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).
- Proceeding very slowly, manually actuate the slide valve to bring the servo-control against its
internal stop. Measure the travel.
- Connect the spring box.
- Set the auxiliary servo-control to stop configuration and measure the travel ; check that the
servo-control stop is located outside the auxiliary servo-control stop-to-stop range.
- Connect the slide valve control rod.
- Perform a functional test of the roll control system (see 04-1).
- Reinstall access doors and fairings, as well as new blanking plugs on pin access holes.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
//-^-""rU
. _ _
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF AILERON

SERVO-CONTROL DUAL SUPPLY VALVE
A Standard tools
- Arsaero coupling kit

2- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM CONCERNED (see 01-0).
- Refer to precautions to be taken when working on hydraulic systems (see 07-0).
3- REMOVAL
A Before removal
- Remove the engine (see 06-4).
B Removal of valve
CAUTION :
MARK THE POSITION OF SYSTEM 1 AND 2 LINES.
- Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the dual supply valve.

BLANK THE PORTS AS LINES ARE DISCONNECTED.
- Remove the valve attachment screws.
- Withdraw the valve from its support.
INSTALLATION
- Position the valve on its support.

- Fit the attachment screws.
- Connect the hydraulic lines.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Bleed air from the hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).

I- Check the connection points of reconnected lines for leakage or seepage.
- Check supply to No. 2 barrel of the aileron servo-controls (see 04-1 ).
- Carry out functional and adjustment checks of the roll channel (see 04-1).
- Reinstall the engine (see 06-4).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]" UJI-" /V\||\/-\V-7L_ I
BREGUET AVIATION Zs&~~-
^ ^-^^,
^^-^ .
Restricted , «.amiiai 04
MANUAL csa
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF ROLL AFU

(figure 13)
A - Special tools
-Flight control 2nd line tool kit.
B - Standard tools
-Accessory kit for torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
-Mechanical test stand MK M043.
D - Spares
-1 lockplate (clevis-sleeve locking),
-4 bearing rings 06S0161001,
-2 bearing rings 08S0205008.
2 - MATERIALS
-Approved chlorinated solvent or white spirit.
-Grease M I L-G -4343.
3 - DISASSEMBLY
-Remove pins 14.
With the AFU neither compressed nor released, accurately measure the center-to-center
distance between attaching clevises - theoretical dimension: 383.6 ± 3 mm (15.102 ± 0.12
in).
- Unsafety nuts 1 1 and 1 2.
-Unlock and unscrew nut 11 (wrench MHC 229-23) while holding clevis 10 (34-mm
A/F ring wrench).
-Unscrew and remove clevis 10 and nut 11.
-Determine the relative position of adjusting guide 8 with respect to cylinder 1 and if re¬
quired, mark these two parts (mark covering both parts). Measure dimension D.
-Straighten lockplate 13, unscrew clevis 9 (wrench D017) while holding sleeve 7
(10-14 x 17 wrench) and then remove clevis 9 and lockplate 13.
-Place the AFU in support block MFG 229-21. Unlock and unscrew nut 12 (wrench
MHC 229-22) while holding adjusting guide 8 (28-mm A/F ring wrench).
-Fully unscrew the adjusting guide, then remove the moving assembly and spring 5 from
cylinder 1 (adjusting guide side).
-Remove the cylinder from the support block and remove second spring 5.
-Accurately measure dimension E on the moving assembly then unscrew sleeve 7
(10-14 x 17 wrench) while securing rod 2 against rotation (wrench MHG 229-21).
-Successively remove stop 3, spring 6 and stop 4.
4 - CLEANING - INSPECTION - LUBRICATION

-Clean all removed parts by dipping and brushing them in a chlorinated solvent or white
spirit bath.
-Dry with clean and dry compressed air.
NOTE: While cleaning, make sure that the evacuation holes in cylinder 1 and clevis 10 are
clear.
-Check removed parts for external condition, making sure that the various sliding surfaces
do not show evidence of deep scratches or flaking of the chromium coat protecting rod 2 and
sleeve 7.
AB
06 - 87 Restricted 1 - 401
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT \LS>-^-K\ /V\ll\^\wC. I
breguet aviation ^^^ Restricted . MANUAL 04
-If necessary, remove any minor defects from chromium-plated surfaces of rod and sleeve
using crocus cloth.
-Carefully clean both parts upon completion of above operation.
-Systematically replace bearing rings 18 and 19.
-On stops 3 and 4, blend out the edges of any marks caused by the spring if the depth of
the indentations does not exceed 0.3 mm (0.012 in); otherwise, replace the stops.
-Check characteristics of springs 5 and 6:
-for both springs 5, free length comprised between 35.1 and 36.7 mm (1 .368 and
1.431 in) or deflection of 1.6 mm (0.063 in) under a load of 2.93 to 3.37 daN (6.59 to
7.57 Ib.wgt),
-for spring 6, free length comprised between 54 and 56.2 mm (2.106 and 2.191 in)
or deflection of 6.2 mm (0.244 in) under a load of 10.23 to 11.77 daN (23 to
26.46 Ib.wgt).
NOTE 1 : The spring free lengths are the operating values.
NOTE 2 : The end spring turns must remain closed.
-Scrap any spring whose characteristics are not to the above tolerances.
-Check the bearing faces of nut 12 and cylinder 1 and of nut 11 and clevis 10 which
should show no evidence of distortion, burrs or dents; otherwise, replace nuts 11 or 12 and at¬
tenuate the defects on the cylinder or clevis bearing face without modifying the perpendicular¬
ity of the faces in relation to the axis of the part.
-Using a cloth smeared with a slight amount of grease MIL.G.4343B, lubricate the
springs and internal components of the equipment, then remove any excess grease from the
sliding surfaces so as to prevent grease accumulation at the internal stops or in the ring
grooves. EXCESS GREASE IS DETRIMENTAL TO AFU OPERATION.
5 - ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Upon assembly, lightly lubricate the threads of guide 8, rod 2 and cylinder 1 .
-Successively install stop 4, spring 6 and stop 3 on rod 2.

-Screw sleeve 7 onto the rod, until it is in contact with stop 3.
-Secure the rod with holding screwdriver MHG 229-21 and tighten the sleeve (10-14 x
17 wrench) until dimension E is obtained.
-Install the end spring on the moving assembly (cylinder bottom side).
-Insert the moving assembly into cylinder 1 and grip the latter in vice support MFG
229-21 .
-Install the second end spring.

-Screw adjusting guide 8 (28-mm A/F ring wrench) until coincidence is achieved with
the position marked at disassembly (dimension D) (index marks opposite each other).
-Screw nut 12 and tighten it slightly while holding the adjusting guide (28-mm A/F ring
wrench).
-Install a new lockplate 13 at rod end.
-Screw and slightly tighten clevis 9.
NOTE: Lockplate 1 3 will be bent after checking of AFU loads and tightening of clevis 9 to the
required torque.
-Remove the AFU from the vice support.
-Screw nut 1 1 to the cylinder, screw clevis 10 um«l the center-to-center distance
measured at disassembly is obtained, then slightly tighten nut 1 1 .
NOTE: When installing the clevis, make sure that its evacuation hole is aligned (as close as
possible) with the hole in the cylinder.
6 - TESTS
-Calibration check and adjustment of AFU (see 04-1 ).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^sSF3.^*^
fi^J^-j^Q, MIRAGE F
^5â^=-~^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION -ASSEMBLY OF AN AILERON SPRING BOX

(See figure 15)
A Special tools
- Flight control 2nd line tool kit.
B Standard tools

- Set of extra-thin wrenches.
- Mechanical test unit MK M043.
D Spares
- 1 retainer (clevis/rod locking).

- 2 bearing rings 06S0391001.
- 4 bearing rings 06S0201002.
2- MATERIALS
-GreaseMIL-G-4343.
3- DISASSEMBLY
- Remove lockwasher 12 and nut 11.
NOTE : Modification 682 incorporated : as plug 6 and skirt-type nut 1 1 are matched, the rejection of
one part shall be cause for systematic replacement of both parts.
- Place the spring box in vice support MFG 103-21 .

Unlock and unscrew nut 10 (wrench MHC 103-21).
-
Unscrew plug 6 (32 mm wrench or 14 mm wrench if modification 682 not incorporated) and
-
remove it.
- Remove the mobile assembly from the body and place it in spring removal/installation tool
MGC 103-21.
Tighten the tool operating screw until stop 3 unseats from washer 8.
-
Straighten retainer 9, unscrew clevis 7 (wrench D21), remove the retainer and washer 8, then
-
unscrew the tool operating screw until spring 5 is fully released.
- Remove the mobile assembly from the tool and successively remove stop 3, spring 5 and stop 4
from the rod.
4- CLEANING - INSPECTION - LUBRICATION

- Clean all removed parts (except clevis 7) by dipping and brushing them in a chlorinated solvent or
white spirit bath.
- Dry with clean and dry compressed air.
Clevis 7, which is fitted with a Teflon-coated ball, should be cleaned by means of a clean lintless
rag soaked with solvent, being careful to avoid any contact between Teflon-coated ball and solvent.
NOTE : While performing cleaning, make sure that the vent holes provided on body 1 and plug 6 are
clear.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fiV-'Ml
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ ^^> ^ . ^ . ,,.,,,,.. .04
^<-l ^s~~^> Restricted MANUAL
-Check removed parts for external condition, making sure that the various rubbing sur¬
faces do not show evidence of deep scratches or flaking of chromium-plating coat protecting
the rod.
-On stops 3 and 4, blend out the edges of any marks caused by the spring if the depth of
-Check that the free length of spring 5 is comprised between 223.9 and 228.5 mm
(8.732 and 8.911 in).
-Scrap any spring whose characteristics are not comprised within above tolerances.
-Check the bearing faces of nut 10 and body 1 which should show no evidence of dis¬
tortion, burrs or dents; otherwise, replace nut 10 and attenuate the defects on the body bear¬
ing face without modifying the perpendicularity of the face in relation to the axis of the part.
-Check that the hexagon section of plug 6 has three lockwire holes; otherwise, drill the
holes as indicated in the figure.
grooves. EXCESS GREASE IS DETRIMENTAL TO SPRING BOX OPERATION.
5 - ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Upon assembly, lightly lubricate the threads of rod 2 and plug 6.
-Install stop 4, spring 5 and stop 3 on rod 2.

-Place above assembly in spring removing and installing tool MGC 103-21. Tighten tool
actuating screw until washer 8 can be easily installed. Fit a new lockplate at rod end and
screw clevis 7 (wrench D21 ) up to stop.
-Untighten tool actuating screw and remove moving assembly.
-Grip moving assembly in a vice fitted with fiber jaws (grip it through the two flat sec¬
tions machined on end flange of rod 2), tighten clevis 7 to a torque of 2 m.daN (14.7 ft.lb)
and fold lockplate 9.
-Insert moving assembly in the body, screw nut 10 on plug 6 and screw the latter into
the body until its internal face comes into contact with stop 4 (which cancels any end play
between body and rod).
-Torque nut 10 to 3.4 m.daN (25.07 ft.lb) using vice support MFG 103-21 and wrench
MHC 103-21 . Check that no end play exists after tightening.
6 - TESTS
-Spring box calibration check (See 04-1).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=i>'"r-U
MIRAGE F
REPLACEMENT OF AN AILERON SPRING BOX PLUG ON AIRCRAFT

(MODIFICATION 682 INCORPORATED)
(see figure 17)
A Special tools
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN ( 1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)

- Mechanical test stand MKM043
D Spares
| - 1 plug/nut assembly 105071 150001 (matched parts)

- 1 cotter pin 233 10AA01 5020 LE
-1 blanking plug F1 17-1 0-47
| - Lockwire 23320AC080Z
Spares (if required)
- 2 washers 04S01 2201 4 (item 1 6)

- 2 lockwashers 31650AC100TA (for LH and RH rods F171-22, item 27)
- 2 cotter pins 23310CA020020
2- MATERIALS
-GreaseMIL-G-4343B
- Placethe roll control linkage in neutral position (see 04-1 ).

- Remove the blanking plug giving access to the spring box pin (on servo-control side).
- Remove door V2-46.
- Remove the spring box/trim actuator assembly (see 04-1 ).
- Measure the center-to-center distance between the attachments of the assembly.
- Uncouple the spring box from the trim actuator.
- Recover lockwasher 1 2.
4- REMOVAL OF SPRING BOX PLUG (see 04-1 )
- Remove plug 6 and recover nut 10 locking it to the body.

- Reject the plug 6 and nut 1 1 assembly (matched parts).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /7_î>^rU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^1 _
MIRAGE F
5- INSTALLATION OF NEW SPRING BOX PLUG (see 04-1)
- Check the bearing faces on body 1 and nut 10, then fit the plug (after lightly lubricating the
threads) in body 1 until end play of the moving assembly is completely suppressed. Install nut 10 and
torque to 3.4 ± 0.17 m.daN (25.07 ± 1.25 ft.lb) and check that no end play exists after tightening.
Safety the nut and plug as indicated in the figure.
- Install the new skirt-type nut 1 1 matched to plug 6.
6 - INSTALLATION OF SPRING BOX/TRIM ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY (see 04-1 )
- Check the bearing faces of the lockwasher and end of trim actuator sleeve which should show no
evidence of distortion, metal burrs or dents.
- Couple the spring box to the trim actuator.
- Observe the center-to-center distance between the attachments of the assembly (value
measured before removal). Make sure that the nut skirt sufficiently covers the center portion of the
spring box plug shank. To this end, check dimension X which should be less than or equal to 14 mm
(0.551 in) between the skirt-type nut bearing face and the spring box plug (see 04-1 : Adjustment
of roll control system).
- Couple the assembly to the control linkage.
7- FINAL STEPS
Check the following on system 1 , then system 2, then systems 1 and 2 (see 04-1 ) :
-
- that aileron neutral positions are within tolerance,
- that spoiler offset (aileron/spoiler interconnection) is adjusted within tolerance,
- that aileron and spoiler control operates properly with correct travel.
- During operation, make sure that there is no contact with components of the compartment.
- After checking correct safetying of the spring box on the trim actuator and installation of the
attachment pins, close the door and fit the blanking plug.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" x /Y\ll\/-\WL. Y
BREGUET AVIATION ^^L .«ô _ . , .,..,...,
^ ^sô Restricted MANUAL 04
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF A SPOILER SPRING BOX

(Figure 14)
A - Special tools
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit: 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit: 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).

D - Spares
-1 lockplate (clevis-rod locking),
-6 bearing rings 06S01 61 001 ,
-4 bearing rings 06S0331001.
2 - MATERIALS
Approved chlorinated solvent or white spirit.

Grease M I LG. 4343.
3 - DISASSEMBLY
-Remove attaching pins 18 and 14.

-With spring box neither compressed nor released, measure center-to-center distance bet¬
ween attaching clevises with accuracy - theoretical dimension 434 ±3 mm
(17.08 ± 0.12 in).
-Unlock nut 10 and grip spring box in vice support MFG 228-21. Then, unscrew nut 10
(MHC 228-22).
-Unscrew the assembly consisting of end-fitting 7 and clevis 9 (MHC 228-21) and re¬
move it.
-Unlock and unscrew nut 11, then remove clevis 9 from end-fitting 7.
-Remove moving assembly from body and grip it in a vice fitted with fiber jaws (grip it
through the two flat sections machined on end flange of rod 2).
-Straighten lockplate 12, unscrew clevis 8 (wrench D21), remove lockplate 12 and suc¬
cessively remove washer 13, stop 3, first spring 6, spacer 5, second spring 6 and stop 4.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL-S^Mi /V\II\/"\vJ7L. I
^<g^
BREGUET AVIATION
^<s_
!^<^>
^-^ -^ .
Restricted . , A ... .
MANUAL ,
04.,
spirit bath.
NOTE: While performing cleaning, make sure that the vent holes provided on body 1 and
clevis 9 are clear.
the rod.
-Systematically replace bearing rings 20 and 21 .
-On stops 3 and 4 and spacer 5, blend out the edges of any marks caused by the spring if
the depth of the indentations does not exceed 0.3 mm (0.012 in), otherwise, replace the
stops and spacer.
-Check that the free length of springs 6 is comprised between 111.8 and 115.8 mm
(4.360 and 4.516 in).
-Check the bearing faces of nut 10 and body 1 and of end-fitting 7 and nut 11 which
should show no evidence of distortion, burrs or dents; otherwise, replace nut 10 or 11 and at¬
tenuate the defects on the body or end-fitting bearing face without modifying the perpendicu¬
larity of the face in relation to the axis of the part.
grooves. EXCESS GREASE IS DETRIMENTAL TO SPRING BOX OPERATION.
5 - ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Upon assembly, lightly lubricate the threads of rod 2, end-fitting 7 and clevis 9.
-With rod 2 gripped in a vice fitted with fiber jaws, successively install first stop 4, spring
6, spacer 5, second spring 6 and second stop 3 on rod 2.
-Exert a pushing force on stop 3 so as to allow washer 13 and lockplate 12 to be in¬
stalled and clevis 8 to be screwed as far as possible.
-Continue to screw clevis 8 (wrench D21) up to stop. Tighten to a torque of 1 m.daN
(88.507 in.lb). Fold lockplate 12.
-Carefully insert moving assembly into body.
-Screw nut 10 on end-fitting 7 and then screw end-fitting 7 into body (wrench
MHC 228-21) until end-fitting inner face just comes into contact with stop 4 (which cancels
any end play between body and moving assembly). Then, slightly nut 10 (wrench
MHC 228-22).
-Screw 9 into 7, then 11 or 7, and slightly tighten.
6 - TESTS
-Spring box calibration check (See 04-1).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^,
/LJ^TU MIRAGE F
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF AILERON AND SPOILER HINGES

(figure 18)
- Grease gun with Sudex 90° adapter - L = 32 mm ( 1 .25 in)

- 24 V vacuum cleaner
2- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3512

Remove the following access doors ,

V3.71 LH and RH - V3.73 LH and RH - V3.75 LH and RH - V4.71 LH and RH - V3.70
LH and RH - V3.72 LH and RH - V3.74 LH and RH - V4.70 LH and RH - V3.47 LH and RH.
4- INSPECTION
- Check each control surface for :

condition, security of attachment and general aspect of hinges
-
- absence of foreign matter around hinges
- condition and security of attachment of bonding braids
- condition and security of attachment of control rods
- correct safetying of various connections
- absence of friction against structure
- Under each spoiler, check for :
- condition and security of attachment of spoiler stops
-cracks and attaching screws of doors V2.60, V2.62, V2.66, V1 .60, V1 .62 and V2.64 for
correct tightness.
5- CLEANING -SERVICING
A Cleaning
- Perform dry cleaning of following :

- structural boxes, using a vacuum cleaner to remove all impurities,
- hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush,
-grease nipples.
CAUTION :
NEVER USETRICHLOROETHYLENE FOR THIS OPERATION.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
B Servicing
(1) On each aileron :
(a) Lubricate the following :
- Inboard and outboard shackles

- Aileron/drive rod hinge.
(b) Slightly oil the following for protection purposes :
- Inboard and outboard shackles

- Aileron/drive rod hinge (only that hinge).
(c) Remove excess grease and oil.
(2) On spoilers :
- Oil hinge fittings. Remove excess oil.
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE ON SPOILER DRIVE RODS (TEFLON-COATED BALL

JOINTS).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall access doors.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
\ « ^^^r<S. « ^CT~-5s- ^
\ '^T"*5ï--£» .*-:-'Vri::r^::::^-~----
f ^^ ^**~- m^ -
LEGENDE KEY
FIGURE 18 - ENTRETIEN DES ARTICULATIONS DES GOUVERNES

AB SERVICING OF CONTROL SURFACE HINGES
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^'^'U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^cZZsF^^g!^ , MAMIIAI r\A
INSPECTION OF CONTROL STICK
A Special tools
-Toolkit F 1-EL-B
2- INSPECTION
A Handgrip
- Check handgrip for condition.

- Check for absence of binding point or play in buttons, control switches and covers.
- Check that handgrip is properly attached to control stick head (wrench M 15007).
B- Head
- Check cast part for condition.

- Check for absence of side or vertical play.
C- Body
- Check the following for condition :
- Electrical cables
- Body proper.
D- Base
- Check that box and arm are properly attached to base.

- Check stop screws for condition.
- Check for correct locking of parts.
- Check boots for condition (absence of tears-flexibility) and security of attachment.
- Check bonding braids for condition.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* UJIJ^ /Y\ll\/-\wU i
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^ _fi~«^>
^~^> ^
Restricted . ^ . .........
MANUAL .,
04
CALIBRATION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL AFU

(Figure 13)
1 - SCOPE
-To perform AFU calibration check in the case where artificial feel loads are found to be
out of tolerance in aircraft.
-To perform AFU adjustment after complete disassembly performed for servicing and lu¬
brication.
A - Special tools
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit : 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit : 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-Mechanical test stand MKM043.
3 - AFU TESTS
A - Installation of AFU on test stand
-Mechanical test stand MKM043 should be previously fitted with all adaptors provided
for AFU installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook).
-Using the attaching pins belonging to test stand :
-pin clevis 9 to balance beam,
-pin clevis 10 to moving poppet.
-Rotate moving poppet control wheel so as to set the balance beam in horizontal position
(pointer set to zero). The AFU is then set to neutral (no load applied); make sure that the bal¬
ance beam pinning position corresponds to the pointer zero position.
NOTE 1 : The ratio available with balance scales hooked to beam ends is 1/10 and the corre¬
spondence between the weight placed on one scale and the load applied to the AFU
rod is as follows:
Weight (kg) : 1 .02 x load (daN) Xj-
Weight (lb) : 1 .02 x load (Ib.wgt) x-^

NOTE 2 : In order to prevent measurements from bring affected by AFU internal frictions, the
balance beam should always be sqet in horizontal position (pointer set to zero) in
the direction causing the scale on which weights are placed (or to be placed during
next test) to move upwards.
CAUTION:
rnS" IMPERATIVE THAT
THE BALANCE BEAM SHOULD BE PINNED BEFORE PLAC¬
ING WEIGHTS ON A SCALE OR BEFORE REMOVING THEM, THIS IN ORDER TO
PROTECT COMPONENTS (CLEVISES) FROM DAMAGES DUE TO LARGE ANGULAR
MOVEMENTS.
BALANCE AND COMPONENT FORCES ARE EQUALIZED AFTER WEIGHTS ARE EI¬
THER PLACED OR REMOVED BY SLOWLY ACTUATING THE MOVING POPPET CON¬
TROL WHEEL UNTIL THE PIN CAN BE EASILY REMOVED FROM THE BALANCE
BEAM.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£c-~ ^^=^> . , kjiamiiai r\A
^-^ -«-^ Restricted MANUAL 04
B - Check of hysteresis at neutral (no load applied)

(1) With the balance. beam in horizontal position (pointer at zero), slightly act on one side of
the balance beam so as to obtain a small displacement of the rod, and slowly release to the
balancing position, then slowly reset the pointer to zero by rotating the moving poppet control
wheel and pin the balance beam. Measure dimension "B" between gauge bearing face and ex¬
ternal face of adjusting guide 8.
(2) Slightly act on the other side of the balance beam so as to also obtain a small displace¬
ment of the rod and slowly release to the balancing position, then slowly reset the pointer to
zero using the control wheel, and pin the balance beam. Measure corresponding dimension
"C".
(3) The absolute value of (B - C) must be less than or equal to 0.14 mm (0.006 in).
C - Check of area 0A OR 0A' (see figure)
(1 ) Reference dimension "A", between gauge bearing face and external face of adjusting
B + C
guide, is equal to : -
Pin the balance beam and place on one of the scales a weight which applies a load of
5 daN (1 1 .24 Ib.wgt) to the rod. Rotate the moving poppet control wheel so as to equalize
the forces and unpin the balance beam.
-With the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer at zero), slightly act on one side
of the balance beam so as to obtain a small displacement of the rod and slowly release to the
balancing position, then slowly reset the pointer to zero by rotating the moving poppet control
wheel. Measure dimension "B" between gauge bearing face and guide.
-Slightly act on the other side of the balance beam so as to also obtain a small displace¬
ment of the rod and slowly release to the balancing position, then slowly reset the pointer to
zero using the control wheel. Measure corresponding dimension "C" and then pin the balance
beam.
-The absolute values of (A - B) and (A - C) must be comprised between 1.16 and
1.38 mm (0.046 and 0.054 in).
(2) Perform the same tests by placing the weight on the other scale. The results must be
within the same tolerances.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -** / Y \ I IN /"V^7 L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^£. _«~^> ^ . ^ . iv«amiiai o/i
^<v. ^~=^ Restricted MANUAL 04
D - Check of area AB or A'B'
(1) Pin the balance beam and place on the same scale a weight which applies a load of
7 daN (1 5.74 Ib.wgt) to the rod. Rotate the moving poppet control wheel so as to equalize
the forces and unpin the balance beam. Perform the same operations as described above so as
to measure new dimensions "B" and "C".

2.2 mm (0.067 and 0.087 in).
Perform the same checks by loading the other scale.
10 daN (22.48 Ib.wgt) to the rod. Rotate the moving poppet control wheel so as to equalize
the forces and unpin the balance beam. Perform the same operations as described in paragraph
3-C so as to measure new dimensions "B" and "C".
-The absolute values of (A -B) and (A - C) must be comprised between 3.2 and
3.8 mm (0.126 and 0.15 in).
E - Check of area BC or B'C
12 daN (26.97 wgt) to the rod.
Perform the same operations as above so as to measure new dimensions "B" and "C".

6 mm (0.165 and 0.236 in).
25 daN (56.20 Ib.wgt) to the rod.
Perform the same operations as above so as to measure new dimensions "B" and "C".

21 mm (0.677 and 0.827 in).
F - Check that the AFU travel in both compression and extension direction is equal to
23 mm (0.906 in).
G - Remove the AFU from the test stand if all values are correct; otherwise, proceed to ad¬
justments of the equipment.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^-"^ /VlllX/^wL. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^<^_
^^ ^s~ô
^s ^ _ .
Restricted , r/iamiiai
MANUAL r\A04
4 - AFU ADJUSTMENT
For disassembly and assembly operations required by the adjustments, see 04-1 .
A - Area OA (or OA') out of tolerance range
Should the values recorded in paragraph 3-C be found out of tolerance, remove the AFU
from the test stand, loosen nut 12 with wrench MHC 229-22, then screw adjusting guide 8
with the 28 A/F ring wrench to increase the travel, or unscrew it to reduce the travel.
Torque tighten nut 12 while preventing the adjusting guide from rotating. Reinstall the
AFU on the test stand and perform all the tests described in paragraph 3.
CAUTION:
IN ALL CASES, DIMENSION "A" WILL BE MEASURED FOLLOWING EACH ACTION
ON ADJUSTING GUIDE 8 AND SLEEVE 7.
B - Area AB (or A'B') out of tolerance range

(1) Should the values recorded in paragraph 3-D be found out of tolerance, remove the AFU
from the test stand and act on adjusting guide 8 as described above so as to obtain correct ad¬
justment. Torque tighten nut 12. Reinstall the AFU on the test stand and perform all the tests
described in paragraph 3.
(2) If correct adjustment cannot be obtained upon each test, replace springs 5 and repeat the
tests.
C - Area BC (or B'C) out of tolerance range
(1) Should the values recorded in paragraph 3-E be found out of tolerance, remove the AFU
from the test stand, disassemble clevis 9 with wrench D 01 7 and then, with the rod prevented
from rotating by means of holding screwdriver MHG229-21, unscrew sleeve 7 (10-14x17
wrench) to reduce the travel or screw it to increase the travel and act on adjusting guide 8 by
the same value to obtain correct adjustment. Torque tighten nut 1 2 and reassemble and torque
tighten clevis 9. Reintall the AFU on the test stand and perform all the tests described in para¬
graph 3.
(2) If correct adjustment cannot be obtained upon each test, replace spring 6 and repeat the
tests.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
5 - FINAL STEPS
A - Final assembly
-Grip the AFU in vice support MFG 229-21 .

-Tighten nut 12 to a torque of 2.5 m.daN (18.43 ft.lb) (wrench MHC 229-22) while
holding the adjusting guide (28-mm A/F ring wrench).
-Tighten clevis 9 to a torque of 1 m.daN (88.50 in.lb) (wrench D017 and 10-14 x 17
wrench). Then fold lockplate 13.
-Check that the AFU center-to-center distance is equal to that measured before disas¬
sembly. Hold clevis 10 (wrench MHC 229-23) and tighten nut 11 to a torque of 2 m.daN
(14.75 ft.lb) (wrench MHC 229-23) while making sure that the evacuation holes in cylinder
and clevis are aligned to ± 10" and directed downwards.
-Safety nuts 11 and 12.
B - Final steps
-Clean and dry pins 14, washers 15 and nuts 16. Replace defective components.
-Slightly lubricate both pins and fit them on clevises 9 and 10. Install washers and nuts
(do not tighten). Install a new locking pin on each attaching pin and connect these two parts
through a lockwire.
-Check the whole AFU for :
-general condition and condition of protections,
-proper locking of parts.
AA
BREGUET
/U^^rU
AVIATION^c^P^ _
MIRAGE F
CALIBRATION CHECK OF AILERON SPRING BOX
(Figure 15)
1- SCOPE
To perform sprinq box calibration check in the case where the spring box has been completely
disassembled for servicing and lubrication.
A Special tools
- Flight control 2nd line tool kit.
B - Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)
- Mechanical test stand MK M043.
3- PROCEDURE
A Installation of sprinq box on test stand
- Mechanical test stand MK M043 should be previously fitted with all adaptors provided for sprinq
box installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook). Using the attaching pin belonging to
test stand, pin clevis 7 to balance beam and screw plug 6 onto movinq poppet.
- Rotate moving poppet control wheel so as to set the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer
set to zero). The spring box is then set to neutral (zero load applied).
NOTE : The ratio available with balance scales hooked to beam ends is 10/1. The correspondence
between the weight placed on one scale and the load applied to the spring box rod is as
follows :
Weiqht (kg) = 1.02 x load (daN) x 0.1
CAUTION :
IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE BALANCE BEAM SHOULD BE PINNED BEFORE PLACING
WEIGHTS ON A SCALE OR BEFORE REMOVING THEM. THIS IN ORDER TO PROTECT
COMPONENTS (CLEVIS, END-FITTING, ETC..) FROM DAMAGES DUE TO LARGE
ANGULAR MOVEMENTS.
BALANCE AND COMPONENT FORCES ARE EQUALIZED AFTER WEIGHTS ARE EITHER
PLACED OR REMOVED BY ACTUATING THE MOVING POPPET CONTROL WHEEL UNTIL
THE PIN CAN BE EASILY REMOVED FROM THE BALANCE BEAM.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ,_
jLJ>-^r\l MIRAGE F
B Threshold check
- Place a dial indicator provided with a magnetic stand on the test boom, with dial indicator feeler
in contact with the bellcrank to which end fitting 7 is pinned.
- Set the dial indicator to zero (approximately to middle point of its whole range).
-Place on one scale a weight corresponding to minimum threshold value, i.e. 26.4 daN
(59.34 Ib.wgt). The dial indicator pointer deflects slowly, but such a deflection is not to be taken into
account, as it is due to internal component settling.
- Continue loading with weights of decreasing value until the dial indicator pointer moves signi¬
ficantly.
- The threshold should be reached with a load of 26.4 to 32.4 daN (59.3 to 72.8 Ib.wgt) applied to
the rod.
- Pin the balance beam and remove weights.
- Perform the same check by placing weights on the other scale.
C Check of travel, loads and frictions

Remove weights from the scale and set the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer set to
zero) without applying any load to the spring box. Using a depth gauge, measure dimension «A»
between depth gauge bearing face and body external face. Then pin the balance beam.
(1 ) Place on one scale a weight provoking a load of 37 daN (83.1 Ib.wgt) on the rod.
-38 daN (85.4 Ib.wgt)
Rotate the poppet wheel to equalize forces and unpin the beam.
With the beam in horizontal position (pointer set to zero), slightly move one side of the balance
beam to obtain a slight rod displacement, then slowly bring the pointer back to zero by rotating the
poppet wheel. -Measure dimension «B» between depth gauge bearing face and spring box body.
Slightly move the other side of the balance beam to also obtain a slight rod displacement and then
reset the pointer to zero by means of the poppet wheel. Measure the corresponding dimension «C» and
pin the beam.
The «B-A» and «C-A» values should be comprised between 12 and 37 mm (0.48 and 1.48 in).
-between 15 and 40 mm (0.59 and 1..b7 in).
(2) Perform the same tests by placing the weights on the other scale. The results must be within the
same tolerances.
(3) After each test and with the balance beam pinned, check that the spring box rod travel is equal
to 42 mm (1 .65 in) in extension and 39.5 mm (1 .58 in) in retraction.
-42 mm (1 .65 in) in retraction or extension.
D Test results
Should a play be found between body and rod with no load applied, screw or unscrew plug 6 with
respect to the body to eliminate this play.
Should the threshold or travel value be out of tolerance, replace the defective spring.
4- FINAL STEPS
Remove the spring box from the test unit.
-
Safety nut 10 and plug 6 (see figure) with lockwire. Install nut
- 11 and lockwasher 12 on the end
of plug 6, then screw on nut 1 1 without tightening.
Check the whole spring box for :
AB
ZU^^rU.
__
MIRAGE F
CALIBRATION CHECK OF SPOILER SPRING BOX

(Figure 14)
1 - SCOPE
To perform spring box calibration check either in the case where loads are found to be out of
tolerance in aircraft, or in the case where the spring box has been completely disassembled for servicing
and lubrication.
A Special tools
- Flight control 2nd line tool kit
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)
- Mechanical test stand MK M043
D Spares
- Lockwire 23320 AC080Z.

3- PROCEDURE
A Installation of spring box on test stand
- Mechanical test stand MK M043 should be previously fitted with all adaptors provided for spring
box installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook). Using the attaching pins belonging to
test stand, pin clevis 8 to balance beam and clevis 9 to moving poppet.
set to zero). The spring box is then set to neutral (zero load applied).
NOTE : The ratio available with balance scales hooked to beam ends is 10/1. The correspondence
between the weight placed on one scale and the load applied to the spring box rod is as
follows :
Weight (kg) = 1 .02 x load (daN) x 0.1
CAUTION :
WEIGHTS ON A SCALE OR BEFORE REMOVING THEM, THIS IN ORDER TO PROTECT
COMPONENTS (CLEVIS, END-FITTING, ETC..) FROM DAMAGE DUE TO LARGE
ANGULAR MOVEMENTS.
AB
BREGUET
jL^^SL
AVIATION^Êl^^"^
MIRAGE ,
F
.
B Threshold check
placed in contact with the bellcrank to which clevis 8 is pinned.
- Set dial indicator to zero (approximately to middle point of its whole range).
- Place on one scale a weight corresponding to minimum threshold value, i.e. 13,5 daN
(30.34 Ib.wgt). The dial indicator pointer deflects slightly but such a deflection is not to be taken into
account as it is due to internal component settling.
- Continue to place weights of decreasing value until dial indicator pointer moves sharply.
Threshold should be obtained with a load of 13,5 to 16,5 daN (30.34 to 37.09 Ib.wgt) applied to
the rod.
- Pin the balance beam and remove weights.
Remove weights from the scale and set the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer set to
zero) without applying any load to the spring box.
Using a depth gauge, measure dimension A comprised between depth gauge bearing face and body
external face. Then, pin the balance beam.
(1) Place on one scale a weight likely to exert a force of 25 daN (56.2 Ib.wgt) on the rod. Rotate the
moving poppet control wheel to equalize forces and then unpin the beam.
With the beam in horizontal position (pointer set to zero), slightly act on one side of balance beam
to obtain small rod displacement and then slowly bring the pointer back to zero by rotating the moving
poppet control wheel. Measure dimension B between depth gauge bearing face and spring box body.
Slightly act on the other side of balance beam to also obtain small rod displacement and then reset
the pointer to zero by means of moving poppet control wheel. Measure corresponding dimension C and
pin the balance beam.
The «B-A» and «C-A» values should be comprised between 24 and 41 mm (0.94 and 1.61 in).
(2) Perform the same tests by placing the weight on the other scale. The values obtained should be
comprised within same tolerances.
(3) After each test and with balance beam pinned, check that spring box rod travel is equal to 46 mm
(1.81 in) in both «rod extension» and «rod retraction» directions.
D Test results
Should a play be noticed between body and rod with no load applied, screw or unscrew end-fitting
7 with respect to the body to cancel that play.
Should threshold or travel value be found out of tolerance, replace defective spring(s).
4- FINAL STEPS
Remove the spring box from test stand and grip it in vice support MFG 228-21.
-
Tighten nut 10 to a torque of 3 m.daN (22.1 ft.lb) (wrench MHC 228-22). Check that no end
-
play between body and rod exists after tightening.
- Check that spring box center-to-center distance is equal to that measured before disassembly.
Otherwise, unlock and untighten nut 11 (wrench MHC 228-21), screw or unscrew clevis 9 and tighten
nut 11 to a torque of 2 m.daN (14.7 ft.lb) by means of the same wrench, while making sure that
evacuation holes respectively provided on body and clevis are aligned to ± 10° and directed downwards.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ J' -*< /V\ 1 1\ /A V-7 L I
^_-
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^^ -. . . . . ,,..,,,., n.
-As indicated by the detail in figure 14, lockwire:

-nuts 10 and 11 (lockwiring No. 1 and No. 2),
-end-fitting 7 with body 1 (lockwiring No. 3),
-clevis 9 with end-fitting 7, with the lockwire secured to the clevis on a screw (P/N
22209BC040006LE) and washer (P/N 2311BC040LE) (lockwiring No. 4).
-Clean and dry pins 14 and 18, washer 15 and nuts 16 and 19.
-Slightly lubricate both pins and fit them on clevises 8 and 9. Install washer 15 and
screw nuts 16 and 19 (do not tighten). Install a new locking pin on pin 14 and connect these
two parts through a lockwire.
-Check the whole spring box for:
-general condition
-condition of protections
AA
BREGUET AVIATION, _
fî^îlrU. MIRAGE F
ROLL CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL AND ADJUSTMENT CHECK
(Figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
To check operation of roll channel in mechanical control mode.
2 - GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY STEPS APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01-0).
A - Special tools
-Toolkit F1-CVB
- Aiieron deflection templates
- Spoiler deflection templates
B - Standard tools
- Ground telephone

- 1 1 5-200V/400Hz electrical power supply.
- Install deflection templates :

- Remove template attach fitting blanking plugs.
- Install templates.
- Connect ground telephone (See 11-3).
- Connect following power supplies :
- Electrical power supply
- Hydraulic power supply for systems 1 and 2.
5 - FUNCTIONAL CHECK
AA
03"78 Restricted ^~5
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 19 - CONTROLE DU DEBATTEMENT DES GOUVERNES

AB CONTROL SU RFA CE DEFLECTION CHECK
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
COCKPIT CONTROL SURFACES
A Preliminary steps
(1 ) Energize electrical system
(2) Apply pressure to hydraulic Failure warning panel

system 1
«HYD. 1» Out
«HYD. 2» 1 n
«EMG. HYD» J Un
Hydraulic pressure selector
switch set to «SERVOS»
Dual hydraulic pressure gauge
System 1 : 210 bar (3045 psi)
System 2 : 0
B Control functional check
- Pin the first linkage bellcrank - Obtain a pinning free from play by selecting the appropriate
(rigging pin MS 1390-20-810) rigging pin among the three rigging pins available.
I
(1 ) Check trim actuator asymmetry i
- Trim so as to place the trim actuators in the LH and RH mid-travel

i
positions (both ailerons near neutral). Align LH aileron with template
(2) Remove rigging pin zero indication by trimming and check that opposite aileron is at ± 1°.
I
C Functional tests
(1 ) Check of spoiler offset
- Slowly actuate control stick and

check that spoiler starts deflecting for an (
aileron movement of 40' to 50' 40' to 50' j
Should deflection value be found out of tolerance, determine

the cause. If necessary, refer to roll channel adjustment card.
(2) Control stick fully moved to the left
(18°37' + ^) - Actuate the stick in a slow and continuous way, making sure
that control moves without friction points, and that control stick
returns to neutral without chattering. If not, determine the cause.
Spoiler (52°+^)
(3) Actuate trim control switch to the Trim indicator : Bar moving >7°
left
AC
01-84 Restricted 1-517 1-5'
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
(4) RH wing : perform the same checks Should deflection value be found out of tolerance, determine
as those previously described for LH the cause. If necessary, refer to sheet «Adjustment of roll
wing. channel».
(5) Drop the pressure in system 1
D Functional tests with pressure

applied to system 2 - Failure warning panel
«hyd. 1» on
«hyd. 2» out
«emg. hyd» on
Hydraulic pressure selector switch
set to «servos»
Dual hydraulic pressure gauge Perform the same checks as above, except those regarding trim
System 1 : 0 system. Check that deflection values remain within tolerance and
System 2 : 210 bar (3045 psi) same loads are obtained (operation of auxiliary servo-control dual
supply valve and aileron servo-control dual supply valves).
E Functional tests with pressure Perform the same checks as for system 2.
applied to systems 1 and 2 - Failure warning panel
«hyd. 1» out
«hyd. 2» out
«emg. hyd» on
(1 ) Test of electrically-operated emer¬

gency selector valve (autopilot)
(a) Check that : -Failure warning panel

Jdllt
«Pitch» switch is at «PITCH» «YAW» - «PITCH»]

«Yaw-antislip» switch is at «YAW» «ROLL» h out
«ELEV» '}
(b) Gyro center ON - R console (heading control Wait for 40 seconds.
un B
(c) Connect the autopilot On autopilot control and indicator
panel, AP light comes on green.
NOTE : After uncoupling through

«STICK UNCOUPLE» switch,
recoupling is impossible for
about 10 seconds.
(d) Lower «STICK UNCOUPLE» On failure warning panel, AP light A slight jerk is felt in control stick (operation of electrically-
switch comes on red. operated selector valve and dual supply valve).
On autopilot control and indicator

panel, AP amber light flashes.
(e) Move control stick from right Auxiliary servo-control operates on barrel 2. Same deflection
to left. values and loads.
AC
01-86 Restricted 1-518 1-51
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
(c) «STICK UNCOUPLE» switch to On failure warning panel, AP light - Check that electrically-operated selector valve operates. Move the
normal (guard down) goes out. i
control surfaces.
Actuate autopilot disengage lever On autopilot control and indicator
panel, AP flashing amber light goes
!
out.
Connect the autopilot On autopilot control and indicator

Set the autopilot to off
(2) Test of aileron servo-control dual j
supply valves.
Drop the pressure in system 2

i
(a) Hyd. 2 on - Check servo-control supply through dual supply valves.
F Functional tests with emergency

system
(a) Start the electric pump -Failure warning panel

«hyd. 1 » \__
«hyd. 2» f on
«emg. hyd» out

System 1 : > 136 bar (1972 psi)
System 2:0 - Move control surfaces over their whole travel, and check that
loads remain the same. This operation is to be carried out during
CHECK OF ELECTRIC PUMP, PRESSURE SWITCH CALIBRATION
(see 07-1 ).
1
G Functional test of trims

j
Apply pressure to system 1

i
(1 ) Actuate trim control switch to I
the left Trim indicator : bar moving >7° ! >7°

(2) Actuate trim control switch to X
the right Trim indicator : bar moving >7° >7°
(3) Actuate trim control switch from Time required for total deflection :
left to right and from right to left 1 4 to 19 seconds
Drop the pressure in system 1
FINAL STEPS
- Remove aileron and spoiler deflection templates
- Perform electrical test of roll channel servo-system (see 13-1 )
AC
1-519 1-51
11-81 Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION,
iU^^TU MIRAGE F
DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF ROLL CHANNEL
(Figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
To check operation of roll channel in mechanical control mode.
2 - GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY STEPS APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (SEE 01-0).
A - Special tools
-Toolkit F1-CVB
-Tool kit F 1-E LA
- Aileron deflection templates
- Flight control rigging device.
B Standard tools
- Ground telephone

- 1 1 5-200 V/ 400 Hz electrical power supply.

- Install templates.
-Pin the first pitch bellcrank (rigging pin MS 1390-10-810) (Door 12-04).
- Install quadrant assembly on pedestal.
- Connect ground telephone (See 11-3).
- Connect following power supplies .
- Electrical power supply.
AA
O4"77 Restricted 1~520
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
'I
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
A Preliminary steps
( 1 ) Energize electrical system
(2) Apply pressure in system 1

Failure warning panel
«HYD. 1» Out
«HYD. 2» )0n
«EMG. HYD» /
Hydraulic pressure selector
switch set to «1 SERVO 2»
Dual hydrauliopressure.gauge
System 2 : 0
B Control functional check
- Pin the first linkage bellcrank

(rigging pin MS 1390-20-810).
Obtain a pinninq free from olav bv selectinq the aDDrooriate
-
(1 ) Set ailerons to neutral. rigging pin among the three rigging pins available.
- Set RH trim actuator in retracted configuration (aileron
lowered), with LH motor in extended configuration (aileron
i
raised).
- Disconnect LH actuator power supply connector.
- Actuate control stick button to reset RH aileron to its
mid-travel position. Obtain zero indication on template through
short impulses.
- Disconnect RH actuator power supply connector and connect
LH actuator power supply connector.
- Actuate control stick button in the same direction as above and
reset LH aileron to its mid-travel position. Obtain zero
Trim indicator : Bar set to i
indication on template through short impulses. Reconnect RH actuator.
neutral.
- Remove pin i
(2) Move control stick over its - Actuate control stick slowly and continuously, while making
whole travel. | sure that control moves without any binding point and that
i control stick resumes neutral position without any
chattering. If not, determine the cause.
C Functional tests 1
- Remove control stick handgrip Wrench M 15007

- Install pointer support
assembly. i
- Pin the first linkage bellcrank

(rigging pin MS 1390-20-810).
(1) Set control stick deflection Control stick quadrant : 0°.

quadrant to zero as indicated by
pointer support.
Unpin the first bellcrank.
.^____ -
AC
1-521 1-521
02-85 Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
(2) Check of spoiler offset Should the deflection value be found out of tolerance, determine the cause.
If necessary, refer to «Adjustment of roll channel» workcard.
- Place a dial gauge on wing
with feeler in contact with spoiler
(dial gauge set to zero)
- Slowly actuate control stick Control stick quadrant Aileron : 40' to 50*
and check that dial gauge pointer starts r25'to1°30'
deflecting when control stick quadrant
pointer passes over 1°25' indication
- Remove dial gauge from wing
(3) Control stick fully moved to Control stick quadrant (18°37' + ^!)
the left 2403(y ± 2°
LH
spoiler
(5i° + £)
(4) Control stick fully moved to Control stick quadrant (18°37' + 1^')
the right 24° 30' ± 2°
RH
spoiler «*!?)
(5) Remove pointer-support
assembly
Install control stick handgrip
(6) Actuate trim control switch Trim indicator : bar moving >7° >7°
to the left
(7) Actuate trim control switch Trim indicator : bar moving >7°
X >7°
to the right
(8) Actuate trim control switch from Time required for tjt>tal deflection
left to right and from right to left 14 to 19 seconds
(9) Unpin pitch bellcrank.

Drop pressure in system 1

applied in system 2 Failure warning panel
«HYD. 1» on
«HYD. 2» out
«EMG.HYD» on
Hydraulic pressure selector Perform same checks as above, except those regarding trim system. Check
switch set to «servos» that deflection values remain within tolerance and same loads are obtained
Dual hydraulic pressure gauge (operation of auxiliary servo-control dual supply valve and aileron servo¬
System 1 : 0 control dual supply valves).
AD
01-86 Restricted 1-522 1-522
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
E Functional tests with pressure - Failure warning panel Perform same checks as for system 2.
applied to systems 1 and 2 «hyd. 1 » ~l out
«hyd. 2» J" out
«emg. hyd» on
(1 ) Test of electrically-operated emer¬

(a) Check that : -Failure warning panel

jane
«Pitch» switch is at «PITCH» «YAW» - «PITCH»
«Yaw-antislip» switch is at «YAW» «ROLL» r out
«ELEV»
(b) Gyro center ON - RH console (heading control Wait for 40 seconds.

unit)
(c) Connect the autopilot On autopilot control and indicator

panel, AP light comes on green

about 1 0 seconds.
(d) Lower «STICK UNCOUPLE» switch On failure warning panel, AP A slight jerk is felt in control stick (operation of electrically-operated
light comes on red. selector valve and dual supply valve).

panel, AP amber light flashes.
(e) Move control stick from right to Auxiliary servo-control operates on barrel 2. Same deflection
left values and loads.
(f) «STICK UNCOUPLE» switch to On failure warning panel, AP Check that electrically-operated selector valve operates. Move the
normal (guard down) light goes out. control surfaces.
Actuate the autopilot disengage On autopilot control and indicator

lever. panel, AP flashing amber light
goes out.
Connect the autopilot On autopilot control and indica¬

tor panel, AP light comes on green.
Set the autopilot to off
(2) Test of aileron servo-control

dual supply valves
(a) Drop the pressure in system 2 Hyd. 2 on - Check servo-control supply through dual supply valves.
AC
1-523 1-52
01-86 Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
1
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS

system
(a) Start the electric pump -Failure warning panel

-Switch off system 1 «hyd. 1» ~|_
u j o r on
«hyd. 2» J
«emg. hyd» out

System 1 : > 136 bar (1972 psi)
System 2 : 0 - Move stabilators over their whole travel and check that loads remain
the same. The operation is to be carried out during CHECK OF
ELECTRIC PUMP PRESSURE SWITCH CALIBRATION (see 07-1).
FINAL STEPS
- Make sure that the control linkages are unpinned.
Remove :
- aileron and spoiler deflection templates,
- flight control adjustment tools,
- perform electrical tests of roll channel servo-system (see 13-1).
AB
01-86 Restricted 1-523M 1-523
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [LJ>-it^X
BREGUET AVIATION ^£7 _^
MIRAGE
.,.,,, ,
F
A1
ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM

(figures 20 and 21)
1 - SCOPE
To provide instructions for complete adjustment of the control system concerned.
2- GENERAL
The flight control linkage is adjusted in factory using manufacturing tools (such as dummy
servo-controls, micrometric rods, dummy components, ect.) allowing basic linkage adjustment to be
determined and therefore providing for the interchangeability of certain system components).
CONSEQUENTLY, NO ROUTINE MAINTENANCE OPERATION SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT

ON LINKAGE EXCEPT AS REGARDS NORMAL OPERATIONS MENTIONED IN THE DOCU¬
MENTATION AND WHICH CAN BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO RISK OF ALTERING THE INITIAL
ADJUSTMENT. If operations necessitating disassembly of components are to be carried out on the
linkage (structural repair for instance), it is IMPERATIVE that the length and setting of the various
components be marked with accuracy before disassembly, or that the manufacturing tools be used at
reassembly so as to restore the initial adjustment.
SHOULD A CONTROL BE FOUND OUT OF ADJUSTMENT, DO NOT ALTER THE EXISTING

ADJUSTMENT AS LONG AS THE CAUSE OF MISADJUSTMENT IS NOT POSITIVELY
DETERMINED.
The following particular rules should be known and complied with each time operations are
being carried out on the system :
- apply the correct tightening torques to the various connecting components (pins - rods) ; rods
should be torqued on a bench ;
- use thimbles for mounting the pins, in order to prevent the bores from being damaged ; lightly
lubricate the pins upon installation ;
- install the pins in the proper direction and orient the rods correctly ;
- install a teflon washer (anti-friction) or an anti-swiveling cup at the specified connections ;
- lock the assembled components (locking pins : lockwires - lockplates) following the applicable
instructions ;
- upon completion of adjustments, make sure that the linkages operate freely, with no unwanted
abutment.
COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING :

- safety measures to be taken for personnel protection (see 01-0),
- instructions to be followed when working on systems (see 01-0)
general instructions for starting and operating the various aircraft systems (see 01-0),
- instructions for using ground support equipment (see 01-0).
AB MOD 757
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-
ti -^-"rll
^^
MIRAGE F
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 Ib.ft)
- Dial indicator
B Special tools
- Flight control rigging device
- Aileron deflection templates
- Flight control adjustment tools
-Electrical power supply, 1 15-200 V/400 Hz
D Spares
-1 retainer F1 73-21 -07
- 1retainer 31650 AC 180 LE or
31650 AC 180 TA
- Lockwire 23320 AC 080 Z
Remove linkage access doors.
-
Pin the pitch linkage at the first bellcrank located upstream of the auxiliary servo-control (rigging
-
pin MS 1390-10-810).
- Install the control stick deflection measuring quadrant (see figure 23).
IMPORTANT NOTE :
MAKE SURE THAT THE POSITION PICKOFF IS NOT CONNECTED.
5- ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL LINKAGE

A Adjustment of power servo-control
- Check that the pitch linkage is pinned at bellcrank 1 located upstream of the auxiliary servo¬
control, with aileron and spoiler deflection templates installed.
-Pin the roll linkage at bellcrank 1 located upstream of the auxiliary servo-control ; the bellcrank
should be free of play (use one of the three pins MS 1390-20-810).
- Install the aileron servo-controls.
- Apply hydraulic pressure to the system (servo-controls supplied through barrel 1 ).
- Set each servo-control to its internal limit stop position by slowly actuating the slide valves by
hand. , aq,
- Measure aileron upward and downward deflections (20° _ ?«/).
B Adjustment of trim actuator neutral setting (mid-travel position)
BEFORE INSTALLATION
Set the trim actuator to its «rod retracted» electrical stop position (continuous operation).
Measure the protruding dimension of the sleeve with respect to the casing. This dimension is referred to
as dimension A. Then set the trim actuator to its «rod extended» electrical stop position (continuous
operation). Measure the new protruding dimension B of the sleeve with respect to the casing. The
«B-A» difference represents the rod travel between electrical stops, which should be equal to
16 ± 0.5 mm (0.629 ± 0.019 in).
Set the trim actuator to its mid-travel position ± 0.1 mm (± 0.0039 in) and in this position,
measure the resistance across terminals H and J or J and K of the equipment connector : it should be
| ± 0.02 Q. .
NOTE : In order not to damage the potentiometer slider (terminal J), it is essenstial to perform this
test with a digital ohmmeter or an ohmmeter whose output is less than 5 mA.
The total potentiometer resistance R measured across therminals H and K is equal to
1400 ± 70 n.
AD MOD 757
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C24 c.2fe C26 DETAIL C
FIGURE 20 - REGLAGE DE LA COMMANDE DE GAUCHISSEMENT

ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM
AF MOD 757
06-87 Restricted 1-526 FIGURE 20 1-!
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
AFTER INSTALLATION
Do not connect the trim actuator'to the electrical circuit.

-Pin wing root bellcrank 19.
CAUTION :
CHECK THE BEARING FACES OF THE LOCKWASHER, SKIRT-TYPE NUT AND END OF
THE TRIM ACTUATOR SLEEVE WHICH SHOULD BE FREE OF DISTORTION, METAL
BURRS AND DENTS.
- On LH and RH sides, adjust the length of the assembly consisting of the trim actuator (set to
zero) and the spring box, so as to set the ailerons to zero (0° ± 15').
- Engage lockwasher 12 in the trim actuator sleeve notches (adjust to ± 1/4 turn), then unscrew the
skirt-type nut so as to seat the assembly.
Upon spring box/trim actuator connection (Modification 682 incorporated)
Spring box plug (61 Lockwasher (12)
Trim actuator
fcAY^NX
If required fit
washer (16)
P/N 04S0122014
"Depending on the desired center-to-center distance"
Make sure that the nut skirt sufficiently covers the center portion of the spring box plug shank.
To this end, check dimension X which should be less than or equal to 14 mm (0.551 in) between
the skirt-type nut bearing face and the spring box plug (see above sketch).
If dimension X is greater than 14 mm (0.551 in)
- Uncouple the spring box/trim actuator assembly and remove the lockwasher.
- Insert washer 04S0122014 between the skirt-type nut and the lockwasher.
NOTE : Specific case of coupling between spring box and trim actuator.
If the assembly is in abutment and thus prevents any further screwing of the spring box end onto
the trim actuator, it is necessary to refine the adjustment of the control linkage by reducing the length
of rod F171-22 (item 27 in figure 20) in order to obtain the required center-to-center distance (Rotate
the rod end through one turn after fitting a new retainer P/N : 31650AC100TA (tightening torque :
1.5 to 2 m.daN (11.06 to 14.75 ft.lb)).
After completion of this specific action on the control linkage, it is necessary to readjust the
aileron control system and the spoiler offset (spoiler spring box).
AD MOD 757
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Remove the rigging pin from wing root bellcrank 19 and drop the pressure in the sys-
tem.
Remove the trim actuator/spring box assemblies after marking LH and RH sides.
-
-Tighten skirt-type nut 11 as follows:
-apply a settling torque of 3 m.daN (22.125 ft.lb) to the skirt-type nut while hold¬
ing the lockwasher with a 19 mm open-end wrench. Loosen the nut and perform this settling
operation three times,
-apply a final torque of 2.5 m.daN (1 8.44 ft.lb).
CAUTION:
M7TCE SURE THAT ONE OF THE WRENCHES DOES NOT ENGAGE BOTH THE SKIRT-
TYPE NUT AND THE LOCKWASHER.
DURING THIS OPERATION, DO NOT PREVENT THE ROTATION OF THE TRIM ACTU¬
ATOR OR ANOTHER COMPONENT OF THE SPRING BOX.
Lockwire the nut with the lockwasher (connection between spring box and trim actua-
tor).
- Install the LH and RH trim actuator/spring box assemblies.
C - Adjustment of auxiliary servo-control
-Install the auxiliary servo-control.
-Apply pressure to the system.
-Successively set the auxiliary servo-control to "rod retracted" and "rod extended" stop
positions by slowly moving the slide valve by hand, and check that the trim actuator/spring
box assemblies can be installed. Note the aileron positions obtained.
+ 40'
Up and down deflections : 1 9° _ 0
-With bellcrank 1 pinned, adjust micrometric rod 4 to be able to pin LH wing root bell¬
crank 19. DO NOT LEAVE THE RIGGING PIN INSTALLED.
6 - ADJUSTMENT OF SPOILER LINKAGE
A - Adjustment between servo-control and spoilers
-On each wing:

-remove the pin connecting rod 39 to bellcrank 38,
-remove the pin connecting rod 23 to the spoiler servo-control slide valve,
-apply pressure to system 1 (slow-running mode, maximum pressure: 50 bar -
724 psi),
-set the servo-control to the "rod retracted" mechanical stop position by moving the
slide valve manually while making sure that there is no interference between bellcrank 38 and
rod 39,
-install tool M31150 (see figure below) in lieu of the pin head lockwasher and bring
the adjustable plunger into contact with the servo-control bushing.
SPOILER
SERVO-CONTROL
Adjustable contact plunger SPOILER

SERVO-CONTROL BUSHING
INSTALLATION OF TOOL
AA MOD 757
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 04 COUPE A
SECTION A
iX=TJL,
s
I I
L
-y* *tl
w
Mise en place Bielle micrométrique de conjugaison spoilers
d'une rondelle Téflon Spoiler interconnecting micrometric rod
Installation of teflon
washer
DETAIL A DETAIL D
Butée de manche.
Control stick stop.
Vérification de la "boutonnière'
Check of spoiler "OFFSET"
DETAIL E
+ 0,7 mm Maxi (0.027 in)
Vis butée
Stop screw
Butées de spoilers .Butée de manche

Spoiler stops Control stick stop
Vérification du désaffleu rement

Alignment check
FIGURE 21 - REGLAGE DE LA COMMANDE DE GAUCHISSEMENT (Suite)

ADJUSTMENT OF ROLL CONTROL SYSTEM (CONT'D)
AF MOD 757
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f vwicx, / Y Y 1\ /"\ V^ L.
1
BREGUET AVIATION ^l_~ j<?^^ . , ......... «.

^ ^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
-Drop the hydraulic pressure.

-Connect micrometric rod 39 to bellcrank 38.
-Manually seat the spoilers against their closing stops.
-Using a set of feeler gauges, check that the clearance between the tool adjustable con¬
tact plunger and the servo-control bushing is:
+ 0 +0
2.5 mm (0.1 in)
- 0.1 -0.004
If this clearance is not obtained, remove micrometric rod 39 and fit new retainers (not bent)
on its adjustable clevis end (see figure 21, cross section A). Install rod 39, readjust its length
(micrometric adjustment) and bring the nuts into contact.
-After adjusting the length of rod 39 on the aircraft:
-remove the rod,
-place the rod in tool M31 1 52,
-torque nut 45 (wrench M31042) to 17 m.daN (132.3 ft.lb) and nut 46 to
12 m.daN (88.44 ft.lb), keeping the two clevises aligned,
-bend the retainer tabs; to safety castellated nut 45, do not attempt to position the
retainer, tabs in the nut castellations,
-reinstall rod 39,
-after signal adjustment and reinstallation of rod 39, check that the
+ 0+0
2.5 mm (0.1 in) clearance is still retained.
- 0.1 -0.004
B - Adjustment of aileron/spoiler interconnecting linkage

-On each wing :
-disconnect spring box 25 from bellcrank 24,
-adjust slide valve control rod 23 for a center-to-center distance between 158.5 and
160 mm (6.24 and 6.30 in) (one-turn adjustment).
Tighten the locknut to a torque of 2 to 2.2 m.daN (14.75 to 16.21 ft.lb) and safety,
-connect rod 23 to the control slide valve of the servo-control and to bellcrank 24,
-screw the stop screw of bellcrank 24 to a maximum,
-apply pressure to system 1 (206 bar),
+ 0.1 + 0.004
-unscrew the stop screw to obtain a clearance of 1 .3 mm (0.05 in)
+ 0 +0
at the spoiler servo-control (measured with a set of feeler gauges between the tool adjustable
contact plunger and the servo-control bushing) with bellcrank 24 in contact with its stop
screw.
AE MOD 757
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//JV-^-Tl / V\ll\/-\VÎ_
^£0*
BREGUET AVIATION
^^ ^!<^>
^*^ ..
Restricted a/iamiiai/->/i
MANUAL 04
-tighten the locknut of the stop screw and check that the adjustment has not changed.
Safety the locknut (new retainer),
-set the servo-control to the "rod extended" stop position by moving bellcrank 24 manu-
+ 1°30'
ally and measure the spoiler deflection which should be 55°
- 1°
-fully retract the spoilers,
-drop the hydraulic pressure,
-remove the tool and install the retainer on the servo-control connecting pin head,
-connect spring box 25 to bellcrank 24.
C - Adjustment of spoiler offset
-Remove spring box 25 (see manual 04-1 -3).

-Unsafety adjustable clevis and locknut 42, loosen the locknut without fully unscrewing
(see figure 20, detail C) WHILE HOLDING END 41 (wrench M31151).
-Install spring box 25 for length adjustment on aircraft.
-Apply pressure to system 1 (206 bar), with hydraulic power supply unit set to "aircraft
reservoir" function.
-Remove the rigging pin from roll bellcrank 1 .
-Install a dial indicator on the wing (see figure 21 ).
-Make sure that the inboard spoiler starts moving for a control stick travel of 45' ± 5'. If
necessary, adjust the center-to-center distance of the spring box to obtain this adjustment.
Make sure that the 4 mm dia hole of the adjustable clevis is aligned with one of the four
spring box body holes to within ±10" and facing down.
-Check that the ailerons are still in neutral position with the control stick at zero. If they
have moved, bring them back to neutral by adjusting the center-to-center distance between
the aileron trim actuator and spring box within its adjustment limits.
-Remove the spring box to:
-torque locknut 42 of spring box 25 to 2 m.daN (14.75 ft.lb) (wrench M31151).
-As indicated by detail C in figure 20, lockwire:
-nut 42 with end 41 (lockwiring No. 2)
-clevis with end 41, with the lockwire secured to the clevis on a screw (P/N
22209BC040006LE) and washer (P/N 2311BC040LE) (lockwiring No. 4)
-Install the spring box (see manual 04-1 -3).
D - Check of spoiler offset
-After adjustment of both spoiler servo-controls and check of aileron neutral position:
-check the spoiler offset adjustment,
-make sure that bellcrank 24 is not in contact with the wing structure (rib 2) when
the roll auxiliary servo-control is in its internal stop position.
AC MOD 757
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^TZL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_ ^ ^. . ......... n.
E Check of spoiler offset
- After adjustment of the offset, bring the control stick to RH and LH roll mechanical position and
check on the templates that the spoiler deflection angle for each wing is less than that measured when
setting the servo-control in mechanical stop position.
F Adjustment of AFU
V
Adjust the roll AFU so as to bring the control stick as close as possible to neutral position.
-
Maximum permissible deviation : 20' (adjust to ± 1 turn, i.e. to ± 0.5 mm (± 0.019 in)).
G Adjustment of control stick stops

+ 15'
Adjust the control stick stops so as to obtain an aileron deflection of 1 8°37' _ gry
-
Distribute the tolerances as evenly as possible, proceeding as follows :

- note the downward aileron deflection on one side when the other aileron is set to 18°30'
upward ; if the downward deflection is x minutes lower than 18°30', adjust the stop so as to set the
upward- deflected aileron to 18°30' + -j minutes ; if the downward deflection isx minutes higher than
1 8°30', adjust the stop so as to set the upward-deflected aileron to 8°30' ^ minutes ;
1
- check the positions recorded :

-atthestick(13°±1°30'),
at the ailerons,
J - at the spoilers (52°^ 2 °)-
H Check of clearances
(1 ) Auxiliary servo-control
- Auxiliary servo-control clearances are obtained by comparing the aileron deflection values
obtained in paragraphs «Adjustment of auxiliary servo-control» and «Adjustment of control stick roll
stops».
Make sure that a minimum clearance of 20' is obtained.
(2) Aileron servo-control
- Aileron servo-control clearances are obtained by comparing the aileron deflection values obtained
in paragraphs «Adjustment of servo-control» and «Adjustment of auxiliary servo-control».
Make sure that a minimum clearance of 20' is obtained.
(3) Spoiler servo-control
- Spoiler servo-control clearances are obtained by comparing the spoiler deflection values obtained
in paragraphs «Adjustment of spoiler servo-control» and «Adjustment of control stick stops».
Make sure that a minimum clearance of 1° is obtained.
7 - CHECK AND TESTS

- Check tightening and safetying of all the hinges.
- Perform :
- detailed adjustment check of the roll system (see 04-1 ),
- plotting of control stick forces (roll) (see 04-1 ).
8- FINAL STEPS
- Remove all the tools.
- Reinstall all the access doors.
AA MOD 757
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL^îTX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONîF^V.-^"^ ,....., n.
^££*^<^> Restricted MANUAL 04
PARTIAL INSPECTION OF ROLL (AND PITCH) CONTROL

SYSTEM LINKAGE -SERVICING
1 - SCOPE
To perform thorough inspection of linkage in fuselage and wings.
- Vacuum cleaner
- Inspection light of Elaul light
3- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3512
- Corrosion preventive compound :
-Ardrox 3140
-Ardrox 396/1
A Remove the following access doors :
(1) roll control system : 10.08, 11. 08i, 14.08i, V2.46, V1.58 and V0.61,
(2) pitch control system : 10.04, 1 1 .04i, 12.04, 13.04i, 14.04i, 33.05, 36.10 and 36.02.
I (3) rudder control system : D3.49 and D3.50.
5 - INSPECTION OF LINKAGE
A Safetying
Check that :
- pins are installed on castellated nuts and provide correct safetying,
- self-locking nuts are tightened properly,
- nuts are actually secured against motion by lock plates.
B Idlers and bellcranks
- Move idlers and bellcranks so as to make sure that the pivot pin bearing is free from play.
- Check idlers and bellcranks for condition (dents, protection, no corrosion).
- Visually check (as far as possible) bearings and self-aligning bearing cages for proper staking.
- Check that bonding braids are installed and in good condition.
- Check that travel limit washers are properly positioned and in good condition.
C Compartments
- Check that idlers and spring boxes do not come into contact with electrical cables. In the wings,
pay special attention to the trim actuator environment.
- In structural boxes housing stabilator servo-controls, check heat-insulating cork plates for condi¬
tion.
If necessary, replace such plates or perform new bonding (see 03-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iU^TirVL
BREGUET AVIATIONîF^^^-O
MIRAGE F
^£2=S~~^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
D - Rods
Move devises so as to check that the hinge bearing is free from play.
-
Check that :
-
- rods are properly coupled to clevises,
- rod tubes are in good condition (dents, protection, etc.),
-rods are free from friction or traces, paying special attention to rod sections running
through bulkheads,
- bonding braids are installed and in good condition.
A Cleaning
- Perform dry cleaning of :

- structural boxes, using a vacuum cleaner to remove all foreign matter,
- hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush.
B Servicing
- If corrosion is evidenced, remove it (see structural repair manual). In case of deep and heavy
corrosion, replace the component.
- Perform the following through doors 10.04 and 10.08 for the pitch and roll control bellcranks :
- remove all traces of moisture. Generously spray Ardrox 396/1 compound in the structure
box and on the bellcrank, then protect the hinge knuckles with oil. Allow to dry for half a day,
- spray a thick coat of Ardrox 3140 compound on the structure box walls. Take appropriate
precautions to prevent ingress of corrosion preventive compound in the hinge knuckles and bearings.
- Lightly oil :
- the sealing rings of the roll and pitch control sealed bellcranks (between frames 10 and 11).
7- FINAL STEPS
Reinstall the access doors.

-
- Becausethe operation necessitates the removal of the pressure-tight cabin doors, carry out a
check of cabin pressurization (see 09-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=>^rQv MIRAGE F
BREGUET AV,AT,ON^^^^> Restr,.eted MANUAL 04
TOTAL INSPECTION OF ROLL (AND PITCH) CONTROL

1 - SCOPE
To perform thorough inspection of linkages in fuselage wings and fin. This workcard is
complementary to the «Partial inspection of roll (an pitch) control linkage -Servicing» workcard.
- Vacuum cleaner
- Inspection light of Elaul light
3- MATERIALS
-Oil air 3512

- Corrosion preventive compound :
-Ardrox 3140
- Ardrox 396/1
Open the following linkage access doors and panels :

-
Fuselage 10.04- 10.08- 11.03-11.09- 12.04 - 12.08 - 13.00- 19.05 - 19.07 - 19.05i - 1 9.05.1 i
19.07.1 î - 19.07.2i - 20.00 - 20.06 - 22.00 - 22.06i - 23.05 - 23.06.2i - 25.00 - 25.02 - 25.05 - 25.10
26.00-26.05-28.00-29.00-29.05-30.05 -31.05 -33.05 -35.06 -36.02 -36.03.2 -36.05.2-36.07.2
36.09.2 - 36.10- 38.03- 38.09- 02.00i - 10.04Î - 11.081 - 13.04Î - 13.08Î - 14.04i - 14.08i - 25.02i
25.10Î.
Wings V1 .51 - V1 .56 - V1 .58 - V1 .60 - V1 .62 - V1 .64 - V2.46 - V2.50 - V2.59 - V2.60 - V2.62
V2.64 - V2.66 - V3.47.
Fin D1 .48 - D2.43 - D2.51 - D3.48 - D3.49 - D3.50 - D3.56.
5- INSPECTION OF ROLL. PITCH AND RUDDER CONTROL LINKAGES
A Safetying
Check that :
- pins are installed on castellated nuts and provide correct safetying,
- self-locking nuts are tightened properly,
- nuts are actually secured by lockplates.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^JJ< /Y\||\/AV^L. 1
BREGUET AVIATION _^_~ je^=^^ . , ,,.. . . . . 04

. n.
^~ ^^^ Restricted MANUAL
B - Idlers and bellcranks
-Move each knuckle and idler separately to detect possible play.

-Check self-aligning bearings for possible friction points or jamming.
-Check idlers and bellcranks for condition (dents, protection, corrosion).
-Visually check (as far as possible) bearings and self-aligning bearing cages for proper
staking.
-Check that bonding braids are installed and in good condition.
-Check that travel limit washers are properly positioned and in good condition.
C - Rods
-Move clevises to make sure that the hinge bearing is free from play.
-Check that :
-rods are properly coupled to clevises,
-rod tubes are in good condition (dents, protection, etc.),
-rods are free from friction or any traces, specially where they run through bulk¬
heads,
-bonding braids are installed and in good condition.
A - Cleaning
-Dry clean:
-structural boxes, using a vacuum cleaner to remove all foreign matter,
-hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush.
B - Servicing
-If corrosion is evidenced, remove it (see structural repair manual). In case of deep and
heavy corrosion, replace the component.
-Perform the following through doors 10.04 and 10.08 for the pitch and roll control bell¬
cranks:
-remove all traces of moisture. Generously spray Ardrox 396/1 compound in the
structure box and on the bellcrank, then protect the hinge knuckles with oil. Allow to dry for
half a day,
-spray a thick coat of Ardrox 3140 compound on the structure box walls. Take ap¬
propriate precautions to prevent ingress of corrosion preventive compound in the hinge knuck¬
les and bearings.
-Lightly oil:
-for roll and pitch control systems: the sealing rings of the sealed bellcranks (bet¬
ween frames 1 0 and 11),
-Wipe off any excess oil.
7 - FINAL STEPS
-Reinstall the access doors.
Because the operation necessitates the removal of a pressure-tight cabin door, carry out
a check of cabin pressurization (see 09-2).
AA
06 - 87 Restricted 1 - 532 R
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iUe>"ir\l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^0^-^^» .,..,.,.,
.,
INSTALLATION OF FLIGHT CONTROL RIGGING DEVICE
(Figures 22, 23 and 24)
1 - SCOPE
To provide instructions applicable to installation of braking and flight control rigging device.
2- GENERAL
The flight control rigging device is intended for plotting flight control linkage forces from the
cockpit.

- Safety measures to be taken for personnel protection (See 01-0)..
- Instructions applicable to all works performed on aircraft systems (See 01 -0).
- Instructions for use of ground support equipment (See 01-0).
CAUTION :
DO NOT ACTUATE CONTROL STICK, RUDDER PEDALS AND TRIM CONTROLS WHEN NO
PRESSURE IS BEING APPLIED IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS.
A Special tools
-Tool kitF1-CVB
-Toolkit F 1-E LA
- 115/200 V 400 Hz electrical power supply

4- AIRCRAFT PREPARATION
- Remove canopy (See 03-2).

- Remove ejection seat (See 09-4).
- Remove seat ejection gun.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Vérin latéra
Side jack
Bras support
Support arm
Vérin vertical Plancher Vérins verticaux

Vertical jack Floor Vertical jacks
MISE EN PLACE DU CHASSIS DANS LA CABINE

PRESENTATION DU CHASSIS INSTALLA TION OF FRAME IN COCKPIT
FRAME LA YOUT
FIGURE 22 - MONTAGE DE L'OUTILLAGE DE REGLAGE COMMANDE DE VOL

AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ M * /V\II\/AV-7I_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^£ç-~
^> ^**^>
â ^> ..
Restricted hjamiiai
MANUAL rm
04
5 - INSTALLATION OF DEVICE
A - Installation of frame (common assembly)
(1 ) Preparation of frame
-Position vertical and horizontal stabilizer jacks in retracted configuration on frame

(Screw in up position).
(2) Installation of frame
-Fit pin 1 to ejection seat lower attach fitting and fold safety pin.
-Install frame in cockpit.
- Fit frame lower attachment to pin 1 and lock the other end to aircraft upper fitting 2.
-Place vertical and horizontal stabilizer jacks into contact with floor and with LH and RH
consoles.
-Check frame for absence of play and readjust stabilizer jacks as required.
B - Adaptation of rigging device to various check
(1) Roll control (Figure 23)
Installation :
-Install quadrant assembly 3 on pedestal.
-Remove control stick handgrip.
-Install pointer support assembly 4 on control stick.
-Install spring scale 6 on support, with spring scale dial facing operator.
-Lock nut 5.
-Fit frame with control stick driving arm 7, and Vee assembly.
-Couple cross rod to Vee assembly crank-pin through vertical rod.
NOTE: If required, loosen frame to fit arm 7.
-Connect driving arm 7 to spring scale.

-Couple screw jack stirrup 8 to driving arm coil.
-Set quadrant assembly 3 to zero (with roll linkage pinned through door 12.08).
Removal :
- Proceed in reverse order of installation.
(2) Pitch control (Figure 23)
Installation :
-Install quadrant assembly 9 on pedestal.
-Remove control stick handgrip.
-Install pointer support assembly 4 on control stick.
-Install spring scale 6 on support, with spring scale dial facing aircraft tail.
-Lock nut 5.
-Connect driving arm to spring scale through stirrup 8.
-Check that screw jack is located along aircraft centerline.
-Set quadrant assembly 9 to zero (with pitch linkage pinned through door 12.04 at minus
1*30\ i.e., 25.4 ± 0.3 mm (1 ± 0.012 in) offset of quadrant rule).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Détail des verrous

de brochage du bras
Detail view of arm
ADAPTATION A LA VERIFICATION
DU GAUCHISSEMENT pinning lock ADAPTATION A LA VERIFICATION DE LA PROFONDEl
RIGGING DEVICE ADAPTATION TO ROLL CONTROL CHECKING RIGGING DEVICE ADAPTATION TO PITCH CONTROL CHECKIN
FIGURE 23 - MONTAGE DE L'OUTILLAGE DE REGLAGE COMMANDE DE VOL

AC INSTALLA TION OF FLIGHT CONTROL RIGGING DEVICE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl * /Y\ll\/-\V^7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^L_>- ^^=^^ ....,.,
^ ^~~*^ _ ^
Restricted.
MANUAL .04
Removal
-Proceed in reverse order of installation.
(3) Rudder control (Figure 24)
Installation:
-Set rudder pedals in mid-position.
-Fit rudder pedals with adapters 10.
NOTE: Check that the adapter attaching screw is fully engaged in the pedal captive nut and
correctly seats the tool. Otherwise, determine the cause and, if the abnormality results
from binding of the attaching screw, tap the captive nut (10 mm diameter, 150 pitch).
-Slide screw jack fully to L/H side of frame.

-Install spring scale support on cross pin.
-Fit spring scale support with spring scale. Direct dial rearwards.
-Couple screw jack stirrup to cross pin.
-Connect adapter lower fork to spring scale handle through coupling bar 11 (use stirrup
attached to coupling bar).
I -After reading is performed on rudder pedal under test:
-remove :
-coupling bar,
-spring scale,
-spring scale support.
-Reinstall above assembly on adapter and test other rudder pedal.
Removal:
(4) Braking (Figure 24)
Installation:
-Fit rudder pedals with adapters 10.

-On rudder pedal to be tested:
-Attach braking axis bar 12 to rudder pedal adapter upper fork and attach stirrup to
spring scale handle.
-On other rudder pedal:
-Attach both securing bars 13 and 14:
-attach longer bar 13 to rudder pedal adapter lower fork. Adjust to suitable
length using associated adjustment system and attach the other end to the screw located out¬
side the frame.
AA
06 - 87 Restricted 1 - 537
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^-^VL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONô^^-^ô . U.KIM., ni
- Attach shorter bar 14 to rudder pedal adapter upper fork. Adjust to suitable length
using associated adjustment system and attach the other end to the longer bar through the clamp
provided for that purpose.
Removal :
7- REMOVAL OF FRAME (COMMON ASSEMBLY)
- Unlock vertical and horizontal stabilize jacks with their screw in retracted position (up position).
- Remove upper pin.
- Remove frame from cockpit.
- Remove lower pin.
- Reinstall :
- Seat ejection gun
- Control stick handgrip
- Ejection seat (See 09-4)
- Canopy (See 03-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION s^&
MIRAGE F
(ORC-5-40-03)
14
(ORC-5- 40-09)
S-l
10 SMS)
(SMS-141-60
ing scale
or 0910 SMS)
Spring scale
Bras support
Bras support Support arm
Support arm
10
(ORC-5-41)
(ORC-5-30-04)
ADAPTATION A LA VERIFICATION DU FREINAGE ADAPTATION A LA VERIFICATION DE LA DIRECTION

ADAPTATION TO BRAKING CHECKING RIGGING DEVICE ADAPTATION TO RUDDER CONTROL CHECKING
FIGURE 24 MONTAGE DE L'OUTILLAGE DE REGLAGE COMMANDE VOL

AC
BREGUET AVIATION
/LJ^T'U.
^cZs^^g^
MIRAGE
haw., ai
F
rs a
PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (ROLL)
(See figure 25)
1 - SCOPE
To make sure that forces required for actuating roll control system are within tolerances.
Take all safety measures applicable to system concerned (See 01 -0).
A Special tools
-Tool kit F1-CVB

-Tool kit F1-ELA
. - Aileron deflection templates.
B Standard tools
- Ground telephone.

- 1 1 5/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply
Remove doors (1 2-03).

Install flight control rigging device (See 04-1 ).
Install templates.
Connect :
AA
07-76 Restricted 1 "540
BREGUET AVIATION ^(<7
MIRAGE F
degrees
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
ce
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2°30
2
1°30
1
30
0
30
1°30
2°30
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Summary table
FIGURE 25 - PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (ROLL)

AB
04-77 Restricted 1-541 1-541
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L==^rid MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^CZZsP^ ^g*^ . . . . . . , - ,
-Set stabilator control to zero position.

- On aileron control, se,t the control stick to neutral position, while ensuring that the bellcrank
located upstream of auxiliary servo-control can be pinned (door 12-08) (rigging pin MS 1390-20-810).
- Remove control stick handgrip (wrench M 15007) and install spring scale.
Setting control stick to neutral :
- Rotate handwheel clockwise to bring control stick fully to the left.

- Continuously rotate handwheel anti-clockwise and note on quadrant the position at which the
force is equal to zero.
- Continue to rotate handwheel until control stick is located fully to the right.
- Then, continuously rotate handwheel to bring control stick to the left and note on quadrant
the position at which the force is equal to zero.
- Adjust quadrant so that zero marking on rule is at mid-travel between both positions noted
above.
- Move control stick fully from left to right so as to visualize travel limit stops on quadrant with a
view to interrupting force measurement about 1° before reaching extreme limit stops.
5- FORCE MEASUREMENT
- Perform force measurement as indicated below.

- Move control stick from full right to full left positions and then from full left to full right
positions at the rate of one degree per second approx. (continuous movement).
- Take a reading every 30' from 0 to 3°, and then every degree.
- Perform force measurement twice or thrice in each direction, so as to confirm results.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,
/LJ^îrsJL. MIRAGE F
CHECK OF AILERON SERVO-CONTROL BARREL 2 SUPPLY
1 - SCOPE
To check that aileron servo-controls are fed under normal operation by barrel 2 only.
- Set of hydraulic system plugs

- Hydraulic accessory kit
- Removedoors V2.46.
Connect the hydraulic power supply to systems 1 and 2.
-
-Disconnect inlet pipe P1 (servo-control side) from LH and RH servo-controls (14- and 16-mm
open-end wrenches).
- Blank port P1 (servo-control side) with the appropriate plug.
- Connect a 0 - 300 bar (0 - 4344 psi) pressure gauge to the end of each flexible pipe.
4- CHECK
- Supply hydraulic systems 1 and 2 with pressure.

- Slowly move the control stick several times for roll only.
- Check that the pressure on the pressure gauges still remains lower than the test bench system 1
return pressure.
- Cut hydraulic pressure supply.
NOTE : Do not take into account a possible momentary increase of pressure when the pressure from
the hydraulic test bench is dropped.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the pressure gauges.

- Connect hydraulic pipes P1 to LH and RH servo-controls ; safety.
- Purge air from hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).
- Check connection points of disconnected pipes for leakage or seepage.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ*>-^~U.
BREGUET AVIATION ^S^3 ^
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF AILERON DRIVE ROD
1 - GENERAL
A Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 Ib.ft)

- Accessory kit for torque wrenches, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 100 and 40 to 350 Ib.ft).

C Spares
- 1 lockwasher. 23351 AC060LE

- 1 cotter pin 23310CA030035
D - Materials

- White spirit
- Remove access door V3.51 .

- Remove fairing V3.47.
When removing or installing an aileron drive rod, the aileron must be held in position by hand.
4- REMOVAL OF ROD
Remove the aileron drive rod.
A On aileron side
- Remove the bonding braid (8 mm A/F wrench).

- Disconnect the rod from the aileron clevis :
- remove the plug retainer :
- unsafety and unscrew the nut (10 mm A/F wrench) ;
- unscrew the plug (32 mm A/F wrench) ;
- remove the lubricating pin.
B On servo-control bellcrank side
- Disconnect the rod from the bellcrank :

- remove the cotter pin, unscrew the nut (24 mm A/F wrench) ;
- remove the recessed washer ;
- clear the rod from the trunnion.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^-îrU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^T . ..*»...«. ~.
5- CLEANING
CAUTION :
CTEANING OF TITANIUM PARTS WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS IS STRICTLY PRO¬
HIBITED.
- On aileron side : after noting its assembly position, pivot the spherical bearing inner ring to bring
it in front of the slots in the rod end ; remove the inner ring ;
- clean the spherical bearing inner ring and the rod end ; clear the grease ducts.
- On bellcrank side : clean the rod end using a clean, lint-free cloth soaked in white spirit, taking
care not to touch the teflon-coated areas ; allow to dry in ambient air or dry with clean, moisture-free
compressed air.
6- INSPECTION OF REMOVED ROD
A Inspection of rod end, on aileron side (greased spherical bearing inner ring)
Inspect the various components :
-spherical bearing inner ring :

- no traces of corrosion : lightly trim as required (crocus cloth) ;
- surface condition of :
- lateral surfaces,
- bore,
- spherical section : scratching, tearing (smooth out light defects by wet trimming
(crocus cloth or india stone)) ;
- rod end :
- no traces of corrosion : lightly trim as required (crocus cloth), protection ;
- surface condition of spherical section (scratching, tearing) ;
- rod end assy :

- reinstall the spherical bearing inner ring (lightly greased) on the rod end ; the inner ring
shall be positioned in such a way that the grease holes of the inner ring are opposite the slots in the rod
end ;
- check by hand that the inner ring does not rotate freely and that there is neither play nor
binding point during swiveling.
B Inspection of rod end on bellcrank side
-Inspect the various components :

- no traces of corrosion ;
- lateral surfaces of the spherical bearing,
- the bore of the spherical bearing,
- spherical sections ;
- condition of airflon coating on the spherical section : check that the weave is not visible,
and the coating is neither torn nor frayed ;
- check by hand that the inner ring rotates freely without any play or binding point.
C Inspection of rod body
- Inspect the rod body (shocks, no traces of friction and corrosion).

- Check lockwashers and locknuts for condition and correct safetying.
D Inspect the bonding braid (no fraying, good condition of lugs).
AA
BREGUET
iL=^r^L
AVIATION^r^^^Ô.
MIRAGE F
^2-s=a=sS>^=^ Restricted MANUAL 04
7- REPLACEMENT OF A ROD END
Prior to removal :
-
- accurately measure the distance between rod end centers,
- note the position of rod ends in relation to each other.
- Upon installation :
-set the distance between rod end centers to the value noted upon removal (use rod length
adjustment tool 50AM008),
- correctly position the rod end,
- torque to specified value (see 04-0).
8- INSTALLATION OF ROD
Reinstall the aileron drive rod.
NOTE : Correctly position the spherical bearings.
A On bellcrank side
- Position the spherical bearing-equipped rod end on the bellcrank trunnion, drive it in.
- Fit the recessed washer and the nut, torque to 6 + 1 m.daN (44.25 + J.'^L Ib.ft).
£. 14. 75
- Cotter.
B On aileron side
- Before reinstalling the pin :

- remove the old grease and check that the grease duct is not clogged,
- lightly grease the pin.
- Position the rod end into the aileron clevis :
- connect the rod end to the aileron clevis,
- fit the lubricating pin :
- screw in the plug (torque to 3 + j* m.daN (22.12 * 22,12 Ib.ft)),

- fit the nut retainer, the lockwasher and the nut, safety.
9- FINAL STEPS
- Check the components for correct installation and make sure that safetying has been carried out.
- Grease the hinge, on greased inner ring side.
- Carry out functional and adjustment check of roll channel (see 04-1). During this check, make
sure there is no contact with other components in the compartment.
- Reinstall the door and the fairing.
- Disconnect the hydraulic and electrical power supplies.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^Jl* /Y\ll\/-\V_7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^
w«. ^s^^>
^?->^. Restricted aaam..ai
MANUAL rs*
04
SECTION 2
PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
>Page
2-0 GENERAL
-Pitch control system - Principle 2-001
-Table of components 2-101
-Pitch linkage 2-110
-Hydraulic system 2-112
-Operation of pitch channel 2-114
-Manual control 2-114
-Roll and pitch damping 2-117
-Automatic control 2-1 1 7
-Stabilator ground locking device 2-119
-Pitch trim system 2-122
-Failures 2-124
-Incorporated documentation
-Pitch variable ratio bellcrank AMD-028-01 5-11 2-127
-Pitch artificial feel unit AMD-1 05-054-06 2-129
-Removal - installation of pitch AFU 2-301
-Removal - installation of pitch auxiliary servo-control 2-303
-Removal - installation of a pitch servo-control 2-305
-Removal - installation of a pitch releasable bellcrank 2-309
-Removal - installation of dashpot jack 2-312
-Removal - installation of a pitch bellcrank 2-314
-Removal - installation of pitch variable ratio bellcrank 2-318
-Removal - installation of pitch trim actuator. 2-320
2-4 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY
-Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of pitch AFU ; 2-401
-Inspection and servicing of stabHator hinges 2-501
-Calibration check and adjustment of pitch AFU 2-503
-Adjustment and check of pitch or rudder releasable bellcrank position
pickoff see 13-1
-Capacity check of accumulator built into electrically-operated selector valve
of pitch releasable bellcranks 2-508
-Bleeding of pitch releasable bellcranks 2-509
-Check of dashpot accumulator fluid level 2-512
-Functional and adjustment check of pitch channel 2-513
-Detailed adjustment check of pitch channel 2-517
-Adjustment of pitch control system 2-522
-Partial inspection of roll (and pitch) control system linkage - Servicing see 04-1
-Plotting of control stick forces (pitch) 2-528
-Measurement of stabilator play 2-533
-Check of power supply to dashpot jack heating system 2-536
-Total inspection of roll (and pitch) control system linkage - Servicing see 04-1
AA
BREGUET
L^Z^Zv^
AVIATION^sSP^^f^
MIRAGE F
^C£^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont'd)
2-5 (cont'd)
- Charging of accumulator built into electrically-operated selector valve of
pitch releasable bellcranks 2-537
- Inspection of stabilator drive rod 2-540
- Check and lubrication of variable ratio bellcrank teeth 2-551
2-8 REPAIRS
- Replacement of pitch AFU potentiometer and electrical wiring 2-801

- Replacement of pitch AFU connector potentiometers (equipped with solder
sleeves) and electrical wiring 2-803
Figure No. Page
1 PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM - SCHEMATIC 2-002

4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM - DIAGRAM 2-113
5 STABILATOR SERVO-CONTROL - FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM 2-116
5M ARTHUR LAW 2-1 17M
6 OPERATION IN MANUAL CONTROL MODE 2-118
7 AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL - OPERATION IN MANUAL CONTROL MODE . . . 2-120
8 AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL - OPERATION IN ELECTRICAL CONTROL
MODE WITH AUTOPILOT. 2-120
9 ZERO HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CONFIGURATION 2-121
10 PITCH TRIM SYSTEM - DIAGRAM 2-123
1 1 FAILURE OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 1 AND EMERGENCY SYSTEM 2-126
12 VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK 2-128
13 PITCH ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT 2-132
13M REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF PITCH AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL 2-304T
14 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO-CONTROL 2-308
16 BLEEDING OF STABILATOR RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS 2-510
17 CHECK OF DASHPOT ACCUMULATOR FLUID LEVEL. 2-512
18 CHECK OF CONTROL SURFACE DEFLECTION 2-514
19 ADJUSTMENT OF PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM 2-524
20 PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (PITCH) WITH ARTHUR DEVICE
IN «LOW RATIO» CONFIGURATION 2-529
21 PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (PITCH) WITH ARTHUR DEVICE
IN «HIGH RATIO» CONFIGURATION 2-531
22 MEASUREMENT OF STABILATOR PLAYS 2-534
23 CHARGING OF ACCUMULATOR BUILT INTO ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED
SELECTOR VALVE OF PITCH RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS 2-539
24 CHECK AND LUBRICATION OF VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK TEETH 2-553
AA
0687 Restricted 2-2
t
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iJè^tTsX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^ST ^-^ - . . ,
PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM - PRINCIPLE
(Figure 1)
The pitch control system is operated by means of control stick 1. A power servo-control 66C is
provided at the other channel end to actuate each stabilator. In electrical control mode, these
components perform roll and pitch damping function as per damping signals directly fed by associated
electronic components.
Pilot's command is transmitted via an auxiliary servo-control 77C inserted in the linkage, close to
control stick. In electrical control mode, this auxiliary servo-control acts as an actuating jack to the
autopilot.
Pitch control can be effected :
- Either manually, by means of control stick and with or without electrical pitch damping signals
fed to stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C.
Flight commands transmitted to power servo-controls may be either electrical or mechanical

commands.
- Or automatically, through the autopilot provided that roll, pitch and yaw damping systems
operate. In that case, the control stick follows the displacements of auxiliary servo-control 77C.
The installation also includes the following :
-Connected in parallel with control linkage :

- An artificial feel unit (A.F.U,) 76C, connected to trim actuator 89C. The trim indicator is
used to shift the A.F.U. zero load setting.
- An ARTHUR device 75C, intended to cause artificial feel loads applied to control stick to
vary in accordance with flight parameters (Mach number and altitude).
- A dash-pot 1 94C, intended to apply to control stick a force proportional to control stick
displacement speed. This force varies in accordance with IAS and altitude (built-in aneroid).
- Connected in series in control linkage :

- An AMEDEE variable ratio bellcrank 3, intented to reduce control sensitivy about a given
control stick position.
- with associated electrically-operated selector valve 69C,
Releasable bellcranks 70C and 71 C
intended to isolate stabilator servo-controls from linkage during electrical operation.
- Position pickoffs, provided for servo-control slaving in electrical mode.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Manche pi lote 1 89C Vérin de trim

Control stick Trim actuator
Renvoi étanche 2 76 C
Pressure seal lever Système de restitution
artificielle d'effort
(S.R.A)
194C Artificial feel unit
Vérin amortisseur (A.F.U.)
(Dash-pot)
Dash-pot
75C Guignol variable
(ARTHUR)
Variable bellcrank
78 C (ARTHUR)
Capteur triple de position
(Servo-Commande auxiliaire)
Triple position pickoff
(Auxiliary servo-control) 77 C Servo-commande
3 . auxiliaire
Relais à démultiplication Auxiliary
variable (AMEDEE) servo-control
Variable ratio bellcrank
(AMEDEE)
Servo commande
(empennage)
Servo-controls
(stabilators)
FIGURE 1 - COMMANDE DE PROFONDEUR - Principe

PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM - Principle
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl«=i>^rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^fiR3^^"^ . .
Failures and safety systems
Should the pitch channel electrical control circuits (damping or autopilot) happen to fail, the
various safety systems will automatically change over to direct mechanical control (control stick).
Should the hydraulic power generation system happen to fail :
1 In hydraulic system 1 and emergency system :
- Autopilot no longer available.

- Half of stabilator servo-control nominal force available only, but such servo-controls perform
pitch damping function on other hydraulic system as long as the accumulator built into
electrically-operated selector valve 69C is not empty.
-ARTHUR device no longer available (absence of hydraulic supply), causing the artificial feel
loads applied to control stick to be not varied as per flight parameters. The variable bellcrank shifts to
low ratio under the action of its internal spring.
- Autopilot, roll and pitch damping system and «ARTHUR» device available.
- Half of stabilator servo-control nominal force available only.
3 In all hydraulic systems :
In that case, an automatic locking device (built into barrel 1 of each stabilator servo-control)
performs the following functions :
- In flight : locking of stabilators in the position they occupy when failure occurs.
- On the ground : locking of stabilators, even in the case of very strong wind.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Layout - See Figure 2-3
Location Doc.
1 CONTROL STICK Cockpit
(See 04-1)
2 PRESSURE SEAL LEVER Cockpit X
It ensures sealing of pitch control where the latter

leaves the cockpit.
3 VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK (AMEDEE) 33-05 X
It reduces control sensitivity about neutral control

stick position.
4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
(See 04-1)
5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
(See 04-1 )
6 CONTROLLED VALVE 36-02 X

36-10
- Inserted in series in hydraulic supply and return
system of barrel 1 of each pitch servo-control.
- A drop in system 1 pressure prevents hydraulic fluid
from being returned to reservoir.
- System 1 pressure causes controlled valve to open,
therefore allowing hydraulic fluid to be returned to
reservoir.
- 1 of the A/C LP system, it allows
By isolating barrel
bootstrap operation of the locking device built in the
servo-control.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc.
Access Door No. S I
STABILATOR (See 034)
Two stabilators (L/H and R/H) are provided for pitch

control and roll and pitch damping function.
39C AUTOPILOT
(See 13-2)
48C FLYING AID AMPLIFIER
(See 13-1)
52C STICK UNCOUPLE SWITCH Cockpit
(See 04-1 )
53C ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE
(See 04-1 )
54C SERVO RESET BUTTON Cockpit X
It provides for failed channel resetting in the case

where the cause of failure has disappeared.
55C PITCH DAMPER SWITCH Cockpit X
It controls the energization of stabilator servo-control

torque motors and electro-valves.
57C ARTHUR SELECTOR SWITCH Cockpit X
-LOW
-HIGH
-AUTO
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Location Doc
Item Name-Characteristics and Functions Access Door No.
65C SERVO-CONTROLS (STABILATOR) 36-10 X

66C 36-02
Dual-barrel type (tandem arrangement). Both barrels op¬
erate simultaneously.
Provided with two synchronized selector valves operated:
-either mechanically by the linkage
-or electrically by one of the electrical servo-valves asso¬
ciated with each main selector valve.
Piston connected to structure and moving body con¬
nected to control surface.
Gust lock device provided on barrel 1 and allowing con- -
trol surface to be locked on ground.
Barrel 1 supplied from hydraulic system 1 .
Barrel 2 supplied from hydraulic system 2.
Nominal force: 2 x 4920 daN (1 1060 Ib.wgt -
4.9347 tons - 5.530 US.tons) at a pressure of 210 bar
(3045 psi).
Travel between mechanical stops: 97 mm (3.818 in).
Function:
-stabilator control
-in electrical mode, ROLL and PITCH damping (as per
damping signals fed from flying aid rack).
Modification 778 incorporated:

The RH servo-control box (stabilator) is ram air cooled
through a scoop. Air escapes through outlets ports.
69C ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE 36-10
Dual single-stage electrically-operated selector valve

supplied from system 1 .
Provided with a built-in hydraulic accumulator - 60 bar
(870 psi).
Used only during operation of servo-controls 65C and
66C in electrical mode.
Function 1 :
-it controls unlocking or locking of releasable bellcranks
70C and 71 C, respectively causing servo -controls to
operate in electrical or mechanical mode.
Function 2:
-in electrical mode (solenoid 1 energized), it controls the
position of moving stops, limiting the relative travels of
releasable bellcrank arms as a function of flight parame¬
ters.
-solenoid 2 energized "shuts off pressure": large travel
(M < 04 - H > 10,000 m)
-solenoid 2 de-energized "applies pressure": small travel
(M > 04 - H < 10,000 m)
AG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj
BREGUET AVIATION ^Vr^
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Item Name r Characteristics and Functions
Access Door No.
Should hydraulic system 1 and emergency system happen

to fail in flight, the built-in accumulator will provide
for about 3 to 5 actuations of releasable bellcranks,
therefore allowing servo-controls to operate on barrel 2
in electrical mode.
In the case where releasable bellcranks cannot be un¬

locked due to an empty accumulator, electrical control
of stabilator servo-control is cancelled by m icrosw itch-
operated safety systems.
70C RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS 36-10 X

71C 36-02
It is provided with three coaxial arms :
- Arm A : Connected to pilot's linkage.
- Arm B : Connected to servo-control selector valves.
- Arm C : Connected to servo-control body.
Arm B can be locked or unlocked hydraulically with
respect to arm A.
In unlocked configuration, arm B can move over a large
or small travel with respect to arm A, depending on
moving stop position. Each travel range (which is a
function of flight parameters) is monitored by safety
microswitches cancelling electrical control of stabila¬
tors in case of failure.
Locking and travel control functions are provided by
electrically-operated selector valve 69C.
Moreover, the releasable bellcrank is fitted with a
dual differential position pickoff the body of which
is connected to arm A and the lever of which is connected
to arm C.
This pickoff is used to slave stabilator servo-control
to flight commands and damping signals.
74C SERVO-VALVE (ARTHUR) 11-04i
Supplied from hydraulic system 1 and controlled

electrically by flying aids, it slaves the position
of variable bellcrank 75C to flight parameters
(Mach number and altitude).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No.
75C VARIABLE BELLCRANK (ARTHUR) 11-04i
This is a hydraulic jack the body of which can oscillate

about a pin integral with aircraft' structure.
One piston end is connected to linkage and the other
to A.F.U. 76C.
Supplied from hydraulic system 1 through servo-valve
74C, it allows artificial feel loads to be slaved to
flight parameters through the displacement of its piston.
The following will be obtained for a given control
stick displacement :
(1) At low IAS : Low ARTHUR ratio, causing low arti¬
ficial feel loads to be applied for small A.F.U. travels.
(2) At high IAS : High ARTHUR ratio, causing higher
artificial feel loads to be applied for larger A.F.U.
travels.
The ARTHUR bellcrank travel varies in accordance with
Mach number and altitude.
A linear potentiometer is built into the variable
bellcrank for slaving purposes.
Should hydraulic system 1 and emergency system happen
to fail, the ARTHUR bellcrank will automatically shift
to low ratio.
76C ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT (A.F.U.) 12-04

23-04i
Consisting of a spring box, it transmits an artificial
accordance with spring box rod displacement.
The A.F.U. body is connected to trim actuator 89C and
the A.F.U. rod to one piston end of variable bellcrank
75C.
It is fitted with two potentiometers one of which acts
as a dynamometric pickoff. When the pitch channel is
controlled by the autopilot, the information provided
by this potentiometer is used by the auto trim system
to permanently cancel the artificial feel loads applied
by the A.F.U.
The second potentiometer is a part of the corresponding
safety channel.
AA
10-73 Pactrir»»! 2-105
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /, *> MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^j^^^-
Location Doc.
ITEM NAME CHARACTERISTICS AND FUNCTIONS
Access door No.
77 C SERVO-CONTROL (AUXILARY) 14-04i X
Dual-barrel type (tandem arrangement). Both barrels do

not operate simultaneously. Piston connected to structure.
Moving body connected to linkage.
Barrel 1 is provided with a mechanically- and electri¬
cally-operated selector valve and is supplied from
hydraulic system 1 .
Both selector valves are interconnected mechanically.
Nominal force for each barrel : 183 daN (41 1 Ib.wgt)
at a pressure of 100 bar (1450 psi).
Auxiliary servo-control is intended to :
- absorb linkage frictions.
- act as an autopilot actuator in electrical control
mode (barrel 1).
78C TRIPLE POSITION PICKOFF 14-04i

(AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL)
Operated by a bellcrank at the output of pitch auxiliary
servo-control 77C, its measurements are used to close
the servo-control servo loop (servo-control slaved to
autopilot commands). Pickoff measurements are also used
by crash recorder (See 17-1).
81C TRIM INDICATOR FUSE-BREAKER Electrical

heart
(See 04-1)
82C TRIM INDICATOR Control

pedestal
(See 04-1)
86C PITCH TRIM CIRCUIT-BREAKER Circuit-

breaker box
Intended to protect the trim actuator control circuit.
87C PITCH TRIM CONTROL SWITCH Control X

stick handgrip
It provides for trim actuator manual control.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No P I
88C «MANUAL-AUTO» TRIM RELAY Trim box X
It switches the trim control circuits from manual mode

to automatic mode, when fed with a signal supplied by
the flying aids. \
In automatic mode, it allows the autopilot to be trimmed

in pitch by means of manual control 87C.
89C TRIM ACTUATOR 13-04i X
The trim actuator body is fixed to a point on aircraft

structure and the rod is connected to the body of A.F.U.
76C.
Its function is to shift the A.F.U. zero load setting
through either manual or automatic control.
96C DUAL SUPPLY VALVE
(See 04-1 )
140C PITCH AUTO TRIM FUSE BREAKER Electro-center X
Intended to protect the trim actuator automatic control

circuit power supply.
144C TRIM CUTOFF RELAY Trim box X
When de-energized by flying aid commands, it cuts

off automatic control of trim actuator 89C.
145C AUTO TRIM RELAY (NOSE-UP) Trim box X
When energized, it controls trim actuator power supply

in «rod retracted» direction, through de-energized relay
146C.
146C AUTO TRIM RELAY (NOSE-DOWN) Trim box X
When energized, it controls actuator trim power supply

in «rod extended» direction, through de-energized relay
145C.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Doc
Item Location
Name - Characteristics and Functions
Access Door No P I
148C RESISTOR BOX - PITCH TRIM Trim box X
Used to attenuate the signal fed to autopilot

(1 kilohm for each resistor).
It prevents fuse-breaker 86C from tripping in the case where
any trouble occurs along the line.
194C DASH-POT 12-04 X
Connected in parallel with pitch linkage, it is intended

to apply to control stick a force proportional to control
stick speed displacement.
An aneroid is built into the dash-pot to vary this force
as per pressure differential A P.
Provided with a hydraulic system independent of aircraft
hydraulic systems, the dash-pot includes a hydraulic
accumulator with a temperature-controlled heating system
and a low level switch.
195C DASH-POT WARNING LIGHT Safety switch X

unit
Intended to signal fluid level drop in dash-pot 17-04
accumulator.
207C TRIM CHOPPER UNIT
(See 13-1)
208C DIODE BOX Trim box
Intended for trim control circuit interference sup¬

pression.
209C RESISTORS Trim box

21 OC
Intended to attenuate BIP trim signal fed to autopilot.
- See 08-3 for description and operation

- Following lights are associated with pitch control
system :
- «ELEV amber light

-«PITCH» amber light
- «ROLL» amber light.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 04
Section between frames 37 and 38 F. 11 Rear view

AF
BREGUET AVIATION
ti^^tT\L
^tzS?* ^^. -
MIRAGE F
PITCH LINKAGE
(Figure 3)
The pitch linkage is of the rigid type (pushing and pulling movements). It is actuated by control
stick 1 . A pressure seal lever 2 is used to provide sealing at cockpit outlet in a lateral structural box.
The following is fitted to the pitch linkage :
- In parallel :
- ARTHUR variable bellcrank 75C, actuating A.F.U. 76C itself coupled to trim actuator 89C.
- Dash-pot 194C.
- In series :
- Auxiliary servo-control 77C
- Dual position pickoff 78C, connected to auxiliary servo-control output bellcrank.
- AMEDEE variable ratio bellcrank 3.
The linkage is divided into two symmetrically-arranged rod and bellcrank systems (L/H and R/H)
connected to the input arms of releasable bellcranks 70C and 71C, each of these releasable bellcranks
being fitted with a dual position pickoff. Releasable bellcrank output arms are connected through a rod
to the slide valve of each servo-control 65C or 66C.
Each servo-control drives its corresponding stabilator through a bellcrank and a rod connected to
stabilator hinge.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
194C

LINKAGE LAYOUT
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^^TV.
BREGUET AVIATION ^^L-^^
MIRAGE F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(Figure 4)
The pitch control system is hydraulically supplied from system 1 (sub-system B) and system 2
(sub-system D) (See 07-1 : Hydraulic power generation).
1 Auxiliary servo-control 77C is supplied as follows :
- In normal operating conditions, from system 1 supplying barrel 1 through electrically-operated

selector valve 53C.
- In the case of system 1 failure, from system 2 automatically supplying barrel 2 through dual
supply valve 96C.
2 Stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C are supplied as follows :
- From system 1 supplying barrel 1

- From system 2 supplying barrel 2.
3 Hydraulic components inserted in pitch control system are only supplied from system 1. These
components are :
- Controlled valves 6, inserted in stabilator servo-control supply and return systems (barrel 1).
- Releasable bellcranks 70C and 71C supplied through electrically-operated selector valve 69C.
- ARTHUR variable bellcrank 75C, supplied through servo-valve 74C.
REMARQUE : The hydraulic accumulator built into electrically-operated selector valve 69C allows a
certain number of releasable bellcrank actuations to be performed in the case of system 1 failure.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
76C _89C
Cabré
Nose-up I l
Vers Servo
Cde auxiliaire
gauchissement
To roll auxiliary
servo-control
79 Z
mm Circuit 1 System 1
mÊ=m Circuit 2 System 2

= Retour Return
A P Aides Flying aids
FA au pilotage
P A
lp Pilote auto Autopilot
FIGURE 4 - CIRCUIT HYDRAULIQUE - (SCHEMA)

AD HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
BREGUET AVIATION ^&. _^ _
MIRAGE
.,...,.».,»,
F
OPERATION OF PITCH CHANNEL
Two control modes are available :
- Manual control
- Automatic control through autopilot
In manual control mode, power servo-controls can be controlled either mechanically by the
linkage, or electrically from commands fed by the flying aid rack.
In the latter case (electrical control), the flight command is fed together with a pitch damping
signal.
Automatic aircraft control requires proper operation of electrical control channel and pitch and
roll dampers. Manual flight command is replaced by auxiliary servo-control action obtained from
commands generated by the autopilot.
Moreover, the installation is provided with a stabilator locking device operating in the case where
hydraulic pressure drops in systems.
1 - MANUAL CONTROL
A Auxiliary servo-control 77C (See 04-1)
Its operation is similar to that of servo-control 79C.
The servo-control drives the linkage up to releasable bellcranks 70C and 71C.
B - Releasable bellcranks 70C and 71C (Figure 5)
Located in the upstream vicinity of each power servo-control, the releasable bellcranks are
intended to convert the mechanical flight command transmitted by the linkage into an electrical
command intended to control stabilator servo-control.
(1) Description
Releasable bellcranks are fitted with a dual position pickoff supplied from electrical circuits 1 and
2, which pickoff permanently detects the difference existing between the positions of arms A and C, i.e.
the difference existing between servo-control and linkage positions. Any deviation causes an electrical
signal (intended to cancel such a deviation to be fed to the torque motor.
Besides, two maximum deviations between servo-control and linkage positions are permitted,
depending on flight parameters. On releasable bellcranks, each range is monitored by a set of safety
microswitches and is limited by mechanical moving stops 20 hydraulically controlled by solenoid 2 of
electrically-operated selector valve 69C. the set of microswitches and the corresponding position of
mechanical stops 20 are selected by the flying aid rack, depending on Mach number and altitude.
AA
#-73 Restricted 2-114
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ>~ZtrV^
BREGUET AVIATIONôF0^^*^
MIRAGE
.......
F
«j
^£^~<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
(2) Operation
Switching on the electrical control channel (pitch damper switch 55C) causes solenoid 1 of
electrically-operated selector valve 69C to be energized, therefore providing for hydraulic unlocking of
releasable bellcrank arms A and B.
Any flight command transmitted by the linkage will cause differential displacement of releasable
bellcrank arms A and C to take place. The pickoff will detect that deviation causing a control signal to
be fed by the flying aid rack to the stabilator servo-control.
C Stabilator servo-controls (Figure 5)
Turning on pitch damper switch 55C causes solenoid valve 21 of torque motor 22 to be energized,
provided that :
- electrically-operated selector valve 69C is pressurized.
- arm B of bellcrank 70C or 71C is unlocked and positionned correctly within stops 20.
(1) Normal control through electrical circuit 1
(a) Barrel 1
System 2 pressure pushes back locking device 23.

-
System 1 pressure causes by-pass valve 24 to be positionned through controlled valve 6 so as to
-
allow hydraulic pressure to be directed towards power stage chamber A or B.
- Solenoid valve 21 is open and allows hydraulic pressure to be directed to the servo-valve of
torque motor 22.
- The flight command generated by the flying aid rack is transmitted to torque motor 22. The
torque motor flap tilts and blanks off one of the two servo-valve nozzles, which causes the pressure to
be directed to one or to the other side of selector valve 25.
The displacement of selector valve 25 causes the hydraulic fluid to be directed to power stage
chamber A or B, therefore causing the servo-control body to move and to drive the stabilator. The
command sent to torque motor 22 is then cancelled by potentiometer type sensing system.
(b) Barrel 2
- Positioned by system 2 pressure, by-pass valve 26 allows the hydraulic fluid to be directed to
power stage chambers.
- Solenoid valve 27 is closed.
- Barrel 2 is controlled by common selector valve 25.
(2) Control through electrical circuit 2
This mode of operation takes place in the case of failure of electrical circuit 1.
(a) Barrel 1
- Solenoid valve 21 is closed and toruqe motor 22 is not fed with any command.
- Barrel 1 is controlled by common selector valve 25.
. (b) Barrel 2
- Solenoid valve 27 is open and torque motor 28 is active. Barrel 2 operates as barrel 1 in previous
case.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
48 C
Circuits Electrical
électriques circuits
65C-66C
Electrical
circuits LEGENDE KEY
System 1
Circuit 1
System 2
OB Circuit 2
Return
Retour
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
Sysiem 1 System 2
FIGURE 5 - SERVO-COMMANDE D'EMPENNAGE FONCTIONNEMENT

STABILATOR SERVO-CONTROL OPERATION
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^cjo. ^-«. -^
MIRAGE
,.....,.,
F
aj
D Mechanical control of stabilator servo-controls
This mode of operation takes place in the case of failure of both electrical control circuits.
(1) Electrically-operated selector valve 69C
Solenoid 1 is de-energized, which causes releasable bellcrank arms A and B to be locked.
(2) Controlled valve 6
It allows system 1 hydraulic fluid to be returned to reservoir.
(3) Stabilator servo-controls ( Figure 6)

Solenoid valves 21 and 27 are closed. Selector valve 25 is fed with mechanical commands from
releasable bellcrank and drives the servo-control until command is cancelled.
E In manual control mode, trim actuator 89C is actuated by manual control 87C whatever the flight
commands transmitted to stabilator servo-controls may be (electrical or mechanical commands). Trim
actuator allows zero load setting to be obtained at A.F.U. 76C for each pitch linkage position
corresponding to a given deflection of stabilators.
Apparent A.F.U. stiffness is varied in accordance to airspeed thanks to the ARTHUR device which
provided two different ratios between two arms. Control circuits are indépendant and the pilot can
select either the low ratio or high ratio of variable bellcrank 75C through manual control 57C (See
figure 5M : ARTHUR law).
With selector switch 57C set to «AUTO», the ARTHUR device will remain in the position it
occupies in the case of air data computer or ARTHUR servo system failure.
2- ROLL AND PITCH DAMPING

The roll damper is used only with autopilot engaged and yaw damper operating.
The aircraft is stabilized along its flight path by means of damping signals sent to stabilator
servo-controls. Such damping signals are generated by the flying aid rack from information provided by
rate gyros and are combined in such a manner that both stabilators perform the following functions
simultaneously :
- Pitch damping, through equal deflection taking place in the same direction.
- Roil damping, through equal deflection taking place in opposite directions.
The damping signals generated by the flying aid rack are fed together with electrical flight
commands. They cause power servo-controls to operate as described above (paragraph C).
3- AUTOMATIC CONTROL
Automatic control can be effected only with roll and pitch damping system operating.
Electrically-operated selector valve 53C is open and allows system 1 pressure to be directed to
-
barrel 1 of auxiliary servo-control 77C.
- Dual supply valve 96C, which is controlled by system 1 pressure, causes system 2 to be shut off.
- Automatic trimming is effected.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION, ^Z^
MIRAGE F
mm Arthur
(1.500) _
Butée
mécanique
guignol
Bellcrank
mechanical
stop
(0.250)
Mach
Mach number
FIGURE 5M - LOI ARTHUR

ARTHUR LAW
AB
11-75 Restricted 2-1 17M FIGURE 5M 2-1 17M
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£5»

MIRAGE F
65 C - 66 C
{Circuit électrique 1
Electrical
nrT" LEGENDE KEY
Circuit l
System 1
Circuit 2
Circuit 1
Circuit 2 System 2
Branche B Branche D Retour
Return
System 1 Systekt 2
FIGURE 6 - FONCTIONNEMENT EN COMMANDE MECANIQUE

OPERA TION IN MANUAL CONTROL MODE
AB
10-73 Restricted 2118 FIGURE 6 2-118
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=îrSl
BREGUET AVIATIONîF^^^Ô
MIRAGE F
A Auxiliary servo-control 77C (Figure 8)
Its operation is similar to that of auxiliary servo-control 79C (See 04-1 ).
The commands generated by the autopilot and passing through the flying aid rack are transmitted
to the servo-valve torque motor. Servo-control 77C moves, simultaneously driving the control stick and
the pitch linkage section between control stick and releasable bellcranks 70C and 71 C.
The operation of releasable bellcranks 70C and 71 C, electrically-operated selector valve 69C,
controlled valve 6 and stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C is similar to that previously described for
normal electrical control mode (See paragraph C (1)).
In automatic control mode, the trim actuator allows A.F.U. zero load setting to be obtained at any
time, regardless of auxiliary servo-control displacement.
B Change-over from automatic mode to manual mode (Figure 7)
Change-over from automatic mode to manual mode can be due :

either to momentary disconnection or voluntary switching off of autopilot performed by the
-
pilot (stick uncouple switch 52C).
- or to the operation of one or several safety systems, in the case of failure of hydraulic systems or
electronic circuits.
In the case where the autopilot is voluntarily switched off without failure of pitch and roll
damping system, the control mode taking place is manual control with electrical transmission of
commands to stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C.
In the case where the autopilot is switched off with failure of pitch and roll damping system, the
control mode taking place is manual mode with mechanical transmission of pilot's commands to
stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C.
NOTE : As for roll control system, it is possible to voluntarily change over to manual control by
shutting off hydraulic supply to barrel 1 of auxiliary servo-control 77C, through closing of
electrically-operated selector valve 53C (stick uncouple switch 52C), or by applying a sudden
jerk to control stick, which causes one of the safety microswitches controlled by the
bellcrank of auxiliary servo-control 77C to operate.
4- STABILATOR GROUND LOCKING DEVICE (Figure 9)
A Locking
Systems 1 and 2 are depressurized.
(1) Controlled valve 6
The absence of pressure in system 1 causes piston 29 to be pushed back under spring action.
Valve 30 is pushed back under spring action and blanks off the return system to servo-control reservoir.
(2) Stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C.
- Barrel 1 : The absence of pressure in system 2 causes locking device 23 to be pushed back under
spring action. The absence of pressure in system 1 causes by-pass valve 24 to be pushed back under
spring action and to abut against piston 23 which prevents interconnection between both chambers A
and B.
Non-return valve 31 and valve 30 allow hydraulic locking and prevent fluid delivery which may
occur, through selector valve, to HP system and reservoir.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]/,
BREGUET AVIATIONûF"-1
MIRAGE F
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
System 1 System 2
53 C
Hf}*"* *
\\W\K
FIGURE 7 - FONCTIONNEMENT EN COMMANDE MANUELLE
AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL - OPERATION IN MANUAL CONTROL MODE
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
System 1 System 1
22VT
FIGURE 8 - FONCTIONNEMENT EN COMMANDE ELECTRIQUE AVEC P.A
AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL - OPERA TION IN ELECTRICAL MODE WITH AUTOPILOT
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
65 C 66 C
48C {Circuit électrique 1 Circuit électrique 2 L 48C

Electrical circuit 1 f]7= Electrical circuit 2 _|
Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Branche B Branche D
System 1 System 2
FIGURE 9 - CIRCUITS SANS PRESSION

AB ZERO HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CONFIGURA TION
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU>*-''JrU
BREGUET AVIATION^^^^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^C*^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
However, small leaks may also occur at the location of by-pass valves and of selector valve, so that
a slight drift of the servo-control may come about, entailing stabilator lowering the speed of which
depends upon the flow rate of the leakage.
Such a drift may be tolerated as long as it does not cause noticeable stresses in control linkage.
On the other hand, if delivery pressure in return line exceeds calibration value of valve 30, the
latter operates as a pressure relief valve.
Barrel 2 : system 2 being depressurized, by-pass valve 26 is pushed back under spring action,
therefore allowing both power chambers to become interconnected.
B Unlocking
In the case where system 2 is pressurized, only servo-control locking device 23 is being pushed
back. By-pass valve 24, fully pushed back under spring action, provides for complete interconnection
between chambers A and B of servo-control barrel 1 .
- In the case where system 1 is pressurized, piston 29 is acted upon by the pressure, causing
valve 30 to open therefore allowing system 1 fluid to be returned to reservoir.
By-pass valve 24 provides for normal operation of barrel 1 .
5- PITCH TRIM SYSTEM (Figure 10)
The pilot is relieved of constant actuation of control stick, in the case of change in aircraft
aerodynamical balance, through the use of trim actuator 89C. Such a trim actuator provides the
possibility of obtaining A.F.U. zero load setting (A.F.U. 76C) for any stabilator position.
A Pitch trim control
The trim system is controlled either manually or automatically (with autopilot 39C engaged).
(1) Operation in manual control mode
Trim actuator 89C is controlled from a control switch located on control stick handgrip, which
control switch actuates «NOSE-DOWN/NOSE-UP» plunger 87C. Power supply is provided by DC
system 1 (R1=), with «MANUAL-AUTO» relay 88C de-energized.
- Actuating the control switch in «NOSE-DOWN» direction causes the trim motor to be operated
in the «rod extended» direction.
- Actuating the control switch to «NOSE-UP» direction causes the trim motor to be operated in
the «rod retracted» direction. Two microswitches are provided in the motor to cut off power supply
when the rod is either fully extended or fully retracted.
Automatic control is effected by the flying aids (through amplifier 48C) when autopilot 39C is
being engaged (See 13-1 and 13-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
86 C
Nose-down 87 C Extension
S\j, ^r
_q J
Nose-up *-« i ,
ni
Retraction
Ht-
140C 207 C
^
88C
145C 146C 144C

-z
nz ri rz;
«+
j. i
148C
I208C
i
r-
i
t-
i i -''irU.
BREGUET AVIATION^2^3 <g<^>
MIRAGE
.........
F
-,
^^S ^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
(a) Principle
The bellcrank of auxiliary servo-control 77C becomes locked onto its body as soon as the
autopilot is engaged. The electrically-operated servo-valve, which follows the commands fed by the
autopilot, causes the servo-control to move as well as the control stick, due to the locked bellcrank of
auxiliary servo-control 77C.
The bellcrank becomes unlocked in the case where the autopilot is disengaged.
Should the more or less compressed A.F.U. apply a load to the linkage, such a load would cause
the auxilary servo-control main selector valve to open fully and suddenly. The aircraft would then be
subjected to a sudden nose-up or nose-down jerk.
Such a phenomenon is suppressed by using a pickoff (built into the A.F.U. and acting as a
dynamometer)which permanently detects A.F.U. movements.
This information is used by the flying aid rack to control trim actuator operation so as to
permanently obtain A.F.U. zero load setting.
(b) Operation
Autopilot engagement causes a signal to be fed by flying aid amplifier 48C to energize the
following relays :
- Relay 88C, which cuts off manual control and allows automatic control.
- Trim cutoff relay 144C.
- Auto trim relay 145C or 146C (the trim motor being supplied by DC system 1 (R1=) through the
other auto trim relay).
De-energized trim cutoff relay 144C cuts off trim actuator automatic control without allowing
manual control to take place.
B Automatic trim safety device

The A.F.U. includes two indépendant potentiometers, one intended for the control circuit and the
other for the safety circuit. Should the output voltage of second potentiometer be higher than a
pre-determined threshold value, a safety device included in flying aid amplifier 48C causes :
- «TRIM» failure warning light to come on in cockpit
- Relay 144C to be de-energized (suppression of automatic trim control).
C Pitch trim indicating
Pitch trim indications are provided on trim indicator 82C, indicating trim actuator position. This
indicator is common to the three trim control systems (yaw, roll and pitch). Trim indications are
supplied by the potentiometer built into the trim actuator and controlling the displacement of a center
bar moving upwards or downwards on corresponding trim indicator dial.
6- FAILURES
A Hydraulic failure of system 1 and emergency system (Figure 11).
- Dual supply valve 96C automatically supplies barrel 2 of auxiliary servo-control 77C and
uncouples the autopilot. The «ELEV» and «ROLL» failure warning lights come on.
- Artificial feel loads are no longer slaved to Mach number and altitude. Variable bellcrank 75C
shifts to low ratio, under internal spring action.
- Damping function is momentarily available on electrical circuit 2 as long as the hydraulic
accumulator built into electrically-operated selector valve 69C remains capable of actuating the
releasable bellcranks.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/',.
BREGUET AVIATION
-*-i---U.
w^x^^-CZ^'
MIRAGE F
^£^^^b> Restricted MANUAL 04
Once the accumulator built into electrically-operated selector valve 69C is empty, arms A and B of
releasable bellcranks 70C and 71 C become automatically locked.
Stabilator servo-controls 65C and 66C have their nominal force reduced by 50%.
-
Flying aid electrical circuits 1 and 2 are cut off by releasable bellcrank safety microswitches,
-
which results in manual control without damping function. The «PITCH» failure warning light comes
on.
B Hydraulic failure of system 2
Such a failure has no effect upon the operation of pitch channel, except as regards stabilator
servo-controls which have their nominal force reduced by 50%.
C Failure of electrical circuit 1.
In the case where a failure causing an excessive difference in position between linkage and
servo-control occurs, the flying aid safety channel is set into service through releasable bellcrank
microswitches. Electrical control is then effected by electrical channel 2 controlling barrel 2 of
stabilator servo-controls. The «ELEV» failure warning light comes on.
D Failure of electrical circuit 2
servo-control occurs, the flying aid safety channel is set into service through releasable bellcrank
microswitches. Automatic locking of bellcrank arms A and B and cutoff of electrical circuit 2 are
automatically effected by releasable bellcrank microswitches.
This results in manual control without damping configuration, except in the case where hydraulic
system 1 operates normally and where the above-mentioned failure of electrical circuit 1 does not exist
any longer. In such a case, releasable bellcrank microswitches cause system 1 to supply barrel 1 and the
roll and pitch damping function remains available.
E Electrical power supply failure (circuits 1 and 2)
Electrically-operated selector valve 69C is de-energized and causes arms A and B of releasable
bellcranks 70C and 71C to become locked. Solenoid valve 21 is no longer energized and torque
motor 22 is no longer fed with any command. This results in manual control without damping
configuration. The «ELEV», «PITCH» and «ROLL» failure warning lights come on.
NOTE : When a failure occurs any failure of electrical circuits1 and 2, with «ELEV», «PITCH» and
«ROLL» amber failure warning lights on), the pilot has at his disposal servo reset button 54C
which allows the failed channel to be reset into service, provided that the cause of failure has
disappeared.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
F - SUMMARY OF FLIGHT CONTROL FAILURES
FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS :AILUR EWAR NING LIGHTS

F
FAILURES RESULTS STILL NO LONGER

AVAILABLE AVAILABLE ELEV PITCH RUD YAW ROLL AP
RUDDER
HYDRAULIC CHANGE¬ STABILATOR (electrical)
SYSTEM OVER TO (electrical YAW ELEV RUD YAW ROLL AP
1 HYDRAULIC PITCH ROLL
SYSTEM 2 AP
HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM 2
CHANGE¬ STABILATOR
-
STABILATOR OVER TO PITCH
ELECTRICAL STABILATOR RUDDER ELEV
CIRCUIT 1 ELECTRICAL YAW
CIRCUIT 2 ROLL
STABILATOR CHANGE¬ STABILATOR

ELECTRICAL OVER RUDDER (electrical)
CIRCUITS 1 TO HYDRO- YAW PITCH ELEV PITCH ROLL AP
AND 2 MECHANICAL ROLL
MODE AP
CHANGE¬ STABILATOR
PITCH OVER RUDDER (electrical)
TO HYDRO- PITCH ELEV PITCH ROLL AP
DAMPER MECHANICAL YAW ROLL
MODE AP
CHANGE¬ STABILATOR
RUDDER OVER PITCH
ELECTRICAL TO RUDDER RUDDER RUD
CIRCUIT 1 ELECTRICAL YAW
CIRCUIT 2 ROLL
CHANGE¬ RUDDER
RUDDER OVER STABILATOR (electrical)
ELECTRICAL TO HYDRO- YAW RUD YAW ROLL AP
CIRCUITS 1 MECHANICAL PITCH ROLL
AND 2 MODE AP
CHANGE¬ RUDDER
YAW OVER STABILATOR (electrical)
TO HYDRO- YAW RUD YAW ROLL AP
DAMPER MECHANICAL PITCH ROLL
MODE AP
STABILATOR
ROLL PITCH ROLL ROLL AP
DAMPER RUDDER AP
YAW
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
65 C _ 66 C
KEY
LEGENDE
Circuit 1
System 1
Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 2

System 2
Branche B Branche D Retour
System 1 System 2 Return
FIGURE ll - PANNE CIRCUIT HYDRAULIQUE 1ET SECOURS
AB FAILURE OF HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 1 AND EMERGENCY SYSTEM

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=J>-^rU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^-^^ ut A MUAI CiA
PITCH VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK
(Figure 12)
1- GENERAL
The variable ratio bellcrank is an epicyclic device which, when inserted in the pitch control system
of an aircraft,
is intended to reduce control sensitivity about the 1°30' nose-up position.
2- DESCRIPTION
The variable ratio bellcrank essentially consists of :

- Support 1 , bearing two fixed toothed quadrants
- Bellcrank 2, hinged to support pin and bearing two planet gears.
Upstream linkage end-fitting 5 is connected to bellcrank 2. Downstream linkage end-fitting 6 is

connected to eccentric shaft which is integral with both planet gears 8.
A Support 1
Its upper part supports both toothed quadrants 3 attached by means of screws. Sealing between
each toothed quadrant and its cover is ensured by means of a felt piece 13 fitted to the end of toothed
quadrants.
Its lower part is run through by bellcrank hinge pin 4.
Support 1 is fitted with two adjustable screws 9, acting as bellcrank travel stops.
B- Bellcrank 2
It is provided at its lower part with the cages of bearings 10 the bore of which accomodates planet
gear 8 onto which half-crankpin 11 is centered and fixed. Both half-crankpins are connected through
eccentric shaft 7 run through downstream linkage end-fitting 6. Upstream linkage end-fitting 5 is pinned
at bellcrank mid-height through pin 12 (end-fitting 5 is offset with respect to bellcrank vertical axis).
Covers 14, protecting planet gears and toothed quadrants, are installed on either side on bellcrank
to part.
3- OPERATION
The variable ratio bellcrank is inserted between pitch channel auxiliary servo-control and power
servo-controls. To a given bellcrank travel within stop-to-stop range corresponds an arc of a circle
described by the input linkage pin and a flat epicycloid described by the output linkage pin.
In the vicinity of neutral position, a given displacement of the input linkage will cause a smaller
displacement of the output linkage, therefore providing the control stick with a greater accuracy.
On the contrary, the displacement of the output linkage will be greater than that of the input
linkage at bellcrank travel limits, therefore allowing the control surface to be moved quicker with a
constant control stick displacement speed.
The 6°10' offsetting of input linkage end-fitting with respect to mounting axis of output linkage
end-fitting allows the middle point of maximum control stick sensitivity range to be located at 1°30'
nose-up.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
'W//À
'''V»'h»'"&L 1 \s&ïïfïi,w''
«H'i'iv.'i'i'i r.'i'i'ivi'lifri
COUPE C
CROSS-SECTION C
llj^'"'' ***'"* *****-* ****-***-*-*"*'**-*>'*-*-*-***«** ***" *»** *******
COUPE A COUPE B
CROSS-SECTION A CROSS-SECTION B
FIGURE 12 - RELAIS A DEMULTIPLICATION VARIABLE

VARIABLE RA T/O BELLCRANK
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^^r^^K^
MIRAGE
mammai
F
r\A
PITCH ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT
(Figure 13)
1 - GENERAL
accordance with such a displacement. Inserted in a channel including servo-controls, it allows a
progressive artificial feel varying in accordance with control stick displacement to be applied to pilot's
linkage.
The A.F.U. is provided with two potentiometers. One of these potentiometers is intended, in
automatic control mode, to detect the direction and value of any load applied by the A.F.U.
A control signal allowing such a load to be cancelled is then automatically supplied to a trim
actuator coupled to the A.F.U. The second potentiometer is a part of the corresponding safety channel.
2- DESCRIPTION
The pitch A.F.U. consists of :

- Cylinder 1
- Rod 2
- Three stops 3, 4 and 5
Two end springs 6 and 7 and two center springs 8
- Sleeve 9
- Adjusting guide 10
- Body 11
- Two potentiometers 12 with associated control system
- Two attachment clevises 13 and 14.
A - Cylinder 1
The ends of the cylinder are equipped with an adjusting guide 10 and body 1 1 .
B- Rod 2
The rod comprises a shoulder at one end and a sleeve 9 at the other end against which are seated
stops 3 and 5 actuated by the initial load of springs 8.
The displacement of the rod in either direction drives the stops, thereby increasing or decreasing
the spring load and consequently causing shortening or lengthening of the A.F.U.
C- Stops 3, 4 and 5
Each stop acts as a seat to two of the four springs. The bore of each stop is provided with two
machined grooves accommodating a teflon split ring 37 (intended to reduce frictions between stops and
rod).
D Springs 6, 7 and 8

- center springs 8 : between center stop and each of the other two stops,
- end spring on cylinder side : between cylinder bottom and stop 5,
- end spring on rod side : between adjusting guide 10 and stop 3.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H ï\-«-»'^ /V\II\/-\V_7L- I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-fi~ êw . - .. _, ......... n,
E - Sleeve 9
Screwed onto the rod, it provides for initial setting adjustment of both center springs 8
during assembly.
F - Adjusting guide 10
Screwed into the cylinder and acting as the rod bearing, it provides for initial setting ad¬
justment of both end springs 6 and 7. It accomodates a teflon split ring 36 so as to reduce in¬
ternal friction. It is secured against motion in the cylinder by means of nut 17.
G - Body 1 1
Screwed at one cylinder end, it is connected to the latter through nut 1 5. It contains both
potentiometers 12, lever assemblies 20 and return springs 21. The assembly is protected by
two covers 22 attached to the body through eight screws 23, each of these screws being fitted
with a washer 24.
H - Single potentiometers 1 2
Each potentiometer is held in body 1 1 by means of four angles 25 attached by a screw 26

and a washer 27. Control lever 20 is attached to potentiometer shaft through clamp 28. The
rollers fitted to levers 20 are maintened in contact with cam 1 9 by springs 21 . Peg 29 acts as a
stop to lever 20 when the A.F.U. extends beyong a certain value. Potentiometers are equiped
with an electrical cable provided with a connector intended to ensure connection with aircraft
electrical circuits.
J - Attachment clevises 13 and 14
Clevis 1 4 is screwed onto the outer end of body 1 1 and is connected to the latter through
nut 16. It is used to adjust the A.F.U. to length in the aircraft. It is fitted with pin 30, flange
32, washer 33, nut 34 and locking pin 35. Clevis 13 is screwed onto the outer end of rod 2
and is secured to the latter through lockplate 38. It is fitted with pin 31, washer 33, nut 34
and locking pin 35.
3 - OPERATION
The device comprises four preloaded springs 6, 7 and 8. The initial load of the two
springs 8 is higher than that of springs 6 and 7. Without an external force, the device is in the
balanced configuration under the action of the forces generated by the four springs.
Under a compressive load (A.F.U. shortening), the rod moves in accordance with the
O.A.B.C. chart.
A - Zone OA
Spring 7 is compressed and spring 6 extends; springs 8 retain their initial length due to
their higher initial load. Only springs 6 and 7 work in this zone.
B - Point A
Spring 7 is compressed, springs 8 remain still set to their initial length and spring 6 ex¬
tends exactly to its free length dimension.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
C - Zone AB
Only spring 7 is working in this zone.
D - Point B
The load reaches the initial load value of the two springs 8.
E - Zone BC
The load is higher than the initial load value of the two springs 8 which become com¬
pressed. Only the three springs 8 and 7 are working in this zone.
Under an extension load (A.F.U. lengthening), the rod moves in accordance with the
O.A'.B'.C. chart. The springs work in the same manner as described above.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^S^3
J MIRAGE F
31-33-34-35 30-32-33-34-35
à ± 1 0° par rapport a la chape et vers le bas VUE F (Capot coupé) SECTION A

Discharge holes positioned at ± 70° with
VIEW F (Cover removed)
respect to the clevis, and pointing downwards
25-26-27 Point de colle Potentiomètre
Gaine CRN 1-1-16 Lg4
Bonding point Sh»=>th Lgth Potentiometer
] Potentiomètres Gaine RNF 100-1-1-4 Lg8

! Potentiometers Sheath Lgth
Gaine RNF 100-1-1-4 Lg18
|A B C D E F | Connecteur Sheath Lgth
+ " Connecior Gaine RNF 100-1-3-8 Lg25
Sheath Lgth
Effort Gaine RILG 406-0
en daN (Ib.wgt) Sheath
Load
in daN
63 (141.52) 26-27.
65.85 (125.55)
Potentiomètre
CABLAGE ANCIENNE FABRICATION Potentiometer
FORMER WIRING MANUFACTURE
22 (49.45) POTENTIOMETRES EQUIPES DE MANCHONS AUTO-SOUDEURS

POTENTIOMETERS WITH SOLDER SLEEVES
Piqué Cabré
Nnse-down O Nose-up Déplacement
en mm 6 Manchons auto-soudeurs (SLT3X)
Extentior42-5 21 -5 4-9 Compression Travel in mm 6 Solder sleeves (SL T3X)
Extension Compression
6 Fils (fil A 1064- 1D20)
6 Wires (wire A 1064 - 1D20)
26(58.45) Jaune (Yellow)
Vert (Green) A+ -
C-
Rouge (Red) |B Potentiomètres
55,85 (125.55) F- Po ten ttometers
Jaune (Yellow) D + ô 6 o ô 6
E Connecteur DEF
Vert (Green). ABC
Connector
74 (166.35) + + -
Rouge (Red)
Gaine RNF 100-1-3-8 Lg18
DIAGRAMME THEORIQUE LOI EFFORT/DEPLACEMENT Sheath Lgth
THEORETICAL LOAD/TRAVEL DIAGRAM
FIGURE 13 - SYSTEME DE RESTITUTION ARTIFICIELLE DE PROFONDEUR SCHEMA DE CABLAGE DES POTENTIOMETRES

PQTENTIOME-r-FR WIRING DIAGRAM
PITCH A R T/FIC/A L FEEL UNI T
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Lj^rPk
breguet aviation^5^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF PITCH A.F.U.
A Special tools
- 1st line flight control tool kit.
B Spares
- 1 lockwasher 23351 AC 080 LE
2- MATERIALS
3- REMOVAL
A Preliminary steps
- Remove doors 11.04i, 12.04, 13.04i and 14.04L

- Set stabilators to neutral position (position provided for linkage pinning).
-Through door 12.04, pin the bellcrank located upstream of ARTHUR device (MS1390-10-810).
- Disconnect electrical connector from trim actuator.
IMPORTANT :
DO NOT OPERATE THE TRIM ACTUATOR WITH A.F.U. DISCONNECTED.
B Removal
Disconnect :
- Bonding braids (7 mm wrench).
- A.F.U. electrical box power supply cable.
Remove :
Pitch auxiliary servo-control slide valve control rod (two 10 mm wrenches and one 13 mm A/F
-
wrench).
- Both A.F.U. attaching pins (two 10 mm wrenches).
Remove the A.F.U. through door 12.04.
4- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Adjust A.F.U. length so that the latter can be pinned easily at both ends (approximate length can
be measured on removed A.F.U.).
- Pin the bellcrank located upstream of ARTHUR device (door 12.04).
- Lubricate pins slightly before installation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L>^rU
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^,^
MIRAGE F
B Installation
- Offer the A.F.U. through door 12.04 by first engaging the end-fitting opposed to sliding rod side.
Engage it rearwards.
- Position the A.F.U. with its electrical box directed towards aircraft centerline.
- Install both attaching pins, with pin heads directed outwards (so that nut locking is performed on
U/C well side).
-As regards aft pin (on trim actuator side), install anti-swivel I ing flange, washer and nut
(10 mm A/F wrench). Then, install locking pin.
- As regards forward pin, insert teflon washer on nut side. Install washer and nut (10 mm A/F
wrench). Then, install locking pin.
- Connect bonding braids (7 mm wrench).
- Connect A.F.U. electrical plug to aircraft receptacle , then make sure that wiring is correctly
secured to A.F.U. by its clamp.
- Install and couple servo-control slide valve control rod.
- On servo-control slide valve side : direct pin head outwards and install locking pin on nut
(two 10 mm wrenches).
- On connecting rod side :
- introduce pin with lockwasher (head outwards), insert teflon washer on pin head side,
- tighten pin (13 mm A/F wrench), and bend lockwasher tabs.
- Connect bonding braids (7 mm wrench).
C Unpin the bellcrank located upstream of ARTHUR device.
D Reconnect trim actuator electrical connector.
5- FINAL STEPS
-Check automatic trim system (see 04-2).

-Perform the following operations :
-check of pitch artificial feel loads (see 04-2). Check that the A.F.U. does not come into
contact with other components during its travel,
- overall check of flight control electronics (see 13-1) - Pitch trim system A.F.U. sheet.
- Check that attaching pins are properly locked and that electrical connectors are properly con¬
nected. Then, close access doors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^"±r\l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c^g;-^^^
^C^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF PITCH AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL

(see figure 13M)
A Special tools

B - Standard tools
- Stabilator deflection templates
- Setof plugs for hydraulic systems
D Spares

2- MATERIALS
3- GENERAL
Servo-controls are interchangeable. No operation is permitted on the servo-control. Any operation
- Remove doors 36.02 - 36. 1 0.
NOTE : For easier access to this door, it is recommended to remove some of the air conditioning
pipes.
- Remove the door pickup spacer.
5- REMOVAL
Remove the pickoff link rod (auxiliary servo-control).
-
Disconnect the electrical plug from the aft aircraft receptacle.
-
Disconnect both bonding braids (7 mm wrench).
-
- Disconnect the pipes on the support. Proceed in the following order, starting from door side : R1 ,
P1, R2 and P2 (14 mm thin fork wrench and 16 mm open-end wrench) (see figure). Note the position
of the pipes to prevent misconnections upon reinstallation (in particular put identification marks on the
two outboard side pipes).
- Blank off the pipes on the support and on the servo-control by means of appropriate plugs.
- Bind the pipes together at the upper part of the servo-control (pipes directed forwards).
- Remove the slide valve control rod attaching pin (10 mm wrench).
- Remove both servo-control attaching pins (10 mm wrench). Recover the flange located on
bellcrank side.
- Remove the servo-control.
AA
BREGUET
/UJ^jirll
AVIATION^3P=<g^>
MIRAGE F
^£s=*^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
6- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
Before installing the servo-control in aircraft, equip it with its flexible pipes and lock these pipes.
- Servo-control LH side : P1 at top (small pipe), R1 at bottom.

- Servo-control RH side : R2 at top (small pipe), P2 at bottom.
Lightly grease the connecting pins and spherical bearings before installation.
B Installation
- Engage the auxiliary servo-control in its compartment. The flexible pipes are to be stowed at the
top and directed forward.
- Install :
- the connecting pin on fixed point side,
- the connecting pin on flange-equipped bellcrank side.
The pins are to be fitted with their heads directed outward, so that the nuts are located on access
door side for easier locking pin installation.
- Install the recessed washer and the nut (10 mm wrench), then fit a locking pin.
- Reconnect the system 2 pipes to the support (see figure).
- Servo-control delivery (P2) to the orifice on outboard side (long pipe at bottom).
- Servo-control return (R2) to the immediately adjacent orifice (short pipe at top).
screw until contact is obtained (use a 16 mm extra-thin fork wrench with short stem) ; tighten.
CAUTION :

- Then reconnect the system 1 pipes to the support (see figure).
- Servo-control delivery (P1) to the orifice next to delivery system (P1) (short pipe at top).
- Servo-control return (R1 ) to the last orifice in the support (long pipe at bottom).
screw until contact is obtained (use a 16 mm extra-thin wrench with short stem) ; tighten.
CAUTION :

- Connect the electrical connector and the bonding braids.
DO NOT CONNECT THE PICKOFF LINK ROD.
C Check of mechanical clearances between auxiliary servo-control and stabilator servo-control.
- On the stabilator servo-control

- Disconnect :
-the position pickoff control rod on releasable bellcrank (8 mm open-end wrench),
-the servo-control slide valve control rod on servo-control side (10 mm open-end
wrench).
- Install the templates.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL~i>~r'9L
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^C^**^*^ Restricted MANUAL 04
CAUTION :
IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT ALL APPLICABLE PRECAUTIONS BE TAKEN AND THAT THE
RODS BE DISCONNECTED IN THE ABOVE ORDER.
(See «Removal - installation of servo-control» in 04-2).
(2) Clearance check
-Apply pressure in hydraulic system 1.

- Degas the hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).
- Proceeding very slowly, manually actuate the slide valve to set the auxiliary servo-control to its
end-of-travel stop configuration ; also set the power servo-control to stop configuration and check that
the stabilator servo-control slide valve micrometric rods can be mounted for each of the above stop con¬
figurations. This operation is intended to make sure that the auxiliary servo-control internal stops are
within the stabilator servo-control stop-to-stop range.
- Measure the stabilator servo-control stop-to-stop range. Install the micrometric rods.
- Measure the auxiliary servo-control stop-to-stop range and check that a clearance of 10' exists
between auxiliary servo-control and stabilator servo-control stops.
- Connect the control rod of the auxiliary servo-control slide valve :
- install the attaching pin (head on outboard side) and pin it,
connect the bonding braid.
-
- Check that there is no interference between the slide valve control rod and the structure at the
passage of frame 14.
7- FINAL STEPS
- Set the stabilators to 1°30' ± 5' position and check that the RH stabilator is aligned with the
LH stabilator to ± 5'.
CAUTION :
CHECK THAT THE AMEDEE BELLCRANK CAN BE PINNED (rigging pin MS 1390-10-830).
TAKE ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0).
- Check that the components are properly locked and that the electrical plug is properly connected.
- Perform a functional and an adjustment check of the pitch control system (see 04-2).
- Reinstall the auxiliary servo-control pickoff link rod.
CAUTION :
- CHECK THE FOLLOWING OVER THE WHOLE SERVO-CONTROL TRAVEL :
-THAT THE PIPES ARE NOT RUBBING AGAINST ANY COMPONENT, ESPECIALLY
AGAINST THE POSITION PICKOFF SUPPORT,
- THAT THE PIPES ARE NOT TWISTED.
- Perform electrical tests of the pitch auxiliary servo system (see 13-1, sheet No. 4).
- Reinstall the spacer and the access doors.
- Test the flight control electronic system using the integrated test circuit (see 13-0).
AA
"n oe Restricted 2-304M
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION B SECTION C
~%j&WWi^M"MMWjM^
SECTION A
k
//*
M I
^ m J
^
^^^^^P^fi^&^^ffl^-W^^^;
FIGURE 13M -DEPOSE-POSE DE LA SERVO-COMMANDE AUXI LIAIRE DE PROFONDEUR

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF PITCH AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL
AA
03-83 Restricted 2-304T FIGURE 13M 2-304
BREGUET AVIATION
L^^TSL
^fiF°^^^>
MIRAGE
.......
F
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO-CONTROL
(see figure 14)
A Special tools
B Standard tools

- Arsaéro coupling kit.

- 1 1 5 - 200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply
- Adjustable stabilator jack
- Set of hydraulic system pipe plugs
- Stabilator deflection templates.
D Spares
- locking
1 pin 23310 AA 050050 LE
- locking
1 pin 23310 AA 050060 LE
- 2 locking pins 2331 0 AA 01 001 2 L
- 3 locking pins 23310 AA 015015 L
- 1 locking pin 23310 AA 020025 L
2- MATERIALS
I - Grease Air 4222 or 421 0.
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (see 01-0).
Servo-controls are interchangeable. No operation is permitted on servo-control. Any operation

causing the center-to-center distance to be altered requires the component to be sent to the manu¬
A - Remove doors 12.04, 14.04i, 36.02, 36.03-1, 36.03-2 (or 36.10) and 36.09-2, changing stabilator
position whenever required.
B Connect hydraulic power system to system 1 .
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT TL^^ZTSk.
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
C Set stabilators to full nose-up, and shut off hydraulic supply.
- Position an adjustable jack beneath stabilators

- Remove doors 36.03.1 or 36.09.1.
D Remove releasable bellcrank 4 (see 04-2)
5- REMOVAL OF SERVO-CONTROL
With stabilators in full nose-down position and adjustable jack in position
Disconnect the bonding braids

-
Disconnect the two electrical connectors
-
-Disconnect the four flexible pipes from couplings at frames 37-38 (wrenches M31059 and
M31060).
BLANK OFF UNCOVERED PORTS AS PIPES ARE DISCONNECTED.
-Remove the connecting pin from the servo-control on fixed point side (wrench M31011 and
extension).
Acting on the adjustable stabilator jack, bring the head of the pin located on stabilator side
opposite the recess provided in the access door framing. During this operation, hold the servo-control
and make sure that it does not come into contact with any other component in the compartment.
- Remove the servo-control-to-stabiiator bellcrank connecting pin (wrench M31012 and extension).
- Recover the anti-nutation plates.
Acting on the adjustable stabilator jack, position the stabilator upwards while holding the servo¬
control. Remove the servo-control.
6- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Clean and lightly lubricate the pin and spherical bearing. Check that the lubricating groove on
the lubricated spherical bearing (fixed point side) is opposite the end-fitting notches used for
disassembly.
- Fit the servo-control with its flexible pipes (19 mm open-end wrench) before its installation in
aircraft (see figure 14) :
- on fixed point side : R 1 - P1
- on bellcrank side : R2 - P2.
-Supply the servo-control with hydraulic pressure to check the pipes for leaks. Push the sliding
rod home.
- Safety the pipes.
- The stabilator is supported by means of an adjustable jack set to the position for installation of
the servo-control-to-stabilator control bellcrank connecting pin.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL-înJL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^fiF^-Ô . ma Mil Al r\A
^£^<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
B Installation
- Offer up the servo-control with its rod fully extended and install the pin for connection to the
stabilator control bellcrank. Be careful to locate the locking pin hole properly.
- Acting on .the holding posts, move the stabilator until the fixed point side attaching pin can be
fitted. Use mounting thimbles SMS 245 and SMS 244 for installing both pins.
On aft side :
Install anti-swiveling plate(s) and nut. Torque to 8 to 10 mdaN (59 to 73.75 ft.lb) (wrench
M31012 and torque wrench). Install locking pin.
On forward side (fixed point) :

Install washer and nut, torque to 10 to 12 mdaN (73.75 to 88.5 ft.lb) (wrench M31011 and
torque wrench). Install locking pin.
NOTE : In order to have nut safetying compatible with the specified torque value (including tole¬
rance), it is imperative to adjust the washer located on the side opposite the recess on front
attachment and on rear side nut.
- Connect the servo-control electrical connectors.

- Remove the holding posts from beneath the stabilator.
- Connect the four flexible pipes and safety them.
CAUTION :
BE CAREFUL NOT TO TWIST THE FLEXIBLE PIPES UPON INSTALLATION.
7- CHECK OF STABILATOR SERVO-CONTROL INTERNAL STOPS
Install the stabilator deflection templates.

-
Apply pressure to system 1 .
-
- Proceeding very slowly, manually move the slide valve to set the servo-control to end-of-travel
stop (full nose-down, full nose-up).
- Note the deflection values obtained
,o + 20'
+ 6° + 0'
-20° ±10'
- Check over the whole travel of the servo-control :
- THAT PIPES ARE NOT RUBBING AGAINST ANY COMPONENT,
- THAT PIPES ARE NOT TWISTED.
- Trim stabilators to 1° 30' position.
- Cut off hydraulic supply.
8- INSTALLATION OF RELEASABLE BELLCRANK (see 04-2)
CAUTION :
HOLD THE PICKOFF CONTROL LEVER AS LONG AS THE LATTER IS NOT CONNECTED
TO THE SERVO-CONTROL THROUGH ITS LINK-ROD, SO AS TO AVOID DAMAGING THE
PICKOFF IF IT REACHES A STOP.
IT IS ESSENTIAL, BEFORE APPLYING HYDRAULIC PRESSURE TO AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
(PARTIAL OR COMPLETE PRESSURIZATION), THAT THE OPERATOR CHECKS THAT
BOTH LINKS BETWEEN SERVO-CONTROL AND RELEASABLE BELLCRANK ARE EITHER
BOTH CONNECTED OR BOTH DISCONNECTED.
SIMILARLY, IN THE CASE WHERE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS APPLIED TO ONE SYSTEM,
SUPPRESSING (EVEN MOMENTARILY) ONE OF THESE TWO LINKS WILL CAUSE SEVERE
DAMAGE TO BOTH COMPONENTS.
AB Restricted
04-80 2-307
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R^J>^^X.
BREGUET AVIATION ôF^^-^f^-o
MIRAGE F
Restricted MAN UA L 04
9- REPLACEMENT OF A SERVO-CONTROL
The procedure is the same as for removal-installation of a servo-control.

-
Perform a complementary check of the clearances.
-
-Trim the stabilators to - 1°30'. With the L/H stabilator set to - 1° 30', the R/H stabilator
should be set to ± 5'. Adjust the corresponding micrometric rod to reach these settings.
CAUTION :
CHECK THAT AMEDEE BELLCRANK CAN BE PINNED (Rigging pin MS1 390-1 0-830) AND
- Remove micrometric rod from changed servo-control.

- Disconnect rod from auxiliary servo-control slide valve.
- Proceeding very slowly, manually actuate the slide valve of the auxiliary servo-control to set the
latter to end-of -travel stop configuration.
- Check that for each one of these configurations (full nose-up, full nose-down) the micrometric
rod can be installed. The pre-servo-control internal stops can thus be checked for being within the
stabilator servo-control internal stops.
- Install the servo-control slide valve rod.
- Set the control to end-of-travel stop and measure stabilator deflection thus obtained.
Nose-down + 5°30' + 2°'
Nose-up -19° *4jj'

-Check tor a minimum clearance (10') between auxiliary servo-control Stops and servo-control
stops.
10 -FINAL STEPS AFTER REMOVAL-INSTALLATION

- Pressurize hydraulic system 1.
- Bleed hydraulic system (see 07-1 ).
- Trim stabilators to - 1° 30' and check that when L/H stabilator is set to - 1° 30', R/H stabilator
clearance is within ± 5'.
- Check linkage for correct pinning.
- Perform a functional test of stabilators and check for correct deflection (see 04-2).
Bleed releasable bellcranks (see 04-2).
- Check that components are properly locked and that electrical connectors are properly
connected.
- Proceed to check of stabilator releasable bellcrank position pickoff (see 13-1).
- Perform electrical tests of pitch servo-system channel (13-1 ).
- sheet No. 7 - R/H stabilator servo-system.
- sheet No. 8 - L/H stabilator servo-system.
- Install access doors.
- Test the flight control electronic system using the integrated test circuit (see 13-0).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted M A NU AL 04
VUEjSUIVANTC
VIEW IN DIRECTION
OF ARROW C
:frCK£ww.w
';£
m 9
W/t
C.36
VUE SUIVANT F
1
SECTION B
SECTION D
VUE SUIVANT G
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW G
SECTION E
DETAIL
FIGURE 14 - DEPOSE-POSE D'UNE SERVO-COMMANDE DE PROFONDEUR

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF PITCH SERVO-CONTROL
AB
04-83 Restricted 2-308 FIGURE 14 2-3C
BREGUET AVIATION^fi.
//^>-%Al
___^
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF PITCH RELEASABLE BELLCRANK

(figure 14)
A Special tools
B Standard tools
- Arsaero coupling kit

D Spares
- Locking pin 23310 AA 020025 LE
2- MATERIALS
-Grease 4222 or 4210

-' Hydraulic fluid Air 3520A
3- GENERAL
4- AIRCRAFT PREPARATION
- Remove :
- LH doors 36.09-1 , 36.09-2 and 36.10, or
- RH doors 36.02, 36.03-2 and 36.03-1 .
AA
BREGUET AVI ATlON^cî.- _-^ . ....,.,,. fl,
5- REMOVAL
CAUTION :
HOLD PICKOFF CONTROL LEVER AS LONG AS THE LATTER IS NOT CONNECTED TO
SERVO-CONTROL THROUGH ITS LINK-ROD, SO AS TO PROTECT THE PICKOFF FROM
DAMAGES IN THE CASE WHERE THE LATTER WOULD REACH ONE OF ITS EXTREME
POSITIONS.
IT IS IMPERATIVE, BEFORE APPLYING HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IN AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
(PARTIAL OR COMPLETE PRESSURIZATION), THAT THE OPERATOR CHECK THAT
BOTH CONNECTIONS BETWEEN SERVO-CONTROL AND RELEASABLE BELLCRANK
ARE EITHER BOTH CONNECTED OR BOTH DISCONNECTED.
MOREOVER, IN THE CASE WHERE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS APPLIED IN ONE SYSTEM,
THE DISCONNECTION (EVEN MOMENTARY) OF ONE OF THE ABOVE TWO CONNEC¬
TIONS WILL CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGES TO BOTH COMPONENTS.
- Remove rod 1 connecting servo-control and bellcrank pickoff (8 mm wrench).

- Pin releasable bellcrank (rigging pin MS1 390-1 0-840).
- Remove rod 2 connecting servo-control slide valve and bellcrank (10 mm wrench).
- Remove bonding braids (7 mm wrench) from the following :
- Servo-control slide valve control rod and clevises
- Releasable bellcrank arms.
- Disconnect releasable bellcrank control rod 3 on bellcrank side (10 mm wrench).
- Unlock U2 and U1 pipe clamping block (6 mm A/F nut).
- Disconnect both hydraulic pipes.
- Unlock and remove swivel coupling pin nut (19 mm wrench).
- BLANK OFF UNCOVERED PORTS AS PIPES ARE BEING DISCONNECTED.
- Disconnect electrical connectors.
- Hold releasable bellcrank.
- Remove bellcrank pin.
- uear bellcrank upwards.
6- REPLACEMENT
A Support fitting preparation
-Measure spacing dimension between sliding ring and shouldered ring, using a feeler gauge.
- On spare bellcrank, measure dimension «x» at swivel coupling and compare both measurements.
- If required, adjust sliding ring position in accordance with dimension obtained by pushing it
slightly back. Use a hammer type extractor or a drift and clean upon operation completion.
- Offer spare bellcrank.
- Fit swivel coupling pin.
- Torque nut to 2.5 m.daN (18.43 ft.lb).
- Actuate bellcrank by hand to check for absence of side play.
- Remove bellcrank!.
B Preparation of spare bellcrank
The bellcrank is supplied set to the zero position so as to allow adjustment on the aircraft. To this
end, a red locking pin complete with a metal warning tag is inserted in the two «position return» and
«servo inlet» arms. The pin must be removed after adjustment on the aircraft.
After installation on aircraft, remove the red adhesive tapes blanking the cover drain ports of pick-
off 016065 or 016065.01.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^(Z&
/L^^-^rU MIRAGE F
NEVER REMOVE THE BELLCRANK STORAGE PIN WITHOUT IMMOBILIZING THE PICK-
OFF CONTROL LEVER.
NOTE : Should the operation of the spare releasable bellcrank be questionable (bellcrank taken from
another aircraft, for instance), a check of the electrical zero point can be carried out (how¬
ever, this check is not to be considered as systematic). Proceed as follows :
- insert the bellcrank into the aircraft electrical system ;
- connect the electrical connectors ; check the pickoff electrical zero point using the position
pickoff adjustment unit (see manual 13-1, sheets 7 and 8) ;
- disconnect the electrical connectors ;
- remove the storage pin (bellcrank released from factory) ;
- install attaching pin MS1 390-10-840 ;
- install the storage pin on the removed bellcrank.
7- INSTALLATION
- Check that the sliding ring is installed.

- Offer up the releasable bellcrank.
- Lubricate the bellcrank pin and bore sparingly with hydraulic fluid.
- Carefully engage the bellcrank pin and check that its head is properly bearing onto the aircraft
fitting. Using a 19 mm wrench, torque the nut to 2.5 m.daN (18.43 ft.lb), then pin the nut.
- Connect the two hydraulic pipes. Lock the cleats of pipes U2-U1 .
- Connect actuating rod 3 of the releasable bellcrank on bellcrank side.
- Adjust and check the position pickoff of the stabilator releasable bellcrank (see 13-1 ).
- Connect :
- bellcrank/servo-control slide valve control rod 2,
- bellcrank pickoff/servo positioning rod 1 .
- Remove the attaching pin.
- Install the bonding strips :
- on the clevises and the actuating rod of the servo-control slide valve,
- on the arm of the releasable bellcrank.
- Connect the electrical connectors.
8- FINAL STEPS
- Apply pressure in hydraulic system 1 .

- Bleed the hydraulic system free of air (see 07-1).
- Bleed the releasable bellcranks (see 04-2).
- Perform a functional test and check the stabilator deflection (see 04-2).
- Check the position pickoff of the stabilator releasable bellcrank (see 13-1 ).
- Carry out electrical tests of the pitch control system (see 13-1 ).
Sheet 7 - RH stabilator control system.

Sheet 8 - LH stabilator control system.
- Check the various parts for correct locking. Check the rods and the electrical connectors.
- Carry out an integrated test of flight control electronics (see 13-0).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" -** MIRAGE
Mllixrivu F
l
BREGUET AVIATION .7Û-~-
^rt. j!?^
-<?^ Restricted j
^ ^ ....,., ..
MANUAL 04
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF DASHPOT JACK
A - Special tools
- Flight control 1 st line tool kit.
B - Standard tools
-Tool kit for ARSAERO couplings
-Torque wrench kit : 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
-Torque wrench accessory kit : 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).

-11 5-200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply
- Pressure generator
D - Spares
AA 01 501 5LE
- Locking pin 2331 0
-Lock washer 05S006L004
2 - MATERIALS
- Loctite screw lock 241

-Locquic activator N
3 - GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01 -0).
- Remove door 1 2.04.
5 - REMOVAL
-Uncouple pitot static lines (static pressure - total pressure); hold coupling on lines; in¬
stall caps.
-Uncouple electrical connectors.
-Unsafety and remove the jack retaining pins (8 mm wrench).
-Remove jack from compartment.
6 - REPLACEMENT
-Adjust jack length in relation to removed jack.
-Make sure that oil servicing (and bleeding) were performed on dashpot.
-Install the jack in its compartment.
-Balance clearances by adjusting the rod end-fitting (see 04-2 : Adjustment of pitch con¬
trol system).
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£&^- ^ï="=»^> . , .MANUAL nj,
, « m i i à i 04
^rv. ^p ^ Restricted
-Safety the clevis assembly on piston rod side.

-Once the clevis is adjusted, bring the lockwasher single tab (to be folded onto the
adjustable clevis) in alignment with the flat; moderately tighten the nut while retaining the
clevis.
-Remove the jack in order to tighten and safety the nut on a workbench.
-Interpose Locquic activator and Loctite screw lock between the nut and corre¬
sponding threads of the jack rod.
-Screw the nut until seated and correctly position the components while preventing
the clevis from rotating and making sure that the lockwasher tab faces the related flat on the
clevis.
-Bend the lockwasher tab onto the clevis flat, using a flat drift (hold on the part).
-Fully tighten the nut to a torque of 1.7 m.daN (12.54 ft.lb) while retaining the
clevis. During this operation, make sure that the clevis adjustment has not been altered and the
lockwasher tab has remained in correct position on the flat.
-Safety the nut by bending the lockwasher double tab onto the nut WITHOUT AL¬
TERING THE POSITION OF THE TORQUED NUT.
NOTE: As concerns a jack incorporating amendment A, the tab lockwasher is replaced with a
tab washer used to safety a new nut with lockwire.
7 - INSTALLATION
-Position the jack in its compartment.

-Fit the jack retaining pins.
-Connect the pitot-static lines (static pressure - total pressure), tighten them while hold¬
ing the line couplings, then safety.
-Connect the electrical connectors.
8 - FINAL STEPS
-Perform a functional test of the dashpot jack (see 04-2, "Detailed adjustment check of
pitch control system").
-During the tests, check that there is no friction between the pitot-static line couplings
and the control rod of the pitch auxiliary servo-control slide valve.
-Carry out a leak test of the pitot-static system (see 12-1 ).
-Safety the pins and reinstall the door.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTjU^-"-^ *» I KM V^ C F
BREGUET AVIATION^c^F3^^ » . . m. ami i a i n*
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A PITCH BELLCRANK

(see figure 14)
A Special tools
- 1st line flight control tool kit.

- 2nd line flight control tool kit.
B Standard tools
- Set of 0.2 to 3 m.daN (1 .5 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrenches

- Set of 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) torque wrenches
- Set of accessories for 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350 ft.lb) torque wrenches

- 1 1 5 - 200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply
- Adjustable positioning screw jack to hold tail unit
D Spares
- 1 lockwasher F 242 51 813

- 1 lockwasher 23351 AC 060LE
2 - MATERIALS

-Sealant PR 1422A2
3 - GENERAL
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM (SEE 01-0).
-Remove the engine (see 06-4).

-Remove doors 36.02 or 36.10 - 38.09 or 38.03 (if required, modify the configuration of the tail
unit) - 38.02i or 38.10i after engine removal.
- Install an adjustable positioning screw jack under the concerned tail unit.
- Remove the pitch servo-control (see 04-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^^TU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^^-^ . ..»»,.,»,«,
^^_ Restricted MANUAL 04
5 - REMOVAL
-Disconnect rod 5 from the bellcrank :

-unsafety and remove screw 6, using the 10 mm open-end wrench ; keep lock cup 8 and
lockwasher 10,
- using the 32 mm open-end wrench, remove retaining screw 9 from the rod attaching pin,
then remove pin 7 ; remove rod 5 from bellcrank 11.
- Disconnect the bonding braids from the bellcrank.
- Remove hinge pin 12 :
-unsafety and slacken nut 15, using wrench M 31113; keep lockwasher 14 and spring
washer 13,
- remove the pin.
- Remove the bellcrank from its clevis :
- push the bellcrank sideways several times and withdraw it from the compartment.
6 - REPLACEMENT
-Before installing the bellcrank, check the following :

-with both bearings resting on outer spacers 16, check that remaining clearance between
center spacer 17 and bearing inner races 18 is 1 mm (0.03 in) total (see detail).
-on the bushing outer support, check the condition of the PR bead located where the
bushing and the support meet ; if necessary, renew it.
-spring washer 14 for scratches and galling and check its free height which should be
0 + 0.2 m 110+ 0.008.
3_0lmm(0.118_0fJ04.n). »
7 - INSTALLATION
- Preliminary steps to be performed if necessary (when the desired bellcrank fitting is not obtai¬
ned) or upon replacement of a spring washer.
- Calibration of a spring washer (under press) :
- measure its free thickness (dimension E),
- measure its thickness under a load of 700 daN (1573 Ib.wgt) (dimension E'),
- the difference between dimensions E and E' corresponds to the spring washer compres¬
sion under 700 daN (1573 Ib.wgt).
Check of bushing sliding motion in aircraft fitting :
-
- the bushing should move (by means of pin 12 and nut 15 «without bellcrank») when
the nut is tightened to a torque of about 1 m.daN (7.375 ft.lb),
- if no movement is detected, grind or replace the bushing. The bushing/bore assembly
can also be lapped so as to obtain a «category 4» interference fit, i.e., 6 ± 2 microns of interference on
the diameter. The surface shall be carefully finished.
Apply a light coat of Mastinox 6856H to the bushing outside diameter prior to fitting, then
remove the excess compound.
- Position the bellcrank in its clevis.
- Install the pin :
- insert pin 1 2 through the inside of the engine compartment with the flat area of the head
uppermost.
- Make sure that the bearing and the bushing support surfaces mate perfectly by tightening
(5 m.daN or 36.8 ft.lb) and slackening nut 15 several times (settling of components and seating of
sliding bushing), without installing the spring washer. During this operation, make sure that the sliding
bushing moves in the bore without deflection of the aircraft fitting flanges. After tightening, there
should be a hardening of the bellcrank rotary torque ; however, the bellcrank should still be maneuverable
by hand.
- Remove nut 15 and install (well greased) spring washer 13, then lockwasher 14, with the inner
tab towards the bearings. Grease the threads and the inner surface of the nut very lightly, then fit it and
torque it to 5 m.daN (36.8 ft.lb).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
From this position, tighten the nut as little as possible to reach the first safetying position. As
only three of the lower tabs on the washer are accessible, it may only be necessary to make 1/10
turn to reach the safetying position.
- After application of the 5 m.daN (36.8 ft.lb) tightening torque corresponding to an axial load
of 700 daN (1573 Ib.wgt) on the spring washer, the bellcrank must not drop under its own weight from
the horizontal position.
-When correctly fitted, the bellcrank should rotate with a certain resistance. For information
purposes only, the rotating force as measured at the rod attaching point is about 5.5 to 10 daN (12.4 to
22.5 Ib.wgt).
- When the desired bellcrank fitting is not obtained or upon replacement of a spring washer, proper
compression of the spring washer can be checked for (after final assembly) as follows :
- Upon final assembly :
- fit the spring washer and lockwasher (well greased),
- tighten the nut by hand until contacting all the components (ensure proper seating),
- measure dimension A (nut face/pin end),
- measure dimension B (fitting flange/bushing shoulder),
- tighten the nut to the specified torque,
- measure the two dimensions again (A' and B'),
-the difference between dimensions A and A' should normally correspond to the compres¬
sion (700 daN prestress) of the spring washer (at ± 5/100) increased by the value of the sliding bushing
depression, i.e.. A' - A = (E - E') + (B - B')
- Bend the lockwasher tab.
- Apply a bead of PR sealant around the sliding bushing shoulder.
Fitting flange:
Sliding bushing
8- FINAL STEPS
- Connect rod 5 to the bellcrank :

- insert pin 7 head outwards, positioning it on the flat area ;
- fit retaining screw 9 and torque it to 5 m.daN (36.8 ft.lb) ;
- if necessary, untighten a little to install lockwasher 10 of screw 9 ;
- fit lockwasher 10 to retaining screw 9 ;
- fit lock cup 8 to lockwasher 10 ;
- insert screw 6, fitted with lockwasher, in pin 7 ; screw home and lower tabs on lockwasher.
- Reinstall the pitch servo-control (see 04-2).
- Reinstall the engine (see 06-4).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=J>-^rQ
BREGUET AVIATION^fiF0^^--^
MIRAGE F
MAMMM n.
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF PITCH VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK
A Special tools
- 1st and 2nd line flight control tool kit.

B Standard tools
- Set of 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrenches.

- Set of 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) torque wrenches.
- Hydraulic power source.

D Spares
-1 pin 23310 AA 01 5020 LE

- 1 lockplate F270.052
- 1 lockwasher F270.051
- 1 lockwasher 23351 AC 080LE.
2- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01-0, 04-0).
- Remove engine or move it out of the way (see 06-4).
- Remove doors 12.04 - 31 .05 - 33.05 - 35.06 - 35.06L
4- REMOVAL
- Disconnect the bonding braids from bellcranks and rods.

- Unlock and remove the rod attaching pins (10 mm wrench and 13 mm A/F wrench), recover
teflon washers.
- Note position of rod ends with respect to rod (number of threads - reference dimension).
NOTE : To prevent the bellcrank being marked and the bearing housings being loosened, place the
bearing shims (M31157) on both surfaces of the rod ends at both sides of the bellcrank.
- Unsafety and loosen the nuts from the rod ends on both sides of the bellcrank (wrenches
M31120, M31 121, M31 129). HOLD THE ROD FAST.
- Unscrew the rods from the rod ends. Count the number of turns required.
- Remove the 6 bellcrank attaching screws (10 A/F wrench).
- Remove the bellcrank from the compartment, then remove the rods.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iu^^ïru. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£oF°_-^î> ....,,.., n.
5- INSTALLATION
- Install both rods in their compartments.

- Attach the relay to its support («input» rod end forward : located closest to rotary axis). Torque
the six bolts (10 mm wrench) to 0.7 m.daN (61.95 in.lb).
- Make sure that relay functioning and deflection are free of hard spots.
- Install both rods.
- On each rod end, install :
- one nut and lockwasher on the «output» rod end,
- one nut and lockplate on the «input» rod end.
NOTE : The locking pads must be on the rod side, and the bonding tab towards the outside.
- Couple the downstream rod to the «output» rod end.

Pin the relay (M S1390-10-830) and the bellcrank through door 35.06 (MS 1390-10-810).
-
- Screw the rod to the rod end and adjust the length so that the pin can be installed without
constraints on the bellcrank side. The rod is adjustable one turn at a time. The adjustment will be consi¬
dered acceptable if a 7.8 mm (0.297 in) pin can be mounted to the bellcrank. Make sure the adjustment
agrees with the adjustment recorded during removal.
- Engage the rod check nut. Install the rod end shims (M31157) on both surfaces of the
output rod end to prevent damage. Hold the rod to prevent it rotating, and torque the check nut
(see manual 04-0) (wrenches M31 120, M31 121, M31 129). Safety the check nut and hammer down the
locking tabs. Remove the shims.
- Check rod end movement.
Couple the rod to the bellcrank.
-
- Insert, without forcing, the pin equipped with its lockwasher (head upwards). Insert
the teflon washer on the nut side, tighten and safety the pin.
- When the rod has been adjusted, check that the pin can be easily inserted in both relay and
bellcrank, then remove the pins.
- Couple the upstream rod to the «input» rod end.
- Use the idling control to pressurize hydraulic system 1.
- Pin the first bellcrank through door 12.04 (MS 1390-10-810), and the ajustable démultiplier
relay (MS 1390-10-830).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=^jir9l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^SP3^-^-^ .,....,.,
n.
-Screw the upstream rod to the rod end to obtain the adjustment recorded during removal (number
of turns, benchwork), so that the pin can be installed on the trailing arm side without constraints.
- Engage the rod check nut. Install the rod end shims (M31157) on both surfaces of the input rod
end, to prevent damage. Hold the rod to prevent it rotating, and torque the check nut (see manual 04-0)
(wrenches M31120, M31121, M31129). Safety the check nut and hammer down the locking tabs.
Remove the shims.
- Check rod end movement.
- Couple the rod to the trailing arm.
- Insert the pin, head upwards, without forcing. Insert the teflon washer on the nut side.
Install the recessed washer - tighten the nut (10 mm A/F wrench), and cotter.
- When the rod has been adjusted, check that the pins can be easily inserted in both relay and
bellcrank, then remove the pins.
- Connect the bonding braids to all components.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Perform an operating test and check horizontal stabilator deflection (see 04-2). Check that there is
no contact with other components during movement.
- After checking for correct safetying and cottering of pins and rod ends, close access doors.
- Install engine.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-i>-%-U.
BREGUET AVIATION ^<<c- __ .
MIRAGE
..........
F
REMOVAL INSTALLATION OF PITCH TRIM ACTUATOR
A Standard tools

- Accessory kit for torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
B Special tools


D Spares
-2pins23310AA015015LE
-1 pin 2331 0AA015020LE
2- MATERIALS
- Grease Air 4222 or 42-10
3- GENERAL
APPLY THE SAFETY MEASURES SPECIFIC TO THE SYSTEM (see 01-0).
4- REMOVAL
A Preliminary steps prior to removal
- Remove doors 12.04 - 13.04i - 14.04L
NOTE : For easier access to door 14.04i, certain air conditioning lines should be removed.
- Supply electrical power.

- Supply pressure to hydraulic system 1 .
- Set the stabilators to 1°30 and trim so as to set the trim indicator bar approximately to neutral.
- Check that the first linkage bellcrank (door 12.04) can be pinned (pin MS 1390-10-810).
- Cut off hydraulic and electrical power supplies.
- Cut out the pitch trim circuit breaker.
B Removal of actuator
Disconnect :
-
- electrical connector 89C,
- the bonding braid (7 A/F wrench).
- Unsafety and remove the nut from the pin on bellcrank side (8 A/F and 10 A/F wrenches) and
recover the washer.
- Unsafety and remove the nut from the pin on fixed point side (10 A/F wrench) ; recover the
recessed washer and nutation-limiting flange.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
-Hold thé actuator, remove the pins, recover the deflection limit washer on fixed point
side.
-Extract the actuator rearwards, keeping it straight so as not to damage the bearing
flanges. Turn it through 90° to position the electric motor on the aircraft centerline side and re¬
move it.
NOTES : (1) During the actuator clevis removal (fixed point attachment end fitting), do not
bring the bearing inner race in contact with the flanges so as to avoid damaging the
flanges.
(2) If the trim actuator is secured in a position other than that required for the above
preparation, it should be removed with the hydraulic system under pressure in order
to counteract the stress applied to the pin and enable removal.
(Make the necessary provisions so that the control stick does not move during the
operation and upon withdrawal of the actuator).
WARNING:
THIS IS AN EXCEPTIONAL OPERATION THAT MUST BE CARRIED OUT WITH ALL
THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS.
5 - INSTALLATION
A - Preliminary steps prior to installation
- Lightly coat the pins with grease before in¬
stalling them.
- Electrically operate the actuator to bring it
to the position corresponding to sleeve set at
16.5 ± 0.2 mm (0.650 ± 0.008 in) (see dia¬
16.5 mm ± 0.2
gram) (i.e., midxtravel dimension of actuator de¬ ^
flection increased by 2 mm (0.08 in) in the (0.650 in ± 0.008)

extension direction). e
For actuator replacement :

- make sure that the adjustable end fitting is V"H?
at its theoretical dimension : 51.3 ± 0.2 mm
(2.020 ± 0.008 in) (see diagram) (this dimen¬
sion changes with respect to the automatic trim e
-« ^
neutral position, within ± 2 mm (0.08 in)). Do 51.3 mm ±0.2
not safety the end fitting. (2.020 in ± 0.008)
B - Installation of actuator
-Through door 13.04i, position the trim actuator with electric motor turned towards the
aircraft centerline, introduce it and turn by 90° so that the electric motor is directed down¬
wards.
-Install the actuator on its attachment fittings, starting with the fixed point.
NOTE: Correctly position the spherical bearing on the bellcrank.
-Fit the two attaching pins with their heads facing the outside of the aircraft (so that the
nuts can be safetied on U/C well side).
-For the pin on fixed point side: fit the deflection limit washer, flange, washer and
nut; do not safety.
-For the pin on bellcrank side: fit the washer and nut; do not safety.
-Connnect the electrical connector.
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Supply electrical power.
-Supply hydraulic power.
-Cut in the trim circuit breaker.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ J> * IV\ 1 1\ AA VJ t. I
breguet av,ation ^- ^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
- Make sure that the automatic trim neutral position corresponds to the LH stabilator set¬
ting of - 1°30' ± 5' (i.e., the stabilator setting angle does not change upon changeover from
low Arthur to high Arthur). If this value is not obtained, adjust the length of the actuator end
fitting (adjustment by 1/2 turns) after checking the AFU neutral position (AFU unstressed, i.e.,
theoretical center-to-center distance :
666 mm (26.220 + 004 in).

+ 0+0
-Check that the first linkage bellcrank (door 12.04) can be freely pinned (pin MS
1390-10-810).
-Check that the trim indicator bar is approximately in neutral position.
-After adjustment, bring lockwasher and nut together.
-Check for correct deflection of control surfaces :
-nose-down: > 2°30
-nose-up: 3s 13°30
When checking deflection of control surfaces, make sure that the extended length of
pitch AFU rod remains unchanged when the trim actuator is in its extreme positions.
-Remove the actuator so as to torque the locknut to 1.5 to 2 m.daN (11.06 to
14.75 ft.lb) and to safety it on bench. ;
-Reinstall the actuator (same operation as for installation).
-Fit locking pins on connecting pins.
-Install the bonding braid.
-Carry out trim functional tests.
-Check deflections and deflection speed.
-Carry out auto-trim test (see worksheet FUNCTIONAL AND ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF
PITCH CHANNEL 04-2).
- During deflection, make sure that there is no contact with other conponents in the com¬
partment.
-Check the components for correct installation and make sure that all parts are correctly
safetied.
-Reinstall access doors.
-Disconnect the power supplies.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" -* /Vlll\/-\VJ'L.
BREGUET AVIATION ZZ<Â<->-
^ ^?-=^
^-*^> Restricted ....,.,
MANUAL nA
04
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF PITCH AFU

(figure 1 3)
A - Special tools
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit: 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
-Torque wrench accessory kit: 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) and 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to
350 ft.lb).

D - Spares
-1 lockplate (clevis-sleeve locking),
- 6 bearing rings 06S0231 001 ,
-2 bearing rings 06S0281001 .
2 - MATERIALS

-Grease MIL-G-4343.
3 - DISASSEMBLY
-Unscrew and remove both nuts 34. Recover washers 33 and flange 32 and remove pins
30 and 31.
The AFU being neither compressed nor released, measure the center -to-center distance
between attaching clevises with accuracy - theoretical dimension:
666 + 1mm (26.220+ 0039in).
+ 0 -0
- Unlock nuts 1 5, 16 and 17.
position of body 1 1 with respect to cylinder 1 and mark these two
- Determine relative
parts (mark covering both parts) (dimension C).
-Unscrew nut 15 (wrench MHC 101-24) while holding body 11 (42 mm A/F wrench).
-Unscrew body 1 1 and remove it from cylinder 1 .
-On body 1 1 , remove eight screws 23 and washers 24 and remove cover 22.
-Determine relative position of adjusting guide 10 with respect to cylinder 1 and mark
these two parts (mark covering both parts) (dimension B).
-Grip AFU in vice support MFG 101-21 and unscrew nut 17 (wrench MHC 101-23).
-Straighten lockplate 38 and unscrew clevis 13 (wrench D21) while holding sleeve 9
(wrench MHC 101-25). Remove clevis and lockplate.
-Unscrew and remove adjusting guide 10 (pin wrench MHJ 101-22).
-Remove AFU from vice support and remove moving assembly and end spring 7 from
cylinder 1.
NOTE: It is imperative that the operator should note the respective positions of end spring 6
and 7.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «JV-^Ti llINAAV^L.
_^&^
BREGUET AVIATION
^, Z£*£^>
-»^> ^ . ^
Restricted . ....,,,.,
MANUAL -,
04
-Measure dimension D with accuracy and place moving assembly in spring removal and
installation tool MGC 1 01 -21 .
-Tighten tool actuating screw until stop 3 separates from sleeve 9.
-Hold rod 2 by means of holding wrench MHG 101-21 and unscrew sleeve 9 (wrench
MHC 101 -25). Then, untighten tool actuating screw until springs 8 are fully released.
-Remove moving assembly from tool and successively remove stop 3, first spring 8, stop
4, second spring 8 and stop 5 from the rod.
-Clean all removed parts (except body 11) by dipping and brushing them in a chlorinated
solvent or white spirit bath.
-Body 11 should be cleaned with a brush soaked with chlorinated solvent, being careful
not to apply cleaning solution on potentiometers and associated electric wiring.
NOTE: While performing cleaning, make sure that the evacuation hole provided on the cylin¬
der is clear.
rod 2 and sleeve 9.
-If necessary, remove minor defects likely to be noticed on rod and sleeve chromium-
plated surfaces, using a crocus cloth. Carefully clean both parts upon completion of above op¬
eration.
-On body 11, check potentiometers 12 for security of attachment, electrical connector
and cable for condition, return springs for correct hooking and rollers fitted to levers 20 for
free rotation (no binding point).
-On guide 10 and stops 3, 4 and 5, blend out the edges of any marks caused by the
springs if the depth of the indentations does not exceed 0.3 mm (0.12 in), otherwise, replace
the guide and stops.
-Check characteristics of springs 6, 7 and 8:
-free length comprised between 59,6 and 62,2 mm (2.324 and 2.425 in) for
spring 6
-free length comprised between 54,6 and 57mm (2.129 and 2.223 in) for spring 7
-free length comprised between 149 and 154 mm (5.811 and 6.006 in) for
springs 8
-Check the bearing faces of nut 17 and cylinder 1 and of nut 15, body 11, nut 16 and
clevis 14 which should show no evidence of distortion, burrs or dents: otherwise, replace the
nuts and attenuate the defects on the cylinder, body or clevis bearing face without modifying
the perpendicularity of the face in relation to the axis of the part.
-Using a cloth smeared with a slight amount of grease MIL.G.4343.B, lubricate the
grooves. EXCESS GREASE IS DETRIMENTAL TO AFU OPERATION.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' TV-fl_« f V\ll\/-\\JrL. I
BREGUET AVIATION^&i _s?-=^ . , « a m a nA
^^ Restricted K
MANUAL 04
5 - ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Upon assembly, lightly lubricate the threads of guide 10, cylinder 1, body 11 and
rod 2.
-Successively install stop 5, first spring 8, stop 4, second spring 8 and stop 3 on rod 2.
- Place moving assembly in spring removal and installation tool MGC 1 01 -21 .
-Tighten tool actuating screw until dimension D is obtained.
-Screw sleeve 9 by a few threads on rod 2 and, holding rod 2 by means of holding
wrench MHG 101-21, screw sleeve 9 (wrench MHC 101-25) until its inner face comes just
into contact with stop 3.
-Install spring 7 on moving assembly, insert the whole assembly into cylinder 1 and grip
the latter in vice support MFG 101 -21 .
-Install spring 6 and screw adjusting guide 10 (wrench MHJ 101-22) until dimension B
measured at disassembly is obtained (marks coinciding).
-Screw nut 17 on adjusting guide and tighten slightly with adjusting guide secured
against rotation (wrench MHJ 101-22).
-Fit a new lockplate 38 at rod end. Screw and slightly tighten clevis 13.
NOTE: Lockplate 38 will be bent after checking of AFU loads and tightening of clevis 13 to
required torque.
- RemoveAFU from vice support.

-Screw nut 15 onto cylinder threaded end. Then, screw the assembly consisting of body
11 and clevis 14 until dimension C is approximately obtained, final adjustment being carried
out during AFU tests (AFU zero load setting check).
-Moderately tighten nut 15.
NOTE: Cover 22 should be installed only after completion of AFU tests.
6 - TESTS
Refer to sheet dealing with AFU adjustment and calibration.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L--VWt'U
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF STABILATOR HINGES
4 Grease gun.
2- MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4217.
- Remove doors E1-35 (L/H and R/H).
4- INSPECTION
- Check each stabilator for :

- condition and security of attachment of slotted blanking cover.
- condition, security of attachment and cleanliness (surrounding area) of inner bearing
seal.
5 - CLEANING -SERVICING (See 04-1 , figure 18)
- Perform following operations on each stabilator.
A Cleaning
- Wipe outer bearing grease-nipple, using a dry rag.

- Perform dry cleaning of :
- inner bearing periphery
- outer bearing box (remove excess grease).
IMPORTANT : Never use trichloréthylène for that operation.
B Servicing
- Grease outer bearing (remove excess grease).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstal access doors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i.-.
BREGUET AVIATION ^dU~-
t x'' ç
J'-<Z-^
\L MIRAGE F
CALIBRATION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF PITCH A.F.U.

(Figure 13)
1 - SCOPE
- To perform A.F.U. calibration check in the case where artificial feel loads are found to be put of
tolerance in aircraft.
-To perform A.F.U. adjustment after complete disassembly performed for servicing and
lubrication.
A Special tools
-Tool kit F1-CVD
B - Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit . 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)
- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
3 - A.F.U. ADJUSTMENT
A Installation of A.F.U. on test stand

- Mechanical test stand MK M043 should be previously fitted with all adaptors provided for A.F.U.
installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook).
- Using the attaching pins belonging to test stand .
-Pin clevis 1 3 to balance beam.
-Pin clevis 14 to moving poppet.
set to zero). The A.F.U. is then set to neutral (no load applied).
NOTE 1 : The ratio available with balance scales hooked to beam ends is 10 : 1 and the correspondence
between the weight placed on one scale and the load applied to the A.F.U. rod is as follows .
Weight (kg) = 1.02 x load (daN) x 0.1
NOTE 2 : In order to prevent measurements from being affected by A.F.U. internal frictions, the
balance beam should always be set in horizontal position' (pointer set to zero) in the direction
causing the scale on which weights are placed (or to be placed during next test) to move
upwards.
CAUTION :
ANGULAR MOVEMENTS.
AB
04-77 D t . 4 . 2-503
Restricted
.
BREGUET AVIATION
ZU^'t^l
^Zp0 ^-C^
MIRAGE
, . , v
F
B Adjustment of end spring initial setting

- With balance beam unpinned in horizontal position (no weight on scales) and using a depth
gauge, measure dimension A comprised between depth gauge bearing face and external face of adjusting
guide 10. Then, pin the balance beam.
NOTE : This dimension A should be measured each time the adjusting guide is being acted upon.
- Place on the scale located on «rod retraction» side a weight likely to exert a compressive force of
30 daN (67.4 Ib.wgt) on the A.F.U. rod.Actuate themoving poppet control wheel to equalize the forces
and unpin the beam. With the beam in horizontal position (pointer set to zero), measure new dimension
between depth gauge bearing face and adjusting guide (dimension D).
- Rod displacement (A.F.U. travel) is equal to the difference between dimensions A and B (B A).
It should be equal to 7.5 ± 1 mm (0.295 ± 0.039 in).
- Should the value obtained be found out of tolerance, remove the A.F.U. and untighten nut 17
while holding adjusting guide 10 by means of wrench MHJ 101-22. Screw the adjusting guide to reduce
the travel and unscrew it to increase the travel. Then, slightly tighten nut 17 and repeat all tests.
C End spring stiffness check
- Pin the balance beam and place on the same scale a weight likely to exert a force of 48 daN
(107.9 Ib.wgt). Rotate the moving poppet control wheel to equalize forces and unpin the balance beam.
With balance beam set in horizontal position (pointer set to zero), measure new dimension C between
depth gauge bearing face and adjusting guide.
-The «C - A» travel should be equal to 15 ± 1,5 mm (0.590 ± 0.059 in). Should the value
obtained be slightly different from applicable tolerances, try to obtain an adjustment satisfactory for all
tests by acting on adjusting guide 10. Otherwise, replace spring 7.
D Adjustment of center spring initial setting
- With balance beam pinned, place on the same scale a weight likely to exert a force of 60 daN
(134 Ib.wgt) on the A.F.U. rod. Actuate the moving poppet control wheel to equalize forces and upin
the beam. With the beam in horizontal position, measure new dimension D.
The «D A» travel should be equal to 29,5 ±11,5 mm (1.161 ± 0.452 in) (comprised between 18
and 41 mm (0.708 and 1 .614 in)).
- Should the value obtained be found out of tolerance, remove the A.F.U. from test stand, remove
clevis 13 (wrench D21 ) and, securing rod 2 against rotation by means of holding wrench MHG 101-21 ,
unscrew sleeve 9 (wrench MHG 101-25) to increase the travel and screw it to reduce the travel. Reinstall
and tighten clevis 13.
- Reinstall the A.F.U. on test stand and mandatorily perform all adjustments described in
paragraph 3.B. so as to obtain correct calibration of end springs, as the action of such springs is
combined with that of center springs.
- Then, check center spring initial setting as described at the beginning of present paragraph.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
fl^>-^-n
^^p=_^^<C>
MIRAGE
... _.
F
E Center spring stiffness check
- Pin the balance beam and place on the same scale a weight likely to exert a force of 70 daN
(157.3 Ib.wgt) on the A.F.U. rod. Actuate the moving poppet control wheel to equalize forces and
unpin the beam. With the beam in horizontal position, measure new dimension E.
- The «E-A» travel should be equal to 56 ± 13 mm (2.204 ± 0.51 1 in). Should the value obtained
be slightly different from applicable tolerances, try to obtain an adjustment satisfactory for all tests by
acting on adjusting guide and sleeve. Otherwise, replace center springs.
F A.F.U. extension check
The procedure is the same as that followed is previous paragraphs, except as regards the weights
which are to be placed on the other scale (causing A.F.U. rod extension).
- Adjustment of end spring initial setting (See paragraph 3.B.) : To a load of 26 daN (58.4 Ib.wgt)
should correspond a travel of 7 ± 1 mm (0.275 ± 0.039 in). Replace spring 6 in the case where an
adjustment satisfactory for all tests (compression and extension) cannot be obtained.
- End spring stiffness check (See paragraph 3.C.) : To a load of 50 daN (112.4 Ib.wgt) should
correspond a travel of 19 ± 2 mm (0.748 ± 0.078 in). Replace spring 6 if the value obtained is found to
be out of tolerance.
- Center spring stiffness check (See paragraph 3.E.) : To a load of 60 daN (134.8 Ib.wgt) should
correspond a travel of 34 ± 1 2 mm (1 .338 ± 0.472 in).
G Internal friction check
With balance beam set in horizontal position (pointer set to zero) and with no weight placed on
-
scales, slightly act on one side of balance beam to obtain small rod displacement. Then, allow the
A.F.U. to resume its zero load setting configuration. Measure dimension between depth gauge bearing
face and adjusting guide.
- Slightly act on the other side of balance beam to obtain small rod displacement in the other
direction. Measure new dimension.
- The difference between above two dimensions, which represents A.F.U. internal frictions, should
be lower than 0.4 mm (0.015 in).
4- A.F.U. CALIBRATION CHECK
- Following adjustment, tighten nuts to torque values specif ied in paragraph 6. A.

- Install the A.F.U. on test stand and successively check that following values are obtained :
Compressive forces (rod retraction)
30 daN (67.4 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 7,5 ± 1 mm (0.295 ± 0.039 in)
48 daN (107.9 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 15 ± 1,5 mm (0.590 ± 0.059 in)

60 daN (134.8 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 29,5 ± 1 1 ,5 mm (1 .161 ± 0.452 in)
70 daN (1 57.3 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 56 ± 13 mm (2.204 ± 0.51 1 in).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^C
JLJ^^T^. MIRAGE F
Tensile forces (rod extension)
26 daN (58.4 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 7 ± 1 mm (0.275 ± 0.039 in)

50 daN (1 12.4 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 19 ± 2 mm (0.748 ± 0.0078 in)
60 daN (134.8 Ib.wgt) - Travel to be obtained : 34 + 12 mm (1.338 + 0.472 in)
- Also check that internal frictions in neutral setting (zero load applied) (proceeding in accordance
with procedure described in paragraph 3.G.) do not cause an inertness range to be noticed on either side
of neutral setting, the value of which is higher than 0.4 mm (0.015 in).
- Finally, check that the travel of the A.F.U. is equal to or more than :
- 45 mm (1 .771 in) under tension
- 68 mm (2.677 in) under compression.
5- POTENTIOMETER CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Connect the A.F.U. to test stand test box and supply the latter with 115 V/400 Hz three-phase AC
power. Check that potentiometer power supply voltages are connect (+ 15 V and 15 V) (perform
voltage measurement by means of a digital voltmeter, using the «external check» control).
NOTE : Should power supply voltages (+ 15 V and 15 V) be not perfectly balanced, add both
values and divide by two (take the value obtained as zero indication).
A Potentiometer setting
- With no weight placed on scale and with balance beam unpinned and set to neutral position, apply
a tensile and then compressive force to the A.F.U. (proceeding as described in paragraph 3.G.). In both
cases, allow the A.FU. to resume its zero load position and measure potentiometer output voltages by
depressing pushbuttons C2 and then C3. The four values read should be comprised between 60 mV
and + 60 mV about zero indication taken as a reference).
- Should out-of-tolerance values be found for one potentiometer, slightly untighten the screws
attaching the four angles 25 and rotate potentiometer body to obtain values comprised within tole¬
rances. Tighten angle attaching screws and check that values have remained the same.
- Should similar out-of-tolerance values be found for both potentiometers, screw or unscrew
body 11 with respect to cylinder 1 and torque nut 15 to torque value specified in paragraph 6.B.
B Voltage variation check
Applying a tensile force to the A.F.U. should cause potentiometer output voltage to increase.
Otherwise, check electric wiring.
C Continuity check
With balance beam pinned, actuate the moving poppet control wheel to vary the output voltages
and check that the latter vary without sparking nor interruption. Otherwise, replace defective poten¬
tiometer.
D Output voltage check
With balance beam pinned, actuate the moving poppet control wheel to obtain a travel of 1 1 mm
(0.433 in) successively in both directions.
Output voltages should be as follows :
- rod extension : + 2.6 ± 0.2 V
- rod retraction : - 2.6 ± 0.2 V.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ^XW-ft /V\ 1\ /AV-7 L. l
1
BREGUET AVIATION^&jg<^> «jiamiiai n*

"<5^ Restricted MANUAL 04
E - Insulation check
Perform an insulation check with 45 V applied accross all connector terminals and AFU
ground. The insulation resistance should be equal to or higher than 20 megohms for a relative
humidity equal to or lower than 85%. In the case where any defect is noticed, check electric
wiring and replace defective component.
6 - FINAL STEPS
Remove AFU from test stand and grip it in vice support MFG 101 -21 .
A - After AFU adjustment
j -Torque nut 17 to 3.5 m.daN (25.8 ft.lb) (wrench MHC 101 -23) while holding adjusting
1 guide (wrench MHJ 101-22).
| -Torque clevis 13 to 1.5 m.daN (11 ft.lb) (wrenches D21 and MHC 101-25) and bend
lockplate 38.
B - After potentiometer check
I Hold body 11 (42 mm A/F wrench) and torque nut 15 to 3 m.daN (22 ft.lb) (wrench
MHC 101-24).
C - Setting to length
-Check that AFU center -to -center dimension is equal to that measured before disassem¬
bly. If required, readjust by moving clevis 14 with respect to body 11 (wrench MHC 101-24
and 42 mm A/F wrench).
j -After adjustment, torque nut 1 6 to 3 m.daN (22 ft.lb).
D - Final steps
-Install and attach cover 22 by means of eight screws 23, each of these screws being fit¬
ted with a new washer 24.
-Lock nuts 15, 16 and 17.
-Clean and dry pins 30 and 31 , flange 32, washers 33 and nuts 34.
-Slightly lubricate both pins and fit clevis 13 with pin 31, washer 33 and nut 34, and
clevis 14 with pin 30, flange 32, washer 33 and nut 34. Lockwire a new locking pin 35 to
each attaching pin.
Check the whole AFU for:

-general condition,
-condition of protections, electrical connector and cable,
AB
06 - 87 Restricted 2 - 507
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^-±TU MIRAGE F
CAPACITY CHECK OF ACCUMULATOR BUILT

INTO ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE OF
PITCH RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS
1 - SCOPE
To check the capacity of the accumulator built into the electrically-operated selector valve.
- 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply
PRELIMINARY STEPS
Connect the electrical power supply.

-
Connect a hydraulic bench to each hydraulic power supply (or one only in the case of a bench
-
with two separate systems).
- Energize the aircraft electrical system.
- Check that the electric pump control switch is set to «OFF».
- Check that the pitch damper switch is set to «OFF» and that «ELEV-PITCH» warning lights are
on.
-Pressurize the hydraulic systems.
- Check that «HYD.1 » and «HYD.2» lights are out on the failure warning panel.
- Set the pitch damper switch to «PITCH». The «ELEV-PITCH» warning lights go out (bellcrank
released).
4- PROCEDURE
I A Checking of accumulator capacity

- Cut feed to system 1 and check pressure drop : «HYD. 1 » warning light comes on and «HYD. 2»
warning light remains out.
-Maneuver the control stick (nose up or down), switching over to electrical mode - barrel 2 :
«ELEV» light comes on.
- Set the pitch damper switch to «OFF» ; «PITCH» light comes on (bellcrank engaged).
-Set the pitch damper switch to «PITCH» ; check that «ELEV» light remains on and that
«PITCH» light goes and remains out after a few SLOW actuations of the control stick.
- Perform these two operations several times while counting pitch damper switch operations until
«PITCH» light remains on whatever the position of the switch.
- The number of actuations should be at least 3.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ>"ur11 MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^jS_ _ _
- Otherwise :
-make sure that the hydraulic systems are correctly bled by slowly maneuvering the pitch
control several times and by monitoring the condition of the hydraulic fluid via the bleed indicator
on the bench,
- bleed the pitch releasable bellcranks (see 04-2). Repeat the previous tests.
- If the number of maneuvers is less than the prescribed number :
-charge the accumulator built into the electrically-operated selector valve of the pitch
releasable bellcranks (see 04-2).
- If after accumulator charging the number of maneuvers is still less than the prescribed number,
replace the electrically-operated selector valve and perform the following operations :
-charging of the accumulator built into the electrically-operated selector valve (see 04-2),
- purging of hydraulic system 1 (see 07-1 ),
- bleeding of pitch releasable bellcranks (see 04-2).
- Make sure that the number of maneuvers is at least 3.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Check that the pitch damper switch is set to «PITCH».

- Shut off hydraulic system 2.
- Disconnect the hydraulic pressure supplies.
- Switch off and disconnect the electrical power supply.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /U^^TU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^S^^tgr*^ . ....,.. n/l
BLEEDING OF STABILATOR RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS

(figure 16)
1- SCOPE
Bleeding procedure applicable to the stabilator releasable bellcranks.
This operation should be performed in the following cases :

- after any operation performed on the bellcrank hydraulic supply system ;
-after installation of stabilator servo-controls, controlled valves, releasable bellcranks and bell¬
crank electrically-operated selector valve ;
-when the number of servo resettings (system 1 failure) is lower than 3, while the accumulator
built into the bellcrank electrically-operated selector valve is correctly charged.
- 115-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply

3- MATERIALS
- Drain pan
- Rags
- Connect electrical and hydraulic power supplies (system 1).

- Remove doors 36.02, 36.03-1, 36.10 and 36.09-1.
NOTE : The pitch trim should be set to full nose-up position to remove doors 36.03-1 and 36.09-1.
WARNING :
- Remove the video receiver through door 36.03-1 (see 14-6).
5- PROCEDURE
-IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE RH BELLCRANK BE BLED FIRST.

I- Set pitch damper switch 55C to «off».
- Apply pressure to hydraulic system 1 ; bleeding will be performed with aircraft reservoir full.
- Set the pitch trim to full nose-down position.
- Place rags and a small drain pan in the compartment located underneath the bellcrank.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
DETAIL A
Amendement A
Amendment A
FIGURE 16 - PURGE DES GUIGNOLS DEBRAYABLES D'EMPENNAGES

BLEEDING OF STABILATOR RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^^c-
/L^^rU
^^
MIRAGE F
A Bleeding of unlocking control chamber
- Unlock and untighten bleed screw 2 (center screw) until fluid starts flowing out. Retighten the
bleed screw as soon as the fluid is free from air bubbles. Tighten the bleed screw MODERATELY.
NOTE : Apply a torque of 0.25 m.daN (22.12 in.lb) to 5 mm dia bleed screws and a torque of
0.40 m.daN (35.4 in.lb) to 6 mm dia bleed screws.
B Bleeding of stop control chambers
- Set the pitch damper switch to «PITCH».

- Unlock and untighten bleed screw 1 (on side opposite to pickoffs) until fluid starts flowing out.
Retighten the bleed screw as soon as the fluid is free from air bubbles.
- Set the pitch trim to full nose-up position.
- Unlock and untighten bleed screw 3 (on pickoff side) until fluid starts flowing out. Retighten
the bleed screw as soon as the fluid is free from air bubbles. Tighten the bleed screw MODERATELY.
C Perform the same operations for bleeding the LH releasable bellcrank.
NOTE : Each bleed screw is fitted with a dual seal consisting of a rubber part 4 and a metallic part 5.
Bleeding is performed by untightening each bleed screw by 1/2 turn MAXIMUM.
After repair, some components are fitted with a screw and seal of larger dimensions.
6- CHECK
Check for absence of hydraulic fluid seepage.
CAUTION :
ANY SEEPAGE OF HYDRAULIC FLUID MANDATORILY ENTAILS REPLACEMENT OF
THE SEAL.
Excessive tightening of the bleed plug causes damage to the thread of the releasable bellcrank
body.
Check the capacity of the accumulator which is built into the electrically-operated selector valve
of the pitch releasable bellcrank (see 04-2).
7- FINAL STEPS
- Lock the bleed screws.

- Reinstall the video receiver (see 14-6).
AD
02-82 Restricted 2-51 1
BREGUET AVIATION -^S^3
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF DASH-POT ACCUMULATOR FLUID LEVEL
(Figure 17)
1 - SCOPE
To check dash-pot accumulator fluid level.
A Standard tools
- Rule
- Remove door 1 2-04.

- Remove dash-pot protective cover (3 attaching screws).
4- PROCEDURE
- Check that protuding dimension of accumulator piston rod is equal to or higher than 20 mm
(0.787 in).
-Should rod protuding dimension be lower than above value, remove dash-pot and send it to
workshop.
5- FINAL STEPS
Reinstall the following :
- Dash-pot protective cover (3 attaching screws).

- Access door.
20mm
FIG URE 17 - CHECK OF DASH-POT ACCUMULATOR FLUID LEVEL

AB
BREGUET AVIATION^<5E_
ti^J>^r\L
_ ^
MIRAGE F
PITCH CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL AND ADJUSTMENT CHECK

(Figure 18)
1 - SCOPE
To check operation of pitch channel in mechanical control mode.
2- GENERAL
A Special tools
-Tool kitF1-CVB


- Ground telephone

- remove template attach fitting blanking plugs
- install templates
- connect ground telephone (see 11-3).

- electrical power supply
- hydraulic power supply for systems 1 and 2.
5- FUNCTIONAL CHECK
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 18 - CONTROLE DU DEBATTEMENT DES GOUVERNES

CONTROL SURFACE DEFLECTION CHECK
AB
BREGUET AVI ATION .^^s>
MIRAGE F
, __, . ,
CHECKS j
OPERATIONS REMARKS
A Preliminary steps Warninq liqhts

«ELEV» "1
(1 ) Energize electrical systems «ROLL» Y on
«PITCH» J
(2) Apply pressure to system 1
(3) Set Arthur selector switch to

«LOW» ratio Failure warning panel
«HYD. 1» out
«HYD. 2» "I
«EMG. HYD» J on

set to «servos»
System 2 : 0
B Functional check of control

Set trim actuator to neutral stabi¬ Trim indicator : bar shifted Stabilators set to ne Jtral (0°) Move the control stick slowly and continuously, while making sure that the
lator setting downwards Maximum deviation between control moves without any binding point and that the control stick returns
stabilators : ± (5') | to neutral without chattering. If not, determine the cause.
I
Move control stick over its whole i

i
travel. I
C Functional tests
I
( 1 ) Check of trim system /
(a) Set trim actuator to full nose-down Trim indicator : bar moving > 2°30' nose-down Balance these two extreme positions by making small movements of the stick
I
so that the AFU returns to neutral.
(b) Set trim actuator to full nose-up Trim indicator : bar moving > 13°30' nosfup
(c) Set trim actuator from full nose- Time required for total deflection :
down to full nose-up and inversely 4.5 to 8 seconds :
(2) Test of automatic trim system
(a) Set stabilators to (- 1°30'± 5') Trim indicator : bar set approxi¬ (-1°30'±5') - Pin the first linkage bellcrank (rigging pin MS 1390-10-810) through
nose-up using trim control switch mately to neutral door 12.04.
- Check that the Amedee bellcrank can be pinned (rigging pin
MS 1390-10-830) through door 33.05.
DO NOT LEAVE THE RIGGING PIN INSTALLED.
- Unpin the first bellcrank through door 12.04.
(b) Set Arthur selector switch to (-1°30'±5') - Check that the Amedee bellcrank STILL CAN BE PINNED.
«HIGH» ratio
(c) Move control stick over its whole - Check for increased control stick stiffness in all movements from nose-down
travel to nose-up.
AC
05-81 Restricted 2-515 2-51
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
J i 1
CHECKS
OPERATIONS ; REMARKS
(d) Set Arthur selector switch to (-1°30i±5') Control stick should drift slightly. Shifting Arthur device to «LOW» ratio does
«LOW» Trim indicator : bar set ,
not affect stabilator positioning. Control stick stiffness disappears.

approximately to neutral (- 1° 30')
Set stabilators to (- 1° 30')
(3) Mechanical check of deflection
(a) Move control stick up to forward (+5°± 20') Should deflection value be found out of tolerance, determine the cause. If
stop required, refer to pitch channel adjustment sheet.
(b) Move control stick up to aft stop (-18° S 20')
(c) Drop pressure in system 1 Maximum deviatioh between

stabilators : (10')
D Functional tests with pressure Failure warning panel
applied to system 2 Hyd. 1 on
Hyd. 2 out
Emg. Hyd. on
Hydraulic pressure selector switch )
set to «Servos» I
Hydraulic pressure indicator

System 1 : 0 Actuate stabilators over their whole travel and check that loads remain the
System 2 : 210 bar (3045 psi) same (operation of dual supply valve).
E- Functional test with PRESSURE Failure warning panel

APPLIED TO SYSTEMS 1 AND 2 Hyd, 1 out
Hyd. 2 out
Emg. Hyd. on Actuate stabilators over their whole travel and check that loads remain the
j
same.
F Functional tests with emergency Failure warning panel j
system - Set electric pump switch to

«ON» ï
Hyd. 1 I
Hyd. 2 J" on I
Emg. Hyd. out I
Hydraulic pressure selector set

to «Servos»
Hydraulic pressure indicator
System 1 :> 136 bar (1972 psi) Actuate stabilators over their whole travel and check that loads remain the
System 2 : 0 same.
This operation is to be carried out during CHECK OF ELECTRIC PUMP
PRESSURE SWITCH CALIBRATION (see 07-1).
j, 1
FINAL STEPS
- Remove the following :
- stabilator deflection templates

- rigging pins.
- Perform electrical tests of pitch channel servo system (see 13-1 ).
AC
04-80 Restricted 2-516 2-511
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L 77^-^1 A/lIKAvjt I
BREGUET Ay\AVON^cZ^-'^^>
^^^^C^> Restricted MANUAL 04
DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF PITCH CHANNEL
(Figure 14)
1 SCOPE
To check operation of pitch channel in mechanical control mode.
2 - GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY STEPS APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01 -0).
A Special tools
-Tool kit F1CVB.

-Tool kit F1ELA.
- Flight control rigging device.
B Standard tools
- Ground telephone.
C - Ground support equipment.

- Pressure generator.
PRELIMINARY STEPS

- remove template attach fitting blanking plugs.
- install templates.
- install quadrant assembly on pedestal.
- pin the first roll bellcrank (rigging pin 1390-20-810) (Door 12-08).
- Connect ground telephone (see 1 1 -3).
- Connect following power supplies .

- electrical power supply,
- hydraulic power supply for systems 1 and 2.
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
A Preliminary steps Warning lights

mm
«ELEV»
(1 ) Energize electrical systems «ROLL» on
Turn «pitch» switch «OFF» «PITCH» 1
(2) Apply pressure to system 1
(3) Set Arthur selector switch to

«LOW» ratio Failure warning panel
«HYD. 1» out
«HYD. 2» "I
«EMG.HYD»J- on
set to «servos»
System 2 : 0
B Functional check of control

to 0°
Set control stick Trim indicator bar shifted Stabilators set to neiitral (0°) Move the control stick slowly and continuously, while making sure that the
downwards Maximum deviation between control moves without any binding point and that the control stick returns
Move control stick over its whole stabilators : ± (5') to neutral without chattering. If not, determine the cause.
travel
C Functional tests with system under

pressure
(1) Check of trim system
(a) Set trim actuator to full nose-down Trim indicator : bar moving > 2° 30' nose-down Balance these two extreme positions by making small movements of the stick
so that the AFU returns to neutral.
(b) Set trim actuator to full nose-up Trim indicator : bar moving >13°30'nosd-up
(c) Set trim actuator from full nose- Time required for total deflection
down to full nose-up and inversely 4.5 to 8 seconds
(2) Test of automatic trim system
(a) Set stabilators to (- 1°30' ± 5') Trim indicator : bar set approxi¬ (- 1°30' ± 5')| Pin the first linkage bellcrank (rigging pin MS 1390-10-810) through
nose-up using trim control switch mately to neutral door 12-04.
Check that the Amedee bellcrank can be pinned (rigging pin
MS 1390-10-830) through door 33.05.
DO NOT LEAVE THE RIGGING PIN INSTALLED.
Unpin the first bellcrank through door 12.04.
(b) Set Arthur selector switch to (- 1°30'± 5') Check that the Amedee bellcrank STILL CAN BE PINNED.
«HIGH» ratio
(c) Move control stick over its whole Check for increased control stick stiffness in all movements from nose-down
travel to nose-up. Check the actuator extension.
AC
Restricted 2-518 2-518
01-86
AVIONS MARCH DASSAULT
MEGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
(d) Switch to «LOW» Arthur <-10°30'±5')

Control stick should slightly drift. Switching-over to «LOW»
Set stabilators to 0° using trim Trim indicator : bar slightly shifted Arthur does not affect the position of stabilators : control stick stiffness
control switch downwards disappears.
(3) Mechanical check of deflection
(a) Remove control stick handgrip Wrench M 15007
(b) Install pointer support assembly
(c) Set quadrant rule to 0°
(d) Move control stick up to forward Control stick quadrant (+ 5° ± 20') - Should deflection value be found out of tolerance, determine
stop 39.5 ± 2.5 mm the cause. If required, refer to sheet «Adjustment of pitch
(1.555 ±0.0098 in) channel».
(e) Move control stick up to aft stop Control stick quadrant (-18^20*)
127 ±2.5 mm Maximum deviation permitted
(5 ± 0.0098 in) between stabilators : 10'
(f ) Drop the pressure in system 1

applied to system 2 -Failure warning panel .
«hyd. 1 » on
«hyd. 2» out
«emg. hyd» on

set to «servos»
System 1:0
Actuate stabilators over their whole travel and check that loads
remain the same (operation of dual supply valve).
E Functional tests with pressure - Failure warning panel : Actuate stabilators over their whole travel.
applied to systems 1 and 2 «hyd. 1 »
out
«hyd. 2»
«emg. hyd» on
(1) Test of electrically-operated emer¬


AD
11-81 Restricted 2-519 2-519
BREGUET AVIATION
J
j^Êd
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
COCKPIT STABILATORS

about 10 seconds.
(a) Lower «STICK UNCOUPLE» switch On failure warning panel, AP light A slight jerk is felt in control stick (operation of electrically-operated
comes on red. selector valve and dual supply valve).

panel, AP amber light flashes
(b) Move the stick from full nose-down Auxiliary servo-control operates on barrel 2. Same deflection
to full nose-up values and loads.
(c) «STICK UNCOUPLE» switch to On failure warning panel, AP Check that electrically-operated selector valve operates. Move the
normal (guard down) light goes out. stabilators.
Actuate the autopilot disengage lever On autopilot control and indicator

panel, AP flashing amber light
goes out.

Set the autopilot to OFF.
AB
11-81 Restricted 2-51 9M 2-5191
7 ; 1
CHECKS
OPERATIONS l
REMARKS
COCKPIT CONTROJ. SURFACES
(2) Set ARTHUR selector switch

to «HIGH»
(a) Move control stick Check for higher control stick stiffness.
(b) Drop pressure in system 1 «HYD. 1» light On Check that :
- ARTHUR device shifts to low ratio.

(c) Move control stick - Control stick stiffness disappears. j
(d) Set ARTHUR selector switch i

to « LOW»
F Functional tests with

emergency system
(a) Start electro-pump

«HYD. 1» ,
-
«HYD. 2» { êro
«EMG. HYD» , _
«EP» î 0ut
System 1 : > 136 bar (1972 psi)
System 2 : 0
(b) Move control stick over its Actuate stabilators over their whole travel and check that
whole travel. loads remain the same.
This operation is to be carried out during CALIBRATION CHECK OF
ELECTRO-PUMP PRESSURE SWITCHES (see 07-1).
G Functional tests
Hydr. system 1 pressurized
(1) Dash-pot check «HYD. 1» Out
«HYD. 2» ) 0n
«EMG. HYD» /
(a) Move control stick over short
travels about 0° position Check dash-pot efficiency (slight resistance felt in linkage).
(b) Move control stick Check that a continuous opposing load varying in accordance
with control stick displacement speed is applied to control stick
in both directions.
AC
10-78 Restricted 2-520 2-520
BREGUET AVIATION.^-^^
MIRAGE F
CHECKS :
7
OPERATIONS REMARKS
(c) Connect pressure generator
(1 ) Connect pitot pressure connection

(T2-T1) (See 01-0 : ground speed)
(2) Move control stick while increasing Perform same operation as above and check that, with a control
IAS from 300 to 400 kt. stick displacement speed similar to above case, control stick dis¬
placement speed is proportional to increase in IAS.
Progressively decrease IAS and check that normal loads are
resumed.
6- FINAL STEPS
Remove the following :
- stabilator deflection templates.

-rigging device.
-rigging pin
Perform pitch channel servo-system electrical tests (See 13-11
AA
02-77 Restricted 2-521 2-521
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^^-^Q
îS53^^^
MIRAGE
..,...,
F
A,
ADJUSTMENT OF PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM
(Figure 19)
1- SCOPE
To provide instructions for complete adjustment of control system concerned.
2- GENERAL
servo-controls, micrometric rods, dummy components, etc.) allowing basic linkage adjustment to be
determined and therefore providing for the interchangeability of certain system components.

ON LINKAGE EXCEPT AS REGARDS NORMAL OPERATIONS MENTIONED IN THE
DOCUMENTATION AND WHICH CAN BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO RISK OF ALTERING THE
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT.
In the case where operations are to be carried out on the linkage (structural repair for instance), which
operations require system components to be removed, it is IMPERATIVE that length and setting of
various components should be marked with accuracy before disassembly, or that manufacturing tools
should be used at reassembly so as to restore initial adjustment.
SHOULD A CONTROL BE FOUND OUT OF ADJUSTMENT, DO NOT ALTER EXISTING

DETERMINED.
The following particular rules should be known and complied with each time operations are being
carried out on the system :
- Apply correct tightening torques to various connecting components (pins - rods). Rods should be
torqued on a bench.
- Use thimbles for mounting the pins, in order to prevent bores from being damaged. Slightly
lubricate pins before their installation.
- Be careful to install pins and rods with their heads and ends positioned properly.
- Make sure to install a teflon washer (anti-friction) or an anti-swivelling cup whenever specified.
- Lock assembled components using locking pins, lockwires or lockplates and complying with
applicable instructions.
-Upon completion of adjustments, make sure that linkage operate freely with no unwanted
abutment.

- Safety measures to be taken for personnel protection (See 01-0).
- Instructions applicable to all works performed on aircraft systems (See 01-0).
- General instructions applicable to starting of aircraft systems and various installations (See 01-0).
AA
BREGUET
tL^^zrk
AVIATION^<<iK=,-<»ïQ>
MIRAGE F
^£2^-^<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
A Standard tools

- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 1 50 ft.lb).
Special tools
-Tool kit F1-CVB
- 1 1 5-200V/400Hz electrical power supply

- Remove linkage access doors.
5 - ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
A Preliminary steps
- Install the following :
-Stabilator deflection templates (Figure 18).

-Control stick deflection measuring quadrant and tooling handgrip fitted with its index.
- Install servo-controls and hydraulic system couplings. Do not perform electrical connections.
IMPORTANT :
MAKE SURE THAT POSITION PICKOFFS ARE NOT CONNECTED.
- Disconnect electrical connector of releasable bellcrank electrically-operated selector valve.

- Apply pressure in system 1 .
B Between control stick and auxiliary servo-control
(1) Adjustment
-Pin bellcrank 19 (bellcrank used to set stabilators to - 1°30' position).

-Adjust micrometric rod 18 to length so as to provide for pinning of AMEDEE bellcrank. DO
NOT LEAVE RIGGING PIN INSTALLED.
CAUTION :
LINKAGE PINNING IS PROHIBITED DOWNSTREAM OF AUXILIARY SERVO-CONTROL.
AB
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
_
~But
ma
de
stic
sto
C
But
préo
pre-
das
ut
pot
B
stop
Das
Buté
serv
~~
Servo
stop
structu
Butée
Structu
stop Montage d'une rondelle
teflon bielle 21
Placer exceptionnellement Bïellettes de conjugaison
la rondelle teflon côté Arthur servo guignol débrayable
Installation of a teflon CP
Servo-control'/releasable bellcrank
washer on rod 21 . interconnecting rods
Exceptionally fit
teflon washer on ARTHUR DETAIL B
bellcrank side
a>
o
aa >
o 5t
^ 2 s£ + S. <"
3 S §-
+-» rç ai o O a) "
'" 3 "> v
<D CD
^

"5
s
to .<u *~
«-* to +J ~ C
3 i: 3 J; 3 .o
CO Co OQCo mQ co cC oo o
J I I I I
(-) Cabré ^
I
Profondeur * Piqué (+)

m
(- ./ Nose-up Pitch Nose-down (+) Orientation de la chape double
Positioning of dual clevis
FIGURE 19 - REGLAGE DE LA COMMANDE DE PROFONDEUR

ADJUSTMENT OF PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM
AC
04-75 Restricted 2-524 FIGURE 19 2-E
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" ^ MIRAGE
miixnvu F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^_- ^.y^^, ,,..,,.,.
^^ ^^> _
Restricted MANUAL n. 04
(2) Automatic trim neutral position

-Measure the extension length of the AFU rod on a bench under unloaded conditions
(this length will be called AFU neutral) and make sure that the AFU is at the theoretical
center-to-center distance of 666 mm (26.220 : in) so as to freely insert the pins.
+ 0 +0
-Pin bellcrank 19.
-Set the Arthur device to the low ratio.
-Install the AFU (in correct direction).
Do not alter its adjustment; otherwise, carefully adjust the trim actuator end fitting, then, if ne¬
cessary, adjust the AFU length (micrometric adjustment)
within the theoretical dimension (666 mm (26.220 ^z. jn)) so as to freely insert the
pins. + 0 +0
-Unpin bellcrank 19.
-Check the LH stabilator setting which should be - 1"30'.
-Set the Arthur device to high ratio.
-Measure the extension length of the AFU rod (this length should be equal to that meas¬
ured on bench under unloaded conditions).
-Check that the automatic trim neutral position corresponds to the LH stabilator setting
of - 1°30' ± 5' (i.e., the stabilator setting angle does not change upon changeover from low
Arthur to high Arthur).
-Check that bellcrank 19 can be freely pinned.
-Set the Arthur device back to low ratio.
(3) Operate the trim actuator to set the stabilators to neutral.
-Measure the control stick deviation from the position occupied upon pinning of bell¬
crank 19. The deviation should be 23.7 ± 0.3 mm (0.933 ± 0.011 in).
(4) Operate the trim actuator over its whole travel
-Check that the following stabilator deflections are obtained:

-nose-down: > 2°30'
-nose-up: ^ 13°30'.
-Check that the AFU remains set to neutral for both extreme positions of the trim actuator
(i.e., check that the rod extension length is the same as that measured upon installation of the
AFU).
-Check that the trim indicator bar moves to neutral when the stabilator is positioned be¬
tween - 1 "30 and - 2°.
C - Between Amédée bellcrank and stabilators
-Measure the stabilator servo-control stop-to-stop range

-Successively set each servo-control to its travel limit stops by slowly actuating the
slide valve by hand and measure the corresponding stabilator deflections. Such deflections are
used to determine the servo-control clearances with respect to the theoretical stabilator de¬
flections (without damping).
NOTE: Before proceeding to nose-up deflection, set the control stick to full nose-up position
so as to avoid interference between pitch servo-control and releasable bellcrank.
Nose-down + 6° ±_20'
:
+ 0'
Nose-up: - 20° ± 10'.
-Pin bellcrank 19.
-Adjust micrometric rod 9 (LH) so as to set the LH stabilator to - 1°30' ± 5'.
-Adjust micrometric rod 8 (RH) so as to align the RH stabilator with the LH stabilator to
within 5'.
AD
AVIONS AAARCEL DASSAULT J
BREGUET AVIATION ^£
MIRAGE F
D Between Amédée bellcrank and auxiliary servo-control
- Remove micrometric rods 8 and 9, after marking their respective positions (LH or RH).
- Make sure that the linkage is not pinned downstream of the auxiliary servo-control.
- Measure the auxiliary servo-control stop-to-stop range.
- Successively set the auxiliary servo-control to its travel limit stops by slowly actuating the
slide valve by hand and check that micrometric rods 8 and 9 can be mounted for each of these positions
(be careful not to invert the RH and LH rods). This operation is intended to make sure that the
auxiliary servo-control stop-to-stop range is within the stabilator servo-control stop-to-stop ranges.
- Install micrometric rods 8 and 9.
- Set the auxiliary servo-control to its travel limit stops and measure the corresponding stabi¬
lator deflections :
+ 20'
- nose-down : + 5 30' _o
- nose-up:- 19° +*5'
A 10' nose-down clearance should be obtained.

Such values are used to determine the auxiliary servo-control clearances with respect to the stabila¬
tor theoretical deflections (without damping) ; they also permit checking of the clearances between
auxiliary servo-control and stabilator servo-control stop-to-stop ranges.
E Adjustment of dashpot clearances
- Install and adjust the dashpot rod end fitting so as to equalize the clearances, taking the stabilator
deflections as a basis. Adjustment check is to be performed as follows : move the control stick to full
nose-up position, being careful to hold it fully deflected to ensure abutment of the auxiliary servo¬
control slide valve and check that a minimum dashpot clearance of 0.1 mm (0.003 in) is obtained when
the connecting pin on bellcrank side is removed. Perform a same check by moving the control stick to
full nose-down position.
IMPORTANT NOTE :
PERFORM THIS OPERATION WITH GREAT CARE, DUE TO LIMITED CLEARANCES.
- Following adjustment of the end fitting, tighten and safety the locknut. Refer to «Replacement»
paragraph in «Removal - installation of dashpot» sheet (see 04-2).
F Linkage deflection check
- Withdraw the control stick stops.

- Pin the roll linkage to neutral and remove all other rigging pins.
- Move the control stick very slowly so as to set the auxiliary servo-control to its travel limit stops
(nose-up and nose-down) and check that :
-the same deflections are obtained as during auxiliary servo-control stop check.
- Control stick deflections should be as follows :
- nose-down : higher than 45 mm (1.771 in),
- nose-up : higher than 131 mm (5.157 in).
- Adjustment of control stick stops

- Pin the roll linkage to neutral.
- Access to controistick stops is gained in cockpit.
- Adjust and lock the control stick stops so as to obtain the following stabilator deflections :
- nose-down : + 5° ± 20',
- nose-up : 18° ± 20' ; maximum deviation permitted between stabilators : 10'.
- Set the control stick to 0° ; maximum deviation permitted between stabilators : 5'.
- Set the control stick to full nose-up or full nose-down position ; maximum deviation
permitted between stabilators : 10'.
- Control stick deflections should be as follows :
- nose-down : 39.5 ± 2.5 mm (1 .555 ± 0.098 in),
- nose-up : 127 ± 2.5 mm (5 ± 0.098 in)..
AD
BREGUET
fl^>^ru
AVIATION^ïSF^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^s***^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
H Check and tests .
- Check deflection values obtained with system 2 and then with systems 1 and 2. Check that same
adjustments are obtained.
- Check that all hinges are properly tightened and locked.
- Perform a pitch control system functional test.
- Plot a pitch control system force curve (See 04-2).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove all tools.

- Reset control system to neutral.
- Reinstall all access doors.
Disconnect :
- hydraulic power supply.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £3-^"^. /V\||\/-\V_7L_ F
^<S&jg*£b.
BREGUET AVIATION
^2^^-s^^ ^ . ^ .
Restricted »«amiiai «>.
MANUAL 04
PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (PITCH)
(Figures 20 and 21)
1 - SCOPE
To make sure that forces required for actuating pitch control system are within tolerances.
2 - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
] TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01 -0).
A - Special tools

-Flight control rigging device.
-Stabilator deflection templates.
B - Standard tools
-Ground telephone.

-Remove door 12-08.

-Install templates.
-Connect :
-Electrical power supply.
-On roll control system, pin the bellcrank located upstream of the auxiliary servo-control,
door 1 2.08 (pin MS1 390-20-81 0).
-Set stabilators to neutral (templates). Trim of necessary and balance said neutral posi¬
tion by performing low-amplitude movements around neutral position.
-Install flight control rigging device suited for pitch control together with spring scale
(see 04-1).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION /S63

MIRAGE F
mn
130
120
110
100
90
80
i 70
fi
O
60 5:
50
40
30
20
10
0
5
10
15
c
20 o
o
25 to
O O
5 30 5;
35
40
Summary table
FIGURE 20 - PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (PITCH) WITH ARTHUR DEVICE

AB IN "LOW RA TIO" CONFIGURA TION
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «^-"Mi /V\||\/"\\^L. I
^&^
BREGUET AVIATION
^>, r5<^>
^=^> Restricted uakhiai
MANUAL n«
04
Setting control stick to neutral
-Rotate handwheel clockwise to bring control stick well in nose-up position.

-Continuously rotate handwheel anti-clockwise and note on quadrant the position at
which the force is equal to zero.
-Continue to rotate handwheel until control stick is located well in nose-down position.
-Then, continuously rotate handwheel to bring control stick in nose-up position and note
on quadrant the position at which the force is equal to zero.
-Adjust quadrant so that zero marking on rule is at mid-travel between both positions
noted above.
-Move control stick fully from nose-down to nose-up positions so as to visualize travel
limit stops on quadrant with a view to interrupting force measurement about 5 mm (0.196 in)
before reaching extreme limit stops.
5 - FORCE MEASUREMENT
A - Low ratio
-Perform force measurement as indicated below.

-Move control stick from full nose-down to full nose-up positions and then from full
nose-up to full nose-down positions at the rate of 10 mm (0.393 in) in 4 seconds approx.
(continuous movement).
-Take a reading every :

-10 mm (0.393 in) on quadrant within zero to full nose-up area.
-5 mm (0.196 in) on quadrant within zero to full nose-up area.
-Perform force measurement twice or thrice in each direction, so as to confirm results.
B - High ratio
-Disconnect spring scale from screw jack.

-Set ARTHUR selector switch to "HIGH".
-Check stabilators. Readjust their position, if required.
-Connect spring scale to screw jack.
- Perform force measurement as described above.
6 - CHECKS
Plot force versus travel curves in both directions. Such curves should be comprised within
the envelope curve drawn on the chart. Check that particular points are within tolerances and
check for each point that the difference existing between forward and aft travels is lower than
half the envelope curve deviation.
The essential points to be checked are the forces obtained around neutral position (thres¬
hold) and at travel limits.
AB
J
BREGUET AVIATION -Ê0

MIRAGE F
mn
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
I
s»
60
50
40
30
20
0
5
10
15
I 20 i
s 25
S
co .,
«o
30
35
40
Summary table
o.
FIGURE 21 - PLOTTING OF CONTROL STICK FORCES (PITCH) WITH ARTHUR DEVICE

IN «HIGH RATIO» CONFIGURATION
AB
BREGUET
fl^^-'trÇl
AVIATION^<$P^_-><^>
MIRAGE
.,...., _
F
.
^£2=^*<^ Restricted MANUAL 04
7- RESULTS
Should the forces measured :

- be found out of minimum and maximum tolerance values set forth
- reveal the presence of binding points.
Perform as follows :
- Disconnect AFU and move pilot's control.
- Check linkage absence of binding point or friction.
- If required, perform AFU disassembly, lubrification and adjustment (See 04-2).
8- FINAL STEPS
- Disconnect :
- Remove flight control rigging device (See 04-1).
- Unpin roll control system.
Reinstall :
- Control stick handgrip
- Seat ejection gun
- Ejection seat (See 09-4)
- Canopy (See 03-2)
- Access doors.
- Remove deflection templates.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
MEASUREMENT OF STABILATOR PLAY
1 - SCOPE
To give instructions required to check for plays of hinge pin and control crankpin.
A - Special tools
-Stabilator play measurement tool 50AM001 .
B - Standard equipment
-1 dial gauge with magnetic base mount (Metrology tool kit 5001 LOM).
-Electrical power supply 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz

-Stabilator deflection templates
-Ballast (lead packs or cast iron plates).
Remove doors 38.09 - 38.03 - 36.03.1 - 36.09.1 - 36.10 (LH side) and 36.02 (RH
side).
-Jack up the aircraft (see 02-2).
-Apply pressure to both hydraulic systems, which should be previously DEGASSED so as
to prevent erratic operation of the servo-control (see 07-1 ).
-Set the stabilators to template zero position and do not move the control or the stabila¬
tors any more.
- Remove the deflection templates.
-Secure the stabilator play measurement tool to the fuselage, using the captive nuts at¬
taching doors 38.09 and 38.03 to the stabilator blinds.
-Position the two dial gauges on the mount.
-Position a third dial gauge (door 36.10 for LH side) indicating the movement of the ser¬
vo-control barrel in relation to the measurement tool attached to the fuselage.
-Position the container intended to receive the ballast; be sure not to damage the stabila¬
tor skin during the operation (to that purpose, insert a protective mat).
-On leading edge side, secure the container with a screw, using the stabilator template
attachment point.
_ Container positioned on
I trailing edge
Dial gauge magnetic mount
Stabilator hinge pin
LH STABILATOR
INSTALLA TION OFCHECKING ASSEMBL Y
Restricted 2-533
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Charge (*) en daN
(Ibf)
Load In daN MîiïïlliiÉiïïïïiÉïïiïïïïl
(lb wgt) Mesure au niveau
Equivalence du maneton
a 800 mm (2.62 ft) Measurement at the
Equivalence
at 800 mm (2.62 ft): crankpin level
(140) MQ[
(314.72 lb wgt) | .
(130) \
(292.24 lb wgt) 160
(120)
(269.76 lb wgt) l:>0
(110) -140
(247.28 lb wgt)
(100)_i?0
(224.8 lb wgt) 120|
(90) 1
(202.32 lb wgt) 110
(80) -
(179.84 lb wgt)
(70) 90
(157.36 lb wgt)
(60) --5°:
(134.88 1b wgt) 7Q|
(50) .
(112.4 lb wgt) 60!

(40) 50£
(89.92 lb wgt)
(30). 40
(67.44 lb wgt) --
(20) 4
(44.96 lb wgt) 20
(10)
(22.48 lb wgt)
(10)__1Q.
(2£48lbwgt) lu
(20) 1
(44.96 lb wgt) 20
(30),
(67.44 lb wgt) 30
(40) _
(89.92 lb wgt) ^
(50)
(112.4 lb wgt)
(134.88 lb wgt)
(70, .60.|
(157.36 lb wgt)
(80)-- 70
(179.84 lb wgt)
(90)--
(202.32 lb wgt)
(100)
(224.8 lb wgt) 90
(110)
(247.28 lb wgt) IqO
(120)-*- t
(269.76 lb wgt)
(130)-
(292.24 lb wgt)
(140)-
(314.72 lb wgt)
(*) Les charges/couples sont calculées à 1000 mm (3.28 ft) de part
et d'autre de l'axe d'articulation.
Equivalence
The loads/torques are calculated at 1000 mm on either side of
à 1200 mm (3.94 ft)
the hinge pin
Equivalence
at 1200 mm (3.94 M
FIGURE 22 - MESURE DES JEUX D'EMPENNAGES (EXEMPLE)
MEASUREMENT OF ST-ABILA TOR PLAYS (EXAMPLE)
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]L^>^rSL
BREGUET AVIATION ^^T _ _
MIRAGE F
4- PROCEDURE
A Principle
Progressively load and unload the stabilator trailing edge then leading edge. Note the deflections
-
as read on dial gauges ; since the load direction was changed during loading, the play at location of the
hinge pin can be determined from the «deflection versus load» curve.
- Loads consist of lead bags or cast iron plates. Intermediate bearing surfaces are located as near as
possible to the root, at 1200 mm (3.94 ft) from the hinge pin towards trailing edge, and at 800 mm
(2.62 ft) towards leading edge. Maximum load force shall be 120 daN (270 Ib.wt) towards trailing edge,
and 180 daN (405 Ib.wt) towards leading edge ; this corresponds to 140 daN (315 Ib.wt) loads located
at 1 meter from hinge pin.
B Operation
(1 ) Apply a 120 daN (270 Ib.wt) load to the stabilator trailing edge.
(2) Reset the dial gauges to zero with 120 daN (270 Ib.wt) load on trailing edge.
NOTE : If any oscillations are visible on the dial gauges, the test must be stopped, gas removed
again and the measurements taken afterwards.
(3) Gradually unload down to zero by steps of 10 daN (22.48 Ib.wt), then load on leading edge side
up to 180 daN (405 ib.wt). Return to initial position, unloading the leading edge and loading the trail¬
ing edge. At each 10 daN (22.48 Ib.wt) step, note the values displayed on dial gauges.
NOTE : Load the container on the leading edge, to prevent it from being unbalanced.
5- ANALYSIS OF RESULTS
NOTE : Since the servo-control cannot be considered as an absolute fixed point, allow for the rod
retraction movement to record the values of the crankpin play curve plot, i.e., deduct the
movement of the servo-control barrel multiplied by the amplification factor of 1 .17 from the
value displayed by the dial gauge at the crankpin.
A On graph paper, plot the «load» curve in relation to travels (see figure 22).
B Observed travels are the sum of bendings and plays : bendings are shown by continuous curves,
plays are expressed by «steps» on the curves ; the height of the steps is equal to the measured play.
C There are two steps : the first one in the direction of increasing loads, and the second one in the
direction of decreasing loads ; consider the higher value only.
D At the location of the hinge pin, the spherical bearing play should be less than 0.2 mm (0.00787 in).
E At the control crank pin, it may be more difficult to read the curve because of more
noticeable bendings ; moreover, steps have become no more than a break of slope. Extend the straight
sections on either side of that discontinuity (they should be nearly parallel) ; measure the distance
between them (see figure 22).
- The clearance should be less than 0.25 mm (0.00984 in).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove :
- loads,
- measuring tool, mount, container.
- Install the doors.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ ^"-Tl /VlIKAVJU T
BREGUET AVIATION^^- ^-^ - _
CHECK OF POWER SUPPLY TO DASH-POT

JACK HEATING SYSTEM
1 - SCOPE
To check that voltage is present in the dash-pot jack heating system.

- Multimeter
- Cutoff box
- Remove door 12.04

- Disconnect electrical connector 194Ca.
- Connect the cutoff box to the receptacle.
4- ELECTRICAL TESTS
- Switch on aircraft electrical power supply.

- Set the probe heating switch to the «on» position.
- Use the multimeter to check that 1 15 V is present across terminals A and B.
- Return the probe heating switch to the «off» position.
- Switch off the electrical power supply.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Disconnect the cutoff box.

- Reconnect the electrical connector.
- Reinstall the access door.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^J^^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^CcC- ^^
MIRAGE
.... .
F
CHARGING OF ACCUMULATOR BUILT INTO

ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE
OF PITCH RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS"
(figure 23)
1- SCOPE
Operation giving the procedure for charging the built-in accumulator.
A Standard tools

- 5 - 200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply

1 1
- Hydraulic accessory kit
3- MATERIALS
- Variable-pressure nitrogen supply
- Leak detecting solution for pressurized gas
- Remove door 36.10.
- Make sure that hydraulic pressure to hydraulic systems is cut off :
- indicator 6D on servo-controls 1 and 2 indicates zero pressure ;
-set the pitch damper switch to «PITCH» several times until the «ELEV-PITCH» warning
lights come on.
| - Make a charging device without connecting it to the electrically-operated selector valve, conform
to the figure and bleed it as follows :
- close valves R1 and R2 on the test cock,
- connect the charging device to the nitrogen supply.
IMPORTANT :
REGULATE THE NITROGEN SUPPLY TO LOW PRESSURE THEN OPEN VALVE R1 IN
ORDER TO BLOW OUT FLUID WHICH MAY POSSIBLY BE FOUND IN THE SYSTEM AND
PREVENT THE EQUIPMENT FROM BEING CONTAMINATED. CLOSE THE VALVE ON THE
NITROGEN SUPPLY AND VALVE R1 ON THE TEST COCK.
5- CHARGING OF ACCUMULATOR
- Remove the protection cap from the charging valve and connect the charging device swivel fitting.
(Correctly screw the valve core plunger knurled ring).
- Check that valves R1 and R2 on the test cock of the device are closed but not tightened ; regulate
nitrogen supply pressure to 60 bar (870 psi), read the pressure indicated on the pressure gauge and open
its valve.
AB
BREGUET AVI ATION^^3^^
'X-^-rrU MIRAGE
..*»...». a
F
- Open the accumulator charging valve by unscrewing the control nut on the valve poppet by
1 1/2 turns maximum (16 mm A/F wrench).
CAUTION :
EXCESSIVE SLACKENING WILL LEAD TO DETERIORATION OF THE VALVE.
- Open valve R1 on the test cock progressively. Monitor the change in pressure and wait one or
two minutes so that pressure stabilizes at 60 ± 3 bar (870 ± 43.5 psi).
NOTE : To preclude an erroneous reading, make sure, upon charging of the accumulator, that its
temperature is practically close to the ambient temperature.
If pressure is too high, close valve R1 and open valve R2.

-
If pressure is too low, regulate nitrogen supply pressure to obtain the desired pressure.
-
- Actuate the pitch damper switch in the cockpit about fifteen times until the pressure stabilizes
on the charging device pressure gauge.
- Close the accumulator charging valve.
- Retighten the control nut on the valve poppet by pulling the poppet axially in order to
facilitate centering on its seat ; tighten it to a torque of 0.500 to 0.870 m.daN (3.6 to 5.7 ft.lb).
- Shut off the nitrogen supply and drop the pressure in the system via valve R2 of the test cock.
- Disconnect the charging device.
-Check charging valve sealing using leak detecting fluid ; also check internal valve sealing by
pressing on the valve core.
- In case of leakage, slack the nut on the valve and rebuild pressure ; tighten the control
nut on the valve poppet while taking the precautions described above. If leakage continues, replace
the charging valve.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Perform capacity check of the accumulator built into the electrically-operated selector valve
a
of the pitch releasable bellcrank (see 04-2).
- Disconnect the electrical power supply.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Bouchon protecteur de valve

Valve protection cap
^s_ Ecrou de commande

du clapet de valve
Valve poppet control nut
S. i r/
R1 R2
Source d'azote à pression

réglable
Adjustable pressure
nitrogen supply
FIGURE 23 GONFLAGE DE L'ACCUMULATEUR INCORPORE A L'ELECTRO-DISTRIBUTEUR

DES GUIGNOLS DEBRAYABLES DE PROFONDEUR
CHARGING OF ACCUMULATOR BUILT INTO ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED
SELECTOR VALVE OF PITCH RELEASABLE BELLCRANKS
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti ^J>^r\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^fL ^-^ . .«ami.., rs.
INSPECTION OF STABILATOR DRIVE ROD
1 - GENERAL
A Standard tools

- Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 and 5 to 50 m.daN (15 to 150 and 40 to 350 ft.lb).
B Spares
- 1 lockwasher 23351 AC060LE
C Materials
- White spirit
Remove the stabilator.
4 - REMOVAL OF ROD (see figure 14 - Section H)
Access through door 38.09, LH side, or 38.03, RH side.
- Uncouple the drive rod from the bellcrank.

- Unsafety and remove screw 6(10 A/F wrench), and recover cup washer 8 and retainer 10.
- Remove screw 9 retaining the rod pin (32 A/F wrench), pin 7 and then the rod.
5 - CLEANING
- The bearing on stabilator side shall be cleaned with a clean lintless cloth soaked with white spirit,
and then dried with ambient air or clean moisture-free compressed air.
6 - INSPECTION OF REMOVED ROD
A Inspection of rod end on bellcrank side
Inspect the various components for :

- corrosion : lightly sand with crocus cloth, if necessary, and protect,
- surface condition (scratches, tearing).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION . >-£=»

MIRAGE F
B Inspection of self-aligning rod end (sealed roller bearing)
- Inspect the side shields (dust cover) for presence, security of attachment and good condition
(dents, distortion, etc.).
- Check the bearing for free rotation (binding).
Should a bearing not freely rotate, lubricate it after removing the shields.
- Significant corrosion on the side faces of the bearing may be the sign of inner corrosion.
Should inner corrosion be detected, replace the bearing.
- Measure the inside axial play by applying an axial load Fa equal to 1 1 .3 daN (25.36 Ib.wgt) to
the end of a pin/nut assembly tightening the bearing inner cage, the nut being torqued to 10 m.daN
(73.75 ft.lb).
The axial play should be less than 0.30 mm (0.012 in).
MEASURING SETUP DIAGRAM
è--
The axial play is equal to the displacement of a bushing with respect to the other under the
action of an alternate axial load Fa.
Measurement method
Apply F1 = Fa.
Set the dial indicator to zero.
Stop applying F1 and apply F2 = Fa.
Read the value of the axial play indicated by the dial indicator.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^^F3^.^ - . »»amiiai
- Inspect the rod body (dents, traces of friction and corrosion).

- Check the locknut retainer for proper condition and safetying.
7 - REPLACEMENT OF A ROD END

- Before disassembly :
- accurately measure the center-to-center distance between the clevis and the rod end,
- mark the relative positions of the pins.
- Upon installation : fit a spare lockwasher :
- comply with the center-to-center distance measured before disassembly (use rod length
adjustment tool 50AM008),
- properly orientate the rod end,
- torque the locknut to the specified value (see manual 04-0),
- bend the lockwasher tabs.
For reference only : the theoretical rod center-to-center distance is equal to 255 mm (10.04 in).
The clevis and rod end axes make an angle of 7°.
8 - INSTALLATION OF ROD
- Couple the drive rod to the bellcrank.

Insert pin 7 (head on outboard side), positioning it on the flat.
-
- Fit retaining screw 9 and torque it to 5 m.daN (36.8 ft.lb) ; if necessary, untighten a little
to install retainer 10 of screw 9.
- Locate retainer 10 on retaining screw 9.
- Locate cup washer 8 on retainer 10.
- Insert screw 6 fitted with its lockwasher in pin 7 ; screw and tighten, then bend the lock¬
washer tabs.
9 - FINAL STEPS
- Check the components for proper installation and make sure that all safetyings have been
completed.
-The installation of the stabilator and access doors as well as the tests and adjustments shall be
performed later on according to the work schedule.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT H ^-"-^ MIRAGE
miii\/-vv/l. F
i
BREGUET AVIATION ^&>-~- ^z-=^>
^ ^s-^> .
Restricted , aaamiiai
MANUAL na
04
CHECK AND LUBRICATION OF VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK TEETH

(figure 24)
A - Standard tools
-1 dial indicator
-1 dynamometer with feeler

-Test rig MJF090-22
-1 rigging pin STM03243
C - Materials
-Grease M I LG. 4343
Not applicable
3 - PROCEDURE (See figure)
A - Cleaning and greasing of teeth
-Unscrew and remove the teeth protective covers.

-Clean the teeth with a dry cloth, then dry brush (protect the rest of the equipment) and
grease them lightly with a brush.
-Operate the bellcrank over the entire tooth travel.
-Clean the teeth again with a dry cloth and grease them again.
B - Check of internal friction

-Secure the equipment to base plate MJF0904201 by means of the six appropriate
screws.
-Deflect the lever between its two extreme positions; make sure that there is no friction
spot throughout the travel.
-Otherwise, despatch the equipment to 4th maintenance line.
C - Check of meshing backlash
-The backlash should not exceed 0.08 mm. If the value is out of tolerance, despatch the
equipment to 4th maintenance line.
AA
AA ID A r*"NC C
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ " ** / Y\ll\/-\V_7I_
^£p^-
BREGUET AVIATION
^^ ^-=^2,
^~w ^ - ^
Restricted . ivâamiiai
MANUAL «a
04
NOTE: If wear of the sector gears is detected other than at the three following measuring
points, perform an additional backlash measurement at that place.
-Fit the input endpiece on support MJF0902202 and the output endpiece on support
MJF0904202.
-Secure the lever with rigging pin STM03243.
-Bring nut "A" into contact with the support, then moderately tighten the nut so that the
rigging pin still slides freely in the lever. Measure and record the value of dimension X on the
input endpiece.
-Screw nut "B" fingertight and check that the rigging pin is still free to slide.
-Place a dial indicator in contact with the output endpiece and adjust so that the pointer
is at zero. Remove the rigging pin.
- Exert an alternate force at the threaded portion of the output endpiece and record back¬
lash value read on the dial.
-Loosen nuts "A" and "B" and move out the input endpiece to a value of Y, i. e. :
X + 8 mm = Y ± 0.5 mm.
-Tighten nuts "A" and "B" so as to secure the equipment at this position and check the
dimension after tightening. Measure the backlash as described above.
-Move out the input endpiece to a value or Z, i.e. :X + 16mm= Z ± 0.5 mm.
-Measure the backlash.
D - Check of minimum force required
-Remove the two nuts securing the input endpiece and remove dial indicator.
-Secure the lever with respect to the support using rigging pin STM03243.
-Check perfect horizontality of the equipment. If necessary, use a level.
-Remove the rigging pin. Using a feeler-equipped dynamometer at the input endpiece
axle pin, check that the minimum force required to shift the lever is less than 6 N (1 .34 Ibf).
-If the value of the force required is higher than or equal to 6 N (1 .34 Ibf), despatch the
equipment to 4th maintenance line.
-Remove the equipment from tool.
-Reassemble the protective covers. After tightening, check that there is a clearance of at
least 0.5 mm between the covers and the teeth and that no spurious friction is detected over
the entire range of travel.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Embout de sortie Embout d'entrée

Output endpiece Input endpiece
MJF0904202
FIGURE 24 - VERIFICATION ET GRAISSAGE DES DENTURES DU RELAIS

A DEMULTIPLICATION VARIABLE
CHECK AND LUBRICATION OF VARIABLE RATIO BELLCRANK TEETH
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL^^îrU.
BREGUET AVIATION .<-<çp=^*=>i>
MIRAGE
»,*...,»
F
r. ,
^^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REPLACEMENT OF PITCH A.F.U. POTENTIOMETER

AND ELECTRIC WIRING
(Figure 13)
1 - SCOPE
Operations to be performed in the case where a potentiometer is considered defective or in the

case where electrical connector or wiring damages are noticed on an A.F.U. during operation.
A Special tools
- Crimping tool checking kit.
C Spares
- 1 potentiometer
- 1electrical connector
- 14 washers (attachment of cover, potentiometer and clamp)
- Electric wire
- Rilsan sheath
-6 sleeves A1 (protection of potentiometer wire solders)
- 1 sleeve A3 (protection of sheath - inserted between sheath and clamp).
3- MATERIALS
- Varnish 9003 bis.
4- POTENTIOMETER REPLACEMENT
A Potentiometer removal
- On body 1 1 : Remove eight screws 23, washers 24 and cover 22.

- Remove rubber sleeves protecting wire solders and unsolder wires from potentiometer terminals
(mark position of wires).
- Unfasten spring 21.
- Untighten the screws attaching clamp 28.
- Remove four screws 26, washers 27 and four angles 25. Separate potentiometer from lever by
pulling it along its centerline. Remove potentiometer and lever (fitted with clamp 28).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT^^^rtl
BREGUET AVI ATION^2P=^^
MIRAGE F
^£^=-^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 04
B Potentiometer installation
- Position lever 20 (fitted with clamp 28) in body 1 1 .

- Slide potentiometer shaft through above assembly.
- Position potentiometer body so that potentiometer center terminal axis is at right angles to
potentiometer centerline.
- Attach potentiometer by means of four angles 25 and four screws 26, each of these screws being
fitted with a new washer 27.
- Fasten spring 21.
- Fit the end of each one of the three potentiometers wires with a new rubber sleeve A1 and solder
wires to corresponding potentiometer terminals.
- Coat solders with varnish and cover them with rubber sleeves.
- Position lever 20 on potentiometer shaft so as to center lever with respect to cam 19.
C Potentiometer setting (A.F.U. zero load)
Refer to paragraph 5 of sheet dealing with A.F.U. adjustment and calibration.
5- ELECTRIC WIRING REPLACEMENT
See 16-0 as regards wiring design principle.
A Removal of electric wiring and connector
- Cover 22 being removed, remove rubber sleeves and unsolder wires from terminals of both
potentiometers.
- Remove two screws 41 , washers 42 and half-clamp 40.
- Remove electric wiring and scrap it, as well as connector.
B Making up of electric wiring
- Cut six 330 mm (13 in) (approx.) long wire sections out of 0.6 mm2 cross-section electric wire.
- Fit one end of each wire with a rubber sleeve A1, strip that end, mark the other and solder
stripped ends to corresponding potentiometer terminals.
- Cut a sheath section having a sufficient length to comply with dimension given on diagram,
making provion to compensate for sheath shrinking taking place at installation.
- Shape wires as required on potentiometers and run them through the sheath.
- Cover the sheath end located on body 1 1 side with a rubber sleeve A3 and secure that end to
body 1 1 by means of half-clamp 40 attached by means of two screws, each of these screws being fitted
with a new washer 42.
- Cut wires to length on connector side.
- Remove identification sleeves, strip wire ends and crimp them to connector terminals.
Then, assemble connector, complying with pin identification when installing the latter.
NOTE : Crimping, pin installation and connector assembling operations should be performed on new
connector, using special SOURIAU tool.
C- Check
Test component on test stand, so as to check that potentiometer connections are correct. Then,
perform final steps applicable to A.F.U., referring to paragraphs 5 and 6 of sheet dealing with A.F.U.
adjustment and calibration.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU^-^TÇL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôP^^-^
^C^*-5^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REPLACEMENT OF PITCH AFU CONNECTOR POTENTIOMETERS (EQUIPPED

WITH SOLDER SLEEVES) AND ELECTRICAL WIRING
(see figure 13)
1 - SCOPE
These operations are to be performed when a potentiometer is considered to be malfunctioning
or when damage has been noted on a connector or associated wiring in an in-service AFU.
IMPORTANT
-The AFU may be equipped with two types of potentiometer :
- potentiometers with three ESC contact studs to which the wires are soldered ;
- potentiometers with three colored wires - yellow, green, red - connected to the wires by
means of solder sleeves.
- Each AFU must be equipped with two potentiometers of the same type, as this renders wiring
operations easier.
A Special tools
- Souriau crimping kit

- Hot air generator
B Standard tools
- Set of torque screwdrivers, 0 - 0.5 m.daN (0 - 1 .5 ft.lb)
C Spares
- 2 potentiometers POT 1 1 R2D0000N01

- 1 connector 5106RC10-6P50
- Electrical wire A.1 604-1 D20
- Insulation jacket CRN1-1-16 - White
- Insulation jacket RNF100-1-4 - Black
- Insulation jacket RILG 406-0
- Insulation jacket RNF 100-1-3-8
- 6 solder sleeves «Raychem» SLT 3X or D 142-50
- 18 lockwashers 200251-24.
3- MATERIALS
- Glue S1 125
- Varnish 9036 bis
4- REPLACEMENT OF POTENTIOMETERS
A Disassembly of potentiometers
- Remove from barrel 1 1 eight screws 23, washers 24 and cover 22.
- Remove two screws 41 , washers 42 and half-clamps 40.
- Unhook springs 21 from studs 45.
- Unscrew attachment screws 44 from bar grips 28, using an Allen wrench.
- Remove eight screws 26, washers 27 and eight brackets 25 ; disconnect the potentiometers from
levers 20, by drawing them along their centerline, and remove them.
AA
BREGUET
fl^J>^-\l
AVIATION^SF*'^^"^
MIRAGE F
^S^*-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
- Unsolder the wiring from connector 43 and potentiometers 12 at the solder sleeves (see 16-0-2).
B Potentiometer prewiring
I - For each potentiometer, cut seven 4 mm (0.015 in) lengths of CRN 1-1-16 jacket and set them
on the potentiometer wires. Mold the jacket to the wire using a hot air generator at a temperature of
between 200 and 250° C, exposure time about 2-3 seconds.
| - Place a spot of glue S 1 125 on the jackets to hold the wiring in place around the potentiometers.
C Potentiometer and connector wiring
-Cut six 400 mm (15 in) lengths of electrical wire.

- Connect the colored wiring on the potentiometers to this wire, using the solder sleeves
(see 16-0-2).
- Mark each of the wires for identification, at the end of the connector.
- Fit the retractable black jacket around the solder sleeves, and the two other black jackets on the
wires.
- Cut a sufficient length of rilsan jacket for the required length of wiring per the illustration,
taking into account the slight shrinkage which occurs on fitting. Feed the wires through the rilsan
jacket.
- Cover the barrel 1 1 end of the rilsan jacket with the retractable jacket. Use the hot air generator
to mold the jackets, and secure this end to the barrel with two half-clamps 40, secured by two screws
41 fitted with new washers 42.
- Cut to length the wires leading to connector 43.
- Remove the identification sleeves, uncover the ends of the wires and crimp the connector pins
onto them. Then assemble the connector, following the markings on the pins when connecting them.
NOTE : When crimping, connecting and assembling new connectors, use Souriau special tools.
D Reassembly of potentiometers
Install the potentiometers by assembling to levers 20 and bar grips 28.

-
Position the potentiometer body so that the cable lead-out is perpendicular to the longitudinal
-
centerline of the equipment (see illustration).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT zL^^^rQL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION*ôF=<^0>
^£^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
- Position eight brackets 25, screw in eight screws 26 with new washers 27 and torque the screws
toôcm.daN (0.530 Ib.in).
-Torque the bar grip attachment screws 44 to between 8 and 10 cm.daN (7.077 - 8.847 Ib.in).
- Hook springs 21 onto studs 45.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Test the equipment at a test bench, to ascertain that the potentiometer is properly connected
(see04-2, worksheet «Calibration check and adjustment of the pitch AFU», paragraphs «Checking and
adjustment of potentiometers» and «Final steps»).
- Coat the heads of screws 26, 41 and 44 with red setting varnish.
- Install and secure cover 22, using eight screws 23 with new washers 24.
- Coat the heads of screws 23 with red setting varnish.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ôP3^^
/L^^TU. MIRAGE
......... .
F
SECTION 3
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
3-0 GENERAL
- Rudder control system - Principle 3-001

- Rudder linkage 3-107
- Hydraulic system 3-109
- Operation of rudder channel 3-111
- Manual control 3-111
- Yaw damping 3-115
- Automatic control 3-115
- Roll and rudder control combination 3-115
- Rudder trim system 3-115
- Failures 3-117
Incorporated documentation
- Rudder pedals AMD OCV 294-04 3-119

- Rudder artificial feel unit AMD 105-038-03 3-123
- Removal - installation of rudder AFU 3-301

- Removal - installation of rudder servo-control 3-303
- Removal - installation of rudder releasable bellcrank 3-307
3-4 DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY
- Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of rudder AFU 3-401
- Inspection and servicing of rudder hinges 3-501

- Inspection of rudder pedals 3-502
- Calibration check and adjustment of rudder AFU 3-504
- Adjustment and check of pitch or rudder releasable bellcrank position pickoff . . see 13-1
- Functional and adjustment check of rudder channel 3-508
- Adjustment of rudder control system 3-51 2
- Partial inspection of rudder control system linkage - Servicing 3-517
- Total inspection of rudder control system linkage - Servicing 3-51 9M
- Plotting of rudder pedal forces 3-520
- Check of cable tension in rudder control system 3-524
- Inspection of rudder drive rod 3-525
AA
BREGUET
/LJ^T^l
AVIATION^<Ji _^
MIRAGE F
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
3-8 REPAIR
- Replacement of rudder A.F.U. microswitch and electric wiring 3-801
Figure No. Page
1 RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM - PRINCIPLE 3-002

4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM 3-110
5 NORMAL ELECTRICAL CONTROL THROUGH CHANNEL 1 3-112
6 RUDDER SERVO-CONTROL MECHANICAL CONTROL 3-114
7 RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM DIAGRAM 3-118
8 RUDDER PEDALS 3-122
9 RUDDER ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT 3-125
10 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF RUDDER SERVO-CONTROL 3-304
11 CHECK OF CONTROL SURFACE DEFLECTION 3-509
12 ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM 3-514
13 PLOTTING OF RUDDER PEDAL FORCES 3-520
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £, -
BREGUET AVIATION ^dZ~-
-v-^'\l
^<^ .
MIRAGE
....,.,
F
.-
PITCH CONTROL SYSTEM - PRINCIPLE
(Figure 1)
The rudder control system is operated from rudder pedals 1 through releasable bellcrank 62C and
servo-control 59C actuating the rudder.
An artificial feel unit (A.F.U.) 201C is connected in parallel with rudder control system linkage to
a trim actuator 85C intended to shift A.F.U. zero setting.
Two control modes are available : Manual control and automatic control.
1 Manual control
(Releasable bellcrank 62C released)
Rudder pedal commands and yaw damping and anti-slip signals are transmitted electrically to
servo-control 59C through electrical circuit 1 or 2.
2 Automatic control
(Releasable bellcrank 62C released)
When yaw damper and autopilot are engaged, roll control surfaces and rudder are acted upon by
the autopilot to obtain balanced turns at low IAS with flaps down.
3 Cases of failure
Should both electrical circuits happen to fail, the following is then effected through safety
systems :
- Locking of releasable bellcrank arms

- Rudder directly controlled by rudder pedals (mechanical control).
Yaw damping and anti-slip functions are not available and the autopilot is disengaged.
Should hydraulic system 1 and emergency system happen to fail simultaneously, the system is in
the same configuration as above but half of servo-control nominal force only is available.
System 2 failure has no other effect than reducing servo-control nominal force by half.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION -^S*3
MIRAGE F
Secteur-avant 2 1 Pédalier
Forward quadrant Rudder pedals
Cables 3 J!t --_4 Traversée étanche

Cables i Pressure seal coupling
Système de
restitution artificielle 5 Secteur-arrière
d'effort Aft quadrant
(S.R.A)
201 C
Artificial feel unit
(A.F.U.)
Vérin de trim,
(direction)
85 C
Servo-commande
Trim actuator
(rudder) (direction)
59 C
Servo-control
Guigno (rudder)
débrayable
62 C
Releasable
bellcrank
^ », .a
^F
FIGURE 1 - COMMANDE DE DIRECTION

Principe
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
Principle
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L -
BREGUET AVIATION --T^^
MIRAGE F
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Layout - See Figures 2-3.
Doc
Item Name - Characteristics and Functions Location
Access Door No. S I
1 RUDDER PEDALS Cockpit X
They perform the following functions :
(1) Rudder control

(2) Normal wheel braking
(3) Steering control
They consist of two pedals provided with an interconnecting
system. Rudder pedals can be adjusted fore and aft.
2 FORWARD QUADRANT 02-00-i
Connected to the other forward sector through an

interconnecting rod, it transmits the movement of a
rudder pedal to the other.
3 CABLES 02-00-i
Each cable is made of steel and is fitted with two

turnbuckles provided for tension adjustment and
control system centering.
4 PRESSURE SEAL COUPLING 17-02

17-10
Located at cockpit outlet (R/H and L/H sides) it ensures
cockpit sealing at cable passage hole.
5 AFT QUADRANT D1-48
It is connected to cables from rudder pedals and includes

two arms :
- one arm is connected to rudder servo-control control
linkage.
- The other arm is connected to A.F.U.
RUDDER
When deflected, it causes a yawing moment to be applied

to aircraft, causing the latter to turn (See 03-4).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION . --SSD
MIRAGE F
Location Doc.
Access Door No. I
LH GEAR MICROSWITCH X
Located on LH gear leg, it cuts off the anti-slip

system on the ground (See 05-1).
39C AUTOPILOT
(See 13-2).
48C FLYING AIDS AMPLIFIER

(See 13-1).
54C SERVO RESET BUTTON Cockpit X

(See 04-2).
56C YAW DAMPER ANTI-SLIP SWITCH LH panel X
Provided with three positions :

- «OFF» - cuts all functions
- «YAW» - yaw damping function
- «ANTI-SLIP» - yaw damping and anti-slip function.
Cuts manual rudder trim.
59C RUDDER SERVO-CONTROL D2-43

operate simultaneously.
Piston connected to structure. Moving body connected
to rudder.
Barrel 1 is provided with a single mechanically-operated
and dual electrically-operated selector valve and is supplied
from hydraulic system 1 .
Selector valves are synchronized, whatever the control
mode.
Nominal force :2x 1750 daN (2x3934 Ib.wgt- 1.755 ton -
1 .967 Us.ton) at a pressure of 210 bar (3045 psi).

Functions :
- Rudder control.
- Yaw damping and anti-slip functions in electrical mode
(signals fed by flying aid rack).
AC
02-85 3-102
Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ£.,J~
BREGUET AVIATION xTÏ?"
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No.
61C ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE D2-43 X
Single single-stage electrically-operated selector

valve, supplied from hydraulic system 1.
Function :
- It controls locking or unlocking of releasable
bellcrank 62C, therefore allowing servo-control 59C
to operate either in electrical mode or in mechanical
mode.
62C RELEASABLE BELLCRANK D2-43
It is provided with three coaxial arms :

- Arm A : Connected to pilot's linkage
- Arm B : Connected to servo-control selector valves
- Arm C : Connect to servo-control body.
Arm B can be locked or unlocked hydraulically with respect

to arm A. Locking or unlocking is controlled through
electrically-operated selector valve 61 C.
Relative travels of above arms are :

- limited by elastic stops
- monitored by safety microswitches cancelling servo¬
control electrical control in case of failure.
Releasable bellcrank is fitted with a dual differential

position pickoff the body of which is connected to
arm A and the lever of which is connected to arm C.
This pickoff is used for slaving servo-control in
electrical mode.
81 C TRIM INDICATOR FUSE-BREAKER Electrical

heart
(See 04-1) R1
82C TRIM INDICATOR Control

pedestal
(See 04-1)
83C FUSE-BREAKER Electrical

heart
Intended to protect rudder trim actuator control circuit. R1
AA
10-73 Restricted l_ini
BREGUET AVIATION . ^ff5
MIRAGE F.
Location Doc.
Access Door No. S I
84C RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SWITCH LH console X
It controls the rudder trim actuator.
85C TRIM ACTUATOR (RUDDER) D2.51 X
The trim actuator body is hinged to a fixed point on

aircraft structure and the rod is connected to the body
of AFU201C.
Its function is to shift the AFU zero load setting through
either manual or automatic control.
197C ANTISLIP FUSE-BREAKER Electrical

master box
Intended to protect the trim actuator circuit. system 1
198C RH AUTO TRIM RELAY Antislip X

box
When fed with a signal supplied by the flying aids rack, 20.00
it controls the trim actuator in the «rod extended»
direction.
199C LH AUTO TRIM RELAY Antislip X

box
It controls the trim actuator in the «rod retracted»
direction.
200C ANTISLIP RELAY Antislip X

box
it switches trim actuator control circuits from manual
mode to automatic mode.
AA
04-83 3-104
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
201 C ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT (A.F.U.) D1-48
(See 13-2)
Consisting of a spring box, it transmits an artificial

accordance with spring box rod displacement. It is provided
with a safety microswitch cancelling the anti-slip function
as soon as it leaves its zero load setting due to linkage
displacement.
202C DIODES Antislip

21 5C box
Intended to protect relay contacts in trim actuator
electric motor power supply circuits.
See 08-3for description and operation.

- Following lights are associated with rudder control
system :
- «YAW» amber light
- «RUD» amber light.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION

AD
BREGUET AVIATION
U^^ZT^
^ûF3^^^
MIRAGE
.........
F
nJ
RUDDER LINKAGE
(Figures 3 and 4)
The rudder linkage is of the semi-rigid type. It consists of rudder pedals 1, including two pedals the
movements of which are combined through an inter-connecting rod.
Each pedal actuates a quadrant itself driving a steel cable consisting of 3 elements.
These cables transmit pilot's commands to a quadrant 5 located in the fin. A bulkhead connector 4
is used on each cable to provide sealing at cockpit outlet. Two turnbuckles 20 are provided between
frames 20 and 22 for adjusting cable tension.
The linkage is rigid downstream of quadrant 5 and actuates releasable bellcrank 62C.
The releasable bellcrank output arm is connected through a rod to the selector valve of rudder
servo-control 59C, which servo-control directly drives the rudder (connected to udder R/H side).
Quadrant 5 controls the rod of A.F.U. 201C in parallel, the A.F.U. body being connected to trim
actuator 85C.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F

LINKAGE LAYOUT
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
J
sC.CS>
MIRAGE F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(Figure 4)
The rudder control system is hydraulically supplied from system 1 (sub-system B) and system 2
(sub-system D) (See 07-1 : Hydraulic power generation).
1 Servo-control 59C is supplied simultaneously :
- from system 1 , supplying barrel 1 .

- from system 2, supplying barrel 2.
2 Releasable bellcrank 62C, which is inserted in control systems, is only supplied from system 1
through electrically-operated selector valve 61C.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MANUAL C4
LEGENDE KEY
Circuit System
1 1
Circuit 2 System 2
Retour Return
Venant de Venant de
C2 branche D CI branche B
From system 2 From system 1

Secteur sub-system B
sub-system D
Quadrant
61 C
ïU\
Vers
59 C aides au
pilotage
To flying
aids
Vers aides Ou pilotage -[^^J.
To flying aids
/* I *\
FIGURE 4 - CIRCUIT HYDRAULIQUE (SCHEMA)

AB HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^Z^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^j^^-<^<> ,.
. . . . . . .
OPERATION OF RUDDER CHANNEL
Rudder control is obtained by actuating rudder pedals. Automatic control is provided at low IAS
with flaps down to combine roll control and rudder control.
Moreover, the rudder control system performs the following functions :
- Yaw damping function, required for automatic control mode.

- Anti-slip function.
In manual control mode, the power servo-control can be controlled :
either electrically, through releasable bellcrank position pickoff in the case where yaw damping is
-
being effected. In that case, a yaw damping signal is fed together with electrical flight command.
- or mechanically, through the linkage acting directly on servo-control main selector valves when
yaw damping system is failed (releasable bellcrank in locked configuration).
1- MANUAL CONTROL (Figure 5)
A- Releasable bellcrank 62C
Located in the upstream vicinity of power servo-control, the releasable bellcrank is intended to
convert the mechanical flight command transmitted by the linkage into an electrical command intended
to control rudder servo-control 59C.
(1) Description
It is fitted with a dual position pickoff permanently detecting the difference existing between the
positions of arms A and C, i.e. the difference existing between servo-control and linkage positions. Any
deviation causes an electrical signal (intended to cancel such a deviation) to be fed to torque motor 21.
Such a deviation is limited by elastic stops 26 located on releasable bellcrank and is monitored by
safety microswitches detecting any operating trouble likely to cause excessive deviation to take place
between pilot's linkage A and servo-control linkage B.
(2) Operation
Yaw damping is controlled by switch 56C set to «YAW». This causes electricaJly-operated selector
valve 61 C to be energized and therefore releasable bellcrank arms A and B to be hydraulically unlocked.
Any flight command transmitted by the linkage will cause differential displacement of releasable
bellcrank arms A and C to take place. The pickoff will detect that deviation, causing a signal to be fed
by the flying aid rack to the servo-control torque motor. The servo-control moves and then cancels the
deviation existing between both arms.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
62 C
LEGENDE KEY
Circuit 1
System 1
Circuit 2
= System 2
Retour
Return
Circuit 1
Branche B
System 1
Sub-system B
FIGURE 5 - COMMANDE ELECTRIQUE NORMALE PAR CHAINE 1
NORMAL ELECTRICAL CONTROL THROUGH CHANNEL 1

AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^j^3
jL^^Z^.
^-<^0
MIRAGE F
B Rudder servo-control
Setting switch 56C to «YAW» causes solenoid valve 22 and torque motor 21 to be energized.
(1 ) Normal electrical control through electrical circuit 1
-Switch 56C is set to «YAW».

-Electrically-operated selector valve 61 C is energized and transmits hydraulic pressure fed by
system (sub-system B).
1
- Arm A of releasable bellcrank 62C is unlocked and positioned correctly within stops 26.
- Servo-control solenoid valve 22 is energized (open position).
- Torque motor 21 is energized.
Rudder control is obtained by actuating rudder pedals 1 .
The command is transmitted mechanically to arm A of releasable bellcrank 62C, and then
electrically from releasable bellcrank 62C to torque motor 21 of servo-control 59C.
Barrel 1 :
-System 1 pressure pushes back by-pass valve 23 which then allows hydraulic pressure to be
directed to chamber A or B.
- System 1 pressure, is sent to the servo-valve of torque motor 21 through open solenoid valve 22.
- The flight command and yaw damping signal generated by the flying aid rack is transmitted to
torque motor 21 through electrical circuit 1.
The torque motor flap tilts and blanks off one of the servo-valve nozzles, which causes the pressure
to be directed to one or to the other side of selector valve 24.
The displacement of selector valve 24 causes the hydraulic fluid to be directed to power stage
chamber A or B, therefore causing the servo-control body to move and to drive the rudder. The signal
received by torque motor 21 is then cancelled by potentiometer type sensing system of releasable
bellcrank 62C.
Barrel 2 :
-System 2 pressure pushes back by-pass valve 25 which then allows hydraulic pressure to be
directed to power stage chamber A or B.
Barrel 2 is controlled by common selector valve 24.
(2) Electrical control through electrical circuit 2.
This mode of operation takes place in the case of failure of electrical circuit 1 . Electrical circuit 2
is automatically set into service by the flying aid safety channel.
Servo-control 59C operates in the same manner as with electrical circuit 1 .
(3) Mechanical control (Figure 6)
This mode of operation takes place in the following cases :
- Simultaneous failure of electrical circuits 1 and 2.

- Failure of hydraulic system 1 and emergency system.
- Yaw damper not engaged (switch 56C set to «OFF»).
Electrically-operated selector valve 61 C is connected to reservoir return system.
The arms of releasable bellcrank 62C are locked.
The rudder is then controlled mechanically from rudder pedals up to selector valve 24 of
servo-control 59C (no damping function).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
62 C
r ' 'i
Circuits
électriques
Electrical
circuits
WO
Circuit 2
Branche D
1
J System 2 Circuits
T Sub-system D
Circuits Electrical électriques
électriques circuits Electrical
' r __i circuits
48 C
48 C LEGENDE
KEY
bmm Circuit 1
System 1
mm=mm ClTCUlf 2
System 2
Circuit 1
Branche B Retour
System 1 Return
Sub-system B
FIGURE 6 - COMMANDE MECANIQUE SERVO DIRECTION

RUDDER SERVO-CONTROL MECHANICAL CONTROL
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL-i>-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^S. ^ ^
MIRAGE F
2- YAW DAMPING
Damping signals are sent to servo-control 59C to stabilize the aircraft along its flight path. Such
signals are generated by the flying aids rack from information provided by the yaw rate gyro. They are
fed together with flight commands transmitted by the linkage.
Damping signals cause servo-control 59C to operate as previously described in paragraph B.
3- AUTOMATIC CONTROL
Automatic control can be effected only if the yaw damping system is operating, but it is
independent of the autopilot system.
A Operation
Automatic control takes place as soon as switch 56C is set to «YAW» or to «ANTI-SLIP».
From information fed by an accelerometer system, the flying aids rack generates an anti-slip
signal which supplements the yaw damping signal.
B Electrically-controlled change-over to manual mode
The anti-slip function which causes automatic control to take place is cancelled :
either through pilot's action on rudder pedals (actuation of microswitch located on AFU 201C),
-
- or as soon as the aircraft touches the ground (actuation of microswitch 6 located on LH U/C
shock absorber).
C Mechanically-controlled change-over to manual mode
Such a change-over can be due :

- either to simultaneous failure of electrical circuits 1 and 2,
- or to simultaneous failure of hydraulic system 1 and emergency system.
4- ROLL AND RUDDER CONTROL COMBINATION
Such a combination takes place at low IAS with flaps down when yaw damping and autopilot
systems are operating.
The autopilot supplies the servo-control with a command proportional to the control stick
displacement in roll, so as to obtain a balanced turn (see 13-1 ).
5- RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM (see figure 7)
The pilot is relieved of constant actuation of rudder pedals, in the case of change in aircraft
aerodynamical balance, through the use of trim actuator 85C. Such a trim actuator provides the
possibility of obtaining zero load setting of artificial feel unit (AFU) (201 C) for any rudder position.
A Rudder trim control
The trim system is controlled either manually or automatically (with anti-slip function selected).
AC
BREGUET
/L=^~TiX
AVIATION^P3^^"^
MIRAGE F
....... .ai nl
(1) Operation in manual mode
Trim actuator 85C is controlled from «RH - LH» control switch 84C located on LH cockpit
console. The «anti-slip» relay 200C being de-energized, the trim actuator extends or retracts its rod in
accordance with contacts made by the control switch.
When no load is applied on pilot's control (A.F.U. set to zero load configuration), the actuator rod
drives the whole rudder channel from rudder pedals up to servo-control.
Automatic control is effect by the flying aids (through amplifier 48C) when the anti-slip function
is being selected.
(a) Principle
As soon as an electrical signal, sent to servo-control for correcting slipping, exceeds a given
threshold, the trim actuator is automatically operated through the flying aid rack so as to obtain pilot's
linkage displacement in the same direction as servo-control displacement.
This is intended to obtain between releasable bellcrank arms A and B a sufficient travel range on
either side of middle setting position, which range is provided for servo-control displacements caused by
damping signals. Without such a function, there would be a risk (in the case of high disturbance
entailing simultaneous damping and anti-slip corrections) of causing the operation of one of the
releasable bel Icran safety microswitches, therefore cutting off flight control channel electrical controls
(yaw and roll damping, autopilot and anti-slip functions).
(b) Operation
As soon as the anti-slip is being selected, a signal fed by flying aid amplifier 48C causes «anti-slip»
relay 200C to be energized, which relay causes control circuits to be switched over from manual mode
to automatic mode.
The control signals fed by the flying aids actuate relay 198C or 199C, depending on the direction
in which trim actuator has to move.
Slow trim actuator operation (about 3°/minute) is obtained through a device causing the electric
motor to operate under pulse conditions.
(c) Change-over from automatic to manual control
Manual control is restored in the following cases :
Cancellation of anti-slip function

-
Operation of microswich loctated in A.F.U. 201 C, due to a load applied to rudder pedals.
-
- Operation of LH gear leg microswitch when the aircraft is touching ground.
- Operation of rudder safety device (cancellation of damping function causing autopilot, anti-slip
and automatic trim functions to be no longer available).
Automatic trim safety device
A safety device is provided to cancel the anti-slip function and trim motor electrically power
supply simultaneously in the case where the electric motor is subjected to any incidental double
excitation.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTî*^.-^! MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^S53^-^^ haw.. .a. m
B Rudder trim indicating
Rudder trim indications are provided on trim indicator 82C, indicating trim actuator positions.
This indicator is common to the three trim control systems (yaw, roll and pitch). Trim indications are
supplied by the potentiometer built into the trim actuator and controlling the displacement of a center
bar moving to the right or to the left on the corresponding trim indicator dial.
6- FAILURES
A Hydraulic failure of system 1 and emergency system
Releasable bellcrank 62C becomes automatically locked. The yaw damping or automatic control
function is no longer available and servo-control 59C has its nominal force reduced by 50%.
The «YAW», « ROLL» and « RUD» amber lights come on on failure warning panel 1 W.
B Hydraulic failure of system 2
Such a failure has no effect on rudder control which can be still effected electrically through yaw
damping function but the servo-control has its nominal force reduced by 50%.
C Failure of electrical circuit 1
servo-control positions occurs, the flying aid safety channel is set into service through releasable
bellcrank microswitches. Rudder control is then effected by electrical system 2 with «RUD» light
coming on on failure warning panel 1 W.
D Electrical power supply failure (circuits 1 and 2)
- Electrically-operated selector valve 61C is de-energized and causes arm A or B of releasable

bellcrank 62C to become locked by connecting hydraulic system 1 to reservoir return system.
- Solenoid valve 22 is no longer energized (closed) and torque motor 21 is no longer fed with any
command.
This results in mechanical control without damping configuration. The «YAW» and «RUD» amber
lights come on on failure warning panel 1 W.
NOTE : When a failure occurs, the pilot has at its disposal servo reset button 54C which allows the
failed channel to be reset into service, provided that the causes of failure have disappeared.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION, ^S55
81 C
83 C R/H 200 C
215C RE
84 C ?T~
ni
L/H ^ -«-- , n J
RR
202 C «-
Ho
197C
S\j~
ri
RR = fotf retraction
RE = flod extension
198C
ri rz 99 C
«/W Z./W 48 C Z./W R/H

il
.201 C
L..
FIGURE 7 - DER TRIM SYSTEM DIA GRAM
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^£. ^-^ ^
MIRAGE
illil
F
-.
RUDDER PEDALS
(Figure 8)
1 - GENERAL
I Rudder pedals 1 , which consist of two indépendant pedals, are intended to perform the following
functions :
A Rudder control (by pushing R/H or L/H pedal).
B Nosewheel steering
C Normal wheel braking (by depressing pedal upper part).
Rudder pedals are provided with fore and aft adjustment to suit pilot's size.
2- DESCRIPTION
Each rudder pedal is fitted, through ball bearings 31 , to casing 3 screwed under L/H or R/H arch 4
in cockpit.
Both rudder pedals are combined through two L/H and R/H forward quadrants 2 connected
together through interconnecting rod 32. Each quadrant includes :
- Rod 26, provided for connection to corresponding pedal

- Control cable attachment 34
- Locating hole 35, intended for the pin securing quadrant 2
- Stop screw 36, integral with quadrant support 37 and limiting rudder pedal travel.
Each rudder pedal consists of :
- Casing 3
- Arm 5
- Adjustment mechanism 6
- Pedal 7
- Output bellcrank 8
- Return spring system 9
- Brake system bellcrank 10
- Brake system rod 11.
A - Casing 3
It includes :
- Bearing cages accommodating the following :

- Hinge pin 1 2 for arm 5 and output bellcrank 8.
- Spacers 13, supporting the hinge of brake system bellcrank 10.
-Spring 14
- Adjustment stop screw 15.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION -^S3
MIRAGE F
B- Arm 5
It bears the following :
- Pedal hinge pin 16

- Adjustment mechanism 6
- Pin 1 9, acting as a stop to output bellcrank 8
- Spring attachment 20 (spring return system 9).
C Adjustment mechanism 6
It includes :
- Adjustment plate 17, hinge to arm 5
- Locking pin 18
-Spring 21.
D - Pedal 7
It pivots on bearings 22 and supports pin 23 to which is fitted brake system rod 1 1 .
E Output bellcrank 8
It includes :
- Pedal adjustment quadrant 24

- Bearing 25, accommodating the clevis of forward quadrant connecting rod 26.
The R/H rudder pedal bellcrank is fitted with a ball joint 38 provided for connection of steering
control potentiometer connecting rod.
F Return spring system 9
It includes a spring 27, contained between two flanges and mounted on hinge pin 12 of arm 5 and
spring attachment 20 integral with arm 5.
G Brake system bellcrank 10
It includes :
- Fixed stop 28
- Stop plate 29, associated with adjustment stop screw 15.
- Attachment point of brake system ro 1 1 .
- Attachment point of spring 14.
- Ball-joint provided ^for attachment of brake system selector valve control rod.
H Brake system rod 11.
It ensures connection between pedal 7 and brake system bellcrank 10.
3- OPERATION
A Rudder control
Both rudder pedals move within planes parallel to aircraft centerline. Pushing one pedal causes
corresponding quadrant to be rotated through rod 26. The actuated quadrant drives the other quadrant.
Each quadrant drives a control cable connected to fin quadrant.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL=*V'^VL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATI0NJx^3^L~--5:iC4*O
^S^S*-^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 04
B Normal braking
Depressing the upper part of R/H or L/H pedal 7 causes brake system bellcrank 10 to be rotated,
through brake system rod 11, up to adjustable stop 15 integral with support. This bellcrank actuates
corresponding brake system selector valve control rod 30. Releasing the upper part of rudder pedal
causes the assembly to be returned in «brake released» position against stop plate 33 through spring 14.
Such springs are also used to provide the pilot with an artificial feel of braking load.
C Pedal adjustment
Pedal adjustment is obtained by means of adjustment plates 17. When depressed laterally by pilot's
foot, such an adjustment plate pivots about its hinge pin, causing the locking pin of adjustment
quadrant 24 to be withdrawn and return spring 21 to be compressed. The pedal assembly is returned
against pilot's foot by return spring 27. Locking occurs once adjustment plate 17 is released. Locking
pin 18 engages into adjustment quadrant 24 under the action of spring 21.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MANUAL 04
FIGURE 8 - PEDALIER
RUDDER PEDALS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION . _
MIRAGE F
RUDDER ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT
(Figure 9)
1 - GENERAL
accordance with such a displacement.
I Inserted in a channel including servo-controls, it allows a progressive artificial feel varying in

accordance with rudder pedal displacement applied to pilot's linkage.
The A.F.U. is provided with a microswitch cutting off the anti-slip circuit as soon as the rod leaves
zero load setting, in one direction or in the other.
2- DESCRIPTION
The rudder A.F.U. consists of :
- Body 1
- Rod 2
- Two seats 3
- Spring 4
- Nut 5
- Attachment clevis 6
- Microswitch 9.
A - Body 1
An attachment clevis is machined at one end of body 1 while the other end is blanked off by
nut 5.
Body 1 contains the A.F.U. constituent items.
B- Rod 2
It slides in the cylinder and its displacement in either direction drives one seat 3, therefore causing
the spring to be compressed.
C- Seat 3
They act as a seat to spring 4.
Their bore and outer surface are provided with three machined grooves accommodating a teflon
ring 1 8 or 19. Such teflon rings are intended to reduce frictions between seats and rod, as well as inside
body 1 .
D Spring 4
Bearing against two seats 3, it is more or less compressed depending on A.F.U. lengthening or
shortening.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZUî^l
BREGUET AVIATION^PV^fCb
MIRAGE
......,., n.
F
E- Nut 5
Screwed onto body 1, it allows moving assembly end play to be cancelled and initial setting of
spring 4 to be adjusted.
F Attachment clevis 6
I Screwed onto rod outer end, it is connected to the latter by nut 8. It is used to adjust the A.F.U.
to length in the aircraft.
I It is fitted, as the clevis-shaped body end, with a pin 1 0 and a nut 1 1 .
G Microswitch 9
Microswitch 9 is supported by an angle 12 attached to body 1 through two screws 13 and two
tabwashers 1 4.
The assembly is protected by cover 1 5 attached to the angle through three screws 16, each of these
screws being fitted with a washer 17.
An electrical cable ended by a connector is used to connect the microswitch to the aircraft
electrical system.
3- OPERATION
In rest configuration, the A.F.U. rod is held in neutral position due to spring initial setting.
This initial setting corresponds to A.F.U. threshold.
Any load higher than threshold value causes the A.F.U. rod to move in one direction (extension or
retraction).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION w^^3
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 04 j
10-11 1, 2., 16-17 . 12 , 15_ ^16-17 ,_13-14 ^18 _19 ^,10-11
fff T Q
f^^^V^VVV^^^^^^V^^^^
^vvvvvvvvvN^^^f^^vv^vvvvy^
9 3.
Jl\ 250 mm (10 in)

f^~^ffi
110 mm (4.33 in) .Gaine RILG 404-0
-*-
$<>: Sheath RILG 404-0
35 mm (1.37 in)
Comparateur
ï m
«XS
1 -
Dial indicator m
2 - Bouton moleté 12-^ 27-28.
LJManchons en gaine RNF 100-1-1-4 noire
Knurled knob
Lg 12 mm (0.47 in)
3 - Pion
Stub
Black sleeves RNF 100- 1- 1-4
Length : 12 mm (0.47 in) -
4 - Touche
Feeler Course no O
5- Vis Travel .Manchon en gaine
Screw RNF 100-1-1-4 noire ? 1
6 - Ecrou Lg 25 mm (1 in) I
Nut ' Black sleeve
7 - Support de comparateur RNF 100-1-1-4 r c 1

Dial indicator support Length : 2E mm (1 in) I ( i
31-32
1
-4B
g
Manchons en gaine RNF 100-2-1-8
Lg20mm (0.8 in)
Sleeves RNF 100-2-1-8
I
1
I
w Length : 20 mm (0.8 in)

1
1
« -
1
Jeu < 0,25 mm fO.O/ /7?J_ TÇ

/Va/
SCHEMA DE CABLAGE
MESURE DU JEU DIAMETRAL DE LA TIGE WIRING DIAGRAM
MEASOREMENT OF ROD RADIAL PLA Y
FIGURE 9 - SYSTEME DE RESTITUTION ARTIFICIELLE DE DIRECTION

RUDDER ARTIFICIAL FEEL UNIT
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* TW'^* /Y\|I\/"\VJH_ l
BREGUET AVIATION _^4-~^s**^> A ... . A ,
.- n.
^^ ^s-^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF RUDDER AFU
A - Special tools
-Flight control 1st line tool kit

-11 5-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply
C - Spares
- 1 locking pin 2331 0 AA 01 501 5 L
-Lacing and tying cord
2 - MATERIALS
- Grease AI R 4222 or 421 0
- Remove fillets 36-01 -1 and 36-1 1 -1 (access to AFU fixed points).

-Remove access doors D1.48 - D2.51 and D1.53.
-Connect the hydraulic power supply to system 1 .
-Actuate the trim system to bring the rudder to RH stop.
-Disconnect the hydraulic power supply.
4 - REMOVAL OF AFU
-Remove the pin that attaches the trim actuator to the bellcrank (1 0-mm wrench).
-Bring the bellcrank arm located on AFU side in line with the skin holes.
-Cut the binding cord and disconnect the safety microswitch connector.
-Remove the AFU-to-bellcrank attaching pin (10-mm box wrench).
-Remove the AFU-to-quadrant attaching pin (10-mm wrench).
-Remove the bonding braid.
-Recover the two teflon nutation-limiting washers.
- Remove the AFU through the door.
5 - INSTALLATION
Installation is to be performed in the reverse order of removal:

-adjust AFU length so that the AFU can be pinned easily at both ends (approximate
length can be measured on removed AFU),
-lubricate the pins lightly before installation,
-engage the AFU in its housing, first inserting the end opposed to rod side (adjustable
endpiece on quadrant side),
-install the attaching pin on bellcrank side, with the head (located by clevis stop)
directed towards fin LH side. Fit the nutation-limiting washer and tighten the nut (10-mm box
wrench),
-install the attaching pin on quadrant side, with the head (located by clevis stop) di¬
rected towards fin inboard side. Fit the nutation-limiting washer and the nut (10-mm wrench),
-connect the safety microswitch connector; bind the electrical wiring,
-install the pin attaching the trim actuator to the bellcrank, with the head directed
towards fin RH side. Fit the washer and the nut (10-mm wrench), and lock it with a pin.
AA
BREGUET
ti^J>^rs\
AVIATION^cTT __
MIRAGE F
6- FINAL STEPS
- Return the rudder to neutral setting, then check that the assembled quadrant can be pinned
easily and without stress (pin MS 1390-20-830).
- Perform plotting of rudder pedal forces (see 04-3). Check that the AFU does not come into
contact with other components in the compartment during its travel ; specially check routing of the
safety microswitch wiring. Make sure that the attaching pin is properly pinned.
- Check the antiskid channel (see 13-1).
- Tighten the clevis-to-AFU extension rod locknut to the specified torque and safety it.
- Reinstall the doors and fillets.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L.J>^Z^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F^^^Ô it n .
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF RUDDER SERVO-CONTROL
(Figure 10)
A Special tools
-Tool kitF1-CVB
B Standard tools

- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)
C Spares
- 1 locking pin 2331 0 AA 020025 L
-1 locking pin 23310 AA 01 5015 L

- 1 locking pin 2331 0 AA 01 001 2 L
- Blanking plug for access hole to servo-control fixed point side pin.
- Blanking plug for access hole to servo-control sliding rod side pin.
2- MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4217.
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01-0).
Servo-controls are interchangeable. No operation is permitted on servo-control. Any operation

causing the center-to-center distance to be altered requires the component to be sent to the
manufacturer for complete adjustment.
Remove doors and plugs D2-42, D2-43, D3-48 and D3-45.
CAUTION :
IT IS IMPERATIVE, BEFORE APPLYING HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IN AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
(PARTIAL OR COMPLETE PRESSURIZATION), THAT THE OPERATOR SHOULD CHECK
THAT BOTH CONNECTIONS BETWEEN SERVO-CONTROL AND RELEASABLE
BELLCRANK ARE EITHER BOTH CONNECTED OR BOTH DISCONNECTED.
MOREOVER, IN THE CASE WHERE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS APPLIED IN ONE SYSTEM,
ANY OVERPRESSURE APPLIED (EVEN MOMENTARILY) TO ONE OF THE ABOVE TWO
CONNECTIONS WILL CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGES TO BOTH COMPONENTS.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION j-?^3
SECTION D
VUE SUIVANT E
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW E
wvmwr
SECTION C
\K\\sysss\K\ss\\\\\\\SWte 3SS3E5SS
P '1
SECTION B
Rondelle Téflon
Teflon washer
VUE SUIVANT F
VIEW IN DIRECT/ON OF ARROW F
VUE SUIVANT G
VIEW IN DIRECT/ON OF ARROW G
Anciennes fabrications
Former manufacture
S'ECTION A
FIGURE 10- DEPOSE-POSE DE LA SERVOCOMMANDE DE DIRECTION

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF RUDDER SERVO-CONTROL
AB
02-85
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fJWMl MIRAGE
lMii\nwu. F
breguet Av.AT,oN^^gg^ Restricted MANUAL 04
5 - REMOVAL
-Disconnect electrical connectors from support.
-Disconnect servo-control bonding braids (7-mm open-end wrench).
-Disconnect hydraulic pipes from servo-control (14 and 16-mm open-end wrenches).
DO NOT TWIST FLEXIBLE PIPES WHILE LOOSENING COUPLINGS. BLANK OFF UNCOV¬
ERED PORTS AS PIPES ARE DISCONNECTED.
-Disconnect following rods:

-releasable bellcrank position pickoff control rod (8-mm open-end wrench)
-servo-control slide valve control rod (on servo-control side) (10-mm open-end
wrench).
- Remove both servo-control attaching pins.
On fixed point side:

-disengage lockplate from pin boss and pivot it on fixed point side attach fitting.
-remove attaching pin, recessed washer and self-locking nut (22-mm open-end
wrench).
-extract attaching pin through RH side skin hole.
On bellcrank side:
-remove attaching pin, recessed washer, nut (17 mm socket) and locking pin.
-extract attaching pin by bringing it opposite LH side skin hole.
6 - INSTALLATION
-Slightly lubricate pins and ball joints before installation. Check that the lubrication
groove on the lubricated ball-joint (fixed point side) is opposite the end-fitting notches used
for disassembly.
B - Installation
-Fit the servo-control into its compartment, on bellcrank side.
- Fit the two attaching pins.
Torque the nuts to:

-5.8 m.daN (42 ft.lb) on fixed point side,
-3.5 m.daN (25 ft.lb) on bellcrank side; fit locking pin.
-Connect the four flexible pipes and safety them with lockwire according to the figure
(views on F and G).
-Start with top connections:
-RH skin side R1 - door side P1
-RH skin side R2 - door side P2
CAUTION:
BFTJAREFUL NOT TO TWIST FLEXIBLE PIPES UPON INSTALLATION.
-Connect electrical connectors and bonding braids.
C - Check of travel limits
-Install the rudder deflection template.
-Supply pressure to hydraulic system 1 .
-Proceeding very slowly, manually actuate the slide valve to set the servo-control to its
retracted and extended stop positions and check that rudder deflections to the right and left
+ 1°
are 18° _ lQ
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" « / V\l l\ A\V^7I_ |
BREGUET AVIATION^-^
^^. ^j^^
^?-^> _ .
Restricted , » » a m i i a i
MANUAL r> a
04
CHECK THAT THROUGHOUT THE TRAVEL:

-PIPES ARE NOT RUBBING AGAINST ANY COMPONENT.
-PIPES ARE NOT TWISTED.
-Connect slide valve control rod 1 (head directed towards LH side of fin).
-Connect pickoff control rod 2.
CAUTION (Modification 459 not incorporated):

REMOVE THE PICKOFF ARM SECURING DEVICE.
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Check:
-that ail parts are correctly installed and that safetying has been carried out wherever
required,
-that lockplate is correctly in place on the boss of pin head, on fixed point side,
-that electrical connectors are connected.
-Bleed the hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).

-Carry out functional and adjustment check of rudder channel (see 04-3).
-Carry out adjustment and check of rudder releasable bellcrank position pickoff (see
13-1).
-Perform electrical tests of the rudder servo channel (see 13-1, sheet 6).
-Reinstall doors and new blanking plugs on pin access holes.
-Perform the integrated test of flight control electronics (see 13-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" ^ /V\H\/-\V^L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^^_»- ^s^^> . , ...,,,... nA
^ ^*^> Restricted MANUAL 04
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF RUDDER RELEASABLE BELLCRANK

(see figure 10)
A - Special tools
B - Standard tools
-ARSAERO coupling kit.
-Torque wrench accessory kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
C - Spares
-1 locking pin 2331 0AA02002OLE
-3 locking pins 2331 0AA01 501 5LE
-2 lockwashers 23350AC080LE
-1 plug F31 1-60-05
2 - MATERIALS
-Hydraulic fluid AIR 3520.
3 - GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (See 01 -0).
CAUTION:
IT IS MANDATORY, BEFORE APPLYING HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IN AIRCRAFT SYS¬
TEMS (PARTIAL OR COMPLETE PRESSURIZATION), THAT THE OPERATOR CHECK
THAT BOTH CONNECTIONS BETWEEN SERVO-CONTROL AND RELEASABLE BELL¬
CRANK ARE EITHER BOTH CONNECTED OR BOTH DISCONNECTED.
MOREOVER, IN THE CASE WHERE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE IS APPLIED IN ONE
SYSTEM, THE DISCONNECTION (EVEN MOMENTARILY) OF ONE OF THE ABOVE
TWO CONNECTIONS WILL CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGES TO BOTH COMPONENTS.
-Remove doors D2-43 and D1 -48, and blanking plug D2-48.
5 - REMOVAL
-Pin dual quadrant through hole D1-45, (rigging pin MS 1390-20-830).
-Remove releasable bellcrank control rod pin on dual quadrant side.
-Disconnect electrical connectors 62CA and 62CB.
-Remove electrical cable clamp.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f *\-"-*< /Y\ll\/-\\^L. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ - jS-^l
-»-^> _ ^
Restricted . m muai 04
a
MANUAL «a
-Remove:
-slide valve control rod pin on servo-control side,
-pickoff control rod pin on servo-control side.
-Disconnect hydraulic pipe (12 mm A/F).
-Remove releasable bellcrank hinge pin.
-Remove releasable bellcrank fitted with its three rods, being careful to recover the spacer
located in the plane of hinge point on releasable bellcrank LH side.
6 - PREPARATION BEFORE REPLACEMENT
DO NOT REMOVE STORAGE PIN FROM BELLCRANK.
-Connect releasable bellcrank to aircraft electrical system by connecting electrical con¬

nectors 62CA and 62CB. Check pickoff null point by means of position pickoff adjustment
unit (see manual 13-1).
-Disconnect electrical connectors 62CA et 62CB.
- Recover the three rods on removed bellcrank.
-Unfasten lockplates on pickoff rod and remove the latter.
- Fit spare releasable bellcrank with the three rods recovered upon removal, fit lockwash-
ers without bending the tabs for rod length adjustment purposes and safety the pins, except
the pickoff rod pin.
CAUTION:
THE ROD PINS MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE DIRECTION SHOWN IN THE FIGURE.
-Remove
-nemove pin.
storage pin.
storage
Install storage pin on removed bellcrank.
7 - REPLACEMENT
of support fitting
- Preparation
-Measure the place between the sliding bushing and shouldered bushing.
-Measure the dimension of the spare bellcrank at the swivel coupling; compare both
measurements.
- If necessary, change the position of the sliding bushing by slightly pushing it back
according to the measured spacing; use a sliding-weight extractor or a drift for this operation,
then clean.
-Locate the spare bellcrank.
-Torque the nut to 3.5 m.daN (25.81 ft.lb).
- Move the bellcrank by hand, making sure that there is no side play.
-Remove the bellcrank.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ Jl ** /V\|r\M\^t. T
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ï^~ ^.s-ô ^ . ^ . ,,,., «.
^-<-l >?^ Restricted MANUAL 04
8 - INSTALLATION
-Lightly lubricate (hydraulic fluid) the bellcrank pin and bore.

-Install releasable bellcrank, making sure that the spacer is installed on LH side.
-Align bellcrank properly.
-Install stop ring, being careful to position it correctly into both corresponding bellcrank
notches and on stop pin provided on structure. Torque nut to 3.5 m.daN (25.81 ft.lb) (17-mm
wrench). Install locking pin on nut.
-Connect hydraulic pipe.
-Connect:
-bellcrank rod to dual quadrant; do not safety,
-pickoff rod to servo-control; do not safety,
-slide valve control rod (fitted with new lockplate) to servo-control; do not bend
lockplate.
-Connect electrical connectors 62CA-62CB.
-Install electrical cable clamp.
-Unpin dual quadrant.
9 - FINAL STEPS
-Adjust and check the rudder releasable bellcrank position pickoff (see 13-1).
-Install:
-locking pin on pickoff rod -to-servo-control attaching pin,
-locking pin on bellcrank rod-to-dual quadrant attaching pin.
-Bend lockplate fitted to slide valve control rod -to-servo-control attaching pin.
-Perform electrical tests of rudder servo channel (see 13-1 ), sheet 6).
-Reinstall doors D2-43 and D1-48.
-Reinstall blanking plug D2-48.
-Perform the integrated test of the flight control electronics (see 13-0).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT t^^-^X. /V\U\/-\V-7L- \
^£^
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ~Zs*£^>
-.f-o Restricted aaamiiai
MANUAL i\a
04
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF RUDDER AFU

(figure 9)
A - Special tools
B - Standard tools
-Accessory kit for torque wrenches kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) and 5 to
50 m.daN (40 to 350 ft.lb).

-Mechanical test stand MKM043.
D - Spares
-2 tabwashers (attachment of bracket-mrcroswitch-wiring assembly) 23350AC040LE
-2 nuts (AFU attachment) 6CR4903
-7 washers (cover and clamp attachment) 200251 -24
-1 lockwasher 05S01 6 P005
-4 bearing rings 06S0181003
-2 bearing rings 06S0381001
2 - MATERIALS
-Grease Ml LG. 4343.
3 - DISASSEMBLY
-Unscrew and remove both nuts 11 then remove both pins 10. With the AFU neither
compressed nor released, accurately measure the center-to-center distance between attaching
I clevises (theoretical dimension: 363 ± 3 mm) (14.157 ± 0.12 in).
1 -Remove both clamps 22 and 23.
-Unlock nuts 7 and 8.
-Unlock nut 7 (wrench MHC 100-22), then unscrew and remove nut 5 (wrench
MHC 100-22).
- Remove the moving assembly from the body and grip it in a vice fitted with fiber jaws
(grip moving assembly by means of rod 2 flange).
-Measure dimension B with accuracy.
-Unlock nut 8 (wrench D017) then unscrew and remove clevis 6 (10-14 x 17 wrench),
and nut 8.
-Straighten lockwasher 33.
-Unlock and remove nut 20 (wrench D23). Remove lockwasher 33, unscrew nut 21
(wrench MHJ 100-21 ) then remove first stop 3, spring 4 and second stop 3 from the rod.
-On cover 1 5, remove three screws 16, washers 17 and the cover.
-Straighten both tabwashers 14 and remove both screws 13. Remove the assembly con¬
sisting of bracket 1 2, microswitch 9 and associated wiring.
-Clean all removed parts (except the bracket-microswitch-wiring assembly) through ul¬
trasonic process or by brushing them with clean white spirit. In the latter case, dry with clean
and dry compressed air.
NOTE: While cleaning, make sure that the vent holes in body 1 are clear.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ^-MX /VUKMVÊ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^ëT^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
the rod.
-On both stops 3, blend out the edges of any marks caused by the spring if the depth of
-Install bracket 12 on body 1 with screws 13 and 14.
-Place a flat-feeler dial indicator support tool (similar to the one shown in figure) on
bracket 12.
-Insert rod 2 in body 1 and measure the rod radial play in its bore by means of the dial
indicator (see figure).
The play should be less than 0.25 mm (0.01 in). If a higher value is recorded, send the
equipment to the next higher maintenance line.
-Withdraw rod 2, then remove the tool and bracket 12 from body 1 .
-Check that the free length of spring 4 is comprised between 85.1 and 88.6 mm (3.318
and 3.455 in).
-Check the bearing faces of nuts 7 and 5 and of nut 8 and clevis 6 which should show
no evidence of distortion, burrs or dents; otherwise, replace nut 7 or 8 and attenuate the de¬
fects on nut 5 or clevis 6 bearing face without modifying the perpendicularity of the face in re¬
lation to the axis of the part.
-Using a cloth smeared with a slight amount of grease MIL.G.4343B lubricate the springs
and internal components of the equipment, then remove any excess grease from the sliding
surfaces so as to prevent grease accumulation at the internal stops or in the ring grooves. EX¬
CESS GREASE IS DETRIMENTAL TO AFU OPERATION.
5 - ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Upon assembly, lightly lubricate the threads of body 1 and rod 2.
-With rod 2 gripped in a vice fitted with fiber jaws, successively install first stop 3, spring
4 and second stop 3 on the rod.
-Screw and tighten nut 21 (wrench MHJ 100-21) until dimension B measured before di¬
sassembly is obtained.
- Fit new lockwasher 33.
-Screw and slightly tighten nut 20 (wrench D23) while holding nut 21 (wrench MHJ
100-21).
-Screw nut 7 onto body and insert moving assembly in body. Then, screw nut 5 until its
inner face comes just into contact with the stop (which causes any end play between body
and rod to be cancelled).
-Moderately tighten nut 7 while holding nut 5. ,
-Screw nut 8 onto rod threaded end. Then, screw clevis 6 (without trying to obtain an
exact center-to-center distance) and screw nut 8 on the latter.
-Install the bracket-microswitch-electrical cable assembly and attach it by means of two
screws 1 3, each of these screws being provided with a new tabwasher 1 4.
NOTE: Tabwashers will be bent and cover 1 5 will be installed only after AFU tests.
6 - TESTS
(See AFU adjustment and calibration).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ J' * /Y\ll\/"\wL. I
BREGUET AVIATION J^»
^-l
^**^
^-^ Restricted
,,..,,,.,
MANUAL
A
04
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF RUDDER HINGES

-Grease gun.
2 - MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 3512
3 - INSPECTION
-Check rudder for:
-condition, security of attachment and general aspect of hinges,
-absence of foreign matter around hinges,
-condition and security of attachment of bonding braids,
-condition and security of attachment of control rod,
-correct locking of various connections,
-absence of friction against structure,
-correct locking of special shacklê-to-fin attaching screws.
4 - CLEANING - SERVICING (See 04-1 , Figure 1 8)
A - Cleaning
-Perform dry cleaning of following:

-hinge knuckles, using a dry rage or a clean brush,
-grease-nipples.
IMPORTANT : Never use trichloréthylène for the cleaning operation.
B - Servicing
(1 ) Lubricate the following:

-Center shackle,
-Rudder/drive rod hinge.
(2) Oil the following for protection purposes:
-Shackles:
-center,
-outer, taking care that no oil enters the bore of the self-aligning bearing ball pro¬
vided with an "AIRFLON" lining.
-Rudder/drive rod hinge.
(3) Remove excess grease and oil.
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Reinstall access doors.
AA
BREGUET
ti^J>^r\L
AVIATION^g. ^
MIRAGE
,,...,.
F
n,
INSPECTION OF RUDDER PEDALS
- Remove the radar nose cone (see 14-2).

- Remove door 02-00i.
2- INSPECTION
- Check each rudder pedal for :

- condition of various components
absence of play
- correct locking of all connections
- condition of brake system selector valve control return spring
- condition of pedal return spring
- correct operation of pedal adjustment mechanism :
- correct adjustment plate travel - no binding point
- condition of locking pin locking obtained in all positions
condition of rudder pedal-to-forward quadrant connecting rod
- condition of brake system selector valve control rod
- condition of stops and stop screw (stop screw properly locked)
- condition of bonding braids
- condition of rudder pedal-to-steering potentiometer unit connecting rod.
3- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall :
- door 02-00i (this requires cabin pressurization to be checked (see 09-2)).

- the radar nose cone (see 14-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^
lLJè^Z\L MIRAGE F
CALIBRATION CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER A.F.U.
(Figure 9)
1 - SCOPE
- To perform A.F.U. calibration check in the case where artificial feel loads are found to be out of
tolerance in aircraft.
-To perform A.F.U. adjustment after complete disassembly performed for servicing and
lubrication.
A Special tools
- Tool kit F1-CVD
B Standard tools

-Torque wrench accessory kit: 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) and 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to
350 ft.lb).
3- A.F.U. ADJUSTMENT
A Installation of A.F.U. on test stand
- Mechanical test stand MK M043 should be previsously fitted with all adaptors provided for
A.F.U. installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook).
- Using the attaching pins belonging to test stand :
- Pin clevis 6 to balance beam.
- Pin body 1 to moving poppet.
- Rotate moving poppet control wheel so as to set the balance beam in horizontal position
(pointer set to zero). The A.F.U. is then set to neutral (no load applied).
NOTE : The ratio available with balance scales hooked to beam ends is 10 : 1 .
The correspondence between the weight placed on one scale and the load applied to the
A.F.U. rod is as follows :
Weight (kg) = 1.02 x load (daN) x 0,1
CAUTION :
ANGULAR MOVEMENTS.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^__
iL^^TU.
^^
MIRAGE F
B Threshold check
placed in contact with the bellcrank to which piston clevis is pinned.
-Place on one scale a weight corresponding to minimum threshold value, i.e. 19,5 daN
(43.8 Ib.wgt). The dial indicator pointer deflects slightly but such a deflection is not to be taken into
- Threshold should be obtained with a load of 19,5 to 22,5 daN (43.8 to 50.5 Ib.wgt) applied to
the rod.
-Should threshold be obtained with a load lower than above range, tighten nut 21. On the
contrary, if the threshold is obtained with a higher load, this nut must be loosened.
In both cases :
Remove A.F.U. from test stand MK M043.
-
- Untighten nut 7, then nut 5 (wrench MHC 100-22) and then nut 20 (wrench D23).
- Tighten or untighten nut 21 (wrench MHJ 100-21).
- Tighten nut 20, screw nut 5 until no more end play exists between body and rod and moderately
tighten nut 7.
- Perform threshold check again.
- Remove weights from the scale and set the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer set to
zero) without applying any load to A.F.U.
- Using a depth gauge, measure dimension A comprised between depth gauge bearing face and
external face of nut 5. Then, pin the balance beam.
(1) to exert a force of 150 daN (337.2 Ib.wgt) on the rod.

Place on one scale a weight likely
Rotate the moving poppet control wheel to equalize forces and unpin the beam.
-
- With the beam in horizontal position (pointer set to zero), slightly act on one side of balance
beam to obtain small rod displacement, and then slowly bring the pointer back to zero by rotating the
moving poppet control wheel. Measure dimension B between depth gauge bearing face and nut 5.
- Slightly act on the other side of balance beam to also obtain small rod displacement and then
reset the pointer to zero by means of moving poppet control wheel. Measure corresponding
dimension C and pin the balance beam.
-The «B-A» and «C-A» values should be comprised between 21 and 25.5mm (0.0826 and
1.003 in).
comprised within same tolerances.
(3) After each test and with balance beam pinned, check that A.F.U. rod travel is equal to 25,5 mm
D Test results
- Out-of-tolerance threshold or end play existing with no load applied : Refer to end of
paragraph 3.B.
- Out-of-tolerance travel : In the case where the travel difference is small, it might be possible to
obtain an adjustment satisfactory for all tests by varying the threshold value. Otherwise, perform spring
replacement.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^<<c_
// à>-tJr'U
_ ^
MIRAGE F
E Final steps
-With A.F.U. extended, hold nut 21 (using wrench MHJ 100.21) and torque nut 20 to 1.4 m.daN
(10.32 ft.lb) (wrench D23).
- Bend the tabwasher on nuts 21 and 20.
- Remove the A.F.U. from test stand.
- Hold nut 5 (51 mm A/F ring spanner) and torque nut 7 to 2.6 m.daN (19.1 ft.lb) (wrench
MHC 100-22).
- Check that no end play exists between body and rod after tightening.
4- MICROSWITCH CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
- Reinstall the A.F.U. on test stand and connect its electrical connector to test stand test box
supplied with 28 V DC power.
- Set A.F.U. to zero load position and pin the balance beam.
- Remove cover 15 after removing its three attaching screws.
NOTE : This operation should be performed after A.F.U. calibration.
Check that :
- test box light 3 is on when A.F.U. is at rest
- test box light 3 goes out as soon as A.F.U. rod moves by a value equal to or lower than 3 mm
(0.118 in) (retraction or extension).
Also check that :

- once test box light is out, the vertical travel required for the microswitch blade roller to reach the
A.F.U. rod cylindrical section is equal to or higher than 0,4 mm (0.015 in),
-when returning the A.F.U. to zero load position, the vertical travel required for microswitch
roller to obtain maximum blade elongation once test box light has come on is equal to or higher than
0,4 mm (0.015 in).
Such checks should be performed in both «rod retraction» and «rod extension» directions.
Should measured values be found out of tolerance :

-straighten lockplate 28, remove both screws 27 and replace lockplate 28, then reinstall and
slightly tighten both screws 27
- move microswitch 9 and its blade with respect to supporting angle 12 and if required, also move
angle 12 with respect to body until obtaining a position providing for correct operation within above
tolerances
- when satisfactory adjustment is obtained, torque both screws 27 to 2.5 cm.daN (2.21 in.lb) and
then tighten both screws 13
- perform a new check so as to make sure that adjusment is not altered and bend lockplate 28.
NOTE : Perform microswitch and associated blade replacement in the case where correct adjustment
cannot be obtained.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL=à>-"r\)L
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
5- FINAL STEPS
The AFU center-to-center distance should be measured before performing any operation.
- Untighten nut 8 and screw or unscrew clevis 6 to obtain the center-to-center distance measured
before disassembly. Then, torque nut 8 to 2 m.daN (14.7 ft.lb) (wrench D017).
- Bend two tabwashers 14 then install and attach cover 15 by means of three screws 16, each fitted
with a new washer 17.
- Install both wiring clamps and install both screws 24, each fitted with a new washer 25. Then
screw and tighten both nuts 26, being careful to place a new washer 25 under each of these nuts.
- Lock nut 7.
-Clean and dry pins 10. Lubricate them lightly and install them on the body end clevis and
on clevis 6. Screw a new nut 1 1 on each pin (do not tighten).
-Check the insulation resistance with 45-V DC power applied accross electrical connector terminals
and AFU ground. The insulation resistance should not be lower than 20 megohms.
- Check the whole AFU for :

- general condition, condition of protections, electrical connector, wiring, etc.,
- proper locking of parts.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT \LJ>^trSk.
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^^ï-C*
MIRAGE F
^£25^=-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
FUNCTIONAL AND ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF RUDDER CHANNEL
1 - SCOPE
To check operation of rudder channel in mechanical control mode.
2- GENERAL
A Special tools
- Tool kit F1-CVB

- Rudder deflection template.
B - Standard tools
- Ground telephone

- 1 15/200 V 400- Hz electrical power supply.
- Install deflection template :

- Install template.
5- FUNCTIONAL CHECK
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted MANUAL C4
COUPE A
CROSS-SECTION A
îll11^!!! ;
a^^S^SI
FIGURE 11 - CONTROLE DU DEBATTEMENT DE LA GOUVERNE

AB CONTROL SUR FA CE DEFLECTION CHECK
BREGUET AVIATION ^^S»
J MIRAGE F
i
i
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
A Preliminary steps
(1) Energize electrical systems
(2) Apply pressure to system 1 Failure warning panel

«HYD. 1» out
«HYD. 2» T_
«EMG.HYD» J" on

set to «servos»
System 2:0
B Functional check of control - Move rudder pedals slowly and continuously, while making sure that the
Move rudder pedals over their control moves without any binding point and that the pedals resume neutral
whole fore and aft travels Trim indicator : Rudder set to 0° J position without any chattering.
bar set to neutral I
If not, determine the cause.
- Check that the fin quadrant can be pinned (rigging pin MS 1390-20-830).
C Functional tests
(1) Push RH pedal fully (17°30'± 10') Should the deflection value be found out of tolerance, determine the cause,
lf necessary, refer to worksheet «Adjustment of rudder channel».
(2) Push LH pedal fully (17°30'± 10')
(3) Actuate trim control switch Trim indicator : (>5°) !
to the left bar moving
(4) Actuate trim control switch (>5°)

to the right
(5) Actuate trim control switch Time required for total deflection :
from left to right and from right to left 14 to 19 seconds
D Functional tests with pressure Failure warning panel

applied to system 2 «HYD. 1» on
«HYD. 2» out
«EMG.HYD» on

set to «servos»
Dual hydraulic pressure gauge Actuate the rudder over its whole travel and check that forces remain the
System 1 : 0 same.
E Functional tests with pressure Failure warning panel

applied to systems 1 and 2 «HYD. 1» T
«HYD. 2» _T OUt Actuate the rudder over its whole travel and check that forces remain the
«EMG.HYD» on same.
AC
05-81 Restricted 3-510 3-51
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
, 1
CHECKS
OPERATIONS REMARKS

system i
( 1 ) Sta rt e lectro-pu m p Failure warninq panel

«HYD.1» ) 0n
«HYD. 2» )
«EMG.HYD»}^
«EP» J
System 1 :> 136 bar (1972 psi) Actuate rudder over its whole travel and check that loads
System 2 : 0 remain the same.
This operation is to be carried out during CHECKING OF
ELECTRO-PUMP PRESSURE SWITCH CALIBRATION (see 07-1).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove rudder deflection template

- Perform rudder channel servo system electrical tests (See 13-1).
AC
04-79 Restricted 3-511 3-51
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT IL^^Z^ZL
BREGUET AVIATION ^ZîP*^g^
MIRAGE
i , * ,. *
w .
F
ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
(Figure 12)
1 - SCOPE
To provide instructions for complete adjustment of control system concerned.
2- GENERAL
servo-controls, micrometric rods, dummy components, etc..) allowing basic linkage adjustment to be
determined and therefore providing for the interchangeability of certain system components.

ON LINKAGE EXCEPT AS REGARDS NORMAL OPERATIONS MENTIONNED IN THE
DOCUMENTATION AND WHICH CAN BE CARRIED OUT WITH NO RISK OF ALTERING THE
INITIAL ADJUSTMENT. In the case where operations are to be carried out on the linkage (structural
repair for instance), which operations require system components to be removed, it is IMPERATIVE
that length and setting of various components should be marked with accuracy before disassembly, or
that manufacturing tools should be used at reassembly so as to restore initial adjustment.
SHOULD A CONTROL BE FOUND OUT OF ADJUSTMENT, DO NOT.ALTER EXISTING

DETERMINED.
The following particular rules should be known and complied with each time operations are being
carried out on the system :
- Apply correct tightening torques to various connecting components (pins - rods). Rods should be
torqued on a bench.
- Use thimbles for mounting the pins, in order to prevent bores from being damaged. Slightly
lubricate pins before their installation.
- Be careful to install pins and rods with their heads and ends positioned properly.
- Make sure to install a teflon washer (anti-friction) or an anti-swivel ing cup whenever specified.
I
- Lock assembled components using locking pins, lockwires or lockplates and complying with
applicable instructions.
- Upon completion of adjustments, make sure that linkages operate freely with no unwanted
abutment.
- Safety measures to be taken for personnal protection (See 01-0).
- Instructions applicable to all works performed on aircraft systems (See 01-0).
- General instructions applicable to starting of aircraft systems and various installations (See 01-0).
A Special tools
-ToolkitF1-CVB
- Rudder deflection template
B Standard tools
-Tensiometer SARMA T60-1001C81A.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" J* /Y\ll\/-\\^l_
BREGUET AVIATION ^{lx ^j^ ,,..,., »,
^ ^?-*o Restricted MANUAL 04

-Remove linkage access doors.
5 - ADJUSTMENT OF LINKAGE BETWEEN RUDDER PEDALS AND FIN
A - Adjustment of rudder pedal linkage (cables not taut)
-Pin both forward quadrants (1) (at the base of LH and RH pedals) (use pins
MS 1390-30-810).
-If necessary, adjust interconnecting rod 2 so that its attaching pins can be installed ea¬
sily.
-Set rudder pedals to "medium pilot's size" setting (5th notch).
-Check "theoretical zero" position of each pedal (5th notch), as determined by the
393.7 mm (15.500 in) dimension between the pedal centerline at R = 380 mm (14.960 in)
and the facing panel of frame 2 (see figure detail A).
-If necessary, adjust length of RH and LH link rods (3) to bring the pedals as close
as possible to "theoretical zero" after changing the rod body lockwasher. Torque the check nut
and bend the lockwasher tabs.
-Install recessed washers, tighten nuts (10 mm socket wrench and 10 mm A/F
wrench) and fit cotter pin.
-Connect the bonding braids.
-Check the deflection of the rudder pedals along their entire travel.
-Retract the two pedal end-of -travel stop screws and install new safeties.
-Unpin the two forward quadrants.
-Note the pedal travels to the right and to the left and check for a deflection of over
70 mm (2.755 in) at structural stop.
-During this operation, check for abnormal friction and hard spots along the entire
travel of the pedals. Make the same check after setting the pedals in short pilot position then
in tall pilot position.
NOTE: During the deflection operations in "tall pilot" position, in case of interference between
the pin ends of the front cockpit rudder pedals and link rods 22, appreciably increase
the theoretical 393.7 mm (15.500 in) presetting dimension (pedal mid-travel posi¬
tion) by adjusting the length of rods 22 (LH and RH) so as to obtain a minimum suffi¬
cient clearance between the components, i.e. 2 mm (0.08 in), within the red mark
limiting maximum unscrewing of the adjustable clevis of each rod.
B - Adjustment of cables
(1 ) Installation of cables
-Check each pulley for freedom of movement.

-Front cables :
-fully screw the end fitting onto the plunger of the pressure seal and install a locking
pin (see figure detail B),
-install the cable ; couple it to the forward quadrant and insert the plunger through,
the pressure seal (oil slightly).
AB
w«, avutk»^. _^ - «esfricd MANUAL 04
- For intermediate cables :

- couple them to the sealed feedthrough piston. Safety turnbuckles with new pins.
- For rear cables :

- couple them to fin quadrant then connect them to intermediate cables.
(2) Install all cables
- Pin fin quadrant 5 (rigging pins MS 1390-20-830).

- Screw turnbuckles 6 by hand simultaneously without twisting them.
- Check cable routing and especially correct engagement in pulley grooves.
- Unpin fin quadrant.
(3) Cable tension adjustment
- Operate pedals several times, decreasing travel each time, to position cables correctly.
While performing this step, make sure that pedals do not bind or rub, and that all pulleys rotate
freely.
- The sealed feedthrough piston should project by at least 5 mm (0.20 in) with the pedals
in abutment on the left or right and should move correctly.
-The deflection clearance between cables and equipment or structure should be more than
5 mm (0.20 in) in the worst case.
It is therefore necessary to :
- stressresiliently-mounted equipment in the least favorable direction to check cable clearance,

- check position of taped piping and security of taping,
- simulate deflection of movable parts adjacent to cables.
- Cable tension shall be recorded at a temperature of 10° C - 30° C. At other temperatures, correct
per the attached table. Do not adjust tension with the aircraft in the sun, as the influence of the tem¬
perature on cable length relative to structure cannot be controlled.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
.^z-4^^±ï^m
-40'
- Pin LH forward quadrant (1).

+ 10 +45
- Operate gradually turnbuckles 6, in turn, until cable tension of 200 lb , Q (890 N Q) is
obtained, and, at the same time, the fin quadrant can- be smoothly pinned (without leaving the pin in
place). Turnbuckle readjustments must be symmetrical (each turnbuckle adjusted by half the amount
required), to avoid loss of previous adjustments (tension/quadrant pinning).
- Male cable terminations must be immobilized (7 mm A/F wrenches) when turnbuckles are being
screwed or unscrewed, to avoid twisting cables.
- Take a number of readings at different points between frames 28 and 30.
IMPORTANT :
AFTER ADJUSTMENT, CABLE TERMINATION MALE THREADS MUST NOT BE VISIBLE.
- Safety turnbuckles with new pins.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 04
Anciennes fabrications
Former manufacture
VUE SUIVANT G
Biellettes de conjugaison
servo guignol débrayable
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW G
Servo-control/releasable bellcrank
interconnecting rods
C.2 C.4 CIO C.13 C.17 C.20a C.23 C.32 C.33 C.37 C38
FIGURE 12 - REGLAGE DE LA COMMANDE DE DIRECTION

ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
AB
02-85 Restricted 3-514 FIGURb r2 3-514
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^^TSX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONîF^L^Ô r/iamiiai n/l
6- ADJUSTMENT OF RIGGING IN STABILATOR
A Adjustment of rigging after servocontrol

- Position rudder deflection template and pointer.
- Record rudder deflection at structural stop : > 20°
B Adjustment of artificial feel unit

- Install trim actuator set to ZERO (bench setting)
L= 215 ± 0.25 mm (8.464 ± 0.009 in).
- Do not alter clevis adjustment.
- Remove AFU/fin quadrant (5) link pin.
- Pin fin quadrant 5 (rigging pin MS 1390-20-830).
- Check that quadrant AFU length is correct. Quadrant AFU should be installed without forcing.
If not, adjust AFU length.
C Adjustment from quadrant to servocontrol

- Check pinning of clutch release bellcrank.
- If unsatisfactory, adjust micrometer rod (8), fitted with new safeties. Do not hammer down
safeties.
- Install slide valve 9 drive rod.
- Check and, if necessary, adjust rod (9) so that rudder is as close as possible to zero a
< 30'
(turn-by-turn adjustment).
- Set rudder zero by adjusting micrometer rod 8.
- Disassemble micrometer rod (8) for torquing on tabletop and safetying.
- By very slow manual operation of slide valve, set servocontrol to fully retracted, then fujly
extended. Record rudder deflection :
To left 18° + Jl To right 18° + Jl
- Remove pin from quadrant.
- Reassemble micrometer rod 8.
7- ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER PEDAL STOPS
- Access through door 02.00L

- Adjust rudder pedal stops 4 so as to obtain a LH and RH rudder deflection of 17° 30' ± 10'.
- Rudder pedal travel should be 65 _ 2 mm (2.559 _ q'qjo in).
- The difference between rudder deflection obtained by setting servocontrol manually to its
stop positions and rudder deflection obtained after rudder adjustment (rudder pedal stop
adjustment) corresponds to servocontrol clearances.
Minimum clearance should be 20'.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTX^ÔX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^r^F^-Ô» .,..,.,n.
>"-~ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
8- INSPECTION AND TESTS
- Check the deflection values obtained with system 2 and then with systems 1 and 2. Check that
the same settings are obtained.
- Check that all the hinges are properly tightened and locked.
- Perform a functional test of the rudder control system.
- Plot a rudder control system force curve.
9- FINAL STEPS
- Remove all the tools.

- Reset the control to neutral.
- Reinstall all the access doors.
- Since this operation required removal of a cabin sealing door, perform cabin pressurization test
(see 09-2).
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT Le^ZT*. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ôF0^-^^ âaamuai «a
PARTIAL INSPECTION OF RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM LINKAGE -SERVICING
1- SCOPE
To perform thorough inspection of linkage.
- Vacuum cleaner.
- Inspection light or Elaul light.
Hydraulic power supply.
- 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply.
3- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3512.
Remove RH and LH cockpit sidewalls :

- Open the doors and panels providing access to the linkages :
- fuselage : 1 1 .03, 1 1 .09, 1 3.00, 20.00, 22.00, 25.00, 26.00, 28.00 and 29.00,
- f in : D1 .48, D2.43 and D2.51 .
5- GENERAL CHECKS
A Locking
Make sure that :

- locking pins are installed on castellated nuts and provide correct locking,
the self-locking nuts are tightened properly,
- the nuts are secured against motion by lockplates.
B Bellcranks and levers
- Move the bellcranks and levers so as to make sure that the pivot pin bearing is free from play.
Check the bellcranks and levers for condition (dents, protection, etc.).
- As far as possible, visually check bearings and ball joint cages for proper crimping.
- Check that the bonding braids are installed and in good condition.
- Check that the travel limit washers are properly positioned and in good condition.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
>LJ>Zzr^
^-j^V^f^
MIRAGE F
^C^*^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
C- Rods
- Move devises so as to check that hinge bearing is free from play.

-Check that:
- rods are properly coupled to clevises,
- rod tubes are in good condition (dents, protection, etc.),
- rods are free from friction traces, paying special attention to rod sections running through
bulkheads,
- bonding braids are installed and are in good condition.
6- SPECIAL CHECKS
A Cable check
(1) Broken strands
(a) Check cables for fraying. Look for broken strands by rubbing a rag over the whole cable length,
paying special attention to cable sections routed in pulley grooves or through fairleads. The rag will
snag each time one or several broken strands are encountered. Doubtful sections should be inspected,
preferably using a magnifying glass.
(b) Especially check cable sections routed in pulley grooves and through bulkheads. Also check cable
sections rubbing or likely to rub against components.
Perform close examination of doubtful sections ; especially if MOD. FX 288 «Cable fairlead at
frame 28» is NOT INCORPORATED, disconnect aft cable F275-17 and slightly disengage from its
passage at frame 28 for the detection of any abnormal condition at this critical location.
NOTE : This special operation necessitates replacement of the turnbuckle locking pins ad adjustment
of the cable tension during the final steps (see Adjustment of rudder control system).
Replace any cable showing evidence of excessive wear or corrosion (even if the number of broken
strands is within tolerance).
(2) Permissible cable damage
IMPORTANT :
CABLE STRENGTH IS MORE AFFECTED BY A SMALL NUMBER OF BROKEN STRANDS
WITHIN A SHORT SECTION THAN BY A GREATER NUMBER DISTRIBUTED ALONG THE
WHOLE CABLE LENGTH.
A MAXIMUM OF 6 BROKEN STRANDS IS ALLOWED OVER A 25 MM (0.984 IN) SECTION,
PROVIDED THAT SUCH BROKEN STRANDS ARE NOT LOCATED WITHIN A CABLE
SECTION ROUTED IN A PULLEY GROOVE OR THROUGH A FAIRLEAD. A CABLE WITH
BROKEN STRANDS ROUTED IN A PULLEY GROOVE MUST BE REPLACED.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^îrU. MIRAGE F
B Check of other components
(1) Turnbuckles
- Check them for condition and correct locking (safety pins).
(2) Pulleys
- Actuate each pulley and check that the side play is less than or equal to 0.4 mm (0.016 in). If
this limit is exceeded, replace the pulley.
- Check the whole pulley for condition, paying special attention to the groove. Any pulley showing
wear caused by defective cables should be systematically replaced.
- On the supports equipped with a fairlead, check for the theoretical clearance of 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
between the cable and the fairlead.
(3) Quadrants
- Check them for condition and security of attachment. Actuate them to check their attaching pins
for absence of play.
- Check-that cables are correctly attached to quadrants (nuts locked by means of locking pins).
- Check_celoron grooves for condition, paying special attention to the areas in contact with cables.
(4) Bulkhead connectors (frame 10)
Perform thorough inspection of LH and RH cockpit bulkhead connectors.

-
- Checkslider assemblies for condition (rubber crazing, ripping, etc.). Also check grommets fitted
to plunger ends. Any doubtful slider will require a leak check to be performed by pressurizing the
cockpit.
A Cleaning

- structural boxes, using a vacuum cleaner to remove all foreign matter,
- all hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush.
NOTE : Never degrease a cable with solvent as such an operation would destroy the protective lubri¬
cant.
- Wipe the cables with dry, lintfree cloths.
B Servicing
- Slightly oil bulkhead connector plungers.

- Check them for operation.
- Wipe off excess oil.
8- FINAL STEPS
- The installation of the access doors as well as the tests and adjustments shall be performed later
on according to the work schedule.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
TOTAL INSPECTION OF RUDDER CONTROL

1 - GENERAL
This operation must be performed with the engine removed.
The operation proper is the same as for partial check of rudder control linkage - Servicing
(see 04-3). The following doors should be removed for additional check :
29.00J - 30.00i - 31 .00i - 35.00i - 36.00i - 02.00L
2- SPECIAL OPERATION
On the nose wheel steering pickoff :

-
- check the pickoff interconnecting rod for condition and attachment,
- manually act upon the interconnecting rod so as to check for locking of the end-fitting on
pickoff lever and bellcrank,
- slightly oil the mechanisms on the end fittings of the pickoff interconnecting rod.
3- FINAL STEPS
Reinstall inspection doors.

-
Reinstall door 02.00i, when reinstalling this door, it is mandatory to check cabin pressurization
(see 09-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^J^-rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^L ^ ^ . ...... ^.
PLOTTING OF RUDDER PEDAL FORCES
(Figure 13)
1- SCOPE
To make sure that forces required for actuating rudder control system are within tolerances.
Take all safety measures applicable to system concerned (See 01-0).
A Special tools
I - Flight control 1st line tool kit

- Rudder deflection template.
B Standard tools
- Ground telephone.

- 115/200 V 400 Hz electrical power supply.
A Preparation
- Install flight control rigging device (See 04-1).

- Install template.
- Connect :
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
,lt..4|i...r|r'l t» - .\. * , , ,1 >r ,

, Effort à tirer sur pédale Gauche ' rf: Effort à tirer sur pédale Droite
.' LH pedal pulling force ''Z.y~. '['.')',
Débattement gouvernail à Droite j*-,t,*.

i Ruddertravel to Right ;
Degrés Degrés
Degrees . V, . f I.* £' *-* r' lr* ,*
17 30'
Butée fin Butée fin
de course de course
End-of-travel End-of-travel
stop stop
M GOUVERNAIL ADROITE GOUVERNAIL A GAUCHE

RUDDER TO RIGHT !
RUDDER TO LEFT
16° 30' 15 13 11 9 7 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 16°30'
1 er relevé 1er relevé

1st plot 1st plot
I
2ème relevé 2ème relevé

2nd plot 2nd plot
i
J
>
3ème relevé 3ème relevé

3rd plot 3rd plot
OU"TILLA( 3E AC(:oupl E AL/ \ PED/M.EG/ f\UCHE t A DE :n a i c
TOOL COUPLED WITH LH PEDAL TOOL COUPLED WITH RH PEDAL
FIGURE 13 - TRACE DE LA LOI D'EFFORT SUR LA DIRECTION

PLOTTING OF RUDDER PEDAL FORCES
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* ^ -" ^ MIRAGE
miihi-iwu F
BREGUET AVIATION ,Û-~ ^tf^-^j, _ ^ . ^ , .. . ... . A . -..
^<v ^<~^ Restncted MANUAL 04
B - Setting rudder to neutral

-Set control to neutral with rudder index opposite zero indication on template quadrant.
Check that fin quadrant can be pinned (rigging pin MS 1390-20-830). Trim, if necessary. Ob¬
tain balanced neutral position by performing low-amplitude movements about neutral position.
-Move rudder pedals over their whole travel so as to visualize travel limit stops on qua¬
drant with a view to interrupting force measurement about 1° before reaching extreme limit
stops.
5 - FORCE MEASUREMENT
force measurement as indicated below.

- Perform
-Post an operator at rudder. This operator will give a signal every degree until previously
visualized stop is reached.
-Rotate handwheel so as to pull the pedal and obtain a continuous rudder movement of
about 2° per second, from zero to maximum deflection and return to zero.
-Note values read on spring scale at each signal given by the operator.
-Perform two or three force measurements in the same manner so as to confirm the va¬
lues.
-Connect the tool to the other pedal, then perform the same operations as described for
the previous check.
6 - CHECKS
-Plot force versus travel curves for each pedal. Such curves should be comprised within
the envelope curve drawn on the chart. Because the tool shifts the point of application of rud¬
der pedal forces in relation to the hinge pin, the values recorded in daN must be multiplied by
coefficient 1 .07 so as to be in the same conditions as a force measurement made along the pe¬
dal centerline.
-Check that particular points are within tolerances and check for each point that the dif¬
ference existing between rightwise and leftwise travels is lower than half the envelope curve
deviation.
-The essential points to be checked are the forces obtained around neutral position
(threshold) and at travel limits. The tolerances are provided by the figure.
7 - RESULTS
Should the forces measured:

-be found out of minimum and maximum tolerance values set forth,
-reveal the presence of binding points.
Perform as follows:
-disconnect AFU and move pilot's control,
-check linkage and cables for absence of binding point or friction,
-check and locate component concerned,
-if required, perform AFU disassembly, lubrication and adjustment (See 04-3).
8 - FINAL STEPS
-Disconnect:
-hydraulic power supply,
-electrical power supply,
-Remove flight control rigging device (See 04-1).
-Reinstall:
-seat ejection gun,
-ejection seat (See 09-4),
-canopy (See 03-2).
- Remove
-rudder deflection template.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^&.
/L^-"^
_^ .
MIRAGE
..»».,,.,
F
CHECK OF CABLE TENSION IN RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
1 - PURPOSE
To complete checking of the rudder control linkage by measuring the cable tension.
- Cable tension dynamometer.

- Electrical power supply 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz.
PRELIMINARY STEPS
The operation should be carried out together with «Partial inspection of rudder control system
linkage» (see 04-3).
4- CHECK OF CABLE TENSION
Readings should be taken as follows :

linkage not pinned,
-
- control and rudder at neutral ; move rudder pedals several times while progressively decreasing
their travel. Stop at neutral position.
Measure tension of LH and RH cables. , 1f) , 4- .
-Take several readings at different points : tension should be 200 _ Jl lb (890 _ go N).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ^^hr^l
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF RUDDER DRIVE ROD
1 - GENERAL

B Standard tools
- Set of torque wrenches, 2-20 m.daN (15-150 ft.lb)

- Set of torque wrench accessories, 2-20 and 5-50 m.daN (15-150 and 40 - 350 ft.lb)
C Spares
- 1 lockwasher 2335 1AC060LE

- 1 cotter pin 23310AA020025LE
- 1 blanking plug F31 1-70-02
D Materials

-White spirit
- Remove fairing D3.56.
- Remove plug D3.47.
- Remove access door D3.48.
4- REMOVAL OF ROD
-Remove the rudder drive rod.
-Move the rudder to the right so as to bring the head of the pin opposite the access hole, thus
providing for removal of said pin.
A On bellcrank side
- Disconnect the bonding braid from the rod (7 mm A/F wrench).

- Disconnect the rod from the bellcrank :
- unsafety and unscrew the nut (19 mm A/F wrench),
- remove the recessed washer,
remove the pin, recover the antiswiveling flange (pin opposite the access hole).
B On rudder side
- Disconnect the bonding braid (7 mm A/F wrench).

- Disconnect the rod from the rudder clevis :
- remove the plug retainer :
- unsafety and remove the nut (10 mm A/F wrench) ;
- unscrew the plug (35 mm A/F wrench) ;
- remove the lubricating pin.
Move the rudder to the left so as to remove the rod from its housing.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ô.
[L^^rXL
__^ - .
MIRAGE
.,,,,
A «
F
5- CLEANING
CAUTION :
CLEANING OF TITANIUM PARTS WITH CHLORINATED SOLVENTS IS STRICTLY PRO¬
HIBITED.
- On rudder side : after noting its assembly position, pivot the spherical bearing inner ring to bring
itin front of the slots in the rod end ; remove the inner ring ;
- clean the spherical bearing inner ring and the rod end ; clear the grease ducts.
- On bellcrank side : clean the bearing using a clean, lint-free cloth soaked in white spirit ; allow to
dry in ambient air or dry with clean, moisture-free compressed air.
6- INSPECTION OF REMOVED ROD
A Inspection of rod end on rudder side (greased spherical bearing inner ring)
Inspect the various components :
-spherical bearing inner ring :

- no traces of corrosion : lightly trim as required (crocus cloth) ;
- lateral surfaces,
- bore,
- spherical section : scratching, tearing (smooth out light defects by wet trimming
(crocus cloth or india stone)) ;
- rod end :
- no traces of corrosion : lightly trim as required (crocus cloth), protection ;
- surface condition of spherical section (scratching, tearing) ;
- rod end assy :

- reinstall the spherical bearing inner ring (lightly greased) on the rod end ; the inner ring
shall be positioned in such a way that the grease holes of the inner ring are opposite the slots in the rod
end ;
- check by hand that the inner ring does not rotate freely and that there is neither play nor
binding point during swiveling.
B Inspection of bearing in bellcrank
-Inspect the various components :

- no traces of corrosion,
- correct swaging (teflon washer cemented in the groove),
- surface condition of the bore,
- check by hand for correct rotation and make sure there is no binding point, fouling or
roughness,
- check appearance of both flanges when installed.
- Inspect the rod body (shocks, no traces of friction and corrosion).

- Check lockwasher and locknut for condition and correct safetying.
D Inspect the bonding braids (no fraying, good condition of lugs).
AA
ti^J>^Û MIRAGE F
Restricted M AN UA L 04
7- REPLACEMENT OF A ROD END
-Prior to removal :
- accurately measure the distance between centers (clevis - rod end),
- note the position of the rod end.
- Upon installation :
- set the distance between centers to the value noted upon removal (use rod length adjust¬
ment tool 50AM008),
- correctly position the rod end,
- torque to specified value (see 04-0).
8- INSTALLATION OF ROD
Reinstall the rudder drive rod.
NOTE : Correctly position the spherical bearing.
A On bellcrank side
- Position the rod (flat on clevis) to the left.

- Couple the rod clevis to the bellcrank.
- Insert the pin through the access hole, with pin head to the left.
- Fit the antiswiveling flange, position it on the rod clevis.
-Fit the recessed washer, torque the nut to 3-6 m.daN (22.12 - 44.25 ft.lb).
-Cotter.
B On rudder side
- Before reinstalling the pin :

- remove the old grease and check that the grease duct is not clogged,
- lightly grease the pin.
- Position the rod end into the rudder clevis :
- connect the rod end to the rudder clevis,
- install the lubricating pin :
- offer up the pin with its head pointing upwards, correctly position the head of the pin
(flat of the hex head corresponding to locking boss),
- torque the plug to 3-6 m.daN (22.12 - 44.25 ft.lb),
- fit the nut retainer, the lockwasher and the nut, safety.
9- FINAL STEPS
- Check the components for correct installation and make sure that safetying has been carried out.
- Grease the hinge, on greased inner ring side.
- Carry out functional and adjustment check of rudder channel (see 04-3). During this check, make
sure there is no contact with other components in the compartment (specially at passage hole in false
spar).
- Reinstall the door, the fairing and the plug.
- Disconnect the hydraulic and electrical power supplies.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/1 ^ Jl ** /V\ll\/-\Vj'r_. I
BREGUET AVIATION _^*c_~ ^yô . , »* a mi i a i rm
^-« >?^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REPLACEMENT OF RUDDER AFU MICROSWITCH AND ELECTRICAL

WIRING
(figure 9)
1 - SCOPE
Operations to be performed in the case where the microswitch is considered defective or

in the case where electrical connector or wiring damages are noticed on an AFU during opera¬
tion.
A - Special tools
-Crimping tool checking kit.

C - Spares
-1 microswitch 5XE401T
-1 blade JM5
-1 electrical connector 51 06RC8-3AP50
-1 lockplate 05S002R006 ~|... ., , . .
-2 tabwashers 23350AC040LEJMlcroswltch a«achment

-9 washers (attachment of cover, sheath and clamp) 200251 -24
-Electric wire A1 604-1 D20
-Rilsan sheath RILG404-0
-Thermofil sheath RNF 100-1-1 -4 (black) and RNF 100-2-1 -8
3 - MATERIALS
-Red varnish (or locking glue) 9036 bis No. 2.
4 - REPLACEMENT OF MICROSWITCH
A - Removal of microswitch
-On cover 1 5: Remove three screws 1 6 and washers 1 7. Then, remove cover 1 5.
-Remove sleeves protecting wire solders and unsolder wires from microswitch terminals
(mark position of wires).
-Straighten lockplate 28, remove both screws 27 and then remove microswitch and
blade, as well as plate 29.
-On angle 12: Straighten both tabwashers 14, remove both screws 13, replace tabwash¬
ers 14 by new ones and then reinstall and slightly tighten both screws 1 3.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f TW -*< /Y\l r\/-\V_7r_ I
BREGUET AVIATION -^L-- ^s-^
^-^ «=~~^ Restricted » * a m
MANUAL a n.
04
B - Installation of microswitch
-Install new microswitch and blade and attach microswitch by means of both screws 27,
lockplate 28 and plate 29.
-Slightly tighten screws 27.
-Slide a 20 mm (0.8 in) long Thermofil sheath sleeve on the end of both microswitch
wires and solder the latter to corresponding microswitch terminals.
-Coat solders with red varnish or locking glue and cover them with the sleeves.
-Shrink the sleeves with a hot air generator at a temperature between 200° and 250 "C,
exposure time about 2 to 3 seconds.
C - Adjustment of microswitch
Refer to paragraphe 4 of sheet dealing with AFU adjustment and calibration.
5 - REPLACEMENT OF ELECTRICAL WIRING

A - Removal of electrical wiring and connector
-Cover 15 being removed, remove the sleeves and unsolder wires from microswitch termi
nals.
Remove two screws 31, washers 32 and half-clamp 30.
Remove electrical wiring and scrap it as well as connector.
B - Making up of electrical wiring
-Cut two 400 mm (15.748 in) (approx.) long wire sections out of 0.6 mm2 cross-section
electrical wire.
-Fit one end of each wire with 20 mm (0.8 in) long Thermofil sheath sleeve, strip that
end, mark the other ands solder stripped ends to corresponding microswitch terminals.
-Coat solders with red varnish (or locking glue) and cover them with the sleeves.
-Shrink the sleeves with a hot air generator at a temperature between 200° and 250° C,
exposure time about 2 to 3 seconds.
-Cut a Rilsan sheath section having a sufficient length to comply with dimension given
on diagram, making provision to compensate for sheath shrinking taking place at installation.
-Shape wires as required on microswitch and run them through angle 12 hole and then
through Rilsan sheath.
-Cover the sheath end located on angle side with a Thermofil sheath sleeve and shrink
and secure that end to the angle by means of half -clamp 30 attached by means of two
screws 31 , each of these screws being fitted with a new washer 32.
-Cut wires to length on connector side.
-Place two Thermofil sheath sleeves on the Rilsan sheath at the position indicated in the
figure, then shrink the sleeves.
-Remove identification sleeves, strip wire ends and crimp them to connector pin contacts.
Then, assemble connector, complying with pin identification when installing the latter.
C - Check
Test component on test stand, so as to check that microswitch connections are correct.
Then, perform final steps applicable to AFU referring to paragraphs 4 and 5 of sheet dealing
with AFU adjustment and calibration.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^^8^
/L-^lirU. MIRAGE F
SECTION 4
HIGH-LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
4-0 GENERAL
- High-lift control system - Scope and principle 4-001

- High-lift device linkage 4-114
- Operation of high-lift devices 4-120
- Incorporated documentation :
- flap spring box AMD-BA- 105101-01 4-140
- flap microswitch unit AMD-BA - 016059 4-143

- Removal - installation of a droop slat jack 4-301
- Removal - installation of a slotted slat gearmotor 4-305
- Removal - installation of a flap jack 4-308
- Removal - installation of flap spring box 4-31 1
- Removal - installation of slotted slat control rods 4-31 2
- Removal - installation of slotted slat jacks 4-314
- Removal - installation of flap electric actuator 4-319
- Disassembly lubrication - assembly of flap spring box 4-401
- Inspection and servicing of high-lift control system linkage. 4-501

- Inspection and partial servicing of slat hinges 4-503
- Inspection and servicing of slat hinges 4-505
- Inspection of slats after exceeding limits 4-508
- Inspection and servicing of flap hinges 4-509
- Inspection of flaps after exceeding limits 4-51 1
- Calibration check of flap spring box 4-512
- Check and adjustment of high-lift device contactors 4-51 5
- Detailed adjustment check of high-lift channel 4-519
- Check of first flight envelope safety device 4-524
- Check of second flight envelope safety device 4-526
- Adjustment of flap control system 4-528
- Adjustment of slotted slat control system 4-537
- Adjustment of high-lift device microswitches ... 4-539
- Inspection of high-lift device channel using the high-lift device test unit 4-546
- Test of microswitch No. 5 on slotted slat gearmotor repeaters 4-573
- Check of microswitch boxes 2C1 and 2C2 4-574
- Check of microswitches on droop slat jacks 4-575
- Inspection and servicing of slat/flap/spoiler control linkages or components 4-580
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION^_u.- ^-^ mamiiai n>i
__ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
4-8 REPAIR
- Replacing a microswitch and the electrical wiring on a high-lift device contactor 4-801
Figure No. Page
1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF HIGH-LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM 4-003

2 LAYOUT IN COCKPIT 4-111
3 GENERAL LAYOUT 4-112
4 LAYOUT OF SLATS 4-113
5 SLAT OPERATING MECHANISM 4-115
6 FLAP OPERATING MECHANISM 4-117
7 SLAT/FLAP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 4-119
8 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF SLATS AND FLAPS THROUGH MANUAL AND
EMERGENCY CONTROL 4-121
9 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF SLATS IN AUTOMATIC MODE THROUGH
«SLAT/FLAP» HANDLE 4-125
10 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF COMBAT SLATS/ F LAPS 4-128
11 SLAT/FLAP INDICATING SYSTEM 4-131
12 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «COMBAT FLAPS ARMED» INDICATOR LIGHT... 4-134
13 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «LIM» WARNING LIGHT IN MANUAL MODE 4-135
14 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «LIM» WARNING LIGHT IN AUTOMATIC
SLAT MODE 4-136
15 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «LIM» WARNING LIGHT IN COMBAT
SLAT/FLAP MODE 4-138
16 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «S/F» WARNING LIGHT IN AUTOMATIC
SLAT MODE 4-139
17 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «S/F» WARNING LIGHT IN COMBAT FLAP MODE 4-139
18 FLAP SPRING BOX 4-141
19 CONTACTOR 4-144
20 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF DROOP SLAT JACK 4-302
21 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF FLAP JACK 4-309
22 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF SLOTTED SLAT CONTROL RODS 4-313
23 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF SLAT JACKS 4-315
24 REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF SLAT JACKS 4-318
25 SERVICING OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICE HINGES 4-507
26 CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICE DEFLECTION 4-520
27 ADJUSTMENT OF FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM 4-529
28 FLAP CONTROL COMPONENTS IN FUSELAGE 4-585
29 SLAT/FLAP/SPOILER CONTROL COMPONENTS IN AWING 4-586
BB MOD 454
BREGUET
L=i>Û
AVIATION^j3^VS?^>
MIRAGE F
^^^-^^> Restricted MANUAL 04
HIGH-LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM - PURPOSE AND PRINCIPLE
1 - PURPOSE
The high-lift devices are intended to increase aircraft lift during maneuvers performed at low
airspeed. They are divided into three groups : droop slats, slotted slats and wing flaps.
The various types of controls available are as follows :
(1) Manual control («FLAPS/SLATS handle), actuated by the pilot during landing approach and
take-off. The three groups of control surfaces are actuated simultaneously as per a pre-determined
sequence.
(2) Automatic control (COMBAT FLAPS), used in flight to improve aircraft performance within a
well determined airspeed range.
(a) With the «SLAT/FLAP» switch set to «NORMAL» (L/H console), all slats are actuated and this
actuation is limited to a well determined flight envelope (Mach number - IAS - incidence).
(b) With the «SLAT/FLAP» switch set to «NORMAL» and the combat flap lever armed on the
throttle lever, all slats and flaps are actuated and this actuation is connected with a well determined
flight envelope (Mach number - IAS).
2 - PRINCIPLE
Each wing is provided with the following high-lift devices : two types of leading edge slats and
slotted recoiling flaps (inboard and outboard).
A Leading edge slats
(1) Droop slats (inboard)
Such slats extend over two fifths of wing leading edge and are deflected to one position only (25°)
whatever the flight configuration may be (landing, take-off or maneuvers at low or medium airspeed).
They are rotated about a hinge pin attached to wing lower surface (See 03-1 ) and are actuated by
hydraulic jacks controlled from an electrically-operated selector valve.
(2) Slotted slats (outboard)
Such slats extend over three fifths of wing leading edge and are located within droop slat profile.
They can be deflected either to 15° (automatic slat configuration) or to 26° («All extended»
configuration).
They are actuated through tracks moving along a path of rollers integral with wing (See 03-1 ) and
are actuated by screwjacks driven by electrically-operated hydraulic gear reducer actuators.
BB MOD 454
05-77 Restricted 4-°01
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT zL>^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONÔ^L ^"^
^£252=-^^ Restricted AAANUAL 04
B Wing flaps
They are slotted recoiling flaps made up of two parts (inboard and outboard) and extending
over two thirds of wing trailing edge (inboard thirds). They can be deflected as follows according to
flight configurations :
- half flaps : inboard flap deflected to 27° and outboard flap deflected to 13°.
- full flaps : inboard flap deflected to 46° and outboard flap deflected to 25°30'.
They move along guide tracks integral with wings (See 03-1 ) and are actuated by single-barrel servo
jacks mechanically controlled by a linkage driven by an actuator.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAULT^3"ér^L
AVIATION^2P^^*Q>
MIRAGE F
^-e^^^* Restricted MANUAL 04
3- HIGH-LIFT DEVICE CONTROL
A Operation in manual control mode
The high-lift devices are controlled electrically by means of «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C which is
provided with three positions :
- forward position : ALL RETRACTED (the handle is protected by a cover in that position).
- center position : 1/2 FLAPS and SLATS fully EXTENDED.
- aft position : FLAPS and SLATS fully extended.
Each droop slat is actuated by hydraulic jack 4C1 or 4C2 which is mechanically locked in
retracted and extended configurations. Control is effected through electrically-operated selector
valve 9C supplying both jacks in parallel and itself operated electrically from handle 6C.
The flaps of each wing are actuated by hydraulic servo jack 1. Control is effected from handle 6C
and through an electric actuator 181C and a spring box inserted in the linkage to take up the necessary
linkage travel. It is then possible to select the desired flap position. The linkage travel is restored
. through spring release as per flap displacement taking place at the speed of the slowest servo jack. The
spring box is also used to protect the electric actuator against linkage jamming.
In ALL RETRACTED and ALL EXTENDED positions, the electric actuator, which is controlled
from handle 6C, causes the spring box to become slightly compressed so as to maintain servo jacks 1
and 2 mechanically locked in either «rod retracted» or «rod extended» configuration.
B - Operation in automatic control mode
(1) The high-lift devices (slats only) are controlled electrically from three-position «SLAT/FLAP»
switch 206C («NORMAL-OFF-EMG RETR»).
In retracted position :
-slats are aligned.
In extended position (flight envelope conditions) :

- droop slats are extended (25°)
- slotted slats are partially extended (15°).
(2) The high-lift devices (slats and flaps) are also controlled electrically from «SLAT/FLAP» switch
206C and through the actuation of the button located on the throttle lever which causes lever 7C to be
unlocked and armed. The flaps are half extended (27° for inboard flap and 13° for outboard flap) and
the slats are fully extended (25°30* for slotted slat and 25° for droop slat).
NOTE : These automatic functions are effective only if «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C is in the ALL
RETRACTED position and provided that the aircraft is flying within the automatic slat/flap
envelope.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 04
DROOP SLAT
Dual electrical'fy-opera
selector valve
«FLAPS/SLATS»
handle
FIGURE 1 - HIGH-LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM - PRINCIPLE Flap servo jack
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^ZZVs. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^JjF'^Ô m a mi i a i ' rwi
C Safety systems (manual and automatic modes)
A limit warning light («LIM») comes on in the case where the flight envelope corresponding to a
given slat or flap deflection is being exceeded.
The slotted slats are actuated by separate gear reducer actuators ; they remain locked in the
position they occupy and «S/F» light comes on if the difference in position becomes higher than 7°
(MODIFICATION 631 NOT INCORPORATED : higher than 4°). They can be however retracted by
setting «SLAT/FLAT» switch 206C to «EMG RETR».
In the case of failure or malfunction of a safety system, full retraction of slaps and flats can be
obtained by setting «SLAT/FLAP» switch 206C to «EMG RETR».
D Hydraulic power supply
All hydraulic components of high-lift control system are supplied from system 1 (sub-system A).
High-lift devices cannot be operated any longer in the case of system 1 failure.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Layout Figures 1 , 2, 3, 4 and 7
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
1-2 FLAP SERVO JACKS Door X

VO-61
- Each jack actuates the flaps of one wing.
- Single-barrel jack with mechanically-operated selector
valve.
- Oscillating fixed body connected to structure.
- Moving rod connected to flap control linkage.
- Mechanical follow-up device between piston and control
bellcrank.
- Provided with piston mechanical locking device in
«rod retracted» configuration (500 kg (1 100 Ib.wgt)
approx.) preventing flap displacement in the case of
hydraulic system failure.
- Nominal force at a pressure of 210 bar (3045 psi) :
- rod extension : 5450 daN (12251 Ib.wgt - 5466 tons -
61 25 US. tons).
- rod retraction : 4000 daN (8992 Ib.wgt - 4012 tons -
4496 US. tons).
-travel between mechanical stops : 100 mm (3.937 in).
- They are controlled through a linkage actuated by an
electric actuator.
FLAP SPRING BOX Door X

28-00
- It compensates for differential displacement rates
between electric actuator rod and flap jack.
- It protects the electric actuator against linkage
jamming.
4-6 L/H AND R/H SCREWJACKS (DRIVE 1) V1-15

V1-17
- They actuate L/H and R/H slotted slats through their
actuating screws.
- Provided with two adjustable mechanical safety limit
stops :
one retraction stop

-
- one extension stop.
- Left-handed screw for L/H screwjack.
- Right-handed screw for R/H screwjack.
- Gear reduction : One revolution coresponds to a screw
travel of 2.5926 mm (0.1020 in).
- Each screwjack is fitted with a grease-nipple.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^
J MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Item Name - Characteristics and Function
Access Door No.
5-7 L/H AND R/H SCREWJACKS (DRIVE 2) V2-15

V2-17
- They actuate L/H and R/H slotted slats through their
actuating screws.
- Not provided with safety limit stops.
- Right-handed screw for L/H screwjack.
- Left-handed screw for R/H screwjack.
- Gear reduction : one revolution corresponds to a screw
travel of 2.0968 mm (0.0825 in).
- Each screwjack is fitted with a grease-nipple.
BEARINGS On wing
front spar
- Each bearing supports a control shaft section between
gear reducer actuator and outboard screwjack 5 or 7.
- There are five bearings for each wing.
- They are sealed prelubricated bearings provided with
splined male end-fittings intented for rod connection.
NOTE : The outboard bearing of each wing has been made

different from other bearings for attachment purposes.
TRANSMISSION RODS On wing

front spar
- They transmit rotary motion of gear reducer actuator
to both screwjacks.
- There are seven transmission rods for each wing (all
being different in length).
- Both extreme rods are each provided at their end with
two gimbal joints and connection device.
- The five intermediate rods are provided at one end
with a gimbal joint and, at the other end, with the
connection device intended to provide connection to
other rod.
- All rods are fitted with splined female end-fittings
intended for connection to bearings and jacks.
10 NON-RETURN VALVE (SLATS) 19-07i
- It protects dual electrically-operated selector valve

9C against any back pressure in reservoir return system.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Doc.
Item Location
Access Door No.
11 NON-RETURN VALVE (FLAPS) Under

LH and RH
- Protectsflap servo actuators 1 -2 against contingent wing fillet
back pressures in the return to reservoir system.
12 COMBAT FLAP UNLOCKING PUSH BUTTON Throttle

control
- Used for unlocking the combat flap control lever.
BA MOD 454
01 -77 Restricted Ain-a
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
2C1 FLAP MICROSWITCH UNITS LH and RH X

2C2 wings
- Intended to supply configuration indicator 2 a with V2-62
following information :
- flaps in
- half flaps
- full flaps.
- They are actuated by flap linkage.
- Each unit is provided with three microswitches used to
supply information as follows :
- microswitch 1 : Flaps in or moving
- microswitch 2 : Half flaps (inboard flap position)
- microswitch 3 : Full flaps (inboard flap position).
3C SLAT WARNING FUSE-BREAKER Electro-center

Syst. 1
Intended to protect slat warning system electrical circuit.
4C1 LH AN D RH DROOP SLAT JACK LH and RH

4C2 wings
- They control droop slat extension and retraction through VO-31
bellcranks and rods.
- Each jack is a single-barrel double-acting jack.
- Supplied from hydraulic system 1 through electrically-
operated selector valve 9C.
- Provided with mechanical claw-type locking system at
each stop.
- Nominal force : 3680 daN (8272 Ib.wgt - 3.691 tons -
4.136 US.tons) at a pressure of 210 bar (3045 psi).
- Travel between mechanical stops : 75 mm (2.952 in).
- Provided at each stop with a microswitch for locking
indication.
- Provided at the «slats retracted and locked» stop with
a microswitch for cutting off slat retraction control circuit
of electrical ly-operated selector valve 9C.
BD MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Item Name - Characteristics and function
Access Door No. S 1
5C «S/F» FUSE-BREAKER Circuit- X

breaker box
- It protects control circuits of slat/flap and slat servo units.
6C «FLAPS/SLATS» HANDLE L/H X

console
- It controls slat and flap extension and retraction elec¬
trically.
- This handle has priority over «SLAT/FLAP» switch
206C.
Handle position Slats Flaps
inb. outb. inb. outb.
- Forward All retracted

: 0° 0° 0° 0°
-Center : 1/2 flaps (and 25° 26° 27° 13°
slats extended)
- Aft : All extended (stop) 25° 26° 46°30 25°
7C COMBAT FLAP LEVER Throttle X
- It controls automatic operation of flaps

- It is provided with two positions :
in . flaps retracted
-out : flaps automatically extended when unlocking
button 12 is being depressed, provided that the
aircraft is being operated within a given flight
envelope (Mach number-IAS).
8C FLAP MICROSWITCH UNIT L/H lower wing X

surface
- Provided with three microswitches performing the V2-62
following functions :
- microswitch 1 : it causes «LIM» warning light 1 1Wto come
on as soon as flaps are manually controlled between 1/2
flap position and end of flat travel, provided that flap
IAS aneroid 240C supplies following information :
IAS>300kt.
- microswitch 2 : it causes «LIM» warning light 1 1 W to
come on as soon as flap deflection exceeds 35°,
provided that air data computer 17F supplies following
information : IAS > 225 kt.
- microswitch 3 . it causes full slat retraction control
electrical circuit to remain open as long as flap deflec¬
tion exceeds 17°.
- It is actuated by flap linkage.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No.
9C ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE 19-071-i X
Dual double-stage selector valve.

Depending on which solenoid is being energized, it directs
hydraulic pressure to one chamber of jacks 4C1 and 4C2
so as to control extension or retraction of droop slats.
48C FLYING AID AMPLIFIER (See 13-1) Equipment bay

13-00
It supplies a voltage varying in accordance with Mach
number and which is used by slat servo unit 193C and
slat/flap servo unit 192C to automatically retract the
slats as soon as Mach number exceeds M1 = 0.98 and the
flaps as soon as Mach number exceeds M1 = 0.75.
97C TEST DISPLAY UNIT

(See 13-1)
When setto «ON», it supplies + 28V voltage to slat

comparator and to IAS 2 flip-flop test circuit
99C «COMBAT FLAPS ARMED» INDICATOR LIGHT Instrument

panel
- Illumination of this indicator light depends on combat
flap selection made by means of lever 7C :
- steady illumination : combat flaps are armed and aircraft
is flying within flight envelope.
- flashing illumination : combat flaps are armed but
aircraft is not flying within flight envelope. Flashing
illumination may also indicate a double selection
(combat flaps selected whereas manual control is not
in ALL RETRACTED position).
108C SLAT IAS ANEROID F1-F2

Nose cone
- It causes power supply circuit of safety relays associated
with slat servo unit 193C to become closed through slat
IAS aneroid microswitch as soon as IAS exceed: IAS2 -
470 kt.
- It is connected to one of the ram and static pressure
system (T1 - S1 ).
109C FLAP IAS ANEROID F1-F2

Nose cone
- It causes power supply circuit of safety relays associated
with slat/flap servo unit 192C to become closed through
flap IAS aneroid microswitch as soon as IAS exceeds
IAS2 = 335kt.
systems (T1 -S1).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Doc.
Item Location
Access Door No. S I
142C 2nd LIMIT AUTOMATIC RETRACTION Electrical X

FUSE-BREAKER master box
System 1
- It protects the power supply circuit of «slat and flap
retraction» safety control (2 nd limit).
178C FLAP RELAY LH junction

box
- It closes the power supply circuit to electric actuator 15-10
to provide for flap retraction.
179C FLAP RELAY LH junction

box
- It closes the power supply circuit to electric actuator 15-10
to provide for flap extension.
180C FLAP MICROSWITCH UNIT Door

26-00
- It controls the flap sequence (from electrical commands)
by repeating the flap linkage movement.
181C FLAP ELECTRIC ACTUATOR Door

28-00
- Inserted in the flap linkage, it receives electrical commands
and controls the driving linkage of the slaved jack slide
valve.
183C RH SLOTTED SLAT MICROSWITCH RH wing

V1-17
- It supplies the «slotted slats fully extended (> 19°)»
information.
187C FLAP MICROSWITCH RH wing

V2-66
- It supplies the «flaps > 17°» information.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
ANNUAL 04
Location Doc.
Access Door No. I
189C SLOTTED SLAT GEAR REDUCER ACTUATORS LHand RH

wings
They drive slotted slat screwjacks mechanically. V0-31
- They consist of :
- a barrel-type hydraulic motor, rotating in both
directions and provided with built-in brake device.
- a dual double-stage electrically-operated selector
valve.
reduction gear, provided with a follow-up device
- a
including microswitches and one potentiometer.
- They are supplied from hydraulic system 1 through their
electrically-operated selector valve.
191C DROOP SLAT MICROSWITCH LH wing

V0-31
Intended to cut off slat retraction safety system control
circuit when droop slats are retracted.
192C HIGH LIFT DEVICE SERVO UNIT Equipment

bay
- It includes :
- flap (and slat) automatic control circuits for ope¬
rating envelope
- safety circuits (limitation).
193C AUTO SLAT SERVO UNIT Equipment

bay
- It includes :
- manual and automatic slat control circuits (envelope)
- safety circuit relative to deviation between slotted
slat positions, together with its test device
safety circuits (limitation).
203C SLOTTED SLAT MICROSWITCH LH wing

V1-15
Intended to cut off slat retraction safety system control
circuit when slotted slats are retracted.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc
Access Door No. S I
204C FLAP MICROSWITCH L/H wing X

V1-62
- It maintains slotted slat half-retraction control circuit
open as long as flap deflection exceeds 17°.
205C SLAT AND FLAP EMERGENCY RETRACTION Electro- X

FUSE-BREAKER center
DC
- It protects the slat and flap emergency retraction circuit. system 1
206C «SLAT/FLAP» SWITCH L/H X

console
- Three positions :
- «OFF» : No automatic slats or combat flaps
- «NORMAL» : Position required to select automatic slats
and combat flaps.
- «EMG RETR» : Emergency retraction of slats and flaps in
manual or automatic mode.
240C FLAPS IAS ANEROID F1-F2 X

Nose cone
It causes power supply circuit of safety relays asso¬
ciated with slat/flap servo unit 192C to become closed
through flap IAS aneroid microswitch as soon as IAS
exceeds IAS 1 =300 kt.
sytems (T2-S2).
14F INCIDENCE PROBE (See 12-1) Frame 1 X

L/H side
- It supplies slat servo unit 193C with «incidence»
information, so as to cause slats to be automatically
controlled as per incidence.
17F AIR DATA COMPUTER (See 12-2) Equipment

bay
- It includes :
a microswitch which opens the circuit to cause automatic
slat retraction as soon as IAS exceeds 440 kt.
- a microswitch which supplies «IAS > 225 kt» infor¬
mation, causing «LIM» light to come on.
- a potentiometer which supplies «automatic slat and flap
retraction» information (M >0.75 for flaps and
M > 0.98 for slats).
55 F MACH/AIRSPEED INDICATOR (See 12-1) Instrument

panel
- It includes a relay which closes the power supply circuit
to safety relays of slat servo unit 193C to provide for
slat retraction as soon as Mach number exceeds M2 = 1.1.
BC MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Location Doc.
Access Door No. I
56F PITOT-STATIC SWITCH
- It includes a relay which closes the power supply cir¬

cuit to safety relays of slat/flap servo unit 192C as
soon as Mach number (M2) becomes higher than 0.85.
29L LIGHTING CONTROL UNIT (See 08-2) RH console
33 L DAY-NIGHT UNIT F10
1W FAILURE WARNING PANEL (See 08-3)
- The «S/F» amber light is associated with slat and flap

system.
11W LIMIT WARNING LIGHT («LIM») (See 08-3)
- It warns the pilot :

- in manual mode, when flap IAS flight envelope is
exceeded :
-> 1/2 flaps :> 225 kt
-< 1/2 flaps: 300 kt
- in automatic mode, when both gates have been triggered
(slats or flaps) whereas slats or flaps are not re¬
tracted.
2a CONFIGURATION INDICATOR (U/C SLATS Instrument

FLAPS) panel
LH side
- It indicates the position of slats and flaps at all times.
SLATS :
- out : slats retracted
- red : slats moving (or maneuver not completed)
- amber : slats extended in combat configuration
- green : slats fully extended.
FLAPS:
-out : flaps retracted
-red : flaps moving (or maneuver not completed)
-amber : half flaps
-green : full flaps.
- Moreover, this indicator is provided with an indicator

light test button and «cbt F» amber light 99C. It also
displays information on U/C and brakes (See 05-6).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 2 - IMPLANTATION AU POSTE PILOTE

LAYOUT IN COCKPIT
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 04 181C.
FIGURE 3 - IMPLANTATION GENERALE

GENERAL LAYOUT
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Inboard drive 1
Outboard drive 2
FIGURE 4 - SLA T LA YOUT

BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted /MANUAL 04
HIGH-LIFT DEVICE LINKAGE
1 - SLATS (Figures 4 and 5)

A Droop slats
The droop slat linkage is of the rigid type (pushing and pulling movements). It is, in each wing,
actuated by a single-barrel single-position hydraulic jack 4C1 or 4C2 controlled by electrically-operated
selector valve 9C.
The linkage consists of :

- two jack output rods
-two bellcranks
- two slat drive rods.
The whole linkage is housed in wings (inboard section), forward of wing structural box.
Slat tilting is obtained through rotation about a hinge pin attached to wing lower surface. Full
deflection is obtained when jacks 4C1 and 4C2 are in «rod fully extended» configuration (stop
position).
The slats are locked in either extended or retracted position through internal locking of hydraulic
jack.
B - Slotted slats
The slotted slat linkage is of the rigid type (rotary movements). It is, in each wing, actuated by
two screwjacks driven by electrically-operated gear reducer actuators 189C and 190C. Each actuator
drives two screwjacks 4-5 and 6-7 through a line of torque shafts, which screwjacks control slat
movement and tilting. This is ensured by means of four curved tracks integral with slotted slats and
moving along a path of four fixed rollers integral with wing.
Slotted slat extended and retracted positions are determined by the travel length of each actuating
screw.
Mechanical travel safety is obtained by means of adjustable stops installed at actuating screw ends
of screwjacks 4 and 6.
The whole transmission system is housed in each wing (forward of wing structural box) and
includes the following for each wing :
- a control shaft, consisting of a series of seven rods 9
- five intermediate bearings 8
- two screwjacks 4-5 or 6-7.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
Out
Auto mode
Fully out
FIGURE 5 - SLA T OPERA TING MECHANISM

BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=-*v'"rU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^3_^<^0
MIRAGE F
C Slat operating mechanism (Figure 5)
(1) Droop slats
The droop slats, which are hinged over their whole length, are deflected under the action of their
actuating jack when the latter is being operated.
(2) Slotted slats
When driven by the actuating screws of screwjacks 4 and 5 (LH side) or 6 and 7 (RH side), the
slotted slats move along their guide tracks and open a slot between them and the fixed wing slat.
2 - SLOTTED FLAPS (Figure 3)
An electric actuator 181C drives an elastic rod 3. The linkage is then separated into two LH and
RH rigid linkages driving in each wing the input slide valves of single-barrel servo jacks in a symmetrical
manner. Jack-to-flap connection is ensured by means of a rigid type linkage essentially consisting of
bellcranks and rods.
Each flap is fitted at each end rib with a ball-joint swivelling in a front pad, and with a rear roller.
The inboard flap is secured to the wing lower surface through a locking rod connected to a slider in a
retaining fitting located under the wing center track.
3- FLAP OPERATING MECHANISM (Figures 3 and 6)
The flap operating mechanism operates as follows :
- 1 st phase :
the inboard and outboard flap pads and rollers recoil along their guide tracks (beginning of
recoil - level travel), driving the locking rod whose end located on wing starts sliding in retaining fitting.
2nd phase :
-
the rear rollers move down into guide track hooks up to adjustment of rod locking pin, causing
the rod to pivot and become locked onto rear stop.
-3rd phase :
the outboard flap aft roller continues to move in guide track hook while the inboard flap aft
roller leaves the guide track hook.
The line of front pads acts as a hinge about which the flap is pivoted while being retained by the
locking rod.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
Bielles d'attaque.
Drive rods
.Volet externe Volet interne

Outboard flap Inboard flap
POSITION VOLET RENTRE

FLAP UP POSITION
:m&*xm
m. MÊEZÏT
POSITION VOLET APRES RECUL A PLAT
FLAP POSITION AFTER LEVEL RECOIL
Galet Patin -^ ^.Bielle d'attaque Driverod
Roller
POSITION VOLET SORTI

FULL FLAP DOWN POSITION
FIGURE 6 - CINEMATIQUE DES VOLETS

FLAP OPERA TING MECHANISM
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(Figure 7)
The high-lift control system is hydraulically supplied from sub-system A (ancillaries) of system 1
(See 07-1 ).
Droop slat actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2 are supplied through dual electrically-operated selector
valve 9C which, when energized, controls droop slat extension or retraction.
Slotted slat gear reducer actuators 189C and 190C are directly supplied through a dual
double-stage electrically-operated selector valve built into each actuator.
Flap actuating jacks 1 and 2, which are mechanically slaved to electric actuator, 181 C through a
control linkage are also supplied directly.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET
J
AVIATION. ^-Ê^
MIRAGE F
190
LEGENDE
KEY
Circuit 1
System 1
Retour
Return
Circuit 1 (branche A)
System 1 (sub-system A)
189 C
FIGURE 7 - INSTALLATION HYDRAULIQUE BECS-VOLETS

BB MOD 454 SLA T/FLAP H YDRA UL IC SYSTEM
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^*
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL CO
OPERATION OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES
1 - GENERAL
Two types of control are available.
A Manual control through «FLAPS/SLATS» handle actuated by the pilot and acting simultaneously
on slats and flaps.
B Automatic control through «SLAT/FLAP» switch.
-The «NORMAL» position alone acts on slats only.

-The «NORMAL» position selected together with COMBAT FLAP mode (lever 7C on throttle
lever) acts simultaneously on slats and flaps.
Automatic retraction and extension phases are connected with flight envelope :
- FLAPS : Mach number and IAS

- SLATS : Mach number, IAS and incidence.
Moreover, the COMBAT FLAP automatic control is effective only in the case where the
«FLAPS/SLATS» manual control is in forward position (All retracted).
2 - OPERATION THROUGH «FLAPS/SLATS» MANUAL CONTROL (Figure 8)
Moving «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C from forward (All retracted) to center (1/2) position, causes
full slat extension and half-flap extension to take place.
A- Slats
- HALF-EXTENSION (HE) circuit is energized through microswitch 1 and 3.

- FULL EXTENSION (FE) circuit is energized through microswitch 2.
(a) Slotted slats
Relay K5 in SLAT SERVO unit 193C being normally supplied, extension (E) solenoids (0° to 15°
and 15° to 25°20') in electrically-operated selector valves of gear reducer actuators 189C and 190C
become energized, causing slotted slats to extend.
(b) Droop slats
Simultaneously, the output stage of electrically-operated selector valve 9C is energized through HE

circuit, causing droop slats to tilt.
After extension of droop slats, electrically-operated selector valve 9C remains energized whereas
hydraulic jacks 4C are locked in extended configuration.
BB MOD 454
°5"77 Restricted 4-120
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL04
HYPER ARME ET BECS AUTO
SLA T/FLAP AND AUTO SLA TS û NORMAL
COMMANDE BECS ET VOLETS PAR MANETTE o^Nq O
SLAT/FLAP CONTROL HANDLE
RENTREE SECOURS BECS ET VOLETS o
EMERGENCY RETRACTION OF SLA TS AND FLAPS

MODIFICA TION 631 NOT INCORPORA TED
FIGURE 8 - SCHEMA DE FONCTIONNEMENT DES BECS ET VOLETS

PAR LA COMMANDE MANUELLE ET SECOURS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF SLATS AND FLAPS
BB MOD 454 THROUGH MANUAL AND EMERGENCY CONTROL
0380 Restricted 4-121 4-121 FIGURE 8 4-1
FIGURE 8
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJ>Zy^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^3^?5^ .,.., ai ni
Restricted ANNUAL 04
During actuation of slotted slats, the extension solenoid S of each gear reducer actuator 189C or
190C is supplied through built-in microswitches 3 and 4, first through HE control circuit and then
through FE circuit after operation of microswitch 3 (slotted slats being extended by more than 15°).
Electrical power" supply is cut off by microswitch 4 when slotted slats reach their fully extended
position (25°30'). Hydraulic supply is cut off and the brake device built into each actuator stops each
actuating assembly.
B- Flaps
(1) Half flaps
After action on handle 6C (to mid position «1/2»), power supply is ensured by microswitch No. 5.
Relay 179C is supplied through half-flap microswitch of microswitch unit 180C and FS microswitch
from electric actuator 181C. Electric actuator supplied through relay 178C not energized, moves and
causes compression of spring box 3 which is connected to the linkage which symmetrically drives the
slide valves of slaved actuators 1 and 2. Flaps begin to slide down. Electric actuator travel is restored
when spring box relieves as much as the slower slaved actuator (1 or 2) moves. After full flat recoil,
which corresponds to full slat deflection, partial deflection of flaps begins.
When flaps are in «half-flap» position microswitches of unit 180C switch over and relay 179C is no
longer energized. Flaps deflection is 28°.
(2) SLAT/FLAP handle in rear position causes flap extension
Once control 6C is set to «fully out» rear position, power supply is ensured through microswitch
No. 7. Relay 179C is supplied through half flap microswitch of unit 180C, and FE microswitch from
electric actuator 181C. When the electric actuator reaches «all down» end of travel, its end-of-travel
microswitch cuts off supply of relay 1 79C.
Slats and flaps remain extended between «1/2» and «ALL DOWN» positions of handle.
C Shifting from rear to mid position causes the flaps to retract
(1) Half flaps
Once handle 6C is returned to half flap position, power supply is ensured through microswitch
No. 6.
Relay 178C is supplied through half flap microswitch of unit 180C and FR microswitch from electric
actuator 181 C. Electric actuator supplied through relay 179C not energized, moves and causes
compression of spring box 3. The flaps move upwards to half flap position. When in that position (29°),
the microswitch of unit 180C cuts off power supply of relay 178C.
The slats remain extended.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION. _
MIRAGE F
(2) Moving «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C from center to forward position causes full slat and flap
retraction to take place.
Once handle 6C is returned to its ALL RETRACTED forward position, power supply takes place
through microswitch 4. Relay 178C is energized through relays K5 and K2 of slat/flap servo unit 192C,
half-flap microswitch of unit 180C and retraction limit (RL) microswitch of electric actuator 181 C.
Flaps retract to 0° position and relay 1 78C is de-energized by the limit microswitch.
D - Slat retraction
Once handle 6C is returned to its ALL RETRACTED forward position, power supply takes place
through microswitch 1. De-energized relay K4 of slat/flap servo unit 192C allows the current to flow
towards microswitch 204C through slat servo unit 193C. De-energized relay K2 of slat servo unit 193C
allows the current to flow towards microswitch 8C. When flap deflection becomes lower than 1 7°, these
two microswitches close, allowing the slotted slat gear reducer actuators to be supplied through
relay K5 of slat servo unit 193C.
Droop slat jack electrically-operated selector valve 9C is supplied through microswitch 8C.
At the end of droop slat retraction, the energization circuit of electrically-operated selector
valve 9C is cut off by the limit microswitch of each hydraulic jack 4C1 or 4C2, as soon as locking takes
place.
During slotted slat actuation, the retraction (R) solenoid of each gear reducer actuator 189C or
190C is supplied through microswitches 1 and 2, first through HR control circuit and then through FR
circuit after operation of microswitch 2 (slotted slats being extended by less than 17°).
Electrical power supply to retraction solenoid is cut off by microswitch 1 when slotted slats reach their
fully retracted position (0°).
Hydraulic supply is cut off and the brake device built into each actuator stops each actuating
assembly.
E Emergency retraction (Figure 8)
Should the extended slats and flaps cannot be retracted by means of manual control 6C or
automatic control 7C, full retraction of all slats and flaps can be obtained by means of «SLAT/FLAP»
switch 206C.
This switch allows :
-all slat control and safety circuit electrical power supplies to be cut off and such circuits to be
grounded.
-the retraction (R) solenoid of slats control electrically-operated selector valve to be directly
supplied.
-flap electric actuator 181 C to be directly supplied.
-the energization of electrically-operated selector valve 9C is cut off when both hydraulic jacks AC
are in retracted and locked configuration. On the other hand, the retraction solenoid of each gear
reducer actuator 189C or 190C remains energized (hydraulic motors remaining supplied with pressure)
even after slotted slats have come to a standstill (actuating jacks reaching their mechanical stop
position).
The power supply to electric actuator 181 C is cut off by the retraction limit microswitch.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION X3ï-
ti^^TT^X
^
MIRAGE F
Restricted t tANUAL 04
3- OPERATION THROUGH AUTOMATIC SLAT CONTROL (Figure 9)
A Auto slats
(1) General
This control is used for extension of :
- droop slats by 25°

-slotted slats by 15°.
in a given flight envelope (Mach number, IAS, angle of attack). This function is obtained by setting
switch 206C to «NORMAL» and handle 6C to «ALL IN» front position.
(2) Slat extension
Slat extension is controlled by setting switch 206C to «NORMAL». Energization of solenoids S

controlling slat extension on the various electrically operated selector valves depends upon the
following requirements :
- in high lift device servo unit 192C
- relay K4 de-energized
- in auto slat servo unit 193C
- relay K1 energized
- relay K2 energized if IAS < IAS1 (in air data computer 17F)
or
M < M1 from flying aid amplifier 48C
and
i > i1 from incidence probe 14F
- relay K3 de-energized if IAS < IAS2 in 108C, with 203C and 1 91 C de-energized
M < M2 in 55F
- relay K5 energized.
If all the conditions are met, the 15° extension control circuit droop slat
is energized. The
actuators become locked in extension position and the gear reducer actuators cause the slotted slats to
extend until reaching 15° deflection. Then, on each gear reducer actuator, microswitch No. 3 cuts off
the supply circuit of solenoid S, since full extension circuit is not energized ; relay K4 of unit 192C is
de-energized.
(3) Slat retraction
(a) 1st slat limit (IAS1 >440orM1 >0.98 or i <8°).

+ 28 V passes through microswitch No.1 of high lift device handle 6C, and through a stage of
relay K4 still de-energized (unit 192C).
+ 28 V passes from K4 to de-energized relay K2, through 1st limit datum (IAS > 440 kt or M > 0.98 or
i < 8°). Flap contactor 8C < 1 7° and electrically operated selector valve 9C of droop slat actuators are
energized. Gear reducer actuators 189C and 190C are energized through a stage of relay K5.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
55F
FIGURE 9 - SCHEMA DE FONCTIONNEMENT DES BECS EN AUTOMATIQUE

PAR MANETTE HYPERS
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF SLATS IN AUTOMATIC MOD THROUGH
BB MOD 454 SLA T/FLAP HANDLE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti ^>^-r^\ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^jî. __
(b) 2nd slat limit (IAS>470 kt,or M > 1.13,or i <8°)

From contactor 2 of switch 206C, the + 28 V voltage supplies relay K1 of unit 193C.
From contactor 3 of switch 206C, the + 28 V voltage supplies relay K3 through :
- IAS aneroid 108C (IAS >470 kt)
or
- mach/airspeed indicator 55F (M > 1.13)
- and microswitches 203C and/or 1 91 C.
Once these requirements are met, the + 28 V voltage from K1 supplies the retraction control
circuit through K3 and 8C « 17°). The droop slat jacks become locked in retracted configuration and
the microswitch of each hydraulic jack 4C1-4C2 cuts off the energizing circuit of electrically-operated
selector valve 9C as soon as locking takes place.
The retraction solenoid R of each gearmotor 189C or 190C is supplied through relay K5.
Power supply to the retraction solenoid is cut off when slotted slat retraction is completed (0°).
Should the airspeed become lower than the 2nd limit value, relay K3 is kept self-energized by K1 and
can be deenergized by setting switch 206C to «OFF». Once deenergized, relay K1 cuts off the power
supply to K3.
(c) Control system cutoff
Slat retraction can also be obtained by returning switch 206C to «OFF».

Deenergized relay K1 cuts off the energization of relay K2.
Through relay K4 of unit 192C, the + 28 V voltage supplies microswitch unit 8C (through deener¬
gized relay K2) which supplies the following :
- dual electrically-operated selector valve 9C,
- gearmotors 1 89C and 1 90C through relay K5.
Full slat retraction takes place as per the sequence already described in preceding paragraphs.
B Combat slat/flaps (figures 9 and 10)
General
This function ensures deflection of :

- droop slats to 25'
slotted slats to 25°30' Hull extension
- flaps to 28 (half extension)
within a given flight envelope :
- Mach number, IAS and angle of attack for slats,

- Mach number and IAS for flaps.
(1 ) Combat slat/flap extension
Set switch 206C to «NORMAL» place «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C in forward position (all
retracted and press button 1 2 to unlock and arm lever 7C.
Consequently :
- K1 isenergized by switch 206C through lever 7C,

- K10 is energized by switch 206C through «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C.
BB MOD 454
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION sZ£sz
-K12 is energized (IAS < 300 kt)

-K4 and K5 are energized
- K2 is de-energized
- K5 supplies the output stage of actuator 181C through unit 180C and relays 178C and 179C.
Half flap position is obtained and the microswitch of unit 180C cuts off the electric actuator power
supply.
+ 28 V from switch 206C passes through relays K1-K2-K4 (servo unit 192C).
From relay K4, the slotted slat gear reducer actuators are supplied through microswitch No.3 of
handle 6C and through a comparison relay K5 (unit 193C) between 0 and 15°,othrough microswitch
No.2 of handle 6C and through a stage of comparison relay K5 between 15 and 26 .
(2) High lift device retraction
The diagram shows the whole sequence of high lift device retraction by exceeding the 1st or 2nd
limit. Combat flaps with 20 kt/sec. acceleration.
Half flaps
> 335 Kt
2nd limit
I
W^==^
Enable microswitch
8C
Slotted slats < 1?1
Time delay relay K6 to prevent

illumination of
Control 7C
engagement
25°
Droop slats
Time in seconds
-\ 1 h
1 1,1 1.6 4,8 5 5,7
BA MOD 454
01-77 4-127
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION ^tl;
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 04 8C
FIGURE 10 - SCHEMA DE FONCTIONNEMENT DES HYPERS COMBAT

F UNCTIONA L DIA GRAM OF COMBA T SLA TS/FLAPS
BB MOD 454
09-88 Restricted 4-128 FIGURE 10 4-1 ;
BREGUET AVIATION
(a) 1stlimit(IAS>300ktorM>0.75)
Flaps
Relays K4 and K5 are deenergized, either by «IAS > IAS1» information, (after deerpergization of
relay K12),orby «M >M1» information.
The + 28 V voltage from switch 206C is routed through :
- microswitch 4 of handle 6C,
- one stage of deenergized relays K5 and K2,
- unit 180C, the retraction limit microswitch of electric actuator 181C, and energizds relay 178C.
The 28 V from 206C is routed through one stage of relays 1 79C and 1 78C to supply the retraction
stage of electric actuator 1 81 C.
Slats (figure 9)
From switch 206C, the + 28 V is routed through microswitch 1 of «SLAT/FLAP» handle 6C and
supplies one stage of relay K4 (slat/flap servo unit 192C) which is still in deenergized configuration,
From K4, the + 28 V is routed through slat servo unit 193C, microswitch 204C (when flap deflection is
lower than 17°) and one stage of energized relay K5 (193C) to supply gearmotors 1 89Cand 190C.
Slotted slats retract from 26° to 15°.
Droop slats remain extended to 25°.
(b) 2nd limit (IAS > 335 kt or M > 0.85)
Flaps (figure 10)

-IAS>335kt
The 28 V from switch 206C causes relay K9 to be energized and consequently, relay K7 (3 s time
delay) to be energized in turn.
- If 187C is closed (flaps > 17°), relay K2 is energized.
The 28 V is routed through two stages of energized relay K1 , one stage of relay K2,
microswitch 180C, the limit microswitch of electric actuator 181C, and energizes relay 178C
The 28 V from 206C is routed through one stage of relays 179C and 178C ô supply the
retraction stage of electric actuator 181C.
The flaps retract from 27° to 0°.
- If 187C open (flaps < 17°), with 183C open (slats < 19°) and flat travel microswitch 8C
closed, relay K7 (energized after a time delay of 3 s) causes relay K8 to be energized a nd to supply
relay K2.
- If 187C open (flaps < 17°), with 183C closed (slats > 19°) and flat travel m croswitch 8C
closed, relay K2 is energized by the stage of relay K7 (energized after a time delay of 3 s although K8
is deenergized.
In all the above cases, the energization of K2 causes flap retraction to take place.
-M>0.85
-The energization of relay K2, which causes flap retraction to take place, is similar to that
described for the IAS but the energization of the various relays is obtained by mach/airspeed indicator
56F, relay K9 remaining deenergized.
Slats
From switch 206C, the 28 V is routed through one stage of energized relays K1 and K2, slat servo
unit 193C, microswitch 204C (when flap deflection is < 17°) and one stage of energized relay K5 (slat
servo unit 193C) to supply the retraction solenoid of gearmotors 189C and 1 90C. Slotted
slats retract from 26° to 1 7°.
Droop slats remain extended to 25°.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ^ZZT^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATION^S^V-^Ô
^^-^^s Restricted M A M I I A I n/t
MANUAL 04
5- «SLAT/FLAP» INDICATING SYSTEM (figure 11)
A Slat indicating system
(1) Purpose
Slat indicating system is intended for monitoring slotted and droop slat position, and more
especially mechanical locking of droop slat jacks 4C1 and 4C2 taking place at end of travel. This system
is controlled by microswitches included in gearmotors and hydraulic jacks.
(2) Description
Slat indicating is by three lights (green, amber and red) :

- all lights out : all slats retracted and jacks locked,
- green light on : slotted slats fully extended and droop slat actuating jacks locked in extended
position,
-amber light on : droop slats in extended position but slotted slats only partially deflected,
-red light on : at least one slat is not set to one of the above positions. This light also indicates that
slat operation is either in progress or not completed.
(3) Operation
/\s soon. ..as. .slat extension is initiated, microswitches 5 of gearmotors 189C and 190C and
microswitches 3 of actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2 operate and cause the red light to come on
(in operation) through microswitch 1 of actuating jack 4C1 .
Microswitches 1 of actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2 operate as soon as droop slats are locked, but
the red light remains on.
Upon completion of partial slat extension, microswitches 6 of gearmotors 189C and 190C operate
J and cause the «HALF» amber light to come on and the red light to go out, through microswitch 7 of
gearmotor 190C and microswitches 1 of actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2.
Shortly after slotted slat extension is initiated (partial to full slat deflection), microswitches 6
resume their initial position (cutting off power supply to amber light which goes out) and cause the red
light to come on through microswitches 5 of gearmotors 189C and 190C or microswitches 3 of
actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2, microswitches 6 and 7 of gearmotor 190C and microswitches 1 of
actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2.
Upon completion of full slotted slat extension, microswitches 7 of gearmotors 189C and 190C
operate (cutting off power supply to red light which goes out) and cause the green light to come on
(slats extended) through microswitches 1 of actuating jacks 4C1 and 4C2.
B Flap indicating system
(1) Purpose
Flap indicating system is intended for monitoring flap position. It is controlled by microswitches
built into flap indicating microswitch units 2C1 and 2C2 which are connected to flap linkage.
(2) Description
Flap position indication is by three lights (green, amber and red) :

- amber light on : «HALF-FLAP» deflection (microswitches 2 are connected in series with micro-
switch 3 of unit 2C1 which is connected to ground),
- green light on : «FULL-FLAP» deflection (microswitches 3 of units 2C1 and 2C2 are connected
in series),
- red light on : flaps are extended but are not set to one of the above positions. This light also
indicates that flap operation is either in progress or not completed,
- all lights out : all flaps retracted.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 04 190 C
EXTENSION RETRACT/ON
1
2 «
V OUT HALF IN
Electrical switching 9 V> o Y> o
shown in rod retracted 4 Ç2
and locked configuration
BCA D £ G N R P L K M J H
Rod Rod Rod
retracted unlocked extended
TZ Operation
Red
and locked and locked
e-
HALF
A.
B
B
C
Open A.
Closed B- C
B Open
Closed
A
B.
. B
C
Closed
Open 9 it "ih
Amber
Green
OUT
to
D. E Open D. E Closed D. E Closed ir-, 01

F . G Open F. G Closed F. G Closed | B C A D E G N RPLK MJH
i
Hz 4C|1
i
ir v. v.
05-6
EXTENSION RETRACTION 189 C - U ^ & ,.

-]
2 C2
Full flaps
f G J H D FEB A*""]
{
Flaps unlocked Green
No. 1
\9
Flaps retracted and locked
Half flaps
os
to
f Amben
Half flaps - e up to half flaps +
{
e
No. 2 Operation
Half flaps + e up to half flaps - e
Full flaps -e up to full flaps

h
Red
e-
{ Full flaps up to full flaps - e
G JHD FEBA
L
2 CI
29 L
ope
3C
L"XT
*\jr-
FIGURE 1 1 - SLA T/FLAP INDICA TING SYSTEM

BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=J>^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^cP3^--^^
MIRAGE F
^£$^-^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 04
(3) Operation
As soon as flap extension is initiated, microswitches 1 of units 2C1 and 2C2 operate and cause
the red light to come on (operation) through microswitches 2 and 3 of unit 2C1. Upon completion of
half-flap extension, microswitches 2 of units 2C1 and 2C2 operate (cutting power supply to red light
which goes out) and cause the amber light to come on through microswitch 3 of unit 2C1 .
As soon as flap extension is initiated (half-flap to full-flap position), microswitches 2 of units "2C1
and 2C2 resume their initial position and cause the amber light to go out and the red light to come on
through microswitch 3 of unit 2C1.
Upon completion of full-flap extension, microswitches 3 of units 2C1 and 2C2 operate and cause
the red light to go out and the green light to come on.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^Z&T
ïî^^Z^L
^ _
MIRAGE F
6- SAFETY WARNING SYSTEM
The safety warning system includes the «S/F» warning light on failure warning panel 1W, «LIM»
warning light 11W, «cbtF» indicator light 99C on the instrument panel and warning horn 7W, «LIM»
warning light and «S/F» indicator light come on thanks to different relays :
-relay K2( 120 ms)
This relay prevents the 2nd limit system from operating and the «S/F» light from illuminating in
the case where an untimely command is fed by pitot-static switch 56F (contact closing caused by
buffeting vibrations for instance).
relay K6 (4 sec.)
-
This relay prevents the «LIM» warning light from illuminating in the case where combat flaps are
disarmed when 1st limit is being reached. This time delay allows flat travel microswitch 8C to open.
relay K7 (3 sec.)
-
This relay prevents the «LIM» warning light to be illuminated when 2nd limit is being reached,
whereas flaps, which are retracting (< 17°), have not reached yet their portion of flat travel (command
from 1st limit safety system).
A Operating principle of «cbtF» amber light 99C (Figure 12)
- This light indicates that combat slats/flaps are selected through steady illumination.
- It indicates that 1st limit is reached through flashing illumination.
- Flashing illuminataion also indicates that two controls are selected at the same time.
(a) Steady illumination
«FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C set to forward position (All retracted), lever 7C unlocked and armed
and switch 206C set to «NORMAL».
The + 28 V voltage energizes relay K1 through lever 7C. Relay K10 is energized through stage 4 of
«FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C. The + 28 V voltage is routed through relays K1 and K10 and through
energized relay K12 (1st limit flight envelope not exceeded) to supply relays K5 and K6. The + 28 V
voltage from lighting control unit ,33 L supplies «cbt F» light 99C through relay K5 (steady
illumination).
(b) Flashing illumination
1st limit system operated.

Relay K12 is de-energized (1st limit flight envelope), causing relays K4 and K5 to be de-energized.
Through lever 7C, the + 28 V voltage is routed through one stage of de-energized relay K4 to energize
relay K1 1 and supply the flashing unit. « cbt F» light 99C is supplied with a + 28 V voltage fed by
lighting control unit 33L and routed through the stage of relay K11 and one stage of de-energized
relay K5. «cbtF» light 99C flashes.
(c) Illumination caused by double selection of controls.
Lever 7C is unlocked and armed while «FLAPS/SLATS» handle 6C is set to its center or aft
position.
Relay K10 is not energized. Relays K4 and K5 are de-energized.
Relay K1 1 and the flashing unit are supplied through K4. «cbtF» light 99C flashes.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION y^F5 Jê*5
MIRAGE F
Normal
FIGURE 12 - SCHEMA DE FONCTIONNEMENT DU VOYANT VOLETS

DE COMBAT ARMES
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF COMBAT SLAT/F LAP
INDICATOR LIGHT
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
B - Operating principle of «LIM» warning light (Figure 13)
Flaps controlled manually (handle 6C)

- «FLAPS/SLATS» handle set to its center position (1/2).
«SLAT/FLAP» switch 206C set to «OFF» or «NORMAL». Operation of 1st limit system
(IAS>300kt).
Relay K10 is de-energized and relay K12 is de-energized by the 1st limit system. Through the stage of
microswitch 8C, the «LIM» warning light is connected to ground via de-energized relays K12 and K10.
The «LIM» warning light comes on and the warning horn operates.
«FLAPS/SLATS» handle set to full flap position.

-
«SLAT/FLAP» switch 206C set to «OFF». Through microswitch 8C, the «LIM» warning light is
connected to ground via 17F when IAS > 225 kt. The «LIM» warning light comes on and the warning
horn operates.
I ' 1
H i
+ 28V
8C B A H
r-UTT
39 17F
1
>- 38
LL
C o Vh
29°f048° °°+e
o loo'
>225 kt
192C J1
6C
1st limit + 28V- H | i
IAS>300kt
+- P
"1
J_K12
P2
K10
FIGURE 13 - FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «LIM» WARNING LIGHT IN MANUAL MODE
BB MOD 454
05-77 4-135
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION ^S&=
MIRAGE F
(b) Auto slats (Fig. 14)
With slat/flap switch 206C to «NORMAL», slats extended, if Mach number or IAS exceed the
preset safety limits, relay K4 is energized and causes «LIM» light grounding and illumination, as well as
warning horn operation.
55 F
28V \ [Ûm]
Slotted slats 203 C
extended or 11 w
not retracted
142C
«o
O
Q
M^li <L
7 W
Jh-
191 C
Slotted slats
extended or
I
not retracted
D2 C2 M2
193C
{M: Sm
B2
SLATS
FIGURE 14 - FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF "LIM" LIGHT IN AUTO SLAT MODE
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^-"rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION. __
(c) Flaps controlled in combat flap automatic mode (figure 15).

Switch 206C set to «NORMAL» and lever 7C unlocked (flaps armed).
NOTE : No warning is provided by the «LIM» warning light upon operation of 1st limit system.
«cbt F» light 99C flashes (see paragraph A).
The 1st limit system having operated, the flaps retract normally. Microswitch 187Cisopen « 17°).
Microswitches 183C and 8C are open and time relay K7 (3 sec.) is energized if the 2nd limit is reached.
The 3-sec. time delay prevents the «LIM» warning light from being illuminated by the 2nd limit system
when flaps are retracting without having reached their flat travel portion (command from 1st limit
system).
The 1st limit system has operated but lever 7C is disarmed the moment the 1st limit is passed.
Relay K1 is de-energized. Microswitch 8C is closed. Relay K12 is de-energized by the 1st limit system.
Time relay K6 is de-energized 4 sec. after lever 7C is disarmed. If microswitch 8C is still closed, the
«LIM» warning light is connected to ground through de-energized relay K6. The «LIM» warning light
comes on and the warning horn operates.
The 2nd limit system has operated.
Without time delay

-
-Microswitch 187C is closed (flaps > 17°). The + 28-V voltage from 56F (M >0.85) or K9
(IAS > 335 kt) energized K3. The «LIM» warning light is connected to ground and comes on
immediately. The warning horn operates. As soon as flap deflection reaches the 17° position, the «LIM»
warning light goes out because time relay K7 (3 sec.), which is operated by the 2nd limit system, is not
closed yet.
With time delay

-
- Microswitch 187C is open (flaps < 17°). Time relay K7 (3 sec.) is energized upon operation
of 2 nd limit system.
If, after 3 sec, microswitch 183Cis closed for a slat deflection greaterthan 19°, energized relay K7
energizes relay K3. The «LIM» warning light is connected to ground and comes on. The warning horn
operates. But, if 8C is closed (half-flaps or flaps retracting -slats < 19°), energized relay K7 causes the
«LIM» warning light to be connected to ground through the control circuit of K8. The «LIM» warning
light comes on and the warning horn operates.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
+ 28V
Armé
Armed
FIGURE 15 - SCHEMA DE FONCTIONNEMENT DU VOYANT "LIM" EN HYPER COMBAT
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF "LIM" WARNING LIGHT IN COMBAT.
SLAT/FLAP MODE
BB MOD 454 ». a ,,«,
BREGUET AVIATION
D -Operating principle of «S/F» warning light (1W)

- Slats controlled in automatic mode (figure 16)
«SLAT-FLAP» switch 206C set to «NORMAL».
The «S/F» light comes on under the following conditions :
- in case of de-energization of comparison relay K1 in slat servo unit 193C, to indicate that
slats are inoperative due to a difference in deflections higher than 7 °
- Modification 631 not incorporated :

- higher than 4°
- in case of operation of 2nd limit safety system, even after safety signal has disappeared,
as long as «SLAT/FLAP» switch 206C is not set to «OFF» (K3 self -energized) ; the «S/F» warning
light remains on.
* 28 V self-energization
(Fig. 9) -*-i r**- + 28V2ndL IMIT
193C D2 C2
i +
MODIFICATION 631
NOT INCORPORATED
K3LJ~^
>4° A2 S/F + 28V
j-*-***
-K\
9 °tT |
\>r K1
+ 28I
I !->* /< I
FIGURE 16- FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «S/F» WARNING LIGHT

IN A UTOMA TIC SLA T MODE
- Flaps controlled in combat mode (figure 17)
- Relay K2 is energized in case of operation of 2nd limit safety system. The «S/F» warning
light is connected to ground and comes on. Combat flap control lever 7C should be disarmed to
extinguish the «S/F» warning light.
192C
+28
>- G1 S/F + 28V
K2
2nd LIMIT
bHl
i -h 28 V self-energization
(Fig. 10)
FIGURE 17 - FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF «S/F» WARNING IN COMBAT FLAP MODE
- «SLAT/FLAP» switch 206C set to «EMG RETR»
Comparison relay K1 is no longer energized and the «S/F» warning light is connected to ground
through de-energized comparison relay K1.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION,,
MIRAGE F
F LAP SPRING BOX
(Figure 18)
1 - GENERAL
The flap spring box is intended to take up electric actuator lengthening or shortening and then to
restore progressively such variations as flaps are being actuated.
2- DESCRIPTION

- body 1
-rod 2
- two sliders 3 and 4
- spring 5
- stop 6
- two attachment clevises 7 and 8.
A - Body 1
One body end is blanked off by attachment clevis 7 and the other end is provided- with a hole
intended for the passage of stop 6 screwed onto rod 2. The body contains the spring box component
items.
B- Rod 2
Shouldered at one end, it slides in the cylinder and its displacement in either direction drives
slider 3 or 4, therefore causing spring 5 to become compressed.
C- Sliders 3 and 4
They act as a seat to spring 5. Their outer surface is provided with two machined grooves, each of
these grooves being fitted with a teflon washer 16. These teflon washers are intended to reduce frictions
between sliders and body. For identical reasons the inner surface is provided with two machined
grooves, each of these grooves being fitted with a teflon washer.
D Spring 5
Bearing on both sliders 3 and 4, it is more or less compressed depending on spring box lengthening
or shortening value.
E--Stop6
Screwed onto rod 2, it is secured to the latter through nut 10. The stop inner face, which is in
contact with slider 4, drives the latter during spring box shortening.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
12-13-14 15 .Trou à ± 10° par rapport à celui du corps 12- 13-14-15

Hole (± 10° with reference to body)
Force
Course
Travel
FIGURE 18 - BOITE A RESSORT VOLETS

FLAP SPRING BOX
BB MOD 454 4-141
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ^T^TU. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION îZZS^^g^
^-^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
F Attachment devises 7 and 8
Clevis 7, which is screwed into body 1, is secured to the latter through nut 9. It allows moving
assembly end play to be cancelled. The other clevis 8 is screwed onto the outer end of rod 2 and is
secured to the latter through nut 11. Each clevis is fitted with attaching pin 12, washer 13, nut 14 and
locking pin 15.
3- OPERATION
As soon as a load higher than threshold value is being applied, the spring becomes compressed and
the spring box takes up corresponding linkage travel. It can restore taken-up linkage travel progressively
with an almost constant load applied, until initial center-to-center distance is obtained.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^"û. ^ _
MIRAGE
. .
F
,
FLAP MICROSWITCH UNIT
(Figure 19)
1 - GENERAL
The microswitches are directly actuated by flap movements. Two of them are intended for
indicating purposes and the third one plays a part in slat control circuit and in limit system («LIM»
light).
The three microswitches are similar, except as regards their camshafts and electrical connections.
2- DESCRIPTION
Each unit consists of :
- a case
- three microswitches
- a rocker arm assembly
- an electrical connector and wiring
A- Case 1
It consists of a rectangular cage provided with two open opposite sides blanked off by two
covers 2 and 3 attached by means of screws.
B Microswitches 4
The three microswitches are mounted in case 1. They are attached by means of two screws 6 fitted
with lockplates 8, spacers 7 and nuts 9.
C Rocker arm assembly
It consists of :
- three rocker arms 10, pivoting on pin 1 1 and spaced by means of shim washers 12. Each rocker
arm is fitted with roller 13 and adjusting screw 14 with associated locknut 15.
- three springs 17 attached to common pin 18 and to each rocker arm.
- camshaft 19, connected to control lever 20.
D Electrical connector and wiring
The wiring connects microswitch terminals to aircraft electrical system through the electrical
connector. It is held by means of half-clamp 21 to the outlet of case 1 .
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ûP33
MIRAGE F
24.25
M-^gf" r^ iP^rCôjO
I m jfll p
' ' '
LU L10 L 22.23
SECTION E
SECTION C
SECTION D ne N° 1 I
o No. 1 »
r^' j
No. 2 I
ne N° 2 !
no |
Schéma de câblage
VU SUIVANT B
Wiring diagram ne N° 3 |
VIEW IN DIRECTION OF ARROW B
19
r' ]£3 !
No. 1
ne No !
)
~ I !
/Vo. 2 I
A0 N° 2 !
I
<
J22 I
No. 3
w w er ne
N° 3
o
20
LU
:£T !
MO mm (6.692 in)
COUPE A
CROSS-SECTION A
C î
FIGURE 19 - CONTACTEUR
MICROSWITCH UNIT
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
3 - OPERATION
Three holes in the body of the unit provide for attachment to the aircraft structure, A fourth hole
is provided to accommodate a locating pin. The unit can be set to «flaps up» reference position by
pinning the control lever to the body.
A Flap indicating microswitch units 2C1 and 2C2
These two microswitch units are arranged in a symmetrical manner and ensure the following
electrical switchings depending on control lever angular settings :
nc contact making
N°1
Bo-
no
rzr between A and B. contact breaking
N°2 contact making
between D and E . contact breaking

no
contact making
between G and H . contact breaking

6V
angular position of
0° 7° 38° 15' 55° 65° control lever 20
(increasing direction)
49°
B Flap safety microswitch unit 8C
It ensures the following electrical switchings, depending on control lever angular settings :
contact making
between H and J . contact breaking
contact making
between B and C . contact breaking
contact making
between E and F . contact breaking

61'
angular position of
18° 35° 46° 65° control lever 20
(increasing direction)
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
/L-i*^='\I
_ _
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF DROOP SLAT JACK

(Figure 20)
A Special tools
-Tool kit F1-CVB
B - Standard tools
- ARSAERO coupling kit.
- Hydraulic accessory kit.

D Spares
-Wing blanking plug
2 - MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 3520
- Grease AI R 3565
- White spirit
Comply with precautionary measures to be taken for removing hydraulic components (See 07-0).
-
Open access doors VO-31 and both rod pin access holes (rod 175-22).
-
- Connect hydraulic power supply to system 1 (slow operation).
- Supply aircraft electrical systems with power.
- Set the .«FLAPS/SLATS» handle to its aft position (flaps and slats fully extended).
- Progressively apply pressure in system and extend slats until bellcrank rod pin is opposite access
holes provided for its removal.
NOTE : The jack can be removed only with its rod 1 75-22 (on side opposed to wing root).
- Hold slats in that position, using any supporting means.
4 - REMOVAL
Disconnect electrical connector. Remove both wiring clamps.

-
Disconnect drive 1 rod on jack side (17 mm A/F). Remove attaching pin and recover teflon
-
washer.
- Disconnect drive 2 control rod on bellcrank side (17 mm socket). Remove attaching pin (using
extractor screw MS 1 393) and recover teflon washer.
- Loosen fairlead to slacken both jack supply pipes.
- Disconnect both pipes (12 mm pipe wrench), remove the pipe located behind the jack.
- Disengage gear reducer actuator drain pipe from its flange.
- Remove drain flange.
- Remove eight jack attaching screws (10 mm socket).
- Remove jack with its rod after disconnecting electrical connector 189C.
- Fit blanking plugs onto hydraulic pipes.
- Remove spilled hydraulic fluid from compartment, using a sponge.
BB MOD 454
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Attaque 1
Drive 1
Attaque 2
Drive 2
Contrôle du jeu aux points d'attaque 1 et 2

Clearance check at drive points 1 and 2
DETAIL A
Jack (0.590 in)

travel
(2.952 in)
FIGURE 20 - DEPOSE-POSE D'UN VERIN DE BECS BASCULANTS

REMO VAL INSTALLA TION OF DROOP SLA T JACK
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT #^-^-^1 V\II\/AV»7L. I
^&& jê^>
BREGUET AVIATION « ^ ^ -, ....,,,., n,
-*^ST^ Restricted MANUAL 04
5 - REPLACEMENT
A - Preadjustment
-Couple drive rod 2 to spare jack.

-Set each end-fitting at a 15 mm (0.59 in) center-to-center dimension (theoretical di¬
mension) from jack body (slat out-slat in) (see detail).
-Set spare jack to same center-to-center dimension as removed jack by simultaneously
acting on both end-fittings. Complete such an adjustment with both end-fittings located
within a same plane.
-Fit a hydraulic pump (provided with a pressure gauge) to pressure system 2 (U2).
j -Lock the jack in the slat- retracted position and drop pressure.
-Provisionally install jack by means of four screws.
-Couple drive rod 2.
-On drive 1 side, rotate jack rod (20 mm A/F) so as to bring slat into contact with stops.
-On stop 4 check for interference fit using a 0.05 mm (0.001 in) shim. Press slat upper
face downwards: the shim should pass freely.
-Once stop 4 is adjusted, install micrometric rod 1 .
-Unlock jack, if required, and orientate and position end-fitting horizontally.
-Relockjack.
-Couple micrometric rod 1 to bellcrank.
-Act upon micrometric rod to obtain an interference fit at stop 3, using a 0.05 mm
(0.001 in) shim. Press slat upper face downwards: the shim should pass freely.
-Remove rod 1 and torque to 8.2 m.daN (60.5 ft.lb).
-Install micrometric rod.
B - Jack initial load adjustment

-Build up pressure in jack and act upon jack rod on drive 1 side to obtain jack locking at
a pressure of 20 ± 5 bar (290 ± 72 psi) (initial load).
-Unscrew to increase stress.
-Lower and raise slat and check locking pressure.
- Lock jack end -fittings.
C - Final adjustment
-Remove jack and torque end-fittings to 3.2 m.daN (23.6 ft.lb). Lock (both end-fittings
should be located within a same plane).
- Reinstall jack.
-Bring slat into contact with stops 3 and 4 (check for simultaneous contact).
-Measure dimension on jack end-fitting, using a rule.
-Lock jack in "stop abutment" configuration.
-Increase jack pressure to 60 bar (870 psi).
-Check for jack abutment and check that slat structure abutment is reached before jack
abutment.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION^cT
/L^îrU
^~
MIRAGE F
6- INSTALLATION
Preliminary steps
-
Carefully wipe the various assembly parts. Check components for perfect surface finish. Slightly
lubricate pins before installation.
- Jack installation
Proceed in reverse order of removal.
- Connect the pipe located behind the jack, first to the jack then to the structure.
7- FINAL STEPS
- Comply with safety measures to be taken after installing a hydraulic component (see 07-0).
- Perform a deflection test and check indicating system (see 04-4).
- Reinstall the access door and also new blanking plugs on the openings used for removal of the
pin.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION -<^_
/L-^-^rU
.
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF A SLOTTED SLAT GEARMOTOR
A Special tools
- 1st line maintenance flight control tool kit

- Trailing edge protector
B Standard tools
- Arsaero coupling kit.

- Electrical power supply 1 15-200 V/400 Hz
- Wing access stepladder.
D Spares
- Locking pin 2331 0 CA 01 5020

- Blanking plugs.
2- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3520
-Oil Air 3512
-White spirit
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (see 01-0).
- Open access doors VO-31 and VO-24.
- Connect hydraulic power supply.
- Supply aircraft electrical systems with power.
- Remove both blanking plugs from access hole to drive 2 bellcrank-to-rod attaching pin.
- Set slats to «fully retracted» position.
NOTE : If slats have been retracted in emergency mode, it is necessary to extend and then retract
them in normal mode.
5- REMOVAL
-Disconnect gearmotor electrical connector.
-Set «slat/flap» handle to «Full».
-Supply hydraulic system 1 with pressure (slow operation), extend droop slats and drop the
pressure.
- Remove the two attaching pins of droop slat jack :
- on drive 1 side : jack-to-rod attaching pin (17 mm A/F wrench),
- on drive 2 side : rod-to-bellcrank attaching pin (17 mm A/F wrench and extractor MS 1393).
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT h<J>^Z\L
BREGUET AVIATION^c_
MIRAGE F
NOTE : Disengage the disconnected rods so as to allow the slat jack rod to be moved.
- Set the slat/flap handle to «Fully retracted» forward position.

- Supply hydraulic system 1 with pressure (slow operation) and bring the slat jack slowly to «slats
retracted» position.
SLAT JACK UNLOCKING REQUIRES A HYDRAULIC PRESSURE OF APPROX. 60 bar

(870 psi). PERFORM FOLLOWING OPERATION SO AS TO CHECK ROD DISPLACEMENT :
-as soon as unlocking takes place, actuate hydraulic power unit emergency stopping control
(remote control) and drop the pressure,
- allow the hydraulic power unit to operate again and apply pressure to obtain slow rod displace¬
ment up to jack internal stop.
Guide drive 2 rod and support the droop slat while performing above-mentioned operation.
Install trailing edge protector.
Remove the gearmotor output shaft attaching nut (13 mm A/F wrench) while holding the shaft
(19 mm A/F wrench),
- disconnect the gearmotor output rod (19 and 21 mm A/F wrenches),
- remove the gearmotor output shaft,
TAKE THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO MAKE SURE THAT TRANSMISSION ROD
POSITION IS NOT CHANGED DURING THE TIME THEY ARE REMOVED.
- disconnect the drain on structure side (support plate attached to wing lower surface by two
screws),
- remove the anti-vibration screw (13 mm socket),
- unfasten the electrical wiring retaining clamp,
- remove the attaching angle located on wing upper surface, recover the shim,
- loosen the fairlead to slacken both hydraulic pipes,
- disconnect both pipes (12 mm union wrench),
- remove the four (4) gearmotor attaching screws (8 mm socket),
- recover the washers,
- remove the gearmotor,
- recover both locating pins,
- fit blanking plugs onto hydraulic pipes and gearmotor,
- remove spilled hydraulic fluid from compartment, using a sponge.
6- REPLACEMENT OF GEARMOTOR
The gearmotor is delivered with its drain.
7- INSTALLATION
THE GEARMOTOR IS PROVIDED WITH A LABEL INDICATING ITS LOCATION IN AIR¬

CRAFT.
- Remove blanking plugs from connections.

- Check threads for condition and cleanliness.
- Position the gearmotor and connect both pipes (do not lock).
- Install both locating pins and tighten the four (4) attaching screws.
- Attach the angle on wing upper surface and install the anti-vibration screw.
- Lock pipe couplings and tighten the fairlead.
Install the electrical wiring retaining clamp.
- Fit and safety drive shaft gearmotor . Be careful not to turn the transmission rod over.
- Connect the drive rod to gearmotor and safety.
- Remove trailing edge protector.
- Set the slat/flap handle to «Fully extended» aft position.
- Supply hydraulic system 1 with pressure (slow operation) and bring the rod slowly to abutment.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVI
Ë->"~iru
ATlON^gP'^^ï»
MIRAGE
..»..,..«.«
F
- Install the attaching pins :

- drive 1 rod-to-jack,
- drive 2 rod-to-bellcrank.
- Cut the nylon tube to proper length and secure the drain to wing lower surface.
- Move the «slatAlap» handle to «Fully retracted» forward position.
- Supply hydraulic system 1 and retract the droop slats.
- Connect the electrical connector of the gearmotor.
8- FINAL STEPS
- Carry out functional tests, check for adjustment and indicating system (see 04-4).
- Install the doors and the blanking plugs.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2UJ>~irvL
BREGUET AVIATION^jaF3^^-^
MIRAGE
...»,*.
F
~.
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF A FLAPJACK
(figure 21 )
A Special tools
- 1st line maintenance flight control tool kit.
B Standard tools
- Set of extra-thin open-end wrenches.
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
- Accessory kit for torque wrench 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) and 5 to 50 m.daN (40 to
350 ft.lb).

- Electrical power supply, 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz.
D Spares
- 1 locking pin 2331 0 AA 030035 L.
2- MATERIALS
- Mineral petrolatum Air 3565

- Remove doors VO-61 and V1-60 (underneath spoiler).

- Connect hydraulic (system 1 ) and electrical power supplies.
- Make sure that slat and flap deflection areas are clear.
- Energize the aircraft electrical systems.
- Apply hydraulic pressure to system 1 and fully extend the flaps.
- Drop hydraulic pressure and cut off electrical power supply.
- Deflect spoiler panel corresponding to flap jack to be removed.
NOTE : Where pressure cannot be applied to aircraft hydraulic system, connect a hand pump to flap
jack supply pipes at wing root.
CAUTION :
TAKE ALL THE SAFETY MEASURES (see 07-0).
4- REMOVAL
- Removal of attaching pin located on sliding rod side requires jack rod to be retracted and then
extended. This operation can be performed by means of hydraulic power supply unit set to a pressure
providing slow operation.
- If above operation cannot be performed proceed as follows :
- disconnect pressure pipe (door 26.10 or 26.02),
- connect a hand pump to pressure pipe,
- disconnect slide valve drive rod (5).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F COUPE A
Restricted MANUAL 04 SECTION A
VUE DE DESSOUS
BOTTOM VIEW
COUPE B
SECT/ON B
MODIFICA TION 551 NOT INCORPORA TED
rV^V^sTHÊTOS^WS^S^?
COUPE B
SECT/ON B
r^^V^^WWKS
k^V\VVS^VW\V>
COUPE C
SECTION C
VUE DE DESSUS
TOP VIEW
BB MOD 454 FIGURE 21 - DEPOSE POSE D'UN VERIN DE VOLET

1 2-80 REMO VAL AND INSTA L LA TION OF FLAP JA CK

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJi>^Z~Z±
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^-^*^
MIRAGE
. .
F
n.
- Through door V1-60, remove nut 1 from hinge pin retaining plug 2.
- Retract jack rod.
- Remove plug 2 from pin (door VO-61) LH thread.
- Disconnect bonding braid.
- Extend jack rod.
- Using extractor MS 1392, remove pin 3 (door V1-60).
- Recover anti-swivelling flange 4.
- Retract jack rod.
- Disconnect jack pipes (wrench M31045 and handle M31056).
- Remove the lockwasher from the attaching pin at fixed point side.
- Remove attaching pin at fixed point side (wrenches M31044 and M31 103).
- Disengage jack and slide it over fixed point side clevis.
- Proceed as follows to clear door VO-61 :
- position flap drive bellcrank by acting on flaps
- tilt jack and remove it (sliding rod side first).
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Clean and slightly lubricate pins and ball-joints before installation.
CAUTION :
THE JACK FIXED POINT SIDE BEING PROVIDED WITH A TEFLON-COATED BALL-JOINT,
COAT ITS ATTACHING PIN WITH A VERY SLIGHT FILM OF PETROLATUM BEFORE
INSTALLATION.
B Procedure
- Proceed in reverse order of removal.

- Offer the jack with its sliding rod extended by 15 mm (0.59 in) with respect to its locked posi¬
tion.
(1 ) Use mounting thimble M31053 to install fixed point side attaching pin.
(2) - Apply following tightening torques :

- fixed point side attaching pin : 5 ± 1 mdaN (36.8 ± 7.3 ft.lb)
-sliding rod side attaching pin : 5 mdaN (36.8 ft.lb).

- Fit the lockwasher onto the attaching pin at fixed point side.
NOTE : The lockwasher on the attaching pin at fixed point side varies depending as whether modi¬
fication 551 has effectively been incorporated. When installing lockwasher, make sure that it
is in accordance with wing specification.
- Measure clearance between flap jack slide valve and stop screw on non-removed jack.
- Adjust micrometric rod 5 to obtain same clearance.
- Check that components are properly installed and properly locked.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Comply with safety measures to be taken after installing a hydraulic component (see 07-0).
- Check flap adjustment (see 04-4).
- Perform a functional test and check indicating system (see 04-4).
BB MOD 454
//^^-"rU
__
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF FLAP SPRING BOX
A Special tools
B Spares
- 2 locking pins 23310 AA 015015 L.
2- MATERIALS
- Grease Air 4222 or 421 0
Remove door 28.00.

-
Disconnect the LH rod on triple bellcrank side.
-
- Remove the electric actuator (see 04-4).
- Disconnect the rod from the microswitch unit so as to prevent any microswitch from being
damaged during removal/installation operations.
4- REMOVAL
Remove the pin on triple bellcrank side (10 mm wrench).

-
the spring box from the triple bellcrank, with the box in rear position so as to ease
- Disengage
removal of the front pin.
- Remove the front pin.
5- INSTALLATION
Proceed in reverse order of removal :

-lightly lubricate the pins before installation,
-connect the spring box to the linkage (sliding portion directed forwards, water drain holes in
lower position),
- proceed to installation of rods and electric actuator.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Perform a functional test of high-lift devices (see 04-4). Check that there is no contact with
other components in the compartment during displacement.
- Check that the pins are correctly locked and reinstall the access doors.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
/LJ^r^JL
^£T ^^ .
MIRAGE F
..aa,.,». r.»
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF SLOTTED SLAT CONTROL RODS

(figure 22)
1 - SCOPE
This sheet provides the instructions required for removing and installing slotted slat control rods,
aswell as for positioning various constituent items. LH and RH control systems are arranged sym¬
metrically and only the LH wing control system is dealt with in the present sheet.
A Special tools
- Slat deflection templates
B Standard tools
- Set of extra thin open-end wrenches

3- MATERIALS
-Grease Air 4222 or 4210.
- Remove or open the access doors concerned.
- Extend the slats.
CAUTION :
TAKE THE MEASURES NECESSARY TO PREVENT CONTROLS FROM BEING OPERATED
DURING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
5- PROCEDURE
A Removal
Remove locking pin 5, washer 6 and stirrup 3 and then extract pin 4.
-
-Unlock and unscrew nut 2 WHILE HOLDING HEXAGONAL SECTION 1 (19 and 21 mm
A/F open-end wrenches).
- Disconnect and remove both rod parts.
B Installation
-Fit both rod parts on the splined shaft of the hinged bracket, the actuator or the gearmotor,
being careful to position the rod parts as illustrated on the figure. Upon installation of all rods, check
the sliding assembly making sure that their lateral sliding before stopping, is comprised between 8 and
14 mm (0.314 and 0.551 in) and that they penetrate the sliding end fittings by 18 ± 4 mm
(0.708 ± 0.157 in) with fixed side connected. Make sure that the passage holes provided for pin 4 on
splined shaft and rod are opposite each other.
NOTE : Each end rod is provided with two gimbal joints which should be aligned to maintain kine¬
matic properties.
- Tighten nut 2 to a torque of 2 to 2.5 m.daN (14.7 to 18.4 ft.lb) WHILE HOLDING HEXAGO¬
NAL SECTION 1 and safetying it with the nut.
- Install and lock pin 4 as illustrated in the figure.
6- CHECK AND TESTS
- Check for operation of the slats (see 04-4).
7- FINAL STEPS
Remove the tools
-
Reinstall all inspection doors.
-
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
LEGENDE
KEY
A = Accouplement
F = Fixe
G = Glissant
C = Coupling
F Fixed
DETAIL B S = Sliding
DETAIL C SECTION H
®
H/?<\ ~\t
FIGURE 22 - DEPOSE-POSE DES BIELLES DE COMMANDE DES BECS A FENTE

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF SLOTTED SLAT CONTROL RODS
BB MOD 454
02-85 Restricted FIGURE 224 4-31
4-313
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J Z^-^-^\ iVUKMV^C I
BREGUET AVIATION^£fi_ ^^-^ - . .«a muai *a
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF SLOTTED SLAT JACKS

(figures 23, 24 and 26)
A Special tools
-Flight control first line maintenance tool kit

-Slat deflection templates GVB3
- End-fitting M31 104
- Rule M3 1097

C Spares
- Locking pins 23310AA010010LE

- Lockplates 23350AC060LE
2- MATERIALS

- Loctite 675
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL SAFETY STEPS APPLICABLE TO SYSTEM CONCERNED (see 01-0).
- Open access doors V1.15 and VI. 17 - V2.15 and V2.17.

- Connect hydraulic power supply.
- Energize aircraft electrical systems.
- Set slats in «all down» position.
5- REMOVAL
A Drive jack No. 1
- Remove slotted slat (see 03-1 ).

- Remove both lower surface doors on either side of jack (doors V1 .1 5 and V1 .17).
- Disconnect torque rods on either side of jack (see 04-4).
- Unlock and remove both screws used to hold jack pins. Remove both stirrups.
- Hold jack and uncouple it by removing both pins.
- Uncouple blanking part 14 from hinge-bracket support 15 (2 screws).
- Remove hinge-bracket support from sliding door (pin provided with a locking pin).
- Uncouple box 13 from jack (4 screws).
BA MOD 454
BREGUET
J
AVIATION.-^533
MIRAGE F
Nut fully home (0098 + 0.019 ''^ COUPE G (°-098 I 0 019 in)
CROSS-SECTION G
FIGURE 23 - DEPOSE-POSE DES VERINS DE BEC Vue intrados vérin enlevé
REMO VAL AND INSTA L LA TION OF SLA T JA CKS Lower surface view Jack removed
BB MOD 454
BREGUET
IL^^ZV^
AVIATION^c^T^^-O
MIRAGE F
^C*=^^&> Restricted MANUAL 04
B - Drive jack No. 2
- The slotted slat should be removed.

- Remove both lower surface doors on either side of the jack (doors V2.15 and V2.17).
- Disconnect the torque rod (see 04-4).
- Unlock and remove both screws used to hold the jack pins. Remove both stirrups.
- Hold the jack and uncouple it by removing both pins.
- Uncouple the box from the jack (four screws).
- Remove the hinge bracket support attaching shims (four screws).
- Uncouple the sliding door.
6- REPLACEMENT OF JACK
NOTE : Since the screwjacks provided as spares are delivered protected but not lubricated, it is
mandatory to lubricate them completely prior to installation.
A Drive jack No. 1
(1 ) Preparation of jack
- Unscrew nut (1 ) ; recover washers (2) and (3), seal (4), spacer (5), then shim washers (6).
- Unscrew and remove screw (7) (pay attention to screw thread).
- Screw in locknut (10) until it bears against stop (12).
- Fit screw (7) in its jack.
- Fit the screw in bush (9) ; the latter has an end play of about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) in its housing.
CAUTION :
WHILE SCREWING, PUSH THE SCREW TO KEEP THE BUSH APPLIED AGAINST THE
HOUSING BOTTOM.
- No binding point should be felt when screw (7) engages with the rollers of nut (8). Otherwise,
unscrew screw (7) and repeat the whole operation.
- Reinstall washers (6), spacer (5), seal (4), washers (3) and (2) and nut (1 ).
- Tighten nut (1 ) until seal (4) is slightly compressed.
(2) Adjustment and installation of stops on jack
- Offer the jack to the aircraft and attach it to the structure and the moving slat. Bring the latter to
its normal «retracted» position, with the end fitting connected to the bearing (use tool M31104). A
dimension of 104 ± 0.5 mm (4.094 ± 0.019 in) should be obtained ; adjust the template.
- Measure distance A between locknut (10) and the face of the reduction gear.
- Dimension A measured in aircraft and reduced by 2 mm (0.079 in) is used to determine the theo¬
retical thickness of shim washers (1 1 ). Select the appropriate number of shim washers to obtain such a
+ 03
thickness with a tolerance of ± 0.5 mm (0.019 in), which gives a clearance of 2 _n'9 mm
+ 0 011
(0.078 _ 0 rjn7 'n^ between stoP an<* J30^-
- Set the slat to full extended position and measure the dimension.
- Using the template, position the slat at 26°. Measure the dimension again and, if required, adjust
the number of washers (6) to obtain a clearance of 3 * j*-5 mm (0.12 *« in) between stop
washer (3) and jack attachment yoke.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT K^^S^ MIRAGE F
.«oust av,»i,on^^cS«> R.sMcU)d MANUAL 04
- Remove jack.
Remove nut 1 , washers and spacers.
- Remove screw 7.
- Unscrew locknut 10.
- Place shim washers 1 1 against stop.
- Reinstall locknut 10. Torque to 2 ± 0.5 m.daN (14.75 ± 3.68 ft.lb).
- Slightly lubricate screw.
- Reinstall screw and comply with measures described in paragraph «Jack preparation».
- Reinstall washers 6, spacer 5, seal 4, washers 3 and 2 and nut 1 .
i r\ r- I O CO
- Torque nut 1 to 1.5 , ' m.daN (1 1.62 , 0' ft.lb) until slight crushing of seal 4 is obtained.
7- INSTALLATION
A Drive jack No. 1
- Attach box 13 to jack (4 screws and 4 washers) (lock with Loctite).

- Attach blanking part 14 and hinge-bracket support 15 to jack and to sliding door 16. Pin sliding
door.
- Lockwire nut 10, being careful to provide for a clearance of 1 .5 mm (0.059 in) between lockwire
and box.
- Attach jack to bearing (lubrication fitting in low position).
- Reinstall slotted slat.
- Attach both torque rods to jack (see 04-4).
- Using end-fitting M31 104, retract and extend slat.
- If required, perform torque rod adjustment (see 04-4).
- Check and correct clearances as required (see figure).
NOTE : Sliding door penetration at track end may exceptionnally reach 10 mm (0.393 in).
B - Drive jack No. 2
- Attach box to jack (4 screws and 4 washers) (lock with Loctite).

- Attach hinge-bracket support to support plate (4 screws), using shims.
- Attach jack to bearing.
- Reinstall slotted slat.
- Attach torque rod to jack (see 04-4).
- Using end-fitting M31 104, retract and extend slat.
- If required, perform torque rod adjustment (see 04-4).
- Check and correct clearances as required (see figure).
8- TESTS
Perform deflection check (see 04-4).
9- FINAL STEPS
- Remove all tools.

BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
?mm+0
^ mm ,nR
COUPE C 9mn1 +0 .
I mm , _-
. ' CROSS-SECTION C + °'5
<0078+0.19in) <0078+ 0.019 in)
4 mm (0. 157 in)
L i I h '[il ''"'
COUPE B
CROSS-SECTION B
Bec rentré
Slat "IN"
(0.098 +0
+ 0.019 in) (0.098
+ 0.019 in)
Vue intrados vérin enlevé

Lower surface view Jack removed
\ a( p O TT
cL_ O O
Yv
+ 0 + 0
2 mm 2 mm
+ 0,5 + 0,5
(0.098
+0 +0
+ 0.019 in) (0.098
+ 0.019 in)
»l_ _.JB
V
- « n
1
zi
V^-^~-
m y//;i c
D i
F>
3^z£
Tr1 o
^jnnr^^n
FIGURE 24 - DEPOSE-POSE DES VERINS DE BEC
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SLAT JACKS
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ J< -*< /Y\ll\/-\wl_ I
BREGUET AVIATION_^,_
^ ^^-^^
^^-^ . ,
Restricted a«am,,a. n04a
MANUAL
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF FLAP ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
A - Special tools

B - Spares
-2 locking pins 2331 0 AA 01 501 5.
2 - MATERIALS
-Grease Air 4222 or 4210.
-Remove door 28.00.
4 - REMOVAL
-Disconnect the electrical connector.

-Remove the clamp from the wiring.
-Disconnect the bonding braid.
-Remove the attaching pin nuts (10 mm wrench); recover the flat washers.
-Remove the pin on fixed point side; push on the actuator to counterbalance the spring
box force; remove the pin and recover the anti-swiveling recessed washer and Teflon washer.
-Remove the pin on front bellcrank assembly side.
- Remove the electric actuator.
5 - INSTALLATION
-Install the actuator (Actuator fixed point fitted to the structure, electric motor on right
side).
-Lightly lubricate the pins before installation.
-Connect the actuator to the linkage (front bellcrank assembly, pin head on RH side).
-Install the pin on fixed point side; position the recessed washer under the head of this
pin on the RH side. Insert the Teflon washer on pin head side and push on the actuator to
counterbalance the spring box force.
-Install the flat washers, tighten the nuts until seated and fit locking pins at the first hole.
-Connect the bonding braid and electrical connector.
-Secure the wiring with its clamp.
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Perform a functional test of high-lift devices (see 04-4).
-Check that there is no contact with other components in the compartment during dis¬
placement.
-Check that the pins are correctly locked and reinstall the access door.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=J>^r\l
BREGUET AVIATION^F53^^^
MIRAGE
», m,aka
F
, a .
DISASSEMBLY-LUBRICATION-ASSEMBLY OF FLAP SPRING BOX

(figure 18)
A Special tools
- 2nd line maintenance workshop flight control tool kit.
B Standard tools

- Torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
C Spares
- 4 bearing rings 06S0155001

- 2 bearing rings 06S0285001
- 1 lock plate 05S013G002
- 1 lock plate 05S008L001
2- MATERIALS
- Approved chlorinated solvent or white spirit.

-GreaseMIL-G-4343.
3- DISASSEMBLY
Remove attaching pins 1 2.

-
- Measure the center-to-center distance between attaching clevises with accuracy (theoretical
dimension : 316.5 ±3 mm (12.460 ± 0.12 in)).
-Unlock nut 9, straighten lock plate 17 and untighten nut 11 while holding clevis 8 with tool
MHC 310-41 , unscrew clevis 8, remove lock plate 17 and unscrew nut 11.
- Grip spring box in vice support MHC 310-41. Unlock and unscrew nut 9. Unscrew and remove
clevis 7.
- Remove moving assembly from body and measure dimension B (theoretical dimension :
112.5 mm (4.429 in)).
- Place moving assembly in compression tool MGC310-21 , tighten the operating screw of the tool
until nut 10 is freed from slider 4.
-Straighten lock plate 18, prevent rod 2 from rotating, unscrew nut 10, remove lock plate 18,
stop 6 and screw the chuck of tool MGC 310-21 onto rod end. Loosen operating screw of the tool
until spring 5 is fully released.
- Remove moving assembly from compression tool and successively remove from rod 2 : the tool
chuck, slider 4, spring 5 and slider 3.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," *\ -" -« / V\l l\/-\V_7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION w^>_-
^-rt. ^s~*^
ê^. *. .
Restricted . kjamiiai
MANUAL n*
04
spirit bath.
NOTE: While performing cleaning, make sure that the evacuation holes provided on body 1
and clevis 7 are clear.
-Check removed parts for external condition, making sure that the various friction sur¬
the rod.
-Systematically replace the bearing rings of sliders 3 and 4.
-On sliders 3 and 4, blend out the edges of any marks caused by the spring if the depth
of the indentations does not exceed 0.3 mm (0.012 in); otherwise, replace the sliders.
-Check that the free length of spring 5 is comprised between 154.8 and 158.8 mm
(6.037 and 6.193 in).
-Check the bearing faces of nut 9 and body 1 which should show no evidence of distor¬
tion, burrs or dents; otherwise, replace nut 9 and attenuate the defects on the body bearing
face without modifying the perpendicularity of the face in relation to the axis of the part.
grooves.
CAUTION:
EXCESS GREASE IS DETRIMENTAL TO SPRING BOX OPERATION.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^-" -** /YXIIX/AwL. I
^5_-
BREGUET AVIATION
^rs. ^y-^>
^~^> _ .
Restr;cted , m a mi i a i
MANUAL rm
04
5 - ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Upon assembly, lightly lubricate the threads of rod 2 and clevis 7.
-Place rod 2 in vertical position, install slider 3, tighten chuck of tool MGC 310-21 on
rod and install spring 5 and slider 4.
-Place moving assembly in compression tool MGC 310-21 and compress the assembly.
-With the assembly compressed, remove the tool chuck and install stop 6, a new lock
plate 18, screw and torque nut 10 to 2.5 m.daN (18.43 ft.lb) without bending the lock plate.
NOTE: Make sure that stop 6 is correctly centered on rod 2.
-Remove moving assembly from compression tool MGC 310-21 .

-Place spring box body in vice support MHC 310-41, insert moving assembly in body,
then tighten clevis 7 on body until inner face of the clevis comes in contact with slider 3,
thereby cancelling axial play of moving assembly.
-Check that evacuation holes provided on body 1 and clevis 7 are aligned to within
± 10°. Should this not be the case, determine the angle existing between the two holes and
remove the equipment so as to adjust stop 6 (on side in contact with slider 4), knowing that,
to obtain a correct alignment, a 10° angle corresponds to an adjustment or thickness of
. 0.026 mm (0.001 in) on stop 6. Once alignment is obtained, screw and torque nut 9 to
| 2.75 m.daN (20.28 ft.lb).
-Install nut 11, a new lock plate 17 on rod, then screw clevis 8 without trying to obtain
an exact center-to-center distance and slightly tighten nut 1 1 .
6 - TESTS
-Spring box calibration check (see 04-4).
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f vx-" -** /Y\ll\/-\V-7t I
^^-
BREGUET AVIATION
^<-y. ^s~=^>
^=?-^> . ^
Restricted . ..,,,.,
MANUAL ».
04
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF HIGH-LIFT CONTROL SYSTEM LINKAGE

-Vacuum cleaner
-Inspection light or ELAUL light
-Cockpit access ladder
B - Materials
-Grease AIR 4205.
-Open following doors and panels providing access to linkages:

-Wings/ V0-20, VO-22, VO-24, VO-26, VO-28, VO-31, V1 -28, V3-28, V1 -03, V1 -05,
V1-15, V1-17, V2-03, V2-05, V2-15, V2-09, V3-11, V3-13, V3-15, VO-61, V1 -63, V2-61,
V2-65, V2-67, V2-69, V2-71 , V1 -60, V1 -62, V1 -64, V2-62, V2-64 and V2-66.
-Fuselage: 28.00.
3 - INSPECTION
A - Locking
Make sure that:

-locking pins are installed on castellated nuts and provide correct locking.
-self-locking nuts are tightened properly
-nuts are actually secured against motion by lockplates.
B - Bellcranks and levers
-Move bellcranks and levers so as to make sure that pivot pin is free from abnormal play.
-Check bellcranks and levers for condition (dents, corrosion, protective cap, etc.).
-Visually check (as far as possible) ball joints for proper crimping.
-Check that bonding braids are installed and are in good condition.
-Check that travel limit washers are properly positioned and are in good condition.
C - Rods
-Move end fittings so as to check that hinge ball joint is free from abnormal play.
-Check that:
-rods are properly coupled to clevises and end fittings,
-rod tubes are in good condition (dents, corrosion, paint, friction, etc.),
-rods are free from friction traces, paying special attention to rod sections run
through bulkheads,
-bonding braids are installed and are in good condition.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' *\ -"-* / V\II\/-\V^L_
BREGUET AVIATION Â_~- .^ô _ .. »aamiiai «a
^ ^~*^. Restricted MANUAL 04
(1 ) Slotted slat control rods

(a) Circular scratches :
-any rod showing circular scratches in the metal, the depth of which exceeds 0.05 mm
(0.001 9 in) should be discarded; if scratches are less deep, touch up scratches and protect the
rod.
(b) Various scratches :

-any rod showing non-circular scratches in the metal, the depth of which exceeds
0.1 mm (0.003 in) or more than three scratches of any kind over a length not exceeding
200 mm (7.874 in) is to be discarded. If not, perform the same operations as indicated in
preceding paragraph.
(c) Impacts on the tube :

-remove any rod showing evidence of impact,
-check the deflection, which should be lower than 0.5 mm (0.019 in) per meter ; fit
back the rod if correct,
-replace any rod with impact traces exceeding 0.3 mm (0.011 in) in depth, or with more
than three impact traces over less than 200 mm (7.874 in).
(d) Gimbal joints
-Check :
-that there is no longitudinal play,
-cross for condition.
D - "Aviac" bearings (slotted slat linkage)
-Check:
-general condition and for security of attachment, corrosion, etc.
-bearing for free rotation and self-aligning motion.
NOTE: The splined shaft is normally made integral with the bearing inner race by insertion and
bonding. However, if rotation of the splined shaft in the bearing inner race is detected,
this condition is acceptable and will not be cause for bearing replacement.
-that retainer is properly engaged in the shaft groove,
-that circlip and seal are fitted on each bearing face.
A - Cleaning
-Perform dry cleaning of following :
-structural boxes, using a vacuum cleaner to remove all impurities
-all hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush.
CAUTION:
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE TO THE BALL JOINTS AND BEARINGS WITH TE¬
FLON SELF-LUBRICATING LININGS.
B - Servicing of pin of bellcrank assembly associated with flap electric actuator

-Unscrew the nut and draw back the pin as far as allowed by the airframe.
-Apply a small amount of grease to the bellcrank end and the pin.
-Position the pin on the support flat.
-Tighten the nut until seated and loosen it by at least 1/6 of a turn, then check for a
clearance of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (0.01 1 to 0.020 in) between the bushes (see figure 27).
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Actuate linkage several times.
-Reinstall access doors and panels.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION^c.
//^-"rll
^ -
MIRAGE F
..a».. .a. «a
INSPECTION AND PARTIAL SERVICING OF SLAT HINGES

(figure 25)
- Grease gun
- Lubricator Tecalemit No. 9-20-00-01

- Wing access stepladder.
2- MATERIALS

-Oil Air 3512
- White spirit
- Remove or open the following access doors and fairings :
-on wings : V1.19and V2.17.

- Connect the hydraulic power supply to system No. 1.
- Fully extend the slats.
INSPECTION
On visible sections, check :
- condition, security of attachment and overall appearance of hinges,

- absence of foreign matter around hinges,
- safetying of various connections,
- absence of friction points against structure,
- condition and security of attachment of tracks, skids and rollers.
A Cleaning
Dry clean the following :

-
- grease nipples,
- rollers.
-Clean the guide tracks with white spirit and dry. Do not apply white spirit on hinges (teflon-
coated ball joints).
CAUTION :
NEVER USE TRICHLOROETHYLENE FOR THE ABOVE OPERATION.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
L^J^-Û
^^F^-^Ô
MIRAGE F
^Cs^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
B - Servicing
On each wing
(1) Lubricate the following :
- slotted slat screwjacks

- guide tracks and slotted slat jack screws (thin film of grease applied with a brush).
(2) Slightly oil the following :
- droop slat hinge pin.
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE ON HINGES (TEFLON-COATED BALL-JOINTS).
6 - FINAL STEPS
- Actuate slats once or twice over their whole travel, ending with slats retracted.
- Install access doors and panels.
BA MOD 454
01 ~77 Restricted 4 504
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl ^-"r-Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^JL ^-^ . .,.,...,,,
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF SLAT HINGES

(figure 25)
- Grease gun
- Lubricator Tecalemit No. 9-20-00-01
- Hydraulic clip bent to 90°
- Cockpit access ladder.

2- MATERIALS

-Oil Air 351 2
-White spirit
- Connect the hydraulic power supply to system 1...

- Set the slats to «full slats».
- Remove the slotted slats (see 03-1 ).
- Remove or open the following access doors and fairings :
-wings : V0.20, V0.22, V0.24, V0.26, V0.28, V0.31, V1.28, V2.28, V3.28, V1.03, V1.05,
V1.15,V1.17,V1.19,V2.03,V2.05,V2.15,V2.17,V2.09,V2.11,V3.11,V3.13andV3.15.
4- INSPECTION
Check :
- safetying of various connections,
- absence of friction against structure,
-condition and security of attachment of slotted slat tracks, skids and rollers (free rotation).
BA MOD 454
BREGUET
/L=^-^TU
AVIATION^S^^^^
MIRAGE F
^S^S*-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
A Cleaning
Perform dry cleaning of :

-
- all hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush,
- grease nipples,
- rollers.
- Clean the guide tracks with white spirit and dry. Do not apply white spirit on hinges (teflon-
coated spherical bearings).
CAUTION :
NEVER USE TRICHLOROETHYLENE FOR THE ABOVE OPERATION.
B Servicing
On each wing
(1) Greasing
- Grease the slotted slat screwjacks.

- Grease the slotted slat rollers provided with grease nipples.
CAUTION :
THE GREASE MUST COME OUT BETWEEN THE PIN AND THE OUTER RING.
- Using a brush, coat the following with a film of grease :

- guide tracks,
- slotted slat screwjacks.
NOTE : Spare screwjacks are provided with storage protection but are not greased. Complete greasing
is therefore necessary before installation.
(2) Oiling
- Slightly oil the droop slat hinge pins.
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE ON HINGES (TEFLON-COATED SPHERICAL BEARINGS).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall the slotted slats.

- Actuate the slats once or twice over their whole travel, ending with slats retracted.
- Reinstall the access doors and panels.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^5r^

MIRAGE F
MANUAL 04
BECS VOLETS
SLATS FLAPS
V2-05
V2-09
V2-11
V3-H
, V3-13
DETAIL A SECTION L DETAIL E

Porte d'accès
CROSS-SECTION L V2.67
Porte d'accès Porte d'accès
Access door
Access door Access door
Porte d'accès
V2.61/1
Access door
DETAIL B DETAIL C
SECTION F
CROSS-SECTION F ^-4E
-Partie graissée
\Q
^fânT^ Lubricated sections
pad contact area
zone de contact
©TcË^ ~î
f**,,*- du patin
piiîiiii
DETAIL H DETAIL K
KEY
LEGENDE
GRAISSE I
n
v GREASE
HUILE
1
1
tr
II- OIL 1
ItV
FIGURE 25 - ENTRETIEN DES ARTICULATIONS DES HYPERSUSTENTATEURS

SER VICING OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICE HINGES
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^>~ZZS^
BREGUET AVIATION ^Z3^ ^£^>
MIRAGE F
muai «a
»« a
INSPECTION OF SLATS AFTER EXCEEDING LIMITS
1 - SCOPE
To indicate required operations when exceeding the 1st limit. This data is provided by the pilot
after «LIM» «S/F» safety indicating system lights have come on (in automatic control operation).
A Special tools
- Slats deflection templates
- Electrical power supply 1 1 5-220 V/400 Hz

3- MATERIALS
4- CHECKS
A 1st case
Slats are retracted after reaching the 2nd limit.

- Check of slat deflection and operation in hydraulic mode. Refer to paragraph «operation of high-
lift devices in manual mode» (see 04-4).
- Check of flight envelope safety devices. Refer to paragraphs «auto slat function» and operation
of «LIM» light (see 04-4).
B - 2nd case
Slats have not retracted after reaching 2nd limit.

- Check of deflection and operation in hydraulic mode. Refer to paragraph «operation of high-lift
devices in manual mode» (see 04-4).
- Check of flight envelope safety devices. Refer to paragraphs «auto slat function» and operation
of «LIM» light (see 04-4).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET
L^-iirU.
AVIATION^cP3^^^
MIRAGE
.. »,.A
F
«a a .
^^ ^^
.
-Inspection of droop slats :

uncouple drive rods 1 and 2.
- actuate slat by hand, check condition of hinge, possible binding points, absence of play,
-check ball joints of drive rods 1 and 2 (rotation, absence of binding points, nutation).
- check condition of pins on drive rods 1 and 2.
- check condition of skin (distortion, creasing),
- check condition of riveting (see 03-0),
- check condition of hinge attaching parts (screws, rivets).
- thoroughly check attachment of drive fittings (cracks, loose screws) and surrounding areas
(cracks, distortion).
-Inspection of slotted slats :

-by alternately pushing the slats, check the amount of play at drive points 1 and 2
(connection between jack ball end and slotted slat clevis)
- remove the slotted slats (see 03-1 ).
- check condition of skin (distortion, creasing, loose or slack screws), in particular around
attachment points of tracks and drive fittings,
- check condition of riveting (loose or missing rivets) (see 03-0).
- check condition of drive fittings and surrounding areas inside the slat structure (loose rivets,
cracks, distortion).
- check condition of tracks and surface of race.
-check condition of sliding doors and hinges on drive rods (distortion, loose attaching
screws).
- on front section of wing box, check condition of the ribs bearing rollers (cracks), condition
and attachment of rollers (free rotation, absence of binding points).
- remove drive screwjacks 1 and 2 (see 04-4) for detailed inspection in workshop.
- check attachment of jack supports (distortion, cracks).
- check condition of jack attachment pins.
- reinstall the drive screwjacks (see 04-4).
- reinstall the slotted slats (see 03-1 ).
5- CHECK AND TESTS
play of doors and jack stops (see 04-4).

- Check
-Carry out operations described in worksheet DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF HIGH-
LI FT CHANNEL (see 04-4).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the tools.

- Reinstall the inspection doors.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION___
//^^-^rU
_ _
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF FLAP HINGES

(figure 25)
- Grease gun
- Lubricator Tecalemit No. 9.20.09.01
- Hydraulic power supply unit
2- MATERIALS

-Oil Air 3512
- White spirit
- Remove or open the following access doors and fairings on the fuselage and on each wing
- fuselage : 26.00 - 28.00,
-wings : V0.61 - V1.63 - V2.61/1 -V2.67-V2.69-V2.71 - V1.60 - V1.62 - V1.64 -
V2.60 - V2.62 - V2.64 and V2.66.
- Connect the hydraulic power supply to system 1 .
- Extend the flaps fully.
4- INSPECTION
Check :

- safetying of the various connections,
- absence of friction against structure,
- condition and security of attachment of flap tracks, skids and rollers (free rotation),
- that the rollers rotate properly, with no sticking and no play ; if not, replace them,
- condition and security of attachment of the flap drip strips,
- absence of cracks outside the tracks in line with the roller indentations.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL.04
A Cleaning

- all hinge knuckles, using a dry rag or a clean brush
-grease-nipples
- pads
- Clean guide tracks with white spirit and dry. Do not apply white spirit on hinges (teflon-coated
ball-joints).
CAUTION :
NEVER USE TRICHLORETHYLENE FOR ABOVE OPERATION.
B Servicing
On each wing
(1 ) Lubricate the following
Flap locking fitting

-
I Slider hinge of inboard flap retaining rod locking fitting (fit a bent lubricator to pin head for
-
that lubrication)
- Guide tracks.
CAUTION :
IT IS IMPERATIVE TO REMOVE THE BENT LUBRICATOR FITTED TO THE INBOARD
FLAP RETAINING ROD PIN HEAD FOR LUBRICATION PURPOSES PRIOR TO
OPERATING ANY HIGH-LIFT DEVICE. FILL LUBRICATING HOLE WITH GREASE.
(2) Slightly oil the following
- Rollers
- Skids
- Hinge point between ball-joints and flap leading edge skids.
CAUTION :
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE ON HINGES (TEFLON-COATED BALL-JOINTS).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Actuate flaps once or twice over their whole travel, ending with flaps retracted.
- Reinstall access doors and panels.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L-J>^r\l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^fiF3^^?^ ......,..«
INSPECTION OF FLAPS AFTER EXCEEDING LIMITS
1 - SCOPE
To indicate required checks after exceeding the limits.
A Operation in automatic control mode
The data is provided by the pilot after «LIM» «S/F» safety indicating system lights have come
on.
- the flaps are retracted after reaching the 2nd limit.
the flaps are not retracted after reaching the 2nd limit.
B Operation in manual control mode
The data is provided by the pilot after «LIM» safety indicating system lights have come on.
A Special tools
- Flap deflection templates
3- MATERIALS
Grease Air 4222 or 4210
4- CHECKS
A Operation in automatic control mode
1st case : the flaps are retracted after reaching the 2nd limit.
- Check flap deflection and operation in hydraulic mode, first in slow and then in normal oper¬
ation. Refer to paragraph «operation of high-lift devices in manual mode» (see 04-4).
- Check flight envelope safety devices. Refer to paragraphs «combat flap function» and «Operation
of LIM light (see 04-4).
2nd case : the flaps are not retracted after reaching the 2nd limit
Check of the operation

-
- Check flap deflection and operation in hydraulic mode, first in slow and then in normal
operation. Refer to paragraph «operation of high-lift devices in manual mode» (see 04-4).
-Check flight envelope safety devices. Refer to paragraphs «combat flap function» and
«operation of LIM light» (see 044).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^37
/L->-itr\I MIRAGE F
Check of structure and control linkage

-
With the flaps in retracted position. Check for play in the structure and in the pads and
rollers of the center track. Refer to paragraphs «check of structure» and «check of play in pads»
(see 04-4).
-Carry out retaining rod adjustment check. Refer to paragraph «adjustment check»
(see 04-4).
- Carry out check of pinning on bellcranks : 12 (pins MS-1 390-40-810) and 16, 19, 21 (pins
MS-1 390-40-830) of the wing flaps control linkage.
CAUTION :
DO NOT LEAVE THE PINS IN PLACE.
- Inspect the riveting on inboard and outboard flaps (see 03-1 ).

- Check condition of skin (distortion).
- Check the vane assembly (attachment, distorsion).
B Operation in manual control mode
- Check flap deflection and operation in hydraulic mode, first in slow and then in normal oper¬
ation. Refer to paragraph «operation of high-lift devices in manual mode» (see 04-4).
- Check «LIM» light operation. Refer to paragraph «operation of «LIM» light» (see 04-4).
- Check structure and control linkage. Refer to above paragraph «check of structure and control
linkage».
5- CHECK AND TESTS
- Carry out DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT CHANNEL (see 04-4).
6- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the tools.

- Install the inspection doors.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L=J>^rU
BREGUET AVIATION,.
MIRAGE F
CALIBRATION CHECK OF FLAP SPRING BOX
(Figure 18)
1 - SCOPE
To perform spring box calibration check in the case where the spring box has been completely
disassembled for servicing and lubrication.
A Special tools
-Tool kit F1-CVD
B Standard tools

3- PROCEDURE
A Installation of spring box on test stand
Mechanical test stand MK M043 should be previously fitted with all adaptors provided for spring
box installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook). Using the attaching pins belonging to
test stand, pin clevis 8 to balance beam and clevis 7 to moving poppet.
Rotate moving poppet control wheel so as to set the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer
set is then set to neutral (zero load applied).
to zero). The spring box
NOTE : The ratio available with balance scales hooked to beam ends is 10/1 .
The correspondence between the weight placed on one scale and the load applied to the
spring box rod is as follows :
Weight (kg) = 1 .02 x load (daN) x 0,1 .
CAUTION :
IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE BALANCE BEAM BE PINNED BEFORE PLACING WEIGHTS
ON A SCALE OR BEFORE REMOVING THEM. THIS IN ORDER TO PROTECT COMPO¬
NENTS (CLEVIS, END-FITTING, ETC..) FROM DAMAGES DUE TO LARGE ANGULAR
MOVEMENTS.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL^-^ZV^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^Cs^^gS^ .,..,.,., n.
B Threshold check
placed in contact with the bellcrank to which clevis 8 is pinned.
-Place on one scale a weight corresponding to minimum threshold value, i.e. 13.5 daN
(30.34 lb. wgt). The dial indicator pointer deflects slightly but such a deflection is not to be taken into
- Threshold should be obtained with a load of 13.5 to 16.5 daN (30.34 to 36.09 Ib.wgt) applied to
the rod.
- Remove weights from the scale and set the balance beam in horizontal position (pointer set to
zero) without applying any load to the spring box.
- Using a depth gauge, measure dimension «A» between depth gauge bearing face and body exter¬
nal face. Then pin the balance beam.
(1 ) Place on one scale a weight likely to exert a force of 25 daN (56.2 Ib.wgt) on the rod. Rotate the
moving poppet control wheel to equalize forces and then unpin the beam.
-With the beam in horizontal position (pointer set to zero), slightly act on one side of balance
beam to obtain small rod displacement and then slowly bring the pointer back to zero by rotating the
moving poppet control wheel. Measure dimension «B» between depth gauge bearing face and spring box
body.
- Slightly act on the other side of balance beam to also obtain small rod displacement and then
reset the pointer to zero by means of moving poppet control wheel. Measure corresponding dimension
«C» and pin the balance beam.
-The «B-A» and «C-A» values should be between 22.5 and 41.5 mm (0.885 and 1.634 in).
within same tolerances.
(3) After each test and with balance beam pinned, check that spring box rod travel is equal to 48 mm
D Test results
- Out-of-tolerance threshold or out-of-tolerance travel :

- replace the spring.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT j> *\-«-« /V\||\/AVÎ_ l
BREGUET AVIATION Û^ ^-^^> ^ , * a m a i »
^ ^°^> Restricted MANUAL 04a
a
FINAL STEPS
-Remove the spring box from test stand and grip it in vice support (MHC 31 0-41 ).
-Torque nut 9 to 2.75 m.daN (20.28 ft.lb). Check that there is no end play between
body and rod after tightening.
-Bend lockplate 18 tabs.
-Untighten nut 11, screw or unscrew clevis 8 so as to obtain center-to-center distance
measured before disassembly, tighten nut 11 and torque to 1.1 m.daN (97.36 in.lb) (wrench
D012) while gripping clevis 8 in vice support .MHC 310-41. Lockplate 17 shall be bent after
installation of spring box in aircraft.
-Lockwire nut 9.
-Clean and dry attaching pins 12, washers 13 and nuts 14.
-Slightly lubricate both attaching pins and install them on clevises 7 and 8. Install wash¬
ers and screw nuts (do not tighten).
-Fit and lockwire a new locking pin to each attaching pin.
Check the whole spring box for:

BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" -« / V \ 1\ /"WJ* L- I
1
BREGUET AVIATION ^^--

^^ _*5~*»^>
ô Restricte(i ihamiiai
MANUAL «a 04
CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICE CONTACTORS

(Figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
These operations are to be carried out after maintenance steps or after an anomaly is no¬
ticed during operation.
-Mechanical test stand MK M043
3 - MATERIALS
-HYLOMAR compound SQ32L
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Installation of contactor on test stand
Mechanical test stand MK M043 should be previously fitted with all adapters provided for
contactor installation (See mechanical test stand technical handbook). Adapt and attach test
support pointer to lever 20 and attach contactor (equipped with is bottom cover 2) to test
support.
B - Microswitch adjustment
Adjust each microswitch when the roller of the corresponding rocker is in the recess of
the cam.
Screw or unscrew contact screw 14 so that the microswitch blade contacts the micro-
switch case. Then, when the high point of the cam acts on the rocker roller, check for a clear¬
ance between the microswitch blade and the contact screw.
C - Inspection - Functional check and tests
-Check contactor for general condition and absence of corrosion traces.
-Manually check that an end play equal to at least 0.05 mm (0.002 in) exists between
camshaft and case.
-Check that the lever can be deflected fully in both directions without any binding point
and without requiring excessive force to be applied.
-Upon completion of inspection and tests, perform contactor functional check, proceed¬
ing as follows:
-Set the lever in "retracted" configuration. Pin lever to case, depressing test support poin¬
ter pushbutton. Check that lever position corresponds to dial zero indication (if necessary, ac¬
tuate the pointer/pointer holder play takeup system).
-Release pushbutton.
-Connect contactor electrical connector to test stand test box and supply test box with
28 V DC power.
-Check that the electrical switching sequence taking place as per lever displacement
complies with the values mentioned on following tables, being careful to move the lever in the
direction specified.
-If one or more electrical test box lights has/have an abnormal luminous intensity (low
brightness, variable brightness or non-positive illumination) during this check, replace the cor¬
responding microswitch (es).
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^Mi /VlUx/AV^C I
BREGUET AVIATION^3&
^rs "£*£^
^*^ Restricted h«am,.a, 04
MANUAL «a
NOTE: Should one value be out of tolerance, correct operation and an acceptable clearance
and contact between the blade and microswitch case can be obtained by adjusting the
contact screw of the microswitch concerned.
However, should the difference between microswitch actuation and release angles be
higher than 3°, replace microswitch concerned.
D - Dielectric test
-Test the insulation resistance with 45 V DC power applied across all connector terminals
connected together and the ground.
The insulation resistance should be higher than 20 megohms with a relative humidity
equal to or lower than 85%.
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Bend both lockplates 8.
-Carefully clean the mating surfaces of case and covers 2 and 3 and smear such mating
surfaces with a slight coat of HYLOMAR compound.
- Fit and attach both covers by means of eight screws 24, each of these screws being fit¬
ted with a new washer 25.
-Check contactor for general condition and fit electrical connector with an appropriate
protective plug. .
-Update traveller documents.
BB MOD 454
09 - 88 Restricted 4- 51 6
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL04
FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF CONTACTORS TYPE 016059-06
8C
MICROSWITCH No. MICROSWITCH No.
_ç
'<A
S
O "O
O)
TEST BOX LIGHTS TEST BOX LIGHTS

+ON - OUT o ° + ON - OUT
o *-
v s
10 11 12 13 14 15 a. zs 10 11 12 13 14 15
-3' Eg
x
u
+ - + - + +
0°
O
UJ
çr
Q
(3
z
co
en <
UJ
Z oc
o o
I-
o
LU
_l
17°30' +
LL.
UJ 18°30' A + 3'
Q
CC
<
-J
Z>
a
z 34° 30'

UJ
+
45°45*
m?m>,vmm.
46° 15' C + 2° 30'
Z
g
UJ
QC
O
U
Z
tn
< 61*
LU
or
CJ
65°
(Decreasing check) (Increasing check)

MICROSWITCH SWITCHING MICROSWITCH SWITCHING
No 2 46° 15' to 45° 45' No 1 Decreasing value recorded +3°
No 3 35° 30' to 34° 30* No 3 Decreasing value recorded +3°
No1 18° 3C to 17° 30' No 2 Decreasing value recorded +2° 30/
(see example)
TEST BOX LIGHTS SHOULD BE CHECKED BETWEEN - 3° AND +65°
BA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF CONTACTORS TYPES 016059-03 and 016059-04

Indices 2C1 - 2C2
MICROSWITCH No. MICROSWITCH No.
V «
s
S-2
TEST SET LIGHTS £S TEST SET LIGHTS
+ON -OUT O c +ON -OUT
-3
10 11 12 13 14 15
fl
a> e
-3" 10 11 12 13 14 15
o° X 0°
Ul
6° D-3°
m
8°
O
?Z
MICROSWITCH No. co O

UI
61°
65°
(Check of increasing values) (Check of decreasing values)

SWITCHING OF MICROSWITCHES SWITCHING OF MICROSWITCHES
No1 6° to 8°
120 -CAM 127°30CAM
39° to 41" 38° to 38°30" No 3 Recorded increasing value 3

No 2 No 2
46°30'to51o No 2 Recorded increasing value 3°
switching should always be >46°
No 3 54° to 56° No 1 Recorded increasing value 3°
NOTE: As concerns No. 2 microswitch control, these contactors are fitted, either with a 120° -cam
or with a 127°30-cam ; thus the adjustment of microswitch No. 2 may be different in the
increasing direction.
If microswitch No. 2 is to be replaced, first carry out the adjustment conformably to the
values given in the table corresponding to the 127°-30-cam. If such values cannot be ob¬
tained, perform the adjustment in accordance with the values in the table corresponding
to the 120° -cam.
The cam can also be identified by measuring the dimension between the ends of the angle
legS" 6,8 mm (0.265 in) 7,7 mm (0.300 in)
120° CAM 127° 30 CAM
The indicator light status is to be checked between 3° and + 65°,

BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^-"rll MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^c- ^^ - . .....,...
DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT CHANNEL
(Figure 26)
1 - SCOPE
To check high-lift devices for correct operation.
2 - GENERAL
A Special tools
-ToolkitF1-CVB
B Standard tools
- Ground telephone

- 1 15/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply
- Install deflection templates

- remove template attach fitting blanking plugs,
- install templates,
- connect ground telephone (See 11-3).
- Connect the following

- electrical power supply,
- hydraulic power supply (system 1).
BA MOD 454
01-77 Restricted 4 "519
J
BREGUET AVIATION ^Z£s>

MIRAGE F
FIGURE 26 - CONTROLE DU DEBATTEMENT DES HYPERSUSTENTATEURS

HIGH-LI FT DEVICE DEFLECTION CHECK
BB MOD 454
05-77 Restricted 4520 FIGURE 26 4-52C
BREGUET AVIATION
J
^S»
MIRAGE F
CHECKS
SLATS FLAPS
OPERATIONS REMARKS
Operating inboard flaps Operating
Lights Droop slats Slotted slats Lights
time (position) time
A Preliminary steps Check 104 ± 1 mm (4.09 ± 0.03 in)

dimension at wing lower
(1) Energize electrical system Out Aligned Aligned surface (red reference mark)
Apply pressure in system 1
Set «SLAT-FLAP» switch to «OFF» Out Aligned
Set «SLAT-FLAP» handle to «all retracted» Align template

position.
Check that combat flap lever is not protruding
B - Manual control mode
(1) Extension Perform measurements on LH flap
(a) Set «SLAT-FLAP» handle to «1/2» position Red on Unlocked and Unlocked and Flap level recoil corresponds
moving moving to full slat deflection.
Green (25° ± 1°) (25°30'±30') Red on Maximum deviation permitted

on after between slats : 1°, as measured
flap at center rod fairing.
recoil of
at most
20 mm
(0.78 in)
Red out (24°)
Amber on 1/2 flaps 4 ±2 seconds RH flap :± 1°

27°±30'=A A = Recorded value
(b) Set «SLAT-FLAP» handle to «all Moving

extended» position
Amber (28°) to
on { (36°)
(36°) to
Red on
{ (40°)
Green on (46°30'±30'>
BB MOD 454
07-79 4-521 4-5Î
Restricted
BREGUET
jL|^rtî
AVIATION^CLp^^g*^
MIRAGE F
^C^î'^=^. Restricted MANUAL 04
CHECKS
SLATS FLAPS
OPERATIONS *» ^~ a *
REMARKS
a r~* %* r%-
Operating Inboard flaps Operating

(2) Retraction Green on l~46o30' ± 30'

Green on
(a) Set «slat-flap» handle to «1/2» position. 1 40°
Red on
r (40°) to
1 (35°)
T (35°) B= recorded value.

1/2 Further requirement :
Amber on B-A>1°.
29° ± 1° = B
(b) Set «slat-flap» handle to «all in» position. Green out Moving Moving Green light goes out when flaps
Red on reach 17° position. This operation
allows microswitch 3 of flap
Red out Aligned Aligned 5 s max. microswitch unit to be checked.
Amber out
| (21°)
Red on
Red out
after flap
forward
travel of
at least As measured on center rod
5 mm fairing.
(0.19 in) Aligned (0°)
Record the flap retraction time :
- from «full flaps» to «all in» position, it should be < 10 s sconds.
- from «half flaps» to «all in» position, it should be < 7 se conds.
C High-lift devices in automatic control mode Out Aligned Aligned Out Aligned
- Set «SLAT-FLAP» switch to «NORMAL»

- Set «slat-flap» handle to «all in» position.
- Select an angle of attack higher than 8° Red on
(angle-of-attack probe). (slats
moving)
Amber on (25° ± 1°) (15° ±1°) 2.5 s Maximum deviation

max. permitted between slats : 1°
- Select an angle of attack lower than 8° Out Aligned Aligned Out Aligned
(angle-of-attack probe). !
BB MOD 454
04-83 Restricted 4-522 4-522
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
HECKS
OPERATIONS SLATS FLAPS REMARKS
operating Inboard flaps Operating
D Operation of asymmetrical deflection comparator
(1) Check comparator

- Drop pressure in system 1
- Set «FLAPS/SLATS» handle to «1/2» position.
- Slowly build up pressure in system 1 Red on Moving Moving For a difference in deflection exceeding T
«S/F» ( MOD. 631 NOT INCORPORATED :
on difference exceeding 4°)
Check by means of templates.
- Increase pressure up to 210 bar (3045 psi).
- Set «SLAT/FLAP» switch to «EMG RETR». Red on Moving Moving

«S/F» upwards upwards
on
Red out Aligned Aligned
- Reset «SLAT/FLAP» switch to «NORMAL». «S/F»

out
Set «FLAP/SLAT» handle to forward position.
FINAL STEPS
Remove slat and flap deflection templates.
- Disconnect the following :

- hydraulic power supply.
BB MOD 454
09-86 Restricted 4-523 4-521
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^J>iirU.
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF THE FIRST FLIGHT ENVELOPE SAFETY DEVICE
1 - SCOPE
- To check the first flight envelope safety device for reliability.
2- GENERAL
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES APPROPRIATE TO THE CONTROL (See 01-0).
Ground support equipment

- Pressure generator (± 1 mb accuracy).

- Connect system No. 1 hydraulic power supply.
- Connect a pressure generator to T1-T2 (pitot) and S1 + S2 and S4 (static) inlets (see 10-1).
- Remove the incidence probe cover.
- Set «SLAT/FLAT» switch to «OFF».
- Combat flap lever not visible.
- Slats/flap handle set to forward position.
- Shock cone pushbutton to manual.
- Apply hydraulic pressure.
- Slats and flaps retracted.
NOTE : Perform the checks with aircraft on its wheels.

- Exceptionally, with aircraft jacked, uncouple the U/C microswitch connector of LH shock
absorber in order to prevent the air data computer failure interlock. After coupling the
connector, perform the tests related to each system.
5- CHECK OF FLIGHT ENVELOPE SAFETY DEVICE

A Combat flap mode
(1 ) Check of the first IAS limit (300 kt)
- Select local pressure Pso
- Set «SLAT/FLAP» switch to «NORMAL»
- Combat flap lever armed, flaps and slats extended, «cbtF» light steadily illuminated.
- Increase ground speed.
- Increase AP (AP = PT - PS) to obtain flap and slap retraction
- «cbtF» light flashes at AP1 < 157.5 mb
- Record AP1 which corresponds to IAS < 303.7 kf (IAS 1 )
- Reduce ground speed
- Reduce AP to obtain flap and slat extension at AP2 > 139.5 mb
- Record AP2 which corresponds to IAS > 286.7 kt (IAS 2)
- «cbtF» light remains steadily illuminated
- Check hysteresis (H = AP1 - AP2) < 5 mb which corresponds to IAS 1 - I AS 2 < 5 kt.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^-^TU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c^--^""^
^£^*^^> Restricted MANUAL 04
(2) Check of the 1st Mach limit (M = 0.75)

- Select a zero speed AP = 0.
- Increase altitude and select Ps = 235 mb (35,303 ft).
- Increase Mach number.
- Increase AP to obtain flap and slat retraction.
- «cbtF» light flashes at AP1 < 124 mb.
- Record API which corresponds to a Mach number < 0.805 (M1 ).
- Reduce Mach number.
- Reduce AP to obtain flap and slat extension at AP2 > 81 .5 mb.
- Record AP2 which corresponds to a Mach number > 0.665 (M2).
- «cbt F» light remains steadily on.
- Check hysteresis (H = AP1 - AP2) < 10 mb which corresponds to M1-M2 < 0.03.
- Reduce altitude to 0.
B Auto slat mode
(1 ) Check of 1st limit through Mach number (M = 0.98).
Select i > 8° using the angle-of-attack probe test switch.
-
- Release the combat flap lever, the flaps assume zero degree position, the slats remain at an angle
of attack of 15°.
- Select a zero speed AP = 0.
- Increase altitude and select Ps = 235 mb (35,303 ft).
- Increase Mach number.
- Increase AP to obtain slat retraction at AP1 < 216 mb.
- Record AP1 which corresponds to a Mach number < 1 .014 (M1 ).
- Reduce Mach number.
- Reduce AP to obtain slat extension at AP2 > 1 53 mb.
- Record AP2 which corresponds to a Mach number > 0.876 (M2).
- Check hysteresis (H = AP1 - AP2) < 10 mb which corresponds to M1-M2 < 0.03.
(2) Check of 1st limit through IAS (440 kt)
-Increase AP to obtain slat retraction at 339 < AP1 <353 mb which corresponds to
433.4 < IAS 1 <441.6kt.
- Reduce ground speed.
- Reduce AP to obtain slat extension at 309 < AP2 < 353 mb which corresponds to tolerance
41 5.4 < I AS 2 < 441 .6 kt.
- Reduce speed to 0.
(3) Check of 1st limit through angle of attack (8°)

-Set «SLAT/FLAP» switch to «NORMAL».
-Set slat/flap handle to all in.
- Retract combat flap lever.
- Manually increase angle of attack (i) from 0° to 10°.
- Check that the slats extend for i > 8°.
- Manually reduce i from 10° to 0°.
- Check that the slats retract for i < 7°.
C «LIM» light operation through microswitch 8C
(1) 225 kt limit

- Set the slat/flap handle to rear position (full flaps).
- Increase AP until «LIM» light comes on at 79.5 < AP < 86.5 mb which corresponds to the
tolerance 204 < IAS < 228.4 kt.
(2) 300 kt limit

the nose U/C uplock box and nose U/C door front lock.
- Close
- Set the slat/flap handle to half flap position.
-Increase AP to cause «LIM» light to come on at AP < 157.5 mb which corresponds to
IAS < 303.7 kt (1st limit values).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION^
HJ^trV^ MIRAGE F
6- FINAL STEPS
- Return AP to 0 and Ps to local pressure.

- Vent Pt and Ps pitot static systems.
- Retract the slats and flaps by means of the manual control.
CAUTION
OPEN THE NOSE U/C UPLOCK BOX AND NOSE U/C DOOR FRONT LOCK (see 02-0).
- Cut off the hydraulic pressure.

- Disconnect :
- the pressure generator,
- the hydraulic power supply,
- the electrical power supply.
- Install the covers.
BA MOD 454
1280 Restricted 4 525M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LeP'irCL
BREGUET AVIATION^c^P^^Ô»
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF THE SECOND FLIGHT ENVELOPE SAFETY DEVICE
1- SCOPE
- To check the second flight envelope safety device for reliability.
2- GENERAL
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES APPROPRIATE TO THE CONTROL (See 01-0).

- Pressure generator (± 1 mb accuracy).
- Connect the electrical power supply
- Connect system No. 1 hydraulic power supply
-Connect a pressure generator to T1 T2 (pitot) and S1 + S2 and S4 (static) inlets (see 10-1)
- Remove the incidence probe cover
- Combat flap lever not visible
- Slats/flap handle set to forward position
- Shock cone pushbutton to manual
- Apply hydraulic pressure
- Slats and flaps retracted
- Close the nose U/C latching box and nose U/C door front lock.
NOTE : Perform the checks with aircraft on its wheels.

- Exceptionally, with aircraft jacked, uncouple the U/C microswitch connector of LH shock
absorber in order to prevent the air data computer failure interlock. After coupling the
connector, perform the tests related to each system.
5- CHECK OF FLIGHT ENVELOPE SAFETY DEVICE
A Combat flap mode
(1 )Check of 2nd limit through IAS (335 kt)

- Select local pressure Pso
- Combat flap lever armed : flap extension
- Shut off the hydraulic pressure
- Increase the ground speed
- Increase AP to cause «LIM» and «S/F» lights to come on at 185 < AP <203 mb which corres¬
ponds to a tolerance of 327.7 < IAS < 342.3 kt.
- Decrease the ground speed
- Decrease AP to cause « LIM» light to go out at AP > 1 73 mb which corresponds to IAS > 31 7.7 kt.
- «S/F» light remains illuminated
- Disarm and restore the combat flap control : «S/F» light goes out.
(2) Cneck of second limit through Mach number (M = 0.85)

- Select zero speed AP = 0
- Increase altitude and select Ps = 235 mb (35,303 ft)
- Increase Mach number
- Increase AP to cause «LIM» and «S/F» lights to come on at AP < 155 mb which corresponds to
Mach number < 0.884
- Disarm the combat flap control. «S/F» light remains illuminated
- Reduce Mach number
- Reduce AP to cause «LIM» and «S/F» lights to go out at AP > 129 mb which corresponds to a
Mach number > 0.81 6.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET
L^>ZZ^.
AVIATIONôF=^^C>
MIRAGE
.......»,
F
(3) Check of the 2nd limit through direct supply

- Arm the combat flap lever
- Restore the hydraulic pressure
- Switch «ON» the integrated test unit
- Retraction of flaps and slats. «S/F» light remains illuminated
- Disarm the combat flap lever : «S/F» light goes out
- Switch «OFF» the integrated test unit.
B Automatic slat mode
(1 ) Check of 2nd limit through Mach number (M = 1 .1 ) 35,000 ft

Using the angle-of-attack probe, manually select an angle of attack higher than 8° (as read on
-
angle-of-attack indicator in cockpit). Slats extend to 15°. Shut off the hydraulic pressure.
- Select zero speed AP = 0
- Check that the altitude reading is 235 mb (35,303 ft)
- Increase Mach number
- Increase AP until «LIM» and «S/F» lights come on at AP < 292 mb
This value corresponds to M < 1.143 tolerance.
- Set «SLAT/FLAP» switch to «OFF» : «S/F» light remains on.
- Decrease Mach number.
- Decrease AP until «S/F» light goes out at AP > 253 mb.
- This value corresponds to M > 1 .076 tolerance.
- Set «SLAT/FLAP» switch to «NORMAL».
(2) Check of the 2nd limit through IAS (470 kt)
- Increase ground speed
- Increase AP to illuminate «LIM» and «S/F» warning lights at AP comprised between 376 and
436 mb
This value corresponds to 454.5 kt < IAS < 485.5 kt tolerance.
- Decrease ground speed
- Decrease AP to extinguish «LIM» warning light at AP > 358 mb
This value corresponds to IAS > 444.5 kt tolerance.
- «S/F» light remains on
- Set slat/flap switch to «OFF» and then back to «NORMAL». «S/F» light goes out.
6- FINAL STEPS
- Return AP to 0 and Ps to local pressure

- Vent the Pt and Ps pitot static systems
- Restore the hydraulic pressure
- Retract the slats by means of the manual control.
CAUTION :
OPEN THE NOSE U/C UPLOCK BOX AND NOSE U/C DOOR FRONT LOCK (See 02-0).
- Fully drop the hydraulic pressure

- Disconnect :
- pressure generator
hydraulic power supply
-
electrical power supply
-
- Install the guards.
BC MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 1>^K1 iVl I KM W L l
BREGUET AVIATION stZsP* a. - . n/i
i\/i a mi i a i
ADJUSTMENT OF FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM

(Figure 27)
1 - PURPOSE
To provide instructions for wing-by-wing positional adjustment of inboard and outboard flaps
and adjustment of fuselage control linkage.
2- GENERAL
- When adjusted, the flap control determines basic control linkage adjustment to insure
interchangeability of certain system equipment.
IT IS THEREFORE ESSENTIAL NEVER TO INTERFERE WITH THE EXISTING

ADJUSTMENT OF A MISADJUSTED CONTROL UNTI L THE CAUSE OF
MISADJUSTEMENT HAS BEEN FIRMLY ESTABLISHED.
- Any work or corrective action on the system involves knowledge and observance of certain
special regulations.
- Correct application of tightening torques to linkage components (pins, rods). To avoid
hardening teflon-coated ball joints, castle nuts will not be fully torqued. After snugging,
use the first pin hole to LOOSEN. On self-locking nuts, check for adequate play after snugging.
Rods will be torqued on a tabletop.
- Use of pilot bushing to fit pins, in order to prevent damage to bores. On installation, pins used
to couple components shall be lightly coated with neutral petrolatum.
- Correct assembly of pins and rods, in required direction.
- During assembly of components, install safeties (pin, wire, washer), per instructions (see
Manual 01-0-02).
OBSERVE :
- Personnel protection safety measures (see Manual 01-0-02).

- Instructions to be followed during work on systems (see Manual 01-0-02).
- General startup instructions for the aircraft and systems (see Manual 01-0-02).
- Instructions for use of tooling and support equipment (see Manual 01-0-02).
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION -^SEo MIRAGE F
SECTION B
_Axe renvoi $6 mm
236 in dia. bellcrank pin
62 mm (2.440 in)
Gabarit de réglage
'Calage du renvoi 7"
Rigging template
"Bellcrank 7 setting'
e = 5 mm
(th = 0.197 in)
76,62 mm (3.016 in)
Axe bielle 6 mm H7
<t>
0.236 in H7 dia. rod pin
FIGURE 27 - REGLAGE DE LA COMMANDE DES VOLETS
BB MOD 454
ADJUSTMENT OF FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM 0 Points de brochage
Pinning points
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ÏLJ>ZZk. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^x^^^^"^
^£2^=-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
A Standard tools
- Set of shims.
Special tools
- Flight control first line maintenance tool kit.
- Flap deflection templates.
C Spares
-6plugsF161-019
-2 plugs F1 17-10-48
4- CONSUMABLES
- Neutral petrolatum AIR 3565.
- Remove linkage access doors 26.00, 28.00 and V0.61 .
6- ADJUSTMENT OF FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM IN FUSELAGE

A Adjustment of fuselage linkage
This operation is to be performed with wing linkage already adjusted.
-
Sprina box not installed or disconnect.
-
Stop 9 withdrawn (screwed to its maximum).
-
- Pin bellcranks 3 and 4 (pin MS 1390-20-810) and bellcranks 10 (pin MS 1390-40-820).
- Adjust and install rods 8 in available center-to-center distance.
-Adjust and install rod 6 or 5 so as to position triple bellcrank 7 as close as possible to its
theoretical position (tilt angle : 17° ± 30'). This tilt angle corresponds to a center-to-center distance of
76.6 mm (3.016 in) between triple bellcrank and inner face of frame 29; For that operation, use a
locally-made template (see figure).
- Adjust and install the second rod in available center-to-center distance.
-Check that LH and RH linkage movement (link rods 11 not connected to jack slide valve) is
obtained with a force less than 1 daN (2.248 Ib.wgt) applied to triple bellcrank 7 (50 mm (1.968 in)
radius).
NOTE : Before installing rods 11, make sure that :
- they are to the latest standard, i.e., the height of each clevis check nut should be 5 mm
(0.197 in). (Nut P/N 22431BC060LE and L22432BC060LE LH threads),
- a Teflon washer is fitted on each pin (nut side).
Pin bellcranks 3 and 4 (no play) (use dia. 8.1 mm or 8.2 mm pins).
-
-Apply hydraulic pressure to system 1 and adjust both rods 11 so as to obtain a 0.1 mm
(0.004 in) clearance between slide valve bellcrank and its stop screw, which must not be out of adjust¬
ment.
NOTE : Check that there is no interference with flap drive lever 12.
- Install spring box 2 after loosening clevis side nut (A), without altering factory center-to-center
distance.
- Unpin bellcranks 3 and 4.
- Install a dummy electric actuator, or the adjustable rod (50 MS 067).
- Move flaps through full travel, and check that, for all positions, dissymetry is less than 1°.
BB MOD 454
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
-Remove pin of rod 1 1 at flap hydraulic jack and record the flap extension angle obtained
with jack abutting. Perform same measurement on RH side.
- Reinstall pins of rods 1 1 .
-Adjust stop 9 so as to obtain 46°30' ± 30' flap deflection (LH and RH flaps). Complete
adjustment to bring the flap with the smaller deflection angle as close as possible to 46°, so as
to obtain the best possible clearance with respect to hydraulic jack (at least 30').
B - Spring box adjustment
-Remove adjustable rod 50 MS 067.
-Install electric actuator (see 04-4).
-Control flap retraction and measure spring box 2 extension travel. Use a cylindrical mea¬
suring rod mounted in place of pin, with no clearance.
-Control full flap extension (until bellcrank 7 abuts against screw 9) and measure rod
compression travel.
-If necessary, readjust the pin-to-pin distance to obtain:
-extension: 1.5 + 05 mm (0.059+ 0019 in) (flaps retracted)
- 0.7 - 0.027
-compression: £ 0.1 mm (0.004 in) (flaps extended).
-Adjust the length of the remaining spring box, acting on flat sections P after nut A is
loosened. DO NOT ACT ON NUT B. Rotate the rod.
Lockwasher
-Control full flap retraction and check that a 0.04 mm (0.002 in) shim cannot pass bet¬
ween slide valve bellcrank and its stop screw on each jack (synchronization check).
- Remove the rod and apply a torque of 1 .1 m.daN (97.36 in.lb) to the nut of clevis A.
-Bend the lockwasher tabs.
7 - ADJUSTMENT OF FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM IN WINGS

-This operation may be performed partially with the wings in place or removed.
A - Wing linkage
-Wing actuator not installed.
-Pin bellcranks 12 (rigging pin MS 1390-40-810) 16, 19 and 21 (rigging pin MS 1390-
40-830).
-Adjust rod 18 as close as possible to dimension determined through pinning of bell¬
cranks 1 9 and 1 6 (adjust to ± 1 /2 turn).
-Unpin bellcrank 19 to connect it to rod 18 and adjust rod 20.
-Install in place of actuator a rigid rod with pin-to-pin distance L = 399.6 mm
(15.732 in).
NOTE: Length L = 399.6 mm (1 5.732 in) is equivalent to the minimum length of an actuator.
At this length, structural clearance can be insured in retracted position in all circum¬
stances.
-Adjust rods 13 and 15.

NOTE: Before installing rod 13, make sure that it is to the latest standard, i.e., a washer
(F1 772504M1 ) is added between the lockwasher and the nut of each rod end.
-Unpin bellcranks 12, 16 and 21.
BB MOD 454
MIRAGE F
Û ^=^
i
breguet aviation Restricted MANUAL 04
B - Inboard flap drive rod adjustment

-Use bellcrank 14 to position flap control linkage in extended position.
-Install inboard and outboard flaps (see Manual 03.1).
- Pin control linkage drive bellcranks (1 2, 1 6, 1 9 and 21 ).
-Adjust center rod 17 to obtain a theoretical dimension
+ 0 +0
L1 = 354.5 mm (13.957 in) between center index holes (those closest to
-0.5 -0.019
center track). During this operation, play is taken up in a forward direction (see drawing. Ap¬
plication of pushing forces for taking up play).
The center rod can be adjusted a half-turn only, and requires flap removal.
-Torque locknut to specified value while keeping the components correctly orientated.
NOTE: The adjustment of L slightly modifies L2 and vice versa.
-Record deviation "e" between dimension L actually obtained and theoretical dimension
L1 (without tolerance) 354.5 mm (13.957 in),
e = L1 - L (- 0.5 mm (0.019 in) £ e £ 0).
-Adjust inboard drive rod to obtain dimension
- 0 - 0
L2 = (314.5 mm - e) (12.382 in - e) ) between inner index holes,
-0.3 -0.012
taking up play in a rearward direction (see drawing, Application of pushing forces for taking
up play).
NOTE: The inboard drive rod is a micrometric rod and can be adjusted to length without dis¬
connecting the flap from the control linkage.
-Prior to installation of the rod to be adjusted :

-Equalize the thread protrusions (end fitting and clevis).
- Position the safetying slots (end fitting and clevis) on wing upper surface side.
-Place the non-bent retainer tabs on wing root side.
-Perform this adjustment using the compensated adjustment value table (L1 - L2 - L3).
-Torquing of the inboard drive rod locknuts to the specified value increases dimen¬
sion L2 by 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
-After adjustment of the inboard flap drive rods, the inboard flap must be removed before
final assembly to tighten and safety the locknuts.
NOTE: Check that the web of the channel-section track does not contact the tabs of the in¬
board drive rod locknut retainers (position the safetying slots on wing lower surface
side).
C - Outboard flap drive rod 22 adjustment

-The inboard flap is in position with its drive rods finally adjusted.
-Adjust rod on outboard skid side. The adjustment is micrometric to obtain a dimension
+ 0.3 +0.012
L3 = (204.5 mm - e) ((8.051 in - e) in) between outer index holes.
- 0 - 0
During this operation, all play is taken up in a forward direction on outboard and center tracks
(see drawing, Application of pushing forces for taking up play).
-Unpin bellcranks 12, 16, 19 and 21.
-Check that :
-flaps can advance 1.5 mm (0.059 in) along tracks without abutting on structure
(see figure. Section B),
-flap orientation gives play of 0.5 mm (0.019 in) between skids and side track
webs throughout stroke.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPENSATED ADJUSTMENT VALUES L1 - L2 - L3
Outboard track Center track Inboard track
Theoretical dimension L3 Theoretical dimension L1 Theoretical dimension L2

on, c + 0.3 ^ q 3 mm
204.5 0 mm 354.5 + °0.5 mm 314.5
/onci +0.012.in).
(8.051 _Q
{13-957-aoi9in) (12-382-aoi2in)
L3 to be obtained L1 obtained L2 to be obtained
mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
204.5 (8.051) to 204.8 (8.063) 354.5 (13.957) 314.2 (12.370) to 314.5 (12.382)
204.4 (8.047) to 204.7 (8.059) 354.4(13.953) 314.1 (12.366) to 314.4 (12.377)
204.3 (8.043) to 204.6 (8.055) 354.3 (13.948) 314 (12.362) to 314.3 (12.374)
204.2 (8.039) to 204.5 (8.051) 354.2 (13.944) 313.9 (12.358) to 314.2 (12.370)
204.1 (8.032) to 204.4 (8.047) 354.1 (13.940) 313.8 (12.354) to 314.1 (12.366)
204 (8.031) to 204.3 (8.043) 354(13.937) 313.7 (12.350) to 314 (12.362)
APPLICATION OF PUSHING FORCES FOR TAKING UP PLAY
. Three 8 mm (0.315 M
dia. holes
Direction of force
O Index hole in wing lower skin and flap
CHECKING TOLERANCES
-To take account of inaccuracy in measurement and prevent unnecessary readjustments, the
following values may be accepted in simple flap adjustment checks :
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj£^>-^rU l\r\\J L. I
BREGUET AV.AT.ON^g^g^ RestHcted MANUAL 04
- perform check with an actual actuator «in fully retracted position, length 400 mm ± 0.4
(15.75 in ± 0.015)», with play taken up (see drawing, Application of pushing forces for
taking up play).
NOTE : L1 , L2 and L3 are the theoretical dimensions without tolerance, given in the
«Table of compensated adjustment values».
- on center track :
. . 1 + 1.8 mm ,0.07. .
L=L1-1.3mm (0.05m)
- record deviation «e» between dimension L actually obtained and theoretical dimension
L1 (without tolerance)
e=L1 -L
« -1 .3 mm (0.05 in) < e< + 1 .8 mm (0.07 in).
- on inboard track :
L=(L2+e) + °Jmm ( °;°2 in)
- on outboard track :
L=(L3+e) + °;®mm ( °°3 in)
D Retaining rod adjustment

(a) Length adjustment
CAUTION :
HYDRAULIC ACTUATION OF FLAPS IS PROHIBITED IF THE ROD HAS NOT
BEEN COMPLETELY ADJUSTED.
- Check that the rod is fitted with all fairing supports.
- Position the flap to 12° ± 30' by enoaoinq the roller in the track by 10 mm (0.393 in) relative
to the lower edge of the track shoulder lower flange (see figure, Detail D).
- Adjust the rod (micrometric adjustment) to obtain a clearance of 0.05 mm (0.002 in) between
the roller and the track lower flange, by exerting forces simulating the aerodynamic force on
the flap; these forces shall be directed backward on the rod, so that the slider abuts inside the
locking fitting, and upward on the flap trailing edge. To take account of the slight elongation
of the rod after check nut tightening, the 0.05 mm (0.002 in) shim must engage with slight
bind between the roller and the track lower flange.
- Fully retract then extend the flap to position the rod end right inside the flap clevis at each
travel end.
EVENLY DISTRIBUTE THE CLEARANCES : these should not be less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
- Check that the setting has not been altered. Readjust if required.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
/LJ^^TU
^^^^^
MIRAGE
.»»..,
F
nA
- Bring the flap to extended position, then pre-tighten the rod check nuts to a torque of
5 m.daN (36.878 Ib.ft) approx. Three wrenches are to be used for this operation; hold the
rod end (13 mm A/F), the rod body (24 mm A/F) and tighten the check nuts (24 mm A/F).
THE END-PIECES SHOULD BE HELD FIRMLY IN POSITION

- Carry out complete cycle of flap and check that the rod end-piece is still in position in the
flap clevis. Set flap at 12° ± 30' and check that the setting has not been altered.
- Remove the rod to tighten the check nuts to 10 m.daN (73.75 Ib.ft). Take the same precautions
as for pre-tightening and check that the position of 'the end-pieces does not change.
(b) Final checks after safetying the retaining rod end-pieces.
- Reinstall the rod.

- Check at the two travel ends of the flaps that there is a minimum clearance of 0.1 mm
(0.004 in) between the rod end-piece and the flap clevis.
- With flap set at 12° ± 30' and plays taken up towards the rear, the 0.05 mm (0.002 in) shim
tool should just fit between the roller and the track lower flange, and should slip freely
between the roller and the upper flange.
- Cycle the flaps with plays taken up towards the rear as previously indicated; check that in the
shoulder area of the track, the roller moves FREELY along the lower and upper flanges.
Check, in particular in the positions corresponding to deflections equal to or higher than 10°
that the roller cannot come into contact with the track upper flange.
- Retract and extend the flaps several times, taking up the plays, then leaving the flap in its
off-load position; check that the roller still moves FREELY in the track. Look for any
possible binding point between the moving components and the fixed structure (in particular,
check that the retainers are correctly lowered on the flap drive rods).
- Record the flap maximum deflection angle (flap against structure). The angle should be
greater than 49°. (Normally, structural stop is between the center pad and the track
shoulder).
E Check of clearance between flap nose and flap top cover

The control jack is in fully retracted position (Insert a 0.5 mm (0.019 in) teflon shim or use
pads of modelling clay) (see figure, Section B).
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
8- CHECK OF PAD PLAY VALUES
- Fit the flap jack.
- Check side plays at inboard and outboard tracks for the following three control jack config¬
urations :
- jack rod set to its extreme retracted position,
-jack rod extended by 18 mm (0.709 in). This position gives the minimum play throughout
complete travel, therefore indicating the most critical position. (For this check, remove the electrical
jack and instead, install adjustable rod 50MS067).
- jack rod in extended position.
- Measure play values, taking them up as indicated in figure (Application of pushing forces for
taking up plays) : This IMPORTANT operation is intended to simulate aerodynamical effect upon
flaps and to provide minimum side plays.
TABLE OF TRACK SIDE PLAYS
Jack position Inboard pad play Outboard pad play
Extreme retracted 1 .3 mm < JO < 1 .8 mm 0.6 mm < X0 < 1 .1 mm

position (0.051 in < JO < 0.071 in) (0.023 in) < X0 < (0.043 in)
18 mm (0.709 in)
J1>0.5mm (0.019 in) X1> 0.5 mm (0.019 in)
(rod extension)
Extreme extended
position
J2> 0.5 mm (0.019 in) X2> 0.5 mm (0.019 in)
9- TESTS
Carry out the hydraulic travel check on «slow» then on «normal» ; apply instructions given on
sheet dealing with detailed adjustment check of the high-lift channel.
10 -FINAL STEPS
- Remove tools.
- Perform and check all safetying.
- Install doors, fairings.
- Stick underside plugs with Loctite.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L-^ZTSK
BREGUET AVIATION^<3aF=^<C5.
MIRAGE F
^C****^^$> Restricted MANUAL 04
ADJUSTMENT OF SLOTTED SLAT CONTROL SYSTEM

(figure 22)
A Special tools

- Trailing edge protector
- Rule M31 097
- Crank handle with universal joint M31 104

2 -MATERIALS
-Grease AIR 4222 or 42 10
3- GENERAL
TAKE ALL THE SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM CONCERNED

(see 01-0).
- Open the access doors

- Connect the hydraulic power supply
- Energize the aircraft electrical systems
5- ADJUSTMENT OF RODS
NOTE : Keep the droop slats open during the following operations. For that purpose, uncouple the
connectors from microswitches 4C1-4C2.
- Disconnect rod 10
- Manually retract the slats (end fitting of universal joint M31 104)
- Disconnect rod 8
I- Rotate each jack end fitting by hand so as to move the screw longitudinally to pin the slat to
the clevis while maintaining a dimension of 104 ± 0.5 mm (4.094 ± 0.019 in). Check the slat for
warping.
- Check the jack clearances (see 04.4)
- Reconnect rod 8
- Adjust the templates to 0°
- Using the hydraulic test bench, retract the gearmotor in NORMAL mode
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ^^-KL /V\II\MV^L l
BREGUET AVIATION ^^
^*s_ ^^>
^r-^> - ^ . ^
MANUAL r\A
04
-Connect rod 10, making sure that the dimension of 104 ± 0.5 mm
(4.094 ± 0019 in) is maintained.
6 - CHECK AND TESTS
-Retract and extend the slats in manual mode and check that the dimension of 104 ±
0.5 mm (4.094 ± 0.019 in) is obtained. Readjust if required.
+ 0,5
- Retract the slats in emergency mode and check that the dimension of 1 02 mm
- 0.3
+ 0.01 9
(4.015 in) is obtained.
-0.011
NOTE: For this measurement, manually push the slat, taking up the plays of the linkage as¬
sembly.
- Perform the same adjustment on the other wing.

- Connect the connectors of microswitches 4C1 and 4C2.
- Fully deflect the slats and check the operating times (see 04-4).
7 - FINAL STEPS
Remove the tools

Reinstall all the access doors
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
ADJUSTMENT OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICE MICROSWITCHES
1 - SCOPE
To provide an adjustment procedure for high-lift device control microswitches in the case
where one of these microswitches is being changed or checked.
2 - GENERAL
Microswitch adjustment consists in obtaining electrical tripping for a given slat or flap
position and in ensuring a minimum excess travel of 0.5 mm (0.019 in) of the roller, beyond
electrical tripping point. This excess travel allows clearance "J" to be determined.
J
Clearance. J = 0.1 to 0.6mm
(0.004 to 0.023 in)
if Excess travel > 0.5 mm (0.019 in)

Electrical tripping
M
Checking of excess travel
When the microswitch roller is actuated by the cam movement, if clearance "J" becomes
higher than 0.6 mm (0.023 in) after electrical tripping (this particularly applies to microswitch
204C), it may be necessary to determine the maximum permissible value of "J".
Proceed as follows : Using a set of shims, determine minimum thickness "E" which, once
inserted within clearance "J", does not allow contact electrical tripping to be obtained any
longer when the roller is actuated by hand from its free position. Excess travel adjustment will
be considered correct if, for any controlled position of roller, clearance "J" remains comprised
between 0.1 and (E-0.5) mm (0.004 and (E-0.019) in).
In the case where clearance "J" cannot be measured with microswitch installed in aircraft
(this is the case of microswitch 183C), clearance "F" available between roller and cover when
clearance "J" is equal to zero should be known. Excess travel adjustment will be considered
correct if, for any controlled position, the clearance between cam and cover is comprised be¬
tween (F + 0.1) and (F + 0.6) mm (F + 0.004) and (F + 0.023) in).
A higher clearance will be permitted between cam and cover if thickness "E" (defined in
preceding paragraph) has been measured, i.e. (F + E - 0.5) mm ((F + E - 0.019) in) in¬
stead of (F + 0.6) mm (F + 0.023) in).
Cover.
Checking of excess travel upon cutting-in.

If released roller still remains in contact with its control, check that the contact is not
tripped when a 0.3-mm (0.01 1 -in) shim is passed between control and released roller.
While performing these operations, take all safety measures applicable to system con¬
cerned (See 01-0).
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT l
BREGUET AVIATION^
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL..04
A Special tools

-RuleM31097
- Crank handle with cardan drive M31 104
- Adjustable rod 50MS067
- Disconnecting box
- Multimeter.
- 1 1 5-200 VMOOHz electrical power supply
- Hydraulic power supply (hand pump).
C Spares
- Lockplates 31650 AC 060 LE

- Locking pin 23310 AA 015 015 LE
4- ADJUSTMENT OF MICROSWITCHES 204C, 2C, 8C, 180C and 187C
A Preliminary steps
- For adjustment of microswitches 204C, 2C1 , 8C and 108C, disconnect rods 5 (Fig. 27).
- For adjustment of microswitches 2C2 and 187C, disconnect rod 6 (Fig. 27).
- Remove doors V1 -62, V2-62, 26-00, 28-00 and V2-66.
- Remove wing fillets 26-10 or 26-02.
- Disconnect both flap supply pipes, forward of wing rear attachment.
- Connect hydraulic hand pump to pipes.
- Install deflection templates.
- Remove electric control actuator 181C.
- Fit adjustable rod 50MS067.
- Open spoiler flap.
B - Microswitch 204C (V 1-62)
-Connect disconnecting box.

- Connect mobile female connector to unit 193C (connector P1 ).
- Connect multimeter as an ohmmeter to disconnecting box (across L1 and Z1 ).
- Set flaps to 1 5° 40' by acting on rod 50MS067.
- Allow microswitch support to rotate about its fixed point.
- Move clamp and cam on flap rod so as to obtain contact between roller and cam (with no stress)
exactly at point «D» (cam profile angle). Rotate microswitch support until a clearance of 0.4 to
0.6 mm (0.01 5 to 0.023 in) is obtained with respect to lever stop.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
0.4 to 0.6 mm
(0.01 5 to 0.023 in)
-Extend flaps to more than 20° by acting on rod 50MS067.

-Retract flaps slowly to obtain continuity indication on multimeter at 18° ± 2°; other¬
wise, correct through slight cam displacement (move cam towards wing root to increase an¬
gle).
Once this operation is completed, check microswitch excess travel in four positions A, B,
C and D and following the indications given in preceding paragraph. If clearance obtained
with respect to lever stop is comprised between 0.1 and 0.6 mm (0.004 and 0.023 in), excess
travel is correct. If clearance is higher than 0.6 mm (0.023 in), it is necessary to measure ac¬
tual excess travel, with respect to tripping point. If clearance is not comprised between 0.1 and
(E - 0.5) mm (0.004 and (E -0.019) in), it is necessary to perform rotary adjustment of
microswitch support until desired clearance is obtained ; then, check that continuity indication
is obtained again on multimeter when retracting flaps to 18° ± 2°.
C - Microswitch 2C1 - 2C2 (V2-62)
Amber light indication
-Connect disconnecting box.
-Connect mobile female connector to mobile aircraft connector.
-Connect multimeter to disconnecting box (across D and E).
-Preadjust microswitch control rod length to a center-to-center value of 68 mm
(2.677 in) and install rod.
CAUTION:
THE CONTROL ROD OF MICROSWITCH 2C1 MUST BE INSTALLED WITH THE
LEFT-HAND THREAD CLEVIS ON THE FLAP CONTROL BELLCRANK.
-Setflapto23°30'.
-Lengthen rod until continuity is obtained across D and E.
-Tighten rod locknuts.
- Retract flaps to a deflection lower than 20" to obtain cutoff and then extend flaps slowly
to obtain continuity at 23°30' ± 30'.
Red light indication
-Retract flaps and check that, when cutoff is obtained across A and B, as least 5 mm
(0.19 in) of flat travel towards "flap retracted" position is still available.
Green light indication
-Extend flaps and check that contact across G and H is made when the 43° position is
reached:
Microswitch 2C2
-Adjustment procedure similar to that described in preceding paragraph.
NOTE: After microswitch 2C1 is changed and adjusted, it is necessary to check adjustment of
unit 8C and to readjust, if required.
BB MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl^J>^Q
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^^"^
MIRAGE. .
F
Restricted MANUAL.04
D - Microswitch 8C (V2-62)
- Connect disconnecting box.
- Connect mobile female connector to mobile aircraft connector.
- Set flap 62 mm (2.44 in) before retracted position.
- Couple microswitch 8C to microswitch 2C1 through preadjustment rod set to 37 mm (1.457 in)
approx.
-Adjust rod to obtain cutoff across H and J.
-Tighten nuts and check that cutoff takes place in retracting direction for a flap position
comprised between 65 and 54 mm (2.559 and 2.125 in).
- Extend flaps beyond 35° and retract them slowly. Check that contact is made across A and B at
32° ±1°.
- Continue to retract flaps slowly and check that continuity is obtained across D and E at 1 8° ± 2°.
NOTE : Lengthen rod to delay contact opening.
E - Microswitch 180C (26-00)

- Set flaps to 27° by acting on rod 50MS067.
CAUTION :
LEVER-TO-MICROSWITCH PINNING HOLE SHOULD NEVER BE USED ON AIRCRAFT.
- Connect disconnecting box.

- Connect multimeter as an ohmmeter to disconnecting box (across A and C).
- Preadjust the microswitch micrometric control rod ; equalize the engaged threads of the clevises
at their maximum unscrewing reference hole.
- Install the micrometric rod and reduce its center-to-center distance by actuating the turnbuckle
until cutoff is obtained across A and C.
- Remove rod 50MS067.
- Install and connect electric actuator.
- Actuate flaps by means of «FLAPS-SLATS» handle in cockpit and record angular deflection of
L/H inboard flap in half-flap position obtained in both retracting and extending directions.
- If necessary, readjust microswitch rod to obtain the following :
a = 27° ± 30' in extending direction (cutoff across A and C)

0 = 29° ± 1° retracting direction (cutoff across D and F)
withj3-a>1°
NOTE : Check that cutoff takes place across G and J at 12° approx. in extending direction.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
F - Microswitch 187C (V2-66)

-Connect disconnecting box to connector P1 of unit 192C.
-Connect multimeter as an ohmmeter across terminals B and D of disconnecting box.
-Set flaps to 14°40'.
-Check the support contact surfaces for condition. Any out-of-flatness of the washers
may make it difficult to position the support. In this case, the three washers P/N
23i16DG050A (formerly manufactured from AU4G) are to be replaced by steel washers P/N
23116BCO50LE.
-Preadjust the position of the microswitch support so as to obtain roller contact at the
end of 80 mm (3.149 in) radius simultaneously with a clearance of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (0.012 to
0.01 9 in) at the microswitch lever stop. Seat the nuts attaching the support to the bases with¬
out final tightening so as to compensate for the thrust of the roller return spring and allow the
support to be slid for minor adjustment purposes upon final adjustment.
0.3 to 0.5 mm
R80 (0.012 to 0.019 in)
T-J
14 40' Flap
retraction
-Extend flaps beyond 20°.

-Retract flaps slowly to obtain cutoff across terminals B and D at 17°30' + 30'. If re¬
quired, readjust by moving microswitch support towards wing leading edge to decrease angle.
After angle adjustment is completed, check clearance obtained with respect to micro-
switch lever stop for flaps retracted and flaps extended to 15°. If clearance is comprised be¬
tween 0.1 and 0.6 mm (0.004 and 0.023 in), microswitch excess travel is correct. If clearance
is higher than 0.6 mm (0.023 in), measure actual excess travel with respect to tripping point
as described in para. 2 (GENERAL). If clearance is not comprised between 0.1 and
(E - 0.5) mm (0.04 and (E -0.019) in), it is necessary to move microswitch support at
right angles to the cam so as to prevent angle adjustment from being altered.
-Finally tighten the three support attaching nuts.
-Check that electrical tripping is still comprised within 17°30' ±30' tolerance limits in re¬
tracting direction. Upon final adjustment we should have 17° ± 1° as measured on LH flap.
G - Microswitches 183C, 1 91 C and 203C.
-Remove doors V0-31 (microswitch 191C), V1-15 (microswitch 203C) and V1-17 (mi¬
croswitch 183C).
-Open equipment bay door 1 3-00.
Microswitch 183C
cirfa06 f^~ -& ^ Fixed point
Fixed point
-Before installation, measure dimensions E and F on microswitch, as described in para. 2

(GENERAL).
-Adjust cam fully upwards.
-Preadjust microswitch on its support so that clearance between cam and microswitch
cover is comprised between 0.2 and 0.3 mm (0.008 and 0.012 in) in "slat retracted" position.
-Adjust cam fully downwards.
-Connect disconnecting box to connector P1 of unit 192C.
-Connect multimeter as an ohmmeter across terminals B and F of disconnecting box.
-Set slats to 19°.
-Move cam upwards to obtain cutoff across B and F. Extend slats beyond 23° and then
+ 1°
retract them slowly to obtain cutoff across B and F at 19°
- 0°30'
-Check microswitch excess travels* retract slats and check that clearance between cam
and microswitch cover is comprised between :
(F + 0.1 ) and (F + 0.6) mm (F + 0.004) and (F + 0.023) in)
or (F + 0.1) and (F + E - 0.5) mm (F + 0.004) and (F + E - 0.019) in)
-Extend slats to 2b°30' and check that a 0.3-mm (0.01 2-in) shim can be passed between
roller and cam without controlling microswitch tripping.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
Microswitch 191C
- Connect disconnecting box to connector P2 of unit 1 93C.

- Connect multimeter as an ohmmeter to disconnecting box (across D and E).
- Connect disconnecting box in series with connector 83 A Remove jumper F F. F F (L/H side
of equipment bay).
- Extend slats in manual mode.
- Unscrew plunger attachment so that plunger can be slightly slided.
- Retract slats in manual mode.
-Adjust plunger position on rod to obtain a clearance of 0.3 to 0.5 mm (0.011 to 0.019 in)
with respect to microswitch stop.
- Check that cutoff is obtained across D and E in above-described conditions.
- Perform several extensions and retractions and check that adjustment.
-Check that microswitch 203C is correctly adjusted, then install jumper FF.FF and perform
several retractions in emergency mode. Check adjustment.
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
H - Microswitch 203C
- Connect the cutoff box to connector P2 of unit 1 93C.
- Connect the multimeter as an ohmmeter to the cutoff box, across C and E.
- Connect the cutoff box in series with connector 83 A.
- Remove FF.FF jumper.
Preadjustment of microswitch
Install the microswitch on the base plate.

-
Adjust the microswitch so as to obtain opening after an arm travel of 1.5 mm (0.049 in) at the
-
boss on track drive side (see figure).
-With the lever at rest, check that passing a 0.3 mm (0.011 in) shim between roller and lever
does not cause one of the two cells to trip. If required, increase travel C to pass the 0.3 mm (0.01 1 in)
shim.
- Check that the overall lever travel from the rest position provided by the spring is 7 mm
(0.275 in) minimum.
- Install the microswitch support assembly on the rib and check that the base plate assembly can
be slightly slid.
-Check the dimension on wing lower surface (M31097) : it should be 104 ± 0.5 mm
(4.094 ±0.019 in).
- Extend the slats and retract them in successive steps. For that purpose :
- select emergency retraction mode ;
- connect the electrical cords to FF.FF of the cutoff box fitted to connector 83 A and apply
short impulses by means of the electrical cords ;
- interrupt slotted slat retraction at 4 ± 0.2 mm (0.157 ± 0.007 in) from zero position (this
dimension shall be taken with a ruler or calipers, between the slat trailing edge and a point marked
on wing upper surface) ;
- move the base plate assembly forwards so that the control lever comes into contact with
the microswitch roller and that contact opening is obtained across E and C of connector P2 (unit
193C) ;
- check the adjustment (manual and emergency) by making sure that opening takes place at
the above-mentioned position ; +0 5 +0019
-upon completion of emergency retraction (travel : 102_Q'omm (4.015 _ q'qh in),
i.e. 2 mm (0.078 in) after theoretical zero position), check that the lever does not come into contact
with the microswitch cover ; check that a 0.1 mm (0.003 in) shim still can be passed between lever and
roller.
Track block
Rib. 1E
r. Lever 4 ± 0.2 mm
(0.157 ±0.007 in)
*==)= (§
1.5 mm
(0.049 in)
L Microswitch
5- FINAL STEPS
- Disconnect the cutoff boxes and reconnect the electrical connectors.
- Restore the system to initial conditions as per the setting specific to each microswitch.
- Disconnect the hydraulic power supply.
- Disconnect the electrical power supply.
- Remove the templates.
- Reinstall the inspection doors.
BB MOD 454
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICE CHAIN
USING SLAT/FLAP TEST BOX
1 - SCOPE
To check for operation of the SLAT/FLAP SERVO UNIT and of SLATS SERVO UNIT and
peripheral devices which make up the high-lift device system.
2- GENERAL
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM (See 01-1).
- Slat/ Flap test box

1 15-200 V/400 Hz electrical power supply.
- Pressure generator.
- Open the equipment bay door.

- Remove the incidence probe cover.
5- SLAT/FLAP TEST BOX - GENERAL
A Coupling
The slat/flap test box is coupled to the equipment item to be checked through flaps cord or slats
cord.
P1 and P2 connectors or slat/flap test box are connected :

- either to combat slat/flap unit 192C and to aircraft systems through flap cord MEM 140 04-01 ,
- or auto slat servo unit 193C and to aircraft systems through slat cord MEM 140 05-01 .
B Measurements
Measurements are selected through switch SW4 which delivers the signals to be measured to
voltmeter M1 (positions 1 to 12 on SW4) and to digital voltmeter DS27 (positions 2 to 5 on SW4).
The center zero voltmeter is fitted with :

- two graduated scales :
- upper scale from - 100% to + 100%,
- lower scale from 3 V to + 3 V,
- two gages (15 V and 30 V) selected automatically according the switch SW4 setting.
BA MOD 454
-77 Restricted 4-546
BREGUET
IL^^ZV^
AVIATIONôp'e^^
MIRAGE F
s^C^*^^. Restricted MANUAL 04
The voltmeter displays, when set to :
- positions 1 to 3 : supply voltages,
- position 4 : a voltage proper to its related measurement circuits,
- positions 5 and 6 : «S/F ARMED» light supply voltages,
- positions 7 to 1 2 : A/C signals shown on the illustration.
The stop-watch has three digits for displaying the hundredths of second. It indicates :
- when set to positions 2 and 3 : time delays (electronic circuits inside combat slat/flap unit),
- when set to positions 4 and 5 : times (hydraulic circuits) required for :
- retraction of flaps from 27° to 0°
-retraction of slats from 15° to 0° sleeves E1 to E5 are used for some measurements at
operator's will :
E1 is connected to positive terminal of vol meter
E2 is connected to negative terminal of volmeter ; depending on SW4 setting, the terminal is set
to null point or to a fictitious zero (+ 10 V).
E3 is connected to the stop-watch starting input.
E4 is connected to the stop-watch stopping input
E5 is connected to the null point.
C Various controls
R1, R2 and R3 potentiometers simulate aircraft information when switch SW6 is set to
«SIMULATION».
R1 simulates :
- in flaps mode, the 1st limit conventional airspeed,
- in slats mode, the incidence.
R2 simulates :
- in flaps or slats mode, the 1st limit Mach number.
R3 simulates :
- in flaps mode, the 2nd limit conventional airspeed,
- in slats mode, the LH slats position pickoff. The RH slats pickoff is replaced by a resistor
fixed bridge.
The various switches are for the functions indicated on illustration. Some of them are used for
operation with or without aircraft systems ; if without A/C systems, they simulate open or closed
condition of A/C contacts.
D Indicating
Flaps or slats retraction-extension control commands (whether manual or automatic) and the
information from A/C contacts and failure warning system are displayed by indicator lights.
These lights can be tested by depressing button SW2.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
6- OPERATION
A Installation
Arrange the «S/F TEST» box, with cover removed.

-
- Check and,if required, set the zero position of the measuring instrument.
-Check and, if required, set the revolution counters of R1, R2 and R3 potentiometers to 000
when the latter are set to minimum stop.
B Preliminary steps
- Manually open the nose U/C door (see 02-2). Manually close the hook of the nose U/C latching
box and the front lock of the nose U/C door.
- Connect the external power receptacle.
- Connect the hydraulic power supply to systems 1 and 2.
C Preliminary check
- Initiate an integrated test sequence (see 13-1 ).
D Connection
(1 ) When checking flaps
- Disconnect the cord from «COMBAT SLATS/FLAPS» unit.

Between this cord (A/C) and «COMBAT SLATS/FLAPS» unit,
- fit flaps cord MEM 140 04-01
by coupling the relevant connectors.
(2) When checking slats
- Disconnect the cord from «AUTO SLATS» unit.

- Between this cord (A/C) and «AUTO SLATS» unit, fit slats cord MEM 140 05-01 by coupling
the relevant connectors.
CAUTION :
THE CORD (FLAPS OR SLATS) SHOULD BE KEPT AWAY FROM SLATS AND SHOCK
CONES.
E Starting
- Energize the aircraft.

- Apply pressure to the hydraulic systems.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/ -i^-"-^ iVXIlxMOL. I
BREGUET AV.AT.ON^^^ Resfricted MANUAL 04
7 - CHECKS
- Perform the checks as per inspection sheets :
(a) Flaps -sheets 1 , 2 and 3
(b) Slats - sheets 4, 5 and 6.
Sheet 1 (or 4) is for checking the manual operation of high-lift device chain.
Sheet 2 (or 5) allows for checking the automatic function of slat/flap servo unit (or auto slat
servo unit) in connection with simulation circuits.
In case of failure, this check removes any doubt that may arise between the unit tested and the
aircraft circuits.
Sheet 3 (or 6) is for checking the automatic function of combat flap servo unit ( or slat servo unit)
in connection with aircraft systems.
This check informs the operator about availability or lack of aircraft signals delivered to the
combat flap servo unit (or slat servo unit).
Sheets 3 and 6 : the operation of assemblies or sub-assemblies (march number repetition poten¬
tiometer, ADC potentiometer, aneroids, angle-of-attack probe) delivering A/C signals is checked.
IN NO CASE SHALL THIS CHECK BE USED AS A REFERENCE FOR SETTING THE
ASSEMBLIES OR SUB-ASSEMBLIES. To check these parameters, refer to sheets related to the checks
of flight envelope safety devices (see 04-4)
NOTE : Switch «SW1 » position :

- For aircraft equipped with 1st limit flap IAS aneroid : switch 240C shall be set to
position «IAS CONT».
- For all other aircraft set to position «ADC».
In either case, the required parameter is set down on the sheets in accordance with the
position («ADC» or «IAS CONT»),
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN MANUAL MODE (FLAPS) Worksheet : 1 Page : 1/2
CHECKS SWITCHING SIMULATION MEASUREMENTS. LIGHTS (DS)

Item Position Level Item Position Reading ON OUT
mm max
1 Preliminary steps
- Set the slats/flaps lever to forward (all in)

- Set combat flap switch 206C to «OFF»
- Set the combat flap lever to disarmed position
(lever not visible) SW1 ADC or
IAS CONT
See Note para 7
SW3 SINGLE-SEATE
SW5 Released (t)
SW6 Released (t)
SW7 Released
SW8 AC FT
SW9 ACFT
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT R 1 to min. stop
000 should be obtained
R2 to min. stop
R3 to min. stop
}! not, reset the stop to zero
2 Power supplies and lights tests SW2 Depressed All
4 to 8 1 to 3
SW2 Released
9to2C
SW4 + 5.5V (1) 34% 38%
SW4 + 28 V (2) 86% 100%
SW4 + 20 V(3) 62% 70%
SW4 40 % (4) -36 % - 44 %
SW4 MACH (7)
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-550 4-5!
BREGUET AVIATION. vÊ^
J MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN MANUAL MODE (FLAPS) Worksheet : 1 Page : 2/2
CHECKS SWITCHING SIMULATION MEASUREMENTS LIGHTS (DS)

mm max
3 - Operation
3.1 - «UP» (RETRACTED) 4 to 8
3.2- «HALF FLAPS»
Set the slat/flap lever to mid position (half flaps)
3.3- «DOWN» (EXTENDED)
Set the slat/flap lever to aft position (full flaps)
3.4- «UP» (RETRACTED)
Set the slat/flap lever to forward position (all in) 4 to 8
4 - Illumination of «LIM» light
- Set the slat/flap lever to mid position (half flaps)

SW6 SIMULATION
- Actuate R1 until «LIM» light comes on 25
A/C fitted with - ADC 366 <R1 <374

- IAS CONT 164 <R1 <176
Record value R1 =x
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-551 4-E
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - SIMULATED PARAMETERS (FLAPS) Worksheet : 2 Page : 1/6
SWITCHING SIMULATION MEASUREMENTS LIGHTS (DS)

CHECKS
mm max
1 - Preliminary steps
- Set the slat/flap lever to forward position (all in)

- Set the combat flap switch to «NORMAL»
- Set the combat flap lever to armed position
- Set the «DAY-NIGHT» switch (cockpit) to «NIGHT» SW1 ADC or IAS
CONT
(see Note para.7)
SW3 SINGLE-STER
SW5 Released (t)
SW6 Released (t)
SW7 Released
SW8 ACFT
SW9 ACFT
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT
R1 to min. stop
}
One should obtain 000
R2 to min. stop
if not, reset the stop to zero
R3 to min. stop
«NIGHT» lighting variations (single-seater only) SW4 DIMMER 1 (5)

SW5 AUTO
2.1 - DAY/NIGHT 1
Check on test box voltmeter the supply voltage

amplitude variations for «combat flaps armed» light
according to the position of the potentiometer of
lighting control unit located in cockpit
2.2- DAY/NIGHT 2
Same check as for 2. 1 SW4 DIMMER 2 (6)

SW5 Released (t)
SW4 MACH (7)
FOR TWO-SEATER ACFT :
2.3 - Power supply to «combat flaps armed» light SW4 DIMMER 1 (5) 80% 100%
SW5 AUTO
SW4 DIMMER 2 (6) 80% 100%
SW5 Released (t)
SW4 MACH (7)
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-552 4-5
BREGUET AVIATION, -<S&3
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - SIMULATED PARAMETERS Worksheet : 2 Page : 2/6
SWITCHING SIMULATION ^- MEASUREMENTS LIGHTS (DS)

--
Item Position Level Item Position Reading ON . OUT
i m in max
3 - Combat flaps 4 to 8
14, 16
- Set the angle-of-attack probe to i > 10° as read on pilot
indicator SW6 SIMULATION
SW8 > 17° I
SW9 > 19°

SW11 <0.85
SW5 AUTO Flap extension until «HALF FLAPS» position 5 to 7 4,8, 1
12 to 15
23 (brightness de¬
pending on NIGHT
lighting on single
seater only)
3.1 - IAS 1 threshold
- Actuate R1 until automatic flap retraction A/C fitted with : -ADC 366 < R1 <374 23 flashes
- IAS CONT 164 <R1 < 176 4 to 8 12, 15
Record value j Rl = x1 13, 14, 16
- Reduce R1 setting until automatic flap extension i 5 to 7 4,8, 1
12 to 15
Record value ! Rl =y1 x1 -y1 23
ADC 2 7
IAS CONT 1 5
R1 <130
i
3.2 - Mach threshold
- Actuate R2 until automatic flap retraction 330 < R2 < 356 23 flashes
4 to 8 12, 15
Record value j R2=x2 13, 14, 16
- Reduce R2 setting until automatic flap extension i

5 to 7 4, 8, 1i
12 to 15
Record value ' R2=y2 x2-y2 4 12 23
R2< 130
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - SIMULATED PARAMETERS (FLAPS Worksheet : 2 Page : 3/6
___ __ r>nrAi/r SWITCHING j SIMULATION -^ MEASUREMENTS . LIGH1-S(DS)

^ ' UMtl^rso v i^
i m in max
3.3 - Limits i
3.3.1 - Mach > 0.85
(a) Without time delay SW8 >17°

SW9 >19°
SW11 >0.85 20
4 to 8
«LIM» light (cockpit) and «S/F» light (failure warning panel) come on 13, 16, 19
22 to 25
Full flap retraction, half slat retraction (auto slats)
SW11 <0.85 «LIM» light (cockpit) goes out 19,20
22,25
I
SW5 Released (t) j «S/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out 4 to 8 13
I |
14, 16 23,24
SW5 AUTO i Flap extension until half flaps position 5 to 7 4,8

12 to 15 16
i
I
23
(b) With time delay SW8 <17° '

19,20
I
SW11 >0.85 After time delay 4 to 8 12, 14

16,23 15
24,25
«LIM» light (cockpit) and «S/F» light (failure warning panel) come on after time delay 13
SW11 <0.85 «LIM» light (cockpit) goes out 19,20,25
SW5 Released (t) «S/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out 14 24, 13
' 1 1
< 1 1
SW5 AUTO Flaps extension until half flap position 5 to 7 4,8

12 to 15
23
i
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-554 4-554
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE (FLAPS) Worksheet : 2 Page : 4/6

Item Position Level Item Position Reading ON I OUT
mm max
(c) Aircraft contact 187C (Flaps < 17°) SW8 ACFT 4 to 8 12, 14, IE
16, 19,20
SW11 >0.85 Flap retraction 23.24
«S/F» light (failure warning panel) comes on
«LIM» light (cockpit) remains illuminated until flap retraction to17 25,22
then goes out 25,22
comes on after time delay 25
SW11 <0.85 «LIM» light (cockpit) goes out 25,19, 20

I
SW5 Release (t) «S/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out 15,23, 24
SW5 AUTO Flat extension until half flap positior 5 to 7 4,8, 16

12 to 15
23
(d) Aircraft contact 183C (Slats >19°) SW8 >17°

SW9 ACFT
SW11 >0.85 Flap retraction 4 to 8, 13 12, 14, IE

16,20
22 to 25
«LIM» light (cockpit) comes on As long as slat deflection is > 19° 19

I
«S/F» light (failure warning panel) come on When slat deflection < 19° 19
SW11 <0.85 «LIM» light (cockpit) goes out 25, 20, 22

: i
SW5 Release (t) «S/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out 13.24
I !
SW5 AUTO Flap extension until half position
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-555 4-55E
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE (FLAPS) Worksheet : 2 Page : 5/6
SWIT.HIMfï SIMULATION MCACIIDCMCMTC LIGHTS (DS)

Item Position Level Item Position Read ng ON OUT
min max
3.3.2- IAS2 threshold (IAS > 335 kt) SW9 >19°
- Actuate R3 until automatic flap retraction , 24,25 12, 14, 15
4 to 8, 13
«LIM» light (cockpit) and «S/F» light (failure warning pa nel) 97<R3<206 16, 19
come on 22,23
Record value I=t3 = x3
- Reduce R3 setting until «LIM» light goes out 25

19,22
«LIM» light (cockpit) goes out Record value }3 = y3 x3-y3 7 16
=13 < 130
SW5 Released (t) cS/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out 13,24
SW5 AUTO :lap extension until «HALF FLAPS» position 5 to 7

12 to 15
23
4 - Time constants
4.1 - 1st limit time delay SW4 1st LIMIT (2)
SW12 RESET DS27 0.00
^1 =400 23 flashes
4 to 8, 13
14, 16
NOTE : SW5 should have been set to «AUTO» from

more than 30 seconds before carrying on the check
SW5 Released (t) Automatic stop-watch sta rting
Automatic stop-watch stopping at the en (I of time delay DS27 3.40 4.60 25 13
31 < 130
SW5 AUTO 5 to 7
12 to 15 25
23
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-556 4-556
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE-SIMULATED PARAMETERS (FLAPS) Worksheet : 2 Page : 6/6
SWITCHING SIMULATION MEASUREMENTS. LIGHTS (DS)

CHECKS
mm max
4.2 - 2nd limit time delay SW4 2nd LIMIT (3)
SW8 <17° 12 to 15
23
SW11 >0.85 i Automatic stop-watch starting 5,6,7
19,20,23
Automatic stop-watch stopping at the end of jtime-delay DS27 2.60 3.40 4,8,16 12, 14
24,25
SW11 <0.85 19, 20, 21
SW5 Released (t) 13,24
SW5 AUTO 5 to 7
12 to 15
23
4.3 - Flap retraction SW4 FLAPS UP

(retracted) (4)
SW5 Release (t) lAutomatic stop-watch starting 4 to 8 13, 15

14, 16 12,23
Automatic stop-watch stopping upon 0 + e f p retraction DS27 0.00 4.25
BB MOD 454
03 80 Restricted 4-557 4 55
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - AIRCRAFT PARAMETERS (FLAPS) Worksheet : 3 Page : 1/2

mm max
- Set the slat/flap lever to front position (all in)

- Set the combat flap lever to armed position
- Set the angle-of-attack probe to i > 10° as read on pilot
indicator
- Check for closing of the U/C uplock box and the
forward latch of the nose U/C door. SW1 ADC or
IAS CONT
(see Note para. 7)
SW3 SINGLE-STER
SW5 Released (t)
SW6 Released (t)
SW7 Released
SW8 ACFT
SW9 ACFT
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT SW4 IAS 1 (8)
Combat slats/flaps 4 to 8
14, 16
SW5 AUTO Flap extension until half flap position 5 to 7 4,8, 16

12 to 15
23
- Connect the pressure generator to total inlets T2, T1 and static inlets S1 + S2 and S4 (see pi .0)
2.1 - IAS1 threshold
- Increase IAS (for Hp =0) until automatic flap retraction. A/C with -ADC 10% 14% 23 flashes 12, 15
- IAS CONT 34% 50%
- Reduce IAS until automatic slat extension -ADC 10% 16% 23
-IAS CONT 34% 54%
2.2 - Mach threshold SW4 MACH (7)
- Select IAS = 250 kt

- Increase altitude (see 01-0) up to about 40,000 ft ; automatic flap retraction - 23 flashes
Keep altitude at 40,000 ft and gradually reduce IAS down to automatic flap extension 15% 24% 23
Gradually increase IAS until automatic flap retraction 16% 22% 23 flashes
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-558 4-5!
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^° J^4
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - AIRCRAFT PARAMETERS (FLAPS) Worksheet : 3 Page : 2/2

mm max
Return IAS to zero
2.3 - Limits
SW8 >17° SW4 IAS 2 (10)
SW9 >19°
2.3.1 - Mach > 0.85 contact
SW6 SIMULATION RK130

R2<130
R3<130
Keep altitude to approx Hp = 35,000 ft

Increase IAS until automatic flap retraction _ 20, 24, 25
Return IAS and altitude to zero 20,25
SW5 Released . 13,24
SW5 AUTO Flap extension until half flap position 13
2.3.2- IAS 2 SW6 Released
- Increase IAS (forHp = 0) until «LIM» light comes on - 30 % 40% 24,25

- Reduce IAS until «LIM» light goes out 32 % 42% 25
- Reduce IAS to zero
- Vent pitot-static systems
- Disconnect pressure generator
SW5 Released 13,24
SW5 AUTO Flap extension until half flap position 13
NOTE :' See para. 2 for remarks connecting sheets 3 and 6.
BC MOD 454
02-85 Restricted 4-559 4-55!
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN MANUAL MODE (SLATS) Worksheet : 4 Page : 1/2

mm max
- Set the slat/flap lever to forward position

(all in)
- Set the combat slat/flap switch to «OFF»
- Disarm the combat flap lever
SW1 SLATS
SW3 SINGLE-STER
SW5 AUTO 1 to 3
SW6 Released (t)
SW7 Released
SW8 ACFT
SW9 ACFT
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT
R1 to min. stop
R2 to min. stop
R3 to min. stop
R3 = 500
} One should be obtained
if not, reset the stop to zero
000
Power supplies and light tests SW2 Depressed . All
SW2 Rest 1,2,3

5, 8, 22
SW4 + 5.5V(1) 34% 38%
SW4 + 28 V (2) 86% 100%
SW4 + 20V (3) 62% 70%
SW4 40% (4) 36 % - 44 %
SW4 MACH (7)
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-560 4-56C
BREGUET AVIATION .^^°
J MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN MANUAL MODE (SLATS) Worksheet : 4 Page : 2/2

mm max
3 - Operation
3.1 - «UP» (RETRACTED) SW8 <17°. 1,2,3

5,8,22
3.2- «DOWN» (EXTENDED)
Set the slat/flap lever to aft position (all out) 5,9 to 1 1 1 to 3, 8

15 22
SW8 ACFT 5,9 to 1 1 1 to 3, 8

15 22
3.3 -«UP» (RETRACTED)
Set the slat/flap lever to forward position (all in) 1.2,3 9 to 11

5,8,22 15
BB MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-561 4-561
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
1
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MOD! - SIMULATED PARAMETERS (?LATS) Worksheet : 5 Page : 1/5
ciAfi"muiMr>
SIMULATION LIGHTS /ns».
« - CHECKS v _
i
Item Position i Level Item Position Reading ON OUT

min max
1 - Preliminary steps !'
- Set the slats/flaps lever to forward position

(all in)
- Set the combat flap switch to «NORMAL» 5
- Disarm the combat flap lever i
i
SW1 SLATS
SW3 SINGLE-STER (
SW5 Released (t)

SW6 Released (f)
SW7 Released
SW8 ACFT
SW9 ACFT
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT
> R1 <300
R2<300 1,5,8 13
j R3 = 500 22,24 21,23
2- Auto slats SW6 SIMULATION j

SW4 MACH (7)
SW8 <17° l
SW10 <440kt
1,2,3 24
SW5 AUTO 5,8,13
21,22
2.1 - Angle-of-attack threshold
- tnrrpaçp R1 until aiitr-ii-natir clat pvtpnçinn - 9 10,16 1,2

3,5,8
423 <R1 <437 13,21,22
Record value R1 = x1
- Rprliirp R1 until aiiTnmatip slat rptrartion .. . h- 1 2 9, 10, 16

3,5,8
Record value R1 =y1 x1 -y1 25 45 13,21,22
R1 =500 Automatic slat extension 9, 10, 16 1,2

3,5,8
13,21,22
,.,.. .
BC MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-562 4-56!
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - SIMULATED PARAMETERS (SLATS) Worksheet : 5 Page : 2/5
T LIGHTS (DS)
CHECKS SWITCHING SIMULATION MEASUREMENTS.
mm max
2.2 - Mach threshold
- Increase R2 until automatic slat retraction 1,2 9, 10, 16

3,5,8
418<R2<442 13,21,22
Record value R2 = x2
- Reduce R2 until automatic slat extension .9, 10, 16 1,2

3,5,8
Record value R2=y2 x2-y2 12 13,21,22
R2=300
2.3- IAS > 440 kt SW10 > 440 kt Automatic slat retraction 1,2 9, 10, 16
3,5,8 21
13,22
2.4 - Slat asymmetry SW4 SLATS ERROR - 10% + 10%
SW4 RIGHTSLAT
(11) - 42 % - 50 %
SW4 LH SLAT (10) + 42 % + 50 %
Set the slat/flap lever to aft position (all out) - 36 % ~ 44 % 5,9 to 1 1 1,2,3
13, 15 8,22
SW4 RIGHTSLAT + 36 % + 44 %
(11)
SW4 SLATS ERROR

(12) - 10% + 10%
Set the slat flap lever to forward position (all in) - 40 % + 40 %

and watch for tension during slat actuation MODIFICATION
631 NOT INCORPO
RATED 1,2 9, 10, 16
- 24 % + 24 % 3,5,8 21
13,22
BC MOD 454
03-80 Restricted 4-563 4-56:
BREGUET AVIATION -^nP3
J
J^
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE -SIMULATED PARAMETERS (SLATS) Worksheet : 5 Page : 3/5

CHECKS
mm max
2.4.1 - 15° Auto slats SW10 < 440 kt 15° automatic slat extension 9, 10, 16
3,5,8
13,21,22
SW4 RIGHTSLAT + 2% + 10%
(11)
Record that value RHS1
SW4 LH SLAT (10) -2% -10%

1
Record that value LHS1
2.4.2- 17° Auto slats
Set the slat/flap lever to aft (all out) 5, 9 to 1 1

13, 15,21
- Set the slat/flap lever to forward (all in) .16,8, 10

3,5,9
13,21,22
SW4 RIGHTSLAT Record RHS2 value

(11)
Diff. 17°- 15° =

RHS2- RHS1 + 4% + 10%
SW4 LH SLAT (10) Record LHS2 value
Diff. 17°- 15°

LHS2- LHS1 -4% - 10%
2.4.3 - Comparator
-Increase R3 until «FAILURE» light comes on. 24

670<R3<710 5,8,9,13
«S/F» light (failure warning panel) comes on MODIFICATION 631 16,21,22
NOT INCORPO¬
RATED
595 < R3 <635
R3 = 500
SW5 Released 5,8, 1
22,24
SW5 AUTO 3, 8, 5, 9
10, 13, 16
21,22
«S/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out
BB MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION ^C0
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - SIMULATED PARAMETERS (SLATS) Worksheet : 5 Page : 4/5

mm max
Reduce R3 until «FAILURE» light comes on 24 10,3
290 < R3 < 330
«S/F» light (failure warning panel) comes on MODIFICATION 631
NOT INCORPORATED
360 < R3 <405
R3 =500
SW5 Released 5,8,1 9, 13
22,24 16,21
SW5 AUTO 3, 5, 8, 9 24
10, 13, 16
«S/F» light (failure warning panel) goes out 21,22
2.5 - Limits. Before proceeding with switchings, read the various checking sequences
2.5.1 - Mach > 1.13 Keep SW7 M > 1.13 «LIM» light (cockpit) and 17, 18,25 come on
until slat retraction
After retraction 17, 18, 2E
SW7 Released 1,2,3,5 9, 10, 16
8, 13,21
22,24
SW5 Released 5,8,1 2,3,13

22,24 21
SW5 AUTO 3, 5, 8, 9
10, 13, 16
21,22
2.5.2- IAS>470kt Keep SW7 IAS>470kt «LIM» light (cockpit) and 17, 18,25 come on
until slat retraction
After retraction 17, 18, 2E
1,2,3,5 9, 10, 16
SW7 Released 8, 13,21
22,24
SW5 Released 1,5,8 3

22,24 13,21
BB MOD 454
12-81 Restricted 4 -565 4-56
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - SIMULATED PARAMETERS (S .ATS) Worksheet : 5 Page : 5/5

mm max
2.6 - Slat retraction time delay SW4 SLATS UP
(retracted) (5)

SW5 AUTO 15 extension of outboard slats 3, 5, 8, 9
SW8 ACFT 10, 13, 16
SW9 ACFT 21,22
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT
Keep SW7 M> 1.13 Automatic stop-watch starting 1,2,3,5

8, 13,21
22,24
Automatic stop-watch stopping on zero slat ret action DS27 0.00 2.00
SW7 Released
SW5 Released 5,8
SW5 AUTO 3, 5, 8, 9
10, 13, 16
21,22
L
BB MOD 454
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF HIGHT-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - AIRCRAFT PARAMETERS (SL [\TS) Worksheet : 6 Page : 1/2

CHECKS
mm max
- Set the slat/flap lever to forward position

(all in)
- Disarm the combat flap lever
- Select a zero angle of attack
- Check for closing of the U/C uplock box and the
forward latch of the nose U/C door SW1 SLATS
SW3 SINGLE-STER
SW5 AUTO 13
SW6 Released (t)
SW7 Released
SW8 ACFT
SW9 ACFT
SW10 ACFT
SW11 ACFT 1,2,3
5,8,13
21,22
2 - Auto slats
2.1 - Angle-of-attack threshold SW4 IAS 1 (8)
- While manually acting upon the probe, increase angle of attack until automatic slat extensic 3,5,8 1,2
9, 10, 13
(Check of probe reliability, but not of setting) 8% 12% 16,21,22
- Reduce angle of attack until automatic slat retraction 1,2,3 9, 10, 16

5,8,13
12% 16% 21,22
Set the angle-of-attack probe to i > 10° as read on pilot indicator (automatic slat extensior 3,5,8 1,2
9, 10, 13
16,21,22
BB MOD 454
03 80 Restricted 4 567 4-56
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT DEVICES IN AUTOMATIC MODE - AIRCRAFT PARAMETERS (SLATS) Worksheet : 6 Page: 2/2
CHECKS SWITCHING SIMULATION -MEASUREMENTS. LIGHTS (DS)

mm max
2.2 - Mach threshold SW4 MACH (7).
- Connect the pressure generator to total inlets T2 + T1 and static inlets S1 + S2 and S4 (see 01.0)
- Increase altitude (see 01.0) up to about 40,000 ft. | |
- Keep altitude at 40,000 ft and increase IAS until automatic slat retraction 1,2,3 9, 10, 16
8,
6% 12% 21,22
Reduce IAS until automatic slat extension 3,5,8 1.2

9, 10, 13
6% 12% 16,21,22
Return IAS and altitude to zero
2.3- IAS > 440 kt contact
- Increase IAS (for Hp = 0) until automatic slat retraction 1,2,3 9, 10, 16

8, 13 21
22
- Reduce IAS until automatic slat extension 3,5,8 1,2

9, 10, 13
16,21,22
2.4 - IAS > 470 kt contact SW10 < 440 kt
- Increase IAS until automatic slat retraction 24

during retraction 25
- Return IAS to zero SW5 Released (t) after retraction 25
SW5 AUTO Auto slat extension 24
2.5- M > 1.13 contact SW6 SIMULATION R1 =500

R2<130
R3 = 500
Increase altitude up to about Hp = 35,000 ft

Increase IAS until automatic slat retraction 24
during retraction 25
after retraction 25
Return AP to 0 and Ps to local pressure

Vent Pt and Ps pitot static systems SW5 Released 13
SW5 AUTO Slat extension until «half slat» position 13 24
NOTE : See para. 7 for remarks concerning sheets 3 and 6.
_
BC MOD 454
12-81 Restricted 4 568 4-568
BREGUET AVIATION,.
iL-^-^rU. MIRAGE F
8- FINAL STEPS
- Open the latching box and the door jack (see 02-0)
- Cut off the hydraulic pressure unit.
- Couple the electrical connectors.
- Disconnect :
- the pressure generator,
- the hydraulic power supply,
- the electrical power supply,
- the test box.
- shut the doors,
- fit the covers.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAULT/LJ>-^rii
AVIATION^-^. ^^^
MIRAGE
..»*,.,..
F
TEST OF MICROSWITCH No. 5 ON

SLOTTED SLAT GEARMOTOR REPEATERS
1 - SCOPE
To test the reliability of slat-flap operation indicating microswitch No. 5 (associated with red light).
A Special tools
- 2 JBC continuity testers

- Multimeter

-Connect the power supplies :
- electrical,
- hydraulic, for system No. 1 .
- Remove access doors V0.31, RH and LH.
- Install the slat deflection templates.
PROCEDURE
- Disconnect connectors 189C and 190C.

- Connect the continuity testers to connectors 189C and 190C.
Connector 189C side

- Remove shunts J and H from the continuity tester.
- Connect the multimeter - in ohmmeter (£2) mode - to free terminals on gearmotor side (movable
connector).
- Operate the slats and flaps in manual mode.
- Check that microswitch No. 5 is working :
- no deflection on multimeter - between 0° and 1 ° on template,
slats retracted :
max. deflection on multimeter - between 1° and 28° on template.
- slats extended :
- On the U/C-slat-flap configuration indicator, check that the red indicator light comes on during
these operations and that it goes out upon locking.
- Perform the same test on R H side for connector 1 90C.
5- FINAL STEPS
Disconnect the continuity testers.
-
Reconnect connectors 189C and 190C.
-
Retract and extend the slats and flaps several times (in manual mode) and check for correct
-
indications on configuration indicator.
- Disconnect the power supplies.
- Remove the slat deflection templates.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION^5i
/LJ^TU
^ .
MIRAGE
...........
F
~ Restricted MANUAL 04
CHECK OF MICROSWITCH BOXES 2C1 AND 2C2
1 - SCOPE
Test of microswitches in boxes 2C1 and 2C2.
A Special tools
-Cutoff boxes J BC.

-Multimeter.
- Electrical power supply 1 15-200 V/400 Hz.

- Remove access doors 25.10 and 25.02.
- Disconnect connectors 125A and 126A and install cutoff boxes.
NOTE : Carry out this test in conjunction with DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF HIGH-LIFT
CHANNEL (see 04-4).
4- PROCEDURE
- On connector 125A, cut M and N.

During retraction and extension, with the multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for continuity
between M and N (box side).
- On connector 1 26A, cut T and V.

During extension, with the multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for continuity between T and
V (box side).
connector 125A, cut P and L.
- On
During retraction, with the multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for discontinuity between
Pand L (box side).
On connector 125A, cut N and L.

-
With flaps retracted, with a multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for continuity between N
and L (box side).
- Onconnector 126A, cut V - R and P.

With flaps retracted, with a multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for continuity between V
and R - V and P (box side).
NOTE : During the following operations, allow for operation of the microswitches which enable
momentary continuity ; refer to paragraph «Operation of high-lift devices in manual mode,
check of flaps», for indicating and position (see 04-4).
- On connector 126A, cut U and R.

During extension, with the multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for discontinuity between
U and R (box side).
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
ILJ^Z^X. MIRAGE F
- On connector 1 25A, cut R and L.

During retraction, with the multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for discontinuity between R
and L (box side).
- On connector 126 A, cut S and P.

During retraction, with the multimeter used as an ohmmeter, check for discontinuity between S
and P (box side).
5- FINAL STEPS
-Disconnect the cutoff boxes.

-Reconnect connectors 1 25A and 1 26A.
- Reinstall doors 25.10 and 25.02.
- Retract and extend the slats and flaps several times (in manual mode) and check for correct
indications on configuration indicator.
BA MOD 454
1280 Restricted 4-574M
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTf ^ -" -** /Y\ 1 1\ /"\ V»7 1. t
^<4_-
BREGUET AVIATION
^l jï^,
^c?^ .
Restricted . * « an*
MANUAL 04 m a
CHECK OF MICROSWITCHES ON DROOP SLAT JACKS
1 - PURPOSE
Test of correct operation of microswitches.
A - Special tools
-Cutoff box J BC 4-1 3-01.
-Multimeter
-Electrical power supply 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz.
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES APPLICABLE TO THE SYSTEM CONCERNED (see ma¬
nual 01-0-2).
- Remove the access doors:
-V0.31 LH and RH (droop slat jacks and gearmotors).
-Connect the power supplies:
-electrical,
-hydraulic to system No. 1 .
-Place the slats in extended configuration (slat/flap handle 6C in center position).
4 - PROCEDURE
(1 ) LH wing, slat jack microswitches 4C1 .
-Cut off electrical power supply.
-Disconnect connector 4C1 .
-Insert the cutoff box on connector 4C1 .
(a) Remove shunts D and E from the cutoff box
-Connect the multimeter (ohmmeter function -Cl) to free terminals D and E on jack unit
4C1 side and check for continuity across D and E on this multimeter.
-Fit a shunt across terminals D and E on aircraft side.
-Supply the aircraft with electrical power.
-Retract the droop slats, "retraction and locking of jack rod" (slat/flap handle 6C in for¬
ward position).
-When the jack rod locks, check for discontinuity across D and E on the multimeter.
-Cut off the electrical power supply.
-Disconnect the multimeter and the shunt across D and E on aircraft side, then reinstall
shunts D and E on the cutoff box.
(b) Remove shunts F and G
-Connect the multimeter (ohmmeter function) across F and G on jack unit 4C1 side.
-Supply the aircraft with electrical power.
-Extend the slats (handle 6C in center position).
-During slat extension, check for continuity across F and G, then reinstall shunts F and G.
(c) Remove shunts A and B
-Connect the multimeter (ohmmeter function -Cl) across A and B on jack unit 4C1 side.
-Retract the slats (handle 6C in forward position).
-During slat retraction, check for discontinuity across A and B, then reinstall shunts A
and B.
- Disconnect the cutoff box.
-Connect connector 4C1 .
(2) RH wing, slat jack microswitches 4C2
-Procedure identical to that previously described for slat jack 4C1 .
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Retract and extend the slats and flaps several times (in manual mode) and check for cor¬
rect indications on the configuration indicator.
NOTE: Carry out this test in conjunction with DETAILED ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF
HIGH-LIFT CHANNEL (see 04-4).
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -« /Y\||\/-\WL I
^^_
BREGUET AVIATION
^l ^s~^>
^~^ .
Restricted^ . aaamiiai
MANUAL «ji
04
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF SLAT/FLAP/SPOILER CONTROL

LINKAGES OR COMPONENTS'
(figures 21 - 25 - 28 -29)
1 - SCOPE
To give instructions for inspection and checking of the various linkage components and
hinges.
2 - GENERAL
-The various operations must be performed methodically, proceeding from the servo-con¬
trol or the jack to the control surface(s).
-If required, before removal, mark the position and assembly direction of the various com¬
ponents (rods, bellcranks, pins, recessed and flat washers).
-Pins must be removed with an appropriate tool, so as not to be damaged.
- Pins must be fitted by means of a thimble, to prevent bores from being damaged.
-lightly grease the component coupling pins,
-torque tighten as appropriate (see manual 01 -2-2),
-safety the pins with split pins (see manual 01 -0-3),
-lock the castellated nuts onto the hinges (see manual 01 -2-2).
A - Special tools
-Droop slat trailing edge protector.
B - Standard tools
-Metrology tool kit 5001 LOM
-Set of extra-thin wrenches
-Torque wrench kit: 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)
-Torque wrench accessory kit
-Hydraulic test bench with adapter set
-Electrical power supply, 115-200 V/400 Hz
-Vacuum cleaner
-Inspection light or ELAUL lamp
-Grease gun
-Lubricator "TECALEMIT" No 9.20.09.01
-Hydraulic clip bent to 90°
-Wing access stepladder
D - Spares
-2 split pins 2331 0AA01 501 5LE
-1 split pin 23310AA030035LE
-1 lockwasher 23351 AC060LE
4 - MATERIALS
-Oil AIR 3512
-White spirit
- Dry, lint-free cloths
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^-"-*< /Y\ll\/-\V^[_ t
BREGUET AVIATIONZZs&
^ .^^
^-^^ Restricted aaamiiai
MANUAL 04n*
-Comply with:
-safety measures required for protection of personnel (see manual 01 -0-2),
-instructions to be followed when working on systems (see manual 01 -0-2).
-Connect:
-electrical power supply
-system No. 1 hydraulic power supply
-Fully extend the flaps and slats.
-Switch off the power supplies.
-Remove or open the following fairings and access doors on the fuselage and each wing:
-Wings: V0.20 - V0.22 - V0.24 - V0.26 - V0.28 - V0.31 - V1.19 - V1.28 - V2.28 -
V3.28 - V1.03 - V1.05 - V1.15 - V1.17 - V2.03 - V2.05 - V2.15 - V2.17 - V2.09 -
V2.11 - V3.11 - V3.13 - V3.15 - V0.61 - V1.58 - V1 .63 - V2.61/1 - V2.65 - V2.67 -
V2.69 - V2.71 - V1 .60 - V1 .62 - V1 .64 - V2.60 - V2.62 - V2.64 - V2.66
- Fuselage : 26.00 - 28.00.
-Remove the following components orêquipment items:
-slotted slats (see manual 03-1-3),
-slotted slat universal-joint control rods (Aviac) (see manual 04-4-3),
-flap electric actuator (see manual 04-4-3),
-flap spring box (see manual 04-4-3),
-inboard and outboard flaps fitted with rods 29 and 16, and retaining rod 23 (see
manual 03-1-3),
-inboard and outboard spoilers fitted with their drive rods (see manual 03-1 -3).
NOTE: If the hydraulic flap jacks and spoiler servo-controls are to be removed, the present in¬
spection shall be carried out before their removal.
If removal has already been performed, the control linkages shall be immobilized by
tools replacing the equipment in question.
6 - PROCEDURE
This work consists in inspecting on aircraft all control linkage components (bellcranks, le¬
vers, idlers, rods, bonding braids, spherical bearings) in order to check them for proper condi¬
tion and operation, and to detect any possible defect or abnormality.
A - Detailed common procedure for inspection of spoiler, flap and droop slat control linkages
components.
PREAMBLE
On spoiler, flap and droop slat control linkages, the bellcrank or lever hinges consist of
Teflon-lined bearings, and the hinge knuckles level with the control rods are fitted with Te¬
flon-lined spherical bearings. Each of these bearings and spherical bearings features a self-lu¬
bricating lining which may be compressed or worn or damaged after a given time of operation.
The inspection described below (to be carried out on nonremoved linkage) is intended to
make sure, visually or by the touch, that every hinge has a correct play.
BA MOD 454
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
Apply on each linkage component the inspection procedure described below:
(a) Carefully clean the various components
-Hinges fitted with a self-lubricating lining shall only be wiped with. a clean, dry and lint¬
less cloth.
-Clean the slat and flap guide rails with white spirit, then dry.
-Compressed-air blowing is PROHIBITED. Dust and filings shall be removed with a vac¬
uum cleaner.
NOTE: Never clean titanium or titanium alloy parts with chlorinated products.
CAUTION:
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE TO SPHERICAL BEARINGS AND BEARINGS WITH
TEFLON SELF-LUBRICATING LININGS. ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS MUST BE DEEN¬
ERGIZED.
-Disconnect connectors shall be protected with their caps and covered with polyethylene
bags.
Special attention shall be paid to non-disconnected connectors during cleaning.
-Blank the disconnected lines.
(b) Procedure on each control bellcrank, lever, idler or hinge knuckle.
-Lock the control linkage with the servo-control (or with a tool if required).
Hollow pin Check
PR compound
Radial play
Check
-At each hinge knuckle bearing hinge, rod-to-bellcrank connecting knuckle).

-Manually actuate the bellcrank, lever, idler or hinge knuckle in the radial and axial direc¬
tions alternatively, so as to detect any abnormal play.
The maximum permissible plays are as follows :
-radial play ^ 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
-axial play < 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT |_Jk-£-% #V\II\>^\^C I
BREGUET AVIATION^K^
^ -5^^
^-^ - .
Restricted . aaakm.a. «a
MANUAL 04
From a practical point of view, the play must be perceptible to the touch, with no need to
measure it. However, if a doubt subsists, the play may be measured using a dial indicator fitted
at the hinge.
-Check their general condition: no scratches, no friction, wear or corrosion traces.
(c) For each hinge (connection)
-At control bellcranks, check:

-condition of the protective plug in the hollow pin bore,
-condition of the PR sealing compound bead on the pin head (wing upper surface),
-the plug screw (wing lower surface) - check safetying (lockwasher tab properly
bent).
-At the other connections, check:
-proper general condition, installation and safetying of pins.
(d) For each rod
-Inspect the ends for traces of impact, friction or corrosion.

-Visually inspect the locknut retainers and make sure that the locknuts are properly safe-
tied.
-Check that the spherical bearings swivel smoothly at their connecting points, and that
they show no abnormality or damage.
(e) For hardware
-Check condition of nuts, pins, recessed washers, anchor nuts.
(f) For bonding braids
-Check the braids for proper condidion: correctly tightened and safetied and free of tears,
and that they are not liable to be damaged by an equipment item or sharp edge. For the braids
fitted to linkages or moving components, check that the component is not hindered by the
braid (s) over its full travel and that the relative motion of the braid does not subject it to ten¬
sion or torsion.
If the braids must be replaced, see manual 16-0-336.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f TN -" -* /V\ 11\ /-\V_7 L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_ ê~=^> «**-# iv/l A M i i A i r\A
B - Inspection of flap control linkage components in fuselage (see figure 28)

IMPORTANT NOTE
SHOULD A DEFECT OR ABNORMALITY BE FOUND ON A COMPONENT DURING
THE INSPECTION, REMOVE/INSTALL AND INSPECT THE COMPONENT INVOLVED
All the components listed below shall be inspected as instructed in paragraph 6 (A).
FRONT BELLCRANK 1
-Access through door 28.00.

-On the bellcrank hinge pin :
-unscrew the nut and move the pin aft as far as possible,
-remove the old grease (check for traces of exidation),
-apply some grease to the bellcrank end and the pin so as to fill the counterbore.
-Reinsert the pin and seat the self-locking nut, then unscrew it by 1/6 turn minimum.
-Check the clearance between rings (see figure) - axial clearance: 0.3 to 0.5 mm (0.011
to 0.020 in).
TORSION BELLCRANK 2
-Access through door 28.00.

-Uncouple LH and RH rods 5 and 6.
-Remove the split pin, unscrew the nut (10 A/F wrench), then recover the washer.
-Remove the hinge pin.
-Check the condition of the torsion bellcrank adjustable stop located at frame 29 (see de¬
tail A in figure 28).
LH AND RH BELLCRANKS 3 AND 4
Actuate the LH and RH bellcranks using each of the LH and RH rods 5 and 6 previously
uncoupled; the bellcranks must rotate smoothly with no binding.
Check for axial and radial plays.
-Rotate LH and RH rods 5, 6, 7 and 8 to make sure that they swivel correctly.
-Couple LH and RH rods 5 and 6 to torsion bellcrank (2) :
-insert hinge pin (head outwards),
-fit the washer, screw on and tighten the nut, safety.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Boîte à ressort volet

Flap spring box
4 - Renvoi gauche
LH bellcrank
Butée de réglage
fin de course
End-of-travel
adjustment stop
Bofte à ressort volet

Flap spring box
_ Jeu 0,3 0,5 mm

à
DETAIL A
Clearance (0.01 1 to 0.020 in)
FIGURE 28 - ELEMENTS DE COMMANDE DES VOLETS DANS FUSELAGE

FLAP CONTROL COMPONENTS IN FUSELAGE
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION
J
^S&°
MIRAGE F
,_, 4 - Guignol interne de volet 10 - Guignol d'attaque spoiler N° 1

Flap inboard bellcrank Spoiler drive bellcrank No. I
1 1 - Guignol d'attaque spoiler N 2

Spoiler drive bellcrank No. 2
8 - Guignol externe dévoie
Flap outboard bellcrank
6 - Guignol central de volet
Guignol d'emplanture interne de volet Flap center bellcrank
Flap inboard wing root bellcrank DEMI-VOILURE DROITE
RH WING
12 - Guignol d'attaque spoiler N°3
Spoiler drive bellcrank No. 3
Guignol d'emplanture externe de volet
Flap outboard wing root bellcrank 7 - Renvoi de commande de volet
Flap control lever
Guignol d'attaque spoiler N°4 Bouchon

Spoiler drive bellcrank No. 4 de protectior
Protective ph
Vérin bec basculant
Droop slat jack
8 - Guignol externe de volet
Flap outboard bellcrank
9 - Guignol d'attaque servo-spoiler
Spoiler servo-control drive bellcrank Axe creux de rotation
Hollow rotating pin
Biellettes d'attaque spoiler interne
Inboard spoiler drive link rods Bague intérieure
Inner ring
2
Biellettes d'attaque spoiler externe .
Outboard spoiler drive link rods Garniture auto-lubrifiante
Self-lubricating lining
14 - Guignol d'attaque spoiler N 5 Bagues extérieures (fixes)

Spoiler drive bellcrank No. 5 Outer rings (fixed)
Guignol d'attaque -2
Guignol d'attaque -1
Drive bellcrank -2
Drive bellcrank -1 Bague coulissante Voilure extrados Bague intérieure
Sliding bushing Wing upper surface Inner ring
^siissssSs ^
Moto-réducteur bec à fente .
Slotted slat gearmotor Guignol Collerette
Bellcrank Flange
Palier
(ensemble appareillé} Rondelle frein
Entretoise
Bearing Spacer Lockwasher
matched assembly)
Servo-commande spoilers. w///////////////////////////;;;/;;////////. Voilure intrados Bague fixe Vis bouchon

Spoilers servo-control DETAIL B Wing lower surface Fixed bushing Plug screw
FIGURE 29 ELEMENTS DE COMMANDE BECS-VOLETS-SPOILERS DANS DEMI-VOILURE

SLAT/FLAP/SPOILER CONTROL COMPONENTS IN A WING
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT,0 ^ M * f Y\II\/-\V-7C. i
BREGUET AVIATION ^-fU-~ ^?-*«o
^^"^ ^ - ^ .
Restricted ....,,,
MANUAL n.
04
C - Inspection of flap and spoiler control linkage components in wings (see figure 20)
IMPORTANT NOTE
THE INSPECTION, REMOVE/INSTALL AND INSPECT THE COMPONENT INVOLVED.
All the components listed below shall be inspected as instructed in paragraph 6 (A).
(a) For flap outboard and inboard wing root bellcranks
-Uncouple rod 3 from the jack:

-unscrew the nut (6 A/F wrench),
-remove the hinge pin,
-recover the washer.
-Operate the two bellcranks slowly to make sure that they swivel smoothly with no bind¬
ing.
Move the bellcranks by hand to check for abnormal radial or axial play.
-
-Couple rod 3 to the jack:
-position the washer,
-insert the hinge pin (head upwards),
-screw on and tighten the nut.
(b) For spoiler and flap control linkage bellcranks
-Flap inboard bellcrank 4.

-Flap drive bellcrank 5.
-Flap center bellcrank 6.
-Flap control lever 7.
-Flap outboard bellcrank 8.
-Spoiler servo-control drive bellcrank 9.
-No. 1 spoiler drive bellcrank 10.
- No. 2 spoiler drive bellcrank 1 1 .
(c) Operating check of controls (flaps and spoilers)
Flap control linkage :
-If the flap jack is installed, proceed to uncoupling as described below (see figure 21 ):
-connect a hand pump to the flap jack supply lines (wing root side),
-remove the split pin through door V1 .60,
-remove nut 1 from hinge pin retaining plug 2,
-retract the jack rod,
-remove the left-hand thread plug 2 from the pin (door V0.61 ),
-disconnect the bonding braid,
-extend the jack rod,
-using extractor MS 1392, remove pin 3 (door V1.60),
-recover antiswivel flange 4,
-retract the jack rod.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ^-ft. /V\||\/-\V^L_ T
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ ^<^> ^ . ^ . ,,..... ..
^« ^s-o Restricted MANUAL 04
-actuate the control linkage manually and slowly in either direction to make sure that it
operates smoothly with no binding,
-clean and lightly lubricate the pin prior to installation,
-couple the flap jack to the flap drive bellcrank (proceed in reverse order of removal),
then insert split pin.
Spoiler control linkage :

-If the spoiler servo-control is installed, proceed to uncoupling as described below :
-uncouple the servo-control (sliding rod side) from drive bellcrank 9 (see figure 29,
détail B),
-remove the pin head retainer and its retaining screw (10 A/F socket),
-unscrew the pin (tool socket M31048),
-remove the pin with extractor MS1395,
-actuate the control linkage manually and slowly in either direction to make sure
that it operates smoothly with no binding,
-couple the spoiler servo-control to the bellcrank,
-clean and lightly lubricate the pin prior to installation,
-install the pin; the sliding rod can be extended by pulling the servo-control body
while actuating the control slide valve so as to bring the clevis opposite the self-aligning rod
end,
-position the pin and torque to 9 to 10 m.daN (66.3 to 73.7 ft.lb) using socket
M31048.
-fit the pin head retainer and its retaining screw complete with a new lockwasher.
D - Inspection of droop slat control linkage components (see figure 29)
IMPORTANT NOTE.
THE INSPECTION, REMOVE/INSTALL AND INSPECT THE COMPONENT INVOLVED.
DRIVE BELLCRANKS 1 AND 2
-Access through doors V0.22 - V0.26 - V0.31 .

-Cover the slat trailing edge with a rubber protector so that its upper surface skin is not
damaged while drive rods 3 and 4 are being uncoupled.
(a) Uncouple drive rods 3 and 4 from the slat fittings.
-Unscrew the nuts (22 A/F socket wrench), extract the hinge pins and recover the Teflon
washers.
(b) Inspect drive bellcranks 1 and 2, as well as the various components (proceed as in¬
structed in paragraph 6 (A)).
(c) Check of droop slat control linkage.
-Uncouple :
-drive rod 1 on jack side (17 A/F wrench) ; extract the hinge pin and recover the
Teflon washer.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «JW-^tt /V\ir\/-\VJ,L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^;^D ^CN, ,.,.,,.,. «.
^<l ^-^> Restricted MANUAL 04
-drive control rod 2 on bellcrank side (17 A/F socket) ; extract the hinge pin (using
extractor screw MS1393) and recover the Teflon washer.
Actuate each bellcrank 1 and 2 manually and slowly in either direction to make sure that
it travels smoothly with no binding.
- Couple :
-rod 1 to jack ; position the hinge pin, insert the Teflon washer and screw on the
nut,
-rod 2 to the bellcrank ; position the hinge pin, insert the Teflon washer and screw
on the nut,
-drive rods 3 and 4 to the slat fittings.
- Position the rods in their respective fittings by raising the slats.
-Grease the hinge pins, then insert them (head on side opposite to wing root), with Te¬
flon washers fitted in between (pin head side). Take care that the pin head is properly seated
in its "head stop" housing in the drive fitting.
-Screw on and tighten the nut to a torque of 2.8 * q"28 m.daN (20.65 * g065 ft.lb)
-Remove the protector from the droop slat trailing edge.
E - Inspection of slotted slat control linkage components

(a) For each "Aviac" bearing
-Check:
-general condition and for security of attachment, corrosion, etc.
-bearing for free rotation and self-aligning motion.
NOTE 1 : Never set the bearing to an excessive swiveling angle, as the seals might be dam¬
aged or the balls lost.
NOTE 2 : Normally, the splined shaft is made integral with the bearing inner ring by fitting and
bonding. However, a rotation of the shaft about the ring is tolerated and does not
impose bearing replacement.
-Inspect the shaft splines.

-Check that the retainer is properly engaged in the shaft groove.
-Make sure that the circlip and seal are fitted on each face of the bearing.
-Check tha bearing axial clearance, which must be lower than 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
(b) Inspection of removed rods
-Inspect the slotted slat control linkage rods for general condition : corrosion - paint -
friction - condition of attachment pins and spring clamps.
-Check that the universal -joint hinge is free from longitudinal play, and check the splines
for condition.
-Check the cross for shear.
-Renew the grease if required.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 ^-" -* MIRAGE
»ii\/ vw i- F
i
BREGUET AVIATION^4-
^w _*3«=w
^~=w ..
Restricted ....,..
MANUAL ..
04
-Using a magnifying glass, inspect the tube rivets for play.

-If corrosion is detected, the maximum permissible depth is 0.2 mm (0.008 in) over
a maximum area of less than 5 % of the rod body surface.
-Circular scratches:
-any rod showing circular scratches in the metal, the depth of which exceeds
0.05 mm (0.0020 in), should be discarded.
-Various scratches:
-any rod showing non -circular scratches in the metal, the depth of which ex¬
ceeds 0.1 mm (0.004 in), or more than three scratches of any kind over a length not exceed¬
ing 200 mm (7.874 in) is to be discarded.
- Dents on the tube:
-any rod showing evidence of dents, the depth of which exceeds 0.3 mm
(0.012 in), or more than three dents over a length not exceeding 200 mm (7.874 in) is to be
discarded.
-Otherwise, touch up scratches and apply protection.
-Check the rod deflection which should be less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in) per meter.
F - Inspection of wing components
Check :
-the rails, runners and rollers for condition and security of attachment (flaps and slotted
slats).
-the rollers for proper rotation without binding or play (replace the rollers if necessary),
-the flap drip strip for condition and security of attachment,
-for cracks at the roller indentations outside the rails.
G - Servicing of slat/flap hinges (see figure 25)
(a) Grease the following:
-slotted slat screwjacks,
-slotted slat rollers provided with lubricators.
CAUTION:
THE GREASE MUST COME OUT BETWEEN THE PIN AND THE OUTER RING.
-Using a brush, coat the following with a film of grease:

-guide rails,
-slotted slat jack screws.
NOTE: Spare screwjacks are provided with storage protection but are not greased. Complete
greasing is therefore necessary before installation.
-Flap locking fitting.

-Slider hinge of inboard flap retaining rod locking fitting (fit a bent lubricator to pin head
for that lubrication).
-Guide rails.
CAUTION:
IT IS IMPERATIVE TO REMOVE THE BENT LUBRICATOR FITTED TO THE INBOARD
FLAP RETAINING ROD PIN HEAD FOR LUBRICATION PURPOSES PRIOR TO OPER¬
ATING ANY HIGH-LIFT DEVICE. FILL LUBRICATING HOLE WITH GREASE.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f^-^Mi /Y\IÏ\/"\\J7E. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^f^
^-^ ^<^>
^s *o .
Restricted , aaamiiai
MANUAL n/i
04
(b) Lightly oil the following
-Droop slat hinge pins.

-Hinge point between spherical bearings and flap leading edge runners.
- Flap rollers and runners.
CAUTION:
DO NOT APPLY OIL OR GREASE ON HINGES (TEFLON-COATED SPHERICAL BEAR¬
INGS).
(c) Remove excess grease and oil.
7 - FINAL STEPS
-Install the following components or equipment items:

-slotted slat universal-joint control rods (Aviac) (see manual 04-4-3),
-slotted slats (see manual 03-1-3),
-flap electric actuator (see manual 04-4-3),
-flap spring box (see manual 04-4-3),
-inboard and outboard flaps fitted with rods 29 and 16, and retaining rod 23 (see
manual 03-1-3),
-inboard and outboard spoilers fitted with their drive rods (see manual 03-1 -3),
-Check tightening and safetying of all hinges and proper installation of all bonding
braids.
-Install the removed fairings and access doors.
-Actuate the slats and flaps once or twice over their whole travel, ending with the slats
and flaps retracted.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION^
t^^ZZ^X MIRAGE F
REPLACING A MICROSWITCH AND THE ELECTRIC WIRING

ON A HIGH LIFT DEVICE CONTACTOR
(Figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
Operations to be performed if a microswitch is found defective, or if the connector or its wiring is

found damaged on a contactor being used.
A - Special tools
- Crimping tool test kit.

-Mechanical test set M K M043.
C - Spares
- 1 microswitch
- 1 connector
- 1 connector
- 2 lock washers for microswitch attaching screws
- 8 cover attaching washers
- 2 clamp attaching washers
- electric wire
- thermit it sheath
- 9 sleeves A1 for microswitch welding protection.
3 - MATERIALS
- Varnish 9036 bis
- Compound «HYLOMAR» SQ32.
4 - REPLACEMENT OF A MICROSWITCH
A Removal of a microswitch
- Unfit both screws 22, withdraw washers 23 and remove half-clamp 21 .

- Unfit the eight screws 24, withdraw washers 25 and remove covers 2 and 3.
- Bring lever 20 to «Extension» position until the rockers have no longer any action on the
microswitch blades.
- Strainghten both lock washers 8, unscrew both nuts 9, withdraw both screws 6 then disengage all
three microswitches from the unit by simultaneously moving the cable through wire outlet.
- At last, recover washers
5 and spacers 7.
On the defective microswitch : remove the protective rubber sleeves from welds, mark the
-
respective positions of wires on microswitch terminals and unsolder them.
BA MOD 454
BREGUET AVIATION, _ _
MIRAGE F
Restricted AVUMUAL 04
B - Microswitch installation
- Slide a new rubber sleeve on the end of removed microswitch wires and solder the latter to
corresponding terminals on new microswitch.
- Insert three microswitches in box while making sure that electric wiring is positioned properly.
- Position and center both washers 5. Install both screws 6 fitted with new lockplate 8. Install both
spacers 7 and second lockplate 8 and then screw and torque both nuts 9 to 5 ± 1 cm.daN
(4.42 ± 0.88 in.lb).
NOTE : Lockplates 8 should be bent only after microswitch adjustment.
C - Microswitch adjustment
Refer to sheet dealing with high-lift device microswitch unit check and adjustment.
5 - ELECTRIC WIRING REPLACEMENT

A Removal of electric wiring and connector
-With microswitches removed from microswitch unit box, remove rubber sleeves and unsolder
wires from microswitch terminals.
- Remove electric wiring and scrap it as well as connector.
B Making up of electric wiring
- Cut eight or nine (depending on type of microswitch unit) 300 mm (12 in) (approx.) long wire
sections out of 0.6 mm2 cross-section electric wire.
- Fit one end of each with a rubber sleeve, strip that end, mark the other and solder stripped ends
to corresponding microswitch terminals.
- Cut a thermofit sheath section having a sufficient length to comply with dimension given on
diagram.
. - Install and attach the three microswitches in microswitch unit box.
- Shape wires on microswitches and run them through wire outlet hole and then through thermofit
sheath.
- Position sheath on wire outlet hole side and shrink it, using a hot air generator (60 to 70 mm
(2.362 to 2.755 in) from that end).
- Cover shrunk end whith a 10 mm (0.393 in) (approx.) long sleeve, cut out of a thermofit sheath
having the same diameter as that used to protect wiring.
-Shrink sleeve and secure sheath to microswitch unit box through half-clamp 21 attached by
means of both screws 22, each of these screws being fitted with a new washer 23.
- Position two or three 10 mm (0.4 in) (approx.) long thermofit sheath sleeves over shrunk section
of sheath, which sleeves are to be used upon final assembly of connector.
- Cut wires to length on connector slide.
- Remove identification sleeps, strip wire ends and crimp them to connector terminals. Then,
assemble connector, complying with pin identification when installing the latter.
- Before installing the two half-clamps of connector cable clamp, fully shrink thermofit sheath and
then shrink one or two sleeves on sheath end (sleeves previously slid over sheath), so as to provide for
correct clamping of wiring end in half-clamps.
- Cut and remove excess sleeve(s).
BB MOD 454
05~77 Restricted 4"802
BREGUET
/L=^-Û
AVIATION^^F^^ô
MIRAGE F
^C*^^*^ Restricted MANUAL 04
C Inspection
Subject the item to a bench test in order to check for wiring quality, then perform the final
operations on microswitch as indicated in paragraphs 4.C and 5 of the worksheet dealing with check
and adjustment of high lift device contactors.
BA MOD 454
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL^^ZT^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlON^fiF0^^ . ...........
SECTION 5
AIRBRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
5-0 GENERAL
- Airbrake control system - Principle 5-001

- Electrical circuit 5-106
- Operation of airbrakes 5-107
- Incorporated documentation
- Airbrake jacks MESSIE R-HISPANO C2229M0-1 ; C22292-10-1 5-109
- MOD 513 NOT INCORPORATED : C22291-10 ; C22292-10
- Connection block MESSIER-HISPANO A77128-1 5-113
5-2 FAILURES
- Airbrake control system 5-201
- Removal-installation of an airbrake jack 5-301

- Removal-installation of unlocking units 5-304
- Removal-installation of airbrake jack swivel coupling 5-307
- Disassembly-assembly of airbrake jack for seal replacement 5-401
5-5 INSPECTION -CHECK -ADJUSTMENT -TESTS
- Inspection and servicing of airbrakes 5-501

- Functional tests of airbrakes 5-503
- Tests of airbrake jack after seal replacement ! 5-504
- Adjustment of airbrakes 5-506
- Check of airbrake extension indicating system 5-510
- Precautions to be taken for long-term work on undercarriage legs and jacks
(airbrakes included) mounted on aircraft see 05-0
- Precautions to be taken for spare jacks see 05-0
- Leakage tolerances on jacks in service use see 05-0
5-7 STORAGE -PACKAGING -TRANSPORTATION
- Storage - packaging - transportation of jacks see 05-1

- Storage - packaging - transportation of connection block 5-701
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAUIT/L^^^TU^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATION^^F3^-^^ . »««»,««,
Figure No. Page

2 AIRBRAKE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM 5-108
3 AIRBRAKE JACK ASSEMBLY 5-110
4 DIAGRAM OF JACK 5-112
5 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF AIRBRAKE JACK 5-407
6 ADJUSTMENT OF AIRBRAKES 5-509
AA
0475 Restricted 5_2
BREGUET AVIATION
tijs>^s\
^jâT _^ -
MIRAGE
». «..*
a
F
trJ
AIRBRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM - PRINCIPLE
Aircraft aerodynamic braking is effected by means of two airbrakes opening simultaneously under
thefu selage. They are operated through an electro-hydraulic installation.
A control switch, located on throttle handle, allows an electrically-operated selector valve to be

energized through a relay, which selector valve then allows hydraulic pressure to be fed to two
double-acting jacks controlling airbrake extension and retraction.
Airbrakes are held in extended configuration thanks to hydraulic pressure admitted in jacks. A
warning light is provided in cockpit to monitor airbrake controls.
Each airbrake is locked mechanically in retracted configuration thanks to a unit provided with
hydraulic unlocking unlocking (unlocking unit).
The warning light comes on as soon as one unit becomes unlocked.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Layout - See Figure 1
Location Doc.
Access Door No. S 1
1 L/H JACK Airbrake X

2 R/H JACK structural box
- Double-acting hydraulic jacks not provided with mecha¬

nical locking.
- Stop-to-stop nominal dimensions (jack isolated from
hydraulic pressure source)
jack compressed : 532 mm (20.944 in)
jack released :769 mm (30.275 in)
travel : 237 mm (9.33 in)
MOD.513 NOT INCORPORATED

jack released : 827 mm (32.558 in)
travel : 295 mm (1 1 .614 in).
- Intended to control airbrake extension and retraction.
3 L/H SWIVELLING COUPLING Airbrake X

4 R/H SWIVELLING COUPLING structural box
-Intended for hydraulic connection between pipes

attached to structure (fixed part) and pipes
connected to jacks (swivel part).
5 CONNECTION BLOCK 23-06-2Î X
- Intended for hydraulic connection between separate

jack pipes and common pipes.
6 NON-RETURN VALVE On electrically X

operated
- Inserted in return system, downstream of electrically- selector valve
operated selector valve it allows the hydraulic fluid to
flow only from the electrically-operated selector
valve to reservoir 1 direction.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL 04
Doc.
Location
Access Door No. S I
7 RESTRICTOR On connection X
block
- Metering hole diameter : 2,5 mm (0.098 in)
- Intended to provide fluid throttling during airbrake
retraction
10C FUSE-BREAKER Electrical X

heart
- Intended to protect electrical control and warning cir¬
cuits.
11C CONTROL SWITCH Cockpit X

Throttle
- Controlling relay 12C, it is provided with three posi¬ handle
tions allowing :
- airbrakes to be extended through short pulses (air¬
brakes retract as soon as control switch is released).
- airbrakes to be fully extended and to remain in that
position.
- airbrakes to be retracted.
12C RELAY RH junction X

box
- Intended to control the energization of electrically-
operated selector valve 15C.
13C LH UNLOCKING UNIT Airbrake X

14C RH UNLOCKING UNIT structural
box
- for locking and
These units are controlled mechanically
hydraulically for unlocking.
- Intended to lock corresponding airbrake (LH or RH) in
retracted configuration.
- Each unit is provided with microswitches connected to
airbrake control and warning circuits.

- arestrictor fitted in the hydraulic supply coupling causes
the unlocking piston to be returned slowlier in order to
reduce the impact of the airbrake hook on the
microswitch lever.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Location Doc.
Access Door No. S 1
15C ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED SELECTOR VALVE 24-06-i X
- Intended to provide hydraulic interconnections required

for operation of jacks 1 and 2.
- Airbrakes are extended through the energization of sole¬
noid 1 .
-Airbrakes are retracted through the energization of
solenoid 2
16C WARNING LIGHT Cockpit X

Instrument
- Push-to-test light panel
- Controlled from microswitches provided in unlocking
units 13Cand 14C.
- It provides «airbrakes unlocked» indication when illu¬
minated.
17C AIRBRAKE SAFETY SWITCH Safety switch X

box
- It allows power supply line to electrically-operated 17-04
selector valve 15C to be opened and airbrakes to be opera¬
ted on ground.
- Provided with two positions («GROUND-FLIGHT»), it
can be locked in «GROUND» position.
65L LIGHTING DISTRIBUTOR Frame 10
See 08-2
18W FUSE-BREAKER Electro-center X
- Intended to protect circuit of warning light 16C.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^«^
$*«uw$
Vue suivant A
V7ew in direction of arrow A
FIGURE 1 - IMPLANTATION DES ORGANES

AG EQUIPMENT LAYOUT
06-78 5-104
Restricted
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
(Figure 2)
The hydraulic power required for operating airbrakes is supplied from ancillary sub-system of
system 1 (See 07). System 1 permanently supplies electrically-operated selector valve 15C which
depending on which one of its two solenoids is energized, provides the necessary interconnections either
to supply hydraulic pressure to jacks 1 and 2 or to connect such jacks to reservoir return system,
depending on whether airbrakes are to be extended or retracted :
- Energization of solenoid 1 causes airbrakes to be extended.

- Energization of solenoid 2 causes airbrakes to be retracted.
When control switch is set to neutral (airbrakes retracted and locked), electrically-operated
selector valve 1 5C causes hydraulic supply to jacks to be shut off and both chambers of each jack to be
connected to reservoir return system. '
Jack cylinders are hinged to aircraft structure whereas jack rods are directly connected to
airbrakes.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted AAANUAL 04
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
(Figure 2)
The airbrake electrical circuit is supplied from DC system 1
There are two circuits :
1 - CONTROL CIRCUIT
Protected through fuse breaker 10C, this circuit is used to energize electrically -operated selector
valve 15C as required.
Control is achieved through toggle switch 11C mounted on throttle lever and connected to relay
12C. Airbrake extension is controlled as long as toggle switch is acted upon by the pilot. Toggle switch
can be locked in «FULLY OUT» position.
«Extension» solenoid 1 is energized through relay 12C when the latter is energized.
«Retraction» solenoid 2 is energized through relay 12C (de-energized) and microswitches

associated with units 13C and 14C, airbrakes unlocked.
Under fuselage bomb jettisoning is prevented by a second stage of relay 12C as soon as airbrake
extension is controlled (relay energized). Prevention lasts until complete airbrake retraction through
microswitches of locking units 13C and 14C «not locked» and relay «de-enefgized» (see 15-3).
Safety on ground is achieved through safety switch 17C which cuts off control circuit power
supply.
2 - WARNING CIRCUIT
Warning is achieved through warning light 16C supplied from lighting control unit 29L, the latter
being protected by fuse breaker 18W. Return to ground is achieved through microswitches of unlocking
units 13C and 14C, airbrakes unlocked.
A test circuit is intended for testing operation of warning light 16C through grounding whatever
the configuration of airbrakes.
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ]LJ>^zrX
BREGUET AVIATION__ ^ _
MIRAGE F
OPERATION OF AIRBRAKES
(Figure 2)
1- AIRBRAKE EXTENSION
The pressure exerted by the pilot on control switch 11C causes energization of relay 12C which
closes the energization circuit to solenoid 1 of electrically-operated selector valve 15C.
- Hydraulic pressure is applied consequently :

-to unlocking units 13C and 14C, causing airbrakes to become unlocked. The microswitches
associated with such units are operated and cause warning light 16C to come on.
- to jacks 1 and 2, causing jack rods to extend and, consequently, airbrakes to be extended.
Maximum airbrake deflection is limited by an internal jack stop.
2- AIRBRAKE RETRACTION
With the airbrakes in extended configuration, retraction is controlled by either simply releasing
control switch 11C or by unlocking and then releasing it. Control switch 1 IC automatically cuts off
power supply to relay 12C which, in turn, opens the energization circuit to solenoid 1 and closes the
energization circuit to solenoid 2 through the microswitches associated with units 13C and 14C,
airbrakes unlocked.
The energization of solenoid 2 allows hydraulic pressure to be applied to jacks 1 and 2 to control
rod retraction.
When fully retracted, airbrakes are locked by means of units 13C and 14C, the microswitches
associated with such units are operated and cause the energization of solenoid 2 and warning light 16C
to be cut off.
Warning light then goes out, indicating that airbrakes are locked in retracted configuration.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MOD. 518 NOT INCORPORA TED
FIGURE 2 - FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF AIRBRAKES

AM
BREGUET AVIATION^,
MIRAGE F
AIRBRAKE JACKS
(Figure 3)
1 - GENERAL
Airbrake jacks are intended to actuate airbrakes in both directions (extension and retraction).
They are double-acting jacks not provided with mechanical locking. L/H and R/H jacks are
arranged in a symmetrical manner. Therefore, the only jack described and illustrated in the present
sheet is the L/H jack.ltre
Rod extension causes corresponding airbrake to be deflected.
An internal device is intended for fluid throttling so as to reduce rod retraction speed at the end of
airbrake retraction (travel limit, dash-pot system).
2- DESCRIPTION
An airbrake jack essentially consists of :
- Cylinder 1, blanked off at its ends by bottoms 2 and 3.

- R od 4 fitted with piston 5 which is secured against motion by stop 6.
- Dash-pot tube 7, containing valve 8 fitted with restrictor 9.
- Stop 1 0, fitted with guide screw 11.
The travel limit dash-pot system is made up of tube 7, valve 8, restrictor 9 and screw 1 1 .
Supply ports A and B, respectively provided with connector 12 or 13, are also fitted with filter 17.
Additional protection against water seepage is provided through application of sealant, especially
at nut 14.
Lever 15 is intended for driving in rotation the swivel part of connectors provided to connect the
pipes attached to structure to those attached to jacks.
3- OPERATION (Figure 4)
A Rod extension
Rod 4 is in retracted configuration.
Hydraulic pressure enters port B, passes through dash-pot tube 7, opens valve 8 and acts upon
section S1 of rod 4 assembly.
The jack ro d extends, therefore causing airbrakes to be extended. The fluid contained in chamber
«b» is expelled through port A.
Maximum travel is obtained when stop 6 comes into contact with bottom 3.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Détail C
Modification 513
non appliquée
Modification 513
not incorporated
Vue suivant F
View in direction of arrow F
FIGURE 3 - ENSEMBLE VERIN D'AEROFREIN

AB SPEEDBRA KE JA CK ASSEMBL Y
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL^^zZSis.
BREGUET AVIATION,.
MIRAGE F
B Rod retraction
Hydraulic pressure enters port A and acts upon section S2 of rod 4 assembly causing the latter to
move back.
At beginning of rod retraction, the fluid is expelled from chamber «a» through center port of
stop 10 and through port B.
At the end of rod retraction, dash-pot tube 7 enters the port provided in stop 10. The fluid
expelled from chamber «a» has to flow through restrictor 9, valve 8 being held against its seat by
expelled fluid pressure. The disp lacement speed of rod is then fairly reduced.
The rod continues to retract until corresponding airbrake is mechanically locked by unit 13C.
AA
BREGUET
\
AVIATION, ^-S&=
MIRAGE F
2e PHASE : FIN DE RENTREE DE TIGE

2nd PHASE : END OF ROD RETRACTION
le PHASE : RENTREE DE TIGE

1st PHASt : ROD RETRACTION
u#g
FIGURE 4 - SCHEMA DU VERIN
AB JACK DIAGRAM
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CONNECTION BLOCK
(Figure 2)
Connection block 5 is provided with six ports (A, B, C, D, E and F).
I Ports A and D are connected to electrically-operated selector valve 15C (pressure distributing
ports).
Ports B - E and C - F are connected to jacks 1 and 2 through swivel connectors 3 and 4.
Internal ducts are provided for interconnecting ports between them :

- Port A is interconnected with ports B and C
- Port D is interconnected with ports E and F.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL M
AIRBRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM - TROUBLE SHOOTING

(Figure 2)
WARNING
TAKE APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 02-0).
Aircraft electrical systems supplied at noijmal voltage value. Safety switch 1 7C set to
«FLIGHT». Actuate control switch 11C. If
Airbrakes extend. Warning light 16C With airbrakes retracted and locked,
Airbrakes do not extend Airbrakes do not retract
does not come on. warning light 16C remains on.
- Lock control switch 1 1C to «out» position. - Leave control switch 1 1C to «in» position. -Check contact tripping of unlocking unit mic
- Disconnect solenoid I movable connector from - Disconnect solenoid II movable connector from switches by manually actuating the lever.
Test warning light. If :
electrically-operated selector valve 15C and check electrically-operated selector valve 15C and check
movable connector output voltage at terminal E. If : movable connector output voltage at terminal C. If :
- No voltage : - Warning light comes on :

- No voltage : - Warning light does not
- Disconnect microswitch - Disconnect cable movable
- Check relay 12G and -Voltage present : - Voltage present : come on
movable connectors from connectors from unlocking
control switch 11C for -Check for continuity - Check Tor continuity - If bulb isnot defective,
unlocking units 13C and units 13C and 14C.
operation. across terminals E and F across terminals C and B failure is due to open
14C and check voltage at - Check voltage at terminal
- Check line for conti¬ of solenoid I . If : of solenoid II. If : circuit between warning
terminal of corresponding E of corresponding fixed
nuity. light and power supply.
fixed connectors. If : connectors. If :
1
- Continuity
- Replace defective issatisfactory - Open cir¬
component in solenoid 1,
failure is of
1
cuit in so¬
hydraulic ori¬ lenoid II.

gin.
- Continuity is satisfac¬ Replace electrically-

tory in solenoid I : -Open circuit in sole¬ operated selector valve
noid I. ISC.
failure is of hydraulic
origin.
- Voltage present :
- Voltage present :
- No voltage : - Check contact tripping of un- - No voltage :
locking unit microswitches by - Check for continuity
- Check relay 12C and across terminals E and F of - Check for line continuity
manually actuating the lever.
control switch 11C for - Check for continuity :
microswitches in «out» posi¬ between warning light and
operation. - in «out» position
tion. microswitch movable conne¬
- between terminals E and F
- Check for continuity ctor, especially in circuit
- Check line for conti¬ across terminal F of fixed
- between terminals B and C common section.
nuity. connector and ground.
- in «in» position
- between terminals E and D
- between terminals B and A
If tripping is not satis¬ - If continuity in micro-

Replace defective com¬ factory or continuity is -Replace unlocking unit, the microswitches of
Replace electrically-operated selector valve 15C. switches is doubtful, re¬
ponent. doubtful, replace unlock¬ which are doubtful.
place unlocking unit.
ing unit.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL=^-^ru MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^P3^-^^-^ n/l
»/i a M l l A I
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF AN AIRBRAKE JACK

(Figure 6)
A Special tools
- Tool kit F1-MO-A or canopy opening multiple tool
B Standard tools
- Set of extra- thin open-end wrenches
- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ftlb)
D Spares
- Seal for elbow coupling
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
-Petrolatum Air 3565
- Set safety switch to «GROUND» position.
- Manually open airbrakes (tool M31025) (see 02-0).
WARNING :
TÂKl THE APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0).
4- REMOVAL
NOTE : Following operations apply to both LH and RH jacks.
A Functional connections
(1) Disconnect both rigid pipes attached to structure and swivel coupling.
(2) Remove rigid pipe attached to swivel coupling and unlocking unit.
(3) Remove both rigid pipes attached to swivel coupling and jack ; for jack «rod retraction» pipe,
remove elbow coupling from jack body.
(4) Blank off pipe and swivel coupling ports.
B Mechanical connections
(1) Jack-to-airbrake panel connection

- Unsafety and unscrew nut 53 (17 mm A/F wrench). Recover washer.
- Remove lockplate 45 from pin head.

- recover laminated shim 46.
- Drive out pin, taking care not to damage lubrication fitting on pin head.

-there is no lubrication fitting on pin head.
AB
BREGUET
V^^zT\^
AVIATION^5P=<«<^>
MIRAGE F
^2-2=^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
(2) Jack-to-structure connection

(a) Unscrew hinge pin retaining nut (27 mm A/F wrench) and recover lockwasher.
(b) Hold jack and drive out hinge pin fitted with swivelling coupling.
(c) Clear jack and recover teflon washer.
(d) Check pin (47) state of sliding bush (48) and the bore of force-fitted bush (49) (see figure 6).
In case of strong corrosion which cannot be eliminated by sanding with fine abrasive cloth, install
new pin and sliding bush and replace the force-fitted bush.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
(1 ) In case a spare airbrake jack is to be installed :

(a) Depreserve jack (see 05-1 ).
(b) Remove elbow coupling on jack rod side and fit it to corresponding pipe (do not tighten).
(c) Adjust the pin end fitting to the dimensions noted on the jack that has been removed (see 05-1 ).
(2) Check that each hinge is perfectly clean.
(3) Coat each hinge with a slight coat of petrolatum.
(1) Jack-to-structure connection

(a) Position jack body swivel end-fitting in structural fitting after teflon washer is correctly positioned
on force-fitted bush flange inside structural fitting.
Position and engage the following simultaneously : hinge pin fitted with swivelling coupling in
structural fitting and swivelling coupling control lever on hinged pawl attached to jack.
(b) Install the following on hinge pin :
- lockwasher, being careful to position it correctly in its housing provided in fitting,
- retaining nut (tighten) (27 mm A/F wrench). Tightening torque 10 ± 2 mdaN (73.5 ± 14.7 ft.lb).
(2) Jack-to-airbrake panel connection

(a) Perform jack adjustment (see 04-5 : adjustment of airbrake).
(b) Check teflon washer (54) located in airbrake panel fitting for condition and position jack sliding
rod swivel end-fitting in airbrake panel fitting. Install connecting pin.
(c) Position the pin head correctly and fix the lockplate (45).

fix the lock plate (45) with its laminated shim (46),
-
- check that the play S between the pin head face and the lock plate is < 0.2 mm (0.0078 in).
If not, re-assemble the lock plate with a new laminated shim adjusted to compensate the excess play.
(d) Install retaining nut fitted with its washer (17 mm A/F wrench) ; tightening torque : 10 ±2 mdaN
(73.5 ±14.7 ft.lb).
(e) Lockwire retaining nut.
C Functional connections
Connect all pipes, after making sure that nipples and seats are perfectly clean. Replace elbow
coupling seal. Make sure that filter is positioned in coupling recess bottom.
6- FINAL STEPS
A Adjust the airbrakes (see 04-5).
B Protect the threads of the adjustable end-fitting with PR sealant.
C Bleed and top up (if required) hydraulic reservoirs (see 07-1).

D Perform airbrake functional test (see 04-5).
E During the tests, make sure there are no leaks at the various couplings involved.
AB
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF UNLOCKING UNIT
A Special tools
- Multiple wrench M31 -025.
B Standard tools
- Set of extra-thin fork wrenches.
C Spares
- 1 locking pin HQAA015020TL.

| - 2 preformed packings BT 8-6.
2- MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Grease AIR 4217
- Set airbrake safety switch to «GROUND».

- Manually open airbrake concerned (see 02-0).
, CAUTION DANGER :
| TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0).
Open door 21 -04 or 21 -08.

In each link recovery box, remove airbrake unlocking unit protective cover.
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect electrical cabling connector from unit and stow electrical cable fitted with its grom-
met in link recovery box.
(2) Disconnect rigid pipe from unlocking unit and blank off uncovered ports.
Ok Hi
AA
BREGUET
ti^^z^X
AVIATION^fiT _ _
MIRAGE F
(1) On unlocking unit :
(a) Remove locking roller, proceeding as follows :
- Remove locking pin and nut and recover washer (10 mm A/F wrench).
- Drive pin out (note its position) and recover locking roller.
(b) Remove hydraulic supply connector, proceeding as follows :

- Unlock (lockwire) and remove hydraulic supply connector accommodating rigid pipe (15 mm
A/F wrench).
- Remove plug located on opposite side of connector (15 mm A/F wrench).
(2) On structural fitting
Mark the fairlead positions with two pencil lines at 90°.

-
Remove both bolts attaching unlocking unit to structural fitting and recover fairleads (10 and
-
13 mm A/F wrenches).
C Remove unlocking unit from link recovery box and fit it back with its hydraulic supply connector
and locking roller.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
Clean structural fitting.

-
In the casewherea spare unlocking unit is to be installed, remove the hydraulic supply connector,
-
the plug and the locking roller from the latter and fit its electrical cable with grommet taken from
removed unit.
-Grease lightly unlocking unit mechanical parts (spring, cup and piston rod).
(1) On structural fitting
Position unlocking unit in link recovery box and fit it into structural fitting.
-
Position fairleads on either side of structural fitting and install both attaching bolts and washers.
-
- Wedge the box following the marks taken before dis-assembling the fairleads. Tighten the nuts
on the attachment bolts (10 and 13 mm A/F wrenches).
(2) On unlocking unit
(a) Reinstall locking roller, engage the pin taking care of its position and lock roller pin nut with a
new locking pin (10 mm A/F wrench).
(b) Reinstall hydraulic supply connector and plug, each of these parts being with new packing
(15 mm A/F wrench).
(1) Install unlocking unit electrical cable in airbrake structural box and connect its electrical
connector, install cable grommet.
(2) Connect hydraulic pipe.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL=J>-^r\L
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3, _
MIRAGE
.... .. .
F
6- FINAL STEPS
A Perform unlocking unit adjustment (see 04-5 : adjustment of airbrakes).
B Bleed hydraulic system (see 07-1 ).
C - Perform airbrake functional test (see 04-5). During testing, check all connections having been
subjected to any action, for leakage.
D Lock the supply connection with lockwire.
E Reinstall unlocking unit protective cover.
F Close door and airbrakes.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^îrU
BREGUET AVIATION .<33~=^-<^>
MIRAGE F
^Cè^^Z^ Restricted MANUAL 04
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AIRBRAKE JACK SWIVELLING COUPLING
A Special tools
- Tool kit F 1 -MO-A or canopy opening multiple tool.
B Standard tools
-Set of extra-thin fork wrenches

-Electrical power supply.
D Spares
- Seal for jack elbow coupling
2- MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Petrolatum AIR 3565.
-Set safety switch to «GROUND» position.
- Manually open airbrakes (M 31025) (See 02-0).
WARNING DANGER :
TAKE THE APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (See 02-0).
4- REMOVAL
NOTE : Following operations apply to both L/H and R/H jacks.
(1 ) Disconnect both rigid pipes attached to structure and swivelling coupling.
(2) Remove rigid pipe attached to swivelling coupling and unlocking unit.
(3) Remove both rigid pipes attached to swivelling coupling and jack. (For «rod retraction» pipe,
remove elbow coupling from jack body).
(4) Blank off pipe and swivelling coupling ports.
B Mechanical connection
Unlock (lockwire) and unscrew hinge pin-to-swivelling coupling attaching nut. Separate these two
parts (38 mm A/F wrench).
NOTE : The attaching nut is screwed onto elbow coupling body.
AB
BREGUET
IL^^ZX^
AVIATION^sSF0-^^
MIRAGE F
^C**^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
5- INSTALLATION
A Mechanical connection
Couple hinge pin to swivel couplinq. Screw, tighten and lockwire attaching nut (38 mm A/F
wrench - Tightening torque : 4.5 ± 0.5 m.daN (33.2 ± 3.6 ft.lb)).
B Functional connections
Connect all pipes, after making sure that nipples and seats are perfectly clean. Replace elbow
-
coupling seal. Make sure that filter is positioned in coupling recess bottom.
6- FINAL STEPS
A Bleed and top up (if required) hydraulic reservoirs (See 07-1 ).
B Perform airbrake functional test (See 04-5).
C During the tests, make sure there are no leaks at the various couplings involved.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION,
jL^^TaI MIRAGE F
DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AIRBRAKE JACK FOR SEAL REPLACEMENT
(Figure 5)
A Special tools
- Tool kit F1-AH-D
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit : 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb).

- Drain pan.
D- Spares
-Seals
- 1 lockplate (adjustable end-fitting nut)
- 1 lockring 7000-0130 A 100 T
- 1 lockring 7000-01 1 0 A 1 00 T
- 1 locking pin 23310 AA 020020 L
- 2 filters (supply ports)
- 1 restrictor (dash-pot system).
- 1 set screw (stop)
2- MATERIALS
- Microfiltered hydraulic fluid AIR 3520

- White spirit
- Solvent D1 PYROLAC 1591
- MASTINOX compound 6856H
-Sealant PR 1321 A2
- Sealant PR 1422 B2
-Grease AIR 4215
- Dry compressed air source
- Copper sulfate
A Place a drain pan and clean rags close to work area.
B Remove all lockwires.
C Remove sealant from areas marked M, using a spatula and taking care not to damage the surface
protection.
D Remove storage plugs.
E Grip jack in a vice fitted with false jaws C47182.
NOTE : In the case where several jacks are to be overhauled, disassemble each jack one after another
so asto prevent mingling of parts.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT £^>'i-HQ
BREGUET AVIATION^jSF^ --KÔ
MIRAGE F
^^^^> Restricted MANUAL 04
CAUTION :
DURING FOLLOWING OPERATIONS, BE CAREFUL TO HANDLE AND PROTECT
FOLLOWING PARTS AS SUCH PARTS ARE PROVIDED WITH RILSAN-COATED AREAS
VERY SENSITIVE TO IMPACTS AND SCRATCHES :
- PISTON 5 (outer diameter)
- PACKING RETAINER 3 (inner diameter).
4- DISASSEMBLY
A Remove connectors 12 and 13, proceeding as follows :
(1 ) Remove both screws 1 6 attaching each connector and recover washers.
(2) Remove connectors.
(3) Remove filter 1 7 from each connector housing (a magnet can be used to facilitate the operation).
B Remove adjustable end-fitting 18, proceeding as follows :
(1 ) Extend jack sliding rod by about 10 cm (4 in) by pulling on end-fitting.
(2) Remove lockplate from nut 19.
(3) Hold end-fitting in a vice fitted with soft jaws and unscrew nut 19 (wrench A21978) until
lockplate 20 and key 21 can be removed.
(4) Remove end-fitting 18 and scrap lockplate 20. r

C Remove bottom 2, proceeding as follows :
(1) Hold jack in a vice (dummy jaws C471 82) unscrew nut 14 (wrench A21978 - adaptor C46473)
and slide it away on cylinder 1 . . _ ,._ K
- Recover two-part ring 23 and key 24. 7 ~. '. 77 -<-
(2) Remove bottom 2 and extract support 10 from the (atter (extractor D46416).
(3) Remove nut 14
D Remove sliding rod 4 assembly., proceeding as follows :
(1 ) Remove threaded ring 22 (wrench A21 978 - adaptor C46473).
(2) Carefully pull sliding rod assembly fully out so as to remove it from cylinder 1 .
- Remove packing retainer 3 from sliding rod.
E Disassembly sliding rod 4 assembly, proceeding as follows :
(1 ) Remove dash-pot tube 7 assembly, proceeding as follows :
(a) Drive out locking pin 26
(b) Grip sliding rod in a vice fitted with false jaws C471 83.
(c) Unscrew nut 27 (adaptor C471 84).
(d) Remove spacer 28 and dash-pot tube 7 assembly together by pulling on dash-pot tube. Separate
these two parts. a. :
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT )LJ>~ltr\L
BREGUET AVIATION^__
MIRAGE F
(2) Disassemble dash-pot tube 7 assembly
(a) Successively remove the following :

- Lockring 29
- Stop 30
-Spring 31
- Valve 8 assembly.
(b) Successively remove the following from valve 8 assembly :

-Lockring32 r,.lES z
-Washer 33
- Restrictor 9.
(3) Remove piston 5, proceeding as follows :
(a) Remove setscrew 34 and discard it.

. , _ p .
(b) Unscrew stop 6 (42 mm A/F wrench). "!C ' 2~
(c) Remove sliding rod from vice and remove stop 6 and piston 5 from rod.
5- CLEANING /., rru,
A Before cleaning parts, remove all seals from the latter, using the curved end of spatulas 89901
and A46524 to remove them from their grooves (use spatula A46524 only to remove seals from piston
5 and packing retainer 3). Systematically discard all rubber or teflon seals.
B Clean all parts with white spirit and dry them with dry compressed air.
;,j- -/'--n-.? 7.ci ;
C Clean parts smeared with MASTINOX compound (threads) using PYROLAC solvent :
- threads of nut 14 and threaded ring 22, of screws 16 ana" end-fitting 18 of cylinder 1, of bottom
2 and rod 4 (adjustable end side), .,.,,,> _.», ;..,,? ^-,- o r ;-- /c ; '
- mating faces of connector 12 with cylinder T, and connector 13 with bottom 2,

- key 24 and two-part ring 23, n 7' '
- the outer diameter of packing retainer 3 flange.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO LET SOLVENT DRIP INTO THE CYLINDER. ~ ]
. ... .-.-\_-,- J ".OiTir ... ' .. - . j.-'- i'J"':>'V,. - . ..
6- INSPECTION
A Check outer surface of cylinder 1 for absence of impacts.
B Carefully inspect seal grooves.
C Check a II parts for absence of oxidation.
D Check threads for condition (peening or tearing away).
E Check moving or fixed sealing parts for absence of seizing or scratching (circular or longitudinal^
scratches).
F Check chromium-plating of sliding rod 4 for absence of flaking, pitting or scratching. Pass a ragtJ
soaked with copper sulfate over doubtful areas (perfectly clean and dry areas). Flaked areas will appear
coloured in red.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jU^zTZX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION .^SÎF*-'.-^*--^
^5^=-^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
G On parts whose outer surface (piston 5) or inner surface (packing retainer 3) is coated with rilsan,
check this surface for absence of impacts or scratches.
NOTE : If the above inspection proves unsatisfactory, send the jack to next higher repair line.
7- PRE-ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS -'
A Fit seals to the parts concerned as assembly proceeds. For fitting teflon seals, use the following
tools (items marked with an asterisk may be oversize - see 05-0) :
(1) Seal 25 (packing retainer 3) :
- shaping cone SI 6-0605-0900.
(2) Seal 35 (piston 5)* :
- mounting cone S 16-0607-1 351*,
- shaping bush S 16-0606- 1350*.
NOTE : See manual 05-0 for precautionary measures to be taken when fitting seals and assembling
parts.
B Lightly coat the parts markedG with grease 4215 : .,

the bore of rod 4 (adjustable end side), except the tapping,
-
-the bore of end-fitting 18, 7,i.v-
- the outer diameter 3 between thé seal groove and the flange ; caution : the seals must be kept
clean. ; * no:?.!
8- ASSEMBLY , oci o b
A Fitting-out of sliding rod 4

(1) Installation of piston 5
(a) Successively install the following on the sliding red r ",;,=
- piston 5 properly positioned (see figure),
-stop 6. '-..Oi/'inj-v--.4, diiw Z. motto -J b :. " ." iu^ " -
(b) Grip the sliding rod in a vice fitted with dummy jaws C471 83.
(cit: Screw and tighten stop 6 (42»ut»nri A/F -wrench) rj for-5 'reference, the tightening torque is
5 + 05m.daN (36.8^.68 ft.lb).
NOTE : Tightening of the stop may cause the threaded hole receiving setscrew 34 to fall out of
alignment with the setscrew recess orr sliding rod 4. In this case, counterdrill as shown in
detail A of the figure (drilling depth of 4 mm (0.157 in)) using a 2.5 mm drill at a 90° angle.
Make sure that the new recess is drilled at 5 mm (0.19 in) minimum from the original recess
on the rod. If not, remove the stop to drill a new tapped hole (M4 x 0.7) at 1 1 mm (0.43 in)
from the bearing surface of the opposite flat.
(d) Position, screw and tighten a new setscrew 34. Safety with a riveting hammer.
(2) Fitting-out of dashpot tube 7
(a> Successively install the following in valve 8 :
- new restrictor 9, ,T:,.f,
- washer 33,
new lock ring 32.
(b) Successively install the following in dashpot tube 7 :

- valve 8 assembly, -"
-spring 31, ?:r
- stop 30, properly positioned (see figure),
- new lock ring 29. e-c " JBj
AB
MIRAGE F
BREQUET AVIATION^4-~
^<^ ^3=-=.^
^-o ^ - ^ ,
Restricted hjamiiai/ivi
MANUAL 04
(3) Install dash-pot tube 7 assembly, proceeding as follows:

(a) Successively insert the following fully in bore of sliding rod 4:
-dash-pot tube 7 __
-spacer 28.
(b) Position, screw and tighten nut 27 (adaptor C47184). Torque to 6 i 0,5 m.daN
(44.2 ± 3.6 ft.lb).
(c) Install new locking pin 26, directing pin head towards nut 27. ^
MAKE SURE THAT LOCKING PIN HEAD DOES NOT PROTRUDE FROM INNER DIAMETER
SURFACE OF NUT 27.
(4) Screw guide cone C471 85 on the sliding rod.
(5) Lightly coat the outer diameter of packing retainer 3 flange with Mastinox.
(6) Lightly coat the guide cone and the sliding rod with hydraulic fluid.
(7) Fit packing retainer 3 on sliding rod 4 with care.
(8) Remove the guide cone.
B - Install sliding rod 4 assembly, proceeding as follows:
(1 ) Grip cylinder 1 in a vice fitted with false jayys C47182!'XnZ.
(2) Lightly coat the bore of cylinder 1 with hydraulic fluid,

(3) Insert sliding rod end fitted with piston 5 and then packing retainer 3 in cylinder 1 with
care (on threaded side).
(4) Coat threads of cylinder 1 and threaded ring 22 with MASTINOX compound and then
screw and tighten threaded ring. Torque to 12 ± 2,5 m.daN (88.5 ± 18.4 ft.lb)
(wrench A21 978 - adaptor C46473) .
C - Install bottom 2, proceeding as follows: r
(1) Install support 10 in bottom 2 making jsu^tbat, support is perfectly seated against bot-:;
torn. " I9-IUDÏÎ 3S2)
.
. '-.. ': v;i=OC
'
7 ...
" r-frrp. .
(2) Coat threads and groove of nut 14 and bottom 2 with MASTINOX compound.
(3) Fit nut 14 on cylinder 1. "' ^0c =; v Tf-uL , ,v 09t:-t ?oiv s ni br i r . 7 , .3
(4) Fill recessed section of cylinder A marked- "G" on ïfigureând covered by bottom 2 with"-1
grease AIR 4215. ,,d;.ci c. ù ; ,J: ;"
(5) Assemble bottom 2 to cylinder 1, being careful to position keying slots opposite each
other.
(6) Install key 24 and two-part ring 23, after coating them with MASTINOX. Hold bottom 2
and screw and tighten nut 14. Torque" "to 28 ± 5.6 m.daN (206.4 ± 40.4 ft.lb) (wrench
1 A21978 - adaptor C46473). n , \0> c,
ACTUATE SLIDING ROD 4 SEVERAL TIMES BY HAND TO MAKE SURE IT OPERATES

PROPERLY.
D - Installation of adjustable end-fitting 18. , g %,t . ,d.
(1 ) Coat adjustable end-fitting threads and rod 4 threads with Mastinox compound. ç,
(2) Fit new lockplate 20 on end-fitting (fitted with nut 19) and screw the latter into sliding
rod 4. Proceed so as to set jack to following theoretical dimension:
-center-to-center dimension (ball-joints) with rod retracted up to internal stop position:
530 ± 0.4 mm (20.866 ± 0.015 in).
NOTE: Rod travel is equal to 237 ± 1 mm (9.33 ± 0.039 in). ,vl|
Modification No. 51 3 not incorporated : 295 ± 1 mm (11.61 ± 0.039 in).
(3) Align keying slots
(4) Fit key 21 and bend tab of lockplate 20 into one notch of sliding rod 4.
AB
09-88 Restricted 5 - 405
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU^rrSL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATlONôP'^*^ .. . . . . . . n.
^££^^>
.
(5) Hold end-fitting, screw and tighten nut 19 moderately (wrench A21978 - adaptor C46473).
The torque is to be applied and the nut locked after adjustment of the jack on the aircraft.
E Install elbow couplings 12 and 13, proceeding as follows :
(1) Install a new filter 17 in both wells accommodating the couplings.
(2) Using Mastinox compound, coat the mating face of coupling 12 with cylinder 1, and coupling 13
with bottom 2. :1 -
. * t: '
c{3) Install couplings with a new seal being careful to position them properly.
(4) Attach each coupling by means of both screws 16, after coating their threads with Mastinox and
with each of these screws fitted with its washers. Lockwire both screws.
9- FINAL STEPS
/
A Perform airbrake tests (see 04-5). ^Z\ \i
B Check threaded ring 22 andcWùt 14 for correct tightening torque (see paragraphs 8.B. (3) and
C
- \ V^-7
Lockwire nut 14 and threaded ring 22, usin&Q&mm dia. wire.
'
NOTE :
%4 ; -\ \
Nut or threaded ring tightening may cau|e':'lo0king^shole to be no longer located opposite
__ corresponding hole provided on support. In that case, proceed as follows :
~rrzzzr~ - Nut 14 : drill nut with a new Î.5 mm (O..Q59 jrt\ dia-. hole opening into cylinder slot and
being tangent to slot side-face opposed to screwing direction,
- Threaded ring 22 : counterdrill.5to\1 .5/mm ^0^059 in) dia. dimension (hole opening into
' ,- Z\\" ' threaded ring inner diameter). c. YV
'"'' The new hole must not be tangent tcvthe-hble previously drilled in nut 14 or threaded ring 22.
D Protect th¥fbl)owlHèf areas with sealant (areas\markecL«M») : /

- annufar recesôfriût 14, and its junction with bottom 2; '
- junction between "threaded ring and cylinder 1, \ /\
- mating face between coupling 12 and cylinder 1, and between coupling 13 and bottom 2.
>* ' ' z z
E ^- Touch up paint protection, if required (see 05-0). "V
F Install jack in aircraft (see 04-5) or perform storage operations (see 05-1), as applicable.
s ^Vc,y,
«; V '-.:.-
v-^Z-
" "W.ZZ âDATi'OW^G -5 3RUDR

... > .JZZYZZt-î X&t&'Z'-Z' -.
AB
V U .' w
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Détail B
FIGURE 5 - DEMONTAGE-REMONTAGE D'UN VERIN D'AEROFREIN

DISASSEMBL Y-ASSEMBL Y OF AIRBRAKE JACK
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iLJ^zZV^
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^V^Ô
MIRAGE
mi i i r\A
»« a a
F
^^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04
INSPECTION AND SERVICING OF AIRBRAKES
A Special tools
Tool kit F1-M0A or canopy opening multiple tool M31025.
2- MATERIALS
-Oil Air 3512.

- White spirit.
WARNING :
- Set airbrake safety switch to «ground» position.

- Manually open the airbrakes (see 02-2).
- Remove doors 2 1 -04 and 2 1 -08.
- In each link recovery box, remove the protective cover from the airbrake unlocking unit.
4- INSPECTION
A On airbrakes
Check:
- condition of structural parts (cracks, impacts, distortion or corrosion),
- correct locking of attaching pins,
- condition and attachment of bonding braids,
- external condition of hinges (absence of play or seizing),
- condition and attachment of the stop,
condition of locking hook (absence of friction points).
| B - On airbrake jacks
Check :
- absenceof leaks,
- condition of electrical connectors and wiring,
- correct safetying of parts concerned,
- absence of friction traces, impacts, etc.,
- condition and attachment of rigid pipes,
- correct swiveling of unlocking unit roller,
- condition of sliding rod (absence of impacts or flaking of chromium plating),
- play of jack swivel end.
Mod. 547 not incorporated :

Check that clearance «S» between the head of the jack connecting pin on the airbrake and its lock
plate 45 is < 0.2 mm (0.0078 in). If not, remove the lock plate and reinstall it with a laminated shim
46 fitted to take up the excess clearance (see 04.5).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^ZZ^y^
BREGUET AVIATION^F^Ô»
MIRAGE
..,.... n.
F
^£^"^2^ Restricted MANUAL 04
C On unlocking units
Check :
- absence of leaks,
- condition of electrical connectors and wiring,
-correct safetying of parts concerned,
- absence of friction traces, impacts, etc.,
- condition and attachment of r igid pipes, ir , ^ .
- swiveling of the roller,

- condition of the spring (absence of corrosion),
- condition of the contactor lever (absence of corrosion or distortion) :
- check its freedom of travel and the correct working of its return system by maneuvering
the lever by hand ; - e 7' îoo. t°;
- absence of contact points between the rear attaching screws of the hook on the airbrake and the
base of the unlocking unit :
- if a point of contact is found, adjust the attaching screw concerned (see 03-2).
D On swivel couplings
Check :
- absence of leaks, '~ ^n s-~'d) ïzZ O'c^ :M N-'-

- the absence of friction
traces, impacts, etc.,
- condition and attachment of rigid pipes,
- attachment of the swivel coupling orr jacktfo-structoii© hinge pin and its correct safetying.
.-,_ ZZ -yi-z) ' -;"r;ou -
5- CLEANING-MAINTENANCE
A Cleaning
Clean the following :

- the hinges, using a dry rag or a clean brush or white spirit, if required, then dry with compressed
dry air,
- the structural boxes.
t«.c; "o -.*<. I-* .^nuê"-'; oi'_.co^":
- ^ns vievïîncrc' b;r .."'..'0;. o; "r-:-.:
^NEVÇR USE TRiWLCJrTOETHYLENE FOfl^ÔPEÂTIQN. V
.i!?.'M . Dr~. dZ,- V~'..l Cc
<"*-;" 'is'1 vr; 'i
B Maintenance
(1) Unlocking unit

-Oil the locking roller and i^Jj^sufe^ptaêsf/«e,ly, -.- ,;L;J- ,:_
- Coat the unlocking unit mechanical parts (spring, piston i^djcgp)- wj£h grease.
(2) Airbrake panel

- Oil the locking hook mechanism (hinge, spring and hook),
- Wipe the jack sïïdfiifffodà; using a^dr^'^HJcTean ràgT" "i; :^ sv ,
DO NOT USE GREASE OR OIL ON AIRBRAKE HINGES EQUIPPED WITH TEFLON-COATED

BALL JOINTS. : w^y. . w- ; «?.?-- Z->
"ev 3~t 7 -'O'lb.'-ic j: .;' r
Mod. 695 incorporated : <-;sn.v . ""... -" no.........
Grease the jack hinge pin on the airbrake. >'
6- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall unlocking unit protective covers.

- Close doors and airbrakes. v,-oM ieoiijDàiJ bn- ;,::. sibyf. i --'
AA
v* "!VA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl^^^Vk

BREGUET AVIATIONôP^^-Q*
b --.3 ,,. <
"""
MIRAGE F
^Z^-^^^ Restricted MANUAL 04 ,
FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF AIRBRAKES f
. w- !
I
- Hydraulic power unit
- 1 15/200 V - 400 Hz electrical power supply.
2- PRELIMINARY STEPS in-, ... .
A - Make sure that airbrake deflection ranges are clear ; in particular, access doors 19-05 and 19-07 ;
should be closed or removed. :ae or J -tît; de;» c::l: _) ^ca>-
' "y IC SiSO
B Connect hydraulic power supply to system^ 1> ,»,... ,,
C Connect electrical power supply and energize aircraft systems. nr- _ .-.
WARNING DANGER :
TAKE THE APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (See 02-0)
.rtô';:ç iCC.
D In cockpit, check that airbrake warning light. iSjOutwben. airbrakes are retracted.
E Set airbrake safety switch to flight position (see 02-0).
3 - FUNCTIONAL TESTS
NOTE : When the airbrakes are actuated, the airbrake system return pressures may provokes a slight
displacement of the stick (in roll). ph ncc .
' ;7-iqc .-. ' --j r**. i nESise ic cei \.v -^h; 307-
A Airbrake extension , V"sb
.asxed tsTujouua snt -
-Set airbrake control switch to «OUT» and progressively apply hydraulic pressure. Note on the
unit gauge at which pressure airbrake unlpçking-take6Tp|ac.e (warning light oryj.jSuehpa pressure^hou^d
be comprised between 30 and 55 bar (435 and 797 psi). "
- Proceed up to full airbrake extension. .ot;r.f^ __ a
B Airbrake retraction
-Set airbrake control switch to «IN» and checT? tha¥âVfclrâKéi locRFngi takes place forva-pf ensure
comprised between 10 anrJSS 6àHÏ4S:èFÏa'i362?psi) (Warning light out)/3-;T1 1" lu
C Time check -Jtznc ":)

.l^ccri brii pni-qi ,eD-;o' " :.:''»i: _. -jcZ^zx
- Extend and retract airbrakes normally and measure d^^^fgc^^^ :
- extension : less than 4 seconds,
- retraction : less than 4 seconds. ., 9 ?g-4
-.-. -3'; nP'V î-vilUO- c-3e>,: ' ~ .'. 7:';Af?=- * "
NOTE : 1 ) Above times should be measured as follows :
extension : between light illumination and the very moment of airbrake deflection stop,
retraction : between the very moment when control switch is released and the time
when light goes out.
2) Functional times are not much modified when MOD 513 is incorporated. The above-stated
limits are available in both cases (MOD INCORPORATED or NOT INCORPORATED).
3
4- FINAL STEPS
- Disconnect hydraulic and electrical power supplies.
AB &»ts,.-»ii?.v
BREGUET AVIATION^__
£^>-^VL
_ _
MIRAGE F
TESTS OF AN AIRBRAKE JACK AFTER SEAL REPLACEMENT
. (Figure 5) "bo

- Hydraulic power supply q -'; u, .
- Set of accessories for 2nd line hydraulic test bench.
2- MATERIALS ,. a >. ?;.;.?>i&fti :srii »'-
- Microfiltered hydraulic fluid AI R 3520
3- PRELIMINARY STEPS _>i A TE
I A Remove jack storage plugs. -y- .i-'-:j5i u5 A r;oq :tlm:
B Install jack on test bench and connect test bench pipes to jack ports A and B.
C Bleed jack correctly by slowly extending and retracting sliding rod several times. Upon bleeding
completion, continue to extend and retract sliding rod for about 10 minutes. Then, drop the pressure
and wipe the jack (and more especially its sliding rod) with a clean rag.
CAUTION :
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR AS THIS MIGHT CAUSE METAL PARTICLES TO ENTER
THE JACK.
4- STATIC TESTS
j A - Supply jack with a pressure comprised between 1 and 5 bar (14 and 72 psi) and maintain such a
pressure applied for 15 minutes. Check that leakage taking place at sliding rod outlet (if any) does not
exceed 3 drops during that lapse of time.
B Drop the pressure and wipe the jack.
5- DYNAMIC TESTS
A Supply jack with a pressure of 210 bar (3045 psi) and extend and retract sliding rod 15 times.
AB
03-85 Restr/ctecfc'? 5-504
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «S^Mi. Z" /Y\li\/-\V»7l_ \
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^ ResitimS ~ MANUAL 04
B - Then, extend and retract sliding rod 25 times and check that leakage does not exceed
3 drops. z ,-45£ R5"" ""'Al _.-
C - Complete above test in "rod retracted" configuration.
D - Drop the pressure.
5 - INTERNAL LEAK TESTS
NOTE: These tests must be performed with the hand pump. °" °
.:h' ';- : ; .mil bnl> -; .
-With port B connected to a graduated test tube, apply and hold 20 bar (290 psi) pres¬
sure through port A.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at B is < 1 drop/min. _ - '
the pressure.
- Drop
-Fully extend the rod. !b ,;/i occc
-With port A connected to a graduated test tube, apply and hold 20 bar (290 psi) pres¬
sure through port B.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at A is ^ 1 drop/min.
- Drop the pressure.
-Apply pressure through port A to retract the rod.
,-; :. ::r-u. r ?->., :OTi9d *ssi ivv;-"'-:c ' ""i rbnec
. - b
j 6 - FINAL STEPS boi onioiic; ?niT?si7.c. ,

« <S2 "
jijodb t.1* toi or-
;->*--;."!(. 7i '>$*< '.:>' ' '
A - Remove jack from test bench. c :: r|- v (bo - ~> - " '-'^ "'' DnF
B - Install storage plugs.

3?,L7 3 THOiwi 3IHT2A HIA d38?3R<W!00 H3i,' . OG
,>IOAlS :"
r3 - -
:*Z '' . ;6 M! isd S bns r neewîsd be. itqmo» snusasïq c r.: oud .-
i..riîbiiE *c ' '. oni>:t>î dyà^ss! .*';?- :'.0= " --
, ' 5f iCt - - 3Tuc23"-'~!
. ,7 ;sn; ; cjdc
. js( ar!: eciv "-.~ès= >~. :iiî-qv- "' - d
oss-nq s Hî?vc c;
Ci
AA
09-88 Restricted ? 5-505 °
BREGUET AVIATION
*&?$&&& MANUAL 04
ADJUSTMENT aft lAfcEB BAKES

(Figure 6)
cclj M/ÎL3
1-* EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ' O V C >i G C >'"
A -Special tools û; r<r*q protec-. :.,.-.

- Preparation tool kit (or multiple tool M310257:n > ~ rr^'--- >
... M\^ .«: ? .-.til1

r-Hydraulic test unit. t^
C Spares
-1 lockplate (foradjustablepckancfefitting nut). ~"
- 1 neoprene stop. q <<bseo!c
- 1 lockwasher (for control screw nut of microswitch on airbrake hook).
D^ Materials .o A .-.:.'.. .: *-: .<jKv rl?».'1: >j -.. - .- .-j-îie

- Pierlon BC 60. - nssc; av&ri es;;;liaiKoq :r.. .... Zû s.c
- Prussian blue.
e^:'-r i»» ::; ,0330=; <*'

- A/C must be «airbrakes open».

bio,
WARNING :
TAKESAL* APPLICABLE SAFETY M£ASURfiS-(8ee 01-0»."' -
-.Zt a\ nst---. - ..-.'q it -: ,'* saeicMp ?<;; -'i lûsssti

.- - acnib gn.n.
Connect: the hydraulic? tsstdi0ito;toirth0itwffg'8& straight couplings
located in the link recovery box :
- right airbrake, door 21 .04, pipes 7431 12 and 743132
-left airbrake, door 21.08, pipes 743111 and[7431 34-; blank off the couplings carefully.
-Uncouple airbrake jack (see 04-5). .»i'.i o -""-' ± 5Z\Z,ZX me c J9î? i fJ :
sn*TRetract tlranjaek rod a* farasvthei internal stcÛsii^lhè^êsfrenif , fer1n£"£ressure to 200 bar

;
(2900 psi), note the position of the rod in this state, let the pressure drop.
- Lock the jack at the bottom of the airbrake recess.
".'"' t. "'" 'c.-rn yri ,*>nt9frj^!V£ri Vf ! <s-|(i .-;; : : r'.Z l-~-:.
3- ADJUSTMENT
*':" D c\J:
A Deflection and routing play check
- Check that the airbrake has beeffadjusted (see 08-2).
Adjustment of unlocking unit T3C or 14C

B -** - :
iLJCî Or Z :oilî DH;. ' .;IS"iô09iq t; i. .:rn A;t.ir, eiU o:
. :'.>
(1) Raise the airbrake manually and check the hook passage clearance Irt^bnt of itrfe structure edge
beneath unlocking unit : 1 mm (0.039 in) min, and the free passage of the shim beneath the hook
support in front of the structural fitting of-the puBbêYStôp 43. ^-50 ..,~e -.-: ^
AB
09-85 *«*&&&¥* 5-506
BREGUET
L^ZZ^.
AVIATION^-^F3^^^^ , ^ a ^77^
^ & MIRAGE F
^2=^<^ ^»Kêèim%d ^ --- MANUAL 04
STORAGE PRESë^À^ff^Md^è^S^JA^^ OF CONNECTION
.: ïZf à -
1 - SCOPE
This sheet describes the steps to" be taken foi^jprcriecting connection blocks to obtain^ correct
preservation after a storage period of 24 months either in temperate continental climate or in tropical
or maritime climate. t-^-u -,.- - .. ,
Applicable procedures vary in accordance with the mode of transportation used. .,._... o
2- EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ' noiï-
- Protective plugs 3r^ __ -

- Non-metallic washers 7i_7' "" -
- Cardboard box
- Labels
-Kraft _, _..._. . .,_ ---'-'=.- --'
- Polyethylene - Thickness : 0,22 mm (OAS-itf^ -: ' ^-'^ ' :: *
- Heat-sealing cloth AIR 81 40 category 1121.
3- MATERIALS
- Methanol AI R 3650 ; '" ; "' Z" "' '
- Micro-crystalline wax
- Desiccant AIR 8060 . ;. , ->
..(no* *.3HOSAM> QtvcAwt \n93.-bc; '- u Jsd -
4- STORAGE - PRESERVATION TRANSPORTATION''^ ^?J s^dliB sr" n3qo Vi!euns
A- Procedure (See table) .t iq*><« ni r,e &~.: oo îî%h wewDfli p ---.nie sdr tsri* *MrO
.9--4sidT<5 bf.'- -"Ol0
5 - DEPRESERVATION , , ,. , . . . . .
»oe J-iD^033-9nî-fH 5%! vr.-.^:on! \tew-ie *«»rtr *^ «. -
..n.-j
Preserved connection blocks should be depreserved only at the moment they are to be used
( installation), choosing that which have been stored for the longest period of time. iA 3 . ,
Remove protective plugs and non-metallic washers.

Perform tests before installation in aircraft. ^vv* yistT6t
AB
10-73 Restricted 5-701r
BREGUET AVIATION
PROCEDURE
PRESERVATION PACKAGING STORING
û
T< <
o -
-'--"
Drain connection block after sealing

fper ft RE 00T method j
- Store unit in its packing.
DC
s tests performed with operating fluid. - As regards units having ex
j 00 - Blank off connectais ports. ceeded storage limit, check
o
-J
z<
Où
Place connection block in a sepa
rate polyethylene bag.
them for proper preserva
tion by performing a
< - Pump air out (using a vacuum pump) sampling check. The new
L-
z and heat seal polyethylene bag. storage period will depend
LU on results of sampling
Z ^ < check.
2 co
O !Z
O <
LU te
H 1-
<
fr
UJ
û_
2 z
UJ
H o
Z r-
LU 2<
" III
CD
<
^W
o*7 - :
^ Q. >
o Ui CQ
O Z
<
w tr
F-
Further instructions :
-Affix a label indicating
Uf that mehut pacMnnmimiws .
drâceant.
.5s 2<
OQ
r- 2
<!5
«ni
a
1 -J
LU
s oc
o£
a. **
t
oc
<
2:9
<%.
L_£C
oc
o
_l
<
o
a.
O
OC z
K O
2 H
LU
^w
Er
<
OC
O?
a.>
o CO OQ
h- z
to <
oc
I-
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^==
&%Yr)tted MANUAL 04
(2) Coat the roller with prussian bluègdésgatiëâi'rbtakë'raànually until it locks.

O-- "^
(3) Adjust the unlocking unit in alignment with the horizontal serrations of support plates 44 to
ensure correct position of hook 37 on roller 38, taking the prussian blue marks left on the hook as
a reference (the dimensions are given for reference) :
- between engagement point of hook 37 on roller 38 and the roller support 39 during locking- :
sequence (view in direction of A, dimension c = 1 mm (0.039 in) min),
-hook overlapping the roller against unlocking piston (dimension h = 2 mm (0.078 in) -min), fi
- clearance at hook bottom : (dimension j = 2 mfrii(0J078 in), min.),
- hook centering with respect to the roller (view in direction of A, dimension e = ± 2 mm
(0.078 in)), _ ;n c Znu,.Z' *
-between hook and roller support (view in direction of A, dimension f = 0.5 mm. (0.0T9 in)
min).
(4) Adjust the unlocking unit in alignment with the vert icdts&rîèra.ofci^ support plates, to simul¬
taneously ensure, in «airbrake closed» position : n^QGir; -
'-'' t z J 3^'- !.C
- -s .' rc-Turn to " ... ... jd iot; le^' ' " '-
(a) Contour variations :
- adjust so that the airbrake panel is flush with fuselage profile. A contour offset of 2 mm 7
(0.078 in) MAX is acceptable if all adjustment possibilities have been exhausted.
(b) Structure clearance :

check that when the airbrake is retracted, it remains at least
- 1 mm (0.039 in) clearance before
coming into contact with the fuselage structure.
C Adjustment of jack »nz
(1) Couple the jack to the airbrake (see 04-5), tighten the pin nut to its torque without locking.
(2) Supply the jack in airbrake opening.îrectlonîçrtOtiStQPv raise tbe'pressure to 200 bar (2900 psi).
(3) Check the opening dimension measured in the airbrake symmetry plane between its skin trailing
edge and the fuselage sldjft^heLaroj&gseejt^ dimension bri? S&7 ± 5 mm
(32.165 ±0.196 in). : xod v^\-zoe~ ïnZ zr\i rZ rvôci
ZZ " i " ' '' !'tM «jqio ->0 -Z too;:- î,vKt> rien -
Modification 513 not incorporated?; r; ^ïb r; 'Zi,* .Buis,. ->c c7'c7 ,'-'
- opening dimension b is 960 ± 5 mm (37.795 ± 0.196 in), ,(c-r>o $sai ;;,&; s*-o<;~:~ -qûjiU -
-check that there isâ >iftrarrr'C|earançei!i0.Oj^JnJrirBini betweemjfiaiairbrakeàânch.the structure
opposite the arms. .çoiL st uses' ': -yz ,?:-:: v.-Ar .":i be1 -..",: . cscmj;5o,; :- -'
: OlC'
,
.c-ssotr. 9/iCidiis.s'l: to (r-.^y-^c an? is *:,-: -.i .:jùJ -

-.;
(4) Check that RH and LH airbrakes are not asymmetrical by more than 5 mm (0.196 in).
NOTE : The adjustment of one airbrake thus depends on the dimension obtained on the other.
xD'jr.'^ ysiq rjniiuc '. Un£ naiir-an; j ;->
(5) Supply the jack in airbrake closing direction, $Rd raise the pressupeto 200 bar (2900 psi).
(6) Check that there is a clearance of 5 ± 2 mm (0.196 ± 0.079 in) before the internal jackstop 7?
with respect to the mark made during preparation and that there is no spurious contact between the
airbrake and jack or êquipment,. v v,, :i 5g; - *0 -- ,.,i xos- .:.-.- -i
c: :-.<-w sht îl.' ôRSssq :..v. sdJ bnr ..>im *ni SEO.û; ;:v nsd
(7) Adjust the jack rod end (see 05-0) .tgi pbtairidthEh airbrake opening dimensions and the jack
retracted rod clearance within tolerance.
AB
06-87 R^tfieted 5-507
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAULTJl^^TÎ
AVIATION^c^ __
MIRAGE F
Restricted > MANUAL 04
>! vïaefl
D Adjustment of rubberjtop.,
" ': >00---
(1) Supply the jack in the airbrake closing direction until locking -locking pressure should be :
20 .£,§ bar (290 ±72 psi) <
NOTE : If it is a new airbrake, or if the rubber stop has been replaced, carry out a series of operations
to compress the stop so-asrto pbeck the locking pressure. -....,
- if the pressure is too high, unstick the stop and adjust its seating until this pressure is obtained
after a few compressing operations, \ ^
- if the pressure is too low, position and adjust a new stop,
- glue the stop with-P-ierlon BC 60.
(2) Check the unlocking pressure. It should be 45 ± 10 bar (652.5 ± 145 psi).
NOTE -: ..TIE'S-, pressure is determiner! ^ thé equipment alone. In case of discrepancies, change the
unlocking unit.
E Adjustment Of microsjwitch unit stop screw $ ~ _- ^2

;QM : IS n.':li:
-The adjustment consists in actuatrnjôTiâct switches while keeping a 0.5 to 1 mm (0.019 to
0.039 in) clearance between microswitch unit .42 piste and stop on the unlocking unit on completion of
adjustment. ! pi-I^.-^c^vv. -.nwW-«-- *
- As access cannot be gained tofstoj3 "screw when the airbrake is closed, proceed as follows :
~\
SJ.\!* ^
__
,-Z? \ '' f
:~S-
(1) Disconnect electrical connector from"~nà^©s(witch:unit, remove the cabling with its grommet
in the link recovery bpxS^. ? i> ._'"JL *jyt !
'".!- ! .
Connect a warning light between pins B ancj Cïof the mobile connector.
I &
Zr ---. ( j :.-
(2) Operate blade 42 on the microswitch manually and using a set of shims, measure clearance G
(between microswitch unit levec^nd stop ; when Jthe warning light indicates contact switch-over, G
should be included between 1.9 and 2.3 mm lfr.0748 and 0.0906 in) ; otherwise, replace unlocking
unit.
(3) Tighten stop

until the contact switch-Ôvër
cr^^jmf^^^d,
sc'r^^T^^^^^l^|ir|c%Jf
/itch-Ôvër 'poïnt iSTOUiro (T/è
poïnt"'iSTOuiTtf turns' are recommended for th
(1/è turns
!
by iujxessive
the final setting
$uj:cessive tests^fâiT
testsé^Si^rt -half-turn ' adjustments
; pitch
I ' . c:
is 0.7 (0.0275 ini)).
.
- ., w -.
i '
(4) When on that very p©sit|on, unscrew stop, screW{41 toy 1.5 turns (i.e. 1 mm^Ô&39 in)),
- Install a new loci^wa^hèr 50 ; screw up, tfefrtSn^nd lock the locknut. v* ' J" '
NOTE : This adjustment allows a clearance^ G'jtd cf je, obtained between plate 42 and its stop on
unlocking unit such that GT = 0.9 to 1^3 rfTm (0.0354 to 0.0512 in).
(5) Disconnect the light unjt, reposition the cabling and its grommetând connect the microswitch
unit connector. ': -, --'-, >"- i^.u r - ..
yy _.. ., .. . .
(6) Disconnect the hydraulic test>trrrit and re-connect the jack sUppty pipesftq their appropriate
couplings. - . . .'-. // . '' _ '"""'/ . .
h-'.r, yy ' '

âO/r/f/
.fT-tU*-, . , (--
4- FINALSTEPS ^ '
- Lock and stop the jack articulation rod on the airbrake (see 04-5)7
- Lock the jack rod nut brake-nut (see 05-0). . ^ "
- Bleed the airbrake system (see 07-1). - c ^_ '.
- Test airbrake performance (see-04r5). '4?'£ ,.';--v^f .,^r
-\ -ta
09-86 Restricted iK 5-508

BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
JEUX-DU CROCHET
HOOK CLEARANCES
Lisse 14 Axe théorique .
Stringer crochet olive

Hook-roller
theoretical axis
37
:j|V.
J"JË .}' ïO i >c --
Position verrouillée Position d'attaque .

b j-'-.9ii;iJiup° Ii6ckedroosïiri>rrù v -AcWatipg position ZLL2£
VUE SUIVANTE ,>0oi '"
"I
.Aérofrein en .i. MOD. 547 NON
arte"'-"' ----. ^---
butée structure "; 3rt^!v'2 jAI*PL?âOEE J f ; "!3!
\irbrake in ~"J
Airbrakein ,J sru ''-
sr'3 i,;- --- Ynz
-:- 'Ti^'A -*k»7 NOT0
\'n~: '$fOD.-$47 ÂÎA-fS-v-;\
structural abutment , » INCORPORATED I
i 4 Tgm--46 !
I K\l r^\ 45 (
;C~!i -.30 S:
52 l
î I .Ji,-=l;
l-;,;,.-4b#iiP#&£, qçtç ".-

îtîne.'
VUE SUIVANT B,, , a ' >«silt - r -Jdl r

Wf IV //V DIRECTION ' , Z A0Kji ,-, ô] (pn
OF ARROW B
I
Z° --f.i.O ' t:':'"1Q hii..ieidOjS
In ïf eu J oi - 3£j.
sniico-ijc "Ci ir.i ;39nnoo2!'3

41 -,.
MOD. 518
APPLIQUEE
IfilCORPORATED
Vis de commande
du contacteur
Microswitch
actuating screw
FIGURE 6 - REGLAGE DES AEROFREINS
ADJUSTMENT OF AIRBRAKES
AB -
BREGUET
JL^bU
AVIATION^! _ _
MIRAGE F
hSfAVfe&d -----z:- MANUAL 04
a^^m^^rm'
1 - SCOPE
Individual check of unlocking units 13.Ç,and. ,14Ç for correct electrical operation.
:.. ,;' : .; .: ; -.ax/.Z ..7 _.c ^ .'- -
Special tools
- Aircraft preparation tool kit or tool M31025.
WARNING :
TAKE APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (sefljQJbQ)} rr.m CS,0 : ?:
7t* if.CZ'î J^1
4- PROCEDURE
NOTE : The operation should be carried out first on LH and then on RH airbrake;
r':~" c : "
v . - *
- Set the battery switch to «MARCHE» (on).
- Manually open the airbrake (see 02<})tfru'7H~au^s.A^jvT'TAy?%bZZ -
| - Check that the airbrake indicator light comes on in cockpit. U*crk-
- Close the airbrake.

çpr-A .
] - Check that airbrake indicator light in the cockpit goes out.

..-: hf><-:^.r> sc .s vin*> bsvisiaicsb >? t' ^te ï*3qM .-_ -,j--
i "'- -vj Ti^^rK>i stiJ "^ "--^'Ois -r^-f-'"1 yvBrt ru.- -iw :;... ï ,rn'ï'.
5- FINAL STEPS
... - ~';i,J?7«rr- ~ Z :.." «gL>'2 -WiJ^-C
- Set the battery switch to «ARRET» (off). ,ie v. n.eitc!'.sJ8n. .- -~c" -
AA
03-85 ftesfrfeted* 5-510
1F-F1K50AD-2-05
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MANUAL 05
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING SYSTEM
MIRAGE F1AD
AIRCRAFT
RE-ISSUE 1990
RESTRICTED
MAY 1990
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGFS

ORIGINAL ISSUE
A AD 05/90 0-125 AA 04/87 0-148 AC 03/88

B AD 05/90 0-126 AB 10/83 0-149 AA 03/88
C AD 05/90 0-127 AB 04/87 0-149M AA 03/88
D AD 05/90 0-128 AD 02/85 0-150 AA 11/81
E AD 05/90 0-129 AA 12/80 0-151 AA 11/81
F AD 05/90 0-130 AA 11/72 0-152 AA 10/75
G/H AD 05/90 0-131 AA 11/72 0-153 AA 04/81
I/II AC 10/74 0-132 AA 11/72 0-154 AA 04/81
III AC 07/75 0-133 AA 04/82
IV AC 11/75 0-134 AB 11/72 1- 1 AA 03/85
V/VI AD 01/77 0-135 AB 11/72 1- 2 AC 04/87
VII/VIII AJ 10/78 0-136 AA 11/81 1-001 AA 11/72
IX AC 06/74 0-137 AE 10/83 1-002 AD 07/83
X AC 06/74 0-137H AD 04/87 1-003 AA 04/82
XI AC 06/74 0-137R AA 04/87 1-004 AB 11/72
XII AC 06/74 0-138 AA 11/81 1-101 AB 11/72
XIII/XIV AC 06/74 0-138M AB 11/81 1-102 AE 02/85
XV AC 06/74 0-139 AA 11/81 1-103 AA 04/82
XVI AC 06/74 0-139M AB 11/81 1-104 AC 07/83
XVII AC 06/74 0-140 AD 04/81 1-105 AB 05/74
XVIII AC 06/74 0-140 AK 03/88 1-106 AB 11/72
XIX AC 06/74 0-141 AA 09/77 1-107 AA 12/75
XX AC 02/80 0-141 AD 03/88 1-108 AB 10/83
0-142 AF 03/88 1-109 AB 04/87
0- 1 AC 11/81 0-143 AB 03/88 1-110 AB 06/78
0- 2 AA 11/79 0-143 AG 03/88 1-111 AA 06/78
0-101 AC 10/74 0-144 AB 03/88 1-112 AB 06/78
0-108 AB 12/80 0-144 AG 03/88 1-113 AA 10/83
0-108M AA 03/88 0-1 44H AA 03/88 1-114 AB 03/88
0-109 AB 12/80 0-144H AC 03/88 1-115 AA 06/78
0-109M AA 12/80 0-144R AA 03/88 1-116 AB 11/72
0-110 AB 12/80 0-144R AC 03/88 1-117 AA 11/72
0-111 AC 12/80 0-145 AB 03/88 1-118 AB 03/88
0-112 AB 02/85 0-145 AF 03/88 1-119 AA 10/80
0-112M AA 09/85 0-145H AA 03/88 1-120 AB 10/80
0-113 AA 03/85 0-145H AC 03/88 1-121 AA 11/72
0-113M AA 04/87 0-145R AA 03/88 1-122 AB 04/87
0-114 AA 03/85 0-145R AC 03/88 1-123 AB 11/72
0-1 14M AA 03/85 0-146 AD 03/88 1-124 AA 05/74
0-115 AA 04/87 0-146 AG 03/88 1-125 AB 05/74
0-116 AA 05/74 0-146H AA 03/88 1-126 AA 11/72
0-117 AA 12/80 0-146H AC 03/88 1-127 AB 11/79
0-118 AB 02/75 0-146R AA 03/88 1-201 AA 05/74
0-119 AB 04/87 0-146R AC 03/88 1-301 AB 12/80
0-120 AB 02/75 0-147 AB 03/88 1-302 AB 06/78
0-121 AB 04/87 0-147 AH 03/88 1-303 AC 02/85
0-122 AB 09/77 0-147M AE 03/88 1-304 AB 03/85
0-123 AB 12/80 0-147M AF 02/89 1-305 AB 04/87
0-124 AB 04/87 0-147Q AA 03/88 1-305M AA 12/80
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
REGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

L/S7" OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq je les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
1-306 AB 10/88 1-503 AB 12/76 2-102 AA 11/72

1-307 AB 10/88 1-504 AB 12/76 2-103 AB 11/72
1-307M AA 04/81 1-505 AB 12/76 2-104 AA 11/73
1-308 AB 03/85 1-506 AB 12/80 2-105 AB 11/72
1-309 AB 03/85 1-507 AB 03/88 2-106 AA 11/73
1-310 AB 03/85 1-508 AB 03/85 2-107 AB 07/83
1-311 AB 03/88 1-509 AB 10/83 2-108 AA 11/72
1-312 AB 03/88 1-510 AB 02/89 2-109 AB 11/72
1-314 AB 03/85 1-511 AB 09/85 2-110 AA 11/72
1-315 AB 04/87 1-512 AB 09/85 2-111 AB 11/72
1-317 AC 03/85 1-513 AB 06/78 2-112 AA 09/77
1-318 AB 03/88 1-514 AB 09/85 2-113 AB 11/72
1-319 AB 03/88 1-515 AB 03/85 2-301 AB 09/85
1-325 AA 03/85 1-516 AB 02/89 2-302 AB 04/87
1-326 AA 04/87 1-517 AB 12/80 2-303 AA 03/85
1-327 AA 04/87 1-520 AA 11/81 2-304 AA 04/81
1-328 AA 03/85 1-521 AA 11/81 2-305 AA 04/87
1-329 AA 04/87 1-701 AA 11/73 2-401 AB 03/85
1-401 AB 03/88 1-702 AA 09/79 2-402 AA 03/85
1-402 AA 03/85 1-703 AB 10/83 2-403 AA 03/85
1-403 AA 03/88 1-704 AB 11/73 2-404 AB 03/88
1-404 AB 03/88 1-705 AB 11/73 2-405 AB 03/85
1-405 AB 03/88 1-706 AA 10/83 2-406 AB 03/85
1-406 AA 03/88 1-707 AB 04/81 2-406M AA 03/85
1-407 AB 03/88 1-708 AA 10/83 2-407 AB 03/85
1-408 AB 03/85 1-709 AB 11/73 2-408 AA 03/85
1-409 AA 02/75 1-710 AB 10/83 2-409 AB 03/85
1-410 AA 03/88 1-711 AB 11/73 2-410 AB 03/85
1-411 AA 10/83 1-712 AA 10/83 2-411 AB 03/85
1-412 AB 03/88 1-801 AA 04/81 2-501 AA 04/81
1-413 AB 03/88 1-802 AA 04/81 2-502 AB 10/83
1-414 AA 03/85 1-805 AA 04/87 2-503 AB 12/80
1-415 AB 03/85 1-806 AA 04/81 2-504 AB 03/88
1-416 AB 03/85 1-807 AA 04/81 2-505 AB 04/87
1-417 AA 03/88 1-808 AA 09/85 2-506 AB 12/76
1-418 AA 09/79 1-809 AA 04/81 2-507 AB 04/87
1-419 AB 03/88 1-810 AA 04/81 2-508 AC 04/87
1-420 AB 03/85 1-811 AA 03/85 2-508M AA 04/87
1-420M AA 03/85 1-812 AA 01/84 2-509 AB 02/89
1-421 AB 03/85 1-813 AA 04/87 2-510 AB 04/87
1-422 AB 12/80 1-814 AA 01/84 2-511 AB 04/87
1-423 AA 09/79 1-815 AA 04/87 2-512 AB 03/88
1-424 AB 03/85 1-816 AA 04/87 2-513 AB 03/88
1-425 AB 02/75 1-817 AA 04/87 2-514 AA 04/87
1-426 AA 09/85 1-818 AA 04/87 2-515 AA 02/89
1-427 AA 09/85
1-428 AA 10/83 2- 1 AA 10/83 3- 1 AA 03/88
1-501 AA 05/87 2-001 AA 11/72 3- 2 AA 03/88
1-502 AA 11/72 2-101 AB 11/73 3-001 AA 11/72
F1AD
05/90 Restricted B
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq ue les pages annulées par la présente mise a jour.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
3-002 AB 11/79 3-404 AB 03/85 3-808 AA 03/88

3-003 AA 11/72 3-405 AB 03/85
3-004 AB 11/72 3-406 AA 03/88 4- 1 AA 11/81
3-101 AB 11/72 3-407 AA 03/88 4-001 AA 11/72
3-102 AB 11/79 3-408 AB 03/85 4-101 AB 11/73
3-103 AA 12/75 3-409 AB 03/88 4-102 AA 11/72
3-104 AE 10/83 3-410 AB 03/88 4-103 AB 11/72
3-105 AA 05/74 3-411 AA 03/85 4-104 AA 12/76
3-105M AA 05/74 3-412 AB 03/85 4-105 AB 12/76
3-106 AB 11/72 3-413 AB 12/80 4-106 AA 12/76
3-107 AB 11/81 3-414 AB 09/79 4-107 AB 12/76
3-108 AB 05/74 3-415 AB 04/87 4-108 AA 11/72
3-109 AA 11/72 3-501 AB 03/85 4-109 AB 11/72
3-110 AA 05/74 3-502 AA 03/85 4-110 AB 11/72
3-111 AB 03/85 3-503 AB 03/85 4-111 AA 11/72
3-112 AB 11/79 3-504 AB 03/88 4-301 AA 03/85
3-113 AA 05/74 3-504M AA 03/88 4-302 AA 03/85
3-114 AB 03/88 3-505 AB 12/80 4-303 AA 03/88
3-115 AB 11/72 3-506 AB 03/88 4-304 AA 03/88
3-116 AA 05/74 3-507 AB 02/85 4-401 AB 03/85
3-117 AA 11/73 3-507H AA 02/85 4-402 AA 03/85
3-118 AB 06/78 3-507R AA 12/80 4-403 AA 03/85
3-119 AA 11/72 3-508 AB 12/80 4-404 AB 03/88
3-120 AB 11/72 3-508M AA 10/83 4-405 AB 03/88
3-121 AB 09/77 3-509 AB 02/89 4-406 AA 03/85
3-122 AA 04/81 3-510 AB 04/87 4-407 AB 03/85
3-123 AA 11/73 3-511 AB 06/79 4-501 AA 11/81
3-124 AB 04/81 3-512 AB 02/89 4-502 AA 11/73
3-301 AB 04/87 3-513 AB 04/87 4-503 AB 04/81
3-302 AB 10/87 3-514 AB 02/89 4-504 AB 03/88
3-303 AB 10/87 3-517 AA 11/81 4-505 AB 10/87
3-303M AA 10/87 3-518 AA 10/83 4-506 AA 10/87
3-303T AA 04/87 3-530 AA 02/89 4-507 AB 03/88
3-304 AB 12/80 3-531 AA 03/88 4-508 AB 03/88
3-305 AB 02/85 3-532 AA 02/89 4-509 AB 03/88
3-306 AB 12/80 3-533 AA 03/88 4-510 AB 03/88
3-307 AB 02/85 3-535 AA 03/88 4-510F AA 03/88
3-309 AB 02/80 3-601 AA 04/87 4-510M AA 03/88
3-310 AB 03/85 3-602 AA 02/89 4-510T AA 03/88
3-311 AB 04/87 3-603 AB 12/80 4-511 AB 03/88
3-312 AB 03/85 3-604 AB 09/79
3-313 AB 03/85 3-605 AB 09/79 5- 1 AA 10/83
3-315 AA 11/81 3-701 AA 12/80 5- 2 AA 02/89
3-316 AA 11/81 3-702 AB 10/83 5-001 AA 11/72
3-317 AA 11/81 3-801 AB 03/88 5-101 AB 11/72
3-318 AA 03/85 3-802 AB 03/88 5-102 AA 02/75
3-401 AB 03/85 3-805 AA 04/87 5-103 AB 11/72
3-402 AA 03/85 3-806 AA 04/87 5-104 AA 10/83
3-403 AB 03/88 3-807 AA 04/87 5-105 AB 11/87
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
REGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES lettre A indiq ue les pages annulées par la présente mise éi jour.
ORIGINAL ISSUE
5-106 AB 11/73 6-110 AC 07/83 6-513 AB 09/75

5-301 AB 10/88 6-111 AA 11/72 6-514 AB 03/88
5-302 AB 03/88 6-112 AA 05/74 6-515 AB 03/88
5-303 AB 04/81 6-113 AA 05/74 6-516 AA 10/83
5-304 AB 03/85 6-114 AA 05/74 6-517 AA 10/83
5-305 AB 03/88 6-115 AA 05/74 6-518 AA 03/85
5-306 AB 11/72 6-116 AA 05/74 6-701 AB 11/73
5-401 AB 03/85 6-117 AA 05/74 6-702 AA 10/83
5-402 AB 10/83 6-118 AC 05/87
5-403 AB 03/88 6-119 AC 12/76 7- 1 AA 11/87
5-404 AB 03/85 6-120 AA 12/76 7- 2 AA 09/85
5-405 AB 03/88 6-121 AA 11/72 7- 3 AA 12/76
5-405M AB 03/85 6-122 AA 06/78 7-001 AC 12/76
5-406 AB 11/87 6-123 AC 04/81 7-002 AC 10/80
5-407 AB 02/89 6-124 AA 04/82 7-003 AB 12/76
5-503 AA 03/85 6-125 AC 10/83 7-004 AA 11/72
5-504 AA 11/73 6-126 AB 11/73 7-101 AE 07/78
5-505 AB 04/87 6-201 AA 02/81 7-102 AB 09/75
5-506 AB 04/87 6-202 AA 04/81 7-103 AC 04/81
5-507 AA 02/89 6-203 AA 06/78 7-104 AB 11/81
5-508 AA 02/89 6-301 AB 11/87 7-105 AD 07/83
5-509 AA 02/89 6-302 AB 12/80 7-106 AJ 02/77
5-510 AA 02/89 6-303 AB 11/87 7-107 AB 09/77
5-510M AA 02/89 6-304 AA 09/79 7-108 AC 09/75
5-511 AA 02/89 6-305 AA 09/79 7-109 AB 09/75
5-512 AA 02/89 6-306 AB 03/85 7-110 AH 10/83
5-513 AA 02/89 6-307 AB 03/85 7-111 AC 12/75
5-514 AA 02/89 6-401 AB 03/85 7-112 AC 05/75
5-514M AA 02/89 6-402 AB 12/80 7-113 AC 04/81
5-701 AA 11/73 6-403 AB 03/88 7-114 AD 10/83
5-702 AA 10/83 6-407 AA 10/83 7-115 AC 07/75
5-703 AB 11/73 6-408 AA 10/83 7-116 AC 05/75
5-704 AA 10/83 6-409 AA 10/83 7-117 AD 03/85
5-801 AB 04/81 6-410 AA 03/85 7-118 AA 11/72
5-802 AA 04/81 6-501 AB 03/85 7-119 AB 11/72
5-803 AB 04/81 6-502 AB 03/88 7-120 AA 11/72
6-503 AB 12/80 7-121 AA 05/74
6- 1 AA 10/83 6-504 AB 03/85 7-122 AA 11/72
6- 2 AA 10/83 6-505 AC 03/85 7-123 AB 12/75
6-001 AA 02/75 6-506 AC 06/78 7-124 AB 03/79
6-101 AA 06/83 6-507 AC 10/83 7-125 AA 11/72
6-102 AA 06/83 6-508 AB 11/87 7-126 AA 12/76
6-103 AA 12/76 6-509 AC 05/87 7-127 AA 11/72
6-104 AC 05/87 6-510 AA 03/88 7-128 AB 09/77
6-105 AA 11/84 6-510M AA 03/88 7-129 AB 10/83
6-106 AC 05/87 6-510T AA 02/89 7-130 AA 09/77
6-107 AD 06/78 6-511 AC 05/87 7-131 AB 09/77
6-108 AA 11/72 6-512 AC 03/88 7-132 AB 11/73
6-109 AB 10/83 6-512M AA 05/87 7-201 AA 12/76
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

>
ORIGINAL ISSUE
7-202 AC 12/76 7-510M AB 09/79 8-103 AB 09/85

7-203 AA 12/76 7-510T AB 03/85 8-104 AC 10/74
7-204 AC 10/80 7-510U AB 02/89 8-105 AJ 12/80
7-205 AA 11/73 7-510V AA 12/76 8-106 AB 12/76
7-206 AA 09/79 7-510W AB 03/85 8-107 AD 01/79
7-301 AB 10/88 7-511 AB 11/81 8-108 AA 12/76
7-302 AB 10/88 7-512 AB 11/81 8-109 AA 12/76
7-304 AB 02/89 7-513 AC 12/80 8-110 AD 12/80
7-305 AB 09/79 7-514 AC 12/80 8-201 AA 06/75
7-306 AB 02/89 7-515 AC 04/81 8-202 AA 05/74
7-307 AB 11/87 7-516 AC 04/81 8-301 AB 10/88
7-308 AB 09/79 7-517 AC 04/81 8-302 AB 12/75
7-309 AB 05/74 7-518 AC 04/81 8-303 AA 10/88
7-310 AB 05/87 7-519 AC 12/80 8-304 AA 05/74
7-311 AB 03/85 7-520 AA 11/72 8-401 AB 12/80
7-312 AB 02/89 7-521 AC 04/81 8-402 AA 10/83
7-313 AB 10/88 7-522 AC 10/74 8-403 AA 09/79
7-314 AA 10/88 7-523 AC 12/80 8-404 AB 12/76
7-315 AA 03/85 7-524 AA 11/72 8-404M AB 09/79
7-316 AB 10/88 7-525 AC 04/81 8-501 AA 02/89
7-317 AB 02/75 7-526 AC 04/81 8-502 AB 02/80
7-318 AA 09/79 7-527 AC 04/81 8-503 AA 02/89
7-401 AB 02/89 7-528 AC 04/81 8-503M AB 02/89
7-402 AA 02/89' 7-529 AA 11/72 8-504 AA 02/89
7-403 AB 02/89 7-530 AC 04/81 8-505 AC 06/78
7-404 AB 04/86 7-531 AA 11/72 8-506 AB 11/73
7-405 AB 12/80 7-532 AC 04/81 8-507 AA 11/73
7-406 AB 03/85 7-533 AA 05/74 8-508 AA 10/75
7-407 AB 12/80 7-701 AB 12/80 8-509 AA 09/79
7-408 AA 12/80 7-702 AA 10/83 8-510 AB 12/76
7-409 AA 12/76 7-703 AB 10/83 8-511 AA 04/81
7-410 AB 12/76 7-704 AA 03/85 8-512 AA 04/81
7-414 AA 03/88 7-801 AB 11/87 8-601 AA 04/81
7-415 AA 02/89 7-802 AB 03/85 8-701 AB 12/80
7-416 AA 02/89 7-803 AB 09/79 8-702 AA 03/85
7-501 AA 12/80 7-804 AB 12/80
7-502 AB 02/89 7-805 AB 11/81 9- 1 AA 02/89
7-503 AA 02/89 7-806 AB 11/81 9-001 AC 02/75
7-504 AC 03/85 7-807 AA 03/85 9-101 AC 02/75
7-505 AD 03/85 7-808 AB 12/80 9-102 AB 11/72
7-506 AB 03/88 7-809 AB 03/85 9-103 AD 02/77
7-506H AB 02/89 7-810 AA 05/74 9-104 AA 02/75
7-506R AB 02/89 7-811 AA 03/85 9-105 AA 02/75
7-507 AB 03/88 7-812 AB 12/80 9-106 AC 02/75
7-508 AB 03/88 9-107 AC 03/85
7-508M AB 10/88 8- 1 AA 04/81 9-108 AC 07/83
7-509 AB 03/88 8-001 AA 11/72 9-109 AA 02/75
7-510 AB 12/80 8-101 AB 07/83 9-110 AA 02/75
7-510F ÀA 11/81 8-102 AB 10/83 9-111 AB 12/80
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
INDEX DES PAGES

ORIGINAL ISSUE
PAGE DATE PAGE DATE PAGE DATE
9-301 AC 02/89
9-501 AC 03/88
9-502 AB 03/88
9-503 AA 12/76
9-504 AA 10/83
9-505 AB 03/88
9-506 AB 03/88
9-506M AB 03/88
9-507 AC 02/89
9-508 AC 03/88
9-508M AB 03/88
9-510 AA 02/89
9-511 AA 02/89
9-512 AA 02/89
9-601 AA 03/85
F1AD
05/90 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DA$$AUlT£^>^rvL
IRICUIT AVIATION _
MIRAGE F

LIST OF AIRCRAFT MODIFICA TIONS WHICH HA VE RESUL TED
IN MANUAL UPDATING
definition
411 (FF.2) - 457 (FF.42) - 461 (FF.45) - 463 (FF.47) - 472 (FF.55) - 485 (BET 16)
519(FF.104)
Change 1 of April 1979 including following modifications :

454 (FF 91) 520 (FF 1 17) -552 (FF 120) 555 (FF 122) - 575 (FF 147) - 581 (FF 175)
609 (FF 177)
This change includes temporary revisions No 003, 004
Change 2 of May 1981 including following modifications :

466 (FF49) -627( J-643 (FF120) - 644 (FF196)
This change includes temporary revisions No 006, 007
Change 3 of April 1982 including following modifications :

696 (FF239) - 762 (FF272)
This change includes temporary revision No 008
modification :
1001 (FF355)
F1AD
05-90 Restricted G/H
BREGUET AVIATION
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION Page
PREAMBLE iii
1 MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS 1-1
2 MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS 2-1
3 NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 3-1
4 NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS 4-1
5 WHEELS AND TYRES 5-1
6 UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS CONTROL 6-1
7 BRAKES AND BRAKING SYSTEM 7-1
8 NOSE WHEEL STEERING/ANTI SHIMMY CONTROL 8-1
9 BRAKE CHUTE 9-1
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL^^z^L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ___ ^ _
Restricted
INTRODUCTION
- Servicing
- Trouble shooting
Removal-disassembly
-
-
instructions, etc.
Thus :
It summarizes :
It defines :
AC
07-75 Restricted »
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lL^>~aZ-\L
BREGUET AVIATION ^CZzP^7^ ^
MIRAGE F
Restricted
It gives :
- parking-mooring,
- ground handling,
- tyres,
- engine starting,
- run-up.
AC
1 1 -75 Restricted iv
.^7

- BREGUET AVIATION X
y v
ici Restricted
MIRAGE F
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
SUB Pilot
Servicing Flight Hydraulic
environment

and- safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety and safety
Maintenance
cycle
operations
points Lighting
2 torques section conditioning
handling controls doors and
I nspection (up to
doors external
frame 22)

and Failure
systems
Engine
List of various Pilot
Draining
Pre-flight
Removable Engine
components
inspections control

Transporta¬
6 for controls
tion
mission
Engine Brakes and

7 starting braking
system
Anti-shimmy
Run-up
8 and steering
Check Mights
controls
AD
AVIONS MARCEL OASSAUtI,
BREGUET AVIATION^, ».
\ ' Vi MIRAGE F
Restricted
MANUAL OR CHAPTER
SECT
OR 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
NWS radio NWS
SUB NWS NWS
CHAP control and operational Wiring
general communi¬ electronics armament recording
cation
navigation sy items
and AP
systems
General General General Genet al General GrMirr.V General General

0 information information information informal ion information information inlormation information
and safely and salety and salety and salety and safety and safety and safely and safety
Use of Iniiex of
testing and V/UHF Flight Armament
electrical
Pilot Gun
1 trouble system
control
panel
and
system system
Rocket
26 V 400 Ht UHF Air data Wiring Fatique
system

3 Gyro system
Close combat
VOR/ILS Air-tO-Air
5 IFF
marker missile
systems
Navigation Radar
6 system detector
Radar
Electronic
7 counter-
altimeter
measures
Reconnais¬
8 Radio
sance
compass
system
Towing
system
9
practice
targets
AJ
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJL -^-""^ 'VA I KMv L7 V
BREGUET AVIATION ^<-^ _
Restricted
A A title page identifying the publ ication.


No
0 - General
5 -Inspection-Check-Adjustment
6 -Cleaning-Corrosion preventive treatment-
Painting
7 - Storage-Preservation-Transportation
8 - Repair
NOTE:
AC
06-74 Restricted IX
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTÊî>'u^l /VAlKMVj'L. I
BREGUET AVIATION^^F^..^ #
Restricted

aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
an aircraft system.
from 0 to X.
:
separate documentation or, if applicable, in the documentation known as the incorporated
components.
AC
06-74 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// _^>~aZ^l
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_ _
MIRAGE F
_ Restricted
the operation.

B Fuselage doors
' example : fuselage door between F.29 and 30 in the middle part of the R/H side : door 29-03.
AC
06-74 Restricted xi
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' -J>-"11 /VAIKMOC t
BREGUET AVIATION^<25. _ ^
__ ^ Restricted
C Wing doors

the trailing edge.
-example : door located between ribs 1 and 2 on the upper surface within the centre wing box :
V138.

- wiring diagrams.
indicator lights.
made.
charts :
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS : GENERAL SYMBOLS ^\j> Fuse

v Single-pole
42R contactor
/~T Fuse-breaker
I- Coaxial connector
Terminal lug Box

1-wire lead
Double-pole
Three-pole
2-wire lead circuit-breaker
Connector
Double-pole
contactor
i i 2
Test connector
3 r
3-wire lead
X Single pole
control switch
on equipment
Spring-loaded,
both directions
2Z Single-pole X
pushbutton Double-pole
Independent "j* , n-wire lead
control switch
connector
Singles pole I Spring-loaded,

} Bus bars
Crossing without
Double-pole
contr ol switch / one direction
connection
pushbutton
Light or lamp
-<X>-
Crossing with & II a Magnetically-held
connection pushbutton
Relay
Press-to-test
Coaxial connector
e- light
Single-pole
double-throw
Antenna switch
Double-pole
Diode
lh DC ground
double-throw
switch
Time delay
relay
e
H- Pushbutton
light
*-<+ Zener diode
Double-pole
triple-throw Flashing
Resistor AC ground switch
0 "s relay
^- LU-
AC xiii/xiv
06-74 Restricted xiii/xiv
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT )
BREGUET AVIATION ^cp^
MIRAGE F
Restricted
ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS ;
a Chassis ground
CX 12 TX
NPN
cj Computing power ground r. L TR
Synchro- £T transistor
receiver s
P4
CTR
Terminal 6 of
test connector P4
Differential tdr PIMP
o synchro transistor
CDX
o transmitter
o n-position
o
o
selector switch
o Thyristor
o
TR
*** Resolver
RS
Triac
Relay LV
-È- H§H j/ Linvar
Magnetron
-8 Cam-actuator
contact
H I
Capacitor
Potentiometer Thyratron
Thermostat
Fuse
-ry~v- Thermistor
Initiator
^
*&* M ) Motor
Photo-electric cell
&- Comparator
Inductor
Amplifier
/// é Q ) Generator Transformer
Failure Electronic
detector unit
|yf q j Motor-generator -5<3~ Single TR
©Tachometer- Double TR
generator
AC
06-74 Restricted xv
BREGUET AVIATION
Restricted

Mechanical link
-© or
\
Cam
____ Mechanical clutch

OJ
_ __ Mechanical differential
® Non-return valve -CÙ- Level switch

(thermistor)
Pressure reducing valve Electrically-operated cock.

relief valve O Float switch
r Non-return flapper
m Pressure switch
EP = Electro-pump
S Fuel stop valve
P = Pump
® Stop air valve

(D
T~L Filler plug

system .
System No.2
systems
hydraulic systems
XXI Emergency system XEI J
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^S0
MIRAGE F
Restricted
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

dimension
&
AND
1
>1 OR
one or more input states are 1 "s .
1
NOT
3-
&
NAND (NOT-AND)
D-
a IIthe input states are 's . 1
>1
NOR (OR-NOT)
D-
one or more input states are Vs.
LOGIC EQUATIONS
Example : S = (A + B + C) (D + E)
or S = B and D or E
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]"
BREGUET AVIATION^£_
^^LLrVi
...,^
MIRAGE F
Restricted

- the Manual number in the top R/H corner.
( 1) The Section number


7- CROSS-REFERENCES
A - From text to text :

within a same section S

units.
dimensions, etc.).
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION. ^^
Restricted
B - Actual revision which permanently incorporates information in the publications. Such information
pages).
A Procedure

B Page numbering
of letters I, 0 and Z.
3rd insertion
Successive
2nd insertion
insertions
1st insertion
\ *
ABCDEFGHJKLMNPQRS U VWXY
L 4 i
2 pages
Simultaneous
insertions
3 pages
AC XIX
06-74 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L==^'i. Vk
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^^7^^
MIRAGE F
^Z^^^^^s. Restricted
Example :


AC
02-80 Restricted xx
BREGUET AVIATION ,^_
tLJ>-uZ\l MIRAGE F
SECTION 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
- Brief description of undercarriage 0-101

- Adjustment of jack rod ends (airbrakes included) 0-108
- Cleaning of undercarriage legs and doors 0-111
- Treatment of corrosion and partial restoration of paint on undercarriage legs,
wheels and jacks (airbrakes included) 0-112
- Precautions to be taken for long-term work on undercarriage legs and jacks
(airbrakes included) mounted on aircraft 0-115
- Precautions to be taken for spare jacks (with jack rods retracted) 0-117
- Pressure check and charging of shock absorbers 0-118
- Filling and fluid level adjustment of shock absorbers 0-121
- Lubrication and protection of undercarriage and door hinges 0-125
- Precautions for installing seals on Messier-Hispano equipment items 0-129
- Leakage tolerances on jacks in service use 0-136
- Checks of undercarriage after hard landing 0-137
- Check of undercarriage after bursting of both tires of one leg 0-138
- Check of undercarriage and doors after arrester barrier engagement 0-139
- Teleforce flexible controls 0-140
- Removal-installation of Teleforce flexible controls 0-144
- Maintenance and lubrication of Teleforce flexible controls 0-148
- Detailed inspection of Teleforce flexible controls 0-149
- Measures to be taken on aircraft after emergency undercarriage extension . 0-150
- Inspection of undercarriage and doors after illumination of «LIM» indicator light .... 0-151
- Check and renewal (if required) of safetying of sleeve nuts fitted to endpieces of
Teleforce flexible controls (mod. 696 not incorporated) 0-153
0-2 SAFETY MEASURES
- Safety measures to be taken for personnel protection see 01-0

- Instructions to be followed when working on systems see 01-0
- General instructions for starting and operating the various aircraft systems see 01-0
- Instructions for using ground support equipment see 01-0
AC
-^-"-^
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 /VAIKMOL I
BREGUET AVIATION^jl _^^ - _ .. . ... A rt_
. .
Figure No. Page
1 ADJUSTMENT OF JACK ROD ENDS 0-110

2 PRESSURE CHECK AND CHARGING OF SHOCK ABSORBERS 0-120
3 FILLING AND FLUID LEVEL ADJUSTMENT OF SHOCK ABSORBERS 0-124
4 LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE
AND DOOR HINGES 0-127
5 LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE
AND DOOR HINGES 0-128
6 INSTALLATION OF SEALS 0-134
7 INSTALLATION OF SEALS 0-135
8 LAYOUT OF TELEFORCE FLEXIBLE CONTROLS 0-142
9 DESCRIPTION OF A FLEXIBLE CONTROL 0-143
AA
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAUIT^^^T}!
AVIATIONêP^^Ô
MIRAGE
........ .,.
F
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE
The retractable aircraft undercarriage is of the tricycle type. It is composed of :

-two symmetrical main legs. Each of them is provided with two disc brakes and two
bogie-mounted wheels. The undercarriage is so designed that, despite of a total attachment to the
fuselage, it provides correct lateral stability and its dimensions are reduced in the retracted position.
- one nose leg, equipped with two bogie-mounted wheels. The wheels can be steered by means of
an electro-hydraulic control operated by the pilot.
The main characteristics are as follows :

- wheel track : 2,48 metres (8.13 ft)
- wheel base : 4,87 metres (15.97 ft)
- nose wheel steering control usable within ± 45°
- wheel deflection during towing : ± 45° (manoeuvrability possible with ± 360° deflection, and
torque links uncoupled).
The undercarriage is extended and retracted by an electro-hydraulic control. A hydraulic control

also permits extensionof the U/C legs in emergency mode. Each U/C leg is mechanically locked up and
down. Unlocking is hydraulically controlled.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^fToF^^
/L^^TU. MIRAGE F
ADJUSTMENT OF JACK ROD ENDS (AIRBRAKES INCLUDED)

(figure 1 )
1 - GENERAL
This sheet concerns the rod end adjustment of the following equipment (see figures) :
- main U/C telescopic rod (1 ),

- main U/C actuating jack (2),
- main U/C elastic rod (3),
- main U/C door jack (4),
- nose U/C truss jack (5),
- nose U/C door jack (6),
-airbrake jack (7).
NOTE : Adjustment of the U/C door unlocking jack rod end is dealt with in the «disassembly -
assembly» sheet of this equipment item.
A Special tools
- U/C hydraulics 1st line tool kit
B Standard tools

- Accessory kit for torque wrench, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
C Spares
- Lockplate for adjustable rod end nut.
D Materials
- Grease Air 4206

- White spirit
A In case the locknut safety is folded over, remove the rod end as follows to install a new lockwasher.
- Mark the position of key C and the screwing length «L» of end D in the sliding rod with pencil
lines (see detail 8).
Unsafety locknut 4.
-
Loosen the locknut using the appropriate tool (see table) while holding the end by its flats with
-
an open-end wrench.
- Unscrew the locknut to allow removal of lockwasher B and the key.
- Remove the rod end and discard the lockwasher.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
NOTE: On the elastic rod, make sure friction ring E is in good condition.
-Clean the screw threads on the rod end and on the rod with solvent D1 Pyrolac 1591
and wipe with a clean cloth.
-Apply a light coat of MASTINOX 6856H to the screw threads and mating surfaces of
parts.
-Fit a new lockwasher with the tab on the rod side.
NOTE: Reinstall friction ring E on the elastic rod.
-Screw the rod end into the rod to the position previously marked.
B - In case the locknut safety is not folded down
-Mark the position of key C in the notch of the sliding rod (see detail 8).
-Loosen the locknut using the appropriate tool (see table) while holding the end by its
flats with an open-end wrench.
-Unscrew the locknut to allow removal of lockwasher B and the key.
- Lightly grease the screw threads visible on the rod end and the mating surfaces of parts.
C - Locknut tools and tightening torques
Tightening
Special
Description torque in
tool
m.daN (ft.lb)
8 ± 1,5
-Main U/C telescopic rod (59 ±11)
Wrench C4691 0
15.5 ± 1.5
-Main U/C actuating jack Wrench C47179
(110.6 ± 11)
Adapter
-Main U/C elastic rod 4 +
* -0 1
C46895
+ 7 ?
(29.5 _ ^ )
1 ± 0,5
-Main U/C door jack 21 A/F wrench
(51.6 ± 3.6)
6 ± 0,5
-Nose U/C truss jack 24 A/F wrench
(44.2 ± 3.6)
- Nose U/C door jack fi6 +-0 1 Wrench C46958
(44.2 +_ I'3 )
6 ± 0,5 Adapter
-Airbrake jack
(44.2 ± 3.6) C47181
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J)^>^Z^1
BREGUET AVIATION ___ ^ _
MIRAGE F
4- PROCEDURE
A Adjustment
- Screw or unscrew the rod end to obtain the desired adjustment while aligning one groove of the
rod end with a notch on the sliding rod (or body of elastic rod).
- Fit key C in rod end groove with bottom on the rod side and the head in the notch of the rod
(or body of elastic rod).
- Fit the tab of the lockwasher in a notch of the rod (or body of elastic rod).
At the same time, make sure the friction ring is correctly fitted on the elastic rod.
-Screw the locknut by hand until it contacts the parts while making sure that the lockwasher
(and the friction ring on the elastic rod) is centered properly.
- Torque the locknut (see table) using the appropriate tool while holding the end by its flats
with an open-end wrench.
CAUTION :
WHEN TIGHTENING THE LOCKNUT, MAKE SURE THAT THE LOCKWASHER REMAINS
CENTERED WITH RESPECT TO THE END OF THE SLIDING ROD OR BODY OF THE
ELASTIC ROD.
AFTER TIGHTENING THE LOCKNUT, THE REFERENCE HOLE «T» IN ROD END SHOULD
NOT BE VISIBLE ON THE EXTERNAL FACE OF THE LOCKNUT.
- FOR THE ELASTIC ROD, INSERT A 2-mm (0.0787-in) DIAMETER PIN INTO REFERENCE
HOLE «T» IN THE END OF THE BODY. THE PIN SHOULD ABUT AGAINSTTHE THREADED
PART OF THE ROD END.
- Realign the rod end for recoupling, taking the following precautions :
- for a claw-system locking jack or a telescopic rod : make sure the pin is not locked,
- for all cases, make sure the jack is not under pressure,
-slowly turn the pin about 10° to 15° beyond its position and then return to the desired
position in order to relieve its linings.
B Safetying of locknuts
NOTE : This operation will not be performed until after final adjustment on the aircraft.
- Main U/C telescopic rod :

- bend lockplate B into two notches of the locknut.
- Main U/C actuating jack :

- Main U/C elastic rod :

- bend lockplate B into two notches of the locknut beyond the area of the key.
AB .
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -^-""-T. /Vil KM \J C T
BREGUET AVIATION j^£- -^
- Main U/C door jack :

- bend lockplate B over one of the six flats of the locknut.
- Nose U/C truss jack :
- amendment B incorporated : bend the edge of the lockplate over two flats of the locknut,
- amendment B not incorporated : bend the second tab of the lockplate over one flat of the
locknut.
- Nose U/C door jack :

- Airbrake jack :
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
1 - Barre télescopique atterrisseur principal 5 - Vérin contre fiche d'atterrisseur avant

Main O/C telescopic rod Nose U/C truss jack
B T A (Amendement B (Amendement B
non appliqée) appliquée)
(Amendment B (Amendment B
not incorporated) incorporated)
2 - Vérin de relevage atterrisseur principal 6 - Vérin de trappe atterrisseur avant

Main U/C retraction jack Nose O/C door jack
C T
'/////t**
V////hr
(Amendement B (Amendement B 7 - Vérin d'aérofrein

non appliqée) appliquée)
Airbrake Jack
(Amendment B (Amendment B
not incorporated) incorporated)
3 - Bielle élastique d'atterrisseur principal

Main O/C elastic rod
'^î ' m^g^m
/////AJ
]
8 T A
8 - Repères de clavette et de vissage

4 - Vérin de trappes d'atterrisseur principal
Main O/C door jack Key and indexing marks
Repère de clavette
FIGURE 1 - REGLAGE DES EMBOUTS DE VERINS Key mark
ADJUSTMENT OF JACK ROD ENDS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [I
BREGUET AVIATION^__
^J^-^h^sl MIRAGE F
CLEANING OF UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS AND DOORS
A Special tools
' - U/C hydraulics 1st line tool kit.
- Set of wheel protective covers 5001 HRA.
2- MATERIALS
-White spirit
(1 ) Ensure that aircraft electrical power systems are not energized.
(2) Make certain that pressure is dropped in systems 1 and 2.
(3) Manually open the main U/C doors (see 02-0).
WARNING :
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0).
(4) Protect the tires (set of wheel protective covers 5001 HRA).
(5) Cover the upper section of the nose leg (retraction system) with protector C47645 and allow the
protector streamer to hang visibly under the aircraft.
4- CLEANING
(1) Using a dry brush, remove dust from all components, particularly in the recesses, under supports,
and from pipe cleats and clamps.
(2) Using white spirit, a brush and rags, clean undercarriage legs, wells and all jacks, except chronium-
plated sections.
DO NOT ALLOW THE CLEANING MATERIAL TO FLOW INTO THE HINGES AND THE
HOLLOW UPPER SECTION OF THE NOSE LEG (section provided with a protector).
(3) Using a dry rag, wipe all hinges and various units in wells, specially drying and cleaning the sliding
rods of jacks and shock absorbers.
(4) Carefully wipe all grease fittings.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the protective covers from the wheels and the protector from the U/C leg upper section.
- If applicable, close the main U/C doors, taking the safety measures.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION ^ZP^
MIRAGE F
TREATMENT OF CORROSION AND PARTIAL RESTORATION OF PAINT

ON UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS, WHEELS AND JACKS
(airbrakes included)
1 - GENERAL
This sheet gives the procedure for treating corrosion on the undercarriage legs, wheels and jacks
according to the type of metal used in these components, and for touching up paint.
Material
Aluminium Magnesium
Component Steel
alloy alloy
- Main U/C
- U/C leg
- cylinder X
- rocker arm X
- swivel tube X
- shock absorber X
- Actuating jack X
- Telescopic strut X
- Elastic rod X
- Wheels X
- Brakes
- torque plate, retaining plate and X
bearing plate
- Nose U/C
- U/C leg
-cylinder X
- cylinder (Mod. 830 not incorporated) X
- swivel tube X
-torque links X
- cylinder block X
- steering jack cylinders X
- steering distributor unit X
- Shock absorber
-cylinder (sliding rod) X
- bottom X
- Wheels X
- Truss jack X
- Elastic rod
- cylinder X
- rod end X
- Main and nose U/C door jacks X
- Door unlocking jack

-cylinder X
- rod end X
- Airbrake jacks X
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /UJ°*-~TVL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F^L^Ô .. . . ,, , . . _,.
2- SPECIAL TOOLS
- Paint spray gun

- Personnel protective equipment (gloves, smock, respirator)
- Set of round-edge cutters
- Wood or plastic spatula
3- MATERIALS
- Fiberglass brush, «Gratte Boess Rush»
- Emery paper 3M 461 , 100 grit
- Adhesive tape, Minnesota «Scotch» type 5F, 12.5 mm (0.5 in) wide
- Absorbent cotton
- Aliphatic naphtha grade F
- Source of moisture-free compressed air
- Distilled water
- Fine grit pumice
- Deoxidine 670
-Alodine 1200
- Chromic acid diluted to 10% (type 2 solution)
- Chrome pickling solution (type 6 solution)
- Materials from Celomer paint range No. 4080 :
- P50 primer No. 6840B
- zinc chromate primer No. 4888
- aluminum tint finish No. 4080
- reactive thinner No. 6940B
- standard thinner No. 4980
- Clean and dry white cotton cloths
- Wrapping paper
- Adhesive tape
- Nylon brush
- Compound PR 1432GP
WARNING :
CORROSION TREATMENT AND PAINT PRODUCTS MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE SKIN
AND RESPIRATORY TRACT. THE OPERATOR SHOULD USE PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT :
GLOVES, SMOCK, RESPIRATOR.
THE OPERATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED IN A SUFFICIENTLY VENTILATED AREA.
THESE PRODUCTS MAY ALSO CAUSE DETERIORATION OF CERTAIN RUBBER AND
PLASTIC MATERIALS. IN PARTICULAR, IT IS NECESSARY TO PROTECT : TIRES,
ELECTRICAL WIRING, FLEXIBLE PIPES AND ALL EXPOSED PLASTIC PARTS.
- Protection of surrounding area
NOTE : Protection of the surrounding area must be more extensive if the paint is to be applied with a
spray gun.
In all cases, precaution should be taken to avoid penetration of the different materials into
joints.
A For components installed in aircraft :

-protect the components and the surrounds of areas to be touched up, using kraft paper,
- remove the electrical harnesses or disconnect them, then protect them with kraft paper or adhe¬
sive tape,
- remove the hydraulic pipes, blank the couplings with suitable plugs then protect them with
adhesive tape,
-protect chromium-plated parts, unpainted mechanical parts (hinges, end fittings), electrical
connectors and identification plates by means of kraft paper or adhesive tape.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ>~Zr± MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^cZs^^g*^ Restricted
M A MUAI OK
MANUAL 05
B For components not installed in aircraft :

-protect the unpainted parts in the same way as for installed components.
5- LOCALIZATION AND MECHANICAL REMOVAL OF CORROSION SPOTS
A Carefully examine painted surfaces for defects such as : blistering or flaking, dents, deep scratches.
NOTE : For defects on nose undercarriage cylinder protected with PR 1432 GP, remove the
compound over a large area surrounding the defect with a spatula.
B Rub a large area around the defect with medium grit abrasive paper so as to bare the metal and
enable identification of the corrosion type using the following criteria.
NOTE : The shock absorber cylinder bore (sliding rod) is not protected on bottom side.
(1 ) Surface corrosion
The surface must be cleaned with aliphatic naphtha grade F and lightly rubbed with a fiberglass
brush (if necessary) to obtain a clean, sound metal surface.
(2) Deep-seated corrosion

Examine the suspect areas with a magnifying glass under bright lighting to detect any spots of
deep-seated corrosion revealed after the above cleaning operation.
This form of corrosion appears as small spots on steel parts, and pits on aluminum or magnesium
alloy parts.
(3) Limits
(a) On steel parts

Deep-seated corrosion is not acceptable ; the equipment must be sent to the next higher repair
line.
(b) On aluminum or magnesium alloy parts

Deep-seated corrosion spots can be removed with a scraper or a burr by working outwards from
the center of the area being touched up, blending the edges with wide radii. Such rework is only
permitted for the parts described below and must be within the defined limits.
On the nose U/C cylinder :

the depth of rework must not exceed 1 mm (0.0393 in) below the surface of the part and must
-
not risk weakening its mechanical strength ;
- if doubts subsist, consult the manufacturer.
On the nose U/C wheels :

the depth of rework must not exceed 0.8 mm (0.0314 in) from the original surface, except in the
-
flange area (see illustration), where reworking is not acceptable ; the following directives must be
adhered to :
- reworking around the wheel bolt housing must not exceed 25% of the washer bearing
surfaces on the the rim, or 25% of the bolt-head surface on the main part of the wheel ;
- reworking in the wheel center bore must not exceed 25% of the total surface of the bore.
CAUTION :
ALL REWORKING MUST BE SPREAD OVER THE WIDEST POSSIBLE AREA TO AVOID
STRESS CONCENTRATIONS (see illustration).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^^
ti^^zTZi.
_ _
MIRAGE F
NOTE : - All other parts displaying deep-seated corrosion must be sent to the next higher repair
line.
-THE CYLINDER, ROCKER ARM AND SWIVEL TUBE OF THE MAIN UNDER¬
CARRIAGE ARE MADE FROM VERY HIGH STRENGTH STEEL. IF ONE OF THESE
PARTS BEARS DEFECTS (E.G. SCRATCHES, DEEP DENTS OR DEEP-SEATED CORRO¬
SION), THE WHOLE U/C LEG MUST BE SENT TO THE NEXT HIGHER REPAIR LINE.
6- PREPARATION OF AREAS TO BE TOUCHED UP
A Degrease the damaged areas with aliphatic naphtha grade F.

B Cut strips of adhesive tape of the appropriate length and apply them around the edge of the
area sanded with abrasive paper (leaving one end unstuck to enable removal of the tape). Carefully
expel any air bubbles trapped under the tape.
C Tear off the strips by pulling them perpendicularly from the surface of the part, so as to remove
poorly adhering paint.
D Thoroughly degrease the sanded area and at least 50 mm (2 in) around it using a clean, dry, white
cloth soaked in aliphatic naphtha grade F, then wipe over with a clean dry cloth. Repeat the procedure
until all grease and dirt has been removed.
E Smooth the edges of surfaces where paint is flaked off in the following manner :
-the oven-baked paintwork of the wheels, nose U/C cylinder and main U/C cylinder and rocker
arm is to be rubbed with 100-grit abrasive paper 3M 461 soaked in white spirit ;
- non-baked paintwork is to be rubbed with a clean cloth soaked in thinner No. 4980.
7- PROTECTIVE TREATMENT OF CORROSION SPOTS
A For steel parts
At 1st and 2nd line maintenance level, the only possible treatment is the application of the paint
scheme as described in paragraph 8.
B For aluminum alloy parts
(1) - Strip surfaces using a brush soaked in a liquid paste composed of Deoxidine 670 and fine grit
pumice.
- Rinse thoroughly in running water.
(2) - Dab the stripped surfaces with an absorbent cotton swab soaked in a solution of Alodine 1200
(35 g per liter of distilled water - 4.77 oz per US gal - 5.6 oz per imp.gal).
- Leave applied for 3 minutes.
- Repeat the procedure several times, checking the color, which can vary from yellow-orange
to light brown.
NOTE : Paleness in color can be due to inadequate degreasing or deterioration of the Alodine
solution.
(3) - Rinse thoroughly in water, then dry in moisture-free compressed air.
IMPORTANT NOTE :
PAINTWORK MUST BE TOUCHED UP WITHIN 48 HOURS OF APPLYING ALODINE.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jU^>~r5L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^-f^Ô
- If the nose shock absorber is not installed immediately, protect the cylinder reworked areas with
grease.
CAUTION :
DO NOT APPLY ANY PAINT IN THE BORE OF THE NOSE SHOCK ABSORBER CYLINDER.
C On magnesium alloy parts
(1 ) - Strip retouched parts with a type 2 solution of chromic acid applied with a nylon brush.
- Leave applied for 5 minutes while brushing.
- Rinse thoroughly with clean water to flush the acid.
- Dry with moisture-free compressed air or a clean cloth.
- Buff without rubbling.
(2) - Dab the degreased surfaces with an absorbent cotton swab dipped in a type 6 pickling solution.
(3) - Leave applied for 15 to 20 seconds (dark brassy yellow color), then rinse thoroughly with water
and dry with dry compressed air.
IMPORTANT NOTE :
IF PAINT IS NOT TO BE APPLIED IMMEDIATELY, TREATED SURFACES MUST BE PRO¬
TECTED WITH GREASE.
8- PAINT APPLICATION
(1 ) Preparation of paint scheme
(a) Priming
Dilute one volume of wash primer No. 6840B with one volume of reactive thinner No. 6940B.
(b) Post-priming
Dilute one volume of zinc chromate primer No. 4888 with two volumes of thinner No. 4980.
(c) Pre-finishing and finishing

Dilute one volume of aluminum-tinted finishing paint No. 4080 with 3/4 volume of thinner
No. 4980.
(2) Painting
(a) Clean the areas to be painted with a clean cloth soaked in aliphatic naphtha grade F ; dry with
moisture-free compressed air.
NOTE : If the surfaces to be painted were temporarily protected with grease, remove grease using
white spirit before painting.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
(b) Apply paint (preferably by spraying), overlapping onto adjacent surfaces. The part and the paint
should be at the same temperature (15 to 25 °C). Relative humidity should be 40 to 70%.
- Apply a coat of primer (drying time : 1 hour).
- Apply a coat of post-primer (drying time : 1 hour).
- Apply a coat of pre-finishing paint, then a coat of finishing paint (drying time between each coat :
1 hour - final curing time : 48 hours).
NOTE : Do not apply the coat of finishing paint to the inside of the nose wheel bore ; observe the
final curing time, i.e. 48 hours, after application of the coat of pre-finishing paint.
9- APPLICATION OF COMPOUND PR 1432 GP ON NOSE U/C CYLINDERS ALREADY

PROTECTED BY THIS PRODUCT
A Wait for final paint curing time.
B Prepare the compound-hardener mixture according to directions for use.
C Apply the compound with a brush over the entire touched-up surface, up to the original section.
If the thickness is important, proceed with successive coats, allowing about 6 hours between
-
coats, at a temperature of 25 °C and a relative humidity of 50% (the surface of the compound should
be tack-free).
D Apply a coat of aluminum-tinted finishing paint No. 4080 over the surfaces where the compound
is visible after the surface of the last coat of compound is no longer tacky.
E Allow full paint curing time.
10 -FINAL STEPS
- Remove the protections (kraft paper and adhesive tape).

- Reconnect the electrical harnesses.
- Reconnect the hydraulic pipes.
- If required, purge air from the system concerned (see 07-1).
5 mm __ i 35 i 35 mm i i 5 n
i 1J7 in) ~ (0.19 in)
_ Profile after touch-up
" +"* * Area of bead seat where no deep touch -ups

are permissible
AA
^3 _
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN FOR LONG-TERM WORK

ON UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS AND JACKS
(AIRBRAKES INCLUDED) MOUNTED ON AIRCRAFT
1 - SCOPE
To prevent seals from being turned, it is necessary to unstick jacks and shock absorbers which
have not operated for more than 15 days.

3- MATERIALS
A Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see 02-2).
B For jacks, connect the hydraulic power unit (minimum flow rate and pressure).
C Supply the aircraft electrical power system.
5- PROCEDURE
A Undercarriage shock absorbers
(1) Using a dry rag, clean the visible sliding rods of the shock absorbers, then lightly coat them with
hydraulic fluid.
(2) Lower the aircraft onto the ground by slowly operating the lifting jacks so that the shock absorber
rods move very slowly.
B Jacks (U/C legs, doors, airbrakes) with rods extended
(1 ) Using a dry rag, clean the jack rods, then slightly coat them with hydraulic fluid.
(2) Retract the jack rods several times by progressively increasing hydraulic pressure so as to overcome
friction forces and obtain a very slow motion of the jack rods.
I C Check the jack rods for leaks.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fl^V-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^F^^Ô.
MIRAGE F
^£^=-^2^ Restricted MANUAL 05
6- FINAL STEPS
A If necessary, perform an undercarriage retraction - extension cycle at normal pressure (See 05-6).
B Carefully wipe jack and shock absorber rods.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJLJ>-uZVl
BREGUET AVIATION^r^- ^^
MIRAGE F
PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN FOR SPARE JACKS

(with jack rods retracted)
1 - SCOPE
To prevent seals from being turned as a result of sticking due to storage or long inactivity of
the jack.

- LPhydraulic power supply
3- MATERIALS
4- PROCEDURE
NOTE : If a jack has the rod extended, it is necessary to lightly smear the entire jack rod with
hydraulic fluid.
A Unstick the jack by means of a hand pump or a hydraulic test bench adjusted for minimum flow
rate, as applicable, by slowly increasing pressure until friction forces are overcome and the sliding rod
moves very slowly.
B Repeat steps outlined in para. A above several times.
C Drop pressure, carefully wipe the jack sliding rod and disconnect the hydraulic power supply.
AA
12-80 Restricted 0_H7
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jL=J>^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^cT _ _
MIRAGE F
PRESSURE CHECK AND CHARGING OF SHOCK ABSORBERS

(Figure 2)
A Standard tools
- 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrench kit
- Accessory kit for 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrench.

-Hydraulic accessory kit.
2- MATERIALS
- Adjustable pressure nitrogen supply.

- Gas pressure leak detecting solution.
A Jack up aircraft so that wheels clear ground (See 02-2).
B For charging the shock absorbers, make up a charging device as shown in the figure.
(1 ) Close valves R1 and R2 of charging fixture.
(2) Connect a 0 to 50 bar (725 psi) pressure gauge to charging fixture.
(3) Connect charging fixture to nitrogen source.
(4) Adjust nitrogen source for low pressure and open valve R1 so as to blast the system to eliminate
fluid if any. Close nitrogen source valve and charging fixture valve R1 .
4- PROCEDURE
A Checking of charging pressure.
IMPORTANT : If the aircraft just returns from flight or taxiing, check the pressure only after at least
half an hour has elapsed.
(1 )Remove protective cap from charging valve at shock absorber bottom.

(2) Connect charging fixture to charging valve, the swivelling adaptor being equipped with a pressure
gage, capacity 0 to 50 bars (0 to 725 psi).
(3) Loosen control nut of charging valve through 1 1/2 turns maximum (16 mm A/F spanner).
IMPORTANT : Excessive loosening will damage the valve.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L**^~lzSL
BREGUET AVIATION ^ji?3 JSf^>
MIRAGE F
^S^^Q^ Restricted MANUAL 05
I (4) . Read pressure on gauge, which should be as follows :
- 21 .6 bar ± 5 % (312 psi ± 5 %) for nose shock absorber.

- 35.6 bar ± 5 % (515 psi ± 5 %) for main shock absorbers.
NOTE : See figure 2 and read inflation pressure corrected in relation to ambient temperature.
(5) If necessary adjust the pressure as per para.B-4, otherwise torque tighten charging valve control nut
between 0.500 and 0.870 m.daN (3.6 and 6.4 ft.lb) using a 16 mm A/F fork wrench. At the same time
pull out the valve core, in a straight axial line, so as to facilitate centering on its seat.
(6) Disconnect the swivelling adaptor.
(7) Using the leak detecting solution, check charging valve for leakage ; also check internal poppet by
pushing on the valve core.
NOTE : In case of leak, unscrew, re-adjust the pressure, re-tighten control nut to required torque.
If leakage is still present, proceed with replacement of charging valve.
(8) By hand, screw on the protective cap.
B Charging
(1 ) Remove protective cap from charging valve and connect charging fixture.
(2) Ascertain that valves R1 and R2 of charging fixture are closed (do not tighten), and adjust
nitrogen supply pressure as instructed in para. A(4).
(3) Loosen charging valve control nut through 1 1/2 turns maximum (16 mm A/F spanner).
(4) Progressively open valve R1 of charging fixture. Watch pressure variation and wait one or two
minutes until pressure has stabilized to the desired value (thermal balance).
- If pressure is too high, close valve R1 and open valve R2 until pressure is correct.
- If pressure is too low, adjust nitrogen supply control for correct pressure.
(5) Once pressure is correct, torque tighten valve control nut between 0,500 and 0,870 m.daN (3.6
and 6.4 ft.lb) (16 mm A/F fork wrench).
(6) Drop pressure in charging fixture by closing valve R1, and nitrogen supply valve if applicable, and
opening valve R2.
(7) Disconnect charging fixture from shock absorber.
(8) Using leak detecting solution, check charging valve for leakage ; also check internal poppet by
pushing on the valve core.
NOTE : In case of leak, unscrew, re-adjust the pressure and re-tighten control nut to required torque.
If leakage is still present, proceed with replacement of charging valve.
(9) By hand, screw on the protective cap.
5- FINAL STEPS
A Lower aircraft on ground (See 02-2).
B Check shock absorber heights depending on aircraft configuration (See 02-4).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
Bouchon protecteur
AMORTISSEUR AVANT Protective cap
NOSE SHOCK ABSORBER
\
Valve de gonflage
Charging valve
°»
R1 R2
Robinet f
de- purge
contrôle Drain}
Charging
fixture
Source d azote a pression

réglable
Adjustable pressure nitrogen
supply
AMORTISSEURS PRINCIPAUX
MAIN SHOCK ABSORBERS
FIGURE 2 -CONTROLE DE LA PRESSION ET GONFLAGE DES

AMORTISSEURS
AB PRESSURE CHECK AND CHARGING OF SHOCK ABSORBERS
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ " « /V\lr\/-\V_7I_
BREGUET AVIATION _^c_>-
^ J!5«s^>
^^^ .
Restricted .,,,..,
MANUAL .,
05
FILLING AND FLUID LEVEL ADJUSTMENT OF SHOCK ABSORBERS

(figure 3)
A - Special tools
-U/C hydraulics 2nd line tool kit.
B - Standard tools
-Accessory kit for torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
-Set of extra-thin open-end wrenches.

-Hydraulic accessory kit.
-Filling crane C21 858.
-LP hydraulic power supply (hand pump).
D - Spares
Nose U/C shock absorber
-2 filler plug seals.
-1 retaining ring 71 00-0060A070T.
Main U/C shock absorber

-1 filler plug seal.
2 - MATERIALS
-Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520.

-Adjustable pressure nitrogen supply.
A - Shock absorber removed (main U/C, see 05-1)

(nose U/C, see 05-3)
B - Shock absorber discharged (valve open, valve core removed)
C - Operations specific to nose shock absorber

(1 ) Remove cover 1 24.
(2) Remove screw 197.
(3) Remove retraction rod 1 55 (see 05-3, figure 1 2).
-Place the retraction rod perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the shock absorber. Us¬
ing a threaded rod (M3 x 0.5), insert stop pin 158 of pin 156 in the retraction rod, after re¬
moving the retaining ring, and recover plain bush 159.
-Hold the retraction rod and drive out pin 156 complete with grooved lubricator by me¬
ans of an 18-mm (0.7086-in) diameter fiber drift.
D - Remove plug 99 or 103 (16-mm A/F socket) from the filler port and install a filling valve
MS28889-1 in place.
WARNING:
UNCREW THE PLUG WITH CARE, AS FLUID MAY SHOOT OUT IF THE FLUID AND
NITROGEN CHAMBERS HAVE BEEN INTERCONNECTED.
AB
MIRAGE F
E - Install shock absorber on filling crane, as shown in figure.
(1 ) Nose shock absorber
- Depress jack pistons, and replace removable jack pad with thrust part C47423 (item A).
- Mount following parts on shock absorber, as shown in figure :
- two-part bush C47421 (item B)
- dummy box C47422 (item C)
- head C47420 (item D) (Lock head through PIP pin on filling crane).
(2) Main shock absorber

- With jack pistons depressed and removable jack pad in place, act by hand on jack pad to fully
loosen jack screw (85 m (3.3464 in)). Extend jack pistons by 165 mm (6.4960 in).
- Mount following parts on shock absorber, as shown in figure :
- head C47424 (item E) (Lock head through PIP pin on filling crane).
- adapter C47425 (item F).
- knurled nut C47426 (item G).
-2pinsC47427 (item H).
- adapter C47428 (item I).
F - Make up a filling fixture as shown in figure.

- Bleed filling fixture free of air.
4- FILLING OF FLUID CHAMBER

A Fully compress shock absorber (down to mechanical stop) using filling crane compression fixture.
B- Connect filling fixture to filling valve and open the latter.
C - Bleed free of air and fill fluid chamber.
(1 )Open valve R1 and close valve R2 of the fixture test cock ; then, using the hand pump, slowly and
fully extend the shock absorber ; slowlyincrease the pressure up to 20 bar (290 psi) to make sure that
the separator piston has been properly thrust to down stop, then drop the pressure again and close
valve R1.
(2) Progressively open valve R2 and fully compress shock absorber. Close valve R2 as fluid stops
flowing out from drain.
(3) Repeat the above two operations until fluid flowing from drain is free of air. Complete these
operations by fully compressing the shock absorber.
(4) Close filling valve.
D Remove filling fixture.
E Remove filling valve and install plug 99 or 103 provided with new seals (16 mm AF socket).
Torque tighten to 1 ,50 mdaN (1 1 ft.lb).
5- FLUID LEVEL ADJUSTMENT IN GAS CHAMBER

A Connect filling fixture to charging valve at shock absorber bottom.
B- Fill with fluid.

(1 ) Open valve R1 of filling fixture test cock (valve R2 closed) and extend shock absorber by about
50 mm (1.9685 in) using the hand pump. Close valve R1.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT [I^Ji^^ZU.
BREGUET AVIATION,,
MIRAGE F
(2) Progressively open valve R2 and fully compress the shock absorber to mechanical stop. As fluid
stops flowing out, disconnect the filling fixture.
(3) While holding the shock absorber fully compressed, mandatorily top up the chamber fluid level by
injecting nitrogen at low pressure through the charging valve. Allow excess fluid to flow out.
(4) With zero pressure in the nitrogen chamber and fluid level adjusted, tighten the charging valve
control nut to a torque of 0.500 to 0.870 m.daN (3.6 and 6.4 ft.lb) (16-mm A/F fork wrench).
C Reinstall the valve core.

Reminder : tightening torque : 0.025 to 0.028 m.daN (2.13 to 2.34 in.lb). After tightening, the
-
core should be set back from the valve body by 0 to 1 .5 mm (0. to 0.059 in).
D Screw the protective cap (tighten by hand) onto the charging valve.
6- FINAL STEPS
A Remove the shock absorber from the fill ing beam.
B Operations specific to nose U/C shock absorber.
(1 ) Installation of retraction rod 155 (see 05-3, figure 12)

-Position the retraction rod (with grease fittings on torque link side) in the clevis of rod 102.
-Couple using pin 156 fitted with grooved lubricator. Fix it angularly by positioning pin 158
(M3 x 0.5 threaded rod) ; safety the latter with a new stop ring.
(2) Install screw 197 fitted with its washer.
(3) Install cover 124.
C Proceed to :
- either installation of shock absorber on main (see 05-1 ) or nose (see 05-3) U/C leg,
- or storage of shock absorber (see 05-1 ).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
197 103 159 158 155
Valve
de
remplissage
Filling valve
J, T
r °1
Valve de gonflage
Charging valve
Potence
de
remplissage
Filling
crane
Robinet de contrôle
Charging fixture
liquide hydraulique ou azote

fluid or nitrogen supply
Amortisseur principal
Main shock absorber
Amortisseur avant Nose shock absorber

FIGURE 3 - REMPLISSAGE ET NIVEAU DES AMORTISSEURS
AB FILLING AND FLUID LEVEL ADJUSTMENT OF SHOCK ABSORBERS
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^JJ /V\lr\/-\V7C_ î
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ .«^^ _ . . . .. . . . . nr.
^ ^ ^ Restricted MANUAL OE
LUBRICATION AND PROTECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOOR HINGES

(figures 4 and 5)
1 - GENERAL
For optimum lubrication to be obtained on the main undercarriage shock absorber self-a¬
ligning bearings, the operation must be performed with the aircraft jacked up then resting on
its wheels.

-Pressure lubricating equipment.
B - Spares
-1 pin 2331 OAA 020 025 LE.
3 - MATERIALS
-White spirit.
-Grease Air 4222 or Air 421 0.
-Oil Air 3512.
A - Ensure that hydraulic pressure is zero in systems 1 and 2.
B - Make certain that aircraft electrical power systems are not energized.
C - Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see 02-2).
D - Manually open the U/C doors (see 02-0).
WARNING:
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0).
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Cleaning
Clean the grease fittings, linkages and hinge knuckles with a rag either dry or lightly
moistened with white spirit.
CAUTION:
NEVER USE SOLVENTS SUCH AS TRICHLORETHYLENE FOR CLEANING OPERA¬
TIONS.
AA
04 - 87 Restricted 0- 1 25
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLJ>~zr\>s. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^ -^^>
^£S^-^Q^> Restricted MANUAL 05
B Greasing
(1) Grease all points shown in figures as per captions, observing the amount of grease to be injected
into the points where indicated.
NOTE1 :
If grease is excessively pressed out around a grease fitting, the latter may be choked. Replace
the grease fitting ; if no improvement is obtained, determine the cause.
NOTE 2 :
To grease the door central hinge greasing point, two different procedures can be used accor¬
ding to the actual door position :
- if the door is «locked open» (jack internal lock) :
disconnect the door jack (two 17 mm A/F wrenches) to gain access to the greasing point,
- if the door is not locked open :
partially close it by hand and grease the point using a Sudex 90° adapter.
NOTE 3
For greasing the U/C-up stop bearing surface of the swivel tube rotation bellcrank on cylinder
(view on F), unlock the legs and partially lift them so as to disengage the stop.
Thoroughly clean the cylinder bearing surface, then apply a light film of grease.
(2) Remove excess grease.
(3) If applicable, reconnect the nose U/C door jack (two 17 mm A/F wrenches) and safety with a
locking pin.
C Protection and lubrication
(1) Modification 466 not incorporated

-Lightly oil the hinge of the safety flap of the normal U/C control unit lever in cockpit.
(2) Protect and lubricate all points shown in the figure.
(a) Ensure that the rollers freely turn on their pins.

(b) Whenever possible, operate the hinge to obtain a better lubrication.
(3) Wipe off excess oil.
APPLY NEITHER OIL NOR GREASE TO HINGES EQUIPPED WITH TEFLON-LINED SELF-
ALIGNING BEARINGS.
FINAL STEPS
- If required, lower the aircraft onto the ground (see 02-2).

- Close U/C doors (see 02-2).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
NOTA: NOTE :
FIGURE 4 - GRAISSAGE ET PROTECTION DES ARTICULATIONS DES TRAPPES MOD. 581 NON APPLIQUEE MOD. 581 NOT INCORPORA TED
ET DE L'ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL Ces articulations sont These hinges are to be
LUBRICATION OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOOR HINGES démontées et graissées removed and lubricated
à la main (Voir 05-1) by hand (See 05-1)
AB 0-127
BREGUET AVIATION
FIGURE 5 - GRAISSAGE ET PROTECTION DESARTICULATIONS DES TRAPPES

ET DE L'ATTERRISSEUR AVANT
L UBRICA TION OF NOSE UNDE RCA RRIA GE AND DOOR HINGES
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^^ZXL
BREGUET AVIATION _
MIRAGE F
PRECAUTIONS FOR INSTALLING SEALS ON MESSIER-HISPANO

EQUIPMENT ITEMS
(figures 6 and 7)
1 - SCOPE
Correct installation of seals is very important. Although not difficult, installing seals requires
certain precautions and should be performed with utmost care.
A Special tools
- Tools specific to installation of rubber and teflon seals are listed in the «disassembly - assembly»
sheet of the equipment item involved.
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit
I - Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520
4- TYPES OF SEALS
- Refer to figures.
5- INSTRUCTIONS
A General instructions to be followed
(1 ) Seals are supplied in individual bags marked with the date of manufacture.
(2) Before installation, carefully clean grooves and surfaces in contact with the seals during installation.
Cleaning shall be performed with white spirit or alcohol.
NOTE : Do not dip parts still equipped with seals, such as fixed seals.
After cleaning, let dry, wipe with a rag inside grooves and on the part, and blast with moisture-free
compressed air if possible. Grooves and all surfaces with which seals come into contact must be
thoroughly clean and dry,
(3) If only gasoline is available, cleaning may be performed provided that :

(a) - perfect drying is performed after cleaning,
(b) - no gasoline penetrates into the unit or comes into contact with rubber material.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAUll LJ>~lZ~\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^P3^^^
(4) Any
seal removed must be replaced.
Never lubricate seals before definitively installing them in grooves. Specially double seals (e.g.
SI-SE seals) should be free of fluid on their bearing surfaces.
When removing or installing seals, take care not to scratch the cylinder.
(5) Special attention shall be paid to cleanliness when installing seals. It is necessary to work in a
clean, dust free place with thoroughly cleaned tools.
(6) Never install distorted or cut seals, as cuts are incipient tears.
(7) Never handle seals with greasy hands. Any seal contaminated by greasy materials other than the
installation fluid, shall be discarded.
(8) When assembling the unit, slightly lubricate the visible seal portion with a spatula. Unless
otherwise specified, never use fluids other than the operating fluid of the unit.
(9) Once seals are correctly positioned, ensure that no slipping or tearing can occur.
Correctly position the parts. Any seal tearing or incipient tearing shall be a cause for removal of the seal
involved.
Install seals progressively, without excessively pushing. If jamming or binding is felt, disassemble and
replace seals according to their condition.
B Special instructions for rubber and teflon seals.
(1) Rubber seals

To install rubber seals, use the straight end of a spatula (89901 ) and a clean, lint free dry rag.
The bent end of the spatula shall be used for removal.
(2) Teflon seals

Circumferential scratches on the bearing surfaces of teflon seals do not affect sealing. On the
contrary, scratches parallel with the axis of seal movement, or close to this direction, are prohibited.
This is the reason why it is necessary to adjust parts by turning them.
IMPORTANT : To install rubber seals and remove rubber and teflon seals of plasticized parts, use
special spatula A 46524.
6- INSTALLATION OF SEALS
A Standard single and double seals
(1 ) On male, stationary or sliding parts (See views A and B).
Ascertain that all groove sides and surfaces coming into contact with the seal are perfectly clean
and dry.
Locate the single seal (in the direction of the chamfer if the seal is chamfered), or the inner seal
(for double seals), ore the end of the part and engage it by means of the spatula. The seal must be
stretched as little as possible. Then, progressively push the seal into the groove by turning the spatula
around the part. Avoid turning the seal over.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
tiJè-^ZXL
^sg5* ^^.
MIRAGE F
For double seals, install the outer seal in the same way, placing it exactly concentric with the inner
seal.
In this case also, the inner seal and the cylindrical engagement section of the part must not be
lubricated. It is absolutely necessary that the contact area of concentric seals is free of fluid.
Place the seal(s) against one groove side so that when installing metal parts seal(s) do not tend to
turn over or slip.
Installation of female part : (See view C).
To facilitate installation of the male part, slightly lubricate (See para. 5-A(8)) the associated bore
and the external surface of the rubbing seal.
In all instances, ensure that mechanical parts are correctly positioned and avoid any abnormal
stress.
Certain assemblies which are difficult to fit, require the use of a mallet, with a wooden plate or a
plastic drift interposed.
(2) On female, stationary or sliding part (See view D)
Double seals may be embedded, when the parts have :

- machined grooves.
- one groove side consisting of a locked thrust washer.
- one groove side formed by a fitted flange.
As a rule, installing a seal is relatively easy, except for seals with small diameter, housed in a
machined groove.
For all parts provided with a machined groove :

Make sure that all groove sides and surfaces coming into contact with the seal are perfectly clean
-
and dry.
- Insert the seal askew by means of a spatula (observing the chamfer direction if the simple seal is
chamfered), and progressively push the seal at several places so as to bring it into the groove without
turning it over (applicable to simple seals and outer seals of double seals).
The inner seal of double seals shall be installed in the same way and accurately fitted to the outer
seal.
It is imperative that the contact surface is absolutely dry.
Therefore, do not lubricate or moisten, as for simple seals.
Place the seal(s) against one groove side in the suitable direction (view E).
NOTE : Installation of seals in grooves with a side consisting of a thrust washer or a flange, shall be
simply performed with the fingers.
Installation of male part : (See view E).
Slightly lubricate (see para. 5-A(8)) the cylindrical surface of the male part and the rubbing surface
of the seal.
Take care to correctly position the part (axis of part normal to the mating surfaces).
AA
BREGUET
2L=îrU.
AVIATION^clF3 _^Q>
MIRAGE F
^2^-^^> Restricted MANUAL 05
B Mixed and double mixed seals (See views F, G and G')
- Rubber seal and split plastic seal on male or female part.
Split plastic seals shall be installed on male or female part in the same way.
Split plastic seals shall be installed with the fingers, acting as close as possible to the cut (The cut is
either on a diametrical or oblique plane).
Do not abnormally separate the two seal ends to facilitate installation. The plastic seal shall be
placed in abutment against one groove side, with the rubber seal(s) on the pressure side coming into
contact with the plastic seal. As regards installation of the rubber seal(s), observe the method described
in para. A.
C Composite seals
- These seals include at least one rubber seal and one plastic seal (generally made of teflon) which
are concentric with each other (views J and M).
(1 ) On male, stationary or sliding part
(a) Installation of rubber seal (See view H)

-use a spatula, as instructed for simple rubber seals.
- the seal shall be placed in the middle of the groove, i.e. at equal distance from the two groove
sides.
(b) Installation of teflon seal (See view I)
prepare a suitably centred installation cone with an apex half-angle a = 5°. The taper surface of
-
the cone should be very polished.
- locate the cone on the part and, without lubricating or moistening, engage the seal by pushing
with the fingers until it fits the groove. Massage the teflon seal to ensure that it is correctly placed in the
groove.
(c) Assembly of female part (See view J)
- Despite the precautions taken for installation, the teflon seal is slightly stretched, and a few
hours are necessary for the teflon seal to normally clamp the rubber seal.
To save time, a metal «shrinking ring» may be used. The lead-in taper bore (apex half-angle a = 5°) of
this ring is extended by a cylindrical section with a diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the bore
of the female part.
- Slightly lubricate the rubbing section of the teflon seal and the bore of the «shrinking ring» with
operating fluid.
- Install this ring with care so as to press the teflon seal in its housing. Clear the shrinking ring after
a few seconds have elapsed.
IMPORTANT : This method is not systematically applicable, since the natural shrinkage and relative
thinness of the teflon seal do not always enable the latter to be retained in the groove as the shrinking
ring is mounted, and the teflon ring may escape.
This can be avoided by using a two-part shrinking ring, with a foil interposed, for instance.
Locate the female part on the part equipped with seals by rotating. No jamming should be felt
- ;
otherwise, disassemble and repeat all operations with new seals.
For reassembling, the assembly lubricant may be more liberally applied (See para. 5-A(8)).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ>^Z^X.
BREGUET AVIATION,.
MIRAGE F
(2) On female, fixed or sliding part
(a) Installation of rubber seal (see view K)

- Use a spatula as instructed for double rubber seals.
- The seal shall be placed in the middle of the groove, i.e. at equal distance from the two groove
sides.
(b) Installation of teflon seal (see view L)
Installation shall be performed as for rubber seals, but using the fingers, folding the seal as shown
-
in view L. Do not use the spatula which may scratch the teflon seal. Rub the seal with the fingers so
that it correctly fits the groove.
(c) Assembly of male part

- Since the teflon seal does not bear on the rubber seal, as for seals mounted on a male part, the
teflon seal does not show tendency to enlargement which may cause jamming when assembling the
metal parts. It is necessary to use one of the following two methods. In both cases, lightly lubricate the
rubbing section of the teflon seal and the metal bearing surface with operating fluid (see para. 5-A8).
Preferred method (see view M)
This method shall be used whenever possible. Mount a metal insertion cone at the end of the
male part. This cone shall have a half-angle of 5° at the apex and the same diameter as the male part.
The cone shall be centred on the latter. Assembly shall be performed by rotating and pushing the male
part. The insertion cone shall be separated from the part after insertion.
The advantage of this method is that the teflon seal may be installed and the metal parts assembled
at the same time.
Secondary method (see view N)
This method is recommended when the above method is not practical. For the same reason as that
explained in the paragraph relating to assembly of the female part, an expansion cone shall be used to
install the teflon seal, before assembling the metal parts.
The metal expansion cone shall have a half-angle of 5° at the apex and a cylindrical section with a
diameter equal to or slightly larger than that of the male part.
- Insert the cone until the cylindrical section comes into contact with the teflon seal and remove
the cone after a few seconds have elapsed.
- Immediately proceed to assembly of the male part by rotating and pushing. No jamming should
occur ; otherwise, disassemble and repeat all operations with new seals.
For reassembling, the assembly lubricant may be more liberally applied (see para. 5-A8).
(3) Parts with oversize dimensions
During factory repair, some parts may be machined to dimensions greater than the original
dimensions. These parts are marked by the repair dimension index following the part number, i.e. R1,
R2, R3, R4orR5.
Example : Piston C56941 -10 - original dimension

Piston C56941 -1 OR 1 - first oversize dimension
Piston C56941-10R2 - second oversize dimension.
During reassembly, these parts should be fitted with teflon seals to the corresponding oversize
dimension.
For teflon seals which are not split, a mounting cone and a retaining bush of the same oversize
dimension should be used.
Parts and tools to which oversize dimensions apply are indicated in the assembly-disassembly
worksheet of the part concerned.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT Jl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
JOINTS STANDARD - SIMPLES ET DOUBLES

STANDA RD SIMPLE AND DOUBLE SEA LS
Vue - B
View A View B
Présentation correcte Présentation Position des joints après

des joints doubles incorrecte présentation incorrecte
Correct installation of double seals Incorrect installation Position of incorrectly installed seals
m
Vue - C
View - C
Gorge usinée Rondelle d'appui

Machined groove Thrust washer
7~,
Vue - D
View - D
Présentation correcte
Correct installation
Joints simples Joints doubles

(caoutchouc) (caoutchouc)
Simple (rubber) Double (rubber)
seals
'Présentation incorrecte seals
s^l Incorrect installation
Vue - E
View E
FIGURE 6 - MONTAGE DES JOINTS D'ETANCHEITE

AB INSTALLA TION OF SEALS
BREGUET AVIATION -v-^SP
J MIRAGE F
TYPES DE JOINTS MIXTES typical mixed seals

Piece Female
part mâle Xr/^wX^ Vue_F View F femelle part
^^* @g Cote Pressure .
~ pression side B^
Joint téflon fendu Joint caoutchouc Joint caoutchouc Joint téflon fendu
Split teflon seal Rubber seal Rubber seal Split teflon seal
TYPES DE JOINTS DOUBLES MIXTES typical double mixed seals

Téflon Caou.tchouc Rubber
Vue G ^ Vue G'

View G View - G'
-Téflon
W
TYPES DE JOINTS COMPOSITES typical composite seals

Joint teflon non fendu
Joint teflon non fendu Non-split teflon seal
Bague de
Cône de Non-split teflon seal
retreint.
montage Shrinking
Installation ring
cone
Piece Male
Joint caoutchouc mâle part Joint caoutchouc
Vue -H Rubber seal Vue-I Vue-J Rubber seal
View H Weirv / View J
Joint caoutchouc
Rubber seal
Vue-K
View K
Joint téflon non fendu

Joint caoutchouc Non-split teflon seals Joint caoutchouc
Rubber seal Rubber seal
/y
cône d'introduction . cône d'extension

Insertion cone Expansion cone
View M Vue -M Vue-N View-N

FIGURE 7 -MONTAGE DES JOINTS D'ETANCHEITE
INSTALLATION OF SEALS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^>MlZ^.
BREGUET AVIATION^cT __
MIRAGE F
LEAKAGE TOLERANCES ON JACKS IN SERVICE USE
1 - SCOPE
To reduce maintenance of hydraulic systems by avoiding unnecessary removal of jacks subse¬

quent to leakage.
2- APPLICABILITY
Applicable to jacks whose rods are sealed by composite seals (rubber-teflon seals).
3- PROCEDURE
A Carefully wipe the suspected jack and the ends of the lines connected to it.
B Leave the jack at zero pressure for about 30 minutes.
C Try to locate the point of leakage or seepage.
NOTE : Seepage at unions is not permissible.
(1) Static check at zero pressure
- Do not wipe the sliding rod of the jack.

Watch the sliding rod and check that the leak rate does not exceed 1 drop in 2 minutes.
If it does, replace the jack.
NOTE : If there is any doubt, carry out the dynamic check.
(2) Dynamic check at normal operating pressure.
(a) If checking an undercarriage jack

Jack up the aircraft so that its wheels are clear of the ground (see 02-2).
(b) Wipe clean the sliding rod of the jack.

Slowly retract and extend the jack 25 times and check that leakage does not exceed 10 drops
in the 25 cycles.
If it does, replace the jack.
(c) If applicable, lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see 02-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
/LJ^^ril
__
MIRAGE F
CHECK OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE AFTER HARD LANDING
1 - GENERAL
Definition of hard landing

-Modification 692 incorporated
- Landing which has caused tripping of the hard landing detector on one or both main U/C
legs.
- Modification 692 not incorporated

- Landing executed at a vertical speed exceeding the maximum value specified in the Flight
Manual.

- 350 mm (13.7795 in) ruler
- Clinometer
A Jack up the aircraft until its wheels are clear of the ground (see 02-2).
WARNING :
TAKE THE RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01-0).
B Open the main U/C doors by hand (see 02-0).
4- PROCEDURE
A Check of hard landing signs
(1) Modification 692 incorporated

- Remove the hard landing detector(s) which has (have) tripped and check its (their) setting :
- if the setting is below tolerances, replace the defective detector(s) and put the aircraft
back into service ;
- if the setting is correct, perform the inspections and checks described in paragraphs B, C
and D below.
(2) Modification 692 not incorporated

-Perform the inspections and checks described in paragraphs B, C and D below.
B Visual inspection
Even if only one detector has tripped, perform a visual inspection on both main U/C units, namely :
(1 ) U/C legs and their attachment points :
- cylinders,
- swivel tubes,
- rocker arms,
(2) wheels,
(3) U/C retraction jacks and their attachment points,
(4) telescopic rods and their attachment points,
(5) elastic rods and their attachment points.
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tfJ^-U /V\H\/-\V-7C. I
^&^rS<N
BREGUET AVIATION ,.,»..» «r-
<ST^ Restricted MANUAL 05
C - Thorough checks
-To be performed on the main U/C unit(s) involved in the tripping of the hard landing
detector (modification 692 incorporated) or,
-To be performed on both main U/C units (modification 692 not incorporated).
(1 ) Remove the wheels.
(2) Check the wheels using the eddy current method (see 05-5).
(3) Checking the straightness of the telescopic rod sliding rod

-Holding the ruler parallel with the axis of the sliding rod, place it first on the upper sur¬
face of the rod and then at 90° to this position.
The straightness error must not exceed 0.17 mm (0.0065 in) over the 350 mm
(13.7795 in) length checked.
-If the straightness error exceeds this, remove the undercarriage leg, telescopic rod and
elastic rod and send them to a heavy equipment workshop for geometric, dimensional and mé¬
tallurgie checks.
(4) Remove the shock absorber (see 05-1).
(5) Check condition of hinge pins after cleaning

-Check for peening.
-Check for distortion and flattening.
-Fit the pins back to the rocker arm and the swivel tube, without sliding the flange onto
the stop pin.
-Rotate each hinge pin through a complete turn: there must be no friction point.
If either of the two pins is damaged, remove the undercarriage leg, the telescopic rod and
the elastic rod and send them to a heavy equipment workshop (together with the shock absor¬
ber) for geometric, dimensional and métallurgie checks.
(6) If the pins are in satisfactory condition, reinstall the shock absorber (see 05-1).
(7) Level the aircraft using the quick method (see 02-2).
(8) Checking the camber angle

-Place a ruler along the upper edge of the spindle and, using a clinometer, check that the
camber angle is 1° ± 10'. If the check proves unsatisfactory, find the cause of the defect.
(9) Check undercarriage adjustment in up position (see 05-1 ). If the check proves unsatisfac¬
tory, find the cause of the defect.
(1 0) If a check proves unsatisfactory, remove the crash recorder to use the vertical speed re¬
cording (see 171).
CAUTION:
IF ONE OR BOTH MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG(S) IS (ARE) TO BE SENT TO NEXT
HIGHER REPAIR LINE SUBSEQUENT TO THE RESULTS OF THE CHECKS, DISCARD
THE CORRESPONDING TIRES.
D - Testing
-To be performed in any case (modification 692 incorporated or not).
(1 ) Reinstall the wheels (see 05-5).
AD
04-87 Restricted 0-1 37 H
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lLeà>^ZXL
BREGUET AVIATION ^3=°
MIRAGE F
(2) Check the undercarriage and door operating pressures (see 05-6).
(3) Check the undercarriage and door operating times (see 05-6).
(4) Reinstall the hard landing detector - modification 692 incorporated.

-Check that the indicator is out of view.
AA
04-87 Restricted 0-1 37 R
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c- -^
CHECK OF UNDERCARRIAGE AFTER BURSTING

OF BOTH TIRES OF ONE LEG
- Jack up the aircraft with its wheels clear of the ground (see 02-2).
- Remove the wheels with burst tires (see 05-5) and send them to the next higher repair line.
2- PROCEDURE
A If one or both tires have been torn to shreds, carefully inspect the aircraft structure for damage
which might have been caused by the projection of pieces of tire. Particular attention should be paid to
the undercarriage doors, the lower surfaces of wing flaps, the ventral fins and the surrounding aircraft
structure.
B Manually open the doors of the undercarriage in question (see 02-0).
WARNING :
TAKE THE RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0).
C Operations to be performed if main wheel tires have burst
(1 ) Remove the brake units (see 05-7).

- If the wheels have been distorted, send the brake units to the next higher repair line.
- If the wheels show no signs of distortion, check the removed rotor and stator assembly
(see 05-7).
(2) Check the lower section of the rocker arm, ensuring in particular that the connection unit, the
brake unit supply lines and the pressure switch are not damaged.
(3) Inspect the main undercarriage legs (see 05-1 ).
(4) Install the brake units (see 05-7).
(5) Install the replacement wheels (see 05-5).
(6) Check adjustment of the main undercarriage in the up position (see 05-1 ).
AA
11-81 Restricted 0-138 I
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^Z^
^gr^Z>
BREGUET AVIATION stZZsE^
MIRAGE F
h.amiiai nr-
NOTE : It is advisable to perform the last two checks at the same time, to prevent any incidents
should adjustment of the undercarriage in the up position be incorrect.
CAUTION :
IF PRESSURE IS ABNORMALLY HIGH DURING MOVEMENT, STOP THE SEQUENCE
AND LOOK FOR THE CAUSE OF THE ANOMALY (E.G. MISADJUSTMENT, DISTORTION,
ETC.).
D Operations to be performed if nose wheel tires have burst
(1 ) Inspect the nose undercarriage leg (see 05-3)

Ensure in particular that the speed detector, the static discharger, the shock absorber charging
-
valve and the microswitch control rod are not damaged.
(2) Check that there is no play in the swivel tube or the torque link hinges by moving the swiveling
assembly laterally by the wheel spindles.
(3) Install the replacement wheels (see 05-5).
(4) Check adjustment of the nose undercarriage in the up position (see 05-3).
CAUTION :
ETC.).
E Carry out functional tests of the undercarriage and warning system (see 05-6).
F Carry out an overall test of the antiskid system (see 05-7).
AB .
11-81 Restricted 0-138M |
BREGUET AVIATION
CHECK OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS

AFTER ARRESTER BARRIER ENGAGEMENT
- Jack up the aircraft with the wheels clear of the ground (see 02-2).
2- PROCEDURE
NOTE : The purpose of the operations listed below is to locate any damage which may have been
caused by engagement of the aircraft in the arrester barrier.
The cause of arrester barrier engagement must also be looked into.
A Procedure for main undercarriage
(1 ) Overall inspection of main undercarriage legs (see 05-1 ).
(2) Overall inspection of undercarriage doors (see 05-1 ).
(3) Adjustment check of undercarriage in up position (see 05-1 ).
(4) Check of undercarriage and door operating pressures (see 05-6).
CAUTION :

ETC.).
B Procedure for nose undercarriage
(1 ) Overall inspection of nose undercarriage leg (see 05-3).
(2) Overall inspection of undercarriage doors (see 05-4).
(3) Check of wheel alignment (see 05-3).
(4) Check of castor angle (see 05-3).
AA .
11-81 Restricted 0-139 j

BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(5) Check of adjustment of nose undercarriage in up position (see 05-3).
(6) Check of undercarriage and door operating pressures (see 05-6).
CAUTION :
IF PRESSURE IS ABNORMALLY HIGH DURING MOVEMENT, STOP THE SEQUENCE AND

LOOK FOR THE CAUSE OF THE ANOMALY (E.G. MISADJUSTMENT, DISTORTION, ETC.).
C Procedure for undercarriage assembly
- Carry out functional test of undercarriages and warning system (see 05-6).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^c.
ti ^J>^Z\L
_^
MIRAGE F
TELEFORCE FLEXIBLE CONTROLS
1 - GENERAL (figure 8)
- Ball bearing type flexible controls transmit push-pull movements and are used to provide tension
and compression linkage in the flight control system.
- Flexible controls are installed in aircraft for :
1 - brake chute (type S71 )
2 emergency U/C - doors (type S41 )
3 emergency/parking brake (type S41 )
4 engine (type S71)
5 nose U/C door unlocking (type S71 ).
2- DESCRIPTION (figure 9)
-Central strip 12, made of stainless steel, is integrally connected by pins to the two sliding
endpieces 1 1 ; appropriate endpieces, 1 and 32, are screwed to the ends of endpieces 1 1 and connected
to the power take-offs.

A mid-travel mark 4 is engraved on each sliding endpiece.
Endpiece 1 1 slides in tube 6, and is guided by bronze bush 5.
- Two stainless steel rails 20 serve as ball bearing guides and absorb loads through their positive
attachment to the fixed endpieces ; the latter consist of tube 6, screwed and locked by weld spots 13
onto endpiece head 14.
The rails and fixed endpieces are connected by means of rail endpiece 15 and support 16. This
assembly permits free rotation of the fixed endpiece in relation to the rails and the sheath ; it also
allows the rails to slightly slide in translation with respect to the sheath in order to compensate for the
differences in bending radiuses, thus enabling control distortion up to a minimum radius of 80 mm
(3.1 5 in) for type S41 , and of 200 mm (8 in) for type S71 .
- Safety disk 18 guides the central strip and maintains the distance between rails.
- The central strip slides along two lines of balls, which are kept apart by two crimped ring
cages 21.
- Flexible stainless steel sheath 22 covers the various components of the control. In each fixed
endpiece, the sheath is retained by stop 19 screwed and stuck onto it. The stop is covered with sleeve
nut 17 screwed onto endpiece head 14. Upon assembly, the various parts are sealed by applying sealant
PR 1321, and made non-removable by crimping the flange of sleeve nut 17 into four notches of
endpiece head 14.
Sleeve nut 17 is screwed onto endpiece head 14, after applying PR sealant providing for sealing
and safetying.
- Depending on the type of assembly, effective tightening is shown by :
-either a band of PR sealant covering the cylindrical section of the sleeve nut and of the
endpiece head (area marked M),
- or a painted line, used to visually check correct tightening.
The sheath only serves as a casing for the various control components and is not designed to
absorb the loads applied to the control.
- The metal sheath is covered with plastic sheath 23 for protection purposes.
- The sheath is fitted with rubber sleeves at the control bearing points on airframe, where it is
attached by means of rubber-coated collars (once the collars are tightened, the sheath can slide in
translation).
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f VW/^H / Y\ll\/,1\v_7L_ I
_^l_~
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^.^-^^
^-^ .
Restricted , »/*», « . 05
MANUAL. . «r-
TELEFLEX FLEXIBLE CONTROLS
1 - GENERAL( Figure 8)
-Ball bearing type flexible controls transmit push-pull movements and are used to provide
tension and compression linkages in the control systems.
-Flexible controls are installed in aircraft for:
1 - brake chute (type TFX1 5)
2 - emergency undercarriage (type TFX10)
3 - emergency/parking brake (type TFX1 0)
4 - engine (typeTFX15T)
5 - nose U/C door unlocking (type TFX1 5T)
2 - DESCRIPTION (figure 9)
The control consists of the following:
-a stainless steel central strip 12 connected by pins 37 to two sliding rods 11 at the end
of which are screwed appropriate end fittings 1 and 32 connected to the power take-offs.
-the surface of the sliding rods 11 is protected by a self-lubricating coating applied dur¬
ing production.
-two stainless steel rails 17 serving as ball races and absorbing the loads. These two rails
are guided by a shoe at each end and their travel is limited by guide stops 16, the back-and-
forth motion of which is restrained with a clearance between the adapter 1 9 and the end fit¬
ting 6. This assembly permits free rotation of the rod 11 with the strip 12 and rails 17; it also
allows the rails to slightly slide in translation with respect to the sheath in order to compensate
for the differences in bending radii, thus enabling control distortion up to a minimum radius of:
-150 mm (6 in) forTFXIO
-180 mm (7 in) forTFX15
-the controls are designed to operate with a maximum system angle "a" of 270°. The sys¬
tem angle is the angle determined by the position of the end fittings in place in the aircraft.
The following controls have a system angle a :
-emergency undercarriage: a = 180°,
-emergency/parking brake: a = 90°,
-nose U/C door unlocking: a = 141°.
-the central strip slides along two lines of balls which are kept apart by two cages 18
each consisting of two foil strips having stamped holes to accommodate the balls and assem¬
bled together by electric weld spots between the balls.
-the adapter 19 and the end fitting 6 are screwed together and safetied by a cup washer
13 crimped after tightening in two blind holes of the end fitting.
-the moving parts of the two types of controls are the same and have the same dimen¬
sions. The only difference rests in the outside diameter of the end fittings 6 and the threaded
portion of the sliding rods 1 1 :
-TFX10 : end fitting 6 = M8x1 threads
sliding rod 11= M4x0.7 threads
-TFX15 : end fitting 6 = M10x1 threads
sliding rod 1 1 = M6x1 threads,
-the fixed end fittings are crimped and should not rotate over the sheath,
-the sheath is used to maintain the spacing between the various components of the con¬
trol and to absorb the loads applied to the latter.
-the sheath is fitted with rubber sleeves at the control bearing points on the airframe,
where it is attached by means of rubber-coated collars (once the collars are tightened, the
sheath can slide in translation).
-each type of control has a different sheath:
-TFX10: right-hand twisted stainless steel strips 20 (230 mm pitch) maintained by a
left-hand twisted strip (5 mm pitch) protected by heat-shrinkable tubing 14.
-TFX15: right-hand twisted carbon steel wire strand 22 (220 mm pitch) placed bet¬
ween an inner Teflon tube 21 and an outer Teflon sleeve 23.
AK MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ>~^SL
BREGUET AVIATIONô^V^Ô
MIRAGE F
^Z-^1^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
- The sliding end-piece terminating in the pressurized zone of the cockpit is sealed by nut 2 fitted
with o-ring 3.
-In the pressurized zone, the sheath is sealed with seal 29 ; this seal is compressed between
washers 28 and 30 through nut 27 fitted on base 31 , itself attached to frame 10 and 1 1 .
- The fixed end-pieces are mounted in swivel structure supports (eye bolt 9 or swivel support 24) ;
these supports are secured with skirt-type nuts 8 and 10 and lock nut 7 fitted on either side of the ball
joint used for adjusting the control translation. Since the nut skirts are of different lengths, be careful
to mark the installation direction.
- Some controls are supplied preformed to angle ot. This preforming consists in adjusting the rail
length in the fixed end-pieces oriented according to their operational position in aircraft, and taking the
different bend radiuses into account.
The following controls are preformed :
Emergency U/C and doors : a = 180°

Emergency /parking brake : a = 90°
Nose U/C door unlock : a = 141°
3- OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When one of the sliding end-pieces is operated in traction or compression, the movement and stress
are transmitted to the central rod which slides on the balls ; the balls themselves slide on the rails made
integral with the fixed end-pieces. As a reaction, these rails absorb the load stresses transmitted by the
central rod.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' *\_/U< /V\ll\/-\VJ'L. I
BREGUET AVIATION Z<Â.
^ ^^-^^
^~=^ .
Restrcted , ...m,, ai
MANUAL nr-
05
-in. the pressurized zone of the cockpit, the sliding rod is sealed by a packing nut 2 fitted
with and O-ring 3 on each side of the control.
-in the pressurized zone, the sheath is sealed by a split seal 29 compressed between a
guide 28 and a washer 30 (in two parts to facilitate installation in the aircraft) by a nut 27 on
a mounting base 31 on the cockpit bulkhead.
-the fixed end fittings are mounted in structural swivel joint supports (eyebolt 9 or swivel
joint cage 24) with a skirt nut 10 and a locknut 7 on each side of the swivel joint used for ad¬
justing the control in translation.
-two grip flats 4 near the sliding rod threads at each end are at right angles to the central
strip and used to hold the latter when tightening the end fittings.
3 - OPERATING PRINCIPLE
When one of the sliding rods is operated in traction or compression, the movement and
the force are transmitted to the central strip which slides on the balls; the balls themselves roll
on the rails placed in the sheath. As a reaction, the sheath absorbs the load transmitted by the
central strip.
AD MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Détail A
(Ensemble de guidage)
(Guide assembly)
FIGURE 8- IMPLANTATION DES COMMANDES SOUPLES

LA YOUT OF FLEXIBLE CONTROLS
AF
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Restricted MANUAL 05 COUPE A
DETAIL D
SECTION A
.Flancs parallèles sans Côté embout Encoches Côté gaine
contrainte en vrillage End fitting side Notches Sheath side 15 _ 16
Sides parallel
without twist stress
Absence de
contrainte
en vrillage
No twist
stress
FIGURE 9 DESCRIPTION D'UNE COMMANDE SOUPLE TELEFORCE

DESCRIPTION OF A TELEFORCE FLEXIBLE CONTROL
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Flancs
parallèles
sans contrainte
en vrillage
Sides parallel
without
twist stress
Absence de contrainte
en vrillage
No twist stress
DETAIL B
FIGURE 9 - DESCRIPTION D'UNE COMMANDE SOUPLE TELEFLEX

DESCRIPTION OF A TELEFLEX FLEXIBLE CONTROL
AG MOD 1001 APPLIQUEE (INCORPORATED)
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" -** / Y \ I TV /-\V_7 L_ l
BREGUET AVIATION ^-~-
^ ^^^
^~*^ Restricted «,am.,ai
MANUAL 05«r-
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF TELEFORCE FLEXIBLE CONTROLS

(Figures 8 and 9)
1 - GENERALITES
This sheet describes :
para. 4 - The precautions to be taken when handling a flexible control,
para. 5 - The check to be performed before removal of a control,
para. 6 - The removal procedure.
para. 7 - The check to be performed before installation of a control,
para. 8 - The preparation of a control before installation,
para. 9 - The installation.
para. 10 - The check to be performed on a control installed in aircraft in non-connected
condition.
para. 1 1 - The adjustment and operating check.
para. 12 - The safetying of the sliding rod packing nuts with PR compound.
CAUTION:
ATTEXIBLE CONTROL ONCE REMOVED MUST MANDATORILY BE REPLACED B A
NEW ONE.
A - Standard tools
-Dial gauge.
-Dial gauge support (local manufacture).
-Spring scale.
B - Special tools
-Set of flexible control end fitting guards M31 144.
C - Materials
-Oil ARDROX 397-2.
. -Oil AIR 3512.
-Compound PR 1422A1/2.
-White spirit.
-According to the control concerned, open or remove the following.
A - Brake chute control (1, figure 8).
-Cockpit LH gunnel fairing.
-Engine (See 06-4).
-Access doors : 11-09, 13-00, 17-00, 17-01, 20-00, 22-00, 25-00, 26-00, 28-00,
29-00, 29-OOi, 30-00i, 31 -OOi, 35-00i, 36-00i, 38-00i, 39-OOi.
B - Emergency undercarriage control (2, figure 8).
-Ejection seat (See 09-4).
- Instrument panel (See 09-1 ).
-Control handle (See 05-6).
-Cockpit RH side panels : 04-04i, 05-04i, 07-04Î.
-Access door : 10-04, 11-04L 12-04, 13-04L 13-06i, 14-04i, 15-06, 17-06, 17-06L
18-06,19-05,23-05.
-Nose cone (See 03-2).
-Sealed panel at frame 2 (See 03-5).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ^JV-^MS / VU l\/-\V-7l_
BREGUET AVIATION ^£^ "Z&<^> - , ....,,... «r
^<-> ^=^> Restncted MANUAL 05
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF TELEFLEX FLEXIBLE CONTROLS

(Figures 8 and 9)
1 - GENERAL
NOTE: These controls constitute a new generation of flexible controls which remain inter¬
changeable with Teleforce flexible controls.
This sheet describes :
para. 4 - The precautions to be taken when handling a flexible control,
para. 5 - The check to be performed before removal of a control,
para. 6 - The removal procedure.
para. 7 - The check to be performed before installation of a control,
para. 8 - The preparation of a control before installation,
para. 9 - The installation.
para. 10 - The check to be performed on a control installed in aircraft in non-connected
condition.
para. 1 1 - The adjustment and operating check.
para. 12 - The safetying of the sliding rod packing nuts with PR compound.
CAUTION:
ATUEXIBLE CONTROL ONCE REMOVED MUST MANDATORILY BE REPLACED BY A
NEW ONE.
A - Standard tools
-Dial gauge.
-Dial gauge support (Local manufacture).
-Spring scale.
B - Special tools
-Set of flexible control end fitting guards M31144.
C - Materials
-Oil AIR 3512.
-Compound PR 1422A1/2.
-Adhesive tape, 12 mm (0.5 in) wide.
-According to the control concerned, open or remove the following.
A - Brake chute control (1, figure 8).
-Cockpit LH gunnel fairing.
-Engine (See 06-4).
-Access doors : 11-09, 13-00, 17-00, 17-01, 20-00, 22-00, 25-00, 26-00, 28-00,
29-00, 29-00i, 30-00i, 31 -OOi, 35-00i, 36-00i, 38-00i, 39-00i.
B - Emergency undercarriage control (2, figure 8).
-Instrument panel (See 09-1).
-Control handle (See 05-6).
-Cockpit RH side panels : 04-04i, 05-04i, 07-04L
-Access doors : 10-04, 11-04i, 12-04, 13-04i, 13-06L 14-04i, 15-06, 17-06, 17-06i,
18-06, 19-05, 23-05.
-Nose cone (See 03-2).
-Sealed panel at frame 2 (See 03-5).
AG MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLZS^-^L /Y\ll\/-\V_7|_. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ï3& ^<^> .,.,,,, nr
^ ^?~=^ Restricted MANUAL 05
C - Emergency/parking brake control (3, figure 8)

-Instrument panel (See 09-1).
-Cockpit LH side panels : 04-09L 05-08-1 i, 05-08-2i, 06-08i, 07-08L
-Emergency/parking brake control handle (See 05-7).
-Electrical cable channel on cockpit LH floor.
-Engine (See 06-4).
- Protective fairing of emergency brake selector valve.
-Access doors : 10-08, 11 -08i, 12-08, 13-06L 13-08i, 14-08i, 15-06, 17-06, 17-06L
18-06, 19-05, 1 9-07-1 i, 19-07-2L 22-06L 23-05, 23-08i, 25-05, 26-06.
D - Engine control (4, figure 8)
-Cockpit LH side panels : 05-08-2i, 07-08i.
-Engine (See 06-4).
-LH gun (See 15-1).
- Protective plates in LH cartridge case compartment.
-Access doors : 10-08, 11-08-i, 12-08, 13-06i, 13-08i, 14-08L 15-06, 17-06, 18-06,
19-07, 1 9-07-1 i, 19-07-2Î, 20-06, 20-06L 22-06L 23-06-1 i, 23-06-2Î, 23-07, 23-08L 24-06L
E - Nose undercarriage door unlocking control (5,figure 8)
-Nose undercarriage door (See 02-0).
-Access door 15.06.
4 - PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING A FLEXIBLE CONTROL
CAUTION:
WHEN A CONTROL IS UNCOILED ON A WORKBENCH OR DURING INSTALLATION
ON AIRCRAFT, IT IS IMPERATIVE :
-TO KEEP ANGLE OF PREFORMED CONTROLS :
-EMERGENCY U/C AND DOORS = 180°
-EMERGENCY/PARKING BRAKE = 90°
-NOSE U/C DOOR UNLOCKING CONTROL = 141°.
-NOT TO BEND THE CONTROL BY A RADIUS SMALLER, THAN THE MINIMUM PER¬
MITTED:
-200 mm (8 in) FOR S71 CONTROLS.
-80 mm (3.15 in) FOR S41 CONTROLS.
FOR TRANSPORT OR STORAGE, LONG CONTROL CAN BE COILED IN A FIGURE OF
"8", PROVIDED THE MINIMUM BFrTD~R£DIUS IS NOT EXCEEDED (EACH BEND
SHOULD NOT EXCEED 2709). ONLY' THIS TYPE OF COILING WILL PREVENT DAMAGE TO
INTERNAL TRACKS. ;
A - The control should always be handled with care (end fitting guards installed). Avoid
bending or twist stresses.
B - The sheath should never show wrinkles.
C - For removal and installation of a control in aircraft :
-rest the entire length of the control on a channel-shaped support,
-attach the guide cable to the control to be removed. For installation, use the guide cable
to guide the control through its full run and not to pull it,
-station an operator at each end of the control and a third one to guide it through the in¬
termediate access doors, in particular in the curves.
D - Should the front or the rear part of the control have to be removed after installation to
engage the end fittings in the swivel joint supports, perform this operation along a curved sec¬
tion of its run and in the same curvature plane to avoid damaging the internal tracksT
E - When tightening the skirt nuts and their locknuts onto the swivel joint support, make sure
that the sheath is not under twist stress.
NEVER HOLD THE END FITTING BY THE FLATS.
F - When tightening the locknut of the sliding rod end fitting, hold the rod by its flats with a
wrench to avoid twist stresses. After tightening, the flanges of the clevis end should be parallel
to the plane of the lever to which it is connected without undue bearing contact (detail D, fig¬
ure 9).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ^Ml /V\ll\/-\vL. I
^&^
BREGUET AVIATION
^-« Za**^
^.eo Restricted .jamiiai
MANUAL nr-
05
C - Emergency/parking brake control (3, figure 8)

-Instrument panel (See 09-1 ).
-Cockpit LH side panels: 04-09i, 05-08-1 i, 05-08-2i, 06-08i, 07-08L
-Emergency/parking brake control handle (See 05-7).
-Electrical cable channel on cockpit LH floor.
-Engine (See 06-4).
- Protective fairing of emergency brake selector valve.
-Access doors: 10-08, 1f-08i, 12-08, 13-06i, 13-08Ï, 14-08i, 15-06, 17-06, 17-06i,
18-06, 19-05, 1 9-07-1 i, 19-07-2L 22-06i, 23-05, 23-08i, 25-05, 26-06.
D - Engine control (4, figure 8)
-Cockpit LH side panels : 05-08-2i, 07-08L
-Engine (See 06-4).
-LH gun (See 15-1).
- Protective plates in LH cartridge case compartment.
-Access doors: 10-08, 11-08i, 12-08, 13-06i, 13-08i, 14-08L 15-06, 17-06, 18-06,
19-07, 1 9-07-1 i, 19-07-2Î, 20-06, 20-06i, 22-06», 23-06-1 i, 23-06-2J, 23-07, 23-08i, 24-06i.
E - Nose undercarriage door unlocking control (5, figure 8)
-Nose undercarriage door (See 02-0).
-Access door 1 5-06.
4 -PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING A FLEXIBLE CONTROL
CAUTION:
WHEN A CONTROL IS UNCOILED ON A WORKBENCH OR DURING INSTALLATION
ON AIRCRAFT, IT IS IMPERATIVE :
-NOT TO BEND THE CONTROL BY A RADIUS SMALLER THAN THE MINIMUM PER¬
MITTED:
180 mm (7 in) FOR TFX15 CONTROLS,
150 mm (6 in) FOR TFX10 CONTROLS.
-FOR TRANSPORT OR STORAGE, LONG CONTROLS CAN BE COILED IN A FIGURE
OF "8", PROVIDED A BEND RADIUS AT LEAST EQUAL IO 1.6 TIMES THL MINIMUM RA¬
DIUS IS OBSERVED (EACH BEND SHOULD NOT EXCEED 270°). ONLY THIS TYPE OF
COILING WILL PREVENT DAMAGE TO INTERNAL TRACKS.
A - The control should always be handled with care (end fitting guards installed). Avoid
bending or twist stresses.
B - The sheath should never show wrinkles.
C - For removal and installation of a control in aircraft:
-rest the entire length of the control on a channel-shaped support,
-attach the guide cable to the control to be removed. For installation, use the guide cable
to guide the control through its full run and not to pull it.
-station an operator at each of the control and a third one to guide it through the in¬
termediate access doors, in particular in the curves.
D - Should the front or the rear part of the control have to be removed after installation to
engage the end fittings in the swivel joint supports, perform this operation along a curved sec¬
tion of its travel, and in the same curvature piane, ;o avoid damaging the internal tracks.
E - When tightening the skirt nuts and their locknuts onto the swivel joint support, make sure
that the sheath is not under twist stress.
NEVER HOLD THE CONTROL BY THE END FITTING WITH A TOOL.
F - When tightening the locknut of the sliding rod end fitting, hold the rod by its end fittings
with a wrench to avoid twist stresses. After tightening, the flanges of the clevis end should be
parallel to the plane of the lever to which it is connected without undue bearing contact (de¬
tail A).
AC MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" JK /V\H\/-\V-7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION^<4
^ j5^0
J=?-^ _ .
Restrjcted , »«amiiai
MANUAL «rr
05
5 - CHECK BEFORE REMOVAL
-Check axial play of swivel joints in their supports (See detail E, figure 9).
-Check that skirt nuts (8) or (10) and their locknuts (7) are correctly tightened.
-Attach a dial gauge on an adjacent structure element or on the sheath end fitting
by means of a suitable support so as to feel the relative play between swivel joint 33 and its
cage (24).
-Operate the control by hand along its length.
-The dial guage must indicate a play < 0.2 mm (0.007874 in).
-Should the play be greater than this tolerance value, the cage of the swivel joint
support or the complete eyebolt must be changed.
NOTE: For the note undercarriage door unlocking control, this check may be performed on
workbench with the control removed (see Note 2, para. 6-B(5)).
6 - REMOVAL
A - General instructions
NOTE: For the nose U/C door unlocking control, apply the specific instructions in para. B.
-Disconnect and remove connecting end fittings (1) and (32) and their locknuts.
- Remove:
-packing nuts (2) and their seals (3) if applicable,
-skirt nuts (8) and their locknuts (7) forward of the swivel joint support (note the
position of the long -skirt and short-skirt nuts),
-the components specified in the instructions specific to each control.
-Modification 696 not incorporated:
-Remove the rubberized compound collar safetying the sleeve nuts of the end fit¬
tings (M, figure 9) (pulling the control through the attaching clamps may prove difficult be¬
cause of the thickness of this collar).
- Remove cockpit seal (detail F, figure 9) (access doors 1 0-04, 1 0-08, 1 1 -09).
-Unscrew packing nut (27), then remove seal (29) and its thrust washers (28) and (30).
Apply a light coat of french chalk to the sheath to facilitate the sliding motion of the seal dur¬
ing withdrawal of the control.
-Pull the control to free the fixed end" fittings from their swivel joint supports or remove
the swivel joint support or eyebolt from the structure in accordance with the instructions spe¬
cific to each control.
-Remove skirt nut (8) and its locknut (7) aft of the swivel joint support.
-Place an appropriate guard on each end fitting (spacer at the front, guard with cable at
the rear).
-Withdraw the control in the direction indicated in the instructions specific to each con¬
trol and leave the guide cable in place to facilitate the installation of the new control.
-Reinstall skirt nuts (8) or (10) and their locknuts (7) as well as the packing nuts and
their seals (if applicable) on the fixed end fittings of the removed control.
-Recover cockpit sealing packing nut (27, detail F) for use with the new control to be in¬
stalled (except for the emergency undercarriage and door control since the nut involved can¬
not be removed).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTf ^ -" ^ /Y\II\/-\V^L.
BREGUET AVIATION Û-~ ^^-ô _ . , ,..,,.,., -..-
^w. -*-^ Restricted MANUAL 05
5 - CHECK BEFORE REMOVAL
-Check axial play of swivel joints in their supports (See detail B, figure 9).
-Check that skirt nuts (10) and their locknuts (7) are correctly tightened.
-Attach a dial gauge on an adjacent structure element or on the sheath end fitting
by means of a suitable support so as to feel the relative play between swivel joint (33) and its
cage (24).
-Operate the control by hand along its length.
-The dial gauge must indicate a play < 0.2 mm (0.007874 in).
-Should the play be greater than this tolerance value the cage of the swivel joint
support or the complete eyebolt must be changed.
NOTE: For the nose undercarriage door unlocking control, this check may be performed on
workbench with the control removed (See Note, para. .6-13 (5))
6 - REMOVAL
NOTE: For the nose U/C door unlocking control, apply the specific instructions in para. B.
-Disconnect and remove connecting end fittings (1) and (32) and their locknuts.
- Remove:
-packing nuts (2) and their seals (3),
-skirt nuts (8) and their locknuts (7) forward of the swivel joint support,
-the components specified in the instructions specific to each control.
-Remove the cockpit seal (detail C, figure 9) (access doors 10-04, 10-08, 11-09).
-Unscrew packing nut (27), then recover half-guides (28),, split seal (29) and half-
washers (30) for use with the new control to be installed.
-Reinstall the packing nut on mounting base (31).
-Pull the control to free the fixed end fittings from their swivel joint supports or remove
the swivel joint support or eyebolt from the structure in accordance with the instructions spe¬
cific to each control.
-Remove skirt nut (8) and its locknut (7) aft of the swivel joint support.
-Place an appropriate guard on each end fitting (spacer at the front, guard with cable at
the rear).
-Withdraw the control in the direction indicated in the instructions specific to each con¬
trol and leave the guide cable in place to facilitate the installation of the new control.
-Reinstall the skirt nuts and their locknuts as well as the packing nuts and their seals on
the fixed end fittings of the removed control.

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f " M * AAIRAOF F
/Y\II\AAVJ7I_ T
breguet aviation Û ^ Restricted MANUAL 05
B - Spécifie instructions
(1 ) Brake chute control
- Remove:
-the cockpit end swivel eyebolt at its attachment point to the structure,
-the guide assembly on brake chute hook mechanism end (18-19, detail A,
figure 8),
-the attaching clamp under frame 36,
-Pull the control forward to free the rear end fitting from the guide assembly and attach
the guard with cable.
-Pull the control aft to free its passage in the cockpit seal at frame 10 and attach the spa¬
cer.
-Withdraw the control at the front through door 1 1 .09.
(2) Emergency undercarriage control
-Remove:
-the fasteners attaching the electrical wiring strands and their guards to the cockpit
floor,
-the seven clamps attaching the sheath in the cockpit (one of which accessible
through pressure bulkhead at frame 2),
-the attaching clamp to the right of door 1 0.04.
-Pull the control forward to free the rear end fitting from the swivel joint support and at¬
tach the guard with cable.
-Pull the control aft to free the portion routed in the cockpit, then withdraw it forward in
the cockpit.
(3) Emergency/parking brake control
-Pull the control aft to free the front end fitting from its swivel joint support, then from
the passage through frame 7 and attach the spacer.
-PuJI the control forward to free the rear end fitting and attach the guard with cable.
-Withdraw the control forward in the cockpit.
(4) Engine control
-Remove the engine end swivel eyebolt and attach the guard with cable.
-Pull the control aft to free the front end fitting from the throttle swivel joint support and
attach the spacer.
(5) Nose U/C door unlocking control
NOTE : 1 For the sole purpose of facilitating the maintenance operations (adjustment of
control or removal/installation of equipment in compartment), it is tolerated to re¬
moye and reinstall the same control, complete with its two swivel joint supports^
in the same aircraft ; this is the only exception to the general ruleT
2 The check of the support swivel joint play (para. 5) and the replacement of a
swivel joint cage (para. 8-D), if necessary, may be facilitated if the operation is
performed with the control removed and placed on a workbench.
-Remove the protective gutter located under the evaporator and the sheath attaching
clamp.
-Disconnect the connecting end fittings at each end without altering their adjustment.
-Remove the swivel joint supports from the structure at the center and rear locks (8 mm
A/F screws and flat washers).
-Remove the control complete with its swivel joint supports and lay it flat on a work¬
bench, observing the precautions specified in para. 4.
-If the same control is to be reinstalled:
DO NOT ALTER THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE SWIVEL JOINT SUPPORTS AND
CLEVIS ENDS.
-If the control is to be replaced:
-Remove the connecting end fittings and the swivel joint supports on workbench.
Note the position of the long-skirt and short-skirt nuts.
-Reinstall the skirt nuts and their locknuts as well as the packing nuts on the re¬
moved control.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION î_~ ê-^^> .. - ^ . «/iamiiai ne
^k^ Restricted MANUAL 05
B - Specific instructions
(1) Brake chute control:
- Remove:
-the cockpit end swivel eyebolt at its attachment point to the structure,
-the guide assembly on brake chute hook mechanism (18-19, detail A, figure 8),
-the attaching clamp under frame 36.
-Pull the control forward to free the rear end fitting from the guide assembly and attach
the guard with cable.
-Pull the control aft to free its passage in the cockpit seal at frame 10 and attach the spa¬
cer.
-Withdraw the control at the front through door 1 1 .09.

-Remove:
-the fasteners attaching the electrical wiring strands and their guards to the cockpit
floor,
-the seven clamps attaching the sheath in the cockpit (one of which accessible
through pressure bulkhead at frame 2),
-the attaching clamp to the right of door 10.04.
-Pull the control forward to free the rear end fitting from the swivel joint support and at¬
tach the guard with cable.
-Pull the control aft to free the portion routed in the cockpit, then withdraw it forward in
the cockpit.
- Pull the control aft to free the front end fitting from its swivel joint support, then from
the passage through frame 7 and attach the spacer.
-Pull the control forward to free the rear end fitting and attach the guard with cable.
(4) Engine control
-Remove the engine end swivel eyebolt and attach the guard with cable.
-Pull the control aft to free the front end fitting from the throttle swivel joint support and
attach the spacer.
NOTE : 1 For the sole purpose of facilitating the maintenance operations (adjustment of
control or removal/installation of equipment in compartment) it is tolerated to re¬
moye and reinstall the same control, complete with its two swivel joint supports^
jn the same aircraft ; this is the only exception to the general rule.
2 The check of the support swivel joint play (para. 5) and the replacement of a
swivel joint cage (para. 8-C), if necessary, may be facilitated if the operation is
performed with the control removed and placed on a workbench.
-Remove the protective gutter located under the evaporator and the sheath attaching
clamp.
-Disconnect the connecting end fittings at each end without altering their adjustment.
-Remove the swivel joint supports from the structure at the center and rear locks (8 mm
A/F screws and flat washers).
-Remove the control complete with its swivel joint supports and lay it flat on a work¬
bench, observing the precautions specified in para. 4.
-If the same control is to be reinstalled:
DO NOT ALTER THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE SWIVEL JOINT SUPPORTS AND CLEVIS
ENDS.
-If the control is to be replaced:
-Remove the connecting end fittings and the swivel joint supports on workbench.
Note the position of the long-skirt and short-skirt nuts.
-Reinstall the skirt nuts and their locknuts as well as the packing nuts on the re¬
moved control.
AF MOD 1001 INCORPORATED
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ M * lV\\l\r\\J7L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^c_~ ,^«=0 ,...,.,
^ ^^-^ .
Restricted MANUAL rt05
r
7 - CHECK OF CONTROL BEFORE INSTALLATION
A - Lay the control on a workbench, observing the precautions specified in para. 4.
B - Remove the storage protectors from the end fittings ; clean the sliding rods with a dry
clean cloth and slightly lubricate them with ARDROX 397-2 oil.
C - Total travel check (detail G, figure 9)
-Actuate the control through its full range of travel to make sure that it is free from bind¬
ing.
-Measure the length of the sliding rod between its end and the end of the fixed end fit¬
ting (with packing nut loosened):
-in extended position (dimension d),

-in retracted position (dimension d').
-Take these measurements at each end.

-Calculate the total travel: C = d - d'.
-Check that travel is the same at both ends and within the tolerances tabulated hereafter.
D - Mid-travel position check

-Place the control in mid-travel position by aligning the mid-travel mark of one end with
the end of the fixed end fitting (with packing nut and its seal loosened). Check that the over¬
lap of the mid-travel mark at the other end is within a tolerance of 0 to 3 mm (0.1 18 in).
If this requirement is not met, very gently subject the control to a wave motion through its full
length to seat its components, and perform another check.
If this requirement is not met again, forward the control to the next higher repair line.
-Place the control in mid-travel position, then retract the sliding end fitting by half the
useful travel (see table hereafter) and make sure that the sliding rod flat does not enter the
packing nut.
-Otherwise, forward the control to the next higher repair line.
-Perform this check at both ends.
AA
03-88 Restricted 0- 1 45 H
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f *\ -» ck /V\ll\ AWJ'L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-~
^>, ^^,
^-^ Restricted .«amiiai
MANUAL 05«c
7 - CHECK OF CONTROL BEFORE INSTALLATION

A - Lay the control on a workbench, observing the precautions specified in para. 4.
B - Remove the storage protectors from the end fittings. Make sure that sliding rods are per¬
fectly clean ; very lightly wipe them with a clean dry cloth, taking care not to damage the self-
lubrificating coating.
C - Actuate the control through its full range of travel to make sure that the internal tracks are
correctly aligned and the componed are not twisted.
NOTE: When actuating the control by hand for the first time, evidence of binding may be felt
at ends of travel ; this may be due to twisting or offsetting of the internal moving
components caused by control storage. To reposition the components, proceed as fol¬
lows :
-Check the alignment of the sliding rod operating flats at each end ; if they are out of
alignment, adjust the control so that the flats are as horizontal as possible (the central strip is
then vertical). Firmly hold one end of the control and exert a gentle side whipping motion at
the other end along the control curvature plane to untwist the internal components. Repeat the
operation successively from one side then the other side.
-If the flats do not return to the same plane and the control remains stiff, send the control
to the next higher repair line.
-When the flats are in the same plane, subject the control to compression by pushing
fully in so as to obtain the total travel at each end and thereby reset the tracks at the same
level.
D - Total travel check (detail D, figure 9)
-Measure the length of the sliding rod between the start of the threads and the end of the
fixed end fitting (with packing nut loosened):
-in extended position (dimension d),

-in retracted position (dimension d').
-Take these measurements at each end.
-Calculate the total travel: C = d - d'.
-Check that travel is'the same at both ends and within the tolerances tabulated hereafter.

BREGUET AVIATION
E - Record the mid-travel mark overlap dimensions and the total travel dimensions for use
during the check of the control when installed in the aircraft in non-connected condition
(para. 10).
F - Operating force check
-Hand-tighten the packing nuts fitted with their seals (if applicable).
-Attach a spring scale to the sliding rod on control lever side and check that operating
forces in traction and in compression are within the tolerances tabulated hereafter.
NOTE: During these operations, observe the preforming angle of the controls.
G - Forces and travels of controls on workbench
Travel
Force
Control daN Useful in aircraft
Total on bench
(Ib.f) (mm-in)
80 to 95
Brake chute < 1.240 (2.78) (3.1 5 to 3.74)
67 (2.637)
100 to 115
Emergency undercarriage < 1 (2.248)
(3.93 to 4.52)
90 (3.54)
60 to 75
Emergency/parking brake £1,1 (2.472) (2.36 to 2.95) 50 ±1 (1.96 ±0.039)
1 20 to 1 35
Engine £ 0.9 (2.0232)
(4.72 to 5.31 )
107.5 (4.232)
30 to 45
Nose undercarriage door < 0.3 (0.674) (1.18 to 1.77) 24 ±2 (0.944 ±0.078)
unlocking
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
E - Mid-travel position check

-From the dimensions measured in para. D above, calculate the length of the extended
rod in mid-travel position as follows :
y - d + d
Perform this operation with the dimensions taken at each end, using :
- X for end fitting at control handle end,
- X' for end fitting at mechanism end.
These dimensions should be within the tolerances of the tabulated X and X' dimensions.
-Set the sliding rod of the control handle side end fitting to dimension X indicated in the
table.
Check that the length of the rod at the other end is within the tolerances for dimension X' in¬
dicated in the table.
-If these dimensions are not obtained, manipulate the control once again as described in
para. C above so that the components are properly positioned.
If the tolerances are not complied with, send the control to the next higher repair line.
-Place the control in mid-travel position, then retract the sliding end fitting by half the
useful travel (see table hereafter) and make sure that the sliding rod flat does not enter the
packing nut.
-Otherwise, forward the control to the next higher repair line.
Perform this check at both ends.
F - Record the mid-travel mark overlap dimensions and the total travel dimensions for use
during the check of the control when installed in the aircraft in non-connected condition
(para. 10).
MID-TRAVEL mm (in) TRAVEL mm (in)
Control Control Mechanism Total Useful

handle end on in
end Dimension X' workbench aircraft
Dimension X (REF)
50 +3
> 80 67
Brake chute 70 (2.73)
(3.15) (2.637)
o.9:°-118 )
Emergency
fi677+3
+0 £ 100 90
80 (3.12)
undercarriage ,-,,+0.118 v (3.937) (3.54)
(2.6 +0 )
-.., +3
Emergency/parking brake
32 -HO > 60 50 ± 1
32 (1 .24)
(2.36) (1.96 ± 0.039)
d.24:°-118)
70 +3
> 120 107,5
Engine 85 (3.3)
._ __+0.118. (4.72) (4.232)
(2.75 +Q )
15+3 > 30 24 ± 2
Nose undercarriage door unlocking 15 (0.5)
(1.18) (0.944 ± 0.078)
(0.5 :°-118 ,

MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
8 - PREPARATION OF CONTROL BEFORE INSTALLATION
A - From fixed end fittings at each end of the control, remove:
-the packing nut and its seal (if applicable) ; use care not to damage the seal on the slid¬
ing rod threads,
-the skirt nuts and their locknuts.
B - Slide into place cockpit packing nut (27, detail F), taken from the removed control (en¬
gage the nut on shoulder washer (28, detail F) side ; this arrangement determines the orien¬
tation of the control in aircraft).
-Ligthly chalk the part of the sheath over which the seal will have to slide during installa¬
tion of the control.
C - Screw suitable guard over each end of the control, taking into account the installation
a
direction and the orientation of the control in aircraft.
D - If the swivel joint of a swivel joint support has been found defective during pre-removal
check (para. 5), replace swivel joint cage (24).
-Install the swivel joint cage on the support, observing the orientation of the notches, on
sheath side or on end fitting side, according to the instructions specific to each control. Tor¬
que nut (26) and locknut (25) to required value (table - para. F).
E - Lightly lubricate (oil AIR 3512) the swivel joint and check for correct swiveling. If the
least amount of binding or friction occurs, replace the swivel joint cage or the complete swivel
bolt.
F - Torque values for swivel joint support nuts and locknuts.
Nut (26) and

Skirt
Locknut (7) Locknut (25) for
nut (10) or (8) swivel joint
Control on swivel joint
on skirt nut
m.daN (ft.lb) cage on support
m.daN (ft.lb)
m.daN (ft.lb)
-Brake chute -Not applicable
-Engine
-Nose undercarriage 0.15(1.1) 0.6 (4.4) 1.5(11)
door unlocking
-Emergency
undercarriage
- Emergency/ 0.1 (0.73) 0.4 (2.95) 0.5 (3.6)
parking brake
AD
BREGUET AVIATION
G - Operating force check

Hand-tighten the packing nut complete with its seal at each end of the control. Connect
a spring scale to the sliding rod on control lever side and check that operating forces in trac¬
tion and in compression are within the tolerances of the following table.
H - Operating forces of controls on workbench
Control Force daN (Ibf)
Brake chute < 1.240 (2.78)

Emergency undercarriage < 0.995 (2.236)
Emergency/parking brake < 1 .1 (2.472)
Engine < 0.9 (2.0232)
Nose undercarriage door unlocking £0.3 (0.674)
8 - PREPARATION OF CONTROL BEFORE INSTALLATION
A - From fixed end fittings at each end of the control, remove:
-The packing nut and its seal. Use care not to damage the seal on the sliding rod
threads ; cover the threads with adhesive tape.
NOTE: The nose undercarriage door unlocking control is not provided with a packing nut with
seal.
-The skirt nuts and their locknuts.

B - Screw a suitable guard over each end of the control, taking into account the installation
direction and the orientation of the control in aircraft.
C - If the swivel joint of a swivel joint support has been found defective during pre-removal
check (para. 5), replace swivel joint cage (24).
-Install the swivel joint cage on the support, observing the orientation of the notches, on
sheath side or on end fitting side, according to the instructions specific to each control
(para. 9-B). Torque nut 26 and locknut 25 to required value (table para. E).
D - Lightly lubricate (oil Air 3512) the swivel joint and check for correct swiveling. If the
least amount of binding or friction occurs, replace the swivel joint cage or the complete swivel
bolt.
E - Torque values for swivel joint support nuts and locknuts.
Nut (26) and

Skirt locknut (25) for
Locknut (7) on
nut (10) on swivel joint
skirt nut
swivel joint m.daN (ft/lb)
cage on
m.daN (ft/lb) support
m.daN (ft/lb)
-Brake chute -Not applicable
-Engine
-Nose indercarriage 0.15(1.1) 0.6 (4.4) 1.5 (11)
door unlocking
-Emergency
undercarriage
- Emergency/ 0.1 (0.73) 0.4 (2.95) 0.5 (3.6)
parking brake
AG MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ J] ** l\/-\V-7L_
BREGUET AVIATION ^£c^>
^ ^*=^>
^?-^ Restricted n/i a m
i i a i
MANUAL r\c
05
9 - INSTALLATION
NOTE: For the nose undercarriage door unlocking control, see instructions specific to this
control.
-Orientate the control in accordance with the specific instructions and attach the guide
cable to the guard of the end fitting corresponding to the installation direction.
-Engage the control in the stucture ; using the guide cable, draw it through its attaching
clamps and through the fame passages until it lies along the whole length of its run, taking the
precautions specified in para. (4).
-Screw and torque (para. 8) the skirt nuts and their locknuts aft of the swivel joint sup¬
port while adjusting the position of the support to dimensions I and I' indicated in the specific
instructions and positioning the long-skirt and short-skirt nuts as noted during removal.
NOTE: Dimensions "I" and T" are theoretical dimensions that may be readjusted during ad¬
justment of the control.
-Engage the fixed end fittings in the swivel joint supports by applying the removal proce¬
dure in reverse way.
-Screw and torque (para. 8) the skirt nuts forward of the swivel joint support, then screw
and torque (para. 8) the locknut onto the skirt nut.
-Attach to the structure the swivel joint supports removed during the removal procedure,
paying attention to the orientation of the swivel joint notches as indicated in the specific in¬
structions.
-Reinstall the cockpit seal (detail F, figure 9).
-Place the seal between its thrust washers in the structure mounting base and hand-
tighten the packing nut.
-Back off the packing nut, then retighten to positive contact and by an additional
1 /6th turn.
-Check the control installed in aircraft in non-connected condition in accordance with

para. 10.
AA
MIRAGE F
yû-
BREGUET AVIATION
^«. ^s*-*^
-«-sj ^ . ^
Restricted . . A mi i a i ne
MANUAL 05
9 - INSTALLATION
NOTE: For the nose undercarriage door unlocking control, see instructions specific to this
control.
-Check that cockpit sealing packing nut 27 is correctly tightened on its mounting base.
-Orientate the control in accordance with the specific instructions and attach the guide
cable to the guard of the end fitting corresponding to the installation direction.
-Engage the control in the structure ; using the guide cable, draw it through its attaching
clamps and through the frame passages until it lies along the whole length of its run, taking
the precautions specified in para. 4.
NOTE: The slight difference in diameter between the TELEFORCE and TELEFLEX controls
does not necessitate the replacement of the attaching clamps.
-Screw and torque (para. 8) the skirt nuts and their locknuts aft of the swivel joint sup¬
port while adjusting the position of the support to dimensions I and I' indicated in the specific
instructions.
NOTE: Dimensions I and I' are theoretical dimensions that may be readjusted during adjuste-
ment of the control.
- Engage the fixed end fittings in the swivel joint supports by applying the removal proce¬
dure in reverse way.
-Screw and torque (para. 8) the skirt nuts forward of the swivel joint support, then screw
and torque (para. 8) the locknut onto the skirt nut.
-Attach to the structure the swivel joint supports removed during the removal procedure,
paying attention to the orientation of the swivel joint notches as indicated in the specific in¬
structions.
-Reinstall the cockpit seal (detail F, figure 9).
-Unscrew packing nut (27) and successively install half-washers (30), split seal
(29) and half-guides (27).
-Fully tighten the packing nut by hand to ensure correct seating of the seal and of
its thrust parts around the sheath.
-Back off the packing nut, then retighten to positive contact and by an additional
1/6th turn.
para. 10.

03-88 Restricted 0-146 H
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ " « / V \ ll\ /-\ V-7 L_
breguet aviation ^ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
B Specific instructions
-Observe the swivel joint support adjustment dimensions and the specific points formu¬
lated below.
(1 ) Brake chute control
(a) Adjust the fixed end fittings in their swivel joint supports,
-in cockpit : dimension I = 80.5 mm (3.16 in),
-at mechanism : dimension I' = 30 mm (1.18 in).
(b) Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control,

-in cockpit : on sheath side,
-at mechanism : not applicable.
(c) Orientate the control.

-Cockpit sealing packing nut on outer side of cockpit.
(d) Reinstall the swivel eyebolt at cockpit end and the guide assembly at mechanism end.
(e) Specific points

-Finally screw the mechanism end packing nut and safety it with PR compound in accor¬
dance with para. 12.
-in cockpit : (control handle : see 05-6),

-in cockpit : not applicable,
-at mechanism : notches on end fitting side.
(c) Orientate the control
-Control handle bottom nut on cockpit side.
(a) Adjust the fixed end fittings in their swivel joint supports
-at mechanism : dimension I' = 44.5 mm (1.75 in).
(b) Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control

-in cockpit : notches on sheath side,
(c) Orientate the control

-Cockpit sealing packing nut on inner side of cockpit.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ^-^-tt I YUJN. AAwL-
BREGUET AVIATION ^<fg& ^5»sQs _ . ^ , ,...,,,., nr
^*T^ RestrfCtec/ MANUAL 05
B - Specific instructions
-Observe the swivel joint support adjustment dimensions and the specific points formu¬
lated below.
(1 Brake chute control
(a Adjust the fixed end fittings in their swivel joint supports,

-in front cockpit : dimension I = 80.5 mm (3.16 in),
(b Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control,

-in cockpit : on sheath side,
-at mechanism : not applicable.
(c Orientate the control.

-Longer fixed end fitting at cockpit end.
(d Reinstall the swivel eyebolt at cockpit end and the guide assembly at mechanism end.
(e Specific points
-Finally screw the mechanism end packing nut with seal and safety it with PR compound
in accordance with para. 1 2.
(2 Emergency undercarriage control
(a Adjust the fixed end fittings in their swivel joint supports.

-in cockpit : (control handle : see 05-6),
(b Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control

-in cockpit : not applicable,
(c Orientate the control

-Control handle bottom nut on cockpit side.
(3 Emergency/parking brake control
(a Adjust the fixed end fittings in their swivel joint supports,

-at mechanism : dimension I' = 44.5 mm (1.75 in).
(b Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control.

-in cockpit : notches on sheath side.
(c Orientate the control

-Reference label on pilot side.
-Also mark the position of the pressure seal protective sleeves.

03-88 Restricted 0-146 R
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* W_fl_JK /V\II\/-\V^L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^ ^s-^^ . . . ... . . . nr-
^ .«î Restrcted MANUAL 05
(4) Engine control
-in cockpit : dimension I = 120 mm (4.72 in),
-at engine : dimension I' = 89 mm (3.5 in).

-at engine : notches on sheath side.

-Cockpit sealing packing nut on inner side of cockpit.
(d) Reinstall the swivel eyebolt at engine end.
(e) Specific points

-At engine compartment end, the control should protrude by 790 to 800 mm (31 .1 to
31 .5 in) from frame 25.
(a) If the control is replaced, fit the new control with its swivel joint supports.
-Adjust the fixed end fittings in their swivel joint supports.
-at center lock : dimension I = 55 mm (2.16 in) (long fixed end fitting),
-at rear lock : dimension I' = 34 mm (1.33 in) (short fixed end fitting),
-observe the position of the long-skirt and short-skirt nuts noted during removal.
-orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control.
-at center lock : notches on sheath side,
-at rear lock : notches on end fitting side.
-install the control assembly in accordance with following para. (b).
-adjust the nose U/C door unlocking control (see 05-4).
(b) If the original control is reinstall :
- Reinstall the control and attach its two swivel joint supports to the structure, taking the
precautions specified in para. 4.
-Reinstall the protective channel under the evaporator and the sheath attaching clamp.
para. 10.
-Reconnect the clevis ends to the levers of the locks.
-Check :
-pinning of the locks,
-lock unlocking sequence,
-clearance between hydraulic stop and mechanical stop (see 05-4).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT j" ^ " "* /Y\ll\/Awl_
breguet aviation Û ^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
(4) Engine control

-Longer sliding rod at cockpit end.
(e) Specific points.

-At engine compartment end, the control should protrude by 790 to 800 mm (31.1 to
31 .5 in) from frame 25.
-at center lock .: dimension I = 55 mm (2.16 in), (long fixed end fitting),
-at rear lock : dimension I' = 34 mm (1 .33 in), (short fixed end fitting),
-Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control,
-Install the control assembly in accordance with following para. (b).
-Adjust the nose U/C door unlocking control (see 05-4).
If the original control is reinstalled:
-Reinstall the control and attach its two swivel joint supports to the structure, taking the
para. 10..
-Reconnect the clevis ends to the levers of thé locks.
-Check :

-clearance between hydraulic stop and mechanical stop (see. 05-4).
AH MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^.
^ ^=?"=*o
^s^. .
Restricted . , A mi i a i
MANUAL ne
05
10- CHECK TO BE PERFORMED ON CONTROL INSTALLED IN AIRCRAFT IN NON-CON¬

NECTED CONDITION
A - Check the mid-travel position and the total travel in accordance with para. 7. Make sure
that they are within the same tolerances.
B - Check the control operating forces as follows :
-Reinstall the packing nuts and their seals (if applicable), screwed fingertight.
- For the emergency/parking brake control :
Check the forces in traction successively at each end of the control.
- For the other controls :
Check the forces in traction and in compression at control lever end.
-The operating forces should satisfy the following tolerance requirements :
Control Force daN (Ib.f)
Brake chute <2.2 (4.94)

Emergency undercarriage < 1 .8 (4.04)
Emergency/parking brake < 1 .8 (4.04)
Engine £2.5 (5.61)
Nose U/C door unlocking < 1 (2.24)
1 1 - ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATING CHECK
-Perform the adjustment and operating check in accordance with the worksheets specific
to each control :
- nose U/C door unlocking 05-4

- emergency undercarriage 05-6
- emergency/parking brake 05-7
- brake chute 05-9
- engine 06-5
AE
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //Jà-d-^fS /Y\ 1 1\ /"VO' L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^&^ ^5<N> _ . .. . . . .
.. . nr-
^v> ^=»^> Restricted MANUAL 05
10- CHECK TO BE PERFORMED ON CONTROL INSTALLED IN AIRCRAFT IN NON-CON¬

NECTED CONDITION
A - Check the mid-travel position and the total travel in accordance with para. 7. Make sure
that they are within the same tolerances.
B - Check the control operating forces as follows :
-Reinstall the packing nuts and their seals (if applicable), screwed fingertight.
- For the emergency/parking brake control :
Check the forces in traction successively at each end of the control.
- For the other controls :
Check the forces in traction and in compression at control lever end.
-The operating forces should satisfy the following tolerance requirements :
Control Force daN (Ib.f)
Brake chute < 2.2 (4.94)

Emergency undercarriage < 1 .8 (4.04)
Emergency/parking brake £ 1 .8 (4.04)
Engine <2.5 (5.61)
Nose U/C door unlocking <1 (2.24)
11 - ADJUSTMENT AND OPERATING CHECK

- Perform the adjutment and operating check in accordance with the worksheets specific
to each control :
- nose U/C door unlocking 05-4
- emergency undercarriage 05-6
- emergency/parking brake 05-7
- brake chute 05-9
- engine 06-5
12- SAFETYING OF SLIDING ROD PACKING NUTS WITH PR COMPOUND
NOTE: The safetying operation is to be performed after adjustment and operating check of the
control, except for the brake chute control at hook mechanism end (see para. 9-B).
-Make sure that the seal is correctly seated in the packing nut.
-Clean the threaded end of the fixed end fitting with a dry cloth.
-Screw the nut by one turn onto the fixed end fitting.
-Apply a drop of PR 1422 A1/2 compound on the threads of the end fitting flush with
the nut, then screw the nut fully home (fingertight).
CAUTION:
DO~~NOT APPLY PR COMPOUND TO THE SLIDING ROD ; PROTECT IT WITH A DRY
CLEAN CLOTH.
13- FINAL STEPS

-For the controls provided with a cockpit seal, perform a cockpit leak test (see 09-2).
-Reinstall the access doors and the components removed during the preliminary steps.
AF MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT;
MIRAGE F
^ç_^
BREGUET AVIATION
^<v ^?"=^
^?-^> .
Restricted , hjiamiiai
MANUAL ne
05
(4) Engine control


-Longer sliding rod at cockpit end.
(e) Specific points.

-At engine compartment end, the control should protrude by 790 to 800 mm (31.1 to
31.5 in) from frame 25.
-at center lock : dimension I = 55 mm (2.16 in), (long fixed end fitting),
-at rear lock : dimension I' = 34 mm (1.33 in), (short fixed end fitting),
-Orientate the swivel joint notches in relation to the control,
-Install the control assembly in accordance with following para. (b).
-Adjust the nose U/C door unlocking control (see 05-4).
If the original control is reinstalled:
-Reinstall the control and attach its two swivel joint supports to the structure, taking the
para. 10.
-Reconnect the clevis ends to the levers of the locks.
-Check :

-clearance between hydraulic stop and mechanical stop (see 05-4).
AH MOD 1001 INCORPORATED

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" ^ /Y\ll\/-\\JrU
BREGUET AVIATION ^£^~ .«ô . , haamiiai ne
^^ ^^^> Restricted MANUAL 05
12- SAFETYING OF SLIDING ROD PACKING NUTS WITH PR COMPOUND
NOTE: The safetying operation is to be performed after adjustment and operating check of the
control, except for the brake chute control at hook mechanism end (see para. 9-B).
-Make sure that the seal (if applicable) is correctly seated in the packing nut.
-Remove oil traces on the threaded end of the fixed end fitting with a cloth soaked in
white spirit, then thoroughly wipe with a dry cloth.
-Screw the nut by one turn onto the fixed end fitting.
-Apply a drop of PR 1422 A1/2 compound on the threads of the end fitting flush with
the nut, then screw the nut fully home (fingertight).
CAUTION:
DO NOT APPLY PR COMPOUND TO THE SLIDING ROD ; REMOVE IT IMMEDIATELY
IF NECESSARY.
-Check that the sliding rod is sufficiently lubricated ; if necessary, improve lubrication by
spraying a very light film of ARDROX 397-2.
13 -FINAL STEPS
-For the controls provided with a cockpit seal, perform a cockpit leak test (see 09-2).
-Reinstall the access doors and the components removed during the preliminary steps.
AA
03-88 Restricted 0-1 47Q
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTf ^ -" -« /Y\ll\/"\VJfC \
^<i_~
BREGUET AVIATION
^<s
,6^^,
^-^ _
Restricted m a m a i nr-
MANUAL 05
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION OF FLEXIBLE CONTROLS

(Figure 9)
A - Materials
-Oil AIR 3512
-White Spirit
A - Open the items giving access to the sliding end fittings of the control concerned.
(1 ) Brake chute control :

-cockpit LH gunnel fairing, engine, door 36-00i.
(2) Emergency U/C and door control :

-door 23-05.
(3) Emergency/parking brake control :

-instrument panel, panel 04-09i, engine selector valve protection fairing.
(4) Engine control :

-LH side panel 07-08i, door 27-08L
(5) Nose U/C door unlocking control :

-nose U/C main door.
B - Make sure that the control concerned is inert ; if required, disconnect the flexible control
from the associated selector valve or linkage.
3 - PROCEDURE
A - Cleaning
-Using a cloth lightly soaked with white spirit, clean the control lever hinges, the sliding
rods and the fixed end fittings as well as the support swivel joints; wipe with a dry cloth.
- For the emergency brake control, on selector valve side :
-disconnect the quick lock-in end fitting ; carefully clean the end fitting and the
swivel joint of the selector valve push-pull.
B Lubrication
-Lightly oil the support swivel joint of the fixed end fitting, while actuating the control so
as to facilitate the oil penetration.
For the emergency brake control, on selector valve side :
-lubricate the mechanism of the quick lock-in end fitting, and check the locking sys¬
tem efficiency by actuating the push rod several times.
AC
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<*t^ ^=5*=^ . , a/iamiiai ne
^<s ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 05
DETAILED INSPECTION OF FLEXIBLE CONTROLS

MOD 1001 not incorporated (TELEFORCE control)
MOD 1001 incorporated (TELEFLEX control)
(Figure 9)
1 - SCOPE
To find any external traces of damage which could cause incorrect operation in the long
or short term.
A - Standard tools
-Dial gauge
-Dial gauge support (local manufacture)
3 - MATERIALS
-Plioplast15
4 - SPARES
- Brake chute control

-1 pin 2331 0AA020-015LE
- Emergency undercarriage and door control '
-1 pin 2331 0AA01 5-01 5LE
-Emergency/parking control <
-1 pin 2331 0AA01 5-01 5LE
-Nose undercarriage door unlocking control
-2 lockwashers 23350AC-060LE
- Engine control
-2 pins 2331 0AA01 5-01 5LE
Open access doors along the path of the control concerned (see 05-0).
6 - PROCEDURE
A - Visual inspection
-Visually inspect the end fittings for straightness and the sliding end fitting for condition.
In particular, check for corrosion, binding or abnormal wear.
-Disconnect the flexible control and check that the support swivel joint moves freely by
moving the control fixed end fitting gently to and fro.
-On all sheath end fittings, check :
-for one of the marks showing correct tightening of end fitting head 14 on threaded
tube 6 as per detail A,
or
-for application of one of the repair methods as per detail B.
-On the sheath end fittings (modification 696 not incorporated) :
-ensure that sleeve nut 17 and end fitting head 14 are not loose ; depending on the
type of assembly, check that :
-paint mark on sleeve nut and end fitting head is properly lined up,
or that:
-ring of sealant around cylindrical part of end fitting (area marked M), is still
intact.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _^4i_~-
^>, ^s^-,
^=-^ .
Restricted h/iamiiai ne
MANUAL 05
-if this is not the case, or in case of doubt, ensure that the control has no other
faults that would entail its replacement, then check the adjustments and if necessary carry out
safetying operations once more (see 05.0).
-Connect the control and if necessary check for correct tightening and safetying of
nuts.
-Check along control path :
-correct tightening of attachment clamps and sheath pressure seal at frame 10
or 11,
-condition of control (distortion, stress or spurious contacts),
-condition of protective plastic sheath (tears, cracks),
MOD 1001 NOT INCORPORATED (TELEFORCE control)
Marking of the plastic sheath and the metal sheath underneath due to friction or spurious
contact is not considered to be dangerous unless the metal sheath is completely worn at the
point of spurious contact. A control which is marked may continue to be used after protecting
the damaged section with 3 to 5 turns of Plioplast 15.
MOD 1001 INCORPORATED (TELEFLEX control)
As the sheath of these controls is subjected to axial stress, only minor damage not impair¬
ing the integrity of the sheath metal section shall be tolerated.
Any sheath distortion (flattening, wrinkling, etc.) or any loss of material from the outer envel¬
ope making it possible to feel or even more to see the steel ropes shall be cause for rejection
of the control.
A control may continue to be used when only the Teflon sheath is marked, after protection the
damaged section with 3 to 5 turns of Plioplast.
B - Check of axial play swivel support joints
-Attach a dial gauge to an adjacent structural part or to a sheath end fitting by means of
an adequate support, so as to sense the relative play between swivel joint and cage 24.
-Manually operate the control along its length :
-the play read on the gauge should be < 0.2 mm (0.007874 in).
-If it is higher than this tolerance value, the swivel support joint cage or the complete ey¬
ebolt should be replaced.
AA
03-88 Restricted 0-1 49 M
t
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i^J>^ZXl
BREGUET AVIATIONô. ^
MIRAGE F
MEASURES TO BE TAKEN ON AIRCRAFT

AFTER EMERGENCY UNDERCARRIAGE EXTENSION
1 - SCOPE
To restore the aircraft to flying condition after emergency extension of the undercarriage.
WARNING :
-SET THE U/C DOOR SAFETY SWITCH TO «SOL» (GROUND) (DOOR 17.04).
- JACK UP THE AIRCRAFT WITH WHEELS CLEAR OF THE GROUND (see 02-2).
-TAKE ALL THE RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0).
3- PROCEDURE
A Before repairing the systems or performing any functional tests :

- find the reason for emergency U/C extension (see 05-6),
- check the fluid level in No. 1 system reservoir (see 02-3).
B If the emergency extension was due to a fault in the hydraulic system, and that the actual failure
cannot be traced precisely, or if an equipment item seems internally deteriorated, proceed as follows :
. - perform the inspection applicable in case of a hydraulic system incident or when the fluid condi¬
tion is questionable (see 07-1 ),

- replace the faulty equipment item or adjust it as required,
- check the U/C and door operating pressures (see 05-6).
C If the emergency extension was due to a fault in the electrical equipment, replace the faulty
item or adjust it as required.
D _ Perform a functional check of the undercarriage and warning system (see 05-6).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION,,
fi^P-'irU MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE AND DOORS AFTER

ILLUMINATION OF «LIM» INDICATOR LIGHT
1 - GENERAL
-Exceeding the aircraft limits (indicated by illumination of the «LIM» light, either with the
undercarriage extended or during maneuvers, can subject the undercarriage and doors to excessive
aerodynamic loads which may damage them.
- If the «LIM» light comes on when the undercarriage is retracted and the doors are locked (under¬
carriage/door indicator lights out) ; there is a fault in the warning system (see 05-6).
- Jack up the aircraft, wheels clear of the ground (see 02-2).

- Manually open the undercarriage doors (see 02-0).
WARNING :
3- PROCEDURE
A Procedure for main undercarriage
- Overall inspection of undercarriage legs (see 05-1 ).

- Inspection of doors and linkages (see 05-2).
- Check of door adjustment (see 05-2).
B Procedure for nose undercarriage
- Overall inspection of undercarriage leg (see 05-3).

- Inspection of doors and linkages (see 05-4).
- Check of door adjustment (see 05-4).
C - Tests
- Check of undercarriage and door operating pressures (see 05-6).

- Check of «U/C not down» and «limit» warning system (see 05-6).
- Functional tests of undercarriage and warning system (see 05-6).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
(2) nose undercarriage (see 05-3)
- Undercarriage in «up» position

- Shock absorber travel
- Truss jack clearance.
(3) main undercarriage doors (see 05-2)
(4) nose undercarriage door (see 05-4)
C Checking and testing (see 05-6)
- Checking undercarriage «not down» indicator and «LIM» warning light

- Undercarriage and indicator system operational test.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tL^^Z~V^
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
CHECK AND RENEWAL OF SAFETYING OF SLEEVE NUTS

FITTED TO ENDPIECES OF TELEFORCE FLEXIBLE CONTROLS
(MODIFICATION 696 NOT INCORPORATED)
Standard tools
,- Torque wrench kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 Ib.ft)

- Accessory kit for torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 Ib.ft)
Materials
- Methylethylketone (MEK)
-Sealant PR 1422 A 1/2
- Loctite high-strength thread locking product SR No. 270
- Activator Locquic N (aerosol can)
- Adhesive tape
2t- PRELIMINARY STEPS
- Disconnect the control and remove the swivel mount or the eyebolt, after recording the adjust¬
ment dimensions (see 05-0) so as to gain access to the endpiece.
- Protect the sliding rod and surrounding areas of the control.
- Keep the endpiece pointing slightly downward to prevent ingress of foreign matter inside the
control.
- Carefully remove the sealant band or the painted line, and carefully clean with MEK.
- Take care not to damage cadmium plating of the endpiece.
NOTE : -endpieces with a PR sealant band are safetied with PR sealant,

- endpieces with a painted line are safetied with Loctite,
- safetying is to be made in the same way as previously.
CAUTION :
DURING SAFETYING OPERATIONS, AVOID ANY EXCESSIVE BENDING OR TWISTING
LIABLE TO DAMAGE THE CONTROL.
3- PROCEDURE
(a) Check of sleeve nut tightening
Hold endpiece head 14 by its flats and torque sleeve nut 17 to :

-
- 0.75 m.daN (5.5 Ib.ft) for a control type S41
- 1 .5 m.daN (1 1 Ib.ft) for a control type S71 .
- If the sleeve nut does not rotate under such a torque, apply a new sealant- band (see para. B4) or
draw a new painted line (see para. B2) depending on the original safetying type.
- If the sleeve nuts tightens up when such a torque is applied, renew the existing safetying (see
para. B).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
(b) Renewal of safetying
- Unscrew the sleeve nut by four turns maximum.

- Remove any traces of PR sealant or Loctite from the threads and mating parts, then carefully
clean with MEK.
(1 ) Safetying with Loctite
- Spraythin film of Locquic activator over the threads. Allow to dry for 10 minutes.
a
- Apply drop of Loctite high-strength thread locking product.
a
- Screw on the sleeve nut immediately and torque to the value given in para. (a).
(2) Marking with painted line
- Paint a line parallel to the endpiece centerline, on the side allowing the best accessibility for
visual check ; this line should be applied to the sleeve nut and the endpiece head in order to mark the
position of both parts.
(3) Safetying with PR sealant
- Apply a thin film of sealant PR 1422 A 1/2 to the threads.

- Screw on the sleeve nut immediately and torque to the value given in para. (a).
(4) Application of PR sealant band

- Apply rings of adhesive tape at 10 mm (0.4 in) approx. on either side of the mating line between
sleeve nut and endpiece head, so as to delimit the area to be coated with sealant.
- Carefully degrease this area with MEK.
- Apply a thick coat of sealant PR 1422 A 1/2 to this area so as to obtain a sealing band (area
marked M).
- When the sealant is no longer sticky, remove the rings of adhesive tape.
4- FINAL STEPS
Remove the protective device from the sliding rod and surrounding areas.
-
Reinstall the eyebolt or the swivel mount, complying with the adjustment dimensions recorded
-
before removal.
- Reconnect the control.
SAFETYING WITH PR SEALANT
PR sealant
SAFETYING WITH LOCTITE
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^îTSl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^(Z&^îg^ .,...,.., nc
SECTION 1
MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1-0 GENERAL
- Breakdown and principle of operation 1-001

- Undercarriage legs 1-103
- Elastic rod 1-117
- Telescopic rod 1-119
- Actuating jack 1-124
1-2 FAILURES
- Shock absorbers 1-201
1-3 REMOVAL -INSTALLATION
- Removal - installation of a main undercarriage leg 1-301

- Removal - installation of a shock absorber 1-306
- Removal - installation of an actuating jack ...» 1-308
- Removal - installation of an elastic rod 1-31 1
- Removal - installation of a telescopic rod 1-314
- Removal - installation of a hydraulic nozzle assembly 1-317
- Removal - installation of a rocker arm 1-325
1-4 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY
- Disassembly - assembly of a shock absorber for seal replacement 1-401

- Disassembly - assembly of an actuating jack for seal replacement 1-408
- Disassembly - assembly of a telescopic rod for seal replacement 1-416
- Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of an elastic rod 1-422
- Disassembly - lubrication - assembly of shock absorber self-aligning bearings 1-426
1-5 INSPECTION - CHECK - ADJUSTMENT - TEST
- Overall inspection of main undercarriage legs 1-501

- Check of main undercarriage leg operating factors 1-503
- Testing of an actuating jack after seal replacement 1-506
- Testing of a telescopic rod after seal replacement 1-508
- Adjustment of a main undercarriage leg 1-510
- Leak test of a hydraulic nozzle assembly 1-517
- Adjustment check of main undercarriage in up position 1-520
- Storage - packaging - transportation of main undercarriage legs 1-701

- Storage - packaging - transportation of elastic rods and universal joint crosspieces .... 1-705
- Storage - packaging - transportation of jacks or telescopic rods. 1-707
- Storage - packaging - transportation of shock absorbers 1-709
- Storage - packaging - transportation of pins 1-711
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL=^-"^HJt.
BREGUET AVIATION,,
MIRAGE F
Page
1-8 REPAIR
- Replacement of locking pins of shock absorber hinge pins 1-801

- General instructions for replacing connectors of electrical cable bundles on a main
undercarriage leg 1-805
- Replacement of a lower electrical cable bundle on a main undercarriage leg 1-81 1
- Repair of a lower electrical cable bundle on a main undercarriage leg 1-815
Figure No. Page
1 LH MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-002

2 CONTROL LINKAGE OF LH UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-004
3 LH MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-104
4 UPPER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER 1-105
5 CENTER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER 1-106
6 LOWER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER 1-108
7 ROCKER ARM/SWIVEL TUBE HINGE 1-109
8 AXLE 1-110
9 SHOCK ABSORBER - DESCRIPTION 1-112
10 SHOCK ABSORBER/UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER CONNECTIONS 1-114
1 1 SHOCK ABSORBER - OPERATION 1-116
1 2 ELASTIC ROD 1-118
13 TELESCOPIC ROD - DESCRIPTION 1-120
14 TELESCOPIC ROD/AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE CONNECTION 1-122
15 TELESCOPIC ROD - OPERATION 1-123
16 ACTUATING JACK - DESCRIPTION 1-125
17 ACTUATING JACK - OPERATION 1-127
18 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-305
18F ADJUSTMENT OF ACTUATING JACK END 1-309
18M REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A HYDRAULIC NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1-318
18T REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A ROCKER ARM 1-329
19 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF A SHOCK ABSORBER 1-407
20 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AN ACTUATING JACK 1-415
21 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF A TELESCOPIC ROD 1-421
21M DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AN ELASTIC ROD 1-425
21T DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF SHOCK ABSORBER
SELF-ALIGNING BEARINGS 1-428
22 CHECK OF OPERATING FACTORS 1-505
23 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-513
24 CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-515
25 STORAGE OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS 1-704
27 CABLE BUNDLES -WIRING DIAGRAM 1-808
28 CONNECTORS OF UPPER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE 1-809
29 CONNECTORS OF LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE 1-810
30 REPLACEMENT OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON A MAIN
UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-814
31 REPAIR OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON AMAIN
UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 1-818
AC
0487 Restricted 1-2
BREGUET AVIATION,,
/L^^TU MIRAGE F
BREAKDOWN AND PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
1- BREAKDOWN (Figure 1)
The two main undercarriage legs are hinged in the fuselage. The askew hinge pins provide a
sufficient track and a clearing retraction trajectory. The legs are retracted forward. The design is such
that a linkage turns a swivelling assembly carrying the wheels through 180° during retraction. The
dimensions of the retracted legs are thus minimum.
The L/H and R/H main U/C legs are symmetrical.
Each main U/C leg includes :

- one leg 1
- one elastic rod 3
- one telescopic rod assembly 5
- one actuating jack assembly 7
- two wheels (See section 5)
- two brakes (See section 7).
Retraction of the actuating jack rod causes extension of the leg and the telescopic rod which is
automatically locked at end of travel.
Extension of the actuating jack rod (after unlocking of the telescopic rod) causes retraction of the
leg and the telescopic rod.
NOTE : The undercarriage well is closed by :

- one door controlled by the leg
- two main doors controlled by a jack.
CONTROL LINKAGE
A Retraction (Figure 2)
Setting U/C control lever to retraction position simultaneously causes pressure application to
actuating jack 7 and unlocking of telescopic rod 5.
As the rod of actuating jack 7 is extended, leg 1 turns about its attaching pin on the structure and
causes retraction of telescopic rod 5.
During retraction, elastic rod 3 turns the swivelling assembly through a bellcrank and rod system,
thereby changing the direction of the wheels and reducing the undercarriage protrusion in up position
(detail F).
At the end of retraction, the U/C leg attaching roller engages the hook of an uplock which locks
the U/C leg in retracted position.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
10 (à gauche)
C29
10 (to left)
7 G. ou
6 Droit
7LHoi
6RH
ROUES :voirsecnon b
WHEELS :see section 5
FREINS : voir section 7
BRAKES : see section 7
FIGURE 1 -ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL GAUCHE

LH MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AD
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT h^zZ^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF=^0> "..«*.«. «r-
^2^^<^ Restricted MANUAL 05
B Extension
Pressurization of the undercarriage extension system simultaneously unlocks the U/C leg uplock
box and supplies actuating jack 7 which causes extension of the U/C leg.
During extension, elastic rod 3 controls rotation of the swivelling assembly.
At the end of extension, the internal lock of telescopic rod 5 immobilizes the U/C leg in the down
position while elastic rod 3, the connecting rod and bellcrank lock the swivelling assembly and correctly
position the wheels (alignment).
C Hard-landing detector linkage (modification 692 incorporated)
- When the undercarriage is locked in the down position, the detector is in active position and
detects the landing impact force.
- When the undercarriage is in the up position, the detector is in the deactivated position and
is not subjected to the stress of inflight acceleration.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
DETAIL C
Boîtier
d'accrochage
Uplock
DETAIL F
DETAIL F
DETAIL E
FIGURE 2 - CINEMATIQUE DE L'ATTERRI S EUR GAUCHE

AB CONTROL LINKAGE OF L/H UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION â-1
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
For layout, see Figure 1
Location Doc.
1 L/H UNDERCARRIAGE LEG X
2 R/H UNDERCARRIAGE LEG X
- These fuselage undercarriage legs are of the lever and

oleopneumatic shock absorber type.
- Nominal characteristics :
Shock absorber charging pressure : 35,6 bar (515 psi)
Maximum travel of wheel centre : 270 mm (10.6299 in).
3 ELASTIC ROD X
- Turns the swivel tube of the main U/C leg.

- Locks the swivel tube in up and down positions.
4 TELESCOPIC ROD ASSEMBLY - R/H U/C LEG X
5 TELESCOPIC ROD ASSEMBLY - L/H U/C LEG X
- Mechanically locked, with rod extended

- Hydraulically unlocked.
- Locks the U/C leg in extended position.
- Nominal characteristics :
Unlocking pressure : 70 bar (1015 psi)
Dimensions between stops :
rod extended : 1043 mm (41.0629 in)
rod retracted : 668 mm (26.2992 in)
travel : 375 mm (14.7637 in).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
6 ACTUATING JACK ASSEMBLY - RH U/C
7 ACTUATING JACK ASSEMBLY - LH U/C
- Double-acting hydraulic jack without internal lock.

- Controls extension and retraction of the associated
U/C leg.
- Dimensions between centers :
- rod extended : 632 mm (24.8818 in),
- rod retracted : 479 mm (18.8582 in),
- travel : 153 mm (6.0236 in).
WHEELS
(see section 5)
BRAKES
(see section 7)
8 RH HARD LANDING DETECTOR On outer drag

strut of LH
9 LH HARD LANDING DETECTOR and RH U/C
(Modification 692 incorporated) cylinder X
- It comprises an inertia block and indicates that an
effort greater than the value set by the manufacturer
has been detected upon landing. This indication is
given by the inertia block which appears and locks
in the instrument window in the form of a red indicator.
AE
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£=°
UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS
The LH and RH undercarriage legs are symmetrical.
Each leg is essentially composed of (Figure 3) :

- one structural box assembly 21
- one shock absorber assembly 22.
1 - STRUCTURAL BOX ASSEMBLY (Figures 3 to 8)

The structural box assembly is the major component of the undercarriage leg structure.
A Upper section (Figures 3 and 4)
The upper section includes a trunnion A and a female clevis B hinged in two self-aligned male
clevis integral with the aircraft structure.
Trunnion A is protected by a bush 27 and accomodates a plug 28 used to facilitate installation

of the U/C leg on aircraft (Figure 4). Plug 28 is retained in place by clamping the lining.
Bushed clevis B is provided with a hollow pin 29 which houses a grooved lubricator 30.
A sleeve 31 is centred in hollow pin 29. A bolt 34 locks the assembly. Sleeve 31 supports a
swivelling coupling 33.
Pre-modification 298
Sleeve 31 is centred in hollow pin 29 on one side and in a bracket 32 on the other side. A bolt 34
locks the assembly. Sleeve 31 supports swivelling coupling 33 ; both parts are integral with bracket 32.
In this section of the structural box (Figure 3), two trunnions C and D are mounted, supporting
the actuating jack and the telescopic rod, respectively. Both trunnions are equipped with a bush 36,
a trunnion 37 attached by a pin 38, a cup 39 and a nut 40 (Figure 4).
A clevis 35 is mounted on the structural box outer bracing. This bushed clevis accommodates the
link of the fairing.
the structural box outer bracing also receives the hard landing detector hand-shaped support,
-
secured by two screws and nuts.

-the hard landing detector support, which is fitted on the LH undercarriage leg, incorporates
a support console 10 for the control of microswitch 9A in «U/C up and locked» position.
B Centre section (Figure 5)
The centre section supports a system controlling the swivelling assembly which consists of the
following :
-one bellcrank 41 swivelling in two structural box bushes 42 and 43. One bolt 44 locks bellcrank
41 and grooved lubricator 45.
Bellcrank 41 is provided with a bushed female clevis accommodating the elastic rod, and a male
clevis fitted with a self -aligning bearing 46.
- one connecting rod 47 coupled to bellcrank 41 through a pin 48. Connecting rod 47
accommodates a plate 49 used to align the three points K, L, M.
- one cardan joint 50 equipped with two pins 51 and 52 connecting rod 47 to the swivelling
assembly. As its bore is eccentred, bush 53 supporting pin 52 permits adjustment of the wheel
alignment. A toothed washer 54 engaging the notches on the shoulder of bush 53, retains the latter in
the desired position.
A stop 55 retains pin 52 and limits the travel of the swivelling assembly by bearing on the
structural box at the end of undercarriage retraction.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
)
.^S3
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 3 - JAMBE D'ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL GAUCHE

LH MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
38 M

Coupe A
Cross-section A
AU'
FIGURE 4 - PARTIE SUPERIEURE DU CAISSON
UPPER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE STRUCTURE BOX
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTg^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^jSF3
MANUAL 05
FIGURE 5 - PARTIE MEDIANE DU CAISSON

CENTRE SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE STRUCTURE BOX
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^ZzZ^-. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^CZsiP^^g^ . . . . , . ,
C Lower section (Figure 6)
The lower section is provided with a machined surface accommodating a shim 60 and a clevis. The
surfaces in contact with the shim and the clevis are serrated. On the clevis is mounted an U/C-up locking
roller 56 through a pin 57. On the same pin, two rollers 58 on either side of the clevis, guide locking
roller 56 at its end of travel by bearing on the attach fitting of the uplock.
The rollers are positioned through shim 60 permitting the clevis to be adjusted in transverse position
through the upper serrated surface and in height through a peel shim.
Pre-amendment A
Shim 60 and the clevis accommodating U/C-up locking roller 56 are mounted on the structural
box of the leg through a bracket 59 attached by two screws.
The lower section of the structural box assembly consists of three major components : one swivel
tube, one swivel arm and one axle.
(1) Swivel tube 61 (Figure 6)
The tube features at the top two bushed female clevises. One of them receives cardan joint 50
described in above para. (2), and the other shock absorber 22.
Swivel tube 61 is retained in position by a two-part ring 64, a nut 65 and a threaded bush 66. The
tube 61 turns in structural box bushes 67 and 68.
A nozzle 69 housed in the bore of the swivel tube provides the hydraulic connection from
swivelling coupling 70 to the swivel arm pin, on the one hand, and locates lubricating sleeve 71, on the
other hand.
(2) Swivel arm 62 (Figures 7 and 8)
The swivel arm is provided with two female clevises : one is hinged on swivel tube 61, and the
other accommodates shock absorber 22.
Fixed shaft 72 connects swivel arm 62 to swivel tube 61 and makes the hydraulic connection from
nozzle 69 to swivelling couplings 75 and 76 through two extensions 73 and 74.
A bush 77 and a pin 78 held in place by two screws are used to attach shaft 72 and swivelling
coupling 76. Bush 77 is also fitted with a clevis constituting an attachment point for debugging the
aircraft forward. Swivelling coupling 75 is attached by three screws to the shoulder of shaft 72.
The rear end of the swivel arm (Figure 8) accommodates a ring 79 forming an attachment point
for jacking-up and debugging the aircraft rearwards.
Ring 79 is hinged on the swivel arm through a pin. It is pressed on a stop 80 through a spring. A
bush 81 and a pin 82 retain the ring hinge pin and a stud 83 locks stop 80 against rotation.
(3) Axle 63 (Figure 8)
Axle 63 is tight-fitted to a bore in swivel arm 62. This is a double axle supporting the brake units
and the wheels.
The axle carries at each end two cups 84 and two nuts 85 used to attach the wheels. Attachment
to the swivel arm is reinforced by a plug 88 and a screw 86.
Screw 86 mounted in a yoke 87 also accommodates a tube 89 used to guide and protect an
electrical wire bundles connected to a pressure switch of the braking system.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
VUE SUIVANT F
VIEW ON F
Amendement A non appliquée
Amendment A
not incorporated
FIGURE 6 - PARTIE INFERIEURE DU CAISSON

LOWER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER
AB
MIRAGE F
Restricted
FIGURE 7 - ARTICULATION BALANCIER - TUBE TOURNANT

ROCKER A RM/SWI VEL TUBE HINGE
AB 1-109
04-87 Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJ^J
BREGUET AVIATION y^>
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
Coupe A Cross section A

FIGURE 8 -ESSIEU
AXLE
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^-"r-Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^. , ^ - , .,»,..,. «,-
Â ,
D Equipment (Figure 3)
An electrical wire bundle is routed along the structural box. It makes the electrical interconnection
between the structure and :
- switch 90 located on shock absorber 22
- two tachometer generators mounted in axle 63
- connection unit 91 secured under the swivel arm.
Two sets of pipes (normal and emergency systems) supply the hydraulic fluid to the brakes
through various swivelling couplings.
- coupling 33 interconnects the hydraulic pipes attached to structural box 21 and those secured to
the aircraft structure.
- coupling 70 interconnects the hydraulic pipes of the structural box and those of the swivelling
assembly.
- couplings 75 and 76 interconnect the hydraulic pipes housed in the swivel tube and those
attached to the swivel arm.
Hydraulic pipes and electrical wire bundles are secured by clamps.
E Operation (Figure 5)
This is limited to the linkage controlling the motion of swivel tube 61 .
Theoretically, aligning the three points K, L and M is sufficient to lock the swivel tube whatever
the actions from ground.
As a matter of fact, such an alignment is stable only in the traction direction. Consequently, the
assembly is stabilized in the compression direction by a slight misalignment N, bringing connecting
rod 47 and the arm of bellcrank 41 into abutment.
In practice, this misalignment can be adjusted by altering the thickness of stop 49 which
immobilizes connecting rod 47 and bellcrank 41, after alignment of points K, L and M.
2- SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY (Figures 9 and 10)
The same shock absorber is used for the L/H and R/H undercarriage legs. The shock absorber is
equipped with a switch 90.
A Description (Figure 9)
This is a double-acting (compression - expansion) oleopneumatic shock absorber of the separator

piston type.
The shock absorber is essentially composed of :

- one stationary assembly connected to swivel tube 61
- one moving assembly connected to swivel arm 62.
(1) Stationary assembly
The stationary assembly consists of a cylinder 92 screwed in an upper end 93. It also provides
attachment of a rod assembly 100.
Cylinder 92 accommodates a bush 94 which guides the slide rod. If comprises an external boss
which accommodates the switch control mechanism composed of a roller-equipped rocker 96 which
drives rocker 97 which in turn controls switch assembly 90.

-the roller-equipped rocker 96 is composed of a ball 96.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MOD.609 NON APPLIQUEE

MOD.609 NOT INCORPORA TED
FIGURE 9 - AMORTISSEUR - DESCRIPTION 109

SHOCK ABSORBER - DESCRIPTION
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti ^-"zXl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^*- ^^ . **.,,», «r-
The switch of the LH leg acts on the retraction disable circuit, the pilot antislip circuit (see 04-3),
the flying aids circuit (see 13) and the data recorder circuit (see 17).
The switch of the RH leg acts on the braking circuit and the warning hom/angle-of-attack «limit»
circuit (see 12-1) (the third microswitch is not used).
Upper end 93 is equipped with a bushed self-aligning bearing 98 and accommodates hydraulic
filler plug 99. Rod 100 is screwed at one end on flange 101 ; it is essentially composed of :
- restrictor 102, screwed at the other end of rod 100 and also used to attach thrust ring 103,
- valve 104, mounted between restrictor 102 and thrust ring 103,
- star-shaped valve 105, mounted between restrictor 102 and the end of rod 100.
(2) Moving assembly
The moving assembly is essentially composed of a rod 106 screwed in an end 107, on the one
hand, and supporting a piston 112 and a cover 1 1 5, on the other hand.
Rod 1 06 is guided in the cylinder by bush 94 and piston 1 1 2. The rod houses separator piston 1 08.
End 107 is equipped with a bushed self-aligning bearing 109. This part accommodates charging
valve 110 and a level tube 111. This tube controls the level of the hydraulic fluid required in chamber F
for lubricating the walls and the adjacent packings.
Piston 1 12 is attached by a nut 1 14 mounted on a threaded bush 113.
Cover 115 is located between threaded bush 113 and a thrust ring 116. The cover is guided by
rod 100 ; it is provided with four calibrated bores.
The shock absorber travel is limited by :

- rod 106 abutting on restrictor 102 during expansion
- piston 112 bearing on flange 101 during compression.
Ends 93 and 107 have equipped lip seals 142 for improved lubrication of the self-aligning bearings.
Modification 581 not incorporated (figure 10) :

-ends 93 and 107 have a metal scraper and a recessed washer instead of equipped lip seals 142.
(3) Shock absorber/cylinder connections (figure 10)
The upper end of shock absorber 22 is connected to the female clevis of swivel tube 61 through
shouldered pin 23. The lower end is connected to rocker arm 62 through shouldered pin 24.
Pins 23 and 24 are equipped with the same pin 117 and the same grooved lubricator 118. Both
parts are locked in position by a bush 1 19 and a bolt 120.
Ring 119 mounted on pin 23 also carries a clamp attaching the electrical wire bundle connected to
switch 90. Pins 23 and 24 also differ from each other in the type of grease fitting.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE
MANUAL 0£
MOD 581 NON

APPLIQUEE
Cran 143 MOD 581 NOT
détrompeur INCORPORATED
Polarizing
notch
Coupe A
117 Section A
FIGURE 10 - LIAISONS AMuRTISSEUR - CAISSON

SHOCK ABSORBER/UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER CONNECTIONS
AB
BREGUET
/LJ^rVL.
AVIATION^cP^^Qi
MIRAGE F
^SâSs^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
B Operation (Figure 1 1)
The operation of the shock absorber is broken down into two phases :
( 1 ) Compression phase
Sinking of rod 106 causes the hydraulic fluid to flow from chamber G to chambers H and J.
The fluid flow is restricted by valve 105 which is pressed on its seat, and by cover 115. Valve 104
opens under the action of the fluid.
The fluid which cannot enter chamber H as a result of the different internal passage areas of
cylinder 92 and rod 106, causes separator piston 108 to sink, and consequently the pressure of the
gaseous mass in chamber F to increase.
At the beginning of compression, roller (or ball, if Modification 609 is not incorporated) 96 sinks
and rocker 97 pivots, thereby actuating switch 90.
(2) Expansion phase
Under the expansion effect of the gas compressed in chamber F, the shock absorber is extended,
thereby causing the hydraulic fluid to flow from chambers H and J to chamber G.
As valve 104 is pressed on its seat, fluid.exchange between chambers H and G takes place only
through the calibrated bores of cover 115. The so obtained fluid restriction is much greater than during
the compression phase.
Fluid exchange between chambers J and G virtually takes place freely, since valve 105 is lifted.
At the end of expansion, rod 106 frees roller (or ball, if Modification 609 is not incorporated)
96 and consequently rocker 97 reverses the contacts in switch 90.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Compression
Détente
Extension
FIGURE ll - AMORTISSEUR - FONCTIONNEMENT

SHOCK ABSORBER OPERA TION
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^-uZ\L
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3
MIRAGE F
ELASTIC ROD
(Figure 12)
The same elastic rod is mounted on the L/H and R/H main undercarriage legs.
1 - DESCRIPTION
The elastic rod controls the motion of the swivelling assembly and locks it in the U/C up and down
positions.
This rod consists of a stationary assembly comprised of a rod 21 screwed at one end in a
housing 22, and a moving assembly with short travel, consisting of a rod end assembly 23.
Rod 21 accommodates at the other end an adjustable end 24 with a self-aligning bearing. A hole T
in rod 21 is used to check with a gauge, that a minimum number of threads of rod end 24 is engaged,
when performing adjustment.
Two bushes 25 and 26 guide the moving assembly. Two other bushes 27 and 28 integral with the
latter are used to space a stack of eight sets of three washers 29. This stack is retained by a threaded
sleeve 30 safetied by a taper pin.
Elastic rod end 23 is connected to a structural point of the aircraft. Rod end 24 is connected to
bellcrank 41 through pin assembly 31 . The latter is a shouldered pin retained by a nut 32.
2- OPERATION
The elastic rod may be compared to a strong spring, with high operating threshold, behaving like :
- a rigid rod when external forces are below the threshold (as the undercarriage legs are moving).
- a traction spring, as it is elongated (U/C down).
- a compression spring, as it is shortened (U/C up).
The linkage is such that the rod is longer in the U/C down position than in the U/C up position.
The length of the rod at rest is adjusted between the two positions.
AA
MIRAGE F
Restricted
Coupe A \
Section A s
FIGURE 12 - BIELLE ELASTIQUE

ELASTIC ROD
AB
BREGUET AVIATION, _
/L=J>-^rU MIRAGE F
TELESCOPIC ROD
The telescopic rods of the LH and RH main undercarriage legs are symmetrical. They are equipped
with switch 9G1 or 9G2.
1 - DESCRIPTION (figures 13 and 14)
The telescopic rod ensures wind-bracing and mechanical locking of the undercarriage leg in the
down position.
The telescopic rod is essentially composed of :

- one stationary assembly attached to the aircraft structure through a cardan yoke ;
- one moving assembly attached to the undercarriage leg.
Except for chamber H, all chambers of the telescopic rod are connected to each other and air
vented through port T.
A Stationary assembly
The stationary assembly consists of cylinder 21 terminating at one end in a bushed female clevis.
On cylinder 21 is mounted locking cylinder 22. A nut 23 and key attach locking cylinder 22 and
locking sleeve 24 to cylinder 21 .
Locking cylinder 22 features two bosses ; one of them supports hydraulic coupling 25, and the
other switch 9G1 or 9G2 actuated by rocker assembly 27.
Switch 9G1 or 9G2 is provided with three microswitches which are connected to the undercarriage
control sequence circuit, the undercarriage control warning circuit and the undercarriage-locked-down
aural warning circuit.
A base 28 attached by nut 29 to locking cylinder 22 retains locking piston 30 and return spring
31 in the locking cylinder.
On locking piston 30, a lever 32 drives rocker assembly 27.
B Moving assembly
The moving assembly consists of rod 33, housing at one end an adjustable end fitting 34 equipped
with a self-aligning bearing 35. A hole T in this rod end is used as a venting port and as a reference
point for checking the minimum number of engaged threads.
At the other end, a threaded ring 36, screwed on rod 33 and safetied by a split pin, retains both
the clip 37 and the piston 38.
MODIFICATION 643 NOT INCORPORATED : Piston 38 is secured against rotation by cotter

pin 26.
Amendment not incorporated : Clip 37 and piston 38 are retained by a bush 36 screwed inside
rod 33 and safetied by a setscrew on piston 38, itself secured by key 26.
Rod 33 is guided, in part, by piston 38 and, in part, by the bore of base 28.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Amendement
MODIFICATION
non appliqué
N° 643 APPLIQUEE
MODIFICATION 38 Amendment
N° 643 INCORPORA TED .
not incorporated
Amendement
non appliqué
Amendment
not incorporated
25
Amendement
appliqué
Amendment
incorporated
9G1 att/G
ou
9G2 att.r D
9G1 onLH U/C
or |
9G2 on RH uk
MODIFICATION
N° 552 APPLIQUEE
MODIFICATION
N° 552 INCORPORATED
FIGURE 13 - BARRE TELESCOPIQUE - DESCRIPTION

TELESCOPIC ROD - DESCRIPTION

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^ZZ^l
BREGUET AVIATION ^pF3,^^
MIRAGE
*.»».«,-
F
C Telescopic rod/aircraft structure connections (Figure 14)
At the structural box, telescopic rod end 34 engages trunnion D described under «STRUCTURAL
BOX ASSEMBLY» - upper section.
The telescopic rod is hinged at the structural point of the aircraft through a cardan yoke 50. This
yoke includes a pin 51 providing the aircraft hinge. A screw 53 locks pin 51 and associated grooved
lubricator 52.
The bushed clevis of the yoke accommodates pin 54 which interconnects the yoke and the
telescopic rod. This hollow pin is attached by a nut 55. A plug 56 limits the injected volume of grease.
The telescopic rod is not a driver component. The sliding rod motion is controlled by the
undercarriage leg which is in turn driven by the actuating jack. Only rod unlocking is hydraulically
controlled.
A Rod extension - locking
Rod 33 is driven by the undercarriage leg during extension.
At the end of extension, the claws of lock 37 are bent to clear locking sleeve 24. Then, they push
locking piston 30 by compressing spring 31. Piston 38 abuts on locking sleeve 24, thereby limiting the
travel of the rod in the extension direction.
As the claws of lock 37 are no longer bent by locking sleeve 24, they separate by spring effect.
Under the action of spring 31, locking piston 30 returns to the initial position and slides under the
claws of the lock. The latter is stopped and firmly immobilizes the telescopic rod.
As locking piston 30 slides under the claws of lock 37, lever 32 turns and reverses the contacts of
switch 9G1 or 9G2.
B Unlocking - rod retraction
The hydraulic pressure applied through coupling 25 acts on annular passage area S and causes
locking piston 30 to move back. The locking piston travel is limited by bottom 28.
As lever 32 is released by the claws of lock 37, it frees rocker 27, thereby causing reversal of the
contacts of switch 9G1 and 9G2.
Rod 33 driven by the undercarriage leg during retraction, is actuated in the retraction direction.
The claws of lock 37 freed by locking piston 30 are bent and clear locking sleeve 24.
Rod continues retracting until the undercarriage leg is locked in the retracted position.
Piston 30 returns to the rest position under the action of spring 31, as hydraulic system 31 is
connected to the reservoir.
AA
MIRAGE F
Restricted
FIGURE 14- LIAISON BARRE TELESCOPIQUE -STRUCTURE AVION

TELESCOPIC ROD-TO-AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE CONNECTION
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
11 Phase -Barre verrouillée 21 Phase . Détail du déverrouilla qe

1st Phase - Rod locked 2nd Phase - Unlocking detail
FIGURE 15 - BARRE TELESCOPIQUE - FONCTIONNEMENT

TELESCOPIC ROD - OPERA TION
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^-^TU.
BREGUET AVIATIONôF3
MIRAGE F
ACTUATING JACK
The actuating jacks of the L/H and R/H undercarriage legs are symmetrical. They are equipped
with a valve box 22.
1 - DESCRIPTION (Figure 16)
These jacks are double-acting hydraulic jacks, without internal lock. Their travel is limited by the
locking systems of the undercarriage legs : locking of the telescopic rod in the down position ; locking
of an uplock in the up position.
Each actuating jack is essentially composed of :

- one stationary assembly attached to a structural point of the aircraft.
- one moving assembly attached to the undercarriage leg.
The stationary assembly consists of a cylinder 21 featuring two bosses used to attach valve box 22,
and one boss supporting coupling 23.
Cylinder 21 accommodates :
one rod 24 centred in a seal retainer 25, and a threaded ring 26 locking both parts to the
-
cylinder.
- one end 27, with a self-aligning bearing 28, screwed in cylinder 21 and attached by a nut 29. A
washer 48 secured to the end by a rivet, limits the angular travel of the jack when the latter is mounted
on aircraft.
- one counter-rod 30 screwed at one end on rod 24, and accommodating piston 31 attached by a
nut 32, at the other end.
B Moving assembly
The moving assembly essentially consists of a rod 33 provided with the following :
- at one end, one bush 34 used to progressively blaiik port P of cylinder 21, at the end of rod
extension ; one piston 35 and one nut 36 simultaneously locking bush 34 and piston 35 to rod 33.
- one bottom 37 immobilized against a shoulder of rod 33 by one threaded ring 38.
- one rod 39, the free end of which is fitted into bore L of rod 24 at the end of rod extension,
thereby progressively preventing fluid exchange between both rods.
- one sleeve 40 in which slides one valve 41 equipped with one restrictor 42 and loaded by one
spring 43.
Rod 39 and sleeve 40 are locked on bottom 37 by threaded ring 44.
- one end 45 equipped with a self-aligning bearing 46. This adjustable end is secured by threaded
ring 47.
A hole T identifies the limit position ensuring a sufficient number of engaged threads.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
FIGURE 16 - VERIN DE MANOEUVRE - DESCRIPTION

AB ACTUATING JACK - DESCRIPTION
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=**^rU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^L--^^
MIRAGE F
^é^*^^* Restricted MANUAL 05
Extension of the actuating jack rod causes retraction of the undercarriage leg. Retraction of the
jack rod causes extension of the undercarriage leg.
A Rod extension
The rod is extended by applying pressure through port A. The generated driving force results from
the action of the hydraulic pressure on :
- annular passage area S1, between the inside diameter of cylinder 21 and the outside diameter of
counter-rod 30, on the one hand,
inner passage area S2 of rod 33, on the other hand.
At end of travel, two devices restrict the hydraulic fluid flow so as to reduce the retraction rate of
the undercarriage leg :
- blanking of bore L by rod 39 constrains the pressure fluid entering through port A to flow
through the restrictor of valve 41 so as to act on passage areas S1 and S2.
- blanking of port P by bush 34 forces the fluid escaping from the jack to flow through a restrictor
in valve box 22. This restrictor is mounted in series with port M.
In case of overpressure at the end of rod extension, a valve in box 22 opens and the excess fluid
flows out.
B Rod retraction
The rod is retracted by applying pressure to ports P and M through valve box 22. A shuttle valve in
this box controls rod retraction through two independent systems (normal and emergency systems).
The generated force results from the pressure acting on :

-annular passage area S3 between the inside diameter of cylinder 21 and the outside diameter of
rod 33, on the one hand,
- annular passage area S4 between the inside diameter of rod 33 and the outside diameter of
counter-rod 30, on the other hand.
The fluid contained in the chambers decreasing in volume, is directed to the reservoir through
port A.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
22
FIGURE 17 - VERIN DE MANOEUVRE - FONCTIONNEMENT

AB A CTUA TING JA CK - OPERA TION
BREGUET AVIATION.--^3
MIRAGE F
SHOCK ABSORBERS - TROUBLE SHOOTING
Excessive shock Shock absorber

absorber flexibility abnormally compressed
Remove shock absorber. Check for leakage

Shock absorber discharged :
carefully loosen filler plug.
Allow shock absorber fluid to
flow out. Fluid emulsified :
Remove shock absorber and

determine fluid leakage cause.
Hydraulic fluid leakage Nitrogen leakage
Gas and fluid chambers

interconnected. Replace
shock absorber.
Leakage at Leakage at Leakage at Leakage at

filler plug filler plug charging valve charging valve
not located not located
Replace filler
plug seal. Fill Replace shock Replace charging Replace shock
with hydraulic absorber valve or seal. absorber
fluid
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^-"-rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^5s. ^ , ...»a. «r-
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

(figure 18)
A Special tools
B Standard tools
- Kit for Arsaero couplings
- Accessory kit for torque wrench, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 1 50 ft.lb)

- Installation jig CTP5
-Support stand MS1 301
D Spares
- 2 sealsfor grooved lubricator of trunnion
I -2pins23310AA015015LE
- Set of shim washers for main U/C leg
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
-Grease Air 42 17
WARNING :
If necessary, remove pylon stores from wings (side of U/C leg concerned) to permit passage of the
installation jig.
B Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see 02-2).
C Remove the wheels from the U/C leg concerned (see 05-5).
D Remove the brake units (see 05-7).
E - Unlock the U/C legs.
(1 ) Connect the hydraulic power supply to the ground connectors of system No. 1 .
(2) Supply aircraft electrical power systems.
(3) Set the undercarriage control switch lever to «HAUT» (up).
(4) Apply pressure to system No. 1, then stop applying pressure as the U/C leg concerned is
partially retracted.
(5) Block the U/C leg in unlocked position.
(6) Switch off supply to aircraft electrical power systems.
AB
BREGUET
ÏLJ>~Z^\L
AVIATION^ÎF3^0^
MIRAGE F
^2^==-^-^ Restricted MANUAL 05
F Remove U/C leg fairing.
G - Open inspection door 27-04 or 27-08.
4- REMOVAL
(1 ) Remove elastic rod (See 05-1 ).

(2) Uncouple telescopic rod from structural leg box - (See 05-1 ).
B Installation of jig
(1) Attach cardan joint of adjustable jig beam to structural leg box trunnion accommodating
telescopic rod.
(2) Break swivel arm control linkage by acting on swivel arm, and attach sling hook of adjustable jig
beam to hoisting ring.
(1) Disconnect electrical plug 1 1 1 A or 112 A from airframe.

(2) Uncouple actuating jack from structural leg box - (See 05-1). Protect jack and pipes. Interpose a
protective plate (wooden or fibre) between structural box and airframe.
(3) Hoist U/C leg through jig mechanism so as to gain access to swivelling coupling mounted at the end
of front U/C leg hinge trunnion.
(4) Remove the two supply pipes from a swivelling coupling 33. Blank ports.
(5) Remove the two screws attaching swivelling coupling 33 to structure bracket 143 then remove
the latter (three 8 mm A/F screws ; save the washers).
(6) Return U/C leg to suitable position for removal.
D - Removal of U/C leg
(1) Remove bolt 34 (22 mm A/F spanner and C46897) from front trunnion 29. If required, use a
15 mm (0.5905 in) diameter fibre drift.
(2) Remove pin 134 from grooved lubricator 30 and withdraw the latter from trunnion 29.
(3) Remove trunnion 29 complete with washer 1 35 (extractor C46861 ).
(4) Clear structural box yoke B from front airframe self-aligning bearing. Recover shim washers 132
and 133.
(5) Clear structural box trunnion A from rear airframe self-aligning bearing by suitably directing U/C
leg.
(6) Remove extractor from trunnion 29 and reinstall grooved lubricator 30 and pin 134 on
trunnion 29.
E Install U/C leg on support mount.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preparation for installation
(1 ) Perform following operations on airframe self-aligning bearings (front and rear) :

(a) Thoroughly clean
(b) Visually inspect for condition
(c) Slightly lubricate
(d) Check swivelling torque which should be between 1 mdaN (7.3 ft.lb) and 2 mdaN (14.7 ft.lb).
IF THE FRONT SELF-ALIGNING BEARING HAS BEEN REMOVED, ENSURE THAT THE
EXTERNAL LUBRICATING GROOVE FACES AFT ON INSTALLATION.
AB
BREGUET
/UîrU.
AVIATION^^^îÔ
MIRAGE F
^£2^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
(2) Clean and grease U/C leg hinge trunnions.
(3) Direct rear self-aligning bearing to about 45° from the vertical and as outwards as possible, using
dummy pin M31007.
(4) If a spare main U/C leg is installed :
(a) Proceed to depreservation (see 05-1).
(b) Remove front trunnion 29 as follows :

-remove bolt 34 (22 mm A/F spanner)
-remove trunnion 29 complete with washer 135 ; discard washer 132 mounted on trunnion.
(c) Assessment of thickness of front trunnion shim washers.

- Remove the self-aligning bearing from the trunnion on the structure.
-Insert trunnion 29 into the structural box yoke, and fit washer 133 (front side) and the
self-aligning bearing.
- Thrust the self-aligning bearing so that it bears positively against the contact tace of the structural
box internal bushing ; using a set of shims, measure the clearance between the self-aligning bearing and
the contact face of washer 1 33.
- According to the clearance found, select that washer 132 which will give a side clearance between
0.03 and 0.10 mm (0.001 1 and 0.003937 in).
NOTE : The washer part number is engraved on the washer chamfer. The last three figures of the part
number indicate the washer thickness in hundredths of millimeters.
Tolerance :" 0Q1 mm ( I00003gin).
- Fit back the self-aligning bearing to the structure trunnion (lubricate lightly and observe the
orientation of the self-aligning bearing in its cage : the grease holes in the spherical bearing surface
should be positioned in the opposite direction to the cutouts).
(d) Fit out U/C leg with following components taken from swivel arm of removed U/C leg :
- both main tachometer generators (see 05-7),
- connection unit assembly (see 05-7),
- the fairing door link rod.
- the hard landing detector (Modification 692 incorporated).
B - Installation of U/C leg
(1) Using installation jig, position U/C leg and adjust leg direction as required to pin hinges.
(2) Fully insert structural box rear trunnion A into airframe self-aligning bearing, avoiding sharp
movements.
(3) Grease and install recessed washer 1 33 in yoke B on front side of structural box.
(4) Return U/C leg towards aircraft and fit structural box yoke B to airframe self-aligning bearing.
Ensure that washer 1 33 has not moved.
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL=J>^r5L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^-^"^ mi a mi i a i ne
(5) Align bores of structural box yoke and airframe self-aligning bearing by means of dummy pin
M31007. Slide previously greased shim washer 132 at the right time, on rear side of yoke (washer
chamfer facing self-aligning bearing).
NOTE : Use only the large diameter of the dummy pin ; otherwise, the swivelling coupling of the U/C
leg may be brought out of alignment.
(6) Remove dummy pin M31007 while firmly holding U/C leg to prevent it from moving.
(7) Insert grooved lubricator 30 fitted with new seals into trunnion 29. Align bores accommodating
pin 134 ; install the latter, and safety with two new pins.
(8) Install trunnion 29 fitted with washer 135. Direct trunnion so that grease fitting faces outwards
and bores for bolt 34 are in line with each other (Directing guide C46862).
(9) Install bot 34 (with head up) and place electrical wire bundle bracket on nut side. Torque tighten
to 8 * p m.daN (59 + J4'7 ft.lb) (22 mm A/F spanner).

(10) Using feeler gauges, make sure that clearance «J» between airframe self-aligning bearing and
structural box yoke B is within the tolerances stated in para. A (c).
(1) Hoist U/C leg through jig mechanism so as to gain access to swivelling coupling at the end of front
U/C leg hinge trunnion.
(2) Reinstall structure bracket 143 (three screws with a washer under the head).
(3) Secure swivelling coupling 33 to aircraft bracket by means of two screws.
(4) Connect the two hydraulic pipes supplying swivelling coupling.
(5) Connect electrical plug 1 1 1 A or 1 12 A.
D Mechanical connections
(1 ) Lower U/C leg and connect actuating jack (See 05-1 ).
(2) Hold U/C leg swivel arm and clear jig sling hook from hoising ring.
(3) Bring swivel arm in normal down position, while holding it by hand as it swivels.
(4) Install elastic rod (See 05-1 ).
(5) Remove cardan joint of adjustable jig beam from attaching trunnion of telescopic rod.
(6) Clear installation jig.
(7) Couple telescopic rod to U/C leg (See 05-1 ).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
(Tourillon) A
(Trunnion)
FIGURE 18 - DEPOSE-POSE D'UN ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL

REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- FINAL STEPS
A Charge the shock absorber (see 05-0).
B Perform complete lubrication of U/C leg (see 05-0).
C - Check and adjust the U/C leg (see 05-1 ).
D Install the brake units (see 05-7).
E Install the main wheels (see 05-5).
F Install the fairing door.
G Check and adjust the fairing door (see 05-2).
| H Bleed the normal and emergency brake systems (see 05-7).
I Lower the aircraft onto the ground (see 02-2).
J If necessary, install the pylon stores.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^Jl* /V\ll\/-\V-7L. I
BREGUET AVIATIONÛ-~-
^^ ^ïô
^^^> ^ .
Restricted , haamiiai 05
MANUAL nir
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A SHOCK ABSORBER

(Figure 10)
A - Standard tools
-Storage and protective tool 50 AM041 .
2 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
A - Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see 02-2).
B - Remove the inner wheel for the RH U/C shock absorber, or the outer wheel for the LH
U/C shock absorber (see 05-5).
C - Discharge the shock absorber (valve at the bottom).
(1 ) Remove the protective cap and valve core from the charging valve.
(2) Progressively loosen the control nut of the valve poppet through 11/2 turns maximum.
CAUTION:
EXCESSIVE LOOSENING WILL DAMAGE THE VALVE.
(3) Reinstall the valve core and protective cap.
(4) Remove sealant from each end of hinge pins 117 (areas marked M in the figure).
4 - REMOVAL
A - Functional connection
- Disconnect the movable electrical connector from switch 90 and clear its wiring from the
shock absorber.
(1) Hinge at rocker arm 62.
(a) Remove stop pin 120 (10-mm A/F wrench) and bush 119.
(b) Support the rocker arm and wheel assembly.
(c) Drive out hinge pin 117 complete with grooved lubricator 118.
(d) Lay the rocker arm and wheel assembly down onto the ground.
NOTE: If the aligning washers (146) of the shock absorber endpieces are unglued, carefully
mark their position so that they may be glued to the same endpiece.
-save the lip seal assemblies 142.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT (LJ^Mi MIRAGE FI
/Y\ll\/-\wL-
BREGUET AVIATION ^&^ lS*£s . . .,.,,., nr.
^ JS~=^ Restricted MANUAL 05
(2) Hinge at swivel tube 61

-Hold the shock absorber and perform the same operations as in para. (1) - (a) and (c).
-Secure the rocker arm by means of tool (D21 867).
5 - PREPARATION BEFORE INSTALLATION
A - If a spare shock absorber is to be installed, proceed to depreservation (see 05-1 ).
B - Check the connecting parts of each hinge for cleanness.
C - Inspect hinge pins 117 for signs of plastic deformation, flattening or scratches. Replace
defective pins - grease them sparingly.
D - Check for presence and condition of the pins stopping the heads of the shock absorber
hinge pins on rocker arm and on swivel tube upper section. If required, replace broken or
missing pins (see 05-1).
E - Check for presence of sleeve 1 43 in the bearing at each of the shock absorber ends.
-Reglue the aligning washers 146, if necessary.
-check the condition of the lip seal assemblies 142 ; replace them if required,
-make sure that the locating notch of sleeve 143 is positioned on the side of the slots for
insertion of the bearing in the end,
-if a sleeve has been disassembled from the bearing, refit it and position the locating
notch opposite the lubricating groove of the bearing, then make sure that bearing is positioned
with lubricating groove opposite the slots for insertion of the bearing in the end
F - Mark the orientation of the pegs on the removed shock absorber, then remove the two
clamps holding the electrical wires and reinstall them (properly oriented) on the spare shock
absorber.
Direct the clamp tightening screws to the generatrix diametrically opposed to the switch.
6 - INSTALLATION
A - Mechanical connections
(1) Hinge on rocker arm 62
(a) Modifjcation 581 incorporated :
-position lip seal assemblies 142 and hold them in place on both sides of the bearing by
a thin film of grease.
(b) Align the bores of the shock absorber lower end and the rocker arm female clevis.
(c) Insert hinge pin 117 fitted with its grooved lubricator (nipple at 45°) and position it an-
ularly so as to install the stop pin.
d) install bush 119. Align the bush bores with the bores of hinge pin 117 and grooved lubri-
+ 0.1 + 0.7
cator 118 ; install stop pin 120 and tighten to a torque of 0.6 m.daN (4.4 ft.lb)
+ 0 +0
(10 mm A/F wrench).
(2) Hinge at swivel tube 61
(a) Modifjcation 581 incorporated :
-position lip seal assemblies 142 and hold them in place on both sides of the bearing by
a thin film of grease.
(b) Lift the rocker arm and wheel assembly so as to fit the shock absorber upper end into the
female clevis of the swivel tube. Align the bores.
(c) Insert hinge pin 117 fitted with its grooved lubricator (nipple straight) and position it an¬
gularly so as to install the stop pin.
(d) Install bush 119 (provided with a clamp attaching the electrical wiring harness). Align the
bush bores with the bores of hinge pin 117 and grooved lubricator 118, install stop pin 120
+ 0.1 + 0.7
and tighten to a torque of 0.6 m.daN (4.4 ft.lb) (10 mm A/F wrench).
+ 0 +0
B - Functional connection
-Connect the movable electrical connector to switch 90 and secure its wiring to the
shock absorber clamp holding pegs.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
ft^^-^rQ
ôF^^^f^
MIRAGE
..,,,,.
F
-_
7- FINAL STEPS
A Charge the shock absorber (see 05-0).
B Apply sealant around each end of hinge pins 1 17 (areas marked M in the figure).
C - Install the wheel (see 05-0).
D Proceed to lubrication (see 05-0) of :
(a) swivel tube hinge,

(b) rocker arm hinge.
E Conduct undercarriage retraction and extension test (slow operation) and check :
- free passage of the electrical wiring between cylinder, shock absorber and structure ; change the
position of the support clamps if necessary,
- clearance between cylinder and upper section of shock absorber : more than 0.5 mm (0.0196 in)
at all points, during rotation of the swivel tube.
F Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see 02-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// Zè^-zH /V\ll\MvjC \
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_ ^^
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF AN ACTUATING JACK

(figure 4)
A Special tools
B Standard tools

D Spares
-1 pin 23310 AA 030 040LE
-1 pin 23310 AA 020 020LE
- Valve box/pipe seals
2- MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Grease Air 4222 or Air 4210
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
-Sealant PR 1321 A2
B Unlock the undercarriage legs.
WARNING :
(1 ) Connect the hydraulic power unit to the ground connectors of system No. 1 .
(3) Set the undercarriage control switch lever to «HAUT» (up).
(4) Apply pressure to system No. 1, then stop applying pressure as the U/C leg equipped with the
jack concerned is partially retracted.
(6) Switch off supply to aircraft electrical power systems.
NOTE : If for any reason the hydraulic system cannot be pressurized, the above operation may be
performed by means of a hand pump connected to the telescopic rod and the actuating jack.
C Disconnect the fairing door from over the U/C leg and hold the door.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
4- REMOVAL
- Disconnect the three flexible supply pipes from airframe and blank the ports.
(1 ) Uncouple the jack-to-cylinder hinge of U/C leg (wrench C46607).

-Check that the thrust washer is installed on the
the trunnion
(2) Hold the actuating jack and remove the pin connecting the jack to the airframe fitting (30 mm
A/F wrench).
- Check that the nutation limiting washer is installed on the body swivel end.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
(1 )If a replacement actuating jack is to be installed :
(a) depreserve the jack (see 05-1 ),
(b) measure clearance «J» between end adjusting locknut (side of connection to U/C leg) and jack
body ; record the values :
- in extended position : J
- in compressed position : J'
Jack under 206 bar (3000 psi) pressure.
MR
FIGURE 18F- ADJUSTMENT OF ACTUATING JACK END

(c) Equip the new jack with the following parts taken from the removed jack :
-rigid pipe provided with restrictor
- flexible pipes.
NOTE : Discard the valve box/pipe seals.
(2) Check each hinge for cleanness and check correct attachment of the nutation limiting washer to
the body swivel end.
(3) Clean and lightly grease the jack-to-structural fitting hinge pin.
(4) On leg trunnion (item C) :
- if the thrust washer is not correctly fixed to the trunnion, renew the sealant bead marked M
in figure 4.
(1) Hinge at airframe
- Position the jack (with valve box on the side opposite the leg) and fit the jack body swivel
end into the airframe fitting.
- Install the connecting pin and the washer. Tighten the nut to a torque of 10 ± 2 m.daN
(73.7 ± 14.7 ft.lb) with a 30 mm A/F wrench. Safety the nut with a locking pin.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=i>^rSX.
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F3^^^
MIRAGE F
m a mm ai ne
(2) Hinge at U/C leg
- Screw guide cone C47027 on the trunnion (item C).

- Fit the sliding rod end to the trunnion.
- Remove the guide cone. , 0 , 0
- Torque nut 40 fitted with cup 39 to 8 _ g m.daN (59 _ «2 ^b'> usin9 wrench C46607.
- Safetying is to be carried out after jack adjustment check on aircraft.
- Connect the three flexible hoses to airframe couplings.
D Check that the jack can swivel.
6- FINAL STEPS
A Check and adjust the undercarriage leg (see 05-1 ).
B After final adjustment, tightening and safetying of the rod end locknut, apply a bead of sealant
PR 1321 A2 to the visible threads of the rod end as well as to the contact surface of the locknut, the
rod end and the recesses of the key notch and the lockwasher tab (areas identified MR in figure 18F).
C Connect the fairing door to the undercarriage leg.
D Bleed the hydraulic system by cycling the undercarriage legs (see 05-6).
E Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see 02-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCSL DASSAULT ^ irtf
ftj>7'
^ MIRAGE
iiinxnwi. F
i
BREGUET AVIATION^S?
^ ^-^^
^-^ .
Restricted , »* a
MANUAL 05ai. i a i «r-
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF AN ELASTIC ROD

(Figure 12)
A - Special tools
-U/C hydraulics 1st line tool kit
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)
-Accessory kit for torque wrench, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)

- Electrical power supply (1 1 5/200 V - 400 Hz)
D - Spares
- 1 pin 2331 0 AA 020 020LE
-1 pin 23310 AA 030 035LE
MATERIALS
-White Spirit
-Petrolatun AIR 3565
-PR 1321 A2
B - Unlock the undercarriage legs.

WARNING:
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01-0).
(1 ) Connect the hydraulic power unit to the ground connectors of system No. 1 .
(3) Set the undercarriage control switch lever to "HAUT" (up).
(4) Apply pressure to system No. 1, then stop applying pressure as the U/C leg equipped
with the elastic rod concerned is unlocked.
(6) Switch off supply to aircraft electrical power systems,
NOTE: If system No. 1 cannot be pressurized, this operation may be performed by means of a
hand pump directly connected to the telescopic rod and the actuating jack.
C - Disconnect the fairing door from over the U/C leg and hold the door.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 1
MIRAGE F
^t*
BREGUET AVIATJON ^<^ -*ï-*^>
.^w ^
Restncted ^ j im animai
MANUAL ne
05
4 - REMOVAL
A - Elastic rod/airframe connection
(1 ) Remove nut from hinge trunnion (22 mm A/F wrench).

(2) Act on U/C leg swivel arm so as to clear elastic rod self-aligned end 23 from hinge trunn¬
ion.
B - Elastic rod/main U/C leg connection

(1 ) Remove nut 32 (socket C46897) from pin 31 connecting elastic rod to swivel arm link¬
age.
(2) Break alignment of linkage by acting on swivel arm so as to permit removal of pin 31 .
(3) Hold elastic rod and remove pin 31 .

(4) Return swivel arm to initial position.
5 - INSTALLATION
(1 ) If a spare elastic rod is to be installed, proceed to depreservation (See 05-1 ).

(2) Check each hinge for cleanliness. Slightly smear each pin with petrolatum.
(3) Check clearance X between nut (rod side) on rod end 23 and body 22, which should be
4.4 ± 0,2 mm (0.1732 ± 0.0078 in). Record clearance.
B - Elastic rod/main U/C leg connection

(1 ) Break alignment of linkage by acting on swivel arm and hold in position.
(2) Locate rod end 24 in swivel linkage bellcrank 41, couple through pin 31 and adjust angu¬
lar position to insert retaining stud.
(3) Torque tighten nut 32 (socket C46897) to 5 ± 2 m.daN (36.8 ± 14.7 ft.lb) and safety
with a pin.
C - Elastic rod/airframe connection
(1 ) Adjust swivel arm position by hand so as to permit installation of elastic rod self-aligned
end on hinge pin, after interposing a washer (bevel edge towards ball-joint end).
(2) Install washer, and torque tighten nut to 5 ± 2 m.daN (36.8 ± 14.7 ft.lb), using a 22 mm
A/F wrench. Safety nut with a pin.
6 - FINAL STEPS
A - Check and adjust undercarriage leg (See 05-1).
-Apply a bead of sealant PR 1321 A2 to the visible threads of rod end 24 (area marked
MR in the figure).
B - Couple fairing door to undercarriage leg.

C - Lower aircraft on ground (See 02-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L-J^jinjl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVI ATION^^jS?0^^»^ . ..ami i ai ne
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A TELESCOPIC ROD
A Special tools
- U/C hydraulics 1st line tool kit.
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)
- Accessory kit for torque wrench, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb).

-Electrical power supply, 1 15-200 V/400 Hz.
D Spares
- 2 pins 23310 AA 020020LE
-6 studs CNF 15-20-650
- Tie BN 15-650, if required
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Grease Air 4222
or Air 4210
-Sealant PR 1422B2
-Sealant PR 1321A2
B - Unlock the U/C legs.
WARNING :
TAKE. ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-0)
Connect the hydraulic power unit to the ground connectors of system No. 1 .
-
Energize aircraft electrical power systems.
-
- Set the U/C control switch lever to «HAUT» (up).
- Apply pressure to system No. 1 , then stop applying pressure as soon as the U/C leg equipped
with the jack concerned has partially retracted.
- Block the U/C leg in unlocked position.
- Switch off aircraft electrical power supply.
NOTE : If, for any reason the hydraulic system cannot be pressurized, the above operation may be
performed by means of a hand pump connected to the telescopic rod and the actuating jack.
C Disconnect the fairing door from over the U/C leg and hold the door.
4- REMOVAL
(1 ) Disconnect the movable electrical connector from the switch and unclamp its wiring from over the
rod body.
(2) Unlock and disconnect the flexible hydraulic pipe from the rod and blank the ports.
(1 ) Disconnect the rod-to-cylinder hinge of the U/C leg (wrench C46607).

(2) Hold the telescopic rod and remove the pin connecting the rod to the airframe fitting.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^ZT^. MIRAGE F
^^FV^gfÔ
BREGUET AVIATION . « ne
. A mi i a i
^^5=-<7^ Restricted MANUAL 05
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps (figure 14)
(1 ) If a spare telescopic rod is to be installed

(a) Depreserve the rod (see 05-1).
(b) Adjust the rod to the length of the removed rod through its end (see 05-0).
(c) Mount the following parts taken from the removed rod :
rigid pipe,
-
universal joint crosspiece 50 (using a 35 mm A/F wrench, torque tighten nut 55 to 5 ± 2 m.daN
-
(36.8 ± 14.7 ft.lb) and safety it with a new locking pin).
(2) Check each hinge for cleanness.

(3) Slightly grease pin 51 and the U/C leg cylinder trunnion (item D in Figure 4).
(1) Hinge at airframe (figure 14)

- Locate universal joint crosspiece 50 in the airframe fitting, install pin 51 (observe grease fitting
position) and attach through bolt 53. Torque tighten to 0.6 , J m.daN (4.44 , Q" ft.lb).
(2) Hinge at U/C leg (figure 4)

Ensure that the thrust washer is correctly positioned on the trunnion (item D), after checking
-
the sealant bead under washer (area identified M in figure) for condition. If required, apply a light
amount of sealant.
- Install guide cone C47027 on the trunnion (item D).
- Fit the rod end to the trunnion.
- Remove the guide cone.
- Locate cup 39 and torque tighten nut 40 to 8 _ g m.daN (59 * °2 ft,lb' (wrench C46607).
Safety with a new locking pin.
(1) Connect the switch plug and attach wiring 57 to the rod body using three new Eribe ties 58 ;
position these ties as per view A, and attach each one with two studs.
(2) Connect the flexible supply hose and lockwire it.
6- FINAL STEPS
A Connect the fairing door.
B Lubricate the airframe hinge (see 05-0).
C - Check and adjust the U/C leg (see 05-1 ).
D After final adjustment, tightening and safetying of the rod end locknut, apply a bead of sealant
PR 1321 A2 to the visible threads of the rod end as well as to the contact surface of the locknut, the rod
end and the recesses of the key notch and the lockwasher tab (areas identified MR in figure 21 ).
E Bleed the hydraulic system free of air by cycling the U/C legs (see 05-6).
F Lower the aircraft onto the ground (see 02-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L==^^r\L
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^^Ô.
MIRAGE
,..,, __
F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A HYDRAULIC NOZZLE ASSEMBLY

(Figure 18M)
A Standard tools
B Special tools
- Undercarriage hydraulics 2nd line tool kit.

- Extractor D46375.
- Guide cone D47492.
D Spares
- 3 nozzle seals JE20F

- 4 packing retainer seals JEE1 1 F
- 3 swivel coupling lockwashers 23350AC060LE
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
- Mastinox 6856 H
- Zinc powder (100/200 grit)
- Moisture-free compressed air supply.
A Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see manual 05-7).
B Make sure that the parking/emergency brake handle is in normal position.
C Remove the sealant from areas marked M in the figure.
D Free the electrical wire bundle from cover 134 and remove the latter.
E Install connector protectors.
F Disconnect the two hydraulic pipes from swivel coupling 70, after unclamping them from the
cylinder to render them more movable (14 mm A/F wrench) (remove support block cap).
G Blank off the pipe ports with appropriate caps as disconnection proceeds.
AC
BREGUET AVIATION
134
135
140
VUE SUIVANT A
VIEW A
VUE SUIVANT B
VIEW B
77 19_ 20^ 61, 72-, 69.n ,.X r,20 r73 ,.19 ^.72
Coupe A
Section A
FIGURE 18M -DEPOSE - POSE D'UNE BUSE HYDRAULIQUE EQUIPEE

REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A HYDRAULIC NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT #_J£>-<!L-ft /V\ll\/-\VJ'L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^S?» J^*Q> ^ . , ,,,.,,,., ftl-
^**^5C^ Restncted MANUAL 05
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Removal
(1) Unsafety and unscrew the three screws 135. Withdraw the lockplates (10-mm socket).
(2) Mark the position of the mounting flange of swivel coupling 70 and remove swivel cou¬
pling 70 and the two packing retainers 136 in succession.
(3) Unscrew nut 137 and recover plug 138 (17-mm A/F wrench-5 mm Allen wrench).
(4) Unscrew the three screws 140 and recover the washers (10 mm socket).
(5) Withdraw nozzle assembly 69 from swivel tube 61, after marking its position (extractor
D46375).
B - Preparation for installation
(1 )Discard all seals and clean the parts ; dry with moisture-free compressed air.
NOTE: Use solvent D1 PYROLAC 1591 for parts coated with MASTINOX.
(2) Check the nozzle sleeve for condition, scratches, corrosion, peening exceeding 0.2 mm
(0.078 in).
NOTE: If a hydraulic leak is the cause for removal of the nozzle, check the bottom of the seal
grooves for cracks by performing a penetrant inspection.
(3) Install the seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds (see manual 05-0).
C - Installation
-Coat the following sections of the nozzle (areas marked X) with Mastinox :
-bottom of the flange and its periphery,
-lower section crossing the bottom of the swivel tube as far as 2 mm (0.078 in) be¬
fore the first seal.
-Apply a light coat of grease 4205 (area marked G) to the bore of pin 72 on plug 138
side over a maximum length of 5 mm (0.196 in).
(1 ) Carefully install nozzle 69 in swivel tube 61 by means of tool D47492.
(2) Align the attaching holes of the nozzle with those of liner 71, as marked during removal.
(3) Install and tighten the three screws 140 provided with washers (10-mm socket).
-Coat the lower section of the flange of swivel coupling 70 with Mastinox (area
marked X).
(4) Install plug 138 and nut 137 ; tighten the nut (17-mm A/F wrench, 5-mm Allen
wrench).
(5) Install the two packing retainers 1 36.
-Coat the inside and outside diameters of plug 138 with Mastinox (area marked X).
(6) Position swivel coupling 70 as marked during removal; attach by means of the three
screws 135 fitted with new lockplates ; safety the screws (10 mm socket).
D - Final step
-Conduct the leak tests (see manual 05-1).

-Connect the two hydraulic pipes to swivel coupling 70 and clamp them onto the cylin¬
der.
-Connect the hydraulic power unit and apply pressure to the system.
-Check the hydraulic pipes for leaks at swivel coupling 70.
-Install cover 134 after moderately spreading conductive sealant on the two cover sides
in contact with swivel coupling 70 ; the sealant should be prepared in the following propor¬
tions and mixed up carefully :
-60% Mastinox compound by weight,
-40% zinc powder by weight.
-Attach the electrical wire bundle.
-Coat areas marked M in the figure with sealant.
AB
BREGUET
ZU^îrU
AVIATION^£F=__^<0
MIRAGE
....,.,
F
nc
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF A ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

(Figure 18T)
A Standard tools

- 1 3 mm A/F Allen wrench
- 1 5 mm A/F Allen wrench
- 45 mm dia. fiber drift
B Special tools

- Guide cone 193-24828J.
C Spares
4 seals JE E9F (extensions 73 and 74) .

-
4 preformed packings BT 31 -7 (swivel couplings 75 and 76).
-
- 2 preformed packings BT 10-8 (pin 76).
- 3 lockwashers 23350AC040LE (screws 17).
- 2 washers 23350AC050LE (attachment of cap to rocker arm line support).
- 2 washers 20 (P/N C54938-20) in case of replacement of rocker arm with a cylinder assembly
C22879/80-14, -143, -144.
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Moisture-free compressed air supply
- 0.8 mm dia. stainless steel lockwire
-Grease Air 4210
- Grease Air 421 5
A Remove the brake units (see manual 05-7).
B Remove the hydraulic nozzle assembly (see manual 05-1).
C Unclamp the hydraulic pipes from the rocker arm and disconnect them from swivel couplings 75
and 76 and from the connection unit.
D Disconnect the lower electrical wire bundle from the upper one, then unclamp it from driver 80.
Remove the clamp attached to the cylinder strut and recover it.
E Remove the shock absorber lower pin while supporting the rocker arm. Free the shock absorber
from the rocker arm, then set the rocker arm in a position roughly horizontal.
AA
BREGUET AVI ATlON^c^F^^Ô IWIAMIIAI OK
^^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
4- PROCEDURE
A Remove swivel coupling 75
(1 ) Unsafety and remove the three screws 17. Discard lockwashers 18.
I (2) Remove swivel coupling 75 and recover extension 73.
NOTE : If pin 72 has not to be replaced, removal of the swivel coupling is not required.
B Remove swivel coupling 76
(1 ) Unsafety and remove screws 16 (3 mm A/F Allen wrench).
(2) Drift out pin 78.

(3) Remove swivel coupling 76 and recover spacers 1 5, extension 74, bush 77 and washer 19 (mark it).
C Remove pin 72
(1 ) Mark the position and installation direction of the pin.
(2) Hold rocker arm 62 and drift out pin 72 (45 mm dia. fiber drift).
(3) Remove the rocker arm and recover washers 19 and 20 after perfectly marking their positions.
5- PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION
A Discard the seals and clean the removed parts ; dry with moisture- free compressed air.
B Clean the bore of the rocker arm and swivel tube bushes ; dry with moisture-free compressed air.
C Check pins 72 and 78 for condition, scratches, corrosion.
D Check the swivel tube for internal condition : corrosion (see manual 05-0).
E In case of replacement of rocker arm
- If a cylinder C22879/80-14, -143 or -144 is installed, discard existing washers 20 (recessed) and
replace them with flat washers delivered in a complementary kit.
- Recover the following on the removed rocker arm :
- the generator assemblies,
- the connection unit assembly,
- the wheel spacers and fit them to the new rocker arm.
F Coat the following with Air 4210 grease : the outside diameter of pins 72 and 78, both sides of
washers 19 and 20, and the bore of the swivel tube and rocker arm bushes.
G Very slightly coat the following with Air 421 5 grease : the inside diameter of pin 72 and the surface
of swivel coupling 75 in contact with pin 72.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lL^^Zr^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^'.^Ô ..«., ne
a i
^£^^<2^ Restricted MANUAL 05
CAUTION :
PREVENT INGRESS OF GREASE IN HOLES RECEIVING EXTENSIONS 73 AND 74.
H Install the seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds (see manual 05-0).
6- INSTALLATION
A Fit pin 72 with coupling 75
- Insert the swivel coupling into pin 72 while aligning the extension with its housing in the pin.
- Attach the swivel coupling with screws 17 and lockwashers 18. Safety screws 17.
B Install pin assembly 72 as marked during removal
- Locate the rocker arm on the swivel tube and slide a washer 20 on either side of the swivel tube.
NOTE : If «recessed» washers 20 are used, locate them on the flange of the swivel tube bushes before
locating the rocker arm.
C Fully insert pin assembly 72 fitted with a washer 19 by placing driver 81 in the rocker arm recess.
Use guide cone 193-24828J to facilitate insertion in the various bores.
I NOTE : The lubrification fitting of each swivel coupling must be directed toward the aircraft nose.
- Install a washer 19 at the end of pin assembly 72.

- Install bush 77.
- Reinstall swivel coupling 76 :
- fit the swivel coupling with preformed packings 39 and spacer rings 15.
D Insert the swivel coupling into pin assembly 72 while :

aligning extension 74 with its housing in the pin,
-
- placing driver 80 in the rocker arm recess, the electrical cable passing between the driver and the
rocker arm,
- aligning the rigging pin holes of the parts.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L=J=^rU.
BREGUET AVIATION ^S^^Ô
MIRAGE F
..ami. ai rsr-
E Install pin 78 and secure it with screws 16. Safety with 0.8 mm dia. stainless steel lockwire.
NOTE : When replacing the rocker arm with a cylinder assembly C22879/80-14, -143 or -144, if
difficulty is encountered in installing pin 78 (offset pinning holes), rework the flat surface
of washer 1 9.
7- FINAL STEPS
A Install the hydraulic nozzle assembly (see manual 05-1 ).
CAUTION :
DO NOT PERFORM THE LEAK TESTS OF THE HYDRAULIC NOZZLE ASSEMBLY.
B Check the rocker arm for free deflection.
C Install the shock absorber lower pin.
D Connect the hydraulic pipes to swivel couplings 75 and 76 and the connection unit.
E Conduct the leak tests of the hydraulic nozzle assembly (see manual 05-1 ).
F Clamp the hydraulic pipes onto the rocker arm and cylinder.
G Clamp the lower electrical wire bundle onto driver 80 and cylinder. Connect it.
H Install the brake units (see manual 05-7).
IN CASE OF ROCKER ARM REPLACEMENT :
Check the adjustment of the concerned leg (see manual 05-1 ).

Lubricate the hinge with a grease gun (Air 4210 grease).
AA
03-85 Restricted 1_32s
BREGUET AVIATION
Coupe A
Section A
77., 19^ 20^ 61^ 72n 69_, 20^ 73., 19
VUE SUIVANT B
VIEW B
FIGURE 18T - DEPOSE - POSE D'UN BALANCIER

REMOVAL -INSTALLATION OF A ROCKER ARM
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ " « MIRAGE
#tiii\#
kvi_ F
BREGUET AVIATION^<_~
^ -=-=^ ^==^^3
Restricted ./i ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF A SHOCK ABSORBER

FOR SEAL REPLACEMENT
(Figure 19)
A - Special tools
-U/C hydraulics 2nd line tool kit

B - Standard tools


-Fluid drain pan.
D - Spares
-Seals
-1 lockplate 23350 CA070
- 1 bottom setscrew
-2 cotter pins 2331 0 AA 020 01 5 LE
- 1 cotter pin 2331 0 AA 01 5 01 5 LE
-2 lockplates for switch stud.
I
2 - MATERIALS
-Microfiltered hydraulic fluid AIR 3520

-White spirit
-Solvent D1 PYROLAC 1591
-MASTINOX 6856 H
-Copper sulfate
-Sealant PR 1422B2
-Adjustable-pressure nitrogen supply
-Grease AIR 4215 (Modification 609 incorporated)
-Zinc powder (100/200 grit).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL=^>^rvL. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^joF3^^^» . miam.iai «r-
A Place a fluid drain pan and clean rags near works area.
B Remove switch (See 056).

C Remove plate and flange assembly accommodating switch.
(1) Unsafety (lock plate) and remove the two studs 123 (3/8 in. A/F spanner). Discard lock plates.
(2) Remove the following in succession :
-plate 122
- rocker 97
-flange 121.
(3) Unsafety and remove the four screws attaching socket 95. Recover washers.
(4) Remove socket 95.
D Remove sealant from ends 93 and 107, screw 124 and guide bush 94 (areas identified M in figure).
E Remove all safetying parts (lockwires, pins).
NOTE : If several shock absorbers are overhauled together, disassemble only one shock absorber at a
time, to avoid mixing parts.
CAUTION :
DURING THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS, IT IS NECESSARY TO CAREFULLY HANDLE
AND PROTECT THE PARTS MENTIONED BELOW, SINCE CERTAIN OF THEM ARE
PARTLY PLASTICIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO
SHOCKS AND SCRATCHES
- Pistons 108 and 112 (outside diameter)
- Restrictor 102 (outside diameter).
4- DISASSEMBLY
WARNING :
BEFORE STARTING ANY REMOVAL OPERATION, FULLY DISCHARGE THE SHOCK
ABSORBER. REMOVE PROTECTIVE CAP. REMOVE VALVE CORE. OPEN CHARGING
VALVE (110) CONTROL CLAPPER BY 1 1/2 TURNS MAXIMUM AND ALLOW SHOCK
ABSORBER TO DISCHARGE FULLY. THEN, REMOVE FILLER PLUG (99) WITH CARE, AS
THE GAS AND FLUID CHAMBERS MAY HAVE BEEN INTERCONNECTED.
A Drain fluid from chambers.
B - Clamp cylinder 92 in vice (Protective jaws C47028).
C Remove end 93 after identifying position relative to cylinder 92 (Adapter C1-47029).
D Remove bottom 101 as follows :
( 1 ) Fully compress shock absorber.

(2) Hold shock absorber and clamp rod 100 in vice (Protective jaws C47030).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT HJ^^Q. /Y\|I\/-\V«7L.
^f^
BREGUET AVIATION ^^ C^*Ci>
^~^> .
Restrictetj , ' mi ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
(3) Remove setscrew 126.

(4) Remove bottom 101 (wrench C1 -47032 - fit wrench in straight or oblique holes in bot-
' torn).
(5) Save washer 127.
E - Clamp cylinder 92 in the vise (protective jaws C47028).
F - Remove sliding rod assembly 106.
(1) Unsafety (lockplate), and remove screw 124, save shim 125, and discard the lockplate.
(2) Rotate guide bush 94 IN THE DIRECTION SHOWN ON THE PLATE LOCATED NEAR
SCREW 1 24 so as to remove stop rod 1 28 (wrench C46846).
(3) Withdraw the sliding rod assembly from cylinder 92.
G - Clamp sliding rod 106 in the vise (protective jaws C47034).
H - Disassemble sliding rod assembly 106.

I (1 ) Remove charging valve 110.
(2) Remove end 107 after marking its position relative to sliding rod 106 (adapter C1 47029).
(3) Remove the following in succession from sliding rod 106 .:
-separator piston 108 (extractor C47036. On the piston the hole provided for the
threaded rod of the extractor may be 6 or 8 mm in diameter ; use the corresponding end of the
threaded rod) ;
-rod 100 complete with restrictor 102 (extraction cone C47033).
(4) Remove piston 112.
(a) Hold threaded bush 1 1 3 in the bore of the sliding rod (retaining wrench C47037).
(b) Unsafety (pin), and remove nut 114 (adapter C46845).
(c) Remove piston 112.
(d) Remove threaded bush 113 complete with blank 115.
(5) Remove guide bush 94.
5 - CLEANING
A - Before cleaning the parts, remove all their seals using the bent end of spatulas 89901 and
A46524 to extract them from the grooves (use only spatula A46524 to remove seals from pis¬
tons 108 and 112, and restrictor 102), Systematically discard all rubber or Teflon seals.
B - Clean all parts with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air.
C - Clean the parts (threads) coated with MASTINOX by means of PYROLAC solvent - Ends
93 and 107, cylinder 92, and sliding rod 106.
6 - CHECK
A - Ensure that the chrome plating of sliding rod 106 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If
such surfaces are questionable, wipe them (clean and dry) with a rag soaked in copper
sulfate ; flaked areas will appear red.
B - Make sure that no part is oxidized, particularly the socket and the switch control rocker.
C - Check that there are no impacts or scratches (circular or longitudinal) on all moving or
stationary parts providing sealing and specially, on the outside diameters of pistons 108, 112,
and restrictor 102 which are rilsan plastic-coated.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJ^-^-^Zl MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^&^
^-^ ^5«Cb
-?-o Restricted .«amiiai
MANUAL nr-
05
D - Check the threads for condition (peening, stripping).

E - Carefully inspect seal seating grooves.
F - Check the locator on plate 122 for condition.
NOTE: If the check proves unsatisfactory, forward the shock absorber to the next higher repair
line.
7 - INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE REASSEMBLY
A - Install the seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds
-For composition of seals to be mounted on separator piston 108 and the outside diame¬
ter of piston 112, see 05-0, figure 7, view G.
-Separator piston 108 and restrictor 102 may have oversize dimensions (see 05-0).
-Use the following tools to install seal 133 (Teflon) on restrictor 102 :
-installation cone C46843,
-forming ring C46844.
NOTE: The precautions to be taken for installing seals and assembling parts are described in
manual 05-0.
B - Lightly smear the bores of cylinder 92 and sliding rod 106 with hydraulic fluid.
8 - REASSEMBLY
A - Fitting out of sliding rod 106.
(1 ) Clamp the sliding rod in the vise (protective jaws C47034).
(2) Install guide bush 94 on the sliding rod.
(3) Install piston 112.
(a) Position piston 112.
(b) Install threaded bush 113 equipped with blank 115 in the sliding rod bore ; hold the
threaded bush (retaining wrench C47037).
(c) Install nut 114 on threaded bush 113 (adapter C46845). Tighten to a torque 10 ± 2
m.daN (73.7 ± 14.7 ft.lb), trying to align the safety hole with one castellation of the nut.
NOTE: If this alignment cannot be obtained within the range of torquing tolerances, drill in
the threaded bush a new 2 mm dia hole inclined at 30" and opening in front of another
castellation so that this hole is not tangential to the hole previously made in the
threaded bush.
(d) Install a new cotter pin 1 29.
(4) Successively insert the following parts completely into the sliding rod bore :
-rod 100 equipped with restrictor 102 (guide cone C47033),
-separator piston 108 (extractor C47036).
(5) Smear threads of sliding rod and rod end 107 with Mastinox.
(6) Screw rod end 107 ; unscrews by 1 /8th of a turn every 1/2 turn so as to reduce the ten¬
sion on the seal. At the right moment, torque to 21 ±4 m.daN (154.8 ± 29.5 ft.lb) adapter
C1 -47029 to pick up the mark set at time of disassembly.
NOTE: To install a new rod end 107, draw a line (felt-tip pen) on the flange of the rod end to
mark the position of a rod slot. Remove the rod end with care. Drill a 2.5 mm (0.09 in)
dia hole on the line at 5 mm (0.19 in) from the edge and with a 45° slant (see detail
B). Carefully deburr the drilled hole. Reinstall, screw and tighten the rod end to the re¬
quired torque value.
(7) Install a new cotter pin 130 as shown in the figure.
(8) Fit charging valve 110 to end 107, tighten to a torque of 1 to 1.25 m.daN (7.3 to 9.2
ft.lb), safety with a lockwire.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" ^ / V\l Ï\/-\V^L_
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ïvr-~-
^^ ^s^»^
^?-^> _ .
Restricted .«ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
B - Clamp cylinder 92 in the vise (protective jaws C47028).

C Installation of sliding rod assembly 106.
(1 ) Proceeding with care, fully insert the sliding rod assembly into cylinder 92.
(2) Install guide bush 94.
(3) Install stop rod 128 by rotating guide bush 94 in the direction shown on the plate located
near screw 1 24.
NOTE: Take care to correctly position stop rod 128 when inserting it (see figure, section A).
(4) Install shim 125 and screw 124 fitted a new lockplate. Safety.
D - Installation of bottom 101 .
(1 ) Hold the shock absorber and clamp rod 100 in the vise (protective jaws C47030).
(2) Install washer 127 on bottom 101 and screw the latter onto rod 100 so as to align the
bore accommodating setscrew 126 with the setscrew hole in rod 100 (wrench C1 -47032).
Tighten to a torque of 10 m.daN (73.7 ft.lb).
(3) Install and tighten setscrew 126, then safety with a punch.
(4) Remove sliding rod 106 so as to position bottom 101 on cylinder 92.
E - Coat the threads of cylinder 92 and end 93 with Mastinox. Tighten end 93 so as to align
the marks made during removal (adapter C1 47029).
Tighten to a torque of 25 + q m.daN (184.3 + q68 ft.lb).
Install a new pin 131 as shown in the figure.
NOTE: When screwing on the rod end, unscrew by 1/8 of a turn every 1/2 turn so as to re¬
duce the tension on the seal.
9 - FINAL STEPS
A - Fill the shock absorber fluid chamber (See 05-0).
B - Check shock absorber for leakage.

(1 ) Remove filler plug 99 with the shock absorber in vertical position.
(2) Connect the nitrogen supply to the charging valve and charge to 10 bar (145 psi).
(3) Dip the shock absorber into a non-corrosive fluid (down to mid-height) and check for air
leakage through the filler port or the sliding rod end.
(4) Remove the shock absorber from the fluid and wipe it thoroughly.
(5) Discharge the shock absorber slowly and completely.
(6) Recharge the shock absorber (See 05-0).
C - Install filler plug 99 equipped with seals and cover 132 and tighten to a torque of
1 .5 m.daN (1 1 ft.lb) (16-mm A/F socket). Then safety with lockwire.
D - Reinstall the switch socket and base plate assembly.

(1 ) Fully extend the shock absorber.
(2) Through the cylinder hole accommodating socket 95, inject grease AIR 4215 to fill the
annular chamber formed by the sliding rod and the cylinder.
-Remove all the grease that could remain in the cylinder bore receiving socket 95.
-Make sure that the roller rotates freely and that the roller holder rocks freely about its
axis.
(3) Lightly grease the rocker surface (marked G) in contact with the roller holder, as well as
the roller.
-MOD 609 NOT INCORPORATED. Make sure that the ball is free in its housing on the
socket. Thoroughly grease the ball.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^-" J^ ' V\ll\/-\V-7L_
BREGUET AVIATION ^?4
^<s_
- ê-*^
^~=^ ^ .
Restricted .aamiiai
MANUAL ncr
05
Apply a coat of MASTINOX on the fitting diameter and the bearing surface of socket 95
flange, then place the socket in its housing of cylinder 92. Secure it by means of four screws
fitted with washers previously coated with MASTINOX. Lockwire the screws.
Apply a large quantity of grease AIR 421 5 in the recess of socket 95.
E - Assemble the switch control assembly
Moderately coat the following surfaces with Mastinox :
-surface of socket 95 in contact with flange 1 21 ,

-surface of flange 121 in contact with plate 122,
-threads of studs 1 23.
Apply grease AIR 421 5 to the following :
-spherical bearing of rocker 97,

-rocker passage hole in flange 121,
-spherical recess in plate 122.
Install plate 1 22 on flange 1 21 .
Install the above assembly on socket 95, directing it properly.
Slide a new lockplate on each stud 123 (provided with its nut and washer) ; then screw
the studs (3/8 in A/F wrench) and lock them by bending the lockplate tabs down onto plate
122.
+ 01
Tightening torque 0.6 + g m.daN (4.425 ft.lb).
Check that the rocker operates correctly : the latter must hinge without friction.
F - Install and adjust the switch (See manual 05-6).
G - Run a sealant bead at the ends (93-107) of screw 124 and guide bush 94 (areas marked
M).
H - If required, touch up paint (See manual 05-0).
J - Depending on the shock absorber destination :
-install on aircraft (See manual 05-1),

-or store it (See manual 05-1 ).
AA
I
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTL
BREGUET AVIATION -'-Ê0
MIRAGE F
Détail A
FIGURE 19 - DEMONTAGE - REMONTAGE D'UN AMORTISSEUR

DISASSEMBL Y - ASSEMBL Y OF A SHOCK ABSORBER
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^rT5L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^£F=^<g<0 mammai ne
DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AN ACTUATING JACK FOR

SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 20)
A Special tools
- U/C hydraulics 2nd line tool kit
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN ( 1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)

-Fluid drain pan
D Spares
- Seals
-1 pin 23310 AA020020LE
- 1 lockplate for adjustable end nut
- 1 filter for supply port
- 1 setscrew for rod/guide rod locking
- 1 setscrew for locking threaded bush on sliding rod extension side
- 1 restrictor
- stop
1 ring 7000-01 10A100T
- 1 stop ring C5022 1-1 0-07-4
- 2 stop rings C50221 -15-1 1-7
- 1 stop ring C5022 1-1 0-03-4
2- MATERIALS
-Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520
-White spirit
-Solvent D1 Pyrolac 1591
-Mastinox 6856 H
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
-Sealant PR 1321 A2
-Moisture-free compressed air supply
-Copper sulphate
-Grease Air 4206
A Place a fluid drain pan and clean rags near the work area.
B Remove all lockwires, except those on. jack valve box.
C Remove the sealant with a spatula, taking care not to damage the surface protective coating.
D Remove the storage plugs.
E Remove the valve box.
F Extend the sliding rod.
G Clamp the jack in the vice (protective jaws C47039).
NOTE : If several jacks are overhauled together, disassemble only one jack at a time to avoid mixing
parts.
AB
/f\ p<a
i^-^r^k MIPAf^F F
/ VII l\/"V V-7 L_ I
BREGUET AVIATI0N^j5F°,.^=O
^^^^^>
L A
CAUTION :
AND PROTECT THE PARTS MENTIONED BELOW, SINCE CERTAIN OF THEM ARE
PARTLY PLASTICIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO
SHOCKS AND SCRATCHES.
- Sliding rod 33
(inside diameter)
- Seal retainer 58
- Pistons 31 and 35
(outside diameter)
- Bush 34
4- DISASSEMBLY
A Remove coupling 23 as follows :
Remove coupling (10 mm A/F spanner) and recover filter 49.
B Remove adjustable rod end 45 as follows :
(1 ) Unsafety threaded ring 47 (lock plate)

(2) Hold adjustable rod end and loosen threaded ring 47 (Spanner A21978 - Adapter C46473) so as to
clear lock plate 50 and key 51 .
(3) Remove rod end 45 and discard lock plate 50.
C Remove self-aligned end 27 as follows :
(1 )Remove retaining ring 52.

(2) Mark self-aligned end dimension from side of nut 29 and count number of turns required to
remove self-aligned end.
(3) Hold end 27, remove nut 29 (Spanner A21978 - Adapter C46473) and recover key 53.
(4) Remove self-aligned end 27.
D Remove seal retainer 25 as follows :
(1 ) Remove retaining ring 54.

(2) Remove threaded ring 26 (Spanner C47043).
(3) Withdraw seal retainer 25 (extractor C47044).
E Remove bottom assembly 37 as follows :
(1) Remove jack from protective jaws C47039 and clamp it again in vice through sliding rod, using
protective jaws C47047.
(2) Remove retaining ring 61 .
(5) Extract bottom assembly 37 (Extractor D46415).
F Strip bottom 37 as follows :
(1 ) Clamp bottom in vice (Protective jaws C47048).

(2) Remove the following in succession from bottom :
(a) Sleeve 40 (Extractor C47041 )
(b) Valve 41, and remove the following from valve :
- retaining ring 62
- restrictor 42
(c) Spring 43
(d) Rod 39.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ " » ' »'"\'~^N<-^»-
BREGUET AVIATION ^ç_-
^<l _,=p-=«o
^*~^ ,-, ^ ^
Restricted j â/iammai ne
. MANUAL 05
G - Remove sliding rod assembly 33 as follows :
(1 ) Clamp jack cylinder 21 in vise (Protective jaws C47039).

(2) Retract sliding rod 33, and push counter-rod 30 through sliding rod bore by means of a
wooden or fiber drift of suitable diameter until counter-rod is sufficiently driven out of cylinder
21 (side of end 27) to gain access to setscrew 55.
(3) Remove setscrew 55.
(4) Hold counter-rod 30 (wrench C47046), and remove rod 24 (wrench A21978 - Adapter
C46473).
(5) Push back counter-rod 30 inside sliding rod 33, by three quarters of its visible length.
(6) Remove screw 56.
(7) Remove threaded bush 57 (wrench A21 978 - Adapter C46473).
(8) Remove cylinder 21 and sliding rod assembly 33.
H - Strip sliding rod 33 as follows :
(1 ) Remove seal retainer 58.

(2) Screw guide cone 193-24975J on counter-rod 30.
(3) Extract counter-rod assembly 30 remove the guide cone.
(4) Clamp sliding rod in vise (Dummy jaws C47047).
(5) Remove cotter pin 59.
(6) Remove the following in succession :
-nut 36 (wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473),
-piston 35,
-bush 34.
I - Strip counter-rod 30 as follows :
-Clamp the counter-rod in vise (Protective jaws D47758).

(1) Remove retaining ring 60. .
(2) Hold counter-rod (wrench C47046), and remove nut 32 (wrench A21978 - Adapter
C46473).
- Remove the counter-rod from the vise.
(3) Remove piston 31 .
5 - CLEANING
A - Before cleaning the parts, remove all seals, using the bent end of spatulas 89901 and
A46524 (Use only spatula A46524 to remove seals from pistons 31 and 35, sliding rod 33,
and seal retainer 58). Systematically reject all rubber or Teflon seals.
DO NOT ALLOW THE CLEANING MATERIAL TO ENTER THE VALVE BOX MOUNTED ON
CYLINDER 21.
C - Clean parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound by means of PYROLAC solvent
(threaded rings 57 and 26, nuts 29 and self-aligned end 27).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTj MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^jî- ^ - ..«....«.
«^
6- CHECK
A Ensure that the external surface of cylinder 21 is free of dents.
B Carefully inspect seal grooves.
C Make sure that no part is oxidized.
D Check threads for condition (peening, stripping).
E Check sealing areas of moving or stationary parts for evidence of seizing and scratches (circular or
longitudinal).
F Ensure that the chromium-plating of sliding rod 33 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If the surface
isquestionable, wipe it (clean and dry) by means of a rag soaked in copper sulphate ; flaked areas will
appear red.
G Check parts whose outside diameters (pistons 31 and 35, bush 34) or inside diameters (sliding rod
33 and seal retainer 58) are plasticized with rilsan : they must show no dents or scratches.
NOTE : If checking is unsatisfactory, forward the jack to the next higher repair line.
7- INSTRUCTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY
A Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds. To install teflon seals, use the tools indicated.
Parts and tools followed by an asterisk (*) may have oversize dimensions (see 05-0).
( 1 ) Seal 63 of seal retainer 58

- Forming cone S1 6-0605-1 531
(2) Seal 64 of piston 35*
- Installation cone S16-0609-1831 *
- Shrinking ring S1 6-0608-1 831 *
(3) Seal 65 of sliding rod 33
- Forming cone S16-0605-0661
(4) Seal 66 of piston 31*
- Installation cone S16-0609-1261 *
-Shrinking ring S 16-0608- 1261*
NOTE : Refer to manual 05-0 for the precautions to be taken to install seals and assemble parts.
B Lightly coat the bores of cylinder 21 and sliding rod 33 with hydraulic fluid.
8- ASSEMBLY
A Fitting-out of bottom 37
(1 ) Clamp the bottom in the vice (protective jaws C47048).

(2) Mount a new restrictor 42 and retaining ring 62 on valve 41 .
(3) Insert the following in succession into bottom 37 :
- rod 39 (correctly seated),
- spring 43,
- valve assembly 41 ,
- sleeve 40.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" « ' » ' T^^>-71-
BREGUET AVIATION >J^- _^-**^> . . . . ,,..,,,,, «r-
^<^ ^&r*~> Restncted MANUAL 05
(4) Coat the threads of threaded ring 44 with Mastinox compound then screw the ring
(wrench C47049) and torque it to 5 ± 1 m.daN (36.8 ± 7 ft.lb).
NOTE 1 : Tightening the threaded ring may misalign the ring safetying hole in relation to the
bottom hole. In such a case drill to 1 .2 ~ « .. mm diameter through the bore.
(Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the threaded ring).
(5) Install a new retaining ring 61.
B - Fit out counter-rod 30 as follows :
(1 ) Install the following in succession on counter-rod :
-piston 31,
-nut 32.
(2) Clamp counter-rod 30 in vise (Protective jaws D47758) and torque tighten nut 32
(wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473) to 14 ± 2.8 m.daN (103.2 ± 20 ft.lb).
NOTE: Tightening the nut may misalign the nut safetying hole in relation to the counter-rod
hole. In such a case, back drill to 1 .2 ~ « ^ mm diameter and 6 mm (0.2362 in) depth
as shown in detail A of the figure (Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial
hole in the counter-rod).
(3) Install retaining ring 60.
C - Fit out sliding rod 33 as follows :
-Clamp sliding rod in vise (Protective jaws C47047).
(1) Install bush 34 on sliding rod (THE BUSH BEVELED SIDE MUST MANDATORILY BE
POSITIONED TOWARDS THE ROD SPLINED END).
(2) Install piston 35.
(3) Torque tighten nut 36 to 10.5 ± 1 m.daN (77.4 ± 7.3 ft.lb) - (wrench A21978 - Adapter
C46473).
NOTE: Tightening the nut may misalign the nut safetying hole in relation to the sliding rod
+ 01
hole. In such a case, back drill to 2.5 + «" mm diameter through the sliding rod.
(Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the sliding rod).
(4) Install a new cotter pin 59.
(5) Install guide cone 1 93-24975J on counter-rod assembly 30.
(6) Fully insert and locate counter-rod assembly 30 into bore of sliding rod 33, exercising
care, and remove guide cone.
(7) Screw guide cone C47496 on sliding rod 33.
(8) Carefully mount and position seal retainer 58 on sliding rod and remove guide cone.
D - Reinstall sliding rod assembly 33 as follows :
(1 ) Clamp jack cylinder 21 in vise (Protective jaws C47039).
(2). Fully insert sliding rod assembly 33 into bore of cylinder 21, exercising care, and mount
seal retainer 58.
(3) Install and tighten threaded ring 57 (with threads coated with Mastinox compound)
(wrench A21 978 - Adapter C46473), then torque to 31 .5 ± 6.8 m.daN (232.3 ± 50 ft.lb) so
as to align the threaded setscrew hole with its locking recess in threaded ring 57. Should
threaded hole and recess cannot be aligned within these tolerances, proceed with a new coun-
terboring in accordance with NOTE 1 .
NOTE: Tightening the threaded ring may misalign the threaded hole in the cylinder, which ac¬
commodates setscrew 56, in relation to the hole for the setscrew in threaded ring 57.
In such a case, back drill (90° tipped drill) to 6 mm (0.2362 in) depth, as shown in
detail B of the figure (do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the
threaded ring).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-A_~- ^*o . , ..a m mai ne
^-^ ^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
(4) Install and tighten a new setscrew 56 and stake it in its slot.
(5) Hold counter-rod 30 (wrench C47046), and install and tighten rod 24 on the latter
(wrench A21 978 -Adapter C46473).
NOTE: Tightening these two parts may misalign the threaded hole in counter-rod 30, which
accommodates setscrew 55, and the hole for the setscrew in rod 24. In such a case
back drill (90° tipped drill) to 4 mm (0.1574 in) depth as shown in detail C of the
figure (Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the rod).
(6) Install and tighten setscrew 55.
(7) Fully push rod 24 in place.
E - Reinstall seal retainer 25 as follows :
(1 ) Fully insert seal retainer 25 into bore of cylinder 21 .
(2) Install and tighten threaded ring 26 (with threads coated with Mastinox compound)
(wrench C47043). Torque tighten to 15 ± 1.5 m.daN (110.6 ± 11 ft.lb).
NOTE: Tightening the threaded ring may misalign the ring safetying hole in relation to the cyl¬
inder hole. In such a case back drill to 1 .8 ~_ 0 1 mm diameter through the cylinder
(do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the threaded ring).
(3) Install retaining ring 54.
F - Reinstall self-aligned end 27 as follows :
(1) Coat self-aligned end threads with Mastinox, compound and tighten self-aligned end,
through the number of turns counted during removal in cylinder 21 . Align key slots.
(2) Install key 53.
(3) Coat the threads of nut 29 with Mastinox, compound then screw and tighten the nut
(wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473). Torque tighten to 19 ± 3.8 m.daN (140 ± 28 ft.lb).
NOTE: Tightening the nut may misalign the nut safetying hole in relation to the hole in the
self-aligned end. In such a case, back drill to 1 .8 ~ n i mm' diameter and 10 ± 1 mm
(0.3937 ± 0.0392 in in), depth as shown in detail D of the figure (Do not drill the
new hole tangential to the initial hole in the self-aligned end).
G - Reinstall bottom assembly 37 follows : as
(1 ) Remove jack from protective jaws C47039 and clamp it again in vise through sliding rod
by means of protective jaws C47047.
(2) Insert and correctly seat bottom assembly 37 in bore of sliding rod 33.
(3) Coat the threads of threaded ring 38 with Mastinox compound, then screw and tighten
the ring (wrench C47Q40). Torque tighten to 10.5 ± 1 m.daN (77.4 ± 7.3 ft.lb).
H - Reinstall adjustable rod end 45 as follows :
(1 ) Coat the threads of adjustable rod end 45 and locknut 47 with Mastinox compound, then
screw the locknut onto rod end.
(2) Install a new lockplate 50 on rod end (equipped with locknut 47), and tighten the rod
end in sliding rod 33 so as to adjust jack to following theoretical dimension :
-center-to-center distance (between self-aligning bearings) with sliding rod fully, re¬
tracted : 484 ± 0.4 mm (18.8582 ± 0.0157 in).
NOTE: The travel is 153 ± 1 mm (6.0236 ± 0.0393 in).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
ti^^Z^.-
Ô?0^-^ .
MIRAGE
..ami i ai
F
nr-
(3) Align the key slots.
(4) Install key 51 coated with Mastinox and bend the tabs of lockplate 50 in the notches of sliding
rod 33.
(5) Hold adjustable rod end 45 : screw and temporarily tighten locknut 47 (wrench A21978 - adapter
C46473).
The locknut will be finally torqued and safetied upon adjustment of the jack on aircraft (see 05-1).
(6) Check that the travel of the sliding rod is 153 ± 1 mm (6.0236 ± 0.0393 in), without binding or
friction.
I Install coupling 23 as follows :
(1 ) Install a new filter 49 in the coupling housing.
(2) Moderately coat the surface of the coupling in contact with the cylinder with Mastinox.
(3) Install the coupling, observing its proper direction.
(4) Coat the threads of screws 48 with Mastinox.
(5) Attach the coupling with the two screws 48 fitted with their washers ; lockwire the screws.
(6) Blank the coupling port by means of an appropriate plug.
9- FINAL STEPS
A Moderately coat the surface of the valve box in contact with cylinder 21 with Mastinox.
B Install the valve box.
C Test the actuating jack (see 05-1 ).
D Apply a complementary protective coat of sealant (areas identified M) :

- on retaining ring 26,
- on the mating surface of coupling 23 in contact with cylinder 21,
- between threaded ring 57 and cylinder 21,
- completely cover nut 29, widely extending application on either side of rod 27.
E If required, touch up paint (see 050).

F Depending on the jack destination :
- prepare it for installation (see referenced card B4), or
- store it (see referenced card B5).
NOTE : The visible threads of rod end 45 as well as the surface of locknut 47 in contact with the end
of sliding rod 33, and the recesses of the notch of key 51 and the tab of lockwasher 50 shall
be protected with a bead of sealant PR 1321 A2 (areas identified MR in the figure) after final
adjustment on aircraft, tightening and safetying of locknut 47.
AA
MANUAL 05
FIGURE 20 - DEMONTAGE - REMONTAGE D'UN VERIN DE MANOEUVRE

DISASSEMBL Y - ASSEMBL Y OF AN A CTUA TING JA CK
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iL==J>-~r"U
BREGUET AVIATIONôP3^^
MIRAGE F
^C^*^^, Restricted MANUAL 05
DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY OF A TELESCOPIC ROD FOR

SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 21)
A Special tools
B Standard tools

-Fluid drain pan
D Spares
- Seals
- 2 lockplates for switch studs
2- MATERIALS

- White spirit
- Solvent D1 Pyrolac 1591
- Mastinox 6856 H
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
-Sealant PR 1321 A2
- Copper sulphate
- Grease Air 4206
- Grease Air 4215
B Mount soft jaws (fiber or lead) on the work bench vice.
C Remove all lockwires.
D - Remove sealant with a spatula, taking care not to damage the surface protective coating.
E Remove the storage plugs.
F - Remove the switch (see 05-6).
NOTE : If several rods are overhauled together, disassemble only one rod at a time to avoid mixing
parts.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ Jl ** Ylll\/-\VJ'L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^c_^ ^jô _ ^ . ^ , ,,..,,,,, AC
^<^ ^*~^ Restricted MANUAL 05
CAUTION:
THE OUTSIDE OF PISTONS 30 AND 38 IS PLASTICIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A
MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO SHOCKS AND SCRATCHES.
IT IS THEREFORE NECESSARY TO CAREFULLY PROTECT THESE PISTONS AND TO
HANDLE THE PARTS WITH CARE.
4 - DISASSEMBLY
A - Removal of switch plate and socket assembly
(1 ) Unsafety (lockplate) and remove the two studs 40 complete with nuts and washers (3/8
in A/F wrench). Discard lockplates.
(2) Remove in succession :

-plate 41,
-rocker 27,
-socket 42.
B - Removal of coupling 25.
Remove the coupling (10 mm A/F wrench) and recover filter 44.
C - Removal of adjustable rod end 34.
(1) Unsafety nut 45 (lockplate).
(2) Hold the adjustable rod end and loosen nut 45 (wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473) so
as to permit disengagement of lockplate 46 and removal of key 47.
(3) Remove rod end 34 and discard lockplate 46.
D - Removal of cylinder assembly 22 and sliding rod assembly 33.
(1 ) Moderately clamp the telescopic rod in the vise, through cylinder 22.
(2) Remove nut 23 (wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473).

-Recover two part ring 48 and key 49.
(3) Remove cylinder assembly 22.
(4) Recover locking sleeve 24.
(5) Remove sliding rod assembly 33.
(6) Leave cylinder 22 in vise.
E - Stripping of cylinder 22
(1 ) Install compression fixture C47057 on cylinder 22, as shown in the figure.
(3) Remove nut 29 (wrench M46548 - Adapter C46473).
(4) Fully release spring 31 of the locking system by loosening nut of compression fixture and
remove the latter.
(5) Remove the following in succession from cylinder 22 :
-bottom 28,
-spring 31,
-locking piston 30.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ^ZTZL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F^^^Ô
5- CLEANING
A Before cleaning the parts, remove all seals, using the bent end of spatulas 89901 and A46524 (use
only spatula A46524 to remove seals from locking piston 30).
Systematically reject all seals.
B Clean all parts with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air.
C Clean parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound, by means of PYROLAC solvent (nuts 23
and 29 and cylinder 22).
6- CHECK
A Ensure that external surface of cylinder 21 is free of dents.
B Carefully inspect all seal grooves.
E Check moving or stationary parts providing sealing, for evidence of seizing and scratches (circular
or longitudinal).
F Ascertain that chromium-plating of sliding rod 33 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If such
surfaces are questionable, wipe them (clean and dry) by means of a rag soaked in copper sulphate ;
flaked areas will appear red.
G Check rilsan-plasticized outside diameters of pistons 30 and 38 for dents and scratches.
H Check locator of plate 41 for condition.
I Check lock 37 for condition.
J Visually check that the threaded bushing 36 is tightened and that the locking pin is installed.
Modification not incorporated :

-visually check that sleeve 36 and locking needle screw are tightened.
NOTE : If checking is unsatisfactory, forward the telescopic rod to the next higher repair line.
Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" M /V\II\/-\N-7l_
_^l_~
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^«o
^-^> _ .
Restncted , ..ami. ai
MANUAL ne
05
8 - ASSEMBLY
A - Fit out cylinder 22 as follows :
(1) Correctly coat spring 31 and internal walls of locking piston 30 with grease AIR 4215.
Moderately pack external grooves of locking piston 30 and bottom 28 with same grease
(Grooves and parts identified G in figure).
NOTE: It is imperative to avoid greasing the two seals of the locking piston and the area bet¬
ween these two seals.
(2) Install following parts in succession on compression fixture C47057 :
- locking piston 30,

-spring 31,
-bottom 28.
(3) Install above assembly in cylinder 22 so as to bring bottom 28 into contact with cylinder
(Locate locking piston lever 32 in front of the housing for the switch plate and socket assem¬
bly).
(4) Coat threads of nut 29 and cylinder 22 with Mastinox compound and install nut on cylin¬
der.
(5) Moderately clamp cylinder 22 in vise and torque tighten nut 29 to 42 ± 8.4 m.daN
(309.7 ± 61 ft.lb) - (wrench A21 978 - Adapter C46473).
(6) Remove compression fixture.
B - Install sliding rod assembly 33 and cylinder 22 assembly as follows :
(1 ) Coat threads of nut 23 with Mastinox compound and install nut on cylinder 21 .
(2) Carefully insert sliding rod assembly 33 into cylinder 21 and hold sliding rod assembly.
(3) Moderately coat the following with grease AIR 4215 (areas identified G) :
-bore and bottom of bore of cylinder 21,
-bore of sliding rod assembly 33,
-claw 37, screw 36 and piston 38 assembly (exclusive of its plasticized portion) (outside
diameter),
-locking socket 24 (outside and inside),
-blind hole of adjustable rod end 34.
(4) Locate locking socket 24 in cylinder 21 .
(5) On that recessed portion of cylinder 21 which is to be capped by cylinder 22 (area identi¬
fied G in figure) apply a coat of grease AIR 4215.
(6) Insert cylinder assembly 22 on sliding rod and assemble with cylinder 21 while aligning
key slots.
(7) Coat key 49 and two-part ring 48 with Mastinox compound ; install them, then screw
nut 23 on cylinder 22.
Clamp cylinder 22 in vise (protective jaws M46547). Torque nut 23 to 38 ± 7.6 m.daN (280
± 59 ft.lb) wrench 21978 adapter C46473).
C - Install adjustable rod end 34 as follows :
(1 ) Coat threads of adjustable rod end 34 and nut 45 with Mastinox compound.
(2) Install a new lockplate 46 on rod end (equipped with nut 45) and tighten rod end in slid¬
ing rod 33 so as to adjust telescopic rod to following theoretical dimension :
-center-to-center distance (between center of ball joints), wi+h sliding rod fully
extended : 1043 ± 0.4 mm (41.0629 ± 0.0157 in).
NOTE: The travel is 375 ± 1 mm (14.7637 ± 0.0393 in).
AB
03 - 88 Restricted 1 - 41 9
AVIONS MARCEL
BREGUET
DASSAULtJLJ^T>L
AVIATION^F*^-^6"^ .
IYiIinMOC I
MANDAI OR
^É^s^^C^. Restricted manual uo
(3) Align key slots.

(4) Install key 47 and bend tab of lock plate 46 down in a notch of sliding rod 33.
(5) Hold adjustable rod end, then install and torque tighten nut 45 to 8 ± 1.5 m.daN (59 ±11 ft.lb)
(Spanner A21978 - Adapter C46473).
| D Install coupling 25 as follows :
(1 ) Install a filter 44 in coupling housing in cylinder 22.

| (2) Install coupling, observing proper direction.
(3) Install the two attaching screws 43 fitted with washers (10 mm A/F spanner). Lockwire attaching
screws.
E Install switch plate and socket assembly as follows :
(1 ) Moderately coat the following with Mastinox :

fitting diameter of socket 42 and its surfaces bearing on cylinder 22
-
- threads of studs 40.
(2) Coat the following with grease Air 421 5 :
- self-aligning bearing of rocker 27
- housing of rocker 27 in socket 42
- spherical recess of plate 41.
(3) Locate locking piston lever 32 through housing for above assembly in cylinder 22, using locating
spanner 14138J :
(4) Assemble :
- socket 42
- rocker 27 (position rocker elbow «C» opposite mark «P» on rod fitted to socket 42).
-plate 41.
(5) Install above assembly in housing in cylinder 22, observing correct direction.
(6) Mount a new lock plate on each stud 40 (equipped with nuts and washers), then install and tighten
studs (3/8 in A/F spanner). Tightening torque : 0.6 , Q* m.daN (4.42 , Q" ft.lb). Safety by bending
tabs of lock plates down on plate 41 .
(7) Check that rocker 27 moves freely. It should rock about its spherical hinge under a load no greater
than 0.2 daN (0.45 Ibf) applied on its end.
9- FINAL STEPS
A - Install switch (See 05-6).
NOTE : Adjustment shall be performed when testing the telescopic rod.
B Install storage plugs and/or caps.
C Test telescopic rod (See 05-1 ).
j D Torque tighten nuts 29 and 23 again.

- Untighten the nut by about one sixth of a turn, then torque it correctly while trying to align the
safetying hole with the cylinder groove within the tightening torque tolerances.
E - Lockwire (0.8 mm dia) nuts 23 and 29.
NOTE : Tightening the nut may misalign the nut safetying hole in relation to the cylinder groove. In
such a case, drill a new hole to 1.5 mm diameter through the cylinder groove, tangential to
the groove side and opposite to the screwing direction.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJU^-JiT}! MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION .^^F3^^ m ANIMAI OK
F Apply a complementary protective coat of sealant PR 1422 B2 (areas identified M) :

- in the annular recess of nuts 23 and 29, as well as at the joint of these nuts with cylinder 22,
- on the mating surfaces of socket 42 and cylinder 22, and of plate 41 and socket 42,
- on the mating surfaces of coupling 25 and cylinder 22.
G If required, touch up paint (see 05-0).
H Depending on the telescopic rod destination :

-prepare it for installation (see 05-1 ), or store it (see 05-1 ).
NOTE : The visible threads of rod end 34, as well as the surface of locknut 45 in contact with the end
of sliding rod 33, and the recesses of the notch of key 47 and the tab of lockwasher 46 shall
be protected with a bead of sealant PR 1321 A2 (areas identified MR in figure) after final
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Montage de compression
FIGURE 21 - DEMONTAGE-REMONTAGE D'UNE BARRE TELESCOPIQUE

DISASSEMBL Y -ASSEMBL Y OF A TELESCOPIC ROD
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL*J>--^r\L
BREGUET AVIATION^gF3'^^
MIRAGE F
^5=^=-^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION ASSEMBLY OF AN ELASTIC ROD

(figure 21 M)
1 - SCOPE
To lubricate or replace the set of washers.
A Special tools
| - U/C hydraulics 2nd line tool kit
B Standard tools

- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)
- Work bench press
D Spares
I -1 cotter pin 23310 AA 020 015 LE

| - 1 taper pin HMBC 030 025TLE
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit
- Quick-setting Molykote grease G
- Grease Air 4206
Mount protective jaws C47528 on the work bench vice.
NOTE : If several elastic rods are overhauled together, disassemble only one elastic rod at a time to
avoid mixing the parts.
5- DISASSEMBLY
J A Clamp the elastic rod in the vice by tightening rod 21 in the protective jaws.
B Remove cotter pin 33 and nut 34, and slide the nut along rod 21. Remove key 35 (adapter
C47527).
C Remove housing assembly 22.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti ^^"ZU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^fL ^ ...»..,», «r-
D Strip housing 22 as follows :
( 1 ) Drive out taper pin 36.
(2) Tighten compression ring C47073 on housing 22 so as to slightly compress set of washers 29.
(3) Clamp self-aligned rod end 23 in vice (provided with soft jaws (fibre or lead)). Remove threaded
sleeve 30 (adapter C47074).
(4) Remove compression ring C47073.
(5) Remove following parts in succession from housing 22 :

- bush 28
- set of washers 29.
DO NOT CHANGE THE STACKING ORDER OF THE WASHERS. TO THIS END, PASS A
LOCKWIRE THROUGH THE SET OF WASHERS AND ATTACH (the set of washers 29 is composed
of 8 groups of 3 washers).
- bush 27.
(6) Remove self-aligned rod end 23.
6- CLEANING
Clean all parts with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air.
7- CHECK
A Ensure that no part is oxidized.
B Ascertain that external surface of rod 21 is free of distorsions and dents.
C Check threads for condition (peening, sripping).
D Check bushes 25 and 26 fitted to rod 21 and housing 22 for security of attachment, and bush
bores for condition.
NOTE : If checking is unsatisfactory, forward the elastic rod to the next higher repair line.
E Check condition of washers 29 for corrosion, distorsion, cracks.

If one washer is defective, the whole set must be replaced.
8- ASSEMBLY
A Fit out housing 22 as follows :
(1) Insert self-aligned rod end into housing and clamp rod end in vice.
(2) Abundantly coat spring washers with Molykote grease.
NOTE : Do not change the stacking order of the washers in case where the same set of washers is
re-installed.
AA
ti ^^ZXL
_ _
MIRAGE F
(3) Install the following parts in succession in the housing :

- bush 27 (correctly directed)
- set of washers 29
- bush 28 (correctly directed).
(4) Hold the housing and screw compression ring C47073 on the former until the set of washers 29 is
sufficiently compressed to install threaded bushing 30.
(5) Install and tighten threaded bushing 30 (adapter C47074) in order to align the safetying holes.
The tightening torque value should be 2 + q-5 m.daN (14.7 + q-6 ft.lb).
(6) Safety threaded bushing 30 by means of a new taper pin 36. Peen and make flush taper pin ends.
(7) Remove compression ring C47073.
B Coat the threads of rod 21 and housing 22 with grease Air 4206.
C - Clamp rod 21 in the vice (protective jaws C47528).
D Screw housing assembly 22 on rod 21 until housing bush 28 comes into contact with the rod.
E Install key 35 (if required, loosen housing 22 to align the slot closest to the key notch).
F Screw and tighten nut 34 (adapter C47527), trying to align its safetying hole with the groove in
rod 21 . Torque value : 5 J § m.daN (36.8 J 1q-7 ft.lb).
NOTE 1 : After tightening nut 34, an internal play of 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) max. is allowed when
slightly pulling and then pushing.
NOTE 2 : If the alignment of the safetying hole cannot be obtained within torque value tolerances, drill
a new hole (2.2 mm diameter) opening in the rod groove and tangential to the groove side
opposite to the screwing direction.
G Safety nut 34 by means of cotter pin 33 with the head placed in the rod groove (see figure).
9- FINAL STEPS
A Check the theoretical rod length (center-to-center distance between rod ends 23 and 24), which
should be 582 ± 0.3 mm (22.9133 ± 0.01 18 in). Adjust rod length as required through rod end 24 (see
05-0). Adjustment is obtained by at least 1/6 of a turn which, for a pitch of 1.50 mm, produces a
variation in length of 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) (the internal play is thus taken up by slight compression).
B Check clearance X between the nut (rod side) mounted on rod end 23, and body 22. This
clearance should be 4.4 ± 0.2 mm (0.1732 ± 0.0078 in) (see detail b). Adjust the clearance as required
through the nut and safety the latter with its retaining ring ; to do this, take up the internal
play by pulling and pushing the rod ; the internal play must be within the tolerances.
C Mount the elastic rod on the press and perform several rod compression and extension cycles,
according to one of the following cases below (maximum retraction dimension X' = 2 mm (0.0787 in)
- see detail b) :
1 st case :
elastic rod with set of washers 29 not replaced :
- perform 5 cycles.
2nd case :
elastic rod with set of washers 29 renewed :
- perform 20 cycles.
D Install the elastic rod on aircraft or place it in storage (see 05-1 ), as applicable.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Détail a Détail b Détail c
Course en traction Cote d'enfoncement Course en compression

Extension travel Penetration dimension Compressed travel
FIGURE 21M DEMONTAGE -REMONTAGE D'UNE BIELLE ELASTIQUE

DISASSEMBL Y - ASSEMBL Y OF AN ELASTIC ROD
AB
BREGUET AVIATION __
L=>îl MIRAGE F
DISASSEMBLY-LUBRICATION-ASSEMBLY
OF SHOCK ABSORBER SELF-ALIGNING BEARINGS
(figure 2 1T)
1 - SCOPE
To clean and lubricate the main U/C self-aligning bearings.
A Special tools
- Stud manufactured locally, as per figure 21T
B - Materials
-White spirit
-Abrasive paper 3M 461 , 100 grit
-Grease Air 4210
- Remove the main U/C shock absorbers (see 05-1).
4- PROCEDURE
(1 ) Disassembly of self-aligning bearing.
NOTE : The bearings must be reassembled in the same endpiece.
-Separate sleeve 1 from bearing 2.

Mod. 581 not incorporated : using a screwdriver, remove scraper ring 5 ; it is not to be reassembled
(d iscard it).
- Remove the bearing.
1 st case
The bearing can be easily loosened or by using the stud 4 as shown in detail A.
2nd case
The bearing cannot be easily loosened.
- With the shock absorber held horizontal, lock endpiece 3 by its flat surfaces in a vice with
aluminum alloy clamps. Rest the other end of the shock absorber in a steady support. Protect the
chromium-plated sliding rod.
- Using an aluminum alloy drift, pivot the bearing through 90° to bring it in the cutouts
of the endpiece.
Take care not to mark the spherical housing of the endpiece.
- Remove the bearing.
(2) Cleaning, inspection and lubrication
- Using white spirit, thoroughly clean the self -aligning bearing, the spherical housing of the end-
piece and the sleeve ; then dry very carefully.
- Check the condition of the spherical surfaces of the bearing and endpiece housing.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i" ^-«-»< /V\II\/-\V^7L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-& ê^j _ ..amiiai ni-
-Using white spirit, clean the self-aligning bearing and the spherical housing of the end-
piece ; then dry very carefully.
-Check the condition of the spherical surfaces of the bearing and the endpiece housing ;
if necessary using abrasive paper, sand the spherical surface of the bearing in order to remove
all the carbon and corrosion deposits adhering to it.
-Also sand the spherical housing of the endpiece any carbonization or fretting corrosion
has disappeared.
-Smooth out any scratches and edges and remove any traces of agressiveness.
NOTE: After sanding, the spherical surfaces of the self-aligning bearing and endpiece may
show surface defects. Such defects are acceptable if they do not alter the self-aligning
motion and rotation of the bearing.
However, if the parts show general surface corrosion, it is recommended to forward the
shock absorber to the next higher repair line.
-After sanding, thoroughly clean the self-aligning bearing and endpiece with white spirit
so as to remove any trace of trimming material, specially from the various holes; then dry with
moisture-free compressed air.
-Apply a coat of grease on the endpiece spherical housing, the self-aligning bearing and
the sleeve.
-Reinstall the bearing, with the greasing grooves on the opposite side from the fitting
slots, and make sure that it can be moved by hand.
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Install the shock absorber (see 05-1 ).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^si-
MIRAGE F
MOD. 5b l non appliquée

MOD. 581 not incorporated
Articulation supérieure Articulation supérieure

Opper hinge Upper hinge
Articulation inférieure Articulation inférieure

Lower hinge Lower hinge
) I I
) =j (
R- 1.542
fl- 1.Sto2
-,
10.059 ro 0.078 in) ** S8
= 500
S 's' 130.00 in)
a
88
a a
===¥
' Ch.1 i4S* Ch.l à 45*
Ch.ito4sr CM ID 4g
ZO- (0.039 in) 10.039 in).
11.18 i 0.039 in)

DETAIL A
FIGURE 21T - DEMONTAGE GRAISSAGE REMONTAGE DES ROTULES D'UN AMORTISSEUR

DISASSEMBLY- LUBRICATION ASSEMBLY OF SHOCK ABSORBER SELF-
ALIGNING BEARINGS
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT flJ^rH MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^c_ _ _
OVERALL INSPECTION OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS
- 24-V inspection light
Open the main U/C doors manually.
WARNING :
3- PROCEDURE
A Undercarriage leg
(1) Check the condition of the paint

- Carefully inspect painted surfaces, particularly under protective sleeves of electrical wiring near
hinges, in order to detect deteriorations which can encourage corrosion spots (traces of impacts,
blistering or peeling of paint).
- If suspect areas are discovered, proceed with corrosion treatment and partial paint refinishing
(see 05-0).
(2) Make sure that :

all grease fittings are in place and tightened,
-
- safetying of all safetied parts is efficient,
- hydraulic pipe cleats and other supports are in satisfactory condition and correctly attached,
-the U/C-uplocking roller turns freely and that the roller pin is correctly attached by its circlips,
- the shock absorber charging valve is in satisfactory condition and provided with a protective cap,
-the shock absorber sliding rod is free of dents, flaking of chrome plating, evidence of fluid, and
that it is clean,
- electrical wires are correctly attached, that the nuts of the various clamps are in place and tight¬
ened, that protection sleeves are in good condition and protect the sheath efficiently, especially at
the lower hinge of the cylinder and at swivel couplings of rocker arm hinge ; if required, replace the
sleeves (see 16-0),
- movable electrical connectors are correctly locked,
-the pin safetying the nut used for each cylinder/jack or rod connection is in place,
- the various swivel couplings (cylinder/ rocker arm connection and upper part of cylinder) and
the various pipes do not show evidence of hydraulic fluid leakage or seepage,
- the swivel coupling drivers are correctly engaged in the rocker arm recesses.
DO NOT USE THE PIPE PROTECTIVE COVER AT THE TOP OF THE SWIVEL TUBE AS A
FOOTSTEP.
Check presence and condition of the pins stopping the heads of the shock absorber hinge pins at
rocker arm and at swivel tube upper section. If required, replace broken or missing pin (see 05-1).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^>~zZ\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF=^_-;g^-0 . .,...-
B Actuating jack, telescopic rod and elastic rod
(1) Ascertain that :

- all grease fittings are installed and tightened.
- nuts of hinge and airframe connecting pins are correctly safetied.
- equipment (switch, valve box, restrictor, pressure inlets and outlet) is correctly attached and
safetied.
- lock nuts of adjustable rod ends are tightened (manual check) and correctly safetied.
- chromium-plating of sliding rods is free of dents, scratches and flakes.
- electrical wires are correctly attached to appropriate places and insulating conduits are not
deteriorated.
- couplings, pipes and jack bodies and sliding rods do not show evidence of hydraulic fluid leakage
or seepage (See 05-0).
(2) For flexible hoses, make sure that :

- service life limit date is not reached.
- hoses do not show evidence of hydraulic fluid leakage or seepage, specially at coupling skirts.
- external sheaths are not damaged by accidental rubbing on external parts.
C- Uplock
Check uplock for security of attachment.

-
Check hook for condition.
-
- Ensure that electrical wiring is in satisfactory condition and that electrical plug is correctly
locked.
- Check grease fitting for condition and tightening.
- Make certain that there is no leakage or seepage.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^L
//-Jfe*-"U
^-^ ,
MIRAGE
,...,....
F
..
CHECKING OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE OPERATING FACTORS

(Figure 22)
1 - SCOPE
This operation consists in checking the operating factor of the undercarriage legs so as to
determine their aging condition.
A Standard tools
- 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) torque wrench kit
- Accessory kit for 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) torque wrench
- Totalizer dial indicator with magnetic support.

- Electrical power supply (1 15/200 V, 400 Hz).
A Jack up aircraft so that wheels clear ground (See 02-2).
B Remove wheels (See 05-5).
C Unlock undercarriage legs.
(1 ) Connect electric and hydraulic power units (System No. 1 ).
WARNING : OBSERVE THE SAFETY MEASURES (See 01-0).
(2) Set undercarriage control switch lever to «UP».

(3) Apply pressure to system No. 1 , and stop hydraulic power unit as undercarriage legs are unlocked.
(4) Switch off aircraft electrical power system supply.
(5) Block undercarriage legs in unlocked position.
(6) Drop pressure in system No. 1 to zero.
D Disconnect the elastic rod hinge on structure side (see 05-1 ).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT TLJ*>"ZS^
BREGUET AVIATION ^<2}S=<g<«5
MIRAGE F
^zC^*^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
4- DETERMINATION OF OPERATING FACTOR
A Place dial indicator on U/C leg as shown in figure (Magnetic support located on flat surface
resulting from structural box position change, and dial indicator feeler against the end of swivel
arm/tube assembly travel limit stop).
B Keep swivelling linkage aligned by pulling bellcrank G by hand.
C Hold each axle end and apply ah angular force sufficient to take up hinge plays, in reverse
direction of swivel arm motion.
D Set dial indicator to graduation 0.
E Perform same operation as at step C, but in direction of swivel arm motion, and take reading on
dial indicator, which is the operating factor.
THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE READING IS 0,85 mm (0.0334 in).
5- FINAL STEPS
A Connect elastic rod hinge to structure (See 05-1 )
B - Install wheels (See 05-5).
C Conduct an undercarriage retraction and extension test (See 05-6).
D Lower aircraft on ground (See 02-2).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
Comparateur à semelle
magnétique
Dial indicator with magnetic

support
FIGURE 22 - CONTROLE DES INDICES D'UTILISATION

AB CHECKING OF OPERATING FACTORS
BREGUET AVIATION ^<^.
ti^^^Z^X
__
MIRAGE F
TESTING OF AN ACTUATING JACK AFTER SEAL

REPLACEMENT

- Accessory kit for hydraulic test bench
2- MATERIALS
A Remove storage plugs from jack and valve box.
B Install the actuating jack on the test bench and connect the test bench lines to ports marked N on
valve box and to ports marked B on jack body (at supply coupling).
C Correctly bleed the jack by slowly extending and retracting the sliding rod. When the jack has
been bled, continue actuating the rod for about 10 minutes. Drop the pressure and correctly wipe the
jack, principally the sliding rod, with a clean rag.
CAUTION :
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR AS IT MAY FORCE METAL PARTICLES INSIDE.
4- STATIC TESTS
A Supply the jack at a pressure between 1 and 5 bar (14 and 72.5 psi). Maintain the pressure for
15 minutes. During this period of time, any leak observed at the sliding rod should not exceed three
drops.
B Drop the pressure and wipe the jack.
5- DYNAMIC TESTS
A - Supply the jack at a pressure of 210 bar (3045 psi) and perform fifteen sliding rod retraction and
extension cycles.
B Then perform twenty-five cycles and ensure that not more than three drops leak during these
cycles.
C Complete testing by retracting the sliding rod.
D Drop the pressure.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-Çv_- jjô _ . r. /. a m i i a i rvc
^^ ^*^> Restricted MANUAL 05
6 - FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF VALVE BOX EMERGENCY SYSTEM
A - Connect test bench to port identified S on valve box.
B - Progressively increase pressure through port S, by means of hand pump.
C - Ensure that internal valve moves at a pressure P < 7 bar (101.5 psi). The valve motion
is indicated by a slight pressure drop in the supply system.
D - Drop pressure.
NOTE: These tests must be performed with the hand pump.
-With the jack rod retracted and port B connected to a graduated test tube, apply and
hold 20 bar (290 psi) pressure through port AN.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at B is s 1 drop/min.
-Fully extend the rod.

-With port AN connected to a graduated test tube, apply and hold 20 bar (290 psi)
pressure through port B.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at AN is < 1 drop/min.
-Retract the rod.
8 - FINAL STEPS
A - Remove jack from test bench.
B - Install storage plugs and/or caps.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
ti^^ZT^.
^âF0^-^5^
MIRAGE
,am..a, r-
F
TESTING OF A TELESCOPIC ROD AFTER SEAL

REPLACEMENT
(figure 21)
- 2nd line hydraulic test bench

- Compression fixture 50 MS146.
MATERIALS
- Hydraulic fluid
A Remove storage plugs from rod and switch.
B Install the telescopic rod on the test bench and connect a test bench supply line to rod port A.
C Extend and lock the sliding rod.
( 1 ) Supply port A at low pressure and bleed the system free of air.
(2) Increase pressure to P = 100 bar (1450 psi).
(3) Extend the sliding rod manually to stop, then lock it with the compression fixture.
(4) Drop the pressure.
(5) Strongly push the sliding rod to ensure that locking is effective.
D - Adjust the switch (see 05-6).
4- LEAK TESTS FUNCTIONAL CHECK OF SWITCHING
A Telescopic rod, with sliding rod extended (locked)
(1) Increase pressure to P = 245 bar (3553 psi). After pressure stabilization, readjust to P = 245 bar
(3553 psi).
No pressure drop is permissible for T minute.
-
(2) Return pressure to P = 5 bar (72.5 psi). After pressure stabilization, readjust to P = 5 bar
(72.5 psi).
- No pressure drop is permissible for 1 minute.
(3) Drop pressure.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT 2L==ûrQl
BREGUET AVIATION ^jllF^
MIRAGE F
(4) Measurement of sliding rod travel
- Measure the length of the rod relative to a mark on the endpiece.

- Gradually increase pressure up to 100 bar (1450 psi).
- Release the sliding rod by means of the compression fixture, then retract it fully home by hand.
- Measure the length of the retracted rod relative to the mark on the endpiece.
NOTE : The travel is 375 ± 1 mm (14.763 ± 0.0393 in).
5- FINAL STEPS
A Remove the telescopic rod from the test bench.
C Perform the operations specified in final steps after seal replacement (see 05-1 ).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ Jl « / V\ I l\/-\V^L_ I
_^_
BREGUET AVIATION ^«. ^cîô
^cp-*^ - ^
Restricted . ....,,,.,
MANUAL ».
05
ADJUSTMENT OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

(Figures 23-24)
1 - SCOPE
To ensure correct operation during the undercarriage extension sequences.
A - Special tools
-Undercarriage-hydraulics 1st line tool kit

-Wheel alignment checking tool 50 MS 138.
B - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb)

-Set of wheel jigs MS 1 379A or 50 MS 040
-Plumbing device (bob and plumb line)
-Clinometer
-Wire, 10 m (33 ft) long
-Alignment checking tool 50 MS 138
D - Spares
-Peelable shim
- Lockplate
3 - MATERIALS
-Prussian blue
-Adhesive tape, 50 mm (2 in) wide
-Compound PR 1422 A2
-Compound PR 1321 A2
WARNING:
TAKE THE RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0).
A - The aircraft shall be in the following configuration :

-jacked up,
-wheels and brakes installed,
-fairing door disconnected and tied,
-upper and lower U/C doors open (safety switch set to "ground") (see 02-0).
B - Connect the hydraulic power unit with its slow running output connected to the self-
sealing couplings of system 1 .
AB
BREGUET
JL^-^XL
AVIATIONôP=_^Qi>
MIRAGE F
5- ELASTIC ROD TRAVELS AND ACTUATING JACK CLEARANCES (figures 21M - 18F)
A Lock the U/C leg in down position and drop the pressure.
B- Checks
(1 ) Elastic rod pull travel

-With «X» being the clearance between rod end nut and rod body (recorded when installing the
rod), measure its new value «X1 » in this configuration (see detail a).
It should be : 1.8 mm (0.07 in)< X1 - X < 3.3 mm (0.1299 in).

(2) Actuating jack clearance
Increase pressure to 206 bar (3000 psi).
-
With «J'» being the clearance between rod end lock nut and jack body (recorded when installing
-
the jack), measure its new value «J'1 » in this configuration.
Clearance J'1 - J' should not be less than 2 mm (0.78 in).
C - VERY SLOWLY retract the U/C leg while ensuring that :

- the U/C leg and equipment fitted to it do not interfere with one another and with the structure,
and in particular that there is a clearance exceeding 0.5 mm (0.0196 in) everywhere between cylinder
and shock absorber, at the top ;
- there is a clearance between uplock hook nose and roller, at roller passage ;
- there is no U/C leg contact with the structure other than that of the roller with the hook, in
particular between the actuating jack equipment and the U/C cylinder.
D - Checks
(1 ) Elastic rod compression travel

With «X» being the clearance between rod end nut and rod body (recorded when installing the
-
rod), measure its new value «X2» in this configuration (see detail c).
It should be : X - X2 > 0.8 mm (0.0315 in).

(2) Actuating jack clearance
Increase pressure to 206 bar (3000 psi).
-
With «J» being the clearance between rod end lock nut and jack body (recorded when installing
-
the jack), measure its new value «J1 » in this configuration.
Clearance J J1 should exceed 0.6 mm (0.0235 in).
E Adjustments
(1) Elastic rod travels

-Uncouple the rod from the U/C leg (see 05-1) and adjust its length through its end (see 05-0).
For information, screwing the rod end causes increase of pull travel and decrease of push travel :
1/6 turn = 0.25 mm (0.0098 in).
NOTE : -any excessive push travel increases the U/C uplocking pressure,
-any excessive pull travel increases the U/C downlocking pressure.
Thus, travels should be distributed within above tolerances, taking the pressure values into
account (see 05-6).
(2) Actuating jack clearances

-Uncouple the jack from the U/C leg (see 05-1) and adjust its length through its end (see 05-0).
For information, screwing the rod end causes increase of clearance in U/C-down position and
decrease of clearance in U/C up position : 1/4 turn = 0.4 mm (0.0157 in).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
6- POSITION CHECK OF MAIN U/C IN DOWN POSITION

A Preliminary steps
(1 ) Place the aircraft in line of flight (see 02-2).
(2) Represent the following on ground by plumbing :

- longitudinal aircraft axis, starting from points A, B, C, D,
- transverse aircraft axis (frame 25), starting from points CI, C2 (after closing upper or lower U/C
door if required).
B - Checks
(1) Caster action
- Using the plumbing device, represent the axle axis on ground by plumbing the axle ends.
The average point represents axle center 0'.
The distance between axle center 0' and the transverse axis (frame 25) should be 699 ±4 mm
(27.5196 ±0.1574 in).
(2) Wheel camber
(a) Remove the outer wheel.
(b) Remove the brake unit.
(0 Place the clinometer on the upper generatrix of the wheel axle and measure angle a.
Measurement result should be : a= 1° ± 10'.
(d) Measure the distance between axle center 0' (determined when checking the caster action) and 0
on the longitudinal aircraft axis.
Measurement result should be : 1240 ± 4 mm (48.8188 ± 0.1574 in).
(e) Reinstall the brake unit.
(f) Reinstall the outer wheel.
(3) Wheel alignment
(a) On the ground, draw lines (a and b) perpendicular to the longitudinal aircraft axis, at one meter
from each side of axle center 0 (determined when checking the caster action).
(b) Install the ruler support on the outer wheel.
(c) Attach the ruler to the ruler support against wheel rim and set it horizontally using the clinometer ;
represent the outer wheel rim axis by plumbing on perpendicular lines a and b.
-
BB' A A' snou|d be between 0.5 mm (0.0196 in) and 3 mm (0.1 181 in) (toe-in).
C Adjustment
(1) The caster action, wheel camber and alignment can be adjusted at the same time by changing the
length of the telescopic rod in locked extended position (no separate adjustment is possible).
(2) Uncouple the rod from the U/C leg (see 05-1) and adjust the rod through its end (see 05-0).
Adjustment is obtained by at least 1/4 of a turn which, for a pitch of 150 mm, produces a varia¬
tion in length of 0.4 mm (0.0157 in) approximately.
For information : screwing the rod end one turn results in a variation of :
- 2mm (0.0787 in) to 2.5 mm (0.0984 in) of AA',
- 4mm (0.1 574 in) from position 0.
To summarize :
Telescopic rod L Wheel camber Wheel alignment Caster action
- After adjusting the wheel alignment, check the push-pull travel of the elastic rod ; if required,
perform adjustment.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^ô
MIRAGE F
FIGURE - CONTROLE ET REGLAGE D'UN ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL

CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L=^-^TU
BREGUET AVIATION^£fL ^^
MIRAGE F
7- POSITION CHECK OF MAIN U/C IN UP POSITION
A Locking of undercarriage leg
(1) Checks
Roller position relative to uplock hook

-
- Slightly smear the roller with Prussian blue.
- Retract the U/C leg and ensure that roller passage clearance «J» at hook nose is 3 mm
(0.118 in) minimum.
- Lock the U/C leg up and drop the pressure. Check that there is a slight play of the roller in
the hook by actuating the U/C leg sideways.
- Unlock the U/C leg and check :
- roller centering in the hook :
maximum deviation : 1 mm (0.039 in) ;
- correct bearing of the roller inside the hook nose ;
*
L should be 6 ^ ^ mm (0.2362 q Q7g7 in).
(2) Adjustments
(a) Roller centering
Adjusted by displacing the roller on its support through shim washers - thk = 0.5 mm (0.0196 in).
(b) Roller passage clearance and bearing surface
Adjusted by displacing the roller support on a serrated shim of the base plate (serrations of 1 mm -
0.039 in).
- With a pencil, mark the position of the support clevis on the serrated shim.
- Unsafety, unscrew and remove the attachment screw.
- Install a new lockplate and partially screw the attachment screw.
- Move the clevis on the serrated shim by the required value.
- Screw and torque the attachment screw to 3 * *
q m.daN (22.125 q-375 ft.lb).
B Axle slant
(1 ) Remove the wheels.
(2) Check
Retract and lock the U/C leg.
-
Place the clinometer on the upper generatrix of the wheel axle and measure angle i, which should
-
be 10° ± 5'.
C Clearances from structure and doors
(1) Checks
(a) Clearance from structure
- Fit the axles with main U/C wheel templates. Tighten the templates so as to take up any lateral
play and at the same time allow free rotation.
- Retract and lock the U/C leg. Drop pressure.
- Make sure that the wheel templates rotate freely inside the well (no positive stop), and specially
at the following places :
- doors 24.03i and 24.09i
- web of frame 25 (lower section, near captive fasteners of inspection doors)
- door jack pipe bracket
- electrical wiring.
(b) Clearance from doors
Uncouple the lower interconnecting rod of doors.
-
Bring the upper door into abutment against structure by hand.
-
Make sure that the outer template rotates freely (no friction point), especially at the rear section
-
of the door recess.
- Perform the same check with lower door closed and locked.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^
C
O a
X
> to
o
*fc.
__
to
o
o rcr
<o
1_
 .«j
<u 03
X S
INCLINAISON FUSEE
AXLE SLANT
M
Chape support d'olive
Roller support devis
Cale effeuillabie
Peelable shim
Pion
Stud
Rondelles de centrage
Shim washers
Centrage de l'olive Portée de l'olive Jeu de passage

Roller centering dans le crochet de l'olive
Roller seating in Roller passage
hook clearance
ACCROCHAGE EN POSITION HAUTE

LOCKING IN UP POSITION
FIGURE 24 - CONTROLE ET REGLAGE D'UN ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL

CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -** MIRAGE
/V\II\/-\V-7L F
l
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-*-
^ ^=î~=*o
^~=*o _ . ^
Restricted . haamiiai ne
MANUAL 05
(2) Setting undercarriage in "up" position.

(a) Should a wheel gauge not fit, measure using Prussian blue or a rule, the maximum play
"Y" to be taken up to enable free movement on door side and on compartment inner wall side.
(b) Remove the roller and its support clevis ; note the position of the roller centering washers
and careffully mark the position of the clevis on the serrated face of the shim.
(c) Remove the shim and measure thickness "e".
(d) Fit and adjust a new peelable shim on the roller support interface ; peel down to thick-
ness E
-E = e + 0.8 Y if the play to be taken up is on the inner wall side of the undercarriage
compartment,
-E = e - 0.8 Y if the play is on the U/C door side,
-the thickness of the new shim should never exceed e + 1 .2 mm (0.047 in), in order to
remain within the adjustment margin of the elastic rod (see para. g).
(e) Install the support clevis on the new shim ; observe the position of the clevis on the ser¬
rated face ; fit a new lockplate, tighten the attachment screw to the specified torque.
(f) Reinstall the roller in its support clevis while observing the centering washer positions.
(g) Check the compression travel of the elastic rod with the U/C locked in "up" position (see
para. 5).
The setting may be readjusted, making sure that the tolerances for the traction travel of
the rod and locking pressures of U/C in downlocked position are observed (see para. 8).
NOTE: A shim thickness increase of 1 mm (0.039 in) results in a reduction of 0.16 mm
(0.00629 in) in the elastic rod compression travel.
(h) Check actuating jack clearances (see para. 5).
(i) Check locking pressures of downlocked U/C (see para. 8).
(j) Lock the attachment screw with the lockplate and cover the screw head with sealant
PR 1422 A2.
(k) Couple the door lower interconnecting rod. Safety the pin nut with a new locking pin.
8 - CHECK OF U/C LOCKING PRESSURES IN DOWNLOCKED POSITION

A - Lock the U/C leg in down position and check the locking pressure.
P1 should be < 150 bar (2175 psi).
B - Unlock the U/C leg and uncouple the elastic rod from the U/C leg. Lock the U/C leg
again in down position (while holding swiveling assembly as it swivels) and check locking
pressure P2.
P1 - P2 should be > 75 bar (1087 psi).
Connect the elastic rod.
9 - FINAL STEPS
-SAFETY THE ADJUSTABLE ROD END LOCK NUTS (See 05-0).
-Safety all pins and trunnions of the hinges concerned by the operation.
-Check and adjust the fairing door as required (see 05-2).
-Check undercarriage and door operating pressures (see 05-6).
-Conduct undercarriage operating tests (see 05-6).
-Check and, if necessary, correct the adjustment of microswitch 9A (see 08-0).
-Make sure that the screw attaching the roller support clevis is correctly safetied and
coated with PR 1422.
-Coat the exposed threads of jack ends with PR 1321 A2 compound.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^-P^
LEAK TEST OF A HYDRAULIC

NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
- Hydraulic power supply (hand pump)

2- MATERIALS
3- TESTING
A Connect the hand pump to one of the ports of the swivel coupling located at the top of the
U/C leg swivel tube.
B Supply low pressure by means of the hand pump and bleed the system free of air.
C Increase pressure to P = 100 bar (1450 psi). After pressure stabilization, readjust to P = 100 bar
(1450 psi).
D Return pressure to P = 5 bar (72.5 psi). After pressure stabilization, readjust to P = 5 bar
(72.5 psi).
E Drop pressure and disconnect the hand pump.
F Connect the hand pump to the second port and repeat the above operations.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -J>-"t-U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£. ^ _ ..am.iai nr-
ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE

IN UP POSITION
(figure 24)
A Special tools
- Undercarriage-hydraulics 1st line tool kit.

- Set of wheel jigs MS1 379A or 50MS040
C Spares
- 2 cotter pins 23310AA015025LE
D Materials
- Prussian blue
WARNING :
- The aircraft must be in the following configuration :

- jacked up, wheels clear of ground (see 02-2),
- wheels and brakes installed,
- fairing door disconnected and secured,
- main doors open and locked (see 02-0).
- Connect the hydraulic power unit to system 1 and switch it to the slow running setting.
3- PROCEDURE
A Position of roller with respect to uplock hook
- Lightly chalk the roller with Prussian blue.

- Raise the undercarriage leg, stopping it when the roller is positioned just in front of the tip of
the hook.
- Check that the clearance J between the roiler and the tip of the hook is at least 3 mm
(0.1181 in).
- Continue to raise the leg until it locks in the up position, then release the pressure.
- The maximum permitted off-centering of the roller with respect to the hook is 1 mm
(0.0393 in) : check this.
- Unlock and lower the undercarriage leg.
- Measure the marks left by the Prussian blue to ensure that the length of roller bearing
against the inside of the hook is 6 _ mm (0.2362 _ !? Q7g7 in).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^>ZZZ^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^ZZS^^Z^ ......... ,-
B Clearance with respect to aircraft structure and doors
-Remove the wheels (see 05-5).

-Fit main wheel jigs to the wheels spindles and tighten them sufficiently to remove lateral play,
but still allow free rotation.
(1 ) Clearance with respect to structure
-Raise the leg until it locks, then release the pressure.

Check that the jigs turn freely inside the well and that there are no points of contact, particu¬
-
larly at the following locations :
- door 24.03i or 24.09i,
- web of frame 25 (lower section, at the captive screws of the inspection door),
- door jack pipe support,
- electric cables.
(2) Clearance with respect to doors
- Disconnect the lower link rod of the undercarriage doors and secure it in such a way that it does
not impede movement of the doors.
- Manually bring the upper door, to bear against its stops.
- Check that the outer jig turns freely and that there are no points of contact, particularly at the
rear section of the door recess.
- Open and secure the upper door.
- Close and lock the lower door using a hydraulic power unit set to slow running.
NOTE : Ensure that the lower link rod is kept well clear.
- Check that the outer jig turns freely and that there are no points of contact, particularly at the
bottom of the door recess.
- Lower and lock the leg.
NOTE : If anything is found maladjusted during the above operations, check that it is not due to
distortion before making corrections.
C Final steps
- Remove the wheel jigs.

- Reinstall the wheels (see 05-5).
- Reconnect the lower link rod of the doors, tighten the pin nut and safety it with a new cotter
pin.
- Lower the aircraft onto its wheels (see 02-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT {LJ>^Z\L
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
STORAGE - PRESERVATION - TRANSPORTATION

OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS
(Figure 25)
1- SCOPE
This sheet specifies the measures to be taken to protect the main undercarriage legs so as to obtain
correct operation after 24-month storage, either in temperate continental climate, or in tropical or
maritime climate.
These measures allow for the transportation mode.
- Swivelling linkage locking tool.

- Torque link clevis protector.
- Axle end protector.
Storage plugs and washers.
- Connector caps.
- Wooden box - blocking materials.
- Metal frame.
- Rubber shock absorbers.
- Labels.
- Grease-proof paper AIR 8140, Category 22.
- Heat-sealed cloth AIR 8140, Category 1 121.
- Grease-proof cloth AIR 8140, Category 22.
- Adhesive tape.
3- MATERIALS
- White spirit DCEA/202B.

- Methanol AIR 3650.
- Rust preventive grease AIR 8136.
- Desiccant AIR 8060.
-ProtexNo. 1 AIR 1502.
- Clear varnish.
- Black paint 2700.
- White paint 2765.
4- STORAGE - PRESERVATION -TRANSPORTATION
Procedure (See table).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L» À*-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION^ ^ _
MIRAGE F
5- DEPRESERVATION
The stored undercarriage legs shall be depreserved just before use (installation), selecting that with
the oldest storage date.
THE REMOVAL OF U/C LEG FROM ITSSTORAGE BOX MUST IMPERATIVELY BE CARRIED
OUT BY MEANS OF THE MOUNTING STAND (see 05-1).
- Remove grease-proof cloth

- Remove rust-preventive grease.
- Remove storage plugs and caps.
- Remove locking tool from swivelling linkage.
- Remove protector from torque link clevis.
- Remove protectors from axle ends.
- Perform pre-installation preparation (see 05-1)
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Î
PROCEDURE
-
PRESERVATION
Blank open ends of pipes or

couplings with storage plugs and
seals.
- Install :
- swiveling linkage locking tool
(as per
-
method
PACKING
RRE
SPECIAL PROCEDURE
00 1 )
Add to specified label¬

ing, a label listing the
subassemblies (on cover
STORING
LU - torque link clevis protector and box). - Store U/C leg in

z - axle end protectors. - Mark storage position package. Observe
o - Discharge shock absorber so on box by means of a storage position
_i that remaining pressure is 5 bar stencil, white paint for marked on box.
o (72.5 psi). boxes painted hydraulic For U/C legs having
LU
- Blank switch and wire bundle brown, and black paint exceeded the storage
P connectors. for unpainted boxes. time, storage prolon
ce z - Clean with white spirit surfaces - Glue labels indicating gation will depend
< < which are not : equipment description, on a check for correct
LU.
5E
h- -painted and storage date and preservation, by
cc
o rr -aluminized time. sampling stored units.
_l < - coated with molybdenum The new storage time
< Q
^9
disulphide grease will also depend on
" s < - corrosion resistant. the results of the
o _l - Remove finger marks with check.
cc
< methanol.
rr - Apply rust preventive grease
_î
< q" to working areas.
1 <
z O - Cover working areas with
UJ ce grease-proof cloth.
ûZ - Coat non-working areas with
1
z Protex.
o - Remove parts which may
o
LU impede U/C leg attachment
r-
< to supports in box. In such
ce a case, secure freed pipes to
LU
O. U/C leg with red adhesive
in
tape, after interposing grease
h- proof paper.
z SPECIAL PROCEDURE
- Additional instructions
z - secure blocking mate
o rials to a metal frame.
< - place frame in box.
interposing rubber
shock dampers.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Protecteur
Protector
Outillage d'immobilisation
Locking tool
-Bloc de
raccordement
\/ x::::=^ Connection block
FIGURE 25 - STOCKAGE JAMBE D'ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL

AB STORAGE OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEGS
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT] MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION__ __
STORAGE PRESERVATION - TRANSPORTATION

OF ELASTIC RODS OR CARDAN YOKES
1 - PURPOSE
This sheet specifies the" measures to be taken to protect elastic rods or cardan yokes so as to obtain
maritime climate.
- Labels.
- Carton.
- Stapler.
- Adhesive tape.
- Grease-proof cloth AIR 8140, Category 21.
- Polyethylene, 0,22 mm (0.0086 in) thick.
- Kraft paper.
- Heat-sealed cloth AIR 8140, Category 1121.
- Grease-proof paper A I R 8140, Category 22.
3- MATERIALS

- Methanol AIR 3650.
- Rust preventive grease AI R 81 36.
- Micro-crystalline wax.
4- STORAGE - PRESERVATION - TRANSPORTATION
5- DEPRESERVATION
The stored units shall be depreserved just before use (installation), selecting that with the oldest
storage date.
- Remove bands of grease-proof cloth.
- Remove rust preventive grease (with a dry rag or white spirit).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^-^-l^0
PROCEDURE
PRESERVATION PACKING STORING

Z
o
1- (as per method R RE 001)
<
H
CE SPECIAL PROCEDURE
o
LU
Cl
LO
2
- Place unit in a compact
< < carton.
rr - Block, staple carton
_j l
O rr flaps and blank open
< Clean with white spirit surfaces edges with adhesive tape.
O which are not :
z z - painted
LU
Z _i - coated with molybdenum
1- < disulphide grease
z
o rr - aluminized
o d" - corrosion resistant. - Store unit in package.
LU < - Remove finger marks with metha - For units having
H O
< ce nol. exceeded the storage
ce
LU - Apply rust preventive grease to time, storage prolon¬
Q.
working areas. gation will depend
LU - Cover working areas with grease SPECIAL PROCEDURE on a check for correct
1- preservation by sampl
proof cloth.
Z
- Coat non-working areas with - Replace wax dip and ing stored units. The
LU z kraft paper with heat- new storage time will
C3 o Protex.
< F - Attach labels indicating equip sealing cloth. also depend on the
OC
o
< ment description, and storage - Wrap carton with heat- results of the check.
h-
cc date and time. sealing cloth.
CO
O - Place unit in a polyethylene - Heat seal after evacu
CO cover. ating air with a vacuum
2.
< - Heat seal after evacuating air pump.
0= with a vacuum pump. -Repeat labeling.
h-
-Coat labels with clear
<
LU varnish.
SPECIAL PROCEDURE
- Additional
nuui IIUI lui instructions
II IOLI UbUUI 19
-Perform above operations, - Wrap carton with heat-

except for polyethylene cover sealing cloth.
_1 Ol which shall be replaced by a - Repeat labeling.
< heat-sealing cloth. - Coat labels with clear
UJ
wz varnish.
o_i
ce o
§2
F" LU
zs
~ 2?tr
<
luF- °o
O ce ces:
<< «co
O <<
r-0= 5cc
co O -II-
<
oc
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT rU^^ZXL
BREGUET AVIATION <^Zé- ^^
MIRAGE F
STORAGE - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

OF JACKS OR TELESCOPIC RODS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet specifies the measures to be taken to protect jacks or telescopic rods so as to obtain
maritime climate.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
- Storage plugs and seals

- Cap for connector
- Protective cap
- Carton
- Labels
- Strips of red adhesive tape
- Kraft paper
- Heat-sealed cloth Air 8140, category 1 121
- Grease-proof paper Air 8140, category 22
- Polyethylene, 0.22 mm (0.0086 in) thick
3- MATERIALS
- Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520A

- White spirit DCEA/202B
- Methanol Air 3650
- Rust preventive grease Air 8136
-Protex No. 1 Air 1502
- Desiccant Air 8060
- Micro-crystalline wax
- Clear varnish
4- STORAGE - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION
A Procedure (see table)
5- UNPACKAGING
The stored units shall be unpackaged just before use (installation), selecting that with the oldest
storage date.
- Remove the bands of grease-proof paper.
- Remove the rust preventive grease (with a dry rag or white spirit).
- Remove the vent port protectors, protective plugs and caps.
- Perform the operations described in sheet «Precautions to be taken for spare jacks» (see 05-0).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
PROCEDURE
(as|aer method RRE001)
SPECIAL PROCEDURE
z
g
i - Place unit in following position : -Do not use any frame.
< - rod retracted (unit without Replace wooden box by
ce locking device) a carton with edges
O - rod retracted and not locked blanked with adhesive
O-
(unit with locking device). tape.
z
- Fill chambers of unit to 3/4
LU
< - Wrap carton with heat-
< CC
1
volume with operating fluid. sealing cloth.
*E
rr
- Blank hydraulic ports with - Repeat labeling on car - Store unit in package.
ton and coat labels with
1
O <r suitable seals and plugs. - Observe storage posi

LU - Blank vent port with red clear varnish. tion.
n Z adhesive tape, if unit is - For units having ex
t < provided with vent port. ceeded the storage time,
ce
< - If unit is equipped with storage prolongation
2 a switch, blank switch or will depend on a check
cc q install protective cap in for correct preservation
o < place of switch. by sampling stored
_J O
< oc -Clean with white spirit units. The new storage
g surfaces which are not : time will also depend
Q.
o painted
- on the results of the
rr aluminized
- check.
1
- coated with molybdenum
i" disulphide grease
<
- corrosion resistant.
- Remove finger marks with SPECIAL PROCEDURE
Z methanol.
1- - Apply rust preventive grease - Replace wax dip and
2
O to working areas and cover with kraft paper with heat-
O grease-proof cloth. sealing cloth.
LU
1- - Apply Protex to non-working - Wrap carton with heat-
< areas. sealing cloth.
LU - Heat seal after evacu
O. z
o ating air with a vacuum
LU pump.
i
1-
2 <
1
-Repeat labeling.
r
oc -Coat labels with clear
LU
CD
varnish.
<
ce z
O <
1- rr
co
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /Lî^-^rU
BREGUET AVIATION ^_^ _^ _
MIRAGE
....... »,
F
«^
STORAGE - PRESERVATION -TRANSPORTATION OF SHOCK ABSORBERS
1 - SCOPE
This sheet specifies the measures to be taken to protect the shock absorbers so as to obtain correct
operation after 24-month storage, either in temperate continental climate, or in tropical or maritime
climate.
- Protective cap.
- Carton.
- Heat-sealed cloth.
- Grease-proof cloth AI R 81 40, Category 22.
- Adhesive tape.
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit DCEA/202B.

-Methanol AIR 3650.
4- STORAGE - PRESERVATION TRANSPORTATION
5- DEPRESERVATION
The stored shock absorbers shall be depreserved just before use (installation), selecting that with
the oldest storage date.
- Drop pressure in gas chamber and charge to operating pressure.
- Remove protective cap.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION --"^c0
PROCEDURE
(as per method R R E 001 )

Z
o SPECIAL PROCEDURE
h-
<
H - Place preserved unit in
rr
III O a heat-sealing polyethy
uu
CL lene cover.
1- CO
z - Add to specified label
< ing, following labels
oc
o h- indicating :
QC
- storage position (rod
< down)
Z a - list of shock absorber
UJ 2
z < subassemblies, if any
p _l (e.g. : switch)
z < - that inside is protected
o QC
a with dry nitrogen at
UJ a 5 bar (72.5 psi), and
<
< o that shock absorber
ce oc
UJ must be discharge before
a.
5 - After testing, discharge shock placing in service use.
UJ absorber so that remaining
r-
pressure is only 5 bar (72.5 psi)
Z Store shock absorber
approximately. -
- Secure protective cap in place SPECIAL PROCEDURE in package. Observe
of switch. storage position.
z For units having
o - Clean with white spirit metal - Replace wax dip and kraft -
h- surfaces which are not : paper with heat-sealing exceeded the storage
CO
< - painted cloth. time, storage prolon
h-
cc -aluminized - Heat seal after evacuating gation will depend on
o - corrosion resistant air with a vacuum pump. a check for correct
- coated with molybdenum - Repeat labeling. preservation, by sam
z
< disulphide grease - Coat labels with clear pling stored units.
oc
1 - protected by blanks. varnish. The new storage time
< - Remove finger marks with will also depend on
UJ methanol. the results of the
co
- Coat visible portion of sliding check.
rod and hinge clevises with rust
preventive grease. Wrap these
ce areaswith grease-proof cloth. SPECIAL PROCEDURE
< - Apply Protex to non-working
-JLU
<r~
a areas. - Replace wooden box with
Si
^5»
a carton.
§1 - Blank edges with adhesive
O.J
oco tape.
F-UJ 1?
-JCC - Wrap carton with heat-
z§ sealing cloth.
ujF- <2
cegj
-
- Repeat labeling.
Orr
- Coat with clear varnish.
<< £<
^1 SE
f-£
coO Q*
<
o
ce
AB
BREGUET
ti^J>^Z\l
AVIATION^£. _-^^- ,
MIRAGE
.,..,.. .,
F
STORAGE - PRESERVATION - TRANSPORTATION OF PINS
1- SCOPE
This sheet specifies the measures to be taken to store pins for 24 months, either in temperate
continental climate, or in tropical or maritime climate.
- Stapler.
- Carton.
- Labels.
- Adhesive tape.
- Heat-sealed cloth AIR 8140, Category 1 121.
- Grease-proof paper AIR 8140, Category 1 122.
- Kraft paper.
- Grease-proof cloth AIR 8140, Category 21 .
3- MATERIALS

-Methanol AIR 3650.
-Clear varnish.
-Desiccant AIR 8060.
4- STORAGE - PRESERVATION -TRANSPORTATION
5- DEPRESERVATION
The stored parts shall be depreserved just before use (installation), selecting that with the oldest
storage date.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
R
PROCEDURE
(as per method R R E 001 )
SPECIAL PROCEDURE
- Place preserved unit in a

O
n
-Clean with white spirit metal compact carton.
LU
h- Ui surfaces which are not : - Block.
< painted
- - Staple carton flaps.
coated with molybdenum
- - Blank edges with adhe
o disulphide grease sive tape.
_j - aluminized
< <
h- Q - corrosion resistant.
z Z - Remove finger marks with
LU
< methanol.
Z 1
F- < - Apply rust preventive grease

Z
o oc to operating parts.
O 0* - Cover these areas with grease
LU
< proof cloth.
< 0 - Coat non-working areas with
oc
ce
lu Protex.
- Attach a label indicating part
number, description and, if - Store unit in pack
1- applicable, date of assembly. age. For units having
z SPECIAL PROCEDURE exceeded the storage
- Attach labels indicating
equipment description, and time, storage prolon
z storage date and time. - Replace wax dip and gation will depend on
0
p - Place equipment in a polyethy kraft paper with heat- a check for correct
< lene cover. sealing cloth. preservation, by sam
CO
cc - Heat seal after evacuating air - Wrap carton with heat- pling stored units.
0
n
with a vacuum pump. sealing cloth. The new storage time
co - Heat seal after evacu will also depend on
z
< ating air with a vacuum the results of the
oc pump. check.
h-
< -Repeat labeling.
LU -Coat labels with clear
Ui
varnish.
CC SPECIAL PROCEDURE
<
_|LU Q - Perform following addi
<F-
-Perform above operations. tional operations :
511 <o - wrap carton with heat-
o_i
except for polyethylene cover
rro which shall be replaced by a sealing cloth,
F-uj heat-sealing cloth. - repeat labeling.
Z| coat with clear varnish.
<P -
LUh- ëfc
CDtr j-Z
<< ^<
coo
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti ^^^Z\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^c. ....,....,-
REPLACEMENT OF LOCKING PINS OF

SHOCK ABSORBER HINGE PINS
A Standard tools
- Set of taps M 5 X 0.8
B Special tools
- Undercarriage-hydraulics 1st line tool kit

- Endoscope
D Materials
- White Spirit
- Mastinox 6856K
- Liquid nitrogen
E Spares
- 1 pin to nominal or oversize dimension as required
C 56685-10 dia. 8 mm (nominal dimension)
C 56685-10 R1 dia. 8.1 mm
C 56685-10 R2 dia. 8.2 mm
C 56689-1 0 R3 dia. 8.3 mm
C 56685-10 R4 dia. 8.4 mm
C 56685-10 R5 dia. 8.5 mm
- Remove the shock absorber involved

(see 05-1).
Shield the surrounding area from cleaning materials and metal shavings, in particular the wheel
-
and the brake that have not been removed from the undercarriage leg.
- Thoroughly clean with white spirit the area involved in the operation and wipe it dry with a
clean cloth.
3- PROCEDURE
A Removal of broken pin
- Drill mark the center of the broken pin with accuracy.

- Drill the broken pin from end to end with a dia. 4 mm drill.
CAUTION :
CAREFULLY LINE UP THE DRILLING AXIS WITH THE PIN AXIS TO AVOID DAMAGING
THE BORE DURING DRILLING AND TAPPING OPERATIONS.
- Tap the hole to M5 X 0.8.

- Use extractor F 21972 to remove the broken pin.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^3z
/L^^-^rU
_ ^
MIRAGE F
B Checks prior to replacement of pin
- Thoroughly clean the bore of the pin and the broken pin using Pyrolac solvent.
- Carefully inspect the bore using an endoscope or a magnifying glass under powerful light in order
to reveal all traces of deep scoring, metal stripping or corrosion.
CAUTION :
SHOULD ANY DEFECT SHOW UP, THE WHOLE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG SHOULD BE SENT
TO THE NEXT HIGHER REPAIR LINE. NO TOUCH-UP WHATSOEVER OF THE BORE IS
PERMITTED.
- Should the bore prove in good condition, measure the broken pin diameter in order to determine
the diameter of the replacement pin (nominal or oversize dimension). From the set of spare pins, select
the one whose diameter corresponds to that of the broken pin.
C Installation of spare pin
- Thoroughly clean the spare pin with Pyrolac solvent.

- Sparingly coat the bore with Mastinox.
- Once the liquid nitrogen has stopped boiling in the container, immerse the pin in nitrogen for
at least, one minute.
WARNING :
TAKE ALL SAFETY MEASURES PRESCRIBED FOR HANDLING OF LIQUID NITROGEN
(RISK OF BURNS). DO NOT HANDLE THE PIN WITH NAKED HANDS.
- Fit the pin into the bore immediately after removing it from liquid nitrogen and drive it into
place, using a mallet if necessary.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Reinstall the shock absorber (see 05-1 ).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' ^ -" ^ /V\li\/-\V^L. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^4_~ .««^ _ ..,..,. nc
^<l ^s-^> Restricted MANUAL 05
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPLACING CONNECTORS OF

ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLES ON A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
(figures 27-28-29)
A - Special tools
-Electrical system 2nd line tool kit.

-Equipment tool kit for connectors Deutsch-Martin 52284.
-Sleeve fitting pliers SES.
-Hot air generator.
. -Ohmmeter.
B - Materials
-Adhesive Raychem S1125.
C - Spares
For lower cable bundle
-Connector C 51 06R8-3AS50
951 -06R8-3AS50
-1 sleeve 202A1 21 -3
-1 sheath 212004-10
-Connector E 51 06R8-3AS50
951 -06R8-3AS50
-1 sleeve 222A1 32-3
-2 adapters CK1 -1 or 202B221
-1 sheath NT 5-8
-1 sleeve A255-60700
-2 adapters CK2-1 or 202C221
-Connector B 51 06R 12-1 0P50

-1 sleeve 202A1 42-3
-2 marking sleeves D1 42-51 or SLT5X
For upper cable bundle
- Connector B 51 06R1 4-1 9P50

-1 sleeve 202A1 42-3
-Connector C 5106R12-10S50
-1 sleeve 202A1 42-3
- Connector D 51 06R1 2-1 0S50
-1 sleeve 222A1 42-3
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
PRELIMINARY STEPS
-Make sure that the aircraft electrical systems are not energized and that switches and circuit
breakers of the circuits concerned are «off».
- For connector C of the lower cable bundle : remove the tachometer generator concerned
(see 05-7).
- For the other connectors :
- break the connection,
- undo the cable attachment clip near the connector concerned,
- if need be, remove the connector from its fixed support.
3- REMOVAL
- Remove sleeves, sheaths and adapters.
CAUTION :
TO REMOVE THESE COMPONENTS, IT IS REQUIRED TO MAKE A LONGITUDINAL CUT.
DURING THIS OPERATION, TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE CABLE INSULATING
MATERIAL COVERED BY THESE COMPONENTS.
- Remove the connector as instructed in manual 16-0-2.

- following tools :
Use the
holding tool FOM 2005
-
- extraction tool M 155 14-20
-metal tip 0187-027-000.
- Cut the wires flush with the contacts.
- After cutting the wires, check each wire for correct continuity by referring to wiring
diagram in figure 27.
NOTE : If the length of the wires after cutting at the contacts and suppressing possible damaged
sections is insufficient for correctly mounting the new connector, replace the whole cable
bundle.
INSTALLATION
- Install the spare connector as instructed in manual 16-0-2.

- Successively fit the adapters, sheaths, sleeves and wire markings corresponding to the
connector concerned (see figures 28 and 29).
- For connector E of the lower cable bundle : if installation is subsequent to replacement
of the cable bundle, reinstall sheath, sleeves and adapters on the wiring section at the outlet of elbowed
tube 220.
- Use the following tools :
- crimping pliers 1 5500-20-7
- sleeve fitting pliers SES.
- Fit a bare contact and a blank to all the connector holes which are not used, as per wiring
diagram in figure 27.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^^ZT^X.
BREGUET AVIATION^c^^Ô
MIRAGE F
^z£^*^^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
Adhere to lengths of sheaths and wires and to positioning of locating notches of the connec¬
-
tors 29).
(see figures 28 and
- After crimping the contacts and before final installation of the connector, check each wire
for correct continuity, as per wiring diagram in figure 27.
5- FINAL STEPS
- Check all the systems supplied by connector(s) on which work has been performed.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Schéma électrique Schéma électrique
jambe gauche jambe droite
Electrical diagram FAISCEAU Electrical diagram
LHIeg SUPERIEUR RHIeq
Prise "B" Connector "B" UPPER CABLE Prise "B" Connector "B"
BUNDLE
I KJEVUutsrpnmlmopobCa "V I ACBOFGMLMNPHSTUVEJK \
c£§£
Bleu clair Bleu clair.

Light blue Light blue
Bl
Bl
Ja
Bl
fo
lBlelet
iBlue
w
cl
L ue
leu
M
Z
ripe
W
Z
.
Jau
filet
bl
eu
,wwit
Prise
Diue
tripeit
V3JKH EFDACB
"D" Connector "D'
Prise
/K J
Jaune pâle
Pale yellow
//
Prise
"B" Connector "B"

A C E G H
OOOMMIII
\K.JEHGFDBCA
\K.JEHGFDBC
<s>-
"C" Connector "C"
Et D.F\
(ES
FAISCEAU
INFERIEUR
LOWER CABLE
BUNDLE
\
Prise
ACBDFGHEJKl
"C" Connector "C"
Prise
/acbhgedfjk\
"B" Connector "B"
\
Prise
BCADFÊriKJGI
"D" Connector "D"
SI
2 S-
.3 b
Q 5 3 - Q 3
ES
J"5
5
/S S
////*ït
/ «
3 * \ \
*W
\\\ \
-Q
4m
C
.5>
/ f Q i?
\*
il. B C
/\
e
B C A-
» <» e h i i i i <
Prise "C" Connector "C"

Prise "E" Connector "E'
Prise "C" Connector "C
FIGURE 27 - SCHEMA DE CABLAGE DES FAISCEAUX

CABLE BUNDLES - WIRING DIAGRAM
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Prise B
Connector B
140.
130
VUE SUIVANT F
VIEW ON F
Orientation ± 10°
\~ Positioning ± 10°
VUE SUIVANT F1
VIEW ON F1
Lettre A de la référence Orientation sur__
gravée sur la dérivation faisceau gauche
Letter A of P/N engraved Positioning as per
on bifurcation LH cable bundle
Prise C Prise D
Connector C Connector D
VUE SUIVANT F2
VIEW ON F2
Orientation! 10"
Positioning ± 10°
Orientation sur_
faisceau droit
Positioning as per
RH cable bundle
(0.19 ±0.39 in)

240
FIGURE 28 - PRISES DU FAISCEAU ELECTRIQUE SUPERIEUR

CONNECTORS OF UPPER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE
AA
BREGUET
[
AVIATION^-"-^53
MIRAGE F
Prise B
Connector B
VUE SUIVANT F1
VIEW ON F1
130
'Orientation ± 10°
Positioning ± 70°
Prise E Prise C *
Connector E Connector C
VUE SUIVANT F
VIEW ON F
\
)rientation ± 10'
'Positioning ± 10°
FIGURE 29 PRISES DU FAISCEAU ELECTRIQUE INFERIEUR
CONNECTORS OF LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^©F3^^
/L^^-^rU MIRAGE
.. .
F
REPLACEMENT OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE

ON A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
(figure 30)
A Standard tools
- Crimping pliers
B Special tools
- 2nd line U/C hydraulics tool kit

- Ohmmeter
C Materials
- Raychem adhesive S1 125

-PR1422B2
- White spirit
D Spares
- 2 lockwashers 23350AC050LE
-3pins23310AA015015LE
- 2 packings BT 31-5 or BT 31-7
- Remove the tachometer generators (see 05-7).
3- PROCEDURE
A Remove the lower pin of the shock absorber (see manual 05-1 ).
B Remove the hydraulic nozzle assembly (see manual 05-1 ).
(1 ) Remove the rocker arm assembly (see manual 05- ).
(2) Lay the rocker arm on a working bench.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ>-urHCL
BREGUET AVIATION ^$_ ^^
MIRAGE F
C Removal of tow ring
- Remove pin 85 used for hooking spring 84 to the plastic stop (two cotter pins) .
- Remove stop pin 82 (remove one of the cotter pins).
- Drive out pin 83 and recover plastic stop 80, ring 79, bushing 81 and spring 84.
D Removal of cable bundle
- Split and remove sleeve 130 at the outlet of elbow tube 220, then cut the wires near elbow tube.
- Remove elbow tube 220 : unscrew the nut of the coupling and extract the wiring from the
tube.
- Remove guard 86 from the rocker arm hinge clevis :
- depending on the type of assembly :
- unsafety and unscrew the three captive screws by a few turns,
or
the center screw by a few turns ;
- unscrew
unlock the cover by tapping on the screw heads, then extract the guard assembly after
-
noting the position of the grommet.
- Cut the wires near both connectors C.
- Strip the wires and hook to each wiring a pulling wire that is at least one-and-a-half times as long
as the cable bundle (use old electrical wires with different colors).
- Extract the cable bundle by pulling it on rocker arm hinge side and by engaging the three pulling
wires in its place.
- Unhook the cable bundle as scon as the pulling wires are visible at the rocker arm hinge and
leave them in place for subsequent installation of the spare cable bundle.
E Installation of cable bundle
Hook the end of each cable bundle branch to the corresponding pulling wire.
-
- The branches of the cable bundle corresponding to connectors C are marked as follows :
I for the inner wheel generator,
E for the outer wheel generator.

- Engage the cable bundle by pulling it gradually with its pulling wires, until it is correctly
installed.
- The upper section of the cable bundle must protrude by 505 ± 5 mm (19.9 ± 0.2 in) above
guard 86, once the latter has been fitted.
- Make sure that the wiring protective sheath is not abnormally stretched or pinched at the diffe¬
rent accessible outlets.
- Unhook the pulling wires from the three branches of the cable bundle.
- Check each wire of the cable bundle for correct continuity on the corresponding contacts of
connector B (see 05-1).
- Reinstall guard 86
- Fit the guard, taking care to correctly position the grommet.
- According to the type of assembly :
- tighten the three screws alternately and gradually, and safety them with 0.8-mm dia.
lockwire,
or
tighten the center screw.
-
- Coat the screw heads and guard edges with PR 1422B2.
- Slip elbow tube 220 over the branch of the cable bundle corresponding to connector E. Screw
and tighten its coupling.
- Reinstall both connectors C and connector E with its insulating sleeve at the outlet of elbow
tube 220 (see 05-1).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ Jl *< /Ylllx/'WJ'L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^<4-~
^<^ .cjô
^*-> .
Restricted ........
MANUAL ft05
,
F - Installation of tow ring
-Reassemble the following parts: ring 79, stop 80, bushing 81 and spring 84; reinstall this
assembly on the rocker arm and attach it with pin 83 after aligning the bores.
-Fit stop pin 82 and safety it with a new cotter pin.
-Reinstall pin 85 on the plastic stop while hooking spring 84 and safety the pin with two
new cotter pins.
G - Reinstall the rocker arm (see manual 05-1).
H - Reinstall the hydraulic nozzle assembly (see manual 05-1).

-Reinstall the lower pin of the shock absorber (see manual 05-1 ).
4 - FINAL STEPS
-Reinstall the tachometer generators (see 05-7).

-Check the anti-skid system after working on electrical wirings (see 05-7).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Prise "B"
Connector "B'
Prise "E" j Prise "C"

Connector "E" Connector "C
DETAIL A
FIGURE 30 - ECHANGE D'UN FAISCEAU ELECTRIQUE INFERIEUR

D'UN ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL
REPLACEMENT OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON A MAIN
UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" -** MIRAGE
iMiixnwu F
i
BREGUET AVIATION _î_~ ^«.ô _ . , ....,,,,, -._
^« ^-^> Restricted MANUAL 05
REPAIR OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

(figure 31 )
SCOPE:
This card only deals with the replacement of a ringed sheath section between connector
"E" and elbowed tube 220.
A - Standard tools
-Electrician's knife.
-Round-tip spatula.
B - Special tools
-Electrical system 2nd line tool kit.
-Equipment tool kit for Deutsch-Souriau connector.
-Hot air generator.
-Ohmmeter.
C - Spares
-Ringed sheath 9-32 Convolex as applicable.
-1 sleeve NT5-8.
-1 sleeve SCL3-4.
-1 sleeve 222AI32-3.
2 - MATERIALS
-Isopropyl alcohol.
-Adhesive Raychem SII25.
-Adhesive Oceta Vibratite VC3.
-Sealant PR 1321 A2.
A - Remove the outer wheel from the U/C leg concerned (see manual 05-5).
B - If necessary, remove the sealant from area M.
C - Disconnect connector E.
D - Release the length of wiring located under the rocker arm.
4 - PROCEDURE
A Disassembly
- Remove protective sleeve 300.
-Remove the metal clamp from adapter 260.
-Remove adapter 260, using a knife to separate the two half-shells.
-Cut sleeves 250 and 270 lengthwise.
CAUTION:
DURING THIS OPERATION, TAKE CARE TO AVOID DAMAGING THE INSULATION OF
THE UNDERLYING WIRING.
-Heat sleeves 250 and 270 with a hot air generator, then remove them from the elbowed
tube and connector using a spatula; discard the sleeves.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ," ^ -" ^ / V\l r\/-\V_7[^ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^^_-
^^ J?^0
^-^> .
Restncted . .hamiiai
MANUAL nr-
05
NOTE: lf a Souriau connector is fitted, remove sleeve 290 as described above.
-Remove adapters 240, using an electrician's knife to separate the two half-shells.
-Mark the orientation of the connector (position of polarizing key).
-Extract and identify the connector contacts (see manual 16-0-2).
-Remove and discard ringed sheath 230.
B - Cleaning - Check
-Clean all the recovered parts with isopropyl alcohol.

-Carefully check that the insulation of the electrical conductors is free from cuts, notches,
crushing, etc.
If defects are detected, send the bundle to the next higher repair line.
-Check that the connector and contacts are free from corrosion, dents, etc.
-Check all parts for cleanliness prior to assembly.
C - Assembly
-Cut a piece of new ringed sheath 230 to length (see figure 1 ).

-Slip the piece of sheath over the electrical conductors and bring it into contact with the
second shoulder of elbowed tube 220.
-Thoroughly coat the outside diameter of the adapter with Raychem adhesive, going
10 mm (0.4 in) beyond either side of the adapter.
-Place a new sleeve 250 on the adapter and shrink on with the hot air generator.
-Wipe off the excess adhesive with a cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
- Place an adapter 240 on the end of the sheath.
- Place a new sleeve 270 on the sheath without shrinking the sleeve.
NOTE: If a Souriau connector is fitted, cut a piece of sleeve 250 to length and slip it onto the
sheath.
-Assemble the connector, referring to the marks applied upon disassembly for the loca¬
tion of the contacts and the position of the connector (see manual 16-0-2).
NOTE: Use Vibratite VC3 adhesive for safetying the connector base.
-Check the electrical continuity of each conductor (see referenced card B1 ).

-Thoroughly coat the outside diameter of the connector base and adapter with Raychem
adhesive; also cover about 10 mm of the sheath.
- Place sheath 270 over both the connector base and sheath and shrink it on at each end
with the hot air generator.
NOTE: If a Souriau connector is fitted, shrink a sleeve 290 cut to length onto the connector
base pre-coated with Raychem adhesive, before positioning sleeve 270.
-Wipe off the excess adhesive with a cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
- Place adapter260 on the sheath and fit the clamp.
D - Electrical check
-Using the ohmmeter, check for an insulation resistance s 20 MO:
-across all the connector contacts joined together and the connector body,
-across each contact.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f UJIJK / Y \ 1\ /-\>^7 L.
1
BREGUET AVIATION ^t^- â*-»^ ....,,, n,

^ .s*-^ Restricted MANUAL 05
E - Final steps
-Perform the functional check of the residual pressure switch (see manual 05-7).
-Clamp the length of wiring located under the rocker arm.
-Reconnect connector E.
-Cover the pressure switch connector and body with sleeve 300.
-Apply a bead of sealant to the sleeve 300/pressure switch assembly (area M).
-Reinstall the wheel (see manual 05-5).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Prise "E".
Connector "E"
UW?//Mf'/ttt//Jttltm£tm
nnnryr
Détail de montage d'une prise "E" Souriau

Detail of a Souriau connector "E"
13 mm (0.52 in)
220 1 mm (0.04 in)
FIGURE 31 REPARATION D'UN FAISCEAU ELECTRIQUE INFERIEUR

D'ATTERRISSEUR PRINCIPAL
REPAIR OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON
A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// -J^-^rU MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^}. <^ - .«ami
ai ne
i
SECTION 2
MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
2-0 GENERAL 2-001

- Undercarriage door unlocking control 2-1 04
- Undercarriage door control linkage 2-106
- Undercarriage door jacks 2-1 08
- Unlocking jack 2-112
2-3 REMOVAL -INSTALLATION
- Removal - installation of a main undercarriage door jack 2-301

- Removal - installation of a main undercarriage door unlocking jack 2-304
2A DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY
- Disassembly - assembly of.an undercarriage door jack for seal replacement 2-401
- Disassembly - assembly of an unlocking jack forseal replacement 2-407
2-5 INSPECTION -CHECK -ADJUSTMENT -TEST
- Inspection of main undercarriage doors and linkages 2-501

- Testing of an undercarriage door jack after seal replacement 2-503
- Testing of an unlocking jack after seal replacement 2-505
- Check of main undercarriage door adjustment 2-507
- Adjustment of main undercarriage doors 2-509
Figure No. Page
1 LAYOUT OF COMPONENTS 2-103

2 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR UNLOCKING CONTROL 2-105
3 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR CONTROL LINKAGE 2-107
4 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK 2-109
5 DIAGRAM OF UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK 2-111
6 UNLOCKING JACK 2-113
7 DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY OF AN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK 2-406
8 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AN UNLOCKING JACK 2-41 1
9 ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS 2-513
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «
BREGUET AVIATION ^rfâ.
-^-"r^J
^^
MIRAGE
......... ..
F
GENERAL
(Figure 1)
The main undercarriage doors blank the undercarriage well entirely when the U/C leg is retracted
and partly when it is extended. The doors are functionally linked to the undercarriage legs and the
associated control systems (See 05-6).
1 - LOCKING
The doors are provided with two mechanical locks. An unlocking jack actuates a linkage which
opens the locks as the undercarriage is extended.
On ground, a manual control enables the lower and upper doors to be unlocked.
2- CONTROL
The doors are controlled by :

- a torque linkage actuated by a hydraulic jack for the lower and upper doors.
- a link 1 1 coupled to the undercarriage leg for the fairing.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
1-2 L/H AND R/H UNLOCKING JACKS U/C well X
- Single-acting hydraulic jacks

- Nominal dimensions between stops
- Jack extended : 220 mm (8.661 1 in)
-Jack retracted : 195 mm (7.6771 in)
- Travel : 25 mm (0.9842 in)
- Control the torque linkage.
3-4 L/H AND R/H AFT DOOR LOCKS U/C well
Automatically locked door locks retaining the lower

and upper doors in closed and locked position.
GROUND UNLOCKING CONTROL U/C well X
Enables the lower and upper doors to be opened on ground

through the handle located in the U/C well above
frame 27.
6-7 L/H AND R/H U/C LEG DOOR JACKS U/C well X
- Double-acting hydraulic jacks internally locked in the

rod extended position.
- Unlocking pressure : °» 70 bar (1015 psi).
- Nominal dimensions between stops (jack not installed
on aircraft).
- Jack extended : 464 mm (18.2677 in)
- Jack retracted : 345 mm (13.5826 in)
- Travel :119mm (4.6850 in) .
- Control opening and closing of the lower and upper
doors.
10G1 L/H AND R/H FORWARD DOOR LOCK U/C well

10G2
Same function as items 3 and 4.
In addition, they are provided with a switch to indicate
that the doors are closed and locked.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS
All the upper and lower doors and fairing closing the
undercarriage well are described in manual 03.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F

LAYOUT
AB
BREGUET AVIATION XJ3."^«^ . UAMIAI ne
UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR UNLOCKING CONTROL

(Figure 2)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The undercarriage door unlocking control consists of two systems, one L/H and one R/H system,
each uncluding :
-one unlocking jack 1 or 2 hinged on the U/C truss fitting on the one hand, and on the bellcrank
support fitting, on the other hand.
-one torque linkage composed of one bellcrank 7, four rods 8 and two control levers 9. The
linkage is reset to the operating position through a return spring mounted at the forward locks 10G1 or
10G2.
- two mechanical locks 10G1 and 3 or 10G2 and 4 retaining the doors in closed position. Forward
lock 10G1 or 10G2 is equipped with a switch indicating that the doors are locked.
The locks are bolted to the aircraft structure through a serrated support plate used to adjust the lock
position.
- one ground unlocking control composed of a sheathed cable actuated by a handle 5 hinged on
the aircraft structure and retained in stowage position by a clip.
- one rocker 10 swivelling about the bellcrank pin, and retained in rest position by a spring.
2- OPERATION
A Unlocking in flight
Under the action of the hydraulic pressure, the jack rod is retracted, which causes bellcrank 7 to
swivel thereby actuating the torque linkage which opens mechanical locks 10G1 and 3 or 10G2 and 4
and frees the door rollers.
B Unlocking on ground
Unlocking on ground is controlled by handle 5 which tilts and drives the cable pivoting rocker 10
and actuating the linkage, thereby causing locks 10G1 and 3 or 10G2 and 4 to open.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
COUPE B COUPE A
CROSS-SECT/ON B CROSS-SECTION A
VUE SUIVANT F
ww«
COUPE C
CROSS-SECT/ON C
FIGURE 2 - COMMANDE DE DEVERROUILLAGE DES TRAPPES

AB 2-105
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R^^ZZ^X
BREGUET AVIATION ,__ _
MIRAGE F
UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR CONTROL LINKAGE

(Figure 3)
1- DESCRIPTION
The three main U/C doors closing the U/C wells are controlled :
- For the U/C leg fairing, by a cardan joint type torque link 1 1 hinged on the aircraft structure, on
the one hand, and on the U/C leg on the other hand. A Pip-pin 12 provides quick uncoupling of the link
from the door, so as to facilitate access inside the U/C well.
- For the two upper and lower doors, by a torque mechanism mounted on frame 22.
This mechanism consists of three rods 13, and two control levers 14 equipped with bearings.
The lower door is actuated by a hydraulic jack 6.
All rods are hinged by self-aligned pins. The bearings of the doors, control levers and hydraulic
jack consist of the aircraft structure.
The four adjustable rubber stops 15-16-17-19, two 15-16 for the upper and lower doors at C22
and C25, and two 17-19 for the fairing at C27 and C29 stress the doors in closed position.
2- DOOR CONTROL LINKAGE
A Door closing
(1) U/C leg fairings

Closing of the U/C leg fairing is slaved to the U/C leg retraction through torque link 1 1 .
In closed position, the fairing comes into contact with stops 17-19.
(2) Upper and lower doors

As the doors are closed, the retracting rod of hydraulic jack 6 actuates the lower door and,
through the linkage, the upper door.
The linkage is so designed that during the closing sequence, the lower door lags the upper door.
The rolling tracks of the lower door come into contact with upper door rollers 18.
Jack 6 continues moving, and the lower door covers the lower edge of the upper door which is
pressed on the two stops 15 and 16, as well as the forward edge of the U/C leg fairing.
All doors are then stressed by stops 15-16-17-19 and immobilized by locks 10G1 - 10G2 - 3 and 4.
AA
BREGUET AVIATIO
MIRAGE F
C.29
COUPE E
SECT/ON E
COUPE C
SECTION C
COUFE D
SECT/ON D
FIGURE 3 - CINEMATIQUE DES TRAPPES

AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^3. __^
MIRAGE
...
F
UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACKS
The L/H main U/C door jack is similar to the R/H main U/C door jack.
This jack opens and closes the doors. This is a double-acting hydraulically controlled jack which is
internally locked by claws in the rod extension direction. It is equipped with a switch 6G1 (L/H jack)
or 6G2 (R/H jack).
This assembly consists of :

- one cylinder 21 equipped with a self-aligning bearing 22 hinging the jack on the structure. Two
bosses G and S accommodate a shuttle valve.
- one cylinder 23 attached to cylinder 21 by nut 24. Cylinder 23 is provided with a hydraulic fluid
supply coupling 25, and a rocker 26 hinged between a socket 27 and a plate 28. This rocker controls
the microswitch of switch 6G1 or 6G2 connected to the undercarriage control sequence system.
Locking sleeve 29 retained between cylinder 21, and an internal shoulder of cylinder 23 forms
with piston 30 and return spring 31, the internal locking device of the jack.
Piston 30 is equipped with a lever 32 actuating rocker 26.
B Moving assembly
This assembly essentially consists of a sliding rod 33 equipped with piston 34 and lock 35 at one
end, and with an adjustable self-aligned rod end 36 making the connection to the door, at the other
end.
Extension of rod 33 controls opening of the main U/C doors. The hydraulic pressure applied to
the jack through a shuttle valve fitted to boss S, acts on passage area S1 of the moving assembly and
causes it to move.
Throughout the rod extension phase, the fluid expelled from chamber P freely flows through
port A.
At the end of rod extension, the claws of lock 35 are bent to clear locking sleeve 29 ; then they
push piston 30 and separate by spring effect as sleeve 29 is cleared.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
6G1
ou or
6G2
FIGURE 4 - VERIN DE TRAPPES

UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK
AB
BREGUET
{L^Zz^X.
AVIATION^^325=>^
MIRAGE F
^£S^-^^> Restricted MANUAL 05
Rod assembly 33 has then reached end of travel, as it abuts on sleeve 29. Under the action of
return spring 31, piston 30 comes again into contact with sleeve 29 and engages the claws of lock 35,
thereby locking rod 33.
As piston 30 stops moving, i.e. at the end of locking, lock 35 rotates lever 32 which actuates
rocker 26, thereby reversing the contacts of switch 6G 1 or 6G2.
The hydraulic pressure applied through port A simultaneously acts on annular passage area S2 of
the moving assembly, and on locking piston 30. It causes the latter to move back, thereby freeing
lock 35 and rocker 26.
As lock 35. is moved by rod 33, the lock claws are bent and clear sleeve 29, which permits rod
retraction and consequently door closing.
Rocker 26 is no longer actuated by lever 32 ; it allows the contacts of switch 6G1 or 6G2 to be
reversed.
Throughout the rod retraction phase, the fluid expelled from chamber M freely flows through
port B.
When the jack is coupled to the doors, the rod retraction travel is limited by the doors abutting on
their locks. The doors are abutting before the jack is internally stopped.
Piston 30 returns against sleeve 29 under the action of spring 31, as the jack is connected to the
hydraulic reservoir through port A.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^SS53
1! Phase .Tige sortie verrouillée 2! Phase. Dèverrouillaqe

1st Phase - Rod extended and locked Début de rentrée de tige
2nd Phase - Rod unlocking and beginning

of retraction
FIGURE 5 - SCHEMA VERIN DE TRAPPES

AB UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK DIAGRAM
BREGUET AVIATION
L==^r^L MIRAGE F
UNLOCKING JACK
(Figure 6)
The unlocking jacks of the LH main U/C door, RH main U/C door and nose U/C doorare identical.
On the nose U/C door unlocking jack, the hydraulic pipe connection is achieved through a
connection block.
1 - DESCRIPTION
The jack unlocks the corresponding doors during the undercarriage retraction and extension phases.
This is a single-acting jack which is hydraulically controlled and mechanically reset.
The unlocking jack is essentially composed of :

-one cylinder 21 provided with a yoke A for attachment to the structure, and hydraulic fluid
supply ports N (normal) and S (emergency).
-one sleeve 22 keeping the normal and emergency systems independent of each other, and
guiding the moving parts of the jack.
- one piston 23 only used for the emergency control.
- one piston 24 supporting a cup 25.
- one spring 26 loading pistons 23 and 24.
- one seal retainer 27 attached by a threaded ring which also guides spring 26.
- one tie-rod 28, with an adjustable self-aligned rod end 29 to connect the jack to the door hook
unlocking linkage.
2- OPERATION
During normal supply, the hydraulic pressure is applied through port N. This pressure acts on
passage area S1 of piston 24, which retracts the latter, and consequently tie-rod 28, and compresses
spring 26. Through a mechanism external to the jack, tie-rod 28 controls door unlocking.
When the jack is no longer supplied, spring 26 returns piston 24 to the neutral position. Tie-rod 28
is returned to the initial position by a spring of the door hook unlocking mechanism.
During emergency supply, the hydraulic pressure is applied through port «S». This pressure acts
on passage area S1 of piston 23 which drives piston 24. All the following jack operating sequences are
the same as those with normal supply.
The input travel of tie-rod 28 is free in relation to piston rod 24, so that spring 26 is not loaded
during door manual unlocking.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^<<i
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 6 -VERIN DE DEVERROUI LLAGE

AB UNLOCKING JACK
BREGUET
t^V-^TU
AVIATIONôP3^ _
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK
A Standard tools


C Spares
-1 pin 2331 0AA015025LE

- 1 pin 23310AA030030LE
- 2 seals for shuttle valve grooved lubricator JEE15F
- 1 lockplate for interconnecting bellcrank pin
- 1 lockplate for jack-to-airframe connecting pin
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
, - Petrolatum Air 3565
| - Sealant PR 1321 A2
B Ensure that aircraft electrical power systems are not energized.
C Make sure that hydraulic pressure is dropped in systems 1 and 2.
D Manually open the doors controlled by the jack concerned (see 02-0).
WARNING :
4- REMOVAL
(1 ) Disconnect the movable electrical connector from the switch.
(2) Disconnect the flexible hydraulic pipe from the jack and blank the ports.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT lAZJ>>-a-J*s\ V\ll\/-\wL.
BREGUET AVIATION ^S'
ô. j2*Q>
^s^j> B *.-*..
Restricted ,.,.,,,.,
MANUAL n,-
05
NOTE: If the shuttle valve is to be removed, loosen the couplings of both normal/emergency
flexible lines (access door 23.08i/23.04i) before loosening the nut of the grooved lu¬
bricator on the jack.
(3) Jack/shuttle valve grooved lubricator connection
-Remove the nut attaching the shuttle valve grooved lubricator to the jack and recover
the washer (17-mm A/F wrench).
B -r Mechanical connections
(1) Hinge on door side
-Unsafety (pin) and remove the nut (22-mm A/F wrench).
-Drive out the connecting pin (identify pin direction).
(2) Hinge on airframe side
-Disconnect the interconnecting rod from the lower door (19-13-mm AF wrenches).
-Unsafety and remove the pin from the interconnecting bellcrank (27-mm A/F wrench).
-Remove the plug (22-mm A/F wrench) from the jack/airframe connecting pin.
-Hold the jack and drive out the connecting pin (identify pin direction). Recover the
washer.
C - Remove the jack, then protect the seals mounted at the end of the shuttle valve grooved
lubricator with protector A46457-3 (to be recovered on spare shuttle valve). Reinstall the
washer and nut on the grooved lubricator.
5 - INSTALLATION
(1 ) If a spare shuttle valve is to be installed, remove the protector, nut, washer and storage
seals. Install new seals, washer and nut (to be found in the bag supplied with the new equip¬
ment).
Install the shuttle valve and connect the couplings of the normal/emergency flexible lines
(tighten by hand) (access door 23.08i/23/04i).
(2) If a spare jack is to be installed:
-remove the jack from storage (see 05-1 ).
(3) Adjust the jack rod end to the dimension recorded for the removed jack. Torque the end
locknut without safetying (see 05-0).
(4) Check each hinge for cleanliness and slightly coat each pin with petrolatum.
(5) Remove protector A46457-3 from shuttle valve grooved lubricator and install two new
seals on the latter.
(1 ) Jack/shuttle valve grooved lubricator connection
-Locate the jack and simultaneously (on airframe side) insert the shuttle valve grooved
lubricator end provided with seals and locator into the associated hole in the jack bottom boss.
-Fit the washer and tighten the retaining nut of the shuttle valve grooved lubricator
(1 7-mm A/F wrench) to a torque of 1 .5 m.daN (1 1 ft.lb).
(2) Jack hinge on airframe side
-Locate the jack rod end in the fitting ai^d install the connecting pin fitted with a washer.
Safety the pin head on the boss provided on the fitting for this purpose.
-Install and tighten the plug (22-mm A/F wrench). Safety.
-Install the interconnecting bellcrank pin. Safety.
-Connect thé interconnecting rod to the lower door. Safety.
(3) Jack hinge on door side
-Locate the self-aligned end of the jack rod in the fitting.
-Install the connecting pin.
-Screw and tighten the nut temporarily. Final tightening and safetying shall be performed
after check and adjustment of U/C doors.
C - Functional connections
(1 ) Connect the electrical plug to the switch.
(2) Connect the flexible hydraulic hose to the jack.
(3) Tighten the couplings of the normal/emergency flexible lines on the shuttle valve.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^^ZTX
BREGUET AVIATION ôF3^-^3^
MIRAGE F
6- FINAL STEPS
A Check and adjust doors as required (see 05-2).
B After final adjustment, tightening and safetying of the rod end locknut, apply a bead of sealant
PR 1321 A2 to the visible threads of the rod end as well as to the contact surface of the locknut, the
rod end and the recesses of the key notch and the lockwasher tab (areas identified MR in figure 7).
C Bleed hydraulic system free of air by cycling undercarriage legs (see 05-6).
D Lower aircraft on ground (see 02-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^
^>^zVl
__
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE

DOOR UNLOCKING JACK
A Standard tools

B Spares
- 1 nut6RH8035MSimloc
- 1 nut6TA106Nylstop
MATERIALS
White spirit
Petrolatum Air 3565
B Manually open the doors controlled by the jack involved (see 02-0).
WARNING :
4- REMOVAL
A Functional connection
(1 ) Remove the yoke of the fairlead securing the hydraulic lines to the structure.
(2) Remove the line support from the jack.
(3) Remove the two spiral hydraulic lines.

Blank off the ports.
Hinge on unlocking mechanism side
(1 ) Remove and discard the locking nut.
(2) Drive out the connecting pin.
Hinge on structure side
(3) Remove and discard the locking nut, recover the washer.
(4) Hold the jack and drive out the connecting pin (note its position).
(5) Pull out the jack backwards.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^<<&
MIRAGE F
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
(1 ) When replacing the jack, depreserve a new jack (see 05-1 ).
(2) Check that all hinges are perfectly clean.
(3) Clean the pins and coat them with a thin film of petrolatum.
(1 ) Position the jack clevis onto the structure fitting.
(2) Fit the connecting pin in the same position as that noted upon removal, and fit the washer (pin
head on outboard side).
(3) Screw and tighten a new locking nut.
Hinge on unlocking mechanism side
(4) Position the rod end of the jack inside the clevis of the bellcrank.
(5) Fit the pin, screw and tighten a new locking nut.
C Functional connection
(1 ) Reconnect the hydraulic lines.
(2) Reinstall the yoke of the fairlead securing the lines to the structure.
(3) Reinstall the line support onto the jack.
6- FINAL STEPS
(1 ) Slowly operate the undercarriage door and check :

- upon door closing, that rear, then front locks effectively close,
- upon door opening, that rear, then front locks open,
- unlocking pressure (see 05-6).
(2) Close the door again and check the manual unlocking control for correct operation.
NOTE : Should an anomaly be noticed, check the jack for correct operation (travel and distance
between centers) before questioning the adjustment of the linkage.
(3) Purge air from hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
jLJ^-ffrU
^SF3^-^^
MIRAGE F
khamiiai ne
DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR

JACK FOR SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 7)
A Special tools
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN ( 1 5 to 1 50 ft.Ib)

- Fluid drain pan
- Work bench press
D Spares
- Seals
2- MATERIALS

- White spirit
- Mastinox 6856H
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
- Copper sulphate
- Grease Air 4215
B Mount soft jaws (fiber of lead) on the work bench vice.
D - Remove sealant from areas identified M with a spatula, taking care not to damage the surface
protective coating.
E Remove storage plugs from all jack ports.
F Remove the switch (see 05-6).
parts.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /U^*-±rÇL.
BREGUET AVIATION^2F'^<0
MIRAGE F
^£^^<^ Restricted MANUAL 05
CAUTION :
THE OUTSIDE OF PISTON 34 AND THE INSIDE OF CYLINDER 23 AND PISTON 30 ARE
PLASTICIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO SHOCKS AND
SCRATCHES
IT IS THEREFORE NECESSARY TO CAREFULLY PROTECT THESE AREAS AND TO
Piston 34 (outside)
pcee3ro23 } «"-*
4- DISASSEMBLY
A Removal of switch plate and socket assembly
(1) Unsafety (lockplate) and remove the two studs 40 (3/8 in A/F wrench). Discard lockplates.
(2) Remove the following parts in succession :
- plate 28,
- rocker 26,
- socket 27.
B Removal of coupling 25
Remove the coupling (10 mm A/F wrench) and recover filter 39.
C Removal of adjustable rod end 36
NOTE : If the jack is to be reinstalled in the initial position on aircraft, measure the rod end distance
from the side of nut 41 and count the number of turns and fractions of a turn required to
remove the rod end.

(2) Hold the adjustable rod end and loosen nut 41 (21 mm A/F wrench) so as to permit lockplate 42
to be cleared and key 43 to be removed.
| (3) Remove rod end 36 (See NOTE) and discard lockplate 42.
D Removal of sliding rod assembly 33 and locking system
(1) Immobilize the jack in the vice by moderately clamping cylinder 23 at the bosses accommodating
coupling 25 and the switch plate and socket assembly.
(2) Loosen nut 24 through ONE TO THREE THREADS MAXIMUM (wrench A21978 - adapter
C46473).
(3) Compress the jack with a press by placing the end of cylinder 23 in thrust part C47180, and inter¬
posing thrust part C47051 between the press chuck and the self-aligned end of cylinder 21 .
(4) Keep under pressure and remove the nut (wrench A21978 -adapter C46473).
- Recover two-part ring 37 and key 44.
(5) Slowly release pressure while watching progressive extension of locking spring 31 .
(6) Remove the jack from the press.
(7) Remove cylinder 23 and recover the following parts in succession :
-spring 31,
- locking piston 30,
- nut 24.
(8) Remove the following parts in succession from cylinder 21 :
- sleeve 29,
- sliding rod assembly 33.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^^.^-^ iwiammai OK
E Disassembly of sliding rod 33
(1 ) Clamp the sliding rod in the vice (protective jaws C47024).

(2) Remove stop ring 45.
(3) Remove nut 46 (wrench A21978 - adapter C46473).
(4) Remove the following parts in succession from the sliding rod :
- piston 34,
- locking claw 35.
5- CLEANING
A Before cleaning the parts, remove all seals from their grooves using the bent ends of spatulas 89901
and A46524 (use spatula A46524 only to remove seals from cylinder 23 and pistons 30 and 34).
Systematically discard all rubber or teflon seals.
C Clean the parts coated with Mastinox by means of Pyrolac solvent :

- threads of nut 24, cylinder 23, studs 40 and screws 38,
- mating surfaces of socket 27, plate 28 and coupling 25,
- key 44 and two-part ring 37.
6- CHECK
A Ensure that the external surface of cylinder 21 shows no trace of impact.
D Check the threads for condition (plastic deformation, stripping).
E Check sealing areas of moving or stationary parts for evidence of seizing and scratches (circular
or longitudinal).
F Ascertain that the chrome plating of sliding rod 33 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If this
surface is questionable, wipe it (clean and dry) by means of a rag soaked in copper sulphate ; flaked
areas will appear red.
G Check rilsan plastic-coated surfaces (outside diameter of piston 34 and inside diameter of cylinder
23 and piston 30) for traces of impact or scratches.
H Check the locating device of plate 28 for condition.
I Check locking claw 35 for condition.
NOTE : If the check proves unsatisfactory, forward the jack to the next higher repair line.
7 - INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE REASSEMBLY
A Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds. To install teflon seals, use the tools indicated.
Parts and tools followed by an asterisk (*) may have oversize dimensions (see 05^0).
(1) Seal 47 of cylinder 23

- Forming cone S1 6-0605-0870.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJÛ-^-^tt Y\||\/"\V-7L.
BREGUET AVIATION^£^> ^5=^>
2^ Restrictedj
r, ^ - ^ ami i ai ne
n«
MANUAL 05
(2) Seal 48 of piston 30.

I -Forming cone S1 6-0605-0541.
(3) Seal 49 of piston 34*.
-Installation cone S1 6-0607-1 261*.
- Forming ring S1 6-0608-1 261 *.
NOTE: Refer to manual 05-0 for the precautions to be taken when installing seals.
B - Lightly coat the bore of cylinder 21 with hydraulic fluid.
| C - Lightly coat the bore of sliding rod 33 with grease AIR 421 5.
8 - REASSEMBLY
A - Fitting-out of sliding rod 33.
Install the following parts in succession :
(1 )
-locking claw 35,
-piston 34,
-nut 46.
(2) Clamp the sliding rod assembly in the vise (protective jaws C47024).
I (3) Tighten nut 46 and safety by means of stop ring 45 (wrench A21978 - adapter C46473).
Tightening torque : 1 1 .5 ± 2.3 m.daN (84.8 ± 17 ft.lb).
NOTE: If the nut and rod holes are not aligned, counterdrill to 1 .5 mm diameter through the
rod bore to permit installation of the stop ring pin (do not drill the new hole tangential
to the initial hole in the rod).
B - Installation of sliding rod assembly 33 and locking system.
(1 ) Carrefully insert the sliding rod assembly into cylinder 21 .
(2) Install the following parts on cylinder 21 :
-sleeve 29,
-nut 24, with threads coated with Mastinox.
(3) Install the following parts in cylinder 23 :
-spring 31,
-locking piston 30 (carefully position locking piston lever 32 in front of the housing re¬
ceiving the switch base plate and socket assembly).
(4) Install guide cone C47494 at the end of sliding rod 33.
(5) Pack the hollow portion of cylinder 21 to be covered by cylinder 23 (area marked G in
figure) with grease Air 421 5.
(6) Couple cylinder assemblies 21 and 23, aligning the key slots with one another.
(8) Moderately coat the following with Mastinox :
-threads of nut 24 and cylinder 23,
-key 44 and two-part ring 37.
(9) Compress the jack with a press by placing the end of cylinder 23 in thrust part C47180
.
and interposing thrust part C47051 between the press chuck and the swivel end of the cylin¬
der.
(10) Install key 44, two-part ring 37 and nut 24 on cylinder 23.
(1 1 ) Remove the jack from the press.
(12) Clamp the jack in the vise by moderately tightening cylinder 23 at the bosses accommo¬
dating coupling 25 and the switch base plate and socket assembly.
(13) Tighten nut 24 to a torque of 28 ± 8.6 m.daN (206.8 ± 41 ft.lb) (wrench A21978 -
adapter C46473).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT it^J>^Z\ï MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£- ^-^ ~ . m a muai ne
C Install adjustable rod end 36 as follows :
(1 Coat threads of adjustable rod end with Mastinox.

)
(2) Install a new lock plate 42 on rod end (equipped with nut 41) and tighten rod end in sliding rod
33 through the number of turns counted during removal, if the jack is to be reinstalled in the initial
position on aircraft. Otherwise, adjust jack to following theoretical dimension :
- centre-to-centre distance (between self-aligning bearings), with sliding rod fully extended :
464 igg mm (18.2677 :°0314 in).

NOTE : The travel is 1 19 ± 1 mm (4.6850 ± 0.0393 in).

(4) Install key 43 and bend tab of lock plate 42 down in a notch of sliding rod 33.
(5) Hold adjustable rod end and tighten nut 41 to torque (see 05-0).
(6) If the jack is to be reinstalled in the initial position on aircraft, safety nut 41 by bending lock
plate 42 down on a nut flat.
D Install coupling 25 as follows :

- threads of screws 38,
- surface of coupling in contact with cylinder 23.
(2) Install a new filter 39 in coupling housing in cylinder 23.
(3) Install coupling, observing proper direction.
(4) Install the two attaching screws 38 provided with washers (10 mm A/F spanner).
(5) Lockwire the two screws 38.
E Install switch plate and socket assembly as follows :

surfaces of socket 27 in contact with plate 28 and cylinder 23,
-
- threads of studs 40.
(2) Coat the following with grease Air 421 5 :
- self-aligning bearing of rocker 26,
- spherical recess of plate 28.
(3) Locate locking piston lever 32 through housing for above assembly in cylinder 23 using locating
spanner 14138J.
(4) Assemble :
- socket 27
- rocket 26 (previously coated with grease Air 4215) (position rocker elbow marked «C» opposite
mark «P» on rod fitted to socket 27).
- plate 28.
(5) Install above assembly in housing in cylinder 23, observing correct direction.
(6) Mount a new lock plate on each stud 40 (equipped with nuts and washers), then install and tighten
studs (3/8 in A/F spanner). Safety by bending tabs of lock plates down on plate 28. Tightening torque :
0.6 + °'1 m.daN (4.42 \ q74 ft.lb).
(7) Check that rocker 26 moves freely. It should rock about its spherical hinge under a load no greater
than 0.2 daN (0.45 Ifb) applied on its end.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^ ^-£&=
FIGURE 7 - DEMONTAGE - REMONTAGE D'UN VERIN DE TRAPPE

DISASSEMBL Y - ASSEMBL Y OF AN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^>-ZZ^. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-c^P33^^"^ . m a muai nK
9- FINAL STEPS
NOTE : Adjustment shall be performed when testing the jack.
C - Test jack (See 05-2).
D Torque nut 24 again .

- Loosen nut 24 by approximately 1/6 turn and torque again so as to align safetying hole with
cylinder groove within torque clearance specified.
- If hole alignment cannot be obtained within these clearances, perform a new counterboring
to 1.6 mm to 2 mm diameter (0.0787 in) through the cylinder groove, tangential to the groove side
opposite to the screwing direction. Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the nut.
E Lockwire (0.8 mm dia) nut 24.
F Apply a complementary protective coat of sealant PR 1422 B2 (areas identified M) :

- in theannular recess of nut 24, as well as at the joint of this nut with cylinder 23,
G If required, touch up paint (See 05-0).
H Depending on the jack destination :

- prepare it for installation (See 05-2), or
-store it (See 05-1).
NOTE : After safetying of locknut 41, the following shall be protected with a bead of sealant
PR 1321 A2 (areas identified MR) :
- visible threads of rod end 36,
- surface of locknut 41 in contact with rod end,
- housing of key 43,
- tab of lockwasher 42.
AA
BREGUET
L=^-^rU
AVIATIONôP^^f^-o
MIRAGE F
DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF AN UNLOCKING JACK

FOR SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 8)
A Special tools
B Standard tools
-Allen 19891 wrench kit

- Fluid drain pan
D Spares
-Seals
- 1 lockplate 23350 AC 070 L
- 4 sealing rings (for banjo bolt of connection block on nose U/C door unlocking jack)
2 - MATERIALS

-White spirit
- Mastinox 6856 H
- Copper sulphate
-Grease Air 4215
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
C Remove storage plugs.

For a nose U/C door unlocking jack, remove the connection block (6-mm Allen wrench)
-
(modification 555 not incorporated : 17-mm A/F wrench).
Discard the banjo bolt sealing rings.
the parts.
CAUTION :
AND PROTECT THE PART MENTIONED BELOW AS CERTAIN AREAS ARE PLASTIC-
COATED WITH RILSAN, WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO SHOCKS AND
SCRATCHES.
- Piston 24 (outside diameter).
AB
BREGUET AVIATIONô-
ti -J>-^rU
^ ^
MIRAGE F
4- DISASSEMBLY
A Remove bolt 30 from yoke A.
B Remove adjustable rod end 29.
(1) Locate unlocking jack in compression fixture C47054, as shown in figure, and tighten fixture
handle «P» until cup 25 comes into contact with threaded ring 31 .
NOTE : During this operation hold adjustable rod end 29.
(2) Remove sealant from nut, unsafety (lock plate) and remove nut 32 (11 mm A/F spanner) and
following parts in succession :
- adjustable rod end 29
- lock plate 33
- two-part ring 34.
C Fully release spring 26 by loosening compression fixture handle «P» and remove unlocking jack.
D Recover cup 25 and spring 26.
E Remove piston 24 complete with tie-rod 28 as follows :
(1) Remove sealant from area identified M with a spatula, taking care not to damage the surface
protective coating.
(2) Moderately clamp, jack in vice through cylinder 21, at supply bosses (Jack vertical).
(3) Remove threaded ring 31 (Spanner A21978 - Adapter C46473).
(4) Slowly pull tie-rod 28 to extract piston 24 and remove following parts :
- seal retainer 27
- piston 23.
F Remove sleeve 22 as follows :
(1) Clean sleeve bore with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air.
(2) Remove sleeve 22 from cylinder 21 (Extractor C47055).
5- CLEANING
spatula A46524 only to remove seals from piston 24). Systematically reject all rubber or teflon seals.
C Clean parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound by means of PYROLAC solvent (Threaded
ring 31 and cylinder 21).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTjlJp-^rfr IYIIInMvJ'E I
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^--!^^ , ,a..hai ne
^£^"^2^ Restricted MANUAL 05
6- CHECK
A Ascertain that chromium-plating of piston rod 24 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If such
surfaces are questionable, wipe them by means of a rag soaked in copper sulphate ; flaked areas will
appear red. For a jack incorporating amendment A, perform the same procedure on the outside
diameter of tie-rod 28 and the bore of sleeve 23.
NOTE : Perform the above operation on clean and dry surfaces.
B Make sure that no part is oxidized.
C Check moving or stationary parts providing sealing, and specially outside diameter of piston 24
which is rilsan-plasticized, for dents and scratches (circular of longitudinal).
E Carefully inspect seal grooves.
A Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds. Using forming cone S 16-0605-0271, install :
- seal35 on seal retainer 27
- seal36 on piston 23.
B Coat the following with grease Air 421 5 :

- bore of piston 24 as well as piston face on air side,
- bottom of cylinder 21 .
C Slightly smear bore of cylinder 2.1 with hydraulic fluid.
8- ASSEMBLY
A Fully insert correctly directed sleeve 22 into housing in cylinder 21 .

B Install piston 24 equipped with tie-rod 28 as follows :
(1) Fully push piston 23 on piston rod 24.

(2) Carefully insert above assembly into sleeve 22.
(3) Install following parts in succession on piston rod 24 :
- seal retainer 27 (correctly directed)
- threaded ring 31 equipped with scraper ring 37.
(4) Moderately clamp jack in vice through cylinder 21 , at supply bosses.
(5) Tighten threaded ring 31, with threads previously coated with Mastinox compound. Torque
tighten to 6.5 ± 1 m.daN (47.9 ± 7.3 ft.lb) (Spanner A21978 - Adapter C46473).
(6) Blank S and N jack ports with the relevant blanking plugs.
(7) Apply a thin bead of sealant at the joint of threaded ring 31 of cylinder 21 (area identified M).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti ^J^^zM. MIRAGE F
BREGUET
^^ ^^ ^
AVIATION^jL
Restricted
....,,,«.
MANUAL 05
nr-
C Install adjustable rod end 29 as follows :
(1) Slightly coat threads of tie-rod 28 with Mastinox.

(2) Install spring 26 and cup 25 on jack.
(3) Locate unlocking jack in compression fixture C47054, as shown in figure, and tighten fixture
handle «P» so as to bring cup 25 into contact with threaded ring 31 .
(4) Screw nut 32.
(5) Install a new lock plate 33 on tie-rod 28 and hold the latter in extended position.
(6) Screw adjustable rod end 29 on tie-rod so as to adjust center-to-center distance «C» to
220 ± 0.5 mm (8.6614 ± 0.0196 in).
AFTER ADJUSTMENT, ENSURE THAT A MINIMUM NUMBER OF THREADS IS ENGAGED BY

INSERTING A 2 MM (0.0787 IN) DIAMETER FEELER GAUGE THROUGH HOLE «T» OF THE
ADJUSTABLE ROD END, AND MAKING SURE THAT THIS FEELER GAUGE ABUTS ON
TIE-ROD 28.
(7) Hold adjustable rod end and torque nut 32 to 0.8 + Q-2 m.daN (5.9 + J-2 ft.lb) (11 mm A/F
wrench).
NOTE : The nut shall be safetied after testing the unlocking jack.
(8) Install and hold two-part ring 34, then loosen compression fixture handle «P» so as to release
spring 26.
D Remove unlocking jack from compression fixture.
9- FINAL STEPS
A Test unlocking jack (see 05-2).
B Safety nut 32 by bending tab of lock plate 33 on a nut flat, then apply a bead of sealant
PR 1321 A2 on either side of nut 32, on the mating surface of lockwasher 33 and rc?d end 29, as well as
on the threads of tie-rod 28 (area identified MR in the figure).
C Install bolt 30 previously coated with grease Air 4215 (cylinder yoke A).
D If required, touch up paint (see 05-0).
E Perform unlocking jack installation on aircraft or storage (see 05-1 ), as applicable.
F For a nose U/C door unlocking jack, install the connection block.
(1 Position the hollow hexagon banjo bolts fitted with new sealing rings : torque up to 1 .5 + ^-2 m.daN
)
(11 + j-47 ft.lb) (6 mm A/F ALLEN spanner). +0

Modification 555 not implemented :
-position the 17 mm A/F head banjo bolts fitted with new sealing rings, torque up to
1.5 + 0-2 m.daN (1 1 +1-47 ft.lb).
+0 +0
(2) Lockwire the banjo bolts between them.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
.29
25
33
35
36
24-G
Montage de compression
Compression fixture
30-G
FIGURE 8 - DEMONTAGE - REMONTAGE D'UN VERIN DE DEVERROUILLAGE

DISASSEMBL Y - ASSEMBL Y OF AN UNLOCKING JACK
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^<<c_
tiL^^Z^L
^ _
MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS AND LINKAGES
1 - SCOPE
To carefully inspect doors and linkages.
- Open the U/C doors by hand (see 02-0).
WARNING :
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (see 01 -0).
- Disconnect the U/C leg fairing door (pip pin).

- Remove doors 25.04Î and 25-08L
- Open doors 21 .03 and 21 .09.
3- GENERAL INSPECTION
A Safetied parts
Ensure that :
- the pins effectively safety the castellated nuts,
- the self-locking nuts are correctly tightened,
- the lock plates immobilize the nuts.
B Control levers and bellcranks
Actuate the control levers and bellcranks to ascertain that the hinges have no play.
-
Check the control levers and bellcranks for condition (dents, protective coating, etc.).
-
- Visually check (as far as possible) the bearings and self-aligning bearing cages for correct
crimping.
C - Rods
- Actuate the rod ends to make sure that the hinges are free of play.
- Check :
- rod/clevis connection,
- rod tube condition (dents, protective coating/friction, etc.).
D Unlocking jack
Close the locks by hand.

-
Operate the clevis end of the jack rod and make sure there is no play ; a play would indicate
-
that the rod has loosened from the clevis end.
- Open the locks using the manual control and check that the travel required is normal and that
unlocking is positive.
E Fittings
Check for :
- oxidation
-cracks
- distortions
- attachment.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// Z^-^-Â MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATlON^tL ^ . .........
4- CHECK OF LONGITUDINAL PLAY OF FAIRING DOOR CONTROL ROD
-This play results from the sum of the rod trunnion and hinge plays (see figure 3, section D).
- Check the play of the door with the U/C down and locked ; to do this, place a ruler against the
edge, perpendicular to the mean chord of the door and in line with the rod fastener ; the end of the
ruler must bear against the U/C leg cylinder.
- Bring the fairing door from open to closed position and measure the play, which must not
exceed 3.5 mm (0.1378 in).
- Should this value be exceeded, replace the rod and its hinge pins.
5- INSPECTION OF U/C DOORS
- Check the condition of the skin and framework. In particular, check the fairing doors. There
must be no cracks or scratches on the upper spar, on both sides of the hinge attachment fittings. If in
doubt, carry out a dye penetrant test.
NOTE : If the control rod attachment fitting on the fairing door has been reinforced, make sure
that, with the fairing door closed, the tip of the pip pin does not come into contact with
the doubler. If necessary, machine down the tapered part of the pin to ensure a minimum
clearance of 3 mm (0.12 in).
- Check roller tracks for condition.

- Check attaching rollers and contact rollers for condition.
- Check manufacture hole Leroux blanks for presence, condition and bonding.
- Check condition and attachment of teflon strips on lower door edges.
- Uncouple the fairing door control rod (pip pin on door side) and check that it swivels properly in
relation to its hinge on U/C leg.
6- INSPECTION OF LINKAGES
- Check :
- the various equipment items for condition and secure attachment,
- rubber stops for condition,
- the unlocking cable for condition and routing,
- the unlocking handle stowage clip for condition and efficiency,
- the electro-hydraulic system (see 07-0).
7- FINAL STEPS
-Install and close the doors.

-Couple the fairing door to the U/C leg (pip pin).
- Direct the rod so that the stowage clip of the pip pin ring faces the U/C cylinder.
- Insert the pip pin from inside to outside (pin head facing U/C cylinder) and place the pin
ring on stowage clip.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti Ji>^-rM *Vl I KM \J C I
BREGUET AVIATION^,^. _^^ - ......... nc
TESTING OF AN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK AFTER

SEAL REPLACEMENT
- Ohmmeter.
2- MATERIALS
- Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520.
A Remove storage plugs from jack and switch.
B Install the special coupling on the port marked B on jack body.
C Install the door jack on the test bench and connect the test bench lines to jack ports A and B.
D Bleed the jack free of air by slowly extending and retracting the sliding rod, then drop pressure.
E Adjust the switch (see 05-6).
4- FUNCTIONAL TESTS - SWITCHING CHECK
A Jack with sliding rod retracted
- Connect the test set to the switch connector and check continuity across terminals B-C.
B Sliding rod locking
(1) Increase pressure via port B to P = 210 bar (3045 psi). Locking should take place for a back
pressure at port A of P > 20 bar (290 psi).
(2) Drop pressures.
(3) Check rod locking
- Supply via port A at P = 30 bar (435 psi). The sliding rod should not be retracted.
(4) Drop pressure.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ J< ^ /Y\ll\/AV-7L \
BREGUET AVIATION Â^- ^s?^ ^ - . a « a mi a i nr-
^ ,*-o Restricted MANUAL 05
C - Jack with sliding rod extended

-Using ohmmeter, check circuit opening across above mentioned terminals. Continuity
should be across terminals A- B.
D - Sliding rod unlocking
(1) Progressively increase pressure through port A and ensure that unlocking (beginning of
rod retraction) is effective at a pressure s 60 bar (870 psi).
(2) Slowly extend and retract jack rod for about ten minutes. Release pressure and correctly
wipe jack, and specially sliding rod, with a clean rag.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR WHICH MAY FORCE METAL PARTICLES INSIDE.
5 - STATIC TESTS
A - Supply jack between 1 and 5 bar (14 and 72.5 psi). Maintain this pressure for 15 min¬
utes. During this period of time, the possible leakage rate at the sliding rod should not exceed
3 drops.
B - Drop pressure and wipe jack.
6 - DYNAMIC TESTS
A - Supply jack at 21 0 bar (3045 psi) and perform 1 5 sliding rod retraction and extension
cycles.
B - Then, perform 25 cycles and ensure that no more than 3 drops fall during these cycles.
C - Complete testing by retracting sliding rod.
D - Drop pressure.

sure through port B.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at A is <1 drop/min.
- Dropthe pressure.
-Unlock and fully retract the rod.
sure through port A.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at B is ^ 1 drop/min.
8 - FINAL STEPS
B - Remove special coupling SK 20684 from port B.
C - Install storage plugs and/or caps.
D - Perform operations specified in final steps after seal replacement (see 05-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f nJJ^ /VlIlx/AV^t P
BREGUET AVIATION ^-fv_~ J^-=^> . , . . . .. . . A . OI-
^<s. ^r^> Restricted MANUAL 05
TESTING OF AN UNLOCKING JACK AFTER

SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 8)

-Accessory kit for hydraulic test bench.
2 - MATERIALS
-Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520.
A- Remove storage plugs.
B - Install the unlocking jack on the test bench and connect test bench lines to jack ports N
and S.
C - Bleed the jack free of air by slowly extending and retracting the jack rod.
4 - FUNCTIONAL TESTS
A - Normal mode
(1) Increase pressure via port N to P = 245 bar (3353 psi) and check that piston rod 24 is
fully retracted.
(2) Slowly drop pressure and check that piston rod 24 is fully extended for a pressure
| > 11.5 bar (196.75 psi).
(3) Drop pressure.
(4) Pull tie-rod 28 by hand and check tie-rod extension.
B - Emergency mode
(1) Increase pressure via port S to P = 245 bar (3353 psi) and check that piston rod 24 is
fully retracted.
. (2) Slowly drop pressure and check that piston rod 24 is fully extended for a pressure
| 2: 11.5 bar (196.75 psi).
(3) Drop pressure.
(4) Pull tie-rod 28 by hand and check tie-rod extension.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iLJ^^zZV.
BREGUET AVIATION ^j^3^---^-^
MIRAGE F
^é^^^> Restricted MANUAL 05
5- STATIC TESTS
A Supply through port «S», with «N» open.
(1) Slowly retract and extend sliding rod for about ten minutes. Drop pressure and thoroughly wipe
jack and specially sliding rod by means of a clean rag.
CAUTION :
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR WHICH MAY FORCE METAL PARTICLES INSIDE.
(2) Supply jack between 1 and 5 bar (14 and 72.5 psi). Maintain this pressure for 15 minutes. During
this period of time, the possible leakage rate at the sliding rod should not exceed 3 drops.
(3) Drop pressure and wipe jack.
B Supply through port «N», with «S» port open

Repeat above operations (1), (2) and (3).
6- DYNAMIC TESTS
A Supply through port «N», with «S» open
(1 ) Supply jack at 210 bar (3045 psi) and perform 15 sliding rod retraction and extension cycles.
(2) Then, perform 25 cycles, and ensure that no more than 3 drops fall down during these cycles.
(3) Complete testing by retracting sliding rod.
(4) Drop pressure.
B Supply through port «S», with «N» open

Repeat above operations (1), (2), (3) and (4).
7- FINAL STEPS
A Remove jack from test bench.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f TWIJS /VMKMV^C V
BREGUET AVIATION ^*U __ /7tr/rt«/ MANUAL 05
CHECK OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR ADJUSTMENT

(figure 9)

-Electrical power supply, 1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz
B - Special tools
-2 pins, 2.8 mm (0.110 in) dia.
2 - MATERIALS
-Prussian blue.
-Modeling paste.
-Aircraft jacked up, with wheels off ground (see 02-2), undercarriage extended and
doors open.
-Connect the hydraulic power unit, set to slow running, to the self-sealing couplings of
system 1 .
WARNING:
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0).
-Lightly coat the lower door rollers with Prussian blue.

- Place a pad of modeling paste at the bottom of the lower and upper door recesses pro¬
vided for passage of the wheel, and at the bottom of the fairing door recess, in line with the
swivel head of the lower U/C hinge.
-Open access doors 21 .03 and 21 .09.
4 - PROCEDURE
Any abnormality encountered during checking shall entail the corresponding adjustment.
After correcting the faulty adjustment, return to this operation to confirm the validity of
the readjustment and to continue the checks.
A - Check of adjustment
-With doors open and locked.

-Check that there is a minimum clearance "b" of 1 mm (0.0393 in) between the door
edge on hinge side and the fuselage skin.
(1 ) During U/C leg retraction
(a) While retracting the U/C legs and closing the doors VERY SLOWLY, check that:
-there is a clearance at all points between the doors and the U/C legs and their equip¬
ment throughout the leg travel,
-the upper door is engaged before the lower door with a clearance of 26 ± 2 mm
(1.01 ± 0.078 in) (distance "d" in detail B).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/' rw/J* /Y\II\AAVJ7U I
BREGUET AVIATION ^7>,_>-
^s .«p^,
^~î _
Restricted hhamiiai
MANUAL nr-
05
NOTE: The clearance should be measured at the support finger of the front roller as the ruler
that is held between the door edges arrives at the horizontal.
-The doors contours should match the fuselage contour.

-The doors should not be "floating".
-Slowly extend the U/C legs.
-Perform a complete door opening, U/C leg extension and door closing cycle VERY
SLOWLY.
-Cut off the hydraulic pressure.
-Manually open the doors.
-Carefully recover the pads of modeling paste; their thickness should confirm that there is
a clearance:
-between the wheel and the bottom of the corresponding recesses in the lower and
upper doors,
-between the swivel head of the lower U/C fastener and the corresponding recess in
the fairing door.
-Uncouple connecting rod 59 from the upper door; secure the rod.
-Hydraulically close the lower door and, during the travel, check:
-clearance "J" (passage between lower door hooking rollers and hook noses) is at
least 4 mm (0.157 in).
-The lower door locks are locked in the following order:
-rear lock then front lock.
-Door warp:
-the door protrusion at the front lock with the rear lock closed must be 8 ± 2 mm
(0.31496 ± 0.074 in).
-Cut off the hydraulic pressure.
-Manually open the door and check:
-the lock unlocking order: rear lock, then front lock,
-the traces of Prussian blue on the hook noses,
-the centering of the rollers with respect to the hooks.
The following should be obtained: 0 ± 1 .5 mm (0 ± 0.059 in),
-the correct bearing of the rollers inside the hook noses.
L should be = 6 _ « mm (0.236 _ no787'n) m'n'mum-

- Reconnect the upper door connecting rod 59.
(2) Manual opening control
-Check the control cable for condition.

-Unlock the locks, then check that the control handle returns normally to its neutral posi¬
tion and that the linkage is returned by its spring. If a defect is detected, determine the cause
(binding of hinges, etc.).
-With control handle held by its spring clip, check that the unlocking jack rod is com¬
pletely extended and that the actuating lever has only a slight clearance- with the control bell¬
crank. This result is obtained by acting on the cable sheath tensioning screw. In case of
abnormality, determine the cause (jack, linkage or cable) and correct as necessary:
AC
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f '^^ / Y\l l\/-\V«7l_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-£_~ ^-^^ _ uamiiai ni-
^~ ^~=^ Restricted MANUAL 05
(a) Check the pinning of both locks, hooks closed at 2.8 mm dia minimum; CHECK THAT
THE PINS PASS THROUGH COMPLETELY.
-Check the unlocking: rear lock, then front lock.
The unlocking sequence should result in a front lock rod minimum travel of 1 .5 mm
(0.059 in) after unlocking of the rear lock (mark to be applied to the front rod at the stringer
on the front of frame 22).
-Check that the control linkage does not contact the structure.
-Check the lock hooks.
(3) Check of clearance between hydraulic stop (jack) and mechanical stop (locks)
-Disconnect electrical connector (3G) from the U/C solenoid-operated selector valve.
-Set the control lever to the U/C-retracted position.
-Slowly increase the hydraulic pressure, and check the lock unlocking order: rear lock,
then front lock.
-Pressurize the hydraulic system to 100 bar and hold this pressure.
-Firmly actuate the manual control; visually and sensitively check for movement of the
two lock levers. This slight movement can also be observed at the mark previously applied (see
para. 2).
NOTE: This check is a means of making sure that the locks are not contacting the internal me¬
chanical stop during hydraulic-powered actuation.
-Set the control lever to the U/C-extended position.

-Reconnect connector (3G).
-Cycle the undercarriage and doors (see manual 05-2).
FINAL STEPS
-Check the tightness of the items covered by the adjustment check and safety as required.
-Perform the functional test of undercarriage and warning system (see manual 05-6).
-Disconnect the hydraulic and electrical power supplies.
-Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see manual 02-2).
-Close the access doors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f TWI^n /V\ll\/,\\-7r- I
BREGUET AVIATION ^l-^- ^^c?-^ _ . , . ... ... nc
^ ^~^j> Restricted MANUAL OE
ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS

(figure 9)
B - Standard tools
-U/C hydraulic 1st line tool kit.
C - Special tools
-2 pins, dia. 3 mm (0.118 in).
-2 pins, dia. 2.8 mm (0.1 1 0 in).
D - Spares
-Lockwashers for adjustable ends of jack and rods.
-Pins for connecting pin of door interconnecting rod.
-Lockwashers for jack-to-door connecting pin.
- Lockwashers for door stop locknuts.
- Lockwasher for adjustable end of fairing door rod.
-Swaged cable end fitting.
2 - MATERIALS
-Prussian blue.
-Compound PR 1321 A1 -2.
B - Open access doors 21 .08 and 21 .09 or 21 .04 and 21 .03.
C - Ensure that aircraft electrical power systems are not energized.
D - Make sure that hydraulic pressure is dropped in systems 1 and 2.
E - Manually open the doors and lock them open (see 02-2).
WARNING:
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0).
F - Disconnect the electrical connector from U/C selector valve 3G.
NOTE: Before adjusting stops or rod adjustable ends, disassemble these parts (when applica¬
ble) to fit a new lockwasher.
4 - PROCEDURE
Prior to performing any readjustment, it is absolutely necessary to know the cause of the
maladjustment detected during the check.
A - Adjustment of lower door.
(1 ) Adjustment of U/C door locked in open position
-Disconnect door jack 6 and lower interconnecting rod 13 (rig the upper door and the in¬
terconnecting rod so as to clear the lower door travel area).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT |J&--î / YXIIX/AwL. I
BREGUET AVIATION ^<Z^
^w. ZZ!?£^
^-»^> ..
Restricted ««am..ai nr-
MANUAL 05
-Bring the lower door to the open position against the structure stop and record opening
dimension "a" between an index mark on the frame at front lock and the outer corner of the
door.
-Reconnect the jack to the door front hinge point and adjust the rod adjustable endpiece
to obtain:
-an opening dimension "a" reduced by 8 to 11 mm (0.31 to 0.43 in),
-a clearance "b" between lower edge of door and edge of fuselage skin within the
tolerances.
-Disconnect the jack and retract the rod. Record the dimension in this position for use in
the subsequent check of jack clearance.
-Stow the jack in the U/C well, in rod retracted position so as to clear the U/C door
travel area.
(2) Preliminary operations for door closing adjustment
- Mark the lock position by two pencil marks at 90°.
NOTE: When changing a lock, mark the position of the lever in relation to the structure (rod
connected).
Reinstall the new lock in the same position.
As concerns the front lock, it is to be pinned before fitting and the pin is to be re¬
moved only after installation of the lever.
-Coat the U/C door hooking rollers with Prussian blue.

-Remove the control rod from the defective lock plus the control lever in case of a rear
lock.
(3) Adjustment of rear lock
-Position the door in closed position and adjust the lock position to obtain the following
dimensions within the tolerances.
-roller passage clearance "J" in front of the hook nose,
-roller bearing surface "L" on the hook (determined from the traces of Prussian
blue),
-flushness of the door in relation to the fuselage contour.
- Proceed as follows:
-loosen the four lock attaching screws by 1 mm min (equal to depth of grooves),
-to adjust clearance "J" and bearing surface "L", move lock vertically by means of
the horizontal grooves in its plate (pitch 1 mm (0.039 in)),
-to adjust door to flush position, move lock horizontally over the vertical grooves in
its plate (pitch 1 mm (0.039 in)),
-tighten lock attaching screws.
-Adjust centering "C" of roller in hook nose (based on the traces of Prussian blue),
-proceed as follows:
-remove roller holder pin,
-remove roller 56 and set of washers 55, then reposition them after having
moved to one side or the other the washers needed to attain centering.
-Check for warping of door
-with the rear lock hooked, check that the door protrusion at the front lock is within
the specified tolerances. If this is not so, replace the door.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT" ^ ~" ^ MIRAGE
Mllixnwi- F
i
BREGUET AVIATION ^^-^ ^«-ô .. - ^ . ....,,,., nr;
^<^ ^~ô Restricted MANUAL 05
(4) Adjustment of front lock
-Position door in closed position and adjust lock position so as to obtain same adjust¬
ment dimensions as for rear lock.
- Proceed as for rear lock.
-Adjust centering of roller.
- Proceed as for rear roller.
MOD. 356 NOT INCORPORATED:

Roller centering is not adjustable; if the tolerance cannot be met, the assembly should be
replaced by a modified assembly.
(5) Check of jack rod clearance (retracted)
-Extend the jack rod.

-Reconnect the jack to the door; tighten the nut onto the pin but do not safety.
-Close and lock the lower door.
-Measure the dimension with rod retracted and compare it with the dimension measured
in para. (A) where the jack was not connected.
The clearance should be:
^ 3 mm (0.1 1 8 in) when pressure is applied,
> 5 mm (0.196 in) when pressure is dropped.
-If necessary, readjust the jack rod end to within the limits of the door opening toler¬
ances.
B - Adjustment of upper door
-Bring the door to closed position, in contact with stops 1 5 and 1 6.

-Adjust the stops so as to obtain, without stress, the flush position of the door at each
stop level. Then, from this position, loosen the stops by one-and-a-half turns. Tighten locknut.
-Adjust interconnecting rods 57 and 59 to theoretical length.
-intermediate rod 57: 317 mm (12.48 in),
-upper rod 59: 441 mm (17.36 in).
NOTE: - During adjustment, take care to position the ends in the same plane. Torque the lock-
nuts to 4 m.daN (30 ft.lb).
- When reinstalling rod 59, position the clevis so as to avoid contact between the bot¬
tom of the recess and the gooseneck during movement of the door (see detail C).
-Reconnect rod 13 to the lower door.
NOTE: If the rod was removed, it should be positioned upon reinstallation so as to avoid con¬
tact between the bottom of the clevis recess and the gooseneck of the door (see detail
B).
-Pressurize system 1 using the hydraulic power unit set to slow running and minimum
delivery rate.
-Bring the doors to locked open position and check positioning of upper bellcrank 58:
-the pin connecting rod 59 to the bellcrank should be offset by 5 mm (0.19 in) ap¬
prox. from an imaginary line drawn between the pin in the upper clevis of the rod and the pin
in the bellcrank (see "F", detail C).
-If necessary, readjust the length of rod 57.
-Slowly close the doors and check the engagement clearance of the upper door before
the lower door.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^JIJM /Y\ll\/-\V^t I
BREGUET AVIATION Â^- j3~^> .. - .. . haami i ai ne
^ ^c?^ Restricted MANUAL 05
-If required, readjust the length of rod 59.

-increase the rod length to reduce the clearance,
-reduce the rod length to increase the clearance,
-continue closing the doors until they lock, and check:
-the order of locking: rear lock and then front lock,
-the flush position of the doors with respect to the fuselage contour
(see detail E).
-Open the doors as follows:
-by manual actuation of the lever for the front lock,
-by means of the previously removed lever for the rear lock.
C - Adjustment of lock control linkage
NOTE: When pinning the locks, make sure that the pins pass through completely
(20 mm 0.8 in) penetration).
-Disconnect the actuating rods from the rear and front locks.
-Unhook the spring of the front lock lever.
-Check the structural clearances (1 mm min) of the bellcranks by fully actuating the ma¬
nual control. If necessary, adjust the length of the horizontal rod.
-Pin both locks with the hooks closed (3 mm (0.117 in) dia pins).
-Adjust the length of the rear lock actuating rod, then the front lock actuating rod to ob¬
tain correct connection without stress.
NOTE: The lower pin of the rear lock rod must be directed with its head toward the front of
the aircraft so as to prevent any structural stop. If necessary, pivot the rod through
180° to obtain this position.
-Adjust the length of the front lock actuating rod to obtain the correct unlocking order:
rear lock, then front lock and the pinning at 208 mm (0.110 in) dia minimum for the front lock
and 3 mm (0.1 1 7 in) dia for the rear lock.
-If the adjustment range is not sufficient, the upper horizontal rod may be readjusted,
paying special attention to the bellcrank structural clearances.
The unlocking sequence should result in a front lock rod minimum travel of 1 .5 mm
(0.0586 in) after unlocking of the rear lock (marks to be applied to the front rod at the stringer
on the front of frame 22).
Check that the nut of the front upper bellcrank adjustable endpiece connecting pin does
not contact the stringer. If necessary, rework the stringer recess as per TIN No. 468, then re¬
move the burrs and apply the I + P paint scheme.
-After rod adjustment, check that the length of the visible threaded portion of the rod ad¬
justable endpieces is <16 mm (0.524 in).
NOTE: To obtain this linkage adjustment, it is also possible to start from the theoretical di¬
mension for the adjustable items given below and then apply the procedure described
above.
-front lock actuating rod 356 mm (14.016 in)
-rear lock actuating rod 167 mm ( 6.575 in)
-horizontal intermediate rod 636 mm (25.1 in)
Removal of rod :
-remove the intermediate rod connecting pins at the front and rear bellcranks,
-tilt the rear bellcrank to disengage the rod clevis,
-disengage the rod from the front of the U/C well,
-unlocking jack : 220 ± 0.5 mm (8.6614 ± 0.0019 in) (preset
in 2 nd line workshop).
It is imperative that any action on the linkage must still enable the following three condi¬
tions to be complied with :
-correct pinning of rear and front locks (with hooks closed),
-correct unlocking order: rear lock, then front lock,
-correct clearance between the hydraulic stop and mechanical stop.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F Détail C
Réglage du
jeu "J" et de
'engagement
'L" du galet
Adjustment
of clearance "J"
and engagement
"L" of roller
FIGURE 9 - REGLAGE DES TRAPPES

±1,5 ±1,5
ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «JW-^ /Y\ 1 1\ AAw L.
BREGUET AVIATION^^
^rt ^3«Ci>
-<?^ ^ .
Restricted
' . kx animai
MANUAL ne
05
D - Adjustment of door manual opening control (after replacement)

-Close the front and rear locks and insert 3 mm dia pin in the rear lock.
-Adjust tensioning screw 50 (cable sheath) to the minimum setting.
-Insert the cable in the sheath through the tensioning screw, then connect the clevis to
control handle 5 and engage the latter in its clip.
-On cable end (unlocking jack side), slip on in succession: nut 52, then a new clamping
cone 53, then screw clevis 54 fingertight.
-Connect the clevis to linkage actuating lever 51 without pinning.
-Tension the cable by pulling it through the clevis until the actuating lever bracket comes
into contact with the bellcrank without stress.
-Tighten nut 52 onto the clevis so as to obtain initial clamping of the cone over the ca¬
ble.
-Disconnect the clevis and unscrew the nut, taking care not to unclamp the cone.
-Cut the cable at the cone end so that it just touches the bottom of the clevis.
-Reinstall the nut on the clevis, torque to 1.63 m.daN (12 ft.lb) and safety.
-Reconnect the clevis to the lever and safety the clevis pin with a cotter pin.
-If necessary, adjust tensioning screw 50 and tighten locknut.
-Remove the pin.
-Carry out a door unlocking test, checking for correct order: rear lock, then front lock.
E - Adjustment of fairing door
-Reconnect electrical plug 3G of U/C solenoid -operated selector valve.

-Disconnect rod 11 (pip pin) and prop fairing door open so as to allow the U/C leg free
travel.
-Inhibit door closing by setting door safety switch to psoition "SOL" (ground).
-Pressurize hydraulic system -1 . Retract and uplock U/C. Drop hydraulic system pressure.
-Retract stops 17 and 19, screwing them fully into their support.
- Remove the rubber strip from around the edge of the airframe.
-Bring the door to closing position until it comes in contact with stops 17 and 19. Mea¬
sure the out-of-flush of the door, that is the gap to be taken up, level with each stop.
-It should be 2 mm min (0.078 in).
-Check that door does not make contact with U/C leg cylinder or any other part, ex¬
cept for the stops and the edge of the airframe.
NOTE: When installing a non-modified U/C door on an aircraft which has received MOD
FX21 5 (reinforced U/C attachment fitting), check that the attachment ball joint head
does not make contact with the bottom of the recess in the U/C door.
If necessary, eliminate a rivet in the bottom of the recess (see Structural Repair Ma¬
nual).
-Reconnect and adjust rod 11 to bring door flush with fuselage contour ± 0.5 mm
(0.0196 in). ft_ n,fifi
-Torque the rod nut to 5 _ q m.daN (3.687 g ° ft.lb) with wrench M31165.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^JIJK / Y \ I IX /A V-7 L I
BREGUET AVIATION^l_-
^-«. ^y^,
^~ô _ .
Restricted imiamiiai
MANUAL ne
05
NOTE: After adjusting rod, the grease nipple on the rod body must be set pointing upwards
when the door is open and U/C leg is in down position.
-Disconnect rod 11 and adjust stops 17 and 19 to bring door flush with fuselage contour
within the values given by rod adjustment. Then, from this position, loosen:
-rear stop 17 by one-and-a-half turns - tighten locknut,
-front stop 19 by one-and-a-half turns -tighten locknut.
NOTE: This adjustment determines the door closure stress.
-Reinstall the rubber strip around the edge of the airframe after ascertaining that it is in
good condition.
- Repressurize system 1 and control extension of U/C legs.
-Reconnect rod 11 and control U/C leg retraction in slow motion.
-Make sure that door is correctly immobilized by stops, in line with fuselage contour.
-Make sure that U/C leg clears lower door and that there is no risk of fouling between
rod 1 1 and corresponding fitting on U/C leg cylinder in up position.
- Extend U/C legs and drop pressure in system 1 .
-Set door safety switch to "VOL" (flight).
-Repressurize system 1 at slow running speed and control U/C retraction.
-During retraction, observe U/C leg travel clearances and proper sequence operation of
door locking system.
-Make sure that all doors are in line with the fuselage contour, particularly level with the
locks and structure stops.
-Perform a check of U/C and door locking and unlocking pressures.
NOTE: If the locking pressure is higher than the limit value, do not incriminate the adjustment
of the rods or of the structural stops of the upper door until the following have been
checked:
- that the Teflon strip cemented to the edge of the lower door is not stretched into the
joggling of the upper door (item "e" in detail C),
- that there is no contact or undesired abutment, in particular between the inside face
of the supports that take the locking rollers of the upper door, and the lower door
housings that receive the said rollers (see item "f" in detail C).
F - Final steps
-Check tightening and proceed to safetying of all components on which work has been
carried out.
-Cover the exposed threads of door jack end with PR 1 321 A1 -2 compound.
-Carry out functional test of undercarriage and warning system (see referenced card B3).
-Reinstall the access doors opened during the operations.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]" ^ M ** /Y\ll\/^\V-7I_
BREGUET AVIATION^î^-
^rt. ^s-=ô
_^~^ ,.-.._,
Restricted miami
MANUALi ai ne
05
SECTION 3
NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
3-0 GENERAL
-Breakdown and control linkage 3-001

-Table of components 3-1 01
-Undercarriage leg 3-103
- Elastic rod 3-1 1 7
-Truss jack assembly '.'. 3-1 1 9
3-2 FAILURES
-Shock absorber (See 05-1 )

-Removal-installation of nose undercarriage leg 3-301
-Removal-installation of shock absorber 3-304
- Removal-installation of truss jack 3-31 0
-Removal-installation of elastic rod 3-312
- Removal-installation of truss jack universal joint crosspiece 3-31 5
-Removal-installation of selector valve unit (See 05-8)
- Removal-installation of an anti-shimmy valve (See 05-8)
-Removal-installation of speed detector unit (See 05-7)
3-4 DISASSEMBLY- ASSEMBLY

-Disassembly-assembly of a shock absorber for seal replacement 3-401
- Disassembly-assembly of a truss jack for seal replacement 3-405
-Disassembly-assembly of nose wheel steering jack and anti-shimmy
valves for seal replacement (See 05-8)
-Disassembly-lubrication-assembly of an elastic rod 3-413
3-5 INSPECTION - CHECK - ADJUSTMENT - TEST
-Overall inspection of nose undercarriage leg 3-501
-Check of nose undercarriage leg operation factor 3-503
-Testing of a truss jack after seal replacement 3-505
-Adjustment of a selector valve unit (See 05-8)
-Check and adjustment of nose wheel alignment 3-507
-Adjustment of nose undercarriage leg 3-509
-Adjustment check of nose undercarriage in up position 3-517
-Adjustment of torque link hinge clearance 3-530
-Lubrication of axle bearings 3-601
-Cleaning and protection of switch control unit on shock
absorber 3-603
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION Zs&-~-
^« ^s^^>
^z~^ ^
Restrtcted^ . tu ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
-Storage - packaging - transportation of a nose undercarriage leg 3-701

-Storage - packaging - transportation of speed detector unit.... see 05-7
-Storage - packaging - transportation of elastic rod see 05-1
-Storage - packaging - transportation of truss jack see 05-1
-Storage - packaging - transportation of shock absorber see 05-1
-Storage - packaging - transportation of pins see 05-1
-Storage - packaging - transportation of an anti-shimmy valve see 05-8
3-8 REPAIRS
-Readjustment of axle bearing operating play 3-801
-Repair of a lower electrical cable bundle on nose undercarriage
leg (MOD 627 incorporated) 3-805
Figure No. Page
1 NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 3-002

2 NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG CONTROL LINKAGE 3-004
3 UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 3-102
4 UPPER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER 3-104
5 LOWER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER 3-106
6 LOWER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER - DETAILS 3-107
7 NOSE WHEEL STEERING JACK AND ANTI-SHIMMY VALVES 3-1 08
8 SHOCK ABSORBER - DESCRIPTION 3-111
9 LOWER SECTION OF SHOCK ABSORBER 3-112
10 AXLE BOX 3-114
11 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF SHOCK ABSORBER 3-115
12 ELASTIC ROD AND RETRACTION CONTROL PINS 3-118
13 TRUSS JACK - DESCRIPTION 3-120
1 4 TRUSS JACK/SUPPORT CONNECTIONS 3-1 21
1 FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF TRUSS JACK
5 3-1 24
1 REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF SHOCK ABSORBER
6 3-309
16M REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF TRUSS JACK UNIVERSAL JOINT
CROSSPIECE 3-318
17 DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF A TRUSS JACK 3-412
18 CHECKING OF OPERATING FACTOR 3-504M
18M WHEEL ALIGNMENT 3-508M
1 9 CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG 3-51 1
20 REPAIR OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON NOSE

UNDERCARRIAGE LEG (MOD 627 INCORPORATED) 3-809
21 ADJUSTMENT OF TORQUE LINK HINGE CLEARANCE 3-535
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tiZ^^ZZX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^£Z ^^ - ....,.,,-
BREAKDOWN AND CONTROL LINKAGE
1 - BREAKDOWN (Figure 1)
The nose undercarriage leg is hinged on the fuselage. It is retracted aft.
The nose undercarriage leg includes the following major components :

-one leg 1 equipped with a shock absorber slaved to a retraction system. The leg is also provided
with a nose wheel steering jack controlled by a selector valve unit. The assembly can also perform as an
anti-shimmy device.
- one elastic rod 2.
- one truss jack assembly 3.
- two bogie-mounted wheels (See Section 5).
Extension of the rod of truss jack 3 causes rétraction of the undercarriage leg which is locked in
«UP» position by an uplock.
Retraction of the rod of truss jack 3 causes extension of the undercarriage leg. A claw lock
mounted inside the jack immobilizes the undercarriage leg in the «DOWN» position.
During take-off, a bounce, or jacking-up of the aircraft, full extension of the shock absorber
returns the wheels along the aircraft centreline. Wheel return is controlled by a cam system mounted
inside the shock absorber.
The retraction system consists of two links and one lever imparting to the shock absorber a
movement of translation in the structural box during undercarriage leg manAuvres.
An electro-hydraulic control using the nose wheel steering jack and the selector valve unit of the
undercarriage leg enables the wheels to be deflected from the cockpit. This control can also perform an
anti-shimmy function consisting in limiting the wheel oscillations when no pressure is applied to the
nose wheel steering control.
NOTE : The undercarriage leg well is blanked by :

- one aft door
- two lateral doors
- one fairing door.
2- CONTROL LINKAGE OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG (Figure 2)
A - Retraction (Details A - B - C and D)
The undercarriage leg is down, with sliding assembly J extended and the rod of truss jack 3
retracted and locked.
Applying pressure to the undercarriage retraction system unlocks and extends the rod of the truss
jack. This rod causes retraction of the undercarriage leg which pivots about its hinge pin A integral with
the structure.
Hinge pin B carried by structural box M of the leg rotates about pin A. At the beginning of the
movement, points B, F and G are fixed in relation to the leg, and point D moves and absorbs the
elongation of elastic rod 2. Then, it imparts to double yoke C a rotational movement about pin B.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION v<^£=>
MIRAGE F

ROUES: voir section 5

WHEELS : see section 5
FIGURE 1 ATTERRISSEUR AUXILIAIRE AVANT
NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^>-"r~U
BREGUET AVIATION ^L _^ - ,
MIRAGE
ÂJ . . . . ,
F
._
The combined two rotations impart to pin F a movement which cancels the buttressing resulting
from misalignment of the three points B, F and G. Stop K leaves its rest. The movement of pin F is
converted by link H into a pull force on pin G and consequently on sliding assembly J. The latter
disappears in structural box M as the leg is retracted.
In the final position, leg roller L engages an uplock N locking the leg in the up position, with the
sliding assembly retracted.
B- Extension (Details A- E - F and G )
The undercarriage leg is up, with sliding assembly J retracted and the rod pf truss jack 3 extended.
Applying pressure to the undercarriage extension system opens uplock N and retracts the rod of
truss jack 3. This rod causes extension of the leg which pivots about hinge pin A integral with the
aircraft structure.
Hinge pin B carried by structural box M of the leg, rotates about pin A. Point D linked to the
structure through elastic rod 2 imparts to double yoke C a rotational movement about pin B.
These combined two rotations Impart to pin F a movement which is transmitted to point G
.
through link H to push sliding assembly J. The latter slides out of structural box M as the leg is
extended.
Near end of travel, the three points B, F and G are aligned, then misaligned until stop K abuts on
structural box M, thereby providing buttressing. As points F and G become fixed in relation to the leg,
sliding assembly J is locked. The leg completes rotation and continues driving pin B and consequently
pin D thereby extending elastic rod 2.
In the final position, the leg is immobilized by the internal claw lock of the truss jack and locking
of sliding assembly J is reinforced by the elastic rod which prevents any risk of buttressing suppression
by applying a pull force to pin D.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Détail B
Détail G
Légende Key
Annonce de mouvement Beginning of movement

Fin de mouvement End of movement
Mouvement Movement
- Effort Force
FIGURE - CINEMATIQUE DE L'ATTERRISSEUR
NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG CONTROL LINKAGE
AB
11-72 Restricted 3-004 FIGURE 2 3-CXW
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Location Doc.
Item Name - Characteristics and Functions Access Door No.
UNDERCARRIAGE LEG X
- Of the direct type with built-in oleopneumatic shock

absorber :
Charging pressure : 21,6 bar (312 psi)
Maximum travel : 300 mm (1 1 .81 10 in)
- Retraction travel : 180 mm (7.0866 in)
- Wheel deflection angle : ± 45°
- Deflection capability : ± 360°
ELASTIC ROD
- Constitutes the fixed point of the linkage controlling

shock absorber sliding in the upper section of the U/C
leg when the latter is actuated.
TRUSS JACK ASSEMBLY X
- Double-acting hydraulic jack with the rod internally

locked in retracted position.
- Actuates the nose U/C leg and locks it in extended
position.
-Nominal characteristics :
Dimensions between stops (jack removed)
- Extended : 1123 mm (44.2125 in)
- Retracted :743 mm (29.2519 in)
- Travel : 380 mm (14.9606 in).
WHEELS (See Section 5).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION

FIGURE 3 - JAMBE D'ATTERRISSEUR

AB UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fLJ>~-aZQ.
BREGUET AVIATION ,^_
MIRAGE F
UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
The nose undercarriage leg is of the direct type with built-in shock absorber. It essentially consists
of the following (Figure 3) :
- one structural box assembly 21
- one shock absorber sliding assembly 22
- one torque link hinge 23
- one selector valve unit 26
- one speed detector unit 27.
1 - STRUCTURAL BOX ASSEMBLY (Figures 4 to 7)

A Upper section (Figure 4)
Structural box 30 carries at the top undercarriage leg hinge pins connecting the aircraft structure,
and a double yoke 31 .
(1) Undercarriage hinge pins
Two similar hollow pins 32 swivel in two self-aligning bearings integral with the aircraft structure.
Both pins are fitted to bushes 33 and 34 of structural box 30. A transverse bolt 35 locks hollow pin 32
and grooved lubricator 36. Hollow pin 32 positioning is controlled by locating pin 205. Bolt 35 carries a
grease fitting 37 at one end and forms a fork at the other end to accommodate the link of the lateral
doors.
MODIFICATION 461 NOT APPLIED :

There is no locating pin 205 for hollow pin 32 location.
(2) Double yoke
The double yoke is connected to elastic rod 2 on the one hand and to the shock absorber sliding
assembly on the other hand.
Double yoke 31 is hinged in a fork of structural box 30. The double yoke swivels on a shouldered
pin 38 equipped with a grooved lubricator 39. The assembly is attached by a lever 40 and a screw 41 .
The upper section of the structural box also accommodates two swivelling couplings 42 and a
sleeve 43. The two couplings make the hydraulic connection from the structure pipes to the
undercarriage leg pipes.
Sleeve 43 is safetied by two bolts 44 and guides seal retainer 45 which is internally provided with
four tenons T providing assembly with the shock absorber.
B Lower section (Figures 5 to 7)
At the front, structural box 30 forms a fork equipped with bushes 46 to accommodate the hinge
pin of the truss jack.
At the rear, the structural box supports a roller 47 for locking the undercarriage leg in the up
position. This roller is mounted on a pin 48 locked by a safetied pin 49.
The lower section of structural box 30 accommodates :

- one swivelling assembly
- one nose wheel steering jack.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Mise en place du tourillon

Installation of trunnir n
Repère de peinture
Paint mark
SECTION D

MODIFICATION 461 NOT INCORPORATED
. MODIFICA TION 627 NOT INCORPORA TED
COUPE A
SECTION A
FIGURE4- PARTIE SUPERIEURE DU CAISSON ,,.,

UPPER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYL INDER
AE 3-104
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZU=*>^r5l MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^jF3^^"-^ . . , ,.,«,.
..
(1 ) Swivelling assembly (Figures 5 and 6)
The swivelling assembly is essentially composed of :

one tube 50 turning in bushes 51 and 52 of structural box 30 (See Figure 5). Tube 50 is slaved in
-
translation to the structural box by a shouldered bush 53. Two screws 54,accessible through two holes
in the box blanked by plugs 55, lock shouldered bush 53 and bearing 56.
This tube is provided with a shoulder in the form of a cam B, and a toothed sector C. Cam B drives the
roller of selector valve unit 26 whereas toothed sector C meshes with the rack of the nose wheel steering
jack.
A cage 57 equipped with a self-aligning bearing 58 guides shock absorber 22.
- one upper torque link 59 hinged on swivel tube 50 (See Figure 6). The hinge consists of a hollow
pin 60 equipped with a grooved lubricator 61.
A spring 62 bearing on tube 50 and on torque link 59 retains this link against stop 63 when the two
links are uncoupled. A pin 64 and stop 63, with the lugs bearing on the internal sides of the yoke of
tube 50, attach pin 60 and grooved lubricator 61 .
Two screwed liners 65 are used to adjust the wheels in line with the aircraft centreline. The liners are
safetied by toothed washers 66 which are secured by bolts 67.
- one towing fitting 68 retained on swivel tube 50 by two shear pins. Shear pin 69 is subjected to
traction and compression forces and shear pin 70 to lateral forces.
Excessive force on one of the shear pins causes it to shear. A cotter pin 71 prevents towing fitting 68
from being lost in case of accidental breakage of shear pin 69, in particular during retraction of the U/C
leg.
Shear pin 70 is mounted in a yoke 72 fitted in the fork formed by towing fitting 68. Mounted
symmetrical on the same fitting, two similar brackets 73 carry two shear pins 69, two shear pins 70 and
two yokes 72 as spares.
(2) Nose wheel steering jack and anti-shimmy valves (Figure 7)
The nose wheel steering jack is essentially composed of :

- one rack 74 meshing with the toothed sector of swivel tube 50.
- two similar bolts guiding the rack. Each bolt 75 is guided by two bearings 76 and 77.
On the eccentred centre section of bolts 75 rotates a shouldered roller 78. The backlash between
rack 74 and the toothed sector is adjusted by rotating bolts 75. After adjustment, the angular position
of bolts 75 is maintained by stud 79 of cover 80. This stud crosses one of the nine holes in bolt 75 and
engages one of the eight holes in bearing 76. A nut 81 attaches each bolt to structural box 30.
Bolts 75 and a threaded bush 83 also attach a support 82 for selector valve unit 26.
- Two cylinders 84 centred in structural box 30 and attached by screws, nuts and washers (see
detail A). Two pins 87 mounted in structural box 30 lock bearings 76 against rotation.
- Two pistons 88 mounted in cylinders 84 and slaved to rack 74 through rods 89. The rods are
made integral with pistons 88 through a pin.
- Pre-modification 297.
- two cylinders 84 screwed in bearings 85 and attached by nuts 86. Two pins 87 with one end
engaging a notch of bearings 85 and the other end crossing the shoulder of bearings 76, lock these
components against rotation.
- two pistons 88 mounted in cylinders 84 and slaved to rack 74 through rods 89. These rods are
made integral with the pistons through nuts 90. They have a spherical end bearing on locating blocks 91 .
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^£- ^~^ . ., . . . , nr.
.
Anti-shimmy valves 93 mounted on the hydraulic fluid supply line of cylinders 84 are directly
attached to these cylinders by threaded rings 94. Each valve 93 controls the fluid flow from
cylinders 84. Both valves are similar ; they essentially consist of a cylinder 95 containing :
- one supply valve 96 subjected to the action of a return spring 97.
- one pressure relief valve 98 subjected to the action of a calibration spring 99.
- one threaded ring 100 locking the assembly in cylinder 95, with a filter 101 interposed.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
Section D
FIGURE 5 - PARTIE INFERIEURE DU CAISSON

LOWER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE STRUCTURE BOX
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
69 71 50
FIGURE 6 - PARTIE INFERIEURE DU CAISSON - DETAILS

LOWER SECTION OF UNDERCARRIAGE CYLINDER DETAILS
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Coupe C Section B
Cross-section C
98 99
101 100 97
Coupe D
Cross-section D
Jrrr,.
82 80 79 78 77 75 81 Modification 297 non appliquée

74 93 94 74 93 94
84 88 x . 84 88 86
See detail A voir détail A 89 91 4 '" 76 87 90 85
FIGURE 7 - VERIN DE DIRIGIBILITE ET CLAPETS ANTI-SHIMMY
AB NOSE WHEEL STEERING JACK AND ANTI-SHIMMY VAL VES
3-108
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R^^ZZX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^x^^--^"^ . .....,. .,
2- SHOCK ABSORBER SLIDING ASSEMBLY (Figures 8 to 12)
A Description
It is essentially composed of :
- one shock absorber and one switch which are functionally dependent on each other.
- one electrical wire bundle, which is described in a separate paragraph .6 entitled «Equipment».
(1 ) Shock absorber (Figure 8)
The shock absorber is of the double-acting (compression - expansion) oleopneumatic type with a
separator piston.
The upper section of the shock absorber consists of rod 102 provided with a filler plug 103. Four
notches opening in a circular groove L permit this rod to be attached to seal retainer 45 of the
structural box assembly.
The lower section of rod 102 accommodates a cam 104 attached by a hollow screw 105.
Cylinder 106 slides in self-aligning bearing 58 of the structural box assembly.
It supports at the top a cam 107 secured by four pins 108 which are attached by bush 109 and
threaded bush 110.
Cams 107 and 104 form a paired assembly.
Inside cylinder 106 moves separator piston 111. It is integral with guide rod 112 on which slides
valve 113 connected to the piston through spring 1 14.
In the centre section, cylinder 106 forms an internal shoulder to which is attached restrictor 115
through threaded ring 116. The restrictor houses valve 1 17. A cover 1 18 guides rod 1 12 while enabling
it to slightly move.
The lower section of the cylinder is blanked by a bottom 120 attached by a pin 121. Bottom 120
accommodates a level tube 122 and charging valve 123 protected by a guard 124. Tube 122 controls the
level of the hydraulic fluid in chamber G so as to lubricate the walls and adjacent packings.
The shock absorber travel is limited :

- during expansion, by cams 104 and 107 which mesh with each other to return the wheels along
the aircraft centreline.
- during compression^ by threaded bush 1 10 abutting on the shoulder of rod 102. However, when
the shock absorber is assembled with the structural box, this stop is preceded by the abutment of axle
box 125 on self-aligning bearing 58.
Axle box 125 is shrunk in the lower section of cylinder 106 and locked by pin 121 (Figure 9).
It carries lower torque link 140 hinged on a hollow pin 141 equipped with a grooved
lubricator 142. The pin and its grooved lubricator are retained in the axle box by a pin 143 used as a
grease conduit.
The upper end of torque link 140 accommodates a ball joint assembly 144 which is screwed and
safetied by a washer 145 engaging a notch of the ball joint, and by a bolt 146. This torque link also
supports switch 147. The latter is secured to a housing 148 and controlled by a rocker assembly 149.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LJ^tT^X MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^S^^^ .,..,., ne
This assembly is operated by a cam 150 driven by a lever 151 hinged on housing 148. Lever 151 is
linked to axle box 125 through an adjustable rod consisting of two rod ends 152 screwed in a liner 153.
The lower rod end is connected to a yoke 1 54 fitted to the axle box.
Switch 147 includes three microswitches acting on :
- undercarriage retraction disable system

- braking system
- nose wheel steering system.
The axle box (Figure 10) forms at the front a male yoke in which is hinged a ring 126 for
jacking-up purposes. A spring 127 mounted on ring hinge pin 128 presses the ring against a pin 129.
At the rear, axle box 125 is provided with a transverse bore housing at the ends shrunk bushes 130
which accommodate taper roller bearings 131 on which turns axle 132. The latter accommodates a
pinion 133 driving a tachometer generator 179. Pinion 133 is secured by a pin 164 riveted to two
shims 165.
NOTE : The angular position of the axle assembly in box 125 is determined by locator 166, the head
of which must slide in a groove R of. the centre box bore so as to prevent damage to the
pinion of the speed detector unit by either of shims 165.
The ends of axle 132 are blanked by shrunk plugs 134, the bores of which are used to attach a
steering bar (hand towing, with torque links uncoupled).
The wheels, which are bogie-mounted on either side of the axle box, are coupled by pins 135
located in crowns 136 which are locked on the axle by bolts 137.
The wheels are attached by castellated nuts 138 safetied by bolts 139.
(2) Link 1 55 couples rod 102 to the retraction system (Figure 12).
The link is connected to shock absorber rod 102 through a hollow pin 156 equipped with a
grooved lubricator 157. The pin and its grooved lubricator are made integral with link 155 through
pin 158. Grease fitting 159 permits lubrication of this hinge through the internal groove of link 155.
The link forms a boss H abutting on sleeve 44 when the U/C leg is extended.
A plain pin connects link 155 to double yoke 31 of the structural box assembly. This plain pin 160
is hollow and equipped with a grooved lubricator 161. A hollow pin 162 locks the pin and its grooved
lubricator on link 155 and accommodates a grease fitting 163.
B- Operation (Figure 11)
Compression phase.
Sinking of cylinder 106 causes the hydraulic fluid to flow from chamber D to chamber E through
restrictor 1 1 5.
Valve 1 17 being lifted by the fluid, fluid flow is restricted only by the six bores in restrictor 115.
The increase in fluid volume in chamber E results in sinking of separator piston 111 which reduces the
volume of chamber G and increases the pressure of the gaseous mass.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION /^°
MANUAL 05
FIGURE 8 - AMORTISSEUR - DESCRIPTION

SHOCK A BSORBER - DESCRIPTION
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Modification 627
Coupe A non appliquée
Cross-section A Modification 627
not incorporated
125 121 27
Coupe D
Coupe C Cross-section D
125 140 Cross-section C
143
FIGURE 9 - PARTIE INFERIEURE DE L'AMORTISSEUR

LOWER SECTION OF SHOCK ABSORBER
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^^ZZ^X
BREGUET AVIATION ^^P3^-^^
MIRAGE
..,.,.,., nc
F
Expansion phase.
The gas compressed in chamber G pushes back separator piston 111, thereby causing the hydraulic
fluid to flow from chamber E to chamber D through restrictor 115. Valve 117, pressed on its seat by the
fluid, offers to the latter passage ports smaller than those of restrictor 115. Fluid flow restriction is thus
more important than in the preceding phase. The fluid volume increase in chamber D results in
extension of the shock absorber.
At the end of expansion, valve 113 partly covers the ports interconnecting chambers D and E. The
fluid must first flow through the groove of valve 113, which increases the flow restriction previously
provided by valve 117. This other restriction prevents the two cams 104 and 107 from coming too
abruptly into contact with each other ; they mesh and return the wheels along the aircraft centreline.
3- SELECTOR VALVE UNIT
See 05-8.
4- TORQUE LINK HINGE (Figure 9)
This hinge 23 interconnects the two torque links 59 and 140.
The hinge is composed of :

- one shouldered pin 174 provided at one end with a fork in which is hinged a pawl 175.
- one plunger 176 pressed on pawl 175 by a spring 177.
- one knurled castellated nut 178 retained on the lower torque link through a cable.
Nut 178 is safetied to pin 174 by pawl 175 engaging a notch of the nut.
5- SPEED DETECTOR UNIT (Figure 10)
This unit 27 is attached to axle box 125 through two screws 188. It supports a tachometer
generator 179 (see 05-7) and transmits the rotational movement of the axle to the tachometer
generator.
Screws 188 are also used to attach the support of static discharger 28.
In housing 181 secured to axle box 125, a pinion 180 turns on a ball bearing 182. Pinion 180
meshes with pinion 133 integral with the axle. It is also slaved to the shaft of tachometer generator 179
through a driver 184.
Housing 181 accommodates a cover 185 on the pinion side, and a casing 186 with a receptacle 187
on the tachometer generator side.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05 Coupe F Coupe G
Section F Section G
Détermination du jeu X
(roues montées et écrous 1 38 serrés)
Determination of clearance X
(wheels mounted and nuts 138 tightened)
Amendement A non appliqué
FIGURE 10 - POT D'ESSIEU Pre-amendment A
AXLE BOX
AB
03-88 Restricted 3-114 3-114
BREGUET AVIATION ^3^
MANUAL 05
102
:n«PHASE
1«?PHASE COMPRESSION DETENTE
1ST PHASE COMPRESSION 2ND PHASE
EXPANSION
AB FIGURE 11 - AMORTISSEUR - FONCTIONNEMENT
11-72 SHOCK ABSORBER OPERATION 3-115
Restricted
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^-'ZzX. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^<5P=^î> â ». ,
^C^*^^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
6- EQUIPMENT (Figure 3)
A discharger 28 discharges the static electricity of the aircraft to ground. Its support is secured to
the axle box by two screws which also attach speed detector 27.
The length of the static discharger rod is adjustable. Attachment to the support is ensured by a
guillotine system.
The set of pipes 191 and electrical wire bundle 192 of structural box assembly 21 form with
electrical wire bundle 193 of shock absorber sliding assembly 22, the equipment of the undercarriage
leg.
A supply pipe and a return pipe connect selector valve unit 26 to the pipes on the aircraft
structure through two swivelling couplings on the structural box.
Two other pipes connect selector valve unit 26 to the two cylinders of the nose wheel steering
jack.
Electrical wire bundle 192 connects the aircraft wire bundle to selector valve unit 26 and to wire
bundle 193.
Wire bundle 193 connects switch 147 and speed detector unit 27 to wire bundle 192.
Both wire bundles are interconnected at a bracket 194 secured to the upper torque link.
Wire bundle 193 is equipped with a lug 195 at connector 196. This lug is used to retain
connector 196 on bracket 194 and permits the free end of wire bundle 193 to be attached to the
internal side of the lower torque link when the two wire bundles are uncoupled.
7 - ELECTRICAL BONDING (Figure 3) - Post-modification 300
It provides ground continuity across the lower section of the structural box and the axle box
through :
one metal jumper 200 across the lower section of the structural box and the upper torque link.
-
- one quick-release metal jumper 201 across the upper torque link and the axle box. This bonding
jumper is routed with the lower electrical wire bundle.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «^-"r-Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^L ^-^ - . ......... _
ELASTIC ROD
(Figure 12)
1 - DESCRIPTION
A The elastic rod is composed of :

-one body 21 forming a rod end equipped with a self-aligning bearing 22 to hinge the rod on
double yoke 31 of the structural box assembly.
- one rod 23 terminating in a self-aligning bearing 24.
- one stack of spring washers 25 mounted between a bush 26 integral with the rod and a
bottom 27 integral with body 21 .
B Elastic rod/nose leg and elastic rod/structure connections
Elastic rod body 21 is connected to double yoke 31 through a pin 28 locked against rotation by a
stud 29 and attached by a nut 30.
Rod 23 is connected to a bushed fitting integral with the aircraft structure.
2- OPERATION
The elastic rod constitutes the fixed point of the linkage controlling retraction of the shock
absorber. In the «U/C DOWN» position, the elastic rod is subjected to a pull force so as to keep boss H
of link 1 55 against sleeve 43.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^-SS"

MIRAGE F
Coupe C - Cross-section C
Coupe A Coupe B
Cross-section A Cross-section B
FIGURE 12 - BIELLE ELASTIQUE ET AXES DE COMMANDE DE RETRACTION

ELASTIC ROD AND RETRACTION CONTROL PINS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R*~è>ZzrX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^CZzP^^g^ , ....,., nc
TRUSS JACK ASSEMBLY
The truss jack ensures nose leg extension and retraction and locking and wind-bracing in the down
position. It is equipped with a valve box 21 and a switch 9G3.
This is a double-acting hydraulic jack with the rod internally locked in the retracted position.
The jack is essentially composed of :

- one stationary assembly connected to the aircraft structure
- one moving assembly connected to the undercarriage leg.
The stationary assembly consists of :

- One bottom 23 forming at the top a fork, and provided on the periphery with two bosses and a
yoke A accommodating one hydraulic coupling 24, switch 9G3 and one attachment point of the
fairing door respectively.
Switch 9G3 is equipped with three microswitches which are connected to the undercarriage control
sequence circuit, the undercarriage control warning circuit and the nose wheel steering control circuit.
- one cylinder 25 featuring the following from top to bottom, on the outside :
- one shoulder accommodating a bracket 26 for clamping the jack supply pipes and attaching a
restrictor.
- one shoulder accommodating a bracket 27 to attach the fairing door.
- two bosses supporting valve box 21 .
- One nut 28 attaching locking sleeve 29 and bottom 23 to cylinder 25.
- One counter-rod 30 retained in jack bottom 23 by a nut 31 .
-One locking piston 32 sliding on counter-rod 30. The locking piston carries a lever 33 which
actuates rocker assembly 34.
- One return spring 35 bearing on a centring cup 36 on one side, and on locking piston 32 on the
other side.
- One sleeve 38 and one bottom 39 secured in the lower end of cylinder 25 by a nut 37.
B Moving assembly
The moving assembly consists of :

- One rod 40 equipped with a self-aligned rod end 41 . This adjustable rod end is screwed in rod 40
and secured by nut 42. A hole B ensures that a sufficient number of threads is engaged when it is not
visible.
- One claw lock 44, one piston 45, one bush 46 and one spacer 47 attached to rod 40 by a nut 43.
Sleeve 38 and bush 46 are paired. The moving assembly is guided by piston 45 and bottom 39.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
FIGURE 13 - VERIN CONTREFICHE - DESCRIPTION

AB TRUSS JA CK - DESCRIPTION
11-72 3-120
Restricted
MIRAGE F
NOIX DE CARDAN 62
FIGURE 14 - LIAISON VERIN CONTREFICHE - SUPPORTS

TRUSS JA CK- TO-SUPPORT CONNECTION
AB
AVIONS MARCEL
_
DASSAULTJU^-"-^ 'MIRAGE F
Y » ,Xr^ w *- '
BREGUET AVIATION^c?0^^ .
C Truss jack-to-support connection (figure 14)
Truss jack 3 is hinged on the aircraft structure through a universal joint crosspiece 62 provided
with two bushed male yokes.
- The upper male yoke is fitted with a pin 63 and a grooved lubricator 64 locked by a pin 65.
A floating nut 66 is used to secure a swivel coupling.
- The lower male yoke accommodates a headed pin 67 connecting universal joint crosspiece 62
to truss jack 3. This pin is safetied by a nut 68.
- Truss jack 3 is connected to undercarriage leg 1 through a hollow pin 69, the lateral travel of
which is limited by two shouldered washers 70 and 71 which are immobilized by a tie-bolt 72 locked
by a pinned nut.
2 - OPERATION (figure 15)
Extension of the truss jack rod causes retraction of the undercarriage leg ; retraction of the jack
rod results in extension and locking of the undercarriage leg.
A Rod retraction - locking
Rod 40 is retracted by applying the hydraulic pressure to valve box 21. A shuttle valve mounted in
this box controls rod retraction through two independent systems (Normal and Emergency systems, via
couplings N and S respectively).
The force provided by the jack results from the action of the pressure fluid on section S1 of
the moving assembly.
Throughout the retraction phase, the fluid expelled from chamber P flows freely through port B.
At the end of travel, the claws of lock 44 flex to clear locking sleeve 29. Then, they push locking
piston 32 by compressing spring 35. Piston 45 abuts on locking sleeve 29, thereby limiting the travel of
the rod.
As the claws of lock 44 are no longer constrained by the locking sleeve, they spring outwards.
Under the action of spring 35, locking piston 32 returns to the initial position and slides under the
claws of the lock. The latter thus is stopped, immobilizing the jack rod.
As locking piston 32 slides under the claws of lock 44, lever 43 turns and reverses the contacts of
switch 9G3.
B Unlocking - rod extension
The hydrau'io pressure applied through port B acts simultaneously on section S2 of locking piston
32 and section S3 of rod 40.
Locking piston 32 moves back and frees :

- claws of lock 44 which are driven by rod 40 and which flex to clear locking sleeve 29,
- rocker 34 which reverses the contacts of switch 9G3.
As rod 40 is extended, the fluid expelled from chamber M flows to the reservoir through ports G
and H and valve box 21 .
At the end of travel, bush 46 progressively blanks port G thereby forcing the fluid from the jack to
flow through a restrictor in valve box 21. This restrictor is in series with port H. As a result, the
extension rate is reduced by restricting the hydraulic fluid flow.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^S--
-^ MIRAGE F
In case of overpressure during fluid flow restriction, a valve in box 21 opens to evacuate the excess
fluid.
As the pressure applied through port F drops, locking piston 32 returns against sleeve 29 under the
action of spring 35.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION .«^
1ere Phase : sortie de tige

1st Phase : rod extension 2e Phase : fin de sortie de tige
2nd Phase : end of rod ex tension
FIGURE 15 - VERIN CONTREFICHE - FONCTIONNEMENT
TRUSS JACK - OPERA TION
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

(Figure 4)
A Special tools
- U/C hydraulics tool kit.

- Checking tool 50MS138.
B Standard tools
- torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb)
- Torque wrench kit, 0 to 0.5 m.daN (0 to 45 in.lb)
C Sbares
fet of shim washers for nose undercarriage leg

reformed packings BT9-4
2- MATERIALS
- érease Air 4210
- White spirit
- PR 1422 A 1/2 or Loctite type 672
PRELIMINARY STEPS
A Ja:k up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see 02-2).
B Remove the wheels (see 05-5).
C Op)en the rear door by hand.
WARN NG:
TJfCRE THE SAFETY MEASURES (see 01-1).
D Discharge the anti-shimmy accumulator by unscrewing the pressure reducing valve setscrew
1 1/2 terns.
E Remove the two plugs 10.05 and 10.07 giving access to U/C leg hinge trunnions.
4- REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the lateral door connecting rods near the leg cylinder (8-mm A/F wrench).
(2) Uncouple the truss jack from the U/C leg (see 05-3).
CAUTION :
TAKE CARE THAT THE SWINGING OF U/C LEG DOES NOT DAMAGE MICROSWITCH 21 L.
(3) Remove elastic rod 2 (see 05-3).

(4) Lift the leg by hand while retracting the shock absorber and, using an appropriate support, prop
it close to the horizontal without catching it in the U/C uplock box.
(5) Uncouple the swivel coupling links on the airframe side.
(6) Unscrew the couplings at each end of the two swivel coupling supply pipes.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ J> "* Y\/-\\JL-
BREGUET AVIATION _^c_~ ê*-»^ -. ^ . . , ,,..,,,., ftc
(7) Bring the leg back to the vertical position, accompanying it in its movement.
(8) Clear away the two hydraulic pipes and blank off their orifices.
(9) Disconnect the electrical plug from the electrical cable.
C - Check of hinge'side play before removal, in the case where the same leg is to be rein¬
stalled.
-The maximum permissible play for in-service leg is £ 0.2 mm (0.078 in).
NOTE: If the play is out of tolerances, a new adjustment washer should be determined as per
paragraph 5-(5)).
D - Removal of leg
(1 ) Remove the stop bolts 35 (1 7 A/F wrench) of the hinge trunnions 32.
(2) Through the orifices of the removed plugs, screw extractors C46608-1 in the threaded
ends of the hinge trunnions 32.
(3) Tilt the leg to about 45° and block it in this position.
(4) Disengage the hinge trunnions from their housing in the leg cylinder by pulling on the
extractors; save the two adjustment washers (mark their position). Make sure that the leg does
not move.
(5) Remove the leg from the bay, disengaging its LH side first.
(6) Remove the trunnions by pushing them inside the bay, then unscrew the extractors.
5 - INSTALLATION
A - Preparation for installation
(1 ) On the airframe hinged brackets.
(a) Remove the bearings from their respective brackets, proceeding one bracket at a time so
as to avoid inverting the bearings.
Mark the direction of assembly.
(b) Carefully clean the bearings and brackets; make a general visual inspection,
(c.) Lightly grease the bearings and their spherical housing in the brackets.
(d) Reinstall the bearings, making sure they are in the right direction.
(e) Check for correct swivelling, using a dummy pin M31007; the swivel torque should be
1 to 2 m.daN (7.37 to 14.7 ft.lb).
(f) End the operation by aligning the bearings.
(2) If the same U/C leg is to be installed.
(a) Remove and discard the seals of stop bolts 35.

(b) Clean the following items with white spirit:
-the stop bolts,
-the hinge trunnions,
-the adjustment washers, if they are to oe reused,
-the bores for the trunnions in the leg cylinder.
(c) Visually inspect these parts for good appearance.
(d) Install new seals on the stop bolts.
(e) Lightly grease all these parts.
(f) This greasing should not hinder the measuring of the hinge side play, if this operation is
to take place.
(g) Clean the elastic rod and check its appearance.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<£<_~-
â ^s^^>
^?-^ fjestncted .«ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
(3) If a spare U/C leg is to be installed
-Proceed to depreservation (see 05-3).

-Remove the stop bolts and hinge trunnions.
-If required, lightly grease theses parts along with the trunnion bores in the leg cylinder.
-This greasing should not hinder the hinge side play measuring operation.
-Install the swivel coupling rods taken from the removed leg.
(4) In all cases, whether installing a repaired leg or a new spare one
-Secure the s^/vivel coupling rods to the leg cylinder.

-Retract the shock absorber and install handling girth and handling tension adjuster
50MS1 38-01 (see figure 18M).
(5) DETERMINING ADJUSTMENT WASHERS FOR HINGE SIDE PLAY
NOTE: This operation is to be performed on a reused leg if the side play checked before remo¬
val (para. (1)-(b)) is not within tolerances (must also be performed on spare leg).
(1 ) Temporarily assemble the leg in its hinged brackets.
(a) From inside the U/C well, engage the hinge trunnions in the bracket bearings, with the
threaded end directed towards the outside.
(b) Working through orifices 10-05 and 10-07, screw the extractors in the trunnions, then
pull the latter until they touch the bearings.
NOTE: During installation of leg, avoid any sudden movements.
(c) Position the leg inclined approximately 30° under the U/C well and engage the RH side
first so as to bring it in front of the bearing.
(d) Straighten the leg so as to align its hinge with the bearings.
(e) Engage the LH trunnion in its bracket and at the right moment, install the nominal dimen¬
sion washer (index 300 engraved on the chamfer), positioning the chamfer on bracket bearing
side.
- Push the trunnion well home until the bore of the stop bolt appears.
(f) Engage the RH trunnion and push it well home until the bore of the stop bolt appears.
(g) Let the leg hang vertically and take care to avoid damaging microswitch 21 L.
(h) Bring the leg cylinder to rest against the LH trunnion.
(j) On the RH trunnion side, measure the play between the bracket bearing and the face of
the flange of the leg cylinder bush.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^-Çl /V\ir\/-\WL_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^£0>
^-«. :5*Q>
^?->^» Restricted *.« a km i a i
MANUAL nr-
05
(m) According to the play measured, choose, from the set of adjustment washers, one which
will provide a side play "J" = 0.03 to 0.09 mm (0.001 1 to 0.0035 in).
NOTE: The last three figures of the part number engraved on the chamfer of the washer indi¬
cate its thickness in hundredths of mm.
(n) Remove the leg.
(p) Without excess, grease again the trunnions, the bores of the bracket bearings and the
housings of the trunnions in the leg cylinder.
B - Installation of leg
(1) Engage the trunnions in the airframe hinge brackets and screw the extractors on the
trunnions.
(2) Position the leg and align its hinge with the bearings.
(3) Engage the LH trunnion and install the nominal-dimension washer (chamfer on bearing
side).
(4) Push the trunnion well home until locating pin 205 is overridden and the bore of the stop
bolt 35 appears.
MOD. 461 NOT INCORPORATED (locating pin not installed).
(5) The trunnion is properly in place when the paint index mark on the extractor rod is com¬
pletely out of sight in the orifice of the fuselage skin (position a).
(6) Align the bore of the stop bolt, using position guide C46609.
CAUTION - MOD .461 INCORPORATED OR NOT

Check that the trunnion is properly in place:
-with the position guide still in place, exert a pulling force on the extractor.
(7) Remove the position guide and install stop bolt 35, positioning its clevis so as to enable
+ 04
connection of the doorlet rod. Screw and tighten the nut to a torque of 3 _ À m.daN
(22.125 + q95 ft.lb) (17 A/F wrench).
(8) Engage the RH trunnion, installing the selected adjustment washer.
(9) Make sure that the trunnion is correctly positioned (proceed as for the LH trunnion).
(10) Align the bore of the stop bolt using the position guide and make sure that the trunnion
is properly in place (proceed as for the LHtrunnion).
(11) With the position guide still in place, make sure that the side play of the hinge is well
within tolerances (see para. 5).
(12) Remove the position guide, install stop bolt 35, screw and tighten its nut (proceed as for
the LH trunnion).
(1 3) Remove the extractors.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -1* /V\II\/-\V-7I_
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ï4_~
^-rt. ^-=>»o
^«-^ _ .» . ^
Restricted . â/iammai
MANUAL ne
05
C - Mechanical and functional connections
(1 ) Remove the blanking plugs from the two hydraulic pipes and put them in their place at
the upper part of the U/C cylinder.
(2) Remove the tension adjuster and the shock absorber retraction girth.
(3) Raise the leg by retracting the shock absorber and blocking it approximately in the hori¬
zontal position, taking care to avoid damaging the pipes at the upper part of the U/C cylinder.
(4) Remove the blanks from the hydraulic couplings and connect the pipes to their respective
couplings.
(5) Couple the swivel coupling link rods to their structure support (8 A/F wrench).
(6) Bring the leg back to the vertical position.
(7) Reconnect the electrical cable plug.
6 - FINAL STEPS
A - Operate the truss jack and measure the length of the rod in extended position, with the
jack under 206 bar (3000 psi) pressure. Note this value with the view of adjusting the U/C.
B - Couple the truss jack (see manual 05-3).

C - Charge the shock absorber (see manual 05-0).
D - Grease the U/C leg (see manual 05-0).
E - Adjust the U/C leg (see manual 05-3).

F - Bleed the nose wheel steering system (see manual 07-1).
G - Check and adjust the nose wheel steering system (see manual 05-8).
H - Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see manual 02-2).
J - Check the position of the static discharger fastened to the speed detector unit. If required,
+ 0.05
adjust it to its normal operating position; tighten the screw to a torque of 0.1 5 m.daN
+ 4.4 - 0
(13.2 in.lb) (7 A/F wrench).
- 0
K - Install the access plugs, lock with PR 1422 A sealant or with loctite 672.
L - Carry out a SPAD test, according to the operation performed (see 05-7).
AA
BREGUET
ILJ^^ZXl
AVIATIONôF3^^ .
MIRAGE F
.«am.iai nr
REMOVAL INSTALLATION OF SHOCK ABSORBER

(figure 16)
A Special tools
- Undercarriage hydraulics 1st line tool kit
- Undercarriage hydraulics 2nd line tool kit
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 0 to 0.500 m.daN (0 to 45 in.lb).
- Torque wrench kit 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).

-Ohmmeter
D Spares
- 1 lockplate for seal retainer attaching screw located on retraction system.
- 1 lockwasher for switch control rod locknut.
- 2 lockplates for attachment studs of switch rocker assembly
- Seals for switch rocker assembly.
2- MATERIALS
-Grease Air 4222 or Air 4210.

-White spii it.
-Sealant PR 1422 B2.
WARNING :
B Open the rear door by hand.
C Remove the wheels (see 05-5). .
D Discharge the shock absorber (charging valve on shock absorber bottom).
E Uncouple the truss jack from the nose leg (see 05-3).
F- Uncouple elastic rod 2 from the nose leg (see 05-3).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti Z£-"-~\\ /Ylll\MV7C I
BREGUET AVIATION^-^^ Restrieied MANUAL 05
4- REMOVAL
A Slightly compress shock absorber and place it on a suitable support (wooden block).
B - Uncouple double yoke 31 from structural leg box as follows :
(1) Remove screw 41 and lever 40.

(2) Remove the grease nipple angled at 90° and located at pin head side.
(3) Hold double yoke 31 and drive out pin 38 with a 22 mm (0.8661 in) diameterfibre drift. Remove
grooved lubricator 39 from this pin.
MOD 627 not incorporated :

-it is not necessary to remove the grease nipple in order to remove the pin (use a hollow fibre
drift).
C Uncouple link 155 from double yoke 31 as follows :
(1 ) Remove pin 162 complete with grease fitting 163 (14 mm A/F spanner).
(2) Hold double yoke 31 and drive out pin 160 complete with grooved lubricator, using an 18 mm
(0.7086 in) diameter fibre drift.
D Separate seal retainer 45 from rod 102 as follows :
(1 ) Retract shock absorber 180 mm (7.0866 in) and block it in position. At the top of structural box,
unsafety (lock plate) and remove screw 197 (10 mm A/F spanner).
(2) Turn seal retainer 0,523 rd (30°) clockwise so as to clear tenons from groove L of rod 1 02 (wrench
C47510).
E - Attach a cord to the end of link 155 and lift nose leg 1.047 rd (60°) approximately while still
keeping shock absorber compressed.
F Uncouple centre torque link hinge as follows :
(1 ) Disconnect electrical plug from upper torque link 59, and bonding jumper.
(2) Unsafety (pawl) and remove knurled nut 178 from centre torque link pin 174.
(3) Remove centre pin and separate torque links 140 and 59.
(4) Install following part on lower link 140 :
- centre pin 174 provided with knurled nut 178
- electrical plug on stowage support.
G Hold structural box and carefully withdraw shock absorber (keep both components on the same
axis), while guiding link 155 at structural box top.
5- PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION
A If a spare shock absorber is to be installed :
(1) Proceed to depreservation (see 05-1).

(2) Mount following parts taken from removed shock absorber :
-centre torque link pin assembly 23 (attach cable of centre pin knurled nut under nut 198 -
10 mm A/F spanner - Attach lower wire bundle with clamp 199 -8 mm A/F wrench - Torque tighten
to 0.3 +q1 m.daN (26.4 +q8 in.lb)
- speed detector unit 27 (see 05-7)
-support 189 with static discharger. Secure these parts by means of screws 188 (10 mm A/F
-' + o.1
spanner). Mount the end of bonding jumper on upper screw and torque tighten to 0.9 + q' m.daN
(6.6 ^°-7 ft.lb).
NOTE : On removed shock absorber, reinstall screw 197 with lock plate on rod 102, and pin 160 with
grooved lubricator and hollow pin 162 on link 155.
AB
BREGUET AVI ATlONô.
ti^-^ZZxy
__^ - .
MIRAGE
....,»,
F
^r-
B Check each hinge for total cleanness.
C Coat each hinge pin with a film of grease.
D Ensure that link 155 is provided with shim washers bonded to each end of the bore that accommo¬
dates pin 160.
E Pass a cord through the cylinder so that it extends sufficiently from both ends.
6- INSTALLATION
A Pull rod 102 by hand to ensure that wheel aligning cams are correctly fitted.
B Set the cylinder to 60° approximately and attach the cord to the end of link 155.
C Guide link 155 to the top of the cylinder and carefully insert the shock absorber into the latter
(keep both components aligned) until only 180 mm (7.0866 in) of sliding cylinder 106 are visible.
Return the nose leg to vertical and place the shock absorber (without extending it) on a suitable
support (wooden block).
D Install seal retainer 45 on rod 102 at cylinder top as follows :
(1) Locate seal retainer tenons in rod notches and lock both parts by fitting seal retainer tenons
into rod groove L and turning the seal retainer 30° counterclockwise (wrench C47510).
(2) Install screw 197 fitted with a new lockplate and torque tighten to 0.6 ZZ m.daN
(4.4 * Q-7 ft.lb) (10-mm A/F wrench) ; safety.
NOTE : With screw 197 torque tightened, the lockplate remains free.
E Couple link 1 55 to double yoke 31 as follows :
(1) Locate the link head in correctly directed yoke, install pin 160 equipped with its grooved
lubricator and align the bores accommodating pin 162.
+ 01
(2) Install pin 162 equipped with grease fitting 163 and torque tighten to 0.5 " m.daN
(3.6 + Q-7 ft.lb) (14-mm A/F wrench).
F Couple double yoke 31 to the U/C leg cylinder as follows :
(1 Install grooved lubricator 39 in shouldered pin 38 and align the bores.

)
(2) Locate double yoke 31 in the female clevis of the cylinder and install shouldered pin 38 in correct
direction (see figure).
(3) Install lever 40, taking care to stop it angularly onto the spigot on the cylinder ; align the bores.
(4) Install screw 41 and its nut with a washer ; torque tighten the nut to 0.6 , Z m.daN
(4.4 ^ q'7 ft.lb) (10-mm A/F wrench).
(5) Install the elbow grease nipple, taking care to position it properly in order to have access for
greasing.
Modification 627 not incorporated : the grease was not removed.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JLJ>~Z^X
BREGUET AVIATION ôF0^-^»^
MIRAGE
. . . ....
A .
F
7- FINAL STEPS
A Couple elastic rod 2 to nose leg (See 05-3).
B Couple truss jack to nose leg (See 05-3).
C - Install wheels (See 05-5).
D Check and adjust wheel alignment as required (See 05-3).
E Charge shock absorber (See 05-0).
F Check the inside of the unit and the switch drive cam for condition. Check grease filling.
Remove switch 1 47 (See 05-6).
-
- Remove rocker assembly 149.
- Through the opening in the base of the rocker, inspect the interior of the unit and check the
condition of the cam. Check grease filling of the unit. Recondition if required (See 05-3).
- Re-install rocker assembly 149. Install new seals, screw, tighten and lock the attachment studs
use new lock plates.
G If a spare shock absorber is installed, proceed to adjust the switch control :
(1 ) Shock absorber charged and extended, torque link arms connected.

(2) Adjust dimension «C» of the drive cam :
-
- switch 147 and rocker assembly 149 removed.
- Unsafety and unscrew nut 164 (lock plate) and adjust liner 153 to obtain dimension «C» value
of 13,65 ± 0,05 mm (0.5373 ± 0.0019 in) between front of housing 148 and front of cam 150, measured
at 5,5 ± 0,1 mm (0.2165 ± 0.0039 in) from axis of housing (dimension C). Reinstall and safety nut 164
(lock plate) (Checking tool D46559).
- Install rocker assembly 149 (See § F).
(3) Install switch 147 (See 05-6).
(4) Adjust switch 147 (See 05-6).
(5) Run a sealant bead in areas identified by M in figure.
H Connect :
(1 )wiring plugs mounted on torque link 140, to :

-switch 147
- speed detector unit 27
- upper wire bundle.
| (2) bonding jumper at connector mounted on torque link 59.
I Perform complete U/C leg lubrication (See 05-0).
J Conduct an undercarriage retraction and extension test (See 05-6).
K Lower aircraft on ground (See 02-2).
L Check shock absorber height according to aircraft configuration (See 02-6).
M Ensure that the position of static discharger mounted on support 189 secured to speed detector
unit iscorrect. If necessary, return it to normal operating position - 7 mm A/F spanner - Tighten to
torque0,15 ^°'05 m.daN (13.2 ^J'4 in.lb).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Detail Z
27 189
FIGURE 16 - DEPOSE-POSE DE L'AMORTISSEUR

REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF SHOCK ABSORBER
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
JLJ^Z^X
^ZZs^^-fg^
MIRAGE
....,.,
F
nc
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF TRUSS JACK

(figure 14)
A Standard tools
- Sets of extra-thin open-end wrenches
- Torque wrench kit 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).
- Accessory kit for torque wrench 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb).

C Spares
-1 pinHQA020 015TL
- 1 pin HQ A 020 030 TL
-TieEribeBN 15
- Studs Eribe CN F 1 5-20-650
- Braid Gudebrod Fyr Lacer 22 DR, black.
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
B With undercarriage legs locked down, ensure that aircraft electrical power systems are switched
off.
C Remove the screws and nuts attaching the shield door to the jack and remove the door.
MARK THE POSITION OF THE LATERAL PLAY TAKE-UP WASHERS.
4- REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the movable electrical connector from the switch and untie the wiring from the jack
body.
(2) Disconnect the three jack/swivel coupling pipes from the swivel coupling ; blank the ports.
(1) Jack/leg cylinder connection

- Unsafety (split pin) and remove tie bolt 72 and recover washers 70 and 71 (17-mm A/F wrench).
- Remove pin 69.
(2) Jack/universal joint yoke 62 connection
- Hold the jack and remove headed pin 67 (32-mm A/F wrench).
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
5 - INSTALLATION
1) If a spare truss jack is to be installed:
aj Proceed to jack depreservation (see 05-1 ).
b) Measure clearance "J" between rod end lock nut (leg connection side) and jack body.
-in extended position, with 210 bar (3.045 psi) pressure in jack,
-record clearance.
(c) Mount following parts taken from removed jack:

-rigid pipes,
- restrictor.
Check each hinge for cleanliness.
(§l Slightly coat each pin with grease.
B - Installation of truss jack.
Locate jack, fit rod end to cardan yoke 62 and hold.
fil Connect pipes from jack to swivelling coupling.
C - Mechanical connections
(1) Jack/cardan yoke 62 connection
-Install headed pin 67, washer and nut 68 and torque tighten to 4 ± 0.5 m.daN (29.5 ±
3.6 ft.lb) 32 mm A/F spanner. Safety with new split pin.
(2) Jack/leg structural box connection
(a) Locate self-aligned rod end of jack in leg structural box yoke, install pin 69.
(b) Install washer 70 in correct position on tie-bolt 72 and tit tie-bolt (with head opposite to
jack valve box) to pin 69. Install washer 71 .
(c) Hold tie-bolt 72 (17 mm A/F spanner) and torque tighten attaching nut (17 mm A/F
+ 2 +14 7
spanner) to 4 + Q m.daN (29. 5+ Q ' ft.lb). Safety with a new split pin.
D - Functional connection
(1 ) Connect the electrical plug to the switch.
(2) Secure the wirinc to the jack body, taking the following precautions:
-adjust wiring 73 to a length of 4Ô0 m (15.75 in) as measured between the shield door-
to-fuselage skin intersection point and the tip of the plug- suppress the overlength by binding
the wiring as required to the strand in the fuselage using GUDEBROD braid:
-connect the electrical plug to the contact switch; shape the wiring by routing it along
the jack body, then along the contact switch, and finally to the right of the shield door attach¬
ing support (see view A);
-secure the wiring in that position using two new ERIBE 74 braids, each attached with
two capsules.
6 - FINAL STEPS
A - Install the shield door on the jack, taking care to position the shim washers properly.
B - Check the undercarriage leg setting (see 05-3).
C - After final adjustment, tightening and safetying of the rod end lock nut, apply a bead of
PR 1321A2 sealant to the visible threads of the rod end, to the lock nut-to-rod contact sur¬
face, in the recesses of the key notches, and on the lug of the lock washer (areas marked MR
on the figure).
D - Bleed the hydraulic system free of air by cycling the undercarriage legs (see 05-6).
Install the shield door on the jack:
-position the play take-up washers in the order recorded at removal,
-check that there is a clearance of at least 3 mm (0.118 in) between U/C door and line.
Otherwise, change the line profile.
E - Lower the aircraft on the ground (see 02-2).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/L^-^TU
BREGUET AVIATION___ _ _
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL- INSTALLATION OF ELASTIC ROD

(Figure 12)
A Standard tools
- 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrench kit.

- Set of extra-thin open-ended spanners.
B Spares
- 1 lockwasher for attaching screw.
2- MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Petrolatum AIR 3565.
A - Jack up aircraft so that wheels clear ground (see 02-2).
B Uncouple truss jack from nose leg (see 05-3).
C - If applicable, remove the fuel line (inflight refueling) section located above the rod.
4- REMOVAL
A Elastic rod/nose leg connection.
(1 ) Relieve stress on elastic rod by slightly lifting nose leg by hand and hold.
(2) Remove nut 30 (1 3 mm A/F spanner), recover washer and drive out pin 28.
(3) Keep elastic rod in abutment against nose leg well wall.
(4) Return nose leg to vertical position.
B Elastic rod/airframe connection
(1 ) Remove lockwasher and attaching screw (13 mm A/F spanner) ; discard the lockwasher.
(2) Hold elastic rod and drive out hinge pin complete with lock plate.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
- Check each hinge for cleanliness. Slightly coat each pin with petrolatum.
- Adjust travel of the elastic rod to be installed (see 05-3).
B Elastic rod/a irf rame connection
(1) Locate elastic rod in airframe yoke. Install hinge pin provided with a lock plate. Correctly direct
lock plate.
(2) Install attaching screw fitted with a new lockwasher and tighten attaching screw (13 mm A/F
spanner) ; fold the lockwasher tab over one of the screw head flats.
C Elastic rod/nose leg connection
(1) Slightly lift nose leg so as to locate elastic rod self-aligned end 21 in double yoke 31.
(2) Install pin 28 and locate pin head on stud 29 mounted on double yoke. Torque tighten nut 30
fitted with washer (13 mm A/F spanner) to 1 .3 + ^ m.daN (9.5 + Q' ft.lb).
6- FINAL STEPS
A Couple truss jack to nose leg (see 05.3).
B Conduct an undercarriage retraction and extension test (see 05-6).
C Lower aircraft on ground (see 02-2).
| D If applicable, install the fuel line section which has been removed.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iLJà^-z^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F°__-^ - . h»ammai mr
4
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF TRUSS JACK UNIVERSAL JOINT CROSSPIECE

(figure 16M)
A Standard tools

- of extra-thin open-end wrenches
Set
B Special tools
- Extractor M3 11 53
C Materials
-White spirit
- Grease Air 4222 or Air 421 0
D Spares
- 2 preformed packings BT14-4
- Remove the truss jack (see 05-3).
3 - REMOVAL OF UNIVERSAL JOINT CROSSPIECE
A Removal of swivel coupling 79
Loosen the unions of the three hydraulic lines between the structure and the swivel coupling.
-
Unsafety (lockwire) and loosen nut 66 connecting the swivel coupling to the grooved lubricator
-
of the universal joint crosspiece pin.
- Remove the swivel coupling by unscrewing nut 66, then disconnect the three lines (blank the
ports).
B Remove grease nipple 75.
C Remove stop bolt 65.
D - Installation of extractor M31 1 53
- Lightly grease the thread of thrust bolt 77 and screw it fully home, then lightly grease the bearing
surface of its head.
- Fold crosspiece 62 upwards and fit the extractor with bearing part 78 centrally positioned in the
hole of the pin lubricator. Place the extractor under tension by unscrewing thrust bolt 77 which is
centered in the hole in the bearing part. Position the extractor in such a way that the thrust bolt can
be unscrewed with a 1 7 mm A/F wrench.
AA
H_81 Restricted 3-315
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tZ=J>"lZrX
BREGUET AVIATION^__ _
MIRAGE F
E Extraction of pin 63
- Using the wrench, unscrew the thrust bolt until the bearing part is fully inserted into the pin
bore.
- Screw the thrust bolt fully home again, fit a second bearing part, then unscrew the bolt to
expel the pin further.
- Repeat the operation, adding bearing parts until the pin has been fully expelled.
F Withdraw the extractor and remove crosspiece 62, carefully noting how it is positioned in the
fitting and the way in which play take-up washer 76 is installed. Recover the washer.
4- CHECKING OF PIN
A Withdraw grooved lubricator 64 ; remove and discard the two preformed packings.
NOTE : If it proves difficult to remove the grooved lubricator, check that the pin is not elongated
~~ or bent. If it is, replace the complete pin.
B Clean all parts with white spirit, wipe with a dry cloth and then dry with moisture-free compressed
air.
C Thoroughly examine the surface of the pin for scratches, signs of binding, plastic deformation,
elongation, distortion, deep-seated corrosion, etc.
- If the pin is defective, replace it.
D Inspect the bores of the universal joint crosspiece for signs of binding or plastic deformation,
scratches, deep-seated corrosion, etc.
- If the bores are defective, replace the crosspiece.
E Screw the grease nipple onto the grooved lubricator and inject a small amount of grease, making
sure that it is expelled through the lubricating holes on either side of the lubricator, then remove the
grease nipple.
5- REINSTALLATION OF PIN
A Fit nut 66 onto the grooved lubricator and install two new preformed packings.
B Fit the grooved lubricator into the pin bore and align the holes of stop bolt 65.
C Screw on the grease nipple and inject grease until is expelled through the lubricating holes of the
pin. Apply a film of grease to the pin, then remove the grease nipple.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/U^^Til
BREGUET AVIATION ^^F°^^>C>
MIRAGE F
6- REINSTALLATION OF UNIVERSAL JOINT CROSSPIECE
A Install crosspiece 62, ensuring that it is correctly positioned.
B Insert pin 63, installing nut 66 on the swivel coupling side. Fit play take-up washer 76 at the
appropriate time.
+ 01
C Line up the hole of stop bolt 65 and install it. Torque its nut to 0.6 , n' m.daN
(4.42 + °'73 ft.lb).
D Installation of swivel coupling
- Position the swivel coupling in such a way that the structure-side unions of the hydraulic lines
fit into their respective positions. Tighten the unions by hand.
- Install the swivel coupling, with the rotatable section positioned as required for connection
of the jack lines. Engage the square end fitting in the grooved lubricator, then insert driving stud 80
of the fixed barrel into the hole provided in the fitting.
- Tighten nut 66 by hand, then torque it to 2 ± 0.5 m.daN (14.7 ± 3.6 ft.lb).
- Tighten the hydraulic line unions (see 07-0).
E Check that the crosspiece rotates freely by manually turning it.
F Reinstall the grease nipple on the grooved lubricator and grease the pin.
7- FINAL STEPS
- Safety nut 66 (lockwire).

- Reinstall the truss jack (see 05-3).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
COUPE A
SECTION A
Noix de cardan
Crosspiece
vZî\__Extracteur
'/A M31153
Extractor
M31153
FIGURE 16M - DEPOSE-POSE DE LA NOIX DE CARDAN DU VERIN CONTREFICHE

REMOVAL-INSTALLA TION OF TRUSS JACK UNIVERSAL JOINT CROSSPIECE
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ>~ZZX
BREGUET AVIATION ^-*- -^
MIRAGE F
DISASSEMBLY - ASSEMBLY OF A SHOCK ABSORBER FOR

SEAL REPLACEMENT
A Special tools
B Standard tools
- Accessory kit for torque wrench 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb).
- Borescope

-Fluid drain pan.
D Spares
-Seals
- 1 retaining ring 7100-0060A070T
- 2 split pins 23310 AA 030030LE
- 1 split pin 23310 AA 020020LE
I
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
-Solvent D1 Pyrolac 1591
- Mastinox compound 6856 H
- Copper sulphate
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
B - Removal of link rod 155 (figure 12).
(1 ) Place the link rod perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the shock absorber. Push pin 1 58 into
the link rod by means of a threaded rod (M8 x 0.5) after removing its retaining ring.
(2) Hold the link rod and drive out pin 156 complete with its grooved lubricator by means of an
18-mm (0.7086-in) diameter fiber drift.
(3) Remove filler plug 103 with care as there may have been leakage between the gas and fluid
chambers.
C Remove sealant from bottom 120 (area marked M in figure 8) and ends of pin 121.
NOTE : If several shock absorbers are overhauled together, disassemble only one shock absorber at
a time, to avoid mixing parts. Do not separate cams 104 and 107, as these parts are paired.
CAUTION :
DURING THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS, IT IS NECESSARY TO HANDLE WITH CARE
AND PROTECT THE PART MENTIONED BELOW, SINCE CERTAIN AREAS ARE PLASTI¬
CIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO SHOCKS AND
SCRATCHES :
-separator piston 1 1 1 (outside diameter).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^,^
ti ^-"zXL
^
MIRAGE F
4- DISASSEMBLY (Fig. 8)
WARNING :
BEFORE STARTING ANY DISASSEMBLY OPERATION, FULLY DISCHARGE THE SHOCK
ABSORBER BY OPENING CHARGING VALVE 123, AFTER REMOVING THE PROTECTIVE
CAP. THEN, REMOVE FILLER PLUG 103, PROCEEDING WITH CARE, AS THE GAS AND
FLUID CHAMBERS MAY HAVE BEEN INTERCONNECTED.
A Drain fluid from chambers
B - Clamp cylinder 106 in vice (Protective jaws C47017).
C Remove rod assembly 102 as follows :
(1) Remove retaining ring from threaded bush 110. Withdraw the latter and slide it along rod
(Adapter C4701 6).
(2) Slide bush 109 along rod (two extrator levers D46235).
(3) Mark position of upper cam 107 relative to cylinder 106.
(4) Depress the four pins 108.
(5) Remove rod assembly.
(6) Recover the four pins 108.
D Remove bottom 120 as follows :
(1 ) Remove the two cotter pins from pin 121 .

(2) Drive out pin 121.
(3) Extract bottom.
(4) Remove charging valve 123.
E Remove separator piston assembly 111 from cylinder 106 (Extractor C47019).
F - Strip rod 102 as follows :
(1) Clamp rod in vice (Protective jaws C47018).

(2) Mark position of lower cam 104 relative to rod 102.
(3) Remove cotter pin from hollow screw 105.
(4) Remove hollow screw 105 (Adapter C47020).
(5) Remove following parts in succession from rod :
-cams 104 and 107
-bush 109
-threaded bush 110.
5- CLEANING
A Before cleaning the internal parts of the shock absorber, remove all seals, using the bent end of
spatulas 89901 and A46524 (use spatula A46524 only to remove seals from separator piston 111).
Systematically reject all rubber or teflon seals.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^^-Kl /Ylllx/^NJT- I
BREGUET AVIATION ^<Z0>
^ ^5^S
^-^ Restricted .MANUAL
. a m. . a . nr-
05
B - Clean all internal parts of the shock absorber with white spirit and dry with moisture-free
compressed air.
C Clean the parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound by means of PYROLAC sol¬
vent (threaded bush 110, cylinder 106, bottom 120 and pin 121).
6 - CHECK
A - Ensure that the chromium-plating of cylinder 106 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If this
surface is questionable, wipe it (clean and dry) by means of a rag soaked in copper sulfate ;
flaked areas will appear red.
B - Make sure that no part is oxidized.
NOTE: Any incipient oxidation in the bottom section of cylinder 106 or on the outside diame¬
ter of bottom 120 may be removed if deemed necessary (See 05-0).
C - Check sealing areas of moving or stationary parts for dents and circular or longitudinal
scratches ; specially check the outer surface of separator piston 1 1 1 which is rilsan plasticized.
D - Check threads for condition (plastic deformation, stripping).
E - Carefully inspect seal grooves.
F - Check the helical grooves of cams 1 04 and 1 07.
G - Using a borescope, check that :

-retaining screw 1 19 of mask 1 18 is correctly safetied (peening mark in a notch),
-stop screw 1 26 of valve 1 1 7 is correctly safetied (peening mark in the screw slot).
NOTE: If checking is unsatisfactory, forward the shock absorber to the next higher repair line.
7 - INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY
A - Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds.
-For composition of seals on outer periphery of cam 104 and separator piston 111, see
05-0, figure 7, view G'.
-These parts may have oversize dimensions (see 05-0).
NOTE: The precautions to be taken to install seals and assemble parts are specified in manual
05-0.
B - Sparingly smear the bore of cylinder 106 with hydraulic fluid.
8 - ASSEMBLY
A - Fitting-out of rod 102
(1 ) Mount the following parts in succession on the rod, observing proper direction :
-threaded bush 110,
-bush 109,
-cam 107,
-cam 104.
(2) Clamp the rod in the vise (protective jaws C4701 8).
(3) Locate lower cam 104 as identified during disassembly. Install and torque hollow screw
105 (Adapter C47020) to 5.5 ± 1 m.daN (40.5 ± 7.3 ft.lb) and safety with a new cotter pin
previously adjusted to length to prevent protrusion in the hollow screw bore.
B - Clamp cylinder 106 in the vise (protective jaws C47017).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^£.
ti ^J>-^zVl
^
MIRAGE F
C Fully insert separator piston assembly 111 into cylinder 106 (axle box side), carefully locating
guide rod 1 12 through restrictor 1 15 (Extractor C47019).
D- Insert bottom 120.
(1) Apply a coat of Mastinox compound (area identified XXX) on the section of bottom 120 which
is fitted in cylinder 106, and insert it while preventing the seal from being soiled with Mastinox
compound. Align the bores.
(2) Apply a coat of Mastinox compound on pin 121, install it and safety with a new split pin.
(3) Fit charging valve 123 to bottom 120, tighten to a torque of 1 to 1.25 m.daN (7.3 to 9.2 ft.lb)
(19 mm A/F spanner), safety with lockwire ; screw the valve core.
E Install rod assembly 102 as follows :
(1) Insert only lower cam 104 of rod assembly into cylinder 106.
(2) Install the four pins 108 in bores in upper cam 107 and locate the latter on cylinder 106, as
identified during disassembly. Safety both parts to each other by means of pins 108.
(3) Install bush 109.
(4) Coat threads of bush 110 with Mastinox compound. Install and torque tighten bush (Adapter
C47016) to 13 ± 2.5 m.daN (95.8 ± 18.4 ft.lb).
NOTE : Tightening the threaded bush may misalign the bush safetying hole in relation to that in
cylinder 106. In such a case, back drill to 1.2 ._ Q . mm through the bush bore as shown in
the figure (Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the sliding rod).
(5) Lock threaded bush 1 10 by means of a retaining ring.
9- FINAL STEPS
A Perform shock absorber filling and fluid level adjustment (See 05-0).
B Run a sealant bead around bottom 120 (area identified as M in figure 8) and on ends of pin 121.
C If required, ref inish paint (see 05-0).
D Perform installation on aircraft (See 05-3) or storage (See 05-1), as applicable.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT tLJ>îZX.
BREGUET AVIATION Ô^L-^^
MIRAGE F
^^^-^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY OF A TRUSS JACK FOR

SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 17)
A Special tools
- Undercarriage hydraulics 2nd line tool kit
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 1 50 ft.lb).

- Fluid drain pan
- Work bench press.
D Spares
-Seals
- 1 lockplate for adjustable rod end nut
- 1 retaining ring for guide rod attaching nut
- 2 lockplates for switch studs.
2- MATERIALS

- White spirit
-Sealant PR 1422 B2
- Copper sulphate
-Grease Air 421 5.
B Remove all lockwires, except from the jack valve box.
C Remove sealant from areas identified M with a spatula, taking care not to damage the surface
protective coating.
D Remove storage plugs.
E Remove the switch (see 05-6).
F Clamp the jack in the vice (protective jaws C47021 ).
NOTE : If several jacks are overhauled together, disassemble only one jack at a time, to avoid mixing
parts. Do not separate bush 46 and sleeve 38, as these parts are paired.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/* ^ J' ** / V \| [\/-\V-7l_
BREGUET AVIATION ^,_^
.^ JÎ«<>
^~^> .»-.»
Restricted j im a m
i i a i
MANUAL ne
05
CAUTION:
DURING THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS, IT IS NECESSARY TO CAREFULLY HAN¬
DLE AND PROTECT THE PARTS MENTIONED BELOW, SINCE CERTAIN AREAS ARE
PLASTICIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO SHOCKS
AND SCRATCHES.
-Counter-rod 30 (outside diameter)
-Bush 46 (outside diameter)
- Piston 45 (outside diameter)
- Bottom 39 (outside diameter)
4 -DISASSEMBLY
(Jack with sliding rod unlocked).
A - Remove coupling 24 (10 mm A/F wrench) and recover filter 49.
B - Remove switch plate and socket assembly (3/8 in A/F wrench) as follows :
(1 ) Unsafety (lockplate) and remove the two studs 50. Discard lockplates.
(2) Remove following parts in succession :
-plate 51,
-rocker 34,
-socket 52.
C - Remove adjustable rod end 41 as follows :

(2) Hold adjustable rod end and loosen nut 42 (34 mm A/F wrench) so as to clear lockplate
53 and remove key 54.
(3) Remove rod end 41 and reject lockplate 53.
D - Remove bottom assembly 23 as follows :
(1) Loosen nut 28 ONE TO THREE THREADS MAXIMUM (wrench M46550 - Adapter
C46473).
(2) Compress jack with a press by placing yoke of bottom 23 on thrust part C47022 and in¬
terposing thrust part C47497 between press chuck and bottom 39.
(3) Maintain pressure and remove nut 28 (Wrench A21978).
-Recover two-part ring 55 and key 56.
(4) Slowly release pressure while watching progressive extension of spring 35.
(5) Remove jack from press.
(6) CAREFULLY separate bottom 23 from cylinder 25 by pulling in line with jack until coun¬
ter-rod 30 is fully cleared.
E - Strip bottom 23 as follows :
(1 ) Clamp counter-rod 30 in vise (Protective jaws C47024).

(2) Remove retaining ring 57 and nut 31 (Wrench C47025).
(3) Remove bottom 23 from counter-rod assembly 30 and withdraw following parts from the
latter by means of compression fixture C47070 :
-two-part ring 58,
-cup 36,
-spring 35,
-locking piston 32.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT «XWL-JTS /Y\l l\/-\V^L_
^&^
BREGUET AVIATION ^<-l J^Cb
^~=^ -
Restncted âhamiiai
MANUAL ne
05
F - Remove sliding rod assembly 40 as follows :
(1 ) Remove locking sleeve 29.

(2) Install guide cone C47026 on sliding rod 40.
(3) Carefully withdraw sliding rod assembly (claw lock side) from cylinder 25 (during this
operation avoid any sharp movement which may indent the cylinder bore).
G - Strip sliding rod assembly 40 as follows :
(1 )Clamp sliding rod in vise (Protective jaws C47030).

(2) Remove retaining ring 59.
(3) Remove nut 43 (Wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473).
(4) Remove sliding rod from vise apd withdraw following parts :
-nut 43,
-bush 46 and spacer 47 assembly,
-piston 45,
-washer 60,
-claw lock 44.
H - Remove following parts from cylinder 25 :
(1 )Clamp cylinder 25 in vise (Protective jaws C47021 ).

| (2) Nut 37 (Wrench 46549 - Adapter C46473).
(3) Bottom 39.
(4) Sleeve 38 (Extractor C47177).
5 - CLEANING
A - Before cleaning the parts, remove all seals, using the bent end of spatulas 89901 and
A46524 (use spatula A46524 only to remove seals from piston 45, counter-rod 30, and bot¬
tom 39). Systematically reject all rubber or Teflon seals.
C - Clean parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound by means of PYROLAC solvent :
-threads of nuts 28 and 87, bottom 28, cylinder 25, studs 50 and screws 48,
-mating surfaces of socket 52, plate 51 and coupling 24,
-key 56 and two-part ring 56.
6 - CHECK
A - Ensure that external surface of cylinder 25 is free of dents.
B - Cerefully inspect seal grooves.
C - Make sure that no part is oxidized.

D - Check threads for condition (peening, stripping).
AA
BREGUET
L^^zrX
AVIATION^3P=7^<^0>
MIRAGE F
m ami Al ne
l
E Check all moving or stationary parts that provide sealing for evidence of seizing or scratching
(circular or longitudinal).
F Ensure that the chromium-plating of sliding rod 40 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If its condi¬
tion is questionable, wipe the surface (which must be clean and dry) with a rag soaked in copper sul¬
phate ; flaked areas will appear red.
G Check for dents and scratches on rilsan-plasticized surfaces (outside diameters of bush 46, guide
rod 30 and piston 45, and inside diameter of bottom 39).
H Check claw lock 44 for condition.
I Check the locator on plate 51 for condition.
J Check brackets 26 and 27 for condition.
A Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds. Use the following tools to install teflon seals :
- assembly cone S1 6-0609-0341 for seals 75 and 76 on rod 30,
- forming cone S16-0605-0391 for seal 61 on bottom 39.
NOTE : Refer to manual 05-0 for the precautions to be taken when installing seals and assembling
parts.
B Lightly coat the following with hydraulic fluid :

- bore of cylinder 25,
- bore of rod 40 housing guide rod 30.
C Lightly coat the following with grease Air 4215 (parts marked G) :
- following bores of rod 40 :
- large diameter on claw lock side,
- bottom of blind hole receiving rod end 41,
- locking sleeve 29,
- bore of adjustable rod end 41,
- outside diameter of guide rod 30, taking care not to soil the seals,
- spring 35,
- cup 36,
- two-part ring 38,
- locking piston 32, exclusive of the surfaces receiving the seals,
- lever 33,
- claw lock 44,
- washer 60,
- inside of bottom 23, exclusive of the bore receiving guide rod 30.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _^<_- jj^j _ . ..,....,, nc
^ -s-^ Restncted MANUAL 05
8 - ASSEMBLY
(1) Install the following parts on sliding rod, in correct position :
-claw lock 44,
-washer 60,
-piston 45,
-bush 46 and spacer 47 assembly,
-nut 43.
(2) Clamp the sliding rod in the vise (Protective jaws C47030).
(3) Install and torque tighten nut 43 to 16.5 ± 3.3 m.daN (121.6 ± 24 ft.lb). (Wrench
A21978 - Adapter C46473).
NOTE: Tightening the nut may misalign the nut safetying hole in relation to the sliding rod
hole. In such a case, counterbore to 1.2 Q « mm diameter and 7.5 mm (0.2952 in)
depth, as shown in the figure (do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in
the sliding rod).
B - Fit out bottom 23 as follows :
(1) Clamp counter-rod 30 in vise (Protective jaws C47024).

(2) Install following parts in succession on counter-rod 30 :
-locking piston 32,
-spring 35,
-cup 36.
(3) Compress spring 35 (Compression fixture C47070).
(4) Install two-part ring 58 and remove compression fixture.
(5) Cover counter-rod locking system with bottom 23, placing bottom port accommodating
switch socket, in front of lever 33 of locking piston 32.
(6) Coat threads of nut 31 with Mastinox compound.
(7) Install and torque tighten nut 31 (Wrench C47025) to 1 .5 ± 0.3 m.daN (1 1 ± 2.2 ft.lb).
NOTE: Tightening the nut may misalign the nut safetying hole in relation to the counter-rod
hole. In such a case, back drill 1 .2 _ 0 1 mm diameter through locating port, as
shown in the figure. (Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial hole in the
counter-rod).
C - Install sliding rod assembly 40 as follows :
(1) Clamp cylinder 25 in vise (Protective jaws C47021). Screw guide cone C47026 on slid¬
ing rod 40. Hold sliding rod.
(2) Fully insert following parts into cylinder 25 :
-sleeve 38 (correctly directed),
-bottom 39.
(3) Install nut 37 with threads previously coated with Mastinox compound.
-Torque to 30 m.daN (221.2 ft.lb).
-Loosen the nut, then torque again to 14.5 ± 3 m.daN (107 ±22 ft.lb).
(4) Carrefully insert sliding rod assembly into bore of cylinder 25.
(5) Remove guide cone.
(6) Install locking sleeve 29 on cylinder 25.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /LJ^Mi / V\H\/-\VJ'l_
BREGUET AVIATION^-£0*
^«. ^-^S
^-^> n ^ . ^
Restricted . mi ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
D - Install bottom assembly 23 as follows :
(1) Coat threads of nut 28 with Mastinox compound and install nut on cylinder 25.
(2) Pack hollow portion of cylinder 25 to be covered by bottom 23 (area identified G in fig¬
ure) with grease AIR 4215.
(3) Locate bottom assembly, carefully install counter-rod 30 in bore of sliding rod 40 and as¬
semble bottom 23 with cylinder 25 so as to align key slots.
(4) Compress jack with a press (Thrust parts C47022 and C47497) (See disassembly).
5) Install key 56, two-part ring 55 previously coated with Mastinox compound and nut 28.
6) Remove jack from press and clamp it in vise (Protective jaws C47021 ).
~ Torque tighten nut 28 (Wrench A21978 - Adapter C46473) to 34 m.daN (250 ft.lb).
Loosen nut 28, then torque again to 17 ± 3.5 m.daN (125.5 ± 25.8 ft.lb).
I.S
E - Install adjustable rod end 41 as follows :
(1 } Coat threads of adjustable rod end with Mastinox compound.

(2) Mount a new lockplate 53 on rod end (equipped with nut 42) and screw rod end in slid¬
ing rod 40 so as to adjust jack to following theoretical dimension :
-center-to-center distance, with sliding rod fully extended : 1123 ± 0.5 mm
(44.2125 ± 0.0196 in).
NOTE: The travel is 380 ± 1 mm (14.9606, ,± 0.0393 in).
3) Align key slots.
4) Install key 54 and bend tab of lockplate 53 down in a notch of sliding rod 40.
5) Hold adjustable rod end and torque tighten nut 42 (34 mm A/F wrench) to
S ± 0.5 m.daN (44.2 ± 3.6 ft.lb).
F - Install coupling 24 as follows :
(1 )Install a new filter 49 in housing for coupling.

(2) Moderately coat the following with Mastinox compound :
-surface of coupling in contact with bottom 23,
-threads of screws 48.
(3) Install coupling, observing correct direction.
(4) Attach coupling by means of the two screws 48 and washers, and lockwire screws.
G - Install switch plate and socket assembly as follows :
(1 ) Moderately coat the following with Mastinox compound :

-fitting diameter of socket 52 and its surfaces bearing on bottom 23 and plate 51 ,
-threads of studs 50.
(2) Coat the following with grease AIR 421 5 :
-self-aligning bearing of rocker 34,
-housing of rocker in socket 52,
-spherical recess of plate 51 .
(3) Locate locking piston lever 33 through housing in bottom 23 for above assembly, using
locating wrench 14138-J.
(4) Assemble :
-socket 52,
-rocker 34 (piston rocker elbow marked "C" opposite mark "P" on rod fitted to socket
52).
-plate 51.
(5) Install above assembly in housing in bottom 23, observing correct direction.
(6) Mount a new lockplate on each stud 50 (fitted with nuts and washers) and tighten studs
(3/8 in A/F wrench). Safety studs by bending tabs of lockplates down on plate 51 .
Tightening torque 0.6 + §-1 m.daN (4.43 + j}'74 ft.lb).
(7) Check that rocker 34 moves freely. It should rock about its spherical hinge under a load
no greater than 0.2 daN (0.45 Ibf) applied on its end.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
t
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT i^J>-^Z\l
^&. ^^ .
MIRAGE
......... _
F
9- FINAL STEPS
C - Test jack (See 05-5).
D Torque again nut 28 (see para. 8-D(7)) and nut 37 (see para. 8-C(4)).
- Loosen nut by approximately 1/6 turn, then torque so as to align nut safetying hole with the
corresponding groove in cylinder.
- Should this alignment not be possible within the torque tolerances, counterbore a new hole
to dia. 1 .5 at 2 mm (0.078 in) from nut edge through to cylinder groove, and tangential to the groove
side that is opposite to the tightening direction. Do not drill the new hole tangential to the initial
hole in the nut.
E Lockwire (0.8 mm dia) the nuts.
F Apply a complementary protective coat of sealant (areas identified M) :

-on the threads of counter-rod 30, nut 31, and between nut and bottom 23,
- in the annular recess of nuts 28 and 37, as well as at the joint of nut 37 with cylinder 25, and
of nut 28 with bottom 23,
- on the mating surfaces of socket 52, and bottom 23, and of plate 51 and socket 52,
- on the mating surfaces of coupling 24 and bottom 23.
G If required, touch up paint (see 05-0).
H Depending on the jack destination, prepare it for installation (see 05-3) or store it (see 05-1).
NOTE : The visible threads of rod end 41, as well as the surface of locknut 42 in contact with the
end of sliding rod 40 and the recesses of the notch of key 54 and the tab of lockwasher
53 shall be protected with a bead of sealant PR 1321 A2 (areas identified MR in the figure)
after final adjustment on aircraft, tightening and safetying of locknut 47.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ê33
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
36-G
58-G
FIGURE 17 - DEMONTAGE - REMONTAGE D'UN VERIN CONTREFICHE

DISASSEMBL Y ASSEMBL Y OF A TRUSS JA CK
AB
BREGUET
L^-^ZTX
AVIATIONÎ^^£<C>
MIRAGE F
DISASSEMBLY - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF AN ELASTIC ROD

(figure 12)
1 - SCOPE
To lubricate or replace the set of washers.
A Special tools
B - Standard tools

-Work bench press
D Spares
- 1 cylindrical oin C59298
- 1 split pin 23310AA015015LE
3- MATERIALS
-White spirit
- Quick-setting molykote grease G
- Moisture-free compressed air supply.
Mount protective jaws (fiber or lead) on the work bench vice.
NOTE : If several elastic rods-are overhauled together, disassemble only one elastic rod at a time, to
" avoid mixing parts.
5- DISASSEMBLY
A - MODERATELY clamp the elastic rod in the vice by its body (21 ).
B Remove the split pin locking threaded bush 27 and remove the latter (adapter C47188).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTJU^rii 7Vl I KM O L I
BREGUET AV.AT.ON^g^<^ RestHcted MANUAL 05
C Remove rod 23 complete with set of washers 25.

D - Strip rod 23 as follows :
(1 ) Moderately clamp self-aligned end of rod 23 in vice.

(2) Drive out pin from threaded bush 26 and remove the latter (20 mm A/F spanner).
(3) Remove set of washers 25 as an assembly.
DO NOT CHANGE THE STACKING ORDER OF THE WASHERS. TO THIS END, PASS A
LOCKWIRE THROUGH THE SET OF WASHERS AND ATTACH.
(The set of washers 25 is composed of 26 opposing washers).
(4) Remove threaded bottom 27 complete with shim washer.
6- CLEANING
A Clean all parts with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air
B Clean parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound
compoi by means of PYROLAC solvent (threads
of bottom
' " rod"23 and threaded bush 26).
27, rod body 21, 26)
7- CHECK
A Ensure that external surface of rod body 21 is free of dents.
B Make sure that no part is oxidized.
C Check threads for condition (peening, stripping).
D Check bush fitted to rod body 21 for security of attachment, and bush bore for condition.
NOTE : If checking is unsatisfactory, forward the elastic rod to the next higher repair line.
E Check condition of washers 25 for corrosion, distortion, cracks :

- if one washer is faulty, the whole set should be replaced.
8- ASSEMBLY
A Fit out rod 23 as follows :
(1 ) Moderately clamp self-aligned end of rod 23 in vice.

(2) Install threaded bottom 27 equipped with shim washer on rod 23.
(3) install set of washers 25.
NOTE : Do not change the stacking order of the washers, if the same set of washers is to be installed.
(4) Coat threads of rod 23 with MASTINOX compound.
(5) Install and tighten threaded bush 26 (20 mm A/F spanner) to align safetying holes (tightening
torque should be of 0.5 m.daN (3.6 ft.lb)).
(6) Safety with a new pin coated with MASTINOX compound.
-Make sure that the pin ends do not stick out of the external diameter of bush.
(7) Apply a thick coat of grease to spring washers 25.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f *W-« /YMlx/Av^C I
BREGUET AVIATION^ ^c^^ . . ......... r-
B - Moderately clamp rod body 21 in vice.
C - Coat threads of bush 27 with Mastinox compound and install rod 23 fitted with set of
washers 25 in rod body 21 .
. D - Install and tighten threaded bush 27 (Adapter C47188) in order to align safetying holes
| (tightening torque should be of 1 m.daN (7.3 ft.lb)).
E - Safety by means of a new split pin, with pin head inside threaded bush.
9 - FINAL STEPS
(REF: Theoretical length: 129 * °q2 mm (5.03 * 0°078 jn)).

A - Mount elastic rod on press and perform several compression and extension cycles (maxi-
| mum travel X = 3 ± 0.5 mm (0.1181 ± 0.0196 in)), according to the case met:
1 st case:
Elastic rod, with set of washers 25 not replaced.
- Perform 5 cycles.
2nd case:
Elastic rod, with set of washers 25 renewed.
- Perform 20 cycles.
B - Perform elastic rod installation on aircraft (see 05-3) or storage (see 05-1), as applicable.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^ZZ^X. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^L^Ô . ««amiiai nr-
OVERALL INSPECTION OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

- 24-V inspection light.
Open the rear door by hand.
WARNING :
3- PROCEDURE
A Undercarriage leg
(1 ) Check paintwork for condition

-
Carefully inspect paintwork for any defects which might be harboring corrosion points (e.g. :
-
impact marks, blistering or flaking).
- If any corrosion points are found on the mounting boss which receives the nose wheel steering
selector valve support, it will be necessary to remove both valve and support for checking of mating
surfaces.
-On undercarriage cylinders protected by compound PR 1432 GP, carefully inspect the coated
surfaces for any deterioration of the compound which might lead sooner or later to onset of corrosion.
- If dubious surfaces are found, perform corrosion prevention operations and paint touch-up
(see manual 05-0).
(2) Ensure that :

all grease fittings are in place and screwed tight,
-
- safetying of all safetied parts is efficient,
- hydraulic pipe cleats and other supports are in satisfactory condition and correctly attached,
- the U/C uplocking roller turns freely and that the roller pin is correctly attached by its circlips,
- the shock absorber charging valve cover is correctly secured,
- the charging valve is in satisfactory condition and provided with a protective cover,
- the shock absorber sliding rod is free of dents, chromium-plating flaking, evidence of hydraulic
fluid, and that it is clean,.
- electrical wires are correctly attached, that the nuts are in place and tightened, and that the
clamps and supports are in good condition, particularly the support mounted on the quick-release
fastener pin of the torque link center hinge (modification 627 incorporated),
- the movable electrical connectors are correctly locked,
- the swivel coupling and door control link rods are correctly secured,
- each axle nut is properly safetied (bolts),
- the various swivel couplings (upper section of cylinder) and pipes do not show evidence of
hydraulic fluid leakage or seepage,
- the nut of torque link center hinge pin is correctly safetied (pawl),
- at the torque link center hinge pin, check that the lateral play between the two links is smaller
than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) ; otherwise, readjust the torque link center hinge (see 05-3).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// Z&^-z^S. »V\ I KM \J L. I
BREGUET AVIATIONô. --^ - . .* ami a nr-
- the static discharger is correctly adjusted and in good condition,

- the control link rod of the switch on lower torque link is in satisfactory condition,
- the tow fitting is properly secured and provided with spare shear pins,
- no object remains in the recess at the top of the cylinder.
B Truss jack
Ascertain that :
- cardan joint grease fitting is in place and tightened.
- nuts of hinge pins on structural box and airframe sides are correctly safetied,
-equipment (switch, valve box, restrictor, pressure inlets and outlet) is correctly attached and
safetied.
- lock nut of adjustable rod end is tightened (manual check) and correctly safetied,
- chromium-plating of sliding rod is free of dents, scratches and flakes,
-electrical wires are correctly secured to appropriate places and insulating conduit is not
deteriorated.
- couplings, pipes and jack body and sliding rod do not show evidence of hydraulic fluid leakage or
seepage.
C Swivelling coupling
- Check swivelling coupling for security of attachment to airframe hinge pin.

- Ensure that there is no hydraulic fluid leakage or seepage.
D - Uplock
Check uplock for security of attachment

-
Check hook for condition.
-
- Ensure that electrical wires are in satisfactory condition and that electrical plug is correctly
locked.
- Check grease fitting for condition and tightening.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Close aft door.
AA
03-85 Restricted I 3-502
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// ^J>^Z\Ï
BREGUET AVIATION^<^_ ___ .
MIRAGE
......
F
CHECK OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG OPERATING FACTOR

(figure 18)
1- SCOPE
This operation consists in checking the operating factor of the nose undercarriage leg so as to
determine its aging condition.
A - Standard tools
I- Totalizer dial indicator with magnetic support

- Screw clamp
- Jack up the aircraft so that its wheels clear the ground (see 02-2).
WARNING :
OBSERVE THE SAFETY RULES (see 01-0).
4- PROCEDURE
A Determination of operating factor
(1) Play of sliding rod (view A)

(a) Place the dial indicator on the leg as shown in the figure (magnetic support positioned on swivel
tube and dial indicator feeler set against the sliding rod, as close as possible to the lower bracket of
the swivel tube).
(b) Take up the hinge play by exerting a sufficient pressure at the bottom of the sliding rod, in direc¬
tion of the aircraft tail.
(c) Set the dial of the indicator to graduation 0.
(d) Exert a sufficient pressure at the bottom of the sliding rod, in direction of the aircraft nose, and
take the reading on the indicator dial.
(2) Play of swivel tube (view B)
(a) With the magnetic support still located on the swivel tube, bring the dial indicator feeler as low
as possible onto the U/C cylinder (see figure).
(b) Perform the same operations as in (1 ).
(3) Determining the total play
Add up the two values recorded ; the result is the operating factor.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ Jl ^ / V\|r\/-\V_7L.
BREGUET AVIATION ^<^_~- ê?-*^, ^ . mi a mm ai nr-
^ -*^^> Restricted MANUAL 05
IMPORTANT NOTE :
The maximum permissible value is 1 mm (0.0393 in).
B - Checking the clearance of the swivel tube upper bracket

(1 ) Remove the selector valve unit (see 05-8).
(2) Place the dial indicator on the selector valve unit support as in detail A, with the feeler in
contact with the swivel tube cam. Secure the dial indicator base with the screw clamp.
(3) Proceed as in A - (1).
(4) The maximum permissible value is 0.15 mm (0.005 in).
C - Checking the clearances of torque link hinges and center hinge
-Upper and lower hinges.

-Check the lateral clearances (J1 and J2) in the upper and lower hinges of the tor¬
que links :
-Apply a lateral force to the torque link concerned as close as possible to the
hinge to be checked.
- Using a set of feeler gauges, measure the total lateral clearance existing bet¬
ween the torque link and the clevis of the swivel tube or axle box. This clearance should be <,
0.22 mm (0.086 in).
NOTE : 1 - Should the clearance be between 0.22 mm (0.086 in) and 0.4 mm (0.157
in), ad just the hinge (see referenced card B1).
2 - Should the clearance be > 0.40 mm (0.157 in), send the equipment concerned to
the next higher repair line.
-Center hinge
-Check that clearance "J" is <, 0.150 mm (0.059 in).
Should the clearance exceed this value, readjust (see 05-3).
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see 02-2).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
Coupe partielle C-C

Détail A Partial section C-C
FIGURE 18 - CONTROLE DE L'INDICE D'UTILISATION DE L'ATTERRISSEUR AVANT

CHECKING OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG OPERATING FACTOR
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT zL=H^T'9L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^(ZsS^^gZ^ . animai ne
iui
TESTING OF A TRUSS JACK AFTER SEAL REPLACEMENT

- Ohmmeter.
2- MATERIALS
- Microfiltered hydraulic fluid Air 3520.
A Remove storage plugs from jack, valve box and switch.
B Install the truss jack on the test bench and connect test bench pipes to ports marked N on valve
box and B on jack body (at supply coupling).
C Correctly bleed the jack free of air by slowly performing sliding rod extension and retraction
cycles ; drop pressure.
D - Adjust the switch (see 05-6).
A Jack with sliding rod retracted (locked)
- Connect an ohmmeter to the switch connector and check continuity across terminals B and A,
Eand D, J and H.
B Sliding rod unlocking
(1) Progressively increase pressure through port B and ascertain that unlocking (begining of rod
extension) occurs when pressure is < 66 bar (957 psi).
(2) Continue supplying fluid to fully extend the sliding rod.
(3) Drop pressure.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" ^ /V\II\>,-\V-7L I
BREGUET AVIATION ^._~
^«. ^^^>
^ ^ ^ - ^
Restricted . miamii
MANUALai ne
05

-Check ohmmeter for circuit opening across above mentioned terminals ; continuity
should be across terminals B-C, E-F and J-K.
D - Sliding rod locking
(1) Increase pressure through port N to P = 210 bar (3045 psi). Locking should occur with
a back pressure at B of P £ 20 bar (290 psi).
(2) Drop pressures.
(3) Check rod locking as follows :
-Increase pressure through port B to P = 30 bar (435 psi). Sliding rod should not be ex¬
tended.
(4) Slowly retract and extend sliding rod for about ten minutes. Drop pressure and thor¬
oughly wipe jack and specially sliding rod by means of a clean rag.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE A JET OF COMPRESSED AIR WHICH MAY FORCE METAL PARTICLES
INSIDE.
5 - STATIC TESTS
A - Supply jack at a pressure between 1 and 5 bar (14 and 72.5 psi). Maintain pressure for
1 5 minutes. During this period of time, the possible leakage rate at the sliding rod should not
exceed 3 drops.
B - Drop pressure and wipe jack.
6 - DYNAMIC TESTS
A - Supply jack at a pressure of 210 bar (3045 psi) and perform 15 sliding rod retraction and
extension cycles.
B - Then, perform 25 cycles and ensure that no more than 3 drops fall down during these
cycles.
C - Complete testing by retracting sliding rod.
D - Drop pressure.
7 - FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF VALVE BOX EMERGENCY SYSTEM
A - Connect test bench pipe to port identified S on valve box.
B - Progressively increase pressure through port S, by means of hand pump.
C - Ensure that internal valve moves at a pressure P < 7 bar (101 .5 psi). The valve motion is
indicated by a slight pressure drop in the supply system.
D - Drop pressure.
8 - INTERNAL LEAK TEST

NOTE: This test must be performed with the hand pump.
sure through port AN.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at B is ^ 1 drop/min.
| 9 - FINAL STEPS
I C - Perform the operations specified in final steps after seal replacement.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLJè-^TX MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION XZZ&^^gT^ . ..animai ne
CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE WHEEL ALIGNMENT

(Figures 16 and 18M)
1 - SCOPE
To adjust wheel alignment in relation to nose wheel steering «0» point after replacement of a U/C
if the aircraft has a tendency to pull to the left or to the right when taxiing
leg, or after a hard landing, or
A Special tools
- Undercarriage hydraulics 1 st line tool kit

- Flight controls 1 st line tool kit
| - Wheel alignment checking tool 50 MS 1 38.
- Payan jack
I - Electrical power supply, 115-200 V/400 Hz
- Plumb line
- String (length : 10 m - 33 ft)
-Sensitive drill.
C Materials
- Adhesive tape (width : 50 mm - 2 in)

-White spirit
- Abrasive paper 3M Emery Polishing 410 Minnesota
- Approved chlorinated solvent
-Jenolite RRNI
- G rease Ai r 4222 or 42 1 0.
A Check the angles of deflection and nose wheel steering neutral position (See 05-8).
B Check the operating clearance of axle bearings (See 05-3).
C Check the play in torque link hinge (See para. 4-B).
D - Discharge the nose wheel shock absorber, fit collar C46863 to shock absorber rod and compress
the shock absorber against its stops using the Payan jack ; then install and tighten tensioner C46865 and
remove the jack.
E Attach the ruler support to one of the wheels.
F With the plumb line, establish the aircraft longitudinal axis on the ground and stretch a string
between the points marked on ground.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^5l
ti^^zZV.. MIRAGE F
4- PROCEDURE
A Wheel alignment check
- Pressurize hydraulic system 2.

- Perform several steering movements in high sensitivity mode, with full travel to the right and to
the left.
- Set the rudder control to neutral position. Actuate the rudder trim until it is possible to pin the
rudder quadrant at fin rib 1 A by means of pin MS1 390-20-830, then remove the pin.
- Install and tighten the ruler on its support against the edges of the wheel rim after aligning
its mid point with wheel axle centerline.
- Steer fully to the left and allow the rudder control to return to neutral position. Make sure that
the pin passes freely through the control quadrant at fin rib 1 A.
- Push the lower part of the shock absorber towards the rear (in the direction of the force caused
by ground rolling) to take up the swivel tube play on the distribution unit follower.
- Mark the points located at 1 meter (39.37 in) on either side of the axle centerline using the ruler
and plumb line ; keep the ruler horizontal with the clinometer.
- Measure the distances between the points obtained and the aircraft centerline, that is :
«L» at front and «L'» at rear.
- Steer fully to the right and allow the rudder control to return to neutral position. Make sure that
the pin passes freely through the control quadrant at fin rib 1 A.
- Push the lower part of the shock absorber towards the rear.
- Mark again the points located at 1 meter (39.37 in) on either side of the axle centerline using
the ruler and plumb line.
- Measure the distances between these new points and the aircraft centerline, that is :
«I» at front and «.'» at rear.
- Calculate the residual deflection in the control, i.e :
L - I or I' - L' ; it should be < 34.8 mm (1 .37 in).
- If the tolerance value is exceeded, adjust the deflection angles of the steering control (See 05-8).
- Check wheel parallelism :
(L + l) - 0' + L'), should be equal to 0 ± 5 mm (0.1968 in).
(2) (2)
If alignment is found to be out of tolerances, adjust the torque link center hinge in accordance
-
with para. B bellow.
B Adjustment of torque link center hinge
- Disconnect the torque link center hinge :

- disconnect the movable electrical connector and the grounding connector attached to the
upper torque link,
- unsafety knurled nut 178 (pawl 175), unscrew it and withdraw pin 174,
- separate torque links 59 and 140,
- on lower torque link 140, install hinge pin 174 fitted with its knurled nut 178 as well as the
electrical connector on its rest support.
- Remove the two bolts 67 on upper torque link and withdraw lockplates 66.
- Using wrench 46896, unscrew bushing 65 on the side of observed deflection by a value equal
to one lockplate notch.
- Reinstall the lockplate and its bolt 67, screw and tighten its nut.
- Introduce both torque links 59 and 140 and keep them aligned.
- Screw bushing 65 on the opposite side and torque to 3 m.daN (22.125 ft.lb) so that the sockets
of ball joint 144 of lower torque link 140 are compressed ; then unscrew up to the nearest lockplate
notch to give a slight operating clearance (maximum clearance : 0.125 mm - 0.0049 in).
NOTE : If it is found difficult to obtain sinking of ball joint 144 sockets due to excessively hard
sliding, readjust the diameter of inner socket 200 in accordance with requirements of para. C
below.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
- Install the second lockplate and its bolt. Screw and tighten the nut.
- Reconnect the torque link center hinge :
- introduce torque links 59 and 140 and connect them using pin 174 ; manually screw and
tighten knurled nut 178, fold down pawl 175 ;
- connect the electrical connector and the grounding connector to the corresponding
receptacles of the upper torque link.
- Check wheel alignment again.
- Proceed to gradual adjustment by successive lockplate notches until wheel alignment is brought
within tolerances.
- If the adjustment tolerance range permitted by the torque link hinge is insufficient to obtain
alignment, proceed as follows :
- put the center hinge back to mid point,
- adjust steering neutral point at distribution unit (see 05-8),
- perfect the adjustment using the torque link hinge.
- Remove the ruler and its support.
C Adjustment of ball joint sockets
- Remove sockets 200 and 201, recover cups 202 and 203 and record the assembly sequence.
- Clean the parts with white spirit and dry with dry compressed air.
- Install internal socket 200 on retaining tool, tighten the tool nut moderately to avoid distorting
the socket.
- Grip the tool by its stem (diameter 10 mm - 0.39 in) in the chuck of a sensitive drill.
- Polish the 15-mm (0.59-in) diameter section of the socket over its whole length using abrasive
paper dipped in water.
- Check the adjustment frequently, after cleaning the socket with white spirit each time,
until there is a slide fit (no binding) of socket 200 in socket 201 .
- Clean socket 200 with chlorinated solvent then dry with oil-free compressed air.
NOTE : Once this operation is finished, it is imperative to avoid touching the reworked area with
the hands.
- With a brush, apply undiluted Jenolite RRN1 to the reworked part until its surface shows
a crystalline appearance (about 1 minute).
- Rinse thoroughly with running water and dry with dry compressed air.
- Clean both sockets 200 and 201 with white spirit and dry with dry compressed air. Make sure
that all traces of filings and Jenolite are eliminated.
- Lightly coat the outside diameters of both sockets with grease.
- Install both sockets 200 and 201 with their two cups 202 and 203 on the lower torque link
observing the assembly sequence.
- Reconnect the torque link center hinge and perfect adjustment in accordance with para. B above.
dia 12+0
dia 10 -0.1 dia 28 M12x 100
(0.39 in)
(0.98 in) (0. 19 in) (1.334 in) (0.98 in)

Retaining tool
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^Z^Z9~. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^cF0^-^^ .. a m. . a . «r-
D Check of steering indicator light
- Remove the retaining device and slowly extend the shock absorber while charging it up to 5 bar
(72.5 psi) (see 05-0).
- Apply pressure to hydraulic system 2.
- Using the Payan jack, carry out a series of compression-release cycles of the shock absorber and
check that the light remains out.
Complete the sequence with the shock absorber compressed.
- Cut hydraulic supply to system 2 and drop the pressure.
Check that the indicator light comes on.
MODIFICATION 385 NOT INCORPORATED
Apply pressure to hydraulic system 2.

-
Using the Payan jack, carry out a series of compression
- - release cycles of the shock absorber
and check that the nose wheel steering indicator light :
-comes on as soon as compression cycle starts
goes out before complete extension of the shock absorber
- Fully extend the shock absorber and remove the jack.
NOTE : With the shock absorber completely extended, the wheels may be deflected by ± 1°30'.
- Cut off hydraulic supply and release pressure in system 2.
E Final steps
- Charge the shock absorber (see 05-0).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C 46865. C 46863
Axe roues
wheel axis
FIGURE-18M - PARALLELISME
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," vw' -*< /Y\li\/-AV^L.
BREGUET AVIATION Û-~ _^-^^> . miamiiai ne
^ ,*-o Restricted MANUAL 05
ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG

(Figure 19)
1 - SCOPE
To obtain correct operation of the undercarriage during the retraction and extension se¬
quences.
A - Special tools
-Undercarriage hydraulics 1st line tool kit
B - Standard tools
-Accessory kit for torque wrench 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb)

-Electrical power supply (1 1 5-200 V/400 Hz).
-Set of wheel jigs MS 1379A or 50 MS 040.
-Clinometer.
-A/C flight leveling sight tube.
-Right image theodolite.
3 - MATERIALS
- Prussian blue.
-Compound PR 1321 A1-2.
WARNING:
TAKE THE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 02-0).
A - The aircraft shall be in the following configuration :
-jacked up,
-wheels removed,
-torque link center hinge coupled,
-U/C fairings disconnected,
-rear U/C door open,
-gun spouts and wheel fairings in place.
B - Connect the hydraulic power unit, with slow-running outlet connected to self-sealing
couplings of system 1 .
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ J' ^ /V\lr\/-\V»7I_ l
BREGUET AVIATION^^-
^ j^^j
^j-ô _
Restricted ami i ai ne
ha
MANUAL 05
5 - SHOCK ABSORBER TRAVEL AND TRUSS JACK CLEARANCE
A - Lock nose leg in down position and drop pressure.
B - Check
(1 ) Shock absorber travel

-Measure and record length "A" of shock absorber sliding rod.
C - VERY SLOWLY retract nose leg while ensuring that:

-nose leg and equipment do not interfere with the structure,
-shock absorber is effectively retracted,
-there is a clearance between uplock hook nose and roller, at roller passage,
-there is no nose leg contact with the structure other than that of roller with hook.
D - Checks
(1 )Shock absorber travel

-"A" being the length of the shock absorber sliding rod (recorded in down position),
measure its new value "B" in this configuration.
Result should be: A - B = 180 ± 0.5 mm (7.0866 ± 0.0196 in).
(2) Truss jack clearance

-"J" being the clearance between the rod end lock nut and the jack body (recorded when
installing the jack), measure its new value "J1 ".
-The clearance should be:
J-J1 > 5 mm (0.196 in) with no pressure applied,
J-J1 > 3 mm (0.118 in) with pressure applied.
E - Adjustment
(1 ) Truss jack clearance

-Uncouple jack from nose leg (See 05-3) and adjust through rod end (See 05-0).
For information:
To increase the clearance, the rod end must be unscrewed; 1/6 turn = 0.25 mm
(0.0098 in).
6 - NOSE LEG ADJUSTMENT IN DOWN POSITION
(1 ) Place aircraft in line of flight (See 03-0).
B - Checks
(1 ) Caster action
-Uncouple the center hinge from the torque links.

-Place clinometer on rear generatrix of shock absorber sliding rod and measure angle 8
Measurement result should be: 6 = 2° ± 10'.
-Reconnect the center hinge to the torque links.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^<==
MIRAGE F
CARROSSAGE
CHASSE
COURSE AMORTISSEUR
CASTOR ACTION
WHEEL CAMBER
SHOCK ABSORBER TRA VEL
Rondelles de centrage/ ».
shim-washers
îentrage de l'olive Jeu de passage Portée de l'olive
Roller centering de l'olive à~rs h crochet
**
Roller passage Roller seating in
clearance hook
,_ B r-A
Axe fusée Axle axis

Horizontale axe
d'articulation
Horizontal hinge
ACCROCHAGE EN POSITION HAUTE axis
LOCKING IN UP POSITION
FIGURE 19 - CONTROLE ET REGLAGE DE L'ATTERRISSEUR AVANT

CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE UNDERCA RRIA GE LEG
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(2) Wheel camber

-Place clinometer on upper generatrix of wheel axle and measure angle a.
Measurement result should be a = 0° ± 10'.
C - Adjustments
(1 ) Caster action
-The caster action can be adjusted by changing the length of the truss jack in locked ex¬
tended position.
-Uncouple jack from nose leg (see 05-3) and adjust jack through rod end (see 05-0),
observing requirements of para. 5-D (2).
(2) Wheel camber
-No adjustment is possible.
(3) Check the wheel alignment adjustment.
7 - ELASTIC ROD TRAVEL

The pull travel of the elastic rod is submitted to the U/C caster angle setting.
After a U/C leg replacement, a caster angle should be found within the range of toler¬
ances, so as to determine a 3 ± 0.5 mm (0.118 ± 0.019 in) travel of the elastic rod.
Proceed as follows :
-record distance across centers "L" on elastic rod being at rest,
-position the extensible rod M31127 (lock screw not tightened) in replacement of elastic
rod, by engaging pins without tightening nuts,
-set the U/C leg caster angle to 2° by acting upon the adjustable end of the truss jack,
-firmly hold all the retraction rods against the limit stop inside U/C cylinder and tighten
the lock screw of extensible rod in that position,
-remove the extensible rod and record distance "L" obtained,
-proceed this way through successive adjustments of U/C caster angle until the extensi¬
ble rod distance across centers = L + 3 ± 0.5 mm (L + 0.118 ± 0.019 in) corresponding to a
caster angle within tolerances : 2° ± 10',
-for information, the extension travel of elastic rod may be increased by reducing the U/C
caster angle.
NOTE: "U/C down" locking pressure may be increased by increasing the elastic rod travel.
-check the U/C down locking and unlocking pressures.
A - Lock nose leg in down position and check locking pressure (see 05-6).
B - Unlock nose leg and check unlocking pressure (see 05-6)
-If required, readjust elastic rod travel within tolerance limits determined to obtain a lock¬
ing pressure within tolerances.
-Summary
Caster Elastic U/C down- Truss

angle rod locking jack
travel pressure clearance
/ / / /
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //^J>-%-U MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONîL ^^ - ..a mm ai nr
8- NOSE LEG ADJUSTMENT IN UP POSITION
A Nose leg locking
(1) Checks
Roller position relative to uplock hook :
-
- slightly smear roller with Prussian blue,
- retract nose leg and ensure that roller passage clearance «J» at hook nose is 3 mm (0.1 181 in)
minimum,
- lock nose leg up and drop pressure. Ascertain that there is a slight play of the roller in the
hook by actuating the nose leg from bottom to top,
- unlock nose leg and check :
- roller centering in hook.
Roller should be centered to within 0 ± 1 mm (0 ± 0.03937 in).
- correct roller bearing inside hook nose.
| L should be 6 + ° mm (0.2362 + q0787 in).
(2) Adjustments
(a) Roller centering
- Adjust by displacing the roller on its support through shim washers with thk = 0.5 mm
(0.0196 in).
I- On assembly, check the proper location and efficiency of the ring retaining the roller on the bolt ;
leave at least one washer under the retaining ring.
(b) Roller passage clearance and bearing surface
- Adjust by laterally displacing uplock on support serrated to 1 mm (0.0392 in) pitch.
- Tighten the nuts of the unit attachment screws to correct torque value (see 05-6).
B Clearances from structure and door
(1) Checks
(a) Undercarriage position
- Install the sight tube laterally and level with the nose U/C leg (see 03-5).
- Aircraft in line of flight, nose leg retracted.
- Record height between nose leg hinge axis B and axle axis A.
Through ports for plugs 10-05 and 10-07, screw extractors C46608 in threaded ends of trunnions
and record corresponding height of each hinge.
Hinge axis height = Height read on left + Height read on right + extractor radius
- Record height of each axle.
Axle axis height = Height read on left +jHeight read on right + ax|e radius
P should be = Axle axis height -Hinge axis height = 36 ± 1 mm (1.4173 ±0.0393 in).
NOTE : If the nose leg has been replaced, only the following data are to be checked and observed,
provided that the position of the uplock has not been changed from that adjusted when
installing the nose leg, i.e. :
- roller position and clearance from uplock hook,
- nose leg/structure and wheel jig/structure and aft door clearances (nose well equipped).
The height between the nose leg hinge axis and the axle axis shall be checked only when :
- the uplock height must be adjusted,
- the uplock is replaced.
(b) Clearance from structure and door

-Mount a nose wheel jig on an axle.
-Retract and lock nose leg. Drop pressure.
-Close and lock aft door.
-Make sure that the wheel jig rotates freely (no friction point) between structure and door.
-Perform same operation with wheel jig installed on the other axle.
(2) Adjustment
-Adjust by vertically displacing uplock on support serrated to 1 mm (0.0392 in) pitch.
-Tighten the nuts of the unit attachment screws to correct torque value (see 05-6).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^Z\^l\zys /V\|I\/-\V^L_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^#t_- j,^ _ . .,..,..
wvi. ^~~^> Restricted MANUAL 05
10 -FINAL STEPS
-SAFETY LOCK NUT OF ADJUSTABLE TRUSS JACK ROD END (see 05-0)
-Cover the exposed threads of truss jack rod end with PR 1 321 A1 -2 compound.
-Install wheels (see 05-5).
-Connect door links (8 mm A/F spanner). Torque tighten to
+ 0.1 + 0.7
0.3 m.daN (2.2 ft.lb).
+ 0 +0
-Check and adjust doors as required (see 05-4).
-Check undercarriage and door operating pressures (see 05-6).
-Conduct undercarriage functional tests (see 05-6).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION .<5Î7
tLJ>^Z\l
^ _
MIRAGE F
ADJUSTMENT CHECK OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE IN UP POSITION

(figure 19)
A Special tools
- Undercarriage-hydraulics 1st line tool kit.

- Set of wheel jigs MS1379A or 50MS040
C Materials
- Prussian blue
WARNING :
- The aircraft must be in the following configuration :

- jacked up, wheels clear of ground (see 02-2),
- wheels removed (see 05-5),
- dôorlets disconnected,
- rear U/C door open (see 02-0),
- wheel fairings installed.
- Connect the hydraulic power unit to No. 1 system and set it to slow running.
3- PROCEDURE
A Position of roller with respect to uplock hook
- Lightly shalk the roller with Prussian blue.

- Raise the undercarriage leg, stopping it when the roller is positioned just in front of the tip
of the hook.
- Check that the clearance J between the roller and the tip of the hook is at least 3 mm
(0.1181 in).
- Continue to raise the leg until it locks in the up position, then release the pressure.
- The maximum permitted off-centering of the roller with respect to the hook is 1 mm
(0.0393 in) : check this.
- Unlock and lower the undercarriage leg.
- Measure the marks left by the Prussian blue to ensure that the length of roller bearing
against the inside of the hook is 6 ± 2 mm (0.232 ± 0.787 in).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti -à>-^ Q MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^s. _^
B Clearances with respect to aircraft structure and door
(1 ) Clearance with respect to aircraft structure
Fit the nose wheel jigs to the axles.

-
-Tighten the jigs on the axles, ensuring they are positioned identically (this makes them
easier to move when the door is closed) .
- Raise and lock the leg, then release the pressure.
- Check that the jigs turn freely without touching the inside of the well.
(2) Clearance with respect to door
- Chalk the outside edges of the jigs with Prussian blue and attach a 1 meter (40 in) length
(approx.) of piano wire to one of the jigs.
- Close and lock the door, while keeping the jigs horizontal with the piano wire.
- Make the jigs turn inside the well and check that they rotate freely.
- Open the door and check that there are no signs of rubbing in the door recess (marks left by
the Prussian blue).
- Lower and lock the undercarriage in the down position.
NOTE : If anything is found maladjusted during the above operations, check that it is not due to
distortion before making corrections.
4- FINAL STEPS
- Remove the wheel jigs.

- Reinstall the wheels (see 05-5).
- Reattach the doorlets.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT]" ^ -" -** /V\ll\/AwC. l
BREGUET AVIATION ^<4_~
^<^ ^s~^3
ô ^
Restricted . miamma.
MANUAL nr-
05
ADJUSTMENT OF TORQUE LINK HINGE CLEARANCE

(Figure 21)
A - Standard tools
-Torque wrench kit, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 22.1 ft.lb)

-Accessory kit for torque wrench, 0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 22.1 ft.lb)
-Set of extra-thin open-end wrenches.
B - Special tools
-Undercarriage-hydraulic 2nd line tool kit
- Extractor PR 4761 1
- Drift 1 93-24806J
-Guide 193-24862J
2 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Solvent Dl PYROLAC 1991
-Mastinox 6856H
-Moisture-free compressed air supply
-Copper sulfate
3 - SPARES
-1 pin 2331 OAA 02001 5LE

-8 preformed packings BT 13-6
-2 preformed packings BT6-15
-Cotter pins 23310 AA 020020LE
-1 pin MS 24665-219
-1 lockwasher JXAX060TL
-2 shim washers C 57428-20R1
-2 shim washers C 547428-20R2
A - Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels are clear of the ground (see manual 02-2)
B - Remove the wheels (see manual 05-5)

C - Discharge the shock absorber (charging valve at shock absorber bottom)
D - Slightly retract the shock absorber and place it on a suitable support (wooden block)
E - Remove the switch (see manual 05-6)
F - Uncouple the torque link center hinge.

-Disconnect the movable electrical connector secured to upper link 59 and the bonding
braid (modification 300 incorporated)
-Unsafety (pawl), then unscrew knurled nut 178 of torque link center pin 174
-Clear the center pin and separate torque links 140 and 59
-Install the following on lower link 140
-center pin 174 with its knurled nut 178
-movable electrical connector on its stowage support
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" « /V\U\/-\V«7L.
^-f^-
BREGUET AVIATION ^rv. ^#-=>^.
^?-=^> .
Restricted , mi ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Removal
-Removal of lower torque link 140

-Disconnect the switch control link rod :
-remove nut 1 79, then drive out screw 1 80 and disengage the link rod.
- Remove and discard the safety pin from pin 1 43, and recover washer 1 81
-Drive out pin 141, then remove torque link 140 and discard washers 182.
NOTE: Secure the link rod self-aligning end with lockwire to preclude accidental misadjus-
ment of the rod.
-Removal of upper torque link 59.

- Remove two fitting 68 as follows :
-remove and discard cotter pin 71,
-remove and discard one of the two cotter pins safetying load limiter 69.
- Drive out load limiter 69 and remove tow fitting 68.
-Disconnect the upper electrical wire bundle connector from the torque link.
-Disconnect bonding braid 183 from top of cylinder.
-Remove and discard pin 184, and recover washer 185.
-Remove the grease fitting, then drive out pin 64.
-Extract grooved lubricator 61 using extractor PR4761 1 .
-Drive out pin 60, then remove torque link 59 and recover stop 63 and spring 62 ; dis¬
card washers 1 82.
B - Cleaning
-Separate grooved lubricator 142 from pin 141.
-Discard all the preformed packings.
-Clean all parts with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air.
-Clean the Mastinox-coated parts with solvent PYROLAC (pin 64, bores of stop 63 and
pin 60).
-Clean the bores of bushes accommodating pins 60 and 141 on the swivel tube and axle
box.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" -** / V\ll\/AV-7l- I
BREGUET AVIATION ^fy_~ j^s^ « .. - . .«a m., ai ne
^« >?-o Restricted MANUAL 05
C - Check
-Make sure that the chromium plating on the outer surface of pins 60 and 141 is not
flaked, pitted or scratched. If the coating is questionable, wipe the surfaces (perfectly clean
and dry) by means of a cloth soaked in copper sulfate ; flaked areas will appear red.
-Check the removed components and the bushes accommodating pins 60 and 141 on the
swivel tube and axle box for :
-scratches, traces of seizure, peening, ovalization, buckling (pins) and deep corro¬
sion.
-Carefully inspect the seal housing grooves.
-Make sure that spring 62 is not weakened or broken.
NOTE: If the check results are unsatisfactory, forward the cylinder or shock absorber to the
next higher repair line.
D - Instructions for assembly
-Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds.

-See manual 05.01 for the precautions to be taken when installing seals.
-Apply a light coat of grease AIR 4215 to the following parts (marked G) :
-outer surface of grooved lubricators 61 and 142, pins 60, 141 and 143, and load
limiter 69,
-new washers 182, -
-spring 62,
-bore of stop 63,
-new pin 71.
-Apply a light coat of MASTINOX to the outer surface of pin 64.
E - Assembly
-Installation of lower torque link 140.

-Engage grooved lubricator 142 in the bore of pin 141 and align the pinning holes.
-Select two washers 182R (repair) according to the play to be taken up (See 05-3) :
-if the hinge side play is between 0.22 and 0.32 mm (0.007 and 0.012 in), select
two R1 dimension washers 182 marked with a lunule on the circumference,
two R2 dimension washers 1 82 marked with two lunules on the circumference.
-Position torque link 140 in the axle box clevis.
-Slide a washer 182R on either side of the torque link and insert pin 141 fitted with its
grooved lubricator. Align the pinning holes.
-Install pin 143 in the torque link, with the grease fitting toward the outside of the axle
box.
-Fit washer 181 and insert a new safety pin 187 through pin 143.
-Check that the torque link swivels freely without binding.
-Reconnect the switch control link rod as follows :
-engage the link rod self -aligning end in the clevis of the switch control lever,
-install screw 180, with its head directed toward the switch. Screw and tighten nut
1 79 to a torque of 0.750 m.daN.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
-Installation of upper torque link 59.

-Select two washers 182R (repair) according to the play to be taken up (See manual
05-3) :
two washers 182R1 marked with a lunule on the circumference,
two washers 182R2 marked with two lunules on the circumference.
-Fit spring 62 in stop 63. Place the resulting assembly in the torque link clevis by engag¬
ing the ends of the spring in the drilled holes provided for this purpose.
-Engage torque link 59 assembly in the swivel tube clevis. Slide a washer 182R on either
side of the torque link, then fit pin 60 using drift 193-24806J.
-Remove the drift and install grooved lubricator 61. Perfectly align the pinning holes with
guide 193-24862J.
-Secure the assembly with pin 64 inserted with the head down.
- Fit washer 1 81 and insert a new safety pin 1 87 through pin 64.
-Check that the torque link swivels freely without binding.
-Connect the upper electrical wire bundle connector and torque link 59.
-Connect bonding braid 183 to the cylinder.
-Reinstall tow fitting 68 as follows :
-install the tow fitting on the swivel tube,
-install load limiter 69 and safety with a new cotter pin,
-install a new cotter pin 71 .
6 -FINAL STEPS
-Reinstall the switch (See manual 05-6).

-Couple the torque link center hinge in reverse order of uncoupling.
-Remove the wooden block, then charge the shock absorber (See manual 05-5).
-Adjust the switch (See manual 05-6).
-Lubricate the torque link hinges.
-Check the nose wheel alignment (See manual 05-3).
-Lower the aircraft onto its wheels (See manual 02-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
SECTION F
SECTION U
184
DETAIL V
DETAIL X
Commutateur
Modification 627 Switch
non appliquée
Modification 627
not incorporated
Détail de la rampe
de graissage 142
Detail of grooved Rondelle conique
lubricator 142 Conical washer
142
G \ Garniture
préformée
Preformed
packing
Garniture
préformée
Rondelle conique Preformed
Conical washer packing
FIGURE 21 - REGLAGE DU JEU DES ARTICULATIONS DES BRANCHES DE COMPAS

ADJUSTMENT OR TORQUE LINK HINGE CLEARANCE
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT JL^^ZZVs.
BREGUET AVIATION ^dZZ _^^
MIRAGE F
STORAGE - PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION

OF A NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
1 - SCOPE
This sheet specifies the measures to be taken to protect nose undercarriage legs so as to obtain
maritime climate.
These measures allow for the method of transportation required.
- Protectors (axle ends)

- Storage plugs and washers
- Connector cap
- Wooden box - packing materials
- Metal frame
- Rubber shock absorbers
- Labels
- Grease-proof paper Air 8140, category 22
- Heat-sealed cloth Air 8140, category 1 121
- Grease-proof cloth Air 8140, category 22
- Strips of adhesive tape.
3- MATERIALS
- White spirit DCEA/202B
- Methanol Air 3650
- Rust-preventive grease Air 81 36
- Desiccant Air 8060
- Protex No. 1 Air 1 502
- Clear varnish
- Black paint 2700
- White paint 2765.
4- STORAGE PACKAGING - TRANSPORTATION
A Procedure (see table)
5- DEPRESERVATION
Stored nose legs shall be depreserved just before use (installation), selecting the one with the
oldest storage date.
- Remove the grease-proof cloth.

- Remove rust-preventive grease (with a dry rag or white spirit).
- Remove storage plugs and caps.
- Remove protectors.
- Drop shock absorber pressure.
- Charge the shock absorber to operating pressure.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^-SE=>
PROCEDURE
( as per method R RE 001)
- Install protectors on axle ends.

- Through open ends of pipes or swivel
couplings, drain a small amount of
hydraulic fluid, the remaining volume
UJ
r-
of which should be about 3/4 total
< z capacity.
ï> o
J- - Blank open ports with storage plugs
_J
CJ
< and seals. SPECIAL PROCEDURE
1
UJ rr - Discharge shock absorber so that
2 O
n
remaining pressure is 5 bar (72.5 psi) - Add to specified label
H - Blank connectors with caps. ing, a label listing the sub
OC
< - Clear wiring and attach it with adhe assemblies.
2" ce sive tape. - Mark storage position on
ce cc - Clean with white spirit/surfaces box by means of a stencil :
o which are not : - white paint for boxes - Store nose leg in package.
_l <
< painted
- painted hydraulic brown. - Observe storage position
a
CJ z - aluminized or black paint for unpain- marked on box.
0- < - coated with molybdenum disul- ted boxes. For nose legs having ex
o i
ce phide grease ceeded the storage time,
\ storage prolongation will
corrosion resistant.
< û - Remove finger marks with metha depend on a check for
i- < nol. correct preservation, by
z O sampling stored units.
LU ce - Apply rust-preventive grease to
Z working areas (sliding rod, trunnions, The new storage time will
r- yokes, forks, hinge pins, locking also depend on the results
O roller, etc.). of the checks.
- Cover working areas with grease
proof cloth.
<
rr
- Coat non-working areas with Protex.
LU - Attach to nose leg, labels indicating :
Q-
2 equipment description, storage
LU date and duration.
t-
- part number, description and, if
z
applicable, date of assembly of
LU
components with specific service
< life.
o - Attach near shock-absorber charg¬
h- ing valve, a label indicating that - Refer to above para.
C/5
z Additional instructions
o shock absorber is charged to 5 bar - :
(72.5 psi). secure packing materials
to metal frame,
- place metal frame in box.
interposing rubber shock
absorbers.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ M ** / Y \ 1\ /-\ V^ L.
1
BREGUET AVIATION _^t-~-

^w. ^?-^^>
^?-^> .
Restricted , miammai
MANUAL - ne
05
READJUSTMENT OF AXLE BEARING OPERATING PLAY

(figure 10)
1 - GENERAL
This operation is to be performed after reinstallation of the wheels, if axle bearing stiffness
is noted after torque tightening the wheel nuts.
A - Standard tools
-Set of extra-thin fork wrenches.
-Dial gauge.
-Magnetic base dial gauge support.
-Caliper gauge, 0 to 25 mm (0 to 1 in).
-Internal dial gauge, dia. 12 mm (0.47 in).
3 - MATERIALS
-White-spirit.
| - Emery paper 3 M 461 , 240 and 320 grit.
-Grease Air 4205.
A - Jack up the aircraft, wheels off the ground (see 02-2).
j B - Remove the wheels (see 05-5).
C - Remove speed detector unit 27 so as avoid damaging the pinion teeth when fitting back
the axle (see 05-7).
5 - PROCEDURE
A - Removal of axle
-Remove the axle assembly (see manual 05-3).
-Check crowns 136 and pins 137.
-make sure that the 12 mm (0.47 in) dia rigging bores of the crowns do not exceed
12.15 mm (0.47835 in) in the elongation direction,
-make sure that the diameter of pins 137 (on bearing portions) is at least 11.9 mm
(0.4685 in).
If the pins or crowns are out of tolerance, replace them and reinstall the axle fitted with its ori¬
ginal washers 211 .
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION _^<_»-
^^ ^^î
^?~^> _ ^ . ^ ,
Restricted miammai
MANUAL ne
05
B - Check of existing clearance "X"

-With wheels mounted and nuts 138 torqued, place the dial indicator base on the shock-
absorber sliding rod, then feel one end of axle 132 with the dial indicator.
-Push the axle longitudinally in one direction then in the other direction : record total ex¬
isting clearance "X" which should be comprised between 0.1 and 0.2 mm (0.0039 and
0.0078 in). Otherwise, the washer thickness is then determined as per the formula defined in
para. (C).
C - Determining the thickness to be reworked on washers 21 1
-Clearance less than 0.10 mm (0.0039 in).

-Considering the recorded clearance "X", determine the thickness "e" to be reworked on
each washer so as to obtain a total clearance between 0.1 and 0.20 mm (0.0039 and
0.0078 in)
a _ 0.20 - X mm ,0.0078 -X . .
e mm ( in)
2 2
-Clerance greater than 0.20 mm (0.0078 in)
-Measure the thickness of existing washers 21 1, that is "E"
-Calculate, as follows, value "e" to be added, to cancel excess clearance, that is:
a _ X - 0.20 mm ,X-0.0078 in . .
e mm ( in)
-Adjust two new washers 21 1 to obtain the thickness : E + e for each of them.
D - Adjustment of washers 21 1
-Sand the chamfered side of each washer on a 240-grit emery paper sheet laid flat on a
surface table and moistened with white spirit.
-Check the washer dimension at several points to keep the two sides parallel.
-Complete sanding on 320-grit paper and round off the edges on the sanded side with
the same paper.
-After sanding, clean the washers carefully.
-Grease and reinstall the axle assembly (see manual 05-3).
-Install the wheels (see manual 05-5) and check that the obtained clearance is within to¬
lerances.
NOTE: With wheels mounted and nuts torqued, it is not abnormal to observe that there is no
strict equivalence between the calculated clearance and the final clearance after instal¬
lation. Zero clearance may be accepted provided the wheel can be rotated by hand
without excessive force.
-If required, rework washers 211 again.
6 - FINAL STEPS
-Install the speed detector unit (see manual 05-7)
-Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see manual 05-3).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ï\-«-X /V\ll\ AWJT I
BREGUET AVIATION Û_~ JC ^> miam.iai ni-
^>, ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 05
REPAIR OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE

ON NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG
(figure 20)
SCOPE :
This card only deals with the replacement of a ringed sheath section between connector
"B" and the branch.
A - Standard tools
-Electrician's knife
-Round-tip spatula
-Sleeve fitting pliers
B - Special tools
- Electrician's 2nd line tool kit
-Equipment tool kit for Deutsch-Souriau connectors
- Hot air generator
-Ohmmeter
C - Spares
-Ringed sheath 3-8 Convolex
-Sleeve NT3-4
-1 sleeve 202 A1 32-3
-1 identification band C60700-18
-4 clamps SST1MC10
2 - MATERIALS
-Isopropyl alcohol
-Adhesive RAYCHEM S1125
-Adhesive OCETA vibratite VC3
A - Disconnect connector "B".
B - Disconnect the bonding braid and unclamp it.
C - Unclamp the cable bundle up to the branch.
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Disassembly
-Remove adapters 210, using the electrician's knife to separate the two half-shells.
-Cut sleeve 240 lengthwise.
CAUTION:
DURING THIS OPERATION, TAKE CARE TO AVOID DAMAGING THE INSULATION OF
THE UNDERLYING WIRING.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" ^ /V\ 1 1\ /-\ V^ L. \
BREGUET AVIATION ^^-^
^-«. jsô
>?^ .
Restricted , mi a m i i a i ni-
MANUAL 05
-Heat sleeve 240 with the hot air generator, then remove it from the connector and
ringed sheath using a spatula; discard the sleeve.
-Mark the orientation of the connector (position of polarizing key).
-Extract and identify the connector contacts (see manual 16-0-2).
-Heat branch end 90 on connector "B" side so as to soften it.
NOTE: Avoid heating sleeve 1 40.
-Insert a round-tip spatula between the branch and sleeve 140 and rotate so as to stretch
the branch and break the adhesive bond: make several turns.
- Extract ringed sheath 1 20 from the branch.
-Using sleeve fitting pliers, while rotating and heating the branch, expand the port and
keep it expanded until cooled down.
-Recover adapters 130 and identification sleeve 180.
-Discard ringed sheath 120.
B - Cleaning - Check
-Clean all the recovered parts with isopropyl alcohol.

-Carefully check that the insulation of the electrical conductors is free from cuts, notches,
crushing, etc..
If defects are detected, send the bundle to the next higher repair line.
-Check that the connector and contacts are free from corrosion, dents, etc..
-Check all parts for cleanliness prior to assembly.
C - Assembly (see figure)
-Cut a piece of new ringed sheath 120 to length.

-Cut a piece of sleeve 140 to length.
-Thoroughly coat the sheath with adhesive S1125 over a length of 18 mm (0.70 in),
starting at 1 5 mm from one of its ends.
-Slip sleeve 140 over the sheath and position it on the bonded portion of the sheath.
-Shrink sleeve 140 using a cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
-Place an adapter 130 on the sheath end (on sleeve 140 side).
-Thoroughly coat sleeve 140 and adapter 130 with adhesive S1125.
-Slip the sheath assembly over the conductors and engage it in the branch by 25 mm
(0.98 in).
-Shrink the branch end using the hot air generator.
-Wipe off the excess adhesive using a cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
- Place identification sleeve 1 80 over sheath 1 20.
- Place a new sleeve 240 on the sheath without shrinking the sleeve.
-Assemble the connector, referring to the marks applied upon disassembly for the loca¬
tion of the contacts and the position of the connector (see manual 16-0-2).
NOTE: Use Vibratite VC3 adhesive for safetying the connector base.
-Check the electrical continuity of each conductor (see diagram).

-Place an adapter 130 on the end of the sheath.
-Thoroughly coat the outside diameter of the connector base and adapter with adhesive
S1 1 25; also cover about 1 5 mm (0.60 in) of the sheath.
AA
04 - 87 Restricted 3 - 806
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT,"^ -" ^* /V\ 1 1\ /A VJP L_ I
BREGUET AVIATION_^_~
^ ..jô
^-o .
Restrcted , ./.am.iai
MANUAL nr
05
-Place sleeve 240 over both the connector base and sheath and shrink it on at each end
with the hot air generator.
-Wipe off the excess adhesive.
-Place adapters 210 and the identification band on the sheath.
-Clamp the bonding braid onto the bundle using new clamps 230.
D - Electrical check
-Using the ohmmeter, check for an insulation resistance ^ 20 MD:

-across all the connector contacts joined together and the connector body,
-across each contact.
E - Final steps
-Reconnect connectors "B" and "H".

-Perform the following:
-overall check of antiskid system (see manual 05-7),
-functional check of emergency electrically operated selector valve (see manual
05-8),
-functional chech of undercarriage retraction disable circuit (see manual 05-6).
-Clamp the bundle onto the lower torque link, center pin and upper torque link.
-Reconnect the bonding braid.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION -^S0
MIRAGE F
Prise B
Connector B
Prise B
Connector B
Prise H
Connector H
SCHEMA ELECTRIQUE
ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
.Prise génératrice J
Generator connector J
r CBA
roi
o o oO
x *-
O - ox
o -
- u-
-, Ui
u. - o o
Ui - O O
m t- - m
< - ~* <
K Niveau de démontabilité B
Removability level B
Prise commutateur
Switch connector H
H.
NOTA : La lettre "A" sert de référence pour la cotation

NOTE : The letter "A " is used as a part number for the quotation
90
Prise J
Connector J \
FIGURE 20- REPARATION D'UN FAISCEAU ELECTRIQUE INFERIEUR D'ATTERRISSEUR
AVANT MOD. 627 APPLIQUEE
REPAIR OF A LOWER ELECTRICAL CABLE BUNDLE ON NOSE
UNDERCARRIAGE LEG (MOD 627 INCORPORATED)
AA
BREGUET AVIATION^c^^^Q*
LJ>^tZX MIRAGE F
^C*=^=^^^ Restricted MANUAL 05
SECTION 4
NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
4-0 GENERAL 4-001

- Undercarriage door unlocking control 4-104
- Undercarriage door control linkage 4-106
- Undercarriage door jack Messier-Hispano C22287-10-1 4-108
- Unlocking jack Messier-Hispano C22367-10 see 05-2
- Removal - installation of a nose undercarriage door jack 4-301

- Removal - installation of a nose undercarriage door unlocking jack 4-303
- Disassembly - assembly of undercarriage door jack for seal replacement 4-401

- Disassembly - assembly of unlocking jack for seal replacement see 05-2
4-5 INSPECTION -CHECK -ADJUSTMENT -TEST
- Inspection of nose undercarriage doors and linkages 4-501

- Testing of undercarriage door jack after seal replacement 4-503
- Check of nose undercarriage door adjustment. 4-505
- Adjustment of nose undercarriage doors 4-507
Figure No. Page
1 LAYOUT OF COMPONENTS 4-103

2 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR UNLOCKING CONTROL 4-105
3 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR CONTROL LINKAGE 4-107
4 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK ASSEMBLY 4-109
5 UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK - DIAGRAM 4-110
6 DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY OF AN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK 4-407
7 ADJUSTMENT OF UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS 4-51 1
AA
1181 Restricted 4_-j
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT l^^TV. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^2^_-<ô ........ a . nr-
GENERAL
(Figure 1)
The nose undercarriage doors blank the undercarriage well entirely when the nose leg is retracted
and partly when it is extended. The doors are functionally linked to the undercarriage legs and the
associated control systems (See 05-6).
1 - LOCKING
The aft door is provided with three locks. An unlocking jack actuates a linkage which opens the
locks as the nose leg is extended.
On ground, a manual control enables the aft door to be unlocked.
2- CONTROL
The doors are controlled by :

- the nose leg for the fairing door and the L/H and R/H doors.
- a hydraulic jack for the aft door.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION ^(j&.-
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Location Doc.
Access Door No. S I
1 UNLOCKING JACK U/C well X
-Single-acting hydraulic jack,

nominal dimensions between stops :
jack extended : 220 mm (8.6614 in)
jack retracted : 195 mm (7.6771 in)
travel : 25 mm (0.9842 in).
Controls the torque linkage.
2 AFT DOOR LOCK U/C well X
Automatically locked door lock retaining the aft door

in closed and locked position.
3 GROUND UNLOCKING CONTROL U/C well X
Enables the aft door to be opened on ground through a

lever directly connected to the pin of forward lock 23G.
4 NOSE LEG DOOR JACK U/C well X
- Double-acting hydraulic jack, with the rod internally

locked in extended position.
- Unlocking pressure : < 60 bar (870 psi)
- Nominal dimensions between stops :
- Jack extended : 508 mm (20.0000 in)
- Jack retracted : 367 mm (14.4488 in)
- Travel : 141 mm (5.5511 in)
- Opens and closes the aft door.
10G3 CENTRE DOOR LOCK U/C leg X
Same function as item 2.

In addition, it is provided with a switch to indicate
that the door is closed and locked.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
23G FORWARD DOOR LOCK U/C well
Same function as item 2. It is provided with a switch

to indicate that the door is unlocked («limit» warning
light).
NOSE LEG DOORS
The fairing door, lateral and aft doors closing the nose leg
well are described in manual 03.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F

LAYOUT
AB
BREGUET AVIATION^<357
£-==>"", "U
__ -
MIRAGE
i .*..,... ,
F

(Figure 2)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The unlocking control consists of :

-one unlocking jack 1 hinged on LH web of U/C well, which actuates lever 10 hinged on
bearing 11.
- three mechanical locks 2, 10G3, 23G to keep doors closed
-one interconnecting linkage including :
- two rods 16, 17 which control lever 3 of lock 23G through lever 12 hinged on bearing 13.
- rod 14 which controls lever 15 of lock 10G3.
- one flexible control 8, connected to the second arm of lever 15, transmits the movement to
lever 18 of lock 2.
- one spring 9, secured to rod 16, resets the hook mechanism to the locking position.
- one ground manual unlocking control consisting of a flap integral with lever 3 of lock 23G.
Center lock 10G3 is provided with a dual switch for U/C cycle warning and control.
Lock 23G is provided with a warning switch («limit» warning light).
The locks are secured by bolts to A/C structure, through a serrated mounting plate used for
positioning adjustment.
2- OPERATION
A Hydraulic unlocking
Under the action of hydraulic pressure, the jack rod is retracted, which causes lever 10 to swivel,
-
thereby actuating interconnecting linkage which opens locks 2, 23G and 10G3 and releases the door
locking rollers.
B Manual unlocking on ground
- It is obtained by tilting lever 3 which directly drives lock23G and opens locks 2 and 10G3
through the interconnecting linkage. The free travel of unlocking jack tie-rod allows for deflection of
lever 10 without loading the jack return spring (see 05-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION.
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
Position verrouillée
Locked position
FIGURE 2 - COMMANDE DE DEVERROU ILLAGE DES TRAPPES

AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iLJ^^Z^X
BREGUET AVIATION ^<ZSZ ^
MIRAGE
. . ^
F

(Figure 3)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The fairing door, lateral and aft doors closing the nose leg well are controlled :
- for the fairing door, by the truss jack to which it is secured.
- for the L/H and R/H doors, by the universal joint, and rod assembly 6 connected to the nose leg
hinge. Two adjustable rods 19, one on the well front web, the other on rear hinge fitting, keep fairings
tightly closed.
- for the aft door, by jack 4. Two adjustable rubber stops 7 mounted between frames 12 and 13,
and between frames 15 and 17, prevent door play in closed and locked position.
2- DOOR CONTROL LINKAGE
(1 ) Since the fairing door, and L/H and R/H lateral doors are connected to the nose leg, they close as
thé nose leg is retracted.
(2) Under the action of the hydraulic pressure, the rod of jack 4 is retracted, thereby closing the aft
door which is pressed on stops 7.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
C.12 C.13 C.14 C.15' C.17

COUPE A
CROSS-SECTION A
COUPE B
CROSS-SECTION B
FIGURE 3 - CINEMATIQUE DES TRAPPES

AB
BREGUET AVIATION _ _
MIRAGE F
UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK
The jack opens and closes the main door of the nose leg. This is a double-acting hydraulically
controlled jack which is internally locked by claws in the «ROD EXTENSION» direction. It is equipped
with a switch 6G3 and a shuttle valve 21 .
This assembly essentially consists of :

- One cylinder 22 accommodating a shuttle valve 21 to supply the jack with hydraulic fluid
through two independent systems. At one end, the jack is equipped with a self-aligning bearing 23
attaching the jack to the aircraft structure hinge.
Cylinder 22 is also fitted with a shoulder E to which is secured a bracket 24 for the hydraulic fluid
supply pipes.
- One cylinder 25 supporting a supply coupling 26, and a rocker 27 hinged between a socket 28
and a plate 29. This rocker controls the microswitch of switch 6G3 connected to the undercarriage
control sequence circuit.
A locking sleeve 30 retained between cylinder 22 and an internal shoulder of cylinder 25, and a
piston 31 with a return spring 32, constitute the internal locking system of the jack. Piston 31 is
equipped with a lever 33 operating rocker 27.
B Moving assembly
This assembly is essentially composed of a rod 34 sliding in the stationary assembly. It

accommodates at one end an adjustable rod end 35 with a self-aligning bearing 36 for connecting the
jack to the door.
At the other end, the rod is fitted with a piston 37 and a claw lock 38 attached by a nut 39.
Extension of rod 34 causes opening of the main door. The hydraulic pressure is applied through
one of the two ports in shuttle valve 21 . This pressure acts on passage area S1 of the moving assembly
to extend rod 34.
The fluid expelled from chamber P freely flows through port A.
At the end of rod extension, the claws of lock 38 are bent to clear locking sleeve 30. Then, they
push locking piston 31 and separate by spring effect as sleeve 30 is cleared. Rod assembly 34 has then
reached end of travel, as it abuts on sleeve 30.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
23
A 90° de sa,,
position réelle
At 90° from
actual position
FIGURE 4 - ENSEMBLE VERIN DE TRAPPE

UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK ASSEMBL Y
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
T Phase -Tige
sortie verrouillée
1st Phase - Rod extended
and locked 2* Phase -Déverrouillaqe
2nd Phase - Unlocking
FIGURE 5 - SCHEMA VERIN DE TRAPPE

AB UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK DIAGRAM
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ZL^>^r\L MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^c^p^^^Ô .,»....». «,-
Under the action of return spring 32, piston 31 comes again into contact with sleeve 30 and
engages the clawsof lock 38, thereby locking the rod.
As piston 31 stops moving, i.e. at the end of locking, lock 38 rotates lever 33 which actuates
rocker 27, thereby reversing the contacts of switch 6G3.
The hydraulic pressure applied through port A simultaneously acts on annular passage area S2 of
the moving assembly, and on locking piston 31. It causes the latter to move back, thereby freeing
lock 38 and rocker 27.
As lock 38 is moved by rod 34, the lock claws are bent and clear sleeve 30, which permits rod
retraction and consequently door closing.
Rocker 27 is no longer actuated by lever 33 ; it allows the contacts of switch 6G3 to be reversed.
Throughout the rod retraction phase, the fluid expelled from chamber M freely flows through port BN
of shuttle valve 21 .
When the jack is coupled to the door, the rod retraction travel is limited by the door abutting on
its locks. The door is abutting before the jack is internally stopped.
Piston 31 returns against sleeve 30 under the action of spring 32, as the jack is connected to the
hydraulic reservoir through port A.
AA
BREGUET
J^J^-^rU
AVIATION^gP3^ _
MIRAGE F
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK
A - Standard tools
- Set of extra-thin open-ended spanners.

- 2 to 20 m.daN (15 to 150 ft.lb) torque wrench kit.

- Electrical power supply (1 15-200 V/ 400 Hz).
C Spares
- 2 pins 23310AA020030LE.
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
. -Petrolatum AIR 3565.
| - Sealant PR 1321 A2
A Jack up aircraft so that wheels clear ground (see 02-2).
B Ensure that aircraft electrical power systems are not energized.
C Make sure that hydraulic pressure is dropped in systems 1 and 2.
D Manually open aft door.
WARNING :
4- REMOVAL
(1 ) Disconnect electrical plug from switch.
(2) Unclamp the three rigid hydraulic pipes from each arm of jack support.
(3) Disconnect the three pipes from jack and blank ports.
AA
BREGUET
JL^^^X
AVIATION^£f[F=^^C>
MIRAGE
......,..«,,.
F
. Restricted MANUAL 05

- Unsafety (pin) and remove the nut. Recover the washer (two 17 mm A/F wrenches).
- Drive out the connecting pin (mark its direction).
(2) Hinge on airframe side

- Unsafety (pin) and remove the nut. Recover the washer (two 17 mm A/F wrenches).
- Drive out the connecting pin (mark its direction).
C Remove the jack and reinstall the two pipe retaining plates on pipe bracket.
5- INSTALLATION
A Preliminary steps
(1 ) If a spare jack is to be installed :

- depreserve the jack (see 05-1 ),
- adjust the end fitting of the sliding rod to the dimension measured on the removed jack,
- torque the end fitting locknut without safetying (see 05-0).
(2) Check each hinge for cleanness and lightly coat each pin with petrolatum.
(1 ) Hinge on airframe side

Locate the jack and fit its self-aligned end on bottom side to the hinge fitting.
-
- Install the connecting pin.
- Install the washer. Tighten and torque the nut (17 mm A/F wrench) to 3.5 m.daN (25.8 ft.lb),
then untighten until the nearest pin hole is reached. Safety with a new pin.

Locate the self-aligned end of the jack rod in the hinge fitting.
-
- Install the connecting pin.
- Install the washer. Screw and tighten the nut (17 mm A/F wrench) temporarily. Torquing and
safetying should be carried out after checking and adjusting the door.
(1) Connect the three hydraulic pipes and secure them to the jack support arms. Lockwire the
attaching screws.
(2) Connect the electrical plug to the switch.
6- FINAL STEPS
A Check and adjust the doors as required (see 05-4).
B Purge air from the hydraulic system (see 07-1 ).
C Carry out functional tests of undercarriage and warning system (see 05-6).
D After final adjustment, tightening and safetying of the rod end locknut, apply a bead of sealant
PR 1321 A2 to the visible threads of rod end 35, as well as to the contact surface of locknut 43, rod
end 34 and the recesses of the notch of key 45 and the tab of lockwasher 44 (areas identified MR in the
figure).
E Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see 02-2).

AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT,"^^'^K MIRAOF
/V\ll\/-\v3rL. F
\
BREGUET AVIATION Zs&
^«. ^s ^>
^~~^> Restricted am., ai
«y,
MANUAL «r-
05
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE

DOOR UNLOCKING JACK
A - Standard tools
-Set of extra-thin open-end wrenches

-Kit for ARSAERO couplings
-ALLEN wrench kit
-0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 22 ft.lb) torque wrench kit
B - Spares
-1 nut6TA106 NYLSTOP
-4 packings JET 1015 or 10-15SP
-1 nut 6RH 8035M SIMLOC
C - Materials
-White spirit
-Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels clear the ground (see 02-0)
-Open the door by hand (see 02-0)
WARNING:
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0)
3 - REMOVAL
A - Functional connection
(1 ) Remove the yoke of the fairlead retaining the hydraulic lines.
(2) Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the connection block, blank off the lines and the
ports in the connection block.
B - Mechanical connection
Hinge on unlocking mechanism side.
(1) Remove and discard the nut.
(2) Drive out the connecting pin.
Hinge on structure side.
(3) Remove and discard the nut, recover the washer.
(4) Hold the jack and drive out the connecting pin (note its position).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ -" cs-<, MIRAGE
minnvi. F
i
BREGUET AVIATION ^-ïvr ^c?-»^> . k* a mi i ai ne
^<^ ^-^ Restricted MANUAL 05
4 - INSTALLATION
NOTE 1 : Before reinstalling a reused jack, visually check the rod end for proper tightening and
the locknut for proper safetying.
NOTE 2 : Before installing a spare jack, make sure it has been tested and set to the
center-to-center dimension as per manual 05-2.
(1 ) When replacing the jack, depreserve a new jack (see 05-1 ).
(2) Remove the connection block from the removed jack (6 mm Allen wrench) (modification
555 not incorporated - 17 mm A/F wrench). Discard the sealing rings.
(3) Check that the hinges and couplings of the jack to be installed are perfectly clean.
(4) Clean the connection block and reinstall it with new sealing rings, torque the banjo
screws to
1 .5 + °q2 m.daN (1 1 * 1q47 Ib.ft)
(5) Clean the connecting pins and coat them with a thin film petrolatum.
B - Mechanical connection
(1 ) Position the jack clevis on the structure fitting.
(2) Fit the connecting pin in the same position as that noted upon removal (pin head aft),
and fit the washer.
(3) Screw and tighten a new locking nut.

Hinge on unlocking mechanism side.
(4) Position the rod end of the jack inside the clevis of the linkage bellcrank.
(4) Fit the pin, screw and tighten a new locking nut.
C - Functional connection
(1 ) Reconnect the hydraulic lines to the connection block.
(2) Reinstall the yoke of the fairlead securing the lines.
5 - FINAL STEPS
(1 ) Perform the following :
-adjustment check of undercarriage doors (see 05-4),
-check of unlocking pressure (see 05-6),
-bleeding of hydraulic systems (see 07-1 ).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ti^^rx. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONôF^^-Ô ......... r-
DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY OF UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR

JACK FOR SEAL REPLACEMENT
(figure 6)
A Special tools
B Standard tools

- Fluid drain pan
- Work bench press
D Spares
- Seal
- 1 lockplate for adjustable rod end nut
- 1 retaining ring for sliding rod piston attaching nut

- External seal for shuttle valve.
2- MATERIALS

- White spirit
- Sealant PR 1422 B2
- Copper sulphate
- Grease Air 4206
-Grease Air 421 5
D Remove sealant from areas identified M and MR with a spatula, taking care not to damage the
surface protective coating.
E Remove storage plugs from all jack ports.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT jLg^~^y. MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^gF0^^.^ . , . ... . __
. .
F Remove the switch (see 05-6).
G Remove the shuttle valve (identify direction).
parts.
CAUTION :
THE OUTSIDE OF PISTON 37 AND THE INSIDE OF CYLINDER 25 AND PISTON 31 ARE
PLASTICIZED WITH RILSAN WHICH IS A MATERIAL VERY SENSITIVE TO SHOCKS AND
SCRATCHES
IT IS THEREFORE NECESSARY TO CAREFULLY PROTECT THESE AREAS AND TO
4- DISASSEMBLY
A Remove filter 50 from the shuttle valve housing in cylinder 22.
B Removal of switch plate and socket assembly.
(1) Unsafety (lockplate) and remove the two studs 54 (3/8 in A/F wrench). Discard lockplates.
(2) Remove the following parts in succession :
-plate 29,
- rocker 27,
- socket 28.
C Remove coupling 26 (10 mm A/F wrench) and recover filter 42.
D Removal of adjustable rod end 35.
NOTE : If the jack is to be reinstalled in the initial position on aircraft, measure the rod end distance
from the side of nut 43 and count the number of turns and fractions of a turn required to
remove the rod end.

(2) Hold the adjustable rod end and loosen nut 43 so as to permit lockplate 44 to be cleared and key 45
to be removed (wrench A21978 - adapter C46472).
(3) Remove rod end 35 (see NOTE) and discard lockplate 44.
E Removal of sliding rod assembly 34 and locking system.
(1) Immobilize the jack in the vice by moderately clamping cylinder 25 at the bosses accommodating
coupling 26 and the switch plate and socket assembly.
(2) Loosen nut 40 through ONE TO THREE THREADS MAXIMUM (wrench A21 978 - adapter
C46473).
(3) Compress the jack with a press by placing the end of cylinder 25 in thrust part C47178, and inter¬
posing thrust part C47056 between the press chuck and the self-aligned end of cylinder 22.
(4) Keep under pressure and remove nut 40 (wrench A21978 - adapter C46473).
- Recover two-part ring 46 and key 47.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT ILJ^^z^X
BREGUET AVIATION ^^c_ _ _
MIRAGE F
(5) Slowly release pressure while watching progressive extension of locking spring 32.
(6) Remove jack from press.
(7) Remove cylinder 25 and recover following parts in succession :
- spring 32
- locking piston 31
-nut 40.
(8) Remove following parts in succession from cylinder 22 :
-sleeve 30
- sliding rod assembly 34.
F Strip sliding rod 34 as follows :
(1) Clamp sliding rod in vice (Protective jaws C46924).

(2) Remove retaining ring 48.
(3) Remove nut 39 (Spanner A21978 - Adapter C46472).
(4) Remove following parts in succession from sliding rod :
- piston 37
- washer 49
-lock 38.
5- CLEANING
only spatula A46524 to remove seals from cylinder 25 and pistons 31 and 37). Systematically reject all
rubber or teflon seals.
C Clean parts (threads) coated with Mastinox compound by means of PYROLAC solvent :
- threads of nut 40, cylinder 25 and studs 54,
- mating surfaces of coupling 26, socket 28 and plate 29,
- two-part ring 46 and key 47.
6- CHECK
A Ensure that external surface of cylinder 22 is free of dents.
E Check moving or stationary parts providing sealing , for evidence of seizing and scratches (circular
or longitudinal).
F Ascertain that chromium-plating of sliding rod 34 is not flaked, pitted or scratched. If this surface
isquestionable, wipe it (clean and dry) by means of a rag soaked in copper sulphate ; flaked areas will
appear red.
G Check rilsan-plasticized outside diameter of piston 37 and inside diameters of cylinder 25 and
piston 31 for dents and scratches.
H Check locator of plate 29 for condition.
I Check lock 38 and pipe bracket 24 for condition.
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT," ^ Jl ** /VxllN/AwL l
Zs&r^
BREGUET AVIATION ^n_ ^<?^0
^«-^ o' *
Restncted * j IV/l A Ml l A
MANUAL I ne
05
7 - INSTRUCTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY

A - Install seals on relevant parts as assembly proceeds. To install Teflon seals, use the tools
indicated. Parts and tools followed by an asterisk (*) may have oversize dimensions (see
05-0).
(1 ) Seal 51 on cylinder 25
-Forming cone S1 6-0605-0692
(1 ) Seal 52 on piston 31
- Forming cone S1 6-0605-0391
(3) Seal 53 on piston 37*
-Installation cone S1 6-0607-081 2*
- Forming ring S1 6-0606-081 1 *.
NOTE: Refer to manual 05-0 for the precautions to be taken when installing seals and assem¬
bling parts.
B - Lightly coat the bore of cylinder 22 with hydraulic fluid.
C - Lightly coat the bore of sliding rod 34 with grease AIR 4215.
8 - ASSEMBLY
(1 ) Install the following parts in succession :
-claw lock 38, .
-washer 49,
-piston 37,
-nut 39.
(2) Clamp the sliding rod assembly in the vise (protective jaws C46924).
(3) Tighten and safety nut 39 by means of a new retaining ring 48.
Torque tighten to 3.5 ± 0.7 m.daN (25.8 ± 5.16 ft.lb) - (wrench A21978 - adapter C46472),
while ensuring alignment of the safetying holes in nut and rod.
NOTE: If this alignment is not possible without exceeding the torque tolerances specified,
counterbore a 1 .5 mm diameter hole through to the bore. Ensure that the hole is not
tangential to the previous one; if this is the case, recommence drilling from the oppo¬
site side.
B - Installation of sliding rod assembly 34 and locking system.
(1 ) Carefully insert the sliding rod assembly into cylinder 22.
(2) Install the following parts on cylinder 22 :
-sleeve 30,
-nut 40, with threads previously coated with Mastinox compound.
(3) Install the following parts in cylinder 25 :
-spring 32,
-locking piston 31 (locate locking piston lever 33 in front of the housing that receives the
plate and socket assembly of the switch).
(4) Install guide cone C47482 on the end of sliding rod 34.
(5) Use grease AIR 421 5 to pack the hollow part of cylinder 22 (identified as G in the figure)
which will be covered by cylinder 25.
(6) Assemble cylinder assemblies 22 and 25, aligning key slots with each other.
(8) Compress the jack with a press by placing the end of cylinder 25 in thrust part C47178,
and interposing thrust part C47056 between the press chuck and the swivel end of cylinder
22.
AB
©3-88 Restricted 4-404
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/LJi-^Mi /Y\II\/-\\J'L. I
^f^^^§«Qi>
BREGUET AVIATION
-=?-> ' .
Restricted haammai 05
MANUAL ne
(9) Install key 47, two-part ring 46, previously coated with Mastinox, and nut 40 on cylinder
25.
(1 0)Remove jack from press.
Moderately clamp jack in vise through cylinder 25, at bosses supporting 26 and switch
(1 1 )
plate and socket assembly.
(12) Torque tighten nut 40 to 24 ± 4.3 m.daN (154.8 ± 7.37 ft.lb) - (wrench A21978 -
Adapter C46473).
C - Install adjustable rod end 35 as follows
(1 ) Coat threads of adjustable rod end with Mastinox.

(2) Install a new lockplate 44 on rod end (equipped with nut 43) and tighten rod end in slid¬
ing rod 34 through the number of turns counted during removal, if the jack is to be reinstalled
in the initial position on aircraft. Otherwise, adjust jack to following theoretical dimension :
-center-to-center distance (between self-aligning bearings), with sliding rod fully ex¬
tended : 508 ± 0.4 mm (20 ± 0.0517 in).
NOTE: The travel is 1 41 ± 1 mm (5.5511 ± 0.0392 in).
(4) Install key 45 and bend tab of lockplate 44 down in a notch of sliding rod 34.
(5) Hold adjustable rod end and tighten nut 43 to correct torque (see 05-0).
(6) If the jack is to be reinstalled in the initial position on aircraft, safety nut 43 by bending
lodkplate 44 down in two nut notches.
D - Instal coupling 26 as follows.
Install a new filter 42 in coupling housing in cylinder 25.
il) Moderately coat the following with Mastinox :
-surface of coupling 26 in contact with cylinder 25,
-threads of screws 41 .
!3) Install coupling/observing proper direction.
4) Install the two attaching screws 41 provided with washers (10 mm A/F wrench).
5) Lockwire (0.8 mm dia) the two screws 41 .
E - Install switch plate and socket assembly as follows.
(1 ) Moderately coat the following with Mastinox :
-fitting diameter of socket 28 and its surfaces bearing on cylinder 25 and plate 29,
-threads of studs 54.
(2) Coat the following with grease AIR 4215 :
-selft-aligning bearing of rocker 27,
-spherical recess of plate 29.
(3) Locate locking piston lever 33 through housing for above assembly in cylinder 25, using
locating wrench 14138J.
(4) Assemble :
-socket 28,
-rocker 27 (position rocker elbow marked "D" opposite mark "P" on pin fitted to socket
28),
-plate 29.
Install above assembly in housing in cylinder 25, observing correct direction.
Mount a new lockplate on each stud 54 (equipped with nuts and washers), then install
and tighten studs (3/8 in A/F wrench). Safety by bending tabs of lockplates down on plate
29.
Tightening torque 0.6 * g'1 m.daN (4.43 * g74 ft.lb).
(7) Check that rocker 27 moves freely. It should rock about its spherical hinge under a load
no greater than 0.2 daN (0.45 Ibf) applied on its end.
-Install a new filter 50 in shuttle valve housing in cylinder 22.
AB
03 - 88 Restricted 4 - 405
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT R^^ZZy^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^^^Ô IWIAMIIAI Ot;
^3^^S-"<Q^ Restricted MANUAL 05
9- FINAL STEPS
A Install the switch (see 05-6).
B Install the shuttle valve as identified during removal, and lockwire the two attaching screws.
C , Install storage plugs.
D - Test the jack (see 05-4).
E Repeat torque tightening of nut 40
- Unscrew the nut by approximately one sixth of a turn and then torque tighten, seeking align¬
ment of the lockwire hole with the cylinder groove. If this alignment is not possible without exceed¬
ing the torque tolerances specified, counterbore a 1.5-mm diameter hole through to the cylinder groove
so that it comes out tangential to the side of the latter, but opposite to the tightening direction. Ensure
that there is sufficient clearance between the new hole and the original one, otherwise find another
position by torquing through the tolerance range so that drilling can be effected.
F Lockwire (0.8 mm dia) nut 40.
G Apply a complementary protective coat of sealant (areas identified M) :

- in the annular recess of nut 40 and at the joint of this nut with cylinder 25,
H If required, touch up paintwork (see 05-0).
I Install the jack on aircraft (see 05-4) or perform storage operations (see 05-1 ), as required.
NOTE : The visible threads of rod end 35, as well as the surface of locknut 43 in contact with the end
of rod 34 and the recesses of the notch of key 45 and the tab of lockwasher 44 shall be
protected with a bead of sealant PR 1321 A2 (areas identified MR in the figure) after final
AA
BREGUET AVIATION .^Z^>
MIRAGE F
53/
FIGURE 6 - DEMONTAGE - REMONTAGE D'UN VERIN DE TRAPPE

DISASSEMBL Y - ASSEMBL Y OF AN UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
JL^^TX MIRAGE F
INSPECTION OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS AND LINKAGES
1 - SCOPE
To carefully inspect the doors as well as the various linkages.
- Open the U/C door by hand (see 02-0).
CAUTION :
TAKE ALL RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (see 01 -0).
3- GENERAL INSPECTION
A Safetied parts
Ensure that :
- pins effectively safety the castellated nuts,
- the self-locking nuts are correctly tightened,
- lockplates immobilize the nuts.
B Control levers and bellcranks
- Actuate control levers and bellcranks to ascertain that the hinges have no play.
- Check control levers and bellcranks for condition (dents, protective coating, etc.).
- Visually check (as far as possible) the outer rings of the self -aligning bearings for correct staking.
C - Rods
- Actuate the rod clevises to make sure that the hinges are free of play.
- Check :
- rod/clevis coupling,
- rod condition (dents, protective coating, friction traces, etc.).
D Unlocking jack
- Close the door locks by hand.

- Move the clevis-type endpiece of the unlocking jack rod and check that there is no play.
Play indicates loosening at the rod/endpiece connection.
- Open the locks using the manual control. The control handle must operate without jamming
or offering resistance.
E Fittings
Check for :
- oxidation
- cracks
- distortions
- loosening.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION _
MIRAGE F
4- INSPECTION OF DOOR
Check :
- skin and frame for condition (See 03-0).
-roller for condition
-attaching rollers and contact rollers for condition
- plugs blanking manufacturing holes for presence, condition and bonding, and electrical bonding
jumpers for security of attachment.
5- INSPECTION OF LINKAGE
Check :
- various equipment items for condition and security of attachment
- rubber stops for condition.
- flexible control for condition, routing and security of attachment
- electro-hydraulic system (See 07-0).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT pZJ^^ZTX
MIRAGE F
TESTING OF UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR JACK

AFTER SEAL REPLACEMENT

- Accessory kit for 2nd line hydraulic test bench
2- MATERIALS
A Remove storage plugs and/or caps from jack, shuttle valve and switch.
B Install the door jack on the appropriate test bench support, and connect the test bench pipes to
ports marked N on shuttle valve and A on jack body (at supply coupling).
C Bleed the jack free of air by slowly extending and retracting the sliding rod, then drop the
pressure.
D Adjust the switch (see 05-6).
A Jack with sliding rod retracted
- Using the appropriate cord, connect the cutoff box to the switch connector and check conti¬
nuity across terminals B-C.
B Sliding rod locking
(1 ) Increase pressure through port N to P = 210 bar (3045 psi). Locking should take place with a back
pressure at A of P > 20 bar (290 psi).
(2) Drop the pressures.
(3) Check rod locking.
-Supply through port A at P = 30 bar (435 psi). The sliding rod should not retract.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT iZ£y~âJQ /V\II\/AVJrC l
BREGUET AVIATION ^£0*
^ ^C^>
^=*-^> Restricted m a mm ai
MANUAL nr
05

-Using an ohmmeter, check that the circuit opens across the above-mentioned terminals.
Continuity then should be across terminals A-B.
D - Unlocking of sliding rod
(1) Progressively increase pressure through port A and ensure that unlocking (begining of
rod retraction) is effective at a pressure < 60 bar (870 psi).
(2) Slowly extend and retract the jack rod for about 10 minutes. Drop pressure and wipe the
jack with a clean cloth paying particular attention to the sliding rod.
CAUTION:
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR WHICH MAY BLOW METAL PARTICLES INTO THE
JACK.
5 - STATIC TESTS
A - Supply the jack under a pressure between 1 and 5 bar (14 and 72.5 psi). Maintain this
pressure for 15 minutes. The maximum permitted leakage at the sliding rod over this period of
time is 3 drops.
B - Drop the pressure and wipe the jack clean.
6 - DYNAMIC TESTS
A - Supply the jack under 210 bar (3045 psi), then retract and extend the sliding rod 15
times.
B - Then perform 25 such cycles, during which the maximum permitted leakage is 3 drops.
C - The sliding rod must be left retracted at the end of the tests.
D - Drop the pressure.
7 - FUNCTIONAL TESTS OF SHUTTLE VALVE EMERGENCY SYSTEM
(1 ) Connect the test bench line to port S on the shuttle valve.

(2) Progressively increase the pressure through port S, using the hand pump.
(3) Make sure that the internal valve moves when pressure P is < 7 bar (101.5 psi). There
will be a slight pressure drop in the supply system when the valve moves.

sure through port BN.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at AN is ^ 1 drop/min.
the pressure.
- Drop
- Unlock and fully retract the rod.
-With port BN connected to a graduated test tube, apply and hold 20 bar (290 psi)
pressure through port A.
-After stabilization (5 min), check that leakage at BN is ^ 1 drop/min.
| 9 - FINAL STEPS
A - Remove the jack from the test bench.
j C - Perform the appropriate final steps which follow seal replacement (see 05-4).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT HZ&-~iL-J£L /Y\ll\A\V^l- I
BREGUET AVIATION ^*&^:^*Q>
^ ô .
Restricted, ».....> ai 05
MANUAL nr-
CHECK OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE DOOR ADJUSTMENT

(Figure 7)
A - Special tools
-3 pins, 2.8 mm (0.11 in) dia.
-Electrical power supply (115-200 V/400 Hz)
2 - MATERIALS
-Prussian blue
-Modeling paste
-Aircraft jacked up, with wheels off ground (see 02-2); undercarriage extended, doors
open and door lock hooks manually locked.
WARNING:
TA~KE" THE SAFETY MEASURES (SEE 01 -0).
-Connect the hydraulic power unit, set to slow running, to system 1 self -sealing cou¬
plings.
-Connect the electrical power supply.
" -Lightly coat the rollers of the rear door with Prussian blue.
- Place a pad of modeling paste at the bottom of the door recesses designed for passage
of the wheels.
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Check of settings
(1 ) With rear door open and locked:
-Check pinning of the three locks (2.8 mm (0.11 in) dia. pins); on the front lock, un¬
screw the manual control lever attaching nut and push back the screw.
-Manually unlock the locks and check the unlocking order; Rear - Front - Center.
-Check that there is a minimum clearance "a" of 1 mm (0.03937 in) between the upper
edge of the door and the structure edge on RH side.
-Check that the door opening dimension "b" 635 _ 5 mm (24.999 _0iq6 in)
as measured between the center roller (rule applied against the roller base on the side opposite
the nut) and the angle formed by the structure at the center lock.
-Make sure that the jack rod does not come into contact with the rivet heads of the door
fitting.
(2) Check of mechanical clearance of door lock control linkage:
-Disconnect electrically-operated selector valve (3G).
-Set U/C control lever to up position.
-Increase pressure to 100 bar and maintain that pressure.
-Actuate the door manual unlocking control and make sure there is a residual clearance
between the unlocking jack hydraulic stop and the door lock control linkage mechanical stop.
-Set U/C control lever to down position.
-Drop hydraulic pressure.
-Reconnect electrically-operated selector valve (3G).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //JWMi l\/"\V«7[- H
BREGUET AVIATION ^<£»= ^"Q> _ ,. . ......
nr.
(3) VERY SLOWLY perform complete undercarriage retraction and door closing.
-During leg retraction, check that there is, at all points, a clearance between doors, leg
and leg equipment and the wheels.
(4) Upon closing of rear door:
-Check the roller passage clearance "J" with respect to the hook noses; it should be at
least 4 mm (0.157 in).
-Check door warp and locking order of locks:
-move the door until the front lock engages, then drop the pressure,
-check door protrusion at the other two locks; it should be 4 ± 1 mm (0.157 ±
0.039 in) at center lock, and 3.5 ± 1 mm (0.137 ± 0.039 in) at rear lock,
-the difference between the two locks should be between 0.5 and 1 mm (0.0196
and 0.039 in).
-Check the locking order which should be as follows: Front - Rear - Center.
(5) With rear door uplocked:
-Check rear door, fairings and shield door flush-out with the fuselage contour. Flush-out
should be ± 0.5 mm (± 0.0196 in).
-Check that the doors are not "floating".
(6) Clearance of rear door and position of locks:
-Hydraulically lower the U/C and check:

-that there is a clearance between the wheels and the door, at the bottom of the
door recesses, as evidenced by the thickness of the pads of modeling paste,
-that the rollers are correctly bearing inside the hook noses; the dimension should
be:
,noo* +_ 0Q 0.0787 in)
L" = 6 +_ 02 mm (0.236
-that the rollers are correctly centered with respect to the hooks; the dimension
should be "C" = 0 ± 1 .5 mm (0 ± 0.059 in)
:
-If there is an anomaly, adjust the nose undercarriage doors as required (see 05-4).
5 - FINAL STEPS
-Disconnect the hydraulic and electrical power supplies.

- Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels (see 02-2).
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT F ^ -" ^ /V\ll\/"\v^C
BREGUET AVIATION ^&-~
^<a ^^^>
^-^ Restncted ....,..
MANUAL nc
05
ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE DOORS

(Figures 2 and 7)

-Electrical power supply
B - Standard tools
-0 to 3 mdaN (0 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrench kit

-2 to 20 mdaN (1 5 to 1 50 ft.lb) torque wrench kit
C - Special tools
-3 pins, 3 mm (0.118 in) dia
-2 pins, 2.8 mm (0.110 in) dia
D - Spares
-Lockwasher for adjustable end of door jack.
-Lockwasher for door jack connecting pin.
-Lockwashers for adjustable ends of lock control linkage rods and fairing adjustable rods.
-Lockwashers for rear door and fairing stop lock-nuts.
2 - MATERIALS
-Prussian blue
-Jack up aircraft, wheels off ground (see manual 02-2).

-Make sure that the aircraft electrical systems are not energized.
-Make sure that hydraulic pressure is dropped in systems 1 and 2.
WARNING:
TAKE THE RELEVANT SAFETY MEASURES (SEE MANUAL 01-0-2) PARTICULARLY
AS CONCERNS OPERATION OF THE U/C DOOR SAFETY SWITCH.
-Disconnect electrical plug from U/C selector valve (3G), and set the U/C door safety
switch to "GROUND".
-Manually open the nose U/C door (see manual 02-0).
-Open access door 15-06 and wheel fairing 13-06i as required.
-Remove the shield door.
NOTE: Whenever the structural stops or rod adjustable endpieces are provided with lockwash¬
ers, remove these items so as to install new lockwashers. Then proceed with their ad¬
justment.
NOTE: All U/C retraction and extension maneuvers must be performed at the slow rate.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT.
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^<<c_~
^<s ^?ô
^r~^ _ ^ . ^
Restricted , iv/iamiiai
MANUAL ne
05
4 - PROCEDURE
A - Adjustment of rear door
(1) Opening adjustment
-Connect the electrical power unit.
-Connect the hydraulic power unit, then pressurize system 1 .
-With the door jack coupled, extend the jack rod until it locks.
-Uncouple the door jack and adjust the rod end (see manual 05-0) (screw in or out by
1/2 turns so that the key can engage in the groove) to obtain the following dimensions within
tolerances :
-clearance "a" between door upper edge and structure edge on RH side :
a = 1 mm (0.039 in) minimum,
-door opening dimension "b" as measured between the center roller (rule applied
against roller base, on side opposite the nut) and the angle formed by the compartment LH
side structure at center lock. This dimension permits free retraction and extension of U/C leg,
without any contact throughout its travel :
b = 635 "^°5 mm (24.999 +_°0 0196 in).
-Check there is no contact between door jack rod and rivet heads of door fitting.
- Disconnect the jack rod, then retract it.
-Set the U/C door safety switch to "GROUND".
- Pressurize the system.
-Measure the "retracted" rod dimension (record this dimension for later check of jack
clearance).
-Secure jack in well with rod retracted so as to clear the door travel area.
(2) Preparation for door closing adjustment
- Recess front and rear structure stops 7 by fully screwing them into their support.
-Remove the three door hooking rollers; index mark position of centering washers 21 on
either side of roller.
-Bring the door toward closed position until it contacts the structure stops and measure
recessing of door over the different stops.
(3) Replacement of lock (if applicable)
Removal:
-uncouple the control linkage control bellcrank,
-mark the position of the lock to be removed by drawing two pencil lines at 90° on the
structure and lock,
-mark the position of the control bellcrank on the structure with the hook closed, locked
and pinned (3 mm dia pin),
-remove the control bellcrank,
-remove the lock and count the number of serrations in relation to the reference mark for
installation purposes.
Installation:
-place the lock in the marked position by counting the same number of serrations as re¬
corded upon removal,
-insert a 3 mm dia pin and position the bellcrank according to the mark on the structure,
-couple the bellcrank to the structure,
-adjust the lock as required,
-mandatorily adjust the lock control linkage.
AB
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-A-~ ^?«o ....,., nc
^w. ^-^> Restricted MANUAL 05
(4) Front lock adjustment
-Reinstall front roller on door while observing washer position recorded before removal:
-install and tighten nut without safetying,
-smear roller with Prussian blue.
-Offer door in closing position and adjust lock position to obtain the following dimen¬
sions, within the tolerances:
-roller passage clearance in front of hook nose "J" = 4 mm (0.157 in) minimum,
-roller engagement in hook "L" (refer to traces of Prussian blue), with a minimum
clearance of 1 mm (0.039 in) at bottom of hook (system pressurized):
L = 6^°2mm (0.236 to.0787 in)'
-door flush with fuselage profile to 0 ± 0.5 mm (0 ± 0.019 in)
-If this is not the case, proceed as follows:
-loosen the four lock attachment screws by a minimum of 1 mm (0.039 in) (height
of serrations),
-move lock horizontally along the vertically serrated plate (serration pitch 1 mm
(0.039 in)) to adjust passage clearance "J" and engagement "L" of roller,
-move lock vertically along the horizontal serrations of its plate (serration pitch
1 mm (0.039 in)) to adjust the door flush,
-screw and tighten the lock attachment screws,
-adjust roller centering "C" in the hook nose by referring to the traces of Prussian
blue: C = 0 ± 1.5 mm (0 ± 0.059 in).
-If this is not the case, proceed as follows:

-remove roller-centering washer assembly and reinstall it after having displaced the
washers required for correct centering on either side of the roller.
NOTE:
-Always leave at least one washer under the nut.
-Be careful to install the chamfered washer against the shoulder at the base of the roller
holder pin.
-Carefully record the new pattern for roller centering washers and remove the assembly to
facilitate adjustment of the other locks.
-Check door warping:
-close the door until the front lock locks, then drop pressure,
-check door protrusion at the other two locks; at center lock, it should be:
4 ±1 mm (0.157 ± 0.039 in); at rear lock, it should be: 3.5 ± 1 mm (0.137 ± 0.039 in),
-the difference between the two should be between 0.5 mm (0.019 in) and 1 mm
(0.039 in),
-if this is not the case, replace the door.
(5) Rear lock adjustment
-Reinstall rear roller on door:

-proceed in same fashion as for front roller.
-Offer door in closing position and adjust lock position so as to obtain the adjustment di¬
mensions:
-proceed in same fashion as for front lock.
-Roller centering adjustment:

-Remove the roller-centering washer assembly to facilitate adjustment of center lock:

AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT /L^-^-TA /V\H\/-\\«7L-
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^£0> "^CN
^^> . ^
Restncted , aaamiiai
MANUAL nir
05
(6) Center lock adjustment

-Reinstall center roller on door:
-Offer door in closing and adjust lock position so as to obtain the adjustment dimensions:
-proceed in same fashion as for front lock.
-Roller centering adjustment:
-proceed in same fashion as for front roller,
-tighten nut and safety, using a new pin.
-Reinstall front roller on door while observing the centering washer pattern; tighten nut
and safety, using a new pin.
-Reinstall rear roller on door while observing the centering washer pattern; tighten nut
and safety, using a new pin.
B - Adjustment of lock control linkage

-For reference only: the unlocking jack has a center-to-center dimension of 220 ±
0.5 mm (8.6614 ± 0.0197 in) when in the rest stop position. This dimension is set in the
workshop.
-Uncouple flexible control (8) at bellcranks (15) and (18).
-Disconnect rod (17) at bellcrank (12).
-Disconnect rod (14) at bellcrank (10).
-Set the front and center locks to the "closed and locked" position. Pin with 3 mm
(0.118 in) dia pins.
NOTE: To facilitate pin insertion, remove the nut of the screw securing bellcrank (3) to the
splined pin and push the screw partly back.
-Theoretical length of rods (for reference only):
-rod (17) - 140 mm (5.410 in)
-rod (14) - 133 mm (5.187 in)
-Reconnect (without safetying) rods (17) and (14) (threaded end forward); do not re¬
move pins and make sure that unlocking jack (1 ) remains in rest stop position. Rods must be
connected without stress; otherwise, readjust by halfturns the length of the rods; tighten the
locknuts (do not safety).
-Unpin the two locks and reinstall the control bellcrank (3) attaching bolt.
-FRONT and CENTER lock sequence adjustment:
-Slowly carry out a manual unlocking operation and check the unlocking order of
the two locks: FRONT, CENTER, with a differential travel of:
+ 0.5 +0.019
1 mm (0.039 in)
+ 0 +0
as measured on rod (16) with a rule held onto the structure with modeling paste (see detail
A).
-If this sequence or the differential travel is not obtained, take the front lock as an
"adjustment basis", then do not modify rod (17) position.
-Adjustment of center lock:
First case:
the lock unlocks too early, or the differential travel is less than 1 mm (0.039 in). Re¬
duce the length of rod (14) (one half-turn at a time).
Second case:
the unlocking sequence of the lock is correct but the differential travel is greater than
1.5 mm (0.059 in). Increase the length of rod (14) (one half -turn at a time).
-Set the FRONT and CENTER locks to the "closed and locked" position.
-Pin the front lock with a 3 mm (0.118 in) dia pin and check that a 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
dia minimum pin can be inserted in the center lock.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" ^ 7Y\ll\/"\V»^C. I
BREGUET AVIATION^l
^ ^s?^^,
.^-^ Restrlcted «aamiiai
MANUAL nr-
05
-Unpin the locks.

- Flexible control adjustment.
NOTE: The center lock must be closed and pinned.
-Teleforce flexible control (MOD 1001 NOT INCORPORATED).
-Engage packing nut on the fixed endpiece on center lock side.

-Reinstall the locknut and lockwasher, then screw the clevis on the sliding rod (cen¬
ter lock side).
-Connect the clevis to the center lock bellcrank.
-Check that the mid-travel mark (rear lock side) is 12.5 ± 0.5 mm (4.87 ±
0.019 in) from the end of the fixed endpiece (see detail B) with packing nut unscrewed. If
this not the case, readjust the clevis on center lock side.
- Do not safety.
-Engage packing nut on the fixed endpiece on rear lock side.
-Safety the packing nuts with PR compound (see manual 05-0-144).
-Teleflex flexible control (MOD 1001 NOT INCORPORATED).
-Reinstall the locknut and lockwasher, then screw the clevis on the sliding rod (cen¬
ter lock side).
-Connect the clevis to the center lock bellcrank.
-On rear lock side, check that the dimension between the end of the sliding rod and
the end of the fixed endpiece is: d = 52.5 ± 0.5 mm (2.06 ± 0.019 in) (see detail C). If
this is not the case, readjust the clevis on center lock side.
- Do not safety.
CAUTION:
THE UNSCREWING LIMIT HOLE MUST NOT BE EXPOSED AFTER CLEVIS ADJUST¬
MENT. IF ADJUSTMENT CANNOT BE OBTAINED WITHIN THIS LIMIT, READJUST
THE FIXED ENDPIECES IN THE SWIVEL SUPPORT (SEE MANUAL 05-0).
-Reinstall the locknut, lockwasher and clevis on rear lock side, by manually retaining
the control linkage unlocked.
-Set the rear lock to the "closed and locked" position and insert a 3 mm (0.1 18 in)
dia pin, then check that bellcrank (18) is approximately 15° below the horizontal plane.
-Without removing the pins and marking sure that unlocking jack (1) remains in rest
stop position, connect the flexible control clevis to the rear lock bellcrank without stress (do
not safety).
CAUTION:
MAKE SURE THAT THE FLEXIBLE CONTROL REAR CLEVIS LOCKWASHER DOES
NOT CONTACT THE STRUCTURE DURING ACTUATION.
- Rear lock sequence adjustment.

-Unpin the locks.
Slowly carry out a manual unlocking operation and check the unlocking order of the
three locks: REAR, FRONT, CENTER with a differential travel of
+ 0.5 +0.019
1mm (0.039 in) as measured on rod (16).
+ 0 + 0
-If this sequence or the differential travel is not obtained, repeat the adjustment by screw¬
ing or unscrewing the clevis on the rear lock side.
First case:
The rear lock unlocks too late or the differential travel is less than 1 mm (0.039 in).
Screw the clevis on rear lock side by complete turns.
AA
03-88 Restricted 4 -51 OF
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT flXy-û-î /Y\|I\/"\V^L_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^-î*l& "^«C^ ». a mm ai ne
^T^ Restricted MANUAL 05
Second case:
The unlocking sequence of the rear lock is correct but the differential travel is greater
than 1 .5 mm (0.059 in). Unscrew the clevis on rear lock side by complete turns.
NOTE: The clevis captive nut must be located on the lock side.
CAUTION:
TT-nrUNSCREWING LIMIT HOLE MUST NOT BE EXPOSED AFTER CLEVIS ADJUST¬
MENT. IF ADJUSTMENT CANNOT BE OBTAINED WITHIN THIS LIMIT, READJUST
THE FIXED ENDPIECES IN THE SWIVEL SUPPORT (SEE MANUAL 05-0).
-Remove the flexible control/swivel support assembly (see manual 05-4) to torque the
clevis locknuts, then safety.
-Reinstall the flexible control/swivel support assembly (see manual 05-4).
-Set the three locks to the "closed and locked" position, then pin as follows:
-FRONT lock: 3 mm (0.118 in) dia pin,
-CENTER and REAR locks: 2.8 mm (0.110 in) dia minimum pins.
-Remove the pins.
-Slowly carry out a manual unlocking operation to check the unlocking order and differ¬
ential travel.
- Detach the door jack so that the rod can be extended.
-Check the clearance:
-make sure that connector 3G is disconnected,
-set the U/C control lever to the up position,
-increase the pressure to 100 bar and hold it there,
-actuate the manual unlocking control and make sure there is a residual clearance
between the unlocking jack hydraulic stop and the door lock control linkage mechanical stop,
as felt on the entire control linkage and the rear lock bellcrank in particular,
-drop the hydraulic pressure,
-set the U/C control lever back to the down position.
CAUTION:
rrrs" imperative to ensure that the following three requirements are
MET AFTER WORKING ON THE CONTROL LINKAGE:
- THE THREE LOCKS CAN BE PINNED WITH HOOKS CLOSED.
- THE LOCKS UNLOCK IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER: REAR - FRONT - CENTER.
- THERE IS A CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE HYDRAULIC STOP AND THE MECHAN¬
ICAL STOP.
(3) Adjustment of rear door structure stops
-Loosen stops (7) to take up the recessing dimension measured at para. (A) (2), then
unscrew by an additional one-and-a-half to two-and-a-half turns; tighten the locknut.
NOTE: This adjustment conditions the door stress in closed position. If the door locking pres¬
sure is out of tolerances, it will be necessary to readjust (see manual 05-6).
-Couple the jack to the door; torque tighten the pin nut to 3.5 m.daN (25.81 ft.lb).
-Set the U/C door safety switch to "FLIGHT".
-Pressurize hydraulic system 1 (low delivery rate) and perform a slow closing of the door
while checking:
-correct order of hooking on the locks: FRONT, REAR, and then CENTER,
-door locking pressure (see manual 05-6).
-Set the U/C control lever to the up position and check:
-unlocking pressure (see manual 05-6),
-jack clearance by measuring the new "rod retracted" dimension and comparing it
with the dimension measured in para. (A) (1 ) with the jack not connected:
-clearance should be:
> 3 mm (0.118 in) with pressure applied in jack,
> 5 mm (0.196 in) with pressure released.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
-If required, perfect the adjustment of the jack rod end (see manual 05-0) within the
door opening tolerances specified in para. (A) (1).
-Complete the operation with the U/C doors open, U/C control lever in down position
and U/C door safety switch in "FLIGHT" position.
-Safety the packing nuts with PR compound and, if applicable, improve lubrification of
the sliding rod (see manual 05-0).
(4) Adjustment of small doors and shield door
Remove the shield door.
-
-Reconnect the electrical connector of electrically-operated valve 3G.
-Pressurize system No. 1 .
-Secure the U/C leg in up position, with rear door open.
-Set the adjustable rod (6) (turn the rod body clockwise to screw in) and the front stops
(1 9) so as to simultaneously have:
-door flush with fuselage profile ± 0.5 mm (0.0196 in)
-1/4 turn stress on stops (19).
-Check small door grimbal joint clearance at level of front structure stop boss and set the
stop retaining nut lockplate tab so as to obtain a minimum clearance of 2 mm.
-Check that there is no interference between the adjustable rods and the goosenecks dur¬
ing operation.
-Set the U/C door safety switch back to "FLIGHT" in order to close the rear door.
-Pressurize hydraulic system No. 1 .
-Check that the flush-out between the rear door and the small doors is 0 ± 0.5 mm (0
± 0.0196 in). Bring rear stops (19) onto small door hinge goosenecks, then unscrew by a
quarter turn.
-Lock the U/C leg in down position.
- Pressurize hydraulic system No. 1 .
-Set the U/C control lever to the down position.
-Install shield door on its brackets, on U/C truss jack.
-Pressurize hydraulic system No. 1.
-Place again U/C leg in up position and check:
-free action of adjustable rod 6 all along the U/C leg retraction operation and in par¬
ticular in the area comprised between 30° and 45° of leg:
-if necessary, realign the rod adjustable endpieces,
-it may also be necessary to adjust the setting of the rod hinge clevis on the
U/C leg cylinder. This is obtained by loosening the U/C leg hinging trunnion retaining bolt.
Tighten the trunnion retaining bolt after adjustment.
-the shield door lying flush with the small doors and rear door profile; it should be:
+ 0 +0
mm ( in).
-0.5 -0.0196
-check for good contact, without any floating, under the locking pins of small doors
(20).
-if necessary, adjust thickness of spacer under shield rear support and eventually of
the peel shims installed between the hinge goosenecks and the small door structure,
-it may also prove necessary to file the bearing surfaces of the locking pins of small
doors (20).
(5) Final steps
-Check locking and unlocking pressures for U/C leg and doors (see manual 05-6).
-Check correct operation of U/C leg and indicating system (see manual 05-6).
-Check torque tightening and safetying of all components concerned by the operations.
-Make sure that U/C is down and locked and that doors are closed (U/C position indica
tor).
-Position the safety on U/C control box lever.
-Drop hydraulic pressure in system 1 and disconnect ground supply unit.
-Disconnect electrical power supply unit.
-Reinstall access doors opened during the operations.
-Lower aircraft to the ground (see manual 02-2).
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
MANUAL 05
Déverrouillage arrière
Rear unlocking
+0
Déverrouillage avant : 1 , q c nrm
Front unlocking : 0.0393 + nnja? in
Déverrouillage médian : 1 , Q 5 mm
Tampons de
pâte à modeler +0
Pads of
Center unlocking : 0.0393 , ~ q-,qj m
modeling paste
Butée hydraulique
Hydraulic stop
i 1 1
.»_ Butée mécanique
Mechanical stop
0 <2>
i i i i i" l' i ii ii I I 1 I I I I I I I II l'I'l I TT 1'1'I'T I ITI
Réglage du jeu "J" et de

l'engagement "L" du galet
Adjustment of clearance "J"
and engagement "L " of roller Point 0 Réglet
Rule
~\
DETAIL A
Réglage de Repère mi-course

l'affleurement Mid-travel mark
de la trappe 1 i
Adjustment __-_!
of door
flush-out
(O)
.Vis 6<f>
Screws dia. 6
-Trous 011
Holes dia. 1 1
Réglage type téléforce
DETAIL B
(0.49 ±0.0197 in) Teleforce type adjustment
tt i tmvrmi mm i m rr ttx
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiimiiiim
Réglage type téléf lex

Teleflex type adjustment
Verrou avant Verrou arrière
Front lock Rear lock DETAIL C
FIGURE 7 - REGLAGE DES TRAPPES

ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE U/C DOORS
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT J) ^J>^ZXi.
BREGUET AVIATION ^_^ _^ _
MIRAGE
.......
F
nr-
A ,
SECTION 5
WHEELS AND TIRES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
5-0 GENERAL 5-001

- Nose wheel Messier-Hispano A62-20217 5-102
- Main wheel Messier-Hispano 286128 or 286128-1 5-104
- Removal - installation of a nose wheel 5-301

- Removal - installation of a main wheel 5-303
- Removal - installation of a main wheel fuse plug 5-305
5^ DISASSEMBLY -ASSEMBLY
- Replacement of a tire - Inspection and maintenance of a nose wheel 5-401

- Replacement of a tire - Inspection and maintenance of a main wheel 5-404
- Disassembly - check - lubrication - assembly of main wheel roller bearings 5-406
- Inspection of tires upon installation 5-503

- Checking of main wheel flanges by eddy current method 5-507
- Checking of main wheel webs by eddy current method. 5-51 1
- Storage - packaging - transportation of a nose wheel 5-701

- Storage - packaging - transportation of a main wheel 5-703
5-8 REPAIR
- Replacement of main wheel driving blocks 5-801
AA
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ Jl -** Y\ll\/-\V*7l_
^._~
BREGUET AVIATION
^« ^5=-=»^
^^^ ^ ^ j
Restricted h/iammai
MANUAL ne05
Figure No. Page
1 NOSE WHEEL ASSEMBLY 5-103

2 MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY 5-105
3 MAIN WHEEL - BOGIE 5-106
3M DETECTION OF CRACKS ON MAIN WHEEL FLANGES 5-509
3P DETECTION OF CRACKS ON MAIN WHEEL FLANGES 5-510
3R DETECTION OF CRACKS ON MAIN WHEEL FLANGES 5-510M
3S DETECTION OF CRACKS ON MAIN WHEEL WEBS 5-514
3U DETECTION OF CRACKS ON MAIN WHEEL WEBS 5-514M
3T DETECTION OF CRACKS ON MAIN WHEEL WEBS 5-51 3M
4 REPLACEMENT OF A DRIVING BLOCK 5-803
AA
/L^îTU
_^ _
MIRAGE F
GENERAL
The nose undercarriage leg is equipped with two similar wheels which are bogie-mounted onan axle.
They are dependent on the axle in rotation and translation direction. Each wheel is provided with a
tubeless tyre.
Each main undercarriage leg is fitted with two independent wheels which are bogie-mounted on
two axles. Each wheel drives the rotors of a brake unit. The wheels can be indifferently installed on the
left or the right of the undercarriage legs.
These wheels are provided with tubeless tyres.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
TABLE OF COMPONENTS
Location Doc.
Access Door No.
NOSE UNDERCARRIAGE LEG WHEEL Nose

undercarriage
- Weight of each wheel : 2,5 kg (5.51 lbs). leg
- Made of magnesium alloy and designed for turbeless
tire.
NOSE WHEEL TIRE
Of the tubeless type, 360 x 135-6 or 14,5 x 55 - 6/1
MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG WHEEL Main X

undercarriage
- Weight of each wheel : 1 1,350 kg (25.01 lbs) leg
- Made of aluminium alloy and designed for tubeless
tire.
MAIN WHEEL TIRE
Of the tubeless type, 605 x 155 - 13 or 24 x 600 - 13.
AB
MIRAGE F
NOSEWHEEL
(Figure 1)
1 - DESCRIPTION
The wheels consist of a body 1 and a removable rim 2 attached by five bolts 3. Sealing between
body 1 and rim 2 is provided by two preformed packings 4 and 5.
Separating the body from the rim permits tire removal (wheel removed and tire deflated).
Ring 6 also secured by bolts 3, is provided with 6 bores A to which are fitted pins connecting
the wheel to the axle of the undercarriage leg. Ring 6 also ensures sealing of the housings for the axle
roller bearings.
Rim 2 accommodates inflation valve 7.
To adjust the balance, the wheel can be equipped with a balancing weight 8 in the form of a plate
installed in place of the washer of one of the 6 attaching bolts 3.
2- WHEEL/UNDERCARRIAGE LEG CONNECTION
Wheel body 1 is fitted to axle 132 and connected to the latter for rotation through six pins 135
mounted in ring 136. Each wheel is secured to the axle by a castellated nut 138 safetied by two
bolts 139.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
MIRAGE F
FIGURE 1 - ENSEMBLE DE LA ROUE AVANT

NOSE WHEEL ASSEMBL Y
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^£2=°^^ . ., a ^_
MAIN WHEEL
1 - DESCRIPTION (figure 2)
The main wheel includes :
A - One body 6 which carries two taper roller bearings 12.
B One spacer 10 engaging the bores of bearing inner races 12. It is retained by a nut 15 safetied with
lockwasher 17 and retaining ring 16. It permits the wheel to be mounted on the axle.
C Two housings 11, each equipped with a felt packing 9 and a sealing ring 8 to provide tightness of
the bearing races. Each seal housing is attached to spacer 10 by a retaining ring 7.
D One rim 1 kept in place by the pressure of the tire. It is retained on body 6 by a ring 2. The retain¬
ing ring ends are lockwired to each other.
E One sealing ring 3 providing tightness of the tubeless tire between rim 1 and body 6.
F One thread insert 19 in which is screwed inflation valve 5 equipped with seal 4.
G Three fuse plugs 13, each equipped with a packing 14. They are screwed in body 6.
H Nine driving blocks 20 tight fitted with Mastinox compound on interfaces. Each block is safetied
by two riveted tubes 21 .
J Three thread inserts 1 8 used to attach the drive casing of the tachometer generator.
K Two locators 26 preventing the brakes from being installed outside driving blocks 20 (modifi¬
cation 331 incorporated).
2- OPERATION (figure 2)
When the brakes are applied, the fuse plug melts if the temperature of body 6 reaches 155°C.
Piston 24 and seal 23 are expelled under the increased inflation pressure resulting from the temperature
rise.
The tire is deflated, thereby preventing bursting.
3- CONNECTION TO MAIN UNDERCARRIAGE LEG (figure 3)
The wheel is mounted on the main undercarriage axle against a spacer 25.
The nine driving blocks 20 engage the tenons of the brake unit rotors. The wheel is attached to the
axle through a castellated nut 85 safetied by a cup 84 and a pin.
AA
MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION
(Modification 331 appliquée) (Post-modification 331)
2\ 20 26
FIGURE 2 - ENSEMBLE ROUE PRINCIPALE

AB MA IN WHEEL ASSEMBL Y
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULtL MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^Sp3 ^<ts-
Détail A
Coupe partielle B
Partial cross-section B
FIGURE 3 - ROUE PRINCIPALE - DIABOLO

MAIN WHEEL - BOGIE
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" -* ^^
BREGUET AVIATION ^ît^-
^<^ ^s-=»^>
^ o - ..
Restricted , iv/iamm ai
MANUAL ne
05
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A NOSE WHEEL

(Figure 1)
A - Special tools
-Undercarriage-hydraulics ground tool kit
B - Standard tools

-Storage and protective tool 50 AM 041 .
2 - MATERIALS
-White spirit
-Grease AIR 4205
3 - REMOVAL
A - Remove the two bolts 139 (7mm A/F wrench).
B - Using adapter C46860, loosen nut 138 without removing it.
NOTE: If both wheels are to be removed, loosen the two nuts while the aircraft is still on the
ground.
C - Jack up the aircraft so that the wheels are sufficiently clear of the ground (see 02-2).
D - Remove nut 1 38 and recover the washer.
E - Remove the wheel from axle 1 32, taking care not to strip the paint from the wheel bore
through friction with the axle thread.
F - Install protector A46 532-2 on the wheel spindle.
4 - INSTALLATION
A - Special instructions
(1 ) On a same twin-wheel assembly :

-it is recommended to install tires showing approximately the same amount of wear,
-it is forbidden to mount two tires of different make,
-should one tire burst, the other must be discarded.
(2) When a new tire is mounted on a wheel, make sure that it has been checked following in¬
stallation (see 05-5).
(3) Should a wheel be fitted with a partially worn tire, make sure it meets the standards of
use for tires (see 02-4).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT f ^ -" ^ / V \ 1\ /"\ V-7 U l
1
BREGUET AVIATIONÂ_~
^>, ^=^>
^-^ _ ^ . ^
Restncted . aaam.iai
MANUAL nr-
05
B - Preparation for installation
(1 ) Clean the wheel bore and the axle with white spirit, then dry.
(2) Sparingly grease the axle surfaces supporting the wheel, as well as the wheel bore.
C - Installation of wheel
(1) Slide the wheel on the axle, taking care not to strip the paint from the wheel bore
through friction with the axle thread.
Position the wheel correctly so that pins 1 35 of drive crown 1 36 are inserted into holes A
in crown 6.
(2) Position nut 1 38 fitted with its washer and screw up moderately.
(3) Lower the aircraft back onto its wheels.
(4) Torque nut 138 to 7 ± 2 m.daN (51.6 ± 14.7 ft.lb), using adapter C46860.
(5) Within the above limits, align two notches of nut 138 with the holes at the tip of axle
132, then install two bolts 139 (bolt head inside axle).
(6) After torquing nuts 1 38 to required value.

- Make sure that the wheel rotates freely without excessive force.
If the bearings appear to be too clamped, check and if required, readjust the axle bearing
play (see 05-3).
5 - FINAL STEPS
Readjust the tire inflation pressure according to the aircraft configuration (see 02-4).
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
/L^TTU.
^-^P3 _^g<0.
MIRAGE
.........
F
n-
REMOVAL - INSTALLATION OF A MAIN WHEEL
A Special tools
- Undercarriage-hydraulics ground tool kit
B Standard tools
- Torque wrench kit, 2 to 20 m.daN (1 5 to 150 ft.lb)
C Spares
-Pin 2331 0AA020015LE
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Grease Air 4205
A Partly jack up the aircraft by the main U/C leg involved (see 02-2).
B Pull the parking brake handle to lock the brake disks.
4- REMOVAL
A Remove tachometer generator drive casing 26 (10 mm A/F socket wrench).
B Unsafety (pin) and remove wheel attachment nut 85 (wrench C46610). Recover cup 84.
C Remove the wheel.
D Ensure that brake spacer 25 remains in place.
5- INSTALLATION
A Special instructions
(1) On a same bogie :
- it is recommended to install tires showing approximately the same amount of wear,

- it is forbidden to mount two tires of different make,
- should one tire burst, the other must be discarded.
(2) On the LH and RH main undercarriage legs, it is generally forbidden to mount two tires of
different make or of same make but with different characteristics as regards takeoff weight. However,
with due consideration to para. (1), it is permissible to detract from this rule as a provisional measure
to avoid grounding the aircraft.
(3) When a new tire is mounted on a wheel, make sure that it has been checked following installation
(see 05-5).
(4) Should a wheel be fitted with a partially worn tire, make sure it meets the standards of use for
tires 02-4).
(see
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT//« w^
-^-^-fl MIRAGE
I Y II l\/~VV^ L. F
I
breguet aviation^ ^ ^ Restricted MANUAL 05
B Preparation for installation
(1 ) Clean axle and brake unit, taking care not to splash fluid onto the friction pads.
(2) Wipe all areas of brake unit.
(3) Ensure that brake spacer is in place.
(4) Check functional assembly of brake unit for wear (See 05-7).
(5) On reused wheels, make sure that depth of furrows (if any) due to friction pads of brake stators,
does not exceed 1 mm (0.0393 in). Beyond this limit, return the wheel to the next higher repair line.
(6) Slightly coat axle with grease.
C Installation of wheel
(1) Install wheel on axle, turning locating pin 26 so that disc tenons engage wheel notches correctly.
Should it prove too difficult to engage wheel into disc tenons, DO NOT USE FORCE, but thoroughly
adjust the tenon alignment using disc locator D46233 (See 05-7).
NOTE : With a brake equipped with steel lateral stators (Modification 520 incorporated) and new
friction pads, the first rotor disc on the hydraulic unit side protrudes beyond the wheel
drive unit by 4 mm (0.16 in) approx. This protrusion disappears as the friction pads wear
down.
(2) Once wheel is installed, release parking brake.

(3) Install wheel attaching nut with cup (Spanner C46610). Torque tighten to 11 ±1 mdaN
(81.1 ± 7.3 ft.lb).
(4) Make sure that the wheel rotates freely without any lateral play.
(5) Safety the nut with a cotter pin (head inside the cup).
(6) Install tachometer generator drive casing (10 mm A/F socket). Torque tighten between 0.5 and
0.6 mdaN (3.6 and 4.4 ft.lb) ; safety the 3 screws, using lockwire.
6- FINAL STEPS
Lower aircraft on ground and service tire pressure (See 02-4).
AB
MIRAGE F
^^-^
BREGUET AVIATION
^ ^jô
,*-<> .
Restncted hjiammai ne
MANUAL 05
REMOVAL-INSTALLATION OF A MAIN WHEEL FUSE PLUG

(Figure 2)
1 - SCOPE
A fuse plug is to be replaced only in case of leakage, due to either the packing or the fuse
plug porosity. Melting of the fuse plug on the wheel requires forwarding of the wheel to the
next higher repair line.
A - Standard tools
-0 to 3 m.daN (0 to 20 ft.lb) torque wrench kit.
3 - MATERIALS
-MASTINOX compound D40

-Pressure gas leakage detector fluid
-White spirit.
4 - SPARES
-Fuse plug
-Packing.
A - Work shall be performed with the wheel removed.
B - Slowly deflate tire by unscrewing valve core.
IMPORTANT : Remove the fuse plug only after ensuring that the tire is entirely deflated.
6 - REMOVAL
A - Remove fuse plug 1 3 and discard packing 1 4.
B - Thoroughly clean plug bearing surface and installation port.
C - Replacement of internal seal

-Extract seal 23 by pricking it in its center, and discard it.
-Clean the fuse plug and dry it.
-Check the bore for scratches.
-Install a new seal coated with grease 4343B.
-Check the seal for proper contact with piston 24.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT// ^J>-a-rU
BREGUET AVIATION^c. _^-v -
MIRAGE
i ,....,.. ,
F
nl-
7- INSTALLATION
NOTE : The MASTINOX protective compound must be used as supplied in tube, without being
thinned.
A Carefully and moderately apply protective compound to fuse plug packing and threads.
B Mount packing on fuse plug and install plug in wheel body. Torque tighten to 1 m.daN (7.3 ft.lb).
Stake on wheel body.
C - Slowly inflate tyre to 7 bar ( 1 01 .5 psi) .
D Test new fuse plug for leakage with leakage detector fluid.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT LfP^ZTX^ MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATION^riF0^^^ m A MM Al OK
REPLACEMENT OF A Tl RE
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF A NOSE WHEEL
(figure 1 )
A Special tools
B Standard tools

- Tire removing press
- Separating rings
- Precision pressure gauge
D Spares
- Packings
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
-GreaseMIL-G-4343
- Standard red paint
- 15-bar (217-psi) nitrogen or air supply
- Pressurized gas leak detecting solution
A Remove the cap from inflation valve 7.
B Slowly deflate the tire by unscrewing the valve core.
WARNING :
DISASSEMBLE THE WHEEL ONLY AFTER COMPLETELY DEFLATING THE TIRE.
C Mount suitable separating rings on the press and install the wheel between the separating rings.
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT WHEN THE JACK IS AT END OF TRAVEL, THE UPPER ADAPTER
CROSS BRACES CANNOT CONTACT THE EDGE OF THE WHEEL RIM.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT / MIRAGE F
BREGUET AVIATIONîL __^ - m, aai nr-
mm
4- PROCEDURE
A Removal of tire
(1) Unseat the tire beads using the press.

(2) Remove the wheel from the press.
(3) Do not remove the inflation valve unless it is leaking (adapter PR1-46471).
(4) Remove bolts 3, using two sockets S 1/2 and two extensions S 210.
NOTE : If one of the above bolts is equipped with a balancing weight 8, mark the location of this
weight.
| (5) Separate rim 2, the tire and wheel body 1 ; if possible, recover ring 6.
(6) Recover packings 4 and 5.
B Maintenance of wheel
(1) Clean the packings with a clean dry cloth.
(2) Clean the wheel body, rim and ring with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air. If
traces of rubber remain on the rim flanges, remove them using a cloth soaked in solvent.
(3) Check condition of the wheel body and rim. Ensure that :
(a) there are no cracks or incipient fractures, specially at critical points (flange fillet, attaching bolt
-
bores) ;
(b) - bearing surfaces are not dented ;
(c) - mating surfaces of tire beads are neither dented nor scratched ;
(d) - contours of packing grooves are perfectly even ;
(e) - valve condition and attachment are correct ;
(f) -the surfaces are in good condition ; neutralize any corrosion and touch up paintwork if required
(see 05-0).
(4) Check packings 4 and 5 for condition.

The edges of the packings must not be distorted or nicked. Check by twisting slightly every 3 to
4 cm (1.1811 to 1.5748 in) around the edge. If the condition of the packing is questionable, reject
it.
(5) Ensure that the bores of ring 6 are in satisfactory condition, and that the cylindrical section of
the ring is not distorted.
C Inspect the tire before installation (see 05-5).
D Installation of tire
(1) Coat packings 4 and 5 with grease MIL-G-4343 and install them in the wheel body and rim
grooves. Equalize stresses and place molding burrs on the same plane.
(2) Position the tire on wheel body 1 (red triangle on tire facing mark B on wheel body).
(3) Fit rim 2 to body 1, pushing it in as far as possible, but taking care not to displace the packings.
Align marks B on wheel body and rim.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT //-J^-^rTJ
BREGUET AVIATION ^£_ _ _
MIRAGE F
(4) Coat bolts 3 as follows :

- bolt shanks and washers under head and under nut : with Mastinox compound,
- bolt threads : with grease Air 4222 or 4210
(5) Install bolts 3 (socket heads) by manually compressing the tire.
NOTE : Bolt 3 with the ends painted red shall be installed in the housing circled in red.
If applicable, reinstall balancing weight 8 in the place marked during removal (chamfer on
web side).
(6) Perform preliminary tightening of the nuts on bolts 3 in a staggered way, to a low torque (sockets
S 1/2 and extensions S 210) to ensure correct bearing of the two mating surfaces. Finally tighten to
torque 5.5 * ° 5 m.daN (40.5 * ° g ft.lb).
(7) Install inflation valve 7 if it has been removed, proceeding as follows :
(a) slightly coat a new packing with grease M I L-G -4343 and install the packing on the valve ; also
grease the valve threads ;
(b) install the valve and tighten to torque 1 _ _ 1 m.daN (7.3 _ n 7 ft.lb), using adapter PR1 -46471.
E Inflation of tire
NOTE : Tires are to be inflated with nitrogen only. Complete tire inflation exceptionally with air, provi¬
ded the oxygen percentage resulting does not exceed 5% in volume.
(1 ) If required, remove the valve core.

(2) Adjust the inflation pressure to 15 bar (217 psi), rapidly inflate the tire to ensure correct ins¬
tallation. Check that the tire beads bear correctly on the wheel shoulders. Disconnect the inflation
adapter and allow tire pressure to drop.
(3) Refit the valve core
- Reminder : tightening torque = 0.025 to 0.028 m.daN (2.13 to 2.34 in.lb) ; after tightening, the
valve core should be inside the valve body by 0 to 1.5 mm (0 to 0.059 in).
(4) Inflate the tire as slowly as possible to operating pressure and ensure that the tire beads bear
evenly on the wheel shoulders.
(5) Tighten the valve cap by hand.
F Test the tire for leakage
(«Inspection of tires upon installation» - see 05-5).
5- FINAL STEPS
If the red marks provided on the wheel (B, head and end of assembly bolt, encircled housing) are
partly erased, apply another coat of standard red paint.
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT L^^zZ^
BREGUET AVIATION^SP^^Ô
MIRAGE
.. m.a
F
«r-. a .
REPLACEMENT OF A TIRE
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF A MAIN WHEEL
(figure 2) ~~
A Special tools
-Socket R 1/2 L
B Standard tools

- Tire removing press
- Separating rings
- Precision pressure gauge
D Spares
- Packings
2- MATERIALS
- White spirit
-GreaseMIL-G-4343
- Standard blue paint
- Standard red paint
- Pressurized gas leak detecting solution
- 15-bar (217-psi) nitrogen or air supply
A Remove the cap from inflation valve 5.
B Slowly deflate tire by unscrewing valve core.
WARNING :
DISASSEMBLE THE WHEEL ONLY AFTER COMPLETELY DEFLATING THE TIRE.
C Mount suitable separating rings on the press and install the wheel between the separating rings.
CAUTION :
MAKE SURE THAT WHEN THE JACK IS AT END OF TRAVEL, THE UPPER ADAPTER
CROSS BRACES CANNOT CONTACT THE EDGE OF THE WHEEL RIM.
4- PROCEDURE
A Removal of tire
(1) Separate the tire beads by means of the press.

(2) Extract retaining ring 2 and remove the wheel from the press.
(3) Separate rim 1 from body 6 and remove the tire.
(4) Remove O-ring 3.
(5) Remove inflation valve 5 only if it is leaking (socket R 1/2 L).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT fLSy^^S /V\ll\/"\V«7l_ I
BREGUET AVIATION ^^
^ "£*£ï>
^~»^> Restricted n* ami i ai
MANUAL ne
05
B - Maintenance of wheel
(1) Disassemble, clean and inspect the bearings (see 05-5).
(2) Clean the wheel body, rim and retaining ring, then dry with compressed air. If traces of
rubber remain on the rim flanges, remove then using a cloth soaked in solvent.
(3) Check condition of the wheel body, rim and retaining ring. Ensure that :
(a) - there are no" cracks or incipient fractures, particularly at critical points (driving plate
housings, hub shoulders and grooves between web lightening holes, rim flanges, etc) ;
(b) - the contact faces of body 6 and rim 1 are not scratched ;
- the surfaces on which the tire beads bear are neither dented nor scratched ;
- the edge of the seal groove is perfectly even ;
- the valve is in good condition and correctly attached ;
- the painted surfaces are in good condition. Remove any corrosion spots, unless they ex¬
ceed the prescribed limits, in which case (see 05-0).
(4) On wheel body, make sure that
(a) -trthe inner dimension of driving plates 20, resulting from plastic deformation by rotor ten¬
ons, is 21 mm (0.8267 in) maximum ; if this dimension is exceeded, replace the plates
(see 05-5) ;
(b) - the depth of the furrows (if any created by the friction pads of the brake stators) does
not exceed 1 mm (0.0393 in) ; beyond this limit, send the wheel to the next higher repair
line.
!5) Grease the bearings and reinstall them (see 05-5).
6) Depending on the aging of the wheel, check it using the Eddy current method
see 05-5);
7) Clean O-ring 3 and check its condition.
-The edge of the O-ring must not be distorted or nicked. Check this by.twisting it slightly
every 3 to 4 cm (1.1811 to 1.5748 in) around the edge. If there is any doubt, reject the O-
ring.
(8) Neutralize any corrosion and touch up paintwork if required (see 05-0).
C - Inspect the tire before installation (see 05-5)
D - Installation of tire
(1) Grease O-ring 3 and the associated groove in body, then install the O-ring in its groove,
without twisting it. Equalize stresses and place molding burrs on the same plane.
(2) Position the tire on wheel body 6 (with red triangle on tire in front of blue mark corre¬
sponding to wheel body unbalance).
t Install rim 1.
Compress the tire by hand and fit the rim to the body, pushing it in as far as possible,
e care not to displace O-ring 3.
(5) Install and safety retaining ring 2.
(6) Install inflation valve 5 if it has been removed, proceeding as follows :
(a) slightly grease a new seal 4 and install it on the valve ; also grease the valve threads ;
(b) install the inflation valve (socket R 1/2 L) and torque to 1 _ q -j m-daN
(7.3 + g 7 ft.lb)
u. Inflation of tire
n n ia nun sji mo
NOTE: Nitrogen only should be used for tire inflation. Air may exceptionally be used for pr
pres-
sure adjustment purposes provided the resulting oxygen contents does not exceed 5" %
by volume.
(1 ) Remove the valve core.
(2) Adjust inflation pressure to 15 bar (217 psi) ; rapidly inflate the tire to ensure correct
installation. Check tire beads for correct bearing. Disconnect the inflation adapter and allow
tire pressure to drop.
(3) Refit the valve core.
-Reminder : torque value : 0.025 to 0.028 m.daN (2.13 to 2.34 in.lb). After tightening,
the valve core should be recessed in the valve body by 0 to 1 .5 mm (0 to 0.059 in).
(4) Inflate to operating pressure as slowly as possible.
(5) Tighten the valve cap by hand.
F - Test the tire for leakage.
(Inspection of tires upon installation - see 05-5).
AB
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULTiL^^Z^X
BREGUET AVIATION ^C^^ ^^^>
MIRAGE F
., . .... . nt-
.
5- FINAL STEPS
I If the blue mark provided on letter B (unbalance) on the wheel is partly erased, apply another coat
of standard blue paint.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION
ti ^Z>'UZ\L
__
MIRAGE F
DISASSEMBLY - CHECK - LUBRICATION - ASSEMBLY OF

MAIN WHEEL ROLLER BEARINGS
(figure 2)
1 - SCOPE
To check roller bearings for condition and to renew grease.
A Special tools
B Standard tools
3- MATERIALS
- White spirit
- Grease Air 4205
-Oil Air 3512
-GreaseMIL-G-4343
4- DISASSEMBLY
A Disassembly of roller bearings
(1) Remove retaining ring 16 and lockwasher 17.

(2) Remove the two retaining rings 7 and seal housings 11.
(3) Remove nut 15, spacer 10 and the two bearing cones (dummy axle 148300/78 - wrench
148400/78).
(4) Clean the following parts with white spirit and dry with moisture-free compressed air :
- bearing cones 19 with race and bearing 20,
- bearing cups,
- spacer 1 0.
B Disassembly, check and maintenance of seal housings
(1) Extract felt packing 9 and O-ring 8 from each housing, clean them with a rag soaked in white
spirit, check their condition and discard if need be.
(2) Clean the housings with white spirit. Dry with compressed air and wipe with a dry rag.
(3) Check condition of the seal housings (check especially for corrosion inside seal grooves).
AB
1 1-87 Restricted 5-406
AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT/7 rs^/i^rs. /Y\ir\/-\WL. F
BREGUET AVIATION ^-A_-~ ^s~=^> .......ai nr-
^ ^=?-~o Restricted MANUAL 05
5 - CHECK OF ROLLER BEARINGS
A - Visually check inner cones and rollers which should be free of corrosion, pitting,
scratches, peening and metal pick-up. Any blue area on a roller or a bearing surface indicates
abnormal overheating which requires replacement of the cone and rollers.
-Make sure that bearing races are perfectly round and free from dents and flats.
B - Check outer raceways (tight fitted to wheel body) in the same way as inner races.
NOTE: If one of the outer races shows one or more of the above defects, the wheel body must
be forwarded to a specialized shop or to the manufacturer for repair.
6 - LUBRICATION
Grease (AIR 4205) cup raceways (on body) and pack cones by pushing grease between
rollers.
7 - ASSEMBLY
A - Assembly of roller bearings
(1) Install cones in respective cups.

(2) Coat the following with MASTINOX compound :
-threads of nut 15
-threads and bearing surfaces of spacer 1 0.
(3) Insert spacer 10 into bearing cones.
(4) Install nut 15 on spacer 10 ; torque to 8 to 9 m.daN (59 to 66 ft.lb) (dummy axle
148300/78, spanner 148400/78) while turning the wheel a whole turn, to ensure bedding
down of bearings and take-up of play. Loosen the nut.
(5) Screw nut 1 5 finger tight until contact with the bearing is felt. Do not tighten.
(6) Loosen nut 15 off one tenth of a turn then continue until the two notches in the spacer
and the nut are aligned. Loosening off gives a play J of between 0.1 and 0.25 mm (0.0039 to
0.0098 in).
(7) Install lock washer 17 in two notches. Install retaining ring 16 and ascertain that it is cor¬
rectly placed in groove.
B - Assembly of seal housings
(1) Soak felt packing 9 in oil AIR 3512.

(2) Coat sealing rings 8, grooves and housings in wheel body with grease MIL-G-4343.
(3) Install seal housings 11 and retaining rings 7.
AB
BREGUET AVIATION ^^^^^Ô
L^ZZ^X. MIRAGE ^F
,
INSPECTION OF TIRES UPON INSTALLATION
1 - SCOPE
To give instructions to personnel for installing tires on wheels.
This is a brief recall and a supplement to Technical Regulation RRM 001-08.
2- GENERAL
BECAUSE OF THE DIRECT EFFECT OF THE TIRE CONDITION ON THE FLIGHT SAFETY,
IF THE INTERPRETATION OF A TOLERANCE OR A REJECTION CRITERION IS
QUESTIONABLE, THE SOLUTION PROVIDING MAXIMUM SAFETY SHALL BE
SYSTEMATICALLY CHOSEN.
3- DEFINITIONS OF TIRE COMPONENTS
A Tread
Moving tire section in contact with ground.

The visible limits are concentric circular grooves at the top of the sidewalls
B- Sidewalls
Surface between tread and beads.
C - Beads
Section bearing of the rim shoulders.
AA
BREGUET AVIATION
INSPECTION
TYRE INSPECTION TOLERANCE MEASURES TO BE TAKEN
A Before tyre installation

on wheel
(1) Tread Must be perfectly sound.

The following are permissible
on moulding surfaces :
- Marks of foreign matter
of small size :
Grains from moulding
treatment mixtures, burrs,
scale, etc.
- Burrs or fillets on ribs.
- Grain differences :
traces of grinding or
«iron blow» to remove
scale deposits.
(a) Contamination - No evidence of damage - R

Manual Mirage f1

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Manual Mirage f1

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Another Aircraft Manual supplied by:

This file is produced and copyrighted by:

Reproduction without written permission is prohibited.

AVIONS MARCEL DASSAULT - BREGUET AVIATION

INDEX DES PAGES

PAGE C DATE R PAGE C DATE R PAGE C DATE R

A AD 05/90 0-218 AC 02/76 2-102M AA 09/80

INDEX DES PAGES

PAGE C DATE R PAGE C DATE R PAGE C DATE R

3-128 AC 03/86 6-011 AD 03/85

LISTE DES DECISIONS DE MODIFICATION AYANT ENTRAINE

Original issue of January 1978 including following modifications :

Change 1 of March 1978

Change 2 of February 1979

Change 3 of July 1980 including following modifications :

Change 4 of May 1981

Change 5 of February 1982

The re-issue dated May 1990 includes the previous updatings.

GENERAL INDEX OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS v/vi

ELABORATION AND USE OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS ix

REVISION TO MAINTENANCE MANUALS xix

0 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY , 0-1

1 MAINTENANCE CYCLE -TABLE OF PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

2 LUBRICATION POINTS -TIGHTENING TORQUES -INSPECTION DOORS 2-1

3 TOOLS AND GROUND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT 3-1

4 LIST OF VARIOUS PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS 4-1

2 The Maintenance Manuals contain :

Their contents are shown in the «General Index of Maintenance Manuals».

(1 ) Manual 01 «GENERAL» gives some general information on the aircraft.

(4) Manual 16 «WIRING»

GENERAL INDEX OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS

Genpra! General General General General General General General General

Tools Fuselage Air intake Anti-g

List of various Engine

Preparation L'G and door

Engine Brakes and

9 Miscellaneous Drag chute

General General General General General Gpnpr.il General General

Common Telephone Sighting Bombing Connection

EXPLANATION AND USE OF MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1 - MAINTENANCE MANUAL COMPOSITION

A - A title page identifying the publication.

D - A table of contents which lists the Sections making up the Manual.

2- BREAKDOWN OF A MAINTENANCE MANUAL SECTION

Three different kinds of «Sections» can be defined in a Maintenance Manual depending on

A Common Sections in a Manual dealing with an aircraft system.

Sectioifi Sub-Section title

B - GENERAL INFORMATION Section of a Manual dealing with an aircraft system.

3- ARRANGEMENT OF A COMMON SECTION IN A MANUAL DEALING WITH A SYSTEM

B - Sub-Section 1 - DESCRIPTION - OPERATION

This Sub-Section is arranged as follows :

(1 ) Each Maintenance operation is described in the Sub-Section corresponding to its category.

4- IDENTIFICATION ON INSPECTION DOORS

A Sub-assembly on which a door is located.

- Fuselage - the number consists of four digits.

30 to 59 - centre wing box

D Fin doors. Same principle as for the wings

E - Stabilator doors. Same principle as for the wings.

5- DIAGRAM DRAWING RULES

There are three kinds of diagrams :

ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS : GENERAL SYMBOLS Fuse

(x)~ Light or lamp

ELECTRICAL GRAPHIC SYMBOLS;

-Ô- -{oh- j/ Linvar